As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on 10 March 201725 February 2020

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

FORM 20-F

¨o  REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR 12(g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

OR

x  ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year ended 31 December 20162019

OR

¨o  TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

OR

¨o  SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

Commission file number 001-15246

LLOYDS BANKING GROUP plc

(previously Lloyds TSB Group plc)

(Exact name of Registrant as Specified in Its Charter)

 

Scotland

(Jurisdiction of Incorporation or Organization)

 

25 Gresham Street

London EC2V 7HN

United Kingdom

(Address of Principal Executive Offices)

 

Malcolm Wood,Kate Cheetham, Company Secretary

Tel +44 (0) 20 7356 1274,2104, Fax +44 (0) 20 7356 1808

25 Gresham Street

London EC2V 7HN

United Kingdom

(Name, telephone, e-mail and/or facsimile number and address of Company contact person)

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

 

Title of each classTrading symbolName of each exchange on which registered
Ordinary shares of nominal value 10 pence each, represented by American Depositary SharesThe New York Stock Exchange
$1,500,000,000 4.344% Subordinated Securities due in 2048LYG48AThe New York Stock Exchange
$824,033,000 5.3% Subordinated Securities due 2045LYG45The New York Stock Exchange
$1,750,000,000 3.574% Senior Notes due in 2028 (callable in 2027)LYG28AThe New York Stock Exchange
$1,500,000,000 4.375% Senior Notes due 2028LYG28BThe New York Stock Exchange
$1,250,000,000 4.55% Senior Notes due 2028LYG28CThe New York Stock Exchange
$1,250,000,000 3.75% Senior Notes due 2027LYG27The New York Stock Exchange
$1,500,000,000 4.65% Subordinated Securities due 2026LYG26The New York Stock Exchange
$1,500,000,000 4.45% Senior Notes due 2025LYG25AThe New York Stock Exchange
$1,327,685,000 4.582% Subordinated Securities due 2025LYG25The New York Stock Exchange
$1,250,000,000 3.5% Senior Notes due 2025LYG25The New York Stock Exchange
$1,000,000,000 3.90% Senior Notes due 2024LYG24AThe New York Stock Exchange
$1,000,000,000 4.5% Subordinated Securities due 2024LYG24The New York Stock Exchange
$1,500,000,000 2.858% Senior Notes due 2023LYG23BThe New York Stock Exchange
$1,750,000,000 4.05% Senior Notes due 2023LYG23AThe New York Stock Exchange
$2,250,000,000 2.907% Senior Notes due 2023 (callable in 2022)LYG23The New York Stock Exchange
$1,500,000,000 3.0% Senior Notes due 2022LYG22The New York Stock Exchange
$1,500,000,000 2.25% Senior Notes due 2022LYG22The New York Stock Exchange
$1,250,000,000 3.3% Senior Notes due 2021LYG21AThe New York Stock Exchange
$1,000,000,000 Floating Rate Senior Notes due 2021LYG21BThe New York Stock Exchange
$500,000,000 Floating Rate Senior Notes due 2021LYG21AThe New York Stock Exchange
$1,000,000,000 3.1% Senior Notes due 2021LYG21The New York Stock Exchange
$2,500,000,000 6.375% Senior Notes due 2021LYG21The New York Stock Exchange
$1,000,000,000 2.7% Senior Notes due 2020LYG20AThe New York Stock Exchange
$1,000,000,000 2.4% Senior Notes due 2020The New York Stock Exchange
$1,000,000,000 2.35% Senior Notes due 2019The New York Stock Exchange
$750,000,000 2.05% Senior Notes due 2019The New York Stock Exchange
$450,000,000 Floating Rate Notes due 2019The New York Stock Exchange
$1,000,000,000 2.3% Senior Notes due 2018The New York Stock Exchange
$700,000,000 2% Senior Notes due 2018The New York Stock Exchange
$300,000,000 Floating Rate Notes due 2018The New York Stock Exchange
$1,250,000,000 1.75% Senior Notes due 2018The New York Stock Exchange
$400,000,000 Floating Rate Notes due 2018The New York Stock Exchange
$1,000,000,000 1.75% Senior Notes due 2018The New York Stock Exchange
$500,000,000 Floating Rate Notes due 2018The New York Stock Exchange
$1,500,000,000 4.20% Senior Notes due 2017LYG20The New York Stock Exchange

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:

None

Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act:

7.50% Fixed Rate Reset Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities

6.75% Callable Fixed Rate Reset AT1 Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities
5.125% Callable Fixed Rate Reset AT1 Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities

 

The number of outstanding shares of each of Lloyds Banking Group plc’s classes of capital or common stock as of 31 December 20162019 was:

Ordinary shares, nominal value 10 pence each71,373,735,357
Limited voting shares, nominal value 10 pence each80,921,05170,052,557,838
Preference shares, nominal value 25 pence each412,204,151412,201,226
Preference shares, nominal value 25 cents each809,160
Preference shares, nominal value 25 euro cents eachNil

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.

Yesx    No¨o

If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.

Yes¨o    Nox

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant: (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports) and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.

Yesx    No¨o

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted

and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months
(or (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).

Yes¨x    No¨o

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, or a non-accelerated filer. filer, or an emerging growth company.

See definitionthe definitions of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer, and large accelerated filer”“emerging growth company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

Large accelerated filerx    Accelerated filer¨o    Non-Accelerated filer¨o    Emerging Growth Company o

If an emerging growth company that prepares its financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP, indicate by check mark if the registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standardsprovided pursuant to Section 13(a) of the Exchange Act.

Yes o    No o

Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements including in this filing:

U.S. GAAP¨o    International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Boardx Other¨o

If ‘Other’ has been checked in response to the previous question, indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow:

Item 17¨o    Item o18¨

If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act).

Yes¨o    Nox

The term “new or revised financial accounting standard” refers to any update issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board to its Accounting Standards Codification after April 5, 2012.

 
 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

Presentation of information1
Business overview2
Selected consolidated financial data3
Exchange ratesBusiness4
Business4
Operating and financial review and prospects1015
Management and employees113
Compensation117
Compensation120
Corporate governance152143
Major shareholders and related party transactions177170
Regulation178171
Listing information182174
Dividends185175
Articles of association of Lloyds Banking Group plc186176
Exchange controls192176
Taxation193177
Where you can find more information196179
Enforceability of civil liabilities196179
Risk factors197180
Forward looking statements215191
Lloyds Banking Group structure216192
Index to the consolidated financial statementsF-1
Glossary217193
Form 20-F cross-reference sheet219195
Exhibit index221197
Signatures222198

PRESENTATION OF INFORMATION

 

In this annual report, references to the ‘Company’ are to Lloyds Banking Group plc; references to ‘Lloyds Banking Group’, ‘Lloyds’ or the ‘Group’ are to Lloyds Banking Group plc and its subsidiary and associated undertakings; references to ‘Lloyds Bank’ are to Lloyds Bank plc (previously Lloyds TSB Bank plc);plc; and references to the ‘consolidated financial statements’ or ‘financial statements’ are to Lloyds Banking Group’s consolidated financial statements included in this annual report. References to the ‘Financial Conduct Authority’ or ‘FCA’ and to the ‘Prudential Regulation Authority’ or ‘PRA’ are to the United Kingdom (the UK) Financial Conduct Authority and the UK Prudential Regulation Authority. References to the ‘Financial Services Authority’ or ‘FSA’ are to their predecessor organisation, the UK Financial Services Authority.

 

The consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB). Certain disclosures required by IFRS have been included in sections highlighted as ‘Audited’ within the Operating and financial review and prospects section of this Annual Report on Form 20-F on pages 15 to 112. Disclosures marked as audited indicate that they are within the scope of the audit of the financial statements taken as a whole; these disclosures are not subject to a separate opinion.

 

In this annual report, amounts described as ‘statutory’ refer to amounts included within the Group’s consolidated financial statements.

 

Lloyds Banking Group publishes its consolidated financial statements expressed in British pounds (‘pounds sterling’, ‘sterling’ or ‘£’), the lawful currency of the UK. In this annual report, references to ‘pence’ and ‘p’ are to one-hundredth of one pound sterling; references to ‘US dollars’, ‘US$’ or ‘$’ are to the lawful currency of the United States (the US); references to ‘cent’ or ‘c’ are to one-hundredth of one US dollar; references to ‘euro’ or ‘€’ are to the lawful currency of the member states of the European Union (EU) that have adopted a single currency in accordance with the Treaty establishing the European Communities, as amended by the Treaty of European Union; references to ‘euro cent’ are to one-hundredth of one euro; and references to ‘Japanese yen’, ‘Japanese ¥’ or ‘¥’ are to the lawful currency of Japan. Solely for the convenience of the reader, this annual report contains translations of certain pounds sterling amounts into US dollars at specified rates. These translations should not be construed as representations by Lloyds Banking Group that the pounds sterling amounts actually represent such US dollar amounts or could be converted into US dollars at the rate indicated or at any other rate. Unless otherwise stated, the translations of pounds sterling into US dollars have been made at the noon buying rate in New York City for cable transfers in pounds sterling as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York (the Noon Buying Rate) in effect on 31 December 2016, which was $1.2337 = £1.00.2019. The Noon Buying Rate on 31 December 20162019 differs from certain of the actual rates used in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements, which are expressed in pounds sterling, and therefore US dollar amounts appearing in this annual report may differ significantly from actual US dollar amounts which were translated into pounds sterling in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements in accordance with IFRS.


1

BUSINESS OVERVIEW

 

Lloyds Banking Group is a leading provider of financial services to individual and business customers in the UK. At 31 December 2016, total2019, Lloyds Banking GroupGroup’s total assets were £817,793£833,893 million and Lloyds Banking Group had 70,43363,069 employees (on a full-time equivalent basis). Lloyds Banking Group plc’s market capitalisation at that date was £44,616£43,783 million. The Group reported a profit before tax for the 12 months to 31 December 20162019 of £3,888£4,393 million, and its capital ratios at that date were 21.221.3 per cent for total capital, 16.816.7 per cent for tier 1 capital and 13.413.6 per cent for common equity tier 1 capital.

 

Set out below is the Group’s summarised income statement for each of the last threetwo years:

 

 2016  2015 2014 
 £m  £m  £m  2019
£m
  2018
£m
 
Net interest income  9,274   11,318   10,660   10,180   13,396 
Other income  30,337   11,832   19,232   32,176   8,695 
Total income  39,611   23,150   29,892   42,356   22,091 
Insurance claims  (22,344)  (5,729)  (13,493)  (23,997)  (3,465)
Total income, net of insurance claims  17,267   17,421   16,399   18,359   18,626 
Operating expenses  (12,627)  (15,387)  (13,885)  (12,670)  (11,729)
Trading surplus  4,640   2,034   2,514   5,689   6,897 
Impairment  (752)  (390)  (752)  (1,296)  (937)
Profit before tax  3,888   1,644   1,762   4,393   5,960 

 

Lloyds Banking Group’s main business activities are retail and commercial banking and long-term savings, protection and investment.investment and it operates primarily in the UK. Services are offered through a number of well recognised brands including Lloyds Bank, Halifax, Bank of Scotland and Scottish Widows, and through a range of distribution channels including the largest branch network and digital bank in the UK.

 

At 31 December 2016,2019, the Group’s fourthree primary operating divisions, which are also financial reporting segments, were: Retail; Commercial Banking; Consumer Finance and Insurance.Insurance and Wealth. Retail provides banking, mortgages, personal loans, motor finance, credit cards and other financial services to personal and small business customers in the UK.customers. Commercial Banking provides banking and related services to business clients, from SMEssmall and medium-sized entities (SMEs) to large corporates. Consumer Finance provides a range of products including personal loans, motor finance, credit cards,Insurance and European mortgages and deposit taking. InsuranceWealth provides long-term savings, protection and investment products as well as general insurance products in the UK.products.

 

Profit before tax is analysed on pages 1317 to 1622 on a statutory basis and, in order to provide a more comparable representation of business performance offor the Group’s segments, on pages 24 to 3430 on an underlying basis. The key principles adopted in the preparation of this basis of reporting are described on page 24. The Group Executive Committee, which is the chief operating decision maker for the Group, reviews the Group’s internal reporting based around these segments (which reflect the Group’s organisational and management structures) in order to assess performance and allocate resources; this reporting is on an underlying basis. IFRS 8,Operating Segmentsrequires that the Group presents its segmental profit before tax on the basis reviewed by the chief operating decision maker that is most consistent with the measurement principles used in measuring the Group’s statutory profit before tax. Accordingly, the Group presents its segmental underlying basis profit before tax in note 4 to the financial statements in compliance with IFRS 8. The table below shows the results of Lloyds Banking Group’s segments in the last threetwo fiscal years, and their aggregation. Further information on non-GAAP measures and the reconciliations required by the Securities and Exchange Commission’s Regulation G are set out on pages F-19F-25 to F-22.F-29.

 

  2016   20151  20141
  £m   £m   £m  2019
£m
  2018
£m
1

Retail  3,003   3,091   2,739   3,839   4,211 
Commercial Banking  2,468   2,478   2,256   1,777   2,183 
Consumer Finance  1,283   1,381   1,449 
Insurance  837   962   922 
Insurance and Wealth  1,101   927 
Other  276   200   390   814   745 
Profit before tax – underlying basis  7,867   8,112   7,756   7,531   8,066 

 

1Segmental analysis restated, as explained on page 24.F-25.

 

Lloyds Banking Group plc was incorporated as a public limited company and registered in Scotland under the UK Companies Act 1985 on 21 October 1985 with the registered number 95000. Lloyds Banking Group plc’s registered office is The Mound, Edinburgh EH1 1YZ, Scotland, and its principal executive offices in the UK are located at 25 Gresham Street, London EC2V 7HN, United Kingdom, telephone number + 44 (0) 20 7626 1500.

2

SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA

 

The financial information set out in the tables below has been derived from the annual reports and accounts of Lloyds Banking Group plc for each of the past five years adjusted, where restatement was required, for subsequent changes in accounting policy and presentation. The financial statements for each of the years shown have been audited by PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm.

 

  2016   2015   2014   2013   20121  2019   20181,2   20171,2,3   20161,2,3   20151,2,3 
Income statement data for the year ended 31 December (£m)                                        
Total income, net of insurance claims  17,267   17,421   16,399   18,478   20,517   18,359   18,626   18,659   17,267   17,421 
Operating expenses  (12,627)  (15,387)  (13,885)  (15,322)  (15,974)  (12,670)  (11,729)  (12,346)  (12,627)  (15,387)
Trading surplus  4,640   2,034   2,514   3,156   4,543   5,689   6,897   6,313   4,640   2,034 
Impairment losses  (752)  (390)  (752)  (2,741)  (5,149)  (1,296)  (937)  (688)  (752)  (390)
Profit (loss) before tax  3,888   1,644   1,762   415   (606)
Profit (loss) for the year  2,164   956   1,499   (802)  (1,387)
Profit (loss) for the year attributable to ordinary shareholders  1,651   466   1,125   (838)  (1,471)
Dividends for the year2,3  2,175   1,962   535       
Profit before tax  4,393   5,960   5,625   3,888   1,644 
Profit for the year  3,006   4,506   3,999   2,255   1,036 
Profit for the year attributable to ordinary shareholders  2,459   3,975   3,494   1,742   546 
Dividends for the year4,5  2,375   2,288   2,195   2,175   1,962 
Balance sheet data at 31 December (£m)                                        
Share capital  7,146   7,146   7,146   7,145   7,042   7,005   7,116   7,197   7,146   7,146 
Shareholders’ equity  42,670   41,234   43,335   38,989   41,896   41,697   43,434   43,551   42,670   41,234 
Other equity instruments  5,355   5,355   5,355         5,906   6,491   5,355   5,355   5,355 
Customer deposits  415,460   418,326   447,067   439,467   426,216   421,320   418,066   418,124   415,460   418,326 
Subordinated liabilities  19,831   23,312   26,042   32,312   34,092   17,130   17,656   17,922   19,831   23,312 
Loans and advances to customers  457,958   455,175   482,704   492,952   516,764   494,988   484,858   472,498   457,958   455,175 
Total assets1  817,793   806,688   854,896   842,380   933,064 
Total assets  833,893   797,598   812,109   817,793   806,688 
Share information                                        
Basic earnings (loss) per ordinary share  2.4p  0.8p  1.7p   (1.2)p  (2.1)p
Diluted earnings (loss) per ordinary share  2.4p   0.8p   1.6p   (1.2)p  (2.1)p
Basic earnings per ordinary share  3.5p   5.5p   4.9p  2.4p   0.8p 
Diluted earnings per ordinary share  3.4p   5.5p  4.8p  2.4p  0.8p
Net asset value per ordinary share  59.8p   57.9p   60.7p   54.6p   59.5p   59.5p   61.0p  60.5p  59.8p  57.9p
Dividends per ordinary share2,4  3.05p   2.75p   0.75p       
Equivalent cents per share2,4,5  3.84c  4.03c   1.16c       
Dividends per ordinary share4,6  3.37p   3.21p  3.05p  3.05p  2.75p
Equivalent cents per share6,7  4.33c   4.14c   4.06c  3.95c  4.03c
Market price per ordinary share (year end)  62.5p   73.1p   75.8p   78.9p   47.9p  62.5p   51.9p   68.1p  62.5p  73.1p
Number of shareholders (thousands)  2,510   2,563   2,626   2,681   2,733   2,361   2,404   2,450   2,510   2,563 
Number of ordinary shares in issue (millions)6  71,374   71,374   71,374   71,368   70,343 
Financial ratios (%)7                    
Dividend payout ratio8  124.9   359.3   45.1       
Number of ordinary shares in issue (millions)8  70,053   71,164   71,973   71,374   71,374 
Financial ratios (%)9                    
Dividend payout ratio10  96.6   57.6   62.8   124.9   359.3 
Post-tax return on average shareholders’ equity  4.1   1.3   2.9   (2.0)  (3.3)  5.7   9.3   8.0   4.1   1.3 
Post-tax return on average assets  0.26   0.11   0.17   (0.09)  (0.14)  0.36   0.55   0.49   0.27   0.12 
Average shareholders’ equity to average assets  5.2   5.1   4.7   4.7   4.6   5.2   5.3   5.3   5.2   5.1 
Cost:income ratio9  73.1   88.3   84.7   82.9   77.9 
Capital ratios (%)10,11,12                    
Cost:income ratio11  69.0   63.0   66.2   73.1   88.3 
Capital ratios (%)                    
Total capital  21.2   21.5   22.0   20.8   17.3   21.3   22.9   21.2   21.2   21.5 
Tier 1 capital  16.8   16.4   16.5   14.5   13.8   16.7   18.2   17.2   16.8   16.4 
Common equity tier 1 capital/Core tier 1 capital  13.4   12.8   12.8   14.0   12.0   13.6   14.6   14.1   13.4   12.8 

 

1Restated, where appropriate,The Group has adopted IFRS 16Leaseswith effect from 1 January 2019, in 2013 foraccordance with the transition requirements of the standard, comparative information has not been restated.
2The Group has implemented the amendments to IAS 19 (Revised)12Income Taxeswith effect from 1 January 2019 and as a result tax relief on distributions on other equity instruments, previously taken directly to retained profits, is now reported within tax expense in the income statement. Comparatives have been restated.
3The Group adopted IFRS 9 and IFRS 10.15 with effect from 1 January 2018; in accordance with the transition requirements, comparative information was not restated.
24Annual dividends comprise both interim and estimated final dividend payments. The total dividend for the year represents the interim dividend paid during the year and the final dividend, which is paid and accounted for in the following year.
35Dividends for the year in 2016 includeincluded a recommended special dividend totalling £356 million; dividends for the year in 2015 included a special dividend totalling(2015: £357 million.million).
46Dividends per ordinary share in 2016 includeincluded a recommended special dividend of 0.5 pence; dividends per ordinary share in 2015 included a special dividend ofpence (2015: 0.5 pence.pence).
57Translated into US dollars at the Noon Buying Rate on the date each payment was made, with the exception of the final and special dividendsdividend in respect of 2016,2019, which havehas been translated at the Noon Buying Rate on 2414 February 2017.2020.
8
6ThisFor 2016 and previous years, this figure excludesexcluded the limited voting ordinary shares owned by the Lloyds Bank Foundations. The limited voting ordinary shares were redesignated as ordinary shares on 1 July 2017.
79Averages are calculated on a monthly basis from the consolidated financial data of Lloyds Banking Group.
810Total dividend for the year divided by earnings attributable to ordinary shareholders adjusted for tax relief on distributions to other equity holders.
911The cost:income ratio is calculated as total operating expenses as a percentage of total income (net of insurance claims).
10Capital ratios for 2012 were not restated to reflect the adoption of IAS 19 (Revised) in 2013.
11Capital ratios for 2013 and earlier years are in accordance with the modified Basel II framework as implemented by the PRA.
12Capital ratios for 2014, 2015 and 2016 are in accordance with the CRD IV rules implemented by the PRA on 1 January 2014.
3

EXCHANGE RATES

In this annual report, unless otherwise indicated, all amounts are expressed in pounds sterling. For the months shown the US dollar high and low Noon Buying Rates per pound sterling were:

  2017  2016  2016  2016  2016  2016 
  January  December  November  October  September  August 
US dollars per pound sterling:                        
High  1.26   1.27   1.25   1.28   1.34   1.33 
Low  1.21   1.22   1.22   1.22   1.30   1.29 

For each of the years shown, the average of the US dollar Noon Buying Rates per pound sterling based on the last day of each month was:

      2016  2015  2014  2013  2012 
US dollars per pound sterling:                        
Average      1.34   1.53   1.65   1.57   1.59 

On 24 February 2017, the latest practicable date, the US dollar Noon Buying Rate was $1.2499 = £1.00. Lloyds Banking Group makes no representation that amounts in pounds sterling have been, could have been or could be converted into US dollars at that rate or at any of the above rates.

BUSINESS

 

HISTORY AND DEVELOPMENT OF LLOYDS BANKING GROUP

 

The history of the Group can be traced back to the 18th century when the banking partnership of Taylors and Lloyds was established in Birmingham, England. Lloyds Bank Plc was incorporated in 1865 and during the late 19th and early 20th centuries entered into a number of acquisitions and mergers, significantly increasing the number of banking offices in the UK. In 1995, it continued to expand with the acquisition of the Cheltenham and Gloucester Building Society (C&G).Society.

 

TSB Group plc became operational in 1986 when, following UK Government legislation, the operations of four Trustee Savings Banks and other related companies were transferred to TSB Group plc and its new banking subsidiaries. By 1995, the TSB Group had, either through organic growth or acquisition, developed life and general insurance operations, investment management activities, and a motor vehicle hire purchase and leasing operation to supplement its retail banking activities.

 

In 1995, TSB Group plc merged with Lloyds Bank Plc. Under the terms of the merger, the TSB and Lloyds Bank groups were combined under TSB Group plc, which was re-named Lloyds TSB Group plc, with Lloyds Bank Plc, which was subsequently re-named Lloyds TSB Bank plc, the principal subsidiary. In 1999, the businesses, assets and liabilities of TSB Bank plc, the principal banking subsidiary of the TSB Group prior to the merger, and its subsidiary Hill Samuel Bank Limited were vested in Lloyds TSB Bank plc, and in 2000, Lloyds TSB Group acquired Scottish Widows. In addition to already being one of the leading providers of banking services in the UK, the acquisition of Scottish Widows also positioned Lloyds TSB Group as one of the leading suppliers of long-term savings and protection products in the UK.

 

The HBOS Group had been formed in September 2001 by the merger of Halifax plc and Bank of Scotland. The Halifax business began with the establishment of the Halifax Permanent Benefit Building Society in 1852; the society grew through a number of mergers and acquisitions including the merger with Leeds Permanent Building Society in 1995 and the acquisition of Clerical Medical in 1996. In 1997 the Halifax converted to plc status and floated on the London stock market. Bank of Scotland was founded in July 1695, making it Scotland’s first and oldest bank.

 

On 18 September 2008, with the support of the UK Government, the boards of Lloyds TSB Group plc and HBOS plc announced that they had reached agreement on the terms of a recommended acquisition by Lloyds TSB Group plc of HBOS plc. The shareholders of Lloyds TSB Group plc approved the acquisition at the Company’s general meeting on 19 November 2008. On 16 January 2009, the acquisition was completed and Lloyds TSB Group plc changed its name to Lloyds Banking Group plc.

 

Pursuant to two placing and open offers which were completed by the Company in January and June 2009 and the Rights Issue completed in December 2009, the UK Government acquired 43.4 per cent of the Company’s issued ordinary share capital; throughcapital. Following sales of shares in September 2013 and March 2014 and the impactcompletion of a trading planplans with Morgan Stanley & Co. International plc (Morgan Stanley), this had reduced to 9.9 per cent by 31 December 2015.

UKFI announced on 7 October 2016 that it intended to continue to sell Her Majesty’s Treasury’s (HMT) shareholding in Lloyds Banking Group plc over the next 12 months through a pre-arranged trading plan managed by Morgan Stanley. UnderUK Government completed the trading plan, Morgan Stanley has full discretion to effect a measured and orderly sell downsale of its shares in Lloyds BankingMay 2017, returning the Group plc on behalf of HMT. The trading plan commenced on 7 October and will terminate no later than 6 October 2017. HMT has instructed Morgan Stanley that (a) up to but no more than, 15 per cent of the aggregate total trading volume in Lloyds Banking Group plc may be sold over the duration of the trading plan, and (b) shares may not be sold under the trading plan below a certain price per share that UKFI and HMT have determined represents fair value currently and continues to deliver value for money for the UK taxpayer. As at 22 February 2017, HMT owned approximately 2.8 billion ordinary shares in Lloyds Banking Group plc, which represents less than 4 per cent of the issued ordinary share capital.full private ownership.

 

Pursuant to its decision approving state aid to the Group, the European Commission required the Group to dispose of a retail banking business meeting minimum requirements for the number of branches, share of the UK personal current accounts market and proportion of the Group’s mortgage assets. Following disposals in 2014, the Group retained an interest of approximately 50 per cent in TSB as at 31 December 2014. The Group sold its remaining interest in TSB to Banco de Sabadell (Sabadell) in 2015, with the acquisition becoming unconditional inand all respects onEC state aid requirements were met by 30 June 20152017.

On 1 June 2017, following the receipt of all relevantcompetition and regulatory clearances.approval, the Group acquired 100 per cent of the ordinary share capital of MBNA Limited, which together with its subsidiaries operates a UK consumer credit card business, from FIA Jersey Holdings Limited, a wholly-owned subsidiary of Bank of America.

The Group successfully launched its new non ring-fenced bank, Lloyds Bank Corporate Markets plc in 2018, transferring in the non ring-fenced business from the rest of the Group, thereby meeting its legal requirements under ring-fencing legislation.

On 23 October 2018, the Group announced a partnership with Schroders to create a market-leading wealth management proposition. The three key components of the partnership are: (i) the establishment of a new financial planning joint venture; (ii) the Group taking a 19.9 per cent stake in Schroders high net worth UK wealth management business; and (iii) the appointment of Schroders as the active investment manager of approximately £80 billion of the Group’s insurance and wealth related assets. The joint venture, Schroders Personal Wealth, was launched to the market in the third quarter of 2019. The Group’s interest in the joint venture is 50.1 per cent.

4

BUSINESS

 

STRATEGY OF LLOYDS BANKING GROUP

 

The Group is a leading provider of financial services to individual and business customers in the UK. The Group’s main business activities are retail and commercial banking, and long-term savings, protection and investment. Services are provided through a number of well recognised brands including Lloyds Bank, Halifax, Bank of Scotland and Scottish Widows and through a range of distribution channels, including the largest branch network and digital bank in the UK.

 

As the Group looks to the future, it sees the external environment evolving rapidly. Changing customer behaviours, the pace of technological evolution and changes in regulation all present opportunities. Given the Group’s strong capabilities and the significant progress made in recent years, the Group believes that it is in a unique position to compete and win in this environment by developing additional competitive advantages. The Group operates a simple, low-risk, customer focused retailwill continue to transform itself to succeed in this digital world and commercial banking business primarily in the UK. The Group’s corporate strategy is built around being the best bank for individual and business customers across the UK and creating value by investing in areas that make a real difference to these customers.

Following the successful delivery of the Group’s 2011 strategy that underpinned the Group’s low cost, low risk, customer focused, UK retail and commercial banking business model, the Group outlined the next phase of its strategy will ensure that the Group has the capabilities to deliver future success.

STRATEGIC PRIORITIES

In 2018 the Group launched the third phase of its strategic plan. The Group identified four strategic priorities focused on the financial needs and behaviours of the customer of the future: further enhancing the Group’s leading customer experience; further digitising the Group; maximising Group capabilities; and transforming ways of working. The Group will invest more than £3 billion in October 2014. these strategic initiatives through the plan period that will drive the Group’s transformation into a digitised, simple, low risk, customer-focused UK financial services provider.

Delivering a leading customer experience

The Group will drive stronger customer relationships through best in class propositions while continuing to provide the Group’s strategy is focused upon delivering valuecustomers with brilliant servicing and high quality experiencesa seamless experience across all channels. This will include:

remaining the number 1 digital bank in the UK with open banking functionality;
unrivalled reach with UK’s largest branch network serving complex needs; and
data-driven and personalised customer propositions.

Digitising the Group

The Group will deploy new technology to drive additional operational efficiencies that will make banking simple and easier for customers alongside superiorwhilst reducing operating costs, pursuing the following initiatives:

deeper end-to-end transformation targeting over 70 per cent of cost base;
simplification and progressive modernisation of our data and IT infrastructure; and
technology enabled productivity improvements across the business.

Maximising the Group’s capabilities

The Group will deepen customer relationships, grow in targeted segments and sustainablebetter address our customers’ banking and insurance needs as an integrated financial performance within a prudent risk and conduct framework.services provider. This will be achieved through three strategic priorities which will be consistently applied across all divisions:include:

 

CREATING THE BEST CUSTOMER EXPERIENCE

increasing Financial Planning and Retirement (FP&R) open book assets by more than £50 billion by 2020 with more than 1 million new pension customers;
implementing an integrated FP&R proposition with single customer view; and
start-up, SME and Mid Market net lending growth (more than £6 billion in the plan period).

 

The Group’s ambition is to create the best customer experience through its multi brand, multi channel approach, combining comprehensive online and mobile capabilities with face to face services. This involves transforming the Group’s digital presence while sustaining extensive customer reach through a branch network focused on delivering high quality service and the right outcomes for customers.

BECOMING SIMPLER AND MORE EFFICIENT

Transforming ways of working

The Group is focused on creating operational capability which is simplermaking its biggest ever investment in people, increasing colleague training and more efficientdevelopment by 50 per cent to 4.4 million hours per annum and will become more responsiveembracing new technology to changingdrive better customer expectations while maintaining its cost leadership amongst UK high street banks. This includes a second phaseoutcomes. The hard work, commitment and expertise of the Simplification programmeGroup’s colleagues has enabled it to achieve run-rate savings of £1.4 billion per annum by the end of 2017. In orderdeliver to achieve these savings,date and the Group will further invest around £2.2 billion over three years on initiativesin capabilities and agile working practices. The Group has already restructured the business and reorganised the leadership team to simplify processes and increase automation.ensure effective implementation of the new strategy.

 

DELIVERING SUSTAINABLE GROWTH

The Group will seek Group-wide growth opportunities whilst maintaining its prudent risk appetite. This will be achieved by maintaining market leadership in its retail business lines while also focusing on areas where the Group is currently under represented.

SUMMARY

The Group’s purpose is to help Britain prosper. The Group is creating a simpler, more agile, efficient and responsive customer focused organisation which operates sustainably and responsibly. The achievement of our strategy could not happen without the support of our colleagues. We are therefore committed to ‘building the best team’ to create a high performance organisation. The Group believes that the successful execution of its strategy will enable delivery of superior and sustainable returns for shareholders.

BUSINESS AND ACTIVITIES OF LLOYDS BANKING GROUP

 

At 31 December 2016 theThe Group’s activities wereare organised into fourthree financial reporting segments: Retail; Commercial Banking; Consumer Finance and Insurance.Insurance and Wealth. In 2019 the Group transferred Cardnet, its card payment acceptance service, from Retail into Commerical Banking and also transferred certain equity business from Commercial Banking into Central items. Comparatives have been restated accordingly.

 

Further information on the Group’s financial reporting segments is set out on pages 2827 to 3429 and in note 4 to the financial statements.

 

MATERIAL CONTRACTS

 

The Company and its subsidiaries are party to various contracts in the ordinary course of business.

5

BUSINESS

 

ENVIRONMENTAL MATTERS

 

MANAGING AND REDUCING Helping the transition to a sustainable low carbon economy

The UK is committed to the vision of a sustainable, low carbon future. The Group’s unique position within the UK economy means that the successful transition to a more sustainable, low carbon economy is of strategic importance.

The Group supports the aims of the 2015 Paris Agreement and the UK Government’s Clean Growth Strategy, which will require a radical reinvention of ways of working, living and doing business including new Government policies and sustainable finance solutions. In 2018 the Group set out its Sustainability Strategy and when reporting on its progress, the Group supports the Taskforce on Climate-Related Financial Disclosure (TCFD) framework, and currently plans to achieve full disclosure by 2022 in line with the TCFD recommendations and the UK Government’s Green Finance Strategy.

OUR ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTSSTRATEGY

 

The Group’s abilitygoal and approach

As a signal of the Group’s commitment the Group has set an ambitious goal, working with customers, Government and the market to help Britain prosperreduce the emissions it finances by more than 50 per cent by 2030, supporting the UK’s ambition to be net zero by 2050 and the 2015 Paris Agreement. During the course of 2020, the Group intends to conduct a review of its portfolio to establish its current financed emissions and set appropriate metrics and targets for material sectors.

In order to meet its goal, the Group will:

Identify new opportunities to support customers and clients and finance the UK transition to a low carbon economy
Identify and manage material sustainability and climate related risks across the Group, disclosing these, their impacts on the Group and its financial planning processes, in line with the TCFD framework
Use the Group’s scale and reach to help drive progress towards a sustainable and resilient UK economy through engagement with customers, communities, industry, Government, shareholders and suppliers
Embed sustainability into the way the Group does business and manages its own operations in a more sustainable way

The Group’s ambition

The Group has set itself seven leadership ambitions to support the UK’s transition to a sustainable future:

Business: become a leading UK commercial bank for sustainable growth, supporting clients to transition to sustainable business models and operations, and to pursue new clean growth opportunities

Homes: be a leading UK provider of customer support on energy efficient, sustainable homes

Vehicles: be a leading UK provider of low emission/green vehicle fleets

Pensions and investments: be a leading UK pension provider that offers customers and colleagues sustainable investment choices, and challenge the companies the Group invests in to behave more sustainably and responsibly

Insurance: be a leading UK insurer in improving the resilience of customers’ lives against extreme weather caused by climate change

Green bonds: be a leading UK bank in the green/sustainable bonds market

The Group’s own footprint: be a leading UK bank in reducing the Group’s own carbon footprint and challenging suppliers to ensure the Group’s own consumption of resources, goods and services is inextricably linkedsustainable

Metrics and targets

In 2018, the Group committed to wider environmental issues. Man-madedevelop a reporting framework to track performance against our sustainability strategy. This includes measures for: the Group’s own energy use, emissions, water and waste; Group and portfolio metrics that drive emission reductions related to financing activity; the amount of green finance provided; and metrics that track climate change risk (including exposure to high carbon sectors and sectors at high risk from climate change).

The complexity of accessing robust data has prevented the Group from setting a full suite of targets in 2019. The Group intends, however, to set appropriate targets during 2020 for material sectors. The Group’s new goal to help reduce the emissions it finances by more than 50 per cent by 2030 will frame the level of ambition across the Group’s targets and metrics.

Extending the Group’s own carbon footprint measurement

The Group met its 2030 carbon reduction target in 2019, having reduced emissions by 63 per cent since 2009. The Group also expanded its Scope 3 emissions measurement to include additional categories of emissions from business travel and colleague commuting. The Group continues to pursue our targets to reduce emissions by 80 per cent by 2050, operational waste by 80 per cent by 2025 (compared to 2014/15) and water consumption by 40 per cent by 2030 (compared to 2009). The Group will be developing new carbon, energy and travel targets in 2020.

Green finance

The Group has provided more than £4.9 billion in green finance since 2016 through its Clean Growth Finance Initiative, Commercial Real Estate Green Loans Initiative, Renewable Energy Financing, and green bonds facilitation. While green loan standards are evolving, the Group has teamed up with leading sustainability consultants when developing green finance products to determine a list of qualifying green criteria. These green finance products support a range of eligible activity including; reducing emissions, improving energy efficiency, reducing waste, improving water efficiency, and funding low carbon transport and renewable energy.

6

BUSINESS

Climate risk sectors

In line with TCFD recommendations, the Group has identified its loans and advances to customers in high carbon sectors and a selection of other sectors that will be exposed to transition risk (see table). This is the Group’s initial view and will be reviewed as its transition risk insight develops. The Group continues to work with customers to support transition, taking into account both risks and opportunities.

The Group’s exposure to high carbon sectors is low (less than 0.5 per cent of total loans and advances to customers). In addition, data for these loans and advances is presented at an overall sector level and not all customers in these sectors will have high emissions or be exposed to significant transition risks. For example:

Utilities includes financing to entities that have both renewable energy and non-renewable energy generation. The Group has provided finance for more than 40 renewable energy projects, including supporting projects such as the Neart na Gaoithe offshore wind farm;
Real estate and mortgages will include loans and advances supported by assets which have a full range of Energy Performance Certificate (EPC) ratings including energy efficient properties;
UK motor finance includes loans and advances for low emission vehicles.
Loans and advances to customers in high carbon sectors and selected other sectors subject to transition risks.

      Loans and advances to
customers (£m)2
 % of total loans and advances
to customers3
Sector/area1 Dec-2019  Dec-2018  Dec-2019 Dec-2018
 Energy Coal Mining  21   28   <0.01%  <0.01%
   Oil and Gas  1,368   975   0.27%  0.20%
 Utilities (Electric and Gas)  964   1,251   0.19%  0.26%
 Total    2,353   2,254   0.47%  0.46%
 Agriculture, Forestry and Fishing  7,558   7,314   1.52%  1.50%
 Construction and Real Estate  28,228   29,470   5.67%  6.04%
 Transportation (Automotive, Aviation, Shipping and Rail)  4,353   5,429   0.87%  1.11%
 Cement, Chemicals and Steel Manufacture  143   250   0.03%  0.05%
 Mortgages  299,141   297,497   60.05%  60.96%
 UK Motor Finance  15,976   14,933   3.21%  3.06%

1Exposures are based on 2007 Standard Industrial Classification codes except for Agriculture, Forestry and Fishing (based on NACE code A00-0) and Mortgages and UK Motor Finance, where the full portfolios have been used. These exposures will include green and other sustainable finance loans, which support the transition to the low carbon economy. As such, these figures and/or trends should not be read as the only measure to gauge transition risk or financed emissions.
2Disclosures are based on loans and advances to customers on a statutory basis, before allowance for impairment losses. Analysis covers at least 95% of loans and advances and does not include data from the Insurance and Wealth division.
3Total loan and advances to customers were £488,088m at 31 December 2018 and £498,247m at 31 December 2019.

Risk management

Climate risk is a key emerging risk for the Group. The Group’s approach to identifying and managing climate risk is founded on embedding it into its existing risk management framework, and integrating it through policies, authorities and risk control mechanisms. During 2019, the Group updated its TCFD implementation plan to incorporate Prudential Regulatory Authority (PRA) supervisory expectations and refined deliverables, with further resource invested in the programme.

In 2019, the Group included commentary on climate change risk within its Internal Capital Capacity Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) submission, and in 2020 the Group is building on this through its analysis of initial scenarios to assess the impact on capital requirements. The Group is also engaged in the industry response to the Bank of England Discussion Paper to identify the best approach to explore the financial risks posed by climate change within its 2021 Biennial Exploratory Scenario (BES).

The Group has updated its external sector statements to include positions on six new sectors including manufacturing, automotive, agriculture, animal welfare, fisheries and UNESCO World Heritage Sites. This is in addition to the existing statements on power, coal, mining, oil and gas, forestry and defence. www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/Our-Group/responsible-business/reporting-centre/. The Group’s statement on coal has been updated and made more ambitious. The Group continues with its policy of not financing new coal fired power stations. The Group has now tightened its requirements for providing general banking or funding, and now requires new clients to have less than 30 per cent of their revenue from the operation of coal fired power stations and/or coal mines (previously less than 50 per cent).

In addition, existing customers whose overall operations include coal mining and coal power generation or who supply equipment or services to the sector will be expected to explain how they plan to reduce their reliance on revenue from coal fired power stations and/or coal mines. This includes reducing such revenue to less than 30 per cent by 2025 and, where relevant, to eliminate UK coal power generation in line with UK Government commitments.

Sustainability is now a mandatory part of credit applications in Commercial Banking for facilities greater than £500,000, and we continue to develop sector specific guidance to help relationship managers identify climate risks. The Group will review climate risk as part of the 2020 annual refresh of the Group’s Risk Appetite.

In line with TCFD, the Group is also developing forward-looking scenario analysis, incorporating physical and transition risks, to help identify risks and opportunities over the short, medium and long-term. For example, Commercial Banking are conducting analysis on the real estate sector for business as usual and low carbon transition scenarios and the Insurance business has conducted an initial climate stress test. The Group is working with external consultants to enhance scenario analysis across divisions and will use the outputs to support scenario analysis assessments and inform credit risk appetite decisions and future disclosures.

7

BUSINESS

Governance

Given the strategic importance of the Group’s sustainability ambitions, the Group’s governance structure provides clear oversight and ownership of the sustainability strategy. This includes:

 

Lloyds Banking Group Board Responsible Business Committee Group Executive Committee Group Executive Sustainability Committee Other internal governance Audit Committee Board Risk Committee GEC Risk Committee Divisional Risk Committees Group sustainability team Divisional forums/ working groups Group sustainability forum TCFD working group

The Responsible Business Committee (RBC), a sub-committee of the Board, chaired by Sara Weller, Group Non-Executive Director and which includes the Chairman, Lord Blackwell as a member
The Group Executive Sustainability Committee (GESC) which provides oversight and recommends decisions to the Group Executive Committee (GEC)
The TCFD working group, co-chaired by senior executives in risk and sustainability, coordinates the implementation of the TCFD recommendations and supports adherence to key regulatory requirements on climate risk
The Group Chief Risk Officer (CRO) has assumed responsibility for identifying and managing the risks arising from climate change, alongside the CROs for key legal entities

Our Group sustainability team is supported by divisional sustainability governance forums led by Divisional Managing Directors, ensuring a coordinated approach to oversight, delivery and reporting of the Group’s sustainability strategy.

How we are delivering against our ambitions

In 2019, the Group has focused on developing new products, services and processes to achieve its ambitions, and progress has been recognised.

Lloyds Banking Group achieved the Leadership level in the 2019 Carbon Disclosure Project (CDP) Climate Change survey, scoring an A minus; the highest placed financial services firm on the Fortune Sustainability All Stars list; and won the Real Estate Capital Sustainable Finance Provider of the Year
One in 14 electric cars in the UK was supplied by Group subsidiary Lex Autolease in 2019, supported by a £1 million cashback offer on pure electric vehicle (EV) orders, reducing future carbon dioxide emissions by an estimated 28 kilotonnes
The Group continues to partner with the Cambridge Institute for Sustainability Leadership to provide high quality training to executives and colleagues in risk management, product development and client facing roles. In 2019, over 800 colleagues were trained, ensuring they are able to support clients on this journey
Since 2018 the Group has supported renewable energy projects that power the equivalent of 5.1 million homes, achieving the Group’s Helping Britain Prosper Plan 2020 target a year early

Evolving our disclosure

In 2020, the Group will continue to review and enhance its methodologies and framework for reporting Environmental, Social and Governance risks. This review will take into account a range of industry guidelines including TCFD, Principles for Responsible Banking, Sustainability Accounting Standards Board (SASB), the evolving World Economic Forum (WEF) ESG standards, and regulatory reporting requirements with a view to further enhancing our disclosures and responding to the evolving needs of both our shareholders and other stakeholders.

8

BUSINESS

Initiatives and collaboration

Climate change is a global challenge that requires collaboration across companies and industries to ensure the risks and opportunities can be adequately identified and managed. To support this, the Group participates in several industry initiatives and has signed up to key principles that drive action on climate change and global trends, suchsustainability, including:

United Nations Environment Programme

Finance Initiative (UNEP FI)

The Group became a member of UNEP FI in 2019 and joined its Phase 2 Banking TCFD Pilot.

The Group also became a signatory to the Principles for Responsible Banking and Principles for Sustainable Insurance.

Coalition for Climate Resilient Investment

In September 2019, the Group joined the newly formed coalition that aims to transform infrastructure investment by integrating climate risks into decision making.

University of Cambridge Banking Environment Initiative (BEI) – Bank 2030

The Group has been working with 12 leading banks to develop a roadmap for how the industry can direct capital towards environmentally and socially sustainable economic development.

The Climate Group

In 2019, the Group was one of only a handful of businesses globally to sign up to all three of The Climate Group’s campaigns:

RE100 – a commitment to source 100 per cent of the Group’s electricity from renewable sources by 2030 (achieved in 2019)
EP100 – a commitment to set ambitious energy productivity targets by 2030
EV100 – a commitment to accelerate the transition to Electric Vehicles by 2030

Climate Financial Risk Forum

In 2019, the Group joined the PRA and FCA’s joint Climate Financial Risk Forum, participating in the Risk Management Working Group that aims to deliver a UK best practice handbook on implementation of the TCFD recommendations.

Greenhouse gas emissions

The Group has voluntarily reported greenhouse gas emissions and environmental performance since 2009, and since 2013 this has been reported in line with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. Our total emissions, in tonnes of CO2equivalent, are reported in the table below. Deloitte LLP has provided limited level ISAE 3000 (Revised) and ISAE 3410 assurance over selected non-financial indicators as resource scarcity, extreme weathernoted by. Their full, independent assurance statement is available online at www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/our-group/responsible-business

Methodology

The Group follows the principles of the Greenhouse Gas (GHG) Protocol Corporate Accounting and risingReporting Standard to calculate our Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions from our worldwide operations. The reporting period is 1 October 2018 to 30 September 2019, which is different to that of the Directors’ report (January 2019 – December 2019). This is in line with Regulations in that the majority of the emissions reporting year falls within the period of the Directors’ Report. Emissions are reported based on an operational boundary. The scope of reporting is in line with the GHG Protocol and covers Scope 1, Scope 2 and Scope 3 emissions. Reported Scope 1 emissions cover emissions generated from gas and oil used in buildings, emissions from UK company-owned vehicles used for business travel and emissions from the use of air conditioning and chiller/refrigerant plant. Reported Scope 2 emissions cover emissions generated from the use and purchase of electricity for own use, calculated using both the location and market based methodologies. Reported Scope 3 emissions relate to business travel and commuting undertaken by colleagues and emissions associated with waste and the extraction and distribution of each of our energy sources; electricity, gas and commodity prices, have an impact onoil. In 2019 the Group has expanded Scope 3 emissions as part of our sustainability strategy to increase transparency of reporting of the Group’s its own operationscarbon footprint, and stakeholders. The Group is committed to managing its direct environmental impact and reducing its greenhouse gas emissions. The Group manages its impacts through its Environmental Action Plan, which focuses on reducing risk and creating value through improved efficiency.drive reductions in additional categories of emissions; these include Waste Emissions, Upstream Business Travel (the well to tank emissions of rail, air, road vehicles, hired vehicles); Hotels; Commuting; Tube; Taxis. A detailed definition of these emissions can be found in the Group’s 2019 Reporting Criteria online at www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/our-group/responsible-business

 

EmissionsIntensity ratio

Legacy         
  Oct 2018 –
Sept 2019
  Oct 2017 –
Sept 2018
  Oct 2016 –
Sept 2017
 
GHG emissions (CO2e) per £m of underlying income (Location Based)1  11.5   13.0   15.5 
GHG emissions (CO2e) per £m of underlying income (Market Based)1  5.6   6.2   16.4 
             
Expanded            
   Oct 2018 –
Sept 2019
   Oct 2017 –
Sept 2018
   Oct 2016 –
Sept 2017
 
GHG emissions (CO2e) per £m of underlying income (Location Based) – expanded scope2  15.8   17.3    
GHG emissions (CO2e) per £m of underlying income (Market Based) – expanded scope2  9.9   10.5    

1Intensities have been restated for 2016-2017 and 2017-2018 to reflect changes to emissions data only, replacing estimated data with actuals; underlying income figures for those years have not changed.
2Scope 3 emissions have been expanded to include additional elements within the Group’s own operations including emissions from waste, colleague commuting and additional elements of business travel (including taxis, tube, well to tank emissions of business travel and hotels). We have disclosed these figures parallel to legacy scope numbers to allow fairer comparison to numbers previously disclosed and to demonstrate performance versus our previous targets.
9

BUSINESS

This year, the Group’s overall location based carbon emissions measured in COwere 207,768 tCO2equivalent tonnes (CO2e), have decreased by 12.95e; a 14.6 per cent year-on-yeardecrease since 2018 and by 38.8363.1 per cent against the Group’s 2009 baseline (legacy scope). Reductions achieved are attributable to an extensive energy optimisation programme and reductions in business travel, alongside decarbonisation of the UK electricity grid. In addition, there has been a reduction in property foot print and headcount.

The Group’s market based emissions figure is equal to 101,042 tCO2e – a comparative decrease of 12.9 per cent year on year and 82.0 per cent against 2009 baseline. This is mainlyFurther reductions in market emissions are attributable to the reduction in consumptionpurchase of gas and electricity (which make up the largest proportionrenewable energy certificates for each of the Group’s emissions)operations outside of the UK equivalent to their consumption since January 2019. The Group continues to source solar, wind, hydro and the Group’s energy optimisation programme.biomass Renewable Energy Guarantees of Origin (REGOs) equivalent to our total UK electricity consumption.

 

CO2e emissions

  Oct 2015 – Oct 2014 –  Oct 2013 – Sept 
  Sept 2016 Sept 20151  20141 
Total CO2e tonnes  344,316  395,554   437,721 
Total scope 1  52,438  57,255   59,856 
Total scope 2  205,127  239,721   261,623 
Total scope 3  86,752  98,579   116,242 
CO2E emissions (tonnes) – Expanded scope         
CO2E Emissions Tonnes: Oct18 –
Sep19
  Oct17 –
Sep181
  Oct16 –
Sep171
 
Total CO2e (market based)  179,324   197,484   n/a 
Total CO2e (location based)  286,051   324,816   n/a 
Total Scope 1  47,524   49,299   51,953 
Total Scope 2 (market based)  387   1,951   178,711 
Total Scope 2 (location based)  107,113   129,284   162,598 
Total Scope 32  131,414   146,233   n/a 
 
CO2E emissions (tonnes) – Legacy scope            
CO2E Emissions Tonnes:  Oct18 –
Sep19
   Oct17 –
Sep181
   Oct16 –
Sep171
 
Total CO2e (market based)  101,042   115,961   303,065 
Total CO2e (location based)  207,768   243,293   286,892 
Total Scope 3  53,131   64,710   72,876 

 

1Restated 2013/20142018/2017 and 2014/20152017/2016 emissions data to improve the accuracy of reporting, using actual data to replace estimations.estimates.
Emissions in tonnes CO2e in line with the GHG Protocol Corporate Standard (2004) including revised Scope 2 guidance (2015) which discloses a Market Based figure in addition to the Location Based figure.
The measure and reporting criteria for Scope 1, 2, 3 emissions is provided in the Lloyds Banking Group Reporting Criteria statement available online at www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/our-group/responsible-business
Scope 1 emissions include mobile and stationary combustion of fuel and operation of facilities.
Scope 2 emissions have been calculated in accordance with GHG Protocol guidelines, in both Location and Market Based methodologies.
2Scope 3 emissions have been expanded to include additional elements within the Group’s own operations including emissions from waste, colleague commuting and additional elements of business travel (including taxis, tube, well to tank emissions of business travel and hotels). We have also disclosed legacy scope numbers to allow fairer comparison to numbers previously disclosed and to demonstrate performance versus our previous targets.
Indicator is subject to Limited ISAE3000 (revised) and 3410 (ISAE3410) assurance by Deloitte LLP for the 2019 Annual Responsible Business Reporting. Deloitte’s 2019 assurance statement and the 2019 Reporting Criteria are available online at www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/our-group/responsible-business

 

Omissions

Emissions associated with joint ventures and investments are not included in tonnes CO2e in line withthis disclosure as they fall outside the GHG Protocol Corporate Standard (2004).scope of our operational boundary. The Group is in the process of transitioning to the revised Scope 2 guidance.

Criteria used to measure and report Scope 1, 2, 3does not have any emissions is provided in the Lloyds Banking Group Reporting Criteria statement available online at www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/ResponsibleBusiness.

Scope 1 emissions include mobile and stationary combustion of fuel and operation of facilities.

Scope 2 emissions have been calculated using a location based methodology, as set out by the GHG Protocol.

Indicator is subject to limited ISAE3000 (revised) assurance by Deloitte LLP for the 2016 Annual Responsible Business Reporting. Deloitte’s 2016 assurance statement and the 2016 Reporting Criteria are available online at www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/RBdownloads.

Supporting the low carbon economy

The Group continues to develop products and services to support customers’ transition to a lower carbon, more resource efficient economy. Since 2014 the Group has launched two Environmental, Social and Governance (ESG) bonds totalling £500 million. Lloyds Bank became the first UK bank to develop an ESG deposit scheme in response to client demand to invest in products that create positive ESG impacts.

In March 2016 Lloyds Bank launched its innovative £1 billion Green Loan Initiative for commercial real estate lending. The initiative – the first of its kind in the UK – provides clients with loans at discounted margins to help incentivise energy efficiency and finance investment in green buildings. The Group completed the first tranche of deals in the second half of 2016, totalling £72 million, and has helped borrowers like HPH, a Bath-based property company with a diverse property portfolio, to fund energy efficiency projects. The Group has now set a target in its Helping Britain Prosper Plan to fund 10 million square feet of commercial real estate to become more energy efficient by 2020, the equivalent of seven London Shards.

In 2016 the Group’s UK-based team was responsible for financing renewable projects with a combined capacity of more than 1.78GW. Globally, the Group’s investments in renewable energy are in excess of 7.4GW in capacity and cover solar, offshore and onshore wind, waste to energy and biomass.

In 2016 Lloyds Bank played a key part in financing a major offshore wind farm off the Norfolk coast, with operations in Grimsby. Race Bank will provide enough energy to power 400,000 homes with a potential capacity of 573MW. It is anticipated the project, when in operation, will create more than 100 jobs associated with buildingimported heat, steam or imported cooling and maintaining turbines for the Humber region.is not aware of any other material sources of omissions from our reporting.

 

PROPERTIES

 

At 31 December 2016,2019, Lloyds Banking Group occupied 2,2211,768 properties in the UK. Of these, 543371 were held as freeholds and 1,6781,397 as leasehold. The majority of these properties are retail branches, widely distributed throughout England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland. Other buildings include the Lloyds Banking Group’s head office in the City of London with other customer service and support centres located to suit business needs but clustered largely in eight core geographic conurbations – London, Edinburgh, Glasgow, Midlands (Birmingham), Northwest (Chester and Manchester), West Yorkshire (Halifax and Leeds), South (Brighton and Andover) and Southwest (Bristol and Cardiff).

 

In addition, there are 155132 properties which are either sub-let or vacant. There are also a number of ATMAutomated Teller Machine (ATM) units situated throughout the UK, the majority of which are held as leasehold. The Group also has business operations elsewhere in the world, primarily holding property on a leasehold basis.

10

BUSINESS

 

LEGAL ACTIONS AND REGULATORY MATTERS

 

During the ordinary course of business the Group is subject to threatened or actual legal proceedings and regulatory reviews and investigations both in the UK and overseas. Set out below is a summary of the more significant matters.

 

PROVISIONS FOR FINANCIAL COMMITMENTS AND GUARANTEES

Provisions are recognised for expected credit losses on undrawn loan commitments and financial guarantees.

PAYMENT PROTECTION INSURANCE (EXCLUDING MBNA)

 

The Group increased the provision for PPI costs by a further £1,350£2,450 million in 2016,the year ended 31 December 2019, bringing the total amount provided to £17,375£21,875 million.

 

The charge in 2019 was largely due to the provisionsignificant increase in 2016 was largely driven by a higher total volume of complaints expected as a result of the Financial Conduct Authority’s (FCA) industry deadline being extendedPPI information requests (PIRs) leading up to the enddeadline for submission of claims on 29 August 2019, and also reflects costs relating to complaints received from the Official Receiver as well as changesadministration costs. An initial review of around 60 per cent of the five million PIRs received in the run-up to the rulesPPI deadline has been undertaken, with the conversion rate remaining low, and guidance that should apply when firms handle PPI complaints in lightconsistent with the provision assumption of around 10 per cent. The Group has reached final agreement with the UK Supreme Court’s decision in Plevin v Paragon Personal Finance Limited [2014] UKSC 61 (Plevin). Final rules and guidance were published by the FCA on 2 March 2017 (PS 17/3).

6

BUSINESSOfficial Receiver.

 

As atAt 31 December 2016,2019, a provision of £2,608£1,578 million remained unutilised relating to complaints and associated administration costs.costs excluding amounts relating to MBNA. Total cash payments were £2,200£2,201 million during the year toended 31 December 2016. Spend continues to reduce following the completion of the re-review of previously handled cases (remediation).

The provision is consistent with total expected reactive complaint volumes of 5.2 million (including complaints falling under the Plevin rules and guidance) in light of the FCA Policy Statement PS 17/3. Weekly complaint levels in the second half of 2016 have been approximately 8,300 versus approximately 8,600 in the first half, and are expected to vary significantly through to the industry deadline, now confirmed to be August 2019.

 

SENSITIVITIES

The Group estimates that it has sold approximately 16 million PPI policies since 2000. These include policies that were not mis-sold and those that have been successfully claimed upon. Since the commencement of the PPI redress programme in 2011 the Group estimates that it has contacted, settled or provided for approximately 50 per cent of the policies sold since 2000.

Sensitivities

The total amount provided for PPI represents the Group’s best estimate of the likely future cost. However aA number of risks and uncertainties remain in particular with respect to future volumes.including processing the remaining PIRs and outstanding complaints. The cost could differ from the Group’s estimates and the assumptions underpinning them, and could result in a further provision being required. There is significant uncertainty aroundThese may also be impacted by any further regulatory changes and potential additional remediation arising from the impactcontinuous improvement of the regulatory changes, FCA media campaign and Claims Management Companies and customer activity.Group’s operational practices.

 

Key metrics and sensitivities are highlightedFor every one per cent increase in PIR conversion rate on the table below:

  Actuals Anticipated  
Sensitivities (exclude claims where no PPI policy was held) to date future3 Sensitivity3
Customer initiated complaints since origination (m)1 3.9 1.3 0.1 = £190m
Average uphold rate per policy2 74% 89% 1% = £35m
Average redress per upheld policy2 £1,700 £1,250 £100 = £150m
Administrative expenses (£m) 3,190 490 1 case = £375

1Sensitivity includes complaint handling costs.
2Actuals to date are based on the last six months to 31 December 2016.
3Anticipated future and sensitivities are impacted by a proportion of complaints and re-complaints falling under thePlevinrules and guidance in light of the FCA Policy Statement PS 17/3.

PACKAGED BANK ACCOUNTSstock as at the industry deadline, the Group would expect an additional charge of approximately £100 million.

 

InPAYMENT PROTECTION INSURANCE (MBNA)

MBNA increased its PPI provision by £367 million in the year ended 31 December 20162019 but the Group’s exposure continues to remain capped at £240 million under the terms of the sale and purchase agreement.

OTHER PROVISIONS FOR LEGAL ACTIONS AND REGULATORY MATTERS

In the course of its business, the Group is engaged in discussions with the PRA, FCA and other UK and overseas regulators and other governmental authorities on a range of matters. The Group also receives complaints in connection with its past conduct and claims brought by or on behalf of current and former employees, customers, investors and other third parties and is subject to legal proceedings and other legal actions. Where significant, provisions are held against the costs expected to be incurred in relation to these matters and matters arising from related internal reviews. During the year ended 31 December 2019 the Group charged a further £445 million in respect of legal actions and other regulatory matters, and the unutilised balance at 31 December 2019 was £528 million (31 December 2018: £861 million). The most significant items are as follows.

Arrears handling related activities

The Group has provided an additional £280£188 million in the year ended 31 December 2019 for the costs of identifying and rectifying certain arrears management fees and activities, taking the total provided to date to £981 million. The Group has put in place a number of actions to improve its handling of customers in these areas and has made good progress in reimbursing arrears fees to impacted customers.

Packaged bank accounts

The Group had provided a total of £795 million up to 31 December 2018 in respect of complaints relating to alleged mis-selling of packaged bank accounts, raisingwith no further amounts provided during the total amount provided to £505 million. As atyear ended 31 December 2016, £215 million of the provision remained unutilised. The total amount provided represents the Group’s best estimate of the likely future cost, however a2019. A number of risks and uncertainties remain, in particularparticularly with respect to future volumes.

 

ARREARS HANDLING RELATED ACTIVITIES

Following a review of the Group’s secured and unsecured arrears handling activities, the Group has putCustomer claims in place a number of actionsrelation to further improve its handling of customersinsurance branch business in these areas. As a result, the Group has provided an additional £261 million in the year ended 31 December 2016 (bringing the total provision to £397 million), for the costs of identifying and rectifying certain arrears management fees and activities. As at 31 December 2016, the unutilised provision was £383 million (31 December 2015: £136 million).

CUSTOMER CLAIMS IN RELATION TO INSURANCE BRANCH BUSINESS IN GERMANY

Germany

The Group continues to receive claims in Germany from customers relating to policies issued by Clerical Medical Investment Group Limited (subsequently renamed Scottish Widows Limited)., with smaller numbers received from customers in Austria and Italy. The German industry-wide issue regarding notification of contractual ‘cooling off’ periods has continued to lead to an increasing number of claims in 2016. Accordingly a provision increase of £94 million was recognised in the year ended2016 and 2017. Whilst complaint volumes have declined, new litigation claim volumes per month have remained fairly constant throughout 2019. Up to 31 December 2016 giving2019 the Group had provided a total provision of £639 million; the remaining unutilised provision as at 31 December 2016 is £168 million (31 December 2015: £124 million).£656 million. The validity of the claims facing the Group depends upon the facts and circumstances in respect of each claim. As a result, the ultimate financial effect, which could be significantly different from the current provision, will be known only once all relevant claims have been resolved.

 

PROVISIONS FOR OTHER LEGAL ACTIONS AND REGULATORY MATTERSHBOS Reading – review

The Group has now completed its compensation assessment for all 71 business customers within the customer review, with more than 98 per cent of these offers to individuals accepted. In total, more than £100 million in compensation has been offered to victims of the HBOS Reading fraud prior to the publication of Sir Ross Cranston’s independent quality assurance review of the customer review, of which £94 million has so far been accepted, in addition to £9 million for ex-gratia payments and £6 million for the re-imbursements of legal fees. Sir Ross’s review was concluded on 10 December 2019 and made a number of recommendations, including a re-assessment of direct and consequential losses by an independent panel. The Group has committed to implementing Sir Ross’s recommendations in full. In addition, further ex gratia payments of £35,000 have been made to 200 individuals in recognition of the additional delay which will be caused whilst the Group takes further steps to implement Sir Ross’s recommendations. It is not possible to estimate at this stage what the financial impact will be.

 

InHBOS Reading – FCA investigation

The FCA’s investigation into the courseevents surrounding the discovery of its business,misconduct within the Reading-based Impaired Assets team of HBOS has concluded. The Group is engaged in discussionshas settled the matter with the PRA, FCA and other UK and overseas regulators and other governmental authorities onpaid a rangefine of matters. The Group also receives complaints and claims from customers in connection with its past conduct and, where significant, provisions are held against£45.5 million, as per the costs expected to be incurred as a result of the conclusions reached. In the year ended 31 December 2016, the Group charged an additional £450 million in respect of matters across all divisions. At 31 December 2016, the Group held unutilised provisions totalling £573 million for these other legal actions and regulatory matters.FCA’s final notice dated 21 June 2019.

11

BUSINESS

 

INTERCHANGE FEES

 

With respect to multi-lateral interchange fees (MIFs), the Group is not directly involved in the ongoing investigations and litigation (as described below) which involveinvolves card schemes such as Visa and MasterCard.Mastercard. However, the Group is a membermember/licensee of Visa and MasterCardMastercard and other card schemes. The litigation in question is as follows:

 

The European Commission continues to pursue certain competition investigations into MasterCardlitigation brought by retailers against both Visa and Visa probing, amongst other things, MIFs paid in respect of cards issued outside the EEA;
LitigationMastercard continues in the English Courts against both Visa(and includes appeals heard by the Supreme Court, judgment awaited); and MasterCard. This litigation has been brought by several retailers who are seeking damages for allegedly ‘overpaid’ MIFs. From publicly available information, it is understood these damages claims are running to different timescales with respect to the litigation process. It is also possible that new claims may be issued.

Any ultimate impactlitigation brought on behalf of UK consumers in the Group of the above investigations and the litigationEnglish Courts against Visa and MasterCard remains uncertain at this time.Mastercard.
7

BUSINESS

 

Any impact on the Group of the litigation against Visa and Mastercard remains uncertain at this time. Insofar as Visa is required to pay damages to retailers for interchange fees set prior to June 2016, contractual arrangements to allocate liability have been agreed between various UK banks (including the Group) and Visa Inc, completed itsas part of Visa Inc’s acquisition of Visa Europe on 21 Junein 2016. The Group’s share ofThese arrangements cap the sale proceeds comprised cash consideration of approximately £330 million (of which approximately £300 million was received on completion of the sale and £30 million is deferred for three years) and preferred stock, which the Group measures at fair value. The preferred stock is convertible into Class A Common Stock of Visa Inc or its equivalent upon the occurrence of certain events. As part of this transaction, the Group and certain other UK banks also entered into a Loss Sharing Agreement (LSA) with Visa Inc, which clarifies the allocation of liabilities between the parties should the litigation referred to above result in Visa Inc being liable for damages payable by Visa Europe. The maximum amount of liability to which the Group may be subject, under the LSAand this cap is cappedset at the cash consideration which was received by the Group at completion.for the sale of its stake in Visa Europe to Visa Inc may also have recourse to a general indemnity, currently in place under Visa Europe’s Operating Regulations, for damages claims concerning inter or intra-regional MIF setting activities.2016.

 

LIBOR AND OTHER TRADING RATES

 

In July 2014, the Group announced that it had reached settlements totalling £217 million (at 30 June 2014 exchange rates) to resolve with UK and US federal authorities legacy issues regarding the manipulation several years ago of Group companies’ submissions to the British Bankers’ Association (BBA) London Interbank Offered Rate (LIBOR) and Sterling Repo Rate. The Swiss Competition Commission concluded its investigation against Lloyds Bank plc in June 2019. The Group continues to cooperate with various other government and regulatory authorities, including the Serious Fraud Office, the Swiss Competition Commission, and a number of US State Attorneys General, in conjunction with their investigations into submissions made by panel members to the bodies that set LIBOR and various other interbank offered rates.

 

Certain Group companies, together with other panel banks, have also been named as defendants in private lawsuits, including purported class action suits, in the US in connection with their roles as panel banks contributing to the setting of US Dollar, Japanese Yen and Sterling LIBOR and the Australian BBSW Reference Rate. The lawsuits, which contain broadly similar allegations, allege violations of the Sherman Antitrust Act, the Racketeer Influenced and Corrupt Organizations Act and the Commodity Exchange Act, as well as various state statutes and common law doctrines. Certain of the plaintiffs’ claims including those asserted under US anti-trust laws, werehave been dismissed by the US Federal Court for Southern District of New York (the District Court). In November 2015 OTC and exchange-based plaintiffs’ claims against the Group were dismissed for lack of personal jurisdiction. On 20 December 2016, the Federal Court for Southern District of New York dismissed all antitrust class action claims against LBG and its affiliates in the Multi District Litigation arising from the alleged manipulation of USD LIBOR. Further appeals in relation(subject to the anti-trust claims remain possible.appeals).

 

Certain Group companies are also named as defendants in (i) UK based claimsclaims; and (ii) two Dutch class actions, raising LIBOR manipulation allegationsallegations. A number of the claims against the Group in connection withrelation to the alleged mis-sale of interest rate hedging products.products also include allegations of LIBOR manipulation.

 

It is currently not possible to predict the scope and ultimate outcome on the Group of the various outstanding regulatory investigations not encompassed by the settlements, any private lawsuits or any related challenges to the interpretation or validity of any of the Group’s contractual arrangements, including their timing and scale.

 

UK SHAREHOLDER LITIGATION

 

In August 2014, the Group and a number of former directors were named as defendants in a claim filed in the English High Court by a number of claimants who held shares in Lloyds TSB Group plc (LTSB) prior to the acquisition of HBOS plc, alleging breaches of duties in relation to information provided to shareholders in connection with the acquisition and the recapitalisation of LTSB. Judgment was delivered on 15 November 2019. The Group and former directors successfully defended the claims. The claimants have sought permission to appeal. It is currently not possible to determine the ultimate impact on the Group (if any), but the Group intends to defend the claim vigorously.

FINANCIAL SERVICES COMPENSATION SCHEME

The Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS) is the UK’s independent statutory compensation fund of last resort for customers of authorised financial services firms and pays compensation if a firm is unable or likely to be unable to pay claims against it. The FSCS is funded by levies on the authorised financial services industry. Each deposit-taking institution contributes towards the FSCS levies in proportion to their share of total protected deposits on 31 December of the year preceding the scheme year, which runs from 1 April to 31 March.

Following the default of a number of deposit takers in 2008, the FSCS borrowed funds from HM Treasury to meet the compensation costs for customers of those firms. At 31 March 2016, the end of the latest FSCS scheme year for which it has published accounts, the principal balance outstanding on these loans was £15,655 million (31 March 2015: £15,797 million). Although it is anticipated that the substantial majority of this loan will be repaid from funds the FSCS receives from asset sales, surplus cash flow or other recoveries in relation to the assets of the firms that defaulted, any shortfall will be funded by deposit-taking participants of the FSCS. The amount of future levies payable by the Group depends on a number of factors including the amounts recovered by the FSCS from asset sales, the Group’s participation in the deposit-taking market at 31 December, the level of protected deposits and the population of deposit-taking participants.

 

TAX AUTHORITIES

 

The Group provides for potential tax liabilities that may arise on the basis of the amounts expected to be paid to tax authorities including open matters where Her Majesty’s Revenue and Customs (HMRC) adopt a different interpretation and application of tax law. The Group has an open matter in relation to a claim for group relief of losses incurred in its former Irish banking subsidiary, which ceased trading on 31 December 2010. In 2013 HMRC informed the Group that their interpretation of the UK rules permittingwhich allow the offset of such losses denies the claim; ifclaim for group relief of losses. If HMRC’s position is found to be correct, management estimate that this would result in an increase in current tax liabilities of approximately £600£800 million (including interest) and a reduction in the Group’s deferred tax asset of approximately £400£250 million. The Group does not agree with HMRC’s position and, having taken appropriate advice, does not consider that this is a case where additional tax will ultimately fall due. There are a number of other open matters on which the Group is in discussion with HMRC (including the tax treatment of certain costs arising from the divestment of TSB Banking Group plc);, none of thesewhich is expected to have a material impact on the financial position of the Group.

 

RESIDENTIAL MORTGAGE REPOSSESSIONS

In August 2014, the Northern Ireland High Court handed down judgment in favour of the borrowers in relation to three residential mortgage test cases concerning certain aspects of the Group’s practice with respect to the recalculation of contractual monthly instalments of customers in arrears. The FCA is actively engaged with the industry in relation to these considerations. The Group will respond as appropriate to this and any investigations, proceedings, or regulatory action that may in due course be instigated as a result of these issues. The FCA has issued a consultation on new guidance on the treatment of customers with mortgage payment shortfalls. The guidance covers remediation for mortgage customers who may have been affected by the way firms calculate these customers’ monthly mortgage instalments. The output from this consultation is expected in the first quarter of 2017.

8

BUSINESS

UPDATE TO THE FINANCIAL CONDUCT AUTHORITY’S ANNOUNCEMENT IN NOVEMBER 2015 ON A DEADLINE FOR PPI COMPLAINTS AND PLEVIN V PARAGON PERSONAL FINANCE LIMITED

On 2 August 2016, the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) published a further consultation paper (CP16/20: Rules and guidance on payment protection insurance complaints: feedback on CP15/39 and further consultation), following on from the original consultation published in November 2015. The consultation papers proposed the introduction of a two year industry deadline by which consumers would need to make their PPI complaints and rules and guidance that should apply when firms handle PPI complaints in light of the UK Supreme Court’s decision in Plevin v Paragon Personal Finance Limited [2014] UKSC 61. On 2 March 2017 the FCA confirmed that the deadline would be 29 August 2019, and new rules for Plevin would come into force in August 2017.

MORTGAGE ARREARS HANDLING ACTIVITIES – FCA INVESTIGATION

 

On 26 May 2016, the Group was informed that an enforcement team at the FCA had commenced an investigation in connection with the Group’s mortgage arrears handling activities. This investigationIt is ongoing and it isnot currently not possible to make a reliable assessment of theany liability if any, that may resultresulting from the investigation.

HBOS READING – CUSTOMER REVIEW

The Group is commencing a review into a number of customer cases from the former HBOS Impaired Assets Office based in Reading. This review follows the conclusion of a criminal trial in which a number of individuals,investigation including two former HBOS employees, were convicted of conspiracy to corrupt, fraudulent trading and associated money laundering offences which occurred prior to the acquisition of HBOS by the Group in 2009. The review is at an early stage and it is currently not possible to determine the ultimateany financial impact on the Group.penalty.

 

CONTINGENT LIABILITIES IN RESPECT OFRELATING TO OTHER LEGAL ACTIONS AND REGULATORY MATTERS

 

In addition, during the ordinary course of business the Group is subject to other complaints and threatened or actual legal proceedings (including class or group action claims) brought by or on behalf of current or former employees, customers, investors or other third parties, as well as legal and regulatory reviews, challenges, investigations and enforcement actions, both in the UK and overseas. All such material matters are periodically reassessed, with the assistance of external professional advisers where appropriate, to determine the likelihood of the Group incurring a liability. In those instances where it is concluded that it is more likely than not that a payment will be made, a provision is established to management’s best estimate of the amount required at the relevant balance sheet date. In some cases it will not be possible to form a view, for example because the facts are unclear or because further time is needed properly to assess the merits of the case, and no provisions are held in relation to such matters. In these circumstances, specific disclosure in relation to a contingent liability will be made where material. However the Group does not currently expect the final outcome of any such case to have a material adverse effect on its financial position, operations or cash flows.

12

BUSINESS

 

COMPETITIVE ENVIRONMENT

 

The Group provides financial services to individual and business customers, predominantly in the UK but also overseas. The main business activities of the Group are retail and commercial banking and corporatelong-term savings, protection and investment.

MARKET DYNAMICS

The Group continues to operate in an increasingly competitive environment, driven by regulatory changes, shifting customer behaviours and increasing levels of innovation across the sector.

Across the Group’s traditional business lines, ring-fencing regulation has seen a number of competitors deploy excess liquidity to support asset growth within the UK, specifically within mortgages where customer rates have in the last few years hit record lows. While this is beneficial for customers, this has depressed margins across the UK banking general insurance,sector and life, pensionsmore recently has resulted in some smaller participants stepping back from the market.

Beyond this, digital-only providers have grown their share of the UK market within the past year. This growth has predominantly been driven by neo-banks that provide a more traditional customer offering alongside leading digital functionality and investment provision.are able to target selected customer segments. This is supported by the emergence of marketplace models which enable these providers to collaborate with more specialist fintechs to provide a broader suite of products and financial services, both for personal and business banking customers.

 

In response, a number of traditional competitors have attempted to replicate the retail bankingsuccess of neo-banks by developing their own digital-only offerings, often under separate and newly created brand names. A number of international peers have also entered the UK market through digital only challengers, taking advantage of the supportive regulatory environment and increasing similarity in customer behaviours across multiple geographies.

Elsewhere, The Group has also started to see the first signs of large technology companies participating in financial services, often partnering with local incumbent banks across different geographies. While the scale of their future ambitions is uncertain at this stage, the power of their brand and large customer bases pose future disruption threats.

THE GROUP’S RESPONSE

The Group continues to respond effectively to the increasingly competitive environment, supported by its significant reach and proven track record of providing products and services that its customers value with this underpinned by significant investment capacity.

Across its core markets such as mortgages, the Group looked to prioritise value while maintaining share and supporting its purpose of Helping Britain Prosper. As marginal players have withdrawn from the market, the Group competeshas more recently strengthened its position, including through the acquisition of Tesco Bank’s mortgage portfolio in September. Alongside this, the Group has also continued to invest in areas where it is under-represented, such as Insurance and Commercial Banking, in line with banksthe commitments outlined at the start of this strategic plan.

In response to changes to the competitive environment from the ongoing shift in digital usage and building societies, major retailersnew entrants, the Group’s multi-channel and internet-only providers. Inmulti-brand offering enables it to continue to effectively meet the mortgage market, competitors includevarying needs of its diverse customer base. The Group’s digital channel is now its most prominent, with 75 per cent of products now originated digitally and we operates the traditional banks and building societies and specialist mortgage providers. The Group competes with both UK and foreign financial institutions along with emerging forms of lending in the commercial banking markets and with bancassurance, life assurance and general insurance companieslargest digital bank in the UK insurance market.with 16.4 million customers and 10.7 million mobile app customers, while its customer satisfaction scores remain strong.

 

The markets for UK financial services, and the other markets within whichIn addition, the Group operates, areremains committed to retaining the largest branch network in the UK. This allows its customers to interact with the Group in whichever way they prefer, while also providing a human touch point for more complex financial needs. The Group’s network is also key to building and deepening its business banking relationships. The Group sees these as unique competitive advantages, and management expects such competitioncombined with its ongoing commitment to continue or intensify in responseinnovation, provide the Group with a strong platform to competitor behaviour, including non-traditional competitors, consumer demand, technological changes such as the growth of digital banking,maintain relevance and the impact of regulatory actions and other factors.deepen relationships with its customer base.

 

Link to principal risks

Regulatory and legal
Conduct
Operational
People

Link to strategic priorities

Delivering a leading customer experience
Maximising Group capabilities

For more information see “See Risk Factors – Business and Economic Riskseconomic risks – The Group’s businesses are conducted in competitive environments, with increased competition scrutiny, and the Group’s financial performance depends upon management’s ability to respond effectively to competitive pressures.

See Regulation – Competition Regulation.

RECENT DEVELOPMENTS

CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS SET OUT IN THE GROUP’S ANNUAL REPORT AND ACCOUNTS

The audited consolidated financial statements set forth in the Group’s Annual Reportpressures and Accounts published on 22 February 2017 were approved on 21 February 2017. As discussed in notes 38 and 55 of the audited consolidated financial statements included in this Annual Report on Form 20-F (which were approved on 10 March 2017 and which therefore include the impact of adjusting post balance sheet events up to this date), on 2 March 2017 the FCA confirmed that the deadline by which consumers will need to make their PPI complaints will be 29 August 2019 and that the final rules and guidance that should apply when firms handle PPI complaints in light of Plevin will come into force in August 2017. The Group has reassessed its provisioning in light of this guidance, leading to an additional charge of £350 million, bringing the total charge for the year ended 31 December 2016 to £1,350 million.

scrutiny.

913

This page is intentionally blank

14

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTSoperating and financial reView and prospects

 

The results discussed below are not necessarily indicative of Lloyds Banking Group’s results in future periods. The following information contains certain forward looking statements. For a discussion of certain cautionary statements relating to forward looking statements, seeForward looking statements.

 

The following discussion is based on and should be read in conjunction with the consolidated financial statements and the related notes thereto included elsewhere in this annual report. For a discussion of the accounting policies used in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements, seeAccounting policiesin note 2 to the financial statements.

 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

Overview and trend information1116
Critical accounting policies1216
Future accounting developments1216
Results of operations – 2016, 20152019 and 201420181317
Line of businessDivisional information24
Divisional results27
Average balance sheet and net interest income3531
Changes in net interest income – volume and rate analysis3733
Risk overview3834
Risk management4441
Risk governanceChange and execution risk50
Data risk 50
Operational resilience risk 50
Strategic risk 51
Credit risk5352
Loan portfolio7569
Risk elements in the loan portfolio73
Regulatory and legal risk81
Conduct risk8682
Market risk87
Operational risk9382
People risk84
Insurance underwriting risk84
Capital risk85
Funding and liquidity risk9594
CapitalGovernance risk101
Regulatory and legalMarket risk108102
InsuranceModel risk109
People risk110
Financial reporting risk111
Governance risk111108
1015

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTSoperating and financial reView and prospects

 

OVERVIEW AND TREND INFORMATION

 

MARKET OVERVIEWECONOMY

 

GIVEN THE GROUP’S UK FOCUS, ITS FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE IS INEXTRICABLY LINKED TO THE PERFORMANCE OF THE UK ECONOMY AND ITS REGULATORY AND COMPETITIVE ENVIRONMENTHighlights

Given our focus on UK customers, the Group’s prospects are closely linked to the fortunes of the UK economy.
On the assumption that the global economy remains broadly stable, we would expect the UK economy to grow in 2020 to 2022 at a pace slightly above that achieved in the past two years.
Our low risk business model and focus on efficiency positions us well irrespective of macro conditions. Nevertheless, if the economy was to be impacted significantly by crystallisation of either domestic or international risks, Group financial performance would be impacted.

Overview

 

ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENTAs a leading UK bank, our prospects are closely aligned to the outlook for the UK economy. Through 2019, the economy continued to show resilience to twin challenges from a slowing global economy and increasing domestic political uncertainty. Although growth of the UK economy has slowed to its weakest since the financial crisis a decade ago, and interest rates remain very low, unemployment has fallen further to a 44 year low and house prices have continued to grow. Barring any sudden shocks to business or consumer confidence, growth is expected to rise mildly in 2020, but international trade-protectionism, the current coronavirus outbreak in China, geo-political instability and the nature of the UK’s exit from the EU, all present risks to that outlook.

 

RESILIENT UK ECONOMY POST REFERENDUMMarket dynamics

 

During 20162019, there have been divergent trends between UK businesses and households. For businesses, uncertainty for the domestic political and economic outlook translated into a second consecutive year of reduced investment spending and commercial real estate prices fell slightly. Low productivity growth remains a key challenge for the UK economy, performed broadlyhowever, the flip-side has been buoyant employment. Households continued to increase spending in line2019 as low unemployment boosted pay growth whilst softening global growth reduced inflation.

The UK housing market remained subdued through much of 2019, although falling mortgage rates and the election of a government with a strong Parliamentary majority appeared to be beginning to stimulate the market expectations attowards the startend of the year despiteyear. The level of housing transactions was broadly flat at around 20 per cent lower than the decisionnorm prior to leave2008, with muted price growth.

The economic outlook appears to be improving. Nevertheless, in a long-term context growth is expected to remain subdued and interest rates low - core to that is the European Unionlow rate of productivity growth, with the recent weakness of businesses’ investment spending suggesting a significant improvement is unlikely near-term. Uncertainty for some UK companies may persist in 2020 and significant changesdrag on investment as the UK attempts to negotiate a comprehensive trade deal with the EU to a tight timescale. However, improved pay growth is likely to support households’ spending, and the likely fiscal stimulus is expected to provide some boost to the economy.

The fundamental drivers behind the subdued trends in the political landscape, bothhousing market are expected to remain in place - the UKhigh level of prices relative to incomes that constrains first-time-buyer demand, and abroad.expectations that interest rates could rise from their current low level.

 

Although post referendum most forecasters were predictingThere are, of course, significant risks to this outlook. The growth-cycle in both of the world’s largest economies - US and China - is in its mature stage, and the coronavirus outbreak and ongoing trade war could complicate the task of policymakers in guiding growth towards a reductionstable and sustainable level. Conversely, high asset prices and corporate debt levels in some countries could be vulnerabilities if an improvement in global economic growth and a resulting rise in practice growth has been resilient andinterest rates causes unexpected shifts in currencies or herd behaviour in financial markets as shareholders change their appetite between different types of investments. Domestically, the future trading relationship with the EU remains uncertain, as does businesses’ response to that uncertainty.

Barring sudden shocks stemming from these challenges, the UK economy is estimatedexpected to have grown by 2grow through 2020 to 2022 at around 1.5 per cent, in 2016, just shy of 2.2slightly above the 1.4 per cent in 2015. Business and consumer confidence did fall immediately post referendum, but most of this has now been recovered and consumers’ retail spending growth actually accelerated inaverage across the months after the referendum.

Manufacturers are expecting exports to benefit from the weaker pound, but confidence in the service sector has weakened. Towards the end of 2016 inflation startedpast two years. The unemployment rate is expected to rise only a little from its current 44 year low. The outlook for the bank rate is uncertain, but capacity constraints and is likely to become a bigger headwind to consumers’ spending growth through the coming year.

UK house prices increased by around 7 per cent during the year, largely driven by strong growth in the first quarter. Prices have continued to increase, albeit at slower rates, during the rest of the year in almost all geographic areas, although the most expensive parts of London have seen some reductions over the last six months.

GROWTH IN THE GROUP’S MARKETS

Household and business deleveraging since 2009 has created capacity for an increased pace of borrowing and the markets in which the Group operates continued to grow in 2016. Specifically:

Mortgage market growth increased to 3 per cent, from 2.7 per cent in 2015, the strongest since 2007, and although buy-to-let growth was impacted by the change in stamp duty policy in April, it still grew significantly faster than the market as a whole
Unsecured consumer credit growth rose to 8 per cent led by motor finance. Although the strongest growth since before the financial crisis, the level of unsecured debt remains close to a 20 year low relative to households’ income

Business borrowing from banks increased by 2 per cent, the first growth since 2008, and SMEs by 2 per cent also
Household deposit growth rose to 6 per cent, the strongest since 2008
Business deposit growth weakened, to 6 per cent, but remains strong after three years of elevated growth and a very high level of liquidity

INTEREST RATES LOW FOR LONGER

Interest rates remain at historical lows with the base rate having been cut to 0.25 per cent in August, and are expected to remain low in the foreseeable future. Market rates currently imply an increase to the base rate to 0.5 per cent during 2018, and to 0.75 per centfiscal boost may support a year later. This flattening of the yield curve along with continued competition has meant bank margins remain under pressure. Significant competition has meant lending rates across the market remain low, particularly in mortgages, although deposit rates have fallen further during the year, offsetting the impact of lower lending rates.

IMPAIRMENT EXPECTED TO REMAIN BENIGN

Improving indebtedness, along with the continued low interest rate environment, is continuing to keep impairment levels low and they remain below through-the-cycle levels.

The expected mild rise in unemployment is likely to lead to anmoderate increase in impairment from the very low level of 2016, but it should remain low over the longer term.

11

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

OUTLOOK FOR 2017

How the economy evolves in 2017 is highly dependent on the type of EU-exit deal that companies expect to be achieved in 2019, how deeply that impacts investment and employment plans, and how much squeezed consumer spending power is offset by improved competitiveness of exports following the fall in sterling. Each of these carries a high degree of uncertainty.

The UK economic environment will also continue to be impacted by global uncertainties including the slowdown in China, European elections and the global trade environment, particularly in light of the recent US presidential election.

The consensus expectation is that UK GDP growth will slow from 2 per cent in 2016 to 1.6 per cent in 2017, and unemployment will remain low, but will rise from 4.9 per cent at the end of 2016 to 5.2 per cent at the end of 2017.interest rates. House prices are expected to continue to rise, by around 3 per cent, supported by the ongoing shortage of property for sale, low levels of housebuilding and exceptionally low interest rates, while commercial real estate prices are expected to fall by 4 per cent.grow mildly.

 

If the economy evolves in line with this consensus view, the Group would expect growth across its markets to remainThis picture of subdued but broadly stable in aggregate, withgrowth is likely to be reflected across our markets. Consumer credit growth has slowed significantly over the past couple of years after a mild weakening inprior period of strong growth, but we expect that the growth of unsecured consumer credit and commercial real estate lending offset by a marginal rise in mortgages and other lending to businesses.slowdown has now run its course.

 

Our response

Given our UK focus, the Group’s prospects are closely linked to the performance of the UK economy. Our low risk, stable business model and focus on efficiency positions us well to continue to support customers irrespective of macro conditions.

CRITICAL ACCOUNTING POLICIES

 

The preparation of financial statements requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect amounts reported therein. Due to the inherent uncertainty involved in making estimates, actual results reported in future periods may be based upon amounts which differ from those estimates.

 

The accounting policies that are deemed critical to the Group’s results and financial position, based upon materiality and significant judgements and estimates, are set out in note 3 to the financial statements.

 

FUTURE ACCOUNTING DEVELOPMENTS

 

Future developments in relation to the Group’s IFRS reporting are discussed in note 56 to the financial statements.

1216

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTSoperating and financial reView and prospects

 

RESULTS OF OPERATIONS – 2016, 20152019 AND 20142018

 

SUMMARY

 

 2016  2015 2014 
 £m  £m  £m  2019
£m
  20181
£m
 
Net interest income  9,274   11,318   10,660   10,180   13,396 
Other income  30,337   11,832   19,232   32,176   8,695 
Total income  39,611   23,150   29,892   42,356   22,091 
Insurance claims  (22,344)  (5,729)  (13,493)  (23,997)  (3,465)
Total income, net of insurance claims  17,267   17,421   16,399   18,359   18,626 
Operating expenses  (12,627)  (15,387)  (13,885)  (12,670)  (11,729)
Trading surplus  4,640   2,034   2,514   5,689   6,897 
Impairment  (752)  (390)  (752)  (1,296)  (937)
Profit before tax  3,888   1,644   1,762   4,393   5,960 
Taxation  (1,724)  (688)  (263)
Tax expense  (1,387)  (1,454)
Profit for the year  2,164   956   1,499   3,006   4,506 
                    
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders  1,651   466   1,125   2,459   3,975 
Profit attributable to other equity holders1  412   394   287   466   433 
Profit attributable to equity holders  2,063   860   1,412   2,925   4,408 
Profit attributable to non-controlling interests  101   96   87   81   98 
Profit for the year  2,164   956   1,499   3,006   4,506 

 

1Restated to reflect amendments to IAS 12, see note 1 on page F-13. The impact on the year ended 31 December 2018 was an increase in profit afterfor the year of £106 million and on the year ended 31 December 2017 was an increase in profit for the year of £102 million; there was no impact on profit before tax, attributable to othertotal shareholder’s equity holders of £412 million (2015: £394 million; 2014: £287 million) is partly offsetor on earnings per share in reserves by a tax credit attributable to ordinary shareholders of £91 million (2015: £80 million; 2014: £62 million).either year.

2016 COMPARED WITH 2015

 

During the year ended 31 December 2016,2019, the Group recorded a profit before tax of £3,888£4,393 million, a decrease of £1,567 million, or 26 per cent, compared with a profit before tax in 20152018 of £1,644 million. The result in 2016 included provisions in respect of redress to customers (together with the related administrative costs) associated with both past sales of Payment Protection Insurance and other matters of £2,435 million (of which £2,374 million is charged within operating expenses and £61 million against income) compared to a charge of £4,837 million in the year ended 31 December 2015. Excluding these charges from both years, profit before tax was £158 million, or 2 per cent, lower at £6,323 million in the year ended 31 December 2016 compared to £6,481 million in the previous year. The comparison of results for 2016 to 2015 is also impacted by the sale of TSB Banking Group plc (TSB), which ceased to be consolidated in March 2015, with the sale of the Group’s remaining holding becoming unconditional on 30 June 2015. The Group recognised a net loss of £660 million in 2015, relating to both the disposal of its shareholding and commitments under agreements entered into with TSB. After taking this item into account there has been a reduction in profit before tax of £818£5,960 million.

 

Total income, increasednet of insurance claims, decreased by £16,461£267 million, or 711 per cent, to £39,611£18,359 million in 20162019 compared with £23,150£18,626 million in 2015,2018, comprising an £18,505a £2,949 million increase in other income, partlynet of insurance claims, more than offset by a decrease of £2,044£3,216 million in net interest income.

 

Net interest income was £9,274£10,180 million in 2016;2019; a decrease of £2,044£3,216 million, or 1824 per cent compared to £11,318£13,396 million in 2015.2018. There was a negative impact of £1,813 million in 2016 from ansignificant increase in the amounts payable to unit holders in those Open-Ended Investment Companies (OEICs) included in the consolidated results of the Group reflecting different levelsto £1,822 million in 2019 from a credit of investment£844 million in 2018. This increase reflects positive market movements in the year, with both equity and debt investments generating significant gains over 2019 compared to negative returns on the assets held by the OEICs; theduring 2018. The change in population of consolidated OEICs in 20162019 compared to 20152018 did not have a significant impact. After adjusting for this, net interest income was £231£550 million, or 24 per cent lower, of which £592 million related to TSB which was sold in 2015.lower. Average interest-earning assets fellincreased by £14,782 million, or 3 per cent, to £595,003 million in 2019 compared to £580,221 million in 2018 as a result of decreasesincreased holdings of reverse repurchase agreement balances; excluding these balances average interest-earning assets reduced as growth in average UK mortgagetargeted segments has been more than offset by lower balances and in the portfolio of assets which are outside ofclosed mortgage book and the Group’s risk appetite, as well as a reduction of some £5 billion as resultimpact of the sale of TSB,the Irish mortgage portfolio in the first half of 2018. The net interest margin decreased, with the benefit of lower deposit costs, higher Retail current account balances and a benefit from aligning credit card terms, more than offsetting growthoffset by continued pressure on asset margins, particularly in small business and unsecured personal lending. Net interest margin improved, excluding the impact of amounts payable to OEIC unitholders.mortgage market.

 

Other income, net of insurance claims, was £18,505£2,949 million, or 56 per cent, higher at £30,337£8,179 million in 20162019 compared to £11,832£5,230 million in 2015. Fee and commission income was £207 million, or 6 per cent, lower at £3,045 million compared to £3,252 million in 2015. Fee and commission expense decreased by £86 million, or 6 per cent, to £1,356 million compared with £1,442 million in 2015. The decrease in net fee and commission income largely reflects lower levels of current account and credit and debit card fees as well as reduced income from commercial banking activities. Net2018. There were increased gains within trading income increased by £14,831 million to £18,545 million in 2016 compared to £3,714 million in 2015; this increase reflected an improvement of £14,797 million in gains on policyholder investments held withinassets in the insurance business, as a result of market conditionsperformance over 2016 relative to thosethe year, particularly in 2015. Insurance premium incomeequities, but this was £3,276 million, or 68 per cent, higher at £8,068 million in 2016 compared with £4,792 million in 2015; there was an increase of £3,289 million in life insurance premiums and a £13 million decrease in general insurance premiums. Premium income in 2015 had been reducedoffset by a chargehigher level of £1,959 million relating to the recapture by a third party insurer of a portfolio of policies previously reassured with the Group; excluding this item life insurance premium income was £1,330 million, or 23 per cent, higher at £7,210 million in 2016 compared to £5,880 million in 2015, principally reflecting growth in bulk annuity business. Other operating income was £519 million higher at £2,035 million in 2016 compared to £1,516 million in 2015 as a gain of £484 million on sale of the Group’s investment in VISA Europe and an improvement in income from the value of in-force insurance business more than offset a loss on redemption of the Group’s Enhanced Capital Notes.

claims. Insurance claims expense was £16,615£20,532 million higher at £22,344£23,997 million in 20162019 compared to £5,729£3,465 million in 2015.2018. The insurance claims expense in respect of life and pensions business was £16,619£20,580 million higher at £21,978£23,710 million in 20162019 compared to £5,359£3,130 million in 2015; this increase was matched by a similar improvement in net trading income, reflecting the relative performance of policyholder investments.2018. Insurance claims in respect of general insurance business were £4£48 million or 114 per cent, lower at £366£287 million in 20162019 compared to £370£335 million in 2015.2018, reflecting the run off of closed books.

13

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Fee and commission income was £92 million, or 3 per cent, lower at £2,756 million compared to £2,848 million in 2018 as a result of decreases in commercial and private banking and asset management fees, in part due to the transfer of business into the Group’s new wealth management joint venture. Fee and commission expense decreased by £36 million, or 3 per cent, to £1,350 million compared with £1,386 million in 2018. Insurance premium income was £385 million, or 4 per cent, higher at £9,574 million in 2019 compared with £9,189 million in 2018; there was an increase of £413 million in life insurance premiums only partly offset by a £28 million decrease in general insurance premiums. The increase in life insurance premiums reflects higher levels of bulk annuity deals and the impact of completion of the acquisition of the Zurich workplace pensions business. Other operating income was £988 million, or 51 per cent, higher at £2,908 million in 2019 compared to £1,920 million in 2018, due mainly to an improvement in the income from movement in value of in-force insurance business and the gain on establishment of the wealth management joint venture.

 

Operating expenses decreasedincreased by £2,760£941 million, or 188 per cent to £12,627£12,670 million in 20162019 compared with £15,387£11,729 million in 2015; the main reason for the decrease being the £2,4632018 reflecting an increase of £1,545 million reduction in charges for redress payments to customers in respect of PPI and other conduct related matters from £4,837£1,350 million in 20152018 to £2,374£2,895 million in 2016 and a charge of £665 million in 2015 in relation to the disposal of TSB.2019. Excluding these itemscharges from both years, operating expenses were £368 million, or 4 per cent, higher at £10,253 million in 2016 compared to £9,885 million in 2015. Staff costs were £140 million, or 3 per cent, higher at £4,817 million in 2016 compared with £4,677 million in 2015; although annual pay rises have been more than offset by the impact of headcount reductions resulting from the sale of TSB and the Group’s rationalisation programmes, there has been an increase in severance costs in relation to restructuring initiatives. Premises and equipment costs were £43£604 million, or 6 per cent, lower at £672£9,775 million in 20162019 compared to £10,379 million in 2018 as a decrease in restructuring costs was coupled with operating cost savings driven by increased efficiency from digitalisation and process improvements. Staff costs were £511 million, or 11 per cent, lower at £4,251 million in 2019 compared with £715£4,762 million in 2015.2018; as a result of decreased pension charges and redundancy costs. Premises and equipment costs were £238 million lower at £491 million in 2019 compared with £729 million in 2018 following the implementation of IFRS 16. Other expenses excluding the charge relating to the TSB disposal, were £3£110 million, higheror 4 per cent, lower at £2,384£2,373 million in 20162019 compared with £2,381£2,483 million in 2015.2018. Depreciation and amortisation costs were £268£255 million, or 1311 per cent, higher at £2,380£2,660 million in 20162019 compared to £2,112£2,405 million in 2015, in line with increased2018 due to the charge for depreciation of the right-of-use asset balances, particularly following implementation of IFRS 16.

17

operating lease assets and capitalised software.financial reView and prospects

 

Impairment losses increased by £362£359 million, or 9338 per cent, to £752£1,296 million in 20162019 compared with £390£937 million in 2015.2018. Impairment losses in respect of loans and advances to customers were £149£285 million, or 3428 per cent, higher at £592£1,307 million in 20162019 compared with £443£1,022 million in 2015;2018; this reflects a lower level of releases and recoveries rather than a deteriorationincrease is primarily driven by two material corporate cases in quality of the underlying portfolio. There was a credit of £13 millionCommercial Banking, along with some weakening in respect of undrawn commitments in 2016, compared to a credit of £55 million in 2015. In addition there was an impairment charge of £173 million in respect of certain equity investments in the Group’s available-for-sale portfolio.used car prices.

 

In 2016,2019, the Group recorded a tax chargeexpense of £1,724£1,387 million compared to a tax chargeexpense of £688£1,454 million in 2015, an2018. The effective tax rate of 44was 31.6 per cent, compared to the standard UK corporation tax rate of 2019.0 per cent,cent. The higher rate was principally as a result of the banking surcharge, restrictions onincrease in non-deductible conduct provision charges in relation to PPI, partially offset by the deductibilityrelease of conduct provisions and the negative impact on the neta deferred tax asset of both the change in corporation tax rate and the expected utilisation by the life business.liability.

 

Total assets were £11,105£36,295 million, or 5 per cent, higher at £833,893 million at 31 December 2019 compared to £797,598 million at 31 December 2018. Loans and advances to customers increased in the year by £10,130 million to £494,988 million, compared to £484,858 million at 31 December 2018, as a result of a £14,117 million increase in holdings of reverse repurchase agreement balances, as part of a rebalancing of the Group’s liquid asset portfolio. Adjusting for this, loans and advances to customers were £3,987 million, or 1 per cent, lower at £440,388 million compared to £444,375 million at 31 December 2018; an increase of £3,694 million from the acquisition of the Tesco Bank mortgage portfolio and continued growth in targeted segments such as SME and motor finance was more than offset by reductions in the closed mortgage book and in Commercial Banking following a balance sheet optimisation initiative. Financial assets held at fair value through profit or loss increased by £1,660 million overall, holdings within the insurance business increased by £19,952 million as a result of positive market movements on policyholder assets and an increase of £7,350 million on completion of the acquisition of the Zurich workplace pensions and savings business. However, holdings in the banking business were £18,292 million lower as a result of the reduction in trading activities. Property, plant and equipment was £804 million, or 7 per cent, higher at £13,104 million compared to £12,300 million at 31 December 2018; an increase of £1,716 million as a result of the right-of-use asset recognised on transition to IFRS 16, and net additions in the year, have been partly offset by depreciation. Assets arising from reinsurance contracts held increased by £15,707 million, to £23,567 million, compared to £7,860 million at 31 December 2018, largely as a result of an increase of £13,616 million on completion of the acquisition of the Zurich UK workplace pensions and savings business.

Total liabilities were £38,688 million, or 5 per cent, higher at £786,087 million compared to £747,399 million at 31 December 2018. Customer deposits were £3,254 million, or 1 per cent, higher at £817,793£421,320 million at 31 December 20162019 compared to £806,688£418,066 million at 31 December 2015. Cash2018 as a £7,712 million increase in repurchase agreement balances and growth in retail current account balances has been partly offset by lower levels of retail savings products and commercial deposits. Debt securities in issue were £6,521 million higher at central banks were £10,965 million, or 19 per cent, lower at £47,452 million compared to £58,417£97,689 million at 31 December 2015, reflecting fewer opportunities for2019 compared to £91,168 million at 31 December 2018 following new issuances to maintain funding levels. Insurance and investment contract liabilities have increased by £36,181 million, or 32 per cent, from £112,727 million at 31 December 2018 to £148,908 million at 31 December 2019 as a result of £20,981 million arising on acquisition of the favourable placementZurich workplace pensions and savings business together with the impact of fundsnew business inflows and trading and other assetspolicyholder investment gains. Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss were £10,638£9,061 million, or 830 per cent, higherlower at £151,174 million compared to £140,536£21,486 million at 31 December 2015, principally due2019 compared to increases in the long-term insurance and investment funds. Loans and advances to customers were £2,783 million, or 1 per cent, higher at £457,958£30,547 million at 31 December 2016 compared to £455,1752018 following reductions in trading book repurchase agreements, in line with the lower levels of trading activity.

Total equity has decreased by £2,393 million, or 5 per cent, from £50,199 million at 31 December 2015; the continued reduction in the portfolio of assets which are outside of the Group’s risk appetite and lower UK mortgage balances, as the Group concentrates on protecting margin in the current market, were more than offset by an £8,304 million increase in reverse repurchase agreement balances together with growth in SME lending and the UK consumer finance business. Available-for-sale financial assets were £23,492 million, or 71 per cent, higher at £56,524 million compared2018 to £33,032£47,806 million at 31 December 2015; during 2016, the Group reviewed its holding of government securities classified as held-to-maturity (£19,808 million at 31 December 2015) in light of the prevailing low interest rate environment and they have been reclassified as available-for-sale. Total liabilities were £9,620 million, or 1 per cent, higher at £769,328 million at 31 December 2016 compared to £759,708 million at 31 December 2015. Debt securities in issue were £5,742 million, or 7 per cent, lower at £76,314 million compared to £82,056 million at 31 December 2015, reflecting reduced funding requirements; however Insurance and investment contract liabilities were, together, £11,431 million, or 11 per cent, higher at £114,502 million, compared to £103,071 million at 31 December 2015, in line with the increase in investment assets. Subordinated liabilities were £3,481 million or 15 per cent, lower at £19,831 million compared to £23,312 million at 31 December 20152019 as a result of redemptions during the year, includingeffect of the defined benefit pension scheme revaluation and a reduction of £1,095 million as a result of the Group’s Enhanced Capital Notes. Totalshare buyback programme; retained profits were offset by dividends paid and distributions on other equity was £1,485 million, or 3 per cent, higher at £48,465 million at 31 December 2016 compared to £46,980 million at 31 December 2015; this reflected positive revaluation movements in the available-for-sale and cash flow hedging reserves.instruments.

 

The Group has strengthened its capital position, with aGroup’s common equity tier 1 (CET1) capital ratio of 13.4has reduced to 13.6 per cent (31 December 2015: 12.82018: 14.6 per cent), largelyprimarily driven by the Group’s share buyback programme, the interim dividend paid during the year and the accrual for the 2019 full year ordinary dividend and the defined benefit pension scheme remeasurements.

During 2019 the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) reduced the Group’s Pillar 2A CET1 requirement from 2.7 per cent to 2.6 per cent. Separately, the Financial Policy Committee of the Bank of England announced an increase in profits andthe Countercyclical Capital Buffer (CCYB) rate for the UK from 1.0 per cent to 2.0 per cent, effective from December 2020. During 2020 the PRA will consult on a proposed reduction in risk-weighted assets. Pillar 2A total capital requirements by 50 per cent of this increase in the CCYB, equivalent to reducing the Pillar 2A CET1 requirement by 28 per cent of the increase. Taking into account the current and potential future changes to capital requirements, the Board’s view of the ongoing level of CET1 capital required by the Group to grow the business, meet regulatory requirements and cover uncertainties continues to be c.12.5 per cent plus a management buffer of c.1 per cent.

The total capital ratio reduced to 21.221.3 per cent (31compared to 22.9 per cent at 31 December 2015: 21.5 per cent)2018, primarily reflecting managed reductions in Tier 2 loan stock, largely through calls and redemptions, offset by the increasereduction in common equity tier 1 capital and the net reduction in Additional Tier 1 securities, offset in part by the reduction in risk-weighted assets.

 

Risk-weighted assets reduced by £7,399£2,935 million, or 31 per cent, to £215,446£203,431 million, primarily reflecting the optimisation of the Commercial Banking portfolio, offset in part by mortgage model updates, the implementation of IFRS 16 and the acquisition of the Tesco UK prime residential mortgage portfolio.

The UK leverage ratio reduced to 5.1 per cent compared to 5.5 per cent at 31 December 2016 compared to £222,845 million at 31 December 2015, largely relating to active portfolio management, disposals, an improvement in credit quality and capital efficient securitisation activity, partially offset by model updates related to UK mortgage portfolios and foreign exchange movements2018, primarily reflecting the depreciationreduction in Sterling.

The Group’s liquiditythe fully loaded tier 1 capital position, remains good, with liquidity coverage ratio (LCR) eligible assets of £121 billion. LCR eligible assets represent over 8 timesoffset in part by a reduction in the Group’s money-market funding with a maturity of less than one year and were in excess of total wholesale funding at 31 December 2016. The Group’s LCR ratio continues to exceed regulatory requirements.exposure measure.

 

The Group has recommended a final ordinary dividend of 1.702.25 pence per share together with a capital distribution in the form of a special dividend of 0.5(2018: 2.14 pence per share.share). This is in addition to the interim ordinary dividend of 0.851.12 pence per share (2018: 1.07 pence per share) that was paid in September 2016.

2019. The total ordinary dividend per share for 20162019 of 2.553.37 pence per share has increased by 135 per cent, from 2.253.21 pence in 2015 and is in line with the Group’s progressive and sustainable ordinary dividend policy. The Group continues to expect ordinary dividends to increase over the medium term with a dividend payout ratio of at least 50 per cent of sustainable earnings.

2015 COMPARED WITH 2014

During the year ended 31 December 2015, the Group recorded a profit before tax of £1,644 million compared with a profit before tax in 2014 of £1,762 million. The result in 2015 included provisions in respect of redress to customers relating to both past sales of Payment Protection Insurance, associated administrative costs and other matters of £4,837 million compared to a charge of £3,125 million in the year ended 31 December 2014; 2014 also included a past service pension credit of £822 million and a loss of £1,362 million in relation to the exchange and repurchase of Enhanced Capital Notes, neither of which were repeated in 2015. Excluding these items from both years, profit before tax was £1,054 million, or 19 per cent, higher at £6,481 million in the year ended 31 December 2015 compared to £5,427 million in the previous year, reflecting a significant reduction in expenditure in relation to the Group’s Simplification programme and lower impairment charges.

The comparison of results for 2015 to 2014 is also impacted by the sale of TSB Banking Group plc (TSB), which ceased to be consolidated in March 2015, with the sale of the Group’s remaining holding becoming unconditional on 30 June 2015. The Group recognised a net loss of £660 million in 2015, relating to both the disposal of its shareholding and commitments under agreements entered into with TSB.2018.

1418

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Total income decreased by £6,742 million, or 23 per cent, to £23,150 million in 2015 compared with £29,892 million in 2014, comprising a £7,400 million decrease in other income partly offset by an increase in net interest income.

Net interest income was £11,318 million in 2015; an increase of £658 million, or 6 per cent compared to £10,660 million in 2014. There was a positive impact of £358 million in 2015 from a decrease in the amounts payable to unit holders in those Open-Ended Investment Companies (OEICs) included in the consolidated results of the Group, particularly in relation to fixed income securities; the change in population of consolidated OEICs in 2015 compared to 2014 caused an increase of £27 million in this interest expense. After adjusting for this, net interest income was £300 million, or 3 per cent, higher at £11,562 million in 2015 compared to £11,262 million in 2014 reflecting an improvement in margin in the Group’s banking operations, driven by a combination of lower depositoperating and wholesale funding costs, partly offset by continued pressure on asset prices. Average interest-earning assets fell as a result of the sale of TSBfinancial reView and the continued run down of the portfolio of assets which are outside of the Group’s risk appetite.

Other income was £7,400 million, or 38 per cent, lower at £11,832 million in 2015 compared to £19,232 million in 2014. Fee and commission income was £407 million, or 11 per cent, lower at £3,252 million compared to £3,659 million in 2014. Fee and commission expense increased by £40 million, or 3 per cent, to £1,442 million compared with £1,402 million in 2014. The decrease in net fee and commission income largely reflects the disposals of TSB and Scottish Widows Investment Partnership. Net trading income decreased by £6,445 million, or 63 per cent, to £3,714 million in 2015 compared to £10,159 million in 2014; this decrease reflected a reduction of £6,146 million in gains on policyholder investments held within the insurance business as a result of market conditions over 2015 relative to those in 2014. The reduction in trading income within the insurance business was coupled with a small decrease of £266 million in the Group’s other operations. Insurance premium income was £2,333 million, or 33 per cent, lower at £4,792 million in 2015 compared with £7,125 million in 2014; there was a decrease of £2,334 million in life insurance premiums and a £1 million increase in general insurance premiums. Premium income in 2015 has been reduced by a charge of £1,959 million relating to the recapture by a third party insurer of a portfolio of policies previously reassured with the Group; excluding this item life insurance premium income was £375 million, or 6 per cent, lower at £5,880 million in 2015 compared to £6,255 million in 2014. Other operating income was £1,825 million higher at £1,516 million in 2015 compared to a deficit of £309 million in 2014. Other operating income includes the results of liability management from which the Group incurred a loss of £28 million in 2015 compared to a loss of £1,386 million in 2014, which was principally in relation to exchange and repurchase transactions in respect of the Group’s Enhanced Capital Notes. Excluding the impact of liability management activities, other operating income was £467 million, or 43 per cent, higher at £1,544 million in 2015 compared to £1,077 million in 2014; in part reflecting a reduction in the losses arising from the movement in the value of in-force insurance business.

Insurance claims expense was £7,764 million, or 58 per cent, lower at £5,729 million in 2015 compared to £13,493 million in 2014. The insurance claims expense in respect of life and pensions business was £7,804 million, or 59 per cent, lower at £5,359 million in 2015 compared to £13,163 million in 2014; this decrease was matched by a similar decline in net trading income, reflecting the relative performance of policyholder investments. Insurance claims in respect of general insurance business were £40 million or 12 per cent, higher at £370 million in 2015 compared to £330 million in 2014.

Operating expenses increased by £1,502 million, or 11 per cent to £15,387 million in 2015 compared with £13,885 million in 2014; the main reasons for the increase being the £1,712 million increase in charges for redress payments to customers in respect of PPI and other conduct related matters from £3,125 million in 2014 to £4,837 million in 2015, a charge of £665 million in 2015 in relation to the disposal of TSB and a net past service pension credit of £822 million in 2014 which was not repeated in 2015. Excluding these items from both years, operating expenses were £1,697 million, or 15 per cent, lower at £9,885 million in 2015 compared to £11,582 million in 2014. On this basis staff costs were £890 million, or 16 per cent, lower at £4,677 million in 2015 compared with £5,567 million in 2014; annual pay rises being more than offset by the impact of headcount reductions resulting from business disposals and the Group’s rationalisation programmes and a reduction in severance costs as this phase of the Simplification programme draws to a close. Premises and equipment costs were £176 million or 20 per cent, lower at £715 million in 2015 compared with £891 million in 2014. Other expenses, excluding the charges in respect of customer redress provisions and the charge relating to the TSB disposal, were £808 million, or 25 per cent, lower at £2,381 million in 2015 compared with £3,189 million in 2014 as a result of lower levels of technology spend, advertising and professional fees, in particular relating to Simplification and the costs of TSB separation in 2014. Depreciation and amortisation costs were £177 million, or 9 per cent, higher at £2,112 million in 2015 compared to £1,935 million in 2014.

Impairment losses decreased by £362 million, or 48 per cent, to £390 million in 2015 compared with £752 million in 2014. Impairment losses in respect of loans and advances to customers were £292 million, or 40 per cent, lower at £443 million in 2015 compared with £735 million in 2014. The overall performance of the portfolio reflects a significant reduction in lending which is outside of the Group’s risk appetite and improvements in all divisions. The net charge has also benefited from significant provision releases but at lower levels than seen in 2014. There was a credit of £55 million in respect of undrawn commitments in 2015, compared to a charge of £10 million in 2014, a result of improvements in credit quality in a number of corporate relationships.

In 2015, the Group recorded a tax charge of £688 million compared to a tax charge of £263 million in 2014, an effective tax rate of 42 per cent, which was higher than the standard UK corporation tax rate of 20.25 per cent; principally as a result of the disallowance of a substantial proportion of the Group’s charge in respect of PPI and other conduct risk issues. The tax charge of £263 million in 2014 arose on a profit before tax of £1,762 million; this tax charge reflected tax exempt gains on the sale of businesses.

On the balance sheet, total assets were £48,208 million, or 6 per cent, lower at £806,688 million at 31 December 2015 compared to £854,896 million at 31 December 2014, largely due to the disposal of TSB. Loans and advances to customers were £27,529 million, or 6 per cent, lower at £455,175 million at 31 December 2015 compared to £482,704 million at 31 December 2014, with £21,643 million of the reduction being due to the sale of TSB, the continued reduction in the portfolio of assets which are outside of the Group’s risk appetite and a £5,148 million reduction in reverse repurchase agreement balances have more than offset growth in the UK consumer finance business. An increase of £7,925 million in cash and balances at central banks has been more than offset by an £11,395 million reduction in trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss and a £6,661 million reduction in derivative assets. Total liabilities were £45,285 million, or 6 per cent, lower at £759,708 million at 31 December 2015 compared to £804,993 million at 31 December 2014, again largely due to the sale of TSB. Customer deposits were £28,741 million, or 6 per cent, lower at £418,326 million at 31 December 2015 compared to £447,067 million at 31 December 2014 with £24,625 million of the reduction being due to the sale of TSB. Decreases of £10,239 million in trading and other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss and £11,095 million in insurance and investment contract liabilities have been partly offset by increases of £6,038 million in deposits by banks and £5,823 million in debt securities in issue as the Group took advantage of favourable funding opportunities. Total equity was £2,923 million, or 6 per cent, lower at £46,980 million at 31 December 2015 compared to £49,903 million at 31 December 2014; this reflected the fact that retained profit for the year has been more than offset by negative reserve movements in respect of available-for-sale revaluation and cash flow hedging reserves, dividends paid and the adjustment to non-controlling interests on the deconsolidation of TSB.

15

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

The Group has maintained its capital position, with a common equity tier 1 (CET1) ratio of 12.8 per cent, (31 December 2014: 12.8 per cent) as the impact of the lower capital base (as a result of reduced levels of equity) has been offset by a reduction in risk-weighted assets.

Risk-weighted assets reduced by £16,986 million, or 7 per cent, to £222,747 million, at 31 December 2015 compared to £239,734 million at 31 December 2014, primarily driven by the sale of TSB, reductions in the portfolio of assets which are outside of the Group’s risk appetite and continued improvements in credit quality offset by targeted lending growth.

The Group’s liquidity position remains good, with liquidity coverage ratio (LCR) eligible assets of £123 billion. LCR eligible assets represent almost 5.7 times the Group’s money-market funding with a maturity of less than one year and were in excess of total wholesale funding at 31 December 2015 thus providing a buffer in the event of market dislocation. The Group’s LCR ratio already exceeds regulatory requirements and is greater than 100 per cent.

16

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTSprospects

 

NET INTEREST INCOME

 

  2016  2015  2014 
Net interest income £m  9,274   11,318   10,660 
Average interest-earning assets £m  600,435   614,917   634,910 
Average rates:            
Gross yield on interest-earning assets %1  2.77   2.86   3.03 
Interest spread %2  1.33   1.67   1.52 
Net interest margin %3  1.54   1.84   1.68 

  2019  2018 
Net interest income £m  10,180   13,396 
Average interest-earning assets £m  595,003   580,221 
Average rates:        
Gross yield on interest-earning assets %1  2.83   2.82 
Interest spread %2  1.52   2.22 
Net interest margin %3  1.71   2.31 
1Gross yield is the rate of interest earned on average interest-earning assets.
2Interest spread is the difference between the rate of interest earned on average interest-earning assets and the rate of interest paid on average interest-bearing liabilities.
3The net interest margin represents the interest spread together with the contribution of interest-free liabilities. It is calculated by expressing net interest income as a percentage of average interest-earning assets.

 

2016 COMPARED WITH 2015

Net interest income was £9,274£10,180 million in 2016,2019, a decrease of £2,044£3,216 million, or 1824 per cent, compared to £11,318£13,396 million in 2015.2018. Net interest income in 20162019 includes a charge of £2,057£1,822 million in respect of amounts payableattributable to unitholdersthird party investors in respect of its consolidated Open-Ended Investment Companies (OEICs), compared to a chargecredit in 20152018 of £244 million. The increase reflects more£844 million, as a result of favourable market conditions;movements during 2019; the change in population of consolidated OEICs in 20162019 compared to 20152018 did not have a significant impact. After adjusting for the amounts payable to unitholders, net interest income was £231£550 million, or 24 per cent, lower at £11,331£12,002 million in 20162019 compared to £11,562£12,552 million in 2015.2018.

 

Average interest-earning assets were £14,482£14,782 million, or 23 per cent, lowerhigher at £600,435£595,003 million in 20162019 compared to £614,917£580,221 million in 2015. The reduction reflected2018, due to increased holdings of reverse repurchase agreement balances; excluding these and similar balances average interest-earning assets were stable, with the impact of the acquisition of the Tesco Bank mortgage portfolio and growth in targeted segments, in particular SME and UK Motor Finance, more than offset by lower balances in the closed mortgage book and the impact of the sale of TSB part-way through 2015, the continuing run-offIrish mortgage portfolio in the first half of 2018. Average interest-earning assets which are outsidein Retail were £690 million, lower at £341,638 million in 2019 compared to £342,328 million in 2018 and average relationship lending and similar interest-earning assets in Commercial Banking were £985 million, or 1 per cent, higher at £92,215 million in 2019 compared to £91,230 million in 2018, as the balance sheet reductions took place towards the end of the Group’s risk appetite and a reductionyear. Average interest-earning assets across the rest of the Group were £14,487 million, or 10 per cent, higher at £161,150 million in UK mortgage balances,2019 compared to £146,663 million in 2018, reflecting the focus on protecting margins, partly offset by increased SME lending and unsecured personal lending.an increase in average reverse repurchase agreement balances.

 

The net interest margin was 3060 basis points lower at 1.541.71 per cent in 20162019 compared to 1.842.31 per cent in 2015, however adjusting2018. Adjusting net interest income for the amounts allocated to unitholders in Open-Ended Investment Companies, the net interest margin was 114 basis point higherpoints lower at 1.892.02 per cent in 20162019 compared to 1.882.16 per cent in 2015. Margins in Retail fell only slightly despite the challenges of the continuing low interest rate environment; margins in Consumer Finance fell, largely due to the focus on high quality, lower margin motor finance business,2018, with the margin also impactedbenefit of lower deposit costs, higher Retail current account balances and a benefit from aligning credit card terms, more than offset by lower Euriborcontinued pressure on asset margins, particularly in the mortgage market.

19

operating and planned reductions in deposits. Margins on relationship lendingfinancial reView and similar interest-earning assets in Commercial Banking grew, supported by high quality deposit growth, disciplined deposit pricing and reduced funding costs.prospects

 

2015 COMPARED WITH 2014OTHER INCOME

  2019
£m
  2018
£m
 
Fee and commission income:        
Current account fees  659   650 
Credit and debit card fees  982   993 
Commercial banking fees  248   305 
Unit trust and insurance broking  206   221 
Private banking and asset management  69   97 
Factoring  103   83 
Other fees and commissions  489   499 
   2,756   2,848 
Fee and commission expense  (1,350)  (1,386)
Net fee and commission income  1,406   1,462 
Net trading income  18,288   (3,876)
Insurance premium income  9,574   9,189 
Gains on sale of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  196   275 
Gain related to establishment of joint venture  244    
Other  2,468   1,645 
Other operating income  2,908   1,920 
Total other income  32,176   8,695 

Other income was £23,481 million higher at £32,176 million in 2019 compared to £8,695 million in 2018.

 

Net interestFee and commission income was £11,318 million in 2015 an increase of £658 million, or 6 per cent, compared to £10,660 million in 2014. Net interest income in 2015 includes a charge of £244 million in respect of amounts payable to unitholders in consolidated Open-Ended Investment Companies compared to a charge in 2014 of £602 million; the change in population of consolidated OEICs in 2015 compared to 2014 caused an increase of £27 million in this interest expense. After adjusting for this, net interest income was £300 million, or 3 per cent, higher at £11,562 million in 2015 compared to £11,262 million in 2014.

Average interest-earning assets were £19,993£92 million, or 3 per cent, lower at £614,917£2,756 million in 20152019 compared to £634,910with £2,848 million in 2014. The reduction reflected the sale of TSB (leading to a year-on-year reduction of £17,309 million) and the continuing run-off of assets which are outside of the Group’s risk appetite.

Average interest-earning assets in Retail2018. Current account fees were £1,581£9 million, or 1 per cent, lowerhigher at £307,001£659 million in 20152019 compared to £308,582£650 million in 2014 and average interest-earning assets in Commercial Banking were £3,8602018, but there was a decrease of £11 million, or 4 per cent, lower at £90,019 million in 2015 compared to £93,879 million in 2014. Average interest-earning assets across the rest of the Group were £14,552 million, or 6 per cent, lower at £217,897 million in 2015 compared to £232,449 million in 2014. The main driver for this reduction being the decrease of £17,309 million resulting from the sale of TSB and in the portfolio of assets which are outside of the Group’s risk appetite, partly offset by growth in Consumer Finance and in non-relationship balances.

The net interest margin was 16 basis points higher at 1.84 per cent in 2015 compared to 1.68 per cent in 2014, however adjusting net interest income for the amounts allocated to unitholders in Open-Ended Investment Companies, the net interest margin was 11 basis points higher at 1.88 per cent in 2015 compared to 1.77 per cent in 2014. Margins in Retail increased, driven by improved deposit margin and mix, more than offsetting reduced lending rates; however margins in Consumer Finance were down due to the acquisition of lower risk but lower margin new business and the impact of the planned reduction in deposits in line with Group’s funding strategy. Margins on relationship lending and similar interest-earning assets in Commercial Banking increased due to disciplined pricing on new lending and deposits, with a reduction in wholesale funding costs led by continued progress in attracting high quality deposits.

17

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

OTHER INCOME

  2016  2015  2014 
  £m  £m  £m 
Fee and commission income:            
Current account fees  752   804   918 
Credit and debit card fees  875   918   1,050 
Other  1,418   1,530   1,691 
   3,045   3,252   3,659 
Fee and commission expense  (1,356)  (1,442)  (1,402)
Net fee and commission income  1,689   1,810   2,257 
Net trading income  18,545   3,714   10,159 
Insurance premium income  8,068   4,792   7,125 
Gains on sale of available-for-sale financial assets  575   51   131 
Liability management  (598)  (28)  (1,386)
Other  2,058   1,493   946 
Other operating income  2,035   1,516   (309)
Total other income  30,337   11,832   19,232 

2016 COMPARED WITH 2015

Other income was £18,505 million higher at £30,337 million in 2016 compared to £11,832 million in 2015.

Fee and commission income was £207 million, or 6 per cent, lower at £3,045 million in 2016 compared with £3,252 million in 2015. Current account fees were £52 million, or 6 per cent, lower at £752 million in 2016 compared to £804 million in 2015, due to the disposal of TSB part-way through 2015 and lower levels of added-value account fees as a result of changing customer preferences. A decrease of £43 million, or 51 per cent, in credit and debit card fees from £918£993 million in 20152018 to £875£982 million in 2016 resulted from reduced interchange income due2019 following a restructuring of late charge fees. Commercial banking fees were £57 million, or 19 per cent, lower at £248 million in 2019 compared to £305 million in 2018 as a market-wide cap on fees. Otherresult of reductions in lending as part of a balance sheet optimisation initiative. Private banking and asset management fees were £28 million, or 29 per cent, lower at £69 million in 2019 compared to £97 million in 2018 following the transfer of business into the Group’s new wealth management joint venture; and other fees and commissions receivable were £112£10 million, or 72 per cent, lower at £1,418£489 million in 20162019 compared with £1,530to £499 million in 2015 again reflecting the disposal of TSB and reduced income in the Insurance and Commercial divisions and as the portfolio of assets which are outside of the Group’s risk appetite continues to run down.2018.

 

Fee and commission expense was £86£36 million, or 63 per cent, lower at £1,356£1,350 million in 20162019 compared to £1,442£1,386 million in 20152018; lower interchange fees followed reduced customer usage of ATMs and there were reductions in part due to the disposal of TSB during 2015 but also reflecting reduced activity in the mortgage marketvalue-added account package costs and lowerother fees payable following the changes in interchange regulation.payable.

 

Net trading income was £14,831£22,164 million, higher at £18,545£18,288 million in 20162019 compared with £3,714a loss of £3,876 million in 2015.2018. Net trading income within the insurance businesses was £14,798£22,303 million, higher at £17,571of £17,273 million in 20162019 compared to £2,774a loss of £5,030 million in 2015,2018, which reflects higher levels of returnsreflected strong investment performance in 2019 compared to market losses in 2018 on policyholder investments as a result of more favourable market conditions over 2016. However this increase, along with the increase in long-term insurance premium income, was largely offset by the increase in insurance claims expenseboth debt security and the £1,813 million increase in the amounts payable to unit holders in those Open-Ended Investment Companies consolidated into the Group’s results within net interest income.equity investments. Net trading income within the Group’s banking activities was £34£139 million, or 412 per cent, higherlower at £974£1,015 million in 20162019 compared to £940£1,154 million in 2015.2018; the Group’s trading activities have reduced.

 

Insurance premium income was £8,068£9,574 million in 20162019 compared with £4,792£9,189 million in 2015;2018; an increase of £3,276£385 million, or 684 per cent. Premium income in 2015 had been reduced by a charge of £1,959 million relating to the recapture by a third party insurer of a portfolio of policies previously reassured with the Group. Excluding this item earnedEarned premiums in respect of the Group’s long-term life and pensions business were £1,330£413 million, or 235 per cent, higher at £7,210£8,932 million in 20162019 compared to £5,880£8,519 million in 20152018 reflecting significant newan increased level of bulk annuities business, more than offsetting reductionsannuity deals in protection2019 and corporatethe impact of the completion of the acquisition of Zurich Insurance Group’s UK workplace pensions and savings business. General insurance earned premiums were little changed, £13£28 million, or 14 per cent, lower at £858£642 million in 20162019 compared with £871£670 million in 20152018 as a result of reduced new business and the continuingcontinued run-off of closed business.books.

 

Other operating income was £519 million higher at £2,035 million in 2016 compared to £1,516 million in 2015 despite a net loss of £721 million arising on the Group’s tender offers and redemptions in respect of its Enhanced Capital Notes which completed in March 2016. Excluding this item, other operating income was £1,240£988 million, or 8251 per cent, higher at £2,756£2,908 million in 20162019 compared to £1,516£1,920 million in 2015; this reflected a £6342018. There was an improvement of £880 million improvement in the movement in value of in-force insurance business reflecting business growth and positive economic variance, andas a £524result of improved market conditions as well as the favourable impact of assumption changes. In 2019 the Group also realised a gain of £244 million increase in gains on disposal of available-for-sale financial assets, from £51 million in 2015 to £575 million in 2016, of which £484 million relatedtransactions relating to the saleestablishment of the Group’s investment in Visa Europe.Schroders Personal Wealth joint venture.

1820

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

2015 COMPARED WITH 2014

Other income was £7,400 million, or 38 per cent, lower at £11,832 million in 2015 compared to £19,232 million in 2014.

Feeoperating and commission income was £407 million, or 11 per cent, lower at £3,252 million in 2015 compared with £3,659 million in 2014. Current account fees were £114 million, or 12 per cent, lower at £804 million in 2015 compared to £918 million in 2014, with £75 million of the reduction being a result of the sale of TSB. A decrease of £132 million, or 13 per cent, in creditfinancial reView and debit card fees from £1,050 million in 2014 to £918 million in 2015 resulted from the sale of TSB (£51 million of the decrease) and reduced interchange income due to changes in regulation. Other fees and commissions receivable were £161 million, or 10 per cent lower at £1,530 million in 2015 compared with £1,691 million in 2014; again partly reflecting the sale of TSB and also Scottish Widows Investment Partnership in 2014.

Fee and commission expense was £40 million, or 3 per cent, higher at £1,442 million in 2015 compared to £1,402 million in 2014; despite a £63 million decrease as a result of the sale of TSB and Scottish Widows Investment Partnership; the underlying increase reflects increased levels of fees payable in respect of transactions in Commercial Banking and for asset management services in Insurance.

Net trading income was £6,445 million, or 63 per cent, lower at £3,714 million in 2015 compared with £10,159 million in 2014. Net trading income within the insurance businesses was £6,146 million, or 69 per cent, lower at £2,774 million in 2015 compared to £8,920 million in 2014, which reflects lower levels of returns on policyholder investments as a result of market conditions over 2015 relative in those in 2014. However this decrease, along with the decrease in long-term insurance premium income, was largely offset by the decrease in insurance claims expense and the £358 million decrease in the amounts payable to unit holders in those Open-Ended Investment Companies consolidated into the Group’s results within net interest income. Net trading income within the Group’s banking activities was £299 million, or 24 per cent, lower at £940 million in 2015 compared to £1,239 million in 2014; in particular this decrease reflected a charge of £101 million for the movement in fair value of the equity conversion feature of the Group’s Enhanced Capital Notes, compared to a gain of £401 million in the year ended 31 December 2014.

Insurance premium income was £4,792 million in 2015 compared with £7,125 million in 2014; a decrease of £2,333 million, or 33 per cent. Premium income in 2015 has been reduced by a charge of £1,959 million relating to the recapture by a third party insurer of a portfolio of policies previously reassured with the Group. Excluding this item earned premiums in respect of the Group’s long-term life and pensions business were £375 million, or 6 per cent, lower at £5,880 million in 2015 compared to £6,255 million in 2014 with the impact of regulatory and market change more than offsetting income from the new bulk annuities business. General insurance earned premiums were little changed, just £1 million higher at £871 million in 2015 compared with £870 million in 2014 reflecting competitive market conditions and the run-off of products closed to new customers.

Other operating income was £1,825 million higher at £1,516 million in 2015 compared to a deficit of £309 million in 2014. In April 2014, the Group had completed exchange offers with holders of certain series of its Enhanced Capital Notes (ECNs) to exchange the ECNs for new Additional Tier 1 (AT1) securities and a tender offer to eligible retail holders outside the United States to sell their Sterling-denominated ECNs for cash; a loss of £1,362 million was recognised in relation to these exchange and tender transactions in the year ended 31 December 2014. Excluding this item, other operating income was £463 million, or 44 per cent, higher at £1,516 million in 2015 compared to £1,053 million in 2014; this reflected a £266 million improvement in the movement in value of in-force insurance business and a £39 million increase in operating lease rental income.

19

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTSprospects

 

OPERATING EXPENSES

 

 2016 2015 2014 
 £m £m £m  2019
£m
  2018
£m
 
Administrative expenses:              
Staff:               
Salaries  2,750   2,808   3,178   2,539   2,482 
Performance-based compensation  475   409   390   380   509 
Social security costs  363   349   398   325   343 
Pensions and other post-retirement benefit schemes:            
Past service credits and curtailment gains        (822)
Other  555   548   596 
  555   548   (226)
Pensions and other post-retirement benefit schemes  532   705 
Restructuring costs  241   104   264   92   249 
Other staff costs  433   459   741   383   474 
  4,817   4,677   4,745   4,251   4,762 
Premises and equipment:                    
Rent and rates  365   368   424   93   370 
Repairs and maintenance  187   173   221   187   190 
Other  120   174   246   211   169 
  672   715   891   491   729 
Other expenses:                    
Communications and data processing  848   893   1,118   1,038   1,121 
Advertising and promotion  198   253   336   170   197 
Professional fees  265   262   481   226   287 
UK bank levy  200   270   237   224   225 
TSB disposal     665    
Other  873   703   1,017   715   653 
  2,384   3,046   3,189   2,373   2,483 
Depreciation and amortisation:                    
Depreciation of tangible fixed assets  1,761   1,534   1,391   2,064   1,852 
Amortisation of acquired value of in-force non-participating investment contracts  37   41   43   30   40 
Amortisation of other intangible assets  582   537   501   566   513 
  2,380   2,112   1,935   2,660   2,405 
Total operating expenses, excluding regulatory provisions  10,253   10,550   10,760   9,775   10,379 
Regulatory provisions:                    
Payment protection insurance provision  1,350   4,000   2,200   2,450   750 
Other regulatory provisions1  1,024   837   925 
Other regulatory provisions  445   600 
  2,374   4,837   3,125   2,895   1,350 
Total operating expenses  12,627   15,387   13,885   12,670   11,729 
Cost:income ratio (%)2  73.1   88.3   84.7 
Cost:income ratio (%)1  69.0   63.0 
1In addition, £61 million (2015: £nil; 2014: £nil) of regulatory provisions have been charged against income.
2Total operating expenses divided by total income, net of insurance claims.

 

2016 COMPARED WITH 2015

Operating expenses decreasedincreased by £2,760£941 million, or 188 per cent, to £12,627£12,670 million in 20162019 compared with £15,387£11,729 million in 2015. This decrease principally reflects the fact that 2016 includes a regulatory provisions charge of £2,374 million, which was £2,463 million, or 51 per cent, lower than2018 due to an increase in the charge of £4,837 million in 2015.for conduct related matters.

 

Staff costs were £140£511 million, or 311 per cent, lower in 2019 at £4,251 million compared to £4,762 million in 2018. On a full-time equivalent basis, the Group had 63,069 employees at the end of 2019, a reduction of 1,859 from 64,928 employees at 31 December 2018. Salaries were £57 million, or 2 per cent, higher at £2,539 million in 20162019 compared with £2,482 million in 2018 as the benefit of the reduction in staff numbers has been more than offset by the effect of annual pay rises and the acquisition of the Zurich work place pensions business. Pension costs were £173 million, or 25 per cent, lower at £4,817£532 million in 2019 compared to £4,677£705 million in 2015,2018, in part due to the inclusion in 2018 of a past service charge of £108 million following legal clarification of requirements regarding Guaranteed Minimum Pension benefits, compared to a charge of £33 million in 2019. Social security costs were £18 million, or 5 per cent, lower at £325 million in 2019 compared with £343 million in 2018. Restructuring costs were £157 million lower at £92 million in 2019 compared to £249 million in 2018, reflecting a significant reduction in particular, increased expenditurecharges in relation to the Group’s restructuring programmes. Salariesstrategic investment plans, and other staff costs were £58£91 million, or 19 per cent, lower at £383 million in 2019 compared with £474 million in 2018.

Premises and equipment costs were £238 million, or 33 per cent, lower at £491 million in 2019 compared to £729 million in 2018 following the implementation of IFRS 16, as a result of which rent and rates were £277 million lower at £93 million in 2019 compared to £370 million in 2018; repairs and maintenance costs were £3 million, or 2 per cent, lower at £2,750 million in 2016 compared with £2,808 million in 2015, as the impact of headcount reductions, including the sale of TSB, has more than offset annual pay rises; pension costs were £7 million, or 1 per cent, higher at £555 million in 2016 compared to £548 million in 2015; social security costs were £14 million, or 4 per cent, higher at £363 million in 2016 compared with £349 million in 2015; and other staff costs were £26 million, or 6 per cent, lower at £433 million in 2016 compared with £459 million in 2015, in part due to lower levels of agency staff costs.

Premises and equipment costs were £43 million, or 6 per cent, lower at £672 million in 2016 compared to £715 million in 2015. Rent and rates was £3 million, or 1 per cent, lower at £365 million in 2016 compared to £368 million in 2015, in part due to charges in respect of onerous lease contracts as the Group rationalises its property portfolio; repairs and maintenance costs were £14 million, or 8 per cent, higher at £187 million in 20162019 compared to £173£190 million in 20152018 and other premises and equipment costs decreasedincreased by £54£42 million, or 3125 per cent, from £174£169 million in 20152018 to £120£211 million in 2016, partly2019 reflecting a lower level of gains on disposal of property, plantpremises and equipment.

other fixed assets.

2021

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

Other expenses, excluding the regulatory provisions charges, were £662£110 million, or 224 per cent, lower at £2,384£2,373 million in 20162019 compared with £3,046£2,483 million in 2015. The Group had incurred a charge of £665 million in 2015 relating to the disposal of TSB, which was not repeated in 2016; excluding this charge, other expenses of £2,384 million in 2016 were £3 million higher than £2,381 million in 2015.2018. Communications and data processing costs were £45£83 million, or 57 per cent, lower at £848£1,038 million in 20162019 compared with £893£1,121 million in 20152018 as a result of the salerenegotiation of TSBcontracts and efficiency initiatives; professionalcosts in 2018 relating to ring-fencing and the integration of MBNA. Professional fees were £3£61 million, or 121 per cent, higherlower at £265£226 million in 20162019 compared to £262£287 million in 20152018, as reduced costs followinga result of the sale of TSB have been offset by costsexpenditure incurred in relation to regulatory developments such as ring-fencing;2018 on ring-fencing and other projects, and advertising and promotion costs were £55£27 million, or 2214 per cent, lower at £198£170 million in 20162019 compared with £253£197 million in 2015 as a result of the sale of TSB and reduced spend on certain marketing initiatives. The cost of the Bank levy was £70 million, or 26 per cent, lower at £200 million2018, again due to ring-fencing related expenditure in 2016 compared to £270 million in 2015, as a result of reduced levels of chargeable liabilities.2018. Other costs were £170£62 million, or 249 per cent, higher at £873£715 million in 20162019 compared with £703£653 million in 2015.2018.

 

Depreciation and amortisation costs were £268£255 million, or 1311 per cent, higher at £2,380£2,660 million in 20162019 compared with £2,112£2,405 million in 2015. Charges2018, as a result of the implementation of IFRS 16; charges for the depreciation of tangible fixed assets were £227£212 million, or 1511 per cent, higher at £1,761£2,064 million in 20162019 compared to £1,534£1,852 million in 2015, in line with increased asset balances, in particular operating lease assets.2018, due to a charge of £216 million on the right-of-use asset. The charge for the amortisation of other intangible assets was £45£53 million, or 810 per cent, higher at £582£566 million in 20162019 compared to £537£513 million in 2015,2018, reflecting the impact of increased capitalisedlevels of software balances.capitalisation.

 

The Group incurred a regulatory provisions charge in operating expenses of £2,374£2,895 million in 20162019 compared to £4,837£1,350 million in 2015 (in addition to £61 million, 2015: £nil, charged against income)2018 of which £1,350£2,450 million (2015: £4,000 million) related to payment protection insurance. For further details see note 38insurance; this charge was largely due to the financial statements.

2015 COMPARED WITH 2014

Operating expenses increased by £1,502 million, or 11significant increase in PPI information requests (PIRs) leading up to the deadline for submission of claims on 29 August 2019, and also reflects costs relating to complaints received from the Official Receiver as well as administration costs. An initial review of around 60 per cent of the five million PIRs received in the run-up to £15,387 million in 2015 comparedthe PPI deadline has been undertaken, with £13,885 million in 2014. This increase principally reflected the fact that 2014 included a past service pension creditconversion rate remaining low, and consistent with the provision assumption of £822 million and 2015 includes a regulatory provisionsaround 10 per cent. The Group has also reached final agreement with the Official Receiver. The unutilised provision at 31 December 2019 was £1,578 million. The charge of £4,837 million, which was £1,712 million, or 54 per cent, higher than the charge of £3,125 million in 2014.

The past service pension credit of £822 million in 2014 followed the Group’s decision, announced on 11 March 2014 to reduce the cap on increases in pensionable pay used in calculating the pension benefit to nil with effect from 2 April 2014.

Despite the past service pension credit in 2014, staff costs were £68 million, or 1 per cent, lower in 2015 at £4,677 million compared to £4,745 million in 2014. Excluding the pension credit, staff costs were £890 million, or 16 per cent, lower at £4,677 million in 2015 compared to £5,567 million in 2014 reflecting, in particular, the impact of business disposals and a significant reduction in expenditure in relation to the Group’s Simplification programme. As a result, salaries were £370 million, or 12 per cent, lower at £2,808other conduct issues was £445 million in 20152019, compared with £3,178to £600 million in 2014; pension costs, excluding the past service pension credit from 2014, were £482018; this charge included £188 million or 8 per cent, lower at £548 million in 2015 compared to £596 million in 2014; social security costs were £49 million, or 12 per cent, lower at £349 million in 2015 compared with £398 million in 2014; staff restructuring costs were £160 million, or 61 per cent, lower at £104 million in 2015 compared with £264 million in 2014; and other staff costs were £282 million, or 38 per cent, lower at £459 million in 2015 compared with £741 million in 2014, in particular due to lower levels of agency staff costs in relation to the Simplification programme.

Premises and equipment costs were £176 million, or 20 per cent, lower at £715 million in 2015 compared to £891 million in 2014, again reflecting business disposals and reduced Simplification expenditure. Rent and rates was £56 million, or 13 per cent, lower at £368 million in 2015 compared to £424 million in 2014; repairs and maintenance costs were £48 million, or 22 per cent, lower at £173 million in 2015 compared to £221 million in 2014, in part due to a lower level of dilapidation provisions on vacation of properties in 2015 than in 2014; and other premises and equipment costs decreased by £72 million, or 29 per cent, from £246 million in 2014 to £174 million in 2015, reflecting lower levels of losses on sale of equipment and a reduced level of activity in the property portfolio.

Other expenses, excluding the regulatory provisions charges, were £143 million, or 4 per cent, lower at £3,046 million in 2015 compared with £3,189 million in 2014. Communications and data processing costs were £225 million, or 20 per cent, lower at £893 million in 2015 compared with £1,118 million in 2014 as a result of a significant reduction in Simplification spend on systems and technology; professional fees were £219 million, or 46 per cent, lower at £262 million in 2015 compared to £481 million in 2014, reflecting both the reduced Simplification spend and a lower level of professional fees(2018: £151 million) in respect of TSB; and advertising and promotion costs were £83 million, or 25 per cent, lower at £253 million in 2015 compared with £336 million in 2014 due to spend in relation to TSB in 2014. The cost of the Bank levy was £33 million, or 14 per cent, higher at £270 million in 2015 compared to £237 million in 2014, as a result of the increase in rate with effect from 1 April 2015. In 2015 the Group incurred a charge of £665 million relating to the disposal of TSB, reflecting the net costs of the Transitional Service Agreement between Lloyds and TSB and the contribution to be provided by Lloyds to TSB in moving to alternative IT provision. Other costs were £314 million, or 31 per cent, lower at £703 million in 2015 compared with £1,017 million in 2014.

Depreciation and amortisation costs were £177 million, or 9 per cent, higher at £2,112 million in 2015 compared with £1,935 million in 2014. Charges for the depreciation of tangible fixed assets were £143 million, or 10 per cent, higher at £1,534 million in 2015 compared to £1,391 million in 2014, in line with increased asset balances. The charge for the amortisation of acquired value of in-force non-participating investment contracts was £2 million, or 5 per cent, lower at £41 million in 2015 compared to £43 million in 2014. The charge for the amortisation of other intangible assets was £36 million, or 7 per cent, higher at £537 million in 2015 compared to £501 million in 2014, reflecting increased capitalised software balances.

The Group incurred a regulatory provisions charge in operating expenses of £4,837 million in 2015 compared to £3,125 million in 2014 of which £4,000 million (2014: £2,200 million) related to payment protection insurance.

21

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTSarrears handling activities.

 

IMPAIRMENT

 

  2016  2015  2014 
  £m  £m  £m 
Impairment losses on loans and receivables:         
Loans and advances to customers  592   443   735 
Debt securities classified as loans and receivables     (2)  2 
Total impairment losses on loans and receivables  592   441   737 
Impairment of available-for-sale financial assets  173   4   5 
Other credit risk provisions  (13)  (55)  10 
Total impairment charged to the income statement  752   390   752 

2016 COMPARED WITH 2015

  2019
£m
  2018
£m
 
Impairment losses on financial assets carried at amortised cost        
Loans and advances to banks     1 
Loans and advances to customers  1,307   1,022 
Debt securities      
Other assets  5   1 
Total impairment losses on financial assets carried at amortised cost  1,312   1,024 
Impairment of financial assets carried at fair value through other comprehensive income  (1)  (14)
Loan commitments and financial guarantees  (15)  (73)
Total impairment charged to the income statement  1,296   937 

 

Impairment losses increased by £362£359 million, or 9338 per cent, to £752£1,296 million in 20162019 compared to £390£937 million in 2015, largely due to lower levels of releases and write-backs and a2018. Credit quality remains strong; the increased impairment charge was primarily driven by two material corporate cases in respect of available-for-sale financial assets.Commercial Banking, along with some weakening in used car prices.

 

The impairment charge in respect of loans and advances to customers was £149£285 million, or 3428 per cent, higher at £592£1,307 million in 20162019 compared to £443£1,022 million in 2015.2018. In Retail, increasedimpairment charges reflected a lower level of benefit from improvements in house prices in the secured book. The increased charges in Commercial Banking were driven by lower levels of releases and recoveries; and in Consumer Finance were as a result of overall growthsome weakening in used car prices, methodology refinements and the non-recurrence of a favourable one-off release in 2015. The impairment charge relating to assets which are outside of the Group’s risk appetite reduced, reflecting the continued run down of the portfolio.

The impairment charge in respect of available-for-sale financial assets was £173 million in 2016, compared to £4 million in 2015, as a result of a charge in respect of certain equity investments; and there was a credit of £13 million (2015: credit of £55 million) in respect of other credit risk provisions, in both years reflecting improved credit quality in a number of corporate relationships

2015 COMPARED WITH 2014

Impairment losses decreased by £362 million, or 48 per cent, to £390 million in 2015 compared to £752 million in 2014, largely due to reduced charges in relation to the portfolio of assets which are outside of the Group’s risk appetite.

The impairment charge in respect of loans and advances to customers was £292 million, or 40 per cent, lower at £443 million in 2015 compared to £735 million in 2014.cash recoveries following prior year debt sales. In Retail, a reduced impairment charge reflected continued low risk underwriting discipline, strong portfolio management and a favourable credit environment with low unemployment, increasing house prices and continued low interest rates. The improvement in Commercial Banking, the increased charge was driven by lower levels of new impairment as a result of effective risk management, improving UK economic conditions and the continued low interest rate environment; as well as provision releases, but at lower levels than seen during 2014. The Consumer Finance impairment charge reduced, driven by a continued underlying improvement in portfolio quality, supported by an increased level of write-backs from the sale of recoveries assets in the credit card portfolio compared to 2014 due to favourable market conditions. The impairment charge relating to assets which are outside of the Group’s risk appetite reduced significantly, reflecting the Group’s ongoing exit from these positions.

The impairment charge in respect of debt securities classified as loans and receivables was a credit of £2 million in 2015 compared to a charge of £2 million in 2014. The impairment charge in respect of available-for-sale financial assets was £1 million, or 20 per cent, lower at £4 million in 2015 compared to £5 million in 2014; and there was a credit of £55 million (2014: charge of £10 million) in respect of other credit risk provisions as a result of improved credit quality in a number oftwo material corporate relationships.

impairments.

22

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

TAXATION

 

 2016 2015 2014 
 £m £m £m  2019
£m
  20181
£m
 
UK corporation tax:                
Current tax on profits for the year  (1,010)  (485)  (162)  (1,389)  (1,280)
Adjustments in respect of prior years  156   (90)  213   96   11 
  (854)  (575)  51   (1,293)  (1,269)
Foreign tax:                    
Current tax on profits for the year  (20)  (24)  (39)  (70)  (34)
Adjustments in respect of prior years  2   27   3   2   5 
  (18)  3   (36)  (68)  (29)
Current tax (charge) credit  (872)  (572)  15 
Current tax charge  (1,361)  (1,298)
Deferred tax  (852)  (116)  (278)  (26)  (156)
Taxation charge  (1,724)  (688)  (263)
Tax expense  (1,387)  (1,454)

 

2016 COMPARED WITH 2015

1Restated to reflect amendments to IAS 12, see note 1 on page F-13.

 

In 2016,2019, a tax chargeexpense of £1,724£1,387 million arose on the profit before tax of £3,888£4,393 million and in 20152018 a tax chargeexpense of £688£1,454 million arose on the profit before tax of £1,644£5,960 million. The statutory corporation tax rates were 20 per cent for 2016 and 20.25 per cent for 2015.

 

The tax chargeexpense for 20162019 represents an effective tax rate of 4431.6 per cent; the highcent compared to 24.4 per cent in 2018 and compared to a statutory corporation tax rate of 19.0 per cent in both 2018 and 2019. The increase in effective tax rate in 2016compared to 2018 was largely due to the banking surcharge, restrictions onincrease in non-deductible conduct provision charges in relation to PPI, partially offset by the deductibilitybenefit of conduct provisions and the negative impact on the neta prior year deferred tax asset of both the change in corporation tax rate and the expected utilisation by the life assurance business.

2015 COMPARED WITH 2014

In 2015, a tax charge of £688 million arose on the profit before tax of £1,644 million and in 2014 a tax charge of £263 million arose on the profit before tax of £1,762 million. The statutory corporation tax rates were 20.25 per cent for 2015 and 21.5 per cent for 2014.

The tax charge for the 2015 represented an effective tax rate of 42 per cent. The effective tax rate was higher than the UK corporation tax rate largely due to the introduction in 2015 of restrictions on the deductibility of conduct related provisions which resulted in an additional tax charge of £459 million. Adjusting for this charge, the effective tax rate would have been 14 per cent reflecting non-taxable and relieved gains and a number of positive one-off items.

The low tax charge in 2014 was driven by tax exempt gains on sales of businesses and a lower deferred tax liability in respect of the value of in-force assets in the life business.

adjustment.

23

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

LINE OF BUSINESSDIVISIONAL INFORMATION

 

The requirements for IFRS segmental reporting are set out in IFRS 8,Operating Segmentswhich mandates that an entity’s segmental reporting should reflect the way in which its operations are viewed and judged by its chief operating decision maker. As a consequence, the Group’s statutory segmental reporting follows the underlying basis as explained below (see also note 4 to the financial statements).

 

The Group Executive Committee, which is the chief operating decision maker for the Group, reviews the Group’s internal reporting based around these segments (which reflect the Group’s organisational and management structures) in order to assess performance and allocate resources.

The segments are differentiated by the type of products provided and by whether the customers are individuals or corporate entities and by the geographical location of the customer and the performance assessment includes a consideration of each segment’s net interest revenue; consequently the total interest income and expense for all reportable segments is presented on a net basis. The internal reporting is on an underlying profit before tax basis. The Group Executive Committee believes that this basis better represents the underlying performance of the Group. IFRS 8 requires that the Group presents its segmental profit before tax on the basis reviewed by the chief operating decision maker that is most consistent with the measurement principles used in measuring the Group’s statutory profit before tax. Accordingly, the Group presents its segmental underlying basis profit before tax in note 4 to the financial statements.

 

The aggregate total of the underlying basis segmental results constitutes a non-GAAP measure as defined in the United States Securities and Exchange Commission’s Regulation G. Management uses aggregate underlying profit before tax, a non-GAAP measure, as a measure of performance and believes that it provides important information for investors because it is a comparable representation of the Group’s performance. Profit before tax is the comparable GAAP measure to aggregate underlying profit before tax. The table below sets out the reconciliation of this non-GAAP measure to its comparable GAAP measure.

 

The Group’s activities are organised into fourthree financial reporting segments: Retail; Commercial Banking; Consumer Finance and Insurance. The Group’s unsecured personal lending portfolio, previously part of Retail, is now managed by Consumer FinanceInsurance and elements ofWealth.

During 2019, the Group’s business in the Channel Islands and Isle of Man wereGroup transferred Cardnet, its card payment acceptance service, from Retail tointo Commercial Banking; comparativesBanking and also transferred certain equity business from Commercial Banking into Central items. Comparatives have been restated accordingly.

 

Comparisons of results on a historical consolidated statutory basis are impacted by a number of items. In order to provide more meaningful and relevant comparatives, the results of the Group and divisions are presented on an ‘underlying’ basis. The following items are excluded in arriving at underlying profit:

 

 losses on redemptionrestructuring, including severance-related costs, the costs of implementing regulatory reform including ring-fencing, the rationalisation of the Enhanced Capital Notes andnon-branch property portfolio, the volatility in the valueestablishment of the embedded equity conversion feature;Schroders strategic partnership, the integration of MBNA and Zurich’s UK workplace pensions and savings business;
   
 market volatility and other items, which includes the effects of certain asset sales, the impact of liability management actions, the volatility relating to the Group’s own debt and hedging arrangements as well asand that arising in the insurance businesses and insurance gross up, the unwind of acquisition-related fair value adjustments arising from the HBOS acquisition, and the amortisation of purchased intangible assets;
restructuring costs (which in 2015 and 2016 comprised severance related costs relating to the Simplification programme announced in October 2014 and in 2014 included severance, IT and business costs relating to the programme started in 2011) and the costs of implementing regulatory reform, ring fencing and rationalisation of the non-branch property portfolio;
TSB build and dual running costs and the loss relating to the TSB sale in 2015;
   
 payment protection insurance and other conduct provisions; and
certain past service pensions charges and credits in respect of the Group’s defined benefit pension arrangements.provisions.

 

The results of the businesses are set out below on the underlying basis:

 

  2019
£m
  20181
£m
 
Retail  3,839   4,211 
Commercial Banking  1,777   2,183 
Insurance and Wealth  1,101   927 
Other  814   745 
Underlying profit before tax  7,531   8,066 

   2016   20151   20141 
   £m   £m   £m  
Retail  3,003   3,091   2,739 
Commercial Banking  2,468   2,478   2,256 
Consumer Finance  1,283   1,381   1,449 
Insurance  837   962   922 
Other  276   200   390 
Underlying profit before tax  7,867   8,112   7,756 
1Segmental analysis restated, as explained above.
24

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

Reconciliation of underlyingstatutory profit to statutoryunderlying profit before tax for the year

     2016  2015  2014 
  Note  £m  £m  £m 
Underlying profit before tax      7,867   8,112   7,756 
Asset sales  1   217   54   138 
Enhanced Capital Notes  2   (790)  (101)  (961)
Liability management  3   123   (28)  (24)
Own debt volatility  4   (11)  127   (3)
Other volatile items  5   201   (129)  (112)
Volatility arising in insurance businesses  6   (91)  (105)  (228)
Restructuring and TSB build and dual running costs  8   (622)  (255)  (1,524)
Charge relating to TSB disposal  9      (660)   
Payment protection insurance provision  10   (1,350)  (4,000)  (2,200)
Other conduct provisions  11   (1,085)  (837)  (925)
Past service pension credit  12         710 
Amortisation of purchased intangibles  13   (340)  (342)  (336)
Fair value unwind and other items  14   (231)  (192)  (529)
Statutory profit before tax      3,888   1,644   1,762 
  Note  2019
£m
  2018
£m
 
Statutory profit before tax      4,393   5,960 
Market volatility and asset sales  1   (126)  50 
Amortisation of purchased intangibles  2   68   108 
Restructuring costs  3   471   879 
Fair value unwind and other items  4   275   319 
Payment protection insurance provision  5   2,450   750 
Underlying profit before tax      7,531   8,066 

 

1.AssetMarket volatility and asset sales

AssetMarket volatility and asset sales comprise the gainsof £126 million included adverse movements in banking volatility and lossesa gain on asset disposals (2016: gains of £217 million; 2015: gains of £54 million; 2014: gains of £138 million), including assets which were outsideestablishment of the Group’s risk appetite;Schroders Personal Wealth joint venture as well as the gain inone-off charge for exiting the year ended 31 December 2016 includes the gain of £484 million on the sale of the Group’sStandard Life Aberdeen investment in Visa Europe.

2.Enhanced Capital Notes

The Group completed tender offers and redemptions in respect of its Enhanced Capital Notes (ECNs) in March 2016, resulting in a net loss to the Group of £721 million in the year ended 31 December 2016, principally comprising the write-off of the embedded equity conversion feature and premiums paid under the terms of the transaction. In addition there was a charge of £69 million reflecting the change in fair value of the embedded equity conversion feature in the period prior to the transaction.

In the year ended 31 December 2015, a charge of £101 million arose from the change in fair value of the embedded equity conversion feature.

In April 2014, the Group completed exchange offers with holders of certain series of its Enhanced Capital Notes (ECNs) to exchange the ECNs for new Additional Tier 1 (AT1) securities and completed a tender offer to eligible retail holders outside the United States to sell their Sterling-denominated ECNs for cash. A loss of £1,362 million was recognised in relation to these exchange and tender transactions in the year ended 31 December 2014; partly offset by a gain of £401 million arising from the change in fair value of the remaining embedded equity conversion feature.

3.Liability management

Gains of £123 million (2015: losses of £28 million; 2014: losses of £24 million) arose on other transactions undertaken as part of the Group’s management of wholesale funding and capital. The liability management gains and losses were included in other income.

4.Own debt volatility

Own debt volatility includes a £31 million loss (2015: gain of £114 million; 2014: gain of £33 million) relating to the change in fair value of the small proportion of the Group’s wholesale funding which was designated at fair value at inception.

5.Other volatile items

Other volatile items include the change in fair value of interest rate derivatives and foreign exchange hedges in the banking book not mitigated through hedge accounting. A gain of £259 million was included in 2016 (2015: charge of £99 million; 2014: charge of £138 million).agreement. Also included in 2016 was a negative net derivative valuation adjustment of £58 million (2015: charge of £30 million; 2014: credit of £26 million), reflecting movements in the market implied credit risk associated with customer derivative balances.

25

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

6.Volatility arising in insurance businesses

The Group’s statutory result before tax is affected by insurance volatility, caused by movements in financial markets, and policyholder interests volatility.

In 2016, the Group’s statutory result before tax included negativepositive insurance and policyholder interests volatility, which is a deduction from statutory profit before tax in the reconciliation above, totalling £91£76 million compared to negative volatility of £105£103 million in 2015 and negative volatility of £228 million in 2014.2018.

 

VolatilityThis insurance and policyholder interests volatility comprises the following:

 

 2016  2015 2014 
 £m  £m £m  2019
£m
 2018
£m
 
Insurance volatility  (152)  (303)  (219)  230   (506)
Policyholder interests volatility  241   87   17   193   46 
Insurance hedging arrangements  (180)  111   (26)  (347)  357 
Total  (91)  (105)  (228)  76   (103)

 

Management believes that excluding volatility from underlying profit before tax provides useful information for investors on the performance of the business as it excludes amounts included within profit before tax which do not accrue to the Group’s equity holders and excludes the impact of changes in market variables which are beyond the control of management.

 

The most significant limitations associated with excluding volatility from the underlying basis results are:

 

(i)Insurance volatility requires an assumption to be made for the normalised return on equities and other investments; and
  
(ii)Insurance volatility impacts on the Group’s regulatory capital position, even though it is not included within underlying profit before tax.

 

Management compensates for the limitations above by:

 

(i)Monitoring closely the assumptions used to calculate the normalised return used within the calculation of insurance volatility; these assumptions are disclosed below; and
  
(ii)Producing separate reports on the Group’s current and forecast capital ratios.

 

Insurance volatility

 

The Group’s insurance business has policyholder liabilities that are supported by substantial holdings of investments. IFRS requires that the changes in both the value of the liabilities and investments are reflected within the income statement. The value of the liabilities does not move exactly in line with changes in the value of the investments. As the investments are substantial, movements in their value can have a significant impact on the profitability of the Group. Management believes that it is appropriate to disclose the division’s results on the basis of an expected return in addition to results based on the actual return. The impact of the actual return on these investments differing from the expected return is included within insurance volatility.

 

The expected gross investment returns used to determine the underlying profit of the business are based on prevailing market rates and published research into historical investment return differentials for the range of assets held. The basis for calculating these expected returns reflects an average of the 15 year swap rate over the preceding 12 months updated throughout the year to reflect changing market conditions. The negativevolatility movements in the period were largely driven by insurance volatility during 2016arising from equity market movements and credit spreads. The capital impact of £152 million primarily reflects reductions in yields, widening credit spreadsequity market movements is hedged within Insurance and low returns on cash investments partially offset by positive returns on equities.this also reduces the IFRS earnings exposure.

 

Policyholder interests volatility

 

The application of accounting standards results in the introduction of other sources of significant volatility into the pre-tax profits of the life, pensions and investments business. In order to provide a clearer representation of the performance of the business, and consistent with the way in which it is managed, adjustments are made to remove this volatility from underlying profits. The effect of these adjustments is separately disclosed as policyholder interests volatility.

 

Accounting standards require that tax on policyholder investment returns relating to life products should be included in the Group’s tax charge rather than being offset against the related income. The result is, therefore, to either increase or decrease profit before tax with a related change in the tax charge. Timing and measurement differences exist between provisions for tax and charges made to policyholders. Consistent with the expected approach taken in respect of insurance volatility, differences in the expected levels of the policyholder tax provision and policyholder charges are adjusted through policyholder interests volatility. In 2016,2019, the statutory results before tax included a credit to other income which relates to policyholder interests volatility totalling £241£193 million reflecting movements in equity, bond and gilt returns relating to life products.

Insurance hedging arrangements

The Group purchased put option contracts in 2016 to protect against deterioration in equity market conditions and the consequent negative impact on the value of in-force business on the Group balance sheet. These were financed by selling some upside potential from equity market movements. A loss of £180million was recognised in relation to these contracts in 2016 which was less than the gain from the underlying exposure.

7.Insurance gross-up

The Group’s insurance businesses’ income statements include income and expenditure which are attributable to the policyholders of the Group’s long-term assurance funds. These items have no impact in total upon the profit attributable to equity shareholders and, in order to provide a clearer representation of the underlying trends within the business, these items are shown net on a separate line. These policyholder amounts relate principally to returns on policyholder investments (within net interest income and net trading income) and insurance premiums receivable, together with a matching amount within the insurance claims expense representing the allocation of these items to policyholders.

8.Restructuring costs and TSB build and dual-running costs

Restructuring costs were £622 million in 2016 and comprised costs relating to the Simplification programme, the announced rationalisation of the non-branch property portfolio and the work on implementing the ring-fencing requirements. Restructuring costs of £170 million in 2015 related to the next phase of Simplification announced in October 2014. The costs of £966 million in 2014 related to phase 1 of the Simplification programme which was completed in 2014.

2625

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

During 2015, the Group completed the European Commission (EC) mandated business disposal of TSB. TSB costs in the year ended 31 December 2015 totalled £85 million (2014: £558 million) relating to dual-running costs. The dual-running costs include the costs of TSB’s standalone treasury, finance, human resources and other head office functions.

9.Charge relating to TSB disposal

The Group completed the sale of a 9.99 per cent interest in TSB Banking Group plc (TSB) to Banco de Sabadell S.A. (Sabadell) on 24 March 2015, reducing the Group’s holding in TSB to 40.01 per cent; this sale led to a loss of control and the deconsolidation of TSB. The Group’s residual investment in 40.01 per cent of TSB was then recorded at fair value, as an asset held for sale. The Group recognised a loss of £660 million reflecting the net costs of the Transitional Service Agreement between Lloyds and TSB, the contribution to be provided by Lloyds to TSB in moving to alternative IT provision and the net result on sale of the 9.99 per cent interest and fair valuation of the residual investment.Insurance hedging arrangements

 

The Group announcedactively manages its exposures to interest rate, foreign currency exchange rate, inflation and market movements within the banking book through a comprehensive hedging strategy. This helps to mitigate earnings volatility and reduces the impact of market movements on 30 June 2015 that all relevant regulatory clearances for the sale of its remaining 40.01 per cent holding in TSB to Sabadell had been received and that the sale was therefore unconditional in all respects; the proceeds were received on 10 July 2015.capital position.

 

10.2.Payment protection insurance (PPI) provision

A provision of £1,350 million to cover further operating costs and redress relating to PPI was recognised in the 2016 (2015: £4,000 million; 2014: £2,200 million). The charge of £1,350 million in 2016 was largely driven by a higher total volume of complaints expected as a result of the Financial Conduct Authority’s (FCA) industry deadline being extended to the end of August 2019 as well as changes to the rules and guidance that should apply when firms handle PPI complaints in light of the UK Supreme Court’s decision in Plevin v Paragon Personal Finance Limited [2014] UKSC 61 (Plevin). Final rules and guidance were published by the FCA on 2 March 2017 (PS 17/3).

11.Other conduct provisions

There was a charge of £1,085 million in 2016 to cover a range of other conduct issues (2015: £837 million; 2014: £925 million). The charge for the year included £280 million in respect of complaints relating to packaged bank accounts, £261 million in respect of arrears-related activities on secured and unsecured retail products and £94 million related to insurance products sold in Germany, together with a number of other conduct risk provisions totalling £450 million across all divisions.

12.Past service pension credit

On 11 March 2014 the Group announced a change to its defined benefit pension arrangements, revising the existing cap on the increases in pensionable pay used in calculating the pension benefit, from 2 per cent to nil with effect from 2 April 2014. The effect of this change was to reduce the Group’s retirement benefit obligations recognised on the balance sheet by £843 million with a corresponding curtailment gain recognised in the income statement. This was partly offset by a charge of £133 million relating to the cost of other changes to the pay, benefits and reward offered to employees to give a net credit of £710 million recognised in 2014.

13.Amortisation of purchased intangibles

The Group incurred a charge for the amortisation of intangible assets, principally those recognised on the acquisition of HBOS, in 2009, of £340£68 million (2015: £342 million; 2014: £336(2018: £108 million).

 

14.3.Restructuring costs

Restructuring costs were £471 million (2018: £879 million) and included severance costs relating to the Group’s strategic investment plans as well as the costs of the integration of MBNA and Zurich’s UK workplace pensions and savings business and the establishment of the Schroders Personal Wealth Joint venture.

4.Fair value unwind and other items

The statutory (IFRS) results include the impact of the acquisition-related fair value adjustments, arising from the acquisition of HBOS in 2009; these adjustments affect a number of line items.

Theand MBNA. In 2019 the principal financial effectseffect of the fair value unwind areis to reflect the effective interest rates applicable at the date of acquisition, on assets and liabilities that were acquired at values that differed from their original book value,value.

5.Payment protection insurance (PPI) provision

The PPI charge of £2,450 million was largely due to the significant increase in PPI information requests (PIRs) leading up to the deadline for submission of claims on 29 August 2019, and also reflects costs relating to recognisecomplaints received from the reversalOfficial Receiver as well as administration costs. An initial review of creditaround 60 per cent of the five million PIRs received in the run-up to the PPI deadline has been undertaken, with the conversion rate remaining low, and liquidity risk adjustments as underlying instruments mature or become impaired. Generally, this leads to higher interest expense asconsistent with the valueprovision assumption of HBOS’s own debt accretes to par and a lower impairment charge reflectingaround 10 per cent. The Group has also reached final agreement with the impact of acquisition balance sheet valuation adjustments.

Official Receiver. The unutilised provision at 31 December 2019 was £1,578 million.

2726

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

DIVISIONAL RESULTS

 

RETAIL

 

Retail offers a broad range of financial service products to personal and business banking customers, including current accounts, savings, and mortgages, to UK personal customers, including Wealth and small business customers. It is also a distributor of insurance, protection and credit cards, unsecured loans, motor finance and a range of long-term savings and investment products.leasing solutions. Its aim is to be the best bank for customers in the UK, by building deep and enduring relationships that deliver real value, to customers, and by providing them with greater choice and flexibility. It will maintain itsflexibility, with propositions increasingly personalised to their needs. Retail operates a multi-brand and multi-channel strategy, and continuestrategy. It continues to simplify theits business and provide more transparent products, helping to improve service levels and reduce conduct risks.risks, whilst working within a prudent risk appetite.

 

 2016  20151  20141 
 £m  £m £m  2019
£m
  20181
£m
 
Net interest income  6,497   6,664   6,270   8,807   9,060 
Other income  1,053   1,115   1,202   2,014   2,097 
Total income  7,550   7,779   7,472   10,821   11,157 
Operating expenses  (4,174)  (4,339)  (4,239)
Operating lease depreciation  (946)  (921)
Net income  9,875   10,236 
Operating costs  (4,760)  (4,897)
Remediation  (238)  (267)
Total costs  (4,998)  (5,164)
Impairment  (373)  (349)  (494)  (1,038)  (861)
Underlying profit  3,003   3,091   2,739   3,839   4,211 

 

1Restated, as explained on page 24.F-25.

2016 COMPARED WITH 2015

 

Underlying profit decreasedreduced by £88£372 million, or 9 per cent, to £3,839 million in 2019 compared to £4,211 million in 2018.

Net interest income reduced by £253 million, or 3 per cent, to £3,003£8,807 million in 20162019 compared to £3,091£9,060 million in 2015,2018, reflecting the challenging interest rate environment and continued pressure on other operating income.mortgage margins, partly offset by lower funding costs and a benefit from aligning credit card terms.

 

Net interestOther income decreased by £167£83 million, or 4 per cent, to £2,014 million in 2019 compared to £2,097 million in 2018, reflecting a lower Lex Fleet size.

Operating lease depreciation increased £25 million, or 3 per cent, to £6,497£946 million in 20162019 compared to £6,664£921 million in 2015, largely due to a reduction2018, reflecting some weakening in mortgage balances as Retail focus on protecting margins. Banking margin fellused car prices through the first three quarters of 2019, partly offset by just 2 basis points despite the continuing low interest rate environment.

Other income decreased £62 million, or 6 per cent, to £1,053 million in 2016 compared to £1,115 million in 2015, driven by changing customer behaviour and improvements to the customer proposition.lower Lex fleet size.

 

Operating expenses decreasedreduced by £165£137 million, or 43 per cent, to £4,174£4,760 million in 20162019 compared to £4,339£4,897 million in 20152018 as efficiency savingsincreased investment in the business was more than covered an increase in investment. Staff numbers have reducedoffset by efficiency savings.

Remediation costs decreased by £29 million, or 11 per cent to £238 million in the year.2019 compared to £267 million in 2018.

 

Impairment increased by £24£177 million, or 721 per cent, to £373£1,038 million in 20162019 compared to £349£861 million in 2015. Underlying credit quality remains stable.

2015 COMPARED WITH 2014

Underlying profit increased by £352 million, or 13 per cent to £3,091 million2018, as a result of some weakening in 2015 compared to £2,739 millionused car prices, methodology refinements and lower cash recoveries following prior year debt sales, while underlying drivers remain strong, particularly in 2014, driven by improved margins and reduced impairments.

Net interest income increased £394 million, or 6 per cent, to £6,664 million in 2015 compared to £6,270 million in 2014. Margin performance was strong, increasing 12 basis points to 2.22 per cent in 2015 compared to 2.10 per cent in 2014, driven by improved deposit mix and margin, more than offsetting reduced lending rates.

Other income decreased £87 million, or 7 per cent, to £1,115 million in 2015 compared to £1,202 million in 2014, driven by current account transaction related income and regulatory changes, in particular, impacting the Wealth business.

Operating expenses increased £100 million, 2 per cent, to £4,339 million in 2015 compared to £4,239 million in 2014. The increase reflects continued business investment and simplification to improve customer experiences.

Impairment reduced by £145 million, or 29 per cent, to £349 million in 2015 compared to £494 million in 2014, driven by continued low risk underwriting discipline, strong portfolio management and a favourable credit environment.

mortgage book.

2827

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

COMMERCIAL BANKING

 

Commercial Banking has a client-led, low risk, capital efficient strategy, helpingcommitted to supporting UK-based clients and international clients with a link to the UK. Through its foursegmented client facing divisions – SME, Mid Markets, Global Corporates and Financial Institutions –coverage model it provides clients with a range of products and services such as lending, transactional banking, working capital management, risk management and debt capital markets services, as well as access to private equity through Lloyds Development Capital.services. Continued investment in capabilities and digital propositions enables the delivery of a leading customer experience, supported by increasingly productive relationship managers, with more time spent on value-adding activities.

 

  2016   20151   20141 
  £m   £m   £m  2019
£m
  20181
£m
 
Net interest income  2,735   2,576   2,542   2,918   3,013 
Other income  1,987   2,072   1,962   1,422   1,670 
Total income  4,722   4,648   4,504   4,340   4,683 
Operating lease depreciation  (105)  (30)  (24)  (21)  (35)
Net income  4,617   4,618   4,480   4,319   4,648 
Operating expenses  (2,133)  (2,162)  (2,139)
Operating costs  (2,081)  (2,191)
Remediation  (155)  (203)
Total costs  (2,236)  (2,394)
Impairment  (16)  22   (85)  (306)  (71)
Underlying profit  2,468   2,478   2,256   1,777   2,183 

1Restated, as explained on page 24.F-25.

2016 COMPARED WITH 2015

 

Commercial Banking underlying profit decreased by £10£406 million, or 19 percent to £2,468£1,777 million in 20162019 compared to £2,478£2,183 million in 2015 due to additional charges relating to certain leasing assets2018 reflecting lower income and higher impairments partially offset by total income growth.lower expenses.

 

Net interest income increaseddecreased by £159£95 million, or 63 per cent, to £2,735£2,918 million in 20162019 compared to £2,576£3,013 million in 2015 with an improvement in net interest2018 reflecting asset margin supported by high quality deposit growth, disciplined deposit pricing and reduced funding costs.pressure.

 

Other income decreased by £85£248 million or 4 per cent, to £1,987£1,422 million in 20162019 compared to £2,072£1,670 million in 2015 driven by non-recurring income recognised2018 reflecting challenging market conditions leading to lower levels of client activity, particularly in 2015, relating to refinancing support of Global Corporates clients.markets.

 

Operating lease depreciation increasedcosts decreased by £75£110 million to £105£2,081 million in 20162019 compared to £30£2,191 million in 2015 due to additional charges relating to certain leasing assets.2018 reflecting efficiency savings and despite increased investment.

 

Operating expensesRemediation costs decreased by £29£48 million to £2,133£155 million in 20162019 compared to £2,162£203 million in 2015.2018.

 

Impairments increased by £38£235 million, to £16£306 million charge in 20162019 compared to £22 million release in 2015.

2015 COMPARED WITH 2014

Commercial Banking underlying profit increased by £222 million, or 10 per cent, to £2,478£71 million in 2015 compared to £2,256 million in 2014 due to lower impairments and increased total underlying income partially offset by higher operating costs.

Net interest income increased by £34 million, or 1 per cent, to £2,576 million in 2015 compared to £2,542 million in 20142018 with the increase driven by reduced funding costs and higher net interest margin due to disciplined new lending and an increase in deposits.

Other income increased by £110 million, or 6 per cent, to £2,072 million in 2015 compared to £1,962 million in 2014 driven by refinancing support provided to Global Corporate clients and increases in Mid Markets.

Operating lease depreciation increased by £6 million to £30 million in 2015 compared to £24 million in 2014. Operating expenses increased by £23 million, to £2,162 million in 2015 compared to £2,139 million in 2014.

Impairments improved by £107 million to a £22 million release in 2015 compared to an £85 million charge in 2014 reflecting lower gross charges and an increase in write-backs.

two individual corporate cases.

29

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

CONSUMER FINANCE

Consumer Finance comprises motor finance, credit cards, unsecured personal loans and its European business, which includes mortgages and deposit taking. Unsecured personal loans joined the division in 2016 in order to reposition this business for growth. This brings together all consumer lending products to enable better and more coordinated focus on these markets. Consumer Finance’s aim is to deliver sustainable growth within risk appetite through building digital capability and continuing to create innovative propositions, underpinned by improvements to customer experience.

   2016   20151  20141
   £m   £m   £m 
Net interest income  1,941   1,954   2,037 
Other income  1,338   1,359   1,368 
Total income  3,279   3,313   3,405 
Operating lease depreciation  (775)  (720)  (667)
Net income  2,504   2,593   2,738 
Operating expenses  (939)  (977)  (971)
Impairment  (282)  (235)  (318)
Underlying profit  1,283   1,381   1,449 
1Restated, as explained on page 24.

2016 COMPARED WITH 2015

Underlying profit was £1,283 million in 2016 compared to £1,381 million in 2015, a decrease of £98 million, or 7 per cent, driven by slightly lower income and increased impairment.

Total income decreased by £34 million to £3,279 million in 2016 compared to £3,313 million in 2015.

Net interest margin decreased by 73 basis points to 5.88 per cent, contributing to a reduction in net interest income to £1,941 million in 2016 compared to £1,954 million in 2015. Net interest margin was down due to the focus on high quality, lower margin motor finance business, with the margin also impacted by lower Euribor and planned reductions in deposits, in line with the Lloyds Banking Group’s funding strategy.

Other income reduced by £21 million to £1,338 million in 2016 compared to £1,359 million in 2015, due to the market-wide reduction in credit card interchange fees, partly offset by continued fleet growth in Lex Autolease.

Operating expenses reduced by £38 million, or 4 per cent, to £939 million in 2016 compared to £977 million in 2015 with continued investment in the business more than offset by underlying efficiency savings.

The impairment charge increased by £47 million, or 20 per cent, to £282 million in 2016 compared to £235 million in 2015, primarily due to overall growth and the non-recurrence of a favourable one-off release in 2015.

2015 COMPARED WITH 2014

Underlying profit was £1,381 million in 2015 compared to £1,449 million in 2014 with growth in better quality but lower margin lending resulting in lower income but lower impairments, offset by increased cost of investment in growth initiatives.

Total income decreased by £92 million to £3,313 million in 2015 compared to £3,405 million in 2014.

Net interest margin decreased by 68 basis points to 6.61 per cent, contributing to a reduction in net interest income to £1,954 million in 2015 compared to £2,037 million in 2014. Net interest margin was down due to the acquisition of lower risk but lower margin new business, an increased proportion of Black Horse lending including the partnership with Jaguar Land Rover, lower unsecured personal lending balances and the impact of the planned reduction in deposits in line with the Group’s balance sheet funding strategy.

Other income reduced by £9 million to £1,359 million in 2015 compared to £1,368 million in 2014, as higher income from growing the Lex Autolease fleet was offset by the impact of lower interchange income in Cards following the recent EU ruling.

Operating expenses increased by £6 million to £977 million in 2015 compared to £971 million in 2014 as operating cost savings were offset by continued investment in growth initiatives.

The impairment charge reduced by £83 million, or 26 per cent, to £235 million in 2015 compared to £318 million in 2014. This has been driven by continued underlying improvement in portfolio quality and supported by the sale of recoveries assets in the credit card and unsecured personal lending portfolios together with a one-off release in the motor business. The asset quality ratio improved by 28 basis points.

30

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

INSURANCE AND WEALTH

 

Insurance providesand Wealth offers insurance, investment and wealth management products and services. It supports over 10 million customers with assets under administration of £170 billion and annualised annuity payments in retirement of over £1 billion. The Group continues to invest significantly in the development of the business, with the aims of capturing considerable opportunities in pensions and financial planning, offering customers a broad range of long term savings, retirementsingle home for their banking and protection products to retailinsurance needs and corporate customers, either direct ordriving growth across intermediary and relationship channels through intermediary networks or through the Group’s banking branches .a strong distribution model.

 

Life, Pensions and Investments

The Life, Pensions and Investments business provides long-term savings, retirement solutions and protection products primarily distributed through intermediaries and direct channels of Scottish Widows.

General Insurance

The General Insurance business is a leading provider of home insurance in the UK, with products sold through the branch network, direct channels and strategic corporate partners. The business also has brokerage operations for personal and commercial insurances. It operates primarily under the Lloyds Bank, Halifax and Bank of Scotland brands.

   2016   2015   2014 
   £m   £m   £m 
Net interest expense  (146)  (163)  (131)
Other income  1,755   1,827   1,725 
Total income, net of insurance claims  1,609   1,664   1,594 
Operating expenses  (772)  (702)  (672)
Underlying profit  837   962   922 

2016 COMPARED WITH 2015

  2019
£m
  2018
£m
 
Net interest income  112   123 
Other income  2,021   1,865 
Total income  2,133   1,988 
Operating costs  (982)  (1,021)
Remediation  (50)  (39)
Total costs  (1,032)  (1,060)
Impairment     (1)
Underlying profit  1,101   927 

 

Underlying profit from Insurance and Wealth was £125£174 million, or 1319 per cent lowerhigher at £837£1,101 million compared to £962£927 million in 2015. A 17 per cent2018 as a result of an increase of £145 million in total income and a £39 million decrease in operating costs, partly offset by an increase in new business income was more than offset by adverse economics impacting existing business income together with increased investmentremediation costs.

 

Net interest expenseincome decreased by £17£11 million, or 109 per cent, to £146£112 million from £163£123 million in 2015 due to lower interest rates.

Other income decreased by £72 million, or 4 per cent, to £1,755 million from £1,827 million in 2015. The decrease was driven by adverse economics impacting existing business income partly offset by growth in the planning and retirement and protection propositions and increased general insurance income.

2015 COMPARED WITH 2014

Underlying profit from insurance was £40 million, or 4 per cent higher at £962 million compared to £922 million in 2014. The increase was driven by bulk annuity deals and the net benefit from a number of assumption updates, partly offset by increased costs reflecting significant investment spend, adverse economics, and reduced general insurance income.

Net interest expense increased by £32 million, or 24 per cent, to £163 million from £131 million in 2014 due to holding increased debt whilst a tranche of subordinated debt was re-financed.2018.

 

Other income increased by £102£156 million, or 68 per cent to £1,827£2,021 million from £1,725£1,865 million in 2014. The increase2018. Life and pensions new business income was driven by bulk annuity dealsup 19 per cent to £628 million. Higher experience and the netother items includes a one-off benefit from a numberthe change in investment management provider. General insurance income net of assumption updates, partly offset by adverse economics and reduced general insurance income.

31

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTSclaims increased, benefitting from benign weather in 2019.

 

UNDERLYING PROFITOperating costs were £39 million lower with cost savings offsetting higher investment in the business.

Remediation increased by £11 million, or 27 per cent, to £50 million from £39 million.

INCOME BY PRODUCT GROUP

 

  2016  2015  2014 
  New  Existing     New  Existing     New  Existing    
  business  business  Total  business  business  Total  business  business  Total 
  income  income  income  income  income  income  income  income  income 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Corporate pensions  123   135   258   140   175   315   143   164   307 
Bulk annuities  121   16   137   125      125          
Planning and retirement  109   95   204   40   94   134   63   123   186 
Protection  19   33   52   12   37   49   46   31   77 
Longstanding life, pensions and investments  9   393   402   9   467   476   16   483   499 
   381   672   1,053   326   773   1,099   268   801   1,069 
Life and pensions experience and other items          223           235           26 
General Insurance          354           323           418 
                                     
Net interest income and free asset return          (21)          7           81 
Total costs          (772)          (702)          (672)
Underlying profit          837           962           922 

2016 COMPARED WITH 2015

  2019  2018 
  New
business
income
£m
  Existing
business
income
£m
  Total
income
£m
  New
business
income
£m
  Existing
business
income
£m
  Total
income
£m
 
Workplace, planning and retirement  387   120   507   333   153   486 
Individual and bulk annuities  209   68   277   160   84   244 
Protection  21   24   45   20   22   42 
Longstanding life, pensions and investments  11   384   395   13   414   427 
   628   596   1,224   526   673   1,199 
Life and pensions experience and other items          255           143 
General Insurance          326           272 
           1,805           1,614 
Wealth          328           374 
Total income          2,133           1,988 

 

New business income has increased by £55£102 million to £381£628 million, driven by growthincreases in planningnew members in existing workplace schemes, increased auto enrolment workplace contributions and retirement and protection propositions. This has more than offset lower income from corporate pensions.bulk annuities.

 

Existing business income has decreased by £101£77 million primarily driven by adverse economics.from £673 million, due to the equity hedging strategy to reduce capital and earnings volatility.

 

There wasExperience and other items contributed a net benefit of £223 million as a result of experience and other items.£255 million. This included one off benefits following an update to the methodology for calculating the illiquidity premium and the addition of a new death benefit to legacy pension contracts, to align terms with other pensions products. These were partly offset by the effect of recent reforms on activity within the pensions market.

General insurance income net of claims has increased by £31 million primarily driven by lower weather related claims.

Net interest income and free asset return has decreased by £28 million with benefits from lower interest rates on net interest income being more than offset by a lower expected rate of return on free assets.

Total costs were £70was £112 million higher reflecting increased investmentthan 2018 and £28 million annual levy associated with the Flood Re scheme.

2015 COMPARED WITH 2014

New business income increased by £58 million to £326 million with the primary driver being the new bulk annuity business. This was offset byincludes a reduction in Protection income, following the removal of face-to-face advice in branch standalone protection sales and reduced annuity income following the introduction of Pensions Freedoms in 2015. Corporate pension income remained robust despite lower sales following the auto enrolment driven increases in 2014.

Existing business income decreased by £28 million reflecting the reduction in the expected rate of return used to calculate life and pensions income. The rate of return is largely set by reference to an average 15 year swap rate (2.57 per cent in 2015 and 3.48 per cent in 2014).

Life and pensions experience and other items increased by £209 million. 2015 assumption changes and experience variances include an adverse impact of £208 million in Pensions and Investments as a result of the strengthening of lapse assumptions on the pensions book to allow for the impact of the recent pension reforms. This was more than offset by the £240 million ofone-off benefit recognised within Planning and Retirement, primarily as a result of changes to assumptions on longevity. These longevity changes reflect both experience in the annuity portfolio and the adoption of a new industry model reflecting an updated view of future life expectancy. Benefits from the long termchange in investment strategy increased by £15 million, reflecting the successful acquisition of a further £1.4 billion of higher yielding assets to match the long duration annuity liabilities.

General Insurance income net of claims has fallen by £95 million. This reflects the run-off of products closed to new customers, the impact of becoming a sole underwriter of the home insurance business (which has resulted in a short-term reduction from the loss of commission recognised upfront) and the impact of adverse weather conditions.

Net interest income and free asset return has decreased by £74 million due to holding increased debt whilst a tranche of subordinated debt was re-financed and a lower rate of return on free assets.

Total costs were £30 million higher, reflecting significant investment spend as part of an ongoing programme of growth and simplification initiatives. In 2015 this included the launch of Protection to IFAs and the bulk annuities business alongside the Part VII transfer as well as a significant regulatory change agenda in particular to support pensions freedoms and transition to Solvency II. Excluding investment related expenditure, underlying costs fell by 3 per cent during 2015 reflecting ongoing operational efficiencies.management provider.

3229

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

OTHER

 

Other comprises Run-off,Central items which include income and expenditure not attributed to divisions, including the resultscosts of TSB up until loss of control in March 2015certain central and Central items.head office functions and the Group’s private equity business, Lloyds Development Capital.

 

Run-off

Run-off includes assets classified as outside the Group’s risk appetite and the results and gains on sale relating to businesses disposed in 2014.

  2019
£m
  20181
£m
 
Total income  815   896 
Operating costs  (52)  (56)
Remediation  (2)  (91)
Total costs  (54)  (147)
Impairment release (charge)  53   (4)
Underlying profit  814   745 

 

   2016   2015   2014 
   £m   £m   £m  
Net interest expense  (110)  (88)  (116)
Other income  120   145   451 
Total income  10   57   335 
Operating lease depreciation  (15)  (14)  (29)
Net income  (5)  43   306 
Operating expenses  (77)  (150)  (279)
Impairment  26   (8)  (203)
Underlying loss  (56)  (115)  (176)
1Restated, as explained on page F-25.

 

2016 COMPARED WITH 2015

The underlying loss of £56Profit before tax was £69 million, was an improvement of £59or 9 per cent, higher at £814 million in 2019 compared to the loss of £115£745 million in 2015.2018.

 

Total income, decreased by £47 million to £10 million in 2016 compared to £57 million in 2015, in particular reflecting reduced feewhich includes the central recovery of the Group’s distributions on other equity instruments and gains on the sale of gilts and other income as the portfolio continues to run off.

Operating expenses were £73liquid assets, reduced by £81 million, or 499 per cent lower at £77to £815 million compared to £150£896 million in 2015 reflecting the reducing costs of managing the portfolio as it runs down.2018.

 

ImpairmentTotal costs were £93 million lower at £54 million in 2019 compared to £147 million in 2018 reflecting a £89 million reduction in the remediation charge from £91 million in 2018 to £2 million in 2019.

There was a creditan impairment release of £26£53 million compared to a small charge of £8£4 million in 2015, in particular reflecting a2018; the credit in 2016 compared2019 included releases relating to a charge in 2015 in relation to Irish lendingthe reassessment of credit risk associated with debt instruments held within the Group’s equity investments business.

 

2015 COMPARED WITH 2014RESULTS OF OPERATIONS – 2017

 

The underlying lossGroup’s results for the year ended 31 December 2017, and a discussion of £115 million was £61 million lower than the loss of £176 million in 2014 as a result of both lower operating expenses and lower impairment charges asresults for the run-off portfolios were managed down.

The reduction in total income from £335 million in 2014year ended 31 December 2018 compared to £57 million in 2015 was duethose for the year ended 31 December 2017 (prior to the sale of Scottish Widows Investment Partnership during 2014 and the continued reduction in run-off assets.

Operating costs were £164 million, down £144 million as a result of business disposals in 2014.

The reductionrestatement described in the impairment charge from £203 millionfootnote to the table on page 17), were included in 2014 to £8 million in 2015 reflects the continued progress in managing down the run-off portfolios.

TSB

TSB served retail and small business customers; providing a full range of retail banking products. The Group sold its controlling interest in TSB in March 2015 and ceased to consolidate TSB’s results at that point.

   2016   2015   2014 
   £m   £m   £m  
Net interest income     192   786 
Other income     31   140 
Total income     223   926 
Operating expenses     (86)  (370)
Impairment     (19)  (98)
Underlying profit     118   458 

TSB results are shown2018 Form 20-F, filed on a Lloyds Banking Group reporting basis. The costs of TSB’s head office functions are excluded from underlying profit.25 February 2019.

3330

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

OTHERAVERAGE BALANCE SHEET AND NET INTEREST INCOME (continued)

 

2016 COMPARED WITH 2015

Because TSB was sold during 2015, no results have been consolidated in 2016, this compares to a profit of £118 million in 2015, for the period up to sale in March 2015.

2015 COMPARED WITH 2014

Underlying profit was £340 million, or 74 per cent, lower at £118 million in 2015 compared to £458 million in 2014; this principally reflects the fact that TSB was only consolidated for three months in 2015, compared to a full year in 2014.

Total income was £703 million, or 76 per cent, lower at £223 million in 2015 compared to £926 million in 2014; operating expenses were £284 million, or 77 per cent, lower at £86 million in 2015 compared to £370 million in 2014; and the impairment charge was £79 million, or 81 per cent, lower at £19 million in 2015 compared to £98 million in 2014.

Central items

Central Items includes income and expenses not recharged to the divisions. These largely comprise residual income from the Group’s processes to allocate funding and liquidity costs to the divisions and the charge for payments to the Group’s charitable foundations.

   2016   2015   2014 
   £m   £m   £m 
Total income  330   176   132 
Operating expenses credit (expense)  2   19   (22)
Impairment release (charge)     2   (2)
Underlying profit  332   197   108 

2016 COMPARED WITH 2015

The underlying profit of £332 million was £135 million, or 69 per cent, higher than £197 million in 2015.

Total income increased by £154 million to £330 million in 2016 compared to £176 million in 2015 largely as a result of sales of liquid assets including gilts, and the timing of dividends from the Group’s strategic investments.

Operating expenses were a credit of £2 million compared to a credit of £19 million in 2015.

2015 COMPARED WITH 2014

Underlying profit was £197 million in 2015, £89 million higher than the £108 million profit in 2014.

Total income was £176 million, £44 million higher than 2014 as it included a full year benefit in net interest income from the exchange of the Enhanced Capital Notes in 2014.

Operating costs were a credit of £19 million compared with a charge of £22 million in 2014 and represent the residual amount after allocations to the divisions.

There was a net release of impairment of £2 million compared with a charge of £2 million in 2014.

  2019 2018 2017
  Average
balance
£m
  Interest
income
£m
  Yield
%
  Average
balance
£m
  Interest
income
£m
  Yield
%
  Average
balance
£m
  Interest
income
£m
  Yield
%
 
Assets                                    
Financial assets at amortised cost:                                    
Loans and advances to banks  65,504   514   0.78   67,609   565   0.84   67,049   271   0.40 
Loans and advances to customers  497,574   15,790   3.17   476,149   15,078   3.17   464,944   14,712   3.16 
Debt securities  5,464   122   2.23   4,129   66   1.60   3,332   43   1.29 
Held-to-maturity investments                                 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  26,461   435   1.64   32,334   640   1.98             
Available-for-sale financial assets                          50,049   980   1.96 
Total interest-earning assets of banking book  595,003   16,861   2.83   580,221   16,349   2.82   585,374   16,006   2.73 
Total interest-earning financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  72,457   1,637   2.26   83,887   1,758   2.10   79,754   1,772   2.22 
Total interest-earning assets  667,460   18,498   2.77   664,108   18,107   2.73   665,128   17,778   2.67 
Allowance for impairment losses on financial assets held at amortised cost  (3,468)         (3,074)          (2,161)        
Non-interest earning assets  167,480          157,026           155,853         
Total average assets and interest income  831,472   18,498   2.22   818,060   18,107   2.21   818,820   17,778   2.17 
                                     
  2019 2018 2017
  Average
interest
earning
assets
£m
  Net
interest
income
£m
  Net
interest
margin
%
  Average
interest
earning
assets
£m
  Net
interest
income
£m
  Net
interest
margin
%
  Average
interest
earning
assets
£m
  Net
interest
income
£m
  Net
interest
margin
%
 
Average interest-earning assets and net interest income:                                    
Banking business  595,003   10,180   1.71   580,221   13,396   2.31   585,374   10,912   1.86 
Trading securities and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  72,457   1,356   1.87   83,887   1,191   1.42   79,754   1,294   1.62 
   667,460   11,536   1.73   664,108   14,587   2.20   665,128   12,206   1.84 
3431

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

  2019 2018 2017
  Average
balance
£m
  Interest
expense
£m
  Cost
%
  Average
balance
£m
  Interest
expense
£m
  Cost
%
  Average
balance
£m
  Interest
expense
£m
  Cost
%
 
Liabilities and shareholders’ funds                                    
Deposits by banks  11,164   96   0.86   8,405   117   1.39   6,758   80   1.18 
Customer deposits  341,254   2,015   0.59   342,929   1,812   0.53   348,662   1,721   0.49 
Liabilities to banks and customers under sale and repurchase agreements  26,905   301   1.12   25,634   245   0.96   18,943   110   0.58 
Debt securities in issue1  97,456   1,204   1.24   86,099   234   0.27   72,762   266   0.37 
Lease liabilities  1,684   42   2.49   41   1   2.46   21   1   2.38 
Amounts payable to unitholders in consolidated open-ended investment vehicles  13,352   1,822   13.65   13,915   (844)  (6.07)  15,675   1,435   9.15 
Subordinated liabilities  17,682   1,201   6.79   18,193   1,388   7.63   18,674   1,481   7.93 
Total interest-bearing liabilities of banking book  509,497   6,681   1.31   495,216��  2,953   0.60   481,495   5,094   1.06 
Total interest-bearing liabilities of trading book  26,101   281   1.08   44,101   567   1.29   55,288   478   0.86 
Total interest-bearing liabilities  535,598   6,962   1.30   539,317   3,520   0.65   536,783   5,572   1.04 
Interest-free liabilities                                    
Non-interest bearing customer accounts  74,906           72,913           66,276         
Other interest-free liabilities  171,611           157,072           166,403         
Non-controlling interests and shareholders’ funds  49,357           48,758           49,358         
Total average liabilities and interest expense  831,472   6,962   0.84   818,060   3,520   0.43   818,820   5,572   0.68 

 

AVERAGE BALANCE SHEET AND NET INTEREST INCOME

  2016 2015 2014
  Average  Interest     Average  Interest     Average  Interest    
  balance  income  Yield  balance  income  Yield  balance  income  Yield 
  £m  £m  %  £m  £m  %  £m  £m  % 
Assets                                    
Loans and receivables:                                    
Loans and advances to banks  82,409   381   0.46   94,543   397   0.42   78,762   406   0.52 
Loans and advances to customers  457,622   15,190   3.32   464,012   16,256   3.50   504,246   17,806   3.53 
Debt securities  3,797   56   1.47   2,139   40   1.87   1,633   42   2.57 
Available-for-sale financial assets  40,604   762   1.88   40,967   725   1.77   50,269   957   1.90 
Held-to-maturity investments  16,003   231   1.44   13,256   197   1.49          
Total interest-earning assets of banking book  600,435   16,620   2.77   614,917   17,615   2.86   634,910   19,211   3.03 
Total interest-earning trading securities and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  81,961   1,594   1.94   87,583   1,955   2.23   82,018   1,993   2.43 
Total interest-earning assets  682,396   18,214   2.67   702,500   19,570   2.79   716,928   21,204   2.96 
Allowance for impairment losses on loans and receivables  (2,536)          (4,729)          (10,051)        
Non-interest earning assets  148,965           145,224           158,584         
Total average assets and interest income  828,825   18,214   2.20   842,995   19,570   2.32   865,461   21,204   2.45 
                                     
  2016 2015 2014
  Average        Average        Average       
  interest  Net  Net  interest  Net  Net  interest  Net  Net 
  earning  interest  interest  earning  interest  interest  earning  interest  interest 
  assets  income  margin  assets  income  margin  assets  income  margin 
  £m  £m  %  £m  £m  %  £m  £m  % 
Average interest-earning assets and net interest income:                                    
Banking business  600,435   9,274   1.54   614,917   11,318   1.84   634,910   10,660   1.68 
Trading securities and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  81,961   1,060   1.29   87,583   1,205   1.38   82,018   1,464   1.78 
   682,396   10,334   1.51   702,500   12,523   1.78   716,928   12,124   1.69 
35

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

  2016 2015 2014
  Average  Interest     Average  Interest     Average  Interest    
  balance  expense  Cost  balance  expense  Cost  balance  expense  Cost 
  £m  £m  %  £m  £m  %  £m  £m  % 
Liabilities and shareholders’ funds                                    
Deposits by banks  10,540   68   0.65   10,442   43   0.41   11,604   86   0.74 
Customer deposits  366,178   2,520   0.69   380,137   3,299   0.87   416,651   4,781   1.15 
Liabilities to banks and customers under sale and repurchase agreements  8,342   38   0.46   5,960   34   0.57   2,104   55   2.61 
Debt securities in issue1  85,030   799   0.94   85,462   586   0.69   88,289   552   0.63 
Amounts payable to unitholders in consolidated open-ended investment vehicles  18,961   2,057   10.85   21,059   244   1.16   18,620   602   3.23 
Subordinated liabilities  22,330   1,864   8.35   24,975   2,091   8.37   29,332   2,475   8.44 
Total interest-bearing liabilities of banking book  511,381   7,346   1.44   528,035   6,297   1.19   566,600   8,551   1.51 
Total interest-bearing liabilities of trading book  50,700   534   1.05   61,560   750   1.22   54,980   529   0.96 
Total interest-bearing liabilities  562,081   7,880   1.40   589,595   7,047   1.20   621,580   9,080   1.46 
Interest-free liabilities                                    
Non-interest bearing customer accounts  54,379           45,294           42,049         
Other interest-free liabilities  163,688           158,852           157,824         
Non-controlling interests and shareholders’ funds  48,677           49,254           44,008         
Total average liabilities and interest expense  828,825   7,880   0.95   842,995   7,047   0.84   865,461   9,080   1.05 
                                     
1The impact of the Group’s hedging arrangements is included on this line; excluding this impact the weighted average effective interest rate in respect of debt securities in issue would be 2.702.57 per cent (2015: 2.76(2018: 2.68 per cent; 2014: 3.062017: 2.43 per cent).

 

Loans and advances to banks and customers include impaired lending; interest on this lending has been recognised using the effective interest rate method, as required by IAS 39.39 in 2017 and by IFRS 9 in 2018 and 2019.

 

Following the reduction in the Group’s non-UK activities, an analysis between domestic and foreign operations is not provided.

3632

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

CHANGES IN NET INTEREST INCOME – VOLUME AND RATE ANALYSIS

 

The following table allocates changes in net interest income between volume and rate for 20162019 compared with 20152018 and for 20152018 compared with 2014.

2017. Where variances have arisen from both changes in volume and rate these are allocated to volume.

 

 2016 compared with 2015
Increase/(decrease)
 2015 compared with 2014
Increase/(decrease)
               2019 compared with 2018
Increase/(decrease)
 2018 compared with 2017
Increase/(decrease)
 Total change Volume Rate  Total change Volume Rate               
 £m £m £m  £m £m £m  Total change
£m
   Volume
£m
   Rate
£m
  Total change
£m
   Volume
£m
   Rate
£m
 
Interest receivable and similar income                                                
Loans and receivables:                        
At amortised cost:                        
Loans and advances to banks  (16)  (56)  40   (9)  66   (75)  (51)  (16)  (35)  294   5   289 
Loans and advances to customers  (1,066)  (212)  (854)  (1,550)  (1,408)  (142)  712   679   33   366   355   11 
Debt securities  16   24   (8)  (2)  9   (11)  56   30   26   23   13   10 
Available-for-sale financial assets  37   (7)  44   (232)  (165)  (67)
Held-to-maturity investments  34      34   197      197 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (2017: available-for-sale financial assets)  (205)  (96)  (109)  (340)  (351)  11 
Total banking book interest receivable and similar income  (995)  (251)  (744)  (1,596)  (1,498)  (98)  512   597   (85)  343   22   321 
Total interest receivable and similar income on trading securities and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  (361)  (109)  (252)  (38)  124   (162)
Total interest receivable and similar income on financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  (121)  (258)  137   (14)  87   (101)
Total interest receivable and similar income  (1,356)  (360)  (996)  (1,634)  (1,374)  (260)  391   339   52   329   109   220 
Interest payable                                                
Deposits by banks  25   1   24   (43)  (5)  (38)  (21)  24   (45)  37   23   14 
Customer deposits  (779)  (96)  (683)  (1,481)  (318)  (1,163)  203   (10)  213   91   (30)  121 
Liabilities to banks and customers under sale and repurchase agreements  4   10   (6)  (21)  22   (43)  56   14   42   135   64   71 
Debt securities in issue  213   (4)  217   34   (20)  54   970   141   829   (32)  36   (68)
Lease liabilities  41   41             
Amounts payable to unitholders in consolidated open-ended investment vehicles  1,813   (228)  2,041   (358)  28   (386)  2,666   (77)  2,743   (2,279)  107   (2,386)
Subordinated liabilities  (227)  (221)  (6)  (384)  (365)  (19)  (187)  (35)  (152)  (93)  (37)  (56)
Total banking book interest payable  1,049   (538)  1,587   (2,253)  (653)  (1,600)  3,728   98   3,630   (2,141)  163   (2,304)
Total interest payable on trading and other liabilities at fair value through profit or loss  (216)  (114)  (102)  221   80   141   (286)  (194)  (92)  89   (144)  233 
Total interest payable  833   (652)  1,485   (2,032)  (573)  (1,459)  3,442   (96)  3,538   (2,052)  19   (2,071)
33

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

RISK OVERVIEW

EFFECTIVE RISK MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL

THE GROUP’S APPROACH TO RISK

Risk management is at the heart of the Group’s strategy to become the best bank for customers.

The Group’s mission is to protect its customers, colleagues and the Group, whilst enabling sustainable growth in targeted segments. This is achieved through informed risk decision-making and robust risk management, supported by a consistent risk-focused culture.

This risk overview provides a summary of risk management within the Group, with a prudent approach and rigorous controls to support sustainable business growth and minimise losses. Through a strong and independent risk function, a robust control framework is maintained to identify and escalate current and emerging risks, support sustainable growth within Group risk appetite, and to drive and inform good risk reward decisions.

The risk management section from pages 41 to 108 provides a more in-depth picture of how risk is managed within the Group, detailing the Group’s emerging risks from pages 44 to 45, approach to stress testing, risk governance, committee structure, appetite for risk and a full analysis of the principal risk categories, the framework by which risks are identified, managed, mitigated and monitored.

RISK AS A STRATEGIC DIFFERENTIATOR

Risks are identified, managed, mitigated and monitored using the Group’s comprehensive enterprise risk management framework, and its well-articulated risk appetite provides a clear framework for decision-making. The principal risks the Group face, which could significantly impact the delivery of the Group’s strategy, are discussed on pages 49 to 108.

The Group believe effective risk management can be a strategic differentiator, in particular:

arrow_cir-gre1

Prudent approach to risk

Being low risk is fundamental to the Group’s business model and drives its participation choices. Strategy and risk appetite are developed in tandem and together outline the parameters within which the Group operates.

arrow_cir-gre1

Strong control framework

The Group’s enterprise risk management framework is the foundation for the delivery of effective risk control and ensures that the Group risk appetite is continually developed and controlled.

The Board is responsible for approving the Group’s risk appetite statement annually. Board-level metrics are cascaded into more detailed business appetite metrics and limits.

arrow_cir-gre1

Business focus and accountability

Risk management is an integral feature of how the Group measure and manage performance – for individuals, businesses and the Group. In the first line of defence, business units are accountable for managing risk with oversight from a strong and independent second line of defence Risk division.

arrow_cir-gre1

Effective risk analysis, management and reporting

Regular close monitoring and comprehensive reporting to all levels of management and the Board ensures appetite limits are maintained and subject to stress analysis at a risk type and portfolio level, as appropriate.

34

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

RISK CULTURE AND THE CUSTOMER

The effectiveness of the Group’s risk management approach relies upon a culture of transparency and openness that is encouraged by both the Board and senior management.

Based on the Group’s conservative business model, prudent approach to risk management, and guided by the Board, the senior management articulates the core risk values to which the Group aspires, and sets the tone from the top, with a strong focus on building and sustaining long-term relationships with customers through the economic cycle. The Group’s Code of Responsibility reinforces colleague accountability for the risks they take and their responsibility to prioritise their customers’ needs.

Tone from the top

Senior leaders set a clear tone from the top and lead by example, reflecting the Group values; putting customers first, keeping it simple, and making a difference together, encouraging a culture of intellectual curiosity and proactive risk management amongst all colleagues.

Accountability

Risk management is a team effort with all colleagues playing their part and taking full individual responsibility for their actions.

Effective communication and challenge

The Group is open, honest and transparent with risk colleagues working in collaboration with business areas to:

Support effective risk management;

Understand root causes when things go wrong;

Share lessons learned; and

Provide constructive challenge.

Incentives

Remuneration, performance management and succession planning that support the Group’s core values and put the customer at the heart of everything the Group do.

2019 THEMES

The Group’s priorities for risk management have continued to evolve, alongside progression of the Group’s strategy and development of external factors. The Group’s principal risks are outlined over the next few pages but some themes have been particularly prevalent in 2019.

Climate risk

Climate change is a key global risk, impacting customers, investors and the Group in making the required transition towards a low carbon economy. The Group is committed to delivering the Task Force for Climate-Related Financial Disclosures by 2022 and are taking steps to fully integrate climate risk into the Group’s existing Enterprise Risk Management Framework, including the Group’s policies, risk appetite, controls and disclosures.

The Group continues to invest in supporting this activity as part of the wider sustainability strategy, and are also active participants in a number of external initiatives to help drive consistency across the industry.

EU exit

Given the vast majority of the Group’s business is in the UK, the direct impact on the Group from leaving the EU is relatively small and have taken the necessary steps to ensure continuity of the Group’s limited EU business activities, where permitted.

The Group’s UK focus means its performance is inextricably linked to the health of the UK economy. Economic performance has remained resilient in recent years and whilst the near term outlook for the UK economy remains unclear given UK/EU trade agreement negotiations, the Group continues to monitor closely. The Group is also taking a prudent approach to balance sheet, accelerating issuance where appropriate.

The Group’s customer focused strategy remains the right one. Guided by the overriding principle of Helping Britain Prosper, the Group continue to focus on customer needs and support the Group’s personal and business customers. The Group have delivered on its commitment to lend £18 billion to UK businesses in 2019, reaffirming support for the UK economy.

Change / Execution risk

Delivering change is a key part of how the Group continues to serve its customers, fulfil its strategic objectives, and deliver its aim of Helping Britain Prosper.

During 2019, key change initiatives included digitising of the Group and transforming ways of working. There has also been significant delivery of regulatory change in order to adapt to the changing regulatory landscape.

The Group continues its drive to deliver a leading customer experience whilst managing a complex and varied change portfolio. Focus on improvements to the control environment and managing within risk appetite has enabled the safe delivery of change.

The need to protect existing processes and minimise adverse impact on colleagues and clients will support the delivery of a leading customer experience.

35

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

THE GROUP’S PRINCIPAL RISKS

Principal risks and uncertainties are reported regularly to the Board Risk Committee. Change/execution, data and operational resilience have been elevated from existing risks to principal risks during 2019, and strategic added as a new principal risk

The risk that, in delivering the change agenda, the Group fails to ensure compliance with laws and regulation, maintain effective customer service and availability, and/or operate within our approved risk appetite.

Example

Ineffective change/execution risk management could lead to increased periods of time where the Group cannot serve its customers, and could lead to impacts associated with other risk types such as regulatory censure.

Risk Appetite

The Group have limited appetite for negative impacts on customers, colleagues, or the Group as a result of change activity.

Mitigation

Continued focus on strengthening the control environment, maturation of the change policy and associated policies and procedures, which set out the principles and key controls that apply across the business and are aligned to the Group risk appetite. Senior Management continue to drive improvements to Change and Execution Risk metrics, in particular those affecting customers and colleagues.
Businesses assess the potential impacts of undertaking any change activity on their ability to execute effectively, and the potential consequences for the existing risk profiles.

Further detail on principal risks, including mitigation on page 50

Alignment to strategic priorities and future focus

Delivering a leading customer experience

 The Group recognise the importance of delivering the strategic priorities and will continue to invest in the transformation of the Group to deliver a leading customer experience.

New principal risk
arrow_cir-gre1Change and Execution risk was elevated from a secondary risk to a principal risk in recognition of the significant volumes of complex change the Group is currently undertaking to deliver its strategy. This includes key change initiatives, digitising the Group and transforming ways of working which will help to future-proof against the heightened risks associated with the use of new technologies and manage regulatory requirements and expectations. The decision aligns with the Group’s progress in developing and embedding its change and execution risk management capabilities.

The risk that the Group fail to effectively govern, manage, and control its data (including data processed by third party suppliers) leading to unethical decisions, poor customer outcomes, loss of value and mistrust.

Example

The loss of trust from customers, colleagues, business partners or regulators arising from a failure to manage and control the Group’s data.

Risk Appetite

The Group have limited appetite for material events or losses that occur due to the inappropriate use of data.

Mitigation

Significant investment has been made to enhance the maturity of data risk management in recent years.
In addition, the General Data Protection programme which delivered the necessary infrastructure to achieve compliance with the new regulations in May 2018, a number of other large investments have been made.

Further detail on principal risks, including mitigation on page 50

Alignment to strategic priorities and future focus

Delivering a leading customer experience

The quality of the data that the Group holds and the choices the Group make in how it is used is a key strategic enabler to future business growth, delivering a leading customer experience and Helping Britain Prosper.
The Group recognises that lawful, fair and transparent collection and appropriate use of data, is critical to delivering a leading customer experience and maintaining trust across the wider industry.
Internal programmes ensure that data is used correctly, and the control environment is regularly assessed through both internal and third-party testing.

New principal risk
arrow_cir-gre1Data was elevated from a secondary risk to a principal risk as one of the Group’s most valuable assets. It is critical to the business and is the subject of significant regulatory oversight and media focus. The Group is trusted with large volumes of data, and the Group must ensure that the information it holds is accurate, secure and managed appropriately.

The risk that the Group fail to design resilience into business operations, underlying infrastructure and controls (people, process, technology) so that it is able to withstand external or internal events which could impact the continuation of operations, and fails to respond in a way which meets customer and stakeholder expectations and needs when the continuity of operations is compromised.

Example

Ineffective risk management could lead to vital services not being available to customers and stakeholders.

Risk Appetite

The Group have a limited appetite for disruption to services to customers and stakeholders from significant unexpected events.

Mitigation

The Group has increased its focus on operational resilience and has updated its strategy to reflect changing priorities of both customers and regulators.

Further detail on principal risks, including mitigation on page 51

Alignment to strategic priorities and future focus

Delivering a leading customer experience
End-to-end resilience of the Group’s critical processes is a key strategic priority and the Group operational resilience programmes continue to invest in improving the control environment and resilience. The Group continues to exercise, test and improve its resilience through scenario testing as well as learning from real events (those impacting the Group but also those impacting others) through understanding the root cause.
The Group recognises the importance of its operational resilience to customers, markets and the wider financial sector.

New principal risk
arrow_cir-gre1Operational resilience was elevated from a secondary risk to a principal risk as the ability to continue operations when subject to internal or external incidents, safeguarding the Group’s most critical processes and assets, protecting colleagues, continuing to service customers and minimising any impact on the banking systems is crucial.


36

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

The risks which result from strategic plans which do not adequately reflect trends in external factors, ineffective business strategy execution, or failure to respond in a timely manner to external environments or changes in stakeholder behaviours and expectations.

Example

The financial services sector operates in an evolving regulatory and competitive environments with an increased pace, scale and complexity of change which creates a risk to the Group’s strategic plans.
Shareholder expectations continue to evolve potentially impacting the Group’s role in society.
Greater competition for specialist skill sets (such as data science and engineering), alongside demographic challenges in the working population, may result in a skills shortage impacting delivery of key strategic initiatives.

Risk Appetite

The Group has business plans that are responsive to internal and external factors including changes to the regulatory, macroeconomic and competitive environments.

Mitigation

Continued digitisation of customer journeys, thereby enabling the delivery of market leading customer experiences that are seamless, accessible and personal.
Robust operating and contingency planning to ensure potential impacts of strategic initiatives and external drivers are mitigated.

Further detail on principal risks, including mitigation on page 52

Alignment to strategic priorities and future focus

Delivering a leading customer experience

The Group’s forward looking approach to managing strategic risk will help the Group identify new risks and opportunities, and allow the Group to be better prepared to respond to changes in the regulatory and competitive environments.

New principal risk
 arrow_cir-gre1Strategic risk is a new principal risk in acknowledgment of the increasing rate of change in customer expectations, regulatory and competitive environments along with the demands for specialist skills to meet these evolving needs. This aligns with the strategic priorities to deliver a leading customer experience by digitising the Group, maximising Group capabilities and transforming ways of working.

The risk that parties with whom the Group have contracted fail to meet their financial obligations (both on or off balance sheet).

Example

Observed or anticipated changes in the economic environment could impact profitability due to an increase in delinquency, defaults, write-downs and/or expected credit losses.

Risk Appetite

The Group has a conservative and well balanced credit portfolio through the economic cycle, generating an appropriate return on equity, in line with the Group’s target return on equity in aggregate.

Mitigation

Prudent, through the cycle credit principles, risk policies and appetite statements.
Robust models and controls.

Further detail on principal risks, including mitigation on page 52

Alignment to strategic priorities and future focus

Maximising Group capabilities

The Group seek to support sustainable growth in targeted segments. The Group has a conservative and well-balanced credit portfolio, managed through the economic cycle and supported by strong credit portfolio management.
The Group is committed to better addressing customers’ banking needs through consistent, fair and responsible credit risk decisions, aligned to customers’ circumstances, whilst staying within prudent risk appetite.
Portfolios have benefitted from relatively favourable economic conditions and a prolonged period of low interest rates. Impairments remain below long-term levels, but are expected to increase as impairments normalise.

Key risk indicators

£1,296m

Impairment charge

2018: £937m

The risk of financial penalties, regulatory censure, criminal or civil enforcement action or customer detriment as a result of failure to identify, assess, correctly interpret, comply with, or manage regulatory and/or legal requirements.

Example

Failure to deliver key regulatory changes or to comply with ongoing requirements.

Risk Appetite

The Group interprets and complies with all relevant regulation and all applicable laws (including codes of conduct which could have legal implications) and/or legal obligations.

Mitigation

Group policies and procedures set out the principles and key controls that should apply across the business which are aligned to the Group risk appetite.
Business units identify, assess and implement policy and regulatory requirements and establish local controls, processes, procedures and resources to ensure appropriate governance and compliance.

Further detail on principal risks, including mitigation on page 81

Alignment to strategic priorities and future focus

Delivering a leading customer experience

The Group is committed to operating sustainably and responsibly, and commit significant resource and expense to ensure it meets its legal and regulatory obligations.
The Group responds as appropriate to impending legislation, regulation and associated consultations and participate in industry bodies. The Group continues to be proactive in responding to significant ongoing and new legislation, regulation and court proceedings.


37

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

Risk overview continued

The risk of customer detriment across the customer lifecycle including: failures in product management, distribution and servicing activities; from other risks materialising, or other activities which could undermine the integrity of the market or distort competition, leading to unfair customer outcomes, regulatory censure, reputational damage or financial loss.

Example

The most significant conduct cost in recent years has been PPI mis-selling.

Risk Appetite

The Group delivers fair outcomes for its customers.

Mitigation

Simplified and enhanced conduct policies and procedures in place to ensure appropriate controls and processes that deliver fair customer outcomes, and support market integrity and competition requirements.
Active engagement with regulatory bodies and other stakeholders to develop understanding of concerns related to customer treatment, effective competition and market integrity, to ensure that the Group’s strategic conduct focus continues to meet evolving stakeholder expectations.

Further detail on principal risks, including mitigation on page 82

Alignment to strategic priorities and future focus

Delivering a leading customer experience

As the Group transforms the business, minimising conduct risk is critical to achieving its strategic goals and meeting regulatory standards.
The Group has senior committees that ensure its focus on embedding a customer-centric culture and delivering fair outcomes across the Group. The conduct risk framework continues to support this through robust and effective management. This supports the Group’s vision of being the best bank for customers, enabling the delivery of a leading customer experience through effective root cause analysis and learning from customer feedback.

The risk of loss from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems, or from external events.

Example

Ineffective risk management could lead to adverse customer impact, reputational damage and financial loss, across all of the Group’s principal risks.

Risk Appetite

The Group has robust controls in place to manage operational losses, reputational events and regulatory breaches. The Group identifies and assesses emerging risks and acts to mitigate these.

Mitigation

The Group continues to review and invest in its control environment to ensure it addresses the inherent risks faced.
The Group employs a range of risk management strategies, including: avoidance, mitigation, transfer (including insurance) and acceptance.

Further detail on principal risks, including mitigation on page 82

Alignment to strategic priorities and future focus

Delivering a leading customer experience

 The Group continues to manage operational risk within the appetite articulated by the Board and in compliance with legal and regulatory requirements to ensure a robust control environment and a positive customer experience.

The risk that the Group fail to provide an appropriate colleague and customer-centric culture, supported by robust reward and wellbeing policies and processes; effective leadership to manage colleague resources; effective talent and succession management; and robust control to ensure all colleague-related requirements are met.

Example

Inability to attract or retain colleagues with key skills could impact the achievement of business objectives.

Risk Appetite

The Group leads responsibly and proficiently, manages people resource effectively, supports and develops colleague talent, and meets legal and regulatory obligations related to its people.

Mitigation

Focusing on leadership and colleague engagement, through delivery of strategies to attract, retain and develop high calibre people together with implementation of rigorous succession planning.
Continued focus on the Group’s culture by developing and delivering initiatives that reinforce the appropriate behaviours which generate the best possible long-term outcomes for customers and colleagues.

Further detail on principal risks, including mitigation on page 84

Alignment to strategic priorities and future focus

Transforming ways of working

Regulatory requirements relating to personal accountability and remuneration rules could affect the ability to attract and retain the calibre of colleagues required to meet changing customer needs. The Group recognises the challenges in delivering the Group’s strategic priorities and it will continue to invest in the development of colleague capabilities and agile working practices. This investment will deliver a leading customer experience and allow the Group to respond quickly to customers’ rapidly changing decision-making in a digital era.


38

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

The risk of adverse developments in the timing, frequency and severity of claims for insured/underwritten events and in customer behaviour, leading to reductions in earnings and/or value.

Example

Uncertain property insurance claims impact Insurance earnings and capital, e.g. extreme weather conditions, such as flooding, can result in high property damage claims.

Risk Appetite

The Group has robust controls in place to manage the insurance underwriting risk inherent in the products its Insurance business offers to meet customer needs.

Mitigation

General Insurance exposure to accumulations of risk and possible catastrophes is mitigated by reinsurance arrangements broadly spread over different reinsurers.

Insurance processes on underwriting, claims management, pricing and product design.

Further detail on principal risks, including mitigation on page 84

Alignment to strategic priorities and future focus

Delivering a leading customer experience

The Group is committed to meeting the changing needs of customers by working to provide a range of insurance products via multiple channels. The focus is on delivering a leading customer experience by helping customers protect themselves today whilst preparing for a secure financial future.

Strategic growth initiatives within Insurance are developed and managed in line with a defined risk appetite, aligned to the Group risk appetite and strategy.

The risk that the Group has a sub-optimal quantity or quality of capital or that capital is inefficiently deployed across the Group.

Example

A worsening macroeconomic environment could lead to adverse financial performance, which could deplete capital resources and/ or increase capital requirements due to a deterioration in customers’ creditworthiness.

Alternatively a shortage of capital could arise from an increase in the amount of capital that needs to be held.

Risk Appetite

The Group maintains capital levels commensurate with a prudent level of solvency and aim to deliver consistent and high quality returns to shareholders.

Mitigation

The Group has a capital management framework that includes the setting of capital risk appetite.

The Group maintains a recovery plan which sets out a range of potential mitigating actions that could be taken in response to a stress.

Further detail on principal risks, including mitigation on page 85

Alignment to strategic priorities and future focus.

Maximising Group capabilities

Ensuring the Group holds an appropriate level of capital to maintain financial resilience and market confidence underpins its strategic objectives of supporting the UK economy, and growth in targeted segments through the cycle.

Funding risk is the risk that the Group does not have sufficiently stable and diverse sources of funding or the funding structure is inefficient. Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group does not have sufficient financial resources to meet its commitments when they fall due, or can only secure them at excessive cost.

Example

A deterioration in either the Group’s or the UK’s credit rating, or a sudden and significant withdrawal of customer deposits, would adversely impact the Group’s funding and liquidity position.

Risk Appetite

The Group maintains a prudent liquidity profile and a balance sheet structure that limits the reliance on potentially volatile sources of funding.

Mitigation

The Group manages and monitors liquidity risks and ensures that liquidity risk management systems and arrangements are adequate with regard to the internal risk appetite, Group strategy and regulatory requirements

The Group’s funding and liquidity position is underpinned by its significant customer deposit base, and is supported by strong relationships across customer segments

Further detail on principal risks, including mitigation on page 94

Alignment to strategic priorities and future focus

Maximising Group capabilities

The Group maintain a strong funding position in line with its low risk strategy, and the loan to deposit ratio remains within the target range.

The Group’s funding position allows us to grow targeted business segments, and better address our customers’ needs.

Key risk indicators

£17,515m

Life and pensions present value
of new business premiums

2018: £14,384m

£671m

General insurance underwritten
total gross premiums

2018: £690m

Key risk indicators

13.8%1

CET1 ratio

2018: 13.9%1,2

5.2%1

UK leveraged ratio

2018: 5.6%1

1  Adjusted basis

2  Incorporates the effects of the share buyback announced in February 2019.

Key risk indicators

£118bn

LCR eligible assets

2018: £129bn

107%

Loan to deposit ratio

2018: 107%

39

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

The risk that the Group’s organisational infrastructure fails to provide robust oversight of decision making and the control mechanisms to ensure strategies and management instructions are implemented effectively.

Examples

Inadequate or complex governance arrangements to address ring-fencing requirements and the potential impact of EU exit could result in a weaker control environment, delays in decision making and lack of clear accountability.

Non-compliance with, or breaches of SMCR requirements could result in lack of clear accountability, and legal and regulatory consequences.

Risk Appetite

The Group has governance arrangements that support the effective long-term operation of the business, maximise shareholder value and meet regulatory and societal expectations.

Mitigation

Defining individual and collective accountabilities for risk management, risk oversight and risk assurance through a three lines of defence model which supports the discharge of responsibilities to customers, shareholders and regulators;

Outlining governance arrangements which articulate the enterprise-wide approach to risk management

Further detail on principal risks, including mitigation on page 101

Alignment to strategic priorities and future focus

Delivering a leading customer experience

Ring-fencing ensures that the Group is safer and continues to deliver a leading customer experience by providing further protection to core retail and SME deposits, increasing transparency of the Group’s operations and facilitating the options available in resolution.

The Group’s governance framework and strong culture of ownership and accountability enabled effective, on time, compliance with the SMCR requirements and enable the Group to demonstrate clear accountability for decisions.

The risk that the Group’s capital or earnings profile is affected by adverse market rates, in particular interest rates and credit spreads in the banking business, equity, credit spreads and interest rates in the Insurance business, and credit spreads in the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes.

Examples

Earnings are impacted by the Group’s ability to forecast and model customer behaviour accurately and establish appropriate hedging strategies.

The Insurance business is exposed indirectly to equity risk through the value of future management charges on policyholder funds. Credit spread and interest rate risk within the Insurance business primarily arises from bonds and loans used to back annuities.

Narrowing credit spreads will increase the cost of pension scheme benefits.

Risk Appetite

The Group has robust controls in place to manage its inherent market risk and does not engage in any proprietary trading, reflecting the customer focused nature of the Group’s activities

Mitigation

Structural hedge programmes implemented to manage liability margins and margin compression.

Equity and credit spread risks are closely monitored and, where appropriate, asset and liability matching is undertaken.

The Group’s defined benefit pension schemes continue to monitor their credit allocation as well as the hedges in place against nominal rate and inflation movements.

Further detail on principal risks, including mitigation on page 102

Alignment to strategic priorities and future focus

Maximising Group capabilities

The Group actively manages its exposure to movements in market rates, to drive lower volatility earnings and offer a comprehensive customer proposition with hedging strategies to support strategic aims. Mitigating actions are implemented to reduce the impact of market movements, resulting in a more stable capital position.

Effective interest rate and inflation hedging has kept volatility in the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes low. This combined with improved market conditions has helped keep the schemes in IAS 19 surplus in 2019. This allows the Group to more efficiently utilise available capital resources.

Key risk indicators

£550m

IAS 19 pension surplus

2018: £1,146m

The risk of financial loss, regulatory censure, reputational damage or customer detriment, as a result of deficiencies in the development, application and ongoing operation of Models and Rating Systems.

Example

The consequences of inadequate models could include: inappropriate levels of capital or impairments; inappropriate credit or pricing decisions; and adverse impacts on funding or liquidity, or the Group’s earnings and profits.

Risk Appetite

Material models are performing in line with expectations.

Mitigation

The model risk management framework, established by and with continued oversight from an independent team in the Risk division, provides the foundation for managing and mitigating model risk within the Group.

Further detail on principal risks, including mitigation on page 108

Alignment to strategic priorities and future focus

Digitising the Group

The Group’s models play a vital role in supporting the strategy to ensure profitable growth in targeted segments and the drive toward automation and digital solutions to enhance customer outcomes. Model risk management helps ensure these models are implemented in a controlled and safe manner for both the Group and customers.

The Group’s emerging risks are shown on pages 44 to 45 and a full analysis of the Group’s risk categories is on pages 49 to 108.

40

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

RISK OVERVIEWMANAGEMENT

 

EFFECTIVE RISK MANAGEMENT, GOVERNANCE AND CONTROL

Managing risk effectively is fundamental to the Group’s strategy and to operating successfully. The Group is a simple, low risk, UK focused, retail and commercial bank with a culture founded on a prudent through-the-economic-cycle appetite for risk.

A strong riskRisk management culture is crucial for sustainable growth and within Lloyds it is at the heart of everything the Group does.Group’s strategy to become the best bank for customers.

 

The Group’s mission is to protect customers, shareholders, colleagues and the Group, whilst enabling sustainable growth in targeted segments. This is achieved through informed risk decisions and robust risk management, supported by a consistent risk-focused culture.

The risk overview (pages 34 to 40) provides a summary of risk management within the Group. It highlights the important role of risk as a strategic differentiator, key areas of focus for risk during 2019, and the role of risk management in enhancing the customer experience, along with an overview of the Group’s enterprise risk management framework, and the principal risks faced by the Group.

This full risk management section provides a more in-depth picture of how risk is managed within the Group, detailing the Group’s emerging risks, approach to stress testing, risk governance, committee structure, appetite for risk and a full analysis of the principal risk categories (pages 49 to 108), and the framework by which risks are identified, managed, mitigated and monitored.

Each principal risk category is described and managed using the following standard headings: definition, exposures, measurement, mitigation and monitoring.

THE GROUP’S APPROACH TO RISK

The Group operates a prudent approach to risk with rigorous management controls to support sustainable business growth and minimise losses. Through a strong and independent risk function (Risk division), a robust control framework is founded onmaintained to identify and escalate current and emerging risks, support sustainable growth within the Group’s risk appetite, and to drive and inform good risk reward decision-making.

To meet ring-fencing requirements from 1 January 2019, core UK retail financial services and ancillary retail activities have been ring-fenced from other activities of the Group. The Group enterprise risk management framework and Group risk appetite apply across the Group and are supplemented by risk management frameworks and risk appetites for the sub-groups to meet sub-group specific needs. In each case these operate within the Group parameters. The Group’s corporate governance framework applies across Lloyds Banking Group plc, Lloyds Bank plc, Bank of Scotland plc and HBOS plc. It is tailored where needed to meet the entity specific needs of Lloyds Bank plc and Bank of Scotland plc, and supplementary corporate governance frameworks are in place to address sub-group specific requirements of the other sub-groups (Lloyds Bank Corporate Markets, Insurance and Lloyds Banking Group Equity Investments).

The Group’s enterprise risk management framework (ERMF) (see risk overview, page 34) is structured to align with the industry-accepted internal control framework standards.

The ERMF applies to every area of the business and covers all types of risk. It is reviewed, updated and approved by the Board at least annually to reflect any changes in the nature of the Group’s business and external regulations, law, corporate governance and industry best practice. The ERMF provides the Group with an effective control frameworkmechanism for developing and embedding risk policies and risk management strategies which guides howare aligned with the risks faced by its colleagues approach their work,businesses. It also seeks to facilitate effective communication on these matters across the way they behaveGroup.

ROLE OF THE BOARD AND SENIOR MANAGEMENT

Key responsibilities of the Board and the decisions they make. senior management include:

approval of the ERMF and Board risk appetite.
approval of Group-wide risk principles and policies.
the cascade of delegated authority (for example to Board sub-committees and the Group Chief Executive).
effective oversight of risk management consistent with risk appetite.

RISK APPETITE

Risk appetite is defined within the Group as the‘the amount and type of risk that the Group is prepared to seek, accept or tolerate – is approved bytolerate’ in delivering the BoardGroup strategy.

Group strategy and risk appetite are developed in tandem. Business planning aims to optimise value within risk appetite parameters and deliver on the Group’s promise to Help Britain Prosper.

The Group’s risk appetite statement details the risk parameters within which the Group operates. The statement forms part of the Group’s control framework and is embedded withininto policies, authorities and limits, to guide decision-making and risk management. The Board is responsible for approving the Group’s risk appetite statement at least annually. Group Board-level metrics are cascaded into more detailed business appetite metrics and limits.

Group risk appetite headlines are outlined within The Group’s Principal Risks section on pages 36 to 40.

GOVERNANCE FRAMEWORKS

The Group’s approach to risk is founded on a robust control framework and a strong risk management culture which are the foundation for the delivery of effective risk management and guide the way all employees approach their work, behave and make decisions.

Governance is maintained through delegation of authority from the Board to individuals through the management hierarchy. Senior executives are supported by a committee based structure which is designed to ensure open challenge and support effective decision-making.

The Group’s risk appetite, principles, policies, procedures, controls and reporting are regularly reviewed and updated where needed to ensure they remain fully in-line with regulation, law, corporate governance and industry good practice.

The interaction of the executive and non-executive governance structures relies upon a culture of transparency and openness that is encouraged by both the Board and senior management.

Board-level engagement, coupled with the direct involvement of senior management in Group-wide risk issues at Group Executive Committee level, ensures that escalated issues are promptly addressed and remediation plans are initiated where required.

Line managers are directly accountable for identifying and managing risks in their individual businesses, ensuring that business decisions strike an appropriate balance between risk and reward and are consistent with the Group’s risk appetite.

Clear responsibilities and accountabilities for risk are defined across the Group through a three lines of defence model which ensures effective independent oversight and assurance in respect of key decisions.

The risk committee governance framework is outlined on page 46.

THREE LINES OF DEFENCE MODEL

The ERMF is implemented through a ‘three lines of defence’ model which defines clear responsibilities and accountabilities and ensures effective independent oversight and assurance activities take place covering key decisions.

Business lines (first line) have primary responsibility for risk decisions, identifying, measuring, monitoring and controlling risks within their areas of accountability. They are required to establish effective governance and control frameworks for their business to be compliant with Group policy requirements, to maintain appropriate risk management skills, mechanisms and toolkits, and to act within Group risk appetite parameters set and approved by the Board.

Risk division (second line) is a centralised function, headed by the Chief Risk Officer, providing oversight and independent constructive challenge to the effectiveness of risk decisions taken by business management, providing proactive advice and guidance, reviewing, challenging and reporting on the risk profile of the Group and ensuring that mitigating actions are appropriate.

It also has a key role in promoting the implementation of a strategic approach to risk management reflecting the risk appetite and ERMF agreed by the Board that encompasses:


41

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

overseeing embedding of effective risk management processes.
transparent, focused risk monitoring and reporting.
provision of expert and high quality advice and guidance to the Board, executives and management on strategic issues and horizon scanning, including pending regulatory changes.
a constructive dialogue with the first line through provision of advice, development of common methodologies, understanding, education, training, and development of new risk management tools.

The primary role of Group Internal Audit (third line) is to help the Board and senior executive management protect the assets, reputation and sustainability of the Group. Group Internal Audit is led by the Group Chief Internal Auditor. Group Internal Audit provides independent assurance to the Audit Committee and the Board through performing reviews and engaging with committees and senior executive management, providing opinion and challenge on risk and the state of the control environment. Group Internal Audit is a single independent internal audit function, reporting to the Board Audit Committee of the Group and the Board Audit Committee of the key subsidiaries.

RISK AND CONTROL CYCLE FROM IDENTIFICATION TO REPORTING

To allow senior management to make informed risk decisions, the business follows a continuous risk management approach which includes producing appropriate, accurate and focused risk reporting. The risk and control cycle sets out how this should be approached, with the appropriate controls and processes in place. This cycle, from identification to reporting, ensures consistency and is intended to manage and mitigate the risks impacting the Group.

 

ACHIEVEMENTS IN 2016The process for risk identification, measurement and control is integrated into the overall framework for risk governance. Risk identification processes are forward-looking to ensure emerging risks are identified. Risks are captured and measured using robust and consistent quantification methodologies. The measurement of risks includes the application of stress testing and scenario analysis, and considers whether relevant controls are in place before risks are incurred.

Identified risks are reported on a monthly basis or as frequently as necessary to the appropriate committee. The extent of the risk is compared to the overall risk appetite as well as specific limits or triggers. When thresholds are breached, committee minutes are clear on the actions and timeframes required to resolve the breach and bring risk within tolerances. There is a clear process for escalation of risks and risk events.

All business areas complete a Control Effectiveness Review (CER) annually, reviewing the effectiveness of their internal controls and putting in place a programme of enhancements where appropriate. The CER reports are approved at divisional risk committees or directly by the relevant member of the Group Executive Committee to confirm the accuracy of the assessment. This key process is overseen and independently challenged by Risk division, reviewed by Group Internal Audit against the findings of its assurance activities, and reported to the Board. No significant failings or weaknesses were identified during the 2019 review.

RISK CULTURE

Based on the Group’s conservative business model, prudent approach to risk management, and guided by the Board, the senior management articulates the core risk values to which the Group aspires, and sets the tone at the top, with a strong focus on building and sustaining long-term relationships with customers, through the economic cycle. The Group’s Code of Responsibility reinforces colleagues’ accountability for the risks they take and their responsibility to prioritise their customers’ needs.

RISK RESOURCES AND CAPABILITIES

Appropriate mechanisms are in place to avoid over-reliance on key personnel or system/technical expertise within the Group. Adequate resources are in place to serve customers both under normal working conditions and in times of stress, and monitoring procedures are in place to ensure that the level of available resource can be increased if required. Colleagues undertake appropriate training to ensure they have the skills and knowledge necessary to enable them to deliver fair outcomes for customers.

There is ongoing investment in risk systems and models alongside the Group’s investment in customer and product systems and processes. This drives improvements in risk data quality, aggregation and reporting leading to effective and efficient risk decisions.

FINANCIAL REPORTING RISK MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS AND INTERNAL CONTROLS

The Group maintains risk management systems and internal controls relating to the financial reporting process which are designed to:

ensure that accounting policies are appropriately and consistently applied, transactions are recorded accurately, and undertaken in accordance with delegated authorities, that assets are safeguarded and liabilities are properly stated.
enable the calculation, preparation and reporting of financial, prudential regulatory and tax outcomes in accordance with applicable International Financial Reporting Standards, statutory and regulatory requirements.
enable certifications by the Senior Accounting Officer relating to maintenance of appropriate tax accounting and in accordance with the 2009 Finance Act.
ensure that disclosures are made on a timely basis in accordance with statutory and regulatory requirements (for example UK Finance Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure and the US Sarbanes Oxley Act).
ensure ongoing monitoring to assess the impact of emerging regulation and legislation on financial, prudential regulatory and tax reporting.
ensure an accurate view of the Group’s performance to allow the Board and senior management to appropriately manage the affairs and strategy of the business as a whole and each of its sub-groups.

 

The Group has continueda Disclosure Committee which assists the Group Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer in fulfilling their disclosure responsibilities under relevant listing and other regulatory and legal requirements. In addition, the Audit Committee reviews the quality and acceptability of the Group’s financial disclosures. For further information on the Audit Committee’s responsibilities relating to deliverfinancial reporting see pages 160 to 163.

RISK DECISION-MAKING AND REPORTING

Risk analysis and reporting enables better understanding of risks and returns, supporting the identification of opportunities as well as better management of risks.

An aggregate view of the Group’s overall risk profile, key risks and management actions, and performance against itsrisk appetite is reported to and discussed monthly at the Group Risk Committee with regular reporting to the Board Risk Committee and the Board.

Rigorous stress testing exercises are carried out to assess the impact of a range of adverse scenarios with different probabilities and severities to inform strategic priorities in 2016, simplifyingplanning.

The Chief Risk Officer regularly informs the Board Risk Committee of the aggregate risk profile and strengtheninghas direct access to the Chairman and members of Board Risk Committee.


42

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table A:Exposure to risk arising from the business whilst growing in targeted areas. Risk has createdactivities of the Group

The table below provides a strong foundationhigh level guide to enable this progress, ensuringhow the Group reacts appropriately to the ever changing macro-economic and regulatory environment. The Group’s prudent risk culture and appetite, along with close collaboration withbusiness activities are reflected through its risk-weighted assets. Details of the business has enabled effective decision making and the achievement of a number of risk related deliverablesactivities for each division are provided in the year. These included:Divisional results on pages 27 to 30.

 

    Commercial  Insurance and Central  
  Retail Banking Wealth1 items2 Group
  £bn £bn £bn £bn £bn
Risk-weighted assets (RWAs)          
– Credit risk 78.7 66.3 0.7 14.3 160.0
– Counterparty credit risk3  4.7  1.2 5.9
– Market risk  1.8   1.8
– Operational risk 19.7 4.6 0.6 0.6 25.5
Total (excluding threshold) 98.4 77.4 1.3 16.1 193.2
– Threshold4    10.2 10.2
Total 98.4 77.4 1.3 26.3 203.4

Conduct

1As a separate regulated business, Insurance (excluding Wealth) maintains its own solvency requirements, including appropriate management buffers, and reports directly to the Insurance Board. Insurance does not hold any RWAs as its assets are removed from the Group’s regulatory capital calculations. However, in accordance with capital rules part of the Group’s equity investment in Insurance is included in the calculation of threshold RWAs, while the remainder is taken as a deduction from common equity tier 1 (CET1) capital.
2Central items include assets held outside the main operating divisions, including the assets of Group Corporate Treasury which holds the Group’s liquidity portfolio, and other supporting functions.
3Exposures relating to the default fund of a central counterparty and credit valuation adjustment risk are included in counterparty credit risk.
4Threshold RWAs reflect the proportion of significant investments and deferred tax assets that are permitted to be risk-weighted instead of deducted from CET1 capital. Significant investments primarily arise from the investment in the Group’s Insurance business.

PRINCIPAL RISKS

The Group’s conduct strategy programme was fully implementedprincipal risks are shown in 2016, embedding conduct into the everyday managementrisk overview (pages 36 to 40). The Group’s emerging risks are shown overleaf. Full analysis of its business, ensuring that the Group retains a consistent and relentless focusGroup’s risk categories is on delivering improved customer outcomes through an open transparent culture.pages 49 to 108.

43

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

Capital strength

The Group continues to maintain a strong capital position, with an adjusted CET1 ratio (taking account of the dividend paid by the insurance business in February 2017) of 13.7 per cent, through a combination of strong statutory profit driven by good underlying profit and lower PPI, along with lower risk-weighted assets. Risk-weighted assets reduced by 3 per cent to £215 billion, reflecting the continued de-risking of the portfolio, and were primarily driven by active portfolio management including asset sales, an improvement in asset quality and capital efficient securitisation activity.EMERGING RISKS

 

The Group was also subjectconsiders the following to be risks that have the UK stress testing run bypotential to increase in significance and affect the Bankperformance of England; passing on all levels, with no capital inadequacies identified.the Group. These risks are considered alongside the Group’s operating plan.

 

Asset quality

Effective risk management ensured asset quality remained strong with no deterioration in the underlying portfolio. The impairment charge increased to £645 million (2015: £568 million) with the asset quality ratio increasing slightly to 15 basis points, but this was largely due to lower provision releases and write-backs. The gross asset quality ratio remained unchanged at 28 basis points. The Group’s prudent risk appetite and robust risk management framework were also reflected in impaired loans, which reduced by over £1 billion to £8.5 billion, and the impaired loans ratio, which continued to fall and is now below 2 per cent.
RiskKey mitigating actions

Regulatory and legal: The financial sector continues to experience increasing regulation from various bodies, including government and regulators.

 

Regulatory rules and laws from both the UK and overseas may affect the Group’s operation, placing pressure on expert resource and investment priorities.

–  The Group work closely with regulatory authorities and industry bodies to ensure that the Group can identify and respond to the evolving regulatory and legal landscape.

–  The Group actively implement programmes to deliver legal, regulatory and mandatory change requirements.

Climate: The key risks are financial, derived from both physical risks (climate and weather-related events) and transition risks resulting from the process of adjustment towards a low carbon economy. Climate change extends across multiple risk types e.g. credit, market, conduct and operational. For example, physical and transition risks could result in the impairment of asset values, may impact the creditworthiness of the Group’s clients, and the products and services the Group’s customers require.

The focus on these risks by key stakeholders including businesses, clients, shareholders, governments and regulators is increasing, aligned to the evolving societal, regulatory and political landscape.

There also remains a risk that campaign groups or other bodies could seek to take legal or other action against the Group and/or the financial services industry for investing in or lending to organisations that they deem to be responsible for, or contributing to, climate change.

–  The Group’s risk management approach to climate change reflects its commitment to adopting the framework set out by the Financial Stability Board’s Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD).

–  The Group Chief Risk Officer (CRO) has assumed responsibility for identifying and managing the risks arising from climate change, alongside the CROs for key legal entities.

–  The Group are integrating risk management of financial risks posed by climate change in the existing enterprise risk management framework, including in policies, risk appetite and controls.

–  The Group continue to support customers and clients in managing the financial risks from the UK’s transition to a low carbon economy.

Cyber: Increases in the volume and sophistication of cyber-attacks alongside the growth in connected devices continues to heighten the potential for cyber-enabled crime.

Increases in geopolitical tensions increase the indirect threat of a sophisticated attack on the Group. The capability of organised crime groups is growing rapidly, which along with the commoditisation of cyber-crime increases the likelihood that the Group or one of its suppliers will be the direct target of a sophisticated attack. This increases the risk of the Group’s exposure through its supply chain.

–  Continued investment in and focus on the Group’s Cyber programme to ensure confidentiality and integrity of data and availability of systems. Key areas of focus relate to access controls, network security, disruptive technology, and denial of service capability.

–  Embedding of Group Cyber control framework aligned to industry recognised cyber security framework (National Institute of Standards and Technology, NIST).

–  Three year cyber strategy to deliver an industry-leading approach across the Group and to embed innovation in the Group’s approach to cyber.

–  Increased business and colleague engagement through education and awareness, phishing testing and cultural MI. Cyber risk is governed through all key risk committees and there are quarterly reviews of all cyber risks.

Political uncertainties including EU trade deal: Following the UK’s exit from the EU, significant negotiation is now required on the terms of the future trade agreement. As a result, the possibility of a limited or no deal at the end of the transition period remains and could manifest in prolonged business uncertainty across the UK, including in the financial services sector. This continued lack of clarity over the UK’s relationship with the EU and other foreign countries, and ongoing challenges in the Eurozone, including weak growth, raise additional uncertainty for the UK’s economic outlook. There also remains the possibility of a further referendum on Scottish independence.

–  Engagement with politicians, regulators, officials, media, trade and other bodies to monitor external developments and reassure the Group’s commitment to Helping Britain Prosper.

–  Entities established in the EU ensure continuity of certain business activities; contingency planning in relation to wider areas of impact.

–  Group Corporate Treasury tracking market conditions closely and actively managing the Group’s balance sheet.

–  Credit applications and sector reviews include assessment of EU related risks. Initiatives in place to help clients effectively identify and mitigate or manage such risks.

Competition: Adoption of technological trends is accelerating with customer preferences increasingly shaped by tech giants and other challengers who are able to exploit their own infrastructure and are impacted by different market dynamics. Regulation is focusing on lowering barriers for new entrants, which could have an adverse impact on the Group’s market position.

Operational complexity has the potential to restrict the Group’s speed of response to market trends. Inability to leverage data and innovate could lead to loss of market share as challengers capitalise on Open Banking. Timely delivery of GSR3 objectives remains key to addressing the competitive challenges facing the Group.

–  The Group is transforming the business to improve customer experience by digitising customer journeys and leveraging branches for complex needs, in response to customers’ evolving needs and expectations.

–  The Group will deepen insight into customer segments, their perception of brands and what they value.

–  Agility will be increased by consolidating platforms and building new architecture aligned with customer journeys.

–  The Group is responsive to changing customer behaviour/business models and adjusts its risk management approach as appropriate

–  GSR3 is designed to support the Group to strengthen its competitive position.

Data: Advancements in new technologies and new services, an increasing external threat landscape, and changing regulatory requirements increase the need for the Group to effectively govern, manage, and protect its data (or the data shared with third-party suppliers). Failure to manage data risk effectively can result in unethical decisions, poor customer outcomes, loss of value to the Group and mistrust.

–  The Group’s strategy is to introduce advanced data management practices, based on Group-wide standards, data-first culture and modern enterprise data platforms, supported by a simplified modern IT architecture.

–  The Group has implemented Open Banking and actively monitors implications for customers, including protection from fraud.

–  The Group is making a significant investment to improve data privacy, including the security of data and oversight of third-parties.

44

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

RiskKey mitigating actions

Macroeconomic headwinds: The UK economic outlook remains uncertain, since it is unclear how businesses will respond to the uncertainty relating to ongoing negotiations of international trade agreements, especially with the EU.

Markets have priced continued low UK interest rates, but rapid growth in labour costs resulting from low unemployment and weak productivity growth could boost inflation more than anticipated, pushing interest rate expectations upward. These factors, combined with current levels of consumer indebtedness, could lead to downward pressure on credit quality.

Internationally, growing protectionism remains a significant risk to stability of the global economy. Notwithstanding the recent first agreement on trade between the US and China, the fundamental nature of the disagreement suggests that roll-back of tariffs applied so far will prove difficult and further escalation is eminently possible. US tariffs on Europe may also increase.

More widely, concerns remain that elevated government indebtedness in advanced economies and limited headroom for conventional monetary policy could render the next global downturn more prolonged and lead to a sustained period of stagflation. These circumstances may spur the wider adoption of less conventional monetary policies such as negative interest rates.

–  High levels of liquidity provided by central banks has boosted asset values and reduced spreads across a wide range of assets, but creates vulnerability to a sharp correction if the global economy turns down.

–  Wide array of risks considered in setting strategic plans.

–  Capital and liquidity are reviewed regularly through committees, ensuring compliance with risk appetite and regulatory requirements.

–  The Group has a robust through the cycle credit risk appetite, including appropriate product, sector and single name concentration parameters, robust sector appetite statements and policies, as well as affordability and indebtedness controls at origination. In addition to ongoing focused monitoring, portfolio deep dives are conducted and regular larger exposure reviews. Enhancements have been made to the Group’s use of early warning indicators, including sector-specific indicators.

Geopolitical: Current geopolitical uncertainties or political upheavals could further impede the global economic recovery, heighten instability and impact markets. Terrorist activity including cyber-attacks also has the potential to trigger changes in the economic outlook, market risk pricing and funding conditions. Additionally, the more recent coronavirus outbreak and related global health issues could potentially impact economies and markets.

–  Risk appetite criteria limit single counterparty exposures complemented by a UK-focused strategy.

–  The Chief Security Office develops and maintains a framework for external incidents, including financial stability, to ensure the incident response team convenes and acts as a rapid reaction group, should an external crisis occur.

–  The Chief Security Office also maintains the operational resilience framework to embed resilience activities across the Group and limit the impact of internal or external events.

–  Hedging of market risk considers, inter alia, potential shocks as a result of geopolitical events.

Financial services transformation impact on customers:The risk that transformation of the financial services industry and the Group does not adequately consider vulnerable customers. As technology and innovation move at increasing pace, the more vulnerable customers could be at a disadvantage.

The increase in execution only propositions due to digitisation may lead to increased conduct risk where customers (including vulnerable customers) choose unsuitable products. The Group’s approach to customer segmentation will need to ensure conduct and reputational risks are well managed.

Further, there is a risk of systematic, unintended consequences within decision-making undertaken by machine learning which could occur on a large scale in a short period of time, creating new operational risks that affect financial and non-financial outcomes, for example credit portfolio anomalies or conduct impacts. This is relevant for the Group at present as the delivery of GSR3 utilises new technologies.

–  Group vulnerability strategy and associated actions being developed through the value stream operating model.

–  Digital principles are being agreed across the Group, primarily aimed at preventing material conduct residual risk and giving customers an optimal, informative and fair buying journey to mitigate the increased risks.

–  Emerging customer risks, including those pertaining to vulnerable customers, are managed through customer segmentation strategy governance throughout the change lifecycle.

–  Technology risks, including those related to machine learning, are escalated and discussed through governance to ensure ongoing monitoring of any emerging unintended consequences.

Transition from IBORs to Alternative Risk Free Reference Rates: Widely used benchmark rates, such as the London Interbank Offered Rate (‘LIBOR’), have been subject to increasing regulatory scrutiny, with regulators signalling the need to use alternative benchmark rates. As a result, existing benchmark rates may be discontinued or the basis on which they are calculated may change.

Uncertainty as to the nature of such potential changes may adversely affect the value of a broad array of financial products, including any LIBOR-based securities, loans and derivatives. This may impact the availability and cost of hedging instruments and borrowings.

Any changes could have important implications for customers, for example: necessitating amendments to existing documents and contracts; and differential in performance of benchmark rates and financial products which reference them.

–  The Group is working closely with the Bank of England initiated Working Group on Sterling Risk-Free Reference Rates on the transition away from LIBOR in the UK.

–  Maintaining close engagement with the FCA on potential impacts.

–  Working closely with industry bodies to understand and manage the impact of benchmark transition in other geographies.

–  Transition programme established and the appointment of an IBOR Transition Director as accountable executive.

–  Developed a communication strategy for customers to ensure they understand the risks or outcomes they might face from transition.

–  Developing an implementation plan for new products and a transition plan for legacy products, taking into account market developments and lead times for product, process and system changes

–  Implementing an internal communication strategy to ensure that all staff are aware and have the tools and training required.

45

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

RISK GOVERNANCE

 

The Board approvesrisk governance structure below is integral to effective risk management across the Group’s overall RMF and sets risk appetite, both of which are designedGroup. Risk division is appropriately represented on key committees to ensure that the Group manages its risks in the right way to achieve its agreed strategic objectives. It has a dedicated Risk Committee of Non-Executive Directors who keep the design and performance of the Group’s RMF under close and regular scrutiny and interact closely with the executive risk management committee operating atis discussed in these meetings. This structure outlines the flow and escalation of risk information and reporting from business areas and Risk division to Group Executive Committee and Board. Conversely, strategic direction and guidance is cascaded down from the Board and Group Executive Committee.

Company Secretariat supports senior and Board-level committees, and supports the Chairs in agenda planning. This gives a further line of escalation outside the three lines of defence.

Table B: Risk governance structure

 

RISK AS A STRATEGIC DIFFERENTIATOR

Group strategy and risk appetite are developed together to ensure one informs the other to deliver on the Group’s purpose to help Britain prosper whilst becoming the best bank for customers.

Risks are identified, managed and mitigated using the Group’s comprehensive Risk Management Framework (RMF), (see page 39) and its clearly defined risk appetite, embedded in policies, authorities and limits provides a clear framework for effective business decision making. The principal risks the Group faces, which could significantly impact the delivery of its strategy, are discussed on pages 40 to 43.

The Group believes effective risk management can be a strategic differentiator, in particular:

Prudent approach to risk

Implementing a prudent approach to risk appetite across the Group, aligned to the embedding of a strong risk culture, driven both from the top and across the wider business, ensures the Group operates within risk appetite.

Strong control framework

The Group’s RMF acts as the foundation for the delivery of effective risk control and ensures that the Group risk appetite is continually developed and adhered to.

Business focus and accountability

Effective risk management is a key focus and is included in key performance measures against which individual business units are assessed. The business areas in the first line of defence are accountable for risk but with oversight from a strong and importantly independent, second line of defence Risk Division.

Effective risk analysis, management and reporting

Continuing to deliver close monitoring and stringent reporting to all levels of management and the Board on a regular basis ensures appetite limits are maintained and subject to stressed analysis at a risk type and portfolio level.

Sustainable growth

Embedding a risk culture that ensures proactive support and constructive challenge takes place across the business is important for delivering sustainable growth.


38

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Committee level. The Board and senior management encourage a culture of transparency and openness to ensure that issues are escalated promptly to them where required.

The Board approved RMF and risk appetite are put into effect using an enterprise-wide framework which applies to every area of the business and covers all types of risk. The framework is designed to ensure the Group follows a consistent approach to risk management and reporting throughout, so that all risks are fully understood and managed in relation to its agreed risk appetite. It includes the Group’s policies, procedures, controls and reporting.

A high level structure is shown in the diagram below.

The framework is reviewed, updated and approved by the Board at least annually to reflect any changes in the nature of the Group’s business and external regulations, law, corporate governance and industry best practice. This helps to ensure the Group continues to meet responsibilities to its customers, shareholders and regulators.

The Group’s risk appetite and the policy framework define clear parameters within which its business units must operate in order to deliver the best outcome for customers and stakeholders. An updated risk appetite statement was approved by the Board in 2016.

The Board delegates authorities for risk management through the Group Chief Executive and the management hierarchy to individuals, an approach which is consistent with the focus of the Senior Managers and Certification Regime (SM&CR) on the principle of individual accountability. At a senior level, executives are supported in their decision making by a committee-based governance structure. The concept of individual accountability for risk management is embedded in the RMF and culture at every level, and guides the way all employees approach their work, behave and make decisions.

An important element of the framework is the maintenance of strong internal controls which are owned and operated by individual business areas. The Group’s risk governance arrangements supported the effective implementation of the requirements of the SM&CR which came into force in 2016.

39
OPERATINGAND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

THE MOST SIGNIFICANT RISKS WHICH COULD IMPACT THE DELIVERY OF THE GROUP’S LONG-TERM STRATEGIC OBJECTIVES AND RESPONSES, ARE DETAILED BELOW

The Group has considered many of the potential implications following the UK’s vote to leave the European Union and the impact to its customers, colleagues and products – as well as legal, regulatory, tax, finance and capital implications.

Continued uncertainty surrounding the political and macroeconomic environment remains but the potential impacts of external factors have been considered in all principal risks and uncertainties to ensure any material uncertainties continue to be monitored and are appropriately mitigated.

Principal risks and uncertainties are reviewed and reported regularly and no new risks have been identified in the year.GROUP CHIEF EXECUTIVE COMMITTEES

 

PRINCIPAL RISKSGroup Executive Committee (GEC)
KEY MITIGATING ACTIONSGroup and Ring-Fenced Banks Risk Committees (GRC)

CREDIT RISK

The risk that customers and/or other counterparties whom the Group has either lent money to or entered into a financial contract with, or other counterparties with whom the Group has contracted, fail to meet their financial obligations, resulting in loss to the Group.

Adverse changes in the economic and market environment the Group operates in or the credit quality and/or behaviour of its customers and counterparties could reduce the value of the Group’s assets and potentially increase its write downs and allowances for impairment losses, adversely impacting profitability.

Example:

Whilst the Group has a deep understanding of credit risks across its commercial, mortgage and other portfolios; a changing economic environment, e.g. interest rate rises, can impact on customer affordabilityRing-Fenced Banks Asset and therefore the Group’s performance.Liability Committees (GALCO)
Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Customer First Committees
Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Cost Management Committees
Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Conduct Review Committees
Group and Ring-Fenced Banks People Committees
Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Sustainability Committees
Senior Independent Performance Adjustment and Conduct Committees
Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Strategic Review 3 Committees
Credit policy, incorporating prudent lending criteria, aligned with Board approved risk appetite, to effectively manage risk.
Robust risk assessment and credit sanctioning to ensure the Group lend appropriately and responsibly.
Extensive and thorough credit processes and controls to ensure effective risk identification, management and oversight.
Effective, well-established governance process supported by independent credit risk assurance.
Early identification of signs of stress leading to prompt action in engaging the customer.


REGULATORY AND LEGALBUSINESS AREA PRINCIPAL ENTERPRISE RISK

The risks of changing legislation, regulation, policies, voluntary codes of practice and their interpretation in the markets in which the Group operates can have a significant impact on the Group’s operations, business prospects, structure, costs and/or capital requirements and ability to enforce contractual obligations.

Examples:

Increased regulatory oversight and Prudential regulatory requirements.
Increased legislative requirements, such as ring-fencing legislation.
Ensure the Group develops comprehensive plans for delivery of all legal and regulatory changes and tracks their progress. Group-wide projects implemented to address significant impacts.
Continued investment in people, processes, training and IT to assess impact and help meet legal and regulatory commitments.
Engage with regulatory authorities and industry bodies on forthcoming regulatory changes, market reviews and investigations.


CONDUCT RISK

Conduct risk can arise from a number of areas including selling products to customers which do not meet their needs; failing to deal with customers’ complaints effectively; not meeting customers’ expectations; and exhibiting behaviours which do not meet market or regulatory standards.

Example:

The most significant conduct cost in recent years has been PPI mis-selling.
Conduct risk appetite metrics provide a granular view on how the Group’s products and services are performing for customers.
Product approval, review processes and outcome testing supported by conduct management information.
Learning from past mistakes through root cause analysis and clear customer accountabilities for colleagues, with rewards driven by customer-centric metrics.
The development of a refined framework for addressing thematic issues impacting customers in vulnerable circumstances.


OPERATIONAL RISK

The Group faces significant operational risks which may result in financial loss, disruption of services to customers, and damage to the Group’s reputation. These include the availability, resilience and security of core IT systems and the potential for failings in customer processes.

Examples:

A resilient IT environment is critical to providing reliable services to customers and enabling sustainable growth.
The dynamic threat posed by cyber risk on the integrity of electronic data or the availability of systems.
Continual review of the Group’s IT environment to ensure that systems and processes can effectively support customers’ requirements.
Enhancing the resilience of systems that support critical business processes with independent verification of progress on an annual basis.
Investing in enhanced cyber controls to protect against external threats to the confidentiality or integrity of electronic data, or the availability of systems and responding to findings from third party industry testing.


PEOPLE RISK

Key people risks include the risk that the Group fails to maintain organisational skills, capability, resilience and capacity levels in response to increasing volumes of organisational, political and external market change.

Example:

Inability to attract or retain colleagues with key skills could impact the achievement of business objectives.
Focused action to attract, retain and develop high calibre people. Delivering initiatives which reinforce behaviours to generate the best outcomes for customers and colleagues.
Managing organisational capability and capacity to ensure there are the right skills and resources to meet customers’ needs.
Effective remuneration arrangements to promote appropriate colleague behaviours and meet regulatory expectations.


40

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS COMMITTEES

 

KEY RISK INDICATORSALIGNMENT TO STRATEGIC PRIORITIES AND FUTURE FOCUSCommercial Banking Risk Committee

Impairment charge

 

Impaired assets

 

Delivering sustainable growth

Read more on page 53   

The Group has a conservative and well balanced UK credit portfolio, managed through the economic cycle and supported by strong credit portfolio management.

Credit risk decisions are consistent, fair and responsible, taking account of customers’ circumstances. The Group supports sustainable growth and meeting targets in the Helping Britain Prosper Plan while staying within prudent risk appetite.

Impairments remain below long term levels and are expected to increase as the level of write-backs and releases normalise. Emerging credit risks that have the potential to increase impairment include the global and UK economic environment, in particular increasing interest rates, as it can impact customer and counterparties’ affordability.

Retail Bank Risk Committee

Mandatory, legal

Insurance and regulatory investment spend

 

Delivering sustainable growth

Read more on page 108  

The Group is committed to operating sustainably and responsibly, and commit significant resource and expense to ensure the Group meets its legal and regulatory obligations.

The Group responds as appropriate to impending legislation and regulation and associated consultations and participates in industry bodies. The Group continues to be subject to significant ongoing and new legislation, regulation and court proceedings.

Wealth Risk Committee

Conduct risk appetite metric performance-Group

 

Creating the best customer experience

Read more on page 86   

As the Group transforms and simplifies the business, minimising conduct risk is critical to achieving its strategic goals and meeting market and regulatory standards.

The successful transition of the Group’s customer-focused Conduct Strategy into Business as Usual, following robust review by the Group Customer FirstTransformation Risk Committee supports the Group’s vision of being the best bank for customers, enabling the creation of the best customer experience through learning from past mistakes.

Availability of core systems

 

Creating the best customer experience

Read more on page 93   

The Group recognises that resilient and secure technology is critical to creating the best customer experience and maintaining trust across the wider industry.

The availability and resilience of IT systems remains a key strategic priority and the Cyber programme continues to focus on enhancing cyber security controls. The control environment is regularly assessed through internal and third party testing.

Finance Risk Committee

Best bank for customers index

 

Creating the best customer experience

Read more on page 110  

Continued regulatory change relating to personal accountabilityPeople and remuneration rules could affect the Group’s ability to attract and retain the calibre of colleagues required to meet changing customer needs. The Group continues to focus on developing colleagues, their capabilities and skills in order to create the best customer experience and to respond quickly to the rapidly evolving change in customers’ decision making, in an increasingly digital marketplace.Productivity Risk Committee
Group Corporate Affairs Risk Committee
41Group People Risk Committee
Responsible Business and Inclusion and Diversity Risk Committee

OPERATINGRISK DIVISION COMMITTEES AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTSGOVERNANCE

 

PRINCIPAL RISKSKEY MITIGATING ACTIONS

INSURANCE RISK

Key insurance risks within the Insurance business are longevity, persistency and property insurance. Longevity risk is expected to increase as the Group’s presence in the bulk annuity market increases. Longevity is also the key insurance risk in the Group’s Defined Benefit Pension Schemes.

Examples:

Increases in life expectancy (longevity) beyond current assumptions will increase the cost of annuities and pension scheme benefits.Credit Risk Committees
Group Market Risk Committee
Uncertain property insurance claims impact Insurance earningsGroup Conduct, Compliance and capital, e.g. extreme weather conditions, such as flooding, can result in high property damage claims.
Processes for underwriting, claims management, pricing and product design seek to control exposure. Longevity and bulk pricing experts support the bulk annuity proposition.Operational Risk Committee
The merits of longevity risk transferGroup Fraud and hedging solutions are regularly reviewed for both the Insurance business and the Group’s Defined Benefit Pension Schemes.Financial Crime Prevention Committee
Property insurance exposures are mitigated by a broad reinsurance programme.Group Financial Risk Committee
Group Capital Risk Committee
Group Model Governance Committee
Ring-Fenced Bank Perimeter Oversight Committee


CAPITAL RISK

The risk that the Group has a sub-optimal quantity or quality of capital or that capital is inefficiently deployed across the Group.

Example:

A worsening macroeconomic environment could lead to adverse financial performance, which could deplete capital resources and/or increase capital requirements due to a deterioration in customers’ creditworthiness.
A comprehensive capital management framework that sets and monitors capital risk appetite, including dividend policy appropriately.
Close monitoring of capital and leverage ratios to ensure the Group meets current and future regulatory requirements.
Comprehensive stress testing analysis to evidence capital adequacy under various adverse scenarios.


FUNDING AND LIQUIDITY RISK

The risk that the Group has insufficient financial resources to meet commitments as they fall due, or can only secure them at excessive cost.

Example:

The Group’s funding and liquidity position is underpinned by a significant and stable customer deposit base and is supported by strong relationships with corporate customers and certain wholesale market segments. A deterioration in either the Group’s or the UK’s credit rating, or a sudden and significant withdrawal of customer deposits, would adversely impact the Group’s funding and liquidity position.
Holding liquid assets to meet potential cash and collateral outflows, regulatory requirements and maintaining a further pool of secondary assets that can be used to access central bank liquidity facilities.
Undertaking daily monitoring against a number of market and Group-specific early warning indicators, maintaining a contingency funding plan detailing actions and strategies available in stressed conditions.


GOVERNANCE RISK

Against a background of increased regulatory focus on governance and risk management, the most significant challenges arise from the requirement to improve the resolvability of the Group and to ring-fence core UK financial services and activities from January 2019 and further requirements under the SM&CR which come into force from March 2017.

Example:

Non-compliance with or breaches of ring-fencing, resolution and SM&CR requirements will result in legal and regulatory consequences.
Leveraging the Group’s considerable change experience to meet ring-fencing and resolution planning requirements and the continuing evolution of SM&CR.
Programme in place to address ring-fencing and resolution planning. In close and regular contact with regulators to develop plans for the Group’s anticipated operating and legal structure.
Evolving risk and governance arrangements that continue to be appropriate to comply with regulatory objectives.


MARKET RISK

The risk that the Group’s capital or earnings profile is affected by adverse market rates, in particular interest rates and credit spreads in the Banking business, equity and credit spreads in the Insurance business, and credit spreads in the Group’s Defined Benefit Pension Schemes.

Examples:

Earnings are impacted by the Group’s ability to forecast and model customer behaviour accurately and establish appropriate hedging strategies.
The Insurance business is exposed indirectly to equity through the value of future management charges on policyholder funds. Credit spread risk within the Insurance business primarily arises from bonds and loans used to back annuities. Credit spreads affect the value of the Group’s Defined Benefit Pension Schemes’ liabilities.
Structural hedge programmes implemented to manage liability margins and margin compression, and the Group’s exposure to Bank Base Rate.
Equity and credit spread risks are closely monitored and, where appropriate, asset liability matching is undertaken to mitigate risk.
The Group’s Defined Benefit Pension Schemes have increased their credit allocation and hedged against nominal rate/inflation movements.
Stress and scenario testing of Group risk exposures.


42

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

KEY RISK INDICATORSALIGNMENT TO STRATEGIC PRIORITIES AND FUTURE FOCUS

Insurance (Life and Pensions) present value of new business premiums

 

Insurance (General Insurance) gross written premiums

 

Creating the best customer experience

Read more on page 109  

The Group is committed to meeting the changing needs of customers by working to provide a range of insurance products via multiple channels. The focus is on creating the best customer experience by helping customers protect themselves today whilst preparing for a secure financial future.

Strategic growth initiatives within Insurance are developed and managed in line with a defined risk appetite, aligned to the Group risk appetite and strategy.

Common equity tier 1 ratio1,2

 

Leverage ratio2

 

Delivering sustainable growth

Read more on page 101  

Ensuring the Group holds an appropriate level of capital to maintain financial resilience and market confidence, underpins its strategic objectives of supporting the UK economy and delivering sustainable growth.

Looking ahead, there are a number of regulatory capital framework changes which are yet to be finalised. These changes are being monitored closely as there is a risk that these could lead to higher capital requirements in the longer term.

Regulatory liquidity

 

Loan to deposit ratio

 

Delivering sustainable growth

Read more on page 95   

The Group maintains a strong funding position in line with its low risk strategy. The Group’s funding position has been significantly strengthened in recent years and the loan to deposit ratio remains within its target range.

Liquid assets now exceed the Group’s total wholesale funding. This provides a substantial buffer in the event of a market-wide stress which could reduce options to fund the Group’s balance sheet in future.

N/A

Delivering sustainable growth

Read more on page 111  

Ring-fencing will ensure the Group becomes safer and continues to create the best customer experience by providing further protection to core Retail and SME deposits, increasing transparency of the Group’s operations and facilitating the options available in resolution.

Resolution planning is intended to reduce the probability of failure and, through ensuring continuity of critical banking services, the impact on customers should the Group fail.

The Group’s Governance framework and strong culture of ownership and accountability enabled effective, on time, compliance with the SM&CR requirements which came into force from March 2016 and preparation for the SM&CR Certification requirements effective from March 2017.

Pension surplus/(deficit)

 

Delivering sustainable growth

Read more on page 87   

The Group manages exposure to movements in market rates throughout the year, leading the Group to promote low volatility earnings and offer a comprehensive customer proposition with market risk hedging strategies to support strategic aims, including delivering sustainable growth.

Mitigating actions are implemented to reduce the impact of market movements, resulting in a more stable capital position. This allows the Group to more efficiently utilise available capital resources to deliver sustainable growth.

Consistent with similar pension schemes, the Group’s Defined Benefit Pension Schemes were adversely impacted by the credit spread volatility in the third quarter of 2016. The interest rate and inflation hedging programmes remain effective.

1This key risk indicator is also a key performance indicator (KPI).
2The CET1 and leverage ratios at 31 December 2016 and 31 December 2015 are reported on an adjusted basis, including dividends paid by the Insurance business in February 2017 and February 2016 respectively, in relation to prior year earnings.
43

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

RISK MANAGEMENT IS AT THE HEART OF THE GROUP’S STRATEGY TO BECOME THE BEST BANK FOR CUSTOMERS

THE GROUP’S MISSION IS TO SUPPORT THE BUSINESS IN DELIVERING SUSTAINABLE GROWTH. THIS IS ACHIEVED THROUGH INFORMED RISK DECISION MAKING AND SUPERIOR RISK AND CAPITAL MANAGEMENT, SUPPORTED BY A CONSISTENT RISK-FOCUSED CULTURE

The risk overview (pages 38 to 43) provides a summary of risk management within the Group. It highlights the important role of risk as a strategic differentiator, risk achievements in 2016 along with a brief overview of the Group’s risk governance structure and the principal risks faced by the Group and key mitigating actions.

This full risk management section provides a more in-depth picture of how risk is managed within the Group, detailing the Group’s emerging risks, approach to stress testing, risk governance, committee structure, appetite for risk (pages 44 to 51) and a full analysis of the primary risk drivers (pages 52 to 112) – the framework by which risks are identified, managed, mitigated and monitored.

Each risk driver is described and managed using the following standard headings: definition, exposures, measurement, mitigation and monitoring.

THE GROUP’S APPROACH TO RISK

The Group operates a prudent approach to risk with rigorous management controls to support sustainable business growth and minimise losses. Through a strong and independent risk function (Risk Division) a robust control framework is maintained to identify and escalate current and emerging risks to support sustainable business growth within Board Risk Appetite and through good risk reward decision making.

Risk culture

The Board ensures that senior management implements risk policies and risk appetites that either limit or, where appropriate, prohibit activities, relationships and situations that could be detrimental to the Group’s risk profile.

As part of a conservative business model that embodies a risk culture founded on a prudent approach to managing risk, the Group reviewed its Codes of Business and Personal Responsibility in 2016 reinforcing its approach where colleagues are accountable for the risks they take and where the needs of customers are paramount.

The focus remains on building and sustaining long-term relationships with customers cognisant of the economic climate.

Risk appetite

Risk appetite is defined as ‘the amount and type of risk that the Group is prepared to seek, accept or tolerate.’

Risk appetite is documented in a Board Risk Appetite Statement which is reviewed by the Board Risk Committee and approved annually by the Board.

The Board metrics are supported by more detailed sub-Board functional and divisional risk appetite metrics.

The Board Risk Appetite is aligned to the Risk Appetite Framework, and in turn the Risk Management Framework and Group Risk Principles.

Risk appetite is embedded within principles, policies, authorities and limits across the Group and continues to evolve to reflect external market developments and composition of the Group.

The Group’s strategy operates in tandem with the Board Risk Appetite and business planning is undertaken with a view to meeting the requirements of the Board Risk Appetite.

Performance is optimised by allowing business units to operate within approved risk appetite and limits.

The Board Risk Committee is responsible for overseeing the development, implementation and maintenance of the Group’s overall risk management framework and its risk appetite, to ensure they are in line with emerging regulatory, corporate governance and industry best practice.

Board Risk Appetite includes the following areas:

Credit – the Group has a conservative and well balanced credit portfolio through the economic cycle.
Conduct – the Group’s product design and sales practices ensure that products are transparent and meet customer needs.
Market – the Group takes minimal proprietary trading risk, reflecting the customer focused nature of the Group’s activities.
Operational – the Group has robust controls in place to manage operational losses, reputational events and regulatory breaches. It identifies and assesses emerging risks and acts to mitigate these.
Funding and liquidity – the Group maintains a prudent liquidity profile to ensure it can survive under stressed conditions, and a balance sheet structure that limits its reliance on potentially volatile sources of funding.
Capital and earnings – the Group maintains capital levels commensurate with a prudent level of solvency, even under stressed conditions. It aims to deliver consistent and high quality earnings and has low appetite for earnings shocks or surprises from any risk type.
Regulatory and legal – the Group complies with all relevant regulation and all applicable laws (including Codes of Practice which could have legal implications) and/or legal obligations.
People – the Group leads responsibly and proficiently, manages its people resource effectively, supports and develops colleague talent, and meets legal and regulatory obligations related to its people.
Financial reporting – the Group meets regulatory reporting and tax requirements in jurisdictions where it operates and ensures the timely and transparent disclosure and dissemination of information relating to its listed debt or equity.
44

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Governance – the Group has governance arrangements that support the effective long-term operation of the business, maximise shareholder value and meet regulatory and societal expectations.
As a separate regulated entity with its own Board, the Insurance business has its own Risk Appetite and maintains its own Risk Appetite framework, aligned to the Group Risk Appetite framework

GOVERNANCE AND CONTROL

The Group’s approach to risk is founded on a robust control framework and a strong risk management culture which are the foundation for the delivery of effective risk management and guide the way all employees approach their work, behave and make decisions.
Governance is maintained through delegation of authority from the Board down to individuals through the management hierarchy. Senior executives are supported by a committee based structure which is designed to ensure open challenge and support effective decision making.
The Group’s risk appetite, principles, policies, procedures, controls and reporting are regularly reviewed and updated where needed to ensure they remain fully in line with regulations, law, corporate governance and industry good-practice.
The interaction of the executive and non-executive governance structures relies upon a culture of transparency and openness that is encouraged by both the Board and senior management.
Board-level engagement, coupled with the direct involvement of senior management in Group-wide risk issues at Group Executive Committee level, ensures that escalated issues are promptly addressed and remediation plans are initiated where required.
Line management is directly accountable for identifying and managing risks in their individual businesses, ensuring that business decisions strike an appropriate balance between risk and reward consistent with the Group’s risk appetite.
Clear responsibilities and accountabilities for risk are defined across the Group through a Three Lines of Defence model which ensures effective independent oversight and assurance in respect of key decisions.

RISK DECISION MAKING AND REPORTING

Taking risks which are well understood, consistent with strategy and with appropriate return is a key driver of shareholder value.
Risk analysis and reporting supports the identification of opportunities as well as risks.
An aggregate view of the Group’s overall risk profile, key risks and management actions, and performance against risk appetite, is reported to and discussed monthly at the Group Risk Committee (and a subset at the Group Asset and Liability Committee), with regular reporting to the Board Risk Committee and the Board.
Rigorous stress testing exercises are carried out to assess the impact of a range of adverse scenarios with different probabilities and severities to inform strategic planning.
The Chief Risk Officer regularly informs the Board Risk Committee (BRC) of the aggregate risk profile and as a member of the Board, has direct access to the Chairman and members of BRC.

Table 1.1:Exposure to risk arising from the business activities of the Group

The table below provides a high level guide to how the Group’s business activities are reflected in its risk measures and balance sheet. Details of the business activities for each division are provided in the Divisional Results on pages 28 to 34.

 Retail
£bn
Commercial
Banking
£bn
Consumer
Finance
£bn
Run-off
£bn
Central
Items1
£bn
Insurance2
£bn
Group
£bn
Risk-weighted assets (RWAs)       
– Credit risk39.778.228.68.311.9166.7
– Counterparty credit risk38.61.09.6
– Market risk3.13.1
– Operational risk15.56.13.50.225.3
Total (excluding threshold)55.296.032.18.512.9204.7
– Threshold410.710.7
Total55.296.032.18.523.6215.4

1Central Items include assets held outside the main operating divisions, including exposures relating to Group Corporate Treasury which holds the Group’s liquidity portfolio, and Group Operations.
2As a separate regulated business, Insurance maintains its own regulatory solvency requirements, including appropriate management buffers, and reports directly to the Insurance Board. Insurance does not hold any RWAs, as its assets are removed from the Banking Group’s regulatory capital calculations. However, part of the Group’s investment in Insurance is included In the calculation of Threshold RWAs, subject to CRD IV rules, while the remainder is taken as a capital deduction.
3Exposures relating to the default fund of a central counterparty and credit valuation adjustment risk are included in counterparty credit risk.
4Threshold is presented on a fully loaded CRD IV basis. Threshold risk-weighted assets reflect the element of significant investments and deferred tax assets that are permitted to be risk-weighted instead of deducted from CET1 capital. Significant investments primarily arise from the investment in the Group’s Insurance business.

PRINCIPAL RISKS

The Group’s principal risks are shown in the risk overview (pages 40 to 43). The Group’s emerging risks are shown overleaf. Full analysis of the Group’s risk drivers is on pages 52 to 112.

45

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

EMERGING RISKS

The Group considers the following to be risks that have the potential to increase in significance and affect the performance of the Group.

These risks are considered alongside the Group’s operating plan.

RiskKey mitigating actions
Regulatory and legal: The industry continues to witness increased government and regulatory intervention in the financial sector with increasing regulatory rules and laws from both the UK and overseas affecting the Group’s operation.

–  The Group continues to embed the strategic conduct agenda across all areas ensuring that the customer is at the heart of the Group’s business planning, whilst working closely with regulatory authorities and industry bodies to ensure that the Group can identify and respond to the evolving regulatory and legal landscape.

–  Programmes in place to deliver regulatory and legal change requirements.

Macroeconomic headwinds and political uncertainties: Political uncertainties over the UK’s relationship with EU Countries remains with US election outcomes and European elections adding to a globally uncertain political and macroeconomic outlook.

–  Internal contingency plans recalibrated and regularly reviewed for potential strategic, operational and reputational impacts.

–  Engagement with politicians, officials, media, trade and other bodies to reassure the Group’s commitment to Helping Britain Prosper.

–  Wide array of risks considered in setting strategic plans.

–  Capital and Liquidity is reviewed regularly through committees, ensuring compliance with risk appetite/regulatory requirements.

IT resilience and cyber: Increasing digitisation places greater reliance on the provision of resilient and secure services to customers. Potential increases in the volume of cyber-attacks could disrupt service for customers, causing financial loss/reputational damage.

–  Continued delivery of cyber control framework and investment in Cyber programme.

–  Operational Resilience activities will be combined with currency upgrades to form a new Technology Resilience programme.

Response to market changes (agility): As technology and customer needs change, the typical banking model is evolving and as such, operational complexity has the potential to restrict the Group’s speed of response.

–  Organisational and behavioural effectiveness is regularly reviewed, ensuring simplicity/efficiency, supporting the Group’s strategy.

–  Sustained and continuing investment in digital capability and customer channels; plans updated to reflect market trends/customer behaviour.

Strategic use of customer data: Impacts of Data Regulation in respect of data sharing, data privacy and data loss, noting the need to defend against dynamic external challengers and consumer expectations. Failure to address growth in data movement or understand the Supply Chain/Third party controls may increase exposure to Cyber/Fraud leading to conduct/reputational issues.

–  Assessment of the possible impacts of legislation is ongoing; delivery of enhanced systems and processes to fulfil related regulatory requirements.

–  Chief Data Officer reviewing operating model and identifying opportunities to enhance the associated control environment.

Ring-fencing:Legislation and rules impact the business and operating model and cost of serving customers effectively. EU Exit/ heightened implementation risk may require a change to target business/ operational model adding complexity, timescales and execution costs.

–  Updates reported to Board and GEC on key components of non ring-fence programmes.

–  The Group is actively engaged with HM Treasury, the PRA and FCA to ensure that it is able to fully implement the restructuring required to implement ring-fencing by the January 2019 deadline.

Resolution:Plans are in place to deliver on bail-in-able debt (MREL) for the Group by 1 January 2022 (interim target 1 January 2020); uncertainty surrounds investor appetite/pricing as many banks will approach the same investor base over a similar period.–  Early engagement with investors; capitalising on the Group’s name in the market, and spread issuance over the time window available.
Geopolitical shocks: Current uncertainties could further impede the global economic recovery. Events in China, Russia, the Middle-East, as well as terrorist activity, have the potential to worsen economic outlook and funding conditions.

–  Risk appetite criteria limits single counterparty bank/non-bank exposures complemented by a UK-focused strategy.

–  Financial Stability Forum develops and maintains Stability Response Plan; acting as a Rapid Reaction Group, when external crises occur.

46

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

BOARD, EXECUTIVE AND RISK COMMITTEES

The Group’s risk governance structure (see table B) strengthens risk evaluation and management, while also positioning the Group to manage the changing regulatory environment in an efficient and effective manner.

Assisted by the Board Risk and Audit Committees, the Board approves the Group’s overall governance, risk and control frameworks and risk appetite. Refer to the Corporate Governance section on pages 143 to 169, for further information on Board committees.

The divisional and functional risk committees review and recommend divisional and functional risk appetite and monitor local risk profile and adherence to appetite.

Table C:Executive and Risk Committees

The Group Chief Executive is supported by the following:

CommitteesRisk focus
Group Executive Committee (GEC)Assists the Group Chief Executive in exercising their authority in relation to material matters having strategic, cross-business area or Group-wide implications.
Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Risk Committees (GRC)Responsible for the development, implementation and effectiveness of the Group’s enterprise risk management framework, the clear articulation of the Group’s risk appetite and monitoring and reviewing of the Group’s aggregate risk exposures and concentrations of risk.
Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Asset and Liability Committees (GALCO)Responsible for the strategic direction of the Group’s assets and liabilities and the profit and loss implications of balance sheet management actions. The committee reviews and determines the appropriate allocation of capital, funding and liquidity, and market risk resources and makes appropriate trade-offs between risk and reward.
Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Customer First CommitteesProvides a Group-wide perspective of customer experience and the governing body of customer plans and targets including governing targets and plans, oversight of customer outcomes and experience, and learning through best practice externally and leveraging Group memberships and partnerships.
Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Cost Management CommitteesLeads and shapes the Group’s approach to cost management, ensuring appropriate governance and process over Group-wide cost management activities and effective control of the Group’s cost base.
Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Conduct Review CommitteesProvides senior management oversight, challenge and accountability in connection with the Group’s engagement with conduct review matters as agreed with the Group Chief Executive.
Group and Ring-Fenced Banks People CommitteesOversees the Group’s people and colleague policies, the remuneration policy and Group-wide remuneration matters, oversees compliance with Senior Manager and Certification Regime (SM&CR) and other regulatory requirements, monitors colleague engagement surveys, progress of the Group towards its culture targets and oversees the implementation of action plans.
Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Sustainability CommitteesRecommends and implements the strategy and plans for delivering the Group’s aspiration to be viewed as a trusted responsible business as part of the purpose of Helping Britain Prosper.
Senior Independent Performance Adjustment and Conduct CommitteesResponsible for providing recommendations regarding performance adjustment, including the individual risk-adjustment process and risk-adjusted performance assessment, and making final decisions on behalf of the Group on the appropriate course of action relating to conduct breaches, under the formal scope of the SM&CR.
Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Strategic Review 3 CommitteesResponsible for monitoring the progress of transformation across the Group, acting as a clearing house to resolve issues and facilitate resolution of issues where necessary and to drive the execution of the Group’s transformation agenda as agreed by the Group Chief Executive.
The Group Risk Committee is supported through escalation and ongoing reporting by business area risk committees, cross-divisional committees addressing specific matters of Group-wide significance and the following second line of defence Risk committees which ensure effective oversight of risk management:
Credit Risk CommitteesReview material credit risk, both current and emerging, and adherence to agreed risk appetite; provide insight into the performance of material credit portfolios against expectation, forecast, metrics, portfolio controls to ensure they remain within agreed credit risk appetite; provide assurance that new business is being written within agreed credit risk appetite; ensure credit risk exposures causing concerns and any risks or issues are identified as early as possible so that remedial action may be taken; review information on credit impairment levels and allowance for expected credit losses; review information on the performance of credit risk models; and the reporting of monitoring activities relating to residual value risk.
Group Market Risk Committee

Reviews and recommends market risk appetites. Monitors and oversees market risk exposures across the Group and adherence to Board risk appetite. Approves the framework and designation of books between the Trading Book and the Banking Book for regulatory purposes.

Responsible for reviewing and proposing changes to the market risk management framework, and for reviewing adequacy of data quality for managing market risks.

47

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

CommitteesRisk focus
Group Conduct, Compliance and Operational Risk CommitteeActs as a Risk community forum to independently challenge and oversee the Group-wide risk and control environment, using read-across and lessons learned from the three lines of defence to ensure that the Group-wide risk profile adapts to emerging risks, trends and themes, and the control environment is sustainable to deliver the Bank of the Future.
Group Fraud and Financial Crime Prevention CommitteeThe Fraud and Financial Crime Prevention Committee brings together accountable stakeholders and subject matter experts to ensure that the development and application of fraud and financial crime risk management complies with the Group’s Strategic Aims, Group Corporate Responsibility, Group risk appetite and Group Fraud and Financial Crime (Anti-Money Laundering, Anti-bribery and Sanctions) policies. It provides direction and appropriate focus on priorities to enhance the Group’s fraud and financial crime risk management capabilities in line with business and customer objectives whilst aligning to the Group’s target operating model.
Group Financial Risk CommitteeResponsible for overseeing, reviewing, challenging and recommending to senior executives and Board committees on internal and regulatory stress tests, Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process, Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process, Pillar 3 disclosures, Recovery and Resolution Plans, and other analysis as required.
Group Capital Risk CommitteeResponsible for providing oversight of all relevant capital matters within the Group, Ring Fenced bank and material subsidiaries, including the Group’s latest capital position and plans, risk appetite proposals, Pillar 2 development updates relating to ICAAP, Recovery and Resolution and the impact from regulatory reforms and accounting developments specific to capital.
Group Model Governance CommitteeResponsible for approving the model governance framework, the associated policy and related principles and procedures; reviewing and approving models, model changes, model extensions and capital post model adjustments; recommending those models which require GRC approval to GRC; approving summary of model performance, approving any appropriate corrective actions; and supporting approval of risk appetite performance and escalating as required.
Ring Fenced Bank Perimeter Oversight CommitteeThe Committee escalates perimeter control breaches to the Ring-Fenced Banks’ Board and the Ring-Fenced Banks’ Board Risk Committee.

CAPITAL STRESS TESTING

 

OVERVIEW

 

Stress testing is recognised as a key risk management tool within the Group by the Board,Boards, senior management, the businesses and the Risk and Finance functions.functions of all parts of the Group and its legal entities. It is fully embedded in the planning process of the Group and its legal entities as a key activity in medium termmedium-term planning, and senior management is actively involved in stress testing activities via a strict governance process.

 

The Group uses scenarioScenario stress testing is used for:

 

Risk identification:Identification:

To understandUnderstand key vulnerabilities of the Group and its key legal entities under adverse economic conditions.

Risk appetite:

Risk Appetite:
Assess the results of the stress test against the Group’s risk appetite of all parts of the Group to ensure the Group isand its legal entities are managed within itstheir risk parameters.
  
Inform the setting of risk appetite by assessing the underlying risks under stress conditions.

Strategic and capital planning:

Strategic and Capital Planning:
Allow senior management and the BoardBoards of the Group and its applicable legal entities to adjust strategies if the plan does not meet risk appetite in a stressed scenario.
  
Support the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) by demonstrating capital adequacy, and meet the requirements of regulatory stress tests that are used to inform the setting of the Group’s PRAPrudential Regulation Authority (PRA) and management buffers (see Capital Riskcapital risk on pages 10185 to 108).94) of the Group and its separately regulated legal entities.

Risk mitigation:

Risk Mitigation:
 Drive the development of potential actions and contingency plans to mitigate the impact of adverse scenarios. Stress testing also links directly to the Group’s Recovery Planning process.recovery planning process of the Group and its legal entities.

REGULATORY STRESS TESTS

 

During 2016,In 2019, the Group was subject toparticipated in both the European Banking Authority’s Europe-wideAnnual Cyclical Scenario (ACS) UK stress test withand the Group’s results significantly above minimum capital requirements. The concurrent UK stress testBiennial Exploratory Scenario (BES) run by the Bank of England was also undertaken in 2016. As announced in November,(BoE). Despite the severity of the ACS stress, the Group comfortably exceeded the capital thresholds set byand leverage hurdles on a transitional basis, after the Prudential Regulation Authorityapplication of management actions and as a consequence was not required to take any action as a resultcapital actions. The BoE continues to review the outputs of this test.the BES exercise.

 

INTERNAL STRESS TESTS

 

AtOn at least on an annual basis, the Group conducts macroeconomic stress tests of the operating plan, which isare supplemented with higher-level refreshes if necessary. The exercise aims to highlight the key vulnerabilities of the Group’s and its legal entities’ business planplans to adverse changes in the economic environment, and to ensure that there are adequate financial resources in the event of a downturn.

 

REVERSE STRESS TESTING

 

Reverse stress testing is used to explore the vulnerabilities of the Group’s and its key legal entities’ strategies and plans to extreme adverse events that would cause the businessbusinesses to fail, in order to facilitate contingency planning. The scenarios used are those that would cause the Group to be unable to carry on its business activities.fail. Where reverse stress testing revealsthis identifies plausible scenarios with an unacceptably high risk, when considered against the Group’s risk appetite, the Group or its entities will adopt measures to prevent or mitigate that risk, which are then reflectedand reflect these in strategic plans.

 

OTHER STRESS TESTING ACTIVITY

 

The Group’s stress testing programme also involves undertaking assessmentassessments of liquidity scenarios, market risk sensitivities and scenarios, and business specific scenarios (see the principal risksrisk categories on pages 52138 to 112187 for further information on risk specificrisk-specific stress testing). If required, ad hoc stress testing exercises are also undertaken to assess emerging risks, as well as in response to regulatory requests. This wide ranging programme provides a comprehensive view of the potential impacts arising from the risks to which the Group is exposed and reflects the nature, scale and complexity of the Group. From 2020 onwards, climate change risk stress testing will be considered as part of the implementation of the recommendations of the Taskforce on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD).


48

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

METHODOLOGY

 

The stress tests at all levels must comply with all regulatory requirements, achieved through the comprehensive construction of macroeconomic scenarios and a rigorous divisional, functional, risk and executive review and challenge process, supported by analysis and insight into impacts on customers and business drivers.

 

The engagement of all required business, Risk and Finance areasteams is built into the preparation process, so that the appropriate analysis of each risk driver’scategory’s impact upon the business plans is understood and documented. The methodologies and modelling approach used for stress testing ensure that a clear link is shown between the macroeconomic scenarios, the business drivers for each area and the resultant stress testing outputs. All material assumptions used in modelling are documented and justified, with a clearly communicated review and sign-off process. Modelling is supported by expert judgement and is subject to the Group Model Governance Policy.

GOVERNANCE

 

Clear accountabilities and responsibilities for stress testing are assigned to senior management and the Risk and Finance functions throughout the Group.Group and its key legal entities. This is formalised through the Group Business Planning and Stress Testing Policy and Procedure, which are reviewed at least annually.

 

The Group Financial Risk Committee (GFRC), chaired by the Chief Risk Officer and attended by the Chief Financial Officer and other senior Risk and Finance colleagues, is the Committeecommittee that has primary responsibility for overseeing the development and execution of the Group’s and Ring-Fenced Bank’s stress tests. Lloyds Bank Corporate Markets (LBCM) Risk Committee performs a similar function within the scope of LBCM.

 

The review and challenge of the Group’s and Ring-Fenced Bank’s detailed stress forecasts, the key assumptions behind these, and the methodology used to translate the economic assumptions into stressed outputs conclude with the divisional Finance Director’s,Directors’, appropriate Risk Director’sDirectors’ and Managing Director’sDirectors’ sign-off. The outputs are then presented to GFRC Group Asset and Liability Committee/Group Risk Committee/Group Executive Committee and Board Risk Committee for Group-level executive review and challenge, before being approved by the Board.

47

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

HOW RISK IS MANAGED IN LLOYDS BANKING GROUP

The Group’s Risk Management Framework (RMF) (see risk overview, page 38) is structured around the following nine components which meet and align with the industry-accepted internal control framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organisations of the Treadway Commission.

The RMF provides the Group with an effective mechanism for developing and embedding risk policies and risk management strategies which are aligned with the risks faced by its businesses. It also seeks to facilitate effective communication on these matters across the Group.

Role of the Board and senior management

Key responsibilities of the Board and senior management include:

setting risk appetite and approval of the RMF;
approval of Group-wide risk principles and policies;
the cascade of delegated authority (for example to Board sub-committees and the Group Chief Executive); and
effective oversight over risk management consistent with the risk appetite.

Risk appetite

Risk appetite is defined within the Group as ‘the amount and type of risk that the Group is prepared to seek, accept or tolerate’ (see The Group’s approach to Risk page 44).

GOVERNANCE FRAMEWORKS

The Policy framework is founded on Board-approved key principles for the overall management of risk in the organisation, which are aligned with Group strategy and risk appetite and based on a current and comprehensive risk profile that identifies all material risks to the organisation. The principles are underpinned by a hierarchy of policies which define mandatory requirements for risk management and control which are consistently implemented across the Group.
The risk committee governance framework is outlined below.

Three Lines of Defence model – the RMF is implemented through a ‘Three Lines of Defence’ model which defines clear responsibilities and accountabilities and ensures effective independent oversight and assurance activities take place covering key decisions.

Business lines (first line) have primary responsibility for risk decisions, identifying, measuring, monitoring and controlling risks within their areas of accountability. They are required to establish effective governance, and control frameworks for their business to be compliant with Group Policy requirements, to maintain appropriate risk management skills, mechanisms and toolkits, and to act within Group risk appetite parameters set and approved by the Board.
Risk Division (second line) is a centralised function providing oversight and independent constructive challenge to the effectiveness of risk decisions taken by business management, providing proactive advice and guidance, reviewing challenging and reporting on the risk profile of the Group and ensuring that mitigating actions are appropriate.
Group Audit (third line) provides independent and objective assurance designed to add value and improve the organisation’s operations. It helps the Group accomplish its objectives by bringing a systematic, disciplined approach to evaluate and improve the effectiveness of risk management, control and governance processes. Group Audit provides independent assurance to the Audit Committee and the Board that risks within the Group are recognised, monitored and managed within acceptable parameters. Group Audit is fully independent of the business and the Risk Division, and seeks to ensure objective challenge to the effectiveness of the risk governance framework.

Mandate of the Risk Division– the objective of Risk Division is to provide both proactive advice and constructive challenge to the business. It also has a key role in promoting the implementation of a strategic approach to risk management reflecting the risk appetite and RMF agreed by the Board that encompasses:

embedded effective risk management processes;
transparent focused risk monitoring and reporting;
provision of expert and high quality advice and guidance to the Board, executives and management on strategic issues and horizon scanning including pending regulatory changes; and
a constructive dialogue with the first line through provision of advice, development of common methodologies, understanding, education, training, and development of new tools.

Risk Division, headed by the Chief Risk Officer, consists of eight Risk Directors and their specialist teams. These teams provide oversight and independent challenge to business management and support senior management and the Board with independent reporting on risks and opportunities. Risk Directors, responsible for each risk type, meet on a regular basis under the chairmanship of the Chief Risk Officer to review and challenge the risk profile of the Group and to ensure that mitigating actions are appropriate.

The Chief Risk Officer is accountable for developing and leading an industry-wide recognised Risk function that adds value to the Group by:

providing a regular comprehensive view of the Group’s risk profile, both current and emerging key risks, and management actions;
(with input from the business areas and Risk Division) proposing Group risk appetite to the Board for approval, and overseeing performance of the Group against risk appetite;
developing an effective RMF which meets regulatory requirements for approval by the Board, and overseeing execution and compliance; and
challenging management on emerging risks and providing expert risk and control advice to help management maintain an effective risk and control framework.
48

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

The Risk Directors:

provide independent advice, oversight and challenge to the business;
design, develop and maintain policies, specific functional risk type frameworks and guidance to ensure alignment with business imperatives and regulatory requirements;
establish and maintain appropriate governance structures, culture, oversight and monitoring arrangements which ensure robust and efficient compliance with relevant risk-type risk appetites and policies;
lead regulatory liaison on behalf of the Group including horizon scanning and regulatory development for their risk type; and
propose risk appetite and oversight of the associated risk profile across the Group.

Risk identification, measurement and control– the process for risk identification, measurement and control is integrated into the overall framework for risk governance. Risk identification processes are forward looking to ensure emerging risks are identified. Risks are captured in comprehensive risk logs/ registers, and measured using robust and consistent quantification methodologies. The measurement of risks includes the application of stress testing and scenario analysis, and considers whether relevant controls are in place before risks are incurred.

Risk monitoring, aggregation and reporting– identified risks are logged and reported on a monthly basis or as frequently as necessary to the appropriate committee. The extent of the risk is compared to the overall risk appetite as well as specific limits or triggers. When thresholds are breached, committee minutes are clear on the actions and timeframes required to resolve the breach and bring risk within given tolerances. There is a clearsimilar process within LBCM for escalation of risks and risk events.

All business areas complete a Control Effectiveness Review (CER) annually, reviewing the effectiveness of their internal controls and putting in place a programme of enhancements where appropriate. The CER reports are approved at Divisional Risk Committees or directly by the relevant membergovernance of the Group Executive Committee to confirm the accuracy of the assessment. This key process is overseen and independently challenged by Risk Division, reviewed by Group Audit against the findings of its assurance activities, and reported to the Board.LBCM-specific results.

Risk culture– supporting the formal frameworks of the RMF is the underlying culture, or shared behaviours and values, which sets out in clear terms what constitutes good behaviour and good practice. In order to effectively manage risk across the organisation, the functions encompassed within the Three Lines of Defence have a clear understanding of risk appetite, business strategy and an understanding of (and commitment to) the role they play in delivering it. A number of levers are used to reinforce the risk culture, including tone from the top, clear accountabilities, effective communication and challenge and an appropriately aligned performance incentive and structure.

Risk resources and capabilities– appropriate mechanisms are in place to avoid over-reliance on key personnel or system/technical expertise within the Group. Adequate resources are in place to serve customers both under normal working conditions and in times of stress, and monitoring procedures are in place to ensure that the level of available resource can be increased if required. Colleagues undertake appropriate training to ensure they have the skills and knowledge necessary to enable them to deliver fair outcomes for customers, being mindful of the Group’s strategic conduct agenda, Customer Treatment Policy/Standards and Financial Conduct Authority requirements.

There is ongoing investment in risk systems and models alongside the Group’s investment in customer and product systems and processes. This drives improvements in risk data quality, aggregation and reporting leading to effective and efficient risk decisions.

49

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

RISK GOVERNANCE

The risk governance structure below is integral to effective risk management across the Group. Risk Division is appropriately represented on key committees to ensure that risk management is discussed in these meetings. This structure outlines the flow and escalation of risk information and reporting from business areas and Risk Division to GEC and Board. Conversely, strategic direction and guidance is cascaded down from the Board and GEC.

Company Secretariat support senior and Board level committees, and support the Chairs in agenda planning. This gives a further line of escalation outside the Three Lines of Defence.

Table 1.2:Risk governance structure

 

GROUP CHIEF EXECUTIVE COMMITTEESBUSINESS AREA PRINCIPAL ENTERPRISE RISK COMMITTEESRISK DIVISION COMMITTEES AND GOVERNANCE

Group Executive Committee (GEC)

Group Risk Committee (GRC)

Group Asset and Liability Committee (GALCO)

Group Customer First Committee

Group Cost Management Committee

Conduct Review Committee

Executive Compensation Committee

Responsible Business Management Committee

Retail Risk Committee

Consumer Finance Risk Committee

Customer Products and Markets Risk

Committee

Commercial Banking Risk Committee

Digital Risk Committee

Insurance Risk Committee

Finance Risk Committee

Group Operations Risk Committee

Group Functions Executive/Risk Committees

Risk Division Risk Committee

Credit Risk

– Executive Credit Approval Committee

– Commercial Banking Credit Risk Committees

– Retail & Consumer Credit Risk Committees

Market Risk

– Group Market Risk Committee

Conduct, Compliance and Operational Risk

– Group Conduct, Compliance & Operational Risk Committee

Fraud and Financial Crime Risk

– Group Financial Crime Prevention Committee

– Group Fraud Committee

Financial Risk

– Group Financial Risk Committee

Capital Risk

– Group Capital Risk Committee

Model Risk

– Group Model Governance Committee

Insurance Risk through the governance arrangements for Insurance Group

(Insurance Group is a separate regulated entity with its own Board, governance structure and Chief Risk Officer)

50

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

BOARD, EXECUTIVE AND RISK COMMITTEES

The Group’s risk governance structure (see table 1.2) strengthens risk evaluation and management, while also positioning the Group to manage the changing regulatory environment in an efficient and effective manner.

Assisted by the Board Risk and Audit Committees, the Board approves the Group’s overall governance, risk and control frameworks and risk appetite. Refer to the Corporate Governance section on pages 152 to 176, for further information on Board committees.

The divisional/functional risk committees review and recommend divisional/functional risk appetite and monitor local risk profile and adherence to appetite.

Insurance, which is subject to separate regulation, has its own Board and governance structure. The Insurance Board, assisted by a Risk Oversight Committee and Audit Committee, approves the governance, risk and control frameworks for the Insurance business and the Insurance business risk appetite, ensuring it aligns with the Group’s framework and risk appetite.

Table 1.3:Executive and Risk Committees

The Group Chief Executive is supported by the following:

CommitteesRisk focus
Group Executive Committee (GEC)Supports the Group Chief Executive in exercising his authority in relation to material matters having strategic, cross-business area or Group-wide implications.
Group Risk Committee (GRC)Reviews and recommends the Group’s risk appetite and governance, risk and control frameworks, material Group policies and the allocation of risk appetite. The committee also regularly reviews risk exposures and risk/reward returns and approves material risk models.
Group Asset and Liability Committee (GALCO)Responsible for the strategic management of the Group’s assets and liabilities and the profit and loss implications of balance sheet management actions. It is also responsible for the risk management framework for market risk, liquidity risk, capital risk and earnings volatility.
Group Customer First Committee (GCFC)Provides a Group-wide perspective on the progress of Group’s, Divisions’ and Functions’ implementation of initiatives which enhance the delivery of customer outcomes and customer trust, and set and promote the appropriate tone from the top to fulfil the Group’s vision to become the best bank for customers and Help Britain Prosper.
Group Cost Management CommitteeLeads and shapes the Group’s approach to cost management, ensuring appropriate governance and process over Group-wide cost management activities and effective control of the Group’s cost base.
Conduct Review CommitteeProvides oversight and challenge in connection with the Group’s engagement with conduct review matters as agreed with the Group Chief Executive.
Executive Compensation CommitteeProvides governance and oversight for Group-wide remuneration matters and policies.
Responsible Business Management CommitteeRecommends and implements the strategy and plans to deliver the Group’s aspiration to be a leader in responsible business as part of the objective of helping Britain prosper.
The Group Risk Committee is supported through escalation and ongoing reporting by business area risk committees, cross-divisional committees addressing specific matters of Group-wide significance and the following Risk committees which ensure effective oversight of risk management:
Credit Risk CommitteesResponsible for the development and effectiveness of the relevant credit risk management framework, clear description of the Group’s credit risk appetite, setting of credit policy, and compliance with regulatory credit requirements.
Group Market Risk Committee (GMRC)Monitors and reviews the Group’s aggregate market risk exposures and concentrations and provides a proactive and robust challenge around business activities giving rise to market risks.
Group Conduct, Compliance and Operational Risk CommitteeResponsible for monitoring breaches, material events and risk issues and conducting deep dive assessments on specific Conduct, Compliance or Operational Risk subjects to inform corrective action along with the sharing of information and best practice.
Group Financial Crime Prevention CommitteeReviews and challenges the management of financial crime risk including the overall strategy and performance and engagement with financial crime authorities. The committee is accountable for ensuring that, at Group level, financial crime risks are effectively identified and managed within risk appetite and that strategies for financial crime prevention are effectively co-ordinated and implemented across the Group.
Group Fraud CommitteeIs responsible for ensuring that the development and application of fraud risk management complies with the Group’s strategic aims and risk appetite, and broader corporate responsibilities. The committee provides direction and focus to priorities which enhance the Group’s fraud risk management capabilities in line with business and customer objectives, including engagement with external fraud detection and prevention bodies.
Group Financial Risk CommitteeResponsible for reviewing, challenging and recommending to GEC/GRC/GALCO, the Group Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment and Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) submissions, the Group Recovery Plan, and the annual stress testing of the Group’s operating plan, PRA and EBA stress tests, and any other analysis as required.
Group Capital Risk CommitteeProvides oversight of capital matters within the Group including the Group’s capital position, Pillar 2 requirements, regulatory reform and accounting developments specific to capital, and reviews regulatory submissions including the ICAAP and Recovery Plan prior to submission to GFRC.
Group Model Governance CommitteeResponsible for setting the framework and standards for model governance across the Group, including establishing appropriate levels of delegated authority and principles underlying the Group’s risk modelling framework, specifically regarding consistency of approach across business units and risk types. It approves risk models other than material models which are approved by GRC.
51

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS


 

FULL ANALYSIS OF RISK DRIVERSCATEGORIES

 

The Group’s risk framework covers all types of risk which affect the Group and could impact on the achievement of its strategic objectives. A detailed description of each category is provided below.on pages 50 to 108.

 

PRIMARY RISK DRIVERSRisk categories recognised by the Group are periodically reviewed to ensure that they reflect the Group risk profile in light of internal and external factors, such as the Group strategy and the regulatory environment in which it operates. There have been no changes to the risk categories during 2019.

 

CreditPrincipal risk categoriesConduct
Secondary risk
categories
Market
risk
Operational
Change/Execution riskFunding
and liquidity
risk
– Change/Execution
Capital
risk
Regulatory
and legal risk
Page 50Insurance riskPeople riskFinancial reporting riskGovernance
risk
    
Data risk– Data
Page 50   
    
Page 53Operational resilience riskPage 86– Operational resiliencePage 87Page 93Page 95Page 101Page 108Page 109Page 110Page 111Page 111

SECONDARY RISK DRIVERS

Portfolio concentration risk

Counterparty credit risk

Country risk

Collateral management risk

Page 51

Customer risk

Product risk

Product distribution/ advice risk

Interest rate risk

Equity risk

Foreign exchange risk

Credit spread risk

Inflation risk

Property risk

Alternative asset risk

Basis risk

Commodity risk

Regulatory and legal process

Client money/fiduciary obligations

Conduct process

Financial crime

Fraud

People process

Sourcing

Internal service provision

External service provision (divested clients)

Physical security and health and safety

Information security and cyber

IT systems

Change

Business process

Financial reporting process

Governance process

Risk process

Operational resilience

Funding risk

Liquidity risk

Capital sufficiency

Capital efficiency

Compliance risk

Competition risk

Legal risk

Longevity risk

Mortality risk

Morbidity risk

Customer behaviour risk (including persistency risk)

Property insurance risk

Expenses risk

Resourcing

Performance and reward

Culture and engagement

Talent and succession

Learning

Well-being

Legal and regulatory (people)

Financial and prudential regulatory reporting

Tax reporting and compliance

Pillar 3 disclosure

Governance

Disclosure

Model risk

Ethics

    
Strategic risk– Strategic
Page 52
    
Credit risk– Retail credit– Commercial credit
Page 52
Regulatory and legal risk– Regulatory compliance– Legal
Page 81
Conduct risk– Conduct
Page 82
Operational risk– Business process– Financial reporting– Physical security/health and safety
Page 82– Cyber and information security– Fraud– Sourcing
– External service provision– Internal service provision
– Financial crime– IT systems
People risk– People
Page 84
Insurance underwriting risk– Insurance underwriting
Page 84
Capital risk– Capital
Page 85
Funding and liquidity risk– Funding and liquidity
Page 94
Governance risk– Governance
Page 101
Market risk– Trading book– Pensions
Page 102– Banking book– Insurance
Model risk– Model
Page 108   

 

The Group considers both reputational and financial impact in the course of managing all its risks and therefore does not classify reputational impact as a separate risk driver.category.

5249

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

CHANGE AND EXECUTION RISK

DEFINITION

Change and execution is defined as the risk that, in delivering its change agenda, the Group fails to ensure compliance with laws and regulation, maintain effective customer service and availability, and/or operation within the Group’s risk appetite.

EXPOSURES

Change and execution risks arise when the Group undertakes activities which require products, processes, people, systems or controls to change. These changes can be as a result of external drivers (for example, a new piece of regulation that requires the Group to put in place a new process or reporting) and internal drivers (such as the strategic transformation that is outlined in GSR3).

MEASUREMENT

The Group currently measures change and execution risk against a defined risk appetite metric which is a combination of lead, quality and delivery indicators across the investment portfolio. These indicators are reported through defined internal governance structures in the form of a monthly execution risk dashboard. An associated measure, based on the aggregate performance of the dashboard is included in the Group Balanced Scorecard.

MITIGATION

The Group takes a range of mitigating actions with respect to change and execution risk. These include the following:

The Board establishes a Group-wide risk appetite and metric for change and execution risk.
Ensuring compliance with the Change policy and associated policies and procedures, which set out the principles and key controls that apply across the business and are aligned to the Group risk appetite.
Businesses assess the potential impacts of undertaking any change activity on their ability to execute effectively, and the potential consequences for the existing risk profiles.
The implementation of effective governance and control frameworks to ensure adequate controls are in place to manage the change activity and act to mitigate the change and execution risks identified. These controls are monitored in line with the Change policy and any additional monitoring that is deemed necessary.
Events related to change activities are escalated and managed appropriately in line with risk framework guidance.

MONITORING

Change and execution risks from across the Group are monitored and reported through to Board and Group Governance Committees in accordance with the Group’s enterprise risk management framework and aligned to our GSR3 activities. Risk exposures are discussed monthly through established governance through to Group Transformation Risk Committee with upwards reporting to Board Risk and Executive Committees. In addition, oversight, challenge and reporting are completed at Risk division level to provide oversight of management of risks and the effectiveness of controls, recommending follow up remedial action if required. All material change and execution risk events are escalated in accordance with the formal Group Operational Risk policy and Change policy.

DATA RISK

DEFINITION

Data risk is defined as the risk of the Group failing to effectively govern, manage and control its data (including data processed by third party suppliers), leading to unethical decisions, poor customer outcomes, loss of value to the Group and mistrust.

EXPOSURES

Data risk is present in all aspects of the business where data is processed, both within the Group and by third parties including colleague and contractor, prospective and existing customer, client lifecycle and insight processes. Data risk manifests:

When personal data is not gathered legally, for a legitimate purpose, or is not managed/protected from misuse and/or processed in a way that complies with General Data Protection Regulations (GDPR) and other data privacy regulatory obligations.
When data quality (accuracy, completeness, consistency, uniqueness, validity and timeliness) is not managed, resulting in data used in systems, processes and products not being fit for the intended purpose.
When data records are not created, retained, protected and destroyed appropriately and when data records cannot be retrieved in a timely manner.
When data governance fails to provide robust oversight of data decision-making and the control mechanisms to ensure strategies and management instructions are implemented effectively.
When data standards are not maintained across core data, data management risks are not managed and data related issues are not remediated as a result of poor data management resulting in inaccurate, incomplete data that is not available at the right time, to the right people, to enable business decisions to be made, and regulatory reporting requirements to be fulfilled.
When critical data mapping and data information standards are not followed impacting compliance, traceability and understanding of data.

MEASUREMENT

Data risk is measured through a series of quantitative and qualitative indicators, aligned to key sources of data risk for the Group covering data governance, data management and data privacy and ethics. In addition to risk appetite measures and limits, data risks and controls are monitored and governed on a monthly basis through divisional risk committees. Significant issues are escalated to Group Risk Committee.

MITIGATION

Data risk is a key component of the Group’s enterprise risk management framework, where the focus is on the end to end management of data risk. This ensures that risks are identified, measured, managed, monitored and reported using the risk and control self-assessment process. Significant investment has been made to enhance the maturity of data risk management in recent years. In addition to the General Data Protection programme which delivered the necessary infrastructure to achieve compliance with the new regulations in May 2018, a number of other large investments and remediation projects include:

Enhancing capability by investing in professional training for data privacy managers.
Enhancing assurance over of suppliers.
Delivered enhanced controls and processes for data retention and destruction, deleting large volumes of historic over-retained data.
Delivering increased level of data maturity against the Data Management Capability Assessment Model.
Where required, these projects have also delivered enhancements to colleague and client training, vetting procedures and access controls processes.

MONITORING

Data risk is governed through divisional risk committees and significant issues are escalated to Group Risk Committee, in accordance with the Group’s enterprise risk management framework. Risk exposures are discussed at divisional risk committees, where oversight, challenge and reporting are completed to assess the effectiveness of controls. Remedial action is recommended, if required. All material data risk events are escalated in accordance with the Group Operational Risk policy and Data risk policies to the respective divisional Managing Directors and Conduct, Compliance and Operational Risk, including, where personal data is concerned, the Group Data Protection Officer. In addition, Group-wide data risk issues and the top data risks that Group faces are discussed at Group Data Committee.

A number of activities support the close monitoring of data risk including:


50

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Design and monitoring of data risk appetite metrics, including key risk indicators and key performance indicators.
Monitoring and reporting of progress against the Data Capability Assessment Model.
Monitoring of significant data related issues.
Identification and effective mitigation of data risk when planning and implementing transformation or business change.
Implementation of effective controls to mitigate data risk, including data privacy, ethics, data management and records management.
Effective monitoring and testing of compliance with data privacy and data management regulatory requirements. For example GDPR and Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS 239) requirements.
Horizon scanning for changes in the external environment, including but not limited to changes to laws, rules and regulations.

OPERATIONAL RESILIENCE RISK

DEFINITION

Operational resilience risk is defined as the risk that the Group fails to design resilience into business operations, underlying infrastructure and controls (people, process, technology) so that it is able to withstand external or internal events which could impact the continuation of operations, and/or fails to respond in a way which meets customer and stakeholder expectations and needs when the continuity of operations is compromised.

EXPOSURES

Ineffective operational resilience risk management could lead to vital services not being available to customers, and in extreme circumstances, bank failure could result. The Group has in place a transparent and effective operating model to identify and monitor critical business processes from a customer, Group and financial industry perspective. The failure to adequately build resilience into a critical business process may occur in a variety of ways, including:

The Group being overly reliant on one location to deliver a critical business process.
The Group not having an adequate succession plan in place for designated subject matter experts.
The Group being overly reliant on a supplier which fails to provide a service.
A weakness in the Group’s cyber or security defences leaving it vulnerable to an attack.
The Group failing to upgrade its IT systems and leaving them vulnerable to failure.
Operational resilience and damage to physical assets including: terrorist acts, other acts of war or hostility, geopolitical, pandemic or other such events.

Effective operational resilience ensures the Group designs resilience into its systems, is able to withstand and/or recover from a significant unexpected event occurring and can continue to provide services to its customers. A significant outage could result in customers being unable to access accounts or conduct transactions, which as well as presenting significant reputational risk for the Group would negatively impact the Group’s purpose of Helping Britain Prosper. Operational resilience is also an area of continued regulatory and industry focus, similar in importance to financial resilience.

Failure to manage operational resilience effectively could impact the following other risk categories:

Regulatory compliance – non-compliance with new/existing operational resilience regulations, for example, through failure to identify emerging regulation or not embedding regulatory requirements within the Group’s policies, processes and procedures.
Operational risk – being unable to safely provide customers with business services.
Conduct risk – an operational resilience failure may render the Group liable to fines from the FCA for poor conduct.
Market risk – the Group being unable to provide key services could have ramifications for the wider market and could impact share price.

MEASUREMENT

Operational resilience risk is managed across the Group through the Group’s enterprise risk management framework and Operational risk policies. The Group’s enterprise risk management framework includes a risk and control self-assessment process, risk impact likelihood matrix, key risk and control indicators, risk appetite, a robust incident management and escalation process, scenario analysis and an operational losses process. Board risk appetite metrics are in place and are well understood. These specific measures are subject to ongoing monitoring and reporting, including a mandatory review of thresholds on at least an annual basis. To strengthen the management of operational resilience risk, the Group mobilised an operational resilience enhancement programme which is designed to focus on end to end resilience and the management of key risks to critical processes.

MITIGATION

The Group has increased its focus on operational resilience and has updated its operational resilience strategy to reflect changing priorities of both customers and regulators. The Group is carefully considering the publication of the consultation paper by the FCA, PRA and Bank of England (December 2019). Focus will be given to ensure that the Group’s strategy and approach to operational resilience aligns with industry thinking and expectation. At the core of its approach to operational resilience are the Group’s critical business processes which drive all activity, including further mapping of the processes to identify any additional resilience requirements such as impact tolerances in the event of a service outage. The Group continues to develop playbooks that guide its response to a range of interruptions from internal and external threats and tests these through scenario-based testing and exercising.

The Group’s strategic review considers the changing risk management requirements, adapting the change delivery model to be more agile and develop the people skills and capabilities needed to be a ‘Bank of the Future’. The Group continues to review and invest in its control environment to ensure it addresses the risks it faces. Risks are reported and discussed at local governance forums and escalated to executive management and Board as appropriate. The Group employs a range of risk management strategies, including: avoidance, mitigation, transfer (including insurance) and acceptance. Where there is a reliance on third-party suppliers to provide services, the Group’s sourcing policy ensures that outsourcing initiatives follow a defined process including due diligence, risk evaluation and ongoing assurance.

Mitigating actions to the principal operational resilience risk are:

Cyber: the threat landscape associated with cyber risk continues to evolve and there is significant regulatory attention on this subject. The Board continues to invest heavily to protect the Group from cyber-attacks. Investment continues to focus on improving the Group’s approach to identity and access management, improving capability to detect and respond to cyber-attacks and improved ability to manage vulnerabilities across the estate.
IT resilience: the Group continues to optimise its approach to IT and operational resilience by investing in technology improvements and enhancing the resilience of systems that support the Group’s critical business processes, primarily through the technology resilience programme, with independent verification of progress on an annual basis. The Board recognises the role that resilient technology plays in achieving the Group’s strategy of becoming the best bank for customers and in maintaining banking services across the wider industry. As such, the Board dedicates considerable time and focus to this subject at both the Board and the Board Risk Committee, and continues to sponsor key investment programmes that enhance resilience.
People: the Group acknowledges the risks associated to the failure to maintain appropriately skilled and available colleagues. The Group continues to optimise its approach to ensure that where applicable, colleagues are capable of supporting a critical business process. Key controls and processes are regularly reported to committee(s) and alignment to the Group Strategic Review is closely monitored.
Property: the Group’s property portfolio remains a key focus in ensuring resilience requirements are appropriately maintained. Processes are in place to identify key buildings where a critical business process is performed. Depending on criticality, a number of mitigating controls are in place to manage the risk of severe critical business process disruption. The Group remains committed to investment in the upkeep of the property portfolio, primarily through the Group Property upkeep investment programme.
Sourcing: the threat landscape associated with third party suppliers and the critical services they provide continues to receive a significant amount


51

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

of regulatory attention. The Group acknowledges the importance demonstrating control and responsibility for those critical business services which could cause significant harm to our customers. Risks and controls are regularly reported through committee(s) and is further supported via the mobilisation of the Sourcing enterprise programme.

MONITORING

Monitoring and reporting of operational resilience risk is undertaken at Board, Group, entity and divisional committees. Each committee monitors key risks, control effectiveness, key risk and control indicators, events, operational losses, risk appetite metrics and the results of independent testing conducted by the Risk division and/or Group Internal Audit.

The Group maintains a formal approach to operational resilience risk event escalation, whereby material events are identified, captured and escalated. Root causes are determined, and action plans put in place to ensure an optimum level of control to keep customers and the business safe, reduce costs, and improve efficiency.

STRATEGIC RISK

DEFINITION

The risks which result from strategic plans which do not adequately reflect trends in external factors, ineffective business strategy execution, or failure to respond in a timely manner to external environments or changes in stakeholder behaviours and expectations.

EXPOSURES

The Group faces significant risks due to the changing regulatory and competitive environments in the financial services sector, with an increased pace, scale and complexity of change. Customers, shareholders and employees expectations continue to evolve, with indications that current societal trends may accelerate, impacting the Group’s ability to respond accordingly, and negatively impacting the Group’s relevance in society.

MEASUREMENT

The Group assesses and monitors the impact of the strategic risk implications of new business, product entries and other strategic initiatives, as part of the business planning processes and stress testing scenarios.

MITIGATION

The Group has a number of mitigating actions to manage strategic risk, including:

Continued digitisation of customer journeys, thereby enabling the delivery of market leading customer experiences that are seamless, accessible and personal.
Robust operating and contingency planning to ensure potential impacts of strategic initiatives and external drivers are mitigated.
Continued focus on increasing the efficiency of the Group’s operations to ensure investment capacity, responsiveness and effectiveness to respond to external trends.
Development of a compelling colleague proposition to continue to attract talent to the Group.

MONITORING

A review of the Group’s emerging and strategic risks, which includes the risks to the current strategic review and the mitigating actions, is undertaken on an annual basis and the findings are reported to the Group and Board Risk Committees.

CREDIT RISK

 

DEFINITION

 

Credit Riskrisk is defined as the risk that parties with whom the Group has contracted fail to meet their financial obligations (both on or off balanceand off-balance sheet).

 

EXPOSURES

 

The principal sources of credit risk within the Group arise from loans and advances, contingent liabilities, commitments, debt securities and derivatives to customers, financial institutions and sovereigns. The credit risk exposures of the Group are set out in note 5253 on page F-87. Credit risk exposures are categorised as ‘retail’, arising primarily in the Retail, Consumer Finance and Run-off divisions, and some small and medium sized enterprises (SMEs) and ‘corporate’ (including larger SMEs, corporates, banks, financial institutions and sovereigns) arising primarily in the Commercial Banking, Run-off and Insurance Divisions and Group Corporate Treasury (GCT).F-99.

 

In terms of loans and advances, (for example mortgages, term loans and overdrafts) and contingent liabilities (for example credit instruments

such as guarantees and standby, documentary and commercial letters of credit), credit risk arises both from amounts advanced and commitments to extend credit to a customer or bank. With respect to commitments to extend credit, the Group is also potentially exposed to an additional loss inup to an amount equal to the total unusedunutilised commitments. However, the likely amount of loss ismay be less than the total unusedunutilised commitments, as most retail and certain commercial lending commitments to extend credit may be cancelled andbased on regular assessment of the prevailing creditworthiness of customers is monitored regularly.customers. Most commercial term commitments to extend credit are also contingent upon customers maintaining specific credit standards, which together with the creditworthiness of customers are monitored regularly.standards.

 

Credit risk also arises from debt securities and derivatives. The total notional principal amount of interest rate, exchange rate, credit derivative and other contracts outstanding at 31 December 20162019 is shown on page 61.67. The notional principal amount does not, however, represent the Group’s credit risk exposure, which is limited to the current cost of replacing contracts with a positive value to the Group. Such amounts are reflected in note 5253 on page F-87.F-99.

 

Additionally, credit risk arises from leasing arrangements where the Group is the lessor. Note 2(J) on page F-14F-17 provides details on the Group’s approach to the treatment of leases.

 

Credit risk exposures in the Insurance Division largely result from holdingand Wealth division relate mostly to bond and loan assets which, together with some related swaps, are used to fund annuity commitments within Shareholder funds; plus balances held in the shareholderliquidity funds (including the annuity portfolio)to manage Insurance division’s liquidity requirements, and from exposure to reinsurers.

 

The investments held in the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes also expose the Group to credit risk. Note 36 on page F-47F-63 provides further information on the defined benefit pension schemes’ assets and liabilities.

 

Loans and advances, contingent liabilities, commitments, debt securities and derivatives also expose the Group to refinance risk. Refinance risk is the possibility that an outstanding exposure cannot be repaid at its contractual maturity date. If the Group does not wish to refinance the exposure then there is refinance risk if the obligor is unable to repay by securing alternative finance. This may be becauseoccur for a number of reasons which may include: the borrower is in financial difficulty, or because the terms required to refinance are outside acceptable appetite at the time.time or the customer is unable to refinance externally due to a lack of market liquidity. Refinance risk exposures are managed in accordance with the Group’s existing credit risk policies, processes and controls, and are not considered to be material given the Group’s prudent and through the cycle credit risk appetite. Where heightened refinance risk exists (such as in Commercial Banking’s Business Support Unit (BSU) or the run-off book) exposures are minimised through intensive account management and, where appropriate, are classed as impaired and forborne where appropriate.and/or forborne.

 

MEASUREMENT

 

In measuring theThe process for credit risk identification, measurement, and control is integrated into the Board-approved framework for credit risk appetite and governance.

Credit risk is measured from different perspectives using a range of loansappropriate modelling and advancesscoring techniques at a number of levels of granularity, including total balance sheet, individual portfolio, pertinent concentrations and individual customer – for both new business and existing lending. Key metrics, such as total exposure, risk-weighted assets, new business quality, concentration risk and portfolio performance, are reported monthly to customersRisk Committees.

Measures such as expected credit loss (ECL), risk-weighted assets, observed credit performance, predicted credit quality (usually from predictive credit scoring models), collateral cover and quality, and other credit drivers (such as cash flow, affordability, leverage and indebtedness) are used to enable effective risk measurement across the Group.

In addition, stress testing and scenario analysis are used to estimate impairment losses and capital demand forecasts for both regulatory and internal purposes and to banks at a counterparty level, the Group reflects three components:

(i) the ‘probability of default’ by the counterparty on its contractual obligations; (ii) current exposures to the counterparty and their likely future development, from which the Group derives the ‘exposure at default’; and (iii) the likely loss ratio on the defaulted obligations (the ‘loss given default’).

For regulatory capital purposes the Group’s rating systems assess probability of default and if appropriate, exposure at default and loss given default, in order to derive Risk Weighted Assets (RWAs) and regulatory Expected Loss (EL). If not appropriate, regulatory prescribed exposure at default and loss given default values are used in order to derive RWAs and EL.

Impairment allowances are recognised for financial reporting purposes only for loss events that have occurred at the balance sheet date, based on objective evidence of impairment. Due to the different methodologies applied, the amount of incurred credit losses provided forassist in the financial statements differs from the amount determined from the regulatory expected loss models. Note 2(H) on page F-13 provides details of the Group’s approach to the impairment of financial assets.

The obligor quality measurement of both retail and commercial counterparties is largely based on the outcomesformulation of credit risk (probability of default PD) models. The Group operates a number of different regulatory rating models, typically developed internally using statistical analysis and management judgement – retail models rely more on the former, commercial models include moreappetite.

As part of the latter, especially‘three lines of defence’ model, Risk division is the second line of defence providing oversight and independent challenge to key risk decisions taken by business management. Risk division also tests the effectiveness of credit risk management and internal credit risk controls. This includes ensuring that the control and monitoring of higher risk and vulnerable portfolios and sectors is appropriate and confirming that appropriate loss allowances for impairment are in the larger corporateplace. Output from these reviews helps to inform credit risk appetite and more specialised lending portfolios. Internal data is supplemented with external data in model development, where appropriate.credit policy.

 

The models vary, inter alia, inAs the extentthird line of defence, Group Internal Audit undertakes regular risk-based reviews to which they are ‘point in time’ versus ‘throughassess the cycle’. The models are subject to rigorous validationeffectiveness of Credit risk management and oversight/governance including, where appropriate, benchmarking to external information.controls.


52

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

In the principal retail portfolios, exposure at default and loss given default models are in use. For regulatory reporting purposes, counterparties are segmented into a number of rating grades, each representing a defined range of default probabilities and exposures migrate between rating grades if the assessment of the counterparty probability of default changes. The Retail Master scale comprises 13 non-default ratings and one default rating.

In commercial portfolios the PD models also segment counterparties into a number of rating grades, with each grade representing a defined range of default probabilities. Counterparties migrate between rating grades if the assessment of the PD changes. The Corporate (non-retail) Master Scale comprises of 19 non-default ratings and 4 default rating grades, and forms the basis on which internal reporting is completed.

MITIGATION

 

The Group uses a range of approaches to mitigate creditCredit risk.

 

Prudent, through the cycle credit principles, risk policies and appetite statements: Thethe independent Risk Divisiondivision sets out the credit principles, credit risk policies and credit risk appetite statements. Principles and policies are reviewed regularly, and any changesThese are subject to aregular review and governance, with any changes subject to an approval process. Policies and risk appetite statements, where appropriate, are supported by procedures, which provide a disciplined and focused benchmark for credit

53

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

decisions. Risk oversight teams monitor credit performance trends review and challenge exceptions to planned outcomes, andthe outlook. Risk teams also test the adequacy of and adherence to credit risk infrastructurepolicies and governance processes throughout the Group, whichGroup. This includes tracking portfolio performance against an agreed set of keycredit risk appetite tolerances. Oversight and reviews are also undertaken by Credit Risk Oversight and Group Audit.

 

Strong rating systemsRobust models and controls: The Group has established an independent team in the Risk Division that sets common minimum standards, designed to ensuresee model risk models and associated rating systems are developed consistently and are of sufficient quality to support business decisions and meet regulatory requirements. Internal rating models are developed and owned by the Risk Division. The designated model owner takes responsibility for ensuring the validation of the rating systems, supported and challenged by an independent specialist Group function.on page 108.

 

Limitations on concentration risk: Credit risk management includesthere are portfolio controls on certain industries, sectors and product linesproducts to reflect risk appetite as well as individual, customer and bank limit guidelines.risk tolerances. Credit policies and appetite statements are aligned to the Group’s risk appetite and restrict exposure to higher risk countries and morepotentially vulnerable sectors and asset classes. Note 18 on page F-33F-99 provides an analysis of loans and advances to customers by industry (for commercial customers) and product (for retail customers). Exposures are monitored to prevent both an excessive concentration of risk and single name concentrations. These concentration risk controls are not necessarily in the form of a maximum limit on exposure, but may instead require new business in concentrated sectors to fulfil additional minimum policy and/or guideline requirements. The Group’s large exposureslargest credit limits are detailed toregularly monitored by the Board Risk Committee and reported in accordance with regulatory reporting requirements.

 

RobustDefined country risk management:management framework: Thethe Board sets a broad maximum country risk appetite. Within this, country limits are authorised bythe Executive Credit Approval Committee approves the Group Countrycountry risk framework and sovereign limits on an annual basis. Risk Appetite Committee,based appetite for all countries is set within the independent Risk division, taking into account economic, financial, political and social factors. Group policies stipulate that these limits must be consistent with, and support,factors as well as the approved business and strategic plans of the Group.

 

Specialist expertise: Creditcredit quality is managed and controlled by a number of specialist units within the business and Risk Division providing,division, which provide for example: intensive management and control (see Intensive carecontrol; security perfection; maintenance of customers in financial difficulty); security perfection, maintenancecustomer and retention;facility records; expertise in documentation for lending and associated products; sector specificsector-specific expertise; and legal services applicable to the particular market placesegments and product rangeranges offered by the business.Group.

 

Stress testing and scenario analysis:testing: Thethe Group’s credit portfolios are also subjectedsubject to regular stress testing, with stress scenario assessments run at various levels of the organisation. Exercises focused on individual Divisions and portfolios are performed intesting. In addition to the Group led, PRA, EBA and other regulatory stress tests.tests, exercises focused on individual divisions and portfolios are also performed. For further information on the stress testing process, methodology and governance refer tosee page 47.48.

 

Frequent and robust creditCredit risk oversight and assurance: Undertakenoversight and assurance of credit risk is undertaken by independent Credit Risk Oversightcredit risk oversight functions operating within Retail and Consumer Creditthe Risk and Commercial Banking Riskdivision which are part of the Group’s second line of defence. Their primary objective is to provide reasonable and independent oversight that credit risk is being effectively managed withand to ensure that appropriate and effective controls.

Group Audit performs the third line of credit risk assurance. A specialist team within Group Audit, comprising experienced credit professionals, iscontrols are in place and being adhered to. Group Internal Audit also provides assurance to carry out independent risk based internal control audits, providing an assessment of the effectiveness of internal credit controls, across the full credit lifecycle including the raising of impairment provisions. These audits cover the diverse range of the Group’s businesses and activities, and include both ‘standard’ risk based audits and reviews as well as agreed upon procedures to respond to any emerging risks or regulatory requirement. The work of Group Audit therefore continues to provide executive, senior management and Board Audit Committee with assurance on the effectiveness of credit risk management controls as well as appropriateness of impairments.across the Group’s activities.

 

ADDITIONAL MITIGATION FOR RETAIL AND CONSUMER FINANCE CUSTOMERS

The Group uses a variety of lending criteria when assessing applications for mortgages and unsecured lending. The general approval process uses credit acceptance scorecards and involves a review of an applicant’s previous credit history using information held by Credit Reference Agencies (CRA).

The Group also assesses the affordability and sustainability of lending for each borrower, for secured lending this includes use of an appropriate stressed interest rate scenario. Affordability assessments are compliant with relevant regulatory conduct guidelines. The Group takes reasonable steps to validate information used in the assessment of a customer’s income and expenditure.

In addition, the Group has in place quantitative limits such as product maximum limits, the level of borrowing to income and the ratio of borrowing to collateral. Some of these limits relate to internal approval levels and others are policy limits above which the Group will reject borrowing applications. The Group also applies certain criteria that are applicable to specific products such as for applications for a mortgage on a property that is to be let by the applicant.

For UK Secured, the Group’s policy permits owner occupier applications with a Loan to Value (LTV) maximum of 95 per cent. Applications with an LTV above 90 per cent are subject to enhanced underwriting criteria, including higher scorecard cut-offs. Loans above £500,000 are subject to a range of further controls, including reduced maximum income multiples, and increased case review via manual underwriting.

Buy-to-let mortgages are limited to a maximum loan size of £1,000,000 and 75 per cent LTV. Buy-to-let applications must pass a minimum Rental Cover Ratio of 125 per cent under stressed interest rates, after applicable tax liabilities.

The Group’s policy is to reject any application for a lending product where a customer is registered as bankrupt or insolvent, or has a recent County Court Judgment or financial default registered at a CRA used by the Group above de minimis thresholds. In addition, the Group rejects applicants where total unsecured debt, debt-to-income ratios, or other indicators of financial difficulty exceed policy limits.

Where credit acceptance scorecards are used, new models, model changes and monitoring of model effectiveness are independently reviewed and approved in accordance with the governance framework set by the Group Model Governance Committee.

ADDITIONAL MITIGATION FOR COMMERCIAL CUSTOMERS

Individual credit assessment and independent sanction of customer and bank limits: With the exception of small exposures to SME customers where relationship managers have limited delegated sanctioning authority, credit risk in commercial customer portfolios is subject to sanction by the independent Risk Division, which considers the strengths and weaknesses of individual transactions, the balance of risk and reward, and how credit risk aligns to the Group’s risk appetite. Exposure to individual counterparties, groups of counterparties or customer risk segments is controlled through a tiered hierarchy of delegated sanctioning authorities and limit guidelines. Approval requirements for each decision are based on a number of factors including, but not limited to, the transaction amount, the customer’s aggregate facilities, credit policy/risk appetite, credit risk ratings and the nature and term of the risk. The Group’s credit risk appetite criteria for counterparty and customer underwriting is generally the same as that for assets intended to

54

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

be held to maturity. All hard underwriting must be sanctioned via credit limits and a pre-approved credit matrix may be used for Best Efforts underwriting.

Counterparty limits: Limits are set against all types of exposure in a counterparty name, in accordance with an agreed methodology for each exposure type. This includes credit risk exposure on individual derivative transactions, which incorporates potential future exposures from market movements against agreed confidence intervals. Aggregate facility levels by counterparty are set and limit breaches are subject to escalation procedures.

Daily settlement limits: Settlement risk arises in any situation where a payment in cash, securities or equities is made in the expectation of a corresponding receipt in cash, securities or equities. Daily settlement limits are established for each relevant counterparty to cover the aggregate of all settlement risk arising from the Group’s market transactions on any single day.

COLLATERALCollateral

 

The principal types of acceptable collateral types for loans and advances, contingent liabilities and derivatives with commercial and bank counterparties/customers are:include:

 

residential and commercial properties;
  
charges over business assets such as premises, inventory and accounts receivables;receivable;
  
financial instruments such as debt securities;
  
vehicles;
  
cash; and
  
guarantees received from third parties.third-parties.

 

The Group maintains appetite guidelinesparameters on the acceptability of specific classes of collateral.

For non-mortgage retail lending to small businesses, collateral may include second charges over residential property and the assignment of life cover.

 

Collateral held as security for financial assets other than loans and advances is determined by the nature of the underlying exposure. Debt securities, including treasury and other bills, are generally unsecured, with the exception of asset-backed securities and similar instruments such as covered bonds, which are secured by portfolios of financial assets. Collateral is generally not held against loans and advances to financial institutions, except where

institutions. However, securities are held as part of reverse repurchase or securities borrowing transactions or where a collateral agreement has been entered into under a master netting agreement. Derivative transactions with wholesalefinancial counterparties are typically collateralised under a Credit Support Annex (CSA) in conjunction with the ISDAInternational Swaps and Derivatives Association (ISDA) Master Agreement. Derivative transactions with non-banknon-financial customers are not usually supported by a CSA.

 

No collateral is held in respect of retail credit card or unsecured personal lending. For non-mortgage retail lending to small businesses, collateral may include second charges over residential property and the assignment of life cover.

Commercial lending decisions must be based on an obligor’s ability to repay from normal business operations rather than reliance on the disposal of any security provided. The requirement for collateral and the type to be taken at origination will be based upon the nature of the transaction and the credit quality, size and structure of the borrower. For non-retail exposures if required, the Group will often require theseek that any collateral to include a first charge over land and buildings owned and occupied by the business, a debenture over one or more of the assets of a company or limited liability partnership, personal guarantees, limited in amount, from the directors of a company or limited liability partnership and key man insurance. The Group maintains policies setting out which types of collateral valuation are acceptable, collateral bases for valuation maximum LTVloan to value (LTV) ratios and other criteria that are to be considered when reviewing an application. Other than for project finance, object finance and income producingincome-producing real estate where charges over the subject assets are required, the provision of collateral will not determine the outcome of an application. Notwithstanding this, the fundamental business proposition must evidence the ability of the business to generate funds from normal business sources to repay a customer/customer or counterparty’s financial commitment.commitment, rather than reliance on the disposal of any security provided.

 

The extent to which collateral values are actively managed will depend on the credit quality and other circumstances of the obligor and type of underlying transaction. Although lending decisions are primarily based on expected cash flows, any collateral provided may impact the pricing and other terms of a loan or facility granted. This will have a financial impact on the amount of net interest income recognised and on internal loss given default estimates that contribute to the determination of asset quality and returns.

 

Collateral values are assessed at the time of loan origination. The Group requires collateral to always be realistically valued by an appropriately qualified source, independent of both the credit decision process and the customer, at the time of borrowing. In certain circumstances, for Retail residential mortgages this may include the use of automated valuation models based on market data, subject to accuracy criteria and loanLTV limits. Where third-parties are used for collateral valuations, they are subject to value limits.regular monitoring and review. Collateral values are reviewed on a regular basissubject to review, which will vary according to the type of lending, collateral involved and account performance. Such reviews are undertaken to confirm that the value recorded in the Bank’s systems remains appropriate and whether revaluation is required, considering for example, account performance, market conditions and any information available that may indicate that the value of the collateral has materially declined. In such instances, the Group may seek additional collateral. For Retail residential mortgages,collateral and/or other amendments to the terms of the facility. The Group adjusts openestimated market property values to take account of the costs of realisation and any discount associated with the realisation of the collateral when estimating credit losses.

 

The Group considers risk concentrations by collateral providers and collateral type as appropriate, with a view to ensuring that any potential undue concentrations of risk are identified and suitably managed by changes to strategy, policy and/or business plans.

 

The Group seeks to avoid correlation or wrong waywrong-way risk where possible. Under repothe Group’s repurchase (repo) policy, the issuer of the collateral and the repo counterparty should be neither the same nor connected. The same rule applies for derivatives. The Risk Divisiondivision has the necessary discretion to extend this rule to other cases where there is significant correlation. Countries with a rating equivalent to AA- and aboveor better may be considered to have no adverse correlation between the counterparty domiciled in thethat country and thatthe country of risk (issuer of securities).

 

Refer to note 5253 on page F-117 for further information on collateral.

 

MASTER NETTING AGREEMENTSAdditional mitigation for Retail customers

The Group uses a variety of lending criteria when assessing applications for mortgages and unsecured lending. The general approval process uses credit acceptance scorecards and involves a review of an applicant’s previous credit history using internal data and information held by Credit Reference Agencies (CRA).

The Group also assesses the affordability and sustainability of lending for each borrower. For secured lending this includes use of an appropriate stressed interest rate scenario. Affordability assessments for all lending are compliant with relevant regulatory and conduct guidelines. The Group takes reasonable steps to validate information used in the assessment of a customer’s income and expenditure.


53

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

In addition, the Group has in place quantitative limits such as maximum limits for individual customer products, the level of borrowing to income and the ratio of borrowing to collateral. Some of these limits relate to internal approval levels and others are policy limits above which the Group will typically reject borrowing applications. The Group also applies certain criteria that are applicable to specific products for example applications for buy-to-let mortgages.

For UK mortgages, the Group’s policy permits owner occupier applications with a maximum loan to value (LTV) of 95 per cent. This can increase to 100 per cent for specific products where additional security is provided by a supporter of the applicant and held on deposit by the Group. Applications with an LTV above 90 per cent are subject to enhanced underwriting criteria, including higher scorecard cut-offs and loan size restrictions.

Buy-to-let mortgages within Retail are limited to a maximum loan size of £1,000,000 and 75 per cent LTV. Buy-to-let applications must pass a minimum rental cover ratio of 125 per cent under stressed interest rates, after applicable tax liabilities. Portfolio landlords (customers with four or more mortgaged buy-to-let properties) are subject to additional controls including evaluation of overall portfolio resilience.

The Group’s policy is to reject any application for a lending product where a customer is registered as bankrupt or insolvent, or has a recent County Court Judgment or financial default registered at a CRA used by the Group above de minimis thresholds. In addition, the Group typically rejects applicants where total unsecured debt, debt-to-income ratios, or other indicators of financial difficulty exceed policy limits.

Where credit acceptance scorecards are used, new models, model changes and monitoring of model effectiveness are independently reviewed and approved in accordance with the governance framework set by the Group Model Governance Committee.

Additional mitigation for Commercial customers

Individual credit assessment and independent sanction of customer and bank limits: with the exception of small exposures to SME customers where certain relationship managers have limited delegated sanctioning authority, credit risk in commercial customer portfolios is subject to sanction by the independent Risk division, which considers the strengths and weaknesses of individual transactions, the balance of risk and reward, and how credit risk aligns to the Group and Divisional risk appetite. Exposure to individual counterparties, groups of counterparties or customer risk segments is controlled through a tiered hierarchy of delegated sanctioning authorities and risk based recommended maximum limit parameters. Approval requirements for each decision are based on a number of factors including, but not limited to, the transaction amount, the customer’s aggregate facilities, credit policy, risk appetite, credit risk ratings and the nature and term of the risk. The Group’s credit risk appetite criteria for counterparty and customer loan Underwriting is generally the same as that for loans intended to be held to maturity. All hard loan/bond Underwriting must be sanctioned by Risk division. A pre-approved credit matrix may be used for ‘best efforts’ underwriting.

Counterparty credit limits: limits are set against all types of exposure in a counterparty name, in accordance with an agreed methodology for each exposure type. This includes credit risk exposure on individual derivatives and securities financing transactions, which incorporates potential future exposures from market movements against agreed confidence intervals. Aggregate facility levels by counterparty are set and limit breaches are subject to escalation procedures.

Daily settlement limits: settlement risk arises in any situation where a payment in cash, securities or equities is made in the expectation of a corresponding receipt in cash, securities or equities. Daily settlement limits are established for each relevant counterparty to cover the aggregate of all settlement risk arising from the Group’s market transactions on any single day. Where possible, the Group uses Continuous Linked Settlement in order to reduce FX settlement risk.

Master netting agreements

 

It is credit policy that a Group approved Master Netting Agreementmaster netting agreement must be used for all derivative and traded product transactions and must be in place prior to trading.trading, with separate documentation required for each Group entity providing facilities. This requirement extends to trades with clients and the counterparties used for the Bank’s own hedging activities, which may also include clearing trades with Central Counterparties (CCPs). Any exceptions must be approved by the Credit Sanctioner. Although masterappropriate credit sanctioner. Master netting agreements do not generally result in an offset of balance sheet assets and liabilities for accounting purposes, as transactions are usually settled on a gross basis,basis. However, within relevant jurisdictions and for appropriate counterparty types, theymaster nettings agreements do reduce

the credit risk to the extent that, if an event of default occurs, all trades with the counterparty may be terminated and settled on a net basis. The Group’s overall exposure to credit risk on derivative instruments subject to master netting agreements can change substantially within a short period, since this is the net position of all trades under the master netting agreement.

55

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

OTHER CREDIT RISK TRANSFERSOther credit risk transfers

 

The Group also undertakes asset sales, credit derivative based transactions, securitisations (including Significant Risk Transfer transactions), purchases of credit default swaps and securitisationspurchase of credit insurance as a means of mitigating or reducing credit risk and/or risk concentration, taking into account the nature of assets and the prevailing market conditions.

 

MONITORING

 

In conjunction with Risk Division,division, businesses identify and define portfolios of credit and related risk exposures and the key benchmarks, behaviours and characteristics by which those portfolios are managed and monitored in terms of credit risk exposure.monitored. This entails the production and analysis of regular portfolio monitoring reports for review by senior management. Risk Divisiondivision in turn produces an aggregated reviewview of credit risk throughoutacross the Group, including reports on significantmaterial credit exposures, concentrations, concerns and other management information, which areis presented to the Divisional Risk Committees,divisional risk committees, Group Risk Committee and the Board Risk Committee.

 

Models

The performance of all rating models used in credit risk is monitored on a regular basis, in order to seek to ensure that models provide appropriate risk differentiation capability, the generated ratings remain as accurate and robust as practical, and the models assign appropriate risk estimates to grades/pools. All models are monitored against a series of agreed key performance indicators. In the event that the monitoring identifies material exceptions or deviations from expected outcomes, these will be escalated in accordanceline with the Group’s model governance framework set by the Group Model Governance Committee.– see model risk on page 108.

 

INTENSIVE CARE OF CUSTOMERS IN FINANCIAL DIFFICULTYIntensive care of customers in financial difficulty

 

The Group operates a number of solutions to assist borrowers who are experiencing financial stress. The material elements of these solutions through which the Group has granted a concession, whether temporarily or permanently, are set out below.

 

RETAIL AND CONSUMER FINANCE CUSTOMERSForbearance

 

The Group’s aim in offering forbearance and other assistance to customers in financial distress is to benefit both the customer and the Group by discharging the Group’s regulatory and social responsibilities to supportsupporting its customers and actacting in their best long-term interests and by, where possible, bringing customer facilities back into a sustainable position which, for residential mortgages, also means keeping customers in their homes. position.

The Group offers a range of tools and assistance to support customers who are encountering financial difficulties. Cases are managed on an individual basis, with the circumstances of each customer considered separately and the action taken judged as being affordableappropriate and sustainable for both the customer. Operationally,customer and the Group.

Forbearance measures consist of concessions towards a debtor that is experiencing or about to experience difficulties in meeting its financial commitments. This can include modification of the previous terms and conditions of a contract or a total or partial refinancing of a troubled debt contract, either of which would not have been required had the debtor not been experiencing financial difficulties.

The provision and review of such assistance is controlled through the application of an appropriate policy framework controls around the execution of policy, regularand associated controls. Regular review of the different treatmentsassistance offered to customers is undertaken to confirm that they remainit remains appropriate, alongside monitoring of customers’ performance and the level of payments received, and management visibility of the nature and extent of assistance provided and the associated risk.

Assistance is provided through trained colleagues in branches and dedicated telephony units, and via online guidance material. For those customers requiring more intensive help, assistance is provided through dedicated support units where tailored repayment programmes can be agreed. Customers are actively supported and referred to free money advice agencies when they have multiple credit facilities, including those at other lenders that require restructuring. Within the Collections and Recoveries functions, the sharing of best practice and alignment of policies across the Group has helped to drive more effective customer outcomes and achieve operational efficiencies.received.

 

The specific tools available to assist customers vary by product and the customer’s status. In defining the treatments offered to customers who have experienced financial distress, the Group distinguishes between the following categories:

Reduced payment arrangements: a temporary arrangement for customers in financial distress where arrears accrue at the contractual payment, for example short-term arrangements to pay.
Term extensions: a permanent account change for customers in financial distress where the overall term of the mortgage is extended, resulting in a lower contractual monthly payment.
Repair: a permanent account change used to repair a customer’s position when they have emerged from financial difficulty, for example capitalisation of arrears.

Forbearance identification, classification and measurement

The Group classifies Retail and Consumer Finance accounts as forborne at the time a customer in financial difficulty is granted a concession. AccountsNon-performing exposures can be reclassified as Performing Forborne after a minimum 12 month cure period, providing there are classifiedno past due amounts or concerns regarding the full repayment of the exposure. A minimum of a further 24 months must pass from the date the forborne exposure was reclassified as Performing Forborne before the account can exit forbearance. If conditions to exit forbearance are not met at the end of this probation period, the exposure shall continue to be identified as forborne only foruntil all the period of time which the exposure is known to be, or may still be, in financial difficulty. Where temporary forbearance is granted, exit criteriaconditions are applied to include accounts until they are known to no longer be in financial difficulty. Where the treatment involves a permanent change to the contractual basis of the customer’s account such as a capitalisation of arrears or term extension, the Group classifies the balance as forborne for a period of 24 months, after which no distinction is made between these accounts and others where no change has been made.

Those forborne loans which fall below individual assessment limits are grouped with other assets of similar characteristics and assessed collectively for impairment in accordance with the Group impairment policy detailed in note 2(H). The Group’s approach is to ensure that provisioning models, supported by management judgement, appropriately reflect the underlying loss risk of exposures. The performance and output of models are monitored and challenged on an ongoing basis, in line with the Group’s model governance policies.

The Group measures the success of a forbearance scheme for Secured customers based upon the proportion of customers performing (less than or equal to three months in arrears) over the 24 months following the exit from a forbearance treatment. For temporary treatments, 80 per cent of customers accepting reduced payment arrangements are performing. For permanent treatments, 83 per cent of customers who have accepted capitalisations of arrears and 84 per cent of customers who have accepted term extensions are performing.

Customers receiving support from UK government sponsored programmes

To assist customers in financial distress, the Group also participates in UK government sponsored programmes for households the most significant of which is the Income Support for Mortgage Interest which provides certain defined categories of customers access to a benefit scheme, paid for by the government, which covers all or part of the interest on the mortgage. There are two primary categories:

Unemployed customers claiming Jobseekers Allowance: Qualifying customers are able to claim for mortgage interest at 3.12 per cent on up to £200,000 of the mortgage. There is a two year time limit on claims.

56

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Pension Credit customers: Qualifying customers are able to claim for mortgage interest at 3.12 per cent on up to £100,000 of the mortgage and there is no time limit as to how long they can claim.

For both categories, all decisions regarding an individual’s eligibility and any amounts payable under the scheme rest solely with the government. Payments are made directly to the Group by the Department of Work and Pensions. The Group estimates that customers representing approximately £1.8 billion of its mortgage exposures are receiving this benefit, including those who are also receiving other treatments for financial difficulty.

COMMERCIAL CUSTOMERS

Early identification, control and monitoring are key to supporting the customer and protecting the Group. With the exception of small exposures in SME all non-retail exposures in the Commercial Banking and Run-off Divisions are reviewed at least annually (and more frequently where required) by the independent Risk Division. As part of the Group’s established Credit Risk Classification system, every exposure in the good book is categorised as either ‘good’ or ‘watchlist’. The term watchlist refers to cases which require closer monitoring on the good book and are split between Special Mention and Special Review (the latter being the more serious of the two). This complements the Group’s risk rating tools and is designed to identify and highlight portfolio levels of asset quality as well as individual problem credits. All watchlist names are reviewed by the Business and Risk Division regularly, and the classification is updated if required. This process seeks to ensure that relationship managers act promptly to identify, and highlight to senior management those customers who have greater potential to become higher risk in the future.

Those customers deemed higher risk where there is cause for concern over future repayment capability or where there is a risk of the asset becoming impaired will be transferred to the Business Support Unit (BSU) at an early stage. BSU will take over the ‘credit’ responsibility for the customer relationship whilst the ‘servicing’ responsibility remains with the original Relationship Manager. The over-arching aim of the BSU is to provide support and work consensually with each customer to try and resolve the issues, restore the business to a financially viable position and thereby bring about a business turnaround. This may involve a combination of restructuring, work out strategies and other types of forbearance.

With the exception of small exposures in SME, BSU case officers manage stressed and doubtful assets in Commercial Banking and are part of the independent Risk Division. They are highly experienced and operate in a closely controlled and monitored environment, including regular oversight and close scrutiny by senior management. Distressed run-off assets are managed to the same standards by Client Asset Management (CAM).

A detailed assessment is undertaken for cases in BSU to assist in reducing and minimising risk exposure and to also highlight potential strategic options. A range of information is required to fully appraise and understand the customer’s business and cashflow (and therefore debt serviceability) and may involve the Group, in addition to using its own internal sector experts, engaging professional advisers to perform asset valuations, strategic reviews and where applicable, independent business reviews. The assessment may also involve:

critically assessing a customer’s ability to effectively manage the business in a distressed situation where a turnaround needs to be delivered;
analysis of market sector factors, i.e. products, customers, suppliers, pricing and margin issues;
performance review of operational areas that should be considered in terms of current effectiveness and efficiency and scope for improvements;
financial analysis to model plans and factor in potential sensitivities, vulnerabilities and upsides; and
determining the most appropriate corporate and capital structure suitable for the work-out strategy concerned.

The above assessment, monitoring and control processes continue throughout the period the case is managed within the BSU. All the analysis performed around cash flows is used to determine appropriate impairment provisions.

The level of Commercial Banking Division BSU gross lending to customers reduced from £4.2 billion to £3.4 billion between 31 December 2015 and 31 December 2016. The net reduction of £0.8 billion in BSU managed lending in Commercial Banking was driven by returns to mainstream, disposals, write-offs and repayments.met.

 

The Group’s treatment of loan renegotiations is included in the impairment policy in note 2(H) on page F-13. Income statement information set out in the credit risk tables is on an underlying basis (see page 24).F-16.

Forbearance

A key factor in determining whether the Group treats a commercial customer as forborne is the granting of a concession which is outside the Group’s current risk appetite to a borrower who experiences, or is believed to be about to experience, financial difficulty. Where a concession is granted to a customer that is not in financial difficulty or the risk profile is considered within the Group’s current risk appetite, the concession would not be considered to be an act of forbearance. The Group does not believe forbearance reporting is appropriate for derivatives, available for sale assets and the trading book where assets are marked to market daily.

The Group recognises that forbearance alone is not necessarily an indicator of impaired status, but it is a trigger for the review of the customer’s credit profile. If there is any concern over the future cash flows and/or the Group incurring a loss, then forborne loans will be classified as impaired in accordance with the Group’s impairment policy. All impaired loans, including recoveries portfolios, are currently reported as forborne.

Recovery can sometimes be through improvement in market or economic conditions, or the customer may benefit from access to alternative sources of liquidity, such as an equity injection. These can be especially relevant in real estate or other asset backed transactions where a fire sale of assets in a weak market may be unattractive.

Depending on circumstances and when operated within robust parameters and controls, the Group believes forbearance can help support the customer in the short to medium-term. The Group expects to have unimpaired forborne assets within its portfolios, where default has been avoided, or when no longer considered impaired, although the majority of these cases will be managed in the BSU, where more intensive management and monitoring is available.

Unimpaired forborne assets are included in calculating the overall collective unidentified impairment provision, which uses the historical observed default rate and loss emergence period of the relevant portfolio as a whole as part of its calculation.

Whilst the material portfolios have been reviewed for forbearance, some non-retail loans and advances in Commercial Banking and Run-off Divisions have not been reviewed on the basis that the level of unimpaired forbearance is relatively immaterial, or because the concept of forbearance is not relevant. These include Lloyds Bank Commercial Finance Ltd and The Agricultural Mortgage Corporation Plc.

5754

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

TypesCustomers receiving support from UK government sponsored programmes

To assist customers in financial distress, the Group participates in UK government sponsored programmes for households, including the Income Support for Mortgage Interest programme, under which the government pays the Group all or part of forbearance

The Group’s strategy and offerthe interest on the mortgage on behalf of forbearancethe customer. This is largely dependent on each customers individual situation. Early identification, control and monitoring are key to supportingprovided as a government loan which the customer and protecting the Group. Concessions are often provided to help the customer with their day to day liquidity and working capital. A number of options are available to the Group where a customer is facing financial difficulty and each case is treated depending on its own specific circumstances.

For commercial customers, the Group currently looks at forbearance concessions including changes to:

Contractual payment terms (for example loan maturity extensions, or changes to capital and/or interest servicing arrangements, including capital repayment holidays or conversion to interest only terms); and
Non-payment contractual terms (for example covenant amendments or waivers) where the concession enables default to be avoided.

The main types of forbearance concessions to commercial customers in or facing financial difficulty are set out below:

Covenants: This includes temporary and permanent waivers, amendment or resetting of non-payment contractual covenants (including LTV and interest cover). The granting of this type of concession in itself would not result in the loan being classified as impaired and the customer is kept under review in the event that further forbearance is necessary;
Extensions/Alterations: This includes extension and/or alteration of repayment terms to a level outside of market or the Group’s risk appetite due to the customer’s inability to make existing contractual repayment terms; amendments to an interest rate to a level considered outside of market or the Group’s risk appetite, or other amendments such as changes to capital and/or interest servicing arrangements including capital repayment holidays or conversion to interest only terms; and
Multiple type of forbearance (a combination of the above two).

Forbearance identification, classification and measurement

All non-retail loans and advances on the watchlist are further categorised depending on the current and expected credit risk attaching to the customer and the transaction. All watchlist names are reviewed by the business and independent Risk function regularly and the classification is updated if required.

Any event that causes concern over future payments is likely to result in the customer being assessed for impairment and, if required, an impairment allowance recognised. If impairment is identified, the customer is immediately transferred to BSU (if not already managed there) and the lending will be treated as impaired.

All of a customer’s impaired loans are treated as forborne as they are considered as having been (or will be) granted some form of forbearance. Most impaired loans and advances exist only in the BSU within Commercial Banking Division and Run-off Division.

A portfolio approach is taken for SME customers with exposures below £1 million managed in BSU. All customers with exposures below £1 million are reported as forborne whilst they are managed by SME BSU (whether impaired or unimpaired).

All reviews performed in the good book, BSU within Commercial Banking or in the Run-off Division include analysis of latest financial information, a consideration of the market and sector the customer operates in, performance against plan and revised terms and conditions granted as part of any forbearance concession that may have been provided.

Exit from forbearance

A customer where forbearance has been granted will remain treated and recorded as forborne until it evidences acceptable performance over a period of time. This period will depend on a number of factors such as whether the customer is trading in line with its revised plan, it is operating within the new terms and conditions (including observation to revised covenants and contractual payments), its financial performance is stable or improving and there are no undue concerns over its future performance. As a minimum, this cure period is currently expected to be at least 12 months following a forbearance event. Customers curing are managed according to their overriding Credit Risk Classification categorisation; this could be in BSU, Run-off or in mainstream Good Book.

The exception to this 12 month minimum period is where a permanent structural cure is made (for example, an injection of new collateral security or a partial repayment of debt to restore an LTV back to within a covenant). In this case, the customer may exit forbearance once the permanent cure has been made.

However, notwithstanding this, the overriding requirement for exit from forbearance in all cases is that the customer is not impaired and the reason for the forbearance event is no longer present.

Upon exit from forbearance the customer may be returned to the mainstream good classification. It is important to note that such a decision can be made only by the independent Risk Division.must repay.

 

THE GROUP CREDIT RISK PORTFOLIO IN 20162019

 

Overview

AssetCredit quality remains strong withdespite an uncertain environment
The Group’s loan portfolios continuingcontinue to be well positioned, reflecting the Group’s effective risk management and continue to benefit from the Group’s pro-active approach to risk management, continueda low interest rates and a resilient UK economic environment.rate environment
The impairment charge increased by 14 per cent to £645 million in 2016 compared to £568 million in 2015. Gross charges remained broadly flat with the increase in net charges largely due to lower levels of releases and write-backs.
The asset quality ratio for 2016 was 15increased to 29 basis points compared(2018: 21 basis points) as did the impairment charge to 14 basis points during 2015 and the gross asset quality ratio (excluding releases and write-backs)£1,291 million (2018: £937 million). This was stable at 28 basis points.primarily driven by material charges against two corporate cases in Commercial Banking, along with some weakening in used car prices in Retail
Stage 2 loans as a proportion of total loans and advances to customers increased by 0.5 percentage points to 5.7 per cent (31 December 2018: 5.2 per cent)
Looking forward the 2017 full year asset quality ratio isStage 2 expected credit loss allowances as a percentage of drawn balances (coverage) decreased to increase to around 25 basis points primarily reflecting lower releases and write-backs.
583.8 per cent (31 December 2018: 4.2 per cent), largely driven by a reduction in expected credit loss (ECL)
allowances in SME due to an enhanced approach to loan amortisation within the IFRS 9 model and a number of other model refinements

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

ImpairedStage 3 loans as a percentageproportion of closingtotal loans and advances to customers was unchanged at 1.2 per cent (31 December 2018: 1.2 per cent), with Stage 3 loans and advances up £0.3 billion to £6.0 billion. Coverage of Stage 3 drawn balances reduced to 1.825.0 per cent at 31(31 December 2016, from 2.12018: 28.4 per cent at 31 December 2015, with impaired loans reducing by £1,095 million to £8,495 million duringcent), largely as a result of a reassessment of performance of Secured cases in long-term default and a change in the period,mix of Commercial assets due to further reductionswrite-offs and the transfer in the Commercial Banking, Consumer Finance and Run-off portfolios.of cases with lower likelihood of net loss

 

Low risk culture and prudent risk appetite

The Group continues to operatetake a prudent approach to credit risk, with the portfolios benefiting from the focus onrobust credit quality and affordability controls at origination and a prudent through the cycle approach to credit risk appetite. The Group’sappetite
Although not immune, credit portfolios are well positioned against currentan uncertain economic concernsoutlook and potential market volatility.volatility, including that related to the UK’s exit from the EU
The Group continues to grow lending to targeted segments in line with strategy, without relaxing credit criteria
The Group’s credit processes and controls ensure effective risk management includingseeks to ensure early identification and management of customers and counterparties who may be showing signs of distress.distress
The Group has delivered lending growth in key segments without relaxing credit criteria despite terms and conditions in some of the Group’s markets being impacted by increased competition and, in Commercial Banking, uncertainty in some sectors.
Sector concentrations within the lending portfolios are closely monitored and controlled, with mitigating actions taken where appropriate. Sector and product caps limit exposure to certain higher risk and vulnerable sectors and asset classes. In particular:classes


Table D:Group impairment charge

  Loans
and
advances
to banks and
other assets
£m
  Loans
and
advances
to customers
£m
  Financial
assets at
fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
£m
  Undrawn
balances
£m
  2019
Total
£m
  2018¹
£m
 
Retail     1,063      (25)  1,038   861 
Commercial Banking     297   (1)  10   306   71 
Insurance and Wealth  5            5   1 
Central Items     (53)        (53)  4 
Total impairment charge  5   1,307   (1)  (15)  1,296   937 
Asset quality ratio                  0.29%  0.21%
Gross asset quality ratio                  0.37%  0.28%

1Prior period segmental comparatives restated. See note 4 on page F-25.

Group loans and advances to customers

The following pages contain analysis of the Group’s loans and advances to customers by sub-portfolio. Loans and advances to customers are categorised into the following stages:

Stage 1 assets comprise of newly originated assets (unless purchased or originated credit impaired), as well as those which have not experienced a significant increase in credit risk. These assets carry an expected credit loss allowance equivalent to the expected credit losses that result from those default events that are possible within 12 months of the reporting date (12 month expected credit losses).

Stage 2 assets are those which have experienced a significant increase in credit risk since origination. These assets carry an expected credit loss allowance equivalent to the expected credit losses arising over the lifetime of the asset (lifetime expected credit losses).

Stage 3 assets have either defaulted or are otherwise considered to be credit impaired. These assets carry a lifetime expected credit loss.

Purchased or originated credit impaired assets (POCI) are those that have been originated or acquired in a credit impaired state. This includes within the definition of credit impaired the purchase of a financial asset at a deep discount that reflects impaired credit losses.


55

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table E:Group loans and advances to customers

  Total
£m
  Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
  Stage 3
as % of
total
%
 
At 31 December 2019                        
Retail  344,218   305,502   22,518   2,484   13,714   0.7 
Commercial Banking  96,763   87,323   5,993   3,447      3.6 
Insurance and Wealth  862   753   32   77      8.9 
Central items  56,404   56,397      7       
Total gross lending  498,247   449,975   28,543   6,015   13,714   1.2 
Expected credit loss allowance on drawn balances  (3,259)  (675)  (995)  (1,447)  (142)    
Net balance sheet carrying value  494,988   449,300   27,548   4,568   13,572     
Expected credit loss allowances (drawn and undrawn) as a percentage of gross lending (%)1  0.7   0.2   3.8   25.0   1.0     
                         
At 31 December 20182                        
Retail  341,682   305,160   18,741   2,390   15,391   0.7 
Commercial Banking  101,824   92,002   6,592   3,230      3.2 
Insurance and Wealth  865   804   6   55      6.4 
Central items  43,637   43,565   6   66      0.2 
Total gross lending  488,008   441,531   25,345   5,741   15,391   1.2 
Expected credit loss allowance on drawn balances  (3,150)  (525)  (994)  (1,553)  (78)    
Net balance sheet carrying value  484,858   441,006   24,351   4,188   15,313     
Expected credit loss allowances (drawn and undrawn) as a percentage of gross lending (%)1  0.7   0.1   4.2   28.4   0.5     

1Stage 3 ECL allowances as a percentage of drawn balances are calculated excluding loans in recoveries in Retail of £205 million (31 December 2018: £250 million).
2Prior period segmental comparatives restated. See note4on page F-25.

Table F:Group’s total expected credit loss allowance

  At
31 Dec 2019
£m
  At
31 Dec 2018
£m
 
Customer related balances        
Drawn  3,259   3,150 
Undrawn  177   193 
   3,436   3,343 
Other assets  19   19 
Total expected credit loss allowance  3,455   3,362 
56

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table G:Group expected credit loss allowances (drawn and undrawn) as a percentage of loans and advances to customers

  Total Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
  £m  As % of
drawn
balances
%
  £m  As % of
drawn
balances
%
  £m  As % of
drawn
balances
%
  £m  As % of
drawn
balances1
%
  £m  As % of
drawn
balances
%
 
At 31 December 2019                                        
Retail  2,090   0.6   639   0.2   819   3.6   490   21.5   142   1.0 
Commercial Banking  1,313   1.4   115   0.1   252   4.2   946   27.4       
Insurance and Wealth  17   2.0   6   0.8   1   3.1   10   13.0       
Central items  16      10            6   85.7       
Total  3,436   0.7   770   0.2   1,072   3.8   1,452   25.0   142   1.0 
At 31 December 20182                                        
Retail  1,768   0.5   493   0.2   713   3.8   484   22.6   78   0.5 
Commercial Banking  1,486   1.5   111   0.1   338   5.1   1,037   32.1       
Insurance and Wealth  18   2.1   6   0.7   1   16.7   11   20.0       
Central items  71   0.2   38   0.1   6   100.0   27   40.9       
Total  3,343   0.7   648   0.1   1,058   4.2   1,559   28.4   78   0.5 

1Stage 3 ECL allowances as a percentage of drawn balances are calculated excluding loans in recoveries in Retail of £205 million (31 December 2018: £250 million).
2Prior period segmental comparatives restated. See note 4 on page F-25.

Table H:Group Stage 2 loans and advances to customers

  Total Up to date 1-30 days past due Over 30 days past due
           PD movements Other1                  
  Gross
lending
£m
  ECL
£m
  As % of
gross
lending
%
  Gross
lending
£m
  ECL
£m
  As % of
gross
lending
%
  Gross
lending
£m
  ECL
£m
  As % of
gross
lending
%
  Gross
lending
£m
  ECL
£m
  As % of
gross
lending
%
  Gross
lending
£m
  ECL
£m
  As % of
gross
lending
%
 
At 31 December 2019                                                            
Retail  22,518   819   3.6   13,359   341   2.6   4,959   238   4.8   2,373   130   5.5   1,827   110   6.0 
Commercial Banking  5,993   252   4.2   3,911   179   4.6   1,700   64   3.8   117   8   6.8   265   1   0.4 
Insurance and Wealth  32   1   3.1            28   1   3.6   1         3       
Central items                                             
Total  28,543   1,072   3.8   17,270   520   3.0   6,687   303   4.5   2,491   138   5.5   2,095   111   5.3 
At 31 December 2018                                                            
Retail  18,741   713   3.8   10,017   248   2.5   4,488   250   5.6   2,441   113   4.6   1,795   102   5.7 
Commercial Banking  6,592   338   5.1   4,169   177   4.2   1,851   110   5.9   455   42   9.2   117   9   7.7 
Insurance and Wealth  6   1   16.7   3         1                  2   1   50.0 
Central items  6   6   100.0            6   6   100.0                   
Total  25,345   1,058   4.2   14,189   425   3.0   6,346   366   5.8   2,896   155   5.4   1,914   112   5.9 

1Includes forbearance, client and product-specific indicators not reflected within quantitative probability of default assessments.
57

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

The Group’s assessment of a significant increase in credit risk, and resulting categorisation of Stage 2, includes customers moving into early arrears as well as a broader assessment that an up to date customer has experienced a level of deterioration in credit risk since origination. A more sophisticated assessment is required for up to date customers, which varies across divisions and product type. This assessment incorporates specific triggers such as a significant proportionate increase in probability of default relative to that at origination, recent arrears, forbearance activity, internal watch lists and external bureau flags. Up to date exposures in Stage 2 are likely to show lower levels of expected credit loss (ECL) allowance relative to those that have already moved into arrears given that an arrears status typically reflects a stronger indication of future default and greater likelihood of credit losses.

Additional information

The measurement of ECL reflects an unbiased probability-weighted range of possible future economic outcomes. The Group achieves this by selecting four economic scenarios to reflect the range of outcomes; the central scenario reflects the Group’s base case assumptions used for medium term planning purposes, an upside and a downside scenario are also selected together with a severe downside scenario. The base case, upside and downside scenarios carry a 30 per cent weighting; the severe downside is weighted at 10 per cent. The table below shows the decomposition of the final probability-weighted ECL for each forward-looking economic scenario. The stage allocation for an asset is based on the overall scenario probability-weighted PD and, hence, the Stage 2 allocation is constant across all the scenarios.

The table below shows the ECL calculated under each scenario.

  Upside
£m
  Base Case
£m
  Downside
£m
  Severe
Downside
£m
  Probability-
weighted
£m
 
Secured  317   464   653   1,389   569 
Other Retail  1,443   1,492   1,564   1,712   1,521 
Commercial  1,211   1,258   1,382   1,597   1,315 
Other  50   50   50   50   50 
At 31 December 2019  3,021   3,264   3,649   4,748   3,455 
58

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

RETAIL

The credit quality of the Retail portfolios remains strong and continues to benefit from robust credit risk management, including affordability and indebtedness controls at origination and a prudent approach to risk appetite. The economic environment continues to benefit from high employment rates, positive real wage growth and household indebtedness remaining below pre-crisis levels.

 New business quality remains strong.
 The average indexed LTVflow of the Retail UK Secured portfolioloans entering arrears remains at 31 December 2016 was 44.0 per cent (31 December 2015: 46.1 per cent). The percentage of closinglow levels.
Stage 3 loans and advances with an indexed LTV greater than 100 per centas a percentage of total was unchanged at 0.7 per cent (31 December 2015: 1.12018: 0.7 per cent).

Loans and advances increased to £344 billion (31 December 2018: £342 billion).
The impairment charge increased to £1,038 million in 2019 compared to £861 million in the same period in 2018, driven by a number of items including some weakening in used car prices, provisioning methodology refinements and lower cash recoveries following prior year debt sales, partially offset by releases following a reassessment of cases in long-term default and improvements in the Secured portfolio.

Portfolios

Secured credit quality remained strong, with flow to arrears stable at low levels. Total secured loans and advances are broadly flat at £289.2 billion (31 December 2018: £288.2 billion), with an improved asset risk mix.
The average indexed loan to value (LTV) remained broadly stable at 44.9 per cent (31 December 2018: 44.3 per cent) and the proportion of balances with an LTV of greater than 90 per cent remained flat at 2.5 per cent. The average LTV of new business increased to 64.3 per cent (31 December 2018: 62.5 per cent).
 The impairment release of £167 million in 2019 compared to a charge of £38 million in 2018. This reflects provision releases due to improved credit quality of the portfolio and a reassessment of Secured cases in long-term default.
Unsecured loans and advances remained broadly flat at £28.4 billion. The impairment charge increased by £265 million to £948 million for 2019 (2018: £683 million), due to provisioning methodology refinements, including the alignment of credit card methodologies, and lower cash recoveries following prior year debt sales.
Total UK Direct Real Estate gross lending across the Group was £19.9The motor finance portfolio continued to grow in 2019, with loans and advances increasing by 7.0 per cent to £16.0 billion (31 December 2015: £19.72018: £14.9 billion). This mainly includes Commercial Banking lending of £18.5 billion, £0.5 billion bookedThe portfolio continues to benefit from a prudent approach to residual values at origination and provisions through the loan lifecycle. Residual value provisions, which are included in the Islands Commercial businessECL allowances for Stage 1 and £0.2 billion within Retail Business Banking (within Retail Division) with the Group continuingStage 2, have increased to write new business within conservative risk appetite parameters. The Group’s significantly reduced legacy run-off direct real estate portfolio has continued to fall to £0.7 billion at 31 December 2016 (31 December 2015: £1.1 billion), and now represents a very modest element of the total UK Direct Real Estate lending portfolio.
Run-off net external assets stood at £11,336£201 million at 31 December 2016, down from £12,1542019 (31 December 2018: £99 million). This is due to an anticipated increase in residual value deficits following some weakening in used car prices, a change in approach relating to the recognition of voluntary terminations and book growth. As a result of this, the impairment charge increased to £203 million at 31 December 2015. The portfolio represents only 2.1 per cent of the overall Group’sfor 2019 (2018: £113 million).
Other loans and advances (31 December 2015: 2.3 per cent)increased by £0.2 billon to £10.6 billion. The impairment charge was £54 million for 2019 (2018: £27 million). This increase is partly due to the non-repeat of prior year IFRS 9 methodology refinements in Business Banking.
59

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

Table I:Retail impairment charge

Table 1.4:Group impairment charge

 

2016 Loans and
advances to
customers
£m
  Debt securities
classified as
loans and
 receivables
£m
  Available-
for-sale
financial
assets
£m
  Other
credit risk
provisions
£m
  Total
£m
  20151
£m
 
Retail  373            373   349 
Commercial Banking  21         (5)  16   (22)
Consumer Finance  282            282   235 
Run-off  (17)        (9)  (26)  8 
Central items  (2)        2      (2)
Total impairment charge  657         (12)  645   568 
Asset quality ratio                  0.15%   0.14% 
Gross asset quality ratio                  0.28%   0.28% 
  2019  2018  Change 
  £m  £m  % 
Secured  (167)  38     
Unsecured1  948   683   (39)
UK Motor Finance  203   113   (80)
Other2,3  54   27   (100)
Total impairment charge  1,038   861   (21)
Asset quality ratio  0.30%   0.25%   5bp

 

1Restated.Unsecured includes Credit cards, Loans and Overdrafts.
2Other includes Business Banking, Europe and Retail run-off.
3Prior period segmental comparatives restated. See note 4 on page F-25.

 

Table 1.5:Movement in gross impaired loans

Table J:Retail loans and advances to customers

 

  2016    
                   
  Retail
£m
  Commercial
Banking
£m
  Consumer
Finance
£m
  Run-off
£m
  Total
£m
  2015
Total
£m
 
At 1 January1 4,112  2,543  910  2,025  9,590  14,308 
Classified as impaired during the year 1,947  671  425  111  3,154  3,401 
Transferred to not impaired during the year (800) (112) (81) (54) (1,047) (1,358)
Repayments (517) (595) (121) (94) (1,327) (1,729)
Amounts written off (391) (311) (285) (485) (1,472) (1,503)
Impact of disposal of business and asset sales   (33) (49) (410) (492) (3,403)
Exchange and other movements 3  16  (54) 124  89  (126)
At 31 December 4,354  2,179  745  1,217  8,495  9,590 
              Purchased  Stage 3 as 
              or originated  % of 
  Total  Stage 1  Stage 2  Stage 3  credit-impaired  total 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  % 
At 31 December 2019                        
Secured  289,198   257,043   16,935   1,506   13,714   0.5 
Unsecured1  28,411   24,921   2,812   678      2.4 
UK Motor Finance  15,976   13,884   1,942   150      0.9 
Other2  10,633   9,654   829   150      1.4 
Total gross lending  344,218   305,502   22,518   2,484   13,714   0.7 
Expected credit loss allowance on drawn balances  (1,961)  (563)  (766)  (490)  (142)    
Net balance sheet carrying value  342,257   304,939   21,752   1,994   13,572     
Expected credit loss allowances (drawn and undrawn) as a percentage of gross lending (%)3  0.6   0.2   3.6   21.5   1.0     
 
At 31 December 2018                        
Secured  288,235   257,797   13,654   1,393   15,391   0.5 
Unsecured1  28,115   24,705   2,707   703      2.5 
UK Motor Finance  14,933   13,224   1,580   129      0.9 
Other2  10,399   9,434   800   165      1.6 
Total gross lending  341,682   305,160   18,741   2,390   15,391   0.7 
Expected credit loss allowance on drawn balances  (1,613)  (389)  (662)  (484)  (78)    
Net balance sheet carrying value  340,069   304,771   18,079   1,906   15,313     
Expected credit loss allowances (drawn and undrawn) as a percentage of gross lending (%)3  0.5   0.2   3.8   22.6   0.5     

 

1Restated.Unsecured includes Credit cards, Loans and Overdrafts.
2Other includes Business Banking, Europe and Retail run-off.
3Stage 3 ECL allowances as a percentage of drawn balances are calculated excluding loans in recoveries for unsecured of £184 million (31 December 2018: £233 million) and £21 million (31 December 2018: £17 million) for Business Banking in Other.

60

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

Table K:Retail expected credit loss allowances (drawn and undrawn) as a percentage of loans and advances to customers

Table 1.6:Group impaired loans and provisions

 

   Loans and
advances to
customers
£m
   Impaired
Loans
£m
   Impaired
loans as %
of closing
advances
%
   Impairment
provisions1
£m
   Provision as % of
impaired
loans2
 %
 
At 31 December 2016                    
Retail  299,493   4,354   1.5   1,630   38.2 
Commercial Banking  101,176   2,179   2.2   824   37.8 
Consumer Finance  35,494   745   2.1   396   85.0 
Run-off  10,259   1,217   11.9   682   56.0 
Reverse repos and other items3  15,249                 
Total gross lending  461,671   8,495   1.8   3,532   43.4 
Impairment provisions  (3,532)                
Fair value adjustments4  (181)                
Total Group  457,958                 
At 31 December 20155                    
Retail  307,500   4,112   1.3   1,564   39.2 
Commercial Banking  103,082   2,543   2.5   1,091   42.9 
Consumer Finance  31,827   910   2.9   367   75.5 
Run-off  11,422   2,025   17.7   1,150   56.8 
Reverse repos and other items3  5,798                 
Total gross lending  459,629   9,590   2.1   4,172   46.1 
Impairment provisions  (4,172)                
Fair value adjustments4  (282)                
Total Group  455,175                 
                          Purchased 
                          or originated 
  Total  Stage 1  Stage 2  Stage 3  credit-impaired 
     As % of     As % of     As % of     As % of     As % of 
     drawn     drawn     drawn     drawn     drawn 
     balances     balances     balances     balances1     balances 
  £m  %  £m  %  £m  %  £m  %  £m  % 
At 31 December 2019                                        
Secured  569   0.2   24      281   1.7   122   8.1   142   1.0 
Unsecured2  1,007   3.6   363   1.5   411   14.6   233   47.2       
UK Motor Finance3  387   2.4   216   1.6   87   4.5   84   56.0       
Other4  127   1.2   36   0.4   40   4.8   51   39.5       
Total  2,090   0.6   639   0.2   819   3.6   490   21.5   142   1.0 
At 31 December 2018                                        
Secured  460   0.2   38      226   1.7   118   8.5   78   0.5 
Unsecured2  896   3.2   287   1.2   379   14.0   230   48.9       
UK Motor Finance3  290   1.9   127   1.0   78   4.9   85   65.9       
Other4  122   1.2   41   0.4   30   3.8   51   34.5       
Total  1,768   0.5   493   0.2   713   3.8   484   22.6   78   0.5 

 

1Impairment provisions include collective unidentified impairment provisions.Stage 3 ECL allowances as a percentage of drawn balances are calculated excluding loans in recoveries for unsecured of £184 million (31 December 2018: £233 million) and £21 million (31 December 2018: £17 million) for Business Banking within other.
  
2Impairment provisions as a percentage of impaired loans are calculated excluding loans in recoveries in RetailUnsecured includes Credit cards, Loans and Overdrafts.
3UK Motor Finance for Stages 1 and 2 include £201 million (31 December 2016: £86 million; 31 December 2015: £1182018: £99 million) relating to provisions against residual values of vehicles subject to finance leasing agreements. These provisions are included within the calculation of coverage ratios.
4Other includes Business Banking, Europe and in Consumer Finance (31 December 2016: £279 million; 31 December 2015: £424 million).Retail run-off.

Table L:Retail Stage 2 loans and advances to customers

  Total  Up to date  1-30 days past due  Over 30 days past due 
           PD movement  Other3                   
        As % of        As % of        As % of        As % of        As % of 
  Gross     gross  Gross     gross  Gross     gross  Gross     gross  Gross     gross 
  lending  ECL  lending  lending  ECL  lending  lending  ECL  lending  lending  ECL  lending  lending  ECL  lending 
  £m  £m  %  £m  £m  %  £m  £m  %  £m  £m  %  £m  £m  % 
At 31 December 2019                                             
Secured  16,935   281   1.7   10,846   83   0.8   2,593   107   4.1   1,876   33   1.8   1,620   58   3.6 
Unsecured1  2,812   411   14.6   1,661   217   13.1   772   90   11.7   282   67   23.8   97   37   38.1 
UK Motor Finance  1,942   87   4.5   543   27   5.0   1,232   30   2.4   135   21   15.6   32   9   28.1 
Other2  829   40   4.8   309   14   4.5   362   11   3.0   80   9   11.3   78   6   7.7 
Total  22,518   819   3.6   13,359   341   2.6   4,959   238   4.8   2,373   130   5.5   1,827   110   6.0 
At 31 December 2018                                                            
Secured  13,654   226   1.7   8,318   62   0.7   1,800   77   4.3   1,955   30   1.5   1,581   57   3.6 
Unsecured1  2,707   379   14.0   998   149   14.9   1,357   144   10.6   258   53   20.5   94   33   35.1 
UK Motor Finance  1,580   78   4.9   488   26   5.3   915   21   2.3   146   23   15.8   31   8   25.8 
Other2  800   30   3.8   213   11   5.2   416   8   1.9   82   7   8.5   89   4   4.5 
Total  18,741   713   3.8   10,017   248   2.5   4,488   250   5.6   2,441   113   4.6   1,795   102   5.7 

1Unsecured includes Credit cards, Loans and Overdrafts.
2Other includes Business Banking, Europe and Retail run-off.
  
3Includes £6.7 billion (December 2015: £5.7 billion) of lower risk loans sold by Commercial Bankingforbearance and Retail to Insurance to back annuitant liabilities.
4The fair value adjustments relating to loans and advances were those required to reflect the HBOS assets in the Group’s consolidated financial records at their fair value and took into account both the expected losses and market liquidity at the date of acquisition. The fair value unwind in respect of impairment losses incurred was £70 million for the year ended 31 December 2016 (31 December 2015: £97 million). The fair value unwind in respect of loans and advances is expected to continue to decrease in future years and will reduce to zero over time.
5Restated.product-specific indicators not reflected within quantitative PD assessments.

Table 1.7:Derivative credit risk exposures

       2016         2015     
       Traded over the counter         Traded over the counter     
  Traded on
recognised
exchanges
£m
  Settled
by central
counterparties
£m
  Not settled
by central
counterparties
£m
  Total
£m
  Traded on
recognised
exchanges
£m
  Settled
by central
counterparties
£m
  Not settled
by central
counterparties
£m
  Total
£m
 
Notional balances                                
Foreign exchange     254   369,368   369,622   6,568      383,722   390,290 
Interest rate  167,399   3,023,742   423,709   3,614,850   31,128   3,598,307   791,351   4,420,786 
Equity and other  32,172      11,046   43,218   4,837      9,337   14,174 
Credit        8,098   8,098         4,566   4,566 
Total  199,571   3,023,996   812,221   4,035,788   42,533   3,598,307   1,188,976   4,829,816 
Fair values                                
Assets      262   35,563           103   28,811     
Liabilities      (1)  (34,506)          (131)  (26,149)    
Net asset      261   1,057           (28)  2,662     

The total notional principal amount of interest rate, exchange rate, credit derivative and equity and other contracts outstanding at 31 December 2016 and 31 December 2015 is shown in the table above. The notional principal amount does not, however, represent the Group’s credit risk exposure, which is limited to the current cost of replacing contracts with a positive value to the Group. Such amounts are reflected in note 52 on page F-87.

61

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

Retail

Table M:Asset quality remains strong across all portfolios, with stable new business quality and fewer loans entering arrears.
The impairment charge increased by £24 million to £373 million for 2016, an increase of 7 per cent compared to 2015.
The Overdrafts impairment charge increased by £12 million to £241 million, driven by a change to collections entry criteria.
The Secured impairment charge increased by £6 million to £104 million, reflecting a continued prudent approach to provisioning.
The Retail Business Banking impairment charge increased by £6 million to £27 million, following a revised modelling approach and an increase in lending balances.
Impairment provisions as a percentage of impaired loans decreased to 38.2 per cent from 39.2 per cent at the end of 2015.

Table 1.8:Retail impairment charge

  2016
£m
  20151
£m
  Change
%
 
Secured  104   98   (6)
Overdrafts  241   229   (5)
Wealth  1   1    
Retail Business Banking  27   21   (29)
Total impairment charge  373   349   (7)
Asset quality ratio  0.12%   0.11%   1bp

1.Restated.

Table 1.9:Retail impaired loans and provisions

  Loans and
advances to
customers
£m
  Impaired
loans
£m
  Impaired loans
as a % of closing
advances
%
  Impairment
provisions1
£m
  Impairment
provisions
as a %
of impaired
loans2
%
 
At 31 December 2016                    
Secured  294,503   4,104   1.4   1,503   36.6 
Overdrafts  1,952   179   9.2   90   82.6 
Wealth  2,034   44   2.2   15   34.1 
Retail Business Banking  1,004   27   2.7   22   200.0 
Total gross lending  299,493   4,354   1.5   1,630   38.2 
Impairment provisions  (1,630)                
Fair value adjustments  (181)                
Total  297,682                 
At 31 December 20153                    
Secured  302,413   3,818   1.3   1,431   37.5 
Overdrafts  2,028   211   10.4   95   78.5 
Wealth  2,164   40   1.8   19   47.5 
Retail Business Banking  895   43   4.8   19   126.7 
Total gross lending  307,500   4,112   1.3   1,564   39.2 
Impairment provisions  (1,564)                
Fair value adjustments  (273)                
Total  305,663                 

1Impairment provisions include collective unidentified impairment provisions.
2Impairment provisions as a percentage of impaired loans are calculated excluding loans in recoveries for Overdrafts (31 December 2016: £70 million; 31 December 2015: £90 million) and Retail Business Banking (31 December 2016: £16 million; 31 December 2015: £28 million).
3Restated.
62

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Secured

The impairment charge increased by £6 million to £104 million in 2016 (31 December 2015: £98 million).
Loans and advances reduced by 2.6 per cent on the Secured book to £295 billion, with reductions in both the Mainstream and buy-to-let portfolios. The closed Specialist portfolio has continued to run-off, reducing by 10.0 per cent to £18 billion.
Impaired loans increased by £286 million to £4,104 million in 2016 and the value of mortgages greater than three months in arrears (excluding repossessions) increased by £128 million to £6,033 million at 31 December 2016 (31 December 2015: £5,905 million). These are both principally due to delayed litigation while changes were made to legal processes. New business quality remained stable and flows into arrears improved.
Impairment provisions as a percentage of impaired loans was 36.6 per cent (31 December 2015: 37.5 per cent).
Against a backdrop of strong improvement in the housing market, with UK prices rising 6 per cent over 2016 (on a quarterly non-seasonally adjusted basis), provisions remain prudent and reflect the latent risks of the current low interest rate environment.
The average indexed LTV of the portfolio at 31 December 2016 improved to 44.0 per cent compared with 46.1 per cent at 31 December 2015. The percentage of closingsecured loans and advances with an indexed LTV in excess of 100 per cent improved to 0.7 per cent at 31 December 2016, compared with 1.1 per cent at 31 December 2015.
The average LTV for new mortgages written in 2016, including participation in the UK Government’s Help To Buy scheme, was 64.4 per cent compared with 64.7 per cent for 2015.
Additional controls for new buy-to-let lending were implemented ahead of the regulatory deadline, with no relaxation in risk appetite.customers

Table 1.10:Retail Secured loans and advances to customers

 

  At 31 Dec
2016
£m
  At 31 Dec
2015
£m
 
         
Mainstream  222,450   227,267 
Buy-to-let  54,460   55,598 
Specialist1  17,593   19,548 
Total Secured  294,503   302,413 

1Specialist lending has been closed to new business since 2009.

Table 1.11:Mortgages greater than three months in arrears (excluding repossessions)

  Number of cases  Total mortgage accounts %  Value of loans1  Total mortgage balances % 
  2016  2015  2016  2015  2016  2015  2016  2015 
At 31 Dec Cases  Cases  %  %  £m  £m  %  % 
Mainstream  35,254   34,850   1.7   1.6   3,865   3,803   1.7   1.7 
Buy-to-let  5,324   5,021   1.1   1.0   660   626   1.2   1.1 
Specialist  9,078   8,777   7.2   6.4   1,508   1,476   8.6   7.6 
Total  49,656   48,648   1.8   1.7   6,033   5,905   2.0   2.0 

1Value of loans represents total gross book value of mortgages more than three months in arrears.

The stock of repossessions increased to 678 cases at 31 December 2016 compared to 654 cases at 31 December 2015.

63

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table 1.12:Period end and average LTVs across the Retail mortgage portfolios

  Mainstream
%
  Buy-to-let
%
  Specialist
%
  Total
%
  Unimpaired
%
  Impaired
%
 
At 31 December 2016                        
Less than 60%  56.8   52.0   53.8   55.8   56.0   38.3 
60% to 70%  17.8   25.4   17.8   19.2   19.3   18.4 
70% to 80%  14.0   14.4   13.6   14.0   14.0   15.3 
80% to 90%  8.4   6.1   8.6   8.0   7.9   11.9 
90% to 100%  2.4   1.5   3.1   2.3   2.2   6.8 
Greater than 100%  0.6   0.6   3.1   0.7   0.6   9.3 
Total  100.0   100.0   100.0   100.0   100.0   100.0 
Outstanding loan value (£m)  222,450   54,460   17,593   294,503   290,399   4,104 
Average loan to value:1                        
Stock of residential mortgages  41.8   53.7   49.2   44.0         
New residential lending  65.0   61.9   n/a   64.4         
Impaired mortgages  51.8   69.0   61.9   55.8         
At 31 December 2015                        
Less than 60%  52.2   45.4   43.7   50.4   50.7   30.9 
60% to 70%  19.1   26.8   19.7   20.6   20.6   17.5 
70% to 80%  15.5   15.0   15.5   15.4   15.4   16.9 
80% to 90%  9.0   8.0   11.6   9.0   8.9   13.3 
90% to 100%  3.2   3.9   5.5   3.5   3.4   9.5 
Greater than 100%  1.0   0.9   4.0   1.1   1.0   11.9 
Total  100.0   100.0   100.0   100.0   100.0   100.0 
Outstanding loan value (£m)  227,267   55,598   19,548   302,413   298,595   3,818 
Average loan to value:1                        
Stock of residential mortgages  43.6   56.3   53.3   46.1         
New residential lending  65.2   63.0   n/a   64.7         
Impaired mortgages  55.6   74.6   66.8   60.0         

1Average loan to value is calculated as total loans and advances as a percentage of the total indexed collateral of these loans and advances.
  At 31 Dec  At 31 Dec 
  2019  2018 
  £m  £m 
Mainstream  227,975   223,230 
Buy-to-let  49,086   51,322 
Specialist  12,137   13,683 
Total  289,198   288,235 

 

Interest only mortgages

The Group provides interest only mortgages to owner occupier mortgage customers whereby only payments of interest are made for the term of the mortgage with the customer responsible for repaying the principal outstanding at the end of the loan term. At 31 December 2016,2019, owner occupier interest only balances as a proportion of total owner occupier balances had reduced to 31.323.9 per cent (31 December 2015: 33.92018: 26.7 per cent). The average indexed loan to value improved to 43.8remained at 41.2 per cent (31 December: 46.6December 2018: 41.2 per cent).

New owner occupier interest only mortgages are subject to conservative underwriting criteria with rigorous controls on customers’ ability to repay the principal at the end of term. New interest only mortgages, including those with any element of capital repayments represented 1.9 per cent of new residential mortgages in 2016 (2.8 per cent in 20152).

 

For existing interest only mortgages, a contact strategy is in place throughoutduring the term of the mortgage to ensure that customers are aware of their obligations to repay the principal upon maturity of the loan.

 

Treatment strategies are in place to help customers anticipate and plan for repayment of capital at maturity and support those who may have difficulty in repaying the principal amount. A dedicated specialist team supports customers who have passed their contractual maturity date and are unable to fully repay the principal. A range of treatments are offered suchto customers based on their individual circumstances to create fair and sustainable outcomes.

62

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table N:Analysis of owner occupier interest only mortgages

  At 31 Dec  At 31 Dec 
  2019  2018 
  Total  Total 
Interest only balances (£m)  57,437   63,138 
Stage 1%  75.6   79.1 
Stage 2%  10.0   6.6 
Stage 3%  1.2   1.0 
Purchased or originated credit impaired %  13.2   13.3 
 
Average loan to value (%)1  41.2   41.2 
 
Maturity profile (£m)        
Due  1,459   1,144 
1 year  1,968   2,405 
2-5 years  9,852   10,229 
6-10 years  18,606   18,562 
>11 years  25,552   30,798 
 
Past term interest only balances (£m)2  1,677   1,635 
Stage 1%  0.9   2.8 
Stage 2%  23.9   16.8 
Stage 3%  21.8   17.9 
Purchased or originated credit impaired %  53.4   62.5 
 
Average loan to value (%)1  35.7   34.9 
Negative equity (%)  2.8   2.8 

12019 interest only LTVs (loan to value) use Markit’s 2019 Halifax House Price Index; 2018 LTVs have been restated on the same basis.
2Balances where all interest only elements have moved past term. Some may subsequently have had a term extension, so are no longer classed as due.

Retail forbearance

The basis of disclosure for forbearance is aligned to definitions used in the European Banking Authority’s FINREP reporting. Total forbearance for the major retail portfolios has improved by £546 million to £6.2 billion driven primarily by a reduction in customers where arrears are written on to the loan balance (capitalisations).

The main customer treatments included are: repair, where arrears are written on to the loan balance and the arrears position cancelled; instances where there are suspensions of interest and/or capital repayments; past term interest only mortgages; and refinance personal loans.

As a percentage of loans and advances, forbearance loans improved to 1.8 per cent at 31 December 2019 (31 December 2018: 2.0 per cent).

Total expected credit losses (ECL) as full (or part) conversiona proportion of loans and advances which are forborne has increased to capital repayment, and extension of term to match the maturity dates of any associated repayment vehicles.5.0 per cent (31 December 2018: 4.3 per cent).

Table O:Retail forborne loans and advances (audited)

              Expected credit 
           Of which  losses as a % of 
           purchased or  total loans and 
     Of which  Of which  originated  advances which 
  Total  Stage 2  Stage 3  credit impaired  are forborne1 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  % 
At 31 December 2019               
Secured  5,559   1,156   736   3,659   2.1 
Unsecured2  540   168   305      31.2 
UK Motor Finance  63   35   26      30.4 
Total  6,162   1,359   1,067   3,659   5.0 
At 31 December 2018                    
Secured  6,089   1,136   642   4,241   1.6 
Unsecured2  563   204   289      30.3 
UK Motor Finance  56   30   25      34.8 
Total  6,708   1,370   956   4,241   4.3 

1Expected credit loss allowance as a percentage of total loans and advances which are forborne is calculated excluding loans in recoveries for Unsecured (31 December 2019: £82 million; 31 December 2018: £107 million).
22019 balances include MBNA, 2018 balances have been restated on the same basis

63

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

COMMERCIAL BANKING

Despite the challenging environment, the overall credit quality of the portfolio and new business remains good. The portfolio continues to benefit from effective risk management and low interest rates. Notwithstanding the current competitive market conditions, the Group is maintaining its prudent, well-defined and controlled through the cycle credit risk appetite.
The possibility of a no-deal exit from the European Union remains given the timelines for striking a trade deal. Developments continue to be monitored proactively and various initiatives are in place to mitigate ‘No Deal’ risk to ensure portfolio quality is maintained whilst supporting the Group’s purpose of Helping Britain Prosper.
There are headwinds in a number of sectors including agriculture, construction, manufacturing and consumer related sectors such as retail. Performance and monitoring of vulnerable sectors remains a key focus at this stage of the credit cycle.
Dynamic internal and external key performance indicators are monitored closely to help identify early signs of deterioration.
Portfolios remain well positioned and are subject to ongoing risk mitigation actions as appropriate. Monitoring indicates no material deterioration in the credit quality of the portfolio.
Net impairment charge of £306 million compared with a net charge of £71 million in 2018 is largely as a result of gross charges on two corporate cases, rather than any material deterioration in the underlying portfolio. These were partially offset by a net release in Stage 1 and 2 ECL, driven by enhancements to model methodology and data, including the approach to modelling loan amortisation. The impact of this was weighted toward the SME portfolio. Excluding the two large corporate cases, gross charges in 2019 were lower than 2018.
The size and nature of the commercial portfolio results in some volatility as cases move between stages. Stage 3 loans as a proportion of total loans and advances to customers has increased to 3.6 per cent (31 December 2018: 3.2 per cent). Stage 3 ECL allowance as a percentage of Stage 3 drawn balances has reduced to 27.4 per cent (31 December 2018: 32.1 per cent), predominantly due to the change in mix of assets due to write-offs and the transfer in of a small number of larger, individually assessed names with lower likelihood of net loss.
Stage 2 loans as a proportion of total loans and advances to customers remained broadly stable at 6.2 per cent (31 December 2018: 6.5 per cent). Stage 2 ECL allowances as a percentage of Stage 2 drawn balances were lower at 4.2 per cent (31 December 2018: 5.1 per cent) with the reduction weighted toward SME mainly due to enhanced approach to loan amortisation within the IFRS 9 model and a number of other model refinements
64

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

Table 1.13:Analysis of owner occupier interest only mortgagesPortfolios

  2016  2015 
Interest only balances (£m)1  72,651   81,558 
Of which, impaired (%)  3.1   2.5 
Average loan to value (%)  43.8   46.6 
Maturity profile (£m)2:        
1 year  2,496   1,709 
2-5 years  9,877   10,123 
6-10 years  16,990   17,084 
>11 years  41,927   51,502 
         
Past term interest only balances (£m)3  1,361   1,140 
Of which, impaired (%)  10.5   9.7 
Average loan to value (%)  31.5   32.5 
Negative equity (%)  1.4   1.8 

1In additionThe SME and Mid Markets portfolios are domestically focused and reflect both our prudent credit risk appetite and the Group has buy-to-let interest only balancesunderlying performance of £48,575 million (2015: £49,751 million) and certain other interest only balances of £3,703 million (2015: £3,705 million).the UK economy.
  
2December 2015 values have been restated to now include the interest only elements of mortgage accounts which consist of partial interest only and partial capital repayment.
3Past term interest only balances are reported excluding any element being repaid on a capital and interest basis. December 2015 balances have been restated on the same basis.

Forborne loans

UK Secured forborne loans and advances reduced by £1,006 million in 2016 to £2,096 million, primarily due to a reduction in recapitalisations with higher levels of historic cases exiting the two year probation period, and a tightening of eligibility criteria during the year. At 31 December 2016, UK Secured loans and advances currently or recently subject to forbearance improved to 0.7 per cent (31 December 2015: 1.0 per cent) of total UK Secured loans and advances.

Overdrafts forborne loans and advances have reduced by £9 million in 2016 to £78 million. At 31 December 2016, Overdrafts loans and advances currently or recently subject to forbearance were 4.0 per cent (31 December 2015: 4.3 per cent) of total overdrafts loans and advances.

Further analysis of the Retail forborne loan balances is set out below:

Table 1.14:UK Retail forborne loans and advances (audited)

  Total loans and advances which
 are forborne
  Total forborne loans and
advances which are impaired
  Impairment provisions as % of
loans and advances which are
forborne
 
  At Dec  At Dec  At Dec  At Dec  At Dec  At Dec 
  2016  2015  2016  2015  2016  2015 
   £m   £m   £m   £m   %   % 
UK Secured lending:                        
Temporary forbearance arrangements                        
Reduced payment arrangements1  428   414   101   41   4.9   4.2 
                         
Permanent treatments                        
Repair and term extensions2  1,668   2,688   116   132   4.7   4.2 
Total  2,096   3,102   217   173   4.7   4.2 
 
Overdrafts3  78   87   61   63   38.0   35.0 

1Includes customers who had an arrangement to pay less than the contractual amount at 31 December or where an arrangement ended within the previous three months.
2Includes capitalisation of arrears and term extensions which commenced during the previous 24 months and where the borrowers remain as customers at 31 December.
3Includes temporary treatments where the customer is currently benefiting from the change or the treatment has ended within the last six months.
65

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

The movements in Retail forborne loans and advances during the year are as follows:

Table 1.15:Movement in UK Retail forborne loans and advances (audited)

  2016  2015 
  UK     UK    
  Secured  Overdrafts  Secured  Overdrafts 
  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 1 January  3,102   87   4,394   89 
Classified as forborne during the year  975   50   1,290   53 
Written-off/sold  (12)  (31)  (25)  (26)
Exit from forbearance  (1,741)  (24)  (2,252)  (22)
Redeemed or repaid  (200)     (263)   
Exchange and other movements  (28)  (4)  (42)  (7)
At 31 December  2,096   78   3,102   87 

Commercial Banking

The Commercial Banking net impairment charge was £16 million in 2016, compared to a net impairment release of £22 million in 2015, with the increase largely due to one material charge related to a case within the oil & gas sector, rather than a deterioration in the underlying portfolio. Other than this, gross charges remained relatively low in 2016.
The portfolio continues to benefit from effective risk management and the continued low interest rate environment.
Credit quality of the portfolio and new business remains generally good.
Impaired loans reduced by 14 per cent to £2,179 million at 31 December 2016 compared with £2,543 million at 31 December 2015 and as a percentage of closing loans and advances reduced to 2.2 per cent from 2.5 per cent at 31 December 2015.
Impairment provisions reduced to £824 million at 31 December 2016 (31 December 2015: £1,091 million) and includes collective unidentified impairment provisions of £183 million (31 December 2015: £229 million). Provisions as a percentage of impaired loans reduced from 42.9 per cent to 37.8 per cent during 2016, heavily influenced by the net movement of three material cases with different coverage levels that has impacted the portfolio average.
The UK faces a number of significant headwinds including the changing global economic outlook and the impact of the EU Exit referendum outcome which have the ability to impact the Commercial Banking portfolios.
Commercial Banking remains disciplined within its low risk appetite approach and key credit risks continue to be effectively managed, including early identification and management of potential concern customers. The Group manages and limits exposure to certain sectors and asset classes, and closely monitor credit quality, sector and single name concentrations.
Detailed EU Exit portfolio impact assessments have been undertaken and internal and external key performance indicators are being monitored closely to help identify early signs of any deterioration.
Despite the uncertain economic headwinds, the portfolios are well positioned and monitoring confirms that the Group has yet to see any material deterioration in the credit quality of its portfolios. However, given the challenging environment the Group’s portfolios will not be immune and impairments are likely to increase from their historic low levels, driven mainly by lower levels of releases and write-backs and an element of credit normalisation.

Table 1.16:Commercial Banking impairment charge

  2016  2015  Change 
  £m  £m  % 
SME  (7)  (22)  (68)
Other  23        
Total impairment charge  16   (22)    
Asset quality ratio1  0.02%   0.01%   1bp 
1In respect of loans and advances to customers.
66

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table 1.17:Commercial Banking impaired loans and provisions

        Impaired       
  Loans and     loans as a %     Impairment 
  advances to  Impaired  of closing  Impairment  provisions as a % 
  customers  loans  advances  provisions1  of impaired loans 
  £m  £m  %  £m  % 
At 31 December 2016                    
SME  29,959   923   3.1   173   18.7 
Other  71,217   1,256   1.8   651   51.8 
Total gross lending  101,176   2,179   2.2   824   37.8 
Impairment provisions  (824)                
Total  100,352                 
                     
At 31 December 20152                    
SME  29,393   1,149   3.9   213   18.5 
Other  73,689   1,394   1.9   878   63.0 
Total gross lending  103,082   2,543   2.5   1,091   42.9 
Impairment provisions  (1,091)                
Total  101,991                 
1Impairment provisions include collective unidentified impairment provisions.
2Restated.

SME

The SME Banking portfolio continues to grow within prudent credit risk appetite parameters.
Portfolio credit quality has remained stable or improved across all key metrics.
SME continues to benefit from write-backs/releases. There was a net impairment release of £7 million in 2016 compared to a net release of £22 million during 2015.

Other Commercial Banking

Other Commercial Banking comprises £71,217 million of gross loans and advances to customers in Mid Markets, Global Corporates and Financial Institutions.
The Mid Markets business remains UK-focused and credit quality has been generally stable during 2016. The downturn in global oil and gas prices, which began in 2015, has created pressure on some parts of the oilfield services portfolio but this has not translated into a significant increase in defaults or impairment in the Mid Markets book. Political events during 2016, in particular the EU Exit referendum outcome, have brought volatility to financial markets but to date this has not led to a material increase in stress within the Mid Markets portfolio.
The Global Corporates business continues to have a predominance of UK based, and to a lesser extent, US and European-based multi-national investment grade clients, primarily UK based.clients. The portfolio remains of good quality despiteand is well positioned for the current global economic headwinds particularly relating to the EU Exit referendum outcome and volatile commodity prices in the oil & gas and mining sectors.outlook.
  
Through clearly defined sector strategies, Financial Institutions serves predominantly investment grade counterparties with whom relationships are either client driven or held to support the Group’s funding, liquidity or general hedging requirements. Overall performance of the portfolio remains good.
The commercial real estate business within the Group’s Mid Markets and Global CorporateCorporates portfolio is focused on clients operating in the UK commercial property market ranging in size from medium sizedmedium-sized private real estate entities up to publicly listed property companies. The uncertainties created by the EU Exit referendum outcome have reduced activity in the second half of 2016 but the market for UK real estate has continued to be resilient and creditCredit quality remains good with minimal impairments/impairments and stressed loans. Recognising this is a cyclical sector, appropriate caps are in place to control exposure and business propositions continue to be written in line with a prudent, through the cycle risk appetite with conservative LTVs, strong quality of income and proven management teams.

Table P:Commercial Banking impairment charge

  2019  2018¹  Change 
  £m  £m  % 
SME  (65)  64     
Other  371   7     
Total impairment charge  306   71   (331)
Asset quality ratio  0.30%   0.06%   24bp 

1Financial Institutions serves predominantly investment grade counterparties with whom relationships are either client focused or heldPrior period segmental comparatives restated. See note 4 on page F-25.

Table Q:Commercial Banking loans and advances to support the Group’s funding, liquidity or general hedging requirements. Overall limits have been relatively stablecustomers

              Stage 3 
              as % of 
  Total  Stage 1  Stage 2  Stage 3  total 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  % 
At 31 December 2019               
SME  30,698   27,455   2,523   720   2.3 
Other  66,065   59,868   3,470   2,727   4.1 
Total gross lending  96,763   87,323   5,993   3,447   3.6 
Expected credit loss allowance on drawn balances  (1,265)  (96)  (228)  (941)    
Net balance sheet carrying value  95,498   87,227   5,765   2,506     
Expected credit loss allowances (drawn and undrawn) as a percentage of gross lending (%)  1.4   0.1   4.2   27.4     
At 31 December 20181                    
SME  30,296   26,099   3,484   713   2.4 
Other1  71,528   65,903   3,108   2,517   3.5 
Total gross lending  101,824   92,002   6,592   3,230   3.2 
Expected credit loss allowance on drawn balances  (1,449)  (93)  (325)  (1,031)    
Net balance sheet carrying value  100,375   91,909   6,267   2,199     
Expected credit loss allowances (drawn and undrawn) as a percentage of gross lending (%)  1.5   0.1   5.1   32.1     

1Prior period segmental comparatives restated. See note 4 on page F-25.

Table R:Commercial Banking expected credit loss allowances (drawn and undrawn) as the Group continuesa percentage of loans and advances to prudently manage the portfoliocustomers

  Total  Stage 1  Stage 2  Stage 3 
     As % of     As % of     As % of     As % of 
     drawn     drawn     drawn     drawn 
     balances     balances     balances     balances 
  £m  %  £m  %  £m  %  £m  % 
At 31 December 2019                                
SME  273   0.9   45   0.2   127   5.0   101   14.0 
Other  1,040   1.6   70   0.1   125   3.6   845   31.0 
Total  1,313   1.4   115   0.1   252   4.2   946   27.4 
At 31 December 20181                                
SME  384   1.3   40   0.2   231   6.6   113   15.8 
Other  1,102   1.5   71   0.1   107   3.4   924   36.7 
Total  1,486   1.5   111   0.1   338   5.1   1,037   32.1 

1Prior period segmental comparatives restated. See note 4 on page F-25.

65

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table S:Commercial Banking Stage 2 loans and advances to customers

  Total  Up to date  1-30 days past due  Over 30 days past due 
           PD movement  Other1                   
        As % of        As % of        As % of        As % of        As % of 
  Gross     gross  Gross     gross  Gross     gross  Gross     gross  Gross     gross 
  lending  ECL  lending  lending  ECL  lending  lending  ECL  lending  lending  ECL  lending  lending  ECL  lending 
  £m  £m  %  £m  £m  %  £m  £m  %  £m  £m  %  £m  £m  % 
At 31 December 2019                                                            
SME  2,523   127   5.0   2,030   104   5.1   410   17   4.1   56   6   10.7   27       
Other  3,470   125   3.6   1,881   75   4.0   1,290   47   3.6   61   2   3.3   238   1   0.4 
Total  5,993   252   4.2   3,911   179   4.6   1,700   64   3.8   117   8   6.8   265   1   0.4 
At 31 December 2018                                                            
SME  3,484   231   6.6   2,376   116   4.9   661   65   9.8   383   41   10.7   64   9   14.1 
Other  3,108   107   3.4   1,793   61   3.4   1,190   45   3.8   72   1   1.4   53       
Total  6,592   338   5.1   4,169   177   4.2   1,851   110   5.9   455   42   9.2   117   9   7.7 

1Includes client-specific indicators not reflected within its conservative risk appetite and clearly defined sector strategies.
The Group continues to adopt a conservative stance across the Eurozone maintaining close portfolio scrutiny and oversight particularly given the current macro environment and horizon risks.quantitative PD assessments.

 

Commercial Banking UK Direct Real Estate LTV analysis

 The Group classifies Direct Real Estate as exposure which is directly supported by cash flows from property activities (as opposed to trading activities, such as hotels, care homes and housebuilders). Exposures to social housing providers is also excluded.
  
Focus remains on the UK market, on good quality customers, with a proven track record in Real Estatereal estate and where cash flows are robust.
  
 Commercial Banking saw some growth in its UK Direct Real Estate core portfolio during 2016 with business continuing to be written within conservative risk appetite parameters. Excluding £0.5 billion in the Islands Commercial business, Commercial Banking UK Direct Real Estate gross lending stood at £18.5£13.6 billion at 31 December 2016.2019 (net of exposures subject to protection through Significant Risk Transfer securitisations). The Group has a further £0.47 billion of UK Direct Real Estate exposure in Business Banking within Retail.
  
Approximately 7060 per cent of loans and advances to UK Direct Real Estate relate to commercial real estate with the remainder relatingrelated to residential real estate. The portfolio continues to be heavily weighted towards investment real estate (c.90(c. 90 per cent) over development.
  
The LTV profile of the UK Direct Real Estate portfolio in Commercial Banking continues to improve.remains robust.
67

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table 1.18:LTV – UK Direct Real Estate

  At 31 December 20161  At 31 December 20151
  Unimpaired  Impaired  Total     Unimpaired  Impaired  Total    
  £m  £m  £m  %  £m  £m  £m  % 
UK exposures >£5m                                
Less than 60%  5,721   14   5,735   67.2   4,989   72   5,061   63.7 
60% to 70%  1,470      1,470   17.2   1,547   6   1,553   19.5 
70% to 80%  506   9   515   6.1   610   13   623   7.9 
80% to 100%  20   6   26   0.3   75   36   111   1.4 
100% to 120%                 8   8   0.1 
120% to 140%                        
Greater than 140%     68   68   0.8   5   100   105   1.3 
Unsecured2  689   26   715   8.4   487      487   6.1 
   8,406   123   8,529   100.0   7,713   235   7,948   100.0 
UK exposures <£5m3  9,563   429   9,992       9,656   508   10,164     
Total  17,969   552   18,521       17,369   743   18,112     
  
1Excludes Islands CommercialBoth investment and development lending is subject to specific credit risk appetite criteria. Development lending criteria includes maximum loan to gross development value and maximum loan to cost, with funding typically only released against completed work as confirmed by the Group’s monitoring quantity surveyor.

Table T:LTV – UK Direct Real Estate.Estate

  At 31 December 20191,2  At 31 December 20181,2 
  Stage 1/2  Stage 3  Total     Stage 1/2  Stage 3  Total    
  £m  £m  £m  %  £m  £m  £m  % 
Investment Exposures > £1m                                
Less than 60%  6,136   89   6,225   79.2   8,838   101   8,939   79.8 
60% to 70%  917   14   931   11.8   1,190   7   1,197   10.7 
70% to 80%  117   7   124   1.6   267   41   308   2.7 
80% to 100%  138   38   176   2.2   79   11   90   0.8 
100% to 120%  26   37   63   0.8   27   25   52   0.5 
120% to 140%  4   12   16   0.2      1   1    
Greater than 140%  18   1   19   0.2   18   46   64   0.6 
Unsecured3  311      311   4.0   520   31   551   4.9 
Total Investment >£1m  7,667   198   7,865   100.0   10,939   263   11,202   100.0 
Investment <£1m4  3,455   88   3,543       3,679   105   3,784     
Total Investment  11,122   286   11,408       14,618   368   14,986     
Development  1,805   58   1,863       1,698   111   1,809     
Total  12,927   344   13,271       16,316   479   16,795     

1Excludes Commercial Banking UK Direct Real Estate exposures subject to protection through Significant Risk Transfer transactions.
  
2Excludes Islands Commercial UK Direct Real Estate of £0.35 billion (31 December 2018: £0.45 billion).
3Predominantly investmentInvestment grade corporate CRE lending where the Group is relying on the corporate covenant.
  
34December 201620195m1m investment exposures include £9.4 billion within SME which hashave an LTV profile broadly similar to the >£5m1m investment exposures.

Forborne loans

Commercial Banking forbearance

At 31 December 2016, £2,645 million (31 December 2015: £3,529 million) of total loans and advances were forborne of which £2,179 million (31 December 2015: £2,543 million) were impaired. Impairment provisions as a percentage of forborne loans and advances increased marginally from 30.9 per cent at 31 December 2015 to 31.2 per cent at 31 December 2016.

Table 1.19:Commercial Banking forborne loans and advances (audited)

     Impairment provisions as % 
  Total loans and advances  of loans and advances which 
  which are forborne  are forborne 
   2016   20151   2016   20151 
   £m   £m   %   % 
Impaired  2,179   2,543   37.8   42.9 
Unimpaired  466   986       
Total  2,645   3,529   31.2   30.9 
1Restated.

All impaired assets are considered forborne.

Impaired loans and advances

The movements in Commercial Banking impaired forborne loans and advances were as follows:

Table 1.20:Movement in Commercial Banking impaired forborne loans and advances (audited)

   2016   20151 
   £m   £m 
At 1 January  2,543   3,241 
Classified as impaired during the year:        
Exposures >£5m  547   505 
Exposures <£5m  124   126 
   671   631 
Transferred to unimpaired:        
Exposures >£5m but still reported as forborne     (15)
Exposures >£5m no longer reported as forborne  (31)  (20)
Exposures <£5m  (81)  (111)
   (112)  (146)
Written-off  (311)  (225)
Asset disposal/sales of impaired assets  (33)  (48)
Drawdowns/repayments  (595)  (693)
Exchange and other movements  16   (217)
At 31 December  2,179   2,543 
1Restated.
6866

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

UnimpairedCommercial Banking forbearance

Table U:Commercial Banking forborne loans and advances (audited)

     Of which 
  Total  Stage 3 
  £m  £m 
At 31 December 2019      
Type of forbearance      
Refinancing  70   41 
Modification  4,216   3,322 
Total  4,286   3,363 
At 31 December 2018        
Type of forbearance        
Refinancing  38   29 
Modification  3,834   2,949 
Total  3,872   2,978 

Table V:Derivative credit risk exposures

     2019        2018    
   �� Traded over the counter        Traded over the counter    
  Traded on  Settled  Not settled     Traded on  Settled  Not settled    
  recognised  by central  by central     recognised  by central  by central    
  exchanges  counterparties  counterparties  Total  exchanges  counterparties  counterparties  Total 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Notional balances                                
Foreign exchange     8   421,143   421,151      45   385,680   385,725 
Interest rate  199,986   6,211,948   250,392   6,662,326   128,221   4,950,912   689,882   5,769,015 
Equity and other  4,820      6,594   11,414   9,247      5,898   15,145 
Credit        16,959   16,959         13,757   13,757 
Total  204,806   6,211,956   695,088   7,111,850   137,468   4,950,957   1,095,217   6,183,642 
Fair values                                
Assets      1,820   24,499           144   23,448     
Liabilities      (1,794)  (23,928)          (150)  (21,222)    
Net asset      26   571           (6)  2,226     

The total notional principal amount of interest rate, exchange rate, credit derivative and advances

Unimpaired forborne loansequity and advances were £466 millionother contracts outstanding at 31 December 2016 (31 December 2015: £986 million).

The table below sets out the largest unimpaired forborne loans2019 and advances to Commercial Banking customers (exposures over £5 million) as at 31 December 2016 by type2018 is shown in the table above. The notional principal amount does not, however, represent the Group’s credit risk exposure, which is limited to the current cost of forbearance:replacing contracts with a positive value to the Group. Such amounts are reflected in note 53 on page F-99.

Table 1.21:Commercial Banking unimpaired forborne loans and advances1(audited)

  31 Dec  31 Dec 
  2016  2015 
  £m  £m 
Type of unimpaired forbearance:        
Exposures >£5m        
Covenants  153   310 
Extensions/alterations  7   350 
Multiple  21   9 
   181   669 
Exposures <£5m  285   317 
Total  466   986 
1Material portfolios only.

Table 1.22:Movement in Commercial Banking unimpaired forborne loans and advances >£5m1(audited)

  2016  2015 
  £m  £m 
At 1 January  669   1,450 
Classified as impaired during the year  (63)  (141)
Cured no longer forborne  (413)  (655)
Classified as forborne during the year  88   156 
Transferred from impaired but still reported as forborne1     15 
Asset disposal/sales      
Net drawdowns/repayments  (100)  (153)
Exchange and other movements     (3)
At 31 December  181   669 
1Balances exclude intra-year movements.

Consumer Finance

UK Loans and advances increased during 2016, driven by strong growth ahead of the market in the UK Motor Finance portfolio, and continued growth in line with the market in the Credit Cards portfolio.
Asset quality remains strong, and the quality of new business continues to be good.
Credit risk appetite has been maintained, and the Group has robust indebtedness and affordability controls to ensure new lending is sustainable for its customers.
The impairment charge increased by £47 million to £282 million largely due to the UK Motor Finance portfolio, in which there was overall growth as well as the non-recurrence of a favourable one-off in 2015.
Credit Cards balances grew broadly in line with the market, and underlying credit quality remained strong. Impaired loans fell by £59 million due to continued reductions in recoveries, and impairment provisions as a percentage of impaired loans remained stable.
Loans balances contracted marginally and underlying credit quality remained strong. Impaired loans fell by £90 million largely due to reductions in recoveries, and impairment provisions as a percentage of impaired loans remained broadly stable.
Growth in UK Motor Finance loans and advances was ahead of the market, in part due to strategic relationships with business partners such as Jaguar Land Rover, which also contributed to the strong underlying credit quality in the portfolio. Impaired loans fell by £14 million largely due to a reclassification of impaired balances for some finance leases, and on an underlying basis grew broadly in line with the portfolio. Impairment provisions as a percentage of impaired loans increased, reflecting the reclassification of impaired balances, and portfolio growth coupled with a prudent approach to residual value.
6967

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

Table 1.23:Consumer Finance impairment charge

  2016  2015  Change 
  £m  £m  % 
Credit Cards  136   129   (5)
Loans  70   83   16 
UK Motor Finance  75   22     
Europe  1   1    
   282   235   (20)
Asset quality ratio  0.83%   0.77%   6bp 

Table 1.24:Consumer Finance impaired loans and provisions

                
              Impairment 
        Impaired     provisions 
  Loans and     loans as a     as a % of 
  advances to  Impaired  % of closing  Impairment  impaired 
  customers  loans  advances  provisions1  loans2 
  £m  £m  %  £m  % 
At 31 December 2016                    
Credit cards  9,843   307   3.1   157   81.8 
Loans  7,767   277   3.6   92   81.4 
UK Motor Finance  11,555   120   1.0   127   105.8 
Europe  6,329   41   0.6   20   48.8 
Total gross lending  35,494   745   2.1   396   85.0 
Impairment provisions  (396)                
Fair value adjustments                   
Total  35,098                 
At 31 December 20153                    
Credit cards  9,425   366   3.9   153   81.8 
Loans  7,889   367   4.7   102   83.6 
UK Motor Finance  9,582   134   1.4   90   67.2 
Europe  4,931   43   0.9   22   51.2 
Total gross lending  31,827   910   2.9   367   75.5 
Impairment provisions  (367)                
Fair value adjustments  (9)                
Total  31,451                 
1Impairment provisions include collective unidentified impairment provisions.
2Impairment provisions as a percentage of impaired loans are calculated excluding loans in recoveries for Cards (31 December 2016: £115 million; 31 December 2015: £179 million) and Loans (31 December 2016: £164 million; 31 December 2015: £245 million).
3Restated.

Forborne loans

At 31 December 2016, total loans and advances currently or recently subject to forbearance as a percentage of total loans and advances had reduced across the major Consumer Finance portfolios with decreases in Consumer Credit Cards and Loans offset by an increase in UK Motor Finance. (31 December 2016: 1.4 per cent; 31 December 2015: 1.6 per cent).

Table 1.25:Consumer Finance forborne loans and advances (audited)

        Impairment provisions 
  Total loans and advances  Total forborne loans and  as % of loans and advances 
  which are forborne  advances which are impaired  which are forborne 
  31 Dec  31 Dec  31 Dec  31 Dec  31 Dec  31 Dec 
  2016  2015  2016  2015  2016  2015 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  %  % 
Consumer Credit Cards1  212   225   119   120   29.0   26.8 
Loans2  49   60   46   56   44.4   47.2 
UK Motor Finance Retail2  117   100   62   51   27.0   25.5 
1Includes temporary treatments where the customer is currently benefiting from the change or the treatment has ended within the last six months. Permanent changes, such as returning a Card account in arrears to an in-order status, which commenced during the last 24 months for existing customers as at 31 December are also included.
2Includes temporary treatments where the customer is currently benefiting from the change or the treatment has ended within the last six months. Permanent changes, such as refinancing, for existing customers as at 31 December are also included.
70

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

The movements in forborne loans and advances during the year were:

Table 1.26:Movement in Consumer Finance forborne loans and advances (audited)

  2016 2015
  Consumer credit     UK Motor  Consumer  UK Motor Finance 
  cards  Loans  Finance Retail  credit cards  Loans  Retail 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 1 January  225   60   100   234   73   109 
Classified as forborne during the year  110   34   82   108   16   61 
Written off/sold  (46)  (24)  (16)  (48)  (29)  (15)
Exit from forbearance  (43)  (4)  (22)  (36)  (4)  (21)
Redeemed or repaid  (9)  (6)  (16)  (9)  (6)  (19)
Exchange and other movements  (25)  (11)  (11)  (24)  10   (15)
At 31 December  212   49   117   225   60   100 

Run-off

The Ireland retail portfolio continues to reduce in volume due to closed book attrition (3 per cent year on year), however exposure has increased by £457 million to £4,497 million in 2016 (31 December 2015: £4,040 million) due to the foreign exchange impact of sterling weakening, partly offset by capital repayments.
Ireland retail loans and advances with an indexed LTV in excess of 100 per cent improved to £1,240 million (27.8 per cent) at 31 December 2016, compared with £1,269 million (31.4 per cent) at 31 December 2015. Of this amount £70 million were impaired (31 December 2015: £71 million).
The Corporate real estate and other corporate portfolio has continued to reduce in line with expectations. Net loans and advances reduced by £337 million, from £1,128 million at 31 December 2015 to £791 million at 31 December 2016.
Total net external assets for the Specialist finance asset based run-off portfolio reduced to £4,668 million at 31 December 2016 (gross £4,779 million), from £5,552 million (gross £5,742 million) for 2015. Assets include Ship Finance, Aircraft Finance, Leasing and Infrastructure loans and advances, as well as the reducing Treasury Asset legacy investment portfolio and operating leases.

Table 1.27:Run-off impairment charge

  2016  2015  Change 
  £m  £m  % 
Ireland retail  (1)  (5)  (80)
Ireland corporate and commercial real estate  (13)  72     
Corporate real estate and other corporate  1   21   95 
Specialist finance  (2)  (45)  (96)
Other  (11)  (35)  (69)
Total  (26)  8     
Asset quality ratio1  (0.15%)  0.20%   (35)bp 
1In respect of loans and advances to customers.
71

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table 1.28:Run-off impaired loans and provisions

              Impairment 
  Loans and     Impaired     provisions as a 
  advances to  Impaired  loans as a % of  Impairment  % of impaired 
  customers  loans  closing advances  provisions  loans 
  £m  £m  %  £m  % 
At 31 December 2016                    
Ireland retail  4,497   138   3.1   133   96.4 
Ireland corporate  1   1   100.0       
Corporate real estate and other corporate  1,190   896   75.3   399   44.5 
Specialist finance  3,374   99   2.9   111   112.1 
Other  1,197   83   6.9   39   47.0 
Total gross lending  10,259   1,217   11.9   682   56.0 
Impairment provisions  (682)                
Total  9,577                 
At 31 December 2015                    
Ireland retail  4,040   132   3.3   120   90.9 
Ireland corporate  29               
Ireland commercial real estate  8   5   62.5        
Corporate real estate and other corporate  1,873   1,410   75.3   745   52.8 
Specialist finance  4,190   361   8.6   189   52.4 
Other  1,282   117   9.1   96   82.1 
Total gross lending  11,422   2,025   17.7   1,150   56.8 
Impairment provisions  (1,150)                
Total  10,272                 

Forborne loans

Run-off Ireland retail lending

At 31 December 2016, £156 million or 3.5 per cent (31 December 2015: £169 million or 4.2 per cent) of Irish retail secured loans and advances were subject to current or recent forbearance. Of this amount, £19 million (31 December 2015: £26 million) were impaired.

Run-off Corporate real estate, other corporate and Specialist Finance

At 31 December 2016 £998 million (31 December 2015 £1,780 million) of total loans and advances were forborne of which £995 million (31 December 2015: £1,771 million) were impaired. Impairment provisions as a percentage of forborne loans and advances decreased from 52.5 per cent at 31 December 2015 to 51.1 per cent at 31 December 2016.

Unimpaired forborne loans and advances were £3 million at 31 December 2016 (31 December 2015: £9 million).

Impaired loans and advances

The movements in Run-off corporate real estate, other corporate and Specialist Finance impaired forborne loans and advances were as follows:

Table 1.29:Movement in Run-off corporate real estate, other corporate and Specialist Finance impaired forborne loans and advances (audited)

  2016  2015 
  £m  £m 
At 1 January  1,771   1,912 
Classified as impaired during the year:        
Exposures >£5m  20   414 
Exposures <£5m  19   11 
   39   425 
Transferred to unimpaired:        
Exposures >£5m but still reported as forborne during the year     (13)
Exposures <£5m  (8)  (11)
   (8)  (24)
Write offs  (478)  (238)
Asset disposal/sales of impaired assets  (405)  (763)
Drawdowns/repayments  (24)  (19)
Exchange and other movements  100   478 
At 31 December  995   1,771 
72

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Eurozone exposures

The following section summarises the Group’s direct exposure to Eurozone countries at 31 December 2016. The exposures comprise on balance sheet exposures based on their balance sheet carrying values net of provisions and off balance sheet exposures, and are based on the country of domicile of the counterparty unless otherwise indicated.

The Group manages its exposures to individual countries through authorised country limits which take into account economic, financial, political and social factors. In addition, the Group manages its direct risks to the selected countries by establishing and monitoring risk limits for individual banks, financial institutions, corporates and individuals.

Identified indirect exposure information, where available is also taken into account when setting limits and determining credit risk appetite for individual counterparties. This forms part of the Group’s credit analysis undertaken at least annually for counterparty and sector reviews, with interim updates performed as necessary. Interim updates would usually be triggered by specific credit events such as rating downgrades, sovereign events or other developments such as spread widening. Examples of indirect risk which have been identified, where information is available, are: European Banking groups with lending and other exposures to certain Eurozone Countries; corporate customers with operations or significant trade in certain European jurisdictions; major travel operators known to operate in certain Eurozone Countries; and international banks with custodian operations based in certain European locations.

The Group Financial Stability Forum (GFSF) monitors developments within the Eurozone, carries out stress testing through detailed scenario analysis and completes appropriate due diligence on the Group’s exposures. The Group has pre-determined action plans that would be executed in certain scenarios which set out governance requirements and responsibilities for the key actions which would be carried out and cover risk areas such as payments, liquidity and capital, communications, suppliers and systems, legal, credit, delivery channels and products, employees and the impact on customers.

Derivative balances are included within exposures to financial institutions or corporates, as appropriate, at fair value adjusted for master netting agreements at obligor level and net of cash collateral in line with legal agreements. Exposures in respect of reverse repurchase agreements are included on a gross IFRS basis and are disclosed based on the counterparty rather than the collateral (repos and stock lending are excluded); reverse repurchase exposures are not, therefore, reduced as a result of collateral held. Exposures to central clearing counterparties are shown net.

For multi-country asset backed securities exposures, the Group has reported exposures based on the largest country exposure. The country of exposure for asset backed securities is based on the location of the underlying assets which are predominantly residential mortgages not on the domicile of the issuer.

For Insurance, the Group has reported shareholder exposures i.e. where the Group is directly exposed to risk of loss. These shareholder exposures relate to direct investments where the issuer is resident in the named Eurozone country and the credit rating is consistent with the tight credit criteria defined under the appropriate investment mandate. Insurance also has interests in funds domiciled in Ireland and Luxembourg where, in line with the investment mandates, cash is invested in short term financial instruments. For these funds, the exposure is analysed on a look through basis to the country of risk of the obligors of the underlying assets rather than treating as exposure to country of domicile of the fund.

Exposures to selected Eurozone countries

The Group continues to have minimal exposure, in aggregate, which could be considered to be direct recourse to the sovereign risk of the selected countries.

Table 1.30:Selected Eurozone exposures

  Sovereign debt  Financial institutions                
                            
  Direct  Cash at        Asset             
  sovereign  central        backed        Insurance    
  exposures  banks  Banks  Other1  securities  Corporate  Personal2  assets1  Total 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 31 December 2016                                    
Ireland        215   512   91   929   4,363      6,110 
Spain  23      76   126      630   41   19   915 
Portugal        7         22   7      36 
Italy        38         59      67   164 
Greece                           
   23      336   638   91   1,640   4,411   86   7,225 
At 31 December 2015                                    
Ireland        748   445   87   731   3,921      5,932 
Spain        77   102      870   39   9   1,097 
Portugal        7         86   6      99 
Italy        32         51      73   156 
Greece                 1         1 
         864   547   87   1,739   3,966   82   7,285 
1Excludes reverse repurchase exposure to Institutional funds domiciled in Ireland secured by UK gilts of £14,506 million (2015: £11,267 million) on a gross basis.
2Ireland Retail exposures have increased by c.£0.4 billion as a result of the depreciation of sterling against the Euro c.£0.7 billion offset by asset reductions primarily driven by repayments of c.£0.3 billion.
73

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

In addition to the exposures detailed above, the Group has exposures in the following Eurozone countries:

Table 1.31:Other Eurozone exposures

  Sovereign debt  Financial institutions                    
                                    
   Direct   Cash at           Asset                
   sovereign   central           backed           Insurance    
   exposures   banks   Banks   Other1   securities   Corporate   Personal   assets   Total
   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m
At 31 December 2016                                   
Netherlands     8,795   343   324   50   1,610   6,315   423   17,860
France        1,907   620   41   2,648   96   851   6,163
Germany  1,543   93   538   31   224   1,598   443   477   4,947
Luxembourg  7      306   1,484   619   923         3,339
Belgium  35      1,009   300      114      49   1,507
All other Eurozone countries  38      95         354      62   549
   1,623   8,888   4,198   2,759   934   7,247   6,854   1,862   34,365
At 31 December 2015                                   
Netherlands  281   11,515   328   164   37   1,275   4,863   428   18,891
France  173      1,809   216   98   1,953   64   953   5,266
Germany  151   97   888   21   66   1,924   177   573   3,897
Luxembourg        74   1,178   618   1,614      36   3,520
Belgium  20      830   1      298      51   1,200
All other Eurozone countries  15      403         342      80   840
   640   11,612   4,332   1,580   819   7,406   5,104   2,121   33,614
1Excludes reverse repurchase exposure to Institutional funds secured by UK gilts of £2,679 million (2015: £1,955 million) on a gross basis.

Environmental risk management

TheAs appropriate, the Group ensures appropriateconsiders the management of the environmental impact of its lending activities. The Group-wide credit risk principles require all credit risk to be incurred with due regard to environmental legislation and the Group’s Code of Business Responsibility. The Group’s external sector statements determine the appetite for many activities that impact the environment. The Group seeks to reduce detrimental impacts and support clients as they improve their own environmental footprint.

The Group’s business areas and sub-groups are each exposed to different types and levels of climate-related risk in their operations. For example, the general insurance function regularly uses weather, climate and environmental models and data to assess its insurance risk from covered perils such as windstorm and flood. A team of specialist scientists are employed within underwriting to do this work and they also regularly monitor the state of climate science to assess the need to include its potential impacts within pricing and solvency.

The Group has been a signatory to the Equator Principles since 2008 and has adopted and applied the expanded scope of Equator Principles III and committed itself to adoption of Equator Principles 4 during 2020. The Equator Principles support the Group’s approach to assessing and managing environmental and social issues in project finance, project-related corporate loans and bridge loans. The Group has also been a signatory to the UN Principles for Responsible Investment (UNPRI) since 2012, which incorporate ESG (environmental, social and governance) risk considerations in asset management. Scottish Widows is responsible for the annual UNPRI reporting process.

 

Within Commercial Banking, an electronic environmental risk screening system has beenEnvironmental Risk Screening Tool is the primary mechanism for assessing environmental risk infor lending transactions. This system provides screening of location specific and sector based risks that may be present in a transaction. IdentifiedWhere a risk results inis identified, the transaction is referred to the Group’s expert in-house environmental risk team for further review and assessment, as outlined below.assessment. Where required, the Group’s panel of environmental consultants provide additional expert support.

 

The Group provides colleagueColleague training inis provided on environmental risk management as part of the standard suite of Commercial Banking credit risk courses. SupportingTo support this training, a range of online resource isresources are available to colleagues, and includesincluding environmental risk theory, procedural guidance, and information on environmental legislation and sector-specific environmental impacts.

The Group has been a signatoryalso continue to partner with the Equator Principles since 2006Cambridge Institute for Sustainability Leadership to provide high quality training to executives and has adoptedcolleagues focused on risk management, product development and applied the expanded scope of Equator Principles III. The Equator Principles support the Group’s approach to assessing and managing environmental and social issues in Project Finance, Project-Related Corporate loans and Bridge loans.client-facing roles.

 

Table 1.32:W:Environmental risk management approach

 

7468

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

LOAN PORTFOLIO

 

In the following tables, where lending and the related impairment allowances are analysed between domestic and international, the classification as domestic or international is based on the location of the office recording the transaction, except for certain lending of the international business booked in London including the Group’s lending in Ireland which, following the merger of Bank of Scotland (Ireland) Limited into Bank of Scotland plc, is held on the balance sheet of Bank of Scotland plc in the UK but is reported as international.

ANALYSIS OF LOANS AND ADVANCES TO BANKS AND CUSTOMERS

 

The following table analyses loans and advances to banks and customers by category of loan at 31 December for each of the five years listed.

 

 2016  2015 2014 2013 2012 
 £m  £m £m £m £m   2019
£m
   2018
£m
   2017
£m
   2016
£m
   2015
£m
 
Loans and advances to banks  26,902   25,117   26,155   25,365   32,760   9,777   6,285   6,611   26,902   25,117 
Loans and advances to customers:                                        
Mortgages  306,682   312,877   333,318   335,611   337,879   299,141   297,498   304,665   306,682   312,877 
Other personal lending  20,761   20,579   23,123   23,230   28,334   29,272   28,699   28,757   20,761   20,579 
Agriculture, forestry and fishing  7,269   6,924   6,586   6,051   5,531   7,558   7,314   7,461   7,269   6,924 
Energy and water supply  2,320   3,247   3,853   4,414   3,321   1,432   1,517   1,609   2,320   3,247 
Manufacturing  7,285   5,953   6,000   7,650   8,530   6,093   8,260   7,886   7,285   5,953 
Construction  4,535   4,952   6,425   7,024   7,526   4,285   4,684   4,428   4,535   4,952 
Transport, distribution and hotels  13,320   13,526   15,112   22,294   26,568   13,016   14,113   14,074   13,320   13,526 
Postal and telecommunications  2,564   2,563   2,624   2,364   1,397   1,923   2,711   2,148   2,564   2,563 
Financial, business and other services  49,197   43,072   44,979   42,478   48,729   89,763   77,505   57,006   49,197   43,072 
Property companies  32,192   32,228   36,682   44,277   52,388   27,596   28,451   30,980   32,192   32,228 
Lease financing  2,628   2,751   3,013   4,435   6,477   1,671   1,822   2,094   2,628   2,751 
Hire purchase  11,617   9,536   7,403   5,090   5,334   16,497   15,434   13,591   11,617   9,536 
Total loans  487,272   483,325   515,273   530,283   564,774   508,024   494,293   481,310   487,272   483,325 
Allowance for impairment losses  (2,412)  (3,033)  (6,414)  (11,966)  (15,253)
Allowance for impairment losses1  (3,261)  (3,152)  (2,201)  (2,412)  (3,033)
Total loans and advances net of allowance for impairment losses  484,860   480,292   508,859   518,317   549,521   504,763   491,141   479,109   484,860   480,292 

1The allowances for loan losses at 31 December 2019 and 2018 were measured in accordance with IFRS 9; for earlier years, they were determined in accordance with IAS 39.

 

Following the reduction in the Group’s non-UK activities, an analysis between domestic and foreign operations is not provided for 2013 or later years. The analysis of loans and advances at 31 December 2012 between domestic and international offices is as follows:provided.

  Domestic  International  Total 
  £m  £m  £m 
Loans and advances to banks  32,073   687   32,760 
Loans and advances to customers:            
Mortgages  322,687   15,192   337,879 
Other personal lending  26,119   2,215   28,334 
Agriculture, forestry and fishing  5,482   49   5,531 
Energy and water supply  1,773   1,548   3,321 
Manufacturing  7,246   1,284   8,530 
Construction  6,481   1,045   7,526 
Transport, distribution and hotels  22,205   4,363   26,568 
Postal and telecommunications  1,239   158   1,397 
Financial, business and other services  44,155   4,574   48,729 
Property companies  43,683   8,705   52,388 
Lease financing  5,306   1,171   6,477 
Hire purchase  4,970   364   5,334 
Total loans  523,419   41,355   564,774 
Allowance for impairment losses  (7,076)  (8,177)  (15,253)
Total loans and advances net of allowance for impairment losses  516,343   33,178   549,521 
7569

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

SUMMARY OF LOAN LOSS EXPERIENCE

 

The following table analyses the movements in the allowance for impairment losses on loans and advances to banks and customers (drawn balances) for each of the five years listed. Allowances for loan losses in 2018 and 2019 were measured in accordance with IFRS 9; for earlier years they were determined in accordance with IAS 39.

 

 2016  2015 2014 2013 2012   2019
£m
   2018
£m
   2017
£m
   2016
£m
   2015
£m
 
 £m  £m £m £m £m 
Balance at beginning of year  3,033   6,414   11,966   15,253   18,746 
Balance at end of preceding year  3,152   2,201   2,412   3,033   6,414 
Adjustment on adoption of IFRS 9      1,023             
Balance at 1 January 2018      3,224             
Exchange and other adjustments  69   (246)  (410)  291   (380)  312   126   132   69   (246)
Disposal of businesses     (82)     (176)        (181)        (82)
Advances written off:                                        
Loans and advances to customers:                                        
Mortgages  (42)  (71)  (87)  (601)  (133)  (99)  (12)  (42)  (42)  (71)
Other personal lending  (728)  (853)  (1,329)  (1,437)  (2,267)  (1,111)  (988)  (925)  (728)  (853)
Agriculture, forestry and fishing  (1)  (1)  (8)  (11)  (45)  (5)  (4)  (1)  (1)  (1)
Energy and water supply  (9)  (73)     (102)  (77)  (1)        (9)  (73)
Manufacturing  (19)  (126)  (59)  (130)  (226)  (11)  (11)  (40)  (19)  (126)
Construction  (96)  (21)  (157)  (84)  (654)  (226)  (82)  (65)  (96)  (21)
Transport, distribution and hotels  (64)  (728)  (1,119)  (798)  (458)  (51)  (42)  (65)  (64)  (728)
Postal and telecommunications  (189)  (11)     (14)  (7)  (6)  (2)     (189)  (11)
Financial, business and other services  (712)  (604)  (946)  (1,030)  (1,071)  (149)  (244)  (158)  (712)  (604)
Property companies  (215)  (1,648)  (2,669)  (1,891)  (3,554)  (139)  (134)  (136)  (215)  (1,648)
Lease financing     (31)  (4)  (10)  (75)        (2)     (31)
Hire purchase  (36)  (37)  (54)  (121)  (130)  (84)  (57)  (65)  (36)  (37)
Loans and advances to banks           (3)  (10)               
Total advances written off  (2,111)  (4,204)  (6,432)  (6,232)  (8,707)  (1,882)  (1,576)  (1,499)  (2,111)  (4,204)
Recoveries of advances written off:                                        
Loans and advances to customers:                                        
Mortgages  44   35   18   28   53   62   20   17   44   35 
Other personal lending  329   366   600   408   757   343   333   419   329   366 
Energy and water supply  3   5               84      3   5 
Manufacturing  80               10   10      80    
Construction  78               2   65   4   78    
Transport, distribution and hotels  50   63         1   2   9   15   50   63 
Postal and telecommunications     1          
Financial, business and other services  241   193            2   42   6   241   193 
Property companies  34   101         4   1   16      34   101 
Lease financing              2         19       
Hire purchase  2   1   63   20   26   3      2   2   1 
Total recoveries of advances written off  861   764   681   456   843   425   580   482   861   764 
Total net advances written off  (1,250)  (3,440)  (5,751)  (5,776)  (7,864)  (1,457)  (996)  (1,017)  (1,250)  (3,440)
7670

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

  2016  2015  2014  2013  2012 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Effect of unwinding of discount recognised through interest income  (32)  (56)  (126)  (351)  (374)
Allowances for impairment losses charged against income for the year:                    
Loans and advances to customers:                    
Mortgages  (23)  33   (138)  224   278 
Other personal lending  438   437   536   920   881 
Agriculture, forestry and fishing  3   1   2      54 
Energy and water supply  (4)  35   28   95   71 
Manufacturing  (48)  23   (4)  31   236 
Construction  143   13   (81)  66   326 
Transport, distribution and hotels  (35)  (88)  198   421   649 
Postal and telecommunications  191   (2)  6   (3)  8 
Financial, business and other services  6   77   179   552   824 
Property companies  (166)  (140)  40   457   1,725 
Lease financing  15   31   (1)  (26)  26 
Hire purchase  72   23   (30)  (12)  47 
Loans and advances to banks               
Total allowances for impairment losses charged against income for the year  592   443   735   2,725   5,125 
Total balance at end of year  2,412   3,033   6,414   11,966   15,253 
Ratio of net write-offs during the year to average loans outstanding during the year  0.3%   0.8%   1.1%   1.1%   1.4% 

The Group’s impairment allowances in respect of loans and advances to banks and customers decreased by £621 million, or 20 per cent, from £3,033 million at 31 December 2015 to £2,412 million at 31 December 2016. This decrease resulted from a charge to the income statement of £592 million being more than offset by net advances written off of £1,250 million (advances written off of £2,111 million less recoveries £861 million). The increase in the charge to the income statement of £149 million, or 34 per cent, from £443 million in 2015 to £592 million in 2016 reflects lower levels of releases and write-backs rather than an underlying deterioration in credit quality. By category of lending, the most significant elements of the charge to the income statement were charges of £438 million in respect of other personal lending, £143 million in respect of construction and £191 million in respect of postal and telecommunications together with a credit of £166 million in respect of property companies. Of the net advances written off of £1,250 million, £399 million related to other personal lending, £471 million related to financial, business and other services and £181 million to property companies.

77

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

   2019
£m
   2018
£m
   2017
£m
   2016
£m
   2015
£m
 
Effect of unwinding of discount recognised through interest income  (53)  (44)  (23)  (32)  (56)
Allowances for impairment losses charged against income for the year:                    
Loans and advances to customers:                    
Mortgages  (167)  29   (119)  (23)  33 
Other personal lending  948   699   596   438   437 
Agriculture, forestry and fishing  (4)  10   2   3   1 
Energy and water supply  (3)  (8)     (4)  35 
Manufacturing  7   9   5   (48)  23 
Construction  5   15   85   143   13 
Transport, distribution and hotels  326   47   (19)  (35)  (88)
Postal and telecommunications  5   (2)  1   191   (2)
Financial, business and other services  64   79   42   6   77 
Property companies  (48)  56   (7)  (166)  (140)
Lease financing           15   31 
Hire purchase  174   88   111   72   23 
Loans and advances to banks     1          
Total allowances for impairment losses charged against income for the year  1,307   1,023   697   592   443 
Total balance at end of year  3,261   3,152   2,201   2,412   3,033 
Ratio of net write-offs during the year to average loans outstanding during the year  0.3%  0.2%  0.2%  0.3%  0.8%

 

Following the reduction in the Group’s non-UK activities, an analysis between domestic and foreign operations is not provided for 2013 or later years. provided.

The analysisGroup ’s impairment allowances in respect of movements in the allowance for impairment losses on loans and advances to banks and customers for the year endedincreased by £109 million, or 3 per cent, from £3,152 million at 31 December 2012 between domestic2018 to £3,261 million at 31 December 2019, the charge to the income statement of £1,307 million being offset by net advances written off of £1,457 million (advances written off of £1,882 million less recoveries of £425 million). The increase in the charge to the income statement from £1,023 million in 2018 to £1,307 million in 2019 reflects, in particular, two material corporate cases in Commercial Banking. By category of lending, the most significant elements of the charge to the income statement were charges of £948 million in respect of other personal lending, £326 million in respect of transport, distribution and international offices is as follows:hotels, £64 million in respect of financial, business and other services and £174 million in respect of hire purchase partly offset by a release of £167 million relating to mortgages. Of the net advances written off of £1,457 million, £768 million related to other personal lending, £224 million related to construction and £138 million to property companies.

  Domestic  International  Total 
  £m  £m  £m 
Balance at beginning of year  8,025   10,721   18,746 
Exchange and other adjustments  (24)  (356)  (380)
Advances written off:            
Loans and advances to customers:            
Mortgages  (96)  (37)  (133)
Other personal lending  (2,258)  (9)  (2,267)
Agriculture, forestry and fishing  (11)  (34)  (45)
Energy and water supply  (68)  (9)  (77)
Manufacturing  (75)  (151)  (226)
Construction  (477)  (177)  (654)
Transport, distribution and hotels  (140)  (318)  (458)
Postal and telecommunications  (1)  (6)  (7)
Financial, business and other services  (919)  (152)  (1,071)
Property companies  (528)  (3,026)  (3,554)
Lease financing  (74)  (1)  (75)
Hire purchase  (129)  (1)  (130)
Loans and advances to banks  (10)     (10)
Total advances written off  (4,786)  (3,921)  (8,707)
Recoveries of advances written off:            
Loans and advances to customers:            
Mortgages  53      53 
Other personal lending  751   6   757 
Agriculture, forestry and fishing         
Energy and water supply         
Manufacturing         
Construction         
Transport, distribution and hotels  1      1 
Financial, business and other services         
Property companies     4   4 
Lease financing  2      2 
Hire purchase  26      26 
Total recoveries of advances written off  833   10   843 
Total net advances written off  (3,953)  (3,911)  (7,864)
7871

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

  Domestic  International  Total 
  £m  £m  £m 
Effect of unwinding of discount recognised through interest income  (405)  31   (374)
Allowances for impairment losses charged against income for the year:            
Loans and advances to customers:            
Mortgages  32   246   278 
Other personal lending  1,121   (240)  881 
Agriculture, forestry and fishing  15   39   54 
Energy and water supply  77   (6)  71 
Manufacturing  81   155   236 
Construction  221   105   326 
Transport, distribution and hotels  289   360   649 
Postal and telecommunications     8   8 
Financial, business and other services  734   90   824 
Property companies  776   949   1,725 
Lease financing  37   (11)  26 
Hire purchase  50   (3)  47 
Total allowances for impairment losses charged against income for the year  3,433   1,692   5,125 
Total balance at end of year  7,076   8,177   15,253 

 

The following table analyses the coverage of the allowance for loan losses by category of loans.

 

   2016   2015   2014   2013   2012 
   Percentage   Percentage of   Percentage of   Percentage of   Percentage of 
   of loans   loans   loans   loans   loans 
   in each   in each   in each   in each   in each 
 2016 category to 2015 category to 2014 category to 2013 category to 2012 category to 
 Allowance total loans Allowance total loans Allowance total loans Allowance total loans Allowance total loans 
 £m % £m % £m % £m % £m %  2019
Allowance1
£m
 2019
Percentage
of loans
in each
category to
total loans
%
  2018
Allowance1
£m
 2018
Percentage of
loans
in each
category to
total loans
%
 2017
Allowance1
£m
 2017
Percentage of
loans
in each
category to
total loans
%
 2016
Allowance1
£m
 2016
Percentage of
loans
in each
category to
total loans
%
 2015
Allowance1
£m
 2015
Percentage of
loans
in each
category to
total loans
%
 
Balance at year end applicable to:                                                                                
Loans and advances to banks     5.5      5.2      5.1      4.8   3   5.8   2   1.9   2   1.3      1.4      5.5      5.2 
Loans and advances to customers:                                                                                
Mortgages  576   63.0   479   64.7   460   64.7   657   63.5   1,113   60.0   611   58.9   509   60.1   485   63.4   576   63.0   479   64.7 
Other personal lending  356   4.3   388   4.3   607   4.5   919   4.4   1,147   5.0   933   5.8   823   5.8   381   6.0   356   4.3   388   4.3 
Agriculture, forestry and fishing  13   1.5   15   1.4   18   1.3   38   1.1   67   1.0   47   1.5   19   1.5   8   1.6   13   1.5   15   1.4 
Energy and water supply  6   0.5   20   0.7   61   0.7   149   0.8   191   0.6   7   0.3   11   0.3   5   0.3   6   0.5   20   0.7 
Manufacturing  84   1.5   70   1.2   179   1.2   296   1.4   337   1.5   58   1.2   65   1.7   35   1.6   84   1.5   70   1.2 
Construction  319   0.9   165   1.0   158   1.3   395   1.3   504   1.3   305   0.8   514   0.9   410   0.9   319   0.9   165   1.0 
Transport, distribution and hotels  161   2.7   219   2.8   1,051   2.9   1,954   4.2   2,162   4.7   503   2.6   161   2.9   57   2.9   161   2.7   219   2.8 
Postal and telecommunications  5   0.5   4   0.5   17   0.5   11   0.4   40   0.2   9   0.4   10   0.5   5   0.4   5   0.5   4   0.5 
Financial, business and other services  312   10.1   811   8.9   1,225   8.7   2,293   8.0   2,764   8.6   274   17.7   476   15.7   312   11.9   312   10.1   811   8.9 
Property companies  470   6.6   790   6.7   2,553   7.1   5,145   8.3   6,664   9.3   147   5.4   294   5.8   343   6.4   470   6.6   790   6.7 
Lease financing     0.5      0.6   1   0.6   6   0.8   33   1.1      0.3      0.4      0.4      0.5      0.6 
Hire purchase  110   2.4   72   2.0   84   1.4   103   1.0   228   0.9   365   3.2   268   3.1   160   2.8   110   2.4   72   2.0 
Total balance at year end  2,412   100.0   3,033   100.0   6,414   100.0   11,966   100.0   15,253   100.0   3,261   100.0   3,152   100.0   2,201   100.0   2,412   100.0   3,033   100.0 

791The allowances for loan losses at 31 December 2019 and 2018 were measured in accordance with IFRS 9; for earlier years, they were determined in accordance with IAS 39.

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

Following the reduction in the Group’s non-UK activities, an analysis between domestic and foreign operations is not provided for 2013 or later years. The analysis of the coverage of the allowance for loan losses at 31 December 2012 between domestic and international offices is as follows:provided.

  Domestic  Foreign  Total
     Percentage of     Percentage of     Percentage of 
     loans in each     loans in each     loans in each 
     category to     category to     category to 
  Allowance  total loans  Allowance  total loans  Allowance  total loans 
2012 £m  %  £m  %  £m  % 
Balance at year end applicable to:                        
Loans and advances to banks  3   6.1      1.7   3   5.8 
Loans and advances to customers:                        
Mortgages  106   62.0   1,007   36.8   1,113   60.0 
Other personal lending  1,064   5.0   83   5.4   1,147   5.0 
Agriculture, forestry and fishing  57   1.0   10   0.1   67   1.0 
Energy and water supply  177   0.3   14   3.7   191   0.6 
Manufacturing  194   1.4   143   3.1   337   1.5 
Construction  215   1.2   289   2.5   504   1.3 
Transport, distribution and hotels  715   4.2   1,447   10.6   2,162   4.7 
Postal and telecommunications  10   0.2   30   0.4   40   0.2 
Financial, business and other services  2,008   8.4   756   11.1   2,764   8.6 
Property companies  2,307   8.3   4,357   21.0   6,664   9.3 
Lease financing  14   1.0   19   2.8   33   1.1 
Hire purchase  206   0.9   22   0.8   228   0.9 
Total  7,076   100.0   8,177   100.0   15,253   100.0 
8072

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

RISK ELEMENTS IN THE LOAN PORTFOLIO AND POTENTIAL PROBLEM LOANS

 

The Group’s credit risk elements analysedIFRS 9, which was adopted by categories reflecting US lending and accounting practices, which differ from those employed in the UK, are detailed below:Group on 1 January 2018, requires that:

 

NON-PERFORMING LENDING

In the US, it is the normal practice to stop accruing interest when payments are 90 days or more past due or when recovery of both principal and interest is doubtful. When the loans are transferred to non-accrual status, accrued interest is reversed from income and no further interest is recognised until it becomes probable that the principal will be repaid in full. Loans on which interest has been accrued but suspended would be included in risk elements as loans accounted for on a non-accrual basis.

In the US non-performingall loans and advances are typically written off more quickly than in the UK. Consequentlyand, as a UK bank may appear to have a higher level of non-performingresult, no loan is classified as non-accrual; and

– an allowance for expected credit losses is recognised on all loans and advances than a comparable US bank although the reported net income may be similar in both the US and the UK.irrespective of whether any payments are past due.

 

TheAs a result, the Group compliesno longer analyses its loans between those that are neither past due nor impaired, past due but not impaired, impaired with no provision held and impaired with a provision.

Whilst IFRS 7 whichwas amended to recognise the impact of IFRS 9, it still requires more detailed qualitative and quantitative disclosures about its loan portfolios. Accordingly,The Group revised its disclosures accordingly; the following tables are presented in respect of the Group’s credit risk elements and potential problem loans.

2019 and
2018
2017 and
earlier years
Days past due for loans and advances that are considered to have experienced a significant increase in credit risk, but are not credit-impairedü
Days past due for loans past due but not impairedü
Credit quality of all loans and advancesü
Credit quality of loans neither past due nor impairedü
Interest foregone on non-performing lendingüü
Analysis of impairment and provision statusü
73

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

SIGNIFICANT INCREASE IN CREDIT RISK

31 December 2019 and 2018

The table below analyses the Group’s loans and advances to customers and banks that are considered to have experienced a significant increase in credit risk, but are not credit-impaired, according to the number of days that have elapsed since the last payment received by the Group was due from the borrower; the analysis of lending has been prepared based on the division in which the asset is held.

                   
  Loans and  Loans and advances to customers
  advances  Retail –  Retail –          
  to banks  mortgages  other  Commercial  Other  Total 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
31 December 2019                        
Up to date     13,439   4,879   5,611   28   23,957 
1-30 days past due     1,876   497   117   1   2,491 
Over 30 days past due     1,620   207   265   3   2,095 
Total     16,935   5,583   5,993   32   28,543 
31 December 2018                        
Up to date  3   10,118   4,387   6,020   10   20,535 
1-30 days past due     1,955   486   455      2,896 
Over 30 days past due     1,581   214   117   2   1,914 
Total  3   13,654   5,087   6,592   12   25,345 

A financial asset is “past due” if a counterparty has failed to make a payment when contractually due.

LOANS PAST DUE BUT NOT IMPAIRED

31 December 2017 and earlier years

The loans that are past due but not impaired are analysed in the table below according to the number of days that have elapsed since the last payment received by the Group was due from the borrower. The analysis of lending between retail and commercial has been prepared based upon the type of exposure and not the business segment in which the exposure is recorded. Included within retail are exposures to personal customers and small businesses, whilst included within commercial are exposures to corporate customers and other large institutions.

                 Loans and 
                 advances 
       designated 
  Loans and  Loans and advances to customers at fair value 
  advances  Retail –  Retail –        through 
(audited) to banks
£m
  mortgages
£m
  other
£m
  Commercial
£m
  Total
£m
  profit or loss
£m
 
31 December 2017                        
0-30 days  6   3,057   458   246   3,761    
30-60 days     1,115   111   10   1,236    
60-90 days     785   3   13   801    
90-180 days     977   3   8   988    
Over 180 days        10   59   69    
Total  6   5,934   585   336   6,855    
31 December 2016                        
0-30 days  14   3,547   285   157   3,989    
30-60 days     1,573   75   37   1,685    
60-90 days     985   2   74   1,061    
90-180 days     1,235   6   14   1,255    
Over 180 days        18   23   41    
Total  14   7,340   386   305   8,031    
31 December 2015                        
0-30 days  111   4,066   276   248   4,590    
30-60 days     1,732   81   100   1,913    
60-90 days     1,065   9   52   1,126    
90-180 days     1,370   8   19   1,397    
Over 180 days        19   44   63    
Total  111   8,233   393   463   9,089    

A financial asset is “past due” if a counterparty has an amount outstanding beyond its contractual due date.

74

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

POTENTIAL PROBLEM LOANS

Potential problem loans are loans where known information about possible credit problems causes management to have concern as to the borrower’s ability to comply with the present loan repayment terms.

31 December 2019 and 2018

IFRS 7 requires the disclosure of information about the credit quality of loans and advances. The Group’s disclosures analyse its loans (gross drawn exposures) based on the internal credit ratings systems used by the Group; these differ between Retail and Commercial, reflecting the characteristics of their exposures and the way that they are managed by the Group.

  Probability of  2019  2018 
Gross drawn exposures default range  £m  £m 
Loans and advances to banks:            
CMS 1-10  0.00-0.50%   9,777   6,180 
CMS 11-14  0.51-3.00%      105 
CMS 15-18  3.01-20.00%       
CMS 19  20.01-99.99%       
CMS 20-23  100%       
       9,777   6,285 
Loans and advances to customers:            
Retail - mortgages            
RMS 1-6  0.00-4.50%   270,522   268,524 
RMS 7-9  4.51-14.00%   2,067   1,766 
RMS 10  14.01-20.00%   414   262 
RMS 11-13  20.01-99.99%   975   899 
RMS 14  100%   15,220   16,784 
       289,198   288,235 
Retail - unsecured            
RMS 1-6  0.00-4.50%   23,249   23,442 
RMS 7-9  4.51-14.00%   3,595   2,845 
RMS 10  14.01-20.00%   265   239 
RMS 11-13  20.01-99.99%   624   886 
RMS 14  100%   678   703 
       28,411   28,115 
Retail - UK Motor Finance            
RMS 1-6  0.00-4.50%   14,865   13,872 
RMS 7-9  4.51-14.00%   682   619 
RMS 10  14.01-20.00%   99   111 
RMS 11-13  20.01-99.99%   180   202 
RMS 14  100%   150   129 
       15,976   14,933 
Retail - Other            
RMS 1-6  0.00-4.50%   9,910   9,737 
RMS 7-9  4.51-14.00%   409   256 
RMS 10  14.01-20.00%   7   7 
RMS 11-13  20.01-99.99%   157   234 
RMS 14  100%   150   165 
       10,633   10,399 
Total Retail      344,218   341,682 
75

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

  Probability of  2019  2018 
Gross drawn exposures (continued) default range  £m  £m 
Commercial            
CMS 1-10  0.00-0.50%   60,259   65,189 
CMS 11-14  0.51-3.00%   27,960   28,922 
CMS 15-18  3.01-20.00%   4,928   4,429 
CMS 19  20.01-99.99%   169   54 
CMS 20-23  100%   3,447   3,230 
       96,763   101,824 
Other            
RMS 1-6  0.00-4.50%   786   810 
RMS 7-9  4.51-14.00%   40    
RMS 10  14.01-20.00%       
RMS 11-13  20.01-99.99%       
RMS 14  100%   84   55 
       910   865 
CMS 1-10  0.00-0.50%   56,356   43,565 
CMS 11-14  0.51-3.00%      6 
CMS 15-18  3.01-20.00%       
CMS 19  20.01-99.99%       
CMS 20-23  100%      66 
       56,356   43,637 
Total loans and advances to customers      498,247   488,008 
             
In respect of:            
Retail      344,218   341,682 
Commercial      96,763   101,824 
Other      57,266   44,502 
Total loans and advances to customers      498,247   488,008 
76

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

31 December 2017 and earlier years

IFRS 7 required the disclosure of information about the credit quality of loans and advances that were neither past due nor impaired. The Group’s disclosures analyse these loans between those that the Group believed were of good quality, satisfactory quality, lower quality and those that were below standard but not impaired. The below standard but not impaired balances represented potential problem loans. The analysis of lending between retail and commercial has been prepared based upon the type of exposure and not the business segment in which the exposure is recorded. Included within retail are exposures to personal customers and small businesses, whilst included within commercial are exposures to corporate customers and other large institutions.

                 Loans and 
                 advances 
                 designated 
  Loans and   Loans and advances to customers at fair value 
  advances  Retail –  Retail –        through 
(audited) to banks
£m
  mortgages
£m
  other
£m
  Commercial
£m
  Total
£m
  profit or loss
£m
 
31 December 2017                        
Good quality  6,351   294,748   43,145   81,121       31,548 
Satisfactory quality  198   790   4,770   30,154       42 
Lower quality  28   32   286   4,807        
Below standard, but not impaired     195   696   314        
Total  6,577   295,765   48,897   116,396   461,058   31,590 
31 December 2016                        
Good quality  26,745   295,286   34,195   72,083       33,049 
Satisfactory quality  87   814   4,479   30,433       30 
Lower quality  3   39   387   6,433        
Below standard, but not impaired  53   164   417   415        
Total  26,888   296,303   39,478   109,364   445,145   33,079 
31 December 2015                        
Good quality  24,670   301,403   33,589   63,453       33,156 
Satisfactory quality  311   527   4,448   28,899       15 
Lower quality  4   27   476   7,210       3 
Below standard, but not impaired  21   106   373   439        
Total  25,006   302,063   38,886   100,001   440,950   33,174 
77

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

INTEREST FOREGONE ON NON-PERFORMING LENDING

The table below summarises the interest foregone on impaired lending.

2019
£m
Interest income that would have been recognised under original contract terms313
Interest income included in profit(198)
Interest foregone115

ANALYSIS OF IMPAIRMENT AND PROVISION STATUS

31 December 2017 and earlier years

The table below shows separately those loans that are (i) neither past due nor impaired, (ii) past due but not impaired, (iii) impaired, but not requiring a provision and (iv) impaired with a provision.

 

           Loans and           Loans and 
           advances           advances 
   Loans and advances to customers designated           designated 
 Loans and         at fair value Loans and Loans and advances to customers at fair value 
 advances Retail – Retail –     through advances Retail – Retail –     through 
(audited) to banks
£m
 mortgages
£m
 other
£m
 Commercial
£m
 Total
£m
 profit or loss
£m
 to banks
£m
 mortgages
£m
 other
£m
 Commercial
£m
 Total
£m
 profit or loss
£m
 
31 December 2017                       
Neither past due nor impaired 6,577   295,765   48,897   116,396   461,058   31,590 
Past due but not impaired 6   5,934   585   336   6,855    
Impaired – no provision required 28   640   306   700   1,646    
– provision held    3,529   1,053   1,613   6,195    
Gross 6,611   305,868   50,841   119,045   475,754   31,590 
31 December 2016                                               
Neither past due nor impaired  26,888   296,303   39,478   109,364   445,145   33,079  26,888   296,303   39,478   109,364   445,145   33,079 
Past due but not impaired  14   7,340   386   305   8,031     14   7,340   386   305   8,031    
Impaired – no provision required     784   392   689   1,865        784   392   689   1,865    
– provision held     3,536   1,038   2,056   6,630        3,536   1,038   2,056   6,630    
Gross  26,902   307,963   41,294   112,414   461,671   33,079  26,902   307,963   41,294   112,414   461,671   33,079 
31 December 2015                                               
Neither past due nor impaired  25,006   302,063   38,886   100,001   440,950   33,174  25,006   302,063   38,886   100,001   440,950   33,174 
Past due but not impaired  111   8,233   393   463   9,089     111   8,233   393   463   9,089    
Impaired – no provision required     732   690   1,092   2,514        732   690   1,092   2,514    
– provision held     3,269   911   2,896   7,076        3,269   911   2,896   7,076    
Gross  25,117   314,297   40,880   104,452   459,629   33,174  25,117   314,297   40,880   104,452   459,629   33,174 
31 December 2014                        
Neither past due nor impaired  26,003   320,324   37,886   106,768   464,978   36,725 
Past due but not impaired  152   10,311   674   488   11,473    
Impaired – no provision required     578   938   847   2,363    
– provision held     3,766   1,109   7,070   11,945    
Gross  26,155   334,979   40,607   115,173   490,759   36,725 
31 December 2013                        
Neither past due nor impaired  25,219   318,668   36,789   107,764   463,221   29,443 
Past due but not impaired  146   12,329   580   786   13,695    
Impaired – no provision required     637   1,284   1,824   3,745    
– provision held     6,229   1,456   20,829   28,514    
Gross  25,365   337,863   40,109   131,203   509,175   29,443 
31 December 2012                        
Neither past due nor impaired  32,726   319,613   41,223   117,152   477,988   14,551 
Past due but not impaired  31   12,880   922   1,527   15,329    
Impaired – no provision required     741   1,530   1,504   3,775    
– provision held  3   7,391   2,124   33,003   42,518    
Gross  32,760   340,625   45,799   153,186   539,610   14,551 

 

The analysis of lending between retail and commercial has been prepared based upon the type of exposure and not the business segment in which the exposure is recorded. Included within retail are exposures to personal customers and small businesses, whilst included within commercial are exposures to corporate customers and other large institutions.

81

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

The loans that are past due but not impaired are further analysed in the table below according to the number of days that have elapsed since the last payment was due from the borrower.

                 Loans and 
                 advances 
     Loans and advances to customers designated 
  Loans and              at fair value 
  advances  Retail –  Retail –        through 
(audited) to banks
£m
  mortgages
£m
  other
£m
  Commercial
£m
  Total
£m
  profit or loss
£m
 
31 December 2016                        
0-30 days  14   3,547   285   157   3,989    
30-60 days     1,573   75   37   1,685    
60-90 days     985   2   74   1,061    
90-180 days     1,235   6   14   1,255    
Over 180 days        18   23   41    
Total  14   7,340   386   305   8,031    
31 December 2015                        
0-30 days  111   4,066   276   248   4,590    
30-60 days     1,732   81   100   1,913    
60-90 days     1,065   9   52   1,126    
90-180 days     1,370   8   19   1,397    
Over 180 days        19   44   63    
Total  111   8,233   393   463   9,089    
31 December 2014                        
0-30 days  152   4,854   453   198   5,505    
30-60 days     2,309   110   51   2,470    
60-90 days     1,427   90   139   1,656    
90-180 days     1,721   5   38   1,764    
Over 180 days        16   62   78    
Total  152   10,311   674   488   11,473    
31 December 2013                        
0-30 days  146   5,596   489   347   6,432    
30-60 days     2,639   87   102   2,828    
60-90 days     1,734   4   57   1,795    
90-180 days     2,360      41   2,401    
Over 180 days           239   239    
Total  146   12,329   580   786   13,695    
31 December 2012                        
0-30 days     5,996   744   860   7,600    
30-60 days  3   2,667   138   131   2,936    
60-90 days  2   1,750   29   328   2,107    
90-180 days  6   2,467   5   56   2,528    
Over 180 days  20      6   152   158    
Total  31   12,880   922   1,527   15,329    

A financial asset is ‘past due’ if a counterparty has failed to make a payment when contractually due.

82

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

POTENTIAL PROBLEM LOANS

Potential problem loans are loans where known information about possible credit problems causes management to have concern as to the borrower’s ability to comply with the present loan repayment terms.

IFRS 7 requires the disclosure of information about the credit quality of loans and advances that are neither past due nor impaired. The Group’s disclosures analyse these loans between those that the Group believes are of good quality, satisfactory quality, and lower quality and those that are below standard but not impaired. The below standard but not impaired balances represent potential problem loans.

                 Loans and 
                 advances 
     Loans and advances to customers designated 
  Loans and              at fair value 
  advances  Retail –  Retail –        through 
(audited) to banks
£m
  mortgages
£m
  other
£m
  Commercial
£m
  Total
£m
  profit or loss
£m
 
31 December 2016                        
Good quality  26,745   295,286   34,195   72,083       33,049 
Satisfactory quality  87   814   4,479   30,433       30 
Lower quality  3   39   387   6,433        
Below standard, but not impaired  53   164   417   415        
Total  26,888   296,303   39,478   109,364   445,145   33,079 
31 December 2015                        
Good quality  24,670   301,403   33,589   63,453       33,156 
Satisfactory quality  311   527   4,448   28,899       15 
Lower quality  4   27   476   7,210       3 
Below standard, but not impaired  21   106   373   439        
Total  25,006   302,063   38,886   100,001   440,950   33,174 
31 December 2014                        
Good quality  25,654   318,967   30,993   65,106       36,482 
Satisfactory quality  263   1,159   5,675   28,800       238 
Lower quality  49   72   623   11,204       5 
Below standard, but not impaired  37   126   595   1,658        
Total  26,003   320,324   37,886   106,768   464,978   36,725 
31 December 2013                        
Good quality  25,044   314,749   29,129   66,345       29,432 
Satisfactory quality  171   2,948   6,414   29,038       7 
Lower quality  2   308   501   9,991       3 
Below standard, but not impaired  2   663   745   2,390       1 
Total  25,219   318,668   36,789   107,764   463,221   29,443 
31 December 2012                        
Good quality  32,173   313,372   30,924   60,049       14,514 
Satisfactory quality  174   4,532   8,579   33,477       28 
Lower quality  10   552   862   18,153       6 
Below standard, but not impaired  369   1,157   858   5,473       3 
Total  32,726   319,613   41,223   117,152   477,988   14,551 

For further details see note 52 on page F-90.

INTEREST FOREGONE ON NON-PERFORMING LENDING

The table below summarises the interest foregone on impaired lending.

2016
£m
Interest income that would have been recognised under original contract terms317
Interest income included in profit(205)
Interest foregone112
8378

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

TROUBLED DEBT RESTRUCTURINGS

 

In the US, loans whose terms have been modified due to problems with the borrower are required to be separately disclosed. If the new terms were in line with market conditions at the time of the restructuring and the restructured loan remains current as to repayment of principal and interest then the disclosure is discontinued at the end of the first year. The Company’s accounting policy for loans that are renegotiated is set out in note 2(H)(l) to the financial statements. The table below sets out loans that are forborneIn accordance with IFRS 9, an impairment provision is recognised on all loans; as a result, the Company amended these disclosures in 2018. Loans modified by the Group during the year as a result of a customer’s financial difficulties were credit-impaired at 31 December 2016, 20152019 and 2014, separately identifying those loans that2018 and are also impaired:included within the forborne balances set out in the table below.

 

       Impairment   Purchased     
 Total forborne Total forborne   allowance as a   or originated     
 loans and loans and Total loans and % of loans and Credit-impaired credit-impaired Other Total 
 advances which advances which advances which advances which forborne forborne forborne forborne 
 are not impaired are impaired are forborne are forborne loans and loans and loans and loans and 
 £m £m £m % advances advances advances advances 
£m £m £m £m 
At 31 December 2019               
Retail:               
Secured 736   3,659   1,164   5,559 
Unsecured 305      235   540 
UK Motor Finance 26      37   63 
Total Retail 1,067   3,659   1,436   6,162 
Commercial 3,363      923   4,286 
At 31 December 2018               
Retail:               
Secured 642   4,241   1,206   6,089 
Unsecured 289      274   563 
UK Motor Finance 25      31   56 
Total Retail 956   4,241   1,511   6,708 
Commercial 2,978      894   3,872 
               
 Impairment 
Total forborne loans Total forborne loans Total loans and allowance as a % of 
and advances which and advances which advances which are loans and advances 
are not impaired are impaired forborne which are forborne 
£m £m £m % 
At 31 December 2017               
UK secured retail 1,291   137   1,428   4.3 
UK unsecured retail 55   139   194   38.6 
Consumer credit cards 105   190   295   36.0 
Asset Finance UK Retail 15   19   34   36.6 
Run off: Ireland secured retail 213   25   238   21.0 
Commercial Banking 447   1,927   2,374   35.0 
Run off: Corporate Real Estate, other Corporate and Specialist Finance    715   715   44.1 
At 31 December 2016                               
UK secured retail  1,879   217   2,096   4.7  1,879   217   2,096   4.7 
UK unsecured retail  20   107   127   40.5  20   107   127   40.5 
Consumer credit cards  93   119   212   29.0  93   119   212   29.0 
Asset Finance UK Retail  55   62   117   27.0  55   62   117   27.0 
Run off: Ireland secured retail  137   19   156   16.6  137   19   156   16.6 
Commercial Banking  466   2,179   2,645   31.2  466   2,197   2,663   31.1 
Run off: Corporate Real Estate, other Corporate and Specialist Finance  3   995   998   51.1  3   995   998   51.1 
At 31 December 2015                
UK secured retail  2,929   173   3,102   4.2 
UK unsecured retail  28   119   147   40.0 
Consumer credit cards  105   120   225   26.8 
Asset Finance UK Retail  49   51   100   25.5 
Run off: Ireland secured retail  143   26   169   13.3 
Commercial Banking  986   2,528   3,514   30.9 
Run off: Corporate Real Estate, other Corporate and Specialist Finance  9   1,771   1,780   52.5 
Run-off Ireland: Commercial real estate and corporate  32   5   37   0.0 
At 31 December 2014                
UK secured retail  4,128   266   4,394   3.5 
UK unsecured retail  23   139   162   39.4 
Consumer credit cards  94   140   234   29.1 
Asset Finance UK Retail  56   53   109   20.5 
Run off: Ireland secured retail  239   41   280   12.7 
Commercial Banking  1,896   3,241   5,137   31.0 
Run off: Corporate Real Estate, other Corporate and Specialist Finance  86   1,912   1,998   58.3 
Run-off Ireland: Commercial real estate and corporate  384   3,052   3,436   72.2 
79

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

          Impairment 
 Total forborne loans  Total forborne loans  Total loans and  allowance as a % of 
 and advances which  and advances which  advances which are  loans and advances 
 are not impaired  are impaired  forborne  which are forborne 
 £m  £m  £m  % 
At 31 December 2015               
UK secured retail 2,929   173   3,102   4.2 
UK unsecured retail 28   119   147   40.0 
Consumer credit cards 105   120   225   26.8 
Asset Finance UK Retail 49   51   100   25.5 
Run off: Ireland secured retail 143   26   169   13.3 
Commercial Banking 986   2,543   3,529   30.9 
Run off: Corporate Real Estate, other Corporate and Specialist Finance 9   1,771   1,780   52.5 
Run-off Ireland: Commercial real estate and corporate 32   5   37   0.0 

 

The Group assesses whether a loan benefiting from a UK Government-sponsored programme is impaired or a troubled debt restructuring using the same accounting policies and practices as it does for loans not benefiting from such a programme.

 

Further information on the schemes operated by the Group to assist borrowers who are experiencing financial stress and on the Group’s forborne loans is set out on pages 5654 to 5955, page 63 and pages 65 to 72.page 67.

 

ASSETS ACQUIRED IN EXCHANGE FOR ADVANCES

 

In most circumstances in the US, title to property securing residential real estate transfers to the lender upon foreclosure. The loan is written off and the property acquired in this way is reported in a separate balance sheet category with any recoveries recorded as an offset to the provision for loan losses recorded in the year. Upon sale of the acquired property, gains or losses are recorded in the income statement as a gain or loss on acquired property.

 

In the UK, although a bank is entitled to enforce a first charge on a property held as security, it typically does so only to the extent of enforcing its power of sale. In accordance with IFRS and industry practice, Lloyds Banking Group usually takes control of a property held as collateral on a loan at repossession without transfer of title. Loans subject to repossession continue to be reported as loans in the balance sheet. The Group’s gains or losses on sale of the acquired property are recorded within the provision for loan losses during the reporting period.

 

The difference in practices has no effect on net income reported in the UK compared to that reported in the US but it does result in a difference in classification of losses and recoveries in the income statement. It also has the effect of causing UK banks to report an increased level of non-performing loans compared with US banks.

 

In certain circumstances the Group takes physical possession of assets held as collateral against wholesale lending. In such cases, the assets are carried on the Group’s balance sheet and are classified according to the Group’s accounting policies.

84

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

CROSS BORDER OUTSTANDINGS

 

The business of Lloyds Banking Group involves exposures in non-local currencies. These cross border outstandings comprise loans (including accrued interest), acceptances, interest-bearing deposits with other banks, other interest-bearing investments and any other monetary assets which are denominated in non-local currency. The following table analyses, by type of borrower, foreign outstandings which individually represent in excess of 1 per cent of Lloyds Banking Group’s total assets.

 

     Governments Banks and other Commercial,      Governments Banks and other Commercial, 
     and official financial industrial      and official financial industrial 
   Total institutions institutions and other    Total institutions institutions and other 
 % of assets £m £m £m £m  % of assets £m £m £m £m 
At 31 December 2016:                    
At 31 December 2019:                    
United States of America  1.6   13,224   7,564   1,718   3,942   1.0   8,741   3,191   4,831   719 
At 31 December 2015:                    
At 31 December 2018:                    
United States of America  1.5   11,748   6,349   952   4,447   1.6   12,502   4,045   5,091   3,366 
At 31 December 2014:                    
At 31 December 2017:                    
United States of America  1.3   11,437   7,838   1,177   2,422   1.6   12,963   6,760   3,205   2,998 

 

At 31 December 2016,2019, United States of America had commitments of £2,168£3,773 million.

 

At 31 December 2016,2019, no countries had cross-border outstandings of between 0.75 per cent and 1 per cent of assets.

At 31 December 2018, no countries had cross border outstandings of between 0.75 per cent and 1 per cent of assets.

 

At 31 December 2015,2017, no countries had cross border outstandings of between 0.75 per cent and 1 per cent of assets.

At 31 December 2014, no countries had cross-border outstandings of between 0.75 per cent and 1 per cent of assets.

8580

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

REGULATORY AND LEGAL RISK

DEFINITION

Regulatory and legal risk is defined as the risk of financial penalties, regulatory censure, criminal or civil enforcement action or customer detriment as a result of failure to identify, assess, correctly interpret, comply with, or manage regulatory and/or legal requirements.

EXPOSURES

Whilst the Group has a zero risk appetite for material regulatory breaches or material legal incidents, the Group remains exposed to them, driven by significant ongoing and new legislation, regulation and court proceedings in the UK and overseas which in each case needs to be interpreted, implemented and embedded into day-to-day operational and business practices across the Group.

MEASUREMENT

Regulatory and legal risks are measured against a defined risk appetite metric, which is an assessment of material regulatory breaches and material legal incidents.

MITIGATION

The Group undertakes a range of key mitigating actions to manage regulatory and legal risk. These include the following:

The Board has established a Group-wide risk appetite and metric for regulatory and legal risk.
Group policies and procedures set out the principles and key controls that should apply across the business which are aligned to the Group risk appetite. Mandated policies and processes require appropriate control frameworks, management information, standards and colleague training to be implemented to identify and manage regulatory and legal risk.
Business units identify, assess and implement policy and regulatory requirements and establish local controls, processes, procedures and resources to ensure appropriate governance and compliance.
Business units regularly produce management information to assist in the identification of issues and test management controls are working effectively.
Risk and Legal departments provide oversight, proactive support and constructive challenge to the business in identifying and managing regulatory and legal issues.
Risk department conducts thematic reviews of regulatory compliance and provides oversight of regulatory compliance assessments across businesses and divisions where appropriate.
Business units, with the support of divisional and Group-level teams, conduct ongoing horizon scanning to identify and address changes in regulatory and legal requirements.
The Group engages with regulatory authorities and industry bodies on forthcoming regulatory changes, market reviews and investigations, ensuring programmes are established to deliver new regulation and legislation.

MONITORING

Material risks are managed through the relevant divisional-level committees, with review and escalation through Group level committees where appropriate, including the escalation of any material regulatory breaches or material legal incidents.


81

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

CONDUCT RISK

 

DEFINITION

 

Conduct risk is defined as the risk of customer detriment across the customer lifecycle including: failures in product management, distribution and servicing activities; from other risks materialising, or other activities which could undermine the integrity of the market or distort competition, leading to unfair customer outcomes, regulatory censure, and/reputational damage or a reduction in earnings/value, through financial or reputational loss, from inappropriate or poor customer treatment or business conduct.loss.

 

EXPOSURES

 

The Group faces significant conduct risks, which affect all aspects of the Group’s operations and all types of customers.

Conduct risks can impact directly or indirectly on our customers and other stakeholders. These can be consideredcould materialise from a number of areas across two main categories; customer conduct risks and market conduct risks. Customer conduct risks are those that have a direct impact on a customer – or group of customers – and can materialise through products or services not meeting the needs of its customers; sales processes resulting in poor customer outcomes; or the failure to deal with a customer’s complaint effectively which in turn may lead to a referral to the Financial Ombudsman Service. Market conduct risks can exist where activity taken can disrupt the fair and effective operation of a market in which the Group, is active. Market conduct risks can arise from the mismanagement of market sensitive information, the failure to identify and report suspicious transactions or orders, or through inaccurate benchmark submissions.including:

Business and strategic planning that does not sufficiently consider customer needs.
Ineffective management and monitoring of products and their distribution (including the sales process).
Unclear, unfair, misleading or untimely customer communications.
A culture that is not sufficiently customer-centric.
Poor governance of colleagues’ incentives and rewards and approval of schemes which drive unfair customer outcomes.
Ineffective management and oversight of legacy conduct issues.
Ineffective management of customers’ complaints or claims.
Outsourcing of customer service and product delivery to third-parties that do not have the same level of control, oversight and culture as the Group.

 

There is an ongoinga high level of scrutiny regarding financial institutions’ treatment of customers, including those in vulnerable circumstances, from regulatory bodies, the media, politicians and consumer groups. As

There continues to be a result,significant focus on market misconduct, resulting from previous issues such as London Inter-bank Offered Rate (LIBOR) and foreign exchange (FX).

Due to the level of enhanced focus on conduct, there is a risk that certain aspects of the Group’s current or legacy business may be determined by the Financial Conduct Authority, other regulatory bodies or the courts as not being conducted in accordance with applicable laws or regulations, or in a manner that fails to deliver fair and reasonable customer treatment. The Group may also be liable for damages to third parties harmed by the conduct of its business. Theretreatment, or is also a significant regulatory focus oninconsistent with market misconduct, resultant from previous issues around LIBOR and FX.integrity or competition requirements.

 

MEASUREMENT

 

To articulate its conduct risk appetite, the Group has sought more granularity through the use of suitable conduct risk metricsConduct Risk Appetite Metrics (CRAMs) and tolerances that indicate where it may potentially be operating outside its conduct risk appetite. Conduct Risk Appetite Metrics (CRAMs)These include Board-level conduct risk metrics covering an assessment of overall CRAMs performance, out of appetite CRAMs, UK Financial Ombudsman Service (FoS) change rates and complaints.

CRAMs have been designed for allservices and product families offered by the Group;Group and are measured by a consistent set of common metrics have been agreed for all products to support a consistent approach.metrics. These contain a range of product design, sales and post-salesprocess metrics to provide a more holistic view of conduct risks; each productsome products also hashave a suite of additional bespoke metrics. The common metrics are sales volume, product governance adherence, target market, outcome testing: meets customer needs, outcome testing: information disclosure, outcome testing: regulatory compliance, retention, usage, claims (decline rates), complaints, Financial Ombudsman Service uphold rate and complaints outcome testing.

Each of the tolerances for the metrics are agreed for the individual product or service and are tracked monthly.regularly tracked. At a consolidated level these metrics are part of the Board approved risk appetite. The Group alsohas, and continues to, measure the effectiveness of the overall strategic focus onevolve its approach to conduct within the divisionsrisk measurements, including those supporting customer vulnerability, process delivery and functions and its impact on customer outcomes and the effective implementation of the Customer Vulnerability agenda through the Group Customer First Committee (GCFC).

In relation to market conduct, relevant metrics are being established, and will continue to evolve in line with external developments. These cover a range of topics including the management of confidential and market sensitive information; and the way in which conflicts of interest are managed.journeys.

 

MITIGATION

 

The Group takes a range of mitigating actions with respect to this risk.conduct risk and remains focused on delivering a leading customer experience. The transitionGroup’s ongoing commitment to good customer outcomes sets the tone from the top and supports the development of the customer-focused UK centric strategy into the Business has strengthened itsright customer-centric culture – strengthening links between actions to support conduct, culture and values, improved systemscustomer and processes, and implementedenabling more effective controls. These actions are being further embedded throughout the Group (across all business areas and all supporting functional areas) through the continued evolution of the strategic focus oncontrol management. Actions to encourage good conduct within business as usual supported by the GCFC, including:include:

 

Conduct risk appetite established at Group and business area level, with metrics included in the Board Risk AppetiteGroup risk appetite to ensure ongoing due-focus;focus.
Simplified and enhanced conduct policies and procedures in place to ensure appropriate controls and processes that deliver fair customer outcomes, and support market integrity and competition requirements.
  
Customer needs explicitly considered within business and product level planning and strategy,through divisional customer plans, with Divisional plansintegral conduct lens, reviewed and challenged by the GCFC;Group Customer First Committee (GCFC).
  
Cultural transformation,transformation: achieving a values-led culture through a focus on behaviours to ensure the Group transforms its culture for success in a digital world. This is supported by strong direction and tone from senior executives and the Board. This is underpinned by the Group’s values and Codes of Responsibility, to deliver the best bank for customers;
  
EstablishmentContinuous embedding of the customer vulnerability framework. Development and continued oversight of the implementation of the vulnerability strategy continues through the Group Customer Vulnerability Framework, which operatesCommittee (GCVC) operating at a senior level to prioritise change, drive implementation and ensure consistency across the Group;Group. The Group is also in the third year of its partnership with Macmillan to support customers with cancer, has launched specialist support for those impacted by financial and domestic abuse and has signed up to standards supporting customers with mental health problems.
  
Development of the Group’s Customer Journey Strategy and Framework to support its focus on conduct from an end-to-end customer perspective;
Enhanced product governance framework to ensure products continue to offer customers fair value, and consistently meet their needs throughout their product life cycle; reviewed and challenged by Group Product Governance Committee (GPGC).
  
Enhanced complaints management through effectively responding to, and learning from, root causes to reduceof complaint volumes and the Financial Ombudsman ServiceFoS change rate;rates.
  
EnhancedReview and oversight of thematic conduct agenda items at senior committees, ensuring holistic consideration of key Group-wide conduct risks.
Robust recruitment and training, with a continued focus on how the Group manages colleagues’ performance with clearerclear customer accountabilities; andaccountabilities.
  
Ongoing focus on the strategic conduct agenda in the Group’s interactionsengagement with third partiesthird-parties involved in serving the Group’s customers to ensure consistent delivery.
Monitoring and testing of customer outcomes to ensure the Group delivers fair outcomes for customers whilst making continuous improvements to products, services and processes.
Continued focus on market conduct and member of the Fixed Income, Currencies and Commodities Markets Standard Board.
Adoption of robust change delivery methodology to enable prioritisation and delivery of needs met.initiatives to address conduct challenges.

The Group has also prioritised activity designed to reinforce good conduct in its engagement with the markets in which it operates. This has included the creation of a Market Conduct Steering Committee, training for relevant colleagues, the development of enhanced procedures, and the enhancement of preventative and detective controls including the Group’s trade surveillance and continuous surveillance capability.

The Group’s leadership team, through the GCFC, has oversighted and approved the transition of the Conduct Strategy within the business as usual to support the development of the right customer centric culture. The Board and Group Risk Committee receive regular qualitative and quantitative reports to track progress on how the Group is meeting customer needs and minimising conduct risk across all areas of the business.

The Group actively engages with regulatory bodies and other stakeholders in developing its understanding of current customer treatment concerns, and those relating to the fairness and effectiveness of markets,Continued focus on proactive identification and mitigation of conduct risk in the GSR3.Active engagement with regulatory bodies and other stakeholders to develop understanding of concerns related to customer treatment, effective competition and market integrity, to ensure that the Group’s strategic conduct focus in business as usual continues to meet evolving stakeholder expectations.

MONITORING

Monitoring and reporting is undertaken at Board, Group, entity and divisional committees. As part of the reporting of CRAMs, a robust outcomes testing regime is in place to determine whether the Group is delivering fair outcomes for customers.

GCFC acts as the guardian of customer experience and has responsibility for monitoring and reviewing plans and actions to improve it, providing oversight of customer outcomes and customer experience and providing challenge to divisions to make changes to support the delivery of the Group’s vision and foster a customer-centric culture.

OPERATIONAL RISK

DEFINITION

Operational risk is defined as the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems or from external events.


82

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

EXPOSURES

The principal operational risks to the Group which could result in customer detriment, unfair customer outcomes, financial loss, disruption and/or reputational damage are:

A cyber-attack.
Failure of IT systems, due to volume of change, and/or aged infrastructure.
Internal and/or external fraud or financial crime.
Failure to ensure compliance with increasingly complex and detailed regulation including anti-money laundering, anti-bribery, counter-terrorist financing, and financial sanctions and prohibitions laws and regulations.

A number of these risks could increase where there is a reliance on third-party suppliers to provide services to the Group or its customers.

MEASUREMENT

Operational risk is managed across the Group through an operational risk framework and operational risk policies. The operational risk framework includes a risk and control self-assessment process, risk impact likelihood matrix, key risk and control indicators, risk appetite, a robust operational event management and escalation process, scenario analysis and an operational losses process.

Table X below shows high level loss and event trends for the Group using Basel II categories. Based on data captured on the Group’s Risk and Control Self-Assessment, in 2019 the highest frequency of events occurred in external fraud (67.89 per cent) and execution, delivery and process management (18.04 per cent). Clients, products and business practices accounted for 72.70 per cent of losses by value, driven by legacy issues where impacts materialised in 2019 (excluding PPI).


Table X:Operational risk events by risk category (losses greater than or equal to £10,000), excluding PPI1

  % of total volume % of total losses
  2019  2018  2019  2018 
Business disruption and system failures  0.78   1.46   2.45   3.53 
Clients, products and business practices  12.84   12.30   72.70   65.12 
Damage to physical assets  0.15   1.64   0.03   0.21 
Employee practices and workplace safety  0.10   0.06   0.01    
Execution, delivery and process management  18.04   21.21   20.60   25.96 
External fraud  67.89   62.98   4.16   5.05 
Internal fraud  0.20   0.35   0.05   0.13 
Total  100.00   100.00   100.00   100.00 

12018 breakdowns have been restated to reflect a number of events that have been reclassified following an internal review.

Operational risk losses and scenario analysis is used to inform the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP). The Group calculates its minimum (Pillar I) operational risk capital requirements using The Standardised Approach (TSA). Pillar II is calculated using internal and external loss data and extreme but plausible scenarios that may occur in the next 12 months.

MITIGATION

The Group’s strategic review considers the changing risk management requirements, adapting the change delivery model to be more agile and develop the people skills and capabilities needed to be a ‘Bank of the Future’. The Group continues to review and invest in its control environment to ensure it addresses the inherent risks faced. Risks are reported and discussed at local governance forums and escalated to executive management and Board as appropriate to ensure the correct level of visibility and engagement. The Group employs a range of risk management strategies, including: avoidance, mitigation, transfer (including insurance) and acceptance. Where there is a reliance on third-party suppliers to provide services, the Group’s sourcing policy ensures that outsourcing initiatives follow a defined process including due diligence, risk evaluation and ongoing assurance.

Mitigating actions to the principal operational risks are:

The threat landscape associated with cyber risk continues to evolve and there is significant regulatory attention on this subject. The Board continues to invest heavily to protect the Group from malicious cyber-attacks. Investment continues to focus on improving the Group’s approach to identity and access management, improving capability to detect and respond to cyber-attacks and improved ability to manage vulnerabilities across the estate.
The Group continues to optimise its approach to IT by investing in technology improvements; focusing on simplification of IT architecture; and decommissioning legacy systems in order to maintain reliable banking services for its customers. IT risk mitigation programmes are in place to continually improve customers’ experience, which receive considerable time and focus at Board and Board Risk Committees.
The Group adopts a risk based approach to mitigate the internal and external fraud risks it faces, reflecting the current and emerging fraud risks within the market. Fraud risk appetite metrics holistically cover the impacts of fraud in terms of losses to the Group, costs of fraud systems and operations, and customer experience of actual and attempted fraud. Oversight of the appropriateness and performance of these
metrics is undertaken regularly through business area and Group-level committees. This approach drives a continual programme of prioritised enhancements to the Group’s technology, process and people related controls, with an emphasis on preventative controls supported by real time detective controls wherever feasible. Group-wide policies and operational control frameworks are maintained and designed to provide customer confidence, protect the Group’s commercial interests and reputation, comply with legal requirements and meet regulatory requirements. The Group’s fraud awareness programme remains a key component of its fraud control environment, and awareness of fraud risk is supported by mandatory training for all colleagues. The Group also plays an active role with other financial institutions, industry bodies, and enforcement agencies in identifying and combatting fraud.
The Group continues to lead and support industry wide activity to help address fraud, such as leadership on the design and implementation of the industry code for Authorised Push Payment (APP) fraud, in addition to making more bespoke commitments with key partners, such as the City of London Police. Such initiatives support the continued enhancement of the Group’s control framework, whilst contributing to the raising of standards across the industry. The Group also continues to make material annual investments in both technology and colleague development to help mitigate this growing area of risk.
The Group has adopted policies and procedures designed to detect and prevent the use of its banking network for money laundering, terrorist financing, bribery, tax evasion, human trafficking, modern-day slavery and wildlife trafficking, and activities prohibited by legal and regulatory sanctions. Against a background of increasingly complex and detailed laws and regulations, and of increased criminal and terrorist activity, the Group regularly reviews and assesses its policies, procedures and organisational arrangements to keep them current, effective and consistent across markets and jurisdictions. The Group requires mandatory training on these topics for all employees. Specifically, the anti-money laundering procedures include ‘know-your-customer’ requirements, transaction monitoring technologies, reporting of suspicions of money laundering or terrorist financing to the applicable regulatory authorities, and interaction between the Group’s Financial Intelligence Unit and external agencies and other financial institutions. The Anti-Bribery Policy prohibits the payment, offer, acceptance or request of a bribe, including ‘facilitation payments’ by any employee or agent and provides a confidential reporting service for anonymous reporting of suspected or actual bribery activity. The Sanctions and


83

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

the Related Prohibitions Policy sets out a framework of controls for compliance with legal and regulatory sanctions.

MONITORING

Monitoring and reporting of operational risk is undertaken at Board, Group, entity and divisional committees. Each committee monitors key risks, control effectiveness, key risk and control indicators, events, operational losses, risk appetite metrics and the results of independent testing conducted by Risk and/or Internal Audit.

The Group maintains a formal approach to operational risk event escalation, whereby material events are identified, captured and escalated. Root causes of events are determined, and action plans put in place to ensure an optimum level of control to keep customers and the business safe, reduce costs, and improve efficiency.

The insurance programme is monitored and reviewed regularly, with recommendations being made to the Group’s senior management annually prior to each renewal. Insurers are monitored on an ongoing basis, to ensure counterparty risk is minimised. A process is in place to manage any insurer rating changes or insolvencies.

PEOPLE RISK

DEFINITION

The risk that the Group fails to provide an appropriate colleague and customer-centric culture, supported by robust reward and wellbeing policies and processes; effective leadership to manage colleague resources; effective talent and succession management; and robust control to ensure all colleague-related requirements are met.

EXPOSURES

The Group’s management of material people risks is critical to its capacity to deliver against its strategic objectives and to be the best bank for customers, particularly in the context of increasing volumes of organisational, political and external market change and increasing digitisation. The Group is exposed to the following key people risks:

Failure to recruit, develop and retain colleagues, including ineffective management of succession planning or failure to identify appropriate talent pipeline.
The increasing digitisation of the business is changing the capability mix required and may impact the Group’s ability to attract and retain talent.
Senior Managers and Certification Regime (SM&CR) and additional regulatory constraints on remuneration structures may impact the Group’s ability to attract and retain talent.
Failure to manage capacity, colleagues having excessive demands placed on them resulting in wellbeing issues and business objectives not being met.
Failure to meet all colleague-related legal and regulatory requirements.
Ineffective leadership, poor communication, weak performance, inappropriate remuneration policies.
Colleague engagement may continue to be challenged by ongoing media attention on culture within the banking sector, conduct and ethical considerations.
Inadequately designed people processes that are not resilient to withstand unexpected events.

MEASUREMENT

People risk is measured through a series of quantitative and qualitative indicators, aligned to key sources of people risk for the Group such as succession, retention, colleague engagement and wellbeing. In addition to risk appetite measures and limits, people risks and controls are monitored on a monthly basis via the Group’s risk governance framework and reporting structures.

MITIGATION

The Group takes many mitigating actions with respect to people risk. Key areas of focus include:

Focusing on leadership and colleague engagement, through delivery of strategies to attract, retain and develop high calibre people together with implementation of rigorous succession planning.
Continued focus on the Group’s culture by developing and delivering initiatives that reinforce the appropriate behaviours which generate the best possible long-term outcomes for customers and colleagues.
Managing organisational capability and capacity through divisional people strategies to ensure there are the right skills and resources to meet customers’ needs and deliver the Group’s strategic plan.
Maintain effective remuneration arrangements to ensure they promote an appropriate culture and colleague behaviours that meet customer needs and regulatory expectations.
Ensuring colleague wellbeing strategies and support are in place to meet colleague needs, and that the skills and capability growth required to build a workforce for the ‘Bank of the Future’ are achieved.
Ensuring compliance with legal and regulatory requirements related to SM&CR, embedding compliant and appropriate colleague behaviours in line with Group policies, values and its people risk priorities.
Ongoing consultation with the Group’s recognised unions on changes which impact their members.
Reviewing and enhancing people processes to ensure they are fit for purpose and operationally resilient.

MONITORING

Monitoring and reporting is undertaken at Board, Group, entity and divisional committees. Key people risk metrics are reported and discussed monthly at the Group People Risk Committee with escalation to Group Risk and Executive Committees and the Board where required.

All material people risk events are escalated in accordance with the Group Operational Risk Policy.

INSURANCE UNDERWRITING RISK

DEFINITION

Insurance underwriting risk is defined as the risk of adverse developments in the timing, frequency and severity of claims for insured/underwritten events and in customer behaviour, leading to reductions in earnings and/or value.

EXPOSURES

The major source of insurance underwriting risk within the Group is the Insurance business.

Longevity and persistency are key risks within the life and pensions business. Longevity risk arises from the annuity portfolios where policyholders’ future cash flows are guaranteed at retirement and increases in life expectancy, beyond current assumptions, will increase the cost of annuities. Longevity risk exposures are expected to increase with the Insurance business growth in the annuity market. Persistency assumptions are set to give a best estimate, however customer behaviour may result in increased cancellations or cessation of contributions.

The Group’s defined benefit pension schemes also expose the Group to longevity risk. For further information please refer to the defined benefit pension schemes component of the market risk section and note 36 to the financial statements.

Property insurance risk is a key risk within the General Insurance business, through Home Insurance. Exposures can arise, for example, in extreme weather conditions such as flooding, when property damage claims are higher than expected.


84

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

MEASUREMENT

Insurance underwriting risks are measured using a variety of techniques including stress, reverse stress and scenario testing, as well as stochastic modelling. Current and potential future insurance underwriting risk exposures are assessed and aggregated on a range of stresses including risk measures based on 1-in-200 year stresses for the Insurance business’ regulatory capital assessments and other supporting measures where appropriate, including those set out in note 33 to the financial statements.

MITIGATION

Insurance underwriting risk in the Insurance business is mitigated in a number of ways:

General Insurance exposure to accumulations of risk and possible catastrophes is mitigated by reinsurance arrangements broadly spread over different reinsurers. Detailed modelling, including that of the potential losses under various catastrophe scenarios, supports the choice of reinsurance arrangements.
Insurance processes on underwriting, claims management, pricing and product design.
Longevity risk transfer and hedging solutions are considered on a regular basis and since 2017 the Group have reinsured £3.1 billion of annuitant longevity. A team of longevity and pricing experts has been built to support the annuity proposition.
Exposure limits by risk type are assessed through the business planning process and used as a control mechanism to ensure risks are taken within risk appetite.

MONITORING

Insurance underwriting risks in the Insurance business are monitored by Insurance senior executive committees and ultimately the Insurance Board. Significant risks from the Insurance business and the defined benefit pension schemes are reviewed by the Group Executive and Group Risk Committees and Board.

Insurance underwriting risk exposures within the Insurance business are monitored against risk appetite. The Insurance business monitors experiences against expectations, for example business volumes and mix, claims and persistency experience. The effectiveness of controls put in place to manage insurance underwriting risk is evaluated and significant divergences from experience or movements in risk exposures are investigated and remedial action taken.

CAPITAL RISK

DEFINITION

Capital risk is defined as the risk that the Group has a sub-optimal quantity or quality of capital or that capital is inefficiently deployed across the Group.

EXPOSURES

A capital risk exposure arises when the Group has insufficient capital resources to support its strategic objectives and plans, and to meet both regulatory and external stakeholder requirements and expectations. This could arise due to a depletion of the Group’s capital resources as a result of the crystallisation of any of the risks to which it is exposed. Alternatively a shortage of capital could arise from an increase in the amount of capital that needs to be held either at Group level, Ring-Fenced Bank (RFB) sub-group level or at a regulated entity level. The Group’s capital management approach is focused on maintaining sufficient capital resources across all regulated levels of its structure in order to prevent such exposures while optimising value for shareholders.

MEASUREMENT

The Group maintains capital levels commensurate with a prudent level of solvency and aims to deliver consistent and high quality returns to shareholders. To support this the capital risk appetite is calibrated by taking into consideration both an internal view of the amount of capital the Group should hold as well as recognising external regulatory requirements.

The Group measures both its capital requirements and the amount of capital resources it holds to meet those requirements through applying the regulatory framework defined by the Capital Requirements Directive and Regulation (CRD IV), as amended by provisions of the revised Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR II) that came into force in June 2019. Directive requirements are implemented in the UK by the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) and supplemented through additional regulation under the PRA Rulebook. Further details of the regulatory capital and leverage frameworks that the Group is subject to, including the means by which its capital and leverage requirements and capital resources are calculated, will be provided in the Group’s Pillar 3 Report.

The minimum amount of total capital, under Pillar 1 of the regulatory framework, is set at 8 per cent of total risk-weighted assets. At least 4.5 per cent of risk-weighted assets are required to be covered by common equity tier 1 (CET1) capital and at least 6 per cent of risk-weighted assets are required to be covered by tier 1 capital. These minimum Pillar 1 requirements are supplemented by additional minimum requirements under Pillar 2A of the regulatory framework, the aggregate of which is referred to as the Group’s Total Capital Requirement (TCR), and a number of regulatory capital buffers as described below.

Additional minimum requirements under Pillar 2A are set by the PRA as a firm-specific Individual Capital Requirement (ICR) reflecting a point in time estimate, which may change over time, of the minimum amount of capital that is needed by the Group to cover risks that are not fully covered by Pillar 1, such as credit concentration and operational risk, and those risks not covered at all by Pillar 1, such as pensions and interest rate risk in the banking book (IRRBB). The Group’s Pillar 2A capital requirement at 31 December 2019 was 4.6 per cent of risk-weighted assets, of which 2.6 per cent must be met by CET1 capital.

The Group is also required to hold a number of regulatory capital buffers which are required to be met with CET1 capital.

Systemic buffers are designed to hold systemically important banks to higher capital standards, so that they can withstand a greater level of stress before requiring resolution.

Although the Group is not currently classified as a global systemically important institution (G-SII) under the Capital Requirements Directive, it has been classified as an ‘other’ systemically important institution (O-SII) by the PRA. The O-SII buffer is set to zero in the UK.
The systemic risk buffer (SRB) came into force for UK ring-fenced banks during 2019, with the PRA setting a buffer of 2.0 per cent of risk-weighted assets for the RFB sub-group. The size of the buffer applied to the RFB sub-group is dependent upon its total assets. The SRB equates to 1.7 per cent of risk-weighted assets at Group level, with the difference reflecting the risk-weighted assets of the Group that are not in the Ring-Fenced Bank sub-group and for which the SRB does not therefore apply.

The capital conservation buffer (CCB) is a standard buffer of 2.5 per cent of risk-weighted assets designed to provide for losses in the event of stress.

The countercyclical capital buffer (CCYB) is time-varying and is designed to require banks to hold additional capital to remove or reduce the build-up of systemic risk in times of credit boom, providing additional loss absorbing capacity and acting as an incentive for banks to constrain further credit growth. The amount of the buffer is determined by reference to buffer rates applied by the Bank of England’s Financial Policy Committee (FPC) for the individual countries where the Group has relevant credit exposures. The CCYB rate for the UK is currently set at 1.0 per cent and will increase to 2.0 per cent from December 2020 following a review by the FPC of the appropriate level to set in the current standard risk environment. As a result of this change the PRA will consult in 2020 on a reduction in Pillar 2A capital requirements by 50 per cent of the relevant bank specific increase in the CCYB, which would leave overall loss absorbing capacity (MREL) broadly unchanged, but increase the Group’s requirement plus buffers for CET1 by c.65 basis points.


85

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

The Bank of England’s Financial Policy Committee (FPC) regularly considers the adequacy of the UK CCYB rate in light of the evolution of the overall risk environment. As at 31 December 2019 non-zero buffer rates also currently apply for Bulgaria, the Czech Republic, Denmark, France, Hong Kong, Iceland, Ireland, Lithuania, Norway, Slovakia and Sweden. During 2020 Belgium, Germany, and Luxembourg will implement non-zero buffer rates. The Group’s overall countercyclical capital buffer at 31 December 2019 was 0.9 per cent of risk-weighted assets which reflects the concentration of exposures of the Group to the UK.

As part of the capital planning process, forecast capital positions are subjected to wide ranging programme of stress testing to determine the adequacy of the Group’s capital resources against the minimum requirements, including the ICR. The PRA considers outputs from both the Group’s internal stress tests and the annual Bank of England stress test, in conjunction with the Group’s other regulatory capital buffers and non-stress related elements, as part of the process for informing the setting of a bank-specific capital buffer for the Group, known as the PRA Buffer. The PRA requires this buffer to remain confidential between the Group and the PRA.

All buffers are required to be met with CET1 capital. Usage of the PRA Buffer would trigger a dialogue between the Group and the PRA to agree what action is required whereas a breach of the CRD IV combined buffer (all other regulatory buffers, as referenced above) would give rise to mandatory restrictions upon any discretionary capital distributions.

In addition to the risk-based capital framework outlined above, the Group is also subject to minimum capital requirements under the UK Leverage Ratio Framework. The leverage ratio is calculated by dividing fully loaded tier 1 capital resources by the leverage exposure which is a defined measure of on-balance sheet assets and off-balance sheet items.

The minimum leverage ratio requirement under the UK Leverage Ratio Framework is 3.25 per cent. This is supplemented by a time-varying countercyclical leverage buffer (CCLB) which is determined by multiplying the leverage exposure measure by 35 per cent of the countercyclical capital buffer (CCYB) rate. As at 31 December 2019 the CCLB for the Group was 0.3 per cent. This is set to increase in proportion to the increase in the countercyclical capital buffer following the FPC’s decision to increase the UK CCYB rate to 2.0 per cent with effect from December 2020. An additional leverage ratio buffer (ALRB) of 0.7 per cent applies to the Ring-Fenced Bank sub-group and is determined by multiplying the Ring-Fenced Bank sub-group leverage exposure measure by 35 per cent of the SRB. This equates to 0.6 per cent of the total leverage exposure measure at Group level.

At least 75 per cent of the 3.25 per cent minimum leverage ratio requirement as well as 100 per cent of regulatory leverage buffers must be met by CET1 capital.

The leverage ratio framework does not currently give rise to higher regulatory capital requirements for the Group than the risk-based capital framework.

MITIGATION

The Group has a capital management framework that includes the setting of capital risk appetite. Close monitoring of capital and leverage ratios is undertaken to ensure the Group meets regulatory requirements and risk appetite levels and deploys its capital resources efficiently. Comprehensive stress testing analyses take place to evidence capital adequacy.

The Group maintains a recovery plan which sets out a range of potential mitigating actions that could be taken in response to a stress. For example, the Group is able to accumulate additional capital through the retention of profits over time, which can be enhanced through reducing or cancelling dividend payments and share buybacks, by raising new equity via, for example, a rights issue or debt exchange and by raising additional tier 1 or tier 2 capital securities. The cost and availability of additional capital is dependent upon market conditions and perceptions at the time. The Group is also able to manage the demand for capital through management actions including adjusting its lending strategy, risk hedging strategies and through business disposals.

MONITORING

The Group’s capital is actively managed and monitoring capital ratios is a key factor in the Group’s planning processes and stress testing, which separately cover the Ring-Fenced Bank sub-group and key individual banking entities. Multi-year base-case forecasts of the Group’s capital position, based upon the Group’s operating plan, are produced at least annually to inform the Group’s capital plan whilst shorter term forecasts are more frequently undertaken to understand and respond to variations of the Group’s actual performance against the plan. The Group’s capital plan is tested for capital adequacy using a range of stress scenarios and sensitivities covering adverse economic conditions as well as other adverse factors that could impact the Group.

The Group’s capital plan also considers the impact of IFRS 9 which has the potential to increase bank capital volatility. Under stress this is primarily a result of provisioning for assets that are not in default at an earlier stage than would have been the case under IAS 39.

In the short to medium term the IFRS 9 transitional arrangements for capital, which the Group has adopted, will provide some stability in capital requirements against the increased provisioning, measurement uncertainty and volatility introduced by IFRS 9.

For the Bank of England Annual Cyclical Scenario stress test, the Bank of England has taken action to avoid an unwarranted de facto increase in capital requirements that could result from the interaction of IFRS 9. The stress hurdle rates for banks participating in the exercise are adjusted to recognise the additional resilience provided by the earlier provisions taken under IFRS 9. The Bank of England is considering options for a more enduring treatment of IFRS9 provisions in the capital framework and alternative options will be explored further during the 2020 Bank of England ACS stress test.

Regular reporting of actual and base case and stress scenario projected ratios for Group, the Ring-Fenced Bank sub-group and key legal entities is undertaken, including submissions to the Group Capital Risk Committee (GCRC), Group Financial Risk Committee (GFRC), Group Asset and Liability Committee (GALCO), Group Risk Committee (GRC), Board Risk Committee (BRC) and the Board. Capital policies and procedures are well established and subject to independent oversight.

The regulatory framework within which the Group operates continues to evolve and further detail on this will be provided in the Group’s Pillar 3 report. The Group continues to monitor these developments very closely, analysing the potential capital impacts to ensure that, through organic capital generation and management actions, the Group continues to maintain a strong capital position that exceeds both minimum regulatory requirements and the Group’s risk appetite and is consistent with market expectations.

Target capital ratios

The Board’s view of the ongoing level of CET1 capital required by the Group to grow the business, meet regulatory requirements and cover uncertainties continues to be c12.5 per cent plus a management buffer of c.1 per cent.

This takes into account, amongst other things:

the minimum Pillar 1 CET1 capital requirement of 4.5 per cent of risk-weighted assets.
the Group’s Pillar 2A set by the PRA. During the year the PRA reduced the Group’s Pillar 2A requirement from 4.7 per cent to 4.6 per cent of risk-weighted assets at 31 December 2019, of which 2.6 per cent must be met by CET1 capital.
the capital conservation buffer (CCB) requirement of 2.5 per cent of risk-weighted assets.
the Group’s current countercyclical capital buffer (CCYB) requirement of 0.9 per cent of risk-weighted assets, which is set to increase following the FPC’s decision to increase the UK CCYB rate from 1.0 per cent to 2.0 per cent, effective from December 2020. In conjunction the PRA will consult during 2020 on a proposed reduction in Pillar 2A capital requirements by 50 per cent of this increase in the CCYB, equivalent to reducing the Pillar 2A CET1 requirement by 28 per cent of the increase.
the Ring-Fenced Bank sub-group’s systemic risk buffer (SRB) of 2.0 per cent of risk-weighted assets, which equates to 1.7 per cent of risk weighted assets at Group level.
the Group’s PRA Buffer, which the PRA sets after taking account of the results of the annual PRA stress test and other information, as well as outputs from the Group’s internal stress tests. The PRA requires the PRA Buffer itself to remain confidential between the Group and the PRA.


86

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

Dividend policy

The Group has established a policy to pay a progressive and sustainable ordinary dividend. Any growth in the ordinary dividend will be decided by the Board in light of the circumstances at the time.

The Board also gives due consideration to the return of capital through the use of special dividends or share buybacks. Surplus capital represents capital over and above the amount management wish to retain to grow the business, meet regulatory requirements and cover uncertainties. The amount of required capital may vary from time to time depending on circumstances and by its nature there can be no guarantee that any return of surplus capital will be appropriate.

The ability of the Group to pay a dividend is also subject to constraints including the availability of distributable reserves, legal and regulatory restrictions and the Group’s financial and operating performance.

Distributable reserves are determined as required by the Companies Act 2006 by reference to a company’s individual financial statements. At 31 December 2019 Lloyds Banking Group plc (‘the Company’) had accumulated distributable reserves of approximately £10 billion. Substantially all of the Company’s merger reserve is available for distribution under UK company law as a result of transactions undertaken to recapitalise the Company in 2009.

Lloyds Banking Group plc acts as a holding company which also issues capital and other securities to capitalise and fund the activities of the Group. The profitability of the holding company, and its ability to sustain dividend payments, is therefore dependent upon the continued receipt of dividends from its main operating subsidiaries, including Lloyds Bank plc (the Ring-Fenced Bank), Lloyds Bank Corporate Markets plc (the non-ring-fenced bank), LBG Equity Investments Limited and Scottish Widows Group Limited (the insurance business). The principal operating subsidiary is Lloyds Bank plc which, at 31 December 2019, had a consolidated CET1 capital ratio of 14.3 per cent (31 December 2018: 14.9 per cent). A number of Group subsidiaries, principally those with banking and insurance activities, are subject to regulatory capital requirements which require minimum amounts of capital to be maintained relative to their size and risk. The Group actively manages the capital of its subsidiaries, which includes monitoring the regulatory capital ratios for its banking and insurance subsidiaries and, on a consolidated basis, the RFB sub-group against approved risk appetite levels. The Group operates a formal capital management policy which requires all subsidiary entities to remit surplus capital to their parent companies.

In May 2019 the Group announced that it will move to the payment of quarterly dividends in 2020, with the first quarterly dividend in respect of the period to 31 March 2020 payable in June 2020. The new approach will result in three equal interim ordinary dividend payments for the first three quarters of the year followed by, subject to performance, a larger final dividend for the fourth quarter of the year. The first three quarterly payments, payable in June, September and December will be equal to 20 per cent of the previous year’s total ordinary dividend per share. The fourth quarter payment will be announced with the full year results, with the amount continuing to deliver a full year dividend payment that reflects the Group’s financial performance and objective of a progressive and sustainable ordinary dividend.

Minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL)

In 2015, the Financial Stability Board established an international standard for the total loss absorbing capacity (TLAC) of global systemically important banks (G-SIBs). The standard, which applies from 1 January 2019, is designed to enhance the resilience of the global financial system by ensuring that failing G-SIBs have sufficient capital to absorb losses and recapitalise under resolution, whilst continuing to provide critical banking services.

At EU level, G-SIBs are subject to the minimum requirements for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL) that came into force in June 2019 following the implementation of CRR II. The MREL framework reflects the European implementation of the global TLAC standard. The purpose of MREL is to require firms to maintain sufficient own funds and eligible liabilities that are capable of credibly bearing losses or recapitalising a bank whilst in resolution. MREL requirements can be satisfied by a combination of regulatory capital and certain unsecured liabilities (which must be subordinate to a firm’s operating liabilities).

In the UK the Bank of England has implemented the requirements of the TLAC standard through a statement of policy on MREL (the MREL SoP).

As the Group is not classified as a G-SIB it is not directly subject to the CRR II MREL requirements. However the Group is subject to the Bank of England’s MREL SoP and must therefore maintain a minimum level of MREL resources from 1 January 2020. The Group operates a single point of entry (SPE) resolution strategy, with Lloyds Banking Group plc as the designated resolution entity.

Applying the Bank of England’s MREL SoP to current minimum capital requirements, the Group’s indicative MREL requirement, excluding regulatory capital and leverage buffers, is as follows:

From 1 January 2020, the higher of 2 times Pillar 1 plus Pillar 2A, equivalent to 20.6 per cent of risk-weighted assets, or 6.5 per cent of the UK leverage ratio exposure measure
From 1 January 2022, the higher of 2 times Pillar 1 plus 2 times Pillar 2A, equivalent to 25.2 per cent of risk-weighted assets, or 6.5 per cent of the UK leverage ratio exposure measure.

In addition, CET1 capital cannot be used to meet both MREL requirements and capital or leverage buffers.

The Bank of England will review the calibration of MREL in 2020 before setting final end-state requirements to be met from 2022. This review will take into consideration any changes to the capital framework, including the finalisation of the Basel III reforms.

Internal MREL requirements will also apply to the Group’s material sub-groups and entities, including the RFB sub-group, Lloyds Bank plc, Bank of Scotland plc and Lloyds Bank Corporate Markets plc, from 1 January 2020.


87

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Analysis of capital position

The Group’s adjusted CET1 capital build amounted to 207 basis points before PPI, and to 86 basis points after the in-year PPI charge, reflecting:

Underlying capital build (198 basis points), including the dividend paid up by the Insurance business in February 2020 in relation to its 2019 earnings (18 basis points)
Other movements (20 basis points), reflecting market movements and the continued optimisation of Commercial Banking risk-weighted assets, net of additional pension contributions and model updates
Offset by a reduction of 121 basis points relating to the in-year PPI charge and 11 basis points relating to the impact of changes arising from the implementation of IFRS 16 on risk-weighted assets.

The Group’s capital position also benefitted by 34 basis points as a result of the cancellation of the remaining c.£650 million of the 2019 buyback programme, as announced in September 2019. The Group used 9 basis points of capital for the acquisition of the Tesco UK prime residential mortgage portfolio.

Overall the Group’s CET1 capital ratio is 15.0 per cent on an adjusted basis before ordinary dividends and 13.8 per cent on an adjusted basis after ordinary dividends (31 December 2018: 13.9 per cent an adjusted, after ordinary dividends and incorporating the effects of the share buyback announced in February 2019).

Excluding the Insurance dividend paid in February 2020 the Group’s actual CET1 ratio is 13.6 per cent after ordinary dividends (31 December 2018: 14.6 per cent).

The accrual for foreseeable dividends reflects the recommended final ordinary dividend of 2.25 pence per share.

The transitional total capital ratio, after ordinary dividends, reduced to 21.3 per cent (21.5 per cent on an adjusted basis), largely reflecting the reduction in CET1 capital and the net reduction in AT1 capital instruments, partially offset by the reduction in risk-weighted assets.

The UK leverage ratio, after ordinary dividends, reduced from 5.6 per cent on an adjusted basis to 5.2 per cent on an adjusted basis, largely reflecting the reduction in the fully loaded tier 1 capital position, partially offset by a reduction in the exposure measure.

Total capital requirement

The Group’s total capital requirement (TCR) as at 31 December 2019, being the aggregate of the Group’s Pillar 1 and current Pillar 2A capital requirements, was £25,608 million (31 December 2018: £26,124 million).

Capital resources

An analysis of the Group’s capital position as at 31 December 2019 is presented in the following section on both a CRD IV transitional arrangements basis and a CRD IV fully loaded basis, as amended by provisions of the revised Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR II) that came into force in June 2019. In addition the Group’s capital position reflects the application of the transitional arrangements for IFRS 9.


88

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table Y:Capital resources

The table below summarises the consolidated capital position of the Group. The Group’s Pillar 3 Report will provide a comprehensive analysis of the own funds of the Group.

  Transitional  Fully loaded 
  At 31 Dec
2019
£m
  At 31 Dec
2018
£m
  At 31 Dec
2019
£m
  At 31 Dec
2018
£m
 
Common equity tier 1                
Shareholders’ equity per balance sheet  41,697   43,434   41,697   43,434 
Adjustment to retained earnings for foreseeable dividends  (1,586)  (1,523)  (1,586)  (1,523)
Deconsolidation adjustments1  2,337   2,273   2,337   2,273 
Adjustment for own credit  26   (280)  26   (280)
Cash flow hedging reserve  (1,504)  (1,051)  (1,504)  (1,051)
Other adjustments  247   (19)  247   (19)
   41,217   42,834   41,217   42,834 
less: deductions from common equity tier 1                
Goodwill and other intangible assets  (4,179)  (3,667)  (4,179)  (3,667)
Prudent valuation adjustment  (509)  (529)  (509)  (529)
Excess of expected losses over impairment provisions and value adjustments  (243)  (27)  (243)  (27)
Removal of defined benefit pension surplus  (531)  (994)  (531)  (994)
Securitisation deductions  (185)  (191)  (185)  (191)
Significant investments1  (4,626)  (4,222)  (4,626)  (4,222)
Deferred tax assets  (3,200)  (3,037)  (3,200)  (3,037)
Common equity tier 1 capital  27,744   30,167   27,744   30,167 
Additional tier 1                
Other equity instruments  5,881   6,466   5,881   6,466 
Preference shares and preferred securities2  4,127   4,008       
Transitional limit and other adjustments  (2,474)  (1,804)      
   7,534   8,670   5,881   6,466 
less: deductions from tier 1                
Significant investments1  (1,286)  (1,298)      
Total tier 1 capital  33,992   37,539   33,625   36,633 
Tier 2                
Other subordinated liabilities2  13,003   13,648   13,003   13,648 
Deconsolidation of instruments issued by insurance entities1  (1,796)  (1,767)  (1,796)  (1,767)
Adjustments for transitional limit and non-eligible instruments  2,278   1,504   (2,204)  (1,266)
Amortisation and other adjustments  (3,101)  (2,717)  (3,101)  (2,717)
   10,384   10,668   5,902   7,898 
less: deductions from tier 2                
Significant investments1  (960)  (973)  (2,246)  (2,271)
Total capital resources  43,416   47,234   37,281   42,260 
                 
Risk-weighted assets  203,431   206,366   203,431   206,366 
                 
Common equity tier 1 capital ratio3  13.6%   14.6%   13.6%   14.6% 
Tier 1 capital ratio  16.7%   18.2%   16.5%   17.8% 
Total capital ratio  21.3%   22.9%   18.3%   20.5% 

1For regulatory capital purposes, the Group’s Insurance business is deconsolidated and replaced by the amount of the Group’s investment in the business. A part of this amount is deducted from capital (via ’significant investments’ in the table above) and the remaining amount is risk-weighted, forming part of threshold risk-weighted assets.
2Preference shares, preferred securities and other subordinated liabilities are categorised as subordinated liabilities in the balance sheet.
3The common equity tier 1 ratio is 13.8 per cent on an adjusted basis reflecting the dividend paid up by the Insurance business in February 2020 in relation to its 2019 earnings (31 December 2018: 13.9 per cent on an adjusted basis, incorporating the effects of the share buyback announced in February 2019).
89

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Movements in capital resources

The key difference between the transitional capital calculation as at 31 December 2019 and the fully loaded equivalent is primarily related to capital securities that previously qualified as tier 1 or tier 2 capital, but that do not fully qualify under the regulation, which can be included in additional tier 1 (AT1) or tier 2 capital (as applicable) up to specified limits which reduce by 10 per cent per annum until 2022. In addition, following revisions to eligibility criteria for capital instruments under CRR II, certain tier 1 capital instruments of the Group that will transition to tier 2 capital by 2022 will cease to qualify as regulatory capital in June 2025. The key movements on a transitional basis are set out in the table below.

Table Z:Movements in capital resources

  Common
Equity tier 1
 £m
  Additional
Tier 1
£m
  Tier 2
£m
  Total
capital
£m
 
At 31 December 2018  30,167   7,372   9,695   47,234 
Banking profit attributable to ordinary shareholders1  2,228         2,228 
Movement in foreseeable dividends2  (63)        (63)
Dividends paid out on ordinary shares during the year  (2,312)        (2,312)
Dividends received from the Insurance business1  450         450 
Share buyback completed  (1,095)        (1,095)
IFRS 9 transitional adjustment to retained earnings  (49)        (49)
Movement in treasury shares and employee share schemes  233         233 
Pension movements:                
Removal of defined benefit pension surplus  463         463 
Movement through other comprehensive income  (1,117)        (1,117)
Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve  (142)        (142)
Prudent valuation adjustment  20         20 
Deferred tax asset  (163)        (163)
Goodwill and other intangible assets  (512)        (512)
Excess of expected losses over impairment provisions and value adjustments  (216)        (216)
Significant investments  (404)  12   13   (379)
Movements in other equity, subordinated debt and other tier 2 items:                
Repurchases, redemptions and other     (2,032)  (284)  (2,316)
Issuances     896      896 
Other movements  256         256 
At 31 December 2019  27,744   6,248   9,424   43,416 

1Under the regulatory framework, profits made by Insurance are removed from CET1 capital. However, when dividends are paid to the Group by Insurance these are recognised through CET1 capital. The £450 million of dividends received from Insurance during the year include £350 million in respect of their 2018 full year ordinary dividend and £100 million in respect of their 2019 interim ordinary dividend.
2Reflects the accrual for the 2019 full year ordinary dividend and the reversal of the accrual for the 2018 full year ordinary dividend which was paid during the year.

CET1 capital resources have reduced by £2,423 million over the year, primarily reflecting:

the interim dividend paid in September 2019 and the accrual for the 2019 full year ordinary dividend
the extent of the 2019 share buyback programme completed during the year prior to the cancellation of the remaining 2019 buyback programme in September 2019
the impact of additional pension contributions made during the year
the increase in other intangible assets, excess expected losses and significant investments in financial sector entities
offset in part by profit generation during the year (net of PPI provision charges), the receipt of dividends paid by the Insurance business during the year and movements in treasury shares and employee share schemes

AT1 capital resources have reduced by £1,124 million over the year, primarily reflecting a redemption during the year and the annual reduction in the transitional limit applied to grandfathered AT1 capital instruments, offset in part by the issuance of new capital instruments.

Tier 2 capital resources have reduced by £271 million over the year, largely reflecting the amortisation of dated instruments and a reduction in eligible provisions, partially offset by the transitioning of grandfathered AT1 instruments to tier 2.

90

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table AA:Minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL)

An analysis of the Group’s current transitional MREL position is provided below.

  Transitional2
  At 31 Dec
2019
£m
  At 31 Dec
2018
£m
 
Total capital resources (transitional basis)  43,416   47,234 
Ineligible AT1 and tier 2 instruments1  (874)  (613)
Amortised portion of eligible tier 2 instruments issued by Lloyds Banking Group plc  24    
Senior unsecured securities issued by Lloyds Banking Group plc  23,554   20,213 
Total MREL resources2  66,120   66,834 
Risk-weighted assets  203,431   206,366 
MREL ratio3  32.5%   32.4% 
Leverage exposure measure  654,387   663,277 
MREL leverage ratio  10.1%   10.1% 

1Instruments with less than one year to maturity or governed under non-EEA law without a contractual bail-in clause.
2Until 2022, externally issued regulatory capital in operating entities can count towards the Group’s MREL to the extent that such capital would count towards the Group’s consolidated capital resources.
3The MREL ratio is 32.6 per cent on an adjusted basis upon recognition of the dividend paid up by the Insurance business in February 2020 in relation to its 2019 earnings (31 December 2018: 32.6 per cent on an adjusted basis).

During 2019, the Group issued externally £3.5 billion (sterling equivalent) of senior unsecured securities from Lloyds Banking Group plc which, while not included in total capital, are eligible to meet MREL requirements. Combined with previous issuances made over the last few years the Group remains comfortably positioned to meet MREL requirements from 1 January 2020 and, as at 31 December 2019, had a transitional MREL ratio of 32.5 per cent of risk-weighted assets.

Total MREL resources reduced by £714 million, largely as a result of the reduction in total capital resources, offset in part by the increase in senior unsecured securities following the issuances made during the year.

Table AB:Risk-weighted assets

  At 31 Dec
2019
£m
  At 31 Dec
2018
£m
 
Foundation Internal Ratings Based (IRB) Approach  53,842   60,555 
Retail IRB Approach  63,208   59,522 
Other IRB Approach  18,544   15,666 
IRB Approach  135,594   135,743 
Standardised (STA) Approach  24,420   25,757 
Credit risk  160,014   161,500 
Counterparty credit risk  5,083   5,718 
Contributions to the default funds of central counterparties  210   830 
Credit valuation adjustment risk  584   702 
Operational risk  25,482   25,505 
Market risk  1,790   2,085 
Underlying risk-weighted assets  193,163   196,340 
Threshold risk-weighted assets1  10,268   10,026 
Total risk-weighted assets  203,431   206,366 

1Threshold risk-weighted assets reflect the element of significant investments and deferred tax assets that are permitted to be risk-weighted instead of being deducted from CET1 capital. Significant investments primarily arise from investment in the Group’s Insurance business.
91

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table AC:Risk-weighted assets movement by key driver

  Credit risk
IRB
£m
  Credit risk
STA
£m
  Credit risk
total1
£m
  Counterparty
credit risk2
£m
  Market risk
£m
  Operational risk
£m
  Total
£m
 
Total risk-weighted assets as at 31 December 2018                          206,366 
Less threshold risk-weighted assets3                          (10,026)
Risk-weighted assets as at 31 December 2018  135,743   25,757   161,500   7,250   2,085   25,505   196,340 
Asset size  (2,707)  (1,184)  (3,891)  (257)  (110)     (4,258)
Asset quality  2,190   (682)  1,508   (672)        836 
Model updates  2,284      2,284      (110)     2,174 
Methodology and policy  (1,083)  (747)  (1,830)  (339)  4      (2,165)
Acquisitions and disposals     1,326   1,326            1,326 
Movements in risk levels (market risk only)              (79)     (79)
Foreign exchange movements  (833)  (50)  (883)  (105)        (988)
Other                 (23)  (23)
Risk-weighted assets as at 31 December 2019  135,594   24,420   160,014   5,877   1,790   25,482   193,163 
Threshold risk-weighted assets3                          10,268 
Risk-weighted assets as at 31 December 2019                          203,431 

1Credit risk includes securitisation risk-weighted assets.
2Counterparty credit risk includes movements in contributions to the default funds of central counterparties and movements in credit valuation adjustment risk.
3Threshold risk-weighted assets reflect the element of significant investments and deferred tax assets that are permitted to be risk-weighted instead of being deducted from CET1 capital. Significant investments primarily arise from investments in the Group’s Insurance business.

The risk-weighted assets movement table provides analysis of the movement in risk-weighted assets in the period by risk type and an insight into the key drivers of the movements. The key driver analysis is compiled on a monthly basis through the identification and categorisation of risk-weighted asset movements and is subject to management judgment.

Credit risk, risk-weighted assets:

Asset size reduction of £3.9 billion, largely driven by commercial portfolio management, includes changes in book size (both drawn and undrawn balances) and composition, excluding acquisitions and disposals.
Asset quality increase of £1.5 billion includes increases in the valuation of equity investments as well as movements due to changes in borrower risk, including changes in the macro-economic environment
Model updates increase in risk-weighted assets of £2.3 billion which relates to changes to the Retail mortgage models
Methodology and policy changes reduced risk-weighted assets by £1.8 billion principally as a result of securitisation activity, partially offset by the introduction of IFRS 16.
Acquisition and disposals increase of £1.3 billion reflects the purchase of the Tesco Bank UK prime residential mortgage portfolio.

Counterparty credit risk, risk-weighted assets reduced by £1.4 billion due to reduced contributions to the default fund of a central counterparty, movement in CVA and a reduction in asset size.

Market risk, risk-weighted assets reductions of £0.3 billion were driven by refinements to internal models, a change in the business model following ring-fencing and movement in risk levels.

Leverage ratio

Analysis of leverage movements

The Group’s fully loaded UK leverage ratio reduced to 5.1 per cent, primarily driven by the reduction in tier 1 capital. This was partially offset by the £8.9 billion reduction in the leverage exposure measure which largely reflected the reduction in the derivatives exposure measure and off-balance sheet items.

On an adjusted basis the UK leverage ratio reduced to 5.2 per cent from 5.6 per cent, on an adjusted basis at 31 December 2018.

The derivatives exposure measure, representing derivative financial instruments per the balance sheet net of deconsolidation and derivatives adjustments, reduced by £3.6 billion during the period, predominantly reflecting a move from a collateralised-to-market to a settled-to-market approach for swaps transacted through a central counterparty.

The SFT exposure measure, representing SFT assets per the balance sheet net of deconsolidation and other SFT adjustments, reduced by £0.6 billion during the period, largely reflecting a reduction in volumes.

Off-balance sheet items reduced by £3.2 billion during the period, reflecting an overall reduction in corporate facilities driven by commercial portfolio management, offset in part by new residential mortgage offers placed.

The average UK leverage ratio of 5.0 per cent over the quarter largely reflected a higher average exposure measure compared to the position at 31 December 2019, with the reductions in the derivative exposure measure and off-balance sheet items described above largely occurring towards the end of the quarter.

92

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table AD:Leverage ratio

  Fully loaded
  At 31 Dec
2019
£m
  At 31 Dec
2018
£m
 
Total tier 1 capital for leverage ratio        
Common equity tier 1 capital  27,744   30,167 
Additional tier 1 capital  5,881   6,466 
Total tier 1 capital  33,625   36,633 
Exposure measure        
Statutory balance sheet assets        
Derivative financial instruments  26,369   23,595 
Securities financing transactions  67,424   69,301 
Loans and advances and other assets  740,100   704,702 
Total assets  833,893   797,598 
Qualifying central bank claims  (49,590)  (50,105)
Deconsolidation adjustments1        
Derivative financial instruments  (1,293)  (1,376)
Securities financing transactions  (334)  (487)
Loans and advances and other assets  (167,410)  (130,048)
Total deconsolidation adjustments  (169,037)  (131,911)
Derivatives adjustments        
Adjustments for regulatory netting  (11,298)  (8,828)
Adjustments for cash collateral  (12,551)  (10,536)
Net written credit protection  458   539 
Regulatory potential future exposure  16,337   18,250 
Total derivatives adjustments  (7,054)  (575)
Securities financing transactions adjustments  1,164   40 
Off-balance sheet items  53,191   56,393 
Regulatory deductions and other adjustments  (8,180)  (8,163)
Total exposure measure2  654,387   663,277 
Average exposure measure3  667,433     
UK Leverage ratio2,4  5.1%   5.5% 
Average UK leverage ratio3  5.0%     
CRD IV exposure measure5  703,977   713,382 
CRD IV leverage ratio5  4.8%   5.1% 

1Deconsolidation adjustments relate to the deconsolidation of certain Group entities that fall outside the scope of the Group’s regulatory capital consolidation, being primarily the Group’s Insurance business.
2Calculated in accordance with the UK Leverage Ratio Framework which requires qualifying central bank claims to be excluded from the leverage exposure measure.
3The average UK leverage ratio is based on the average of the month end tier 1 capital position and average exposure measure over the quarter (1 October 2019 to 31 December 2019). The average of 5.0 per cent compares to 4.9 per cent at the start and 5.1 per cent at the end of the quarter.
4The UK leverage ratio is 5.2 per cent on an adjusted basis upon recognition of the dividend paid up by the Insurance business in February 2020 in relation to its 2019 earnings (31 December 2018: 5.6 per cent on an adjusted basis).
5Calculated in accordance with CRD IV rules which include central bank claims within the leverage exposure measure.
93

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table AE :Application of IFRS 9 on a full impact basis for capital and leverage

  IFRS 9 full impact 
  At 31 Dec
2019
  At 31 Dec
2018
 
Common equity tier 1 (£m)  27,002   29,592 
Transitional tier 1 (£m)  33,249   36,964 
Transitional total capital (£m)  43,153   47,195 
Total risk-weighted assets (£m)  203,083   206,614 
Common equity tier 1 ratio (%)  13.3%   14.3% 
Transitional tier 1 ratio (%)  16.4%   17.9% 
Transitional total capital ratio (%)  21.2%   22.8% 
UK leverage ratio exposure measure (£m)  653,643   663,182 
UK leverage ratio (%)  5.0%   5.4% 

The Group has opted to apply paragraph 4 of CRR Article 473a (the ‘transitional rules’) which allows for additional capital relief in respect of any post 1 January 2018 increase in Stage 1 and Stage 2 IFRS 9 expected credit loss provisions (net of regulatory expected losses) during the transition period. As at 31 December 2019 no additional capital relief has been recognised.

Stress testing

The Group undertakes a wide-ranging programme of stress testing providing a comprehensive view of the potential impacts arising from the risks to which the Group and its key legal entities are exposed. One of the most important uses of stress testing is to assess the resilience of the operational and strategic plans of the Group and its legal entities to adverse economic conditions and other key vulnerabilities. As part of this programme the Group conducted a macroeconomic stress test of the four year operating plan in the first quarter of 2019.

The Group also participates in the UK wide Annual Cyclical Scenario stress tests run by the Bank of England. In the 2019 Bank of England stress test the Group exceeded the capital and leverage hurdles on a transitional basis after the application of management actions and was not required to take any action as a result of the test.

G-SIB indicators

Although the Group is not currently classified as a Global Systemically Important Bank (G-SIB), by virtue of the Group’s leverage exposure measure exceeding €200 billion the Group is required to report G-SIB indicator metrics to the PRA. The Group’s indicator metrics used within the 2019 Basel G-SIBs annual exercise will be disclosed from April 2020 and the results are expected to be made available by the Basel Committee later this year.

Insurance businesses

The business transacted by the insurance companies within the Group comprises both life insurance business and General Insurance business. Life insurance business comprises unit-linked business, non-profit business and with-profits business.

Scottish Widows Limited (SW Ltd) holds the only with-profit fund managed by the Group. Each insurance company within the Group is regulated by the PRA.

The Solvency II regime for insurers and insurance groups came into force from 1 January 2016. The insurance businesses are required to calculate solvency capital requirements and available capital on a risk-based approach. The Insurance business of the Group calculates regulatory capital on the basis of an internal model, which was approved by the PRA on 5 December 2015, with the latest major change to the model approved in December 2019.

The minimum required capital must be maintained at all times throughout the year. These capital requirements and the capital available to meet them are regularly estimated in order to ensure that capital maintenance requirements are being met.

All minimum regulatory requirements of the insurance companies have been met during the year.

FUNDING AND LIQUIDITY RISK

DEFINITION

Funding risk is defined as the risk that the Group does not have sufficiently stable and diverse sources of funding. Liquidity risk is defined as the risk that the Group has insufficient financial resources to meet its commitments as they fall due.

EXPOSURE

Liquidity exposure represents the potential stressed outflows in any future period less expected inflows. The Group considers liquidity exposure from both an internal and a regulatory perspective.

MEASUREMENT

Liquidity risk is managed through a series of measures, tests and reports that are primarily based on contractual maturities with behavioural overlays as appropriate. Note 53 on page F-120 sets out an analysis of assets and liabilities by relevant maturity grouping. The Group undertakes quantitative and qualitative analysis of the behavioural aspects of its assets and liabilities in order to reflect their expected behaviour.

MITIGATION

The Group manages and monitors liquidity risks and ensures that liquidity risk management systems and arrangements are adequate with regard to the internal risk appetite, Group strategy and regulatory requirements. Liquidity policies and procedures are subject to independent internal oversight by Risk. Overseas branches and subsidiaries of the Group may also be required to meet the liquidity requirements of the entity’s domestic country. Management of liquidity requirements is performed by the overseas branch or subsidiary in line with Group policy. Liquidity risk of the Insurance business is actively managed and monitored within the Insurance business. The Group plans funding requirements over the life of the funding plan, combining business as usual and stressed conditions. The Group manages its liquidity position both with regard to its internal risk appetite and the Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR) as required by the PRA and Capital Requirements Directive and Regulation (CRD IV) liquidity requirements.

The Group’s funding and liquidity position is underpinned by its significant customer deposit base, and is supported by strong relationships across customer segments. The Group has consistently observed that in aggregate the retail deposit base provides a stable source of funding. Funding concentration by counterparty, currency and tenor is monitored on an ongoing basis and where concentrations do exist, these are managed as part of the planning process and limited by internal funding and liquidity risk monitoring framework, with analysis regularly provided to senior management.

To assist in managing the balance sheet, the Group operates a Liquidity Transfer Pricing (LTP) process which: allocates relevant interest expenses from the centre to the Group’s banking businesses within the internal management accounts; helps drive the correct inputs to customer pricing; and is consistent with regulatory requirements. LTP makes extensive use of behavioural maturity profiles, taking account of expected customer loan prepayments and stability of customer deposits, modelled on historic data.

The Group can monetise liquid assets quickly, either through the repurchase agreements (repo) market or through outright sale. In addition, the Group has pre-positioned a substantial amount of assets at the Bank of England’s Discount Window Facility which can be used to access additional liquidity in a time of stress. The Group considers diversification


94

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

across geography, currency, markets and tenor when assessing appropriate holdings of liquid assets. The Group’s liquid asset buffer is available for deployment at immediate notice, subject to complying with regulatory requirements.

Liquidity risk within the Insurance business may result from: the inability to sell financial assets quickly at their fair values; an insurance liability falling due for payment earlier than expected; the inability to generate cash inflows as anticipated; an unexpected large operational event; or from a general insurance catastrophe, for example, a significant weather event. Liquidity risk is actively managed and monitored within the Insurance business to ensure that it remains within approved risk appetite, so that even under stress conditions, there is sufficient liquidity to meet obligations.

MONITORING

 

MonitoringDaily monitoring and reporting is undertaken at Board,control processes are in place to address internal and regulatory liquidity requirements. The Group monitors a range of market and business area committees. Asinternal early warning indicators on a daily basis for early signs of liquidity risk in the market or specific to the Group. This captures regulatory metrics as well as metrics the Group considers relevant for its liquidity profile. These are a mixture of quantitative and qualitative measures, including: daily variation of customer balances; changes in maturity profiles; funding concentrations; changes in LCR outflows; credit default swap (CDS) spreads; and basis risks.

The Group carries out internal stress testing of its liquidity and potential cash flow mismatch position over both short (up to one month) and longer-term horizons against a range of scenarios forming an important part of the reportinginternal risk appetite. The scenarios and assumptions are reviewed at least annually to ensure that they continue to be relevant to the nature of CRAMs,the business including reflecting emerging horizon risks to the Group. For further information on the Group’s 2019 liquidity stress testing results refer to page 98.

The Group maintains a Contingency Funding Framework as part of the wider Recovery Plan which is designed to identify emerging liquidity concerns at an early stage, so that mitigating actions can be taken to avoid a more serious crisis developing. Contingency Funding Plan invocation and escalation processes are based on analysis of five major quantitative and qualitative components, comprising assessment of: early warning indicators; prudential and regulatory liquidity risk limits and triggers; stress testing results; event and systemic indicators; and market intelligence.

Funding and liquidity management in 2019

The Group has maintained its strong funding and liquidity position with a stable loan to deposit ratio of 107 per cent.

During 2019, the Group repaid its Funding for Lending Scheme (FLS) contractual maturities of £12.1 billion and early repaid £4.5 billion of its Term Funding Scheme (TFS) drawings, representing all of its 2020 TFS maturities. This has reduced the balance of FLS outstanding to £1 billion and the balance of TFS to £15.4 billion as at 31 December 2019.

The Group’s liquidity coverage ratio (LCR) was 137 per cent (based on a monthly rolling average over the previous 12 months) as at 31 December 2019 calculated on a consolidated basis based on the EU Delegated Act. Following the implementation of structural reform, liquidity risk is managed at a legal entity level with the Group consolidated LCR representing the composite of the ring-fenced bank and non ring-fenced bank entities.

The Group’s credit ratings continue to reflect its robust outcomesbalance sheet, resilient underlying profitability and bail-in capital position. There were no changes to the ratings over 2019, although in November, Moody’s revised the Group’s and Lloyds Bank plc’s outlooks to negative due to concern relating to the UK’s exit from the European Union. In March Fitch placed the majority of UK banks, including the Group’s entities, on Ratings Watch Negative before stabilising the ratings in December given the reduced risk of a no-deal exit from the EU.


95

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table AF:Group funding position

          
  At 31 Dec
2019
£bn
  At 31 Dec
2018
£bn
  Change
%
 
Funding requirement            
Loans and advances to customers1  440.4   444.4   (1)
Loans and advances to banks2  8.1   5.9   37 
Debt securities at amortised cost  3.9   4.0   (5)
Reverse repurchase agreements         
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income – non-LCR eligible3  0.1   0.8   (75)
Cash and balances at central bank – non-LCR eligible4  5.7   5.8   (2)
Funded assets  458.2   460.9    
Other assets5  251.7   212.9   18 
   709.9   673.8     
On balance sheet LCR eligible liquid assets            
Reverse repurchase agreements  56.2   40.9   37 
Cash and balances at central banks4  49.4   48.9   1 
Debt securities at amortised cost  1.6   1.2   42 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  25.0   24.0   4 
Trading and fair value through profit and loss  4.0   11.9   (66)
Repurchase agreements  (12.2)  (3.1)    
   124.0   123.8    
Total Group assets  833.9   797.6   5 
Less: other liabilities5  (230.6)  (187.9)  23 
Funding requirement  603.3   609.7   (1)
Funded by            
Customer deposits6  411.8   416.3     
Wholesale funding7  128.3   123.3   4 
   540.1   539.6    
Term funding scheme  15.4   19.9   (23)
Total equity  47.8   50.2   (5)
Total funding  603.3   609.7   (1)

1Excludes reverse repos of £54.6 billion (31 December 2018: £40.5 billion).
2Excludes £0.1 billion (31 December 2018: £nil) of loans and advances to banks within the Insurance business and £1.6 billion (31 December 2018: £0.4 billion) of reverse repurchase agreements.
3Non-LCR eligible liquid assets comprise a diversified pool of highly rated unencumbered collateral (including retained issuance).
4Cash and balances at central banks are combined in the Group’s balance sheet.
5Other assets and other liabilities primarily include balances in the Group’s Insurance business and the fair value of derivative assets and liabilities.
6Excludes repos of £9.5 billion (31 December 2018: £1.8 billion).
7The Group’s definition of wholesale funding aligns with that used by other international market participants; including interbank deposits, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities.
96

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table AGReconciliation of Group funding to the balance sheet (audited)

  Included in
funding
analysis
£bn
  Repos
and cash
collateral
received by
Insurance
£bn
  Fair value
and other
accounting
methods
£bn
  Balance
sheet
£bn
 
At 31 December 2019                
Deposits from banks  9.6   18.7   (0.1)  28.2 
Debt securities in issue  102.1      (4.4)  97.7 
Subordinated liabilities  16.6      0.5   17.1 
Total wholesale funding  128.3   18.7         
Customer deposits  411.8   9.5      421.3 
Total  540.1   28.2         
At 31 December 2018                
Deposits from banks  8.3   22.1   (0.1)  30.3 
Debt securities in issue  97.1      (5.9)  91.2 
Subordinated liabilities  17.9      (0.2)  17.7 
Total wholesale funding  123.3   22.1         
Customer deposits  416.3   1.8      418.1 
Total  539.6   23.9         

Table AH:Analysis of 2019 total wholesale funding by residual maturity

  Less
than one
month
£bn
  One to
three
months
£bn
  Three to
six months
£bn
  Six to nine
months
£bn
  Nine
months
to one year
£bn
  One to
two years
£bn
  Two to
five years
£bn
  More than
five years
£bn
  Total at
31 Dec
2019
£bn
  Total at
31 Dec
2018
£bn
 
Deposits from banks  7.3   1.3   0.3   0.1   0.1   0.2   0.3      9.6   8.3 
Debt securities in issue:                                        
Certificates of deposit  1.2   2.6   2.8   2.4   1.2   0.4         10.6   12.0 
Commercial paper  1.3   3.5   2.8   0.9   0.4            8.9   8.0 
Medium-term notes  1.0   0.8   1.8   1.2   0.2   6.6   19.3   17.1   48.0   45.4 
Covered bonds  0.8   1.3      2.9      6.1   10.6   7.0   28.7   27.1 
Securitisation  0.4      1.1   0.9   0.4   1.7   1.4      5.9   4.6 
   4.7   8.2   8.5   8.3   2.2   14.8   31.3   24.1   102.1   97.1 
Subordinated liabilities     1.2      1.0   0.1   0.5   4.3   9.5   16.6   17.9 
Total wholesale funding1  12.0   10.7   8.8   9.4   2.4   15.5   35.9   33.6   128.3   123.3 

1The Group’s definition of wholesale funding aligns with that used by other international market participants; including interbank deposits, debt securities and subordinated liabilities.

Table AI:Total wholesale funding by currency (audited)

  Sterling
£bn
  US Dollar
£bn
  Euro
£bn
  Other
currencies
£bn
  Total
£bn
 
At 31 December 2019  28.7   49.6   40.9   9.1   128.3 
At 31 December 2018  25.8   45.2   42.8   9.5   123.3 

Table AJ:Analysis of 2019 term issuance (audited)

  Sterling
£bn
  US Dollar
£bn
  Euro
£bn
  Other
currencies
£bn
  Total
£bn
 
Securitisation  1.6   0.4         2.0 
Medium-term notes  0.5   3.2   1.8   1.1   6.6 
Covered bonds  2.0   0.8   2.8      5.6 
Private placements1  0.1   0.3   0.9      1.3 
Subordinated liabilities2  0.5   0.4         0.9 
Total issuance  4.7   5.1   5.5   1.1   16.4 

1Private placements include structured bonds.
2Consists of AT1 issuances.
97

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

The Group continues to access wholesale funding markets across a wide range of products, currencies and investors to maintain a stable and diverse source of funds. In 2019, the Group has continued with this approach to funding, including capital and funding from the holding company, Lloyds Banking Group plc, as needed to transition towards final UK Minimum Requirements for Own Funds and Eligible Liabilities (MREL). The Group will continue to issue funding trades from Lloyds Bank plc, the ring-fenced bank operating company, across senior unsecured, covered bonds, ABS and RMBS. In 2019, the Group launched an operating company funding programme for LBCM, the non-ring-fenced bank, and have since issued a number of trades for this entity including an inaugural five year £500 million senior unsecured public benchmark transaction. The maturity of the Funding for Lending and Term Funding Schemes are fully factored into the Group’s funding plans.

Liquidity Portfolio

At 31 December 2019, the banking business had £118.3 billion of highly liquid unencumbered LCR eligible assets (31 December 2018: £129.4 billion), of which £115.7 billion is LCR level 1 eligible (31 December 2018: £128.6 billion) and £2.6 billion is LCR level 2 eligible (31 December 2018: £0.8 billion). These assets are available to meet cash and collateral outflows and regulatory requirements. Total LCR eligible liquid assets represent over five times the Group’s money market funding less than one year to maturity (excluding derivative collateral margins and settlement accounts) and thus provide a substantial buffer in the event of market dislocation. The Insurance business manages a separate liquidity portfolio to mitigate insurance liquidity risk.


Table AK:LCR eligible assets

  At 31 Dec
2019
£bn
  At 31 Dec
2018
£bn
  Change
%
  Average
2019
£bn
  Average
2018
£bn
 
Level 1                    
Cash and central bank reserves  49.4   48.9   1   50.9   58.1 
High quality government/MDB/agency bonds1  63.9   78.7   (19)  76.4   66.2 
High quality covered bonds  2.4   1.0       1.9   0.8 
Total  115.7   128.6   (10)  129.2   125.1 
Level 22  2.6   0.8       1.5   0.8 
Total LCR eligible assets  118.3   129.4   (9)  130.7   125.9 

1Designated multilateral development bank (MDB).
2Includes Level 2A and Level 2B.

Table AL:LCR eligible assets by currency

  Sterling
£bn
  US Dollar
£bn
  Euro
£bn
  Other
currencies
£bn
  Total
£bn
 
At 31 December 2019                    
Level 1  91.5   11.7   12.5      115.7 
Level 2  1.7   0.5   0.4      2.6 
Total  93.2   12.2   12.9      118.3 
At 31 December 2018                    
Level 1  98.2   19.8   10.6      128.6 
Level 2  0.4   0.4         0.8 
Total  98.6   20.2   10.6      129.4 

The banking business also has a significant amount of non-LCR eligible liquid assets which are eligible for use in a range of central bank or similar facilities. Future use of such facilities will be based on prudent liquidity management and economic considerations, having regard for external market conditions.

Stress testing regime,results

Internal liquidity stress testing results at 31 December 2019 showed that the banking business had liquidity resources representing 158 per cent of modelled outflows over a three month period from all wholesale funding sources, retail and corporate deposits, intraday requirements and rating dependent contracts under the Group’s most severe liquidity stress scenario.

This scenario includes a two notch downgrade of the Group’s current long-term debt rating and accompanying one notch short-term downgrade implemented instantaneously by all major rating agencies.

Encumbered assets

This disclosure provides further detail on the availability of assets that could be used to support potential future funding requirements of the Group.

The disclosure is not designed to identify assets that would be available in the event of a resolution or bankruptcy.

The Board and the Group Asset and Liability Committee (GALCO) monitor and manage total balance sheet encumbrance using a number of risk appetite metrics. At 31 December 2019, the Group had £60.6 billion (31 December 2018: £53.4 billion) of externally encumbered on-balance sheet assets with counterparties other than central banks. The increase in encumbered assets was primarily driven by an increase in covered bond issuance. The Group also had £639.5 billion (31 December 2018: £584.3 billion) of unencumbered on-balance sheet assets, and £133.7 billion (31 December 2018: £159.8 billion) of pre-positioned and encumbered assets held with central banks, the reduction in the latter was primarily driven by a decrease in encumbrance relating to FLS and TFS maturities in the year. Primarily, the Group encumbers mortgages, unsecured lending and credit card receivables through the issuance programmes and tradable securities through securities financing activity. The Group mainly positions mortgage assets at central banks.


98

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table AM:On balance sheet encumbered and unencumbered assets

  Encumbered with
counterparties other
than central banks
 Pre-
positioned
and
  Unencumbered assets
not pre-positioned
with central banks
   
  Securitisations
£m
  Covered
bond
£m
  Other
£m
  Total
£m
  encumbered
assets
held with
central banks
£m
  Readily
realisable1
£m
  Other
realisable
assets2
£m
  Cannot be
used3
£m
  Total
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2019                                        
Cash and balances at central banks                 49,270      5,860   55,130   55,130 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  51      4,834   4,885      2,469      152,835   155,304   160,189 
Derivative financial instruments                       26,369   26,369   26,369 
Financial assets at amortised cost:                                        
Loans and advances to banks        1   1      1,858   3,851   4,065   9,774   9,775 
Loans and advances to customers  7,319   33,161   7,109   47,589   133,732   14,087   171,370   128,210   313,667   494,988 
Debt securities        553   553      3,200      1,791   4,991   5,544 
   7,319   33,161   7,663   48,143   133,732   19,145   175,221   134,066   328,432   510,307 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income        7,617   7,617      16,919      556   17,475   25,092 
Other4                    514   56,292   56,806   56,806 
Total assets  7,370   33,161   20,114   60,645   133,732   87,803   175,735   375,978   639,516   833,893 
At 31 December 2018                                        
Cash and balances at central banks                 49,645      5,018   54,663   54,663 
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  54      2,646   2,700      5,190      150,639   155,829   158,529 
Derivative financial instruments                       23,595   23,595   23,595 
Financial assets at amortised cost:                                        
Loans and advances to banks        12   12      1,223   2,555   2,493   6,271   6,283 
Loans and advances to customers  5,774   29,041   6,012   40,827   159,822   12,098   155,278   116,833   284,209   484,858 
Debt securities        2,627   2,627      2,581   4   26   2,611   5,238 
   5,774   29,041   8,651   43,466   159,822   15,902   157,837   119,352   293,091   496,379 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income:        7,278   7,278      17,114      423   17,537   24,815 
Other4                 56   612   38,949   39,617   39,617 
                                         
Total assets  5,828   29,041   18,575   53,444   159,822   87,907   158,449   337,976   584,332   797,598 

1Assets regarded by the Group to be readily realisable in the normal course of business, to secure funding, meet collateral needs, or be sold to reduce potential future funding requirements, and are not subject to any restrictions on their use for these purposes.
2Assets where there are no restrictions on their use to secure funding, meet collateral needs, or be sold to reduce potential future funding requirements, but are not readily realisable in the normal course of business in their current form.
3The following assets are classified as unencumbered – cannot be used: assets held within the Group’s Insurance businesses which are generally held to either back liabilities to policyholders or to support the solvency of the Insurance subsidiaries; assets held within consolidated limited liability partnerships which provide security for the Group’s obligations to its pension schemes; assets segregated in order to meet the Financial Resilience requirements of the PRA’s Supervisory Statement 9/6 ‘Operational Continuity in Resolution’; assets pledged to facilitate the use of intra-day payment and settlement systems; and reverse repos and derivatives balance sheet ledger items.
4Other comprises: items in the course of collection from banks; investment properties; goodwill; value in-force business; other intangible assets; tangible fixed assets; current tax recoverable; deferred tax assets; retirement benefit assets; investments in joint ventures and associates; assets arising from reinsurance contracts held and other assets.

The above table sets out the carrying value of the Group’s encumbered and unencumbered assets, separately identifying those that are available to support the Group’s funding needs. The table does not include collateral received by the Group (i.e. from reverse repos) that is not recognised on its balance sheet, the vast majority of which the Group is permitted to repledge.

99

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

FUNDING AND LIQUIDITY RISK – CONTRACTUAL CASH OBLIGATIONS

The following table sets out the amounts and maturities of Lloyds Banking Group’s contractual cash obligations at 31 December 2019.

  Within
one year
£m
  One to three
years
£m
  Three to
five years
£m
  Over five
years
£m
  Total
£m
 
Long-term debt – dated  2,442   356   2,345   7,343   12,486 
Debt securities in issue  29,977   26,556   19,082   29,605   105,220 
Lease liabilities  241   429   315   859   1,844 
Capital commitments  405            405 
Other purchase obligations  1,232   1,946   1,209   929   5,316 
   34,297   29,287   22,951   38,736   125,271 

Other purchase obligations include amounts expected to be payable in respect of material contracts entered into by Lloyds Banking Group, in the ordinary course of business, for the provision of outsourced and other services. The cost of these services will be charged to the income statement as it is incurred. Lloyds Banking Group also has a constructive obligation to ensure that its defined post-retirement benefit schemes remain adequately funded. The amount and timing of Lloyds Banking Group’s cash contributions to these schemes is uncertain and will be affected by factors such as future investment returns and demographic changes. Lloyds Banking Group expects to make cash contributions of at least £1,200 million to these schemes in 2020.

At 31 December 2019, Lloyds Banking Group also had £4,642 million of preference shares, preferred securities and undated subordinated liabilities outstanding.

At 31 December 2019, the principal sources of potential liquidity for Lloyds Banking Group plc were dividends received from its directly owned subsidiary companies, particularly Lloyds Bank plc and Scottish Widows Group Limited, and loans from this and other Lloyds Banking Group companies. The ability of Lloyds Bank to pay dividends going forward, or for Lloyds Bank or other Lloyds Banking Group companies to make loans to Lloyds Banking Group plc, depends on a number of factors, including their own regulatory capital requirements, distributable reserves and financial performance.

OFF-BALANCE SHEET ARRANGEMENTS

A table setting out the amounts and maturities of Lloyds Banking Group’s other commercial commitments and guarantees at 31 December 2019 is included in note 53 to the financial statements. These commitments and guarantees are not included in Lloyds Banking Group’s consolidated balance sheet.

Lending commitments are agreements to lend to customers in accordance with contractual provisions; these are either for a specified period or, as in the case of credit cards and overdrafts, represent a revolving credit facility which can be drawn down at any time, provided that the agreement has not been terminated. The total amounts of unused commitments do not necessarily represent future cash requirements, in that commitments often expire without being drawn upon.

Lloyds Banking Group’s banking businesses are also exposed to liquidity risk through the provision of securitisation facilities to certain corporate customers. At 31 December 2019, Lloyds Banking Group offered securitisation facilities to its corporate and financial institution client base through its conduit securitisation vehicles, Argento, Cancara and Grampian. These are funded in the global asset-backed commercial paper market. The assets and obligations of these conduits are included in Lloyds Banking Group’s consolidated balance sheet. Lloyds Banking Group provides short-term asset-backed commercial paper liquidity support facilities on commercial terms to the issuers of the commercial paper, for use in the event of a market disturbance should they be unable to roll over maturing commercial paper or obtain alternative sources of funding.

Details of securitisations and other special purpose entity arrangements entered into by Lloyds Banking Group are provided in notes 32 and 49 to the financial statements. The successful development of Lloyds Banking Group’s ability to securitise its own assets has provided a mechanism to tap a well established market, thereby diversifying Lloyds Banking Group’s funding base.

Within Lloyds Banking Group’s insurance businesses, the principal sources of liquidity are premiums received from policyholders, charges levied upon policyholders, investment income and the proceeds from the sale and maturity of investments. The investment policies followed by Lloyds Banking Group’s life assurance companies take account of anticipated cash flow requirements including by matching the cash inflows with projected liabilities where appropriate. Cash deposits and highly liquid government securities are available to provide liquidity to cover any higher than expected cash outflows.

100

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

GOVERNANCE RISK

DEFINITION

Governance risk is defined as the risk that the Group’s organisational infrastructure fails to provide robust oversight of decision-making and the control mechanisms to ensure strategies and management instructions are implemented effectively.

EXPOSURES

The internal and corporate governance arrangements of major financial institutions continue to be subject to a high level of regulatory and public scrutiny. The Group’s exposure to governance risk is also reflective of the significant volume of existing and proposed legislation and regulation, both saleswithin the UK and complaints processes, isacross the multiple jurisdictions within which it operates, with which it must comply.

MEASUREMENT

The Group’s governance arrangements are assessed against new or proposed legislation and regulation and best practice among peer organisations in order to identify any areas of enhancement required.

MITIGATION

The Group’s enterprise risk management framework (ERMF) establishes robust arrangements for risk governance, in particular by:

Defining individual and collective accountabilities for risk management, risk oversight and risk assurance through a three lines of defence model which supports the discharge of responsibilities to customers, shareholders and regulators;
Outlining governance arrangements which articulate the enterprise-wide approach to risk management; and
Supporting a consistent approach to Group-wide behaviour and risk decision-making through a Group policy framework which helps everyone understand their responsibilities by clearly articulating and communicating rules, standards, boundaries and risk appetite measures which can be controlled, enforced and monitored.

Under the banner of the ERMF, training modules are in place to testsupport all colleagues in understanding and fulfilling their risk responsibilities.

The Group’s Code of Responsibility embodies its values and reflect its commitment to operating responsibly and ethically both at a business and an individual level. All colleagues are required to adhere to the code in all aspects of their roles.

Effective implementation of the ERMF mutually reinforces and is reinforced by the Group’s risk culture, which is embedded in its approach to recruitment, selection, training, performance of customer critical activities. The GCFC has responsibility for monitoringmanagement and reviewing integrated measurement of enhanced outcomes, customer views and cultural transformation, including challenging Divisions to make changes based on key learnings to support the deliveryreward.

MONITORING

A review of the Group’s visionERMF, which includes the status of the Group’s principles and foster a customer centric culture. Monitoring activity has also increased in scope to cover trading and communication surveillance,policy framework, and the monitoringdesign and testingoperational effectiveness of controls relevantkey governance committees, is undertaken on an annual basis and the findings are reported to the Group’s market conduct agenda.Group Risk Committee, Board Risk Committee and the Board.

 

For further information on corporate governance see pages 143 to 169.


101

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

MARKET RISK

 

DEFINITION

 

Market risk is defined as the risk that unfavourable market moves (including changes in and increased volatility of interest rates, market-implied inflation rates, credit spreads and prices for bonds, foreign exchange rates, equity, property and commodity prices and other instruments) lead to reductions in earnings and/or value.

 

BALANCE SHEET LINKAGES

Balance sheet linkages

The information provided in table 1.33 (below)AN aims to facilitate the understanding of linkages between banking, trading, and insurance balance sheet items and the positions disclosed in the Group’s market risk disclosures.

 

Table 1.33:AN:Market risk linkage to the balance sheet

 

     Banking     
     Trading         
2016 Total
£m
  book only
£m
  Non-trading
£m
  Insurance
£m
  Primary market risk factor
Assets                  
Cash and balances at central banks  47,452      47,452     Interest rate
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  151,174   45,247   4,039   101,888  Interest rate, foreign exchange, credit spread
Derivative financial instruments  36,138   30,951   2,713   2,474  Interest rate, foreign exchange, credit spread
Loans and receivables:                  
Loans and advances to banks  26,902      5,583   21,319  Interest rate
Loans and advances to customers1  457,958      457,958     Interest rate
Debt securities  3,397      3,397     Interest rate, credit spread
   488,257      466,938   21,319   
Available-for-sale financial assets  56,524      56,522   2  Interest rate, foreign exchange, credit spread
Value of in-force business  5,042         5,042  Equity
Other assets  33,206      16,811   16,395  Interest rate
Total assets  817,793   76,198   594,475   147,120   
                   
Liabilities                  
Deposits from banks  16,384      16,384     Interest rate
Customer deposits  415,460      415,460     Interest rate
Trading and other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss  54,504   45,079   9,425     Interest rate, foreign exchange
Derivative financial instruments  34,924   30,143   1,967   2,814  Interest rate, foreign exchange, credit spread
Debt securities in issue  76,314      76,314     Interest rate, credit spread
Liabilities arising from insurance and investment contracts  114,502         114,502  Credit spread
Subordinated liabilities  19,831      18,012   1,819  Interest rate, foreign exchange
Other liabilities  37,409      9,726   27,683  Interest rate
Total liabilities  769,328   75,222   547,288   146,818   
1Includes £6.7 billion of lower risk loans within the banking book sold by Commercial Banking and Retail to Insurance to manage market risk arising from annuitant liabilities within the Insurance business.
     Banking     
2019 Total
£m
  Trading
book only
£m
  Non-trading
£m
  Insurance
£m
  Primary market risk factor
Assets                  
Cash and balances at central banks  55,130      55,130     Interest rate
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  160,189   17,982   5,352   136,855  Interest rate, foreign exchange, credit spread
Derivative financial instruments  26,369   18,885   5,119   2,365  Interest rate, foreign exchange, credit spread
Financial assets at amortised cost                  
Loans and advances to banks  9,775      9,710   65  Interest rate
Loans and advances to customers  494,988      494,948   40  Interest rate
Debt securities  5,544      5,544     Interest rate, credit spread
   510,307      510,202   105   
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  25,092      25,092     Interest rate, foreign exchange, credit spread
Value of in-force business  5,558         5,558  Equity
Other assets  51,248      22,410   28,838  Interest rate
Total assets  833,893   36,867   623,305   173,721   
                   
Liabilities                  
Deposit from banks  28,179      28,179     Interest rate
Customer deposits  421,320      421,320     Interest rate
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss  21,486   13,955   7,531     Interest rate, foreign exchange
Derivative financial instruments  25,779   15,654   7,719   2,406  Interest rate, foreign exchange, credit spread
Debt securities in issue  97,689      97,689     Interest rate, credit spread
Liabilities arising from insurance and investment contracts  148,908         148,908  Credit spread
Subordinated liabilities  17,130      15,335   1,795  Interest rate, foreign exchange
Other liabilities  25,596      10,678   14,918  Interest rate
Total liabilities  786,087   29,609   588,451   168,027   

 

The defined benefit pension schemes’ assets and liabilities are included under Other assets and Other liabilities in this table and note 36 on page F-47F-61 provides further information.

87

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

The Group’s trading book assets and liabilities are originated by Financial Markets within the Commercial Banking division. Within the Group’s balance sheet these fall under the trading assets and liabilities and derivative financial instruments. The assets and liabilities are classified as trading books if they have been acquired or incurred formeet the purpose of selling or repurchasingrequirements as set out in the near future. These consist of government, corporate and financial institution bonds and loans/deposits and repos.Capital Requirements Regulation, article 104. Further information on these activities can be found under the Trading portfolios section on page 92.107.

 

Derivative assets and liabilities are held by the Group for three main purposes; to provide risk management solutions for clients, to manage portfolio risks arising from client business and to manage and hedge the Group’s own risks. The majority of derivatives exposure arises within Financial Markets. Insurance business assets and liabilities relate to policyholder funds, as well as shareholder invested assets, including annuity funds. The Group recognises the value of in-force business in respect of Insurance’s long-term life assurance contracts as an asset in the balance sheet (see note 24,25, page F-38)F-51).

The Group ensures that it has adequate cash and balances at central banks and stocks of high quality liquid assets (e.g. Giltsgilts or US Treasury Securities)securities) that can be converted easily into cash to meet liquidity requirements. The majority of these assets are asset swapped and held as available-for-saleat fair value through other comprehensive income with the remainder held as financial assets at fair value through profit and loss. Further information on these balances can be found under the Fundingfunding and Liquidity Riskliquidity risk on page 95. Interest rate risk in the asset portfolios is swapped into a floating rate.94.

 

The majority of debt issuance originates from the Issuance, Capital VehiclesGroup’s capital and Medium Term Notes desksfunding activities and the interest rate risk of the debt issued is hedged by swapping them into a floating rate.

 

The non tradingnon-trading book primarily consists of customer on balanceon-balance sheet activities and the Group’s capital and funding activities, which expose it to the risk of adverse movements in market prices, predominantly interest rates, credit spreads, exchange rates and equity prices, as described in further detail within the Banking activities section (page 89)103).


102

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

Table 1.34 shows the key material market risks for the Group’s banking, defined benefit pension schemes, Insurance and trading activities.

Table 1.34:Key material market risks for the Group by individual business activity (profit before tax impact measured against Group single stress scenarios)

  Risk type 
2016 Interest Rate  Basis Risk  FX  Credit Spread  Equity  Inflation 
Banking activities1  

l

   

l

      

l

   

l

    
Defined benefit pension scheme1  

l

         

n

       
Insurance portfolios1  

l

         

l

   

l

    
Trading portfolios2                  
                         
Profit before tax  Loss   Gain                 
>£500m  

l

   

n

                 
£250m – £500m  

l

   

n

                 
£50m – <£250m  

l

   

n

                 
Immaterial/zero                      
1Banking Activities: Insurance and Pensions stresses; Interest rate -100 bps, Basis 3 month Libor +100bps/Bank Base Rate -25pbs, FX -15 per cent GBP.
Credit Spread +100 per cent, Equity -30 per cent, Inflation +50 bps.
2Trading Portfolios; Interest rate -30bps, FX -5 per cent GBP, Credit spread +20 per cent, Inflation +30bps.

MEASUREMENT

 

In addition to measuring single factors, boardGroup risk appetite is calibrated primarily to five multi-risk Group economic multirisk scenarios, and is supplemented with sensitivity basedsensitivity-based measures. The scenarios assess the impact of unlikely, but plausible, adverse stresses on income with the worst case for banking activities, defined benefit pensions, insurance and trading portfolios reported against independently, and across the Group as a whole.

 

The BoardGroup risk appetite is cascaded first to the Group Asset and Liability Committee (GALCO), chaired by the Chief Financial Officer, where risk appetite is approved and monitored by risk type, and then to Group Market Risk Committee (GMRC) where risk appetite is sub allocatedsub-allocated by Division.division. These metrics are reviewed regularly by senior management to inform effective decision making.decision-making.

 

MITIGATION

 

GALCO is responsible for approving and monitoring group market risks, management techniques, market risk measures, behavioural assumptions, and the market risk policy. Various mitigation activities are assessed and undertaken across the Group to manage portfolios and seek to ensure they remain within approved limits. The mitigation actions will vary dependent on exposure but will, in general, look to reduce risk in a cost effective manner by offsetting balance sheet exposures and externalising through to the financial markets dependent on market liquidity. The market risk policy is owned by Group Corporate Treasury (GCT) and refreshed annually. The policy is underpinned by supplementary market risk procedures, which define specific market risk management and oversight requirements.

 

MONITORING

 

GALCO and the GMRC regularly review high level market risk exposure as part of the wider risk management framework. They also make recommendations to the Group Chief ExecutiveBoard concerning overall market risk appetite and Group Market Risk Policy. Exposures at lower levels of delegation are monitored at various intervals according to their volatility, from daily in the case of trading portfolios to monthly or quarterly in the case of less volatile portfolios. Levels of exposures compared to approved limits and triggers are monitored by Risk Division and where appropriate, escalation procedures are in place.

 

How market risks arise and are managed across the Group’s activities is considered in more detail below.

88

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

BANKING ACTIVITIES

 

EXPOSURESExposures

 

The Group’s banking activities expose it to the risk of adverse movements in market prices, predominantly interest rates, credit spreads, exchange rates and equity prices. The volatility of market values can be affected by both the transparency of prices and the amount of liquidity in the market for the relevant asset, liability or liability.instrument.

Interest rate risk

 

Interest rate risk

Interest rateYield curve risk in the Group’s divisional portfolios, and in the Group’s capital and funding activities arises from the different repricing characteristics of the Group’s non-trading assets, liabilities (see loans and advances to customers and customer deposits in table 1.36)AN) and off balanceoff-balance sheet positions. Behavioural assumptions are applied to (i) embedded optionality within products; (ii) the duration of balances that are contractually repayable on demand, such as current accounts and overdrafts, together with net free reserves of the group; and (iii) to the re-pricing behaviour of managed rate liabilities namely variable rate savings.

 

Basis risk arises from the possible changes in spreads, for example where the bank lends with reference to a central bank rate but funds with reference to LIBOR, and the spread between these two rates widens or tightens.

 

PrepaymentOptionality risk arises predominantly infrom embedded optionality within assets, liabilities or off-balance sheet items where either the Retail division, asGroup or the customer can affect the size or timing of cash flows. One example of this is mortgage prepayment risk where the customer owns an option allowing them to prepay when it is economical to do so. This can result in customer balances amortiseamortising more quickly or slowly than anticipated due to economic conditions or customer’scustomers’ response to changes in economic conditions. Pipeline and pre hedge risk arises where new business volumes are higher or lower than forecasted.

 

Foreign exchange risk

 

Economic foreign exchange exposure arises from the Group’s investment in its overseas operations (net investment exposures are disclosed in note 5253 on page F-87)F-98). In addition, the Group incurs foreign exchange risk through non-functional currency flows from services provided by customer facingcustomer-facing divisions, and the Group’s debt and capital management programmes.programmes and is exposed to volatility in its CET1 ratio, due to the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates on the retranslation of non-sterling-denominated RWAs.

 

Equity risk

 

Equity risk arises primarily from three different sources; (i) the Group’s strategic equity holdings in Banco Sabadell, Aberdeen Asset Management, and Visa Europe; (ii) exposure to Lloyds Banking Group share price through deferred shares and deferred options granted to employees as part of their benefits package; and (iii) the Group’s private equity investments held by Lloyds Development Capital.

 

the Group’s private equity investments held by Lloyds Development Capital within the Equities sub-group.
the Group’s strategic equity holdings, for example Visa Inc Preference Shares, now held in the Equities sub-group.
a small exposure to Lloyds Banking Group share price through deferred shares and deferred options granted to employees as part of their benefits package.

Credit spread risk

 

Credit spread risk arises largely from (i) the liquid asset portfolio held in the management of Group liquidity, comprising of government, supranational and other eligible assets; and (ii) the Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA) and Debit Valuation Adjustment (DVA) sensitivity to credit spreads; and (iii) a number of the Group’s structured medium termmedium-term notes where it haswe have elected to fair value the notes through the profit and loss account.account; and (iv) banking book assets held at fair value in Commercial Banking under IFRS 9.


103

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

MEASUREMENTMeasurement

 

Interest rate risk exposure is monitored monthly using, primarily:

 

(i) Market value sensitivity: this methodology considers all repricing mismatches (behaviourally adjusted where appropriate) in the current balance sheet and calculates the change in market value that would result from an instantaneous 25, 100 and 200 basis points parallel rise or fall in the yield curve (subject to an appropriate floor). The market value sensitivities are calculated on a static balance sheet using principal cash flows excluding interest, commercial margins and other spread components and are therefore discounted at the risk free zero-coupon rate.

 

(ii) Interest income sensitivity: this measures the 12 month impact on future net interest income arising from anvarious economic scenarios. These include instantaneous 25, 100 and 200 basis pointspoint parallel rise or fallshifts in all the yield curves over a rolling 12 month basisand the five Group economic scenarios (subject to an appropriate floor). These scenarios are reviewed every year and are designed to replicate severe but plausible economic events, capturing risks that would not be evident through the use of parallel shocks alone such as basis risk and steepening or flattening of the yield curve. An additional negative rates scenario is also used for information purposes where all floors are removed; however this is not measured against the limit framework.

Unlike the market value sensitivities, the interest income sensitivities incorporate additional behavioural assumptions as to how and when individual products would reprice in response to such change.changing rates. In addition a dynamic balance sheet is used which includes the run-off of current assets and liabilities and the addition of planned new business.

 

(iii) Market Value limit: this capsReported sensitivities are not necessarily predictive of future performance as they do not capture additional management actions that would likely be taken in response to an immediate, large, movement in interest rates. These actions could reduce the amount of conventional and inflation-linked government bonds held bynet interest income sensitivity, help mitigate any adverse impacts or they may result in changes to total income that are not captured in the Group for liquidity purposes.net interest income.

 

(iv) Structural hedge limits; theselimits: the structural hedging programme managing interest rate risk in the banking book relies on a number of assumptions made around customer behaviour. A material mismatch between assumptions and reality could lead to a deterioration in earnings. In order to monitor this risk a number of metrics are in place to enhance understanding of assumption and duration risk takenrisks within the behaviouralisation of this portfolio.

 

The Group has an integrated Asset and Liability Management (ALM) system which supports non tradednon-traded asset and liability management of the Group. This provides a single consolidated tool to measure and manage interest rate repricing profiles (including behavioural assumptions), perform stress testing and produce forecast outputs. The Group is aware that any assumptions based model is open to challenge. A full behavioural review is performed annually, or in response to changing market conditions, to ensure the assumptions remain appropriate.appropriate and the model itself is subject to annual re-validation, as required under the Group Model Governance Policy. The key behavioural assumptions are:

 

A limit structure exists to ensure that risks stemming from residual and temporary positions or from changes in assumptions about customer behaviour remain within the Group’s risk appetite.

embedded optionality within products.
the duration of balances that are contractually repayable on demand, such as current accounts and overdrafts, together with net free reserves of the Group.
the re-pricing behaviour of managed rate liabilities namely variable rate savings.

 

Table 1.35AO below shows, split by material currency, the Group’s market value sensitivities to an instantaneous parallel up and down 25 and 100 basis points change to all interest rates.

 

Table 1.35:AO: Group Banking activities: market value sensitivity

 

 2016  2015 
                 
 Up 25bps Down 25bps Up 100bps Down 100bps  Up 25bps Down 25bps Up 100bps Down 100bps  2019 2018
 £m £m £m £m  £m £m £m £m   Up
25bps
£m
   Down
25bps
£m
   Up
100bps
£m
   Down
100bps
£m
   Up
25bps
£m
   Down
25bps
£m
   Up
100bps
£m
   Down
100bps
£m
 
Sterling  (11.4)  11.5   (45.1)  31.6   48.7   (48.8)  194.2   (115.9)  13.6   (13.6)  52.7   (47.4)  29.1   (29.5)  113.7   (122.4)
US Dollar  3.2   (3.2)  12.6   (13.7)  1.9   (1.9)  7.5   (5.9)  (5.6)  5.8   (21.3)  24.3   (7.8)  7.8   (30.6)  31.9 
Euro  (6.0)  (3.7)  (23.2)  (12.1)  1.7   (2.1)  6.9   (6.8)  (7.2)  2.3   (27.0)  11.1   (3.0)  1.7   (11.2)  7.2 
Other  (0.2)  0.2   (0.9)  0.6   (0.4)  0.4   (1.6)  1.1   0.2   (0.2)  0.8   (0.8)  (0.1)  0.1   (0.4)  0.5 
Total  (14.4)  4.8   (56.6)  6.4   51.9   (52.4)  207.0   (127.5)  1.0   (5.7)  5.2   (12.8)  18.2   (19.9)  71.5   (82.8)
104

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

This is a risk based disclosure and the amounts shown would be amortised in the income statement over the duration of the portfolio.

89

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

The market value sensitivity is driven by temporary customer flow positions not yet hedged plus other positions occasionally held, within limits, by the Group’s wholesale funding desks in order to minimise overall funding and hedging costs. The level of risk is low relative to the size of the total balance sheet.

 

Table 1.36AP below shows supplementary value sensitivity to a steepening and flattening (c.100 basis points around the 3 year point) in the yield curve. This ensures there are no unintended consequences to managing risk to parallel shifts in rates.

 

Table 1.36:AP:Group Banking activities: market value sensitivity to a steepening and flattening of the yield curve

 

 2016  2015 
          
 Steepener Flattener  Steepener Flattener  2019 2018
 £m £m  £m £m  Steepener
£m
 Flattener
£m
  Steepener
£m
 Flattener
£m
 
Sterling  (5.8)  (13.2)  (105.7)  97.1   46.6   (47.5)  38.3   (36.5)
US Dollar  0.7   (1.3)  (3.4)  4.8   (13.2)  15.3   6.5   (5.7)
Euro  (15.3)  (12.8)  (0.5)  2.0   (15.5)  9.7   (6.8)  3.6 
Other  (0.2)  0.2   0.2   (0.2)  0.4   (0.4)  (0.1)  0.1 
Total  (20.6)  (27.1)  (109.4)  103.7   18.3   (22.9)  37.9   (38.5)

 

The table below shows the banking book income sensitivity to an instantaneous parallel up and down 25 and 100 basis points change to all interest rates.

 

Table 1.37:AQ:Group Banking activities: net interest income sensitivity (audited)

 

  2016  2015 
                         
  Up 25bps  Down 25bps  Up 100bps  Down 100bps  Up 25bps  Down 25bps  Up 100bps  Down 100bps 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Client facing activity and associated hedges  176.8   (286.1)  724.9   (408.0)  152.4   (140.1)  604.7   (464.2)
  2019 2018
  Up
25bps
£m
  Down
25bps
£m
  Up
100bps
£m
  Down
100bps
£m
  Up
25bps
£m
  Down
25bps
£m
  Up
100bps
£m
  Down
100bps
£m
 
Client facing activity and associated hedges  109.4   (147.9)  430.8   (702.8)  76.2   (125.4)  341.6   (538.6)

 

Income sensitivity is measured over a rolling 12 month basis.

 

The increase in the net interest income sensitivity continues to reflect structural hedging againsta downwards 100bps shock reflects additional margin compression. The increased sensitivity reflects both the timing of margin management, and the level of floors giving rise to increased compression risk within retail savings and a reduction in the Group.size of the structural hedge.

 

Basis risk, foreign exchange, equity, and credit spread risks are measured primarily through scenario analysis by assessing the impact on profit before tax over a 12 month horizon arising from a change in market rates, and reported within the Board Risk Appetiterisk appetite on a monthly basis. Supplementary measures such as sensitivity and exposure limits are applied where they provide greater insight into risk positions. Frequency of reporting supplementary measures varies from daily to quarterly appropriate to each risk type.

 

MITIGATIONMitigation

 

The Group’s policy is to optimise reward whilst managing its market risk exposures within the risk appetite defined by the Board. The Group Market Risk policyPolicy and procedures outlines the hedging process, and the centralisation of risk from divisions into GCT, e.g. via Transfer Pricing Framework.the transfer pricing framework. GCT is responsible for managing the centralised risk and does this through natural offsets of matching assets and liabilities, and appropriate hedging activity of the residual exposures, subject to the authorisation and mandate of GALCO within the Board risk appetite. Derivative desks in Financial Markets will then externalise theThe hedges are externalised to the market.market by derivative desks within GCT and Commercial Banking Markets. The Group hasmitigates income statement volatility through hedge accounting solutions in place, which reduceaccounting. This reduces the accounting volatility arising from the Group’s economic hedging activities by utilising both Libor basedLIBOR and Bankbank base rate assets. Any hedge accounting ineffectiveness that leads to accounting volatility is continuously monitored.

 

The largest residual risk exposure arises from balances that are deemed to be insensitive to changes in market rates (including current accounts, a portion of variable rate deposits and investable equity), and is managed through the Group’s structural hedge. Consistent with the Group’s strategy to deliver stable returns, GALCO seeks to minimise large reinvestment risk, and to smooth earnings over a range of investment tenors. The structural hedge consists of longer-term fixed rate assets or interest rate swaps and the amount and duration of the hedging activity is reviewed regularly by GALCO, with current maximum duration of around four years.GALCO.

 

Whilst the bank faces margin compression in the current low rate environment,environments, its exposure to pipeline and prepayment risk are not considered material and are hedged in line with expected customer behaviour. These are appropriately monitored and controlled through Divisional ALCOs.divisional Asset and Liability Committees (ALCOs).

 

Net investment foreign exchange exposures are managed centrally by GCT, by hedging non GBPnon-sterling asset values with currency borrowing.

Economic foreign exchange exposures arising from non-functional currency flows are identified by divisions and transferred and managed centrally. The Group also has a policy of forward hedging its forecasted currency profit and loss to year end. The Group makes use of both accounting and economic foreign exchange exposures, as an offset against the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates on the value of non-sterling-denominated RWAs. This involves the holding of a structurally open currency position; sensitivity is minimised where, for a given currency, the ratio of the structural open position to RWAs equals the CET1 ratio. Continually evaluating this structural open currency position against evolving non-sterling-denominated RWAs, mitigates volatility in the Group’s CET1 ratio.

 

MONITORINGMonitoring

 

The appropriate limits and triggers are monitored by senior executive Committeescommittees within the Bankingbanking divisions. Banking assets, liabilities and associated hedging are actively monitored and if necessary rebalanced to be within agreed tolerances.

 

DEFINED BENEFIT PENSION SCHEMES

 

EXPOSURESExposures

 

The Group’s defined benefit pension schemes are exposed to significant risks from their assets and liabilities. The liability discount rate provides exposureexposes the Group to interest rate risk and credit spread risk, which are partially offset by fixed interest assets (such as gilts and corporate bonds) and swaps. Equity and alternative asset risk arises from direct asset holdings. Scheme membership exposes the Group to longevity risk.

 

For further information on defined benefit pension scheme assets and liabilities please refer to note 36 on page F-47.

90

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTSF-61.

 

MEASUREMENTMeasurement

 

Management of the schemes’ assets is the responsibility of the Trustees of the schemes who are responsible for setting the investment strategy and for agreeing funding requirements with the Group. Should a funding deficit arise, theThe Group will be liable for meeting it, and asany funding deficit that may arise. As part of athe triennial valuation process, the Group will agree with the Trustees a funding strategy to eliminate the deficit over an appropriate period.

 

MITIGATIONLongevity risk is measured using both 1-in-20 year stresses (risk appetite) and 1-in-200 year stresses (regulatory capital).

Mitigation

 

The Group takes an active involvement in agreeing risk management and mitigation strategies with the schemes’ Trustees. An interest rate and inflation hedging programme is in place to reduce liability risk. In recent years theThe schemes have also reduced equity allocation and invested the proceeds in credit assets as partassets. The Trustees have put


105

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

in place a longevity swap to mitigate longevity risk. The merits of a programme to de-risk the portfolio.longevity risk transfer and hedging solutions are reviewed regularly.

 

MONITORINGMonitoring

 

In addition to the wider risk management framework, governance of the schemes includes two specialist pensions committees (one Group executive sub-committee and a supporting management committee).committees.

 

The surplus, or deficit, in the schemes is tracked on a monthly basis along with various single factor and scenario stresses which consider the assets and liabilities holistically. The impact on GroupKey metrics are monitored monthly including the Group’s capital resources of the schemes is monitored monthly. Performancescheme, the performance against risk appetite triggers, is also monitored monthly. Hedges are in place and asset/the performance of the hedged asset and liability matching positions are also actively monitored.positions.

 

INSURANCE PORTFOLIOS

 

EXPOSURESExposures

 

The main elements of market risk to which the Group is exposed through the Insurance business are equity, credit spread, interest rate and inflation.

 

Equity risk arises indirectly through the value of future management charges on policyholder funds. These management charges form part of the value of in-force business (see note 2425 on page F-38)F-51). Equity risk also arises in the with-profits funds but is less material.
  
Credit spread risk mainly arises from annuities where policyholders’ future cashflowscash flows are guaranteed at retirement. Exposure arises if the
market value of the assets which are held to back these liabilities, mainly corporate bonds and loans, do not perform in line with expectations. Within the Group accounts a large amount of the exposure to market value movements, but not actual default losses, is removed as accounting rules require that assets Insurance have acquired from Group are maintained at the original amortised book value.
  
Interest rate risk arises through holding credit and interest assets mainly in the annuity book and also to cover general insurance liabilities, capital requirements and risk appetite.
  
Inflation exposure arises from a combination of inflation linked policyholder benefits and inflation assumptions used to project future expenses.

 

MEASUREMENTMeasurement

 

Current and potential future market risk exposures within Insurance are assessed using a range of techniques including stress, testing exercisesreverse stress and scenario analyses.testing, as well as stochastic modelling.

 

Risk measures include 1-in-200 year stresses used for regulatory capital assessments and single factor stresses for profit before tax.

 

Table 1.38AR demonstrates the impact of the Group’s UK Recession stress scenario on the Insurance business’ portfolio (with no diversification benefit)benefit, but after the impact of Group consolidation on Insurance’s portfolio; this is the most onerous scenario for Insurance out of the Group scenarios.interest rate and credit spreads). The amounts include movements in assets, liabilities and the value of in-force business in respect of insurance contracts and participating investment contracts.


 

Table 1.38:AR:Insurance business: profit before tax sensitivities

 

  Increase (reduction) in
profit before tax
 
       
  2016  20151 
  £m  £m 
Interest rates – decrease 100 basis points  (142)  9 
Inflation – increase 50 basis points  (34)  (23)
Credit spreads – 100% widening  (812)  (864)
Equity – 30% fall  (681)  (616)
Property – 25% fall  (58)  (51)
1Restated. The most onerous scenario has changed to UK Recession from Fiscal Solvency.
  Increase (reduction)
in profit before tax
  2019
£m
  2018
£m
 
Interest rates – decrease 100 basis points  116   297 
Inflation – increase 50 basis points  30   93 
Credit spreads – 100% widening  (859)  (823)
Equity – 30% fall  (68)  (38)
Property – 25% fall  (47)  (50)
Total  (828)  (521)

 

Further stresses that show the effect of reasonably possible changes in key assumptions, including the risk-free rate, equity investment volatility, widening of credit default spreads on corporate bonds and an increase in illiquidity premia,premium, as applied to profit before tax are set out in note 33.33 on page F-60.

 

MITIGATIONOne of the consequences of preparations for the formation of the Ring Fenced Bank was to reduce the impact of some stresses within the Insurance business, though Group exposures may not have materially changed. Examples of this include centralisation of defined benefit pension schemes, and the transfer of specific hedging programmes from the corporate centre to the business unit where the exposure emanated.

Mitigation

 

Equity and credit spread risks are closely monitored and, where appropriate, asset liability matching is undertaken to mitigate risk. A hedging strategy isUnit matching has been used since 2018 to reduce the sensitivity of equity movements by matching unit-linked liabilities on a best-estimate view. Hedging strategies are also in place to reduce exposure from unit-linked funds and the with-profit funds.

Interest rate risk in the annuity book is mitigated by investing in assets whose cash flows closely match those on the projected future liabilities. It is not possible to eliminate risk completely as the timing of insured events is uncertain and bonds are not available at all of the required maturities. As a result, the cash flows cannot be precisely matched and so sensitivity tests are used to test the extent of the mismatch.

 

Other market risks (e.g. interest rate exposure outside the annuity book and inflation) are also closely monitored and where considered appropriate, hedges are put in place to reduce exposure.

91

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

MONITORINGMonitoring

 

Market risks in the Insurance business are monitored by Insurance senior executive committees and ultimately the Insurance Board. Monitoring includes the progression of market risk capital against risk appetite limits, as well as the sensitivity of profit before tax to combined market risk stress scenarios and in year market movements. Asset/Asset and liability matching positions and hedges in place are actively monitored and if necessary rebalanced to be within agreed tolerances. In addition market risk is controlled via approved investment policies and mandates.


106

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

TRADING PORTFOLIOSEXPOSURE

 

EXPOSURES

The Group’s trading activity is small relative to its peers andLiquidity exposure represents the Group does not have a programme of proprietary trading activities. The Group’s trading activity is undertaken solely to meet the financial requirements of commercial and retail customers for foreign exchange, credit and interest rate products. These activities support customer flow and market making activities.

All trading activities are performed within the Commercial Banking division. While the trading positions taken are generally small,potential stressed outflows in any extreme moves in the main risk factors and other related risk factors could cause significant losses in the trading book depending on the positions at the time. The average 95 per cent 1-day trading VaR (diversified across risk factors) was £1.3 million for year end 2016 compared to £1.4 million for year end 2015. This decrease was due to the significant de-risking activities that took place at the portfolio level.

Trading market risk measures are applied to all the Group’s regulatory trading books and they include daily VaR (table 1.39), sensitivity based measures, and stress testing calculations.

MEASUREMENT

future period less expected inflows. The Group internally uses VaR as the primary risk measure for all trading book positions.

Table 1.39 shows some relevant statistics for the Group’s 1-day 95 per cent confidence level VaR that are based on 300 historical consecutive business days to year end 2016 and year end 2015.

The risk of loss measured by the VaR model is the minimum expected loss in earnings given the 95 per cent confidence. The total and average trading VaR numbers reported below have been obtained after the application of the diversification benefits across the five risk types. The maximum and minimum VaR reported for each risk category did not necessarily occur on the same day as the maximum and minimum VaR reported at Group level.

Table 1.39: Trading portfolios: VaR (1-day 95 per cent confidence level) (audited)

  At 31 December 2016  At 31 December 2015 
                         
  Close  Average  Maximum  Minimum  Close  Average  Maximum  Minimum 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Interest rate risk  0.7   1.3   7.7   0.5   0.8   1.4   3.5   0.8 
Foreign exchange risk  0.1   0.3   0.8   0.1   0.2   0.3   0.8   0.1 
Equity risk                        
Credit spread risk  0.2   0.2   0.4   0.1   0.2   0.4   1.0   0.2 
Inflation risk  0.2   0.3   5.9   0.1   0.1   0.3   1.6   0.1 
All risk factors before diversification  1.2   2.1   14.3   1.1   1.3   2.3   6.2   1.3 
Portfolio diversification  (0.5)  (0.8)          (0.4)  (0.9)        
Total VaR  0.7   1.3   5.7   0.6   0.9   1.4   3.1   0.8 

The market risk for the trading book continues to be low with respect to the size of the Group and compared to its peers. This reflects the fact that the Group’s trading operations are customer-centric and focused on hedging and recycling client risks. Note that the maximum VaR reported at £5.7 million was due to the incomplete booking of a position by end of day 22 March 2016 and hence did not reflect the true end of day position and was not a real limit breach. The VaR returned to normal levels once the booking was completed the next day. The next highest VaR was £3.8 million.

Although it isconsiders liquidity exposure from both an important market standard measure of risk, VaR has limitations. One of them is the use of limited historical data sample which influences the output by the implicit assumption that future market behaviour will not differ greatly from the historically observed period. Another known limitation is the use of defined holding periods which assumes that the risk can be liquidated or hedged within that holding period. Also calculating the VaR at the chosen confidence interval does not give enough information about potential losses which may occur if this level is exceeded. The Group fully recognises these limitations and supplements the use of VaR with a variety of other measurements which reflect the nature of the business activity. These include detailed sensitivity analysis, position reportinginternal and a stress testing programme.

Trading book VaR (1-day 99 per cent) is compared daily against both hypothetical and clean profit and loss. 1-day 99 per cent VaR charts for Lloyds Bank, HBOS and Lloyds Banking Group models can be found in the Group’s Pillar 3 Report.

MITIGATION

The level of exposure is controlled by establishing and communicating the approved risk limits and controls through policies and procedures that define the responsibility and authority for risk taking. Market risk limits are clearly and consistently communicated to the business. Any new or emerging risks are brought within risk reporting and defined limits.

MONITORING

Trading risk appetite is monitored daily with 1-day 95 per cent VaR and Stress Testing limits. These limits are complemented with position level action triggers and profit and loss referrals. Risk and position limits are set and managed at both desk and overall trading book levels. They are reviewed at least annually and can be changed as required within the overall Group risk appetite framework.

92

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

OPERATIONAL RISK

DEFINITION

Operational risk is defined as the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems or from external events.

The aim of operational risk management is to manage operational risks, protecting customers and the Group, whilst delivering sustainable growth. Operational risks are managed in line with defined appetites through the Group Operational Risk Management Framework, evaluating key exposures, measuring risks, mitigating risks, and monitoring risks on an ongoing basis, as set out below.

EXPOSURES

The principal operational risks to the Group are:

The risk that the Group is unable to provide services to customers as a result of an IT systems failure;
Cyber risks associated with malicious attacks on the confidentiality or integrity of electronic data, or the availability of systems;
Fraud and financial crime arising from acts of deception or omission;
Ensuring compliance with increasingly complex and detailed anti-money laundering, anti-terrorism, sanctions and prohibitions laws and regulations, as failure to do so would adversely impact the Group’s reputation and potentially incur fines and other legal enforcements;
Risks arising from inadequate delivery of services to customers;
The risk associated with the ongoing provision of services to TSB and other organisations; and
Terrorist acts, other acts of war or hostility, geopolitical, pandemic or other such events.

A number of these risks also apply where there is a reliance on third party suppliers to provide services to the Group or its customers.regulatory perspective.

 

MEASUREMENT

 

OperationalLiquidity risk is managed withinthrough a Board approved framework and risk appetite. A varietyseries of measures, tests and reports that are used such as: scoringprimarily based on contractual maturities with behavioural overlays as appropriate. Note 53 on page F-120 sets out an analysis of potential risks, using impactassets and likelihood, with impact thresholds aligned to risk appetite statements; assessmentliabilities by relevant maturity grouping. The Group undertakes quantitative and qualitative analysis of the effectivenessbehavioural aspects of controls; monitoring of eventsits assets and losses by size, business unit and internal risk categories.

Table 1.40 below shows high level loss and event trends for the Group using Basel II categories. Based on data captured on the Group’s Operational Risk System,liabilities in 2016, the highest frequency of events occurred in external fraud (61.58 per cent) and execution, delivery and process management (24.80 per cent). Clients, products and business practices accounted for 77.62 per cent of losses by value, driven by legacy issues where impacts materialised in 2016 (excluding PPI).

Table 1.40: Operational risk events by risk category (losses greater than or equalorder to £10,000), excluding PPI

  % of total volume  % of total losses 
          
  2016  2015  2016  2015 
Business disruption and system failures  1.01   0.40   0.55   0.13 
Clients, products and business practices  11.31   11.46   77.62   83.43 
Damage to physical assets  1.05   0.06   0.27   0.04 
Employee practices and workplace safety  0.04   0.03       
Execution, delivery and process management  24.80   15.81   19.23   11.08 
External fraud  61.58   71.96   2.31   5.27 
Internal fraud  0.21   0.28   0.02   0.05 
Total  100.00   100.00   100.00   100.00 

Operational risk scenario assessments and actual losses are used by the Group to calculate the appropriate holding of operational risk regulatory capital under the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP). The Group calculates its minimum (Pillar I) operational risk capital requirements using The Standardised Approach (TSA), which the Basel Committee has stated as being appropriate for an ‘internationally active’ bank.

93

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTSreflect their expected behaviour.

 

MITIGATION

 

The Group continues to reviewmanages and invest in its control environment to ensure it addresses the inherentmonitors liquidity risks faced. Risks are reported and discussed at local governance forums and escalated to executive management and Board as appropriate. This ensures the correct level of visibility and engagement. The Group employs a range ofthat liquidity risk management strategies, including: avoidance, mitigation, transfer (which would also include insurance)systems and acceptance. Where there is a reliance on third party suppliersarrangements are adequate with regard to provide services, the Group’s Sourcing Policy ensures that outsourcing initiatives follow a defined sourcing process including due diligenceinternal risk appetite, Group strategy and risk evaluation. Contingency plansregulatory requirements. Liquidity policies and procedures are maintained for a range of potential scenarios, with regular disaster recoverysubject to independent internal oversight by Risk. Overseas branches and scenario testing scheduled to test and challenge the readinesssubsidiaries of the Group may also be required to respondmeet the liquidity requirements of the entity’s domestic country. Management of liquidity requirements is performed by the overseas branch or subsidiary in line with Group policy. Liquidity risk of the eventInsurance business is actively managed and monitored within the Insurance business. The Group plans funding requirements over the life of an incident.

The Group continues to mature its approach to operational resilience by enhancing the resilience of systems that support the Group’s critical business processes through the IT Resilience programme, with independent verification of progress on an annual basis. The Board recognises the role that resilient technology plays in achieving the Group’s strategy of becoming the best bank for customers and in maintaining banking services across the wider industry. As such, the Board dedicates considerable time and focus to this subject at both the Board and the Board Risk Committee, and continues to sponsor key investment programmes that enhance its resilience.
The threat landscape associated with cyber risk continues to evolve and regulatory attention continues. The Board has defined a Cyber Risk Appetite and is supporting initiatives to protect the Group against malicious cyber-attacks. The Group continues to invest in enhanced protection of customer information, including limiting access to key systems and enhancing the security, durability and accessibility of critical information.
The Group adopts a risk based approach to mitigate the internal and external fraud risks it faces, reflecting the current and emerging fraud risks within the market. Fraud Risk Appetite metrics have been defined, holistically covering the impacts of fraud in term of losses to the Group, costs of fraud systems and operations, and customer experience of actual and attempted fraud. Oversight of the appropriateness and performance of these metrics is undertaken regularly through business area and Group-level committees. This approach drives a continual programme of prioritised enhancements to the Group’s technology, process and people related controls, with an emphasis on preventative controls supported by real time detective controls wherever feasible. Group-wide policies and operational control frameworks are maintained and designed to provide customer confidence, protect the Group’s commercial interests and reputation, comply with legal requirements and meet regulatory expectations. The Group’s fraud awareness programme remains a key component of its fraud control environment, and awareness of fraud risk is supported by mandatory training for all colleagues.
The Group has adopted policies and procedures designed to detect and prevent the use of its banking network for money laundering, terrorist financing, bribery and activities prohibited by legal and regulatory sanctions. The Group regularly reviews and assesses these policies to keep them current, effective and consistent across markets and jurisdictions, against a background of increasingly complex and detailed laws and regulations. The Group requires mandatory training on these topics for all employees. Specifically, the anti-money laundering procedures include ‘know-your-customer’ requirements, transaction monitoring technologies and reporting of suspicions of money laundering or terrorist financing to the applicable regulatory authorities and the Anti-Bribery Policy prohibits the payment, offer, acceptance or request of a bribe, including ‘facilitation payments’ by any employee or agent and provides a confidential reporting service for anonymous reporting for suspected or actual bribery activity. The Sanctions and Related Prohibitions Policy sets out a framework of controls for compliance with legal and regulatory sanctions.
The Group remediates issues that are identified in its customer processes, addressing root cause and rectifying customers as required. Enhancing the overall servicing environment remains a focus of dedicated Group programmes such as Customer Journey Transformation.
Following the successful divestment of TSB the Group retains responsibility for the ongoing provision of key services which are managed via robust service and change management processes. There are separate governance arrangements and additional controls in place to ensure contractual commitments are met.
Operational resilience measures and recovery planning defined in the Group’s Resilience & Continuity (including Incident Management) policy ensure an appropriate and consistent approach to the management of continuity risks, including potential interruptions from a range of internal and external incidents or threats including environmental and climatic issues, terrorism, cyber, economic instability, pandemic planning and operational incidents.

MONITORING

Monitoringthe funding plan, combining business as usual and reporting is undertaken at Board,stressed conditions. The Group manages its liquidity position both with regard to its internal risk appetite and business area committees, in accordance with delegated limits of authority which are regularly reviewedthe Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR) as required by the PRA and refreshed. Business unit risk exposure is aggregatedCapital Requirements Directive and discussed at oversight committees, and matters are escalated to the Chief Risk Officer, or higher committees, if appropriate. A combination of: regular management information and reporting from business areas, oversight and challenge from Risk Division, Group Audit and other assurance activities ensures that key risks are regularly presented and debated by executive management.Regulation (CRD IV) liquidity requirements.

 

The Group’s funding and liquidity position is underpinned by its significant customer deposit base, and is supported by strong relationships across customer segments. The Group maintainshas consistently observed that in aggregate the retail deposit base provides a formal approach to operational risk event escalation, whereby material events are identified, capturedstable source of funding. Funding concentration by counterparty, currency and escalated. Root causes of events are determined, where possible and action plans put in place to ensure an optimum level of control to keep customers and the business safe, reduce costs, and improve efficiency.

The insurance programmetenor is monitored and reviewed regularly, with recommendations being made to the Group’s senior management annually prior to each renewal. Insurers are monitored on an ongoing basis and where concentrations do exist, these are managed as part of the planning process and limited by internal funding and liquidity risk monitoring framework, with analysis regularly provided to ensure counterparty risksenior management.

To assist in managing the balance sheet, the Group operates a Liquidity Transfer Pricing (LTP) process which: allocates relevant interest expenses from the centre to the Group’s banking businesses within the internal management accounts; helps drive the correct inputs to customer pricing; and is minimised. A process isconsistent with regulatory requirements. LTP makes extensive use of behavioural maturity profiles, taking account of expected customer loan prepayments and stability of customer deposits, modelled on historic data.

The Group can monetise liquid assets quickly, either through the repurchase agreements (repo) market or through outright sale. In addition, the Group has pre-positioned a substantial amount of assets at the Bank of England’s Discount Window Facility which can be used to access additional liquidity in place to manage any insurer rating changes or insolvencies.a time of stress. The Group considers diversification


94

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

across geography, currency, markets and tenor when assessing appropriate holdings of liquid assets. The Group’s liquid asset buffer is available for deployment at immediate notice, subject to complying with regulatory requirements.

Liquidity risk within the Insurance business may result from: the inability to sell financial assets quickly at their fair values; an insurance liability falling due for payment earlier than expected; the inability to generate cash inflows as anticipated; an unexpected large operational event; or from a general insurance catastrophe, for example, a significant weather event. Liquidity risk is actively managed and monitored within the Insurance business to ensure that it remains within approved risk appetite, so that even under stress conditions, there is sufficient liquidity to meet obligations.

MONITORING

Daily monitoring and control processes are in place to address internal and regulatory liquidity requirements. The Group monitors a range of market and internal early warning indicators on a daily basis for early signs of liquidity risk in the market or specific to the Group. This captures regulatory metrics as well as metrics the Group considers relevant for its liquidity profile. These are a mixture of quantitative and qualitative measures, including: daily variation of customer balances; changes in maturity profiles; funding concentrations; changes in LCR outflows; credit default swap (CDS) spreads; and basis risks.

The Group carries out internal stress testing of its liquidity and potential cash flow mismatch position over both short (up to one month) and longer-term horizons against a range of scenarios forming an important part of the internal risk appetite. The scenarios and assumptions are reviewed at least annually to ensure that they continue to be relevant to the nature of the business including reflecting emerging horizon risks to the Group. For further information on the Group’s 2019 liquidity stress testing results refer to page 98.

The Group maintains a Contingency Funding Framework as part of the wider Recovery Plan which is designed to identify emerging liquidity concerns at an early stage, so that mitigating actions can be taken to avoid a more serious crisis developing. Contingency Funding Plan invocation and escalation processes are based on analysis of five major quantitative and qualitative components, comprising assessment of: early warning indicators; prudential and regulatory liquidity risk limits and triggers; stress testing results; event and systemic indicators; and market intelligence.

Funding and liquidity management in 2019

The Group has maintained its strong funding and liquidity position with a stable loan to deposit ratio of 107 per cent.

During 2019, the Group repaid its Funding for Lending Scheme (FLS) contractual maturities of £12.1 billion and early repaid £4.5 billion of its Term Funding Scheme (TFS) drawings, representing all of its 2020 TFS maturities. This has reduced the balance of FLS outstanding to £1 billion and the balance of TFS to £15.4 billion as at 31 December 2019.

The Group’s liquidity coverage ratio (LCR) was 137 per cent (based on a monthly rolling average over the previous 12 months) as at 31 December 2019 calculated on a consolidated basis based on the EU Delegated Act. Following the implementation of structural reform, liquidity risk is managed at a legal entity level with the Group consolidated LCR representing the composite of the ring-fenced bank and non ring-fenced bank entities.

The Group’s credit ratings continue to reflect its robust balance sheet, resilient underlying profitability and bail-in capital position. There were no changes to the ratings over 2019, although in November, Moody’s revised the Group’s and Lloyds Bank plc’s outlooks to negative due to concern relating to the UK’s exit from the European Union. In March Fitch placed the majority of UK banks, including the Group’s entities, on Ratings Watch Negative before stabilising the ratings in December given the reduced risk of a no-deal exit from the EU.


95

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table AF:Group funding position

          
  At 31 Dec
2019
£bn
  At 31 Dec
2018
£bn
  Change
%
 
Funding requirement            
Loans and advances to customers1  440.4   444.4   (1)
Loans and advances to banks2  8.1   5.9   37 
Debt securities at amortised cost  3.9   4.0   (5)
Reverse repurchase agreements         
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income – non-LCR eligible3  0.1   0.8   (75)
Cash and balances at central bank – non-LCR eligible4  5.7   5.8   (2)
Funded assets  458.2   460.9    
Other assets5  251.7   212.9   18 
   709.9   673.8     
On balance sheet LCR eligible liquid assets            
Reverse repurchase agreements  56.2   40.9   37 
Cash and balances at central banks4  49.4   48.9   1 
Debt securities at amortised cost  1.6   1.2   42 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  25.0   24.0   4 
Trading and fair value through profit and loss  4.0   11.9   (66)
Repurchase agreements  (12.2)  (3.1)    
   124.0   123.8    
Total Group assets  833.9   797.6   5 
Less: other liabilities5  (230.6)  (187.9)  23 
Funding requirement  603.3   609.7   (1)
Funded by            
Customer deposits6  411.8   416.3     
Wholesale funding7  128.3   123.3   4 
   540.1   539.6    
Term funding scheme  15.4   19.9   (23)
Total equity  47.8   50.2   (5)
Total funding  603.3   609.7   (1)

1Excludes reverse repos of £54.6 billion (31 December 2018: £40.5 billion).
2Excludes £0.1 billion (31 December 2018: £nil) of loans and advances to banks within the Insurance business and £1.6 billion (31 December 2018: £0.4 billion) of reverse repurchase agreements.
3Non-LCR eligible liquid assets comprise a diversified pool of highly rated unencumbered collateral (including retained issuance).
4Cash and balances at central banks are combined in the Group’s balance sheet.
5Other assets and other liabilities primarily include balances in the Group’s Insurance business and the fair value of derivative assets and liabilities.
6Excludes repos of £9.5 billion (31 December 2018: £1.8 billion).
7The Group’s definition of wholesale funding aligns with that used by other international market participants; including interbank deposits, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities.
96

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table AGReconciliation of Group funding to the balance sheet (audited)

  Included in
funding
analysis
£bn
  Repos
and cash
collateral
received by
Insurance
£bn
  Fair value
and other
accounting
methods
£bn
  Balance
sheet
£bn
 
At 31 December 2019                
Deposits from banks  9.6   18.7   (0.1)  28.2 
Debt securities in issue  102.1      (4.4)  97.7 
Subordinated liabilities  16.6      0.5   17.1 
Total wholesale funding  128.3   18.7         
Customer deposits  411.8   9.5      421.3 
Total  540.1   28.2         
At 31 December 2018                
Deposits from banks  8.3   22.1   (0.1)  30.3 
Debt securities in issue  97.1      (5.9)  91.2 
Subordinated liabilities  17.9      (0.2)  17.7 
Total wholesale funding  123.3   22.1         
Customer deposits  416.3   1.8      418.1 
Total  539.6   23.9         

Table AH:Analysis of 2019 total wholesale funding by residual maturity

  Less
than one
month
£bn
  One to
three
months
£bn
  Three to
six months
£bn
  Six to nine
months
£bn
  Nine
months
to one year
£bn
  One to
two years
£bn
  Two to
five years
£bn
  More than
five years
£bn
  Total at
31 Dec
2019
£bn
  Total at
31 Dec
2018
£bn
 
Deposits from banks  7.3   1.3   0.3   0.1   0.1   0.2   0.3      9.6   8.3 
Debt securities in issue:                                        
Certificates of deposit  1.2   2.6   2.8   2.4   1.2   0.4         10.6   12.0 
Commercial paper  1.3   3.5   2.8   0.9   0.4            8.9   8.0 
Medium-term notes  1.0   0.8   1.8   1.2   0.2   6.6   19.3   17.1   48.0   45.4 
Covered bonds  0.8   1.3      2.9      6.1   10.6   7.0   28.7   27.1 
Securitisation  0.4      1.1   0.9   0.4   1.7   1.4      5.9   4.6 
   4.7   8.2   8.5   8.3   2.2   14.8   31.3   24.1   102.1   97.1 
Subordinated liabilities     1.2      1.0   0.1   0.5   4.3   9.5   16.6   17.9 
Total wholesale funding1  12.0   10.7   8.8   9.4   2.4   15.5   35.9   33.6   128.3   123.3 

1The Group’s definition of wholesale funding aligns with that used by other international market participants; including interbank deposits, debt securities and subordinated liabilities.

Table AI:Total wholesale funding by currency (audited)

  Sterling
£bn
  US Dollar
£bn
  Euro
£bn
  Other
currencies
£bn
  Total
£bn
 
At 31 December 2019  28.7   49.6   40.9   9.1   128.3 
At 31 December 2018  25.8   45.2   42.8   9.5   123.3 

Table AJ:Analysis of 2019 term issuance (audited)

  Sterling
£bn
  US Dollar
£bn
  Euro
£bn
  Other
currencies
£bn
  Total
£bn
 
Securitisation  1.6   0.4         2.0 
Medium-term notes  0.5   3.2   1.8   1.1   6.6 
Covered bonds  2.0   0.8   2.8      5.6 
Private placements1  0.1   0.3   0.9      1.3 
Subordinated liabilities2  0.5   0.4         0.9 
Total issuance  4.7   5.1   5.5   1.1   16.4 

1Private placements include structured bonds.
2Consists of AT1 issuances.
97

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

The Group continues to access wholesale funding markets across a wide range of products, currencies and investors to maintain a stable and diverse source of funds. In 2019, the Group has continued with this approach to funding, including capital and funding from the holding company, Lloyds Banking Group plc, as needed to transition towards final UK Minimum Requirements for Own Funds and Eligible Liabilities (MREL). The Group will continue to issue funding trades from Lloyds Bank plc, the ring-fenced bank operating company, across senior unsecured, covered bonds, ABS and RMBS. In 2019, the Group launched an operating company funding programme for LBCM, the non-ring-fenced bank, and have since issued a number of trades for this entity including an inaugural five year £500 million senior unsecured public benchmark transaction. The maturity of the Funding for Lending and Term Funding Schemes are fully factored into the Group’s funding plans.

Liquidity Portfolio

At 31 December 2019, the banking business had £118.3 billion of highly liquid unencumbered LCR eligible assets (31 December 2018: £129.4 billion), of which £115.7 billion is LCR level 1 eligible (31 December 2018: £128.6 billion) and £2.6 billion is LCR level 2 eligible (31 December 2018: £0.8 billion). These assets are available to meet cash and collateral outflows and regulatory requirements. Total LCR eligible liquid assets represent over five times the Group’s money market funding less than one year to maturity (excluding derivative collateral margins and settlement accounts) and thus provide a substantial buffer in the event of market dislocation. The Insurance business manages a separate liquidity portfolio to mitigate insurance liquidity risk.


Table AK:LCR eligible assets

  At 31 Dec
2019
£bn
  At 31 Dec
2018
£bn
  Change
%
  Average
2019
£bn
  Average
2018
£bn
 
Level 1                    
Cash and central bank reserves  49.4   48.9   1   50.9   58.1 
High quality government/MDB/agency bonds1  63.9   78.7   (19)  76.4   66.2 
High quality covered bonds  2.4   1.0       1.9   0.8 
Total  115.7   128.6   (10)  129.2   125.1 
Level 22  2.6   0.8       1.5   0.8 
Total LCR eligible assets  118.3   129.4   (9)  130.7   125.9 

1Designated multilateral development bank (MDB).
2Includes Level 2A and Level 2B.

Table AL:LCR eligible assets by currency

  Sterling
£bn
  US Dollar
£bn
  Euro
£bn
  Other
currencies
£bn
  Total
£bn
 
At 31 December 2019                    
Level 1  91.5   11.7   12.5      115.7 
Level 2  1.7   0.5   0.4      2.6 
Total  93.2   12.2   12.9      118.3 
At 31 December 2018                    
Level 1  98.2   19.8   10.6      128.6 
Level 2  0.4   0.4         0.8 
Total  98.6   20.2   10.6      129.4 

The banking business also has a significant amount of non-LCR eligible liquid assets which are eligible for use in a range of central bank or similar facilities. Future use of such facilities will be based on prudent liquidity management and economic considerations, having regard for external market conditions.

Stress testing results

Internal liquidity stress testing results at 31 December 2019 showed that the banking business had liquidity resources representing 158 per cent of modelled outflows over a three month period from all wholesale funding sources, retail and corporate deposits, intraday requirements and rating dependent contracts under the Group’s most severe liquidity stress scenario.

This scenario includes a two notch downgrade of the Group’s current long-term debt rating and accompanying one notch short-term downgrade implemented instantaneously by all major rating agencies.

Encumbered assets

This disclosure provides further detail on the availability of assets that could be used to support potential future funding requirements of the Group.

The disclosure is not designed to identify assets that would be available in the event of a resolution or bankruptcy.

The Board and the Group Asset and Liability Committee (GALCO) monitor and manage total balance sheet encumbrance using a number of risk appetite metrics. At 31 December 2019, the Group had £60.6 billion (31 December 2018: £53.4 billion) of externally encumbered on-balance sheet assets with counterparties other than central banks. The increase in encumbered assets was primarily driven by an increase in covered bond issuance. The Group also had £639.5 billion (31 December 2018: £584.3 billion) of unencumbered on-balance sheet assets, and £133.7 billion (31 December 2018: £159.8 billion) of pre-positioned and encumbered assets held with central banks, the reduction in the latter was primarily driven by a decrease in encumbrance relating to FLS and TFS maturities in the year. Primarily, the Group encumbers mortgages, unsecured lending and credit card receivables through the issuance programmes and tradable securities through securities financing activity. The Group mainly positions mortgage assets at central banks.


98

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table AM:On balance sheet encumbered and unencumbered assets

  Encumbered with
counterparties other
than central banks
 Pre-
positioned
and
  Unencumbered assets
not pre-positioned
with central banks
   
  Securitisations
£m
  Covered
bond
£m
  Other
£m
  Total
£m
  encumbered
assets
held with
central banks
£m
  Readily
realisable1
£m
  Other
realisable
assets2
£m
  Cannot be
used3
£m
  Total
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2019                                        
Cash and balances at central banks                 49,270      5,860   55,130   55,130 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  51      4,834   4,885      2,469      152,835   155,304   160,189 
Derivative financial instruments                       26,369   26,369   26,369 
Financial assets at amortised cost:                                        
Loans and advances to banks        1   1      1,858   3,851   4,065   9,774   9,775 
Loans and advances to customers  7,319   33,161   7,109   47,589   133,732   14,087   171,370   128,210   313,667   494,988 
Debt securities        553   553      3,200      1,791   4,991   5,544 
   7,319   33,161   7,663   48,143   133,732   19,145   175,221   134,066   328,432   510,307 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income        7,617   7,617      16,919      556   17,475   25,092 
Other4                    514   56,292   56,806   56,806 
Total assets  7,370   33,161   20,114   60,645   133,732   87,803   175,735   375,978   639,516   833,893 
At 31 December 2018                                        
Cash and balances at central banks                 49,645      5,018   54,663   54,663 
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  54      2,646   2,700      5,190      150,639   155,829   158,529 
Derivative financial instruments                       23,595   23,595   23,595 
Financial assets at amortised cost:                                        
Loans and advances to banks        12   12      1,223   2,555   2,493   6,271   6,283 
Loans and advances to customers  5,774   29,041   6,012   40,827   159,822   12,098   155,278   116,833   284,209   484,858 
Debt securities        2,627   2,627      2,581   4   26   2,611   5,238 
   5,774   29,041   8,651   43,466   159,822   15,902   157,837   119,352   293,091   496,379 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income:        7,278   7,278      17,114      423   17,537   24,815 
Other4                 56   612   38,949   39,617   39,617 
                                         
Total assets  5,828   29,041   18,575   53,444   159,822   87,907   158,449   337,976   584,332   797,598 

1Assets regarded by the Group to be readily realisable in the normal course of business, to secure funding, meet collateral needs, or be sold to reduce potential future funding requirements, and are not subject to any restrictions on their use for these purposes.
2Assets where there are no restrictions on their use to secure funding, meet collateral needs, or be sold to reduce potential future funding requirements, but are not readily realisable in the normal course of business in their current form.
3The following assets are classified as unencumbered – cannot be used: assets held within the Group’s Insurance businesses which are generally held to either back liabilities to policyholders or to support the solvency of the Insurance subsidiaries; assets held within consolidated limited liability partnerships which provide security for the Group’s obligations to its pension schemes; assets segregated in order to meet the Financial Resilience requirements of the PRA’s Supervisory Statement 9/6 ‘Operational Continuity in Resolution’; assets pledged to facilitate the use of intra-day payment and settlement systems; and reverse repos and derivatives balance sheet ledger items.
4Other comprises: items in the course of collection from banks; investment properties; goodwill; value in-force business; other intangible assets; tangible fixed assets; current tax recoverable; deferred tax assets; retirement benefit assets; investments in joint ventures and associates; assets arising from reinsurance contracts held and other assets.

The above table sets out the carrying value of the Group’s encumbered and unencumbered assets, separately identifying those that are available to support the Group’s funding needs. The table does not include collateral received by the Group (i.e. from reverse repos) that is not recognised on its balance sheet, the vast majority of which the Group is permitted to repledge.

99

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

FUNDING AND LIQUIDITY RISK – CONTRACTUAL CASH OBLIGATIONS

The following table sets out the amounts and maturities of Lloyds Banking Group’s contractual cash obligations at 31 December 2019.

  Within
one year
£m
  One to three
years
£m
  Three to
five years
£m
  Over five
years
£m
  Total
£m
 
Long-term debt – dated  2,442   356   2,345   7,343   12,486 
Debt securities in issue  29,977   26,556   19,082   29,605   105,220 
Lease liabilities  241   429   315   859   1,844 
Capital commitments  405            405 
Other purchase obligations  1,232   1,946   1,209   929   5,316 
   34,297   29,287   22,951   38,736   125,271 

Other purchase obligations include amounts expected to be payable in respect of material contracts entered into by Lloyds Banking Group, in the ordinary course of business, for the provision of outsourced and other services. The cost of these services will be charged to the income statement as it is incurred. Lloyds Banking Group also has a constructive obligation to ensure that its defined post-retirement benefit schemes remain adequately funded. The amount and timing of Lloyds Banking Group’s cash contributions to these schemes is uncertain and will be affected by factors such as future investment returns and demographic changes. Lloyds Banking Group expects to make cash contributions of at least £1,200 million to these schemes in 2020.

At 31 December 2019, Lloyds Banking Group also had £4,642 million of preference shares, preferred securities and undated subordinated liabilities outstanding.

At 31 December 2019, the principal sources of potential liquidity for Lloyds Banking Group plc were dividends received from its directly owned subsidiary companies, particularly Lloyds Bank plc and Scottish Widows Group Limited, and loans from this and other Lloyds Banking Group companies. The ability of Lloyds Bank to pay dividends going forward, or for Lloyds Bank or other Lloyds Banking Group companies to make loans to Lloyds Banking Group plc, depends on a number of factors, including their own regulatory capital requirements, distributable reserves and financial performance.

OFF-BALANCE SHEET ARRANGEMENTS

A table setting out the amounts and maturities of Lloyds Banking Group’s other commercial commitments and guarantees at 31 December 2019 is included in note 53 to the financial statements. These commitments and guarantees are not included in Lloyds Banking Group’s consolidated balance sheet.

Lending commitments are agreements to lend to customers in accordance with contractual provisions; these are either for a specified period or, as in the case of credit cards and overdrafts, represent a revolving credit facility which can be drawn down at any time, provided that the agreement has not been terminated. The total amounts of unused commitments do not necessarily represent future cash requirements, in that commitments often expire without being drawn upon.

Lloyds Banking Group’s banking businesses are also exposed to liquidity risk through the provision of securitisation facilities to certain corporate customers. At 31 December 2019, Lloyds Banking Group offered securitisation facilities to its corporate and financial institution client base through its conduit securitisation vehicles, Argento, Cancara and Grampian. These are funded in the global asset-backed commercial paper market. The assets and obligations of these conduits are included in Lloyds Banking Group’s consolidated balance sheet. Lloyds Banking Group provides short-term asset-backed commercial paper liquidity support facilities on commercial terms to the issuers of the commercial paper, for use in the event of a market disturbance should they be unable to roll over maturing commercial paper or obtain alternative sources of funding.

Details of securitisations and other special purpose entity arrangements entered into by Lloyds Banking Group are provided in notes 32 and 49 to the financial statements. The successful development of Lloyds Banking Group’s ability to securitise its own assets has provided a mechanism to tap a well established market, thereby diversifying Lloyds Banking Group’s funding base.

Within Lloyds Banking Group’s insurance businesses, the principal sources of liquidity are premiums received from policyholders, charges levied upon policyholders, investment income and the proceeds from the sale and maturity of investments. The investment policies followed by Lloyds Banking Group’s life assurance companies take account of anticipated cash flow requirements including by matching the cash inflows with projected liabilities where appropriate. Cash deposits and highly liquid government securities are available to provide liquidity to cover any higher than expected cash outflows.

100

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

GOVERNANCE RISK

 

DEFINITION

 

FundingGovernance risk is defined as the risk that the Group’s organisational infrastructure fails to provide robust oversight of decision-making and the control mechanisms to ensure strategies and management instructions are implemented effectively.

EXPOSURES

The internal and corporate governance arrangements of major financial institutions continue to be subject to a high level of regulatory and public scrutiny. The Group’s exposure to governance risk is also reflective of the significant volume of existing and proposed legislation and regulation, both within the UK and across the multiple jurisdictions within which it operates, with which it must comply.

MEASUREMENT

The Group’s governance arrangements are assessed against new or proposed legislation and regulation and best practice among peer organisations in order to identify any areas of enhancement required.

MITIGATION

The Group’s enterprise risk management framework (ERMF) establishes robust arrangements for risk governance, in particular by:

Defining individual and collective accountabilities for risk management, risk oversight and risk assurance through a three lines of defence model which supports the discharge of responsibilities to customers, shareholders and regulators;
Outlining governance arrangements which articulate the enterprise-wide approach to risk management; and
Supporting a consistent approach to Group-wide behaviour and risk decision-making through a Group policy framework which helps everyone understand their responsibilities by clearly articulating and communicating rules, standards, boundaries and risk appetite measures which can be controlled, enforced and monitored.

Under the banner of the ERMF, training modules are in place to support all colleagues in understanding and fulfilling their risk responsibilities.

The Group’s Code of Responsibility embodies its values and reflect its commitment to operating responsibly and ethically both at a business and an individual level. All colleagues are required to adhere to the code in all aspects of their roles.

Effective implementation of the ERMF mutually reinforces and is reinforced by the Group’s risk culture, which is embedded in its approach to recruitment, selection, training, performance management and reward.

MONITORING

A review of the Group’s ERMF, which includes the status of the Group’s principles and policy framework, and the design and operational effectiveness of key governance committees, is undertaken on an annual basis and the findings are reported to the Group does not have sufficiently stableRisk Committee, Board Risk Committee and diverse sources of funding or the funding structure is inefficient. LiquidityBoard.

For further information on corporate governance see pages 143 to 169.


101

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

MARKET RISK

DEFINITION

Market risk is defined as the risk that unfavourable market moves (including changes in and increased volatility of interest rates, market-implied inflation rates, credit spreads and prices for bonds, foreign exchange rates, equity, property and commodity prices and other instruments) lead to reductions in earnings and/or value.

Balance sheet linkages

The information provided in table AN aims to facilitate the understanding of linkages between banking, trading, and insurance balance sheet items and the positions disclosed in the Group’s market risk disclosures.

Table AN:Market risk linkage to the balance sheet

     Banking     
2019 Total
£m
  Trading
book only
£m
  Non-trading
£m
  Insurance
£m
  Primary market risk factor
Assets                  
Cash and balances at central banks  55,130      55,130     Interest rate
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  160,189   17,982   5,352   136,855  Interest rate, foreign exchange, credit spread
Derivative financial instruments  26,369   18,885   5,119   2,365  Interest rate, foreign exchange, credit spread
Financial assets at amortised cost                  
Loans and advances to banks  9,775      9,710   65  Interest rate
Loans and advances to customers  494,988      494,948   40  Interest rate
Debt securities  5,544      5,544     Interest rate, credit spread
   510,307      510,202   105   
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  25,092      25,092     Interest rate, foreign exchange, credit spread
Value of in-force business  5,558         5,558  Equity
Other assets  51,248      22,410   28,838  Interest rate
Total assets  833,893   36,867   623,305   173,721   
                   
Liabilities                  
Deposit from banks  28,179      28,179     Interest rate
Customer deposits  421,320      421,320     Interest rate
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss  21,486   13,955   7,531     Interest rate, foreign exchange
Derivative financial instruments  25,779   15,654   7,719   2,406  Interest rate, foreign exchange, credit spread
Debt securities in issue  97,689      97,689     Interest rate, credit spread
Liabilities arising from insurance and investment contracts  148,908         148,908  Credit spread
Subordinated liabilities  17,130      15,335   1,795  Interest rate, foreign exchange
Other liabilities  25,596      10,678   14,918  Interest rate
Total liabilities  786,087   29,609   588,451   168,027   

The defined benefit pension schemes’ assets and liabilities are included under Other assets and Other liabilities in this table and note 36 on page F-61 provides further information.

The Group’s trading book assets and liabilities are originated within the Commercial Banking division. Within the Group’s balance sheet these fall under the trading assets and liabilities and derivative financial instruments. The assets and liabilities are classified as trading books if they meet the requirements as set out in the Capital Requirements Regulation, article 104. Further information on these activities can be found under the Trading portfolios section on page 107.

Derivative assets and liabilities are held by the Group for three main purposes; to provide risk management solutions for clients, to manage portfolio risks arising from client business and to manage and hedge the Group’s own risks. Insurance business assets and liabilities relate to policyholder funds, as well as shareholder invested assets, including annuity funds. The Group recognises the value of in-force business in respect of Insurance’s long-term life assurance contracts as an asset in the balance sheet (see note 25, page F-51).

The Group ensures that it has insufficient financial resourcesadequate cash and balances at central banks and stocks of high quality liquid assets (e.g. gilts or US Treasury securities) that can be converted easily into cash to meet liquidity requirements. The majority of these assets are asset swapped and held at fair value through other comprehensive income with the remainder held as financial assets at fair value through profit and loss. Further information on these balances can be found under funding and liquidity risk on page 94.

The majority of debt issuance originates from the Group’s capital and funding activities and the interest rate risk of the debt issued is hedged by swapping them into a floating rate.

The non-trading book primarily consists of customer on-balance sheet activities and the Group’s capital and funding activities, which expose it to the risk of adverse movements in market prices, predominantly interest rates, credit spreads, exchange rates and equity prices, as described in further detail within the Banking activities section (page 103).


102

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

MEASUREMENT

In addition to measuring single factors, Group risk appetite is calibrated primarily to five multi-risk Group economic scenarios, and is supplemented with sensitivity-based measures. The scenarios assess the impact of unlikely, but plausible, adverse stresses on income with the worst case for banking activities, defined benefit pensions, insurance and trading portfolios reported against independently, and across the Group as a whole.

The Group risk appetite is cascaded first to the Group Asset and Liability Committee (GALCO), chaired by the Chief Financial Officer, where risk appetite is approved and monitored by risk type, and then to Group Market Risk Committee (GMRC) where risk appetite is sub-allocated by division. These metrics are reviewed regularly by senior management to inform effective decision-making.

MITIGATION

GALCO is responsible for approving and monitoring group market risks, management techniques, market risk measures, behavioural assumptions, and the market risk policy. Various mitigation activities are assessed and undertaken across the Group to manage portfolios and seek to ensure they remain within approved limits. The mitigation actions will vary dependent on exposure but will, in general, look to reduce risk in a cost effective manner by offsetting balance sheet exposures and externalising to the financial markets dependent on market liquidity. The market risk policy is owned by Group Corporate Treasury (GCT) and refreshed annually. The policy is underpinned by supplementary market risk procedures, which define specific market risk management and oversight requirements.

MONITORING

GALCO and the GMRC regularly review high level market risk exposure as part of the wider risk management framework. They also make recommendations to the Board concerning overall market risk appetite and Group Market Risk Policy. Exposures at lower levels of delegation are monitored at various intervals according to their volatility, from daily in the case of trading portfolios to monthly or quarterly in the case of less volatile portfolios. Levels of exposures compared to approved limits and triggers are monitored by Risk and where appropriate, escalation procedures are in place.

How market risks arise and are managed across the Group’s activities is considered in more detail below.

BANKING ACTIVITIES

Exposures

The Group’s banking activities expose it to the risk of adverse movements in market prices, predominantly interest rates, credit spreads, exchange rates and equity prices. The volatility of market values can be affected by both the transparency of prices and the amount of liquidity in the market for the relevant asset, liability or instrument.

Interest rate risk

Yield curve risk in the Group’s divisional portfolios, and in the Group’s capital and funding activities arises from the different repricing characteristics of the Group’s non-trading assets, liabilities (see loans and advances to customers and customer deposits in table AN) and off-balance sheet positions.

Basis risk arises from the possible changes in spreads, for example where the bank lends with reference to a central bank rate but funds with reference to LIBOR, and the spread between these two rates widens or tightens.

Optionality risk arises predominantly from embedded optionality within assets, liabilities or off-balance sheet items where either the Group or the customer can affect the size or timing of cash flows. One example of this is mortgage prepayment risk where the customer owns an option allowing them to prepay when it is economical to do so. This can result in customer balances amortising more quickly or slowly than anticipated due to customers’ response to changes in economic conditions.

Foreign exchange risk

Economic foreign exchange exposure arises from the Group’s investment in its commitmentsoverseas operations (net investment exposures are disclosed in note 53 on page F-98). In addition, the Group incurs foreign exchange risk through non-functional currency flows from services provided by customer-facing divisions, the Group’s debt and capital management programmes and is exposed to volatility in its CET1 ratio, due to the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates on the retranslation of non-sterling-denominated RWAs.

Equity risk

Equity risk arises primarily from three different sources;

the Group’s private equity investments held by Lloyds Development Capital within the Equities sub-group.
the Group’s strategic equity holdings, for example Visa Inc Preference Shares, now held in the Equities sub-group.
a small exposure to Lloyds Banking Group share price through deferred shares and deferred options granted to employees as part of their benefits package.

Credit spread risk

Credit spread risk arises largely from (i) the liquid asset portfolio held in the management of Group liquidity, comprising of government, supranational and other eligible assets; (ii) the Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA) and Debit Valuation Adjustment (DVA) sensitivity to credit spreads; (iii) a number of the Group’s structured medium-term notes where we have elected to fair value the notes through the profit and loss account; and (iv) banking book assets held at fair value in Commercial Banking under IFRS 9.


103

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Measurement

Interest rate risk exposure is monitored monthly using, primarily:

Market value sensitivity: this methodology considers all repricing mismatches (behaviourally adjusted where appropriate) in the current balance sheet and calculates the change in market value that would result from an instantaneous 25, 100 and 200 basis points parallel rise or fall in the yield curve (subject to an appropriate floor). The market value sensitivities are calculated on a static balance sheet using principal cash flows excluding interest, commercial margins and other spread components and are therefore discounted at the risk free zero-coupon rate.

Interest income sensitivity: this measures the 12 month impact on future net interest income arising from various economic scenarios. These include instantaneous 25, 100 and 200 basis point parallel shifts in all yield curves and the five Group economic scenarios (subject to an appropriate floor). These scenarios are reviewed every year and are designed to replicate severe but plausible economic events, capturing risks that would not be evident through the use of parallel shocks alone such as basis risk and steepening or flattening of the yield curve. An additional negative rates scenario is also used for information purposes where all floors are removed; however this is not measured against the limit framework.

Unlike the market value sensitivities, the interest income sensitivities incorporate additional behavioural assumptions as to how and when individual products would reprice in response to changing rates. In addition a dynamic balance sheet is used which includes the run-off of current assets and liabilities and the addition of planned new business.

Reported sensitivities are not necessarily predictive of future performance as they fall due,do not capture additional management actions that would likely be taken in response to an immediate, large, movement in interest rates. These actions could reduce the net interest income sensitivity, help mitigate any adverse impacts or can only secure them at excessive cost.they may result in changes to total income that are not captured in the net interest income.

 

Structural hedge limits: the structural hedging programme managing interest rate risk in the banking book relies on a number of assumptions made around customer behaviour. A material mismatch between assumptions and reality could lead to a deterioration in earnings. In order to monitor this risk a number of metrics are in place to enhance understanding of risks within this portfolio.

The Group has an integrated Asset and Liability Management (ALM) system which supports non-traded asset and liability management of the Group. This provides a single consolidated tool to measure and manage interest rate repricing profiles (including behavioural assumptions), perform stress testing and produce forecast outputs. The Group is aware that any assumptions based model is open to challenge. A full behavioural review is performed annually, or in response to changing market conditions, to ensure the assumptions remain appropriate and the model itself is subject to annual re-validation, as required under the Group Model Governance Policy. The key behavioural assumptions are:

embedded optionality within products.
the duration of balances that are contractually repayable on demand, such as current accounts and overdrafts, together with net free reserves of the Group.
the re-pricing behaviour of managed rate liabilities namely variable rate savings.

Table AO below shows, split by material currency, the Group’s market value sensitivities to an instantaneous parallel up and down 25 and 100 basis points change to all interest rates.

Table AO: Group Banking activities: market value sensitivity

  2019 2018
   Up
25bps
£m
   Down
25bps
£m
   Up
100bps
£m
   Down
100bps
£m
   Up
25bps
£m
   Down
25bps
£m
   Up
100bps
£m
   Down
100bps
£m
 
Sterling  13.6   (13.6)  52.7   (47.4)  29.1   (29.5)  113.7   (122.4)
US Dollar  (5.6)  5.8   (21.3)  24.3   (7.8)  7.8   (30.6)  31.9 
Euro  (7.2)  2.3   (27.0)  11.1   (3.0)  1.7   (11.2)  7.2 
Other  0.2   (0.2)  0.8   (0.8)  (0.1)  0.1   (0.4)  0.5 
Total  1.0   (5.7)  5.2   (12.8)  18.2   (19.9)  71.5   (82.8)
104

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

This is a risk based disclosure and the amounts shown would be amortised in the income statement over the duration of the portfolio.

The market value sensitivity is driven by temporary customer flow positions not yet hedged plus other positions occasionally held, within limits, by the Group’s wholesale funding desks in order to minimise overall funding and hedging costs. The level of risk is low relative to the size of the total balance sheet.

Table AP below shows supplementary value sensitivity to a steepening and flattening (c.100 basis points around the 3 year point) in the yield curve. This ensures there are no unintended consequences to managing risk to parallel shifts in rates.

Table AP:Group Banking activities: market value sensitivity to a steepening and flattening of the yield curve

  2019 2018
  Steepener
£m
  Flattener
£m
  Steepener
£m
  Flattener
£m
 
Sterling  46.6   (47.5)  38.3   (36.5)
US Dollar  (13.2)  15.3   6.5   (5.7)
Euro  (15.5)  9.7   (6.8)  3.6 
Other  0.4   (0.4)  (0.1)  0.1 
Total  18.3   (22.9)  37.9   (38.5)

The table below shows the banking book income sensitivity to an instantaneous parallel up and down 25 and 100 basis points change to all interest rates.

Table AQ:Group Banking activities: net interest income sensitivity

  2019 2018
  Up
25bps
£m
  Down
25bps
£m
  Up
100bps
£m
  Down
100bps
£m
  Up
25bps
£m
  Down
25bps
£m
  Up
100bps
£m
  Down
100bps
£m
 
Client facing activity and associated hedges  109.4   (147.9)  430.8   (702.8)  76.2   (125.4)  341.6   (538.6)

Income sensitivity is measured over a rolling 12 month basis.

The increase in the net interest income sensitivity to a downwards 100bps shock reflects additional margin compression risk within retail savings and a reduction in the size of the structural hedge.

Basis risk, foreign exchange, equity, and credit spread risks are measured primarily through scenario analysis by assessing the impact on profit before tax over a 12 month horizon arising from a change in market rates, and reported within the Board risk appetite on a monthly basis. Supplementary measures such as sensitivity and exposure limits are applied where they provide greater insight into risk positions. Frequency of reporting supplementary measures varies from daily to quarterly appropriate to each risk type.

Mitigation

The Group’s policy is to optimise reward whilst managing its market risk exposures within the risk appetite defined by the Board. The Group Market Risk Policy and procedures outlines the hedging process, and the centralisation of risk from divisions into GCT, e.g. via the transfer pricing framework. GCT is responsible for managing the centralised risk and does this through natural offsets of matching assets and liabilities, and appropriate hedging activity of the residual exposures, subject to the authorisation and mandate of GALCO within the Board risk appetite. The hedges are externalised to the market by derivative desks within GCT and Commercial Banking Markets. The Group mitigates income statement volatility through hedge accounting. This reduces the accounting volatility arising from the Group’s economic hedging activities by utilising both LIBOR and bank base rate assets. Any hedge accounting ineffectiveness that leads to accounting volatility is continuously monitored.

The largest residual risk exposure arises from balances that are deemed to be insensitive to changes in market rates (including current accounts, a portion of variable rate deposits and investable equity), and is managed through the Group’s structural hedge. Consistent with the Group’s strategy to deliver stable returns, GALCO seeks to minimise large reinvestment risk, and to smooth earnings over a range of investment tenors. The structural hedge consists of longer-term fixed rate assets or interest rate swaps and the amount and duration of the hedging activity is reviewed regularly by GALCO.

Whilst the bank faces margin compression in low rate environments, its exposure to pipeline and prepayment risk are not considered material and are hedged in line with expected customer behaviour. These are appropriately monitored and controlled through divisional Asset and Liability Committees (ALCOs).

Net investment foreign exchange exposures are managed centrally by GCT, by hedging non-sterling asset values with currency borrowing.

Economic foreign exchange exposures arising from non-functional currency flows are identified by divisions and transferred and managed centrally. The Group also has a policy of forward hedging its forecasted currency profit and loss to year end. The Group makes use of both accounting and economic foreign exchange exposures, as an offset against the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates on the value of non-sterling-denominated RWAs. This involves the holding of a structurally open currency position; sensitivity is minimised where, for a given currency, the ratio of the structural open position to RWAs equals the CET1 ratio. Continually evaluating this structural open currency position against evolving non-sterling-denominated RWAs, mitigates volatility in the Group’s CET1 ratio.

Monitoring

The appropriate limits and triggers are monitored by senior executive committees within the banking divisions. Banking assets, liabilities and associated hedging are actively monitored and if necessary rebalanced to be within agreed tolerances.

DEFINED BENEFIT PENSION SCHEMES

Exposures

The Group’s defined benefit pension schemes are exposed to significant risks from their assets and liabilities. The liability discount rate exposes the Group to interest rate risk and credit spread risk, which are partially offset by fixed interest assets (such as gilts and corporate bonds) and swaps. Equity and alternative asset risk arises from direct asset holdings. Scheme membership exposes the Group to longevity risk.

For further information on defined benefit pension scheme assets and liabilities please refer to note 36 on page F-61.

Measurement

Management of the schemes’ assets is the responsibility of the Trustees of the schemes who are responsible for setting the investment strategy and for agreeing funding requirements with the Group. The Group will be liable for meeting any funding deficit that may arise. As part of the triennial valuation process, the Group will agree with the Trustees a funding strategy to eliminate the deficit over an appropriate period.

Longevity risk is measured using both 1-in-20 year stresses (risk appetite) and 1-in-200 year stresses (regulatory capital).

Mitigation

The Group takes an active involvement in agreeing mitigation strategies with the schemes’ Trustees. An interest rate and inflation hedging programme is in place to reduce liability risk. The schemes have also reduced equity allocation and invested the proceeds in credit assets. The Trustees have put


105

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

in place a longevity swap to mitigate longevity risk. The merits of longevity risk transfer and hedging solutions are reviewed regularly.

Monitoring

In addition to the wider risk management framework, governance of the schemes includes two specialist pensions committees.

The surplus, or deficit, in the schemes is tracked monthly along with various single factor and scenario stresses which consider the assets and liabilities holistically. Key metrics are monitored monthly including the Group’s capital resources of the scheme, the performance against risk appetite triggers, and the performance of the hedged asset and liability matching positions.

INSURANCE PORTFOLIOS

Exposures

The main elements of market risk to which the Group is exposed through the Insurance business are equity, credit spread, interest rate and inflation.

Equity risk arises indirectly through the value of future management charges on policyholder funds. These management charges form part of the value of in-force business (see note 25 on page F-51). Equity risk also arises in the with-profits funds but is less material.
Credit spread risk mainly arises from annuities where policyholders’ future cash flows are guaranteed at retirement. Exposure arises if the
market value of the assets which are held to back these liabilities, mainly corporate bonds and loans, do not perform in line with expectations.
Interest rate risk arises through holding credit and interest assets mainly in the annuity book and also to cover general insurance liabilities, capital requirements and risk appetite.
Inflation exposure arises from a combination of inflation linked policyholder benefits and inflation assumptions used to project future expenses.

Measurement

Current and potential future market risk exposures within Insurance are assessed using a range of techniques including stress, reverse stress and scenario testing, as well as stochastic modelling.

Risk measures include 1-in-200 year stresses used for regulatory capital assessments and single factor stresses for profit before tax.

Table AR demonstrates the impact of the Group’s UK Recession scenario on the Insurance business’ portfolio (with no diversification benefit, but after the impact of Group consolidation on interest rate and credit spreads). The amounts include movements in assets, liabilities and the value of in-force business in respect of insurance contracts and participating investment contracts.


Table AR:Insurance business: profit before tax sensitivities

  Increase (reduction)
in profit before tax
  2019
£m
  2018
£m
 
Interest rates – decrease 100 basis points  116   297 
Inflation – increase 50 basis points  30   93 
Credit spreads – 100% widening  (859)  (823)
Equity – 30% fall  (68)  (38)
Property – 25% fall  (47)  (50)
Total  (828)  (521)

Further stresses that show the effect of reasonably possible changes in key assumptions, including the risk-free rate, equity investment volatility, widening of credit default spreads on corporate bonds and an increase in illiquidity premium, as applied to profit before tax are set out in note 33 on page F-60.

One of the consequences of preparations for the formation of the Ring Fenced Bank was to reduce the impact of some stresses within the Insurance business, though Group exposures may not have materially changed. Examples of this include centralisation of defined benefit pension schemes, and the transfer of specific hedging programmes from the corporate centre to the business unit where the exposure emanated.

Mitigation

Equity and credit spread risks are closely monitored and, where appropriate, asset liability matching is undertaken to mitigate risk. Unit matching has been used since 2018 to reduce the sensitivity of equity movements by matching unit-linked liabilities on a best-estimate view. Hedging strategies are also in place to reduce exposure from unit-linked funds and the with-profit funds.

Interest rate risk in the annuity book is mitigated by investing in assets whose cash flows closely match those on the projected future liabilities. It is not possible to eliminate risk completely as the timing of insured events is uncertain and bonds are not available at all of the required maturities. As a result, the cash flows cannot be precisely matched and so sensitivity tests are used to test the extent of the mismatch.

Other market risks (e.g. interest rate exposure outside the annuity book and inflation) are also closely monitored and where considered appropriate, hedges are put in place to reduce exposure.

Monitoring

Market risks in the Insurance business are monitored by Insurance senior executive committees and ultimately the Insurance Board. Monitoring includes the progression of market risk capital against risk appetite limits, as well as the sensitivity of profit before tax to combined market risk stress scenarios and in year market movements. Asset and liability matching positions and hedges in place are actively monitored and if necessary rebalanced to be within agreed tolerances. In addition market risk is controlled via approved investment policies and mandates.


106

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

EXPOSURE

 

Liquidity exposure represents the amount of potential stressed outflows in any future period less expected inflows. Liquidity is consideredThe Group considers liquidity exposure from both an internal and a regulatory perspective.

 

MEASUREMENT

 

Liquidity risk is managed through a series of measures, tests and reports that are primarily based on contractual maturity.maturities with behavioural overlays as appropriate. Note 5253 on page F-87F-120 sets out an analysis of assets and liabilities by relevant maturity grouping. In order to reflect more accurately the expected behaviour of the Group’s assetsThe Group undertakes quantitative and liabilities, measurement and modellingqualitative analysis of the behavioural aspects of each is constructed. Divisional teams form a view of customer behaviour based on quantitativeits assets and qualitative analysis.liabilities in order to reflect their expected behaviour.

 

MITIGATION

 

The Group manages and monitors liquidity risks and ensures that liquidity risk management systems and arrangements are adequate with regard to the internal risk appetite, Group strategy and regulatory requirements. Liquidity policies and procedures are subject to independent internal oversight by Risk. Overseas branches and subsidiaries of the Group may also be required to meet the liquidity profilerequirements of the balance sheet through short termentity’s domestic country. Management of liquidity managementrequirements is performed by the overseas branch or subsidiary in line with Group policy. Liquidity risk of the Insurance business is actively managed and monitored within the Insurance business. The Group plans funding requirements over the life of the funding plan, combining business as usual and stressed conditions. Longer term funding, definedThe Group manages its liquidity position both with regard to its internal risk appetite and the Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR) as having an original maturity of more than one year, is used to manage the Group’s strategic liquidity profile, determinedrequired by the Group’s balance sheet structure.PRA and Capital Requirements Directive and Regulation (CRD IV) liquidity requirements.

 

The Group’s funding and liquidity position is underpinned by its significant customer deposit base, and is supported by strong relationships with corporate customers and certain wholesale marketacross customer segments. A substantial proportion ofThe Group has consistently observed that in aggregate the retail deposit base is made up of customers’ current and savings accounts which, although mostly repayable on demand, have traditionally in aggregate providedprovides a stable source of funding. Funding concentration by counterparty, currency and currencytenor is monitored on an ongoing basis. Wherebasis and where concentrations do exist, (for example, maturity profile), these are managed as part of the planning process and limited by the internal funding and liquidity risk appetite and considered manageable. The abilitymonitoring framework, with analysis regularly provided to deploy assets quickly, either through the repo market or through outright sale, is also an important source of liquidity for the Group’s Banking businesses.senior management.

 

To assist in managing the balance sheet, the Group operates a Liquidity Transfer Pricing (LTP) process which: allocates relevant interest expenses from the centre to the Group’s Bankingbanking businesses within the internal management accounts in a manner consistent with the Group Funding and Liquidity Policy;accounts; helps drive the correct inputs to customer pricing and supports the overall Group balance sheet strategy;pricing; and is consistent with regulatory requirements. LTP makes extensive use of behavioural maturity profiles, taking account of expected customer loan prepayments and stability of customer deposits, modelled on data gathered over several years.historic data.

The Group can monetise liquid assets quickly, either through the repurchase agreements (repo) market or through outright sale. In addition, the Group has pre-positioned a substantial amount of assets at the Bank of England’s Discount Window Facility which can be used to access additional liquidity in a time of stress. The Group considers diversification


94

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

across geography, currency, markets and tenor when assessing appropriate holdings of liquid assets. The Group’s liquid asset buffer is available for deployment at immediate notice, subject to complying with regulatory requirements.

 

Liquidity risk within the Insurance business may result from: the inability to sell financial assets quickly at their fair values; an insurance liability falling due for payment earlier than expected; the inability to generate cash inflows as anticipated; an unexpected large operational event; or from a general insurance catastrophe, e.g.for example, a significant weather event. Following the implementation of Solvency II, the annuity portfolio is ring-fenced and assets held to match annuity liability cashflows are excluded from shareholder liquidity. In the event a liquidity shortfall arises on the annuity portfolio, shareholder liquidity will be required to support this. As a result, the shareholder’s exposure to liquidity risk is through Insurance’s non-annuity and surplus assets, any shortfall arising in the annuity portfolio and the investment portfolios within the general insurance business. Liquidity risk is actively managed and monitored within the Insurance business to ensure that it remains within approved risk appetite, so that even under stress conditions, there is sufficient liquidity to meet obligations and remain within approved risk appetite.obligations.

 

MONITORING

 

Liquidity is actively monitored at Group level. Daily monitoring and control processes are in place to address internal and regulatory liquidity requirements. Liquidity policiesThe Group monitors a range of market and proceduresinternal early warning indicators on a daily basis for early signs of liquidity risk in the market or specific to the Group. This captures regulatory metrics as well as metrics the Group considers relevant for its liquidity profile. These are subject to independent internal oversight by Risk.a mixture of quantitative and qualitative measures, including: daily variation of customer balances; changes in maturity profiles; funding concentrations; changes in LCR outflows; credit default swap (CDS) spreads; and basis risks.

 

The Group carries out internal stress testing of its liquidity and potential cash flow mismatch position over both short (up to one month) and longer term (up to three months)longer-term horizons against a range of scenarios.scenarios forming an important part of the internal risk appetite. The scenarios and the assumptions are reviewed at least annually to gain assuranceensure that they continue to be relevant to the nature of the business.business including reflecting emerging horizon risks to the Group. For further information on the Group’s 20162019 liquidity stress testing results refer to page 98. The Group funding plan is also stressed against a range of macroeconomic scenarios. Regulatory metrics are calculated and monitored over the life the plan under base and stress conditions.

 

The Group maintains a Contingency Funding Framework as part of the wider Recovery Plan which is designed to identify emerging liquidity concerns at an early stage, so that mitigating actions can be taken to avoid a more serious crisis developing. Contingency Funding Plan invocation and escalation processes are based on analysis of five major quantitative and qualitative components, comprising assessment of: early warning indicators,indicators; prudential and regulatory liquidity risk limits and triggers,triggers; stress testing results,results; event and systemic indicatorsindicators; and market intelligence.

FUNDING AND LIQUIDITY MANAGEMENT IN 2016Funding and liquidity management in 2019

 

During 2016 theThe Group has maintained its strong funding and liquidity position with a stable loan to deposit ratio of 108.9107 per cent.

 

Total funded assets reduced by £5.8 billion to £465.4 billion during 2016. Loans and advances to customers, excluding reverse repos, reduced by £5.5 billion. Growth in Consumer Finance was strong at 11 per cent and SME lending growth was 3 per cent, both outperforming the market. This was offset by a reduction in mortgage balances asDuring 2019, the Group continuesrepaid its Funding for Lending Scheme (FLS) contractual maturities of £12.1 billion and early repaid £4.5 billion of its Term Funding Scheme (TFS) drawings, representing all of its 2020 TFS maturities. This has reduced the balance of FLS outstanding to £1 billion and the balance risk and margin considerations versus volumes in a competitive low growth market. Total customer deposits fell by £5.3of TFS to £15.4 billion to £413.0 billionas at 31 December 2016, largely due to lower Retail and Consumer Finance tactical balances.2019.

 

Wholesale funding has decreased by £9.1 billion to £110.8 billionThe Group’s liquidity coverage ratio (LCR) was 137 per cent (based on a monthly rolling average over the previous 12 months) as excess liquidity is managed down; the amount with a residual maturity less than one year fell to £35.1 billion (£37.9 billion at 31 December 2015). 2019 calculated on a consolidated basis based on the EU Delegated Act. Following the implementation of structural reform, liquidity risk is managed at a legal entity level with the Group consolidated LCR representing the composite of the ring-fenced bank and non ring-fenced bank entities.

The Group’s term funding ratio (wholesale funding with a remaining life ofcredit ratings continue to reflect its robust balance sheet, resilient underlying profitability and bail-in capital position. There were no changes to the ratings over one year as a percentage of total wholesale funding) is unchanged at 68 per cent. During 20162019, although in November, Moody’s revised the Group’s term issuance costs have remained broadlyand Lloyds Bank plc’s outlooks to negative due to concern relating to the UK’s exit from the European Union. In March Fitch placed the majority of UK banks, including the Group’s entities, on Ratings Watch Negative before stabilising the ratings in line with other post-crisis years and significantly lower than levels seen duringDecember given the economic downturn. The Group’s overall costreduced risk of wholesale funding has reduceda no-deal exit from the EU.


95

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

as more expensive funding raised in previous years mature. The Group’s market capacity for term funding is considered across the planning horizon as part of the funding plan and the Group expects term funding requirements to remain stable.

The credit ratings on Lloyds Bank were unchanged over 2016, and the median credit rating among the three major credit rating agencies remains ‘A+’. Following the EU referendum in June, both S&P and Moody’s revised their outlooks on Lloyds Bank, among other UK banks, in order to reflect increased macroeconomic uncertainty. S&P revised the outlook on Lloyds Bank’s ‘A’ rating to ‘Negative’ from ’Stable’ whilst Moody’s revised the outlook on Lloyds Bank’s ‘A1’ rating to ‘Stable’ from ‘Positive’. Moody’s also revised their outlook on the UK banking system to ‘Negative’ from ‘Stable’. Fitch’s outlook on Lloyds Bank’s ‘A+’ rating remained ’Stable’ as Fitch expect the economic effects of the referendum to be manageable. The effects of a potential downgrade from all three credit rating agencies are included in Group liquidity stress testing.

The LCR became the Pillar 1 standard for liquidity in the UK in October 2015. The Group comfortably meets the requirements. Liquid asset holdings have fallen during the second half of 2016 as excess liquidity held during the EU Referendum is managed down. The Group continues to monitor the Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR) requirements and expects to meet them once confirmed by the PRA.

Table 1.41:AF:Group funding position

 

 At 31 Dec  At 31 Dec   
 2016  2015 Change        
 £bn  £bn  %  At 31 Dec
2019
£bn
  At 31 Dec
2018
£bn
 Change
%
 
Funding requirement                        
Loans and advances to customers1  449.7   455.2   (1)  440.4   444.4   (1)
Loans and advances to banks2  5.1   3.4   50   8.1   5.9   37 
Debt securities  3.4   4.2   (19)
Debt securities at amortised cost  3.9   4.0   (5)
Reverse repurchase agreements  0.5   1.0   (50)         
Available-for-sale financial assets – non-LCR eligible3  1.9   2.7   (30)
Cash and balances at central bank – non LCR eligible4  4.8   4.7   2 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income – non-LCR eligible3  0.1   0.8   (75)
Cash and balances at central bank – non-LCR eligible4  5.7   5.8   (2)
Funded assets  465.4   471.2   (1)  458.2   460.9    
Other assets5  249.9   234.2   7   251.7   212.9   18 
  715.3   705.4   1   709.9   673.8     
On balance sheet LCR eligible liquidity assets            
On balance sheet LCR eligible liquid assets            
Reverse repurchase agreements  8.7          56.2   40.9   37 
Cash and balances at central banks4  42.7   53.7   (20)  49.4   48.9   1 
Available-for-sale financial assets6  54.6   30.3   80 
Held-to-maturity financial assets6     19.8     
Debt securities at amortised cost  1.6   1.2   42 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  25.0   24.0   4 
Trading and fair value through profit and loss  1.8   3.0   (40)  4.0   11.9   (66)
Repurchase agreements  (5.3)  (5.5)  (4)  (12.2)  (3.1)    
  102.5   101.3   1   124.0   123.8    
Total Group assets  817.8   806.7   1   833.9   797.6   5 
Less: other liabilities5  (245.5)  (221.5)  11   (230.6)  (187.9)  23 
Funding requirement  572.3   585.2   (2)  603.3   609.7   (1)
Funded by                        
Customer deposits7  413.0   418.3   (1)
Wholesale funding8  110.8   119.9   (8)
Customer deposits6  411.8   416.3     
Wholesale funding7  128.3   123.3   4 
  523.8   538.2   (3)  540.1   539.6    
Repurchase agreements          
Term funding scheme  15.4   19.9   (23)
Total equity  48.5   47.0   4   47.8   50.2   (5)
Total funding  572.3   585.2   (2)  603.3   609.7   (1)

 

1Excludes £8.3reverse repos of £54.6 billion (31 December 2015: £nil) of reverse repurchase agreements.
2018: £40.5 billion).
2Excludes £20.9£0.1 billion (31 December 2015: £20.8 billion)2018: £nil) of loans and advances to banks within the Insurance business and £0.9£1.6 billion (31 December 2015: £0.92018: £0.4 billion) of reverse repurchase agreements.
3Non-LCR eligible liquid assets comprise a diversified pool of highly rated unencumbered collateral (including retained issuance).
4Cash and balances at central banks are combined in the Group’s balance sheet.
5Other assets and other liabilities primarily include balances in the Group’s Insurance business and the fair value of derivative assets and liabilities.
6The Group reclassified gilts held within the liquidity portfolio as ‘available-for-sale’ (previously been classified as ‘held-to-maturity’) during the third quarter of 2016 as the Group has decided it is no longer appropriate to commit to holding any gilts to maturity.
7Excludes £2.5repos of £9.5 billion (31 December 2015: £nil) of repurchase agreements.2018: £1.8 billion).
87The Group’s definition of wholesale funding aligns with that used by other international market participants; including interbank deposits, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities.
96

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

Table 1.42:AGReconciliation of Group funding to the balance sheet (audited)

 

 At 31 December 2016 At 31 December 2015 Included in
funding
analysis
£bn
 Repos
and cash
collateral
received by
Insurance
£bn
 Fair value
and other
accounting
methods
£bn
 Balance
sheet
£bn
 
            Repos     
   Repos and Fair value      and cash Fair value   
 Included in cash collateral and other    Included in collateral and other   
 funding received by accounting    funding received by accounting Balance 
 analysis Insurance methods  Balance sheet analysis Insurance methods sheet 
 £bn £bn £bn  £bn £bn £bn £bn £bn 
At 31 December 2019                
Deposits from banks  8.1   8.0   0.3   16.4   8.5   8.4      16.9   9.6   18.7   (0.1)  28.2 
Debt securities in issue  83.0      (6.7)  76.3   88.1      (6.0)  82.1   102.1      (4.4)  97.7 
Subordinated liabilities  19.7      0.1   19.8   23.3         23.3   16.6      0.5   17.1 
Total wholesale funding  110.8   8.0           119.9   8.4           128.3   18.7         
Customer deposits  413.0   2.5      415.5   418.3         418.3   411.8   9.5      421.3 
Total  523.8   10.5           538.2   8.4           540.1   28.2         
At 31 December 2018                
Deposits from banks  8.3   22.1   (0.1)  30.3 
Debt securities in issue  97.1      (5.9)  91.2 
Subordinated liabilities  17.9      (0.2)  17.7 
Total wholesale funding  123.3   22.1         
Customer deposits  416.3   1.8      418.1 
Total  539.6   23.9         

 

Table 1.43:AH:Analysis of 20162019 total wholesale funding by residual maturity

 

   One to     Nine       Total at Total at  Less
than one
month
£bn
 One to
three
months
£bn
 Three to
six months
£bn
 Six to nine
months
£bn
 Nine
months
to one year
£bn
 One to
two years
£bn
 Two to
five years
£bn
 More than
five years
£bn
 Total at
31 Dec
2019
£bn
 Total at
31 Dec
2018
£bn
 
 Less than three Three to six Six to nine months to One to two Two to five More than 31 Dec 31 Dec 
 one month months months months one year years years five years 2016 2015 
 £bn  £bn  £bn  £bn  £bn  £bn  £bn  £bn  £bn  £bn 
Deposit from banks  6.1   1.0   0.5   0.4      0.1         8.1   8.5 
Deposits from banks  7.3   1.3   0.3   0.1   0.1   0.2   0.3      9.6   8.3 
Debt securities in issue:                                                                                
Certificates of deposit  0.4   2.1   3.0   1.7   0.3            7.5   10.6   1.2   2.6   2.8   2.4   1.2   0.4         10.6   12.0 
Commercial paper  2.0   0.8      0.4               3.2   6.6   1.3   3.5   2.8   0.9   0.4            8.9   8.0 
Medium-term notes1     1.5   2.7   1.4   0.3   5.1   12.3   13.6   36.9   37.6 
Medium-term notes  1.0   0.8   1.8   1.2   0.2   6.6   19.3   17.1   48.0   45.4 
Covered bonds  2.1   2.8   1.1         2.2   10.7   10.2   29.1   25.8   0.8   1.3      2.9      6.1   10.6   7.0   28.7   27.1 
Securitisation  0.6   1.0   0.4   0.7   0.8   0.7   1.8   0.3   6.3   7.5   0.4      1.1   0.9   0.4   1.7   1.4      5.9   4.6 
  5.1   8.2   7.2   4.2   1.4   8.0   24.8   24.1   83.0   88.1   4.7   8.2   8.5   8.3   2.2   14.8   31.3   24.1   102.1   97.1 
Subordinated liabilities     0.5   0.1   0.4      2.4   3.7   12.6   19.7   23.3      1.2      1.0   0.1   0.5   4.3   9.5   16.6   17.9 
Total wholesale funding2  11.2   9.7   7.8   5.0   1.4   10.5   28.5   36.7   110.8   119.9 
Of which issued by Lloyds Banking Group plc3                    1.7   5.7   7.4   3.4 
Total wholesale funding1  12.0   10.7   8.8   9.4   2.4   15.5   35.9   33.6   128.3   123.3 

 

1Medium-term notes include funding from the National Loan Guarantee Scheme (31 December 2016: £1.4 billion; 31 December 2015: £1.4 billion).
2The Group’s definition of wholesale funding aligns with that used by other international market participants; including interbank deposits, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities.
3Consists of medium-term notes (£2.5 billion) and subordinated liabilities (£4.9 billion).

 

Table 1.44:AI:Total wholesale funding by currency (audited)

 

           Other    
  Sterling  US Dollar  Euro  currencies  Total 
  £bn  £bn  £bn  £bn  £bn 
At 31 December 2016  30.6   33.0   41.4   5.8   110.8 
At 31 December 2015  34.9   37.6   41.3   6.1   119.9 
  Sterling
£bn
  US Dollar
£bn
  Euro
£bn
  Other
currencies
£bn
  Total
£bn
 
At 31 December 2019  28.7   49.6   40.9   9.1   128.3 
At 31 December 2018  25.8   45.2   42.8   9.5   123.3 

 

Table 1.45:AJ:Analysis of 20162019 term issuance (audited)

 

       Other   
 Sterling US Dollar Euro currencies Total 
 £bn  £bn  £bn  £bn  £bn  Sterling
£bn
 US Dollar
£bn
 Euro
£bn
 Other
currencies
£bn
 Total
£bn
 
Securitisation  0.3   0.4         0.7   1.6   0.4         2.0 
Medium-term notes     1.5   1.2   0.4   3.1   0.5   3.2   1.8   1.1   6.6 
Covered bonds  1.2      2.4      3.6   2.0   0.8   2.8      5.6 
Private placements1  0.1   1.0   0.8      1.9   0.1   0.3   0.9      1.3 
Subordinated liabilities     1.1         1.1 
Subordinated liabilities2  0.5   0.4         0.9 
Total issuance  1.6   4.0   4.4   0.4   10.4   4.7   5.1   5.5   1.1   16.4 
Of which issued by Lloyds Banking Group plc2     3.8   1.2   0.4   5.4 

 

1Private placements include structured bonds and term repurchase agreements (repos).
bonds.
2Consists of medium-term notes (£2.5 billion) and subordinated liabilities (£3.0 billion).AT1 issuances.

Gross term issuance for 2016 totalled £10.4 billion. The Group maintained a diversified approach to funding markets with trades in public and private format, secured and unsecured products and a wide range of currencies and markets. In 2016, the Group drew down £1.0 billion under the Funding for Lending Scheme (FLS), taking peak usage to £33.1 billion, with £3.0 billion of maturities during the year. A further £4.5 billion was drawn under the Bank of England’s Term Funding Scheme (TFS), underlining the Group’s support to the UK economy. The maturities for the FLS and TFS are fully factored into the Group’s funding plan.

97

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

LIQUIDITY PORTFOLIOThe Group continues to access wholesale funding markets across a wide range of products, currencies and investors to maintain a stable and diverse source of funds. In 2019, the Group has continued with this approach to funding, including capital and funding from the holding company, Lloyds Banking Group plc, as needed to transition towards final UK Minimum Requirements for Own Funds and Eligible Liabilities (MREL). The Group will continue to issue funding trades from Lloyds Bank plc, the ring-fenced bank operating company, across senior unsecured, covered bonds, ABS and RMBS. In 2019, the Group launched an operating company funding programme for LBCM, the non-ring-fenced bank, and have since issued a number of trades for this entity including an inaugural five year £500 million senior unsecured public benchmark transaction. The maturity of the Funding for Lending and Term Funding Schemes are fully factored into the Group’s funding plans.

Liquidity Portfolio

 

At 31 December 2016,2019, the Bankingbanking business had £120.8£118.3 billion of highly liquid unencumbered LCR eligible assets (31 December 2018: £129.4 billion), of which £120.3£115.7 billion is LCR level 1 eligible (31 December 2018: £128.6 billion) and £0.5£2.6 billion is LCR level 2 eligible.eligible (31 December 2018: £0.8 billion). These assets are available to meet cash and collateral outflows and PRA regulatory requirements. A separate liquidity portfolio to mitigate any insurance liquidity risk is managed within the Insurance business.Total LCR eligible liquid assets represent over 8five times the Group’s money market funding less than one year to maturity (excluding derivative collateral margins and settlement accounts) and exceed total wholesale funding, and thus providesprovide a substantial buffer in the event of continued market dislocation. The Insurance business manages a separate liquidity portfolio to mitigate insurance liquidity risk.


Table 1.46:AK:LCR eligible assets

  At 31 Dec  At 31 Dec     Average  Average1
  2016  2015  Change  2016  2015 
  £bn  £bn  %  £bn  £bn 
Level 1                    
Cash and central bank reserves  42.7   53.7   (20)  53.7   57.2 
High quality government/MDB/agency bonds2  75.3   65.8   14   72.4   63.0 
High quality covered bonds  2.3   3.4   (32)  2.4   3.3 
Total  120.3   122.9   (2)  128.5   123.5 
Level 23  0.5   0.5      0.5   0.7 
Total LCR eligible assets  120.8   123.4   (2)  129.0   124.2 

  At 31 Dec
2019
£bn
  At 31 Dec
2018
£bn
  Change
%
  Average
2019
£bn
  Average
2018
£bn
 
Level 1                    
Cash and central bank reserves  49.4   48.9   1   50.9   58.1 
High quality government/MDB/agency bonds1  63.9   78.7   (19)  76.4   66.2 
High quality covered bonds  2.4   1.0       1.9   0.8 
Total  115.7   128.6   (10)  129.2   125.1 
Level 22  2.6   0.8       1.5   0.8 
Total LCR eligible assets  118.3   129.4   (9)  130.7   125.9 

 

1Average for 2015 includes fourth quarter 2015 only.
2Designated multilateral development bank (MDB).
32Includes Level 2A and Level 2B.

 

Table 1.47:AL:LCReligible assets by currency

           Other    
  Sterling  US Dollar  Euro  currencies  Total 
  £bn  £bn  £bn  £bn  £bn 
At 31 December 2016                    
Level 1  96.0   12.5   11.8      120.3 
Level 2  0.2   0.3         0.5 
Total  96.2   12.8   11.8      120.8 
At 31 December 2015                    
Level 1  90.9   15.8   16.2      122.9 
Level 2  0.1      0.4      0.5 
Total  91.0   15.8   16.6      123.4 

 

  Sterling
£bn
  US Dollar
£bn
  Euro
£bn
  Other
currencies
£bn
  Total
£bn
 
At 31 December 2019                    
Level 1  91.5   11.7   12.5      115.7 
Level 2  1.7   0.5   0.4      2.6 
Total  93.2   12.2   12.9      118.3 
At 31 December 2018                    
Level 1  98.2   19.8   10.6      128.6 
Level 2  0.4   0.4         0.8 
Total  98.6   20.2   10.6      129.4 

The Bankingbanking business also had £113.8 billionhas a significant amount of secondary, non-LCR eligible liquidity, the vast majority ofliquid assets which isare eligible for use in a range of central bank or similar facilities and the Group routinely makes use of as part of its normal liquidity management practices.facilities. Future use of such facilities will be based on prudent liquidity management and economic considerations, having regard for external market conditions.

 

The Group considers diversification across geography, currency, markets and tenor when assessing appropriate holdings of liquid assets. This liquidity is managed as a single pool in the centre and is under the control of the function charged with managing the liquidity of the Group. It is available for deployment at immediate notice, subject to complying with regulatory requirements.

STRESS TESTING RESULTSStress testing results

 

Internal liquidity stress testing results at 31 December 20162019 showed that the Bankingbanking business had liquidity resources representing 167.0158 per cent of modelled outflows over a three month period from all wholesale funding sources, retail and corporate deposits, intraday requirements and rating dependent contracts under the Group’s most severe liquidity stress scenario.

 

A hypothetical idiosyncraticThis scenario includes a two notch downgrade of the Group’s current long-term debt rating and accompanying one notch short-term downgrade implemented instantaneously by all major rating agencies, could result in a contractual outflow of £3.1 billion of cash over a period of up to one year, £1.8 billion of collateral posting related to customer financial contracts and £9.0 billion of collateral posting associated with secured funding.agencies.

 

ENCUMBERED ASSETSEncumbered assets

 

This disclosure provides further detail on the availability of assets that could be used to support potential future funding requirements of the Group.

The disclosure is not designed to identify assets that would be available in the event of a resolution or bankruptcy.

The Group’s analysis separately identifies those assets held at central banks; assets not held at central banks are classified as either encumbered or unencumbered.

The Board and GALCOthe Group Asset and Liability Committee (GALCO) monitor and manage total balance sheet encumbrance viausing a number of risk appetite metrics. At 31 December 2016,2019, the Group had £83.5£60.6 billion (31 December 2015: £77.42018: £53.4 billion) of externally encumbered on balanceon-balance sheet assets with counterparties other than central banks. The increase in encumbered assets was primarily driven by an increase in the use of on balance sheet available-for-sale financial assets for repo activity.covered bond issuance. The Group also had £580.9£639.5 billion (31 December 2015: £573.72018: £584.3 billion) of unencumbered on balanceon-balance sheet assets, and £153.5£133.7 billion (31 December 2015: £155.62018: £159.8 billion) of pre-positioned and encumbered assets held with central banks.banks, the reduction in the latter was primarily driven by a decrease in encumbrance relating to FLS and TFS maturities in the year. Primarily, the Group encumbers mortgages, unsecured lending and credit card receivables through the issuance programmes and tradable securities through securities financing activity. The Group mainly positions mortgage assets at central banks.


98

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

Table 1.48:AM:On balance sheet encumbered and unencumbered assets

 

 Encumbered with counterparties other Pre- Unencumbered assets not pre-positioned    Encumbered with
counterparties other
than central banks
 Pre-
positioned
and
 Unencumbered assets
not pre-positioned
with central banks
   
 than central banks  positioned  with central banks     Securitisations
£m
 Covered
bond
£m
 Other
£m
 Total
£m
 encumbered
assets
held with
central banks
£m
 Readily
realisable1
£m
 Other
realisable
assets2
£m
 Cannot be
used3
£m
 Total
£m
 Total
£m
 
         and           
         encumbered           
         assets           
         held with   Other       
   Covered     central Readily realisable Cannot     
 Securitisations bond Other Total banks realisable assets be used1 Total Total 
 £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 31 December 2016                                        
At 31 December 2019                                        
Cash and balances at central banks                 42,998      4,454   47,452   47,452                  49,270      5,860   55,130   55,130 
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss        4,806   4,806      9,175   22   137,171   146,368   151,174 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  51      4,834   4,885      2,469      152,835   155,304   160,189 
Derivative financial instruments                       36,138   36,138   36,138                        26,369   26,369   26,369 
Loans and receivables:                                        
Financial assets at amortised cost:                                        
Loans and advances to banks        32   32      528   1,825   24,517   26,870   26,902         1   1      1,858   3,851   4,065   9,774   9,775 
Loans and advances to customers  14,542   30,883   7,305   52,730   153,482   7,032   152,997   91,717   251,746   457,958   7,319   33,161   7,109   47,589   133,732   14,087   171,370   128,210   313,667   494,988 
Debt securities        904   904      2,344   5   144   2,493   3,397         553   553      3,200      1,791   4,991   5,544 
  14,542   30,883   8,241   53,666   153,482   9,904   154,827   116,378   281,109   488,257   7,319   33,161   7,663   48,143   133,732   19,145   175,221   134,066   328,432   510,307 
Available-for-sale financial assets  154      24,824   24,978      31,017   31   498   31,546   56,524 
Held-to-maturity investments                              
Other2                 34   1,737   36,477   38,248   38,248 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income        7,617   7,617      16,919      556   17,475   25,092 
Other4                    514   56,292   56,806   56,806 
Total assets  14,696   30,883   37,871   83,450   153,482   93,128   156,617   331,116   580,861   817,793   7,370   33,161   20,114   60,645   133,732   87,803   175,735   375,978   639,516   833,893 
At 31 December 2015                                        
At 31 December 2018                                        
Cash and balances at central banks                 56,323      2,094   58,417   58,417                  49,645      5,018   54,663   54,663 
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss        6,922   6,922      7,459   17   126,138   133,614   140,536   54      2,646   2,700      5,190      150,639   155,829   158,529 
Derivative financial instruments                       29,467   29,467   29,467                        23,595   23,595   23,595 
Loans and receivables:                                        
Financial assets at amortised cost:                                        
Loans and advances to banks        37   37      431   910   23,739   25,080   25,117         12   12      1,223   2,555   2,493   6,271   6,283 
Loans and advances to customers  13,668   32,641   7,418   53,727   150,086   7,678   159,510   84,174   251,362   455,175   5,774   29,041   6,012   40,827   159,822   12,098   155,278   116,833   284,209   484,858 
Debt securities        855   855      3,150   62   124   3,336   4,191         2,627   2,627      2,581   4   26   2,611   5,238 
  13,668   32,641   8,310   54,619   150,086   11,259   160,482   108,037   279,778   484,483   5,774   29,041   8,651   43,466   159,822   15,902   157,837   119,352   293,091   496,379 
Available-for-sale financial assets        15,810   15,810   5,548   11,048   31   595   11,674   33,032 
Held-to-maturity investments                 19,808         19,808   19,808 
Other2                 10   2,716   38,219   40,945   40,945 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income:        7,278   7,278      17,114      423   17,537   24,815 
Other4                 56   612   38,949   39,617   39,617 
                                        
Total assets  13,668   32,641   31,042   77,351   155,634   105,907   163,246   304,550   573,703   806,688   5,828   29,041   18,575   53,444   159,822   87,907   158,449   337,976   584,332   797,598 

 

1Assets regarded by the Group to be readily realisable in the normal course of business, to secure funding, meet collateral needs, or be sold to reduce potential future funding requirements, and are not subject to any restrictions on their use for these purposes.
2Assets where there are no restrictions on their use to secure funding, meet collateral needs, or be sold to reduce potential future funding requirements, but are not readily realisable in the normal course of business in their current form.
3The following assets are classified as unencumbered – cannot be used: assets held within the Group’s Insurance businesses which are generally held to either back liabilities to policyholders or to support the solvency of the Insurance subsidiaries; assets held within consolidated limited liability partnerships which provide security for the Group’s obligations to its pension schemes; assets segregated in order to meet the Financial Resilience requirements of the PRA’s Supervisory Statement 9/6 ‘Operational Continuity in Resolution’; assets pledged to facilitate the use of intra-day payment and settlement systems; and reverse repos and derivatives balance sheet ledger items.
24Other comprises: items in the course of collection from banks,banks; investment properties, goodwill,properties; goodwill; value in-force business,business; other tangible assets,intangible assets; tangible fixed assets,assets; current tax recoverable,recoverable; deferred tax assets,assets; retirement benefit assets; investments in joint ventures and associates; assets arising from reinsurance contracts held and other assets.

 

The above table sets out the carrying value of the Group’s encumbered and unencumbered assets, separately identifying those that are available to support the Group’s funding needs. The table does not include collateral received by the Group (i.e. from reverse repos) that is not recognised on its balance sheet, the vast majority of which the Group is permitted to repledge.

99

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

FUNDING AND LIQUIDITY RISK – CONTRACTUAL CASH OBLIGATIONS

 

The following table sets out the amounts and maturities of Lloyds Banking Group’s contractual cash obligations at 31 December 2016.2019.

 

 Within One to three Three to Over five   
 one year years five years years Total 
 £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  Within
one year
£m
 One to three
years
£m
 Three to
five years
£m
 Over five
years
£m
 Total
£m
 
Long-term debt – dated  761   2,195   3,446   7,832   14,234   2,442   356   2,345   7,343   12,486 
Debt securities in issue  25,708   14,914   18,655   26,460   85,737   29,977   26,556   19,082   29,605   105,220 
Finance leases  8   3      12   23 
Operating leases  264   453   402   944   2,063 
Lease liabilities  241   429   315   859   1,844 
Capital commitments  543            543   405            405 
Other purchase obligations  1,221   1,899   912   557   4,589   1,232   1,946   1,209   929   5,316 
  28,505   19,464   23,415   35,805   107,189   34,297   29,287   22,951   38,736   125,271 

 

Other purchase obligations include amounts expected to be payable in respect of material contracts entered into by the Lloyds Banking Group, in the ordinary course of business, for the provision of outsourced and other services. The cost of these services will be charged to the income statement as it is incurred. The Lloyds Banking Group also has a constructive obligation to ensure that its defined post-retirement benefit schemes remain adequately funded. The amount and timing of the Lloyds Banking Group’s cash contributions to these schemes is uncertain and will be affected by factors such as future investment returns and demographic changes. Lloyds Banking Group expects to make cash contributions of at least £575£1,200 million to these schemes in 2017.2020.

 

At 31 December 2016,2019, Lloyds Banking Group also had £5,597£4,642 million of preference shares, preferred securities and undated subordinated liabilities outstanding.

 

At 31 December 2016,2019, the principal sources of potential liquidity for Lloyds Banking Group plc were dividends received from its directly owned subsidiary company,companies, particularly Lloyds Bank plc and Scottish Widows Group Limited, and loans from this and other Lloyds Banking Group companies. The ability of Lloyds Bank to pay dividends going forward, or for Lloyds Bank or other Lloyds Banking Group companies to make loans to Lloyds Banking Group plc, depends on a number of factors, including their own regulatory capital requirements, distributable reserves and financial performance.

 

OFF-BALANCE SHEET ARRANGEMENTS

 

A table setting out the amounts and maturities of Lloyds Banking Group’s other commercial commitments and guarantees at 31 December 20162019 is included in note 5253 to the financial statements. These commitments and guarantees are not included in Lloyds Banking Group’s consolidated balance sheet.

 

Lending commitments are agreements to lend to customers in accordance with contractual provisions; these are either for a specified period or, as in the case of credit cards and overdrafts, represent a revolving credit facility which can be drawn down at any time, provided that the agreement has not been terminated. The total amounts of unused commitments do not necessarily represent future cash requirements, in that commitments often expire without being drawn upon.

 

Lloyds Banking Group’s financial guarantee contracts are accounted for as financial instruments and measured at fair value on the balance sheet. The contractual nominal amounts of these guarantees totalled £6,883 million at 31 December 2016 (with £3,815 million expiring within one year; £667 million between one and three years; £1,334 million between three and five years; and £1,067 million over five years).

Lloyds Banking Group’s banking businesses are also exposed to liquidity risk through the provision of securitisation facilities to certain corporate customers. At 31 December 2016,2019, Lloyds Banking Group offered securitisation facilities to its corporate and financial institution client base through its conduit securitisation vehicles, Argento, Cancara and Grampian. These are funded in the global asset-backed commercial paper market. The assets and obligations of these conduits are included in Lloyds Banking Group’s consolidated balance sheet. Lloyds Banking Group provides short-term asset-backed commercial paper liquidity support facilities on commercial terms to the issuers of the commercial paper, for use in the event of a market disturbance should they be unable to roll over maturing commercial paper or obtain alternative sources of funding.

 

Details of securitisations and other special purpose entity arrangements entered into by theLloyds Banking Group are provided in notes 1932 and 2049 to the financial statements. The successful development of Lloyds Banking Group’s ability to securitise its own assets has provided a mechanism to tap a well established market, thereby diversifying Lloyds Banking Group’s funding base.

 

Within Lloyds Banking Group’s insurance businesses, the principal sources of liquidity are premiums received from policyholders, charges levied upon policyholders, investment income and the proceeds from the sale and maturity of investments. The investment policies followed by Lloyds Banking Group’s life assurance companies take account of anticipated cash flow requirements including by matching the cash inflows with projected liabilities where appropriate. Cash deposits and highly liquid government securities are available to provide liquidity to cover any higher than expected cash outflows.

100

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

CAPITAL RISK

DEFINITION

Capital risk is defined as the risk that the Group has a sub-optimal quantity or quality of capital or that capital is inefficiently deployed across the Group.

EXPOSURES

A capital risk exposure arises when the Group has insufficient capital resources to support its strategic objectives and plans, and to meet external stakeholder requirements and expectations. This could arise due to a depletion of the Group’s capital resources as a result of the crystallisation of any of the risks to which it is exposed. Alternatively a shortage of capital could arise from an increase in the amount of capital that is needed to be held. The Group’s capital management approach is focused on maintaining sufficient capital resources to prevent such exposures while optimising value for shareholders.

MEASUREMENT

The Group measures the amount of capital it holds using the regulatory framework defined by the Capital Requirements Directive and Regulation (CRD IV) as implemented in the UK by the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA). Full details of the Group’s regulatory capital and leverage frameworks will be provided in the Group’s Pillar 3 Report.

The minimum amount of total capital, under Pillar 1 of the regulatory framework, is determined as 8 per cent of aggregate risk-weighted assets. At least 4.5 per cent of risk-weighted assets are required to be covered by common equity tier 1 (CET1) capital and at least 6 per cent of risk-weighted assets are required to be covered by tier 1 capital. These minimum Pillar 1 requirements are supplemented by additional minimum requirements under Pillar 2 of the regulatory framework and a number of regulatory capital buffers as described below.

Additional minimum requirements are set by the PRA by the issuance of bank specific Individual Capital Guidance (ICG). This reflects a point in time estimate by the PRA, which may change over time, of the minimum amount of capital that is needed by the bank. It includes the assessment of risks that are not fully covered by Pillar 1, such as credit concentration and operational risk, and those risks not covered at all by Pillar 1, such as pensions and interest rate risk in the banking book (IRRBB).

The Group is also required to maintain a number of regulatory capital buffers, which are required to be met with CET1 capital.

Systemic buffers are designed to hold systemically important banks to higher capital standards, so that they can withstand a greater level of stress before requiring resolution.

There are three systemic buffers in the Capital Requirements Directive:

The G-SII buffer is applied to global systemically important institutions. The Group has not been classified as a G-SII.
The O-SII buffer may be applied to other systemically important institutions. The Group has been classified as an O-SII by the PRA, but the O-SII buffer is set to zero in the UK.
The Systemic Risk Buffer (SRB) will be applied to ring-fenced banks from 1 January 2019. In July 2016 the FPC published their methodology for quantifying the buffer for each ring-fenced bank and in December 2016 the PRA published their statement of policy on their approach for implementing the SRB. The size of buffer applied to the Group’s ring-fenced bank (RFB) sub-group in 2019 will be dependent upon the total assets of the sub-group. The largest buffer the FPC anticipates applying to any ring-fenced bank is 2.5 per cent.

Although the SRB will apply at a sub consolidated level within the Group’s structure, the PRA have indicated that they will include in the PRA Buffer that applies to the Group an amount equivalent to the RFB’s Systemic Risk Buffer. The amount included in the PRA Buffer is expected to be lower as a percentage of Group RWAs reflecting the assets of the Group that will not be held in the RFB sub-group and for which the SRB will not apply to.

The capital conservation buffer (CCB) is a standard buffer of 2.5 per cent of risk-weighted assets designed to provide for losses in the event of stress and is being phased in over the period from 1 January 2016 to 1 January 2019. During 2016 it was 0.625 per cent and during 2017 it is 1.25 per cent.

The countercyclical capital buffer (CCYB) is time-varying and is designed to require banks to hold additional capital to remove or reduce the build-up of systemic risk in times of credit boom, providing additional loss absorbing capacity and acting as an incentive for banks to constrain further credit growth. The amount of the buffer is determined by reference to buffer rates set by the FPC for the individual countries where the Group has relevant credit risk exposures. The buffer is currently set at zero for the UK, however non-zero rates for Norway, Sweden and Hong Kong were in place at 31 December 2016. Given that the Group has minimal exposures to these jurisdictions, the overall requirement is negligible. The UK CCYB rate was set to increase from 0 per cent to 0.5 per cent of risk-weighted assets on 29 March 2017, at which time the overlapping aspects of Pillar 2 supervisory capital buffers would be removed or reduced. However, following the EU referendum, on 5 July 2016 the FPC announced in their Financial Stability Report that the planned 0.5 per cent UK CCYB would not be implemented in March 2017 and the zero per cent rate was expected to remain until at least June 2017. The FPC also recommended that where existing Pillar 2 supervisory buffers reflect risks that would be captured by a UK CCYB rate, the PRA should reduce those buffers by an amount of capital which is equivalent to the effect of a UK CCYB rate of 0.5 per cent. The FPC has also indicated that it expects to review the UK CCYB and to set a rate in the region of 1 per cent of risk-weighted assets when risks are judged to be neither subdued nor elevated, but the rate can be set in excess of this level. Any increase in CCYB would take effect 1 year after it is set.

The FPC can also set sectoral capital requirements which are temporary increases to banks’ capital requirements on exposures to specific sectors, if the FPC judges that exuberant lending to those sectors poses risks to financial stability. No sectoral capital requirements currently apply to the Group.

As part of the capital planning process, forecast capital positions are subjected to extensive stress analyses to determine the adequacy of the Group’s capital resources against the minimum requirements, including ICG. The PRA uses the outputs from some of these stress analyses as one of the inputs that inform the setting of a bank-specific capital buffer for the Group, known as the PRA Buffer. The PRA Buffer also takes into account the CCB, CCYB and any sectoral capital requirements that already apply to the Group. The PRA requires the PRA Buffer to remain confidential between the Group and the PRA.

All buffers are required to be met with CET1 capital. A breach of the PRA buffer would trigger a dialogue between the Group and the PRA to agree what action is required whereas a breach of the CRD IV combined buffer (all regulatory buffers excluding the PRA buffer) would give rise to automatic constraints upon any discretionary capital distributions by the Group.

101

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

In addition to the risk-based capital framework outlined above, the Group is also subject to minimum capital requirements under the UK’s Leverage Ratio Framework. The leverage ratio is calculated by dividing fully loaded tier 1 capital resources by a defined measure of on balance sheet assets and off balance sheet items.

The minimum leverage ratio in the UK is 3 per cent, in line with current Basel requirements. In addition the UK framework requires two buffers to be maintained: an Additional Leverage Ratio Buffer (ALRB), which is calculated as 35 per cent of the Systemic Risk Buffer (applicable from 2019) and a time-varying Countercyclical Leverage Buffer (CCLB) which is calculated as 35 per cent of the countercyclical capital buffer rate (currently set at 0 per cent). At least 75 per cent of the minimum 3 per cent requirement and the entirety of any buffers that may apply must be met by CET1 capital.

The leverage ratio framework does not currently give rise to higher capital requirements for the Group than the risk-based capital framework.

MITIGATION

The Group has a capital management framework including policies and procedures that are designed to ensure that it operates within its risk appetite, uses its capital resources efficiently and continues to comply with regulatory requirements.

The Group is able to accumulate additional capital through the retention of profits over time, which can be enhanced through cutting costs and reducing or cancelling dividend payments, by raising new equity via, for example, a rights issue or debt exchange and by raising additional tier 1 or tier 2 capital through issuing tier 1 instruments or subordinated liabilities. The cost and availability of additional capital is dependent upon market conditions and perceptions at the time. The Group is also able to manage the demand for capital through management actions including adjusting its lending strategy, risk hedging strategies and through business disposals.

Additional measures to manage the Group’s capital position include seeking to optimise the generation of capital demand within the Group’s businesses to strike an appropriate balance of capital held within the Group’s Insurance and banking subsidiaries and through improving the quality of its capital through liability management exercises.

MONITORING

Capital is actively managed and regulatory ratios are a key factor in the Group’s planning processes and stress analyses. Multi-year forecasts of the Group’s capital position, based upon the Group’s operating plan, are produced at least annually to inform the Group’s capital strategy whilst shorter term forecasts are more frequently undertaken to understand and respond to variations of the Group’s actual performance against the plan. The capital plans are tested for capital adequacy using a range of stress scenarios covering adverse economic conditions as well as other adverse factors that could impact the Group and the Group maintains a Recovery Plan which sets out a range of potential mitigating actions that could be taken in response to a stress.

Regular reporting of actual and projected ratios, including those in stressed scenarios, is undertaken, including submissions to the Group Capital Risk Committee (GCRC), Group Financial Risk Committee (GFRC), Group Asset and Liability Committee (GALCO), Group Risk Committee (GRC), Board Risk Committee (BRC) and the Board. Capital policies and procedures are subject to independent oversight.

The regulatory framework within which the Group operates continues to evolve and further detail on this will be provided in the Group’s Pillar 3 report. The Group continues to monitor these developments very closely, analysing the potential capital impacts to ensure that, through organic capital generation, the Group continues to maintain a strong capital position that exceeds the minimum regulatory requirements and the Group’s risk appetite and is consistent with market expectations.

Target capital ratios

The Board’s view of the current level of CET1 capital required to grow the business, meet regulatory requirements and cover uncertainties and future regulatory developments remains at around 13 per cent.

This takes into account, amongst other things:

the Pillar 2A Individual Capital Guidance (ICG) set by the PRA, reflecting their point in time estimate, which may change over time, of the amount of capital that is needed in relation to risks not covered by Pillar 1. During the year the PRA updated the Group’s ICG representing a reduction from 4.6 per cent to 4.5 per cent of risk-weighted assets at 31 December 2016, of which 2.5 per cent has to be covered by CET1 capital.
the PRA Buffer, which they set taking into account the results of the PRA stress tests and other information, as well as outputs from the Group’s internal stress tests and other information. In November 2016 the PRA published the results of its 2016 stress tests which showed the Group’s capital depletion to be 2.5 per cent after management actions compared to 3.3 per cent in the 2015 PRA stress tests and 4.8 per cent in the 2014 PRA stress tests. The PRA requires the PRA buffer to remain confidential between the Group and the PRA.
future regulatory developments, including the introduction of the Systemic Risk Buffer in 2019.

In addition, the Group targets a transitional total capital ratio of around 20 per cent.

Dividend policy

The Group has established a dividend policy that is both progressive and sustainable. Ordinary dividends are expected to increase over the medium term to a dividend payout ratio of at least 50 per cent of sustainable earnings. The Board interprets progressive to indicate a dividend per share that is expected to increase over the medium term. Sustainable earnings represents the long term earnings generation of the business. Sustainable earnings are defined as earnings after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders adjusted to remove the effects of market volatility, exceptional conduct or litigation events, major liability management or restructuring and other one off items such as the sale of businesses, and exceptional underlying business performance.

The Board also gives due consideration to the distribution of surplus capital through the use of special dividends or share buy-backs. Surplus capital represents capital over and above the amount management wish to retain to grow the business, meet regulatory requirements and cover uncertainties. The amount of required capital may vary from time to time depending on circumstances and the Board will continue to give due consideration, subject to the situation at the time, to the distribution of any surplus capital. By its nature, there can be no guarantee that this level of special dividends or any surplus capital distribution will be appropriate in future years.

The ability of the Group to pay a dividend is also subject to constraints including the availability of distributable reserves, legal and regulatory restrictions and the financial and operating performance of the entity.

102

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Distributable reserves are determined as required by the Companies Act 2006 by reference to a company’s individual financial statements. At 31 December 2016 Lloyds Banking Group plc (‘the Company’) had accumulated distributable reserves of approximately £8,500 million. Substantially all of the Company’s merger reserve is available for distribution under UK company law as a result of transactions undertaken to recapitalise the Company in 2009.

Lloyds Banking Group plc acts as a holding company which also issues capital and other securities to capitalise and fund the activities of the Group. The profitability of the holding company, and consequently its ability to sustain dividend payments, is therefore dependent upon the continued receipt of dividends from its subsidiaries (representing both banking and insurance). A number of Group subsidiaries, principally those with banking and insurance activities, are also subject to regulatory capital requirements. These require entities to maintain minimum amounts of capital related to their size and risk. The principal operating subsidiary is Lloyds Bank plc which, at 31 December 2016, had a consolidated CET1 capital ratio of 15.1 per cent (31 December 2015: 15.2 per cent). The Group actively manages the capital of its subsidiaries, which includes monitoring the regulatory capital ratios for its banking and insurance subsidiaries against approved risk appetite limits. It operates a formal capital management policy which requires all subsidiary entities to remit any surplus capital to their parent companies.

During 2016 the Group has continued to simplify the Group’s internal capital structure and to ensure that profits generated by subsidiary entities can be more easily remitted to the Company. This included the court approved capital reduction by Lloyds Bank plc.

Analysis of capital position

During 2016 the Group continued to strengthen its capital position with a fully loaded CET1 ratio, after accruing for foreseeable dividends, of 13.4 per cent and 13.7 per cent on an adjusted basis upon recognition of the dividend paid by the Insurance business in February 2017 in relation to its 2016 earnings (31 December 2015: 13.0 per cent on an adjusted basis). The accrual for foreseeable dividends includes both the recommended full year ordinary dividend of 2.55 pence per ordinary share and a special dividend of 0.5 pence per ordinary share.

The final and special dividends proposed were consistent with a CET1 ratio on an adjusted basis retaining circa 0.8 per cent of capital, above the current target level, to cover the estimated capital impact of the MBNA acquisition that was announced in December 2016. Subsequently, on 2 March 2017, the FCA provided further clarification in relation to the consultation paper dealing with PPI, resulting in an additional provision of £350 million being recorded, reducing the adjusted CET1 ratio by 18 bps to 13.7 per cent.

Over the year the Group generated around 1.7 per cent of CET1 capital on an adjusted basis, pre dividend, primarily as a result of the following:

Strong underlying capital generation of 2.2 per cent, largely driven by underlying profits;
The dividend paid by the Insurance business in February 2017 in relation to its 2016 earnings of 0.2 per cent;
Impact of conduct charges of (1.2) per cent;
Impact of market movements, netting to 0.2 per cent. This included 0.8 per cent from the impact of the accounting reclassification of c.£20 billion of gilts within the liquidity portfolio from ‘held-to-maturity’ to ‘available-for-sale’, offset by a number of market related movements, including an adverse impact of movements in the defined benefit pension schemes of (0.4) per cent;
Other items largely representing a reduction in risk-weighted assets, most notably in the fourth quarter, largely relating to active portfolio management, disposals, an improvement in credit quality and capital efficient securitisation activity, partially offset by model updates related to UK mortgage portfolios and the impact of the redemption of the remaining series of Enhanced Capital Notes in the first quarter.

After accruing for foreseeable dividends, the transitional total capital ratio reduced by 0.3 percentage points to 21.2 per cent, primarily reflecting managed reductions in tier 2 capital, largely due to calls and redemptions, partially offset by the increase in CET1 capital and the reduction in risk-weighted assets.

In 2020 the Group will have to meet a Minimum Requirement for Own Funds and Eligible Liabilities (MREL). During 2016 the Group commenced issuance of senior unsecured securities from Lloyds Banking Group plc, which, while not included in total capital, are eligible to meet MREL, £2.5 billion (Sterling equivalent) was issued in 2016 and a further £2.2 billion (Sterling equivalent) was issued in January 2017 leaving the Group well positioned to meet MREL requirements from 2020.

The leverage ratio, after accruing for foreseeable dividends, was 4.8 per cent (4.9 per cent on an adjusted basis).

An analysis of the Group’s capital position as at 31 December 2016 is presented in the following section applying CRD IV transitional arrangements and also on a fully loaded CRD IV basis, both as implemented in the UK by the PRA.

103

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

The table below summarises the consolidated capital position of the Group.

Table 1.49:Capital resources

  Transitional  Fully loaded
  At 31 Dec  At 31 Dec  At 31 Dec  At 31 Dec 
  2016  20151  2016  20151 
  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Capital resources (audited)                
Common equity tier 1                
Shareholders’ equity per balance sheet  42,670   41,234   42,670   41,234 
Adjustment to retained earnings for foreseeable dividends  (1,568)  (1,427)  (1,568)  (1,427)
Deconsolidation adjustments1  1,342   1,119   1,342   1,119 
Adjustment for own credit  87   67   87   67 
Cash flow hedging reserve  (2,136)  (727)  (2,136)  (727)
Other adjustments1  (276)  (97)  (276)  (97)
   40,119   40,169   40,119   40,169 
less: deductions from common equity tier 1                
Goodwill and other intangible assets  (1,623)  (1,719)  (1,623)  (1,719)
Prudent valuation adjustment  (630)  (372)  (630)  (372)
Excess of expected losses over impairment provisions and value adjustments  (602)  (270)  (602)  (270)
Removal of defined benefit pension surplus  (267)  (721)  (267)  (721)
Securitisation deductions  (217)  (169)  (217)  (169)
Significant investments1  (4,317)  (4,500)  (4,317)  (4,529)
Deferred tax assets  (3,564)  (3,874)  (3,564)  (3,884)
Common equity tier 1 capital  28,899   28,544   28,899   28,505 
Additional tier 1                
Other equity instruments  5,320   5,355   5,320   5,355 
Preference shares and preferred securities2  4,998   4,728       
Transitional limit and other adjustments  (1,692)  (906)      
   8,626   9,177   5,320   5,355 
less: deductions from tier 1                
Significant investments1  (1,329)  (1,177)      
Total tier 1 capital  36,196   36,544   34,219   33,860 
Tier 2                
Other subordinated liabilities2  14,833   18,584   14,833   18,584 
Deconsolidation of instruments issued by insurance entities1  (1,810)  (1,665)  (1,810)  (1,665)
Adjustments for transitional limit and non-eligible instruments  1,351   (52)  (1,694)  (3,066)
Amortisation and other adjustments  (3,447)  (3,880)  (3,597)  (4,885)
   10,927   12,987   7,732   8,968 
Eligible provisions  186   221   186   221 
less: deductions from tier 2                
Significant investments1  (1,571)  (1,756)  (2,900)  (2,933)
Total capital resources  45,738   47,996   39,237   40,116 
                 
Risk-weighted assets  215,446   222,845   215,446   222,747 
                 
Common equity tier 1 capital ratio3  13.4%   12.8%   13.4%  12.8%
Tier 1 capital ratio  16.8%   16.4%   15.9%   15.2% 
Total capital ratio  21.2%   21.5%   18.2%   18.0% 

1For regulatory capital purposes, the Group’s Insurance business is deconsolidated and replaced by the amount of the Group’s investment in the business. A part of this amount is deducted from capital (shown as ‘significant investments’ in the table above) and the remaining amount is risk-weighted, forming part of threshold risk-weighted assets. The presentation of the deconsolidation of the Group’s insurance entities has been amended for 2016 with comparative figures restated accordingly.
2Preference shares, preferred securities and other subordinated liabilities are categorised as subordinated liabilities in the balance sheet.
3The common equity tier 1 ratio is 13.7 per cent on an adjusted basis upon recognition of the dividend paid by the Insurance business in February 2017 in relation to its 2016 earnings (31 December 2015: 13.0 per cent on an adjusted basis).
104

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

The key differences between the transitional capital calculation as at 31 December 2016 and the fully loaded equivalent are as follows:

Capital securities that previously qualified as tier 1 or tier 2 capital, but do not fully qualify under CRD IV, can be included in tier 1 or tier 2 capital (as applicable) up to specified limits which reduce by 10 per cent per annum until 2022.
The significant investment deduction from additional tier 1 (AT1) will gradually transition to tier 2.

The movements in the transitional CET1, AT1, tier 2 and total capital positions in the period are provided below.

Table 1.50:Movements in capital resources

  Common  Additional     Total 
  Equity Tier 1  Tier 1  Tier 2  capital 
  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 31 December 2015  28,544   8,000   11,452   47,996 
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders1  1,720         1,720 
Movement in foreseeable dividends2  (141)        (141)
Dividends paid out on ordinary shares during the year  (2,014)        (2,014)
Dividends in respect of 2015 earnings received from the insurance business1  500         500 
Movement in treasury shares and employee share schemes  134         134 
Pension movements:                
Removal of defined benefit pension surplus  454         454 
Movement through other comprehensive income  (954)        (954)
Available-for-sale reserve  1,197         1,197 
Prudent valuation adjustment  (258)        (258)
Deferred tax asset  310         310 
Goodwill and other intangible assets  96         96 
Excess of expected losses over impairment provisions and value adjustments  (332)        (332)
Significant investments  183   (152)  185   216 
Eligible provisions        (35)  (35)
Movements in subordinated debt:                
Repurchases, redemptions and other     (551)  (3,211)  (3,762)
Issuances        1,151   1,151 
Other movements  (540)        (540)
At 31 December 2016  28,899   7,297   9,542   45,738 

1Under the regulatory framework, profits made by Insurance are removed from CET1 capital. However, when dividends are paid to the Group by Insurance these are recognised through CET1 capital.
2Includes the accrual for the 2016 full year ordinary and special dividends and the reversal of the accrual for the 2015 full year ordinary and special dividends which were paid during the year.

CET1 capital resources have increased by £355 million in the year largely as a result of profit generation in the year, dividends received from the Insurance business and the favourable movement in the available-for-sale reserve following the accounting reclassification of gilts within the liquidity portfolio from held-to-maturity. These movements in CET 1 capital were partially offset by dividends paid out during the year, movements in the defined benefit pension schemes largely driven by the impact of credit spreads, an increase in the excess of expected losses over impairment provisions and value adjustments primarily as a result of the implementation of recently published EBA guidance restricting prudent valuation adjustments eligible for offset against expected losses, and the accrual of the full year ordinary and special dividends, representing returns to ordinary shareholders following strong capital generation.

AT1 capital resources have reduced by £703 million in the year, primarily reflecting the annual reduction in the transitional limit applied to grandfathered AT1 capital instruments and an increase in the significant investments deduction.

Tier 2 capital resources have reduced by £1,910 million in the year largely reflecting calls and redemptions, including the redemption of all remaining series of Enhanced Capital Notes (ECNs) under the Regulatory Call Right, and the amortisation of dated tier 2 instruments, partly offset by the issuance of a new dated tier 2 instrument, foreign exchange movements on subordinated debt, the transitioning of grandfathered AT1 instruments to tier 2 and a reduction in the significant investments deduction.

The redemption of the remaining series of ECNs followed the decision of the Court of Appeal in December 2015 that a Capital Disqualification Event (CDE) in relation to the ECNs had occurred. The Group subsequently exercised its option to redeem them in the first quarter of 2016. In June 2016 the UK Supreme Court confirmed the decision of the Court of Appeal.

105

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table 1.51:Risk-weighted assets

  At 31 Dec  At 31 Dec 
  2016  2015 
  £m  £m 
Foundation Internal Ratings Based (IRB) Approach  64,907   68,990 
Retail IRB Approach  64,970   63,912 
Other IRB Approach  17,788   18,661 
IRB Approach  147,665   151,563 
Standardised (STA) Approach  18,956   20,443 
Credit risk  166,621   172,006 
Counterparty credit risk  8,419   7,981 
Contributions to the default fund of a central counterparty  340   488 
Credit valuation adjustment risk  864   1,684 
Operational risk  25,292   26,123 
Market risk  3,147   3,775 
Underlying risk-weighted assets  204,683   212,057 
Threshold risk-weighted assets1  10,763   10,788 
Total risk-weighted assets  215,446   222,845 
Movement to fully loaded risk-weighted assets2     (98)
Fully loaded risk-weighted assets  215,446   222,747 

1Threshold risk-weighted assets reflect the element of the significant investments and deferred tax assets that are permitted to be risk-weighted instead of deducted from CET1 capital. Significant investments primarily arise from the investment in the Group’s Insurance business.
2Differences may arise between transitional and fully loaded threshold risk-weighted assets where deferred tax assets reliant on future profitability and arising from temporary timing differences and significant investments exceed the fully loaded threshold limit, resulting in an increase in amounts deducted from CET1 capital rather than being risk-weighted.

Table 1.52:Risk-weighted assets movement by key driver

  Credit risk  Credit risk     Counterparty     Operational    
  IRB  STA  Credit risk1  Credit risk2  Market risk  risk  Total 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Fully loaded risk-weighted assets as at 31 December 2015                          222,747 
Less total threshold risk-weighted assets3                          (10,690)
Risk-weighted assets at 31 December 2015  151,563   20,443   172,006   10,153   3,775   26,123   212,057 
Asset size  (4,453)  (440)  (4,893)  (1,542)  (139)     (6,574)
Acquisitions and disposals  (3,406)  (435)  (3,841)  (183)        (4,024)
Model updates  4,363      4,363   99   (951)     3,511 
Methodology and policy  (1,215)  (1,184)  (2,399)           (2,399)
Asset quality  (2,989)  (75)  (3,064)  729   (200)     (2,535)
Movements in risk levels (Market risk only)              662      662 
Foreign exchange  3,802   647   4,449   367         4,816 
Other                 (831)  (831)
Risk-weighted assets as at 31 December 2016  147,665   18,956   166,621   9,623   3,147   25,292   204,683 
Threshold risk-weighted assets3                          10,763 
Total risk-weighted assets as at 31 December 2016                          215,446 

1Credit risk includes securitisation risk-weighted assets.
2Counterparty credit risk includes movements in contributions to the default fund of central counterparties and movements in credit valuation adjustment risk.
3Threshold risk-weighted assets reflect the element of significant investments and deferred tax assets that are permitted to be risk-weighted instead of being deducted from CET1 capital. Significant investments primarily arise from investment in the Group’s Insurance business.

The risk-weighted assets movement tables provide analyses of the reduction in risk-weighted assets in the period by risk type and an insight into the key drivers of the movements. The key driver analysis is compiled on a monthly basis through the identification and categorisation of risk-weighted asset movements and is subject to management judgment.

Credit risk-weighted assets reductions of £5.4 billion were driven by the following key movements:

Asset size movements. Credit risk-weighted assets decreased by £4.9 billion, primarily due to active portfolio management, partially offset by continued growth in targeted customer segments.
Disposals of the Group’s interest in strategic equity investments and other targeted disposals reduced credit risk-weighted assets by £3.8 billion.
Model update increases of £4.4 billion were mainly related to the Mainstream and buy-to-let UK mortgage portfolios.
Methodology and policy reductions of £2.4 billion are principally due to securitisation activity.
106

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Asset quality movements capture movements due to changes in borrower risk, including changes in the economic environment. Net reductions in credit risk-weighted assets of £3.1 billion primarily relate to model calibrations and a net change in credit quality, reflecting improvements in the economic climate, partly offset by increases in the valuation of centrally held strategic equity investments.
Foreign exchange movements reflect the depreciation of Sterling which has contributed to a £4.4 billion increase in credit risk-weighted assets.

Counterparty credit risk assets decreased by £0.5 billion mainly driven by increased capital relief from CVA related hedges partially offset by increased trading activity, foreign exchange and yield curve movements.

Market risk-weighted assets reduced by £0.6 billion due to a reduction in the Value-at-Risk multiplier, improvements to the VaR model and active portfolio management.

Operational risk-weighted assets reduced by £0.8 billion due to the annual update of the income based TSA operational risk calculation.

STRESS TESTING

The Group undertakes a wide ranging programme of stress testing providing a comprehensive view of the potential impacts arising from the risks to which the Group is exposed. One of the most important uses of stress testing is to assess the resilience of the operational and strategic plans of the Group to adverse economic conditions and other key vulnerabilities. As part of that the Group participates in the UK-wide concurrent stress test run by the Bank of England.

During 2016, the Group was subject to the European Banking Authority’s Europe-wide stress test with the Group’s results significantly above its minimum capital requirements. The concurrent UK stress test run by the Bank of England was also undertaken in 2016. As announced in November, the Group comfortably exceeded the capital thresholds set by the PRA and was not required to take any action as a result of this test.

LEVERAGE RATIO

Table 1.53: Leverage ratio

  Fully loaded 
  At 31 Dec  At 31 Dec 
  2016  2015 
  £m  £m 
Total tier 1 capital for leverage ratio        
Common equity tier 1 capital  28,899   28,505 
Additional tier 1 capital  5,320   5,355 
Total tier 1 capital  34,219   33,860 
Exposure measure        
Statutory balance sheet assets        
Derivative financial instruments  36,138   29,467 
Securities financing transactions (SFTs)  42,285   34,136 
Loans and advances and other assets  739,370   743,085 
Total assets  817,793   806,688 
Deconsolidation adjustments1        
Derivative financial instruments  (2,403)  (1,510)
Securities financing transactions (SFTs)  112   (441)
Loans and advances and other assets  (142,990)  (133,975)
Total deconsolidation adjustments  (145,281)  (135,926)
Derivatives adjustments        
Adjustments for regulatory netting  (20,490)  (16,419)
Adjustments for cash collateral  (8,432)  (6,464)
Net written credit protection  699   682 
Regulatory potential future exposure  13,188   12,966 
Total derivatives adjustments  (15,035)  (9,235)
SFT adjustments  39   3,361 
Off-balance sheet items  58,685   56,424 
Regulatory deductions and other adjustments  (9,128)  (9,112)
Total exposure  707,073   712,200 
Leverage ratio2  4.8%   4.8% 
Average leverage ratio3  4.9%     
Average leverage ratio exposure measure4  718,914     

1Deconsolidation adjustments predominantly reflect the deconsolidation of assets related to Group subsidiaries that fall outside the scope of the Group’s regulatory capital consolidation (primarily the Group’s Insurance entities).
2The countercyclical leverage ratio buffer is currently nil.
3The average leverage ratio is based on the average of the month end tier 1 capital and exposure measures over the quarter (30 September 2016 to 31 December 2016). The average of 4.9 per cent compares to 4.8 per cent at the start and end of the quarter.
4The average leverage ratio exposure measure is based on the average of the month end exposure measures over the quarter (30 September 2016 to 31 December 2016).
107

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

KEY MOVEMENTS

The Group’s fully loaded leverage ratio was increased by 9 basis points reflecting the impact of both the increase in tier 1 capital and the £5.1 billion reduction in the exposure measure, the latter largely reflecting the reduction in liquid asset holdings.

The derivatives exposure measure, representing derivative financial instruments per the balance sheet net of deconsolidation and derivatives adjustments, reduced marginally with market movements and trading activity broadly offset through netting and cash collateral inflows.

The increase in SFT assets over the period, reflecting increased customer volumes, was offset by the reduction in SFT adjustments reflecting both the recognition of additional eligible netting adjustments and a reduction in the counterparty credit risk add-on.

Off-balance sheet items increased by £2.3 billion, primarily reflecting a change in the profile and subsequent classification of commercial off-balance sheet items and a net increase in securitisation financing facilities, partially offset by a planned drawdown on certain liquidity facilities supporting the Group’s conduit programme to provide funding alongside the proceeds of the ABCP issurance.

The average leverage ratio of 4.9 per cent over the quarter reflected a strengthening tier 1 capital position prior to the accrual for the announced full year special dividend and the reduction in balance sheet assets during the quarter, largely reflecting the reduction in liquid asset holdings.

MODIFIED UK LEVERAGE RATIO

The Group’s leverage ratio on a modified basis, excluding qualifying central bank claims from the leverage exposure measure, is 5.1 per cent. This follows the rule modification applied to the UK Leverage Ratio Framework by the PRA in August 2016 as a result of recommendations made by the Financial Policy Committee.

The Financial Policy Committee has indicated that it intends to recalibrate the UK framework in 2017 in order to adjust for the impact of the rule modification, thereby ensuring that levels of capital currently required to meet leverage ratio minimums are maintained. The modified UK leverage ratio should therefore be considered in the context of the proposed recalibration.

G-SIB INDICATORS

Although the Group is not currently classified as a Global Systemically Important Bank (G-SIB), by virtue of the Group’s leverage exposure measure exceeding €200 billion the Group is required to report G-SIB indicator metrics to the PRA. The Group’s indicator metrics used within the 2016 Basel G-SIBs annual exercise will be disclosed from April 2017, and the results are expected to be made available by the Basel Committee later this year.

INSURANCE BUSINESSES

The business transacted by the insurance companies within the Group comprises both life insurance business and general insurance business. Life insurance business comprises unit-linked business, non-profit business and with-profits business.

Scottish Widows Limited (SW Ltd) holds the only with-profit funds managed by the Group. Each insurance company within the Group is regulated by the PRA.

The Solvency II regime for insurers and insurance groups came into force from 1 January 2016. The insurance businesses are required to calculate solvency capital requirements and available capital on a risk-based approach. The insurance business of the Group calculates regulatory capital on the basis of an internal model, which was approved by the PRA on 5 December 2015.

The minimum required capital must be maintained at all times throughout the year. These capital requirements and the capital available to meet them are regularly estimated in order to ensure that capital maintenance requirements are being met.

All minimum regulatory requirements of the insurance companies have been met during the year.

REGULATORY AND LEGAL RISK

DEFINITION

Regulatory and legal risk is defined as the risk that the Group is exposed to fines, censure, or legal or enforcement action; or to civil or criminal proceedings in the courts (or equivalent) and/or the Group is unable to enforce its rights due to failing to comply with applicable laws (including Codes of Practice which could have legal implications), regulations, codes of conduct or legal obligations.

EXPOSURES

Whilst the Group has a zero risk appetite for material regulatory breaches or material legal incidents, the Group remains exposed to material regulatory breaches and material legal incidents outside of its risk appetite. Exposure is driven by significant ongoing and new legislation, regulation and court proceedings in the UK and overseas which in each case needs to be interpreted, implemented and embedded into day-to-day operational and business practices across the Group.

MEASUREMENT

Regulatory and legal risks are measured against a set of risk appetite metrics, with appropriate thresholds, which are approved annually by the Board and which are regularly reviewed and monitored. Metrics include assessments of control and material regulatory rule breaches.

108

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

MITIGATION

The Group has taken a number of steps and have outlined below the following key components:

The Board establishes a Group-wide risk appetite and metrics for Regulatory and Legal Risk;
Group policies and procedures set out the principles and key controls that should apply across the business which are aligned to the group risk appetite. Mandated policies and processes require appropriate control frameworks, management information, standards and colleague training to be implemented to identify and manage regulatory and legal risk;
Business units assess and implement policy and regulatory requirements and establish local control, processes and procedures to ensure governance and compliance;
Material risks and issues are escalated to divisional and then Group-level bodies which challenge and support the business on its management of them;
Business units regularly produce management information to assist in the identification of issues and test management controls are working effectively;
Risk Division and Legal provide oversight and proactive support and constructive challenge to the business in identifying and managing regulatory and legal issues;
Risk Division will conduct thematic reviews of regulatory compliance across businesses and divisions where appropriate;
Business units with the support of divisional and Group-Level bodies conduct ongoing horizon scanning to identify and address changes in regulatory and legal requirements.

MONITORING

Business unit risk exposure is reported to Risk Division where it is aggregated at Group level and a report prepared. The report forms the basis of challenge to the business at the monthly Group Conduct, Compliance and Operational Risk Committee. This committee may escalate matters to the Chief Risk Officer, or higher committees. The report also forms the basis of the regulatory and legal sections in the Group’s consolidated risk reporting.

STATE AID COMMITMENTS

In 2015 the Group satisfied all material structural and behavioural commitments following the successful carve-out and disposal of TSB with respect to the State Aid commitments agreed with the European Commission under the State Aid regime in 2009. The Group is therefore no longer subject to restrictive behavioural commitments including the constraint on acquisitions, but continue to be bound by two remaining limited ancillary commitments which means that the Group remains subject to supervision by the European Commission with respect to these commitments until they cease to have effect on or before June 2017.

INSURANCE RISK

DEFINITION

Insurance risk is defined as the risk of adverse developments in the timing, frequency and severity of claims for insured/underwritten events and in customer behaviour, leading to reductions in earnings and/or value.

EXPOSURES

The major sources of insurance risk within the Group are the Insurance business and the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes.

Longevity and persistency are key risks within the life and pensions business. Longevity risk arises from the annuity portfolios where policyholders’ future cashflows are guaranteed at retirement and increases in life expectancy, beyond current assumptions, will increase the cost of annuities. Longevity risk exposures are expected to increase with the Insurance business growth in the bulk annuity market. Persistency assumptions are set to give a best estimate however, customer behaviour may result in increased cancellations or cessation of contributions.

Property insurance risk is a key risk within the general insurance business, through Home Insurance, and exposures can arise, for example, in extreme weather conditions, such as flooding, when property damage claims are higher than expected.

The prime insurance risk of the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes is longevity.

MEASUREMENT

Insurance risks are measured using a variety of techniques including stress, reverse stress and scenario testing, as well as stochastic modelling. Current and potential future insurance risk exposures are assessed and aggregated on a range of stresses including risk measures based on 1-in-200 year stresses for Insurance’s regulatory capital assessments and other supporting measures where appropriate, including those set out in note 33 to the financial statements. For measuring the longevity risk in the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes both 1-in-20 year stresses (risk appetite) and 1-in-200 year stresses (regulatory capital) are utilised. For further information on defined benefit schemes please refer to note 36 to the financial statements.

MITIGATION

Insurance risk in the Insurance business is mitigated in a number of ways:

General insurance exposure to accumulations of risk and possible catastrophes is mitigated by reinsurance arrangements broadly spread over different reinsurers. Detailed modelling, including that of the potential losses under various catastrophe scenarios, supports the choice of reinsurance arrangements.
Insurance processes on underwriting, claims management, pricing and product design.
Longevity risk transfer and hedging solutions are considered on a regular basis. A team of longevity and bulk pricing experts has been built to support the new bulk annuity proposition.
109

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Exposure limits by risk type are assessed through the business planning process and used as a control mechanism to ensure risks are taken within risk appetite.

The most significant insurance risk in the defined benefit pension schemes is longevity risk. The merits of longevity risk transfer and hedging solutions are regularly reviewed.

MONITORING

Insurance risks in the Insurance business are monitored by Insurance senior executive Committees and ultimately the Insurance Board. Governance of the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes includes two specialist pension committees. Significant risks from the Insurance business and the defined benefit pension schemes are reviewed by the Group Executive and Group Risk Committees and/or Board.

Insurance risk exposures within the Insurance business are monitored against risk appetite. The Insurance business monitors experiences against expectations, for example business volumes and mix, claims and persistency experience. The effectiveness of controls put in place to manage insurance risk is evaluated and significant divergences from experience or movements in risk exposures are investigated and remedial action taken.

Progress against risk appetite metrics in respect of longevity risk in the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes is regularly reported and reviewed by the relevant committees.

PEOPLE RISK

DEFINITION

People risk is defined as the risk that the Group fails to lead, manage and enable colleagues to deliver the Group’s strategy for customers, shareholders and regulators.

EXPOSURES

The Group’s management of material people risks is critical to its capacity to deliver against its strategic objectives and to be the best bank for customers. Over the coming year the Group anticipates the following key people risk exposures:

Maintaining organisational skills, capability, resilience and capacity levels in response to increasing volumes of organisational, political and external market change;
Senior Managers and Certification Regime (SM&CR) and additional regulatory constraints on remuneration structures may impact the Group’s ability to attract and retain talent;
The increasing digitisation of the business is changing the capability mix required and may impact the Group’s ability to attract and retain talent; and
Colleague engagement may continue to be challenged by ongoing media attention on banking sector culture, sales practices and ethical conduct.

MEASUREMENT

People risk is measured through a series of quantitative and qualitative indicators, aligned to key sources of people risk for the Group such as succession, retention, colleague engagement and performance management. In addition to risk appetite measures and limits, people risks and controls are monitored on a monthly basis via the Group’s risk governance framework and reporting structures.

MITIGATION

The Group takes many mitigating actions with respect to people risk. Key areas of focus include:

Focusing on leadership and colleague engagement, through delivery of strategies to attract, retain and develop high calibre people together with implementation of rigorous succession planning;
Continued focus on the Group’s culture by developing and delivering initiatives that reinforce the appropriate behaviours which generate the best possible long-term outcomes for customers and colleagues;
Managing organisational capability and capacity through divisional people strategies to ensure there are the right skills and resources to meet customers’ needs and deliver our strategic plan;
Maintain effective remuneration arrangements to ensure they promote an appropriate culture and colleague behaviours that meet customer needs and regulatory expectations;
Ensuring compliance with legal and regulatory requirements related to SM&CR, embedding compliant and appropriate colleague behaviours in line with Group policies, values and its people risk priorities; and
Ongoing consultation with the Group’s recognised unions on changes which impact their members.

MONITORING

People risks from across the Group are monitored and reported through Board and Group Governance Committees in accordance with the Group’s Risk Management Framework and People Risk sub-framework. Risk exposures are discussed monthly via the Group People Risk Committee with upwards reporting to Group Risk and Executive Committees. In addition oversight, challenge and reporting is completed at Risk Division level and combined with Risk Assurance reviews, assesses the effectiveness of controls, recommending follow up remedial action if relevant. All material People Risk events are escalated in accordance with the formal Group Operational Risk Policy and People Policies to the respective Divisional Managing Directors and the Group Director, Conduct, Compliance and Operational Risk.

110

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

FINANCIAL REPORTING RISK

DEFINITION

Financial reporting risk is defined as the risk that the Group suffers reputational damage, loss of investor confidence and/or financial loss arising from the adoption of inappropriate accounting policies, ineffective controls over business or finance processes impacting financial, prudential regulatory, and tax reporting, failure to manage the associated risks of changes in taxation rates, law, corporate ownership or structure and the failure to disclose timely and appropriate information in accordance with regulatory requirements.

EXPOSURES

Exposure represents the sufficiency of the Group’s policies and procedures to maintain adequate systems, processes and controls to support statutory, prudential regulatory and tax reporting, to prevent and detect financial reporting fraud, to manage the Group’s tax position and to support regulatory disclosures.

MEASUREMENT

Financial reporting risk is measured by the adequacy of, and compliance with, a number of key controls. Identification of potential financial reporting risk also forms a part of the Group’s Operational Risk management framework.

MITIGATION

The Group maintains a system of internal controls, which is designed to:

ensure that accounting policies are consistently applied, transactions are recorded and undertaken in accordance with delegated authorities, that assets are safeguarded and liabilities are properly recorded;
enable the calculation, preparation and reporting of financial, prudential regulatory and tax outcomes in accordance with applicable International Financial Reporting Standards, statutory and regulatory requirements; and
ensure that disclosures are made on a timely basis in accordance with statutory and regulatory requirements and as far as possible are consistent with best practice and in compliance with the British Bankers’ Association Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure.

MONITORING

Financial reporting risk is actively monitored at business unit and Group levels. There are specific programmes of work undertaken across the Group to support:

annual assessments of: (i) the effectiveness of internal controls over financial reporting; and (ii) the effectiveness of the Group’s disclosure controls and procedures, both in accordance with the requirements of the US Sarbanes Oxley Act; and
annual certifications by the Senior Accounting Officer with respect to the maintenance of appropriate tax accounting arrangements, in accordance with the requirements of the 2009 Finance Act.

The Group also has in place an assurance process to support its prudential regulatory reporting and monitoring activities designed to identify and review tax exposures on a regular basis. There is ongoing monitoring to assess the impact of emerging regulation and legislation on financial, prudential regulatory and tax reporting.

The Group has a Disclosure Committee which assists the Group Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer in fulfilling their disclosure responsibilities under relevant listing and other regulatory and legal requirements. In addition, the Audit Committee reviews the quality and acceptability of the Group’s financial disclosures. For further information on the Audit Committee’s responsibilities relating to financial reporting see pages 167 to 170.

GOVERNANCE RISK

 

DEFINITION

 

Governance risk is defined as the risk that the Group’s organisational infrastructure fails to provide robust oversight of decision makingdecision-making and the control mechanisms to ensure strategies and management instructions are implemented effectively.

 

EXPOSURES

 

The internal and corporate governance arrangements of major financial institutions continue to be subject to a high level of regulatory and public scrutiny. The Group’s exposure to governance risk is also reflective of the significant volume of existing and proposed legislation and regulation, both within the UK and overseasacross the multiple jurisdictions within which it operates, with which it must comply. Risk governance and risk culture are mutually reinforcing.

 

MEASUREMENT

 

The Group’s governance arrangements are assessed against new or proposed legislation and regulation and best practice among peer organisations in order to identify any areas of enhancement required.

 

Model Risk appetite considers the performance of the Group’s most material models.

MITIGATION

 

The Group’s Risk Management Framework (RMF)enterprise risk management framework (ERMF) establishes robust arrangements for risk governance, in particular by:

 

Defining individual and collective accountabilities for risk management, risk oversight and risk assurance through a Three Linesthree lines of Defencedefence model which supports the discharge of responsibilities to customers, shareholders and regulators;
  
Outlining governance arrangements which articulate the enterprise-wide approach to risk management; and
111

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Supporting a consistent approach to Group-wide behaviour and risk decision makingdecision-making through a Group Policy Frameworkpolicy framework which helps everyone understand their responsibilities by clearly articulating and communicating rules, standards, boundaries and risk appetite measures which can be controlled, enforced and monitored.

Under the banner of the RMF,ERMF, training modules are in place to support all colleagues in understanding and fulfilling their risk responsibilities.

 

The Ethics and Responsible Business Policy and supporting CodesGroup’s Code of Personal Responsibility and Business Responsibility embody the Group’sembodies its values and reflect its commitment to operating responsibly and ethically both at a business and an individual level. All colleagues are required to adhere to the Codescode in all aspects of their roles.

 

Driving adherence toEffective implementation of the ERMF mutually reinforces and is reinforced by the Group’s RMF goes ‘hand in glove’ with its approach to risk culture, which is embedded in the Group’sits approach to recruitment, selection, training, performance management and reward.

 

MONITORING

 

A review of the Group’s RMF,ERMF, which includes the status of the Group’s Principlesprinciples and Policy Framework,policy framework, and the design and operational effectiveness of key governance committees, is undertaken on an annual basis and the findings are reported to the Group Risk Committee, Board Risk Committee and the Board.

 

This includes a reviewFor further information on corporate governance see pages 143 to 169.


101

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

MARKET RISK

DEFINITION

Market risk is defined as the risk that unfavourable market moves (including changes in and increased volatility of interest rates, market-implied inflation rates, credit spreads and prices for bonds, foreign exchange rates, equity, property and commodity prices and other instruments) lead to reductions in earnings and/or value.

Balance sheet linkages

The information provided in table AN aims to facilitate the understanding of linkages between banking, trading, and insurance balance sheet items and the positions disclosed in the Group’s market risk disclosures.

Table AN:Market risk linkage to the balance sheet

     Banking     
2019 Total
£m
  Trading
book only
£m
  Non-trading
£m
  Insurance
£m
  Primary market risk factor
Assets                  
Cash and balances at central banks  55,130      55,130     Interest rate
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  160,189   17,982   5,352   136,855  Interest rate, foreign exchange, credit spread
Derivative financial instruments  26,369   18,885   5,119   2,365  Interest rate, foreign exchange, credit spread
Financial assets at amortised cost                  
Loans and advances to banks  9,775      9,710   65  Interest rate
Loans and advances to customers  494,988      494,948   40  Interest rate
Debt securities  5,544      5,544     Interest rate, credit spread
   510,307      510,202   105   
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  25,092      25,092     Interest rate, foreign exchange, credit spread
Value of in-force business  5,558         5,558  Equity
Other assets  51,248      22,410   28,838  Interest rate
Total assets  833,893   36,867   623,305   173,721   
                   
Liabilities                  
Deposit from banks  28,179      28,179     Interest rate
Customer deposits  421,320      421,320     Interest rate
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss  21,486   13,955   7,531     Interest rate, foreign exchange
Derivative financial instruments  25,779   15,654   7,719   2,406  Interest rate, foreign exchange, credit spread
Debt securities in issue  97,689      97,689     Interest rate, credit spread
Liabilities arising from insurance and investment contracts  148,908         148,908  Credit spread
Subordinated liabilities  17,130      15,335   1,795  Interest rate, foreign exchange
Other liabilities  25,596      10,678   14,918  Interest rate
Total liabilities  786,087   29,609   588,451   168,027   

The defined benefit pension schemes’ assets and liabilities are included under Other assets and Other liabilities in this table and note 36 on page F-61 provides further information.

The Group’s trading book assets and liabilities are originated within the Commercial Banking division. Within the Group’s balance sheet these fall under the trading assets and liabilities and derivative financial instruments. The assets and liabilities are classified as trading books if they meet the requirements as set out in the Capital Requirements Regulation, article 104. Further information on these activities can be found under the Trading portfolios section on page 107.

Derivative assets and liabilities are held by the Group for three main purposes; to provide risk management solutions for clients, to manage portfolio risks arising from client business and to manage and hedge the Group’s own risks. Insurance business assets and liabilities relate to policyholder funds, as well as shareholder invested assets, including annuity funds. The Group recognises the value of in-force business in respect of Insurance’s long-term life assurance contracts as an asset in the balance sheet (see note 25, page F-51).

The Group ensures that it has adequate cash and balances at central banks and stocks of high quality liquid assets (e.g. gilts or US Treasury securities) that can be converted easily into cash to meet liquidity requirements. The majority of these assets are asset swapped and held at fair value through other comprehensive income with the remainder held as financial assets at fair value through profit and loss. Further information on these balances can be found under funding and liquidity risk on page 94.

The majority of debt issuance originates from the Group’s capital and funding activities and the interest rate risk of the debt issued is hedged by swapping them into a floating rate.

The non-trading book primarily consists of customer on-balance sheet activities and the Group’s current approachcapital and funding activities, which expose it to governancethe risk of adverse movements in market prices, predominantly interest rates, credit spreads, exchange rates and ongoing initiativesequity prices, as described in lightfurther detail within the Banking activities section (page 103).


102

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

MEASUREMENT

In addition to measuring single factors, Group risk appetite is calibrated primarily to five multi-risk Group economic scenarios, and is supplemented with sensitivity-based measures. The scenarios assess the impact of unlikely, but plausible, adverse stresses on income with the latest regulatory guidance, including in 2016 the further enhancement of frameworks to address Senior Managers and Certification Regime (SM&CR) requirements and prepareworst case for the requirement to ring-fence retail banking activities, with effect from January 2019.defined benefit pensions, insurance and trading portfolios reported against independently, and across the Group as a whole.

 

As part ofThe Group risk appetite is cascaded first to the RMF,Group Asset and Liability Committee (GALCO), chaired by the performance of modelsChief Financial Officer, where risk appetite is approved and monitored by risk type, and then to Group Market Risk Committee (GMRC) where risk appetite is sub-allocated by division. These metrics are reviewed regularly monitoredby senior management to inform effective decision-making.

MITIGATION

GALCO is responsible for approving and monitoring group market risks, management techniques, market risk measures, behavioural assumptions, and the market risk policy. Various mitigation activities are assessed and undertaken across the Group to manage portfolios and seek to ensure they remain fit-for-purpose.within approved limits. The mitigation actions will vary dependent on exposure but will, in general, look to reduce risk in a cost effective manner by offsetting balance sheet exposures and externalising to the financial markets dependent on market liquidity. The market risk policy is owned by Group Corporate Treasury (GCT) and refreshed annually. The policy is underpinned by supplementary market risk procedures, which define specific market risk management and oversight requirements.

MONITORING

GALCO and the GMRC regularly review high level market risk exposure as part of the wider risk management framework. They also make recommendations to the Board concerning overall market risk appetite and Group Market Risk Policy. Exposures at lower levels of delegation are monitored at various intervals according to their volatility, from daily in the case of trading portfolios to monthly or quarterly in the case of less volatile portfolios. Levels of exposures compared to approved limits and triggers are monitored by Risk and where appropriate, escalation procedures are in place.

How market risks arise and are managed across the Group’s activities is considered in more detail below.

BANKING ACTIVITIES

Exposures

The Group’s banking activities expose it to the risk of adverse movements in market prices, predominantly interest rates, credit spreads, exchange rates and equity prices. The volatility of market values can be affected by both the transparency of prices and the amount of liquidity in the market for the relevant asset, liability or instrument.

Interest rate risk

Yield curve risk in the Group’s divisional portfolios, and in the Group’s capital and funding activities arises from the different repricing characteristics of the Group’s non-trading assets, liabilities (see loans and advances to customers and customer deposits in table AN) and off-balance sheet positions.

Basis risk arises from the possible changes in spreads, for example where the bank lends with reference to a central bank rate but funds with reference to LIBOR, and the spread between these two rates widens or tightens.

Optionality risk arises predominantly from embedded optionality within assets, liabilities or off-balance sheet items where either the Group or the customer can affect the size or timing of cash flows. One example of this is mortgage prepayment risk where the customer owns an option allowing them to prepay when it is economical to do so. This can result in customer balances amortising more quickly or slowly than anticipated due to customers’ response to changes in economic conditions.

Foreign exchange risk

Economic foreign exchange exposure arises from the Group’s investment in its overseas operations (net investment exposures are disclosed in note 53 on page F-98). In addition, the Group incurs foreign exchange risk through non-functional currency flows from services provided by customer-facing divisions, the Group’s debt and capital management programmes and is exposed to volatility in its CET1 ratio, due to the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates on the retranslation of non-sterling-denominated RWAs.

Equity risk

Equity risk arises primarily from three different sources;

the Group’s private equity investments held by Lloyds Development Capital within the Equities sub-group.
the Group’s strategic equity holdings, for example Visa Inc Preference Shares, now held in the Equities sub-group.
a small exposure to Lloyds Banking Group share price through deferred shares and deferred options granted to employees as part of their benefits package.

Credit spread risk

Credit spread risk arises largely from (i) the liquid asset portfolio held in the management of Group liquidity, comprising of government, supranational and other eligible assets; (ii) the Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA) and Debit Valuation Adjustment (DVA) sensitivity to credit spreads; (iii) a number of the Group’s structured medium-term notes where we have elected to fair value the notes through the profit and loss account; and (iv) banking book assets held at fair value in Commercial Banking under IFRS 9.


103

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Measurement

Interest rate risk exposure is monitored monthly using, primarily:

Market value sensitivity: this methodology considers all repricing mismatches (behaviourally adjusted where appropriate) in the current balance sheet and calculates the change in market value that would result from an instantaneous 25, 100 and 200 basis points parallel rise or fall in the yield curve (subject to an appropriate floor). The market value sensitivities are calculated on a static balance sheet using principal cash flows excluding interest, commercial margins and other spread components and are therefore discounted at the risk free zero-coupon rate.

Interest income sensitivity: this measures the 12 month impact on future net interest income arising from various economic scenarios. These include instantaneous 25, 100 and 200 basis point parallel shifts in all yield curves and the five Group economic scenarios (subject to an appropriate floor). These scenarios are reviewed every year and are designed to replicate severe but plausible economic events, capturing risks that would not be evident through the use of parallel shocks alone such as basis risk and steepening or flattening of the yield curve. An additional negative rates scenario is also used for information purposes where all floors are removed; however this is not measured against the limit framework.

Unlike the market value sensitivities, the interest income sensitivities incorporate additional behavioural assumptions as to how and when individual products would reprice in response to changing rates. In addition a dynamic balance sheet is used which includes the run-off of current assets and liabilities and the addition of planned new business.

Reported sensitivities are not necessarily predictive of future performance as they do not capture additional management actions that would likely be taken in response to an immediate, large, movement in interest rates. These actions could reduce the net interest income sensitivity, help mitigate any adverse impacts or they may result in changes to total income that are not captured in the net interest income.

Structural hedge limits: the structural hedging programme managing interest rate risk in the banking book relies on a number of assumptions made around customer behaviour. A material mismatch between assumptions and reality could lead to a deterioration in earnings. In order to monitor this risk a number of metrics are in place to enhance understanding of risks within this portfolio.

The Group has an integrated Asset and Liability Management (ALM) system which supports non-traded asset and liability management of the Group. This provides a single consolidated tool to measure and manage interest rate repricing profiles (including behavioural assumptions), perform stress testing and produce forecast outputs. The Group is aware that any assumptions based model is open to challenge. A full behavioural review is performed annually, or in response to changing market conditions, to ensure the assumptions remain appropriate and the model itself is subject to annual re-validation, as required under the Group Model Governance Policy. The key behavioural assumptions are:

embedded optionality within products.
the duration of balances that are contractually repayable on demand, such as current accounts and overdrafts, together with net free reserves of the Group.
the re-pricing behaviour of managed rate liabilities namely variable rate savings.

Table AO below shows, split by material currency, the Group’s market value sensitivities to an instantaneous parallel up and down 25 and 100 basis points change to all interest rates.

Table AO: Group Banking activities: market value sensitivity

  2019 2018
   Up
25bps
£m
   Down
25bps
£m
   Up
100bps
£m
   Down
100bps
£m
   Up
25bps
£m
   Down
25bps
£m
   Up
100bps
£m
   Down
100bps
£m
 
Sterling  13.6   (13.6)  52.7   (47.4)  29.1   (29.5)  113.7   (122.4)
US Dollar  (5.6)  5.8   (21.3)  24.3   (7.8)  7.8   (30.6)  31.9 
Euro  (7.2)  2.3   (27.0)  11.1   (3.0)  1.7   (11.2)  7.2 
Other  0.2   (0.2)  0.8   (0.8)  (0.1)  0.1   (0.4)  0.5 
Total  1.0   (5.7)  5.2   (12.8)  18.2   (19.9)  71.5   (82.8)
104

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

This is a risk based disclosure and the amounts shown would be amortised in the income statement over the duration of the portfolio.

The market value sensitivity is driven by temporary customer flow positions not yet hedged plus other positions occasionally held, within limits, by the Group’s wholesale funding desks in order to minimise overall funding and hedging costs. The level of risk is low relative to the size of the total balance sheet.

Table AP below shows supplementary value sensitivity to a steepening and flattening (c.100 basis points around the 3 year point) in the yield curve. This ensures there are no unintended consequences to managing risk to parallel shifts in rates.

Table AP:Group Banking activities: market value sensitivity to a steepening and flattening of the yield curve

  2019 2018
  Steepener
£m
  Flattener
£m
  Steepener
£m
  Flattener
£m
 
Sterling  46.6   (47.5)  38.3   (36.5)
US Dollar  (13.2)  15.3   6.5   (5.7)
Euro  (15.5)  9.7   (6.8)  3.6 
Other  0.4   (0.4)  (0.1)  0.1 
Total  18.3   (22.9)  37.9   (38.5)

The table below shows the banking book income sensitivity to an instantaneous parallel up and down 25 and 100 basis points change to all interest rates.

Table AQ:Group Banking activities: net interest income sensitivity

  2019 2018
  Up
25bps
£m
  Down
25bps
£m
  Up
100bps
£m
  Down
100bps
£m
  Up
25bps
£m
  Down
25bps
£m
  Up
100bps
£m
  Down
100bps
£m
 
Client facing activity and associated hedges  109.4   (147.9)  430.8   (702.8)  76.2   (125.4)  341.6   (538.6)

Income sensitivity is measured over a rolling 12 month basis.

The increase in the net interest income sensitivity to a downwards 100bps shock reflects additional margin compression risk within retail savings and a reduction in the size of the structural hedge.

Basis risk, foreign exchange, equity, and credit spread risks are measured primarily through scenario analysis by assessing the impact on profit before tax over a 12 month horizon arising from a change in market rates, and reported within the Board risk appetite on a monthly basis. Supplementary measures such as sensitivity and exposure limits are applied where they provide greater insight into risk positions. Frequency of reporting supplementary measures varies from daily to quarterly appropriate to each risk type.

Mitigation

The Group’s policy is to optimise reward whilst managing its market risk exposures within the risk appetite defined by the Board. The Group Market Risk Policy and procedures outlines the hedging process, and the centralisation of risk from divisions into GCT, e.g. via the transfer pricing framework. GCT is responsible for managing the centralised risk and does this through natural offsets of matching assets and liabilities, and appropriate hedging activity of the residual exposures, subject to the authorisation and mandate of GALCO within the Board risk appetite. The hedges are externalised to the market by derivative desks within GCT and Commercial Banking Markets. The Group mitigates income statement volatility through hedge accounting. This reduces the accounting volatility arising from the Group’s economic hedging activities by utilising both LIBOR and bank base rate assets. Any hedge accounting ineffectiveness that leads to accounting volatility is continuously monitored.

The largest residual risk exposure arises from balances that are deemed to be insensitive to changes in market rates (including current accounts, a portion of variable rate deposits and investable equity), and is managed through the Group’s structural hedge. Consistent with the Group’s strategy to deliver stable returns, GALCO seeks to minimise large reinvestment risk, and to smooth earnings over a range of investment tenors. The structural hedge consists of longer-term fixed rate assets or interest rate swaps and the amount and duration of the hedging activity is reviewed regularly by GALCO.

Whilst the bank faces margin compression in low rate environments, its exposure to pipeline and prepayment risk are not considered material and are hedged in line with expected customer behaviour. These are appropriately monitored and controlled through divisional Asset and Liability Committees (ALCOs).

Net investment foreign exchange exposures are managed centrally by GCT, by hedging non-sterling asset values with currency borrowing.

Economic foreign exchange exposures arising from non-functional currency flows are identified by divisions and transferred and managed centrally. The Group also has a policy of forward hedging its forecasted currency profit and loss to year end. The Group makes use of both accounting and economic foreign exchange exposures, as an offset against the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates on the value of non-sterling-denominated RWAs. This involves the holding of a structurally open currency position; sensitivity is minimised where, for a given currency, the ratio of the structural open position to RWAs equals the CET1 ratio. Continually evaluating this structural open currency position against evolving non-sterling-denominated RWAs, mitigates volatility in the Group’s CET1 ratio.

Monitoring

The appropriate limits and triggers are monitored by senior executive committees within the banking divisions. Banking assets, liabilities and associated hedging are actively monitored and if necessary rebalanced to be within agreed tolerances.

DEFINED BENEFIT PENSION SCHEMES

Exposures

The Group’s defined benefit pension schemes are exposed to significant risks from their assets and liabilities. The liability discount rate exposes the Group to interest rate risk and credit spread risk, which are partially offset by fixed interest assets (such as gilts and corporate bonds) and swaps. Equity and alternative asset risk arises from direct asset holdings. Scheme membership exposes the Group to longevity risk.

 

For further information on Corporate Governance see pages 152defined benefit pension scheme assets and liabilities please refer to 176.note 36 on page F-61.

 

For further information on Model Risk see page 173.Measurement

Management of the schemes’ assets is the responsibility of the Trustees of the schemes who are responsible for setting the investment strategy and for agreeing funding requirements with the Group. The Group will be liable for meeting any funding deficit that may arise. As part of the triennial valuation process, the Group will agree with the Trustees a funding strategy to eliminate the deficit over an appropriate period.

Longevity risk is measured using both 1-in-20 year stresses (risk appetite) and 1-in-200 year stresses (regulatory capital).

Mitigation

The Group takes an active involvement in agreeing mitigation strategies with the schemes’ Trustees. An interest rate and inflation hedging programme is in place to reduce liability risk. The schemes have also reduced equity allocation and invested the proceeds in credit assets. The Trustees have put


112105

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

in place a longevity swap to mitigate longevity risk. The merits of longevity risk transfer and hedging solutions are reviewed regularly.

Monitoring

In addition to the wider risk management framework, governance of the schemes includes two specialist pensions committees.

The surplus, or deficit, in the schemes is tracked monthly along with various single factor and scenario stresses which consider the assets and liabilities holistically. Key metrics are monitored monthly including the Group’s capital resources of the scheme, the performance against risk appetite triggers, and the performance of the hedged asset and liability matching positions.

INSURANCE PORTFOLIOS

Exposures

The main elements of market risk to which the Group is exposed through the Insurance business are equity, credit spread, interest rate and inflation.

Equity risk arises indirectly through the value of future management charges on policyholder funds. These management charges form part of the value of in-force business (see note 25 on page F-51). Equity risk also arises in the with-profits funds but is less material.
Credit spread risk mainly arises from annuities where policyholders’ future cash flows are guaranteed at retirement. Exposure arises if the
market value of the assets which are held to back these liabilities, mainly corporate bonds and loans, do not perform in line with expectations.
Interest rate risk arises through holding credit and interest assets mainly in the annuity book and also to cover general insurance liabilities, capital requirements and risk appetite.
Inflation exposure arises from a combination of inflation linked policyholder benefits and inflation assumptions used to project future expenses.

Measurement

Current and potential future market risk exposures within Insurance are assessed using a range of techniques including stress, reverse stress and scenario testing, as well as stochastic modelling.

Risk measures include 1-in-200 year stresses used for regulatory capital assessments and single factor stresses for profit before tax.

Table AR demonstrates the impact of the Group’s UK Recession scenario on the Insurance business’ portfolio (with no diversification benefit, but after the impact of Group consolidation on interest rate and credit spreads). The amounts include movements in assets, liabilities and the value of in-force business in respect of insurance contracts and participating investment contracts.


Table AR:Insurance business: profit before tax sensitivities

  Increase (reduction)
in profit before tax
  2019
£m
  2018
£m
 
Interest rates – decrease 100 basis points  116   297 
Inflation – increase 50 basis points  30   93 
Credit spreads – 100% widening  (859)  (823)
Equity – 30% fall  (68)  (38)
Property – 25% fall  (47)  (50)
Total  (828)  (521)

Further stresses that show the effect of reasonably possible changes in key assumptions, including the risk-free rate, equity investment volatility, widening of credit default spreads on corporate bonds and an increase in illiquidity premium, as applied to profit before tax are set out in note 33 on page F-60.

One of the consequences of preparations for the formation of the Ring Fenced Bank was to reduce the impact of some stresses within the Insurance business, though Group exposures may not have materially changed. Examples of this include centralisation of defined benefit pension schemes, and the transfer of specific hedging programmes from the corporate centre to the business unit where the exposure emanated.

Mitigation

Equity and credit spread risks are closely monitored and, where appropriate, asset liability matching is undertaken to mitigate risk. Unit matching has been used since 2018 to reduce the sensitivity of equity movements by matching unit-linked liabilities on a best-estimate view. Hedging strategies are also in place to reduce exposure from unit-linked funds and the with-profit funds.

Interest rate risk in the annuity book is mitigated by investing in assets whose cash flows closely match those on the projected future liabilities. It is not possible to eliminate risk completely as the timing of insured events is uncertain and bonds are not available at all of the required maturities. As a result, the cash flows cannot be precisely matched and so sensitivity tests are used to test the extent of the mismatch.

Other market risks (e.g. interest rate exposure outside the annuity book and inflation) are also closely monitored and where considered appropriate, hedges are put in place to reduce exposure.

Monitoring

Market risks in the Insurance business are monitored by Insurance senior executive committees and ultimately the Insurance Board. Monitoring includes the progression of market risk capital against risk appetite limits, as well as the sensitivity of profit before tax to combined market risk stress scenarios and in year market movements. Asset and liability matching positions and hedges in place are actively monitored and if necessary rebalanced to be within agreed tolerances. In addition market risk is controlled via approved investment policies and mandates.


106

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

TRADING PORTFOLIOS

Exposures

The Group’s trading activity is small relative to its peers and does not engage in any proprietary trading activities. The Group’s trading activity is undertaken solely to meet the financial requirements of commercial and retail customers for foreign exchange, credit and interest rate products. These activities support customer flow and market making activities.

All trading activities are performed within the Commercial Banking division. While the trading positions taken are generally small, any extreme moves in the main risk factors and other related risk factors could cause significant losses in the trading book depending on the positions at the time. The average 95 per cent 1-day trading VaR (Value at Risk; diversified across risk factors) was £0.9 million for 31 December 2019 compared to £0.8 million for 31 December 2018.

Trading market risk measures are applied to all of the Group’s regulatory trading books and they include daily VaR (table AS), sensitivity based measures, and stress testing calculations.

Measurement

The Group internally uses VaR as the primary risk measure for all trading book positions.

Table AS shows some relevant statistics for the Group’s 1-day 95 per cent confidence level VaR that are based on 300 historical consecutive business days to year end 2019 and year end 2018.

The risk of loss measured by the VaR model is the minimum expected loss in earnings given the 95 per cent confidence. The total and average trading VaR numbers reported below have been obtained after the application of the diversification benefits across the five risk types, but does not reflect any diversification between Lloyds Bank Corporate Markets and any other entities. The maximum and minimum VaR reported for each risk category did not necessarily occur on the same day as the maximum and minimum VaR reported at Group level.


107

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

Table AS:Trading portfolios: VaR (1-day 95 per cent confidence level) (audited)

     At 31 December 2019        At 31 December 2018    
  Close
£m
  Average
£m
  Maximum
£m
  Minimum
£m
  Close
£m
  Average
£m
  Maximum
£m
  Minimum
£m
 
Interest rate risk  0.6   0.8   1.6   0.4   0.6   0.7   1.8   0.4 
Foreign exchange risk  0.1   0.1   0.3   0.0   0.1   0.1   2.1    
Equity risk                        
Credit spread risk  0.1   0.2   0.3   0.1   0.2   0.2   0.7   0.1 
Inflation risk  0.4   0.2   0.6   0.1   0.3   0.3   0.7   0.2 
All risk factors before diversification  1.2   1.3   2.2   0.9   1.2   1.3   3.0   0.9 
Portfolio diversification  (0.4)  (0.4)          (0.4)  (0.5)        
Total VaR  0.8   0.9   1.6   0.5   0.8   0.8   2.1   0.4 

The market risk for the trading book continues to be low with respect to the size of the Group and compared to our peers. This reflects the fact that the Group’s trading operations are customer-centric and focused on hedging and recycling client risks.

Although it is an important market standard measure of risk, VaR has limitations. One of them is the use of a limited historical data sample which influences the output by the implicit assumption that future market behaviour will not differ greatly from the historically observed period. Another known limitation is the use of defined holding periods which assumes that the risk can be liquidated or hedged within that holding period. Also calculating the VaR at the chosen confidence interval does not give enough information about potential losses which may occur if this level is exceeded. The Group fully recognises these limitations and supplements the use of VaR with a variety of other measurements which reflect the nature of the business activity. These include detailed sensitivity analysis, position reporting and a stress testing programme.

Trading book VaR (1-day 99 per cent) is compared daily against both hypothetical and actual profit and loss. The 1-day 99 per cent VaR chart for Lloyds Banking Group can be found in the Group’s Pillar 3 Report.

Mitigation

The level of exposure is controlled by establishing and communicating the approved risk limits and controls through policies and procedures that define the responsibility and authority for risk taking. Market risk limits are clearly and consistently communicated to the business. Any new or emerging risks are brought within risk reporting and defined limits.

Monitoring

Trading risk appetite is monitored daily with 1-day 95 per cent VaR and stress testing limits. These limits are complemented with position level action triggers and profit and loss referrals. Risk and position limits are set and managed at both desk and overall trading book levels. They are reviewed at least annually and can be changed as required within the overall Group risk appetite framework.

MODEL RISK

DEFINITION

Model risk is defined as the risk of financial loss, regulatory censure, reputational damage or customer detriment, as a result of deficiencies in the development, application or ongoing operation of models and rating systems.

Models are defined as quantitative methods that process input data into quantitative outputs, or qualitative outputs (including ordinal letter output) which have a quantitative measure associated with them. Model Governance Policy is restricted to specific categories of application of models, principally financial risk, treasury and valuation, with certain exclusions, such as prescribed calculations and project appraisal calculations.

EXPOSURES

There are over 300 models in the Group performing a variety of functions including:

capital calculation;
credit decisioning, including fraud;
pricing models;
impairment calculation;
stress testing and forecasting; and
market risk measurement.

As a result of the wide scope and breadth of coverage, there is exposure to model risk across a number of the Group’s principal risk categories.

MEASUREMENT

The Group risk appetite framework is the key component for measuring the Group’s model risk. Reported monthly to the Group Risk Committee and Board, focus is placed on the performance of the Group’s most material models.

MITIGATION

The model risk management framework, established by and with continued oversight from an independent team in the Risk division, provides the foundation for managing and mitigating model risk within the Group. Accountability is cascaded from the Board and senior management via the Group enterprise risk management framework.

This provides the basis for the Group Model Governance Policy, which defines the mandatory requirements for models across the Group, including:

the scope of models covered by the policy;
model materiality;
roles and responsibilities, including ownership, independent oversight and approval; and
key principles and controls regarding data integrity, development, validation, implementation, ongoing maintenance and revalidation, monitoring, and the process for non-compliance.

The model owner takes responsibility for ensuring the fitness for purpose of the models and rating systems, supported and challenged by the independent specialist Group function.

The above ensures all models in scope of policy, including those involved in regulatory capital calculation, are developed consistently and are of sufficient quality to support business decisions and meet regulatory requirements.

MONITORING

The Group Model Governance Committee is the primary body for overseeing model risk. Policy requires that key performance indicators are monitored for every model to ensure they remain fit for purpose and all issues are escalated appropriately. Material model issues are reported to Group and Board Risk Committees monthly with more detailed papers as necessary to focus on key issues.


108

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

INVESTMENT PORTFOLIO, MATURITIES, DEPOSITS, SHORT-TERM BORROWINGS

 

Trading securities and other financialFinancial assets at fair value through profit or loss; financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (2017: available-for-sale financial assets; held-to-maturity investments;assets); and debt securities classified as loans and receivablesheld at amortised cost

 

The following table sets out the book values and valuationsvaluation (fair value) of the Group’s debt securities, treasury and other bills and equity shares at 31 December for each of the three years indicated.

 

 2016  2016  2015 2015 2014 2014  2019
Book value
£m
 2019
Valuation
£m
  2018
Book value
£m
 2018
Valuation
£m
 2017
Book value
£m
 2017
Valuation
£m
 
 Book value  Valuation  Book value Valuation Book value Valuation 
 £m  £m  £m £m £m £m 
Trading securities and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss                        
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss                        
US treasury and US government agencies  1,607   1,607   663   663   658   658   194   194   474   474   1,458   1,458 
Other government securities  25,125   25,125   21,454   21,454   24,815   24,815   18,660   18,660   17,621   17,621   20,562   20,562 
Other public sector securities  1,325   1,325   2,039   2,039   2,170   2,170   2,126   2,126   2,064   2,064   1,527   1,527 
Bank and building society certificates of deposit  244   244   135   135   554   554   984   984   1,105   1,105   222   222 
Mortgage-backed securities  707   707   1,358   1,358   1,034   1,034   468   468   225   225   400   400 
Other asset-backed securities  1,538   1,538   847   847   850   850   258   258   349   349   1,021   1,021 
Corporate and other debt securities  19,832   19,832   20,316   20,316   22,090   22,090   18,216   18,216   18,310   18,310   19,990   19,990 
Treasury bills and other bills  20   20   74   74   1,459   1,459   19   19   20   20   18   18 
Equity shares  67,697   67,697   60,476   60,476   61,576   61,576   95,789   95,789   77,485   77,485   86,090   86,090 
  118,095   118,095   107,362   107,362   115,206   115,206   136,714   136,714   117,653   117,653   131,288   131,288 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income                        
US treasury and US government agencies  1,979   1,979   3,963   3,963         
Other government securities  11,119   11,119   15,008   15,008         
Bank and building society certificates of deposit        118   118         
Mortgage-backed securities  121   121   120   120         
Other asset-backed securities  60   60   131   131         
Corporate and other debt securities  11,051   11,051   5,151   5,151         
Treasury and other bills  535   535   303   303         
Equity shares  227   227   21   21         
  25,092   25,092   24,815   24,815         
Available-for-sale financial assets                                                
US treasury and US government agencies  7,564   7,564   6,349   6,349   7,226   7,226                   6,760   6,760 
Other government securities  41,150   41,150   18,980   18,980   40,176   40,176                   27,948   27,948 
Bank and building society certificates of deposit  142   142   186   186   298   298                   167   167 
Mortgage-backed securities  108   108   197   197   674   674                   1,156   1,156 
Other asset-backed securities  317   317   319   319   685   685                   255   255 
Corporate and other debt securities  6,030   6,030   5,808   5,808   5,529   5,529                   4,615   4,615 
Treasury bills and other bills              863   863 
Equity shares  1,213   1,213   1,193   1,193   1,042   1,042                   1,197   1,197 
  56,524   56,524   33,032   33,032   56,493   56,493                   42,098   42,098 
Held-to-maturity investments                        
UK government        19,808   19,851       
Debt securities classified as loans and receivables                        
Debt securities held at amortised cost                        
Mortgage-backed securities  2,089   2,065   2,528   2,493   190   155   3,007   3,007   3,272   3,396   2,366   2,351 
Other asset-backed securities  1,290   1,227   1,234   1,173   985   900   876   876   780   642   1,260   1,225 
Corporate and other debt securities  94   11   526   441   164   45   1,664   1,654   1,192   1,206   43   10 
  3,473   3,303   4,288   4,107   1,339   1,100   5,547   5,537   5,244   5,244   3,669   3,586 
Allowance for impairment losses  (76)     (97)     (126)     (3)     (6)     (26)   
  3,397   3,303   4,191   4,107   1,213   1,100   5,544   5,537   5,238   5,244   3,643   3,586 
113109

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

MATURITIES AND WEIGHTED AVERAGE YIELDS OF INTEREST-BEARING SECURITIES

 

The weighted average yield for each range of maturities is calculated by dividing the annualised interest income prevailing at 31 December 20162019 by the book value of securities held at that date.

 

 Maturing within
one year
 Maturing after one but
within five years
 Maturing after five but
within ten years
 Maturing after
ten years
 Maturing within
one year
 Maturing after one but
within five years
 Maturing after five but
within ten years
 Maturing after
ten years
 Amount Yield Amount Yield Amount Yield Amount Yield  Amount
£m
 Yield
%
 Amount
£m
 Yield
%
 Amount
£m
 Yield
%
 Amount
£m
 Yield
%
 
 £m % £m % £m % £m % 
Trading securities and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss                                
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss                                
US treasury and US government agencies        407   1.22   93   2.02   1,107   2.24         68   2.6   86   2.3   40   3.5 
Other government securities  390   1.68   3,484   3.26   2,602   1.89   18,649   2.60   958   3.2   2,667   1.7   2,829   1.7   12,206   2.6 
Other public sector securities        238   2.61   86   3.37   1,001   2.95   1   5.0   487   1.9   294   3.2   1,344   2.7 
Bank and building society certificates of deposit  244   0.93                     984   0.7                   
Mortgage-backed securities        37   1.14   105   4.61   565   2.83         5   2.0   192   4.2   271   4.3 
Other asset-backed securities        121   3.65   583   2.44   834   3.73   15   5.0   26   3.8   6   4.0   211   2.3 
Corporate and other debt securities  12,456   3.48   3,404   5.59   2,841   4.04   1,131   4.15   311   2.5   3,256   4.2   4,361   4.1   10,288   3.3 
Treasury bills and other bills  20   0.50                     19   1.5                   
  13,110       7,691       6,310       23,287       2,288       6,509       7,768       24,360     
Available-for-sale financial assets                                
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income                                
US treasury and US government agencies        4,651   2.78   2,652   5.76   262   3.85         549   0.2   1,430   5.5       
Other government securities  539   0.99   9,045   3.79   15,531   3.05   16,034   3.69   664   7.0   6,183   2.7   3,505   2.0   767   3.0 
Bank and building society certificates of deposit  142   0.07                                           
Mortgage-backed securities  9   2.44   4   1.00         95   0.76               18   0.9   103   0.0 
Other asset-backed securities              41   1.02   276   0.97                     60   4.2 
Corporate and other debt securities  628   1.28   4,267   1.50   1,134   2.04   1   0.00   525   1.5   8,776   1.6   1,750   2.5       
Treasury and other bills  165   0.7   229   2.1   141   2.1       
  1,318       17,967       19,358       16,668       1,354       15,737       6,844       930     
Debt securities classified as loans and receivables                                
Debt securities held at amortised cost                                
Mortgage-backed securities              30   1.8   2,059   1.0         1,913   1.7         1,094   1.5 
Other asset-backed securities  248   0.2   32   0.3   779   1.1   231   1.8   11   0.0   381   0.2   484   1.4       
Corporate and other debt securities  2   0.0   2   0.0         90   0.0   139   1.8   871   2.9   646   2.3   8   1.9 
  250       34       809       2,380       150       3,165       1,130       1,102     

 

The Group’s investment holdings at 31 December 20162019 include £63,253£28,303 million due from the UK government and its agencies and £9,172 million due from the US government and its agencies.

114110

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

MATURITY ANALYSIS AND INTEREST RATE SENSITIVITY OF LOANS AND ADVANCES TO CUSTOMERS AND BANKS AT 31 DECEMBER 20162019

 

The following table analyses the maturity profile and interest rate sensitivity of loans by type on a contractual repayment basis at 31 December 2016.2019. Following the reduction in the Group’s non-UK activities, an analysis between domestic and foreign operations is not provided.

 

All amounts are before deduction of impairment allowances. Demand loans are included in the ‘maturing in one year or less’ category.

 

 Maturing in one Maturing after
one but within
 Maturing after   
 year or less five years five years Total 
 £m £m £m £m  Maturing in one
year or less
£m
 Maturing after
one but within
five years
£m
 Maturing after
five years
£m
 Total
£m
 
Loans and advances to banks  21,812   4,973   117   26,902   6,422   57   3,298   9,777 
Loans and advances to customers:                                
Mortgages  11,614   47,535   247,533   306,682   14,138   51,009   233,994   299,141 
Other personal lending  5,418   4,621   10,722   20,761   4,079   5,871   19,322   29,272 
Property companies  5,266   10,404   16,522   32,192   3,560   13,010   11,026   27,596 
Financial, business and other services  26,234   13,311   9,652   49,197   69,807   11,826   8,130   89,763 
Transport, distribution and hotels  6,097   4,649   2,574   13,320   6,440   3,985   2,591   13,016 
Manufacturing  4,598   2,133   554 �� 7,285   3,658   1,892   543   6,093 
Other  9,807   13,311   7,815   30,933   8,696   17,678   6,992   33,366 
Total loans  90,846   100,937   295,489   487,272   116,800   105,328   285,896   508,024 
Of which:                                
Fixed interest rate  23,434   29,776   102,631   155,841   73,986   50,235   162,151   286,372 
Variable interest rate  67,412   71,161   192,858   331,431   42,814   55,093   123,745   221,652 
  90,846   100,937   295,489   487,272   116,800   105,328   285,896   508,024 

 

DEPOSITS

 

The following tables show the details of the Group’s average customer deposits in each of the past three years.

 

  2016  2016  2015  2015  2014  2014 
  Average  Average  Average  Average  Average  Average 
  balance  rate  balance  rate  balance  rate 
  £m  %  £m  %  £m  % 
Non-interest bearing demand deposits  54,379      45,294      42,049    
Interest-bearing demand deposits  90,272   0.48   83,756   0.47   82,545   0.80 
Savings deposits  164,155   0.57   174,239   1.00   201,046   1.18 
Time deposits  111,751   1.05   122,142   0.99   133,060   1.32 
Total average deposits  420,557   0.60   425,431   0.79   458,700   1.04 

  2019
Average
balance
£m
  2019
Average
rate
%
  2018
Average
balance
£m
  2018
Average
rate
%
  2017
Average
balance
£m
  2017
Average
rate
%
 
Non-interest bearing demand deposits  74,906      72,913      66,276    
Interest-bearing demand deposits  85,251   0.50   92,190   0.41   94,627   0.33 
Savings deposits  162,290   0.50   152,304   0.38   168,013   0.23 
Time deposits  93,713   0.82   98,476   0.86   86,043   1.15 
Total average deposits  416,160   0.48   415,883   0.44   414,959   0.41 

Following the reduction in the Group’s non-UK activities, an analysis between domestic and foreign operations is not provided.

 

CERTIFICATES OF DEPOSIT AND OTHER TIME DEPOSITS

 

The following table gives details of the Group’s certificates of deposit issued and other time deposits at 31 December 20162019 individually in excess of US $100,000 (or equivalent in another currency) by time remaining to maturity. Following the continuing reduction in the Group’s non-UK activities, an analysis between domestic and foreign operations is not provided.

 

   Over 3 months Over 6 months     
 3 months but within but within Over   
 or less 6 months 12 months 12 months Total 
 £m £m £m £m £m  3 months
or less
£m
 Over 3 months
but within
6 months
£m
 Over 6 months
but within
12 months
£m
 Over
12 months
£m
 Total
£m
 
Certificates of deposit  2,668   3,692   1,642   70   8,072   2,643   4,277   3,398   280   10,598 
Time deposits  26,051   5,877   6,778   4,692   43,398   15,899   4,703   4,990   2,245   27,837 
Total  28,719   9,569   8,420   4,762   51,470   18,542   8,980   8,388   2,525   38,435 
115111

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

 

SHORT-TERM BORROWINGS

 

Short-term borrowings are included within the balance sheet captions ‘Deposits by banks’, ‘Customer accounts’ and ‘Debt securities in issue’ and are not identified separately on the balance sheet. The short-term borrowings of the Group consist of overdrafts from banks, securities sold under agreements to repurchase, notes issued as part of the lending securitisations, certificates of depositdepost issued, commercial paper and promissory notes issued and other marketable paper. Securities sold under agreements to repurchase certificates of deposit issued, commercial paper, securitisation notes and covered bonds are the only potentially significant short-term borrowings of the Group.

 

The following tables give details of thesethe significant short-term borrowings of the Group for each of the past three years.

 

 2016 2015 2014 
 £m £m £m  2019
£m
 2018
£m
 2017
£m
 
Liabilities in respect of securities sold under repurchase agreements          
Balance at the year end 9,741 7,061 1,075 
Average balance for the year 8,342 5,960 2,104 
Maximum balance during the year 12,734 9,467 9,971 
Average interest rate during the year 0.5% 0.6% 1.1% 
Interest rate at the year end 0.6% 0.6% 1.2% 
Certificates of deposit issued   
Balance at the year end 8,077 11,101 7,033 
Average balance for the year 11,200 11,708 9,912 
Maximum balance during the year 13,712 13,925 11,376 
Average interest rate during the year 0.6% 0.4% 0.4% 
Interest rate at the year end 0.7% 0.2% 0.3% 
Commercial paper   
Balance at the year end 3,281 6,663 7,373 
Average balance for the year 4,666 5,286 8,432 
Maximum balance during the year 7,646 12,700 14,768 
Average interest rate during the year 0.9% 0.6% 0.3% 
Interest rate at the year end 0.0% 0.0% 0.1% 
Securitisation notes   
Balance at the year end 7,253 7,763 11,908   27,635   22,988   25,813 
Average balance for the year 7,131 10,362 13,836   26,905   25,634   18,943 
Maximum balance during the year 7,436 12,155 15,787   31,241   25,813   25,813 
Average interest rate during the year 2.5% 2.4% 2.1%   1.1%  1.0%  0.6%
Interest rate at the year end 2.2% 2.7% 2.0%   1.3%  2.1%  1.4%
Covered bonds               
Balance at the year end 30,521 27,200 27,191   29,821   28,194   26,132 
Average balance for the year 30,625 26,503 29,754   29,674   27,028   26,765 
Maximum balance during the year 32,444 27,200 31,684   30,953   28,194   30,521 
Average interest rate during the year 3.5% 4.2% 4.5%   2.7%  3.0%  3.2%
Interest rate at the year end 3.0% 3.7% 4.3%   2.4%  2.7%  2.8%
116112

MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

 

DIRECTORS AND SENIOR MANAGEMENT

 

The Group is led by the Board comprising a Chairman (who was independent on appointment), independent Non-Executive Directors and Executive Directors with a wide range of experience. The appointment of directorsDirectors is considered by the Nomination and Governance Committee and approved by the Board. Following the provisions in the articles of association, directorsDirectors must stand for election by the shareholders at the first annual general meeting following their appointment. In line with UK Corporate Governance best practice, all Directors are subject to annual re-election by shareholders at each annual general meeting thereafter. Independent Non-Executive Directors are appointed for an initial term of three years after which their appointment may continue subject to an annual review. Their appointment may be terminated, in accordance with statute and the articles of association, at any time with immediate effect and without compensation.

 

The Board meets regularly. In 2016,2019, a total of 9 Board11 scheduled meetings were held, 9 of which were scheduled at the start of the year.held.

 

The roles of the Chairman, the Group Chief Executive and the Board and its governance arrangements, including the schedule of matters specifically reserved to the Board for decision, are reviewed annually. The matters reserved to the Board for decision include the approval of the annual report and accounts and any other financial statements; the payment of dividends; the long-term objectives of the Group; the strategies necessary to achieve these objectives; the Group’s budgets and plans; significant capital expenditure items; significant investments and disposals; the basis of allocation of capital within the Group; the organisational structure of the Group; the arrangements for ensuring that the Group manages risks effectively; any significant change in accounting policies or practices; the appointment of the Company’s main professional advisers (other than the auditors) and their fees;fees (where significant); and the determination of Board and Committee structures, together with their size and composition.

 

According to the articles of association, the business and affairs of the Company are managed by the Directors, who have delegated to management the power to make decisions on operational matters, including those relating to credit, liquidity and market risk, within an agreed framework.

 

All Directors have access to the services of the Company Secretary, and independent professional advice is available to the Directors at the Group’s expense, where they judge it necessary to discharge their duties as directors.

 

The Chairman has a private discussion at least once a year with each Director on a wide range of issues affecting the Group, including any matters which the Directors, individually, wish to raise.

 

There is an induction programme for all Directors, which is tailored to their specific requirements having regard to their specific role on the Board and their skills and experience to date. Major shareholders are also offered the opportunity to meet new Non-Executive Directors.

 

The Directors and senior management of Lloyds Banking Group plc are:

 

NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS

1. Lord Blackwell Chairman

Chairman

Age: 64

Age: 67

Chairman of the Nomination and Governance Committee, memberMember of the Remuneration Committee, the Responsible Business Committee and the Board Risk Committee the Remuneration Committee and the Responsible Business Committee.

Appointed: June 2012 (Board), April 2014 (Chairman)

Skills, experience and contribution:

Skills and experience: Lord Blackwell has deepDeep financial services knowledge including in insurance and banking as well as regulatory

Significant experience with strategic planning and implementation

Regulatory and public policy experience gained from senior positions in Downing Street, Regulators and a wide range of industries. His breadth of experience, credibilityindustries

Credibility with key stakeholders and strong

Strong leadership qualities make him an effective Chairman.

Lord Blackwell wasis an experienced Chairman and Non-Executive Director within the financial services sector having previously thebeen Chairman of Scottish Widows Group,Group. He was previously Senior Independent Director and Interserve plc,Chairman of the UK Board for Standard Life and Director of Group Development at NatWest Group, a Senior IndependentGroup. His past Board roles have also included Chairman of Interserve plc, and Non-Executive Director of Standard Life and also chaired their UK Life and Pensions Board. His past Non-Executive Directorships have included Halma plc, Dixons Group, SEGRO and Ofcom. He was Head of the Prime Minister’s Policy Unit from 1995 to 1997 and was appointed a Life Peer in 1997. He has an MA in Natural Sciences from the University of Cambridge, a Ph.D in Finance and Economics and an MBA from the University of Pennsylvania.

External appointments: Governor of the Yehudi Menuhin School.

Anita Frew

Deputy ChairmanSchool and Independent Director

Age: 59

Chairman of the Remuneration Committee,a member of the Audit Committee,Governing Body of the Board RiskRoyal Academy of Music.

2. Anita Frew Deputy Chairman

Age: 62

Member of the Audit Committee, the Nomination and Governance Committee, andthe Remuneration Committee, the Responsible Business Committee.Committee and the Board Risk Committee

Appointed: December 2010 (Board), May 2014 (Deputy Chairman), May 2017 to December 2019 (Senior Independent Director)

Skills, experience and contribution:

Skills and experience: Anita has significantSignificant board, financial and general management experience

Experience across a range of sectors, including banking, asset and investment management, manufacturing and utilities. Sheutilities

Extensive experience as chairman in a range of industries

Strong board governance experience, including investor relations and remuneration

Anita was previously Chairman of Victrex plc, the Senior Independent Director of Aberdeen Asset Management and IMI plc, an Executive Director of Abbott Mead Vickers, a Non-Executive Director of Northumbrian Water and has held various investment and marketing roles at Scottish Provident and the Royal Bank of Scotland. Her extensive board level, asset and investment management experience makes her a strong Deputy Chairman and Chairman of the Remuneration Committee. She has a BA (Hons) in International Business from the University of Strathclyde, a MRes in Humanities and Philosophy from the University of London and an Honorary DSc for contribution to industry and finance from the University of Cranfield.

External appointments: Chairman of Croda International Plc and a Non-Executive Director of BHP Billiton.

113

Alan Dickinson

Independent DirectorMANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

 

Age: 663. Alan Dickinson Senior Independent Director

Age: 69

Chairman of the Board Risk Committee, memberMember of the Audit Committee, the RemunerationNomination and Governance Committee and the NominationRemuneration Committee.

Appointed: September 2014 (Board), December 2019 (Senior Independent Director)

Skills, experience and Governance Committee.contribution:

Appointed: September 2014

Skills and experience: Alan is a highlyHighly regarded retail and commercial banker having spent

Strong strategic, risk and core banking experience

Regulatory and public policy experience

Alan has 37 yearsyears’ experience with the Royal Bank of Scotland, most notably as Chief Executive of RBS UK. More recently, heAlan was a Non-Executive Director of Willis Limited and Chairman of its Risk Committee. He was formerly

117

MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

Chairman of Brown, Shipley & Co. Limited, and a Non-Executive Director of Nationwide Building Society, where he was Chairman of its Risk Committee. Alan’s strategic focus and core banking experience complements the balance of skills on our Board and makes him ideal for the role of Chairman of the Board Risk Committee. He is a Fellow of the Chartered Institute of Bankers and the Royal Statistical Society and has an MBA from the Manchester Business SchoolCommittee and a BachelorGovernor of Science from the University of Birmingham.

Motability.

External appointments: Chairman of Urban & Civic&Civic plc and a GovernorNon-Executive Director of Motability.England and Wales Cricket Board.

 

4. Simon Henry

Independent Director

Age: 58

Age: 55

MemberChairman of the Audit Committee and Member of the Board Risk Committee.Committee

Appointed: June 2014

Skills, experience and contribution:

Skills and experience: Simon has deepDeep international experience in board level strategy and execution. His extensiveexecution

Extensive knowledge of financial markets, treasury and risk management and his qualification

Qualification as an Audit Committee Financial Expert is

Strong board governance experience, including investor relations and remuneration

Simon was formerly Chief Financial Officer and Executive Director of particular value in our Board Risk and Audit Committees. Simon has a BA in Mathematics, an MA from the University of Cambridge and is a fellow of the Chartered Institute of Management Accountants.

External appointments:Royal Dutch Shell plc. He was also previously Chair of the European Round Table CFO Taskforce and a Member of the Main Committee of the 100 Group of UK FTSE CFOs,CFOs.

External appointments: Non-Executive Director of Rio Tinto plc and Rio Tinto Limited and Chair of their Audit Committee, Independent Director of PetroChina Company Limited, Member of the Defence Board and Chair of the Defence Audit Committee, UK Government, Member of the Advisory Panel of CIMA and of the Advisory Board of the Centre for European Reform. Non-Executive Director of Rio Tinto plc and Rio Tinto Limited (from 1 July 2017). Chief Financial Officer and Executive Director of Royal Dutch Shell plc until 9 March 2017 and will remain available to his successor and the Board of Royal Dutch Shell plc to assist with transition until 30 June 2017.

 

Nick Luff

5. Sarah Legg Independent Director

Age: 49

Chairman of the Audit Committee, member of the Board Risk Committee and the Nomination and Governance Committee.

Appointed: March 2013

Skills and experience:Age: Nick has significant financial experience in the UK listed environment having served in a number of senior finance positions within a range of sectors. His background and experience enables him to fulfil the role of Audit Committee Chair and, for SEC purposes, the role of Audit Committee Financial Expert. Nick was previously the Group Finance Director of Centrica plc, Finance Director of The Peninsular & Oriental Steam Navigation Company and Chief Financial Officer of P&O Princess Cruises plc. He previously served as a Non-Executive Director and was the Audit Committee Chair of QinetiQ Group plc. He is a Mathematics graduate from the University of Oxford and a Chartered Accountant.

External appointments: Executive Director and Chief Financial Officer of RELX Group.

Deborah McWhinney

Independent Director

Age: 61

52

Member of the Audit Committee and the Board Risk Committee.

Appointed: December 2015

Committee

Appointed: December 2019

Skills, experience and experience: Deborahcontribution:

Strong financial leadership skills

Significant experience in financial and regulatory reporting

Strong transformation programme experience

Sarah has an extensive executive backgroundspent her entire career in managing technology, operations and new digital innovations across banking, payments and institutional investment. She broadens the Board’s diversity from a global market perspective. Deborah is a former Chief Executive Officer, Global Enterprise Payments and President, Personal Banking and Wealth Management at Citibank.financial services with HSBC in finance leadership roles. She was the Group Financial Controller and a Group General Manager of HSBC until early 2019 and previously PresidentChief Financial Officer for HSBC’s Asia Pacific region. She also spent 8 years as a Non-Executive Director on the Board of Institutional Services at Charles Schwab Corporation and held executive roles at Engage Media Services Group, Visa International andHang Seng Bank of America, where she held senior roles in Consumer Banking. She holdsLimited, a BSc in Communications from the University of Montana.

Hong Kong listed bank.

External appointments: Honorary Vice President of The Hong Kong Society for Rehabilitation and Chair of the Campaign Advisory Board of King’s College, Cambridge University.

6. Lord Lupton CBE Independent Director and Chairman of Lloyds Bank Corporate Markets plc

Age: 64

Member of the SupervisoryResponsible Business Committee and the Board Risk Committee

Appointed: June 2017

Skills, experience and contribution:

Extensive international corporate experience, especially in financial markets

Strong board governance experience, including investor relations and remuneration

Regulatory and public policy experience

Significant experience in strategic planning and implementation

Lord Lupton was Deputy Chairman of Fresenius Medical Care AGBaring Brothers, co-founded the London office of Greenhill & Co. KGaA, Independent Director, and was Chairman of Fluor Corporation and IHS Markit Ltd,Greenhill Europe. He was previously Chairman of Trustees of Dulwich Picture Gallery, a Trustee of the California InstituteBritish Museum, Governor of TechnologyDowne House School and a member of the Institute for Defense Analyses.International Advisory Board of Global Leadership Foundation. He became a Life Peer in October 2015 and is a former Treasurer of the Conservative Party. He served on the House of Lords Select Committee on Charities.

External appointments: Senior Advisor to Greenhill Europe, Trustee of the Lovington Foundation and Chairman of the Board of Visitors of the Ashmolean Museum with effect from 1 January 2020.

114

MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

 

7. Amanda Mackenzie OBE Independent Director

Age: 56

Member of the Remuneration Committee, the Responsible Business Committee and the Board Risk Committee

Appointed: October 2018

Skills, experience and contribution:

Extensive experience in responsible business

Considerable customer engagement experience

Strong digital technology experience

Significant marketing and brand background

Amanda was a member of Aviva’s Group Executive for seven years and Chief Marketing and Communications Officer. Prior to her current role, Amanda was seconded from Aviva as Executive Adviser to Project Everyone, to help launch the United Nations Sustainable Development Goals. She has over 25 years’ of commercial business practice, including director roles at British Airways AirMiles, BT, Hewlett Packard Inc, British Gas and as a Non-Executive Director of Mothercare plc. Amanda is a Life Fellow of the Royal Society of Arts and Fellow and past President of the Marketing Society.

External appointments: Chief Executive of Business in the Community – The Prince’s Responsible Business Network.

8. Nick Prettejohn

Independent Director and Chairman of Scottish Widows Group

Age: 56

59

Member of the Audit Committee, the Nomination and Governance Committee and the Board Risk Committee.Committee

Appointed: June 2014

Skills, experience and contribution:

Skills and experience: Nick has significantDeep financial services experience, particularly in insurance where he

In-depth regulatory knowledge and experience

Governance experience and strong leadership qualities

Significant experience in strategic planning and implementation

Nick has served as Chief Executive of Lloyd’s of London, and Prudential UK and Europe as well asand Chairman of Brit Insurance. He is a former Non-Executive Director of the Prudential Regulation Authority and of Legal & General Group Plc as well as Chairman of the Financial Services Practitioner Panel. He has the knowledge and experience to provide valuable insight and contribute effectively as a Non-Executive Director and Member of the Audit Committee and Risk Committee as well as the governance experience and leadership qualities to chair Scottish Widows Group. Nick has a First Class Degree in Philosophy, Politics and Economics from Balliol College, University of Oxford.

External appointments: Member of the BBC Trust (until 31 March 2017), Chairman of the Britten-Pears Foundation, the Royal Northern College of MusicPanel and the Financial Conduct Authority’s Financial Advice Working Group. He was previously a Member of the BBC Trust and Chairman of the Britten-Pears Foundation.

External appointments: Chairman of Reach plc (formerly Trinity Mirror plc) and of their Nomination Committee. He is also Chairman of the Royal Northern College of Music and a member of the Board of Opera Ventures.

 

9. Stuart Sinclair Independent Director

Age: 66

Chairman of the Remuneration Committee, Member of the Responsible Business Committee, the Board Risk Committee and the Nomination and Governance Committee

Appointed: January 2016

Skills, experience and contribution:

Extensive experience in retail banking, insurance and consumer finance

Governance and regulatory experience

Significant experience in strategic planning and implementation

Experience in consumer analysis, marketing and distribution

Stuart is a former Non-Executive Director of TSB Banking Group plc, TSB Bank plc, LV Group, Virgin Direct and Vitality Health (formerly Prudential Health). He was previously the Interim Chairman of Provident Financial plc and a former Senior Independent Director of Swinton Group Limited. In his executive career, he was President and Chief Operating Officer of Aspen Insurance after spending nine years with General Electric as Chief Executive Officer of the UK Consumer Finance business then President of GE Capital China. Before that he was Chief Executive Officer of Tesco Personal Finance and Director of UK Retail Banking at the Royal Bank of Scotland. He was a Council member of The Royal Institute for International Affairs (Chatham House).

External appointments: Senior Independent Director and Chair of the Risk & Capital Committee at QBE UK Limited (formerly QBE Insurance (Europe) Limited).

10. Sara Weller CBE Independent Director

Age: 58

Chairman of the Responsible Business Committee, Member of the Nomination and Governance Committee, the Remuneration Committee and the Board Risk Committee

Appointed: February 2012

Skills, experience and contribution:

Background in retail and associated sectors, including financial services

Strong board governance experience, including investor relations and remuneration

Passionate advocate of customers, the community, financial inclusion and the development of digital skills

Considerable experience of boards at both executive and non-executive level

Sara’s previous appointments include Managing Director of Argos, various senior positions at J Sainsbury (including Deputy Managing Director), Chairman of the Planning Inspectorate, Lead Non-Executive Director at the Department of Communities and Local Government, a Board member at the Higher Education Funding Council, a Governing Council Member of Cambridge University, a Non-Executive Director of Mitchells & Butlers as well as a number of senior management roles for Abbey National and Mars Confectionery.

External appointments: Non-Executive Director of United Utilities Group and Chair of their Remuneration Committee, Lead Non-Executive Director at the Department for Work and Pensions, Chair of the Remuneration Committee of New College, Oxford and Trustee of Lloyds Bank Foundation for England and Wales.

115

MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS

11. António Horta-Osório Executive Director and Group Chief Executive

Age: 56

Appointed: January 2011 (Board), March 2011 (Group Chief Executive)

Skills, experience and contribution:

Extensive experience in, and understanding of, both retail and commercial banking built over a period of more than 30 years, working both internationally and in the UK

Drive, enthusiasm and commitment to customers

Proven ability to build and lead strong management teams

António previously worked for Citibank and Goldman Sachs and held various senior management positions at Grupo Santander before becoming its Executive Vice President and member of the Group’s Management Committee. He was a Non-Executive Director of Santander UK and subsequently its Chief Executive. He is also a former Non-Executive Director of the Court of the Bank of England.

External appointments: Non-Executive Director of EXOR N.V., Fundação Champalimaud and Sociedade Francisco Manuel dos Santos in Portugal, a member of the Board of Stichting INPAR Management/Enable and Chairman of the Wallace Collection.

12. William Chalmers Executive Director and Chief Financial Officer

Age: 51

Appointed: August 2019

Skills, experience and contribution:

Significant board level strategic and financial leadership experience including strategic planning and development, mergers and acquisitions, equity and debt capital structuring and risk management

Worked in financial services for over 25 years

William was previously Co-Head of the Global Financial Institutions Group at Morgan Stanley. Prior to that, he held a number of senior roles at Morgan Stanley, including Head of EMEA Financial Institutions Group. Before joining Morgan Stanley, William worked for JP Morgan, again in the Financial Institutions Group.

External appointments: None.

13. Juan Colombás Executive Director and Chief Operating Officer

Age: 57

Appointed: November 2013 (Board), January 2011 to September 2017 (Chief Risk Officer), September 2017 (Chief Operating Officer)

Skills, experience and contribution:

Significant banking and risk management experience

International business and management experience

Juan is responsible for leading a number of critical Group functions and driving the transformation activities across the Group in order to build the Bank of the Future. He was previously the Chief Risk Officer and an Executive Director of Santander’s UK business. Prior to this, he held a number of senior risk, control and business management roles across the Corporate, Investment, Retail and Risk Divisions of the Santander Group. He was previously the Vice Chairman of the International Financial Risk Institute.

External appointments: Member of the FCA Practitioner Panel.

1Lord Blackwell has announced his plan to retire as Group Chairman at or before the AGM in 2021.
2Alan Dickinson has succeeded Anita Frew as Senior Independent Director on 1 December 2019 and will succeed her as Deputy Chairman when she retires from the Board at the AGM in May 2020.
3Juan Colombás has announced his plan to retire from the Group in July 2020.

EMPLOYEES

As at 31 December 2019, the Group employed 63,069 people (on a full-time equivalent basis), compared with 64,928 at 31 December 2018 and 67,905 at 31 December 2017. At 31 December 2019, 62,327 employees were located in the UK, 403 in continental Europe, 277 in the Americas, and 62 in the rest of the world. At the same date, 33,933 people were employed in Retail, 6,505 in Commercial Banking, 4,911 in Insurance and Wealth, and 17,720 in other functions.

The Group has Codes of Responsibility which apply to all employees. The Codes of Responsibility can be found at: www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/Responsible-Business.

116

COMPENSATION

Remuneration Content

 Chairman’s statement and remuneration policy overview 117-121
 Annual report on remuneration 122-133
 2020 Remuneration Policy 134-142

DEAR SHAREHOLDER

On behalf of the Board I am pleased to present the Directors’ Remuneration Report for the year ended 31 December 2019 and the proposed Directors’ Remuneration Policy (our ‘Policy’) for which we are seeking your support and approval at our Annual General Meeting in May 2020.

Our upcoming AGM marks the beginning of our next remuneration policy cycle, which will run until the end of 2022. This offered the opportunity to take a fresh look at how we incentivise and reward our colleagues, and what values and outcomes we wish to encourage.

The timing coincided with a great deal of public interest in matters of executive pay, fairness, employee engagement and the pay gap between those at the top of organisations compared to other colleagues. We have been active participants in these discussions, through meetings with shareholders, our unions, the Investment Association and some members of Parliament, as well as through an open dialogue with colleagues on a variety of topics related to their pay and benefits. These talks have had a material impact on the priorities and recommendations of the Remuneration Committee throughout the last year. In the pages which follow, the proposals which have emerged from these discussions are laid out in detail.

While we were pleased to receive over 90 per cent support for our Annual Report on Remuneration at the AGM in 2019, we heard during that process a continued desire for greater simplicity and transparency in our approach. To that end, we started to make changes early in 2019, without waiting for our full redesign to be finalised.

In November 2019, we announced our decision, subject to AGM approval, to reduce pension allowances for Executive Directors to 15 per cent of salary in a single step in 2020 with no offsetting adjustment in salary or other remuneration. We are also

making improvements to pensions for all the 50,000 colleagues who participate in Defined Contribution (DC) arrangements (the majority of our workforce) to make all members eligible for a maximum employer contribution of 15 per cent, and to increase the employer contribution for our lower paid colleagues by one per cent. This represents a significant investment of approximately £20 million per annum in our colleagues and aligns the employer contributions available to the wider workforce with those of Executive Directors. At the same time, the Group supports the third largest private sector defined benefit (DB) scheme accruing benefits for a further 16,000 current colleagues.

We have listened to feedback and the external sentiment around executive remuneration. Some of the sentiments that resonated with me and my Committee were that executive remuneration should be re-evaluated in the context of colleagues as a whole; be truly variable and not managed within a ‘corridor’ without being closely aligned with outcomes. We have tackled these sentiments head on with our proposals in the new Policy by reducing the new maximum opportunity for Executive Directors and by demonstrating with this year’s outcomes that performance and conduct do have material consequences, resulting in lower total remuneration.

OUR NEW POLICY

In approaching the refresh of the Directors’ Remuneration Policy, my committee colleagues and I thought carefully about what behaviours and outcomes we wanted to see and how the remuneration structure could support them. We approached the review with the following core aims:

 Remuneration should be linked to the Group’s purpose of Helping Britain Prosper
Remuneration should reward and drive the right behaviours and outcomes and reflect both strategic (non-financial) and financial achievements
Remuneration should be designed in a manner that is clear for all stakeholders and reflects their expectations
Remuneration should be easy to explain and be viewed as fair

It was with these objectives in mind that we designed the new Policy detailed on page 134 and summarised on page 119. The key headlines are as follows:

 The maximum pension allowance for Executive Directors is reduced to 15 per cent of salary
 We are introducing a new long-term variable reward plan to align pay more closely to our business model of producing sustainable long-term returns
 As a result of the new Policy, the Group Chief Executive’s fixed pay will reduce by 8 per cent and his maximum total remuneration opportunity by 29 per cent

Given the feedback we have received, we hope you will support the aims and the methods we outline, and vote accordingly ahead of the AGM in May.

GROUP PERFORMANCE AND VARIABLE REMUNERATION

For 2019, the performance of the Group was resilient in a challenging and uncertain economic environment. Despite a softening of margins and income, continued discipline in operating costs enabled the Group to maintain its significant investment in digitising and transforming the way we support customers, as well as to pay an increased dividend to shareholders. Financial results were however heavily impacted by the PPI provision of £2.45 billion; therefore a significant downward adjustment was made to the Group Performance Share pool to reflect this along with other conduct-related costs. The final 2019 Group Performance Share pool is £310.1 million, which is a reduction of 33 per cent compared to 2018. The vesting of the 2017 Executive Group Ownership Share was similarly affected by financial performance and shareholder returns, with a formulaic vesting outcome of 49.7 per cent. No discretion was used to change the vesting outcome.

The performance and strategic progress of the Group was however overshadowed by significant non-financial conduct issues during the latter part of the year, not least the findings of Sir Ross Cranston’s review into how the Group has treated customers who were the victims of the HBOS Reading fraud. These issues are reflected in the variable reward outcomes for Executive Directors.


117

COMPENSATION

EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR VARIABLE REWARDS DECISIONS

As a result of the overall performance of the Group and the issues faced during 2019, the Group Chief Executive and Chief Operating Officer independently requested that they be withdrawn from consideration for Group Performance Share awards for 2019. The Committee exercised its discretion to accept this request and welcomed the judgement shown in volunteering it as a consequence of the non-financial conduct issues mentioned above. No downward adjustment has been made to the overall Group Performance Share pool as a result of these individual decisions, which was therefore distributed to other colleagues outside the executive team.

For the newly appointed Chief Financial Officer, overall performance for 2019 was assessed at 3.12 out of 5 with a corresponding Group Performance Share award of £195,528. An award of 250 per cent of salary will be awarded under the final Executive Group Ownership Share to the Group Chief Executive and 237.5 per cent for Chief Financial Officer. No Group Ownership Share award is being made to the Chief Operating Officer who has announced his retirement. Further details of awards are provided on pages 124 and 130.

Executive Director total remuneration outcomes

The information below summarises Executive Director remuneration for the 2018 and 2019 performance years. Full details are provided in the Single total figure of remuneration table on page 122.

Director 2018  2019    
António Horta Osório Group Chief Executive £6.54m  £4.73m  28%
Juan Colombás Chief Operating Officer £3.42m  £2.58m  25%
William Chalmers Chief Financial Officer 1 Aug 2019    £5.14m    
George Culmer Former Chief Financial Officer 1 Jan-1 Aug 2019 £3.43m  £1.95m    

HOW WE HAVE RESPONDED TO YOUR FEEDBACK

Executive remuneration should be re-evaluated in the context of colleagues as a whole.

The proposed Policy for 2020 reduces the maximum total compensation opportunity for the Group Chief Executive by 29 per cent
The Group Chief Executive’s pension reduced from 46 per cent to 33 per cent in 2018 and will now be 15 per cent with effect from 2020, a decrease of 67 per cent from 2018 to 2020
The ratio of CEO pay to the medium employee has reduced by 24 per cent between 2018 and 2019
We are very focused on addressing the pay gap from the bottom up and not just from the top down, in other words, by taking action to increase pay and pensions for more junior colleagues
In 2019 we have continued our commitment for pay progression with higher pay awards for lower paid colleagues and colleagues paid lower within their pay range
The pay budget for colleagues this year is 2.4 per cent, above the budget of 2 per cent for executives and we will once again make an award of free shares worth £200 to every permanent colleague in the Group. All these actions are intended to reduce the gap between executives and the wider workforce

Variable pay should be truly variable and not managed within a corridor without being closely aligned with outcomes.

The Balanced Scorecard is made up of an appropriate balance of financial and non-financial measures. Targets are determined at the beginning of the year and my Committee and I discuss them thoroughly to ensure they are stretching
When determining reward outcomes, other factors outside of the scorecard are considered. Scores directly correlate to reward outcomes and, as can be seen with this year’s awards, there is clear pay for performance alignment
GPS award outcomes for 2019 show that award outcomes are truly variable and that the structure of the plan ensures that performance and conduct will have a direct impact on remuneration

Your remuneration structure is overly complex

We recognise that our process for determining short-term variable (GPS) outcomes has been perceived to be complex and the link between pay and performance is not easily understood
We have taken steps to reduce complexity through reducing the number of measures in our Group Balanced Scorecard from 20 to 15 for 2019 and 2020. We believe this provides the optimum breadth of measures for a large and complex Group
We’ve focused on simplifying the allocation to our overall Group Performance Share pool by agreeing to use a fixed 5 per cent of underlying profit as the starting position. The Committee will retain discretion to ensure that 5 per cent remains appropriate
To support colleaguesunderstanding of determining Group Performance Share awards across the Group, including for Executive Directors, we have used internal media channels to explain the process in a clear and transparent way and to emphasise the link between pay and performance


Together with my Committee members, I look forward to hearing your views on the remuneration arrangements outlined in the report and we hope the new Policy alongside the resolutions relating to remuneration will receive your support at the upcoming AGM.

 

Stuart Sinclair

Independent Director

Age: 63

Member of the Board Risk Committee and theChairman, Remuneration Committee.Committee

Appointed: January 2016

Skills and experience: Stuart has extensive experience in retail banking, insurance and consumer finance. He is a former Non-Executive Director of TSB Banking Group plc, TSB Bank plc, LV Group and Virgin Direct. In his executive career, he was President and Chief Operating Officer of Aspen

118

MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEESCOMPENSATION

 

Insurance after spending nine years

Proposed Policy overview

Pages 134 to 142 provide an overview of the new proposed 2020 Policy. The full policy can be found on page 115.

Current PolicyProposed changes in Policy and why

Base Salary – Reflective of individual role, taking account of responsibilities, experience and pay in the wider Group.   – Typically reviewed annually, with General Electric,increases effective 1 January.  What:   – We are changing the effective date of increases from 1 January to 1 April for new Executive Directors (EDs).   Why:   – Provides alignment to the award timeline for other colleagues in the Group, meeting our alignment principle.

Fixed Share Award– Ensures fixed remuneration is commensurate with role.   – Delivered in shares.   – 20 per cent released over five years.   What:   – We are changing the release schedule from five to three years. All other aspects remain the same, including quantum.  Why:   – Provides alignment to the release Schedule for other colleagues eligible for a Fixed Share Award in the Group meeting our alignment principle.

Pension – Contributions set as a percentage of base salary (cash salary only).   – Maximum allowance of 46 per cent for Group Chief Executive Officer(GCE) and 25 per cent for other EDs and all future appointments.  What:   – We are reducing the maximum employer pension contribution available to all EDs to 15 per cent of base salary with no compensation for the UK Consumer Finance business then President of GE Capital China. Before that he was Chief Executive Officer of Tesco Personal Finance and Director of UK Retail Banking at the Royal Bank of Scotland. He was a Council member of The Royal Institute for International Affairs (Chatham House). He has an MA in Economics from the University of Aberdeen and an MBA from the University of California.reduction.  Why:   – We agree comparable pension contributions should be available to all colleagues, including EDs.

 

External appointments: Non-Executive DirectorBenefits – Flexible benefit allowance of 4 per cent of base salary in line with other colleagues.   – Other benefits include private medical insurance and Chair of the Risk Committee at Provident Financial plc, Senior Independent Director and Chair of Risk at QBE Insurance (Europe) Limited and Senior Independent Director and Chair of Risk at Swinton Group Limited.car allowance.   – No changes.

 Short Term Variable Group Performance Share (GPS)   – Maximum opportunity of 140 per cent of salary for GCE and 100 per cent of salary for other EDs with normal target to 30 per cent of maximum.   – Performance adjustment including malus and clawback provisions apply.   – No award can be made if threshold performance is not met by the Group or the individual.  What:   – There will be no change in maximum opportunities, however expected value for performance in line with target will change to 50 per cent of maximum.  Why:   – We believe the GPS award is an effective short term variable reward opportunity.   – Simplifying the approach to target performance aligns the design structure to other colleagues and is clearer to articulate. The approach to target setting has been adjusted to ensure that the outcome is no less stretching to achieve.

Anthony Watson CBE

Senior Independent Director

Age: 71

MemberLong Term Variable Group Ownership Share (GOS)   – A long-term incentive plan.   – Maximum opportunity of 400 per cent for the Audit Committee, the Board Risk Committee, the Remuneration Committee and the Nomination and Governance Committee.

Appointed: April 2009 (Board), May 2012 (Senior Independent Director)

Skills and experience: Tony is our Senior Independent Director and with over 40 years of experience in the investment management industry and related sectors, he is well placed to carry out this role. His former positions include Chief Executive of Hermes Pensions Management and Chairman of the Asian Infrastructure Fund, MEPC, the Marks & Spencer Pension Trustees and of the Strategic Investment Board (Northern Ireland). He is also a former Member of the Financial Reporting Council, a Senior Independent Director of HammersonGCE and a Non-Executive Directormaximum of the Shareholder Executive and Vodafone Group. He has a BSc (Hons) in Economics from Queen’s University Belfast, a Diploma in Security Analysis from the New York Institute300 per cent of Finance and is a Barrister at Law, England and Wales.

External appointments: Senior Independent Director of Witan Investment Trust, Chairman of the Lincoln’s Inn Investment Committee and a member of the Norges Bank Investment Management Corporate Governance Advisory Board.

Sara Weller CBE

Independent Director

Age: 55

Chairman of the Responsible Business Committee, member of the Board Risk Committee and the Remuneration Committee.

Appointed: February 2012

Skills and experience: With a background in retail and associated sectors, including financial services, Sara brings a broad perspectivesalary for other EDs.   – Vesting will be subject to the Board. She is a passionate advocateachievement of customers, the community, financial inclusion and the development of digital skills which directly support Lloyds Banking Group’s strategy and her role as Chairman of the Responsible Business Committee. Sara has considerable experience of boards at both executive and non-executive level. Her previous appointments include Managing Director of Argos, various senior positions at J Sainsbury including Deputy Managing Director, Lead Non-Executive Director at the Department of Communities and Local Government, a Non-Executive Director of Mitchells & Butlers as well as a number of senior management roles for Abbey National and Mars Confectionery. She has an MA in Chemistry from Oxford University.

External appointments: Non-Executive Director of United Utilities Group and Chair of their Remuneration Committee, a Governing Council Member of Cambridge University, Chairman of the Planning Inspectorate and Board member at the Higher Education Funding Council.

EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS

António Horta-Osório

Executive Director and Group Chief Executive

Age: 53

Appointed: January 2011 (Board), March 2011 (Group Chief Executive)

Skills and experience: António brings extensive experience in, and understanding of, both retail and commercial banking. This has been builtperformance conditions measured over a period of more than 30 years, working both internationally as well asthree years.   – The Committee retains full discretion to amend the payout levels should the award not reflect business and/or individual performance.   – Award levels set at the time of grant under the rules of the 2016 Long-Term Incentive Plan approved at the AGM on 12 May 2016 and made in the UK. António’s drive, enthusiasmform of conditional shares.  What:   – Introducing the Long Term Share Plan (LTSP), subject to approval at the 2020 AGM. An alternative reward structure to a traditional LTIP that has similarities with restricted share awards.   – Maximum opportunities will significantly reduce from 400 per cent for the GCE and commitment300 per cent for other EDs to customers, along200 per cent of base salary. The normal ‘target’ level of award will be 150 per cent of base salary. Please see page 101 for further explanation of how we determined the right maximum opportunities for the business.   – Remuneration Committee will grant awards based on a discretionary pre-grant test using the Balanced Scorecard to inform decision making.   – Vesting will be subject to a set of three financial underpins.   – Remuneration Committee retains full discretion to amend the vesting levels from that determined should they not reflect performance.  Why:   – The proposed structure provides greater alignment to the delivery of the strategic aims for the Group. Please see our Policy FAQs on page 120 for further understanding of our rationale for the LTSP and how it is structured.  

The Group’s approach to shareholding requirements

The Group currently operates a shareholding policy, please see page 127 for further details.

The Group considers it important to ensure Executive Directors continue to have a substantial shareholding after employment to continue to align their interests with his proven ability to buildshareholders over a longer time horizon than simply whilst in role. Our existing reward structures and lead strong management teams, brings significant value to all stakeholdersthe structure designed through the Long Term Share Plan, which, in line with regulatory requirements, mean that a substantial proportion of Lloyds Banking Group. Previously he workedvariable reward for Goldman Sachs, CitibankExecutive Directors and other senior employees takes the form of shares, deferred and held various senior management positions at Grupo Santander before becoming its Executive Vice President. He wasover a Non-Executive Directorperiod of Santander UK and subsequently its Chief Executive. He is also a former Non-Executive Director ofup to eight years. These structures achieve the Court of the Bank of England and Governor of the London Business School. António has a Degree in Management & Business Administrationoutcomes intended from the Universidade Católica Portuguesa, an MBA from INSEADintroduction of a post-employment shareholding requirement and has completedensure that Executive Directors continue to meet their shareholding requirements for a minimum of two years after leaving the Advanced Management Program at Harvard Business School.

External appointments: Non-Executive Director of EXOR N.V., Fundação ChampalimaudGroup. On this basis, the Group already complies with best practice and Sociedade Francisco Manuel dos Santos in Portugal, a member of the Board of Stichting INPAR and Chairman of the Wallace Collection.

George Culmer

Executive Director and Chief Financial Officer

Age: 54

Appointed: May 2012 (Board)

Skills and experience: George has extensive operational and financial expertise including strategic and financial planning and control. He has worked in financial services in the UK and overseas for over 25 years. George was an Executive Director and Chief Financial Officer of RSA Insurance Group, the former Head of Capital Management of Zurich Financial Services and Chief Financial Officer of its UK operations as well as holding various senior management positions at Prudential. Hetherefore no formal post-employment shareholding policy is a Non-Executive Director of Scottish Widows. George is a Chartered Accountant and has a history degree from the University of Cambridge.

External appointments: None.necessary.

119

COMPENSATION

 

Juan Colombás

Executive Director and Chief Risk Officer

Age: 54

Appointed: January 2011 (Chief Risk Officer), November 2013 (Board)

Skills and experience: Juan has significant banking and risk management experience, having spent 31 years working in these fields both internationally and in the UK. Juan is responsible for developing the Group’s risk framework, recommending its risk appetite and ensuring that all risks generated by the business are measured, reviewed and monitored on an ongoing basis. He was previously the Chief Risk Officer and an Executive Director of Santander’s UK business. Prior to this position, he held a number of senior risk, control and business management roles across the Corporate, Investment, Retail and Risk Divisions of the Santander Group. He has served as the Group’s Chief Risk Officer and as a member of the Group Executive Committee since January 2011. Juan has a BSc in Industrial Chemical Engineering from the Universidad Politécnica de Madrid, a Financial Management degree from ICADE School of Business and Economics and an MBA from the Institute de Empresa Business School.

External appointments: Vice Chairman of the International Financial Risk Institute.

EMPLOYEES

As at 31 December 2016, the Group employed 70,433 people (on a full-time equivalent basis), compared with 75,306 at 31 December 2015 and 84,490 at 31 December 2014. At 31 December 2016, 69,649 employees were located in the UK, 394 in continental Europe, 328 in the Americas, and 62 in the rest of the world. At the same date, 29,639 people were employed in Retail, 5,816 in Commercial Banking, 3,399 in Consumer Finance, 1,874 in Insurance, 19,213 in Group Operations and 10,492 in other functions.

The Group has Codes of Responsibility which apply to all employees. The Codes of Responsibility can be found at: www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/Responsible-Business.

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION

The Committee’s focus goes beyond executive pay to ensure that the interests of all colleagues and shareholders are considered fairly and consistently.

KEY MESSAGESNew Policy FAQs

 

Long Term Share Plan

 Why did you decide the new Long Term Share Plan is more appropriate for your business compared to the traditional LTIP?

We believe this Policy cycle is the most opportune time to restructure our reward package and introduce the LTSP for the following core reasons.

Lower and less volatile potential reward outcomes aligned to a stable long-term business model

We believe that a reward package that has less volatile outcomes is more reflective of our objective of delivering stable and sustainable returns and will incentivise stewardship over longer timeframes.

A simpler structure with one set of annual metrics

In recent years we have received significant feedback on the complexity of our reward structures. Removing multiple scorecards and focusing on a single simplified Balanced Scorecard will give management clearer line of sight and greater alignment of interests to long-term company performance.

Amending the existing LTIP by reducing the number of measures was considered. However, we felt that this would not match the wider objectives of alignment to the Group’s strategy and the experience of colleagues.

The use of a single Balanced Scorecard to inform both variable reward components provides clear line of sight to important annual and strategic measures, which can be tracked year on year through our disclosure.

Promote fairness and consistency

The structure supports reducing the gap between colleague and executive remuneration; the increase in certainty of award outcomes is offset by reduced opportunities.

Performance against strategic goals will be assessed and Committee discretion will play an important role

The Committee will have four opportunities to test performance, using a mixture of clear metrics and discretion, applied against a pre-determined approach.

 Balanced Scorecard

Strategic decisions will, as now, be measured through the inclusion of both financial and non-financial performance metrics within the Balanced Scorecard

 Individual assessment

As now, the Committee will determine if an Executive Director’s personal performance justifies a variation in the assessment of performance or award values determined by the Balanced Scorecard, and will explain how this is determined

Remuneration review concluded

 Pre-grant test

Committee discretion, incorporating an assessment of risk and conduct, will be applied where actual behaviours or outcomes are not adequately captured in 2016, resultingthe Balanced Scorecard assessment

 Underpin assessment

The Committee will make an assessment against the three financial underpins. In addition, the Committee will consider applying a downward discretionary adjustment by asking itself whether there are any non-financial factors that should be considered at vesting

 What factors will the Committee take into account when exercising discretion?

When considering the use of discretion in revised Reward Principlesconjunction with the underpin assessment, the Committee will consider the following key questions:

 Do the Group’s financial results and capital position adequately reflect risk, conduct and any other non-financial considerations?

 Has the Group suffered a serious conduct event or has severe reputational damage arisen from the Group not living its values?

 Has the bank lived up to its ambition to be the Best Bank for Customers?

The Committee will explain its reasons for applying discretion in either direction, or for not doing so.

 How did you determine the new maximum opportunity for the Long Term Share Plan and did you consider shareholder guidelines that there should be at least a 50 per cent discount when moving to a restricted share model?

We are reducing the maximum opportunity for the Group Chief Executive’s long-term awards by 50 per cent from 400 per cent to 200 per cent of base salary, and the normal ‘target’ level of award to 150 per cent of base salary. Unlike a number of restricted share schemes, our Long Term Share Plan will have a pre-grant test to determine the value of awards. As outlined, this will be based on the Balanced Scorecard (consistent with the short term variable remuneration designaward) with the expectation that the achievement of an overall outcome in line with target will lead to an award of 150 per cent of base salary.

Under the Group Ownership Share Plan Executive Directors were eligible to receive a maximum award of 300 per cent. We wanted consistency in award maximum for all Executive Directors. This therefore marks a discount of 33 per cent but we are confident this is appropriate for the business given the use of a pre-grant test, underpins and the Committee’s intention to use discretion where appropriate.

 Why did the Committee decide that the three underpins chosen for the plan are the most appropriate?

The pre-vest test against defined underpins after three years is an important feature to guard against the potential of ‘rewards for

failure.’ After considerable debate, we are confident that focusing on capital strength, relative returns and a progressive and sustainable ordinary dividend aligns with our commitments to shareholders. Underpins will be measured over a three year period year period from grant and each underpin element will determine the vesting of 33 per cent of the original award.

The Committee will have discretion to consider any other events before confirming the vesting of awards using the questions outlined above.

Balanced Scorecard

 How does the use of the Balanced Scorecard ensure that Executive Directors are rewarded for performance aligned to the strategic objectives of the Group?

The Balanced Scorecard is considered by non-executives and management to be a transparent and effective tool to drive and assess performance while meeting regulatory requirements. Each measure has pre-set underlying objectives determined by the Remuneration Committee at the start of the performance year. In the interest of transparency, the Committee can confirm that for 2020 there is no change1 to the 15 measures in the 2019 Balanced Scorecard (fully disclosed on page 123) which the Committee consider provide sufficient breadth across the Group’s strategic priorities.

Strongcore business objectives and the optimum balance to measure our performance as a simple, low-risk, customer-focused UK financial performance overallservices provider:

 Customer measures (33%)

Providing a leading customer experience sits at the core of our strategy. The Group customer dashboard provides an assessment of how effectively we are serving customers across all brands, products and further progress against strategic priorities, supporting bonus outcomeservices, while other measures focused on complaint handling, customer perception, and trust in the Group, measure how effectively we are at being the best bank for customers.

 Colleagues and Conduct measures (33%)

Colleagues are critical to the delivery of £392.9 million. This includedthe Group’s long-term strategy and we confirmed our investment in training and development as part of transforming ways of working to drive better customer outcomes. Ensuring the way we operate is aligned with the Group’s low-risk appetite, as well as in line with the Group’s cultural aspiration, values and behaviours is key to our long-term success.

 Finance measures (33%)

Our financial measures assess the Group’s ability to deliver a 19 per cent downward collective adjustmentcapital efficient, low cost and equatesprofitable bank.

1  The measure in relation to 4.8 per cent of pre-bonus underlying profit.

Executive Director 2016 bonus awards approximately 77 per cent of maximum.
Executive Director single figure remuneration outcomes approximately 35 per cent lower than 2015,external reputation has been expanded to now also include relationship with 2014 Long-Term Incentive Plan awards vesting at 55 per cent of maximum.
Consistent 2 per cent base salary budget applied to all colleagues, including Executive Directors.
To build a long-term ownership culture, all colleagues will, for the first time, receive an award of shares under the new Group Ownership Share Plan.Group’s regulators.

On behalf of the Board and as Chair of the Group’s Remuneration Committee, I have pleasure in presenting the Directors’ remuneration report for the year ended 31 December 2016. I am very grateful for the continued support and engagement we have had with shareholders and their representative bodies, especially during consultations on the outcomes of the remuneration review which I outlined in last year’s statement and which was a key priority for 2016.

OUTCOMES OF THE REMUNERATION REVIEW

The Committee conducted a full review of the Group’s remuneration arrangements in 2016. The main focus of this review was to ensure the remuneration arrangements support our purpose of helping Britain prosper and align to the Group’s aim of becoming the best bank for customers whilst delivering superior and sustainable returns for shareholders. With this in mind, the Committee simplified and updated the Reward Principles that apply across the Group to ensure they support the strategic priorities, as set out below:

Further detail is set out in the ‘Summary of the remuneration review’.

There are no significant changes to the remuneration policy for Executive Directors that is being put to a binding vote at the 2017 AGM, and the maximum opportunity for both the short-term and long-term elements of variable remuneration will remain the same.

120

COMPENSATION

 

FAIR REWARD FOR COLLEAGUES
OUR NEW VARIABLE REWARD STRUCTURE

The Group’s purpose is to support our customers, colleagues and communities and to Help Britain Prosper. The Group’s business model is to be a low risk UK bank and rewards for the executive management team in that business should reflect and encourage the steady creation of shareholder value over the long-term, best measured through the share price. The long-term sustainable success of the business is driven by meeting the needs of different stakeholders and our proposed move to Long Term (restricted) Share awards within our revised variable reward structure

supports these strategic aims. To gain greater understanding of why we believe the implementation of this new approach is now appropriate for the Group and aligns to our business model in our Policy FAQs on page 120.

The diagram below illustrates the performance inputs, underpin assessment and delivery of the Group’s proposed short and long-term variable reward structures. The new structure has multiple test points to ensure the Remuneration Committee can use its discretion and make an evaluation beyond formulaic outcomes. Further details on the use of discretion are explained in full within the Policy on page 137.

Removing complex standalone LTIP metrics and instead using a simplified Balanced Scorecard will give management clearer line of sight and greater alignment of interest to long-term share price performance whilst the underpin and pre-vest test, combined with the long-term delivery of shares over up to eight years, ensure that long-term and multi-year performance assessment is not compromised.

 

The

HOW THE NEW STRUCTURE OPERATES Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 40% 60% Pre-grant performance assessment and sizing of award determined at Remuneration Committee’s focus goes beyond executive pay. I have engaged with the Group’s recognised unions, and I am keen to ensure that the interests of all colleagues are considered in the Committee’s deliberations. We are mindful of the relationship between pay for executives and more junior colleagues, and to that end have sought to ensure consistency of pay outcomes with a salary budget of 2 per cent applied across the whole Group. In order to ensure that the Committee’s approach to remuneration aligns to Group strategy, I have engaged the Responsible Business Committee in discussions on pay. This dialogue will continue during 2017.

In 2016, the Group has completed the moves to ensure that all customer-facing colleagues in Retail are now incentivised by reference to Balanced Scorecard metrics, rather than individual or branch level sales or product targets. This change ensures that colleagues are rewarded for action and behaviour that puts customers first. All variable remuneration decisions takediscretion, taking into consideration the Group’s Value, Codes of Responsibility, and the Conduct Pillars (Integrity, Compliance and Competence).

SHARING IN THE GROUP’S PERFORMANCE

As part of considering the structure of remuneration, the Committee concluded that it was important all colleagues should understand that they share in the overall performance of the Group alongside other stakeholders. The short-term variable remuneration element that supports this will be known as the ‘Group Performancekey questions outlined on page 120. Long Term Share plan’.

The plan outcome will be determined ‘top-down’ as a percentage of the Group’s underlying profit, modified based on the Group’sPlan Award Balanced Scorecard performance and any collective adjustment for risk and conduct matters. The clear and transparent link between risk-adjusted profit and theIndividual ED Assessments Group Performance Share plan outcome ensures direct alignment betweenLong Term Share Plan Underpin Assessment 1 yr hold 1 yr hold 1 yr hold 1 yr hold 1 yr hold 33% 33% 33% CET 1 Ratio ROTE Ordinary Dividend Remuneration Committee evaluation. See page 120 for further detail. In light of the interestsChief Operating Officer, Juan Colombás’ retirement announcement in 2020, an illustration has not been provided here. Underpins (Pre-Vest Test)* Group CET1 ratio above the guided management buffer each year, including all regulatory buffers Group ROTE exceeds average for UK peer banks (excluding the Group) over the 3 years Actual dividend payments do not fall below stated progress policy in any year of colleagues (including Executive Directors) and shareholders.the vesting period 40% 20% 40% 20% 20% TEST 20% 1 yr hold 20% 1 yr hold 20% 1 yr hold * Indicative underpin definition; final details to be confirmed in 2020 DRR Implementation Report.

 

BUILDING A LONG-TERM OWNERSHIP CULTURE

The Group promotes the broadest possible share ownership by colleagues to buildHOW HAVE THE MAXIMUM OPPORTUNITIES FOR EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS CHANGED? As a culture of acting as stewardsresult of the long-term interests of the Group.

Over 80proposed changes in policy, total variable opportunities will reduce from 540 per cent of colleagues hold an interest insalary to 340 per cent for the Group through participation in oneChief Executive. This is a reduction of our existing share plans. To achieve 10029 per cent share ownership, forin maximum total compensation when reductions in fixed pay through the first time in 2017, all colleagues in the Group will receive an award of shares valued at £200, which they will be required to hold for at least three years. We will look to repeat awards in future years, dependent on delivering against the Group’s strategic aims.

Executive-level share ownership is high, with all Executive Director shareholdings well above their minimum requirement under the shareholding policy. The Group Chief Executive’s current shareholding significantly exceeds the level required, as detailed in the annual report on remuneration.

To align with the culture of broader share ownership, the long-term element of variable remuneration will be known as the ‘Group Ownership Share plan’. This plan incentivises and rewardspension changes are taken into account. Other Executive Directors and senior colleagues against Group financial and strategic objectives designedwill reduce from 400 per cent to deliver superior and sustainable long-term returns for shareholders. Executives will build a direct ownership interest in the Group if those strategic objectives are met over the three-year performance period. The Committee decided that the performance measures for the 2017 awards should align to the revised Reward Principles, and with that, the Group’s strategic priorities.

REMUNERATION OUTCOMES FOR 2016

The Group has delivered strong financial performance in 2016 following further strategic progress. Underlying profit was £7.9 billion and statutory profit has more than doubled to £4.2 billion. The Group’s balance sheet remains strong and capital generation of approximately 190 basis points has enabled the Group to increase the ordinary dividend, pay a special dividend and fully cover the expected capital impact of the MBNA acquisition.

The gross bonus that results from underlying profit modifiers and Balanced Scorecard performance is £484.1 million. In reaching the final decision on the 2016 bonus outcome, the Committee considered the conduct-related provisions, including an additional provision for PPI in 2016. This led to a downward adjustment of 19300 per cent resulting in a final bonus outcome for 2016 of £392.9 million. This is an increase of 1119 per cent compared to 2015.

The Group’s bonus outcome is amongst the lowest of large UK banks and at 4.8 per cent of pre-bonus underlying profit, significantly lower than the Group’s funding limit of 10 per cent of pre bonus underlying profit.

A formulaic approach has been used to set thereduction in maximum total compensation. New Policy Current Policy £000 £000 £2,828 £2,603 £1,813 £1,813 £5,180 29% £2,589 Chief Financial Officer William Chalmers Group Chief Executive Directors’ bonus awards, consistent with other colleagues across the Group. The Committee determined that bonus awards of between 77 per cent and 78 per cent of maximum should be made to Executive Directors. Each of these awards, as well as the proposed Group Ownership Share awards detailed in the report, reflect the Group’s strong underlying performance against both financial and Balanced Scorecard metrics.

The long-term incentive plan (LTIP) awards made in 2014 are proposed to vest at 55 per cent, reflecting performance in the period to 31 December 2016.

Overall, the total remuneration for the Executive Directors is down by around 35 per cent compared to 2015. Further details on the reward outcomes for Executive Directors are outlined in the annual report on remuneration.

The Group’s approach to deferral of total variable remuneration ensures that both the short-term and long-term elements are subject to deferral in a way that results in a slower release of variable remuneration than the minimum regulatory requirements.António Horta-Osório £1,552 £1,473 £811 £811 £2,433 19% £1,622 Fixed Pay Short Term Variable Long Term Variable Current Policy New Policy Current Policy In line with the new PRA remuneration requirements for PRA Senior Managers, the Group Ownership Share element is deferred over seven years with pro rata vesting between the third and seventh year.

Across all colleagues, less than 3.5 per cent of annual bonus plan awards are above £25,000 and relate to high performing colleagues at senior levels. The first £2,000 of any bonus award continues to be paid in cash in March 2017, with the balance deferred in shares which are released periodically over subsequent months and years.

2017 EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR SALARIES

It was the Committee’s intent that Executive Director salary increases remain aligned with the 2 per cent budget for all colleagues. With that principle in mind, the Committee proposes to increase the base salarieslight of the Chief FinancialOperating Officer, and the Chief Risk Officer by 2 per cent.

As disclosedJuan Colombás’ retirement announcement in the 2015 Directors’ remuneration report, for the first time since 2011, a salary increase was applied in 2016 for the Group Chief Executive to begin to adjust his base salary to the previously disclosed Reference Salary of £1.22 million, which was set relative to the market when he joined in 2011, and for the adjustment to be staged over two years. As a result the second stage of the adjustment to £1.22 million is to be implemented with effect from January 2017, with 2 per cent of the increase delivered in cash and the remainder in shares.

2017 ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING

Approval for the Directors’ remuneration policy will be sought at the AGM on 11 May 2017; if approved, it will take effect from that date. I hope you will support the resolutions relating to remuneration.2020, an illustration has not been provided here.

121

COMPENSATION

 

SUMMARY OF THE REMUNERATION REVIEW2019 Annual report on remuneration

 

ENHANCING THE LINK BETWEENEXECUTIVE DIRECTOR SINGLE TOTAL FIGURE OF REMUNERATION AND STRATEGY

 

As part of the review of the Group’s variable remuneration arrangements in 2016, the existing reward principles were simplified and updated to ensure they support the Group’s strategic priorities. The table below shows the link between strategic priorities, the reward principles and performance measures for the Group Ownership Share and Group Performance Share plans. Further detail can be found in the strategic report.

  António Horta-Osório Juan Colombás William Chalmers George Culmer Total
£000 2019 2018 2019 2018 2019 2018 2019 2018 2019 2018
Base Salary 1,269 1,244 795 779 331  461 776 2,856 2,799
Fixed Share Award 1,050 900 497 497 252  298 504 2,097 1,901
Benefits 166 157 74 68 19  41 49 300 274
Pension 419 573 199 195 83  130 194 831 962
Total Fixed Pay 2,904 2,874 1,565 1,539 685  930 1,523 6,084 5,936
Group Performance Share1  1,178  527 81  113 527 194 2,232
Group Ownership Share/Long Term Incentive (LTIP)2,3 1,821 2,490 1,011 1,355   911 1,374 3,743 5,219
Total Variable Pay 1,821 3,668 1,011 1,882 81  1,024 1,901 3,937 7,451
Other Remuneration4 2 2 1 1   1 1 4 4
Buy out award5     4,378    4,378 
Total Remuneration 4,727 6,544 2,577 3,422 5,144  1,955 3,425 14,403 13,391

 

Strategic priori-
ties
1
Reward principleLong-term measures
(Group Ownership
Share plan)
Short-term measures
(William Chalmers was awarded a full year Group Performance
Share plan), examples
include:
Creatingaward of £195,528 which has been pro-rated to reflect five months as an Executive Director for the best customer experience

CUSTOMER ALIGNMENT

– Rewards action and behaviour which puts customers first

– Builds a responsible business plan that helps Britain prosper

– Supports the Culture Plan

– Net promoter score

– FCA total reportable complaints per 1,000 accounts and Financial Ombudsman Service (FOS) uphold rate

– Digital active customer base

– Helping Britain Prosper Plan

– Best Bank for Customers index

– Digital active customer base

Becoming simpler and more efficient

SIMPLE, AFFORDABLE AND MOTIVATING

– Flexible and simple

– Transparent and understood (by colleagues and other stakeholders)

– Motivating awards which colleagues value

– Cost:income ratio

– Economic profit

– Cost:income ratio
Delivering sustainable growth

SHAREHOLDER ALIGNMENT

– Supports delivery of long-term, superior and sustainable returns

– Promotes sound and effective risk management

– Complies with regulations

– Absolute Total Shareholder Return

– Underlying profit before tax

– Common equity tier 1 (CET1) ratio

– PRA stress test

Building the best team

COMPETITIVE, PERFORMANCE-DRIVEN AND FAIR

– Drives successful change towards Bankpurpose of the Future

– Encourages working together as one team

– Delivers fair outcomes, based on performance, not personal characteristics

– Employee engagement index

– Performance excellence index

– Employee engagement index

– Inclusion & Diversity

The Group’s remuneration arrangements support its purpose of helping Britain prosper and align to the Group’s aim of becoming the best bank for customers, whilst delivering long-term, superior and sustainable returns for shareholders.

The Group believes in offering fair reward. It fosters a performance-driven and meritocratic culture where colleagues share in the collective success of the Group and are rewarded for performance aligned to the long-term sustainable success of the business and the commitment to changing the culture of the Group.

The new variable remuneration arrangements have been designed to reinforce the simplified reward principles and maintain a separate short-term and long-term model. Remuneration remains weighted towards the long-term and the design closely aligns to the Group’s strategic priorities. There have not been any changes to the maximum potential under either plan.

The graphic below summarises the elements of the Executive Directors’ total remuneration package for 2017.

SIMPLIFYING THE APPROACH TO SHORT-TERM VARIABLE REMUNERATION: GROUP PERFORMANCE SHARE

The Group Performance Share plan provides Executive Directors and colleagues with a reward for delivery against the Group’s short-term financial and strategic priorities. The annual performance share outcome is based on a percentage of the Group’s underlying profit, adjusted by a strategic multiplier based on the Group’s Balanced Scorecard (BSC) metrics and risk matters. This approach replaces the more complex methodology used in recent years where the Group’s total bonus outcome was driven by the aggregate divisional and functional bonus outcomes and provides a clear line of sight for Executive Directors, colleagues and shareholders.

122

COMPENSATION

In order to ensure that the opportunity under the Group Performance Share plan is not increased when compared to the previous annual bonus plan, the Committee has included threshold and maximum payout levels. The maximum for 2017 is 20 per cent above the underlying profit target and a ‘Top’ rating against Balanced Scorecard objectives. This is consistent with prior years. The threshold is set at 20 per cent below the Group’s underlying profit target.

LONG-TERM VARIABLE REMUNERATION: GROUP OWNERSHIP SHARE

From 2017, the long-term incentive plan will be known as the Group Ownership Share plan to reinforce its link to the Group’s strategic priorities and provide greater shareholder alignment. The Group Ownership Share plan ensures Executive Directors and senior colleagues build an ownership interest in the Group and are motivated by delivering long-term superior and sustainable returns for shareholders. Vesting is subject to future three-year performance with a clear link between measures and key strategic priorities.

2017 DEFERRAL OF VARIABLE REMUNERATION

Under new PRA remuneration requirements, 60 per cent of variable remuneration awarded to PRA Senior Managers must be deferred for seven years with pro rata vesting between the third and seventh year. The Group’s approach ensures that both short-term and long-term variable remuneration is subject to deferral and is more onerous than the minimum PRA requirements, as over 60 per cent of variable remuneration awarded to Executive Directors is deferred under the Group Ownership Share plan and vests over a period of seven years from the date of grant.

Due to this more onerous approach under the Group Ownership Share plan, awards for Executive Directors under the Group Performance Share plan are deferred for two years as follows:

table above. Awards for William Chalmers and George Culmer will be made in March 2020 in a combination of cash and shares. 40 per cent will be released in the first year following award;
the award with £2,000 paid in cash, and the balance of the upfront 40 per cent delivered in shares; 50 per cent of which will be releasedsubject to holding until March 2021. The remaining 60 per cent is deferred into shares with 40 per cent vesting in the second year;2021 and
the remaining 20 per cent in 2022. 50 per cent of each release will be releasedsubject to a further 12-month holding in the third year.

The graphic below illustrates how the Group’s deferral approach for Executive Directors (who are PRA Senior Managers for regulatory purposes) continues to be weighted to the long term, underpinning the strategic priority and reward principle of delivering sustainable growth. Any shares released are subject to a further holding period in line with regulatory requirements and market practice. In line with shareholder expectations, no Group Ownership Share awards are unconditionally released until at least five years after grant.

123

COMPENSATION

REMUNERATION AT A GLANCE

HOW LLOYDS BANKING GROUP PERFORMED

KEY PERFORMANCE MEASURES

The table below illustrates outcomes against the Group’s key performance measures relevant to remuneration.

The annual bonus outcome is driven by a combination of Group underlying profit and Balanced Scorecard performance. The long-term incentive plan measures Group performance over a three-year period, using a range of financial and strategic measures.

Measure 2016  2015 
Underlying profit before tax  £7,867m   £8,112m1
Group Balanced Scorecard  Strong plus   Strong 
Economic profit  £3,377m  £2,233m
Total Shareholder Return (TSR)        
Per annum for the three years ended 31 December  (5%)  16.6%
Cost:income ratio  48.7%2  49.3%
Net promoter score  62.7   59.3 
Digital active customer base  12.5m  11.5m
Employee engagement index  71   71 

1The underlying profit result used for remuneration purposes was £7,994 million (excluding TSB).line with regulatory requirements.
  
2The adjusted cost:income ratio result used for remuneration purposes was 50.52017 Group Ownership Share (GOS) vesting (see page 125) at 49.7 per cent.

ANNUAL BONUS PLAN OUTCOME

The Group has delivered strong financial performance in 2016 following further strategic progress. In reaching the decision on the 2016 bonus outcome, the Committee considered the conduct-related provisions, including an additional provision for PPI in 2016. This led to a downward adjustment of 19 per ent.

The total bonus award as a percentage of pre-bonus underlying profit before tax increased from 4.2 per cent in 2015 to 4.8 per cent in 2016. This compares favourably to shareholder return from dividend payments over the same period which increased to 26.3 per cent of underlying profit and remains significantly lower than the Group’s funding limit of 10 per cent of pre bonus underlying profit.

For Executive Directors, awards of between 77 per cent and 78 per cent of maximum opportunity were determined reflecting Group and individual performance.

LONG-TERM INCENTIVE PLAN OUTCOME

The Group has delivered a good financial performance over the performance period of the 2014 Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) awards, continuing to transform the business for the benefit of its shareholders. Performance was measured over three financial years ended 31 December 2016. The performance conditions attached to these awards and actual performance are set out in the table below. At the end of the performance period, it has been assessed that awards will vest at 55 per cent of maximum. Executive Directors are required to retain any shares vesting for a further two years post vesting.

124

COMPENSATION

1Adjusted total costs.
2FCA reportable complaints per 1,000 for the period up to and including H1 2016 and formally closed FCA complaints per 1,000 accounts for the period from H2 2016. Both exclude PPI complaints, any complaints received via Claims Management Companies (CMC) and any complaints relating to TSB activity. With the introduction of the FCA guidance contained in PS15/19 applicable from 1 July 2016, the complaint classification and reporting for the original metric ceased on 30 June 2016. Accordingly, the Remuneration Committee has rebased the original 2014 metrics in line with the new FCA reporting regime. The Remuneration Committee considers the rebased targets equally stretching.

EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR REMUNERATION OUTCOMES

The charts below summarise the Executive Directors’ remuneration for the years ended 31 December 2015 and 2016.

12016 bonus, awarded in March 2017.
22014 LTIP vesting and dividend equivalents awarded in shares were confirmed by the Remuneration Committee at its meeting on 1518 February 2017.2020. The total number of shares vesting were 2,643,386 and 425,413 shares delivered in respect of dividend equivalents for António Horta-Osório, 1,467,137 shares vesting and 236,113 shares delivered in respect of dividend equivalents for Juan Colombás and 1,322,490 shares vesting and 212,834 shares delivered in respect of dividend equivalents for George Culmer. This award was pro-rated to reflect George’s leave date. William Chalmers was not granted a 2017 GOS award. The average share price between 1 October 20162019 and 31 December 2016 (58.302019 (59.34 pence) has been used to calculateindicate the value. The shares were awarded in 20142017 based on a share price of 78.878 pence.68.814p pence and as such no part of the reported value is attributable to share price appreciation.
3LTIP and dividend equivalent figures for 2018 have been adjusted to reflect the share price on the date of vesting (62.9679 pence) instead of the average price (56.04 pence) reported in the 2018 report.
4Other remuneration payments comprise income from all employee share plans, which arises through employer matching or discounting of employee purchases.
5William Chalmers joined the Group on 3 June 2019 and was appointed as Chief Financial Officer on 1 August 2019 on the retirement of George Culmer. He was granted deferred cash of £2,046,097 and deferred share awards over 4,086,632 Shares, to replace unvested awards from his former employer, Morgan Stanley, that were forfeited as a result of him joining the Group. The deferred cash and the number of Shares over which the deferred share awards were granted was calculated using the USD:GBP exchange rate and the respective mid-market closing prices of Mr Chalmers’ previous employer and the Group on 3 June 2019.
The awards are subject to a vesting schedule and retention periods that match the vesting schedule and retention periods of the awards forfeited and as a result, the awards vest in tranches until January 2022. The awards were granted pursuant to Listing Rule 9.4.2, and in accordance with the regulatory requirements for buy-outs and are subject to clawback. Clawback will also apply to any awards exercised prior to the first anniversary of employment.

 

DIRECTORS’ FIXED REMUNERATION FOR 2017PENSION AND BENEFITS

Pension/Benefits £ António Horta-Osório Juan Colombás William Chalmers George Culmer
Cash allowance in lieu of pension contribution 418,865 198,735 82,806 129,892
Car or car allowance 12,000 12,000 5,000 19,646
Flexible benefits payments 49,776 31,174 13,249 20,783
Private medical insurance 42,341 19,246 279 481
Tax preparation 24,000 9,000  
Transportation 37,606 2,359  

DEFINED BENEFIT PENSION ARRANGEMENTS

 

BASE SALARYAntónio Horta-Osório has a conditional unfunded pension commitment. This was a partial buy-out of a pension forfeited on joining from Santander Group. It is an Employer-Financed Retirement Benefits Scheme (EFRBS). The EFRBS provides benefits on a defined benefit basis at a normal retirement age of 65. The benefit in the EFRBS accrued during the six years following commencement of employment, therefore ceasing to accrue as of 31 December 2016.

 

2017The EFRBS was subject to performance conditions and it provided for a percentage of the GCE’s base salariessalary or reference salary in the 12 months before retirement or leaving. No additional benefit is due in the event of early retirement. The rate of pension accrued in each year depended on share price conditions being met. In March 2019, the GCE asked that his defined benefit pension be based on a percentage of his pensionable salary in 2014. The total pension due is now fixed at 6 per cent of his 2014 reference salary of £1,220,000, or £73,200.

There are no other Executive Directors with defined benefit pension entitlements.

Under terms agreed when joining the Group, Juan Colombás is entitled to a conditional lump sum benefit of £718,996 either (i) on reaching normal retirement age of 65 unless he voluntarily resigns or is dismissed for cause, or (ii) on leaving due to long-term sickness or death.

122

COMPENSATION

CALCULATING THE 2019 GROUP PERFORMANCE SHARE OUTCOME

Allocating Underlying Profit
To simplify the approach to determining the Group Performance Share outcome for 2019, the Committee agreed that a fixed 5 per cent of Underlying Profit (UP) would be used as a starting position for the overall pool.£8,349m1 x 5% =£417.4m
The threshold, below which no bonus is payable, remains set at 20 per cent below target UP.
For 2019, UP target was £8,637 million, actual UP was £8,349 million.

1 Underlying profit of £7,531m, adjusted by £21m for year-on-year Prudential Value Adjustment in line with regulatory requirement, £445m for conduct and costs, and £352m for Group Performance Share expenses in 2019.

STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Measurement of performance against Balanced Scorecard objectives. Strategic objectives Measure Performance Range/Outcome Minimum: 1 Maximum: 5 Score Customer 33% Leading customer experience Satisfying our Customers Customer dashboard 64 <30 .85 3 Retaining and growing valuable customers Segmented Customer Index 3.75 <2.0 >4.5 3 Helping Britain Prosper Deliver Helping Britain Prosper Plan targets 20/22 metrics were rated green (90.9%) <50% of Helping Britain Prosper Plan 4 metrics are Green .90% of Helping Britain Prosper Plan metrics are Green and none are Red Fewer complaints, better handled, driving better customer outcomes Total FCA Complaints per e 000 2.72 <3.04 .2.81 5 FOS Change Rate (ex PPI) 26% >30% .25% 4 Building great relationships with external stakeholders Reputation with External Stakeholders (Excluding Regulators) 4.00 <2.0 &/or >30% rated 1 >4.5 & none rated 1 4 Colleagues & Conduct 33% Transforming ways of working Building a better culture Colleague Culture & Engagement survey 69 <64 >73 3 Building skills for the future Colleagues successfully completing upskilling/ retraining 3,193,087 Cumulative hours <1,980,000 Cumulative hours .2,640,000 5 Maintaining a low risk Bank Board Risk Appetite 7.4% >10% .4% 3 Change delivered safely Change Execution Risk 92.2% green and 6.4% red Green <75% and Red >15% Green >92.5% and Red <5% 4 Finance 33% Maximising Group capabilities Delivering a capital efficient, low cost, profitable Bank Investment Performance 11 <5 .14 4 Cost:Income Ratio 48.5% >50.4% .46.4% 3 Statutory Profit after tax ‘3,006m <4,241 .5,831 1 Common Equity Tier 1 77bps <127bps >200.bps 1 Statutory Return on Tangible Equity 7.8% <11.5% .15.8% 1 STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4

Application of Group performance modifier

The modifier determined by Group Balanced Scorecard performance is applied to the proportion of UP allocated under Step 1.

2019 Balanced Scorecard Outcome1.00-1.491.5-1.791.8-2.092.1-2.392.4-2.692.7-2.993.0-3.293.3-3.593.6-3.893.9-4.194.2-4.494.5-4.794.8-5
Group Balanced Scorecard Modifier0.000.550.700.800.900.951.001.051.101.151.201.251.30

Group Balanced Scorecard Modifier£417.4m x 1.00 =£417.4m

Application of adjustments for risk, conduct and other factors.
The overall pool was reduced by £107.3m to reflect the impact of conduct-related provisions and regulatory fines received during 2019.£107.3m
Overall GPS pool£310.1m
123

COMPENSATION

EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS’ GROUP PERFORMANCE SHARE OUTCOME FOR 2019

Balanced Scorecard performance

Individual awards for Executive Directors are determined through the assessment of individual performance using the Group or their divisional balanced scorecard. Awards will not be made if the Group does not meet threshold financial performance or if an individual receives a score below 2.6 out of 5.

Group Chief Executive António Horta-Osório The Group Chief Executive’s performance assessment for 2019 reflected the Group’s objectives For Group Balanced Scorecard please see page 103 Chief Operating Officer Juan Colombás Chief Operating Office Scorecard rating BSC category Assessment Customer 3.00 Colleague & Conduct 3.63 Finance 4.33 Chief Financial Officer William Chalmers Finance Division Scorecard rating BSC category Assessment Customer 3.00 Colleague & Conduct 3.29 Finance 2.71 Finance Division Scorecard rating BSC category Assessment Customer 3.00 Colleague & Conduct 3.29 Finance 2.71

Individual Performance Assessment and Committee Discretion

Personal contribution and how performance has been achieved through leadership approach may be considered where it diverges from scorecard outcomes. Judgement may be applied in deciding whether personal contribution should alter the mechanical outcome provided by balanced scorecard metrics.

Key considerations factored into assessing performance and overall rating include, but are not limited to, the following:

Other performance considerations Strong progress in executing the Group’s strategic transformation programme, with significant investment in technology, people and improved customer propositions Further progress on the strategy for growing our Financial Planning & Retirement business with the successful launch of our Schroders Personal Wealth joint venture But acknowledged organisational failures in the Group’s handling of some customers, including the victims of the historic HBOS Reading fraud Other performance considerations Strong leadership and oversight of the Group’s strategic transformation programme, transforming the Group for success in a digital world. Further investment and improvements delivered in the Group’s operational resilience, resulting in a c30% reduction in critical incident occurrences in 2019. Acknowledged failures in the handling of customers impacted by the historic HBOS reading fraud. Other performance considerations Strong start to tenure as CFO, overseeing a challenging second half, marked by the substantial increase in PPI provision related to the deadline for claims submission. Delivered costs, investments and FTE favourable to plan in 2019, maintaining cost efficiency versus peers. Successful acquisition of the Tesco mortgage book finalised under William’s stewardship Other performance considerations Prior to his retirement at the end of July, George oversaw delivery of a good financial performance in H1, with market leading efficiency and returns Balance sheet strength maintained with lower capital requirement Maintained prudent approach to growth and risk The Group Chief Executive and Chief Operating Officer voluntarily requested to be withdrawn from consideration for a 2019 award. Overall score 3.12/5 Overall score 3.12/5

GPS award commensurate with performance determined

Awards are initially based on pre-determined formulaic pay out ranges, commensurate with performance scores as follows:

 

Group Chief Executive: £1,220,000 (1 January 2017)

Chief Financial Officer: £764,070 (1 April 2017)

Chief Risk Officer: £753,458 (1 January 2017)Individual Performance Score 1.00 – 2.59 – Threshold 2.60 – 2.69– 2.70– 2.99– Target 3.00– 3.29– 3.30– 3.59– 3.60– 3.89– 3.90– 4.19– 4.20– 4.49– 4.50– 4.79– 4.80– 5.00– Maximum Opportunity (% of maximum) 0% 0.0% – 19.5%– 19.5% – 30.0%– 30.0% – 40.5% 40.5% – 51.0% 51.0% – 61.5%– 61.5% – 72.0%– 72.0% – 82.5% 82.5% – 93.0% 93.0% – 100.0%–

 

FIXED SHARE AWARDCommittee determine final award outcome

Judgement is applied by the Remuneration Committee to determine award levels with the formulaic pay-out ranges.

 

The levelsRemuneration Committee exercised its overall discretion to accept the voluntary withdrawal of the Group Chief Executive and Chief Operating Officer from consideration for a 2019 GPS award. Accordingly, no award set for value was determined.

Executive
Directors
Balanced
Scorecard
Final
Individual
Score
Award
(% of max)
Group
Funding
Modifier1
Final
Award
(% of max)
GPS Maximum
Opportunity
(% of salary)
Final Award
(% of salary)
Final Award
(£)
António Horta–OsórioGroup140%
Juan ColombásChief Operating Office100%
William ChalmersFinance3.1234.2%71.9%24.6%100%24.6%£195,528
George Culmer2Finance3.1234.2%24.6%100%24.6%£113,407

1The overall GPS pool was 28.1 per cent below the target pool of £431.2 million. Therefore, a downward adjustment of 28.1 per cent was applied to the award recommendations of William Chalmers and George Culmer.
2Award pro-rated to reflect working days of employment.
124

COMPENSATION

2017 remain unchanged and are as follows:EXECUTIVE GROUP OWNERSHIP SHARE

 

Group Chief Executive: £900,000Ownership Share (GOS) Awards in the form of conditional rights to free shares in 2017 were made over shares with a value of 300 per cent of reference salary for the GCE and 275 per cent of salary for the former CFO and COO. These awards are vesting at 49.7 per cent, as detailed in the table below. The formulaic outcome reflects the Group’s solid financial and strong strategic performance over the three years ended 31 December 2019, balanced against a challenging economic and political environment impacting negatively on share price performance. This has resulted in no vesting for the Total Shareholder Return component and lower than expected Economic Profit.

The Committee has an overarching discretion to reduce the level of award that will vest, regardless of whether the performance condition for partial or full vesting has been met. This qualitative judgement ensures that vesting is not simply driven by a formula that may give an unexpected or unintended remuneration outcome compared to Group performance and that share price performance can also be considered. The Committee agreed that no adjustment would be applied to the vesting outcome of 49.7 per cent.

Shares will vest on a pro–rata basis up to the seventh anniversary of the award grant and each set of vested shares will be subject to a further holding period. Further details on deferral and holding can be found on pages 110-111.

Weighting Measure Threshold Maximum Actual Vesting
30% Absolute Total Shareholder Return 8% p.a. 16% p.a. 5.6% p.a. 0.00%
25% Economic Profit1 £3,074m £3,769m £3,138m 7.97%
10% Cost : Income Ratio2 47.2% 45.7% 45.9% 8.00%
10% Customer Complaint Handling 3.52 complaints per 1,000 3.18 complaints per 1,000 2.72 5.00%
  FCA reportable complaints        
           
  Financial Ombudsman Service (FOS) uphold rate =< 29% FOS uphold rate =<25% FOS uphold rate 26% 3.75%
10% Customer Satisfaction        
  Group performance relative to market peers 3rd 1st 1st 10.00%
7.5% Digital        
  Active Customer Growth 14.3m 14.9m 15.0m 7.50%
7.5% People        
  Employee Engagement Index 67 73 74 7.50%
      Award (% maximum) vesting 49.70%

1A measure of profit taking into account Expected Losses, tax and a charge for equity utilisation
2Adjusted to exclude remediation costs

SINGLE TOTAL FIGURE OF REMUNERATION FOR CHAIRMAN AND NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS

  Fees £000 Benefits £0002 Total £000
  2019 2018 2019 2018 2019 2018
Chairman and current Non–Executive Directors            
Lord Blackwell 758 743 12 12 770 755
Alan Dickinson 240 230 1  241 230
Anita Frew 356 380 1  357 380
Simon Henry 186 182   186 182
Lord Lupton 314 318 1  315 318
Amanda Mackenzie OBE 156 31   156 31
Nick Prettejohn 471 449 5  476 449
Stuart Sinclair 210 172   210 172
Sara Weller CBE 203 199 4  207 199
Sarah Legg1 6    6 
Former Non–Executive Directors           
Deborah McWhinney  174    174

1Appointed 1 December 2019.
2The Chairman receives a car allowance of £12,000. Other benefits relate to reimbursement for expenses incurred in the course of duties.

PAYMENTS FOR LOSS OF OFFICE

George Culmer retired as Chief Financial Officer: £504,000Officer and an Executive Director with effect from 1 August 2019 and retired from the Group on 2 August 2019.

Chief Risk Officer: £497,000

He received a payment of £79,595 in lieu of unused annual leave entitlement up to his Retirement Date. In accordance with contractual entitlements, George was entitled to a capped contribution of up to £10,000 (excluding VAT) towards legal fees incurred in connection with his retirement from the Company.

In accordance with retirement provisions, George has maintained outstanding deferred Group Performance Share awards under the 2016 GPS Plan (83,466 Shares), 2017 GPS Plan (176,108 Shares) and under the 2018 GPS Plan (501,341 Shares) which continue to be released on their scheduled release dates, subject to the relevant terms (including post-vesting holding periods, malus and, where applicable, clawback and deductions for national insurance and income tax).

A 2019 Group Performance Share award was made, pro-rated for the period of 2019 elapsed to George Culmer’s retirement date, as described on page 105. This award is subject to deferral, holding periods, malus and clawback. Under the Executive Group Ownership Plan Rules (Executive GOS), George Culmer’s outstanding 2017 and 2018 Executive GOS awards will be time pro-rated to his retirement date (2017 becomes 2,660,946 Shares and 2018 becomes 2,144,958 Shares). The awards remain subject to the performance measures which apply to the relevant awards and will continue to vest at the normal vesting dates and be released on their scheduled release dates, subject to the relevant terms (including post-vesting retention periods, malus and, where applicable, clawback and to deductions for national insurance and income tax).

No other payment for loss of office were made in 2019.

125

COMPENSATION

 

PAYMENTS WITHIN THE REPORTING YEAR TO PAST DIRECTORS

There were no payments made to past directors in 2019.

EXTERNAL APPOINTMENTS

António Horta-Osório – During the year ended 31 December 2019, the GCE served as a Non- Executive Director of Exor, Fundação Champalimaud, Stichting INPAR Management/Enable and Sociedade Francisco Manuel dos Santos. The Group Chief Executive is entitled to retain the fees, which were £349,303 in total.

No other Executive Director served as a Non-Executive Director in 2019.

RELATIVE IMPORTANCE OF SPEND ON PAY

The graphs illustrate the total remuneration of all Group employees compared with returns of capital to shareholders in the form of dividends and share buyback.

Dividend £m 2019 2018 [xxx] 4,039 Salaries and performance-based compensation £m 2019 2018 2,919 2,991

12019: Ordinary dividend in respect of the financial year ended 31 December 2019, partly paid in 2019 and partly to be paid in 2020. 2018: Ordinary dividend in respect of the financial year ended 31 December 2018, partly paid in 2018 and partly paid in 2019 and intended share buyback.

COMPARISON OF RETURNS TO SHAREHOLDERS AND GCE TOTAL REMUNERATION

The chart below shows the historical total shareholder return (TSR) of Lloyds Banking Group plc compared with the FTSE 100 as required by the regulations.

The FTSE 100 index has been chosen as it is a widely recognised equity index of which Lloyds Banking Group plc has been a constituent throughout this period.

TSR INDICES – LLOYDS BANKING GROUP AND FTSE 100

Growth in the value of a hypothetical £100 holding since 31 December 2009 (to 31 December 2019)

Growth in the value of a hypothetical £100 holding since 31 December 2009 (to 31 December 2019) Value of £100 invested on 31 December 2009 250 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 Dec 2009 Dec 2010 Dec 2011 Dec 2012 Dec 2013 Dec 2014 Dec 2015 Dec 2016 Dec 2017 Dec 2018 Dec 2019

  CEO 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
GCE single figure of remunerati on £000 J E Daniels 2,572 855        
 António Horta-Osório  1,765 3,398 7,475 11,540 8,704 5,791 6,434 6,544 4,727
                       
Annual bonus/
GPS payout (% of maximum opportunity)
 J E Daniels 62% 0%        
 António Horta-Osório   62% 71% 54% 57% 77% 77% 67.60% 
                       
Long-term incentive vesting (% of maximum opportunity) J E Daniels 0% 0%        
 António Horta-Osório  0% 0% 54% 97% 94.18% 55% 66.30% 68.70% 49.7%
                       
TSR component vesting (% of maximum) J E Daniels 0% 0%         
 António Horta-Osório  0% 0% 25.30% 30% 30% 0% 0% 0% 0%

Notes: J E Daniels served as GCE until 28 February 2011; António Horta-Osório was appointed GCE from 1 March 2011. António Horta-Osório declined to take a bonus in 2011 and independently requested that he be withdrawn from consideration for a Group Performance Share award in 2019.

126

COMPENSATION

DIRECTORS’ SHARE INTERESTS AND SHARE AWARDS

DIRECTORS’ INTERESTS

  Number of shares Number of options Total shareholding1 Value
  Owned outright Unvested
subject to
continued
employment
 Unvested
subject to
performance
 Unvested
subject to
continued
employment
 Vested
unexercised
 Total at
31 December
2019
 Total at
20 February
2020
 Expected value
at 31 December
2019 (£000s)2
Executive Directors            
António Horta-Osório 20,817,507 1,509,516 19,729,182 53,618   42,109,823 42,110,475720,165
Juan Colombás 10,713,340 694,247 11,171,375 29,109   22,608,071 22,608,639710,645
William Chalmers³ 705,398   3,268,460   3,973,858 3,973,858 2,485
George Culmer4 16,626,666 677,449 6,854,490    24,158,605 24,158,605 12,967
Non-Executive Directors            
Lord Blackwell 150,000     150,000 150,000 n/a
Alan Dickinson 200,000     200,000 200,000 n/a
Anita Frew 450,000     450,000 450,000 n/a
Simon Henry 250,000     250,000 250,000 n/a
Sarah Legg5 0     0 0 
Lord Lupton 1,000,000     1,000,000 1,000,000 n/a
Amanda Mackenzie OBE 63,567     63,567 63,567 n/a
Nick Prettejohn6 69,280     69,280 69,280 n/a
Stuart Sinclair 362,664     362,664 362,664 n/a
Sara Weller CBE 372,988     372,988 372,988 n/a

1Including holdings of connected persons.
2Awards subject to performance under the GOS had an expected value of 50 per cent of face value at grant (in line with the Remuneration Policy). Values are based on the 31 December 2019 closing price of 62.535 pence.
3Appointed 1 August 2019.
4.Retired as Chief Financial Officer and an Executive Director with effect from 1 August 2019 and from the Group 2 August 2019. The number of shares in respect of which the GOS Awards (unvested subject to performance) vests, will be reduced to reflect the period from the start of the Performance Period to 2 August 2019, date of leaving, at the point of vest.
5Appointed 1 December 2019.
6In addition, Nick Prettejohn held 400 6.475 per cent preference shares at 1 January 2019 and 31 December 2019.
7The changes in beneficial interests for António Horta-Osório (652 shares), Juan Colombás (568 shares) relate to ‘partnership’ and ‘matching’ shares acquired under the Lloyds Banking Group Share Incentive Plan between 31 December 2019 and 20 February 2020. There have been no other changes up to 20 February 2020.

SHAREHOLDING REQUIREMENTS

Executives are expected to build and maintain a company shareholding in direct proportion to their remuneration in order to align their interests to those of shareholders. The minimum shareholding requirements Executive Directors are expected to meet are as follows: 350 per cent of base salary for the GCE and 250 per cent of base salary for other Executive Directors. Newly appointed individuals will have three years from appointment to achieve the shareholding requirement. In the event that exceptional individual circumstances exist resulting in an Executive not being able to comply with the Policy, the Remuneration Committee will consider whether an exception should apply.

In addition to the Group’s shareholding requirements, shares vesting are subject to holding periods in line with regulatory requirements.

For the year ending 31 December 2019, the GCE and COO continued to meet their shareholding requirements, as detailed within the illustration below. William currently holds 52 per cent of his salary in shares and will have until 2 June 2022 to achieve the requirement. At the time of his departure in August 2019, George Culmer held 1,233 per cent of his salary in shares.

The Group does not operate a formal post-employment shareholding policy. Existing reward structures and the Long Term Share Plan under the proposed new Policy have been designed in line with regulatory requirements and ensure that a substantial proportion of variable reward for Executive Directors and other senior employees takes the form of shares deferred and held over a period of up to eight years. These structures already ensure that Executive Directors continue to meet our shareholding requirements for a minimum of two years after leaving the Group.

António Horta-Osório 350% George Culmer 250% 782% 1,233% 952% Juan Colombás 250% 52% William Chalmers Shareholding requirement Actual shareholding1 Shareholding requirement Actual shareholding1 Shareholding requirement Actual shareholding1 0 130 260 390 520 650 780 910 1040 1170 1300 0 130 260 390 520 650 780 910 1040 1170 1300 0 130 260 390 520 650 780 910 1040 1170 1300 Shareholding requirement Actual shareholding1

1Calculated using the average share price for the period 1 January 2019 to 31 December 2019 (58.07 pence). Includes ordinary shares acquired through the vesting of the deferred Group Performance Share plan, Fixed Share Awards as the shares have no performance conditions; American Deposit Receipts (ADRs) with each one ADR equating to four shares, Executive Share Awards which have vested but have not been exercised; shares held in the Share Incentive Plan (SIP) Trust, i.e. Free, Partnership, Matching and Dividend shares which are no longer subject to forfeiture, as defined in the SIP Rules. Shares held by Connected Persons, as defined by the Companies Act, but broadly meaning spouse or partner and children, may also be included.

None of those who were Directors at the end of the year had any other interest in the capital of Lloyds Banking Group plc or its subsidiaries.

127

COMPENSATION

OUTSTANDING SHARE PLAN INTERESTS

        Vested /   At 31   Exercise periods  
  At 1 January
2019
 Granted/
awarded
 Dividends
awarded
 released /
exercised
 Lapsed December
2019
 Exercise price From To Note
António Horta-Osório                    
LTIP 2016-2018 5,015,210  509,271 3,445,449 1,569,761        1,2,3
GOS 2017-2019 5,318,685     5,318,685       3
GOS 2018-2020 6,725,221      6,725,221       3
GOS 2019-2021   7,685,276       7,685,276       3, 4
Deferred GPS awarded in 2018 1,166,466     777,644   388,822       10
Deferred GPS awarded in 2019   1,494,258  373,564  1,120,694       6
2016 Sharesave 14,554     14,554 47.49p 01/01/2020 30/06/2020  
2017 Sharesave 21,728      21,728 51.03p 01/01/2021 30/06/2021  
2019 Sharesave   17,336       17,336 39.87p 01/01/2023 30/06/2023  
Juan Colombás                    
LTIP2016-2018 2,728,973  277,114 1,874,804 854,169        1,2,3
GOS 2017-2019 2,951,987      2,951,987       3
GOS 2018-2020 3,807,302      3,807,302       3
GOS 2019-2021   4,412,086       4,412,086       3,4
Deferrred GPS awarded in 2018 528,320     352,212   176,108       10
Deferred GPS awarded in 2019   668,453   167,112   501,341       6
2016 Sharesave 29,109     29,109 47.49p 01/01/2020 30/06/2020  
William Chalmers                    
Share Buy-Out   818,172   818,172           7,8
    1,457,748       1,457,748   28/01/2020 27/01/2025 7
    1,124,627       1,124,627   28/01/2021 27/01/2026 7
    686,085       686,085   28/01/2022 27/01/2027 7
George Culmer                    
LTIP 2016-2018 2,767,409  281,017 1,901,209 866,200        1,2,3
GOS 2017-2019 2,993,565      2,993,565       3,5
GOS 2018-2020 3,860,925      3,860,925       3,5
Deferred GPS awarded in 2018 528,320     352,212   176,108       10
Deferred GPS awarded in 2019   668,453   167,112   501,341       6
2016 Sharesave 14,554   13,341 1,213  47.49p     9

1.The shares awarded in March 2016 vested on 7 March 2019. The closing market price of the Group’s ordinary shares on that date was 62.15 pence. Shares vested are subject to a further two-year holding period.
2.2016 LTIP award was eligible to receive an amount equal in value to any dividends paid during the performance period. Dividend equivalents have been paid based on the number of shares vested and have been paid in shares. The dividend equivalent shares were paid on 7 March 2019. The closing market price of the Group’s ordinary shares on that date was 62.15 pence. The dividend equivalent shares are not subject to any holding period.
3.All GOS have performance periods ending 31 December at the end of the three-year period. Awards were made in the form of conditional rights to free shares.
4.Awards (in the form of conditional rights to free shares) in 2019 were made over shares with a value of 300 per cent of salary for António Horta-Osório (7,685,276 shares with a face value of £3,733,200) and 275 per cent for Juan Colombás (4,412,086 shares with a face value of £2,143,215). No award was made to George Culmer. The share price used to calculate face value is the average price over the five days prior to grant (27 February to 5 March 2019), which was 63.052 pence. As regulations prohibit the payment of dividend equivalents on awards in 2018 and subsequent years, the number of shares awarded has been determined by applying a discount factor to the share price on award. An adjustment of 29.8 per cent was applied. Performance conditions for this award are set out in the table on page 110.
5.The number of Shares in respect of the 2017 and 2018 GOS Awards are stated in full and will be reduced to reflect the period from the start of the Performance Period to the date of leaving (2 August 2019) at the point of vest in accordance with the appropriate plan rules.
6.Part of GPS is deferred into shares (in the form of conditional rights to free shares). The face value of the share awards in respect of GPS granted in March 2019 was £942,160 (1,494,258 shares) for António Horta-Osório; £421,473 (668,453 shares) for Juan Colombás and £421,473 (668,453) for George Culmer. The share price used to calculate the face value is the average price over the five days prior to grant (27 February to 5 March 2019), which was 63.052 pence.
7.William Chalmers joined the Group on 3 June 2019 and was appointed as Chief Financial Officer on 1 August 2019 on the retirement of George Culmer. He was granted deferred cash of £2,046,097 and deferred share awards over 4,086,632 Shares, to replace unvested awards from his former employer, Morgan Stanley, that were forfeited as a result of him joining the Group. The deferred cash and the number of Shares over which the deferred share awards were granted was calculated using the USD:GBP exchange rate of 1.2664 and the respective mid-market closing prices of Mr Chalmers’ previous employer and the Group on 3 June 2019 (57.05 pence) resulting in a face value of the awards of £4,377,521. The award is subject to vesting terms in line with those forfeited as set out above, and is on materially the same terms as the Executive Group Ownership Share (ExGOS), including the discretions as summarised on page 93 of the 2017 Annual Report, but as the award is a buy-out it is not subject to performance conditions and is not subject to time pro-rating in a good leaver circumstances. The award is subject to malus and clawback on the same terms as ExGOS awards, and in addition is subject to clawback in the event of resignation within one year of grant. The value of the award is not pensionable.
8.Options vested on 18 July 2019 and William Chalmers exercised on 1 August 2019. The closing market price of the Group’s ordinary shares on that date was 52.84 pence. Mr Chalmers retained all the shares apart from 384,733 shares which were sold to meet income tax and National Insurance contributions. Shares are subject to a six month holding period from the date of vesting on 18 July 2019.
9.Mr Culmer had six months from his date of retirement to exercise his Sharesave options. Options were exercised on 7 November 2019 and savings made to date were used to buy shares. The closing market price of the Group’s ordinary shares on that date was 57.20 pence.
10.Part of GPS is deferred into shares. The face value of the share awards in respect of GPS granted in March 2018 was £1,058,016 (1,555,288 shares) for António Horta-Osório; £479,200 (704,426 shares) for Juan Colombás and £479,200 (704,426) for George Culmer. The share price used to calculate the face value is the average price over the five days prior to grant (27 February to 5 March 2019), which was 63.052 pence.
128

COMPENSATION

2019 GROUP OWNERSHIP SHARE PERFORMANCE MEASURES (FOR AWARDS MADE IN MARCH 2019)

Meeting threshold performance will result in 25 per cent vesting of each metric, relative to each weighting.

Strategic prioritiesMeasureBasis of payout rangeMetricWeighting
Creating the best customerexperienceCustomer satisfactionMajor Group average ranking over2021Threshold: 3rd
Maximum: 1st
10%
Digital net promoter scoreSet relative to 2021 targetsThreshold: 65.3
Maximum: 68.3
7.5%
FCA total reportable complaints and FinancialOmbudsman Service (FOS) change rateSet relative to 2021 targetsAverage rates over 2020Threshold: 2.891and ≤ 29%2
Maximum: 2.611and ≤ 25%2
10%
Becoming simpler andmore efficientStatutory economic profit3Set relative to 2021 targetsThreshold: £2,210m
Maximum: £3,315m
25%
Cost:income ratioSet relative to 2021 targetsThreshold: 45.9%
Maximum: 43.4%
10%
Delivering sustainablegrowthAbsolute total shareholder return (TSR)Growth in share price includingdividends over 3-year periodThreshold: 8% p.a.
Maximum: 16% p.a.
30%
Building the best teamEmployee engagement indexSet relative to 2021 markets normsThreshold: +5% vs. 2021 UK Norm
Maximum: +2% vs. 2021 UK HighPerforming Norm
7.5%

1FCA reportable complaints per 1,000 accounts.
2FOS uphold rate.
3A measure of profit taking into account Expected Losses, tax and a charge for equity utilisation.

IMPLEMENTATION OF THE POLICY IN 2020

The 2020 Remuneration Policy is subject to approval at the Annual General Meeting in May 2020. We propose to implement the Policy in the following ways subject to shareholder approval. A final 2020 Group Ownership Share award will be granted under the existing Remuneration Policy prior to the AGM when the 2020 Remuneration Policy is intended to come into effect.

Base Salary

The Group has applied a total pay budget of 2.4 per cent including a minimumpay award of £500 for eligible colleagues. Focussing on lower paid colleagues andcolleagues paid lower in their pay range, the Group’s pay approach ensures over 63 percent of colleague will receive a pay award of 2.5 per cent or more. The pay budget forsenior executives is set below the budget for the wider colleague at 2 per cent.

It was agreed that a salary increase of 2 per cent would applyfor the Group Chief Executive (GCE) and Chief FinancialOfficer (CFO). Following confirmation that the ChiefOperating Officer (COO) is due to retire in 2020, his salary isdue to remain in line with 2019.

Salaries will therefore be as follows:

GCE: £1,294,674 (with effect from 1 January 2020)

COO: £794,938

CFO: £810,837 (with effect from 1 April 2020)

Fixed ShareAward

Awards remain unchanged from 2019 as follows:

GCE: £1,050,000

COO: £497,000

CFO: £504,000

Subject to approval shares will be released in equal tranchesover three years. (See page 135 for further details).

Pension

With effect from 1 January 2020, pension allowances will be reduced for all ExecutiveDirectors to 15 per cent of base salary. Any new Executive Director appointments in2020 will also attract a maximum allowance of 15 per cent of base salary.Over 50,000 colleagues participate in the Group’s DefinedContribution (DC) Pension scheme. We therefore believe theDC pension provisions provide an accurate reflection of thepension rate available to the majority of the workforce. Witheffect from July 2020 the maximum employer contributionfor all colleagues will be 15 per cent of base salary andExecutive Directors will be aligned to the majority of theworkforce.

Benefits

Benefits remain unchanged from 2019. Executive Directors receive a flexible benefitallowance in line with colleagues, (4 per cent of base salary). This can be used to selectbenefits including life assurance and critical illness cover. Other benefits include carallowance, transportation tax preparation and private medical cover.

GroupPerformanceShare

The approach to determining the Group’s Group Performance Share outcome for2020 will remain aligned to the approach from 2019. A fixed five per cent of adjustedUnderlying Profit (UP) will be used as a starting position for the overall pool. Thisremains within the maximum plan limit of 10 per cent of UP and a financial performancethreshold will be set at 20 per cent below the Group’s underlying profit target, at whichno award will be payable.

A measurement of the Group’s performance will be assessed against BalancedScorecard objectives and receive a score from 1 to 5. The Group Balanced Scorecardmust exceed a threshold score of 1.5, below which no award will be payable.

The fixed 5 per cent of UP will be adjusted by a scorecard modifier commensurate withthe Group Balanced Scorecard performance score. Adjustments for conduct and riskfactors will also be considered when determining the final overall pool.

Individual maximum opportunities for Executive Directors remain unchanged from2019 at 140 per cent of base salary for the GCE and 100 per cent of base salary for otherExecutive Directors.

Individual awards will be based on pre-determined formulaic pay out rangescommensurate with performance and will be determined by the RemunerationCommittee through the assessment of a balanced scorecard and an individualperformance assessment. The Committee will determine if an Executive Director’spersonal performance justifies a variation up or down in the rating or award valuesdetermined by the scorecard, and will explain how this is determined. The Group ChiefExecutive’s individual performance will be measured through the Group BalancedScorecard, the Chief Operating Officer will be measured through the Chief OperatingOffice scorecard and the Chief Financial Officer will be measured through the FinanceDivision scorecard.

The 2020 scorecards will provide a balanced view acrossfinancial, operational and strategic measures equallyweighted between 15 financial, customer and colleague andconduct measures. Target will be assessed against a ratingscale of 1 to 5.

The Committee considers the specific targets thatapply to 2020 to be commercially sensitive but willprovide information on the level of payout relative to theperformance achieved in next year’s annual report onremuneration.

For the 2020 performance year, any Group PerformanceShare opportunity will be awarded in March 2021 in acombination of cash (up to 50 per cent) and shares. 40 percent will be released in the first year following the awardwith £2,000 paid in cash, and the balance of the upfront 40per cent delivered in shares; 50 per cent of which will besubject to holding until March 2022. The remaining 60 percent is deferred into shares with 40 per cent vesting in 2022and 20 per cent in 2023. 50 per cent of each release will besubject to a further 12-month holding in line with regulatoryrequirements.

The Committee may consider the application of malusand clawback as outlined in the performance adjustmentsection.

129

COMPENSATION

GroupOwnershipShare

A Group Ownership Share award will be granted in relation to 2019 performance underthe terms of the current Remuneration Policy. On the basis of the new Long Term SharePlan being approved by shareholders at the 2020 AGM, no further Group OwnershipShare awards would then be made.

The maximum Group Ownership Share award for Executive Directors is 300 per cent ofsalary and the Remuneration Committee has to ability to grant an award up to 400 percent of salary for exceptional circumstances for the Group Chief Executive. Followingconfirmation that the Chief Operating Officer (COO) is due to retire in 2020, no awardwill be made.

Awards in 2020 are being made as follows:

GCE: 250 per cent of base salary

COO: No award

CFO: 237.5 per cent of base salary

As regulations prohibit the payment of dividend equivalents on awards, the number ofshares subject to the award has been determined by applying a discount factor to theshare price on grant, as previously disclosed. The Committee approved an adjustmentof 29.03 per cent for colleagues who are senior managers, including the ExecutiveDirectors.

Awards will be subject to a three-year performance periodwith vesting between the third and seventh anniversaryof award, on a pro-rata basis. Any shares released aresubject to a further holding period in line with regulatoryrequirements and market practice. Meeting thresholdperformance will result in 25 per cent vesting of each metric,relative to each weighting.

Awards made in 2020 will vest based on the Group’sperformance against the financial and strategic measures,set out below. In line with the current Remuneration Policy,the Committee has full discretion to amend payout levelsshould the award not reflect business and/or individualperformance. Business performance includes, but is notlimited to, consideration of returns to shareholders.

There are no changes to proposed financial and strategicmeasures to provide consistency with the 2019 plan andcontinued alignment to the key strategic priorities as set outin the third Group Strategic Review.

The Committee may consider the application of malusand clawback as outlined in the performance adjustmentsection.

Strategic prioritiesMeasureBasis of payout rangeMetricWeighting

Group
Ownership Share

continued

Creating the best customerexperienceCustomer satisfactionMajor Group averageranking over 2022Threshold: 3rd
Maximum: 1st
10%
Digital net promoter scoreSet relative to 2022 targetsThreshold: 65.3
Maximum: 68.3
7.5%
FCA total reportablecomplaints and FinancialOmbudsman Service (FOS)change rateSet relative to 2022 targetsAverage rates over 2022Threshold: 2.65
Maximum: 2.52
Threshold: 30%
Maximum: 25%
15%
Becoming simpler and more Statutory economic profit1efficientSet relative to 2022 targetsThreshold: £1,965m
Maximum: £2,948
25%
Cost: income ratioSet relative to 2022 targetsThreshold: 46.4%
Maximum: 43.9%
10%
Delivering sustainablegrowthAbsolute total shareholderreturn (TSR)Growth in share priceincluding dividends over3-year periodThreshold: 8%
Maximum: 16%
40%
Building the best teamEmployee engagementindexSet relative to 2022 marketsnormsThreshold: +5% vs UK norm
Maximum: +2% vs UK HighPerforming Norm
7.5%

1A measure of profit taking into account expected losses, tax and a charge for equity utilisation.



Performanceadjustment

Performance adjustment is determined by the Remuneration Committee and/orBoard Risk Committee and may result in a reduction of up to 100 per cent of the GPSand/or GOS opportunity for the relevant period. It can be applied on a collective orindividual basis. When considering collective adjustment, the Senior IndependentPerformance Adjustment and Conduct Committee (SIPACC) submits a report to theRemuneration Committee and Board Risk Committee regarding any adjustmentsrequired to balanced scorecards or the overall GPS and/or GOS outcome to reflectin-year or prior year risk matters.

The application of malus will generally be considered when:

– there is reasonable evidence of employee misbehaviour or material error or thatthey participated in conduct which resulted in losses for the Group or failed to meetappropriate standards of fitness and propriety;

– there is material failure of risk management at a Group, business area, division and/or business unit level;

– the Committee determines that the financial results for a given year do not supportthe level of variable remuneration awarded; and/or

– any other circumstances where the Committee consideradjustments should be made.

Judgement on individual performance adjustment isinformed by taking into account the severity of the issue,the individual’s proximity to the issue and the individual’sbehaviour in relation to the issue. Individual adjustmentmay be applied through adjustments to balancedscorecard assessments and/or through reducing the GPSand/or GOS outcome.

Awards are subject to clawback for a period of up to sevenyears after the date of award which may be extended to10 years where there is an ongoing internal or regulatoryinvestigation.

The application of clawback will generally be consideredwhen:

– there is reasonable evidence of employee misbehaviouror material error; or

– there is material failure of risk management at a Group,business area, division and/or business unit level.

130

COMPENSATION

CHAIRMAN AND NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR FEES IN 2019

The annual fee for the Chairman was increased by 2 per cent to £772,855, in line with the overall salary budget for the executive population. The annual Non-Executive Director fees were increased by 2 per cent, in line with the base salary increase awarded to the senior management of the Group. These changes took effect from 1 January 2020.

  2020 2019
Basic Non-Executive Director fee £81,200 £79,600
Deputy Chairman £106,000 £104,000
Senior Independent Director £63,600 £62,400
Audit Committee Chairmanship £74,300 £72,800
Remuneration Committee Chairmanship £74,300 £72,800
Risk Committee Chairmanship £74,300 £72,800
Responsible Business Committee Chairmanship £42,400 £41,600
IT Forum Chairmanship £42,400 £41,600
Audit Committee Membership £34,000 £33,300
Remuneration Committee Membership £34,000 £33,300
Risk Committee Membership £34,000 £33,300
Responsible Business Committee Membership1 £15,900 £15,600
Nomination and Governance Committee Membership £15,900 £15,600

1New members only.

Non-Executive Directors may receive more than one of the above fees.

PERCENTAGE CHANGE IN REMUNERATION POLICYLEVELS

Figures for ‘All employees’ are calculated using figures for all colleagues eligible for the GPS plan. This population is considered to be the most appropriate group of employees for these purposes because its remuneration structure is consistent with that of the GCE. For 2019, 66,216colleagues were included in this category.

 % change in base salary
(2018 to 2019)
 % change in GPS
(2018 to 2019)
 % change in benefits
(2018 to 2019)
GCE (salary increase effective 1 January 2020) 2.0% (100%)1 2.0%
All employees 2.4%2 (31.7%)2 2.4%2

1Reflects the increase in base salary from 1 January 2019 against which the award is determined.
2Adjusted for movements in colleagues numbers and other impacts to ensure a like-for-like comparison. Salary increases effective 1 April 2020.

GENDER PAY

We have further reduced our gender pay gap in 2019 resulting in a 1.9 per cent improvement since 2017.

At Lloyds Banking Group we are committed to promoting a diverse and inclusive working environment. Our focus is on improving the gender pay and bonus gaps by increasing the proportion of women in senior roles. In doing so, the gender gaps will reduce over time. We are committed to attracting and retaining the best talent and we are pleased that our 2019 mean gender pay and bonus gaps have reduced further this year.

The reduction in the pay gap can be attributed to an improvement in female representation across the Bank, with an increase in the proportion of female colleagues in senior roles. The proportion of women in the upper pay quartile for the Group has increased. We are pleased to see that our efforts have started to decrease our gender pay gap, however we are aware that there continue to be more men in senior roles. Addressing female representation across the Bank will take time and we are committed to achieving our gender targets will have an impact on our pay gaps in future years. Further information is available at: https://www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/globalassets/our-group/responsible-business/ reporting-centre/lloyds-banking-group-gender-pay-gap-report-2019.pdf

2018 2019 Mean Pay Gap % 31.5% 30.9% 2018 2019 Mean Bonus Gap % 66.4% 64.2%

131

COMPENSATION

CEO PAY RATIO

 Total Compensation Fixed pay
YearMethodologyP25
(Lower Quartile)
P50
(Median)
P75
(Upper Quartile)
 P25
(Lower Quartile)
P50
(Median)
P75
(Upper Quartile)
2019A179:1128:171:1 114:182:147:1
2018A237:1169:193:1 113:181:148:1
2017A245:1177:197:1 113:182:148:1
Y-o-Y
(2018 vs 2019)
  (24%)   1% 

Notes to the calculation:

The 2019 total remuneration for the colleagues identified at P25, P50 and P75 are as follows: £26,419, £36,975, £66,944.
The 2019 base salary for the colleagues identified at P25, P50 and P75 are as follows: £22,227, £31,671, £50,431.
The P25, P50 and P75 colleagues were determined on 12 February 2020 based on calculating total remuneration for all UK employees for the 2019 financial year. Payroll data from 1 January 2019 to 31 December 2019 and variable remuneration outcomes approved in February 2020 were used.
Methodology option A has been used and was selected on the basis that it provided the most accurate means of identifying the median, lower and upper quartile colleagues.
Colleague total remuneration has been calculated in line with the single total figure of remuneration. The single total figure of remuneration calculated for each of the 62,364 UK colleagues includes full time equivalent base pay, Group Performance Share awards for the 2019 performance year, vesting Group Ownership Share awards (for eligible colleagues), core benefits, pension, overtime and shift payments, travel/relocation payments (for eligible colleagues) and private medical benefit.
The average share price between 1 October 2019 and 31 December 2019 (59.34 pence) has been used to indicate the value of vesting Group Ownership Share awards.
The colleague identified at P50 did not receive a separate car benefit and does not participate in the long-term incentive plan. As a result, the ratio does not provide a direct comparison to the total remuneration of the Group Chief Executive.
Each of the three individuals identified was a full-time employee during the year.
Due to operational constraints, inflationary adjustments to defined benefit pensions are excluded.
All other data has been calculated in line with the methodology for the single total figure of remuneration for the Group Chief Executive.

The median ratio has decreased 24 per cent year-on-year. The reduction is largely attributed to the Group Chief Executive’s request to withdraw from consideration by the Remuneration Committee (the Committee) for a Group Performance Share award for 2019. Volatility in variable reward outcomes has contributed to the year-on-year changes in the ratio.

The Committee is thoughtful of the volatility in pay ratios due to variable reward outcomes. Although the pay ratio is used as a useful reference point to inform policy-setting, the Committee takes into account a number of other factors to assess colleague pay progression.

For the majority of colleagues, year-on-year changes in remuneration are principally driven by pay increases. We are committed to reducing the pay gap between executives and wider colleagues and continue to remain focused on addressing the gap from the bottom up and not just from the top down. To support this, the Group has a commitment to pay progression and a continued focus on ensuring higher pay awards for colleagues who are lower paid, or paid lower within their pay range.

For 2020, the pay budget has been set at 2.4 per cent, with over 63 per cent of colleagues at lower grades receiving a pay award of 2.5 per cent or over. The pay budget for senior colleagues was set lower, at 2 per cent.

A minimum pay award of £500 will apply for all eligible colleagues and pay awards of up to 3.5 per cent for the lowest paid colleagues. We are proud to be an accredited Living Wage employer since 2015, and from April 2020 we will go further and raise the minimum salary for all full-time colleagues to £18,200, reflecting a rate of £10 per hour. For some colleagues this will result in an increase of up to 3.94 per cent and is 22 per cent greater than the National Living Wage and 70 pence greater than current National Living Wage Foundation’s UK wide real Living Wage.

We believe our approach to pay progression has contributed to the reduction of the 2019 median pay ratio and supports reducing the gap between executive and wider colleague pay over time. For example, the colleague who is now at P25 for 2019 received a 2.69 per cent pay increase which brought them up from P24 to that level.

REMUNERATION COMMITTEE

The Committee comprises six Non-Executive Directors; Stuart Sinclair (Chair), Lord Blackwell, Alan Dickinson, Anita Frew, Sara Weller and Amanda Mackenzie; to provide a balanced and independent view on remuneration matters. Stuart Sinclair has been Chair of the Committee since 1 September 2018 and has been a member of the Committee since January 2016. For further details of Committee membership and attendance at meetings, please see page 145.

The purpose of the Committee is to set the remuneration for all Executive Directors and the Chairman, including pension rights and any compensation payments. It recommends and monitors the level and structure of remuneration for senior management and material risk takers. It also considers, agrees and recommends to the Board an overall remuneration policy and philosophy for the Group that is aligned with its long-term business strategy, its business objectives, its risk appetite, purpose and values and the long-term interests of the Group, and recognises the interests of relevant stakeholders, including the wider workforce. The Committee’s operation is designed to ensure that no conflicts of interest arise, and in particular, the Committee ensures that no individual is present when matters relating to their own remuneration are discussed.

Mercer was appointed by the Committee in 2016 following a competitive tender process and was retained for 2019. The Committee is of the view that Mercer provides independent remuneration advice to the Committee and does not have any connections with the Group or any director that may impair its independence. The broader Mercer company provides unrelated advice on accounting and investments. During the year the Committee requested advice and independent research on market and best practice in relation to fixed and variable reward structures to support formulating the Policy. Mercer attended Committee meetings upon invitation and fees payable for the provision of services in 2019 were £31,630.

132

COMPENSATION

HOW THE REMUNERATION COMMITTEE SPENT ITS TIME IN 2019 AND COMPLIANCE WITH THE 2018 CORPORATE GOVERNANCE CODE

EXECUTIVES

Key highlights:

Assurance that the new Policy supports the delivery of the Group’s purpose and long-term goals whilst rewarding the right behaviours in line with the Group’s culture and values.

COLLEAGUES AND WIDER WORKFORCE

Key highlights:

Delivery of the Group’s new performance management approach ‘Your Best’ and colleague understanding of the link between performance and reward.

ADDITIONAL STAKEHOLDERS

Key highlights:

Consideration of a balanced range of opinions from stakeholders on remuneration matters.

Oversight and approvalOversightOversight and engagement

  Review of 2018 performance andremuneration for EDs and seniormanagement. Particularly focused ondiscussing and challenging performanceoutcomes and the direct implications ofrisk and conduct on reward outcomes.

  Comfortable that the Directors’ Remuneration Policy worked effectively in 2019, ensuring that there was true alignment between pay and performance notwithstanding that there were areas of development to consider when designing the new policy.

  The 2019 executive pay budget was setin the context of the wider colleague paybudget. Pay increases were approvedon the basis that they were lower thanpay increases for wider colleagues. Theimplications of pay increases on futureCEO pay ratios and the Group’s approachto pay progression was considered.

  Code Provision 40. When designing thenew Directors’ Remuneration Policy, theCommittee has aimed to design clear andtransparent remuneration structures thatreduce complexity and promote behavioursthat support the Group’s purpose, valuesand culture. Risk and conduct has beenconsidered to avoid rewarding for failureand the range of possible values of rewardsEDs can potentially receive have beenreviewed. Please see pages 117 to 121 forexamples of how we have considered the key principles of Provision 40 in 2019.

  2020 Colleague Pension Policy and how the changes support the Group’s culture.

  When finalising the changes to the Group’s DC employer pension offering including the reduction to ED pensions, the potential impact on pay ratios including gender pay were considered.

  Received a quarterly report on key colleague and wider workforce reward activity including in-year spend on colleague pay increases and a review of the Group Remuneration Policy for third party suppliers sharing enhancements to the assessment framework used to ensure third party reward polices align to the Group’s own principles.

  Constructive engagement with the Group’s recognised Unions, particularly on the deployment of the Group Performance Share model with the introduction of ‘Your Best’, the improvements to the DC pension scheme for all colleagues, the broader reward package the Group offers and 2019 discussions on pay budgets. Together the Unions are recognised across a bargaining unit of circa. 95 per cent of colleagues and continue to play a valuable role in representing colleagues across the Group.

  To support colleagues to better understand the approach to determining GPS awards across the Group, including Executive Directors, the Committee gained insight into how the Group has used internal media channels to explain the process in a clear and transparent way and to emphasise the link between pay and performance.

  Regular updates on corporate governance and institutional remuneration principles changes.

  The regulators were invited to attend committee meetings in 2019 and gain greater understanding of Committee debates in relation to performance and reward outcomes.

  The Chair attended the Work and Pensions Select Committee and reiterated intentions to focus on purpose and behaviour when designing the Policy in its entirety whilst also gaining further insight into external sentiment felt in relation to executive pensions.

STATEMENT OF VOTING AT ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING

The table below sets out the voting outcome at the Annual General Meeting in May 2019 in relation to the annual report on remuneration and the Remuneration Policy, last voted on in 2017.

  Votes cast in favour Votes cast against Votes withheld
  Number of shares
(millions)
 Percentage of
votes cast
 Number of shares
(millions)
 Percentage of
votes cast
 Number of shares
(millions)
2018 annual report on remuneration (advisory vote) 43,322 91.95% 3,790 8.05% 1,006
Directors’ remuneration policy (binding vote in 2017) 47,673 98.03% 959 1.97% 535
133

COMPENSATION

2020 Remuneration policy

 

Approval for this remuneration policyRemuneration Policy will be sought at the AGM on 1121 May 20172020 and, if approved, will take effect from that date.

 

It is intended that approval of the remuneration policyRemuneration Policy will be sought at three-year intervals, unless amendments to the policyPolicy are required, in which case further shareholder approval will be sought. Information on how the Policy will be implemented in 20172020 is included in the annual report on remuneration.

 

The Group’s policy continues to help ensure that the remuneration proposition is both cost effective and enables the Group to attract and retain executivesobjective of the highest calibre. The objectivePolicy is to align individual reward with the Group’s performance, the interests of its shareholders and a prudent approach to risk management. In this way, the requirements of the major stakeholders are balanced: customers, shareholders, employees, and regulators.

 

The policy is based on principles which are applicable to all employees within the Group and, in particular, the principle that the reward package should support the delivery of the Group’s purpose of helpingHelping Britain prosperProsper and the strategic aim of becoming the best bank for customers whilst delivering long-term superior and sustainable returns to shareholders. It fosters a performance-drivenperformance in line with the Group’s values and meritocratic culture,behaviours, encourages effective risk disciplines and is in line with relevant regulations and codes of best practice.

DECISION MAKING PROCESS FOR DETERMINING THE POLICY AND CONSIDERATION OF STAKEHOLDER VIEWS

In formulating the Policy, the Remuneration Committee has consulted extensively with a number of stakeholders including institutional shareholders and the Group’s main regulators, the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) and the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA). A formal consultation on the remuneration of Executive Directors was not undertaken with colleagues. However, constructive engagement with the Group’s recognised Unions took place on key elements of the reward package and the unions continue to play a valuable role in representing colleagues across the Group. The Committee also increased its level of oversight on remuneration matters for colleagues and the wider workforce in 2019, receiving overviews and analysis on key reward matters on a quarterly basis to support decisions in relation to executive remuneration.

The Chairman of the Remuneration Committee alongside senior management consulted with shareholders extensively and the proposed amendments to the Policy were deliberated by the Remuneration Committee at three separate committee meetings. Throughout the process, the Committee Chair kept an open dialogue with key stakeholders to provide updates on amendments and additional points of consideration within the Policy following their feedback. The final Policy is proposed on the basis that it has been widely consulted on with stakeholders and has been designed to align to the Group’s culture, values and purpose whilst also remaining aligned to wider stakeholder interests.

No Executive Director has been involved in the determination of their own remuneration but has remained well informed to ensure alignment between executive and wider colleague remuneration structures. To manage conflicts of interests effectively, Executive Directors were asked to step out of committee meetings and relevant paperwork was also redacted for individuals if required. The Committee has also considered gender pay and CEO pay ratio analysis when finalising policy proposals.

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY AND GROUP REMUNERATION POLICY ALIGNMENT

There is no significant difference between the policyPolicy for Executive Directors and that for other senior employees.colleagues. If a significant difference for any individual were proposed, this would be subject to approval by the Remuneration Committee (within regulatory requirements). The table below summarises how the policyPolicy applies across the Group.

 

  Executive DirectorsGroup Executive
Committee
Other Material
Executive DirectorsCommittee
Risk Takers
Other employeesEmployees
FixedBase salaryüüüü
 Fixed share award1üüüü
 Pension and benefitsüüüü
VariableShort-term incentiveüüüü
 Long-termLong term incentive1ü1üüü

 

1Eligibility based on seniority grade andand/or role.

 

CONSIDERATION OF SHAREHOLDERS’ AND EMPLOYEES’ VIEWS

The Group is committed to regular dialogue with stakeholders. In formulating the policy, the Remuneration Committee has consulted extensively with a number of shareholders and key stakeholders, such as the Group’s main regulators, the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) and the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA). The following topics were discussed:

BASE SALARYAlignment of variable remuneration to Group strategic priorities
  
Structure of variable remuneration
Latest regulatory requirements
Latest shareholder guidelines

Formal consultation on the remuneration of Executive Directors is not undertaken with employees and no formal remuneration comparison measurements were used. However, surveys are undertaken semi-annually on employee engagement and discussion on the Group’s remuneration approach takes place with union representatives during the annual pay review cycle and on relevant employee reward matters, on which the Remuneration Committee receives and considers relevant feedback. In addition, the Remuneration Committee has reviewed equal pay analysis undertaken by an independent third party and will continue to monitor this on an ongoing basis.

Colleague opinion is also sought through regular engagement surveys. This includes questions relating to remuneration, the results of which in 2016 positioned colleague satisfaction with the Group’s reward arrangements, including the link to performance, above the high performing norm of UK companies.

REMUNERATION POLICY TABLE FOR EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS

BASE SALARY

Purpose and link to strategy To support the recruitment and retention of Executive Directors of the calibre required to develop and deliver theGroup’s strategic priorities. Base salary reflects the role of the individual, taking account of market competitiveness,responsibilities and experience, and pay in the Group as a whole.
Operation 

Base salaries are typically reviewed annually with any increases normally taking effect from 1 January.January for existingExecutive Directors and 1 April for future appointments. When determining and reviewing base salary levels,the Committee takes into account base salary increases for employees throughout the Group and ensures that decisionsthatdecisions are made within the following two parameters:

An objective assessment of the individual’s responsibilities and the size and scope of their role, using objective job-sizingobjectivejob-sizing methodologies.

Pay for comparable roles in comparable publicly listed financial services groups of a similar size.

Salary may be paid in sterling or other currency and at an exchange rate determined by the Committee.

Maximum potential The Committee will make no increase which it believes is inconsistent with the two parameters above. Increaseswill normally be in line with the increase awarded to the overall employee population. However, a greater salary increasesalaryincrease may be appropriate in certain circumstances, such as a new appointment made on a salary below a market competitivemarketcompetitive level, where phased increases are planned, or where there has been an increase in the responsibilities ofresponsibilitiesof an individual. Where increases are awarded in excess of the wider employee population, the Committee will providewillprovide an explanation in the relevant annual report on remuneration.
Performance measures N/A
ChangesThe effective date will change from January to April each year for future Executive Directors to align delivery with the rest of the workforce.
126134

COMPENSATION

 

ChangesPreviously, the Group Chief Executive (GCE) had a reference salary of £1.22 million which was used to calculate certain elements of long-term remuneration and the pension allowance. Due to the GCE’s base salary being increased to his reference salary (effective from 1 January 2017), the concept of reference salary is being removed. Elements of long-term remuneration and the pension allowance which were previously calculated with regard to reference salary will be calculated with regard to the GCE’s base salary.
FIXED SHARE AWARDFixed share award  
Purpose and link to strategy To ensure that total fixed remuneration is commensurate with role and to provide a competitive reward packagefor Executive Directors with an appropriate balance of fixed and variable remuneration, in line with regulatory requirements.regulatoryrequirements.
Operation The fixed share award will initially be delivered entirely in Lloyds Banking Group shares, released over fivethree years with 2033 per cent being released each year following the year of award. The Committee can, however, decide to deliver somedeliversome or all of it in the form of cash.
Maximum potential The maximum award is 100 per cent of base salary.
Performance measures N/A
Changes NoDelivery of vested shares will change from five to policythree years to align the delivery schedule with other colleagueseligible to receive a Fixed Share Award.
PENSIONPension  
Purpose and link to strategy To provide cost effective and market competitive retirement benefits, supporting Executive Directors in buildinglong-term retirement savings.
Operation 

Executive Directors are entitled to participate in the Group’s defined contribution scheme with company contributionscompanycontributions set as a percentage of salary.

An individual may elect to receive some or all of their pension allowance as cash in lieu of pension contribution.

Maximum potential The maximum allowance for the GCEall Executive Directors is 5015 per cent of base salary. All future appointments asExecutive Directors will also attract a maximum allowance of 15 per cent of base salary less any flexible benefits allowance.
The maximumin line with the majority of theworkforce. Maximum allowance for other Executive Directors is 25 per cent of base salary.may be increased or decreased in order to remain aligned.
Performance measures N/A
Changes No changeMaximum employer pension contribution available has been reduced to policy for existing Executive Directors. All future appointments as Executive Directors will attract a maximum allowance of 2515 per cent of base salary.cash salary with nocompensation for the reduction to align to the maximum employer pension contribution available to colleagues onthe defined contribution pension scheme.
BENEFITSBenefits  
Purpose and link to strategy To provide flexible benefits as part of a competitive remuneration package.
Operation 

Benefits may include those currently provided and disclosed in the annual report on remuneration.

Coreremuneration.Core benefits include a company car or car allowance, private medical insurance, life insurance and other benefits thatbenefitsthat may be selected through the Group’s flexible benefits plan.

Additional benefits may be provided to individuals in certain circumstances such as relocation. This may include benefitsincludebenefits such as accommodation, relocation, and travel. The Committee retains the right to provide additional benefitsadditionalbenefits depending on individual circumstances.

When determining and reviewing the level of benefits provided, the Committee ensures that decisions are made withinmadewithin the following two parameters:

An objective assessment of the individual’s responsibilities and the size and scope of their role, using objective job-sizingobjectivejob-sizing methodologies.

Benefits for comparable roles in comparable publicly listed financial services groups of a similar size.

Maximum potential 

The Committee will only make only increases in the benefits currently provided which it believes are consistent with the twothetwo parameters above. Executive Directors receive a flexible benefits allowance, in line with all other employees. colleagues.

The flexible benefits allowance does not currently exceed 4 per cent of base salary.

Performance measures N/A
Changes No change to policyPolicy
ALL-EMPLOYEE PLANSAll-employee plans  
Purpose and link to strategy Executive Directors are eligible to participate in HMRC-approved share plans which promote share ownershipby giving employees an opportunity to invest in Group shares.
Operation Executive Directors may participate in these plans in line with HMRC guidelines currently prevailing (where relevant),on the same basis as other eligible employees.
Maximum potential 

Participation levels may be increased up to HMRC limits as amended from time to time. The monthly savings limits forlimitsfor Save As You Earn (SAYE) is currently £500. The maximum value of shares that may be purchased under the SharetheShare Incentive Plan (SIP) in any year is currently £1,800 with a two-for-one match. Currently a three-for-two match is operated up to a maximum employeecolleague investment of £30 per month.

The maximum value of free shares that may be awarded in any year is £3,600.

Performance measures N/A
Changes No change to policy
127135

COMPENSATION

 

GROUP PERFORMANCE SHARE PLANGroup Performance Share plan
Purpose and link to strategy To incentivise and reward the achievement of the Group’s annual financial and strategic targets whilst supportingthe delivery of long-term superior and sustainable returnsreturns.
Operation 

Measures and targets are set annually and awards are determined by the Committee after the year end based onbasedon performance against the targets set. The Group Performance Share may be delivered partly in cash, shares,notes or other debt instruments including contingent convertible bonds. Where all or part of any award is deferred,the Committee may adjust these deferred awards in the event of any variation of share capital, demerger, special dividendspecialdividend or distribution or amend the terms of the plan in accordance with the plan rules.

Where an award or a deferred award is in shares or other share-linked instrument, the number of shares to betobe awarded may be calculated using a fair value or based on discount to market value, as appropriate.

The Committee applies its judgement to determine the payout level commensurate with business and/orindividual performance or individual performance.other factors as determined by the Committee. The Committee may reduce the level oflevelof award (including to zero), apply additional conditions to the vesting, or delay the vesting of deferred awards to a specifiedaspecified date or until conditions set by the Committee are satisfied, where it considers it appropriate as a result of an event occurring before vesting.appropriate. Awards may bemaybe subject to malus and clawback for a period of up to seven years after the date of award which may be extended toextendedto 10 years where there is an ongoing internal or regulatory investigation.

Maximum potential The maximum Group Performance Share opportunities are 140 per cent of base salary for the GCE and 100 per centof base salary for other Executive Directors.
Performance measures 

Measures and targets are set annually by the Committee in line with the Group’s strategic business plan and further detailsfurtherdetails are set out in the annual report on remuneration for the relevant year.

  

Measures consist of both financial and non-financial measures and the weighting of these measures will be determinedbedetermined annually by the Committee. The weightings of the performance measures for the 2017 financial year2020 financialyear are set out for 2019 on page 136.129. All assessments of performance are ultimately subject to the Committee’s judgement,Committee’sjudgement, but no award will be made if threshold performance (as determined by the Committee) is not met for financialforfinancial measures or the individual is rated ‘Developing performer’receives a score of 2.6 out of 5 or below. The expected valuenormal ‘target’ level of the Group PerformanceGroupPerformance Share is 3050 per cent of maximum opportunity.

The Committee is committed to providing transparency in its decision making in respect of Group Performance SharePerformanceShare awards and will disclose historic measures and target information together with information relating to how thehowthe Group has performed against those targets in the annual report on remuneration for the relevant year except toexceptto the extent that this information is deemed to be commercially sensitive, in which case it will be disclosed once it isitis deemed not to be sensitive.

Changes DueThe normal ‘target’ level of the Group Performance Share has changed to regulatory changes, Executive Directors can no longer receive dividend equivalents on deferred shares. The number50 per cent of shares to be awarded may be calculated using a fair or discounted value. If regulatory requirements change, dividend equivalents may be paid. There are no changes to maximum opportunity.opportunityfrom 30 per cent.
GROUP OWNERSHIP SHARE PLANLong Term Share plan
Purpose and link to strategy To incentiviseLong term variable reward opportunity to align executive management incentives and reward Executive Directors and senior managementbehaviours to deliver against strategic the Group’sobjectives designed to support the long-term success of the Group and encourage working as a team. It ensures executives build an ownership interest in the Group and are motivated by delivering long-term superior and sustainable returns forreturns. The Long Term Share Plan will incentivestewardship over a long time horizon and promote good governance through a simple alignment with the interestof shareholders.
Operation Awards are

From 2021, awards will be granted under the rules of the 20162020 Long-Term IncentiveShare Plan, approvedsubject to shareholderapproval at the AGM on 1221 May 2016.2020. Awards are made in the form of conditional shares or nil cost options. Awardand award levels are set at theatthe time of grant, in compliance with regulatory requirements, and may be subject to a discount in determining total variabletotalvariable remuneration under the rules set by the European Banking Authority.

The number of shares to be awarded mayawardedmay be calculated using a fair value or based on a discount to market value, as appropriate.

Vesting will be subject to the achievementan assessment of performance conditionsunderpin thresholds being maintained measured over a period of three years,threeyears, or such longer period, as determined by the Committee.

The Committee retains full discretion to amend the payout levels should the award not reflect business and/or individualorindividual performance. The Committee may reduce (including to zero) the level of the award, apply additional conditionsadditionalconditions to the vesting, or delay the vesting of awards to a specified date or until conditions set by the Committee areCommitteeare satisfied, where it considers it appropriate as a result of an event occurring before vesting. appropriate.

Awards may be subject to malus and clawback for a period of up to seven years after the date of award which may bemaybe extended to 10 years where there is an ongoing internal or regulatory investigation.

Maximum potential The maximum annual award for Executive Directors will normally be 300Long Term Share Plan opportunity is 200 per cent of salary. Under base salary for all Executive Directors includingthe plan rules, awards canGCE.
Performance measures

An award may be made up to 400granted by the Remuneration Committee taking into account an assessment of performance ofthe Company, any Member of the Group or business unit or team, and/or the performance, conduct or capability ofthe Participant, on such basis as the Committee determine. The normal ‘target’ level of the Long Term Share award is 150 per cent of salary in exceptional circumstances.base salary.

No further performance conditions will apply. However vesting will be subject to the underpins and RemunerationCommittee discretion as described above.

ChangesThe Long Term Share Plan replaces the Executive Group Ownership Share Plan.
128136

COMPENSATION

 

Performance measuresMeasuresDeferral of variable remuneration and targets are set by the Committee annually and are set out in the annual report on remuneration each year. At least 60 per cent of awards are weighted towards typical market (e.g. Total Shareholder Return) and/or financial measures (e.g. economic profit), with the balance on strategic measures.holding periods
25 per cent will vest for threshold performance, 50 per cent for on-target performance and 100 per cent for maximum performance.
The measures are chosen to support the best bank for customers strategy and to align management and shareholder interests. Targets are set by the Committee to be stretching within the context of the strategic business plan. Measures are selected to balance profitability, achievement of strategic goals and to ensure the incentive does not encourage inappropriate risk-taking.
Following the end of the relevant performance period, the Committee will disclose in the annual report on remuneration for the relevant year historic measure and target information, together with how the Group has performed against those targets, unless this information is deemed to be commercially sensitive, in which case it will be disclosed once it is deemed not to be sensitive.
ChangesDue to regulatory changes, Executive Directors can no longer receive dividend equivalents on deferred shares. The number of shares to be awarded may be calculated using a fair or discounted value. If regulatory requirements change, dividend equivalents may be paid. There are no changes to maximum opportunity.
DEFERRAL OF VARIABLE REMUNERATION AND HOLDING PERIODS
OperationThe Group Performance Share and Group OwnershipLong Term Share plans are both considered variable remuneration for the purpose of regulatory payment and deferral requirements. The payment of variable remuneration and deferral levels are determined at the time of award and in compliance with regulatory requirements (which currently require that at least 60 per cent of total variable remuneration is deferred for seven years with pro rata vesting between the third and seventh year, and at least 50 per cent of total variable remuneration is paid in shares or other equity linked instruments subject to a holding period in line with current regulatory requirements).

A proportion of the aggregate variable remuneration may vest immediately on award. The remaining proportion of the variable remuneration is then deferred in line with regulatory requirements.
ChangesTheNo change in deferral period has been extended to comply with new regulatory requirements.

 

Further information on which performance measures were chosen and how performance targets and underpin thresholds are set are disclosed in the relevant sections throughout the report.

 

DISCRETION IN RELATION TO GROUP PERFORMANCE SHARE AND GROUP OWNERSHIP SHARE PLANSVARIABLE REWARDS

 

The Committee retains discretion with regards to these plans. This relates to:

 

the timing, size and type of awards and holding periods, subject to policy maxima;maxima, and the annual setting of targets;
where qualitative performance measures or underpins are used and performance against those measures or underpins is not commensurate with the Group’s overall financial or strategic performance over the performance period;
where qualitative underpin thresholds are used and performance against those underpins is not commensurate with the Group’s overall financial performance over the underpin period;
adjustment of targets and measures if events occur which cause it to determine that it is appropriate to do so. The Committee also retains the right to change performance measures and the weighting of measures, including following feedback from regulators, shareholders and/or other stakeholders; and amending the plan rules in accordance with their terms and or amending the basis of operation (including but not limited to the approach in respect of dividend equivalents) including in light of any change to regulatory requirements or guidance or feedback from regulators;
to exercise discretion in accordance with the rules, including in relation to whether or not malus or clawback provisions would apply, in connection with recruitment, or terminations of employment, or corporate events affecting the Company;
adjustments required in certain circumstances (e.g. rights issues, corporate restructuring events and special dividends);
where qualitative performance measures are used and performance against those measures is not commensurate with the Group’s overall financial performance overexercise of the performance period;
adjustment of targets and measures if events occur which cause it to determine that the conditions are no longer appropriate. The Committee also retains the right to change performance targets and measures and the weighting of measures, including following feedback from regulators, shareholders and/or other stakeholders; and
amending the plan rulesCommittee’s discretion will be disclosed in accordance with their terms.regulatory requirements.

The exercise of the Committee’s discretion will be disclosed in accordance with regulatory requirements.

 

LEGACY AWARDS AND RESTRICTIONS ON PAYMENTS

 

Awards in respect of the Group Performance Share and under the long-term incentive Group Ownership share will be granted in 2020 under the terms of the Directors’ remuneration policy approved by shareholders on 11 May 2017 (the “2017 Policy”). No further awards would be made under the long-term incentive Group Ownership share (or the terms of the 2017 Policy) unless the new Long Term Share Plan 2020 was not approved by shareholders. The Committee reserves the right to make any remuneration payments/awards and any payments/awards for loss of office, notwithstanding that they are not in line with the policy set out above where the terms of the payment/award were agreed (i) before the Directors’ remuneration2017 policy approved by shareholders on 15 May 2014 (the ’2014 policy’) came into effect; (ii) pursuant to the 20142017 policy; or (iii) at a time when the relevant individual was not a Director of the Group and, in the opinion of the Committee, the payment/award was not in consideration for the individual becoming a Director of the Group. Such payments/awards will have been set out in the annual report on remuneration for the relevant year. They include awards and payments made under previous approved remuneration policy and payments in relation to deferred bonusGroup Performance Share awards and long-term incentiveincentive’ Group Ownership share awards granted in 20122018, 2019 and, 2013.as referred to above, 2020.

137

COMPENSATION

 

ILLUSTRATION OF APPLICATION OF REMUNERATION POLICY

 

The charts below illustrate possible remuneration outcomes under the following three scenarios:

 

1.The maximum that may be paid, assuming full Group Performance Share payout and full vesting under the Group Ownershipnew Long Term Share plan. For the Long Term Share Plan, an indication of the maximum remuneration receivable assumes a share price appreciation of 50 per cent during the period in which the award is subject to underpins. The basis of the calculation of the share price appreciation is that the share price embedded in the calculation for the ‘maximum’ bar chart is assumed to increase by 50 per cent across the performance period.
  
2.The expected value of remuneration for performance midway between threshold and maximum, assuming 3050 per cent of maximum Group Performance Share opportunity and 50a Long Term Share award granted at 150 per cent vesting underof salary. It is also assumed that the Group OwnershipLong Term Share plan.Award will vest in full.
  
3.The minimum that may be paid, where only the fixed element is paid (salary,(base salary, benefits, pension and the fixed share award).
129

COMPENSATION

 

No share price growth has been assumed. The amountsAmounts are based on based salaries as at 1 January 2017 (GCE2020 for the Group Chief Executive and CRO)Chief Operating Officer and 1 April 2017 (CFO) and implementation2020 for the Chief Financial Officer. Implementation of the policyPolicy in 2017 as2020 is set out in the annual report on remuneration.

 

António Horta-Osório

Value of package (£000)

 

George Culmer

Value of package (£000)

Juan Colombás

Value of package (£000)

1Maximum values of reward package take into account the assumed 50 per cent share price appreciation. Maximum total compensation (£000) without share price appreciation is £7,005 for António Horta-Osório, £3,840 for Juan Colombás and £3,913 for William Chalmers.

 

APPROACH TO RECRUITMENT AND APPOINTMENT TO THE BOARD

 

In determining appropriate remuneration arrangements on hiring a new Executive Director, the Committee will take into account all relevant factors. This may include the experience and calibre of the individual, local market practice, the existing remuneration arrangements for other executives and the business circumstances. The Committee will seek to ensure that arrangements are in the best interests of both the Group and its shareholders and will seek not to pay more than is necessary.

 

The Committee may make awards on hiring an external candidate to ‘buy-out’ remuneration arrangements forfeited on leaving a previous employer. In doing so the Committee will take account of relevant factors including any performance conditions attached to these awards, the form in which they were granted (e.g. cash or shares), the currency of the awards, and the timeframe of awards. Any such award made will be made in accordance with the PRA’s Rulebook and made on a comparable basis to those forfeited and subject to malus and clawback at the request of the previous employer as required by the PRA rules.

 

The package will normally be aligned with the remuneration policy as described in the policy report. However, the Committee retains the discretion to make appropriate remuneration decisions outside the standard policy to facilitate the recruitment of an individual of the calibre required and in exceptional cases.

 

This may, for example, include the following circumstances:

 

An interim recruit, appointed to fill an Executive Director role on a short-term basis.
Exceptional circumstances requiring the Chairman to take on an executive function on a short-term basis.
An Executive Director recruited at a time in the year when it would be inappropriate to provide a Group Performance Share or Group OwnershipLong Term Share award for that year, for example, where there may be insufficient time to assess performance. In this situation the Committee may feel it appropriate to transfer the quantum in respect of the months employed during the year to the subsequent year so that reward is provided on a fair basis.
An Executive Director recruited from a business or location where benefits are provided that do not fall into the definition of ‘variable remuneration forfeited’ but where the Committee considers it reasonable to buy-out these benefits.
Transitional arrangements for overseas hires, which might include relocation expenses and accommodation.

 

The maximum level of variable remuneration (excluding buy-out awards) that may be awarded to new Executive Directors is equal to 200 per cent of fixed remuneration, including any discount permitted by the European Banking Authority for Group Ownership Share awards.Authority. In making any such remuneration decisions, the Committee will apply any appropriate performance measures in line with those applied to other Executive Directors.

 

A full explanation will be provided of any buy-out award or discretionary payment.

130138

COMPENSATION

 

SERVICE AGREEMENTS

 

The service contracts of all current Executive Directors are terminable on 12 months’ notice from the Group and six months’ notice from the individual.

The Chairman also has a letter of appointment. His engagement may be terminated on six months’ notice by either the Group or him.

 

  Notice to be given by the Group Date of service agreement
Lord Blackwell 6 months 31 March 2014
António Horta-Osório 12 months 3 November 2010
George CulmerWilliam Chalmers 12 months 1 March 20123 June 2019
Juan Colombás 12 months 30 November 2010

 

Under his contract (dated 3 November 2010), António Horta-Osório (GCE) is entitled to an amount equivalent to base salary and pension allowance as a payment in lieu of notice if notice to terminate is given by the Group. If notice to terminate is given by the GCE, he is entitled to an amount equivalent to base salary if the Group chooses to make a payment in lieu of notice. Such payments in lieu will be made in monthly instalments subject to mitigation. He is also entitled to six months’ notice from the Group in the event of his long-term incapacity. As part of a buy-out of a pension forfeited on joining from Santander, the GCE is also entitled to the provision of a conditional unfunded pension commitment, subject to performance conditions as described further in the annual report on remuneration. In the event of long-term incapacity, if the GCE does not perform his duties for a period of at least 26 weeks (in aggregate over a 12 month period), the Group shall be entitled to terminate his employment by giving six months’ notice. In all other respects, the terms of the GCE’s contract in relation to payments for loss of office match those set out below for new directors.

 

Under terms agreed when joining the Group, Juan Colombás is entitled to a conditional lump sum benefit, payable either (i) on reaching normal retirement age unless he voluntarily resigns or is dismissed for cause, or (ii) on leaving due to long-term sickness or death, as described further in the annual report on remuneration.

 

The service contracts and letters of appointment are available for inspection at the Company’s registered office.

 

NOTICE PERIODS

 

Newly-appointed Executive Directors will be employed on contracts that include the following provisions:

 

The individual will be required to give six months’ notice if they wish to leave and the Group will give 12 months’ notice other than for material misconduct or neglect or other circumstances where the individual may be summarily dismissed by written notice. In exceptional circumstances, new joiners will be offered a longer notice period (typically reducing to 12 months within two years of joining).
In the event of long-term incapacity, if the Executive Director does not perform their duties for a period of at least 26 weeks (in aggregate over a 12 month period), the Group shall be entitled to terminate the executive’s employment by giving three months’ notice.
At any time after notice to terminate is given by either the Group or the Executive Director, the Group may require the Executive Director to take leave for some or all of the notice period.
At any time, at its absolute discretion, the Group may elect to terminate the individual’s employment by paying to the Executive Director, in lieu of the notice period, an amount equivalent to base salary, subject to mitigation as described more fully in the termination payments section of this report, below.report.
131139

COMPENSATION

 

TERMINATION PAYMENTS

 

It is the Group’s policy that where compensation on termination is due, it should be paid on a phased basis, mitigated in the event that alternative employment is secured. Where it is appropriate to make a bonus payment (now( known as Group Performance Share) to the individual, this should relate to the period of actual service, rather than the full notice period. Any Group Performance Share payment will be determined on the basis of performance as for all continuing employees and will remain subject to performance adjustment (malus and clawback) and deferral. Generally, on termination of employment, Group Performance Share awards, long-term incentive awards (now known asin flight Group Ownership Share)Share awards, Long Term Share Plan awards and other rights to payments will lapse except where termination falls within one of the reasons set out below. In the event of redundancy, the individual may receive a payment in line with statutory entitlements at that time. If an Executive Director is dismissed for gross misconduct, the Executive Director will receive normal contractual entitlements until the date of termination and all deferred Group Performance Share, and Group Ownership Share and Long Term Share Plan awards will lapse.

 

  Base salary Fixed share award Pension, benefits and
other fixed remuneration
Resignation In the case of resignation to take up new employment, paid until date of termination (including any period of leave required by the Group). In the case of resignation for other reasons, base salary will be paid in monthly instalments for the notice period (or any balance of it), offset by earnings from new employment during this period. Awards continue and are released at the normal time and the number of shares subject to the award in the current year will be reduced to reflect the date of termination. Paid until date of termination including any period of leave required by the Group (subject to individual benefit scheme rules).
Redundancy or termination by mutual agreement Paid until date of termination (including any period of leave required by the Group). In respect of the balance of any notice period, base salary will be paid in monthly instalments, offset by earnings from new employment during this period. Awards will normally continue and be released at the normal time and the number of shares subject to the award in the current year will be reduced to reflect the date of termination unless, in the case of mutual agreement, the Committee determines that exceptional circumstances apply in which case shares may be released on termination. Paid until date of termination including any period of leave required by the Group (subject to individual benefit scheme rules).
Retirement/ill health, injury, permanent disability/death Paid until date of retirement/death. For ill health, injury or permanent disability which results in the loss of employment, paid for the applicable notice period (including any period of leave required by the Group). Awards will normally continue and be released at the normal time and the number of shares subject to the award in the current year will be reduced to reflect the date of termination except for (i) death where shares are released on the date of termination; or (ii) in the case of permanent disability the Committee determines that exceptional circumstances apply in which case shares may be released on the date of termination. Paid until date of death/ retirement (subject to individual benefit scheme rules). For ill health, injury, permanent disability, paid for the notice period including any period of leave required by the Group (subject to individual benefit scheme rules).
Change of control or merger N/A Awards will be payable on the date of the Change of Control and the number of shares subject to the award will be reduced to reflect the shorter accrual period. The Committee may decide that vested awards will be exchanged for (and future awards made over) shares in the acquiring company or other relevant company. N/A
Other reason where the Committee determines that the executive should be treated as a good leaver Paid until date of termination (including any period of leave required by the Group). In respect of the balance of any notice period, base salary will be paid in monthly instalments, offset by earnings from new employment during this period. Awards continue and are released at the normal time and the number of shares subject to the award in the current year will be reduced to reflect the date of termination. Paid until date of termination including any period of leave required by the Group (subject to individual benefit scheme rules).
132140

COMPENSATION

 

  Group Performance Share
(Annual bonus (now known as
Group Performance Share)plan)1
 Long-term incentive (now known asLong Term Share Plan
Group Ownership Share)(Long term variable reward plan)2
 Chairman and
Non-Executive Director fees3
Resignation Unvested deferred Group Performance Share awards are forfeited and in-year Group Performance Share awards are accrued until the date of termination (or the commencement of garden leave if earlier) unless the Committee determines otherwise (in exceptional circumstances), in exceptional circumstances.which case such awards are subject to deferral, malus and clawback. Awards lapse on date of leaving (or on notice of leaving) unless the Committee determines otherwise in exceptional circumstances that they will vest on the original vesting date (or exceptionally on the date of leaving). Where award is to vest it will be subject to the performance conditionsunderpins and time pro-rating (for months worked in performanceunderpin period). Malus and clawback will apply. Paid until date of leaving Board.
Redundancy or termination by mutual agreement For cases of redundancy, unvested deferred Group Performance Share awards are retained and in-year Group Performance Share awards are accrued until the date of termination (or the commencement of garden leave if earlier). Such awards would be subject to deferral, malus and clawback. For termination by mutual agreement, the same approach as for resignation would apply. Awards vest on the original vesting date (or exceptionally on the date of leaving). Vesting is subject to the performance conditionsunderpins and time pro-rating (for months worked in performanceunderpin period). Malus and clawback will apply. Paid until date of leaving Board.
Retirement/ill health, injury, permanent disability Unvested deferred Group Performance Share awards are retained and in-year Group Performance Share awards are accrued until the date of termination (or the commencement of garden leave if earlier). Such awards would be subject to deferral, malus and clawback. Awards vest on the original vesting date (or exceptionally on the date of leaving). Vesting is subject to the performance conditionsunderpins and time pro-rating (for months worked in performanceunderpin period). Malus and clawback will apply. Paid until date of leaving Board.
Death Unvested deferred Group Performance Share awards are retained and in-year Group Performance Share awards are accrued until the date of termination. Deferred Group Performance Share awards vest on death in cash, unless the Committee determines otherwise. Awards vest in full on the date of death subject tounless in exceptional circumstances the performance conditions and time pro-rating (for months worked in performance period unless determined otherwise). Malus and clawback will apply.Remuneration Committee determines that the underpins or pre-vest test do not support full vesting. Paid until date of leaving Board.
Change of control or merger2 In-year Group Performance Share accrued up until date of change of control or merger (current year). Where there is a Corporate Event, deferred Group Performance Share awards vest to the extent and timing determined by the Committee in its absolute discretion. Awards vest on date of event. Vesting is subject to the performance conditionsunderpins and time pro-rating (for months worked in performanceunderpin period unless determined otherwise). Malus and clawback will normally apply. Instead of vesting, awards may be exchanged for equivalent awards over the shares of the acquiring company or another company.company or equivalent cash based awards. Paid until date of leaving Board.
Other reason where the Committee determines that the executive should be treated as a good leaver Unvested deferred Group Performance Share awards are retained and in-year Group Performance Share awards are accrued until the date of termination (or the commencement of garden leave if earlier). Deferred Group Performance Share awards vest in line with normal timeframes and are subject to malus and clawback. The Committee may allow awards to vest early if it considers it appropriate. Awards vest on the original vesting date (or exceptionally on the date of leaving). Vesting is subject to the performance conditionsunderpins and time pro-rating (for months worked in performanceunderpin period). Malus and clawback will apply. Paid until date of leaving Board.

 

1If any Group Performance Share is to be paid to the Executive Director for the current year, this will be determined on the basis of performance for the period of actual service, rather than the full notice period (and so excluding any period of leave required by the Group).
2Reference to change of control or merger includes a compromise or arrangement under section 899 of the Companies Act 2006 or equivalent. Fixed share awards may also be released/exchanged in the event of a resolution for the voluntary winding up of the Company; a demerger, delisting, distribution (other than an ordinary dividend) or other transaction, which, in the opinion of the Committee, might affect the current or future value of any award; or a reverse takeover, merger by way of a dual listed company or other significant corporate event, as determined by the Committee. In the event of a demerger, special dividend or other transaction which would in the Committee’s opinion affect the value of awards, the Committee may allow a long-termdeferred Group Performance Share award or a long term incentive award to vest to the extent relevant performance conditions are met to that date and if the Committee so determined, on a time pro-rated basis (unless determined otherwise) to reflect the number of months of the performanceunderpin period worked.
3The Chairman is entitled to six months’ notice.
4The terms applicable on a cessation of employment to Group Ownership Share Awards are as shown on page 133 of the 2017 Remuneration Policy.
133141

COMPENSATION

 

On termination, the Executive Director will be entitled to payment for any accrued but untaken holiday calculated by reference to base salary and fixed share award.

 

The cost of legal, tax or other advice incurred by an Executive Director in connection with the termination of their employment and/or the cost of support in seeking alternative employment may be met up to a maximum of £100,000. Additional payments may be made where required to settle legal disputes, or as consideration for new or amended post-employment restrictions.

 

Where an Executive Director is in receipt of expatriate or relocation expenses at the time of termination (as at the date of the AGM no current Executive Directors are in receipt of such expenses), the cost of actual expenses incurred may continue to be reimbursed for up to 12 months after termination or, at the Group’s discretion, a one-off payment may be made to cover the costs of premature cancellation. The cost of repatriation may also be covered.

 

REMUNERATION POLICY TABLE FOR CHAIRMAN AND NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS

 

The table below sets out the remuneration policy for Non-Executive Directors (NEDs).

 

CHAIRMAN AND NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR FEES

AND BENEFITS

Purpose and link to strategyTo provide an appropriate reward to attract and retain a high-calibre individual with the relevant skills, knowledge and experience.
OperationThe Committee is responsible for evaluating and making recommendations to the Board with regards to the Chairman’s fees. The Chairman does not participate in these discussions.
 The GCE and the Chairman are responsible for evaluating and making recommendations to the Board in relation to the fees of the NEDs.
 When determining and reviewing fee and benefit levels, the Committee ensures that decisions are made within the following parameters:
 

The individual’s skills and experience.

An objective assessment of the individual’s responsibilities and the size and scope of their role, using objective sizing methodologies.

Fees and benefits for comparable roles in comparable publicly listed financial services groups of a similar size.

 The Chairman receives an all-inclusive fee, which is reviewed periodically plus benefits including life insurance, car allowance, medical insurance and transportation. The Committee retains the right to provide additional benefits depending on individual circumstances.
 NEDs are paid a basic fee plus additional fees for the chairmanship/membership of committees and for membership of Group companies/boards/non-board level committees.
 Additional fees are also paid to the senior independent director and to the deputy chairman to reflect additional responsibilities.
 Any increases normally take effect from 1 January of a given year.
 The Chairman and the NEDs are not entitled to receive any payment for loss of office (other than in the case of the Chairman’s fees for the six month notice period) and are not entitled to participate in the Group’s bonus, share plan or pension arrangements.
 NEDs are reimbursed for expenses incurred in the course of their duties, such as travel and accommodation expenses, on a grossed-up basis (where applicable).
Maximum potentialThe Committee will make no increase in fees or benefits currently provided which it believes is inconsistent with the parameters above.
Performance metricsN/A
ChangesNo change to policy.

 

LETTERS OF APPOINTMENT

 

The Non-Executive Directors all have letters of appointment and are appointed for an initial term of three years after which their appointment may continue subject to an annual review. Non-Executive Directors may have their appointment terminated, in accordance with statute and the articles of association, at any time with immediate effect and without compensation.

 

DATESTATEMENT OF LETTERVOTING AT ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING

The table below sets out the voting outcome at the Annual General Meeting in May 2019 in relation to the annual report on remuneration and the Remuneration Policy, last voted on in 2017.

  Votes cast in favour Votes cast against Votes withheld
  Number of shares
(millions)
 Percentage of
votes cast
 Number of shares
(millions)
 Percentage of
votes cast
 Number of shares
(millions)
2018 annual report on remuneration (advisory vote) 43,322 91.95% 3,790 8.05% 1,006
Directors’ remuneration policy (binding vote in 2017) 47,673 98.03% 959 1.97% 535
133

COMPENSATION

2020 Remuneration policy

Approval for this Remuneration Policy will be sought at the AGM on 21 May 2020 and, if approved, will take effect from that date.

It is intended that approval of the Remuneration Policy will be sought at three-year intervals, unless amendments to the Policy are required, in which case further shareholder approval will be sought. Information on how the Policy will be implemented in 2020 is included in the annual report on remuneration.

The objective of the Policy is to align individual reward with the Group’s performance, the interests of its shareholders and a prudent approach to risk management. In this way, the requirements of the major stakeholders are balanced: customers, shareholders, employees, and regulators.

The policy is based on principles which are applicable to all employees within the Group and, in particular, the principle that the reward package should support the delivery of the Group’s purpose of Helping Britain Prosper and the strategic aim of becoming the best bank for customers whilst delivering long-term superior and sustainable returns to shareholders. It fosters performance in line with the Group’s values and behaviours, encourages effective risk disciplines and is in line with relevant regulations and codes of best practice.

DECISION MAKING PROCESS FOR DETERMINING THE POLICY AND CONSIDERATION OF APPOINTMENTSTAKEHOLDER VIEWS

In formulating the Policy, the Remuneration Committee has consulted extensively with a number of stakeholders including institutional shareholders and the Group’s main regulators, the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) and the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA). A formal consultation on the remuneration of Executive Directors was not undertaken with colleagues. However, constructive engagement with the Group’s recognised Unions took place on key elements of the reward package and the unions continue to play a valuable role in representing colleagues across the Group. The Committee also increased its level of oversight on remuneration matters for colleagues and the wider workforce in 2019, receiving overviews and analysis on key reward matters on a quarterly basis to support decisions in relation to executive remuneration.

The Chairman of the Remuneration Committee alongside senior management consulted with shareholders extensively and the proposed amendments to the Policy were deliberated by the Remuneration Committee at three separate committee meetings. Throughout the process, the Committee Chair kept an open dialogue with key stakeholders to provide updates on amendments and additional points of consideration within the Policy following their feedback. The final Policy is proposed on the basis that it has been widely consulted on with stakeholders and has been designed to align to the Group’s culture, values and purpose whilst also remaining aligned to wider stakeholder interests.

No Executive Director has been involved in the determination of their own remuneration but has remained well informed to ensure alignment between executive and wider colleague remuneration structures. To manage conflicts of interests effectively, Executive Directors were asked to step out of committee meetings and relevant paperwork was also redacted for individuals if required. The Committee has also considered gender pay and CEO pay ratio analysis when finalising policy proposals.

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY AND GROUP REMUNERATION POLICY ALIGNMENT

There is no significant difference between the Policy for Executive Directors and that for other colleagues. If a significant difference for any individual were proposed, this would be subject to approval by the Remuneration Committee (within regulatory requirements). The table below summarises how the Policy applies across the Group.

 

Alan Dickinson26 June 2014Deborah McWhinneyExecutive Directors26 November 2015Group Executive
Committee
Other Material
Risk Takers
Other Employees
Anita FrewFixed17 November 2010Base salaryNick Prettejohnü1 April 2014üüü
Simon HenryFixed share award1 May 2014Stuart Sinclairü26 November 2015üüü
Dyfrig John28 October 2013Pension and benefitsAnthony Watsonü23 February 2009üüü
Nick LuffVariable25 February 2013Short-term incentiveSara Wellerü31 January 2012üüü
Long term incentive1üüüü

 

All Directors are subject to annual re-election by shareholders.

1Eligibility based on seniority and/or role.

 

The service contracts and letters of appointments are available for inspection at the Company’s registered office.
BASE SALARY
Purpose and link to strategyTo support the recruitment and retention of Executive Directors of the calibre required to develop and deliver theGroup’s strategic priorities. Base salary reflects the role of the individual, taking account of market competitiveness,responsibilities and experience, and pay in the Group as a whole.
Operation

Base salaries are typically reviewed annually with any increases normally taking effect from 1 January for existingExecutive Directors and 1 April for future appointments. When determining and reviewing base salary levels,the Committee takes into account base salary increases for employees throughout the Group and ensures thatdecisions are made within the following two parameters:

– An objective assessment of the individual’s responsibilities and the size and scope of their role, using objectivejob-sizing methodologies.

– Pay for comparable roles in comparable publicly listed financial services groups of a similar size.

Salary may be paid in sterling or other currency and at an exchange rate determined by the Committee.

Maximum potentialThe Committee will make no increase which it believes is inconsistent with the two parameters above. Increaseswill normally be in line with the increase awarded to the overall employee population. However, a greater salaryincrease may be appropriate in certain circumstances, such as a new appointment made on a salary below a marketcompetitive level, where phased increases are planned, or where there has been an increase in the responsibilitiesof an individual. Where increases are awarded in excess of the wider employee population, the Committee willprovide an explanation in the relevant annual report on remuneration.
Performance measuresN/A
ChangesThe effective date will change from January to April each year for future Executive Directors to align delivery with the rest of the workforce.

134

COMPENSATION

 

ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION

IMPLEMENTATION OF THE POLICY IN 2017

It is proposed to operate the policy in the following way in 2017:

BASE SALARY

The Group has applied a 2 per cent overall salary budget increase for the general population differentiated by performance and market position (with increases of around 4 per cent for strongly performing colleagues). Salary increases of 2 per cent are proposed for the Chief Financial Officer (CFO) and the Chief Risk Officer (CRO).

As announced last year, for the first time since 2011 a salary increase was applied in 2016 for the Group Chief Executive to begin to adjust his base salary to the previously disclosed reference salary of £1,220,000 which was set relative to the market when he joined in 2011. After discussing the proposed increase with shareholders, the Remuneration Committee decided to stage the adjustment over two years, with an initial increase to £1,125,000 effective from 1 January 2016 and the second stage increase to £1,220,000 due to be implemented with effect from 1 January 2017. The form of the increase will follow that for 2016, with 2 per cent delivered in cash (in line with other colleagues) and the remainder in shares, held until the government has sold its shareholding in the Group.

Salaries will therefore be as follows, effective dates shown below:

GCE: £1,220,000 (1 January 2017)
CFO: £764,070 (1 April 2017)
CRO: £753,458 (1 January 2017)

Due to the GCE’s base salary being increased in line with his reference salary (effective from 1 January 2017), the concept of a separate reference salary will be removed. Reference salary will therefore no longer be used when calculating certain elements of long-term remuneration and the pension allowance. Instead, these elements will be calculated with reference to the GCE’s base salary.

FIXED SHARE AWARD

The levels of the 2017 award are unchanged from 2016 and are as follows:

GCE: £900,000

CFO: £504,000

CRO: £497,000

Shares will be released in equal tranches over a five year period.

PENSION

Executive Directors are entitled to a pension allowance which they may choose to take as cash in lieu of pension contributions.

The level of allowances has not been increased for 2017.

GCE: 50 per cent of base salary less flexible benefits allowance

CFO: 25 per cent of base salary

CRO: 25 per cent of base salary

BENEFITS

For 2017, the benefits provided to Executive Directors include a car allowance, transportation, private medical insurance, life assurance and other benefits selected through the flexible benefits allowance which is currently capped at 4 per cent of base salary (unchanged from 2016).

ALL-EMPLOYEE PLANS

Executive Directors are eligible to participate in the Group’s Sharesave and Sharematch plans on the same basis as other employees.

GROUP PERFORMANCE SHARE PLAN

OpportunityFixed share award
Purpose and link to strategyTo ensure that total fixed remuneration is commensurate with role and to provide a competitive reward packagefor Executive Directors with an appropriate balance of fixed and variable remuneration, in line with regulatoryrequirements.
OperationThe fixed share award will be delivered entirely in Lloyds Banking Group shares, released over three years with33 per cent being released each year following the year of award. The Committee can, however, decide to deliversome or all of it in the form of cash.
Maximum potentialThe maximum Group award is 100 per cent of base salary.
Performance measuresN/A
ChangesDelivery of vested shares will change from five to three years to align the delivery schedule with other colleagueseligible to receive a Fixed Share opportunityAward.
Pension
Purpose and link to strategyTo provide cost effective and market competitive retirement benefits, supporting Executive Directors in buildinglong-term retirement savings.
Operation

Executive Directors are entitled to participate in the Group’s defined contribution scheme with companycontributions set as a percentage of salary.

An individual may elect to receive some or all of their pension allowance as cash in lieu of pension contribution.

Maximum potentialThe maximum allowance for all Executive Directors is 14015 per cent of base salary. All future appointments asExecutive Directors will also attract a maximum allowance of 15 per cent of base salary in line with the majority of theworkforce. Maximum allowance may be increased or decreased in order to remain aligned.
Performance measuresN/A
ChangesMaximum employer pension contribution available has been reduced to 15 per cent of cash salary with nocompensation for the GCEreduction to align to the maximum employer pension contribution available to colleagues onthe defined contribution pension scheme.
Benefits
Purpose and 100link to strategyTo provide flexible benefits as part of a competitive remuneration package.
Operation

Benefits may include those currently provided and disclosed in the annual report on remuneration.Core benefits include a company car or car allowance, private medical insurance, life insurance and other benefitsthat may be selected through the Group’s flexible benefits plan.

Additional benefits may be provided to individuals in certain circumstances such as relocation. This may includebenefits such as accommodation, relocation, and travel. The Committee retains the right to provide additionalbenefits depending on individual circumstances.

When determining and reviewing the level of benefits provided, the Committee ensures that decisions are madewithin the following two parameters:

– An objective assessment of the individual’s responsibilities and the size and scope of their role, using objectivejob-sizing methodologies.

– Benefits for comparable roles in comparable publicly listed financial services groups of a similar size.

Maximum potential

The Committee will only make increases in the benefits currently provided which it believes are consistent with thetwo parameters above. Executive Directors receive a flexible benefits allowance, in line with all other colleagues.

The flexible benefits allowance does not currently exceed 4 per cent of base salary for other salary.

Performance measuresN/A
ChangesNo change to Policy
All-employee plans
Purpose and link to strategyExecutive Directors (unchanged from 2016). All assessments of performance are ultimately subjecteligible to the Committee’s judgement, but no award will be made if threshold performance for the financial measure is not met and/or the individual is rated ‘Developing performer’ or below. The threshold is set at 20 per cent below the Group’s underlying profit target.participate in HMRC-approved share plans which promote share ownershipby giving employees an opportunity to invest in Group shares.
DeferralOperationForExecutive Directors may participate in these plans in line with HMRC guidelines currently prevailing (where relevant),on the 2017 performancesame basis as other eligible employees.
Maximum potential

Participation levels may be increased up to HMRC limits as amended from time to time. The monthly savings limitsfor Save As You Earn (SAYE) is currently £500. The maximum value of shares that may be purchased under theShare Incentive Plan (SIP) in any year the Group Performance Share opportunity willis currently £1,800 with a two-for-one match. Currently a three-for-two match is operated up to a maximum colleague investment of £30 per month.

The maximum value of free shares that may be awarded in a combination of cash (upany year is £3,600.

Performance measuresN/A
ChangesNo change to 50 per cent) and shares. 40 per cent will be released in the first year following award, 40 per cent will be released in the second year and the remaining 20 per cent will be released in the third year. Any shares released are subject to a further holding period in line with regulatory requirements and market practice.policy
135

COMPENSATION

 

Performance measures and targetsFor 2017, the Group Performance Share will be based on a percentageplan
Purpose and link to strategyTo incentivise and reward the achievement of the Group’s underlying profit, adjustedannual financial and strategic targets whilst supportingthe delivery of long-term superior and sustainable returns.
Operation

Measures and targets are set annually and awards are determined by the Committee after the year end basedon performance against the targets set. The Group Performance Share may be delivered partly in cash, shares,notes or other debt instruments including contingent convertible bonds. Where all or part of any award is deferred,the Committee may adjust these deferred awards in the event of any variation of share capital, demerger, specialdividend or distribution or amend the terms of the plan in accordance with the plan rules.

Where an award or a strategic multiplierdeferred award is in shares or other share-linked instrument, the number of up to 130 per centshares tobe awarded may be calculated using a fair value or based on the Group’s Balanced Scorecard (BSC) metrics and risk matters.

In 2017, at least 75 per cent of performance is weighted towards a financial measure.
Individual awards are adjusteddiscount to reflect a balanced scorecard approach with clearly identified performance metrics used to assess Group performance in key areas. Stretching objectives for each division and function are approved around the start of the performance year. The objectives are aligned to the Group’s strategy and split across five categories: Customer, People, Control environment, Building the business and Finance.
Each measure in the Group and divisional/functional BSC is assigned targets aligned to a five-point rating scale. BSC ratings are based on a scale ranging from ‘Under’ (at the lowest level), through ‘Developing’, ‘Good’, ‘Strong’ and up to ‘Top’, which is the highest rating. Each of these ratings may be further differentiated by the addition of ‘minus’ or ‘plus’.
The Committee considers the targets that apply to these measures to be commercially sensitive but will provide information on the level of payout relative to the performance achieved in next year’s annual report on remuneration.
market value, as appropriate.

The Committee applies its judgement to determine the payout level commensurate with Group, business and/orindividual performance or individual performance.

Performance adjustment isother factors as determined by the RemunerationCommittee. The Committee and/or Board Risk Committee and may result in a reduction of upreduce the levelof award (including to 100 per cent of the bonus opportunity for the relevant period. It can be applied on a collective or individual basis. When considering collective adjustment, the Senior Independent Performance Adjustment and Conduct Committee (SIPACC) submits a reportzero), apply additional conditions to the Remuneration Committee and Board Risk Committee regarding any adjustments requiredvesting, or delay the vesting of deferred awards to BSCsaspecified date or the overall bonus outcome to reflect in-year or prior year risk matters.
The application of malus will generally be considered when:
– there is reasonable evidence of employee misbehaviour or material error or that they participated in conduct which resulted in losses for the Group or failed to meet appropriate standards of fitness and propriety;
– there is material failure of risk management at a Group, business area, division and/or business unit level;
until conditions set by the Committee determines that the financial results for a given year do not support the level of variable remuneration awarded; and/or
– any other circumstancesare satisfied, where the Committee consider adjustments should be made.
Judgement on individual performance adjustment is informed by taking into account the severity of the issue, the individual’s proximity to the issue and the individual’s behaviour in relation to the issue. Individual adjustment may be applied through adjustments to BSC assessments and/or through reducing the bonus outcome.
it considers it appropriate. Awards are subject to clawback for a period of up to seven years after the date of award which may be extended to 10 years where there is an ongoing internal or regulatory investigation.
The application of clawback will generally be considered when:
– there is reasonable evidence of employee misbehaviour or material error; or
– there is material failure of risk management at a Group, business area, division and/or business unit level.
GROUP OWNERSHIP SHARE PLAN
OpportunityThe maximum Group Ownership Share award for Executive Directors is 300 per cent of salary (unchanged from 2016). Awards in 2017 are being made as follows:
GCE: 300 per cent of reference salary
CFO: 275 per cent of base salary
CRO: 275 per cent of base salary
Performance measures and targets2017 awards will be subject to a three-year performance period with vesting between the third and seventh anniversary of award, on a pro-rata basis. Any shares released are subject to a further holding period in line with regulatory requirements and market practice.
During 2016 and early 2017, the Committee consulted widely with shareholders on appropriate performance measures, particularly the link between performance measures and the Group’s strategic priorities.
The awards made in 2017 will vest based on the Group’s performance against the following key financial and strategic measures:
– Absolute Total Shareholder Return (30 per cent)  – Economic profit (25 per cent)
– Cost:income ratio (10 per cent)  – Strategic measures (35 per cent))
The following table provides a breakdown of these measures and the targets applicable.
The Committee believes that these measures appropriately capture risk management and long-term sustainable growth, aligning management and shareholder interests. Each of the measures aligns to the reward principles and, through that, the Group’s strategic priorities.
Awards aremaybe subject to malus and clawback for a period of up to seven years after the date of award which may be extendedto 10 years where there is an ongoing internal or regulatory investigation.

Maximum potentialThe maximum Group Performance Share opportunities are 140 per cent of base salary for the GCE and 100 per centof base salary for other Executive Directors.
Performance measures

Measures and targets are set annually by the Committee in line with the Group’s strategic business plan and furtherdetails are set out in the annual report on remuneration for the relevant year.

Measures consist of both financial and non-financial measures and the weighting of these measures will bedetermined annually by the Committee. The weightings of the performance measures for the 2020 financialyear are set out for 2019 on page 129. All assessments of performance are ultimately subject to the Committee’sjudgement, but no award will be made if threshold performance (as determined by the Committee) is not met forfinancial measures or the individual receives a score of 2.6 out of 5 or below. The normal ‘target’ level of the GroupPerformance Share is 50 per cent of maximum opportunity.

The Committee is committed to providing transparency in its decision making in respect of Group PerformanceShare awards and will disclose historic measures and target information together with information relating to howthe Group has performed against those targets in the annual report on remuneration for the relevant year exceptto the extent that this information is deemed to be commercially sensitive, in which case it will be disclosed once itis deemed not to be sensitive.

ChangesThe normal ‘target’ level of the Group Performance Share has changed to 50 per cent of maximum opportunityfrom 30 per cent.
Long Term Share plan
Purpose and link to strategyLong term variable reward opportunity to align executive management incentives and behaviours to the Group’sobjectives of delivering long-term superior and sustainable returns. The Long Term Share Plan will incentivestewardship over a long time horizon and promote good governance through a simple alignment with the interestof shareholders.
Operation

From 2021, awards will be granted under the rules of the 2020 Long-Term Share Plan, subject to shareholderapproval at the AGM on 21 May 2020. Awards are made in the form of conditional shares and award levels are set atthe time of grant, in compliance with regulatory requirements, and may be subject to a discount in determining totalvariable remuneration under the rules set by the European Banking Authority. The number of shares to be awardedmay be calculated using a fair value or based on a discount to market value, as appropriate.

Vesting will be subject to an assessment of underpin thresholds being maintained measured over a period of threeyears, or such longer period, as determined by the Committee.

The Committee retains full discretion to amend the payout levels should the award not reflect business and/orindividual performance. The Committee may reduce (including to zero) the level of the award, apply additionalconditions to the vesting, or delay the vesting of awards to a specified date or until conditions set by the Committeeare satisfied, where it considers it appropriate.

Awards may be subject to malus and clawback for a period of up to seven years after the date of award which maybe extended to 10 years where there is an ongoing internal or regulatory investigation.

Maximum potentialThe maximum Long Term Share Plan opportunity is 200 per cent of base salary for all Executive Directors includingthe GCE.
Performance measures

An award may be granted by the Remuneration Committee may consider the applicationtaking into account an assessment of malus and clawback as outlined inperformance ofthe Company, any Member of the Group Performanceor business unit or team, and/or the performance, conduct or capability ofthe Participant, on such basis as the Committee determine. The normal ‘target’ level of the Long Term Share plan sectionaward is 150 per cent of base salary.

No further performance conditions will apply. However vesting will be subject to the underpins and RemunerationCommittee discretion as described above.

ChangesThe Long Term Share Plan replaces the Executive Group Ownership Share Plan.
136

COMPENSATION

 

Strategic prioritiesMeasureBasisDeferral of payout rangeMetricWeightingvariable remuneration and holding periods
CreatingOperationThe Group Performance Share and Long Term Share plans are both considered variable remuneration for the best customer experienceFCApurpose of regulatory payment and deferral requirements. The payment of variable remuneration and deferral levels are determined at the time of award and in compliance with regulatory requirements (which currently require that at least 60 per cent of total reportable complaintsvariable remuneration is deferred for seven years with pro rata vesting between the third and seventh year, and at least 50 per 1,000 accounts1andSet relativecent of total variable remuneration is paid in shares or other equity linked instruments subject to 2019 targets  See note 1 below  10%  a holding period in line with current regulatory requirements).
A proportion of the aggregate variable remuneration may vest immediately on award. The remaining proportion of the variable remuneration is then deferred in line with regulatory requirements.
Changes
Financial Ombudsman Service (FOS) uphold rate (excl PPI)Average rates over 2019Threshold: =<29%
Maximum: =<25%
Net promoter scoreMajor Group average ranking over 2019Threshold: 3rd
Maximum: 1st
10%
Digital active customer baseSet relative to 2019 targetsThreshold: 14.3m
Maximum: 14.9m
7.5%
Becoming simpler and more efficientEconomic profit2Set relative to 2019 targetsThreshold: £3,074m
Maximum: £3,769m
25%
Cost:income ratioSet relative to 2019 targetsThreshold: 47.2%
Maximum: 45.7%
10%
Delivering sustainable growthAbsolute Total Shareholder Return (TSR)GrowthNo change in share price including dividends over three-year periodThreshold: 8%
Maximum: 16%
30%
Building the best teamEmployee engagement indexSet relative to 2019 targetsThreshold: 67%
Maximum: 73%
7.5%
1The FCA changed the approach to complaint classification and reporting from 30 June 2016. Updated complaint data is not yet available on the new basis, but will be available by the end of the first quarter at which point, or shortly thereafter, the metric will be disclosed.
2A measure of profit taking into account Expected Losses, tax and a charge for equity utilisation.deferral requirements.

 

CHAIRMAN AND NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR FEESFurther information on which performance measures were chosen and how performance targets and underpin thresholds are set are disclosed in the relevant sections throughout the report.

DISCRETION IN 2017RELATION TO VARIABLE REWARDS

 

The annual feeCommittee retains discretion with regards to these plans. This relates to:

the timing, size and type of awards and holding periods, subject to policy maxima, and the annual setting of targets;
where qualitative performance measures or underpins are used and performance against those measures or underpins is not commensurate with the Group’s overall financial or strategic performance over the performance period;
where qualitative underpin thresholds are used and performance against those underpins is not commensurate with the Group’s overall financial performance over the underpin period;
adjustment of targets and measures if events occur which cause it to determine that it is appropriate to do so. The Committee also retains the right to change performance measures and the weighting of measures, including following feedback from regulators, shareholders and/or other stakeholders; and amending the plan rules in accordance with their terms and or amending the basis of operation (including but not limited to the approach in respect of dividend equivalents) including in light of any change to regulatory requirements or guidance or feedback from regulators;
to exercise discretion in accordance with the rules, including in relation to whether or not malus or clawback provisions would apply, in connection with recruitment, or terminations of employment, or corporate events affecting the Company;
adjustments required in certain circumstances (e.g. rights issues, corporate restructuring events and special dividends);
the exercise of the Committee’s discretion will be disclosed in accordance with regulatory requirements.

LEGACY AWARDS AND RESTRICTIONS ON PAYMENTS

Awards in respect of the Group Performance Share and under the long-term incentive Group Ownership share will be granted in 2020 under the terms of the Directors’ remuneration policy approved by shareholders on 11 May 2017 (the “2017 Policy”). No further awards would be made under the long-term incentive Group Ownership share (or the terms of the 2017 Policy) unless the new Long Term Share Plan 2020 was not approved by shareholders. The Committee reserves the right to make any remuneration payments/awards and any payments/awards for the Chairman was increased by 2 per cent to £728,280,loss of office, notwithstanding that they are not in line with the overall salary budgetpolicy set out above where the terms of the payment/award were agreed (i) before the 2017 policy came into effect; (ii) pursuant to the 2017 policy; or (iii) at a time when the relevant individual was not a Director of the Group and, in the opinion of the Committee, the payment/award was not in consideration for the general colleague population.

Theindividual becoming a Director of the Group. Such payments/awards will have been set out in the annual Non-Executive Director fees were reviewedreport on remuneration for the relevant year. They include awards and payments made under previous approved remuneration policy and payments in relation to deferred Group Performance Share awards and long-term incentive’ Group Ownership share awards granted in 2018, 2019 and, as result of this review some of the fees were increased, as follows,referred to reflect market practice in financial services groups of a similar size. These changes took effect from 1 January 2017.

  2017 2016 
Basic Non-Executive Director fee £76,500 £75,000 
Deputy Chairman £100,000 £100,000 
Senior Independent Director £60,000 £60,000 
Audit Committee Chairmanship £70,000 £60,000 
Remuneration Committee Chairmanship £70,000 £60,000 
Board Risk Committee Chairmanship £70,000 £60,000 
Responsible Business Committee Chairmanship £40,000 £40,0004 
Audit Committee membership £32,000 £30,000 
Remuneration Committee membership £32,000 £30,000 
Board Risk Committee membership £32,000 £30,000 
Responsible Business Committee members £15,0001 £10,0001 
Nomination and Governance Committee membership £15,0002 £5,0003 
1New members only.
2Including payments to Chairmen of other Committees who are members.
3Where individual was not Chairman of another Committee.
4During 2016, the fee for Chairmanship of the Responsible Business Committee increased from £30,000 to £40,000.

Non-Executive Directors may receive more than one of the above, fees.2020.

137

COMPENSATION

 

ILLUSTRATION OF APPLICATION OF REMUNERATION OUTCOME FOR 2016

EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS (AUDITED)POLICY

 

The charts below illustrate possible remuneration outcomes under the following table summarises the total remuneration delivered during 2016 in relation to service as an Executive Director.three scenarios:

 

  António Horta-Osório1  George Culmer  Juan Colombás  Totals 
£000 2016  2015  2016  2015  2016  2015  2016  2015 
Base salary  1,125   1,061   745   731   739   724   2,609   2,516 
Fixed share award  900   900   504   504   497   497   1,901   1,901 
Benefits  143   140   42   41   70   73   255   254 
Other remuneration2  1   2   1   2   1   2   3   6 
Annual bonus  1,220   850   574   462   578   455   2,372   1,767 
Long-term incentive3  1,584   5,183   857   2,804   763   2,496   3,204   10,483 
Pension allowance4  568   568   186   182   185   181   939   931 
Total remuneration  5,541   8,704   2,909   4,726   2,833   4,428   11,283   17,858 
Less: performance adjustment5     (234)     (65)     (3)     (302)
Total remuneration less performance adjustment  5,541   8,470   2,909   4,661   2,833   4,425   11,283   17,556 
1.
12016 base salary increase: 6The maximum that may be paid, assuming full Group Performance Share payout and full vesting under the new Long Term Share plan. For the Long Term Share Plan, an indication of the maximum remuneration receivable assumes a share price appreciation of 50 per cent (2during the period in which the award is subject to underpins. The basis of the calculation of the share price appreciation is that the share price embedded in the calculation for the ‘maximum’ bar chart is assumed to increase by 50 per cent in cash andacross the remainder in shares, held until the government has sold its shareholding in the Group).performance period.
  
22.OtherThe expected value of remuneration payments comprise income from all employee share plans, which arises through employer matching or discountingfor performance midway between threshold and maximum, assuming 50 per cent of employee purchases.maximum Group Performance Share opportunity and a Long Term Share award granted at 150 per cent of salary. It is also assumed that the Long Term Share Award will vest in full.
  
33.The LTIP vestingminimum that may be paid, where only the fixed element is paid (base salary, benefits, pension and dividend equivalents awarded in shares were confirmed by the Remuneration Committee at its meeting on 15 February 2017. The averagefixed share award).

Amounts are based on based salaries as at 1 January 2020 for the Group Chief Executive and Chief Operating Officer and 1 April 2020 for the Chief Financial Officer. Implementation of the Policy in 2020 is set out in the annual report on remuneration.

1Maximum values of reward package take into account the assumed 50 per cent share price between 1 October 2016appreciation. Maximum total compensation (£000) without share price appreciation is £7,005 for António Horta-Osório, £3,840 for Juan Colombás and 31 December 2016 (58.30 pence) has been used£3,913 for William Chalmers.

APPROACH TO RECRUITMENT AND APPOINTMENT TO THE BOARD

In determining appropriate remuneration arrangements on hiring a new Executive Director, the Committee will take into account all relevant factors. This may include the experience and calibre of the individual, local market practice, the existing remuneration arrangements for other executives and the business circumstances. The Committee will seek to ensure that arrangements are in the best interests of both the Group and its shareholders and will seek not to pay more than is necessary.

The Committee may make awards on hiring an external candidate to ‘buy-out’ remuneration arrangements forfeited on leaving a previous employer. In doing so the Committee will take account of relevant factors including any performance conditions attached to these awards, the form in which they were granted (e.g. cash or shares), the currency of the awards, and the timeframe of awards. Any such award made will be made in accordance with the PRA’s Rulebook and made on a comparable basis to those forfeited and subject to malus and clawback at the request of the previous employer as required by the PRA rules.

The package will normally be aligned with the remuneration policy as described in the policy report. However, the Committee retains the discretion to make appropriate remuneration decisions outside the standard policy to facilitate the recruitment of an individual of the calibre required and in exceptional cases.

This may, for example, include the following circumstances:

An interim recruit, appointed to indicate the value. The shares were awarded in 2014 basedfill an Executive Director role on a share priceshort-term basis.
Exceptional circumstances requiring the Chairman to take on an executive function on a short-term basis.
An Executive Director recruited at a time in the year when it would be inappropriate to provide a Group Performance Share or Long Term Share award for that year, for example, where there may be insufficient time to assess performance. In this situation the Committee may feel it appropriate to transfer the quantum in respect of 78.878 pence. LTIPthe months employed during the year to the subsequent year so that reward is provided on a fair basis.
An Executive Director recruited from a business or location where benefits are provided that do not fall into the definition of ‘variable remuneration forfeited’ but where the Committee considers it reasonable to buy-out these benefits.
Transitional arrangements for overseas hires, which might include relocation expenses and dividend equivalent figures for 2015 have been adjusted for the share price on the date of vesting (72.75 pence).accommodation.

The maximum level of variable remuneration (excluding buy-out awards) that may be awarded to new Executive Directors is equal to 200 per cent of fixed remuneration, including any discount permitted by the European Banking Authority. In making any such remuneration decisions, the Committee will apply any appropriate performance measures in line with those applied to other Executive Directors.

A full explanation will be provided of any buy-out award or discretionary payment.

138

COMPENSATION

SERVICE AGREEMENTS

The service contracts of all current Executive Directors are terminable on 12 months’ notice from the Group and six months’ notice from the individual.

The Chairman also has a letter of appointment. His engagement may be terminated on six months’ notice by either the Group or him.

  
4Notice to be given by the GroupFollowing changes to the amountDate of tax relief available on pension contributions in each year, Executive Directors may elect to receive some or all of their allowances as cash. The breakdown of payments made in cash and contributions into the pension scheme are shown below.service agreement
Lord Blackwell 6 months31 March 2014
5António Horta-OsórioIn12 months3 November 2010
William Chalmers12 months3 June 2015, the Group reached a settlement with the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) with regard to aspects of its Payment Protection Insurance (PPI) complaint handling process during the period March 2012 to May 2013. As a result, the Committee decided to make performance adjustments in respect of bonuses awarded in 2012 and 2013 to the Group Executive Committee and some other senior executives given their ultimate oversight of the PPI operations. The number of shares adjusted was 409,039 for the Group Chief Executive (GCE), 109,464 for the Chief Financial Officer (CFO) and 376,055 for the Chief Risk Officer (CRO) (pro-rated in the above table to reflect his appointment to Executive Director on 292019
Juan Colombás12 months30 November 2013). The share price used for the valuation was the market price for a share in the Group at the award dates, 49.29 pence and 78.878 pence, respectively.2010

 

PENSION AND BENEFITS (AUDITED)

          
  António  George  Juan 
Pension/Benefit £ Horta-Osório  Culmer  Colombás 
Employer contribution to pension scheme  9,542   4,492   12,068 
Cash allowance in lieu of pension contribution  558,018   181,862   172,711 
Car or car allowance  12,000   12,183   12,000 
Flexible benefits payments  42,440   29,376   28,968 
Private medical insurance  30,950   760   14,068 
Tax preparation  24,000      11,940 
Transportation  33,760      2,900 

DEFINED BENEFIT PENSION ARRANGEMENTS (AUDITED)

TheUnder his contract (dated 3 November 2010), António Horta-Osório (GCE) is entitled to an amount equivalent to base salary and pension allowance as a payment in lieu of notice if notice to terminate is given by the Group. If notice to terminate is given by the GCE, hashe is entitled to an amount equivalent to base salary if the Group chooses to make a conditional unfunded pension commitment,payment in lieu of notice. Such payments in lieu will be made in monthly instalments subject to share price performance. This wasmitigation. He is also entitled to six months’ notice from the Group in the event of his long-term incapacity. As part of a partial buy-out of a pension forfeited on joining from Santander, Group. Itthe GCE is an Employer-Financed Retirement Benefits Scheme (EFRBS). The EFRBS provides benefitsalso entitled to the provision of a conditional unfunded pension commitment, subject to performance conditions as described further in the annual report on a defined benefit basis at a normal retirement ageremuneration. In the event of 65. The EFRBS applieslong-term incapacity, if the GCE does not perform his duties for a maximumperiod of at least 26 weeks (in aggregate over a 12 month period), the Group shall be entitled to terminate his employment by giving six years followingmonths’ notice. In all other respects, the commencement of employment and the maximum allowance over that period is 26.5 per cent of the higherterms of the GCE’s base salary or reference salarycontract in the 12 months before retirement or leaving, subjectrelation to performance conditions. No additional benefit is due in the eventpayments for loss of early retirement. The rate of pension accrual in each year depends on share price conditions being met. Accrual at 31 December 2016 is a pension of 6 per cent of the reference salary or £73,200. Nooffice match those set out below for new pension entitlement was accrued in 2016.

There are no other Executive Directors with defined benefit pension entitlements.directors.

 

Under terms agreed when joining the Group, the CROJuan Colombás is entitled to a conditional lump sum benefit, of £718,996payable either (i) on reaching normal retirement age unless the CROhe voluntarily resigns or is dismissed for cause, or (ii) on leaving due to long-term sickness or death.

2014 LTIP VESTING (AUDITED)

               
      Number Indicative Indicative Indicative  
  Number   of shares share price value of award dividend Indicative
  of shares awarded Vesting %1 vesting at vesting at vesting equivalent total value
António Horta-Osório 4,640,077 55% 2,552,042 58.30 pence £1,487,840 £95,940 £1,583,780
George Culmer 2,510,205 55% 1,380,612 58.30 pence £804,897 £51,902 £856,799
Juan Colombás 2,234,780 55% 1,229,129 58.30 pence £716,582 £46,207 £762,789
1For details of the performance outcome please refer to section ‘Long-term awards made in March 2014 vesting for the period ended on 31 December 2016’.
138

COMPENSATION

ANNUAL BONUS (AUDITED)death, as described further in the annual report on remuneration.

 

The individual bonus awardsservice contracts and letters of appointment are available for inspection at the Company’s registered office.

NOTICE PERIODS

Newly-appointed Executive Directors are determined inwill be employed on contracts that include the same way as for colleagues across the Group, with outcomes based on the individual on-target award adjusted for the Group annual bonus outcome and for individual performance outcomes.

The Group total bonus outcome is the sum of the divisional and functional bonus outcomes. Performance outcomes are determined by adjusting the Group’s target bonus outcome according to Group underlying profit and Balanced Scorecard performance. These are each used as a modifier to increase or decrease the target bonus outcome in the range of 0 per cent – 145 per cent, subject to an overall funding limit of 10 per cent of pre-bonus underlying profit. A collective performance adjustment is then applied.

The individual on-target award is then adjusted for the Group annual bonus outcome and for individual performance outcomes. Awards are approved by the Committee, which has discretion to adjust outcomes for any reason.

The approach to determining annual bonus awards is summarised below:

ANNUAL BONUS OUTCOME FOR 2016 (AUDITED)

The target bonus outcome for 2016 (£397.1 million) was adjusted for:following provisions:

 

(1)The individual will be required to give six months’ notice if they wish to leave and the Group underlying profit performancewill give 12 months’ notice other than for material misconduct or neglect or other circumstances where the individual may be summarily dismissed by written notice. In exceptional circumstances, new joiners will be offered a longer notice period (typically reducing to 12 months within two years of joining).
In the event of long-term incapacity, if the Executive Director does not perform their duties for a period of at least 26 weeks (in aggregate over a 12 month period), the Group shall be entitled to terminate the executive’s employment by giving three months’ notice.
At any time after notice to terminate is given by either the Group or the Executive Director, the Group may require the Executive Director to take leave for some or all of the notice period.
At any time, at its absolute discretion, the Group may elect to terminate the individual’s employment by paying to the Executive Director, in lieu of the notice period, an amount equivalent to base salary, subject to mitigation as described more fully in the termination payments section of this report.

A target of £7,572 million was approved by the Board. In line with regulatory requirements, the underlying profit of £7,867 million has been adjusted by the incremental movement in Prudential Valuation Adjustment (PVA) from year-end 2015 to year-end 2016. The adjustment of £126 million reduces the underlying profit figure to £7,741 million, resulting in a modifier of 1.22.

A balanced scorecard approach with clearly identified performance descriptors is used to assess Group performance in key areas. Stretching objectives for each division and function were approved by the Committee around the start of the performance year. The objectives are aligned to the Group’s strategy and split across five categories: customer, people, control environment, building the business and finance.

139

COMPENSATION

 

APPROACH TO THE BALANCED SCORECARD (BSC)

Each measure in the Group and divisional/functional BSC is assigned targets aligned to a five-point rating scale.TERMINATION PAYMENTS

 

It is the Group’s policy that where compensation on termination is due, it should be paid on a phased basis, mitigated in the event that alternative employment is secured. Where it is appropriate to make a bonus payment ( known as Group Performance Share) to the individual, this should relate to the period of actual service, rather than the full notice period. Any Group Performance Share payment will be determined on the basis of performance as for all continuing employees and will remain subject to performance adjustment (malus and clawback) and deferral. Generally, on termination of employment, Group Performance Share awards, in flight Group Ownership Share awards, Long Term Share Plan awards and other rights to payments will lapse except where termination falls within one of the reasons set out below. In the event of redundancy, the individual may receive a payment in line with statutory entitlements at that time. If an Executive Director is dismissed for gross misconduct, the Executive Director will receive normal contractual entitlements until the date of termination and all deferred Group Performance Share, Group Ownership Share and Long Term Share Plan awards will lapse.

 

BSC ratings are based on a scale ranging from ‘Under’ (at the lowest level), through ‘Developing’, ‘Good’, ‘Strong’ and up to ‘Top’, which is the highest rating. Each of these ratings may be further differentiated by the addition of ‘minus’ or ‘plus’. The Committee reviewed performance in depth to determine ratings for the Group and each division and function, including consideration of risk matters arising in 2016. Risk adjustments were approved by the Board Risk Committee.

The ratings for each division and function are communicated to all colleagues within the business area to ensure bonus outcomes are transparent and understood. The ratings are considered commercially sensitive; however, as an indication of performance, the overall rating for the Group (as determined by the Committee) was Strong plus and the average of the divisional/functional modifiers applied was 1.26.


Key performance factors considered by the Committee in arriving at the performance assessment for the Group included:

Strong financial performanceUnderlying profit was £7.9 billion and statutory profit has more than doubled to £3.9 billion. Despite an additional PPI provision and the challenging macroeconomic environment, the Group remains strongly capital generative with an adjusted CET1 ratio of 13.7 per cent after increased dividend.
Growth in the key customer segmentsThe Group continued to make good progress in growing market share in areas where it is under represented, growing lending to SME clients and in consumer finance.
Lower risk bankContinued efforts to de-risk the bank, combined with sustained improvements in core prudential risks (capital, credit, funding) and a customer centric culture are delivering a lower risk bank. From a credit perspective, asset quality remained strong with no deterioration in the underlying portfolio. Prudent risk appetite and robust risk management framework reflected in lower impaired loans and an improved impaired loan ratio.
Effective cost leadershipCost management remains a strategic priority and the acceleration of cost initiatives in response to the lower interest rate environment has enabled the Group to reduce operating costs by 3 per cent. The market leading cost:income ratio also improved to 48.7 per cent.
Increased dividendsIncreased ordinary dividend of 2.55 pence per share in 2016 (2015: 2.25 pence), in line with the Group’s progressive and sustainable dividend policy. Additional special dividend of 0.5 pence.
PRA stress test threshold exceededThe resilience of the Group’s capital position was demonstrated again in 2016 when it comfortably exceeded the threshold for the latest PRA stress test and performed well compared to peers.
Customer focus in the businessDevelopment and launch of the Customer Journey framework and strategy which will be the basis to manage the Group and its control environment in a customer centric way. Further reductions in the level of customer complaints. Net promotor score continued to improve and is now nearly 50 per cent higher than at the end of 2011.
Culture and reputationAccelerated progress towards the desired culture, developing new Management Information, further embedding the Group Customer First Committee and the work to establish the Customer Journey strategy.
The Group’s reputation with external stakeholders.
  Base salaryFixed share awardPension, benefits and
other fixed remuneration
(3)ResignationCollective performance adjustmentIn the case of resignation to take up new employment, paid until date of termination (including any period of leave required by the Group). In the case of resignation for other reasons, base salary will be paid in monthly instalments for the notice period (or any balance of it), offset by earnings from new employment during this period.Awards continue and are released at the normal time and the number of shares subject to the award in the current year will be reduced to reflect the date of termination.Paid until date of termination including any period of leave required by the Group (subject to individual benefit scheme rules).
Redundancy or termination by mutual agreementPaid until date of termination (including any period of leave required by the Group). In respect of the balance of any notice period, base salary will be paid in monthly instalments, offset by earnings from new employment during this period.Awards will normally continue and be released at the normal time and the number of shares subject to the award in the current year will be reduced to reflect the date of termination unless, in the case of mutual agreement, the Committee determines that exceptional circumstances apply in which case shares may be released on termination.Paid until date of termination including any period of leave required by the Group (subject to individual benefit scheme rules).
Retirement/ill health, injury, permanent disability/deathPaid until date of retirement/death. For ill health, injury or permanent disability which results in the loss of employment, paid for the applicable notice period (including any period of leave required by the Group).Awards will normally continue and be released at the normal time and the number of shares subject to the award in the current year will be reduced to reflect the date of termination except for (i) death where shares are released on the date of termination; or (ii) in the case of permanent disability the Committee determines that exceptional circumstances apply in which case shares may be released on the date of termination.Paid until date of death/ retirement (subject to individual benefit scheme rules). For ill health, injury, permanent disability, paid for the notice period including any period of leave required by the Group (subject to individual benefit scheme rules).
Change of control or mergerN/AAwards will be payable on the date of the Change of Control and the number of shares subject to the award will be reduced to reflect the shorter accrual period. The Committee may decide that vested awards will be exchanged for (and future awards made over) shares in the acquiring company or other relevant company.N/A
Other reason where the Committee determines that the executive should be treated as a good leaverPaid until date of termination (including any period of leave required by the Group). In respect of the balance of any notice period, base salary will be paid in monthly instalments, offset by earnings from new employment during this period.Awards continue and are released at the normal time and the number of shares subject to the award in the current year will be reduced to reflect the date of termination.Paid until date of termination including any period of leave required by the Group (subject to individual benefit scheme rules).

Consideration was given to items not factored into the Group underlying profit or divisional or functional Balanced Scorecards. These included the provisions for legacy conduct-related matters relevant to the year. As a result of these items, the Committee approved an overall collective adjustment of £91.2 million or approximately 19 per cent, resulting in a final bonus outcome of £392.9 million as shown in the table below. The bonus outcome of £392.9 million is significantly below the overall funding limit of 10 per cent of pre bonus underlying profit.

TOTAL BONUS OUTCOME

140

COMPENSATION

 

INDIVIDUAL OUTCOMES FOR EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS (AUDITED)

The individual bonus awards for Executive Directors are determined in the same way as for colleagues across the Group, with outcomes based on annual bonus outcome, weighted by:

1.Individual performance
  Group Performance Share
(Annual bonus plan)1
Long Term Share Plan
(Long term variable reward plan)2
Chairman and
Non-Executive Director fees3
2.ResignationOn-targetUnvested deferred Group Performance Share awards are forfeited and in-year Group Performance Share awards are accrued until the date of termination (or the commencement of garden leave if earlier) unless the Committee determines otherwise (in exceptional circumstances), in which case such awards are subject to deferral, malus and clawback.Awards lapse on date of leaving (or on notice of leaving) unless the Committee determines otherwise in exceptional circumstances that they will vest on the original vesting date (or exceptionally on the date of leaving). Where award is to vest it will be subject to the underpins and time pro-rating (for months worked in underpin period). Malus and clawback will apply.Paid until date of leaving Board.
Redundancy or termination by mutual agreementFor cases of redundancy, unvested deferred Group Performance Share awards are retained and in-year Group Performance Share awards are accrued until the date of termination (or the commencement of garden leave if earlier). Such awards would be subject to deferral, malus and clawback. For termination by mutual agreement, the same approach as for resignation would apply.Awards vest on the original vesting date (or exceptionally on the date of leaving). Vesting is subject to the underpins and time pro-rating (for months worked in underpin period). Malus and clawback will apply.Paid until date of leaving Board.
Retirement/ill health, injury, permanent disabilityUnvested deferred Group Performance Share awards are retained and in-year Group Performance Share awards are accrued until the date of termination (or the commencement of garden leave if earlier). Such awards would be subject to deferral, malus and clawback.Awards vest on the original vesting date (or exceptionally on the date of leaving). Vesting is subject to the underpins and time pro-rating (for months worked in underpin period). Malus and clawback will apply.Paid until date of leaving Board.
DeathUnvested deferred Group Performance Share awards are retained and in-year Group Performance Share awards are accrued until the date of termination. Deferred Group Performance Share awards vest on death in cash, unless the Committee determines otherwise.Awards vest in full on the date of death unless in exceptional circumstances the Remuneration Committee determines that the underpins or pre-vest test do not support full vesting.Paid until date of leaving Board.
Change of control or merger2In-year Group Performance Share accrued up until date of change of control or merger (current year). Where there is a Corporate Event, deferred Group Performance Share awards vest to the extent and timing determined by the Committee in its absolute discretion.Awards vest on date of event. Vesting is subject to the underpins and time pro-rating (for months worked in underpin period unless determined otherwise). Malus and clawback will normally apply. Instead of vesting, awards may be exchanged for equivalent awards over the shares of the acquiring company or another company or equivalent cash based awards.Paid until date of leaving Board.
Other reason where the Committee determines that the executive should be treated as a good leaverUnvested deferred Group Performance Share awards are retained and in-year Group Performance Share awards are accrued until the date of termination (or the commencement of garden leave if earlier). Deferred Group Performance Share awards vest in line with normal timeframes and are subject to malus and clawback. The Committee may allow awards to vest early if it considers it appropriate.Awards vest on the original vesting date (or exceptionally on the date of leaving). Vesting is subject to the underpins and time pro-rating (for months worked in underpin period). Malus and clawback will apply.Paid until date of leaving Board.

 

Awards are approved by the Committee, which has discretion to adjust outcomes for any reason.

ANTÓNIO HORTA-OSÓRIO

The Group Chief Executive’s (GCE) individual performance assessment for 2016, as confirmed by the Committee, reflected the Group’s performance as outlined on page 140 and a number of other considerations including:

Strong financial1If any Group Performance Share is to be paid to the Executive Director for the current year, this will be determined on the basis of performanceImprovement in market-leading cost:income ratio delivered, with statutory profit more for the period of actual service, rather than doubled and key balance sheet metrics strengthened.the full notice period (and so excluding any period of leave required by the Group).
Low risk business model maintained2Continued improvementReference to change of control or merger includes a compromise or arrangement under section 899 of the Companies Act 2006 or equivalent. Fixed share awards may also be released/exchanged in credit qualitythe event of lending portfolio, stronga resolution for the voluntary winding up of the Company; a demerger, delisting, distribution (other than an ordinary dividend) or other transaction, which, in the opinion of the Committee, might affect the current or future value of any award; or a reverse takeover, merger by way of a dual listed company or other significant corporate event, as determined by the Committee. In the event of a demerger, special dividend or other transaction which would in the Committee’s opinion affect the value of awards, the Committee may allow a deferred Group Performance Share award or a long term incentive award to vest to the extent relevant performance in 2016 PRA stress test.conditions are met to that date and if the Committee so determined, on a time pro-rated basis (unless determined otherwise) to reflect the number of months of the underpin period worked.
Increased dividends3Increase in ordinary dividendThe Chairman is entitled to 2.55 pence per share (2015: 2.25 pence) in line with the Group’s progressive and sustainable dividend policy, with additional special dividend of 0.5 pence per share.six months’ notice.
Strong employee engagement4Employee engagement survey results strengthened despite uncertain economic outlook and announcementThe terms applicable on a cessation of further role reductions – scores significantly higher than UK benchmark and closeemployment to UK high-performing benchmark.
Creating the best customer experienceKey Customer Journeys across retail and commercial banking and insurance significantly enhanced, leading to improved customer feedback and trust scoresGroup Ownership Share Awards are as well as complaints reducing from their low levels relative to the sector.
Continued growth in digital channelsWith 12.5 million online and 8 million mobile banking customers, the Group operates the UK’s largest digital bank, and now meets over 60 per cent of customers’ banking needs digitally.
Supporting the UK economy and helping Britain prosperRemaining the largest lender to first-time buyers and maintaining the recent record of above-market growth in lending to SMEs. Commitments to support communities and charities also exceeded.
Leading the Group’s strategic developmentLead Board and executive team in highly impactful exercise to review the impact of digital technology and market changeshown on the ‘Bankpage 133 of the Future’, enabling the Group to develop critically important plans for the evolution of its business model and technology base.
UKFI reduction in government shareholdingContinued successful delivery of the Group’s strategy enabling a significant reduction in the government shareholding to less than 5 per cent. UKFI no longer the Group’s largest shareholder, with £18.5 billion now having been returned to the UK taxpayer at a profit.

Based on a full assessment of performance, the Committee agreed an individual rating for 2016 of Strong plus for the GCE, an improvement from Strong in 2015.

Expected outcomes are based on individual performance before taking into account a modifier based on underlying profit and the Group BSC, as follows:

RatingUnderDevelopingGoodStrongTop
Expected outcome as % of salary0%0%42%91%140%

Following the Committee’s assessment of performance against the underlying profit target and Group BSC objectives, and taking into account the collective performance adjustment of 19 per cent and the improvement to the individual rating of Strong plus, the Committee determined a 2016 bonus award for the GCE of £1,219,537 (108 per cent of salary and 77 per cent of maximum).

GEORGE CULMER

The Chief Financial Officer’s (CFO) personal performance assessment for 2016, as confirmed by the Committee, reflected a number of considerations including:

Strong financial performanceStrong financial performance delivered in challenging low interest rate and volatile market environment – key liquidity, funding and capital metrics either strengthened or maintained.
Cost leadershipContinued improvement in the Group’s market-leading cost:income ratio to 48.7 per cent (2015: 49.3 per cent) – efficiency programme successfully accelerated in response to customers’ changing preferences.
Strong capital generationGroup’s adjusted CET1 capital ratio of 13.7 per cent comfortably above regulatory requirements after increased ordinary dividend of 2.55 pence per share and an additional special dividend of 0.5 pence per share.
Resilient business model‘Stressed’ CET1 capital and leverage ratios of 10.3 per cent and 4.3 per cent from 2016 regulatory (PRA) stress test comfortably above regulatory requirements and strongest across major UK banking peers.
Successful outcome of ECN court caseSuccessful outcome of ECN (‘enhanced capital notes’) court case – enabling the Group to improve the efficiency of its balance sheet and reduce funding costs.
Well managed external stakeholder relationsWell-managed relationships with key external stakeholders, e.g. debt and equity investors, regulators, and credit rating agencies.2017 Remuneration Policy.
141

COMPENSATION

 

Based on a full assessment of performance,On termination, the Committee agreed an individual ratingExecutive Director will be entitled to payment for 2016 of Strong plus for the CFO. Expected outcomes are based on individual performance before taking into account a modifier based on underlying profitany accrued but untaken holiday calculated by reference to base salary and the Finance division’s BSC, as follows:

RatingUnderDevelopingGoodStrongTop
Expected outcome as % of salary0%0%30%65%100%

Following the Committee’s assessment of performance against the underlying profit target and the Finance division’s BSC objectives, and taking into account the collective performance adjustment of 19 per cent and the individual rating of Strong plus, the Committee determined a 2016 bonus award for the CFO of £574,326 (77 per cent of maximum).

JUAN COLOMBÁSfixed share award.

 

The Chief Risk Officer’s (CRO) personal performance assessmentcost of legal, tax or other advice incurred by an Executive Director in connection with the termination of their employment and/or the cost of support in seeking alternative employment may be met up to a maximum of £100,000. Additional payments may be made where required to settle legal disputes, or as consideration for 2016, as confirmed by the Committee, reflected a number of considerations including:

Strong risk management frameworkThe Group remains comfortably within risk appetite set by the Board, with strengthened processes and controls, aligning to the Group’s objective of being a low risk bank.
Strengthened management of operational riskManagement of operational risk strengthened through the development of a robust control framework for key risk categories.
Credit qualityPrudent lending criteria reflected in credit quality across all lending portfolios and reduced gross impairment charges.
Low risk culture and effective controlsLow risk culture and effective controls reflected in very low level of financial losses following EU Referendum result and other periods of market volatility.
Effective optimisation of balance sheetEffective optimisation of balance sheet leading to further reductions in risk-weighted assets (RWAs) – in turn supporting capital generation.
Low risk model recognised by the marketGroup’s low risk model recognised by the market; tight credit default swap (CDS) spreads and resilient credit ratings confer tangible funding cost benefits to the Group.

Based on a full assessment of performance, the Committee agreed an individual rating for 2016 of Strong plus for the CRO.new or amended post-employment restrictions.

 

Expected outcomesWhere an Executive Director is in receipt of expatriate or relocation expenses at the time of termination (as at the date of the AGM no current Executive Directors are based on individual performance, before taking into accountin receipt of such expenses), the cost of actual expenses incurred may continue to be reimbursed for up to 12 months after termination or, at the Group’s discretion, a modifier based on underlying profit andone-off payment may be made to cover the Risk division’s BSC, as follows:

RatingUnderDevelopingGoodStrongTop
Expected outcome as % of salary0%0%30%65%100%

Following the Committee’s assessmentcosts of performance against the underlying profit target and the Risk division’s BSC objectives, and taking into account the collective performance adjustmentpremature cancellation. The cost of 19 per cent and the individual rating of Strong plus, the Committee determined a 2016 bonus award for the CRO of £577,676 (78 per cent of maximum).repatriation may also be covered.

 

DEFERRALREMUNERATION POLICY TABLE FOR CHAIRMAN AND NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS

 

The 2016 annual bonustable below sets out the remuneration policy for all ExecutiveNon-Executive Directors is awarded in a combination of cash and shares. 40 per cent of the annual bonus will be released in 2017 (£2,000 cash in March, the remainder in shares), 40 per cent will be released in 2018 and the remaining 20 per cent will be released in 2019, subject to remaining in the Group’s employment. Any shares released are subject to a further holding period in line with regulatory requirements.

 

The Group’s malus and clawback provisions cover all material risk takers, in line with regulatory requirements. Vested variable remuneration can be recovered from employees for a period of up to seven years after the date of award which may be extended to 10 years where there is an ongoing internal or regulatory investigation. The Committee reserves the right to exercise its discretion in reducing any payment that otherwise would have been earned, if it deems appropriate as a result of an event occurring before vesting.

LONG-TERM AWARDS MADE IN MARCH 2014 VESTING FOR THE PERIOD ENDED ON 31 DECEMBER 2016 (AUDITED)

Awards (in the form of conditional rights to free shares) in 2014 were made over shares with a value of 300 per cent of reference salary for the GCE and 275 per cent of salary for the CFO and CRO.

142

COMPENSATION

The Group has delivered a good financial performance over the performance period of the 2014 Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) awards, continuing to transform the business for the benefit of our shareholders. Performance was measured over three financial years ended 31 December 2016. The performance conditions attached to these awards and actual performance are set out in the table below. At the end of the performance period, it has been assessed that awards will vest at 55 per cent of maximum. Executive Directors are required to retain any shares vesting for a further two years post vesting.

1Adjusted total costs.
2FCA reportable complaints per 1,000 for the period up to and including H1 2016 and formally closed FCA complaints per 1,000 accounts for the period from H2 2016. Both exclude PPI complaints, any complaints received via Claims Management Companies (CMC) and any complaints relating to TSB activity. With the introduction of the FCA guidance contained in PS15/19 applicable from 1 July 2016, the complaint classification and reporting for the original metric ceased on 30 June 2016. Accordingly, the Remuneration Committee has rebased the original 2014 metrics in line with the new FCA reporting regime. The Remuneration Committee considers the rebased targets equally stretching.

PERCENTAGE CHANGE IN REMUNERATION OF THE GROUP CHIEF EXECUTIVE VERSUS THE WIDER EMPLOYEE POPULATION

Figures for ‘All Employees’ are calculated using figures for UK-based colleagues subject to the Group Annual Bonus Plan. This population is considered to be the most appropriate group of employees for these purposes because its remuneration structure is consistent with that of the GCE. For 2016, 46,963 colleagues were included in this category.

  % change in
base salary
(2015 – 2016)
  % change in
bonus
(2015 – 2016)
  % change in
benefits
(2015 – 2016)
 
GCE  8.4%1  44%2  2%
All employees  2%3  17%3  2%3

12 per cent delivered in cash (in line with other colleagues) the remainder in shares.
2The performance rating for the GCE improved from Strong in 2015 to Strong plus in 2016.
3Adjusted for movements in staff numbers and other impacts to ensure a like-for-like comparison.

RELATIVE SPEND ON PAY (£M)

The graph below illustrates the relative importance of spend on pay (total remuneration of all Group employees) compared with distributions to shareholders. Distributions to shareholders are ordinary and special dividends.

12016: Ordinary and special dividend in respect of the financial year ended 31 December 2016, partly paid in 2016 and partly to be paid in 2017. 2015: Ordinary and special dividend in respect of the financial year ended 31 December 2015, partly paid in 2015 and partly paid in 2016.
2In addition to the annual bonus of £392.9 million awarded in respect of 2016 performance, the Group made Group Ownership Share awards of £47.6 million and paid approximately £84 million under variable pay arrangements used to incentivise customer-facing colleagues, primarily in the Retail division.
143

COMPENSATION

LOSS OF OFFICE PAYMENTS AND PAYMENTS WITHIN THE REPORTING YEAR TO PAST DIRECTORS (AUDITED)

There were no payments for the loss of office or any other payments made to former Directors during 2016.

EXTERNAL APPOINTMENTS HELD BY THE EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS

António Horta-Osório – During the year ended 31 December 2016, the Group Chief Executive served as a Non-Executive Director of Exor, Fundação Champalimaud, Stichting INPAR and Sociedade Francisco Manuel dos Santos for which he received fees of £217,098 in total.(NEDs).

 

CHAIRMAN AND NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS (AUDITED)

  Fees £000 Taxable benefits £000 Total £000
  2016 2015 2016 2015 2016 2015
Chairman and current Non-Executive Directors            
Lord Blackwell 714 700 121 121 726 712
Alan Dickinson 195 144   195 144
Anita Frew 295 236   295 236
Simon Henry 135 105   135 105
Nick Luff 165 135   165 135
Deborah McWhinney 135 9   135 9
Nick Prettejohn 412 350   412 350
Stuart Sinclair 135    135 
Anthony Watson 230 209   230 209
Sara Weller 171 135   171 135
Former Non-Executive Directors            
Carolyn Fairbairn (retired October 2015)  88    88
Dyfrig John (retired May 2016) 49 105   49 105
Total 2,636 2,216 12 12 2,648 2,228

DIRECTOR FEES AND BENEFITS

1Purpose and link to strategyCar allowance.To provide an appropriate reward to attract and retain a high-calibre individual with the relevant skills, knowledge and experience.
OperationThe Committee is responsible for evaluating and making recommendations to the Board with regards to the Chairman’s fees. The Chairman does not participate in these discussions.
The GCE and the Chairman are responsible for evaluating and making recommendations to the Board in relation to the fees of the NEDs.
When determining and reviewing fee and benefit levels, the Committee ensures that decisions are made within the following parameters:

–  The individual’s skills and experience.

–  An objective assessment of the individual’s responsibilities and the size and scope of their role, using objective sizing methodologies.

–  Fees and benefits for comparable roles in comparable publicly listed financial services groups of a similar size.

The Chairman receives an all-inclusive fee, which is reviewed periodically plus benefits including life insurance, car allowance, medical insurance and transportation. The Committee retains the right to provide additional benefits depending on individual circumstances.
NEDs are paid a basic fee plus additional fees for the chairmanship/membership of committees and for membership of Group companies/boards/non-board level committees.
Additional fees are also paid to the senior independent director and to the deputy chairman to reflect additional responsibilities.
Any increases normally take effect from 1 January of a given year.
The Chairman and the NEDs are not entitled to receive any payment for loss of office (other than in the case of the Chairman’s fees for the six month notice period) and are not entitled to participate in the Group’s bonus, share plan or pension arrangements.
NEDs are reimbursed for expenses incurred in the course of their duties, such as travel and accommodation expenses, on a grossed-up basis (where applicable).
Maximum potentialThe Committee will make no increase in fees or benefits currently provided which it believes is inconsistent with the parameters above.
Performance metricsN/A
ChangesNo change to policy.

 

BREAKDOWNLETTERS OF NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS’ FEES (£000S)

  Board fee Deputy
Chairman
 Senior
Independent
Director
 Audit
Committee
 Remuneration
Committee
 Board Risk
Committee
 SWG
Board fees1
 Other
Committees
 2016
Total
Alan Dickinson2 75     30 30 60     195
Anita Frew2,3 75 100   30 60 30     295
Simon Henry 75     30   30     135
Dyfrig John 27       11 11     49
Nick Luff2 75     60   30     165
Deborah McWhinney 75     30   30     135
Nick Prettejohn 75     30   30 277   412
Stuart Sinclair 75       30 30     135
Anthony Watson 75   60 30 30 30   54 230
Sara Weller 75       30 30   365 171

1Scottish Widows Group Limited.
2Due to their role as Chairmen of other Board Committees, Alan Dickinson, Anita Frew and Nick Luff do not receive any fees for their membership of the Nomination and Governance Committee.
3As Deputy Chairman, Anita Frew does not receive any fee for membership of the Responsible Business Committee.
4Nomination and Governance Committee.
5Responsible Business Committee.
144

COMPENSATION

HISTORICAL TOTAL SHAREHOLDER RETURN (TSR) PERFORMANCEAPPOINTMENT

 

The chart below showsNon-Executive Directors all have letters of appointment and are appointed for an initial term of three years after which their appointment may continue subject to an annual review. Non-Executive Directors may have their appointment terminated, in accordance with statute and the historical TSRarticles of Lloyds Banking Group plc comparedassociation, at any time with the FTSE 100 as required by the regulations, rebased as at 31 December 2008. The FTSE 100 index has been chosen as it is a widely recognised equity index of which Lloyds Banking Group plc has been a constituent throughout this period.immediate effect and without compensation.

 

TOTAL SHAREHOLDER RETURN INDICES – LLOYDS BANKING GROUP AND FTSE 100

HISTORICAL GROUP CHIEF EXECUTIVE (GCE) REMUNERATION OUTCOMES

  GCE 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016
GCE single figure of J E Daniels 1,121 2,572 855     
remuneration £000 António Horta-Osório   1,765 3,398 7,475 11,540 8,704 5,541
Annual bonus payout J E Daniels Waived 62% 0%     
(% of maximum opportunity) António Horta-Osório   Waived 62% 71% 54% 57% 77%
Long-term incentive vesting J E Daniels 0% 0% 0%     
(% of maximum opportunity) António Horta-Osório   0% 0% 54% 97% 94.18% 55%

Notes: J E Daniels served as GCE until 28 February 2011; António Horta-Osório was appointed GCE from 1 March 2011. J E Daniels declined to take a bonus in 2009 and António Horta-Osório declined to take a bonus in 2011.

OUTSTANDING SHARE AWARDS

DIRECTORS’ INTERESTS (AUDITED)

SHAREHOLDING GUIDELINES

Executive Directors were required to build up a holding in Lloyds Banking Group plc shares of value equal to 150 per cent of base salary (200 per cent for the GCE) within three years from the later of 1 January 2012 or their date of joining the Board. Following the introduction of the fixed share award in 2014, the gross annual value of this award was added to salary to determine the personal shareholding requirement.

For the purposes of assessing the additional shareholding requirement related to the fixed share award, Executive Directors had up to three years from 1 January 2014 to build up the additional shareholding created by the addition of the fixed share award. As at 31 December 2016, all Executive Directors significantly exceeded the requirements.

In order to provide greater transparency in the measurement of the shareholding requirements, from 1 January 2017 the measure is to be focused on base salary only. There will be a consequent increase in the percentage required as a multiple of salary; however the number of shares required to be held will remain approximately the same. The new requirements are 350 per cent of base salary for the GCE and 250 per cent of base salary for the other Executive Directors.

Executive Directors are required to retain any shares vesting from 2014 LTIP awards onwards for a further two years post vesting (although vested shares count towards the shareholding requirement immediately after vesting).

145

COMPENSATION

  Number of shares Number of options Total shareholding1 Value
  Owned
outright
 Unvested
subject to
continued
employment
 Unvested
subject to
performance
 Unvested
subject to
continued
employment
 Vested
unexercised
 Totals at
31 December
2016
 Totals at
24 February
2017
 Expected
value at
31 December

2016
(£000s)2
Executive Directors                
António Horta-Osório3 17,893,726 4,212,594 14,234,293 29,549  36,370,162 36,370,7576 18,286
George Culmer 10,547,315 1,253,398 7,754,781 29,549  19,585,043 19,585,5626 9,819
Juan Colombás 6,362,996 1,209,441 7,406,515 29,109  15,008,061 15,008,5806 7,067
Non-Executive Directors                
Lord Blackwell 100,000     100,000 n/a6 n/a
Alan Dickinson 200,000     200,000 n/a6 n/a
Anita Frew 450,000     450,000 n/a6 n/a
Simon Henry 200,000     200,000 n/a6 n/a
Dyfrig John4 27,385     27,385 n/a6 n/a
Nick Luff 400,000     400,000 n/a6 n/a
Deborah McWhinney3 250,000     250,000 n/a6 n/a
Nick Prettejohn5 69,280     69,280 n/a6 n/a
Stuart Sinclair       n/a6 n/a
Anthony Watson 576,357     576,357 n/a6 n/a
Sara Weller 340,000     340,000 n/a6 n/a

1Including holdings of connected persons.
2Awards subject to performance under the LTIP had an expected value of 50 per cent of face value at grant (in line with the Remuneration Policy). Values are based on the 31 December 2016 closing price of 62.51 pence. Full face value of awards are £22,734,988 for António Horta-Osório, £12,242,610 for George Culmer and £9,381,538 for Juan Colombás.
3Shareholdings held by António Horta-Osório and Deborah McWhinney are either wholly or partially in the form of ADRs.
4Shares held as at date of retirement.
5In addition, Nick Prettejohn held 400 6.475% preference shares at 1 January 2016 and 31 December 2016.
6The changes in beneficial interests for António Horta-Osório (595 shares), George Culmer (519 shares) and Juan Colombás (519 shares) relate to ‘partnership’ and ‘matching’ shares acquired under the Lloyds Banking Group Share Incentive Plan between 31 December 2016 and 24 February 2017. There have been no other changes up to 24 February 2017.

A summary of transactions undertaken in the year, including share plan awards vested plus open market purchases and sales made by Directors, is shown on pages 148/149.

As a result of the above shareholdings, the position for each Executive Director is as follows:

  2016 Shareholding requirement Current shareholding New shareholding
requirement from
1 January 2017
 Current shareholding
(based on new requirement)
  Base salary
plus fixed
share award
(£000s)
 % of base
salary plus
fixed share
award
 Number of
shares1
 % of base
salary plus
fixed share
award1
 Number of
shares as at
31/12/162
 Old
requirement
met
 % of base
salary
 Number of
shares1
 % of base
salary1
 New
requirement
met
Executive Directors                    
António Horta-Osório 2,025 200% 6,560,829 545% 17,891,894 Yes 350% 6,917,220 905% Yes
George Culmer 1,253 150% 3,044,925 519% 10,545,483 Yes 250% 3,094,403 852% Yes
Juan Colombás 1,236 150% 3,002,634 318% 6,361,547 Yes 250% 3,051,426 521% Yes

1Number of shares required and current shareholding percentage of base salary plus fixed share award figures are calculated using the average share price for the period 1 January 2016 to 31 December 2016 (61.73 pence).
2Includes shares owned outright reduced by forfeitable ‘matching’ shares under the Share Incentive Plan.

None of those who were Directors at the end of the year had any other interest in the capital of Lloyds Banking Group plc or its subsidiaries.

146

COMPENSATION

BREAKDOWN OF SHARES INTERESTS AND INTERESTS IN SHARE OPTIONS (AUDITED)

                Exercise periods  
  At 1 January
2016
 Granted/ awarded Dividends
awarded
 Vested /
exercised
 Lapsed At 31 December
2016
 Exercise
price
 From To Notes
António Horta-Osório                    
LTIP 2013-2015 7,425,441  130,641 6,993,280 432,161        1, 2, 3
LTIP 2014-2016 4,640,077     4,640,077       3
LTIP 2015-2017 4,579,006     4,579,006       3
LTIP 2016-2018   5,015,210    5,015,210       3, 4
Deferred bonus awarded                    
in 2016   1,164,253    1,164,253       5
2013 Sharesave 22,156   22,156   40.62p     8
2014 Sharesave 14,995     14,995 60.02p 01/01/2018 30/06/2018  
2016 Sharesave   14,554    14,554 47.49p 01/01/2020 30/06/2020 10
George Culmer                    
LTIP 2013-2015 4,017,041  70,674 3,783,249 233,792        1, 2, 3
LTIP 2014-2016 2,510,205     2,510,205       3
LTIP 2015-2017 2,477,167     2,477,167       3
LTIP 2016-2018   2,767,409    2,767,409       3, 4
Deferred bonus awarded                    
in 2016   632,856    632,856       5
2013 Sharesave 22,156   22,156   40.62p     9
2014 Sharesave 14,995     14,995 60.02p 01/01/2018 30/06/2018  
2016 Sharesave   14,554    14,554 47.49p 01/01/2020 30/06/2020 10
Juan Colombás                    
LTIP 2013-2015 3,576,283  62,920 3,368,143 208,140        1, 2, 3
LTIP 2014-2016 2,234,780     2,234,780       3
LTIP 2015-2017 2,442,762     2,442,762       3
LTIP 2016-2018   2,728,973    2,728,973       3, 4
Deferred bonus awarded                    
in 2016   624,065    624,065       5
Share buy-out award                    
(share options) 235,499   235,499         6, 7
Share buy-out award                    
(share options) 299,732   299,732         6, 7
2014 Sharesave 29,990    29,990  60.02p      
2016 Sharesave   29,109    29,109 47.49p 01/01/2020 30/06/2020 10

1The shares awarded in March 2013 vested on 7 March 2016. The closing market price of the Group’s ordinary shares on that date was 72.75 pence. Shares vested are subject to a further two-year holding period.
22013 LTIP award was eligible to receive an amount equal in value to any dividends paid during the performance period. Dividend equivalents have been paid based on the number of shares vested and have been paid in shares. The dividend equivalent shares were paid on 7 March 2016. The closing market price of the Group’s ordinary shares on that date was 72.75 pence. The dividend equivalent shares are not subject to any holding period.
3All LTIPs have performance periods ending 31 December at the end of the three-year period. Awards were made in the form of conditional rights to free shares.
4Awards (in the form of conditional rights to free shares) in 2016 were made over shares with a value of 300 per cent of reference salary for António Horta-Osório (5,015,210 shares with a face value of £3,660,000); 275 per cent for George Culmer (2,767,409 shares with a face value of £2,019,600); and 275 per cent for Juan Colombás (2,728,973 shares with a face value of £1,991,550). The share price used to calculate face value is the average price over the five days prior to grant (1 March to 7 March 2016), which was 72.978 pence. This was the average share price used to determine the number of shares awarded. Performance conditions for this award have been disclosed in last year’s annual report on remuneration (page 91).
5Bonus is deferred into shares. The face value of the share awards in respect of bonuses granted in March 2016 was £849,649 (1,164,253 shares) for António Horta-Osório; £461,846 (632,856 shares) for George Culmer; and £455,431 (624,065 shares) for Juan Colombás. The share price used to calculate the face value is the average price over the five days prior to grant (1 March to 7 March 2016), which was 72.978 pence.
6Share buy-out award granted on 30 March 2011 for the loss of deferred share awards forfeited on leaving the Santander Group. Awards are consistent with those forfeited and have a nil option price.
7Options exercised on 8 March 2016. The closing market price of the Group’s ordinary shares on that date was 70.63 pence.
8Options exercised on 6 June 2016. The closing market price of the Group’s ordinary shares on that date was 69.64 pence.
9Options exercised on 1 June 2016. The closing market price of the Group’s ordinary shares on that date was 71.34 pence.
10Sharesave options granted on 10 October 2016.

The aggregate amount of gains made by Directors on the exercise of share options was £391,270.

None of the other Directors at 31 December 2016 had options to acquire shares in Lloyds Banking Group plc or its subsidiaries.

147

COMPENSATION

DIRECTORS’ INTERESTS – SUMMARY OF AWARDS VESTED, PURCHASES AND SALES MADE BY DIRECTORS IN 2016 (UNAUDITED)

  Holding at
1 January 2016
(or appointment
date)
 Transactions
during the year
 Number of
shares1
 Notes Holding at
31 December
2016
Executive Directors          
António Horta-Osório2 11,761,072 08/03/2016 3,706,439 Vesting of 2013 LTIP  
    08/03/2016 69,239 Dividend equivalent shares paid on 2013 LTIP  
    16/03/2016 173,707 Fixed Share Award  
    18/03/2016 8,256 Salary for shares  
    18/04/2016 2,803 Salary for shares  
    16/05/2016 1,437,096 Release of 2012 Deferred Bonus  
    16/05/2016 2,873 Salary for shares  
    06/06/2016 22,156 2013 Sharesave  
    17/06/2016 2,920 Salary for shares  
    17/06/2016 184,317 Fixed Share Award  
    28/06/2016 100,000 Share purchase  
    18/07/2016 3,377 Salary for shares  
    17/08/2016 3,482 Salary for shares  
    19/09/2016 3,330 Salary for shares  
    19/09/2016 210,206 Fixed Share Award  
    18/10/2016 3,549 Salary for shares  
    16/11/2016 3,069 Salary for shares  
    14/12/2016 2,994 Salary for shares  
    14/12/2016 189,000 Fixed Share Award  
    Monthly 3,841 Share Incentive Plan purchase andmatching shares 17,893,726
George Culmer 7,090,093 08/03/2016 295,534 Release of 2013 Deferred Bonus  
    08/03/2016 2,005,122 Vesting of 2013 LTIP  
    08/03/2016 37,457 Dividend equivalent shares paid on 2013 LTIP  
    16/03/2016 97,276 Fixed Share Award  
    19/05/2016 210,244 Dividend Reinvestment  
    02/06/2016 22,156 2013 Sharesave  
    17/06/2016 103,218 Fixed Share Award  
    30/06/2016 50,000 Share purchase  
    19/09/2016 295,534 Release of 2013 Deferred Bonus  
    19/09/2016 117,715 Fixed Share Award  
    28/09/2016 113,779 Dividend Reinvestment  
    14/12/2016 105,840 Fixed Share Award  
    Monthly 3,347 Share Incentive Plan purchase andmatching shares 10,547,315
Juan Colombás 3,145,458 08/03/2016 44,355 Release of 2012 Deferred Bonus  
    08/03/2016 277,981 Release of 2013 Deferred Bonus  
    08/03/2016 1,785,116 Vesting of 2013 LTIP  
    08/03/2016 33,347 Dividend equivalent shares paid on 2013 LTIP  
    16/03/2016 282,898 Exercise of Share buy out  
    16/03/2016 95,924 Fixed Share Award  
    17/06/2016 101,784 Fixed Share Award  
    30/06/2016 50,000 Share purchase  
    19/09/2016 44,355 Release of 2012 Deferred Bonus  
    19/09/2016 277,981 Release of 2013 Deferred Bonus  
    19/09/2016 116,080 Fixed Share Award  
    14/12/2016 104,370 Fixed Share Award  
    Monthly 3,347 Share Incentive Plan purchase andmatching shares 6,362,996
148

COMPENSATION

  Holding at
1 January 2016
(or appointment
date)
 Transactions
during
the year
 Number of
shares
 Notes Holding at
31 December
2016
Non-Executive Directors          
Lord Blackwell 50,000 05/05/2016 50,000 Share purchase 100,000
Alan Dickinson 100,000 29/06/2016 100,000 Share purchase 200,000
Anita Frew 300,000 29/06/2016 150,000 Share purchase 450,000
Simon Henry 100,000 30/06/2016 100,000 Share purchase 200,000
Dyfrig John3 27,385    27,385
Nick Luff 300,000 29/06/2016 100,000 Share purchase 400,000
Deborah McWhinney4 200,000 29/06/2016 50,000 Share purchase 250,000
Nick Prettejohn  26/02/2016 69,280 Share purchase 69,280
Stuart Sinclair     
Anthony Watson 476,357 29/06/2016 100,000 Share purchase 576,357
Sara Weller 200,000 04/05/2016 100,000 Share purchase  
    29/06/2016 40,000 Share purchase 340,000

1After the settlement of tax and National Insurance contributions, where applicable.
2Part of António Horta-Osório’s 2016 salary increase was delivered in shares.
3Shares held as at date of retirement.
4Held in the form of ADRs.

ADDITIONAL DISCLOSURES

TOTAL REMUNERATION OF THE EIGHT HIGHEST PAID SENIOR EXECUTIVES1

The following table sets out the total remuneration of the eight highest paid senior executives (excluding Executive Directors) in respect of the 2016 performance year.

  Executive
  8  7  6  5  4  3  2  1 
  £000  £000  £000  £000  £000  £000  £000  £000 
Fixed                                
Cash-based  305   589   300   740   799   315   330   420 
Share-based  200   406   250   490   500   500   740   650 
Total fixed  505   995   550   1,230   1,299   815   1,070   1,070 
Variable                                
Upfront cash  2   2   2   2   2   2   2   2 
Deferred cash  0   0   0   0   0   0   0   0 
Upfront shares  273   152   416   187   217   462   658   238 
Deferred shares  213   231   432   284   328   196   165   360 
Long-term incentive plan2  1,042   744   884   833   780   2,020   2,571   2,886 
Total variable pay  1,530   1,129   1,734   1,306   1,327   2,680   3,396   3,486 
Pension cost3  46   147   45   181   182   63   66   84 
Total remuneration  2,081   2,271   2,329   2,717   2,808   3,558   4,532   4,640 

1Includes members of the Group Executive Committee and Senior Executive level colleagues.
2Values shown reflect awards for which the performance period ended on 31 December 2016, including the 2014 LTIP and 2014 Commercial Banking Transformation Plan. Dividend equivalents are included where applicable.
3Pension costs based on a percentage of salary according to level.

TOTAL REMUNERATION OF EMPLOYEES ACROSS THE GROUP

Total remuneration1Number of employees
£0 to £100,00073,415
£100,001 to £500,0004,432
£500,001 to £1,000,000145
Above £1,000,00058

1Total remuneration of UK-based colleagues. Includes base salary, bonus awards for the 2016 performance year, the estimated values of LTIP and Commercial Banking Transformation Plan awards for the performance period ended 31 December 2016 (including dividend equivalents where applicable), pension and benefits.
149

COMPENSATION

REMUNERATION COMMITTEE

COMMITTEE PURPOSE AND RESPONSIBILITIES

The Remuneration Committee has responsibility for setting remuneration for all Executive Directors and the Chairman, including pension rights and any compensation payments. The Committee also recommends and monitors the level and structure of remuneration for senior management and material risk takers.

The Committee’s purpose is to consider, agree and recommend to the Board an overall remuneration policy and philosophy for the Group that is aligned with its long-term business strategy, its business objectives, its risk appetite, values and the long-term interests of the Group that recognises the interests of relevant stakeholders. The Committee’s Terms of Reference can be found on the Company’s website at www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/our-group/corporate-governance

The Directors who served on the Committee during the year and their attendance at Committee meetings is set out in the table below.

  Remuneration
Committee meetings
 
  Eligible to    
  attend  Attended 
Committee Chairman        
Anita Frew  7   7 
Committee members who served during 2016        
Lord Blackwell  7   7 
Alan Dickinson  7   7 
Stuart Sinclair1  7   7 
Anthony Watson2  7   6 
Sara Weller  7   7 
Former members who served during 2016        
Dyfrig John3  3   3 

1Joined the Committee on 4 January 2016.
2Anthony Watson was unable to attend the Committee meeting in May 2016 due to a prior commitment.
3Retired on 11 May 2016.

COMMITTEE COMPOSITION, SKILLS AND EXPERIENCE

The Committee comprises Non-Executive Directors from a wide background to provide a balanced and independent view on remuneration matters. Stuart Sinclair was appointed as an independent Non-Executive Director and as a member of the Committee on 4 January 2016. Dyfrig John retired as an independent Non-Executive Director and as a member of the Committee on 11 May 2016.

HOW COMMITTEE MEETINGS ARE RUN

The management of the Committee is in keeping with the basis on which meetings of the Board are managed, as detailed on page 155, with a structure which facilitates open discussion and debate, with steps taken to ensure adequate time for members of the Committee to consider proposals which are put forward.

During 2016, the Committee met its key objectives and carried out its responsibilities effectively, as confirmed by the annual effectiveness review.

MATTERS CONSIDERED BY THE COMMITTEE

The Committee had seven scheduled meetings during 2016 to consider the following principal matters:

– Review of remuneration arrangements for senior executives;

– Determination of 2015 bonus outcome based on divisional and functional performance and adjustment for risk;

– Review of the Balanced Scorecard for the determination of 2016 bonuses in divisions and functions;

– Vesting of the 2013 long-term incentive plan (LTIP);

– Performance conditions for the 2016 LTIP;

– Bonus and salary awards for Executive Directors and key senior managers;

– Performance adjustments in respect of staff, in relation to risk matters in its purview;

– Feedback from the Committee Chairman on her meetings with the PRA and shareholders;

– Review of services and consideration of a number of advisors with subsequent appointment of Kepler, a brand of Mercer (Kepler);

– Results of the Remuneration Committee effectiveness review and the suggestions for improvement;

– Variable remuneration and simplification of reward principles;

– Approval of the 2015 and 2016 Directors’ remuneration report for publication within the annual report and Form 20-F;

– Review and approval of material risk taker identification and approval of the Remuneration Policy Statement; and

– Remuneration governance in the light of regulatory changes.

In addition to the scheduled meetings, the Committee met on a number of other occasions to allow the Directors greater time to discuss their views and for an in-depth review of key areas including this year the review of the Directors’ Remuneration Policy.

150

COMPENSATION

The Committee appoints independent consultants to provide advice on specific matters according to their particular expertise. In May 2016, the Committee conducted a review of their independent advisers and appointed Kepler to advise the Committee following a competitive tendering process. Kepler has voluntarily signed up to the Remuneration Consultants’ Code of Conduct and is judged by the Committee to be independent. Kepler is not connected with the Group. Kepler’s fees for services to the Committee in 2016 were on a time and materials basis and amounted to £175,400. Kepler did not provide any other services to the Group. Mercer provides unrelated advice regarding pensions and investments to the Group.

The Committee has not formally evaluated Kepler’s performance since their appointment in mid-2016. A review is due to be undertaken in early 2017. Deloitte LLP, independent consultants to the Committee since 2010, provided advice for the first five months of the year. Deloitte LLP is not connected with the Group. Deloitte’s fees for services to the Committee in 2016 were on a time and materials basis and amounted to £240,800. In addition, Deloitte LLP provided the Group with advice on taxation and other consulting services, and assurance services.

António Horta-Osório (Group Chief Executive), Simon Davies (Chief People, Legal and Strategy Officer), Paul Hucknall (People Director, Centres of Excellence), Chris Evans (Director, Reward Policy and Partnering), Stuart Woodward (Head of Reward Regulation and Governance) and Matthew Elderfield (Group Director, Conduct, Compliance and Operational Risk) (until September 2016) and Letitia Smith thereafter provided guidance to the Committee (other than for their own remuneration).

Juan Colombás (Chief Risk Officer) and George Culmer (Chief Financial Officer) also attended the Committee to advise as and when necessary on risk and financial matters.

STATEMENT OF VOTING AT ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING

 

The Group’s remuneration policy, which was effective during 2016, was detailed withintable below sets out the Directors’ remuneration report for 2013 and voted onvoting outcome at the 2014 AGM. The remuneration awardedAnnual General Meeting in May 2019 in relation to the Executive Directors in 2015 was disclosed in last year’s annual report on remuneration and wasthe Remuneration Policy, last voted on in 2017.

  Votes cast in favour Votes cast against Votes withheld
  Number of shares
(millions)
 Percentage of
votes cast
 Number of shares
(millions)
 Percentage of
votes cast
 Number of shares
(millions)
2018 annual report on remuneration (advisory vote) 43,322 91.95% 3,790 8.05% 1,006
Directors’ remuneration policy (binding vote in 2017) 47,673 98.03% 959 1.97% 535
133

COMPENSATION

2020 Remuneration policy

Approval for this Remuneration Policy will be sought at the 2016 AGM. The shareholder votes submitted a t the meetings, either directly, by mail or by proxy, were as follows:AGM on 21 May 2020 and, if approved, will take effect from that date.

 

               Votes 
   Votes cast in favour   Votes cast against   withheld 
   Number of shares  Percentage of   Number of shares  Percentage of   Number of shares 
  (millions)  votes cast  (millions)  votes cast  (millions) 
Remuneration policy (2014 vote)  48,261   97.97%  999   2.03%  1,391 
Annual report on remuneration (2016 vote)  48,674   97.67%  1,163   2.33%  176 

It is intended that approval of the Remuneration Policy will be sought at three-year intervals, unless amendments to the Policy are required, in which case further shareholder approval will be sought. Information on how the Policy will be implemented in 2020 is included in the annual report on remuneration.

The objective of the Policy is to align individual reward with the Group’s performance, the interests of its shareholders and a prudent approach to risk management. In this way, the requirements of the major stakeholders are balanced: customers, shareholders, employees, and regulators.

The policy is based on principles which are applicable to all employees within the Group and, in particular, the principle that the reward package should support the delivery of the Group’s purpose of Helping Britain Prosper and the strategic aim of becoming the best bank for customers whilst delivering long-term superior and sustainable returns to shareholders. It fosters performance in line with the Group’s values and behaviours, encourages effective risk disciplines and is in line with relevant regulations and codes of best practice.

DECISION MAKING PROCESS FOR DETERMINING THE POLICY AND CONSIDERATION OF STAKEHOLDER VIEWS

In formulating the Policy, the Remuneration Committee has consulted extensively with a number of stakeholders including institutional shareholders and the Group’s main regulators, the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) and the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA). A formal consultation on the remuneration of Executive Directors was not undertaken with colleagues. However, constructive engagement with the Group’s recognised Unions took place on key elements of the reward package and the unions continue to play a valuable role in representing colleagues across the Group. The Committee also increased its level of oversight on remuneration matters for colleagues and the wider workforce in 2019, receiving overviews and analysis on key reward matters on a quarterly basis to support decisions in relation to executive remuneration.

The Chairman of the Remuneration Committee alongside senior management consulted with shareholders extensively and the proposed amendments to the Policy were deliberated by the Remuneration Committee at three separate committee meetings. Throughout the process, the Committee Chair kept an open dialogue with key stakeholders to provide updates on amendments and additional points of consideration within the Policy following their feedback. The final Policy is proposed on the basis that it has been widely consulted on with stakeholders and has been designed to align to the Group’s culture, values and purpose whilst also remaining aligned to wider stakeholder interests.

No Executive Director has been involved in the determination of their own remuneration but has remained well informed to ensure alignment between executive and wider colleague remuneration structures. To manage conflicts of interests effectively, Executive Directors were asked to step out of committee meetings and relevant paperwork was also redacted for individuals if required. The Committee has also considered gender pay and CEO pay ratio analysis when finalising policy proposals.

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY AND GROUP REMUNERATION POLICY ALIGNMENT

There is no significant difference between the Policy for Executive Directors and that for other colleagues. If a significant difference for any individual were proposed, this would be subject to approval by the Remuneration Committee (within regulatory requirements). The table below summarises how the Policy applies across the Group.

Executive DirectorsGroup Executive
Committee
Other Material
Risk Takers
Other Employees
FixedBase salaryüüüü
Fixed share award1üüüü
Pension and benefitsüüüü
VariableShort-term incentiveüüüü
Long term incentive1üüüü

1Eligibility based on seniority and/or role.

BASE SALARY
Purpose and link to strategyTo support the recruitment and retention of Executive Directors of the calibre required to develop and deliver theGroup’s strategic priorities. Base salary reflects the role of the individual, taking account of market competitiveness,responsibilities and experience, and pay in the Group as a whole.
Operation

Base salaries are typically reviewed annually with any increases normally taking effect from 1 January for existingExecutive Directors and 1 April for future appointments. When determining and reviewing base salary levels,the Committee takes into account base salary increases for employees throughout the Group and ensures thatdecisions are made within the following two parameters:

– An objective assessment of the individual’s responsibilities and the size and scope of their role, using objectivejob-sizing methodologies.

– Pay for comparable roles in comparable publicly listed financial services groups of a similar size.

Salary may be paid in sterling or other currency and at an exchange rate determined by the Committee.

Maximum potentialThe Committee will make no increase which it believes is inconsistent with the two parameters above. Increaseswill normally be in line with the increase awarded to the overall employee population. However, a greater salaryincrease may be appropriate in certain circumstances, such as a new appointment made on a salary below a marketcompetitive level, where phased increases are planned, or where there has been an increase in the responsibilitiesof an individual. Where increases are awarded in excess of the wider employee population, the Committee willprovide an explanation in the relevant annual report on remuneration.
Performance measuresN/A
ChangesThe effective date will change from January to April each year for future Executive Directors to align delivery with the rest of the workforce.
151134

COMPENSATION

Fixed share award
Purpose and link to strategyTo ensure that total fixed remuneration is commensurate with role and to provide a competitive reward packagefor Executive Directors with an appropriate balance of fixed and variable remuneration, in line with regulatoryrequirements.
OperationThe fixed share award will be delivered entirely in Lloyds Banking Group shares, released over three years with33 per cent being released each year following the year of award. The Committee can, however, decide to deliversome or all of it in the form of cash.
Maximum potentialThe maximum award is 100 per cent of base salary.
Performance measuresN/A
ChangesDelivery of vested shares will change from five to three years to align the delivery schedule with other colleagueseligible to receive a Fixed Share Award.
Pension
Purpose and link to strategyTo provide cost effective and market competitive retirement benefits, supporting Executive Directors in buildinglong-term retirement savings.
Operation

Executive Directors are entitled to participate in the Group’s defined contribution scheme with companycontributions set as a percentage of salary.

An individual may elect to receive some or all of their pension allowance as cash in lieu of pension contribution.

Maximum potentialThe maximum allowance for all Executive Directors is 15 per cent of base salary. All future appointments asExecutive Directors will also attract a maximum allowance of 15 per cent of base salary in line with the majority of theworkforce. Maximum allowance may be increased or decreased in order to remain aligned.
Performance measuresN/A
ChangesMaximum employer pension contribution available has been reduced to 15 per cent of cash salary with nocompensation for the reduction to align to the maximum employer pension contribution available to colleagues onthe defined contribution pension scheme.
Benefits
Purpose and link to strategyTo provide flexible benefits as part of a competitive remuneration package.
Operation

Benefits may include those currently provided and disclosed in the annual report on remuneration.Core benefits include a company car or car allowance, private medical insurance, life insurance and other benefitsthat may be selected through the Group’s flexible benefits plan.

Additional benefits may be provided to individuals in certain circumstances such as relocation. This may includebenefits such as accommodation, relocation, and travel. The Committee retains the right to provide additionalbenefits depending on individual circumstances.

When determining and reviewing the level of benefits provided, the Committee ensures that decisions are madewithin the following two parameters:

– An objective assessment of the individual’s responsibilities and the size and scope of their role, using objectivejob-sizing methodologies.

– Benefits for comparable roles in comparable publicly listed financial services groups of a similar size.

Maximum potential

The Committee will only make increases in the benefits currently provided which it believes are consistent with thetwo parameters above. Executive Directors receive a flexible benefits allowance, in line with all other colleagues.

The flexible benefits allowance does not currently exceed 4 per cent of base salary.

Performance measuresN/A
ChangesNo change to Policy
All-employee plans
Purpose and link to strategyExecutive Directors are eligible to participate in HMRC-approved share plans which promote share ownershipby giving employees an opportunity to invest in Group shares.
OperationExecutive Directors may participate in these plans in line with HMRC guidelines currently prevailing (where relevant),on the same basis as other eligible employees.
Maximum potential

Participation levels may be increased up to HMRC limits as amended from time to time. The monthly savings limitsfor Save As You Earn (SAYE) is currently £500. The maximum value of shares that may be purchased under theShare Incentive Plan (SIP) in any year is currently £1,800 with a two-for-one match. Currently a three-for-two match is operated up to a maximum colleague investment of £30 per month.

The maximum value of free shares that may be awarded in any year is £3,600.

Performance measuresN/A
ChangesNo change to policy
135

COMPENSATION

Group Performance Share plan
Purpose and link to strategyTo incentivise and reward the achievement of the Group’s annual financial and strategic targets whilst supportingthe delivery of long-term superior and sustainable returns.
Operation

Measures and targets are set annually and awards are determined by the Committee after the year end basedon performance against the targets set. The Group Performance Share may be delivered partly in cash, shares,notes or other debt instruments including contingent convertible bonds. Where all or part of any award is deferred,the Committee may adjust these deferred awards in the event of any variation of share capital, demerger, specialdividend or distribution or amend the terms of the plan in accordance with the plan rules.

Where an award or a deferred award is in shares or other share-linked instrument, the number of shares tobe awarded may be calculated using a fair value or based on discount to market value, as appropriate.

The Committee applies its judgement to determine the payout level commensurate with business and/orindividual performance or other factors as determined by the Committee. The Committee may reduce the levelof award (including to zero), apply additional conditions to the vesting, or delay the vesting of deferred awards to aspecified date or until conditions set by the Committee are satisfied, where it considers it appropriate. Awards maybe subject to malus and clawback for a period of up to seven years after the date of award which may be extendedto 10 years where there is an ongoing internal or regulatory investigation.

Maximum potentialThe maximum Group Performance Share opportunities are 140 per cent of base salary for the GCE and 100 per centof base salary for other Executive Directors.
Performance measures

Measures and targets are set annually by the Committee in line with the Group’s strategic business plan and furtherdetails are set out in the annual report on remuneration for the relevant year.

Measures consist of both financial and non-financial measures and the weighting of these measures will bedetermined annually by the Committee. The weightings of the performance measures for the 2020 financialyear are set out for 2019 on page 129. All assessments of performance are ultimately subject to the Committee’sjudgement, but no award will be made if threshold performance (as determined by the Committee) is not met forfinancial measures or the individual receives a score of 2.6 out of 5 or below. The normal ‘target’ level of the GroupPerformance Share is 50 per cent of maximum opportunity.

The Committee is committed to providing transparency in its decision making in respect of Group PerformanceShare awards and will disclose historic measures and target information together with information relating to howthe Group has performed against those targets in the annual report on remuneration for the relevant year exceptto the extent that this information is deemed to be commercially sensitive, in which case it will be disclosed once itis deemed not to be sensitive.

ChangesThe normal ‘target’ level of the Group Performance Share has changed to 50 per cent of maximum opportunityfrom 30 per cent.
Long Term Share plan
Purpose and link to strategyLong term variable reward opportunity to align executive management incentives and behaviours to the Group’sobjectives of delivering long-term superior and sustainable returns. The Long Term Share Plan will incentivestewardship over a long time horizon and promote good governance through a simple alignment with the interestof shareholders.
Operation

From 2021, awards will be granted under the rules of the 2020 Long-Term Share Plan, subject to shareholderapproval at the AGM on 21 May 2020. Awards are made in the form of conditional shares and award levels are set atthe time of grant, in compliance with regulatory requirements, and may be subject to a discount in determining totalvariable remuneration under the rules set by the European Banking Authority. The number of shares to be awardedmay be calculated using a fair value or based on a discount to market value, as appropriate.

Vesting will be subject to an assessment of underpin thresholds being maintained measured over a period of threeyears, or such longer period, as determined by the Committee.

The Committee retains full discretion to amend the payout levels should the award not reflect business and/orindividual performance. The Committee may reduce (including to zero) the level of the award, apply additionalconditions to the vesting, or delay the vesting of awards to a specified date or until conditions set by the Committeeare satisfied, where it considers it appropriate.

Awards may be subject to malus and clawback for a period of up to seven years after the date of award which maybe extended to 10 years where there is an ongoing internal or regulatory investigation.

Maximum potentialThe maximum Long Term Share Plan opportunity is 200 per cent of base salary for all Executive Directors includingthe GCE.
Performance measures

An award may be granted by the Remuneration Committee taking into account an assessment of performance ofthe Company, any Member of the Group or business unit or team, and/or the performance, conduct or capability ofthe Participant, on such basis as the Committee determine. The normal ‘target’ level of the Long Term Share award is 150 per cent of base salary.

No further performance conditions will apply. However vesting will be subject to the underpins and RemunerationCommittee discretion as described above.

ChangesThe Long Term Share Plan replaces the Executive Group Ownership Share Plan.
136

COMPENSATION

Deferral of variable remuneration and holding periods
OperationThe Group Performance Share and Long Term Share plans are both considered variable remuneration for the purpose of regulatory payment and deferral requirements. The payment of variable remuneration and deferral levels are determined at the time of award and in compliance with regulatory requirements (which currently require that at least 60 per cent of total variable remuneration is deferred for seven years with pro rata vesting between the third and seventh year, and at least 50 per cent of total variable remuneration is paid in shares or other equity linked instruments subject to a holding period in line with current regulatory requirements).
A proportion of the aggregate variable remuneration may vest immediately on award. The remaining proportion of the variable remuneration is then deferred in line with regulatory requirements.
ChangesNo change in deferral requirements.

Further information on which performance measures were chosen and how performance targets and underpin thresholds are set are disclosed in the relevant sections throughout the report.

DISCRETION IN RELATION TO VARIABLE REWARDS

The Committee retains discretion with regards to these plans. This relates to:

the timing, size and type of awards and holding periods, subject to policy maxima, and the annual setting of targets;
where qualitative performance measures or underpins are used and performance against those measures or underpins is not commensurate with the Group’s overall financial or strategic performance over the performance period;
where qualitative underpin thresholds are used and performance against those underpins is not commensurate with the Group’s overall financial performance over the underpin period;
adjustment of targets and measures if events occur which cause it to determine that it is appropriate to do so. The Committee also retains the right to change performance measures and the weighting of measures, including following feedback from regulators, shareholders and/or other stakeholders; and amending the plan rules in accordance with their terms and or amending the basis of operation (including but not limited to the approach in respect of dividend equivalents) including in light of any change to regulatory requirements or guidance or feedback from regulators;
to exercise discretion in accordance with the rules, including in relation to whether or not malus or clawback provisions would apply, in connection with recruitment, or terminations of employment, or corporate events affecting the Company;
adjustments required in certain circumstances (e.g. rights issues, corporate restructuring events and special dividends);
the exercise of the Committee’s discretion will be disclosed in accordance with regulatory requirements.

LEGACY AWARDS AND RESTRICTIONS ON PAYMENTS

Awards in respect of the Group Performance Share and under the long-term incentive Group Ownership share will be granted in 2020 under the terms of the Directors’ remuneration policy approved by shareholders on 11 May 2017 (the “2017 Policy”). No further awards would be made under the long-term incentive Group Ownership share (or the terms of the 2017 Policy) unless the new Long Term Share Plan 2020 was not approved by shareholders. The Committee reserves the right to make any remuneration payments/awards and any payments/awards for loss of office, notwithstanding that they are not in line with the policy set out above where the terms of the payment/award were agreed (i) before the 2017 policy came into effect; (ii) pursuant to the 2017 policy; or (iii) at a time when the relevant individual was not a Director of the Group and, in the opinion of the Committee, the payment/award was not in consideration for the individual becoming a Director of the Group. Such payments/awards will have been set out in the annual report on remuneration for the relevant year. They include awards and payments made under previous approved remuneration policy and payments in relation to deferred Group Performance Share awards and long-term incentive’ Group Ownership share awards granted in 2018, 2019 and, as referred to above, 2020.

137

COMPENSATION

ILLUSTRATION OF APPLICATION OF REMUNERATION POLICY

The charts below illustrate possible remuneration outcomes under the following three scenarios:

1.The maximum that may be paid, assuming full Group Performance Share payout and full vesting under the new Long Term Share plan. For the Long Term Share Plan, an indication of the maximum remuneration receivable assumes a share price appreciation of 50 per cent during the period in which the award is subject to underpins. The basis of the calculation of the share price appreciation is that the share price embedded in the calculation for the ‘maximum’ bar chart is assumed to increase by 50 per cent across the performance period.
2.The expected value of remuneration for performance midway between threshold and maximum, assuming 50 per cent of maximum Group Performance Share opportunity and a Long Term Share award granted at 150 per cent of salary. It is also assumed that the Long Term Share Award will vest in full.
3.The minimum that may be paid, where only the fixed element is paid (base salary, benefits, pension and the fixed share award).

Amounts are based on based salaries as at 1 January 2020 for the Group Chief Executive and Chief Operating Officer and 1 April 2020 for the Chief Financial Officer. Implementation of the Policy in 2020 is set out in the annual report on remuneration.

1Maximum values of reward package take into account the assumed 50 per cent share price appreciation. Maximum total compensation (£000) without share price appreciation is £7,005 for António Horta-Osório, £3,840 for Juan Colombás and £3,913 for William Chalmers.

APPROACH TO RECRUITMENT AND APPOINTMENT TO THE BOARD

In determining appropriate remuneration arrangements on hiring a new Executive Director, the Committee will take into account all relevant factors. This may include the experience and calibre of the individual, local market practice, the existing remuneration arrangements for other executives and the business circumstances. The Committee will seek to ensure that arrangements are in the best interests of both the Group and its shareholders and will seek not to pay more than is necessary.

The Committee may make awards on hiring an external candidate to ‘buy-out’ remuneration arrangements forfeited on leaving a previous employer. In doing so the Committee will take account of relevant factors including any performance conditions attached to these awards, the form in which they were granted (e.g. cash or shares), the currency of the awards, and the timeframe of awards. Any such award made will be made in accordance with the PRA’s Rulebook and made on a comparable basis to those forfeited and subject to malus and clawback at the request of the previous employer as required by the PRA rules.

The package will normally be aligned with the remuneration policy as described in the policy report. However, the Committee retains the discretion to make appropriate remuneration decisions outside the standard policy to facilitate the recruitment of an individual of the calibre required and in exceptional cases.

This may, for example, include the following circumstances:

An interim recruit, appointed to fill an Executive Director role on a short-term basis.
Exceptional circumstances requiring the Chairman to take on an executive function on a short-term basis.
An Executive Director recruited at a time in the year when it would be inappropriate to provide a Group Performance Share or Long Term Share award for that year, for example, where there may be insufficient time to assess performance. In this situation the Committee may feel it appropriate to transfer the quantum in respect of the months employed during the year to the subsequent year so that reward is provided on a fair basis.
An Executive Director recruited from a business or location where benefits are provided that do not fall into the definition of ‘variable remuneration forfeited’ but where the Committee considers it reasonable to buy-out these benefits.
Transitional arrangements for overseas hires, which might include relocation expenses and accommodation.

The maximum level of variable remuneration (excluding buy-out awards) that may be awarded to new Executive Directors is equal to 200 per cent of fixed remuneration, including any discount permitted by the European Banking Authority. In making any such remuneration decisions, the Committee will apply any appropriate performance measures in line with those applied to other Executive Directors.

A full explanation will be provided of any buy-out award or discretionary payment.

138

COMPENSATION

SERVICE AGREEMENTS

The service contracts of all current Executive Directors are terminable on 12 months’ notice from the Group and six months’ notice from the individual.

The Chairman also has a letter of appointment. His engagement may be terminated on six months’ notice by either the Group or him.

Notice to be given by the GroupDate of service agreement
Lord Blackwell6 months31 March 2014
António Horta-Osório12 months3 November 2010
William Chalmers12 months3 June 2019
Juan Colombás12 months30 November 2010

Under his contract (dated 3 November 2010), António Horta-Osório (GCE) is entitled to an amount equivalent to base salary and pension allowance as a payment in lieu of notice if notice to terminate is given by the Group. If notice to terminate is given by the GCE, he is entitled to an amount equivalent to base salary if the Group chooses to make a payment in lieu of notice. Such payments in lieu will be made in monthly instalments subject to mitigation. He is also entitled to six months’ notice from the Group in the event of his long-term incapacity. As part of a buy-out of a pension forfeited on joining from Santander, the GCE is also entitled to the provision of a conditional unfunded pension commitment, subject to performance conditions as described further in the annual report on remuneration. In the event of long-term incapacity, if the GCE does not perform his duties for a period of at least 26 weeks (in aggregate over a 12 month period), the Group shall be entitled to terminate his employment by giving six months’ notice. In all other respects, the terms of the GCE’s contract in relation to payments for loss of office match those set out below for new directors.

Under terms agreed when joining the Group, Juan Colombás is entitled to a conditional lump sum benefit, payable either (i) on reaching normal retirement age unless he voluntarily resigns or is dismissed for cause, or (ii) on leaving due to long-term sickness or death, as described further in the annual report on remuneration.

The service contracts and letters of appointment are available for inspection at the Company’s registered office.

NOTICE PERIODS

Newly-appointed Executive Directors will be employed on contracts that include the following provisions:

The individual will be required to give six months’ notice if they wish to leave and the Group will give 12 months’ notice other than for material misconduct or neglect or other circumstances where the individual may be summarily dismissed by written notice. In exceptional circumstances, new joiners will be offered a longer notice period (typically reducing to 12 months within two years of joining).
In the event of long-term incapacity, if the Executive Director does not perform their duties for a period of at least 26 weeks (in aggregate over a 12 month period), the Group shall be entitled to terminate the executive’s employment by giving three months’ notice.
At any time after notice to terminate is given by either the Group or the Executive Director, the Group may require the Executive Director to take leave for some or all of the notice period.
At any time, at its absolute discretion, the Group may elect to terminate the individual’s employment by paying to the Executive Director, in lieu of the notice period, an amount equivalent to base salary, subject to mitigation as described more fully in the termination payments section of this report.
139

COMPENSATION

TERMINATION PAYMENTS

It is the Group’s policy that where compensation on termination is due, it should be paid on a phased basis, mitigated in the event that alternative employment is secured. Where it is appropriate to make a bonus payment ( known as Group Performance Share) to the individual, this should relate to the period of actual service, rather than the full notice period. Any Group Performance Share payment will be determined on the basis of performance as for all continuing employees and will remain subject to performance adjustment (malus and clawback) and deferral. Generally, on termination of employment, Group Performance Share awards, in flight Group Ownership Share awards, Long Term Share Plan awards and other rights to payments will lapse except where termination falls within one of the reasons set out below. In the event of redundancy, the individual may receive a payment in line with statutory entitlements at that time. If an Executive Director is dismissed for gross misconduct, the Executive Director will receive normal contractual entitlements until the date of termination and all deferred Group Performance Share, Group Ownership Share and Long Term Share Plan awards will lapse.

Base salaryFixed share awardPension, benefits and
other fixed remuneration
ResignationIn the case of resignation to take up new employment, paid until date of termination (including any period of leave required by the Group). In the case of resignation for other reasons, base salary will be paid in monthly instalments for the notice period (or any balance of it), offset by earnings from new employment during this period.Awards continue and are released at the normal time and the number of shares subject to the award in the current year will be reduced to reflect the date of termination.Paid until date of termination including any period of leave required by the Group (subject to individual benefit scheme rules).
Redundancy or termination by mutual agreementPaid until date of termination (including any period of leave required by the Group). In respect of the balance of any notice period, base salary will be paid in monthly instalments, offset by earnings from new employment during this period.Awards will normally continue and be released at the normal time and the number of shares subject to the award in the current year will be reduced to reflect the date of termination unless, in the case of mutual agreement, the Committee determines that exceptional circumstances apply in which case shares may be released on termination.Paid until date of termination including any period of leave required by the Group (subject to individual benefit scheme rules).
Retirement/ill health, injury, permanent disability/deathPaid until date of retirement/death. For ill health, injury or permanent disability which results in the loss of employment, paid for the applicable notice period (including any period of leave required by the Group).Awards will normally continue and be released at the normal time and the number of shares subject to the award in the current year will be reduced to reflect the date of termination except for (i) death where shares are released on the date of termination; or (ii) in the case of permanent disability the Committee determines that exceptional circumstances apply in which case shares may be released on the date of termination.Paid until date of death/ retirement (subject to individual benefit scheme rules). For ill health, injury, permanent disability, paid for the notice period including any period of leave required by the Group (subject to individual benefit scheme rules).
Change of control or mergerN/AAwards will be payable on the date of the Change of Control and the number of shares subject to the award will be reduced to reflect the shorter accrual period. The Committee may decide that vested awards will be exchanged for (and future awards made over) shares in the acquiring company or other relevant company.N/A
Other reason where the Committee determines that the executive should be treated as a good leaverPaid until date of termination (including any period of leave required by the Group). In respect of the balance of any notice period, base salary will be paid in monthly instalments, offset by earnings from new employment during this period.Awards continue and are released at the normal time and the number of shares subject to the award in the current year will be reduced to reflect the date of termination.Paid until date of termination including any period of leave required by the Group (subject to individual benefit scheme rules).
140

COMPENSATION

Group Performance Share
(Annual bonus plan)1
Long Term Share Plan
(Long term variable reward plan)2
Chairman and
Non-Executive Director fees3
ResignationUnvested deferred Group Performance Share awards are forfeited and in-year Group Performance Share awards are accrued until the date of termination (or the commencement of garden leave if earlier) unless the Committee determines otherwise (in exceptional circumstances), in which case such awards are subject to deferral, malus and clawback.Awards lapse on date of leaving (or on notice of leaving) unless the Committee determines otherwise in exceptional circumstances that they will vest on the original vesting date (or exceptionally on the date of leaving). Where award is to vest it will be subject to the underpins and time pro-rating (for months worked in underpin period). Malus and clawback will apply.Paid until date of leaving Board.
Redundancy or termination by mutual agreementFor cases of redundancy, unvested deferred Group Performance Share awards are retained and in-year Group Performance Share awards are accrued until the date of termination (or the commencement of garden leave if earlier). Such awards would be subject to deferral, malus and clawback. For termination by mutual agreement, the same approach as for resignation would apply.Awards vest on the original vesting date (or exceptionally on the date of leaving). Vesting is subject to the underpins and time pro-rating (for months worked in underpin period). Malus and clawback will apply.Paid until date of leaving Board.
Retirement/ill health, injury, permanent disabilityUnvested deferred Group Performance Share awards are retained and in-year Group Performance Share awards are accrued until the date of termination (or the commencement of garden leave if earlier). Such awards would be subject to deferral, malus and clawback.Awards vest on the original vesting date (or exceptionally on the date of leaving). Vesting is subject to the underpins and time pro-rating (for months worked in underpin period). Malus and clawback will apply.Paid until date of leaving Board.
DeathUnvested deferred Group Performance Share awards are retained and in-year Group Performance Share awards are accrued until the date of termination. Deferred Group Performance Share awards vest on death in cash, unless the Committee determines otherwise.Awards vest in full on the date of death unless in exceptional circumstances the Remuneration Committee determines that the underpins or pre-vest test do not support full vesting.Paid until date of leaving Board.
Change of control or merger2In-year Group Performance Share accrued up until date of change of control or merger (current year). Where there is a Corporate Event, deferred Group Performance Share awards vest to the extent and timing determined by the Committee in its absolute discretion.Awards vest on date of event. Vesting is subject to the underpins and time pro-rating (for months worked in underpin period unless determined otherwise). Malus and clawback will normally apply. Instead of vesting, awards may be exchanged for equivalent awards over the shares of the acquiring company or another company or equivalent cash based awards.Paid until date of leaving Board.
Other reason where the Committee determines that the executive should be treated as a good leaverUnvested deferred Group Performance Share awards are retained and in-year Group Performance Share awards are accrued until the date of termination (or the commencement of garden leave if earlier). Deferred Group Performance Share awards vest in line with normal timeframes and are subject to malus and clawback. The Committee may allow awards to vest early if it considers it appropriate.Awards vest on the original vesting date (or exceptionally on the date of leaving). Vesting is subject to the underpins and time pro-rating (for months worked in underpin period). Malus and clawback will apply.Paid until date of leaving Board.

1If any Group Performance Share is to be paid to the Executive Director for the current year, this will be determined on the basis of performance for the period of actual service, rather than the full notice period (and so excluding any period of leave required by the Group).
2Reference to change of control or merger includes a compromise or arrangement under section 899 of the Companies Act 2006 or equivalent. Fixed share awards may also be released/exchanged in the event of a resolution for the voluntary winding up of the Company; a demerger, delisting, distribution (other than an ordinary dividend) or other transaction, which, in the opinion of the Committee, might affect the current or future value of any award; or a reverse takeover, merger by way of a dual listed company or other significant corporate event, as determined by the Committee. In the event of a demerger, special dividend or other transaction which would in the Committee’s opinion affect the value of awards, the Committee may allow a deferred Group Performance Share award or a long term incentive award to vest to the extent relevant performance conditions are met to that date and if the Committee so determined, on a time pro-rated basis (unless determined otherwise) to reflect the number of months of the underpin period worked.
3The Chairman is entitled to six months’ notice.
4The terms applicable on a cessation of employment to Group Ownership Share Awards are as shown on page 133 of the 2017 Remuneration Policy.
141

COMPENSATION

On termination, the Executive Director will be entitled to payment for any accrued but untaken holiday calculated by reference to base salary and fixed share award.

The cost of legal, tax or other advice incurred by an Executive Director in connection with the termination of their employment and/or the cost of support in seeking alternative employment may be met up to a maximum of £100,000. Additional payments may be made where required to settle legal disputes, or as consideration for new or amended post-employment restrictions.

Where an Executive Director is in receipt of expatriate or relocation expenses at the time of termination (as at the date of the AGM no current Executive Directors are in receipt of such expenses), the cost of actual expenses incurred may continue to be reimbursed for up to 12 months after termination or, at the Group’s discretion, a one-off payment may be made to cover the costs of premature cancellation. The cost of repatriation may also be covered.

REMUNERATION POLICY TABLE FOR CHAIRMAN AND NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS

The table below sets out the remuneration policy for Non-Executive Directors (NEDs).

CHAIRMAN AND NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR FEES AND BENEFITS

Purpose and link to strategyTo provide an appropriate reward to attract and retain a high-calibre individual with the relevant skills, knowledge and experience.
OperationThe Committee is responsible for evaluating and making recommendations to the Board with regards to the Chairman’s fees. The Chairman does not participate in these discussions.
The GCE and the Chairman are responsible for evaluating and making recommendations to the Board in relation to the fees of the NEDs.
When determining and reviewing fee and benefit levels, the Committee ensures that decisions are made within the following parameters:

–  The individual’s skills and experience.

–  An objective assessment of the individual’s responsibilities and the size and scope of their role, using objective sizing methodologies.

–  Fees and benefits for comparable roles in comparable publicly listed financial services groups of a similar size.

The Chairman receives an all-inclusive fee, which is reviewed periodically plus benefits including life insurance, car allowance, medical insurance and transportation. The Committee retains the right to provide additional benefits depending on individual circumstances.
NEDs are paid a basic fee plus additional fees for the chairmanship/membership of committees and for membership of Group companies/boards/non-board level committees.
Additional fees are also paid to the senior independent director and to the deputy chairman to reflect additional responsibilities.
Any increases normally take effect from 1 January of a given year.
The Chairman and the NEDs are not entitled to receive any payment for loss of office (other than in the case of the Chairman’s fees for the six month notice period) and are not entitled to participate in the Group’s bonus, share plan or pension arrangements.
NEDs are reimbursed for expenses incurred in the course of their duties, such as travel and accommodation expenses, on a grossed-up basis (where applicable).
Maximum potentialThe Committee will make no increase in fees or benefits currently provided which it believes is inconsistent with the parameters above.
Performance metricsN/A
ChangesNo change to policy.

LETTERS OF APPOINTMENT

The Non-Executive Directors all have letters of appointment and are appointed for an initial term of three years after which their appointment may continue subject to an annual review. Non-Executive Directors may have their appointment terminated, in accordance with statute and the articles of association, at any time with immediate effect and without compensation.

DATE OF LETTER OF APPOINTMENT

NEDDate of letter of appointmentDate of appointment
Alan Dickinson26 June 20148 September 2014
Anita Frew17 November 20101 December 2010
Simon Henry1 May 201426 June 2014
Nick Prettejohn1 April 201423 June 2014
Stuart Sinclair26 November 201504 January 2016
Sara Weller31 January 201201 February 2012
Lord Lupton2 March 201701 June 2017
Amanda Mackenzie17 April 201801 October 2018
Sarah Legg21 October 201901 December 2019

All Directors are subject to annual re-election by shareholders.

The service contracts and letters of appointments are available for inspection at the Company’s registered office.

142

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

STATEMENT ON US CORPORATE GOVERNANCE STANDARDS

 

The Board is committed to the delivery of the Group’s strategy to becomewhich will transform the best bankGroup for customers, whilst delivering long-term, superior and sustainable returns to shareholders.success in a digital world. The Board’s strategy is underpinned by high standards of corporate governance designed to ensure consistency and rigour in its decision making. This report explains how those standards, in particular, those laid down in the Financial Reporting Council’s 2014 UK Corporate Governance Code 2018 (the UK Code), apply in practice to ensure that the Board and management work together for the long-term benefit of the Company and its shareholders. The UK Code can be accessed at www.frc.org.uk.

 

To assist the Board in carrying out its functions and to provide independent oversight of internal control and risk management, certain responsibilities are delegated to the Board’s Committees. The Board is kept up to date on the activities of the Committees through reports from each of the Committee Chairmen. Terms of Reference for each of the Committees are available on the website at www.lloydsbankinggroup.com. Information on the membership, role and activities of the Nomination and Governance Committee, the Audit Committee, the Board Risk Committee and the Responsible Business Committee can be found on pages 164157 to 175.168.

 

Further information about the work of the Remuneration Committee is included on pages 150117 to 118 and 151.132 to 133.

 

As a non-US company listed on the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) Lloyds Banking Group plc is required to disclose any significant ways in which its corporate governance practices differ from those followed by domestic US companies listed on the NYSE.NYSE, key differences are set out in the paragraphs below. As Lloyds Banking Group plc’s main listing is on the London Stock Exchange, it follows the principles contained in the UK Code. The Group hasconfirms that it applied the principles and complied with all the provisions of the Code throughout 2019 except in relation to that part of provision 36 that provides that the remuneration committee should develop a formal policy for post-employment shareholding requirements encompassing both unvested and vested shares. Compliance with the UK Code and has done so throughout 2016 regarding the provisions where the requirements are of a continuing nature. Key differences are set out below.is discussed further on page 155.

 

The NYSE corporate governance listing standards require domestic US companies to adopt and disclose corporate governance policies. For Lloyds Banking Group plc, consistent with the principles of the UK Code, the Nomination and Governance Committee sets the corporate governance principles applicable to the Company and oversees the annual evaluation of the performance of the Board, its Committees and its individual members.

 

Under the NYSE corporate governance listing standards, the remuneration, nomination and governance committees of domestic US companies must be comprised of entirely independent directors. However for Lloyds Banking Group plc, again consistent with the principles of the UK Code, the Remuneration Committee and the Nomination and Governance Committee include the Chairman, with all other members being independent non-executive directors.Non-Executive Directors.

152143

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

This report sets out our approach to governance in practice,A letter from the work of the Board and its committees and explains how the Group applied the principles of the UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code) during 2016Chairman

 

LEADERSHIP

THE BOARD

The Group is led by an effective, committed and unitary Board, which is collectively responsible for the long-term success of the Company. The Board comprises a Chairman (who was independentDelivering on appointment), independent Non-Executive Directors and Executive Directors. The names and biographies of current Directors are set out on pages 117 to 120.

There is a clear division of responsibility at the head of the Company, which is documented in the Group’s Corporate Governance Framework. The Chairman has overall responsibility for the leadership of the Board and for ensuring its effectiveness while the Group Chief Executive manages and leads the business.

The Corporate Governance Framework, which is reviewed annually by the Board, sets out a number of key decisions and matters that are reserved for the Board’s approval.

The Board sets the strategy, oversees its delivery and establishes the culture, values and standards of the Group.

The Board ensures that the Group manages risk effectively, monitors financial performance and reporting and ensures that appropriate and effective succession planning arrangements and remuneration policies are in place. It provides and encourages entrepreneurial leadership across the Group within this framework.

KEY ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Chairman
Lord Blackwell

Lord Blackwell leads the Board and promotes the highest standards of corporate governance. He sets the Board’s agenda and builds an effective and complementary Board. The Chairman leads Board succession planning and ensures effective communication with shareholders.

Deputy Chairman
Anita Frew

Anita Frew as Deputy Chairman ensures continuity of Chairmanship during any change of chairmanship. She supports the Chairman in representing the Board and acting as a spokesperson. She deputises for the Chairman and is available to the Board for consultation and advice. The Deputy Chairman represents the Group’s interests to official enquiries and review bodies.

Senior Independent Director
Anthony Watson

As the Senior Independent Director, Anthony Watson is a sounding board for the Chairman and Group Chief Executive. He acts as a conduit for the views of other Non-Executive Directors and conducts the Chairman’s annual performance appraisal. He is available to help resolve shareholders’ concerns and attend meetings with major shareholders and financial analysts to understand issues and concerns.

Non-Executive Directors
Alan Dickinson, Simon Henry, Nick Luff, Deborah McWhinney, Nick Prettejohn, Stuart Sinclair, Sara Weller

The Non-Executive Directors challenge constructively and help develop and set the Group’s strategy. They actively participate in Board decision making and scrutinise management performance. The Non-Executive Directors satisfy themselves on the integrity of financial information and review the Group’s risk exposures and controls. The Non-Executive Directors, through the Remuneration Committee, determine the remuneration of Executive Directors.

Group Chief Executive
António Horta-Osório

António Horta-Osório manages the Group on a day-to-day basis and makes decisions on matters affecting the operation, performance and strategy of the Group’s business. He delegates aspects of his own authority, as permitted under the Corporate Governance Framework, to members of the Group Executive Committee (GEC). He provides leadership and direction to senior management and coordinates all activities to implement the strategy and for managing the business in accordance with the Group’s risk appetite and business plan set by the Board.

Executive Directors
Juan Colombás, George Culmer

Under the leadership of the Group Chief Executive, the Executive Directors make and implement decisions in all matters affecting operations, performance and strategy. They provide specialist knowledge and experience to the Board. They are responsible for the successful leadership and management of the Risk and Finance divisions respectively. The Executive Directors design, develop and implement strategic plans and deal with day-to-day operations of the Group.

Company Secretary
Malcolm Wood

The Company Secretary advises the Board and ensures good information flows and comprehensive practical support are provided to Directors. He maintains the Group’s Corporate Governance Framework and organises Directors’ induction and training. The Company Secretary communicates with shareholders as appropriate and ensures due regard is paid to their interests. Both the appointment and removal of the Company Secretary is a matter for the Board as a whole.

153

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

BOARD AND GOVERNANCE STRUCTUREpurpose – Helping Britain Prosper

 

LLOYDS BANKING GROUP BOARD

A full schedule of all matters reserved to the Board and Terms of Reference for each of the Board Committees can be found at www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/our-group/corporate-governance

BOARD COMMITTEES

The Board is supported by its Committees which make recommendations on matters delegated to them under the Corporate Governance Framework, in particular in relation to internal control, risk, financial reporting, governance and remuneration matters.

This enables the Board to spend a greater proportion of its time on strategic, forward looking agenda items. Each Committee comprises Non-Executive Directors only and is chaired by an experienced Chairman. The Committee Chairmen report to the Board on the activities of the Committee at each Board meeting.

The Board recognises that governance must be dynamic and evolve to meet current and future demands. Therefore, in 2016 two further sub-committees of the Board Risk Committee were established to focus on Financial Markets and IT Resilience & Cyber, in addition to an existing Stress Testing & Recovery Planning sub-committee. The sub-committees were constituted to enable members of the Board Risk Committee to dedicate additional time and resource to better understand and to enable fuller review and challenge of the risks associated with the topic of the sub-committee. Current direct Board level oversight of these activities through regular updates and annual review continues unchanged.

Additionally, a Cyber Security Advisory Panel was established to bring an industry perspective and allow for discussion of the key cyber related activities and threats.

THE BOARD IN 2016

Non-Executive Directors see attendance at Board and Committee meetings as only one part of their role. In addition to the annual schedule of Board and Committee meetings, the Non-Executive Directors undertake a full programme of activities each year, as set out on page 158 .

Non-Executive Directors regularly meet with senior management and spend time increasing their understanding of the business through site visits, formal briefing sessions or more informal events including breakfast meetings with senior staff, which the Chief People, Legal and Strategy Officer also attends. Board dinners are held prior to each scheduled Board meeting. This allows the Directors greater time to discuss their views, ensuring that there is sufficient time for the Board to discuss matters of a material nature at Board meetings. Some of these pre meetings are for Non-Executive Directors only, some also include the Group Chief Executive and others the full Board and GEC members. At least once a year, a meeting is held without the Chairman in attendance.

Prior to the annual general meeting (AGM) in Scotland the Board held a joint discussion with the Board of Scottish Widows Group Limited allowing in-depth focus on insurance matters.

The Board has agreed the following changes to our Board composition since the year end. Anthony Watson, Senior Independent Director, will retire at the 2017 AGM after serving more than eight years on the Board. Anita Frew will succeed Anthony as Senior Independent Director. Anita will combine the role of Senior Independent Director with the role of Deputy Chairman, which she has held since May 2014. Anita’s significant board, financial and investment management experience, including as a Senior Independent Director, make her ideally suited to take on this role. Nick Luff, an independent Non-Executive Director, has notified the Board that in light of his other commitments he does not intend to seek re-election at the 2017 AGM. Nick will be succeeded as Chairman of the Audit Committee by Simon Henry. Simon has significant financial experience in the UK listed environment, retiring as Chief Financial Officer of Royal Dutch Shell plc in March 2017. His background and experience enable him to fulfil the role of Audit Committee Chairman and for SEC purposes the role of Audit Committee financial expert.

154

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

ATTENDANCE AT BOARD MEETINGS IN 2016    

  Eligible to attend1   Attended
Directors who served during 2016        
António Horta-Osório  9   9 
Lord Blackwell  9   9 
Juan Colombás  9   9 
George Culmer  9   9 
Alan Dickinson  9   9 
Anita Frew  9   9 
Simon Henry2  9   8 
Nick Luff  9   9 
Deborah McWhinney  9   9 
Nick Prettejohn3  9   8 
Stuart Sinclair4  9   9 
Anthony Watson  9   9 
Sara Weller  9   9 
Former directors who served during 2016        
Dyfrig John5  4   4 

1 

The attendanceBoard recognises
the importance of Directors at Committee meetings is displayed within
meeting the individual Committee reports found on pages 164Group’s
responsibilities and duties
both to 175 shareholders
and for the Remuneration Committee on page 150. Whilst all Non-Executive Directors are, where appropriate, invited to and regularly attend other Committee meetings, only their attendance at Committees of which they are members is recorded.

2Mr Henry was unable to joincommunities that the July Board meeting due to
Group serves across the second quarter 2016 results announcement for Royal Dutch Shell plc, of which he is Chief Financial Officer, being presented on the same day.
3Mr Prettejohn was unable to join the June Board meeting due to a prior commitment.
4Joined the Board on 4 January 2016.
5Retired on 11 May 2016.

HOW BOARD MEETINGS ARE RUN

The Chairman ensures Board meetings are structured to facilitate open discussion, debate and challenge. Through his opening remarks, the Chairman sets the focus of each meeting.

In the rare event of a Director being unable to attend a meeting, the Chairman discusses the matters proposed with the Director concerned, seeking their support and or feedback accordingly. The Chairman subsequently represents those views at the meeting.

Directors are sent papers for the Board meeting typically seven days in advance of the meeting in order that they may have the time to consider the proposals put forward and seek clarification or further information as required. The Board makes full use of technology such as video conferencing, teleconferencing, a Board portal and tablets in its meeting arrangements. This leads to greater flexibility, security and efficiency in Board paper distribution.

ENSURING THE RIGHT FOCUS TO DELIVER THE GROUP’S STRATEGY

The Board recognises the need to be adaptable and flexible to respond to changing circumstances and emerging business priorities, whilst ensuring the continuing monitoring and oversight of core issues.

The Group has a comprehensive and continuous agenda setting and escalation process in place for ensuring the Board has the right information at the right time and in the right format to enable the Directors to make the right decisions. The Chairman leads the process, assisted by the Group Chief Executive and Company Secretary. The process ensures that sufficient time is being set aside for strategic discussions and business critical items.

The process of escalating issues and agenda setting is reviewed at least annually as part of the Board Effectiveness Review with enhancements made to the process, where necessary, to ensure it remains effective.

The Non-Executive Directors also receive regular updates from the Group Chief Executive’s office including a weekly email which gives context to current issues. In-depth and background materials are regularly provided via a reading room on the Board portal.

SENIOR MANAGERS AND CERTIFICATION REGIME

Last year, the Corporate Governance Framework was reviewed in preparation for the introduction in March 2016 of the Senior Managers and Certification Regime (SM&CR) and, as relevant to the Scottish Widows Group, the Senior Insurance Managers Regime.

The review, which was part of a wider range of initiatives undertaken to prepare the Group for the introduction of SM&CR, found that the framework was generally aligned with the requirements of the SM&CR but a number of changes were recommended.

These included amendments to the statements of responsibilities of the Directors and members of the GEC and minor amendments to the terms of reference of a number of Board and Group Chief Executive Committees.

155

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

AGENDA SETTING PROCESS
PROCESS FOR ESCALATING ISSUES
Board and Committee agendas and topics
156

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

BOARD FOCUS IN 2016UK.

 

FinancialLord Blackwell

– Budget for 2016

– Group operating plan

– Draft results and presentation to analysts

– Approval of dividends

– Funding and Liquidity plan

– Capital plan

Strategy

– Review of progress in implementing the Group’s 2015-17 strategy

– Approval of large transactions

– MBNA acquisition

– EU referendum outcome

– Review of future environment and business model

Culture and values

– Customer performance dashboard

– Conduct, culture and values

– Responsible Business report

– Helping Britain Prosper Plan

Governance and shareholders

– Board effectiveness and Chairman’s performance reviews

– Board Diversity Policy

– Review of Corporate Governance Framework

– Investor Relations updates

– AGM briefing

– In the first half of 2016, preparation for proposed public offering of shares in the Company by HM TreasuryChairman

 

Regulatory

– Ring-fencing and resolution

– SM&CR updates

– Regulatory updates

– Whistleblowing updates

Risk management

– Approval of Group risk appetite

– Approval of Risk Management Framework

– Review of internal control systems

– Review and approval of PRA and EBA stress testing results

– CMA market review into retail banking services

– IT resilience and cyber security

 

 

 

BOARD MEETINGS AND ACTIVITY IN 2016

157

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

BOARD ACTIVITIES IN 2016 – SUPPORTING DELIVERY OF THE GROUP’S STRATEGIC PRIORITIES

Deep dives

The Board regularly takes the opportunity to hold ‘deep dive’ sessions with senior management outside of formal Board meetings.

The purpose of the sessions is to provide the Board with deeper insight into key areas of strategic focus. The sessions are structured to allow for plenty of opportunity for discussion and include presentations and videos.

In 2016 ‘deep dive’ sessions were held on the following topics:

– Commercial Banking

– Customer perspective

– Data infrastructure and information security

– Consumer Finance

– Customer segmentation

– Retail product pricing

Board strategy offsite

The Board sets aside time each year outside of the annual Board calendar to hold a strategy offsite giving the Directors the opportunity to solely focus on strategic issues.

This year the Board and the GEC held a two day offsite in June to discuss the strategic challenges and opportunities the Group faces in the future, based on four scenarios for how banking could evolve over the next ten years. The offsite enabled the Board to take a view of the longer-term outlook for the Group. The Board debated the transformation required to be ‘Bank of the Future’ in order to underpin continued competitive success. This will provide the backdrop to the next phase of strategic development, on which the Group will report later in 2017.

The agenda included case studies from banking and other industries, and presentations from senior management and smaller break-out sessions on specific topics.

The offsite concluded with a group discussion leveraging the broad range of experience and perspectives from across the Board.

Creating the best
customer experience
Becoming simpler
and more efficient
Delivering sustainable growth

Board visit to Halifax

Over two days in November the Board visited the Group’s Halifax offices. In addition to the Board and Committee meetings, a separate strategy meeting, attended by GEC members, was held reviewing the Group operating plan. During the visit, the Chairman and several Non-Executive Directors, spent half a day with some of the c3,000 colleagues based in Halifax. The visit included a walk through the Mortgage Transformation lab to learn about the improvements being made to the customer mortgage journey.

The Chairman and Non-Executive Directors also spent time with the Banking Complaints Team, where they followed a complaint through to its outcome and joined a ‘huddle’ discussing how Financial Ombudsmen Service learnings could be used to ensure fair customer outcomes in the future.CHAIRMAN’S LETTER

 

  

Chairman’s engagement programme

The Chairman undertakes an extensive engagement programme each year representing the Group at industry events, acting as a spokesperson for the Group and meeting with clients, regulators, investors, the media, the Foundations and their beneficiaries.

The programme includes visits to regional offices, branches, IT and operations centres, where the Chairman meets local management and colleagues through meetings, floor walks, team talks and Town Hall sessions. The Town Hall sessions are an opportunity for colleagues to hear from the Chairman on the Group’s performance and strategic direction, and importantly, to ask questions. These events are very popular and are always well attended.BOARD AND COMMITTEE CHANGES

 

  

SHOWING SUPPORT FOR CUSTOMERS AND THE COMMUNITY

In September, Lord Blackwell spent two days in Aberdeen where he met with more than 100 business customers. During his visit, he delivered the keynote speech at a dinner for customers and local influencers, emphasising the Group’s vital role in helping Britain prosper and the importance of building long-term customer relationships. At a breakfast for Mid Markets clients and local business leaders, he outlined his views

announced that I plan to retire as Group Chairman at or before the AGM in 2021 as I will by then have served some nine years on the economy and the importance of supporting local businesses.

Lord Blackwell also found time to host a Town Hall and Q&A session for colleagues at the Group’s Albyn Place office. His final stop was an inspiring visit to Fly Cup Catering in Inverurie, a charity funded by the Bank of Scotland Foundation which provides catering training, employment experience and placements for adults with learning difficulties.

Speaking about the visit, he said: ‘I came away enthused by the commitment and enthusiasm of everyone I met, and by the general sense of cautious optimism from our commercial clients and relationship managers. It is extremely helpful to me to hear these perspectives first hand and to meet more of our tremendous colleagues.’

158

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

EFFECTIVENESS

BOARD INDUCTION

The Chairman personally ensures that on appointment each Director receives a full, formal and tailored induction. The emphasis is on ensuring the induction brings the business and its issues alive for the new Director, taking account of the specific role they have been appointed to fulfil and the skills/experience of the Director to date.

Directors who take on or change roles during the year attend induction meetings in respect of those new roles.

An outline of the induction programme is set out on page 160 and Deborah McWhinney and Stuart Sinclair share their experiences on joining the Board on page 166.

PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT AND TRAINING

The Chairman leads the learning and development of Directors and the Board generally and regularly reviews and agrees with each Director their training and development needs.

Ample opportunities, support and resources for learning are provided through a comprehensive programme, which is in place throughout the year comprising both formal and informal training and information sessions.

The Company Secretary maintains a training and development log for each Director.

TIME COMMITMENTS

Non-Executive Directors are required to devote such time as is necessary for the effective discharge of their duties. The estimated minimum time commitment set out in the terms of appointment is 35-40 days per annum including attendance at Committee meetings. For Committee Chairmen and the Senior Independent Director, this increases to a minimum of 45 to 50 days. As described elsewhere , the time devoted on the Group’s business by the Non-Executive Directors is in reality considerably more than the minimum requirements.

Executive Directors are restricted to taking no more than one non-executive director role in a FTSE 100 company and may not take on the chairmanship of such a company. The Chairman is committed to this being his primary role, limiting his other commitments to ensure he can spend as much time as the role requires. In February 2016, the Chairman retired as Chairman of Interserve plc. The Chairman’s biography can be found on page 117.

CONFLICTS OF INTEREST

The Board has a comprehensive procedure for reviewing and, as permitted by the Companies Act 2016 and the Company’s articles of association, approving actual and potential conflicts of interests.

Directors have a continuing duty to notify the Chairman and Company Secretary as soon as they become aware of actual or potential conflict situations. Changes to the commitments of all Directors are reported to the Nomination and Governance Committee and the Board and a register of potential conflicts and time commitments is regularly reviewed and authorised by the Board to ensure the authorisation status remains appropriate.

If any potential conflict arises, the articles of association permit the Board to authorise the conflict, subject to such conditions or limitations as the Board may determine. Decisions regarding these conflicts of interest could be and are only taken by Directors who have no interest in the matter. In taking the decision, the Directors act in a way they consider, in good faith, would be most likely to promote the Company’s success. Any authorities given are reviewed periodically, and as considered appropriate, and at least every 15 months. No Director is permitted to vote on any resolution or matter where he or she has an actual or potential conflict of interest. The Board confirms that no material conflicts were reported to it during the year.

Stuart Sinclair is Senior Independent Director at both QBE Insurance (Europe) Limited, a general insurance and reinsurance company, and Swinton Group Limited, an insurance broker for home and motor insurance. The Board has recognised that potential conflicts may arise in relation to his position at QBE Insurance and in relation to Swinton Group. The Board has authorised the potential conflicts and requires Mr Sinclair to recuse himself from discussions, should the need arise.

ACCESS TO ADVICE

The Group provides access, at its expense, to the services of independent professional advisers in order to assist Directors in their role. Board Committees are also provided with sufficient resources to undertake their duties. All Directors, including Non-Executive Directors, have access to the services of the Company Secretary in relation to the discharge of their duties.

159

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

BOARD INDUCTION PROGRAMME

Core programme

– Strategic and corporate induction

– Governance and Director responsibilities

– Senior Managers and Certification Regime

– Detailed risk induction programme

– Detailed briefings on each of the Group’s business divisions

– Branch and site visits

– Opportunity to meet with major shareholders as requested

One-to-one briefings

– Chairman

– Company Secretary

– Executive Directors

– GEC members

– Group Audit Director

– Senior executives from across the Group

Bespoke programme

Board. The Chairman personally ensuresBoard has initiated a new Director receives a tailored induction.

– Specific briefings are provided on the Committees on which the new Director will serve.

Briefingsearch process to allow time to identify my successor and reading materialsenable an orderly handover.

 

Briefing and reading materials are made available onQUARTERLY DIVIDEND

I am pleased to report that the Board portal.

approved the Group moving to the payment of quarterly dividends in 2020, with the first quarterly dividend in respect of the first quarter of 2020 payable in June 2020. The Group has around 2.4 million shareholders, the vast majority of whom are retail shareholders, and this approach will provide a more regular flow of dividend income to all shareholders whilst accelerating the receipt of payments. Further information on quarterly dividends can be found on page F-76.

 

PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT AND
TRAINING PROGRAMME AT A GLANCE


BOARD EFFECTIVENESS

The Board carried out an annual evaluation of its effectiveness during the year. This was an internal evaluation, which ran between October 2019 and January 2020 and was overseen by the Nomination and Governance Committee. The process which was undertaken and the findings of the review can be found on pages 152 to 153, together with information about the Board’s progress against the 2018 review actions.

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE CODE

The year under review was the first year that the Code has applied to the Group. The Group’s statement of compliance with the Code and a summary of the requirements of the Code can be found on pages 155 to 156. The Group also implemented its approach to workforce engagement.

Lord Blackwell

Chairman

This Corporate Governance Report details the Group’s approach to governance in practice, how the Board operates and the key activities of the Board during the year, together with information on the annual Board evaluation process. It also includes the reports from each of the Board’s principal Committees.

The Board recognises the importance of meeting the Group’s responsibilities and duties both to shareholders and the communities the Group serves across the UK. These are embedded into the Group’s processes and thinking. The Group’s commitment to good governance and the directors’ duties, including under s.172 of the Companies Act 2006, make sure that the Group continually challenges its assumptions and risks. The Group’s purpose to Help Britain Prosper reflects the understanding that a sustainable business organisation needs to continuously demonstrate its value as a responsible corporate citizen.

A major focus over the last year has been the continued implementation of the Group’s strategic transformation programme. This has required a substantial investment in colleague skills and culture to support the re-shaping of roles around the new ways of working. The Board has devoted considerable time to reviewing the way this is being implemented, including a two day joint Board and Executive offsite. The Group has paid particular attention to the management of the risks arising from the implementation of new technologies, the new ways of working and the overall pace of change. 2019 has also been the first year in which the Group has operated under the new ring-fencing governance requirements. Further details of the Group’s ring-fencing governance structure and the Board’s oversight of the strategic transformation programme are set out on pages 151 and 150 respectively.

Succession planning and the composition of the Board and its committees are important components of good governance. There were a number of changes to the Board and Committees during the year. George Culmer retired as Chief Financial Officer and Executive Director of the Group on 1 August 2019 and was succeeded by William Chalmers, who brought a wealth of experience to the Group. George was a crucial member of the team that helped turn Lloyds around and left with our thanks and best wishes for the future.

Following a recruitment process led by the Nomination and Governance Committee, Sarah Legg was appointed to the Board in December 2019 as a new independent Non-Executive Director and Catherine Woods will join the Board on 1 March 2020 as a new independent Non-Executive Director. While selected on merit, these appointments help meet the Group’s commitments to both gender and BAME diversity. Sarah became a member of the Audit and Board Risk Committees and Catherine will join the Board Risk and Remuneration Committees.

Anita Frew stepped down as Senior Independent Director on 1 December 2019 and will retire as Deputy Chairman and Non-Executive Director at the AGM in May 2020. Anita has been an extremely valuable Board member, and will be much missed. Alan Dickinson succeeded Anita as Senior Independent Director on 1 December 2019 and will also take on the role of Deputy Chairman following Anita’s retirement from the Board. Alan’s significant board, financial and regulatory experience, including as a chairman, make him ideally suited to this role.

Juan Colombás, Executive Director and Chief Operating Officer, announced that he plans to retire in July 2020 after many years as a senior executive in which he has made a major contribution to the transformation of the Group. In line with the UK Corporate Governance Code 2018 (the ‘Code’), I also

144

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Corporate governance report

The Group’s Board in 20191

Board and Committee composition and attendance at scheduled meetings in 20196

    Nomination and Audit Board Risk Remuneration Responsible
Board member Board Governance Committee Committee Committee Committee Business Committee
Lord Blackwell (C) 11/11 7/7  8/8 6/6 4/4
António Horta-Osório 11/11     
William Chalmers1 3/3     
Juan Colombás 11/11     
George Culmer1 8/8     
Alan Dickinson2 11/11 7/7 6/6 8/8 6/6 
Anita Frew2 11/11 7/7 6/6 8/8 6/6 3/44
Simon Henry 10/114  6/6 7/84  
Sarah Legg3      
Lord Lupton 11/11  3/3 8/8  1/25
Amanda Mackenzie 11/11   8/8 3/3 4/4
Nick Prettejohn 11/11 5/5 6/6 8/8  
Stuart Sinclair 11/11   8/8 6/6 4/4
Sara Weller 11/11 7/7  7/84 6/6 4/4
1George Culmer retired from, and William Chalmers was appointed to, the Board on 1 August 2019.
2Alan Dickinson succeeded Anita Frew as Senior Independent Director on 1 December 2019.
3Sarah Legg joined the Board and respective Committees on 1 December 2019. There were no meetings in December 2019.
4Unable to attend due to a scheduling clash with a prior business commitment.
5Unable to attend due to a scheduling clash with another Group business commitment.
6Where a Director is unable to attend a meeting s/he receives papers in advance and has the opportunity to provide comments to the Chairman of the Board or to the relevant Committee Chairman.
 Chairman

BEYOND BOARD MEETINGS

Non-Executive Directors regularly meet with senior management and spend time increasing their understanding of the business through site visits, formal briefing sessions or more informal events including breakfast meetings with senior colleagues. These informal meetings allow Directors greater time to discuss business in an informal setting, ensuring that there is sufficient time for the Board to discuss matters of a material nature at Board meetings.

Non-Executive Directors see attendance at Board and Committee meetings as only one part of their role. In addition to the annual schedule of Board and Committee meetings, the Non-Executive Directors undertake a full programme of activities and engagements each year.

Where further training or awareness is identified, such as new technology, regulations or sector advances, deep dives are held with the relevant field expert to provide overviews, chances to raise questions, and debate the impacts on business in an informal setting.

The Board held joint discussions with Scottish Widows Group Limited in April and Lloyds Bank Corporate Markets plc in September. These meetings are important in respect of both governance and the sharing of best practice. They also provide the opportunity for in-depth focus on both insurance and corporate markets matters. Performance and business updates are also provided, and, in the case of Lloyds Bank Corporate Markets plc, updates on key milestones in respect of the development of this new bank.

145

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

How the Board works

Meetings, activities and processes

THE RIGHT PROCESSES IN PLACE TO DELIVER ON THE GROUP’S STRATEGY

During the year, there were 11 scheduled Board meetings, with details of attendance shown on page 145. In addition to formal meetings, the Board meets as necessary to consider matters of a time-sensitive nature. The Chairman and the Chairmen of each Committee ensure Board and Committee meetings are structured to facilitate open discussion, debate and challenge.

The Board is supported by its Committees which make recommendations on matters delegated to them under the Corporate Governance Framework, in particular in relation to Board appointments, internal control risk, financial reporting, governance and remuneration issues.

The management of all Committees is in keeping with the basis on which meetings of the Board are managed. Each of the Committees’ structures facilitates open discussion and debate, with steps taken to ensure adequate time for members of the Committees to consider proposals which are put forward.

The Executive Directors make decisions within clearly defined parameters which are documented within the Corporate Governance Framework. However, where appropriate, any activities outside the ordinary course of business are brought to the full Board for their consideration, even if the matters fall within the agreed parameters. The Corporate Governance Framework helps to ensure that decisions are made by management with the correct authority. In the rare event of a Director being unable to attend a meeting, the Chairman of the respective meeting discusses the matters proposed with the Director concerned wherever possible, seeking their support and feedback accordingly. The Chairman subsequently represents those views at the meeting.

The Board recognises the need to be adaptable and flexible to respond to changing circumstances and emerging business priorities, whilst ensuring the continuing monitoring and oversight of core issues.

The Group has a comprehensive and continuous agenda setting and escalation process in place to ensure that the Board has the right information at the right time and in the right format to enable the Directors

to make the right decisions. The Chairman leads the process, assisted by the Group Chief Executive and Company Secretary. The process ensures that sufficient time is being set aside for strategic discussions and business critical items.

The process of escalating issues and agenda setting is reviewed at least annually as part of the Board effectiveness review with enhancements made to the process, where necessary, to ensure it remains effective. Details of the meeting process are provided below.

The Non-Executive Directors also receive regular updates from the Group Chief Executive’s office including a weekly email which gives context to current issues. In-depth and background materials are regularly provided via a designated area on the secure electronic Board portal.

A full schedule of matters reserved for the Board and Terms of Reference for each of the principal Committees can be found at www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/our-group/ corporate-governance

BOARD MEETINGS

 A yearly planner is prepared by the Company Secretary to map out the flow of key items of business to the Board.

 Board venues are agreed and colleagues in the areas that the Board will visit are engaged at both senior management and operational level.

 The Chairman holds monthly meetings to review the draft agenda and planner with the Company Secretary and Chief of Staff, as well as quarterly meetings with a wider group of central functions, to identify emerging issues.

 The draft Board agenda is discussed with the Chairman and the Group Chief Executive and reviewed at GEC meetings.

 Matters may be added to agendas in response to external events, Non-Executive Director requests, regulatory initiatives and the quarterly Board topic review meetings.

 Templates and guidelines are included within targeted training for authors of papers to ensure consistency and high quality of information.

 Meeting packs are uploaded and communicated to all Directors via a secure electronic Board portal typically a week in advance of the meeting to ensure sufficient time to review the matters which are to be discussed and seek clarification or any additional information.

 Executive meetings are held ahead of all Board and Committee meetings to ensure matters being presented to the Board have been through a thorough discussion and escalation process.

 Committee meetings are generally held prior to Board meetings, with the Chairman of each Committee then reporting matters discussed to the Board.

 Non-Executive discussions and informal dinners are held prior to most Board meetings, some of which also include the Group Chief Executive.

 Board meetings have certain standing items, such as a report from the Group Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer on Group performance, reports from the Chairmen of Committees and principal subsidiaries and updates from certain GEC members.

 The agenda includes free agenda discussion time.

 Topics for deep dives or additional items are discussed when required and include business, governance and regulatory updates.

 The Board makes full use of technology such as video conferencing, teleconferencing, a Board portal and tablets/devices in its meeting arrangements. This leads to greater flexibility, security and efficiency in Board paper distribution and meeting arrangements.

 The Board has the chance to meet colleagues within the business and, if any additional meetings are required to provide more details, these are arranged.

 Minutes and matters arising from the Board meeting are produced and circulated to the Directors for review and feedback.

 Those responsible for matters arising are asked to provide updates to a subsequent meeting.

146

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

How the Board workscontinued

Key focus areas

The Board sets the strategy, oversees its delivery and establishes the culture, values and standards of the Group. The Board ensures that the Group manages risk effectively, monitors financial performance and reporting and ensures that appropriate and effective succession planning arrangements and remuneration policies are in place. It provides and encourages entrepreneurial leadership across the Group within this framework.

This page 147 and page 148 show the key focus areas of the Board during the year and highlight the link between those focus areas and the Group’s strategic objectives. Also listed are stakeholder groups central to the matters considered and decisions taken.

The agenda for each Board meeting is discussed in advance with the Chairman and Chief Executive Officer and reviewed at Group Executive Committee meetings and includes 30 minutes ‘free agenda’ discussion time. Regular updates are provided to the Board by the Chairmen of the Audit, Nomination and Governance, Remuneration, Responsible Business and Board Risk Committees as well as by the Chief Executive Officer, the Chief Financial Officer, the Chief Operating Officer and the Chairman and the chairmen of the Lloyds Bank Corporate Markets plc and Scottish Widows Group Limited boards.

LEADING CUSTOMER EXPERIENCE
DIGITISING THE GROUP
MAXIMISING GROUP CAPABILITIES
TRANSFORMING WAYS OF WORKING

REVIEWED AND APPROVED THE
HELPING BRITAIN PROSPER PLAN
Link to strategic priorities:
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Community and Environment; Suppliers
DISCUSSED CONDUCT, CULTURE AND
VALUES – CULTURE DASHBOARD AND
CHANGE MANAGEMENT
Link to strategic priorities:
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Colleagues; Regulatory and Government; Suppliers
RECEIVED REPORTS ON RESPONSIBLEBUSINESS INCLUDING ONCLIMATE CHANGE MATTERS ANDSUSTAINABILITY
Link to strategic priorities:
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Colleagues; Community and Environment; Shareholders; Suppliers; Regulatory and Government
REVIEWED AND APPROVED THE GROUP’S DIVERSITY POLICY
Link to strategic priorities:
Link to stakeholder groups:
Colleagues
CONSIDERED UPDATES ON WORKFORCE ENGAGEMENT
Link to strategic priorities: 
Link to stakeholder groups:
Colleagues
CONSIDERED UPDATES ON PROPOSED NEW REMUNERATION POLICY
Link to strategic priorities:
Link to stakeholder groups:
Colleagues; Regulatory and Government;
Shareholders
DISCUSSED THE GROUP’S
PERFORMANCE AGAINST CUSTOMER DASHBOARD
Link to strategic priorities:
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers
DISCUSSED IMPROVEMENTS IN CUSTOMER OUTCOMES FROM STRATEGIC TRANSFORMATION PLAN (GSR3)
Link to strategic priorities:
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Regulatory and Government
DISCUSSED HOW THE GROUPSUPPORTS VULNERABLE CUSTOMERSAND CUSTOMERS IN FINANCIALDIFFICULTY
Link to strategic priorities:
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Regulatory and Government
DISCUSSED THE ANNUAL REVIEW OFCUSTOMER CONDUCT FRAMEWORKAND RISK
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Regulatory and Government
DEEP DIVE ON STRONG CUSTOMERAUTHENTICATION
Link to strategic priorities:
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Regulatory and Government
DEEP DIVE ON OPEN BANKING
Link to strategic priorities:
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Regulatory and Government
DISCUSSED PROCESSES ANDOUTCOMES FOR THE FAIR TREATMENTOF CUSTOMER COMPLAINTS ANDREMEDIATION
Link to strategic priorities: 
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Regulatory and Government
DEEP DIVE ON DATA ETHICS
Link to strategic priorities:
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Regulatory and Government
APPROVED THE 2019 BUDGET
DISCUSSED THE REGULAR FINANCEREPORT, FORECASTS AND CAPITALAND LIQUIDITY POSITIONS
REVIEWED AND APPROVED INCOMESTATEMENT, DRAFT RESULTS ANDPRESENTATIONS TO ANALYSTS
Link to stakeholder groups:
Colleagues; Shareholders
REVIEWED AND APPROVED FUNDINGAND LIQUIDITY PLANS AND CAPITALPLAN
Link to stakeholder groups:
Regulatory and Government
APPROVED THE PAYMENT OF FINALAND INTERIM DIVIDENDS
Link to stakeholder groups:
Shareholders
APPROVED THE LAUNCH OF A SHAREBUYBACK PROGRAMME AND ITSSUBSEQUENT CURTAILMENT ASCONDITIONS CHANGED
Link to stakeholder groups:
Shareholders
APPROVED THE PAYMENT OFQUARTERLY DIVIDENDS
Link to stakeholder groups:
Shareholders
CONSIDERED UPDATES ONSTRUCTURAL HEDGING STRATEGY& GROUP CORPORATE TREASURY’SREGULAR MANAGEMENTINFORMATION REPORT
Link to stakeholder groups:
Regulatory and Government
RECEIVED AN ANNUAL UPDATE ONPENSION SCHEME VALUATIONS
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers
DISCUSSED GSR3 AND FOUR YEAROPERATING PLAN
Link to strategic priorities:
REVIEWED AND APPROVED BASELPILLAR 3 DISCLOSURES
Link to stakeholder groups:
Regulatory and Government
REVIEWED AND APPROVED ANNUALREPORT AND FORM 20-F
Link to stakeholder groups:
Regulatory and Government; Shareholders


147

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

REVIEWED AND APPROVED GROUP TREASURY PLAN 2020
Link to stakeholder groups:
Regulatory and Government
CONSIDERED AN UPDATE ON THE IMPLEMENTATION OF THE GROUP’S RING-FENCING MODEL
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Regulatory and Government
DISCUSSED OUTCOME OF BOARD EFFECTIVENESS REVIEW AND AGREED ACTIONS ARISING FROM IT
Link to stakeholder groups:
Shareholders
DISCUSSED CHAIRMAN’S PERFORMANCE REVIEW
Link to stakeholder groups:
Shareholders
APPROVED AGM DOCUMENTATION AND RECEIVED UPDATE ON VOTING
Link to stakeholder groups:
Shareholders
REVIEWED AND APPROVED THE CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FRAMEWORK
Link to stakeholder groups:
Shareholders
REVIEWED AND APPROVED VARIOUS GROUP POLICIES INCLUDING THE SIGNING AUTHORITIES, AND BOARD AND GEC DEALING POLICY
Link to stakeholder groups:
Colleagues; Regulatory and Government
CONSIDERED UPDATED BOARD SKILLS MATRIX
Link to stakeholder groups:
Shareholders
CONSIDERED REVIEWS OF CHAIRMAN’S FEE (WITHOUT CHAIRMAN PRESENT) AND NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS’ FEES (WITH NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS ABSTAINING)
REVIEWED AND APPROVED GOING CONCERN STATEMENT
DISCUSSED UPDATE ON BANKING STANDARDS BOARD 2018 SURVEY
Link to stakeholder groups:
Colleagues; Regulatory and Government
APPROVED BOARD AND BOARD COMMITTEE APPOINTMENTS
CONSIDERED BOARD, BOARD COMMITTEE AND EXECUTIVE SUCCESSION PLANS
Link to stakeholder groups: Colleagues; Shareholders
APPROVED ATTESTATION OF RING-FENCING COMPLIANCE
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Regulatory and Government
CONSIDERED WHISTLEBLOWING UPDATES
Link to stakeholder groups:
Colleagues; Customers; Regulatory and Government
CONSIDERED REGULATORY UPDATES
Link to stakeholder groups:
Regulatory and Government
RECEIVED UPDATES ON THE SENIOR MANAGER AND CERTIFICATION REGIME
Link to stakeholder groups:
Regulatory and Government
DISCUSSED THE FCA FIRM EVALUATION LETTER
Link to stakeholder groups:
Regulatory and Government
HELD DISCUSSIONS WITH THE PRA
Link to stakeholder groups:
Regulatory and Government
APPROVED GROUP RISK APPETITE
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Shareholders; Colleagues;
Community and Environment; Regulatory and Government; Suppliers
CONSIDERED CYBER SECURITY UPDATES
Link to stakeholder groups:
Colleagues; Customers; Suppliers
CONSIDERED KEY AREAS OF CONDUCT RISK
Link to stakeholder groups:
Colleagues; Customers; Regulatory and Government
REVIEWED AND APPROVED PRA STRESS TESTING RESULTS
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Shareholders; Regulatory and Government
REVIEWED AND APPROVED THE RISK MANAGEMENT FRAMEWORK
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Shareholders; Colleagues;
Regulatory and Government; Suppliers
APPROVED ANNUAL REVIEW OF GROUP RING-FENCING POLICY
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Regulatory and Government
TWO STRATEGY AWAY DAYS TO REVIEWTHE PROGRESS IN IMPLEMENTING THEGROUP’S STRATEGY
Link to strategic priorities:
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Shareholders; Colleagues;
Community and Environment; Regulatory andGovernment; Suppliers
DEEP DIVE ON DATA AND MACHINEINTELLIGENCE PROGRAMME
Link to strategic priorities:
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Colleagues; Regulatoryand Government
DEEP DIVE ON OPEN BANKINGAND ON STRONG CUSTOMERIDENTIFICATION
Link to strategic priorities:
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Regulatory and Government
DEEP DIVE ON FINTECH
Link to strategic priorities: 
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Colleagues
CONSIDERED AND APPROVED LARGETRANSACTIONS AND CONTRACTS
Link to strategic priorities:
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Shareholders; Suppliers
CONSIDERED THE GROUP’S EU EXITPREPARATIONS
Link to strategic priorities: 
Link to stakeholder groups:
Customers; Shareholders; Colleagues;
Community and Environment; Regulatory andGovernment; Suppliers

Deep dive sessions

The Board regularly takes the opportunity to hold deep dive sessions with senior management outside formal Board meetings. The purpose of the sessions is to provide the Board with deeper insight into key areas of strategic focus, whilst providing Directors with a greater understanding and appreciation for the subject matter to help drive better quality of debate and enhance knowledge. The sessions are structured to allow plenty of opportunity for discussion and include presentations and videos.

Details of the deep dive sessions that were held in 2019 are set out in the key focus areas section on pages 147 and 148. In addition, detailed updates were received from, and joint discussions held with, Scottish Widows Group Limited and Lloyds Bank Corporate Markets plc.


148

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

How the Board workscontinued

Governance in action

BOARD OVERSIGHT: CULTURE

The Group aims to continually develop a values-led culture with the Board providing sponsorship of this approach. The Group’s values and behaviours are the foundation of the Group’s culture, providing a clear framework to ensure everyone in the Group understands what is expected of each other every day. Despite many strengths, the Board recognises that the Group’s culture needs to continually change to ensure the business can adapt rapidly to a changing environment while delivering the best outcomes for customers.

The Group’s culture plan is driven by the Group’s three core values; putting customers first, keeping it simple and making a difference together and these are underpinned by the Group’s six drivers of culture: Vision and Values, Leaders and Line Managers, Communication and Colleague Voice, Enabling and Developing Colleagues, Reward and Recognition and Accountability and Empowerment. These are also reflected in divisional plans and align to the FCA’s four key drivers of culture. Culture initiatives are designed and delivered collaboratively, with input from colleagues and various teams across the Group, including divisional culture leads, Inclusion and Diversity, Responsible Business and Group Corporate Affairs.

The Board provides oversight and direction of culture activities and believes that establishing the right culture is important to ensure the Group builds an environment where all colleagues feel included, empowered and inspired to do the right things for customers. During 2019, the Board assessed and monitored the Group’s progress on culture through regular updates at Board meetings, which included:

 regular updates on the Group strategic review, which incorporates the biggest ever investment in colleagues, with a significant focus on transforming the way the Group works and its culture

 quarterly workforce engagement reports, which provide an update on culture initiatives and colleague feedback

 specific bi-annual updates on culture initiatives

An understanding of the impact of the management initiatives is developed by reviewing a wide range of data and metrics, including the outputs from the Group’s colleague engagement survey, the Banking Standards Board assessment and other business metrics.

As a result of this oversight, the Group’s culture plan and associated activities are regularly refined and tailored to incorporate insight into the Group’s progress. By doing this, the Group

is able to recognise areas of positive progress and understand where it still has more work to do so that the Group can focus on areas for improvement.

Culture highlights from 2019 include:

 Continued roll out and embedding of Your Best, the Group’s transformational approach to performance management and career development. As part of the roll out the Group undertook the biggest capability uplift for line managers ever seen across the Group

 Simplifying and improving the Group’s ways of working, through focusing on key colleague journeys

 Continued focus on developing the skills required for the future, with significant progress made towards achieving the Group’s commitment to deliver 4.4 million additional learning and development hours during 2018 to 2020

 Building resilience through a range of interventions for colleagues throughout the organisation, including the launch of an online portal providing access to a wide range of resources

The Group has a number of initiatives planned for 2020 to accelerate cultural change, in particular in relation to empathy and promoting simplicity.

Q&A WITH SARA WELLER

The Group is
committed to
Helping Britain
Prosper by supporting a
thriving low carbon
economy

Sara Weller

Non-Executive Director and
Chairman, Responsible Business
Committee

HOW DOES THE BOARD OVERSEE THE GROUP’S SUSTAINABILITY STRATEGY?

Given the strategic importance of the Group’s sustainability ambitions, the Group’s governance structure provides clear oversight and ownership of the sustainability strategy. The Board of Directors as a whole is responsible for sustainability and has oversight via the Responsible Business Committee, a sub-committee of the Board, chaired by me and which includes the Chairman, Lord Blackwell, and Deputy Chairman, Anita Frew, as members. The Responsible Business Committee regularly reports to the Board to enable the Board to discuss pertinent issues as whole. Day to day accountability for sustainability rests with executive management, in particular the Group Chief Executive.

HOW IMPORTANT IS SUSTAINABILITY AND THE MANAGEMENT OF CLIMATE CHANGE RISK TO THE GROUP?

Sustainability and climate change has become a pressing priority for the country and beyond. Over the past year the Group has been working, right across the business, on the best ways to respond to these challenges, and has developed a sustainability strategy which is committed to supporting the UK’s transition to a sustainable, low-carbon economy, and

is fully aligned to the Paris Agreement and the UK’s commitment to a net zero future by 2050. From the Group’s position at the heart of the UK economy, the Group is committed to supporting the UK successfully to engage with the challenges and opportunities presented by climate change and the carbon economy. The Group has identified and will manage material sustainability related risks across the Group, disclosing these in line with the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) recommendations. The Group has created a detailed implementation plan for the TCFD and the PRA supervisory expectations related to climate change. The Group has appointed Senior Management Function positions responsible for Climate Change risk, covering the three main legal entities, for example, for Lloyds Bank and Bank of Scotland this is the Chief Risk Officer.

CAN YOU TELL US ABOUT YOUR PERSONAL HIGHLIGHTS IN 2019?

There are so many matters on which great progress has been made in 2019. However, if I had to pick a couple of areas, I would choose highlights where colleagues have gone the extra mile and more to support individuals at the risk of disadvantage. Firstly the Group’s Digital Skills Academy, piloted in Manchester and now rolling out to other cities, starting with Bristol. Secondly, the Group’s work to provide support to Mental Health UK to allow them to set up the UK’s first Money and Mental Health Advice line.

149

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Q&A WITH STUART SINCLAIR

2020 marks the
beginning of a
new policy period
that must remain
relevant for three
years. This offered
the opportunity for
a fresh look.

Stuart Sinclair

Non-Executive Director and
Chairman, Remuneration
Committee

HOW DOES THE BOARD OVERSEE THE GROUP’S REMUNERATION POLICY AND GET ASSURANCE THAT IT HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ALIGN TO THE GROUP’S PURPOSE AND VALUES AND IS CLEARLY LINKED TO THE SUCCESSFUL DELIVERY OF THE COMPANY’S LONG-TERM STRATEGY?

This year, the Group was given an opportunity to take a step back and think about the remuneration philosophy for the Group and focus on what the Group’s main stakeholders would like the Group to consider. I personally have spent considerable time listening to a wide cross-section of the Group’s investor base, as well as receiving the input of stakeholders such as recognised unions, regulators and the Work and Pensions Select Committee. With the insights from these discussions in mind, the Remuneration Committee has been able to discuss a great deal of material with management and independent advisers to gain comfort that the final proposals the Remuneration Committee recommended to the Board are suitable and align to the Group’s culture and values.

WHAT HAS BEEN YOUR GREATEST CHALLENGE SINCE BECOMING REMUNERATION COMMITTEE CHAIRMAN?

The greatest challenge lay in crafting a new Remuneration Policy for the Group that would remain relevant for three years, while also being commercially sensible. To achieve this, Committee members spent time with a large cross section of investors and others (as noted in the Directors’ Remuneration Report), while, as ever, being mindful of the need to set pay at a level which will continue to attract candidates who can run large, complex

organisations. In this remuneration period, the task is made all the more challenging by the need to find senior people who have appreciation for technology and innovation generally and how it can improve customer experience while helping the cost structure.

It was also important, in this round, to build in as much optionality as possible, so that change in society’s expectations or regulation or indeed the market for top talent could be accommodated within the new Policy. The various tests which have been engineered into the Policy, along with the continued expectation of Committee override and discretion, give the Committee some reassurance that a degree of future proofing has been built in.

IN YOUR OPINION, WHAT MAKES AN EFFECTIVE REMUNERATION COMMITTEE TO SUPPORT THE BOARD?

The Remuneration Committee’s role is to ask the right questions, get comfortable the Committee has engaged with the right stakeholders and listened to them properly to give the Board assurance that the proposals the Committee put forward are right for the Group. Composition of the Committee is important and it has a mix of male and female Non-Executive Directors with a wealth of financial and non-financial, executive and non-executive experience to bring to the table. Importantly, all Committee members also have a good understanding of what factors, both internal and external, have an impact on remuneration.

BOARD OVERSIGHT:

OPERATIONAL RESILIENCE

The Board believes that operational resilience has become ever more important: maintaining the Group’s most important services for the Group’s customers and the market in which the Group operates is critical and requires ongoing focus as the Group becomes more reliant on technology against a changing threat landscape.

Operational Resilience receives significant attention from the Board, primarily through the Board Risk Committee. The Board approves the list of the Group’s most important business services annually, reviews a suite of operational resilience Board Risk Appetite Metrics on at least a quarterly basis and the operational resilience risk profile monthly, as it represents one of the Group’s most important non-financial risks. Please see page 166 for a summary of operational resilience matters considered by the Board Risk Committee.

The Board also approved, and receives regular updates from the Group Chief Operating Officer, on progress against the Group’s Operational Resilience strategy, and the operational resilience investment programmes that are delivering the strategy.

BOARD OVERSIGHT:

TRANSFORMATION

The Board is responsible for the overall strategic direction of the Group and has been engaged with the Group’s strategy to transform its business for success in a digital world through multiple touchpoints throughout the year. These have included:

 the annual cycle of two strategy away days to debate priorities and agree implementation plans

 a suite of formal Board metrics and qualitative reporting to monitor progress and risks

 Deep dives sessions on key areas (see pages 147 and 148 for more information);

 Customer insight sessions with workstream teams in research labs and other locations (see page 154 for more information)

 a range of informal interactions to feel the pulse.

These touchpoints enable the Board to oversee the Group’s transformation strategy, continually challenge and develop that strategy and take informed decisions on the critical issues relating to the Group’s strategy.

150

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

How the Board workscontinued

GROUP STRUCTURE AND
RING-FENCING GOVERNANCE
ARRANGEMENTS

From 1 January 2019 UK legislation requires large UK banks to separate personal banking services such as current and savings accounts from riskier activities, such as investment banking, in other parts of their business. This is called ring-fencing. The Group has established a Group structure and governance arrangements which are appropriate for the Group and meet the regulatory requirements. Lloyds Bank plc and Bank of Scotland plc are the banks, within the Group, which have been included within the ring-fence (together, the ‘Ring-Fenced Banks’). The governance structure focuses on ensuring:

 Independent decision making by the Ring-Fenced Bank Boards – on any matters where there might be a conflict between the interests of the Ring-Fenced Banks and the interests of another part of the Group

 Risks affecting the Ring-Fenced Banks are considered and managed from the Ring-Fenced Banks’ perspective – including maintenance of the capital adequacy and liquidity of the Ring-Fenced Banks

 Clear and effective governance at both Ring-Fenced Bank and Lloyds Banking Group plc level – including second and third lines of defence in respect of risk management

GROUP STRUCTURE

The subsidiaries of the Group are structured into the following sub-groups under Lloyds Banking Group plc providing effective governance for the business undertaken in each sub group:

 ‘Ring-Fenced Banks sub-group’ containing Lloyds Bank plc and Bank of Scotland plc (including the Halifax and MBNA businesses), serving both their UK personal and commercial customers

 ‘Non Ring-Fenced bank sub-group’ - Lloyds Bank Corporate Markets plc (LBCM) - which provides products and services to Group customers that are not allowed within the ring-fence as well as serving Financial Service customers and holding the Group’s subsidiaries and branches outside the UK

 ‘Insurance sub-group’ under Scottish Widows Group Limited (including Scottish Widows Limited)

 ‘Equity sub-group’ under LBG Equity Investments Limited, for which the principal subsidiary is Lloyds Development Capital Limited

BOARD STRUCTURES

Since the Ring-Fenced Banks represent the core banking activity of the Group, all of the Directors of Lloyds Banking Group plc also sit on the Boards of the Ring-Fenced Banks, which are chaired by the Group Chairman. The ring-fencing governance structures have been operating since 1 January 2019. The Group Chief Executive is also Chief Executive of the Ring Fenced Banks. In addition, the Ring-Fenced Bank Boards have three additional independent Non-Executive Directors. These Ring-Fenced Bank only directors are independent of the management and the rest of the Group and play a critical role in the governance structure, with an enhanced role in managing any potential conflicts between the Ring-Fenced Banks and the Group. One of the Directors, Nigel Hinshelwood, acts as Senior Independent Director of the Ring-Fenced Banks and also chairs the cross-Group Information Technology and Cyber Security Advisory Forum.

Lloyds Bank Corporate Markets has its own Board as a separately constituted and regulated banking subsidiary, chaired by a Non-Executive Group Board Member – Lord Lupton – and with its own independent non-executive directors. Scottish Widows Group, which is regulated as an insurance group, similarly has its own Board with independent Non-Executive Directors, and is chaired by a Group Non-Executive Director – Nick Prettejohn. The Chief Executives and Functional Heads of these businesses have reporting lines to the Group executives, and the Group Board receives regular updates on their strategic development and performance.

ANTÓNIO HORTA-OSÓRIO VISITS GLASGOW

Group Chief Executive António Horta-Osório undertook a number of visits throughout the UK in 2019. During his regional visit to Glasgow in October 2019, António took the opportunity to spend time with Group teams and customers, including holding a town hall, a recognition dinner to celebrate colleagues and all they are doing to Help Britain Prosper and embody the Group’s values and a business breakfast with local Small and Medium-sized Enterprise and Corporate clients.

Across the two days António heard directly from colleagues about their work and their successes, passion, drive and commitment to improve the business for the benefit of customers and the Group.

Whilst meeting the Connect and Resolve teams in the Group’s Atlantic Quay building, António listened in to customer calls with the teams who support Schroders Personal Wealth and handle credit disputes. He also watched mobile messaging interactions with customers, seeing and hearing first-hand how

the Group is meeting its customers’ needs through a range of channels and products. This experience was part of the Reconnecting with Customers pilot programme, launched in July 2019 to bring senior leaders across the Group closer to customers and customer-facing teams.

The Credit Disputes team shared with António the success it has had in improving the customer journey for credit card disputes. António was able to see the difference this transformation has made for customers by dialling into a live credit dispute call.

151

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Assessing the Board’s effectiveness

BOARD EVALUATION

HOW THE BOARD PERFORMS AND IS EVALUATED

The annual evaluation, which is facilitated externally at least once every three years, provides an opportunity to consider ways of identifying greater efficiencies, maximising strengths and highlighting areas of further development to enable the Board continuously to improve its own performance and the performance of the Group.

 

The Chairman of the Board, leads the annual review of the Board’s effectiveness and that of its Committees and individual Directors with the support of the Nomination and Governance Committee, leads the Board in considering and responding to the annual review of the Board’s effectiveness, which he also chairs. The annualincludes a review of its Committees and individual Directors. Performance evaluation of the Chairman is facilitated externally at least once every three years.carried out by the Non-Executive Directors, led by the Senior Independent Director, taking into

account the views of the Executive Directors.

 

2016The Board is in the second year of its three year evaluation cycle. An external evaluation was conducted in 2018, facilitated by EgonZehnder¹, an external board review specialist, with an internal evaluation having been carried out in respect of 2019. The current expectation is that the 2020 evaluation will be conducted internally.

2019 EVALUATION OF THE BOARD’S PERFORMANCE

The 20162019 evaluation was conducted internally between November 2016October 2019 and December 2016January 2020 by the Company Secretary, and was overseen by the Nomination and Governance Committee.

 

The 20162019 review sought the Directors’ views on a range of topics including: strategy; planning and performance; risk and control; Board composition and size; balance of skills,

experience and experience;knowledge; diversity; cultureculture; how members work together, and dynamics;with executive management, to achieve objectives; the Board’s calendar and agenda; the quality and timeliness of information; and support for Directors and Committees. The topics were selected by the Company Secretary and the Chairman of the Nomination and Governance Committee as being the most pertinent when considering the Board’s effectiveness.

 

If Directors have concerns about the Company or a proposed action which cannot be resolved, it istheir concerns are recorded in the Board minutes. Also on resignation, Non-Executive Directors are encouraged to provide a written statement of any concerns to the Chairman, for circulation to the Board. No such concerns were raised in 20162019 and up to the date of the annualthis report.

 

INTERNAL EVALUATION PROCESS

Anthony Watson, Senior IndependentOCTOBER 2019

Detailed questionnaire issued to all Directors by the Company Secretary

OCTOBER 2019 TO JANUARY 2020

Individual meetings held between each Director is dueand the Company Secretary to retirediscuss responses and opportunity for Directors to raise any other matters concerning the Board or its Committees.

DECEMBER 2019 TO JANUARY 2020

Report prepared by the Company Secretary based on the questionnaire results and matters raised in individual meetings.

JANUARY 2020

Draft report discussed by the Company Secretary with the Chairman.

Final report discussed at the 2017 AGM. At the timea meeting of the 2017 AGM, he will have served onBoard, following its consideration by the Nomination and Governance Committee.

APRIL 2020

Actions to be recommended to the Board for more than eight yearsby the Nomination and therefore,Governance Committee to reflect the Board discussion in compliance with the Code, his review was particularly rigorous.January.

 

OUTCOME OF 2016 BOARD EFFECTIVENESSSubsequently the Board will consider the recommendations and agree an action plan.

HIGHLIGHTS FROM THE 2019 REVIEW

 

The reviewsevaluation concluded that the performance of the Board, its Committees, the Chairman and each of the Directors continues to be effective. All Directors demonstrated commitment to their roles.roles and contributed effectively. The Board is also regarded as very able, collegiate and well-run, with an open and supportive culture and strong governance relating to risks and controls.

 

Many Directors commented favourably onThe key findings and areas for consideration include the performancefollowing:

FindingsAreas for consideration
 

  Ring-fencing governance requirements, with an increased number of participants at the Board, require individual Directors and the Chairman and Committee Chairmen to manage meetings, to ensure all Directors are able to contribute fully and effectively.

  Whilst ring-fencing governance has been embedded successfully, it is important to streamline governance processes further and ensure the Board’s and its Committees’ time is used to best effect.

  The Board’s detailed engagement in the formulation of strategy is seen as a whole, describing it as hardworking, collegiate, questioningkey strength, with the strategy away days playing an important role in this.

  Continue to increase time allowed in Board meetings for expansive discussion of broader strategic issues and highly engaged. Developments during 2016, includingthemes.

  Board deep dives into particular topics and the continued use of deep dives,more informal Board sessions to facilitate greater depth of discussion continue to be appreciated.

  Whilst the establishmentquality of sub-committeesBoard papers was seen to have improved, there remain concerns about the length of Board papers and the inclusion of unnecessary detail.

  Board and Committee papers to be shorter in length and the amount of time spent in Board meetings on presentations to be reduced, to allow more time for open discussion and debate.

1At the time of the 2018 review EgonZehnder provided certain Board Risk Committee and senior management level services from time to time, including in respect of succession planning as detailed on page 67 of the Cyber Security Advisory Panel have generally been welcomed2018 Annual Report and Directors have commentedAccounts, otherwise EgonZehnder had no other connection with the Group.
152

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

How the Board workscontinued

PROGRESS AGAINST THE 2018 EXTERNAL BOARD EFFECTIVENESS REVIEW
During the year, work focused particularly on the high quality of debate within the Board. Highlights mentioned by several Directors were the strategy offsite in June and governance of the acquisition of the MBNA UK consumer credit card business, where the Board was highly engaged in oversight and challenge of the acquisition process. Directors also spoke highly of the work done by the Chairman and the Chairs of the Committees in structuring agendasbecoming more outwardly focused and ensuring that business is covered at the meetings.

RECOMMENDATIONS FROM THE 2016 BOARD EFFECTIVENESS REVIEW (INTERNAL)

The review identified a number of actions to maintainBoard agenda was less rooted in regulatory compliance and improve the Board’s effectiveness.

Volume of Board/Committee papers

The most common observation by Directors concerned the volume of information which they received. Directors would like to receive more concise reports with clearer signposting of the key issues.

160

corporate governance

Links to strategy

Several Directors said they would welcome more frequent linkage to strategy in the regular business of the Board.

Conduct of Board/Committees

Several Directors said that they would value more time in agendas for discussion, while recognising the pressures on meeting time.

2016 EVALUATION PROCESS
Step 1 Detailed questionnaire completed by each Director
Step 2 Individual meetings held between each Director and the Company Secretary
Step 3 Evaluation of the findings by the Company Secretary and report prepared
Step 4 Draft conclusions discussed by the Company Secretary with the Chairman
Step 5 Discussion of the Company Secretary’s report and draft conclusions and actions agreed
Chairman’s evaluation
The Senior Independent Director carried out the evaluation of the Chairman’s performance using a questionnaire and individual meetings with Directors other than the Chairman. The outcome of the evaluation of the Chairman’s performance was discussed by the Directors in the absence of the Chairman.

2015 BOARD EFFECTIVENESS REVIEW (EXTERNAL)

In accordance with the three year cycle, the 2015 evaluation was facilitated externally by JCA Group between October 2015 and January 2016. The review was commissioned by the Chairman, assisted by the Company Secretary and overseen by the Nomination and Governance Committee.risk mitigation. A summary of the Board’s progress against the actions arising from the 20152018 effectiveness review are set out below.

Recommendations from the 2018 evaluationActions taken during 2019

  Board agenda to become less rooted in regulatory compliance and risk mitigation.

 

Recommendations

  Board to become more outwardly focused.

  Added 30 minutes ‘free agenda’ discussion time to Board meetings

  June strategy session updated views of external environment (customer, technology, competition, society) to prepare for 2020 discussions on GSR4

  Executive Director performance reports continue to evolve towards flagging issues and priorities

  Regular competition reports to include more on the activities of new competitors

  Chairman to continue moving focus of agenda to give more time to business discussions

  Ensure size of Board and large attendance at Committee meetings does not inhibit debate

  Requirement for Board and Committee Chairmen to be more directive when required

  Commitments by individual Directors to self-discipline contributions

  Continued use of informal sessions to air issues that need more discussion

  Further streamline meeting papers and agendas to enable more expansive discussion

  Continued to streamline length and time spent on ‘taken as read’ reports

  Further development and simplification of GSR3 reporting

  Continue to evolve Board skills and diversity

  Chairman continued to share succession timetables and skills matrix for discussion in Nomination and Governance Committee and wider Board

  Reviewed wording of Board diversity objective during 2019

 

  Look at ways to better leverage individual Non-Executive Director skills and experience

  Chairman discussed and agreed potential focus areas with Non-Executive Directors during regular performance reviews

  Individual Non-Executive Directors encouraged to communicate topics they are engaging with to other Non-Executive Directors

 Actions taken/progress

STRATEGY

  

– Continue to focus on strategy, with particular attention to the longer term horizon and the impact of the changing technology and competitive landscape

– 2016 strategy offsite focused on reviewing future environment and business model

– Regular Board deep dives and discussion topics related to digital disruption and strategic development held during the year

SUCCESSION PLANNING

– Maintain a proactive approach to succession planning for Executive and Non-Executive Directors and for senior management

 

 

– Non-Executive Director discussion on Executive succession carried out

– Non-Executive Directors are informed about and able to input on Group Chief Executive succession planning

– Chairman and Nomination and Governance Committee continued to review Non-Executive Director profile and succession

BOARD INFORMATION

– Continue the progress made in 2015 in ensuring that information provided to the Board and its Committees is clear, concise, relevant and focused

– Review and continue to evolve metrics used to assess business performance to ensure that they provide an appropriate level of detail and insight for the Board

– Continued progress on reducing unnecessary material and presentations

– Revised Board template and guidance in place

– Regular reporting on business performance has continued to develop in response to Board feedback

LORD BLACKWELL’S VISIT TO BIRMINGHAM

 

INTERNAL CONTROL

 

As part of his programme of regional visits, Lord Blackwell spent time in Birmingham in September. He met colleagues from Lloyds Bank and Halifax branches, as well as spending time with colleagues from Brindley Place.

Lord Blackwell took part in the branch team talk with colleagues from the Lloyds Bank Branch. Topics covered the Group’s joint venture with Schroders Personal Wealth, customer referrals and supporting local communities. There were questions for Lord Blackwell covering the economic environment, digital technology, the Group’s brands and its branch network.

Lord Blackwell was joined all day on this visit by Kendall Akhurst, a colleague from Group Transformation. As a strong advocate for, and member of, the Group’s Access network, which supports colleagues with disabilities, Kendall was particularly interested in the visit to the Birmingham Disability Resource Centre (BDRC). The BDRC is one of the many charities the Group supports through its charitable Foundations and provides support for people with all kinds of disabilities. Lord Blackwell spent time hearing about the wide range of support BDRC has received from the Group and also from people who use the centre and their experience of the Journey to Work scheme, which aims to help people turn their lives around by building up their confidence and self-esteem to get back into work.

After the branch and charity visits, Lord Blackwell moved to Brindley Place where he hosted a recognition lunch for around 20 colleagues from Group Client Information Office and Commercial, discussing their successes and also what challenges they

might be facing. He then spent time with teams from within those divisions and heard about work to investigate suspicious activity reports raised from branches, the cash management and payments model office, the automation journey for payments, including demonstrations of robotics and also how the Group is supporting business clients through their trade journey.

The visit continued with a Town Hall session for around 80 colleagues at which Lord Blackwell invited questions and answered a wide variety of questions covering topics such as resilience for colleagues and the Group, his own mentors and inspirations, the branch network, EU exit and leadership styles and skills.

The visit ended with a recognition dinner for 25 colleagues to celebrate how they have truly lived the Group’s values and what they have done to embody the Group’s purpose of Helping Britain Prosper.

153

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Internal control

BOARD RESPONSIBILITY

 

The Board is responsible for the Group’s risk management and internal control systems, which are designed to facilitate effective and efficient operations and to ensure the quality of internal and external reporting and compliance with applicable laws and regulations. The Directors and senior management are committed to maintaining a robust control framework as the foundation for the delivery of effective risk management. The Directors acknowledge their responsibilities in relation to the Group’s risk management and internal control systems and for reviewing their effectiveness.

 

In establishing and reviewing the risk management and internal control systems, the Directors carried out a robust assessment of the emerging and principal risks facing the Company,company, including those that would threaten its business model, future performance, solvency or liquidity and reputation, the likelihood of a risk event occurring and the costs of control. The process for identification, evaluation and management of the emerging and principal risks faced by the Group is integrated into the Group’s overall framework for risk governance. The Group is forward-looking in its risk identification processes to ensure emerging risks are identified. The risk identification, evaluation and management process also identifies whether the controls in place result in an acceptable level of risk. At Group level, a consolidated risk report and risk appetite dashboard are reviewed and regularly debated by the Executive Group Risk Committee, Board Risk Committee and the Board to ensure that they are satisfied with the overall risk profile, risk accountabilities and

mitigating actions. The report and dashboard provide a monthly view of the Group’s overall risk profile, key risks and management actions, together with performance against risk appetite and an assessment of emerging risks which could affect the Group’s performance over the life of the operating plan. Information regarding the main features of the internal control and risk management systems in relation to the financial reporting process is provided within the risk management report on pages 3841 to 59.108. The Board concluded that the Group’s risk management arrangements are adequate to provide assurance that the risk management systems put in place are suitable with regard to the Group’s profile and strategy.

161

corporate governance

 

CONTROL EFFECTIVENESS REVIEW

 

An annual control effectiveness review (CER) is undertaken to evaluate the effectiveness of the Group’s control framework with regard to its material risks, and to ensure management actions are in place to address key gaps or weaknesses in the control framework. Business areas and head office functions assess the controls in place to address all material risk exposures across all risk types. The CER considers all material controls, including financial, operational and compliance controls. Senior management complete an attestation to confirmapprove the CER findings which are reviewed and independently challenged by the Risk Division and Group Internal Audit and reported to the Board. Action plans are implemented to address any control deficiencies.

 

REVIEWS BY THE BOARD

 

The effectiveness of the risk management and internal control systems is reviewed regularly by the Board and the Audit Committee, which also receives reports of reviews undertaken by the Risk Division and Group Internal Audit. The Audit Committee receives reports from the Company’s auditor, PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (which include details of significant internal control matters that they have identified), and has a discussion with the auditor at least once a year without executives present, to ensure that there are no unresolved issues of concern.

 

The Group’s risk management and internal control systems are regularly reviewed by the Board and are consistent with the Guidance on Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Financial and Business Reporting issued by the Financial Reporting Council and compliant with the requirements of CRD IV. They have been in place for the year under review and up to the date of the approval of the annual report. The Group has determined a pathway to compliance with BCBS 239 risk data aggregation and risk reporting requirements and continues to actively manage enhancements.

 

LORD BLACKWELL AND NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR VISITS TO CUSTOMER INSIGHT SESSIONS

CONCLUSIONLord Blackwell and a number of Non-Executive Directors attended multiple Customer Insight sessions during 2019.

 

Our Controls Frameworks are continuously improved and enhanced, addressing known issues and keepingThe Group’s customers’ world is changing at pace so it is important to stay in touch with the dynamic environment. Progress continuesreality of customers’ daily lives, their changing needs and priorities.

Customer insight sessions are held monthly in research labs and other locations across the

country to be made in IT, Cyber,hear directly from customers about their lives and Financial Crime.what is important to them. The 2016 CER assessment provides reasonable assurance thatdiscussions cover topics such as life priorities and money management providing a rich insight into evolving needs, attitudes and behaviours.

This insight is a valuable input into understanding how customers’ lives are evolving to help develop the Group’s controls are effective or that where control weaknesses are identified,strategic direction.

The Chairman and Non-Executive Directors were impressed by customers’ openness and willingness to share their views. The sessions they are subject to management oversightattended gave a deep insight into customers’ lives and action plans. The Audit Committee, in conjunctionneeds and their ideas on how a bank can provide a leading customer experience.
154

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Complying with the UK Corporate Governance Code 2018

The UK Corporate Governance Code 2018 (the ‘Code’) applied to the financial year ended 31 December 2019. The Group confirms that it applied the main principles and complied with all the provisions of the Code throughout the year except in relation to that part of provision 36 that provides that the remuneration committee should develop a formal policy for post-employment shareholding requirements encompassing both unvested and vested shares. Whilst the Remuneration Committee has not introduced a formal post-employment shareholding policy, the existing reward structure ensures that Executive Directors will continue to meet the Group’s shareholding requirements for a minimum of two years after leaving the Group. On this basis, the Group believes that it already complies with best practice and with the spirit of provision 36 notwithstanding the fact that a specific formal policy has not been introduced. Please refer to pages 119 and 127 for a more detailed explanation of the Group’s approach to post-employment shareholding requirements.

The Code is publicly available at www.frc.org.uk. This page and the following page explain how the Group has applied the principles and related provisions of the Code during the year. The alphabetical references in the paragraphs below correspond to the principles, and related provisions, of the Code.

The Group has adopted the UK Finance Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure and its 2019 financial statements have been prepared in compliance with its principles.

1. Board Leadership and Company Purpose

 IndependentResponsibilities
Chairman
Lord Blackwell
Lord Blackwell leads the Board Risk Committee, concluded thatand promotes the assessment process washighest standards of corporate governance. He leads in building an effective and recommended themcomplementary Board, and sets the Board’s agenda. The Chairman also leads Board succession planning and ensures effective communication with shareholders.
Executive Directors Group Chief Executive
António Horta-Osório
António Horta-Osório manages and leads the Group on a day-to-day basis, making decisions on matters affecting the operation and performance of the Group’s business and the delivery of the Board’s approved strategy. He delegates aspects of his authority, as permitted under the Corporate Governance Framework, to other members of the Group Executive Committee.
Chief Financial Officer
William Chalmers1
Under the leadership of the Group Chief Executive, William Chalmers, who joined the Board during the year, and Juan Colombás make and implement decisions in all matters affecting operations, performance and strategy. They provide specialist knowledge and experience to the Board. Together with António Horta-Osório, William Chalmers and Juan Colombás design, develop and implement strategic plans and deal with day-to-day operations of the Group.
Chief Operating Officer
Juan Colombás
Non-Executive Directors
Deputy Chairman
Anita Frew
As Deputy Chairman, Anita Frew supports the Chairman in representing the Board and acts as a spokesperson for the Group. She deputises for the Chairman and is available to the Board for approval.

consultation and advice. The Deputy Chairman may also represent the Group’s interests to official enquiries and review bodies. Having spent nine years on the Board, Anita will retire at the forthcoming AGM. Anita’s independence up to the point of her retirement is confirmed on page 156.
Senior Independent Director
Alan Dickinson
As Senior Independent Director, Alan Dickinson is a sounding board for the Chairman and Group Chief Executive. He acts as a conduit for the views of other Non-Executive Directors and conducts the Chairman’s annual performance appraisal. He is available to help resolve shareholders’ concerns and attends meetings with major shareholders and financial analysts to understand issues and concerns.
Simon Henry

 

REMUNERATIONThe Non-Executive Directors challenge management constructively and help develop and set the Group’s strategy. They actively participate in Board decision-making and scrutinise management performance.

 

The statement byNon-Executive Directors satisfy themselves on the Chairmanintegrity of financial information and review the Group’s risk exposures and controls. The Non-Executive Directors, through the Remuneration Committee, also determine the Directors’ Remuneration policy and the Directors’ Remuneration Implementation Report are set out on pages 120 to 151.remuneration of Executive Directors.

 

SPOTLIGHT ON SUBSIDIARY GOVERNANCE

The Group conducts the majority of its business through a number of subsidiary entities. The Corporate Governance Framework sets out minimum governance standards and a subsidiary directors’ handbook sets out detailed guidance on the role and responsibilities of a subsidiary director.

An annual certification process, at individual entity level, of compliance with the minimum governance standards set out in the Corporate Governance Framework enhances management of any legal, regulatory and reputational risks associated with the Group’s subsidiary entities. The process provides GEC members with additional oversight of subsidiary entities within their respective

business area, including an escalation process for any matters of non-compliance. In addition, the process provides continued focus on simplification of the Group’s legal entity structure through consideration of the lifecycle of each entity.

Scottish Widows Group Limited

The Board of the Group’s insurance subsidiary, Scottish Widows Group Limited, which also sits as the Board of its major subsidiaries, is chaired by a Non-Executive member of the Lloyds Banking Group Board and contains a balance of independent Non-Executive Directors, Group executives (serving as Non-Executives) and Insurance Division executives. This composition supports its legal and regulatory requirements for independent decision making within the overall framework of Group policies and controls.

Sarah Legg2
Lord Lupton
Amanda Mackenzie
Nick Prettejohn
Stuart Sinclair
Sara Weller
Group Company Secretary
Kate Cheetham
Kate Cheetham was appointed Group Company Secretary during the course of the year, and in this role advises the Board on matters relating to governance, ensuring good information flows and comprehensive practical support is provided to Directors. She maintains the Group’s Corporate Governance Framework and organises Directors’ induction and training. The Company Secretary also communicates with shareholders as appropriate and ensures due regard is paid to their interests. Both the appointment and removal of the Group Company Secretary is a matter for the Board as a whole.

 

1William Chalmers joined the Board with effect from 1 August 2019.
2Sarah Legg joined the Board with effect from 1 December 2019.

A.The Group is led by an effective, committed Board, which is collectively responsible for the long-term, sustainable success of the Group, ensuring due regard is paid to the interests of the Group’s stakeholders, with its effectiveness assessed with an annual Board effectiveness review, discussed further on page 152 to 153. The Group’s Corporate Governance Framework, which is reviewed annually by the Board, sets out the key decisions and matters reserved for the Board’s approval, which includes matters relating to the Group’s long-term strategy and priorities. Further details of the Corporate Governance Framework can be found online at www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/our-group/corporate-governance, and on page 146.

B.The Board assumes responsibility for establishing the purpose of the Company, setting its strategy, establishing its culture, and determining the values to be observed in achieving that strategy. Central to this is the Company’s role as a trusted and responsible business, with the Board’s Responsible Business Committee overseeing the Group’s ambitions in this regard. The Group’s approach to acting as a responsible business is discussed in the report of the Responsible Business Committee on page 168.

C.The Board retains ultimate responsibility for ensuring adequate resource is available to meet agreed objectives and strategy, and ensures such resources are responsibly and effectively deployed. The effective management of risk is central to the Company’s strategy, supported by the Group’s enterprise risk management framework, as discussed in the risk management report on pages 41 to 108.

D.The Board recognises that engaging with and acting on the needs of the Group’s stakeholders is key to achieving the strategy and long-term objectives of the Company.

155

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

E.All policy and practice relating to Group colleagues is developed and implemented in a way which is consistent with the Group’s purpose and values, with the Board receiving regular updates on matters relevant to colleagues. The Board has appointed Anita Frew as its whistleblowing champion, with responsibility for overseeing the integrity, independence and effectiveness of the Group’s whistleblowing procedures. In addition, the Audit Committee reviews reports on whistleblowing to ensure there are arrangements in place which colleagues can use in confidence to report relevant concerns, as discussed on page 163 and reports on such review to the Board.

2. Division of Responsibilities

F.The Chairman has overall responsibility for the leadership of the Board and for ensuring its effectiveness in all aspects of its operation. The responsibilities of the Chairman in this regard are formalised within the Corporate Governance Framework. Lord Blackwell was independent on appointment.

G.The balance of skills, experience, independence and knowledge on the Board is the responsibility of the Nomination and Governance Committee, and is reviewed annually or whenever appointments are considered. Having the right balance of skills and experience helps to ensure Directors discharge their duties effectively. The Nomination and Governance Committee monitors whether there are any relationships or circumstances which may affect a Director’s independence. Following the most recent review of independence, the Committee concluded that all Non-Executive Directors are independent in character and judgement, as shown on page 157. As of 1 December 2019, Anita Frew had spent 9 years on the Board and will retire at the AGM in May. In relation to the period from 1 December 2019, being the ninth anniversary of Anita’s appointment to the Board, to her retirement at the AGM in May, the Board considered and agreed that the period beyond nine years as a director did not impact on Anita’s level of independence or the effectiveness of her contributions and her continuing treatment as an independent Non-Executive Director of the Company for that period. The decision was based on a number of factors including consideration of Anita’s interests outside the Group and the continued challenge and oversight Anita provides in the role, whilst noting the benefits of enabling the phased transition of responsibilities to other Non-Executive Directors during this short period. More information on the annual Board effectiveness review can be found on pages 152 to 153 and information on the Board Diversity Policy can be found on page 158.

H.Non-Executive Directors are advised of time commitments prior to their appointment and are required to devote such time as is necessary to discharge their duties effectively. The time commitments of the Directors are considered by the Board on appointment and annually thereafter, and, following the most recent review, the Board is satisfied there are no directors whose time commitments are considered to be a matter for concern. External appointments, which may affect existing time commitments relevant to the Board, must be agreed with the Chairman, and prior Board approval must be obtained before taking on any new external appointments. The Board has not approved any significant external commitments during 2019. No Executive Director has taken up more than one Non-Executive Director role at a FTSE100 company or taken up the chairmanship of such a company. More information on Directors’ attendance at meetings can be found on page 145.

I.The Chairman, supported by the Group Company Secretary, ensures that Board members receive appropriate and timely information. The Group provides access, at its expense, to the services of independent professional advisers in order to assist Directors in their role. Board Committees are also provided with sufficient resources to discharge their duties.

3. Composition, Succession and Evaluation

J.The process for Board appointments is led by the Nomination and Governance Committee, which makes recommendations to the Board. A combination of open advertising and an external search consultancy is used for the appointment of the Chairman and Non-Executive Directors. More details about succession planning can be found on page 157 and 159. More information about the work of the Nomination and Governance Committee can be found on pages 157 to 159.

K.The Chairman leads the training and development of Directors and the Board regularly reviews and agrees with each Director their individual and combined training and development needs. The Chairman personally ensures that on appointment each Director receives a full, formal and tailored induction. The emphasis is on ensuring the induction brings the business and its issues alive, taking account of the specific role

the Director has been appointed to fulfil and their skills and experience to date. Directors who take on or change roles during the year attend induction meetings in respect of those new roles. The Group Company Secretary maintains a training and development log for each Director.

At the 2020 AGM all Directors will seek re-election or election save for Anita Frew, who will be stepping down at the 2020 AGM. Being the first AGM since their respective appointments, William Chalmers and Sarah Legg will stand for election, together with Catherine Woods, who, as announced in October 2019, will join the Board on 1 March 2020. The Board believes that all Directors continue to be effective and committed to their roles.

L.An internally facilitated Board evaluation was completed in 2019, with an externally facilitated evaluation having taken place in 2018. Individual evaluation is carried out by the Chairman on behalf of the Board. Performance evaluation of the Chairman is carried out by the Non-Executive Directors, led by the Senior Independent Director, taking into account the views of the Executive Directors. More information on the Board effectiveness review can be found on pages 152 to 153, along with the findings, actions, and progress made during the year.

4. Audit, Risk and Internal Control

M.The Board has delegated a number of responsibilities to the Audit Committee, including oversight of financial reporting processes, the effectiveness of internal controls and the risk management framework, whistleblowing arrangements and the work undertaken by the external and internal auditors. The Audit Committee reports regularly to the Board on its activities, and its report for 2019, confirming how it has discharged its duties can be found on pages 160 to 163.

N.Requirements that the Annual Report is fair, balanced and understandable are considered throughout the drafting and reviewing process and the Board has concluded that the 2019 Annual Report meets this requirement. Related information on the Company’s business model and strategy can be found on pages 4 to 14.

O.The Board is responsible for the Group’s risk management and internal controls systems, including the determination of the nature and extent of risk the Company is willing to take. Risk is further managed through the Board approved Risk Control Framework, as discussed in the risk management report on pages 41 to 108. The Audit Committee assumes further responsibility for the effectiveness of internal controls, with the Board Risk Committee assuming responsibility for the review of the risk culture of the Group, ensuring the correct ‘tone from the top’ in respect of risk management.

5. Remuneration

P.The Group is committed to offering all colleagues a reward package that is competitive, performance-driven and fair and its Remuneration Policy is designed to promote the long-term and sustainable success of the Company. Compensation on pages 117 to 142 provides further details regarding the remuneration of Directors. The current Remuneration Policy can be found in the 2016 Annual Report and Accounts and remains unchanged since last approved by shareholders at the 2017 AGM. A new Remuneration Policy will be proposed for approval by shareholders at the 2020 AGM.

Q.The Remuneration Committee seeks to ensure all remuneration policy, including that relevant to executive remuneration, is fair and transparent. The work of the Remuneration Committee during the year, including its review of the Remuneration Policy, is discussed further in its report on page 133.

R.The Remuneration Policy seeks to ensure all remuneration decisions made by Directors fully consider the wider circumstances as relevant to that decision, including, but not limited to, individual performance. The Remuneration Committee’s decision making in respect of remuneration outcomes is discussed further in Compensation on pages 117 to 142 which includes additional confirmation of the use of remuneration consultants, including where any such consultant has another connection to the Company.


156

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Nomination and Governance Committee report

Good succession planning and recognition of diversity is integral to maintaining a strong Board and supporting the development of the Executive population.

Lord Blackwell

Chairman, Nomination and Governance Committee

DEAR SHAREHOLDER RELATIONSHIPS

I am pleased to report on the activity of the Nomination and Governance Committee (the ‘Committee’) during 2019.

BOARD AND GEC CHANGES

As set out in my introduction to the Governance Report on page 144 there have been a number of changes to the Board and its Committees during the year, all of which have been overseen by the Committee.

During the year, the Committee undertook a thorough process to identify and assess candidates which resulted in the appointment of two new Group Non-Executive Directors: Sarah Legg was appointed to the Board on 1 December 2019 and Catherine Woods will join the Board on 1 March 2020. While selected on the basis of their strong banking experience and skills, these two appointments help meet the Group’s continuing commitment to gender diversity. Sarah’s appointment also supports our objective of BAME diversity. Details of the selection process can be found on page 159.

 

The Committee oversaw the planned transition of the Senior Independent Director role from Anita Frew to Alan Dickinson with effect from 1 December 2019, ahead of Anita’s planned retirement from the Board recognisesat the forthcoming AGM when Alan will also succeed her as Deputy Chairman. Alan’s breadth and values greatlydepth of experience make him ideally suited to the role of Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director.

Following the Group’s announcement in February 2019, William Chalmers joined the Board on 1 August 2019 as an Executive Director and Chief Finance Officer, succeeding George Culmer. As announced in October 2019, Juan Colombás plans to retire from the Group in July 2020, and I plan to retire as Group Chairman at or before the AGM in 2021, by which time I will have served 9 years on the Group Board. The Committee has initiated a search process for my successor under the leadership of the Senior Independent Director.

A number of changes have also been made to the membership of Board Committees during the year, reflecting Board changes and the ongoing review of Committee membership.

SUCCESSION PLANNING

As can be seen from these changes, the Committee continued to focus on succession planning at both a Board and Executive level, building on work undertaken in previous years.

The Committee continues to keep under review, on an ongoing basis, the structure, size and composition of the Board and its Committees, making recommendations to the Board as appropriate. Consideration was given to anticipated retirements from the Group Board over the next two years, together with the need to deliver a programmeensure the appropriate mix of engagement that offers all shareholders the opportunity to receive Company communicationsknowledge, skills and to share their views with the Board.experience, and diversity.

 

The Group has a diverse rangeAt an Executive level, the Committee considered the overall health of shareholders and investorsthe Executive talent pipeline, together with different communication and engagement needs which are addressed by specialist teams.detailed Executive succession planning aimed at supporting the development of executives for the Bank of the Future. Further detail on succession planning can be found on page 159.

 

The Group’s website enables access to documents and communications as soon as they are published, including a live webcast of the AGM. Recordings of webcasts and other analyst presentations are also available.BOARD EFFECTIVENESS AND TRAINING

 

RELATIONSHIPS WITH INSTITUTIONAL INVESTORS

Investor Relations has primary responsibility for managing and developing the Group’s external relationships with existing and potential institutional equity investors and analysts. With support from senior management, they achieved this through a combination of more than 1,100 meetings and various presentationsAs highlighted in 2016. The presentations were primarily aligned to results and included content on strategic progress and financial and operational performance.

In addition to this direct shareholder engagement, Investor Relations provides regular reportsmy introduction to the executive team andGovernance Report on page 144, an internal Board on key market issues and shareholder concerns.

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE MEETING WITH INSTITUTIONAL SHAREHOLDERS

In October 2016, the Chairman hosted a meeting with a number of large institutional shareholders focused on the Group’s corporate governance arrangements. Following an overview from the Chairman on the Group’s strategy and culture and Board governance, the shareholders heard from each of the Chairmen of the Audit, Board Risk, Remuneration and Responsible Business Committees and the Senior Independent Director. The meeting was also attendedeffectiveness review, undertaken by the Company Secretary, was overseen by the Committee. The Committee also considered, and recommended to the Board, actions arising from the previous externally facilitated review undertaken by Egon Zehnder. Full details are provided on pages 152 to 153.

Annually, as part of the Board effectiveness review, the Committee also undertakes a review of its own effectiveness. The findings of this review, which were considered by the Committee at its meeting in January 2020, found that the Committee had met its key objectives and carried out its responsibilities effectively.

The Committee also oversees training undertaken by the Non-Executive Directors. Learning and engagement opportunities have been undertaken by all Non-Executive Directors in relation to material aspects of the Group’s business.

INDEPENDENCE AND TIME COMMITMENTS

Based on its assessment for 2019, the Committee is satisfied that, throughout the year, all Non-Executive Directors remained independent1as to both character and judgement. The Committee, and the Board gave specific consideration to Anita Frew’s continuing independence as detailed on page 156.

In recommending Directors for re-election, the Committee reviews the performance of each Non-Executive Director and their ability to continue meeting the time commitments required, taking into consideration individual capabilities, skills and experiences and any relationships that have been disclosed. All Directors were considered to have appropriate roles.

THE GROUP’S CORPORATE GOVERNANCE FRAMEWORK

The annual review of the Corporate Governance Framework was undertaken during the year with the inclusion of further enhancements to the ring-fenced banking governance arrangements which came into effect on 1 January 2019, together with various other minor amendments, and updates to committee terms of reference.

As part of its broader governance responsibilities, the Committee also considered regular updates on developments in corporate governance, including the initiation of HM Treasury’s review of the financial services regulatory framework, provided ongoing oversight of the embedding of the ring-fenced banks’ governance structure and considered correspondence with shareholders.

UK CORPORATE GOVERNANCE CODE

As highlighted in last year’s report and referred to in the Governance Report, the Financial Reporting Council’s amended UK Corporate Governance Code (the ‘Code’), came into effect from 1 January 2019, with requirements relating to the annual report applicable to the report and accounts for the year ended 31 December 2019. The Group Investor Relations Director.applied the Code. The meetingGroup’s statement of

1The Chairman was structuredindependent on appointment in accordance with the Code. Following the Financial Reporting Council’s Guidance on Board Effectiveness, the Chairman is not subject to allow for an open dialogue and discussionthe Code’s independence test, other than on the matters of importance to institutional shareholders. Those in attendance were especially interested in hearing about the Group’s approach to becoming a more responsible business.

162appointment.
157

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

GOVERNANCE AND EXECUTIVE REMUNERATION

Lord Blackwell (Chairmancompliance with the Code and Chairmana summary of the Nomination and Governance Committee) and Anita Frew (Deputy Chairman and Chairmanrequirements of the Remuneration Committee) participated in meetingsCode can be found on pages 155 and discussions with investors and other stakeholders, including the Group’s regulators, regarding governance and the strategic direction of the Group. They also engaged with proxy advisors, regulators and shareholders on issues relating specifically to executive remuneration.156.

RELATIONSHIPS WITH RETAIL SHAREHOLDERS

The Company Secretary has a team dedicated to engage with retail shareholders who, with support from the Company’s registrar Equiniti Limited, deliver the Group’s shareholder service strategy, including the AGM. Group Secretariat provides feedback to the Board and appropriate Committees to ensure the views of retail shareholders are received and considered.

ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING 2016 AT A GLANCE

The AGM is an opportunity for shareholders to hear directly from the Board on the Group’s performance and strategic direction, and importantly, to ask questions.

nearly 200 shareholders represented
over 70 per cent of total voting rights voted
over 97 per cent of votes cast ‘in favour’ of the Directors’ Remuneration Report
all resolutions voted on by way of a poll

STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE

UK Corporate Governance Code - The UK Corporate Governance Code 2014 (the ‘Code’) applied to the 2016 financial year. The Group confirms that it applied the main principles and complied with all provisions of the Code throughout the year, and that it has applied the UK Corporate Governance Code 2016 since its financial year end. The Code is publicly available at www.frc.org.uk

The British Bankers’ Association Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure - The Group has adopted the British Bankers’ Association’s Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure and its 2016 financial statements have been prepared in compliance with its principles.


163

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

NOMINATION AND GOVERNANCE COMMITTEE REPORT

We are committed to the highest standards of corporate governance, designed to ensure rigour in the Board’s discussions and decision making

  Committee meetings 
      
  Eligible to attendAttended 
Committee Chairman     
Lord Blackwell 5 5 
Committee members who served during 2016     
Alan Dickinson 5 5 
Anita Frew 5 5 
Nick Luff1 5 4 
Anthony Watson 5 5 

1Mr Luff was unable to attend the February Committee meeting due to a prior commitment.

A key priority for the Committee, under my leadership, is to keep the composition of the Board and its Committees under review and to make appropriate recommendations to the Board. There were two changes to the Board in 2016. Stuart Sinclair joined the Board in January 2016 and Dyfrig John retired from the Board in May 2016. Stuart’s appointment followed that of Deborah McWhinney, who joined the Board in December 2015.

A number of Board changes have been agreed since the year end. Anthony Watson, our Senior Independent Director, will retire at the 2017 AGM after serving more than eight years on the Board, and Nick Luff, an independent Non-Executive Director and Chairman of the Audit Committee, has notified the Board that in light of his other commitments he does not intend to seek re-election at the 2017 AGM. On the Committee’s recommendation, the Board has appointed Anita Frew to succeed Anthony as Senior Independent Director, which she will combine with the role of Deputy Chairman. Anita’s significant board, financial and investment management experience, including as a Senior Independent Director, make her ideally suited to take on this role. On the Committee’s

recommendation, the Board has appointed Simon Henry to succeed Nick as Chairman of the Audit Committee. Simon has been a member of the Audit Committee since June 2014 and his background and experience enable him to fulfil the role of Audit Committee Chairman and for SEC purposes the role of Audit Committee financial expert.

The Committee will continue to keep under review the structure, size and composition of the Board and its Committees and to make appropriate recommendations to the Board.

Another important role for the Committee is ensuring the adequacy of succession planning, including contingency arrangements, both for Board appointments and key senior management roles. An in-depth review was conducted during the year of the Group’s talent management approach and succession pipeline and this will continue to be a focus during 2017.

Lord Blackwell

Chairman, Nomination and Governance Committee

 

COMMITTEE PURPOSE AND RESPONSIBILITIES

 

The purpose of the Committee is to keep the Board’s governance, composition, skills, experience, knowledge, independence and succession arrangements under review and to make appropriate recommendations to the Board to ensure the Company’s arrangements are consistent with the highest corporate governance standards.

 

The Committee reports to the Board on how it discharges its responsibilities and makes recommendations to the Board, all of which have been accepted during the year. The Committee’s terms of reference can be found at www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/our-group/corporate-governancecorporate-governance.

 

COMMITTEE COMPOSITION, SKILLS AND EXPERIENCE

 

To ensure a broad representation of experienced and independent Directors, membership of the Committee comprises the Chairman, the Deputy Chairman, who is also the Chairman of the Board Risk Committee (and Senior Independent Director since December 2019), the Chairman of the Group’s Insurance Subsidiary, and the Chairman of the Responsible Business Committee. In addition, as announced on 25 November 2019, Stuart Sinclair, Chairman of the Remuneration Committee, the Senior Independent Director, the Chairmanwas appointed as a member of the Audit Committee and the Chairman of the Risk Committee. with effect from 1 December 2019.

The Group Chief Executive attends meetings as appropriate. Details of Committee memberships and meeting attendance can be found on page 145.

 

ANNUAL EFFECTIVENESS REVIEWLord Blackwell

Chairman, Nomination and
Governance Committee

During the year, the Committee met its key objectives and carried out its responsibilities effectively, as confirmed by the annual effectiveness review.

HOW COMMITTEE MEETINGS ARE RUNTHE BOARD DIVERSITY POLICY

 

The managementBoard Diversity Policy (the ‘Policy’) sets out the Board of Lloyds Banking Group’s approach to diversity and provides a high level indication of the CommitteeBoard’s approach to diversity in senior management roles which is governed in keeping withgreater detail through the basisGroup’s policies. The Board places great emphasis on which meetingsensuring that its membership reflects diversity in its broadest sense. Consideration is given to the combination of demographics, skills, experience, race, age, gender, educational and professional background and other relevant personal attributes on the Board to provide the range of perspectives, insights and challenge needed to support good decision making.

New appointments are made on merit, taking account of the Board are managed, as detailed on page 155. Its structure facilitates open discussionspecific skills and debate, with steps takenexperience, independence and knowledge needed to ensure adequate time for membersa rounded Board and the diversity benefits each candidate can bring to the overall Board composition.

As part of the Committeedecision to consider proposals which are put forward.appoint Sarah Legg and Catherine Woods to the Board, diversity was considered in its broadest sense. These appointments bring strong banking and asset management experience to the Group.

 

MATTERS CONSIDERED BY THE COMMITTEEObjectives for achieving Board diversity may be set on a regular basis. In April (and then again in January 2020) the Board considered and approved updates to aspirations set out in the Board Diversity Policy relating to gender diversity and the number of senior roles held by Black, Asian and Minority Ethnic (BAME) executives.

 

DuringOn gender diversity the yearBoard is committed to maintaining at least 3 female Board members and over time will expect female representation on the Committee consideredBoard to match the 40 per cent target that the Group has set for senior executives. Reflecting these aspirations, the Board will aim to meet the Hampton-Alexander objective of 33 per cent female representation by, or as soon as possible after, the target date of 2020.

Female representation on the Board is currently 31 per cent (based on four female Directors and nine male Directors).

The Group also set a numbertarget of issues relating8 per cent of senior roles to be held by BAME executives by 2020. At Board level , the Group aims to meet the objectives of the Parker review for at least one BAME Board member by, or as soon as possible after, the target date of 2021. The appointment of Sarah Legg in 2019 supports this objective.

As noted, the Board places high emphasis on ensuring the development of diversity in senior management roles within the Group and supports and oversees the Group’s governance arrangements, both internalobjectives of achieving 40 per cent of senior roles held by female executives by 2020, and external. It assistedof 8 per cent of senior roles being held by BAME executives by 2020. This is underpinned by a range of policies within the Chairman in keeping the composition ofGroup to help provide mentoring and development opportunities for female and BAME executives and to ensure unbiased career progression opportunities. Progress on this objective is monitored by the Board and built into its Committees under reviewassessment of executive performance. As at 31 December 2019, female representation within senior management and to lead the appointment process for nominations to the Board.their direct reports was 31.1 per cent in total (29.4 per cent and 31.3 per cent respectively). Female representation across all senior roles was 36.8 per cent, and BAME representation in senior roles was 6.7 per cent.

 

These issues are summarisedA copy of the Policy is available on the next page.Group’s website at www. lloydsbankinggroup.com/our-group/responsible-business

164
158

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Nomination and Governance Committee reportcontinued

 

HOW THE NOMINATION AND GOVERNANCE COMMITTEE SPENT ITS TIME IN 2016

KEY ISSUESCOMMITTEE REVIEW AND CONCLUSION
Board and Committee size and compositionDuring the year the Committee, led by the Chairman, continued to keep under review the structure, size and composition of the Board and its Committees and to make appropriate recommendations to the Board.
The Board should be of sufficient size to reflect a broad range of views and perspectives whilst allowing all Directors to participate effectively in meetings. The Board currently comprises three Executive Directors, nine independent Non- Executive Directors and the Chairman who was independent on appointment.
Details of Board changes are set out on page 164.
Succession planningThe Committee, led by the Chairman, continued to keep the adequacy of succession arrangements under review to ensure the desired mix of skills and experience of Board members now and in the future. Full details of the Group’s approach to succession planning can be found on the next page.
Diversity policyThe Committee reviewed the Board Diversity Policy in light of new and emerging best practice and recommended to the Board a specific target to maintain at least three female Board members and to take opportunities to increase the number of female Board members over time. The Board Diversity Policy is set out below.
EffectivenessThe Committee oversaw the annual evaluations of the performance of the Board and its Committees. In January 2016, the Committee reviewed the findings of the 2015 Board Effectiveness Review and recommended actions to the Board to address the areas identified for improvement. Progress against the plan was reviewed during the year. In preparation for the 2016 Board Effectiveness Review, the Committee made recommendations to the Board on the process and timing of the review, which was carried out internally by the Company Secretary. Full details of the 2016 Board Effectiveness Review together with details of the progress against the 2015 review actions are set out on page 160.
Corporate governance

In 2016, the Committee:

– oversaw the annual review of the Corporate Governance Framework, including the amendments necessary to accommodate the SM&CR and recommended it to the Board for approval

– received regular corporate governance updates from the Company Secretary

– recommended to the Board a revised share dealing policy for Directors and GEC in light of the new Market Abuse Regulation

– reviewed reports from the Chairman on communications from shareholders

– received updates on the SM&CR

– approved the appointment of Trustees to the Bank’s Foundations

– received updates on ring-fencing governance

Independence and time commitments

In assessing independence, the Committee did not rely solely on the Code criteria but considered whether, in fact, the Non-Executive Director was demonstrably independent and free of relationships and other circumstances that could affect their judgement. It did this with reference to the individual performance and conduct in reaching decisions. It also took account of any relationships that had been disclosed and authorised by the Board.

Based on its assessment for 2016, the Committee is satisfied that, throughout the year, all Non-Executive Directors remained independent as to both character and judgement.

The Committee reviewed the role, including capabilities and time commitment, of the Chairman, Deputy Chairman, Senior Independent Director, Non-Executive Directors, the Group Chief Executive and Executive Directors and found them to be appropriate.

BOARD DIVERSITY POLICY
The Board places great emphasis on ensuring that its membership reflects diversity in its broadest sense. A combination of demographics, skills, experience and personal attributes on the Board is important in providing a range of perspectives, insights and challenge needed to support good decision making.
New appointments are made on merit, taking account of the specific skills and experience needed to ensure a rounded Board and the diversity benefits each candidate can bring to the overall Board composition. On gender diversity the Board has a specific target to maintain at least three female Board members and, recognising the emerging target for FTSE companies to move towards 33 per cent female representation, to take opportunities to increase the number of female Board members over time where that is consistent with other skills and diversity requirements.
The Board also places high emphasis on ensuring the development of diversity in the senior management roles within the Group and supports and oversees the Group’s objective of achieving 40 per cent of senior roles held by female executives by 2020, along with other metrics which promote the engagement of other underrepresented groups within the business. This is underpinned by a range of policies within the Group to help provide mentoring and development opportunities for female executives and to ensure unbiased career progression opportunities. Progress on this objective is monitored by the Board and built into its assessment of executive performance.
A copy of the Board Diversity Policy is available on our website at www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/our-group/responsible-business.
Female representation on the Board is currently 23 per cent (based on three female directors and 10 male directors).
165

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

OUR APPROACH TO SUCCESSION PLANNING

GoodEffective succession planning contributes to the delivery of the Group’s strategy by ensuring the desired mix of skills and experience of Board members now and in the future. The Board is also committed to recognising and nurturing talent within the executive and management levels across the Group to ensure the Group creates opportunities to develop current and future leaders.

The role of succession planning in promoting diversity is recognised and the Group has a range of policies which promote the engagement of underrepresented groups within the business in order to build a diverse talent pipeline.

 

BOARD SIZE AND COMPOSITION

Under the leadership ofThe Committee supports the Chairman in keeping the Committee continued to keep under review the structure, size and composition of the Board and its Committees. AtCommittees under regular review and

in leading the coreappointment process for nominations to the Board. This has been a particular area of focus during 2019, with a number of changes to Board Committee membership, and the processappointment of two new Non-Executive Directors, discussed further below.

Central to this is an ongoing assessment, led by the Chairman, of the collective Board’s technical and governance skill set. From this the Chairman creates a boardBoard skills matrix which the Committee usesis used to track the Board’s strengths and identify any gaps in the desired collective skills profile of Board members, givingBoard. Various factors are taken into consideration such as the Group’s future strategic direction, and helping ensure due weight is given to diversity in its broadest sense. Recommendations are made toThe skills matrix was considered in the Boardappointment of Sarah Legg and Catherine Woods and

the appointment of Alan Dickinson as appropriate.Senior Independent Director and, in due course, also as Deputy Chairman.

 

SENIOR MANAGEMENT SUCCESSIONOutcomes of the annual Board evaluation process are also taken into consideration.

 

During the year, the Committee led byalso considered the adequacy of succession arrangements for key senior management roles, also taking into consideration the changing opportunities as the shape of the Group continues to evolve through delivery of the Group’s strategy. The Chairman also reviewed theis responsible for developing and maintaining a succession plansplan for the Group Chief Executive who is, in turn, primarily responsible for developing and other key senior management roles.

The Committee’s review was shaped by an in-depth review and broader discussion by the Non-Executive Directors of the Group’s talent management approach and succession pipeline for key senior executive roles. This annual talent review allows the Board to identify talent and ensure the Group has the right succession plans and development programmes in place. The review noted the work done to strengthen the approach to talent and development during the year, including the extension of the annual talent review programme and improved tracking and review of succession plans. There was recognition of the further work to be done to continue to increase the diversity of the succession pipeline. The robustness of themaintaining succession plans for key leadership positions in the Group Chief Executive and other key senior management roles in terms of contingency arrangements and over the medium to longer term were also reviewed.executive team.

BOARD INDUCTION

DEBORAH MCWHINNEY AND STUART SINCLAIR SHARE THEIR INSIGHTS

 
Deborah McWhinney and Stuart Sinclair who joined the Board in December 2015 and January 2016 respectively, share their insights on their induction and first year on the Board
HOW DID THE INDUCTION PROGRAMME HELP YOU PREPARE FOR YOUR ROLE ON THE BOARD? HOW WILL YOU REFLECT ON YOUR FIRST YEAR ON THE BOARD?
   
Deborah

APPOINTMENT PROCESS - ASSESSMENT OF NEW NON-EXECUTIVE DIRECTORS
OutcomeKey considerations
During the year the Committee led the search process for, and appointment of, new Non-Executive Directors which culminated in the appointment of Sarah Legg, who joined the Board on 1 December, and Catherine Woods who will join the Board on 1 March 2020.In establishing criteria for the new appointments, the Committee considered a number of factors including the collective Board’s technical and governance skill set, anticipated retirements in 2020 and 2021 based on current FRC Code guidance, and support for the Group’s diversity objectives.
 Deborah
   

I found the programme very well structured and comprehensive. There was a good mix of formal presentations and more informal sessions. It really brought the business and its issues alive for me and, having spent my career in the United States, the tailored and in-depth overview of the UK regulatory landscape was especially instructive.

 

Colleagues were always very open and willing to spend time with me to ensure my questions were fully answered. The level of openness within the senior management team is reflective of the Group’s wider culture.

 

I have extensive experience in managing IT operations and digital innovations. I was therefore delighted to be asked to join the new sub-committee of the Board Risk Committee, solely focusing on IT resilience and cyber security, bringing an independence of judgement and challenge to Board discussions.

What also struck me during my first year is the very genuine commitment to diversity in its broadest sense. There is a real understanding that diversity is more than gender, it’s a ‘frame of mind’ that helps bring diversity of thought to Board debate and conversations. I support the Group’s diversity programmes through mentoring women in senior roles and by speaking at diversity events.

   
StuartStuart

I have been through quite a few inductions over the years and what was especially effective about the Group’s induction was the mixture of highly structured overviews on key topics such as capital, liquidity and conduct, together with self-selected ‘top-ups’ and site visits. Attending functions, conferences, product forums, customer focus groups and branches provided valuable context too.

At all times colleagues were welcoming and never failed to find answers to my questions. As a newly appointed Non-Executive Director, I felt that a ‘go anywhere, ask anything’ culture was apparent.

I have really enjoyed my first year on the Board because the Group to me was a mixture of relatively familiar topics such as retail network analysis, product testing, capital models and conduct requirements and newer topics such as ring-fencing.

Board and Committee meetings are open, fact-based and collegiate in the best sense: on any given topic there will typically be both experts and generalists. The Board culture works to draw all Directors into the subject, allowing for appropriate consideration and challenge from many angles, which enables an appropriate decision to be reached.

   
166
The Committee considered a number of search firms before appointing Heidrick & Struggles1to assist with the identification of potential candidates based on the Board’s criteria.The Committee were provided with a list of potential candidates for consideration, from which a short list was identified.Interviews were then held between the candidates, the Chairman and the Senior Independent Director.Further meetings for selected candidates were held with other members of the Board.After further consideration, the Committee recommended to the Board the appointment of the preferred candidates.The Board formally approved the appointments, subject to any remaining checks and approvals required.

1Aside from assisting with senior recruitment Heidrick & Struggles have no other connection to the Company, or individual Directors.
159

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Audit Committee report

 

 

AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT

It is the Audit Committee’s job to review the integrity of the financial statements and the effectiveness of the internal and external auditor. The Audit Committee has
delivered on its key
responsibilities, ensuring
oversight of financial
reporting and the
control environment.

 

  Committee meetings 
      
  Eligible to attendAttended 
Committee Chairman     
Nick Luff 8 8 
Committee members who served during 2016     
Alan Dickinson 8 8 
Anita Frew 8 8 
Simon Henry 8 41
Deborah McWhinney 8 8 
Nick Prettejohn 8 72
Anthony Watson 8 8 

1MrSimon Henry was unable to attend Audit Committee meetings in January, July, October and December due to prior executive commitments. Mr Henry will succeed Mr Luff as Audit Committee Chairman following Mr Luff’s retirement at the AGM in May 2017. Prior to taking on the Chairmanship of the Audit Committee, Mr Henry is retiring as Chief Financial Officer of Royal Dutch Shell plc in March 2017.
2Mr Prettejohn was unable to attend the June Audit Committee meeting due to a prior commitment.

Throughout 2016, the Audit Committee has continued to focus on its key objectives, overseeing financial reporting, internal controls, whistleblowing, and internal and external audit.

Overseeing financial reporting requires an assessment of key accounting judgements and related disclosures. The cost of redress relating to Payment Protection Insurance (PPI) has been substantial, and accounting provisions for this cost remain the most significant judgement made in drawing up the Group’s financial statements.

Estimates of the cost have changed as complaint trends and regulatory factors have evolved. The Committee has reviewed these estimates, and challenged the assumptions behind them, as well as ensuring that appropriate disclosures have been made to explain the uncertainties that remain.

The Committee also considered other areas of significant judgement that were relevant to the financial statements. These included other conduct provisions, loan impairments, tax matters, actuarial assumptions for insurance and pension accounting, and the appropriate classification of gilts held by the Group for liquidity purposes. Further details are set out in this report.

The transformation of the internal audit function has also been a focus for the Committee. This has included reviewing the scope and direction of internal audit’s work, overseeing changes to the leadership of the function, supporting independence of audit, and encouraging improved reporting of audit findings. The Committee has also monitored the effectiveness of the external audit as the new lead audit partner was introduced.

Nick Luff

Chairman, Audit Committee

 

 

DEAR SHAREHOLDER

transition in January 2021 to Deloitte LLP as the Group’s external auditor.

The Committee also expects to review ongoing developments in the Group’s approach to climate change reporting, as this area continues to develop. The Committee will also consider the developments in Corporate Governance, external audit practice, and regulation of this industry, arising from reviews by Sir Donald Brydon and others. The Committee has already given initial consideration to the matters these reviews have raised, and will continue to contribute to the ongoing consultation processes.

Simon Henry

Chairman, Audit Committee

COMMITTEE PURPOSE AND RESPONSIBILITIES

 

The purpose of the Committee is to monitor and review the Group’s financial and narrative reporting arrangements, the effectiveness of the internal controls (including over financial reportingreporting) and the risk management framework, whistleblowing arrangements and each of the internal and external audit processes.processes, including the statutory audit of the consolidated financial statements and the independence of the statutory auditor.

 

The Audit Committee reports to the Board on how it discharges its responsibilities and makes recommendations to the Board, all of which have been accepted during the year. A full list of responsibilities is detailed in the Committee’s terms of reference, which can be found at www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/our-group/corporate-governancecorporate-governance. In satisfying its purpose, the Committee undertakes the functions detailed within Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rule 7.1.3R.

 

During the year the Committee considered a number of issues relating to the Group’s financial reporting. These issues are summarised on the following pages, including discussion of the conclusions the Committee reached, and the key factors considered in reaching conclusions, including a continuing focus on the judgements and assumptions used by management in its models. In addition, the Committee considered a number of other issues not related directly to financial reporting, including internal controls, internal audit and external audit. These issues are also discussed in detail in the next section, including insight

into the key factors considered by the Committee in reaching its conclusion.

COMMITTEE COMPOSITION, SKILLS, EXPERIENCE AND EXPERIENCEOPERATION

 

The Committee acts independently of the executive to ensure that the interests of the shareholders are properly protected in relation to financial reporting and internal control.

 

All members of the Committee are independent Non-Executive Directors with competence in the financial sector with the Committee as a whole having competence relevantand their biographies can be found on pages 113 to the financial sector. Nick Luff is a Chartered Accountant and has significant financial experience in the UK listed environment enabling him to fulfil the role of Audit Committee Chairman, for the purposes of the UK Corporate Governance Code (the ‘Code’) as a member having recent and relevant financial experience, and for SEC purposes, the role of Audit Committee financial expert. In addition, 116.

Simon Henry is a Chartered Global Management Accountant and has extensive knowledge of financial markets, treasury, and risk management and also qualifies asinternational accounting standards. He is a member having recent and relevant financial experience underfor the purposes of the UK Corporate Governance Code and anis the Audit Committee financial expert underfor SEC rules.

HOW COMMITTEE MEETINGS ARE RUN

The management of the Committee is in keeping with the basis on which meetings of the Board are managed, as detailed on page 155. Its structure facilitates open discussion and debate, with steps taken to ensure adequate time for members of the Committee to consider proposals which are put forward.purposes.

 

During the course of the year, the Committee held separate sessions with the internal and external audit teams, without members of the executive management present. For details of how the Committee was run, see page 146.

 

Based onAnnually the outcomeCommittee undertakes an effectiveness review. The review forms part of the annual board effectivenessBoard evaluation process with Directors being asked to complete parts of the questionnaire relating to the Committees of which they were members. The findings of the review in 2015 additional training for Committee members has been introduced. Targeted training on risk weighted assets, derivative accounting, IFRS9 and insurance accounting has been provided. This year’s annual effectiveness review confirmedwere considered by the Committee metat its key objectives and carried out its responsibilities effectively.

167

CORPORATE GOVERNANCEJanuary 2020 meeting. On the basis of the evaluation the feedback was that the performance of the Committee continues to be effective.

 

Whilst the Committee’s membership comprises the Non-Executive Directors noted above,on page 145, all Non-Executive Directors may attend meetings as agreed with the Chairman of the Committee. The Interim Group Audit Director,Financial Controller, Chief Internal Auditor, the external auditor, the Group Chief Executive, the Chief Financial Officer, and the Chief Risk Officer and the Chief Operating Officer also attend meetings of the Committee as appropriate. Details of Committee membership and meeting attendance can be found on page 145.

I am pleased to report on how the Group Audit Committee (the ‘Committee’) has discharged its responsibilities throughout 2019.

 

DuringThe Committee has continued to focus on the year the Committee considered a number of issues relatingrelevant to the Group’s financial reporting, these issues are summarised below, including discussionconsideration of key accounting judgements, and ensuring the integrity of financial reporting and related disclosures. The Committee has also spent a significant proportion of its time considering other related areas, including monitoring of the conclusionsGroup’s internal control framework, to ensure it remains effective and fit for purpose. The key sources of information here remain the company’s Financial Controllership, the Risk function, Internal Audit and External Audit. The Committee reached,is hence receiving multiple, independent and the key factors considered by the Committeeobjective reports, in reaching its conclusions.support of assurance provided.

 

In addition,Assessing the Committee consideredfinal provisioning for the costs relating to Payment Protection Insurance redress has remained a numbersignificant area of other significant issues not related directly to financial reporting, including internal controls, internal audit and external audit. These issues are also discussedjudgement in detail in the next section, including insight into the key factors considered by the Committee in reaching its conclusions.

MATTERS CONSIDERED BY THE COMMITTEE

HOW THE AUDIT COMMITTEE SPENT ITS TIME IN 2016

FINANCIAL REPORTING

During the year, the Committee considered the following significant financial issues in relation to the Group’s financial statements and disclosures,reporting, with inputthe Committee continuing to challenge management’s assumptions used to calculate the Group’s provision.

Reports from management were considered on the ongoing application of IFRS 9, including challenge of management judgements underpinning credit impairment provisions. The Committee also oversaw the successful implementation of IFRS 16, which was adopted by the Group Auditon 1 January 2019, and received updates from the external auditor:project to implement IFRS 17, which is expected to be effective for the 2022 financial year.

 

KEY ISSUES

The potential for economic uncertainty arising from the exit of the UK from the European Union was considered in particular in respect of any potential impact on the Group’s credit impairment provision.

The Committee continued to oversee the role of Group Internal Audit, with particular focus on the key risk themes across the Group, including the transformation programmes, which continue to play an increasingly important role in the Group’s strategy.

The Committee also oversaw the establishment of a sub-committee to consider improvements in the Group’s whistleblowing arrangements.

Looking ahead to 2020, beyond continued focus on financial reporting and related controls, the Committee will oversee the

 COMMITTEE REVIEW AND CONCLUSION

Payment Protection Insurance (PPI)

In determining the adequacy of the provision for redress payments and administration costs in connection with the mis-selling of PPI the Group makes a number of assumptions based on management judgement. Such assumptions include the number of future complaints that will be received and the extent to which they will be upheld; average redress payments; and related administrative costs.

The Group provided a further £1,350 million to cover further operating costs and redress, including the impact of an August 2019 industry deadline. To 31 December 2016, the Group has provided a total of £17,375 million in respect of PPI mis-selling redress and administration costs.

– The Committee continued to challenge the assumptions made by management to determine the provision for PPI redress and administration costs. The Committee oversaw continued use of sensitivities reflecting the uncertainty that remains around the ultimate cost of PPI redress.

– The Committee also reviewed management’s assessment of the impact of the Financial Conduct Authority’s industry deadline of August 2019 for consumers to make their PPI complaints and final rules and guidance that should apply when firms handle complaints in light of the decision in the Plevin case.

– Group Audit undertook periodic agreed upon procedures over the process used by management to calculate the PPI provision. Procedures undertaken were designed to identify the use of reasonable, consistent and supportable assumptions and inputs. No items were raised by exception for consideration by the Committee.

– The Committee concluded that the provision for PPI redress and the Group’s external disclosures were appropriate.

– The disclosures relating to PPI are set out in note 38: ‘Other provisions’ on page F-56 of the financial statements.

Other conduct provisions

The Group has also made provisions totalling £1,085 million in respect of other conduct matters, including £280 million for packaged bank accounts and £261 million for secured and unsecured arrears handling activities.

– For packaged bank accounts, the Committee has continued to monitor the utilisation of the provision and management’s assessment of both the remaining exposure and the additional provisions required. This has included reviewing the expected level of complaints and the average redress payments.

– The Committee has understood the basis for determining the provision in respect of the Group’s secured and unsecured arrears handling activities. The provision includes the cost of both identifying and rectifying the customers affected.

– Group Audit undertook periodic agreed upon procedures over the process that has been used by management to calculate the extent of conduct related provisions. Procedures undertaken were designed to identify the use of reasonable, consistent and supportable assumptions and inputs. No items were raised by exception for consideration by the Committee.

– The Committee was satisfied that the provisions for other conduct matters were appropriate. The disclosures relating to other conduct provisions are set out in note 38: ‘Other provisions’ on page F-56 of the financial statements.

Allowance for impairment losses on loans and receivables

Determining the appropriateness of impairment losses requires the Group to make assumptions based on management judgement.

– The Committee challenged the level of provisions made and the assumptions used to calculate the impairment provisions held by the Group.

– Group Audit has provided assurance to the Audit Committee that the impairment governance processes are effective.

– The Committee was satisfied that the impairment provisions were appropriate. The disclosures relating to impairment provisions are set out in note 52: ‘Financial risk management’ on page F-87 of the financial statements.

168
160

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

KEY ISSUESCOMMITTEE REVIEW AND CONCLUSION

Recoverability of the deferred tax asset

Audit Committee Reportcontinued

FINANCIAL REPORTING

During the year, the Committee considered the following issues in relation to the Group’s financial statements and disclosures, with input from management, Risk Division, Group Internal Audit and the external auditor

 

A deferred tax asset can be recognised only to the extent that it is recoverable. The recoverability of the deferred tax asset in respect of carry forward losses requires consideration of the future levels of taxable profit in the Group.

– The Committee considered the recognition of deferred tax assets, in particular the forecast taxable profits based on the Group’s operating plan, the split of these forecasts by legal entity
ACTIVITIES FOR THE YEAR
Key issuesCommittee review and conclusion
Payment Protection Insurance (PPI)

Management judgement is usedto determine the assumptionsused to calculate the Group’sPPI provision. Following thedeadline for submission of claimsin August 2019, the principalyear-end assumptions used inthe calculation are the extentto which customer enquiriesconvert to valid complaints, arethen upheld, the average redressto be paid and expected futureadministration costs.

During 2019, the Group madeprovisions totalling £2,450 millionin respect of PPI.

The Committee reviewed management’s assumptions used to calculate the Group’sprovision for PPI redress and associated administration costs. The overall cost remainsuncertain and the Committee considered management’s use of sensitivities used toevaluate this uncertainty.

The Committee concluded that the provision for PPI redress and the Group’s externaldisclosures were appropriate. The disclosures relating to PPI are set out in note 38:‘Other provisions’ of the financial statements.

The Committee’s consideration of PPI is discussed further on page 162.

Other conduct provisionsThere were relatively few newconduct matters in 2019. TheGroup made provisions totalling£445 million in respect of otherconduct matters, including£188 million for costs of identifyingand rectifying certain arrearsmanagement fees and activities.The Committee has considered management’s assessment of the provisions requiredfor other conduct matters and was satisfied that the provisions were appropriate.The disclosures relating to other conduct provisions are set out in note 38: ‘Otherprovisions’ of the financial statements.
Allowance for impairment on loans and advances

The Group’s impairment provisionis dependent on management’sjudgements on matters such asfuture interest rates, house pricesand unemployment

rates, as wellas its assessment of a customer’scurrent financial positionand whether it has suffered asignificant increase in credit risk.

The allowance for impairmentlosses on loans and advancesto customers at 31 December2019 was £3,259 million(2018: £3,150 million).

During the year, the Committee has challenged both the level of provision held by theGroup, and the judgements and estimates used to calculate the provision. It regularlyreviewed management’s analysis of the Group’s lending portfolios. As part of eachof its reviews, the Committee considered management’s assessment of the potentialimpact of the UK leaving the European Union. The Committee has also consideredthe disclosure recommendations published by The Taskforce on Disclosures aboutExpected Credit Losses in December 2019.

The Committee was satisfied that the impairment provisions and associateddisclosures were appropriate. The disclosures relating to impairment provisionsare set out in note 20: ‘Allowance for impairment losses’ and note 53: ‘Financial riskmanagement’ of the financial statements.

Retirement benefit obligationsThe value of the Group’s definedbenefit pension plan obligationsis determined by making financialand demographic assumptions,both of which are significantestimates made by management.

The Committee reviewed the process used by management to determine anappropriate discount rate and considered the other critical assumptions underlyingthe calculation of the defined benefit liabilities, including those in respect of inflationand mortality.

The Committee was satisfied that management had used appropriate assumptionsthat reflected the Group’s most recent experience and were consistent with marketdata and other information.

The Committee was also satisfied that the Group’s disclosures made in respect ofretirement benefit obligations are appropriate. The relevant disclosures are set out innote 36: ‘Retirement benefit obligations’ of the financial statements. The defined benefitobligation at 31 December 2019 was £45,241 million (31 December 2018: £41,092 million).

Recoverability of deferred tax assetA deferred tax asset can berecognised only to the extent that it is more likely than not to berecoverable. The recoverability of thedeferred tax asset in respect of carryforward losses requires considerationof the future levels of the Group’staxable profit and the legal entities inwhich the profit will arise.

The Committee considered management’s assessment of forecast taxable profitsbased on the Group’s operating plan, the split of these forecasts by legal entity andthe Group’s long-term financial and strategic plans.

The Committee agreed with management’s judgement that the deferred taxassets were appropriately supported by forecast taxable profits, taking intoaccount the Group’s long-term financial and strategic plans. The disclosuresrelating to deferred tax are set out in note 37: ‘Deferred tax’ of the financialstatements. The Group’s net deferred tax asset at 31 December 2019 was£2,622 million (31 December 2018: £2,453 million).

Uncertain tax provisionsThe Group has open taxmatters which require it to make judgements about the most likelyoutcome for the purposes ofcalculating its tax position.

The Committee reviewed management’s assessment of the Group’s uncertain taxpositions which took into account the views of the relevant tax authorities and anyexternal advice it received.

The Committee was satisfied that the provisions and disclosures made in respect ofuncertain tax positions were appropriate. The relevant disclosures are set out in note 48:‘Contingent liabilities, commitments and guarantees’ of the financial statements.

161

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

– The Committee agreed with management’s judgement that the deferred tax assets were appropriately supported by forecast taxable profits, taking into account the Group’s long-term financial and strategic plans. The disclosures relating to deferred tax are set out in note 37: ‘Deferred tax’ on page F-53 of the financial statements.

Uncertain tax positions

The Group has open tax matters which require it to make judgements about the most likely outcome for the purposes of calculating its tax position.

– The Committee took account of the respective views of both management and the relevant tax authorities when considering the uncertain tax positions of the Group. The Committee also understood the external advice obtained by management to support the views taken.

– The Committee was satisfied that the provisions and disclosures made in respect of uncertain tax positions were appropriate. The relevant disclosures are set out in note 48: ‘Contingent liabilities and commitments’ on page F-68 of the financial statements.

Retirement benefit obligations

The Group must make both financial and demographic assumptions of a judgemental nature to determine the value of the defined benefit obligation.

– The Committee considered the financial and demographic assumptions used to determine the defined benefit liabilities, in particular mortality assumptions and the discount rate, which have been updated to reflect recent experience.

– The Committee was also satisfied that the Group’s quantitative and qualitative disclosures made in respect of retirement benefit obligations are appropriate. The relevant disclosures are set out in note 36: ‘Retirement benefit obligations’ on page F-47 of the financial statements.

Value-In-Force (VIF) asset and insurance liabilities

Determining the value of the VIF asset and insurance liabilities is judgemental and requires economic and non-economic actuarial assumptions.

– The Committee challenged the economic and non-economic actuarial assumptions made by management which underpin the calculation of the VIF asset and the insurance liabilities. The Committee also reviewed the movements in the key assumptions since 31 December 2015.

– The Committee was satisfied that the value of the VIF asset and insurance liabilities were appropriate. The disclosures are set out in note 24: ‘Value of in-force business’ on page F-38 and note 32: ‘Liabilities arising from insurance contracts and participating investment contracts’ on page F-42 of the financial statements.

Reclassification of gilts held within the liquidity portfolio

Determining the appropriate accounting treatment for gilts held within the liquidity portfolio.

– During the year, the Group reclassified approximately £20 billion of gilts within the liquidity portfolio as ‘available-for-sale’; the gilts were previously classified as ‘held-to-maturity’.

– The Committee considered and was satisfied with management’s assessment of the circumstances which support the reclassification of the gilts, the appropriateness of the accounting treatment and related disclosure.

– The disclosure is set out in note 49: ‘Financial instruments’ on page F-71 of the financial statements.

One-off transactions

Determining the appropriate accounting for certain one-off transactions requires management to assess the facts and circumstances specific to each transaction.

– The sale of Visa Europe is one example of one-off transactions considered by the Audit Committee during the year.

– The Committee was satisfied that the accounting treatment of the sale
Key issuesCommittee review and conclusion
Value-In-Force (VIF) asset and insurance liabilitiesDetermining the value of the VIFasset and insurance liabilitiesrequires management to makesignificant estimates for botheconomic and non-economicactuarial assumptions.

The Committee considered updates from management and from the Group’sInsurance Audit Committee summarising its activities, which included a review of theeconomic and non-economic assumptions made by management to determine theGroup’s VIF asset and insurance liabilities. The most significant assumptions were inrespect of annuitant mortality, workplace pension persistency and expenses.

The Committee was satisfied that the assumptions used to calculate the VIF asset(2019: £5,558 million; 2018: £4,762 million) and liabilities arising from insurance contractsand participating investment contracts (2019: £111,449 million; 2018: £98,874 million)were appropriate. The disclosures are set out in note 25: ‘Value of in-force business’and note 32: ‘Liabilities arising from insurance contracts and participating investmentcontracts’ of the financial statements.

Wealth management partnershipDetermining the appropriateaccounting for certain one- off transactions requiresmanagement to assess the factsand circumstances specific to eachtransaction.

During 2019, the Group entered into a wealth management partnership with Schrodersplc. This involved the Group retaining a 50.1 per cent ownership interest in an entityinto which it transferred assets under management and associated advisers from itsexisting business. Determining the appropriate accounting classification of the newactivities required management judgement. The Committee reviewed the accountingproposed by management which determined that the entity should be accounted foras a joint venture and was satisfied that this was appropriate.

The relevant disclosures are set out in note 23 of the financial statements.

IFRS 16 LeasesThe Committee has discussed the requirement of IFRS 16 which the Group adopted on 1 January 2019.The Committee noted that the principal impact of the standard on the Group wasto recognise property leases ‘on-balance sheet’ rather than as operating leases. TheCommittee was satisfied that the disclosures made in respect of IFRS 16 in the Group’sfinancial statements were appropriate.
IFRS  Insurance contractsIFRS 17 Insurance Contracts isexpected to be effective for theyear ending 31 December 2022.The Committee received an update on the Group’s IFRS 17 implementation project,which noted that, whilst the effective date of the standard is expected to be deferred,the Group will broadly maintain its existing timetable for elements of the programmethat will improve processes. The Committee also noted the progress made to dateon the IT development and actuarial models. The Committee was satisfied with theGroup’s progress and its disclosure included in note 56 to the financial statementssetting out the impact of accounting standards that were not effective for the Group at31 December 2019.

 

PAYMENT PROTECTION INSURANCE

The Group increased its provision for payment protection insurance (PPI) redress and associated administration costs by £2,450 million in the year ended 31 December 2019, bringing the total amount provided to £21,875 million. As in previous years, the Committee has reviewed management’s assumptions used to calculate the Group’s provision.

In the lead up to the 29 August 2019 deadline for the submission of claims (the Industry Deadline), the Group received a significant number of PPI Information Requests (PIRs). Management determined that the rate at which these enquiries convert to valid claims was a significant judgement in 2019, with the quality of PIRs deteriorating as the Industry Deadline approached.

The Committee reviewed management’s assessment that the quality of the PIRs received in the period leading up to the deadline was low, with about one in ten PIRs leading to a valid claim, and its calculation that an additional provision of £1,800 million was required in the third quarter. At the year end, the Committee reviewed management’s assessment that, based on actual experience in the fourth quarter of 2019, no further provision was required.

The overall cost associated with PPI remains uncertain and the Committee has considered management’s use of sensitivities used to evaluate this uncertainty. At 31 December 2019, for every one per cent increase in the PIR conversion rate on the stock at the Industry Deadline, the Group would expect an additional charge of approximately £100 million.

162

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Audit Committee Reportcontinued

OTHER SIGNIFICANT ISSUES

 

The following matters were also considered by the Committee:

 

RISK MANAGEMENT AND INTERNAL CONTROL SYSTEMS

 

Full details of the internal control and risk management systems in relation to the financial reporting process are given within the risk management section on pages 4441 to 112.108. Specific related matters that the Committee considered duringfor the year included:

 

the effectiveness of systems for internal control, financial reporting and risk management;
the extent of the work undertaken by the Finance teams across the Group and consideration of the resources to ensure that the control environment continued to operate effectively;
the major findings of internal investigations into control weaknesses, fraud or misconduct and management’s response along with any control deficiencies identified through the assessment of the effectiveness of the internal controls over financial reporting under the US Sarbanes- Oxley Act.

 the effectiveness of systems for internal control, financial reporting and risk management

 the extent of the work undertaken by the Finance teams across the Group to ensure that the control environment continued to operate effectively

 the major findings of internal investigations into control weaknesses, fraud or misconduct and management’s response along with any control deficiencies identified through the assessment of the effectiveness of the internal controls over financial reporting under the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act

 

The Committee was satisfied that internal controls over financial reporting were appropriately designed and operating effectively.

 

RISK WEIGHTED ASSETS

The Committee asked management to prepare a summary of the Group’s end-to-end processes to calculate its risk-weighted assets, highlighting those areas that require management judgement and interpretation. Whilst no issues were identified, it was agreed further internal assurance work would be undertaken. The Committee also asked that a programme of targeted external assurance reviews be carried out; it will review the findings from both the internal and external reviews in 2020.

CLIMATE-RELATED FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE

The Committee has received updates on the Group’s plans to develop disclosures implementing the Taskforce on Climate-Related Financial Disclosure recommendations by 2022 and the Group’s proposed current year Annual Report disclosure. Climate change disclosure will remain an area of focus for the Committee and it will continue to monitor its development during the coming year.

Q1 AND Q3 INTERIM MANAGEMENT STATEMENTS (‘IMS’)

The Committee considered the processes and format of the Company’s IMS reporting and concluded that improvements could be made, which resulted in simplification of IMS reporting in Q1 and Q3 for 2019.

GROUP INTERNAL AUDIT

 

In monitoring the activity, role and effectiveness of the internal audit function and their audit programme the Committee:

 

monitored the effectiveness of Group Audit and their audit programme through quarterly reports on the activities undertaken and a report from the Quality Assurance function within Group Audit;
approved the annual audit plan and budget and reviewed progress against the plan through the year;
oversaw the process for the appointment of an Interim Group Audit Director; and
considered the major findings of significant internal audits, and management’s response.
169

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 monitored the effectiveness of Group Internal Audit and their audit programme through quarterly reports on the activities undertaken and a report from the Quality Assurance function within Group Internal Audit

 monitored the progress of internal audit’s coverage of key risk themes across the Group, including Transformation and Change, Cyber & Information Security, Data Management and IT, Business & Operational Resilience

 approved the annual audit plan and budget, including resource and reviewed progress against the plan through the year

 assessed Group Internal Audit’s resources and skills (supplemented by externally sourced subject matter experts as required) as adequate to fulfil its mandate

 monitored and assessed the independence of Group Internal Audit

considered the major findings of significant internal audits, and management’s response

 

SPEAK UP (THE GROUP’S WHISTLEBLOWING SERVICE)

 

The Committee received and considered reports from management on the Group’s whistleblowing arrangements. The Committee reviewed the reports to ensure there are arrangements including summariesin place which colleagues can use in confidence to report concerns about inappropriate and unacceptable practices, and that there is proportionate and independent investigation of cases and ongoing reviews of the Whistleblowing Governance Structure. Onsuch matters or appropriate follow up. The Committee reported on its consideration of whistleblowing arrangements to the reports submitted,Board. The Committee also established an interim sub-committee to consider whistleblowing cases where allegations relate to Material Risk Takers or Senior Managers, and to oversee improvements being made to the Committee was satisfied with the actions which had been taken, the report first having been considered and approved by the Board’s Whistleblowing Champion, Anita Frew.Group’s whistleblowing arrangements.

 

AUDITOR INDEPENDENCE AND REMUNERATION

 

Both the Board and the external auditor have safeguards in placepolicies and procedures designed to protect the independence and objectivity of the external auditor. The Committee has received confirmation from Deloitte, the incoming auditor from 2021, that it is independent of the Group as at 1 January 2020. This will permit Deloitte to commence audit planning activities in the first half of 2020. In 2016January 2020, the Audit Committee approved an amended its non-audit service policy to regulate the use of the auditor for non-audit services to ensure compliance with the revised Ethical Standards for Auditors fromreflect revisions made by the Financial Reporting Council (FRC).to its rules and to require Deloitte to comply with the policy. The main change related to due diligence services, which can no longer be provided to the Group by

 

either PwC or Deloitte. In orderaddition to ensuredetailing those services that the objectivity and independence ofCommittee prohibits the external auditor from providing to the Group, the policy sets a financial threshold above which all non-auditpre-approves certain services provided by the external auditorfee is below a threshold; all other permitted services must be specifically approved in advance by the Committee, with additional provision made for the approval of non-material services which are below the threshold by certain members of senior management. The policy further formalises within the Group the restriction on the provision of non-audit services by the external auditor which the FRC consider to be prohibited.Committee.

 

Prior to engagement of the auditor for a permitted service, the policy requires that senior management confirms whether the Committee has pre-approved the service or specific approval is required. The total amount of fees paid to the auditor for both audit and non auditnon-audit related services in 20162019 is disclosed in note 1112 to the financial statements on page F-26.statements.

 

EXTERNAL AUDITOR

 

The Committee oversees the relationship with the external auditor. During the year, the Committee considered the auditors’auditor (PwC) including its terms of engagement (including remuneration), theirand remuneration, and monitors its independence and objectivityobjectivity. Mark Hannam has been PwC’s senior statutory audit partner for the Group and approved the Company since the beginning of 2016, and attends all meetings of the Committee. During 2019, the Committee reviewed PwC’s audit plan, (includingincluding the underlying methodology, and PwC’s risk identification processes).

processes. In accordanceits assessment of PwC’s performance and effectiveness, the Committee has considered: PwC’s interactions with regulations there wasthe Committee; the responses to a change of lead audit partner.

The Committee also consideredquestionnaire issued to the effectivenessGroup’s businesses, Finance, Risk and performance of the auditorInternal Audit; and the audit process.

These assessments considered data and information from a number of sources including:

the results of an internal effectiveness survey; and
the FRC’s Audit Quality Inspection Report (AQIR) on PwC published in May 2016.

FRC’s Audit Quality Inspection Report published in July 2019. The Committee concluded that it was satisfied with the auditor’s performance and recommended to the Board a proposal for the reappointmentre-appointment of the auditor to be approved at the Company’s AGM.

 

STATUTORY AUDIT SERVICES COMPLIANCE

 

The Company and the Group confirm compliance with the provisions of The Statutory Audit Services for Large Companies Market Investigation (Mandatory Use of Competitive Tender Processes and Audit Committee Responsibilities) Order 2014 (the ‘Order’) for the year to 31 December 2016.

2019. PwC havehas been auditor to the companyCompany and the Group since 1995, having previously been auditor to certain of the Group’s constituent companies. PwC were re-appointedand will continue as auditor with effect from 1 January 2016until the year ending 31 December 2020.

In October 2018, the Board, following a tender process conducted during 2014. Thereexercise and formal review to choose a new auditor and the recommendation of the Committee, approved the proposed appointment of Deloitte LLP. Subject to shareholder approval, Deloitte LLP will be a mandatory rotationundertake the Group audit for the 2021year ending 31 December 2021. The Company and the Group have no plans therefore as at the date of this report to conduct a tender exercise for external audit if not earlier.services.

170

163

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Board Risk Committee report

The Group’s resilience, through strategic change and continually emerging risks, has been a core consideration.

 

BOARD RISK COMMITTEE REPORTAlan Dickinson

Chairman, Board Risk Committee

DEAR SHAREHOLDER

 

The Committee has continued to take a dynamic approach to the consideration of existing and emerging risks.

  Committee meetings 
     
  Eligible to attend Attended 
Committee Chairman        
Alan Dickinson  8   8 
Committee members who served during 2016        
Lord Blackwell  8   8 
Anita Frew  8   8 
Simon Henry  8   71
Nick Luff  8   72
Deborah McWhinney  8   8 
Nick Prettejohn  8   8 
Stuart Sinclair  8   8 
Anthony Watson  8   8 
Sara Weller  8   8 
Former Committee members who served during 2016        
Dyfrig John3  4   4 

1Mr Henry was unable to attend the May Risk Committee meeting due to prior executive commitments.
2Mr Luff was unable to attend the July Risk Committee meeting due to prior executive commitments.
3Mr John retired on 11 May 2016.

I am pleased to report on how the Board Risk Committee (the ‘Committee‘) has discharged its responsibilities throughout 2016.2019.

 

TheDuring the year, the Committee has continued to takeagain focused on a dynamic approach to the considerationwide range of existing and emerging risks, through a balanced agenda which included standing areas of risk management, together with specific focus on emerging risks focusing significant additional resource where considered necessary. An example of this has been the establishment ofusing dedicated sub-committees to further enhance focus on particular areas, such as IT resilience and cyber security, enabling memberseffective planning of the Committeeagenda to direct more timeensure that focus and attention was given to better understand,those risks which were considered to be of ongoing importance to the Group and challenge,its customers. The environment within which the associatedGroup operates remained subject to continually evolving risks with considerable degrees of change and actions being taken by management.uncertainty.

 

The Committee was concerned to oversee the successful delivery of significant regulatory change such as the embedding of ring-fenced banking, data risk and operational resilience. Operational resilience has continuedbeen elevated to build upona primary risk category along with change and execution risk, recognising the progress reported last year around furthering the understanding of complex risks and seeking to enhance risk management. I amextensive Group strategic change agenda. The Committee was pleased to reportsee that good progress continued to bewas made throughout 2016with the management of customer rectifications. The Committee also focused very closely on conduct risks and, in reducing risks acrossparticular, the Group’s material lending portfoliosmanagement of customers in financial difficulty, including implementation of a revised operating model to improve customer outcomes. Each of these areas will be subject to ongoing focus in 2020.

Other areas of focus for the year ahead will include continued improvements in the Group’s treatment of vulnerable customers, fraud and financial crime, consumer indebtedness, and continually evolving risks within bothIT and cyber – as part of the

Mortgage and Commercial businesses. broader operational resilience agenda. The Committee will continue to review progress and developments during 2017.

The Group continues to operate in an environment subject to considerable change and, during 2016, another key area of activity for the Committee has been the proactive review, oversight and management of risks arising from the outcome of the EU referendum and wider geo-political risks. The Committee will continue to monitor developments and any impactagain consider impacts on the Group’s broader risk profile.profiles arising from delivery of the strategic change agenda. Inevitably, the external environment continues to provide challenges and potential impacts for the Group’s risk profile which the Committee continues to closely monitor.

 

The Committee has concluded through its detailed work, that the Group continues to have strong discipline in the management of both emerging and existing risks, and the Committee’s work continues to help support the Group in achieving its core aim of operating as a safe,digitised, simple, low risk bank.provider of financial services.

 

Alan Dickinson

Chairman, Board Risk Committee

COMMITTEE PURPOSE AND RESPONSIBILITIES


Committee purpose and responsibilities

The purpose of the Board Risk Committee is to review the risk culture of the Group, setting the tone from the top in respect of risk management. The Committee is also responsible for ensuring the risk culture is fully embedded and supports at all times the Group’s agreed risk appetite, covering the extent and categories of risk which the Board considers as acceptable for the Company.Group.

 

In seeking to achieve this, the Committee assumes responsibility for monitoring the Group’s Risk Management Framework,risk management framework, which embraces risk principles, policies, methodologies, systems, processes, procedures and people. It also includes the review of new, or material amendments to risk principles and polices,policies, and overseeing any action resulting from material breaches of such policy.

 

More details on the Group’s wider approach to risk management can be found in the risk management section on pages 4441 to 112.108. Full details of the Committee’s responsibilities are set out in its terms of reference, which can be found at www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/our-group/corporate-governance

 

Committee composition, skills and experienceCOMMITTEE COMPOSITION, SKILLS, EXPERIENCE AND OPERATION

Alan Dickinson, Chairman of the Committee, is a highly regarded retail and commercial banker, having spent 37 years with the Royal Bank of Scotland, most notably as Chief Executive of RBS UK, overseeing the group’s Retail and Commercial operations in the UK.

The Committee is composed of independent Non-Executive Directors, who provide core banking and risk knowledge, together with breadth of experience which brings knowledge from other sectors, and a clear awareness of the importance of putting the customer at the centre of all that the Group does.

 

Since January 2016, allAll Non-Executive Directors have beenare members of the Board Risk Committee. The Chief Risk Officer has full access to the Committee and attends all meetings. The Interim Group Audit DirectorChief Internal Auditor and members of the Executive also attend meetings, as appropriate.

 

During the yearAnnually the Committee met its key objectives and carried out its responsibilities effectively, as confirmedundertakes an effectiveness review. The review forms part of the Board evaluation process with Directors being asked to complete parts of the questionnaire relating to the Committees of which they were members. The findings of the review were considered by the annual effectiveness review.

171

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

How Committee meetings are runat its January 2020 meeting. On the basis of

The managementthe evaluation, the feedback was that the performance of the Committee is in keeping with the basis on which meetingscontinues to be effective. Details of the Board are managed, as detailedCommittee membership and meeting attendance can be found on page 155, with a structure which facilitates open discussion and debate. Steps are taken to ensure adequate time for members to consider proposals which are put forward.145.

 

As the most senior risk forumcommittee in the Group, the Committee interacts with other related risk forums,committees, including the Executiveexecutive Group Risk Committee. Such interaction assists with the agenda planning process, where in addition to annual agenda planning, matters considered by the Group Risk Committee are reviewed to ensure escalation of all relevant matters to the Board Risk Committee.

 

Matters considered by the CommitteeMATTERS CONSIDERED BY THE COMMITTEE

Over the course of the year the Committee considered a wide range of risks facing the Group, both standing and emerging, across all key areas of risk management, in addition to risk culture and risk appetite, as noted above.

 

As part of this review, certain risks were identified which required further detailed consideration. Set out belowon the following pages is a summary of these risks, with an outline of the material factors considered by the Committee, and the conclusions which were ultimately reached.

 

In addition, during 2016, two furtherDuring 2019, the Committee continued to utilise established sub-committees of the Board Risk Committee were established to provide additional focus on Financialareas such as IT resilience and cyber, and stress testing and recovery planning. The Committee receives regular updates from the Lloyds Bank Corporate Markets and IT Resilience & Cyber, in addition to an existing Stress Testing & Recovery Planning sub-committee. TheInsurance business sub-groups, which summarise the key discussions and decisions taken at the relevant entities’ risk committees. These sub-committees were constituted to enable members of the Board Risk Committee to dedicate additional time and resource to better understandachieving a more in-depth understanding of the topics covered, and to enable fullerfurther review and challenge of the risks associated with the topic of the sub-committee.

KEY ISSUESCOMMITTEE REVIEW AND CONCLUSION

EU referendum

The Committee regularly reviewed a range of lead economic and Key Performance Indicators across the portfolios, to help identify any early signs of deterioration in the economy and the Group’s credit risk profile.

As a result of the referendum outcome and to manage the impact of uncertainty caused by the referendum process and ensuing economic concerns, detailed EU exit portfolio assessments were undertaken to understand potential impacts on the Bank’s credit risk profile and to assess the potential need for any changes to Group risk appetite. Additional regular monitoring of internal and external early warning and key performance indicators was instigated and continues to be closely monitored by the Committee to track any adverse movement in the risk profile of the Retail and Commercial portfolios, and to ensure that risk appetite remains appropriate.

Conclusion: Regular monitoring continues to assist the Committee in its assessment of the portfolios, with management continuing to take action to mitigate potential risks associated with the EU exit decision. Key credit risks continue to be well managed through strong, effective risk management and risk appetite, including early identification and management of potential concern customers.risks.

Cyber risk and IT resilience

A resilient IT environment is critical to providing reliable services to customers and enabling sustainable growth. The dynamic threat posed by cyber risk and the potential for external attacks on the integrity of electronic data or the availability of systems are key risks for the Group and central area of focus for the Committee.

Given the dynamic nature and significance of IT and cyber risks the Committee has established a sub-committee to enable more in depth consideration of IT resilience and cyber risks. During the year the sub-committee gave consideration to a wide range of issues including insider risk, cyber reverse stress testing, IT Resilience and Cyber Programme updates, cyber insurance and cloud technology. Alongside this an advisory panel comprising external industry experts has been established to provide the sub-committee with an external view of current and evolving industry wide cyber security threats, challenges and developments.

Conclusion: Much has been achieved in respect of IT resilience and cyber security initiatives and the focus given by the Committee during 2016 has raised awareness across the Group. However, IT resilience and cyber security risk will remain a key area of focus for the Committee in 2017.

Conduct risk

The Committee continues to focus closely on the Group’s approach to conduct risk.

Throughout 2016, the Committee considered reports on the proactive identification and resolution of conduct issues which have had an impact on customers. The pace and quality of required remediation received particular attention together with actions taken to address root cause analysis and the prevention of similar issues. Consideration was also given to the conduct risks within the collections process for customers in arrears as well as customers in financial difficulties. In addition the Committee considered developments in the Group’s conduct culture as well as reports on complaints, conduct risk appetite metrics and product governance.

Conclusion: Whilst good progress has been made as a result of the Group’s conduct strategy initiatives, continued improvement in the Group’s conduct risk profile will remain a priority for the Group in 2017 and will continue to be a subject of focus for the Committee.

UK Secured and buy-to-let

Regular reviews were undertaken of the risks associated with the UK Secured portfolio, including specifically the buy-to-let segment.

In reviewing the UK Secured portfolio, consideration was given to the quality of new lending, the credit performance of the portfolio, the risk adjusted returns, and the adequacy of impairment and capital provisions under both expected and stressed conditions. The Committee specifically considered appetite for higher loan to value lending following the government’s announcement to discontinue the Help to Buy 2 scheme. Additionally, for the buy-to-let segment, the Committee reviewed management’s plans to implement changes in response to the revised tax regime and additional regulatory requirements for underwriting.

Conclusion: The Group’s mortgage portfolio remains well balanced, with overall debt to value ratios having improved and concentration risks reduced. Management continues to take appropriate action to address the risks arising from these portfolios and the Committee will continue to review developments during the course of 2017.

172
164

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

KEY ISSUESCOMMITTEE REVIEW AND CONCLUSION

Data risk

Data risk has been identified as a key focus within the Group to take into account the growing importance of data as a means of competitive advantage and to underpin key risk decision making and risk management.

The

Board Risk Committee reportcontinued to focus attention on key data initiatives within the Group. The Committee considered a number of reports on data risk throughout 2016 covering, amongst other topics, user access management, risk data aggregation and reporting and data privacy, all of which have impacts across the Group. Additionally, regular reporting on data risk, as a distinct risk type, has been introduced in 2016 in recognition of the growing importance of data as an asset to the Group as well as the forthcoming EU General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR).

 

Conclusion: Improvement to risk data systems, governance and controls over the last two years have strengthened risk reporting, whilst there remains opportunity to develop further. Data risk will remain a key area of focus for the Committee in 2017 in line with the growing importance of data as an asset to the Group and maturity of the Group Chief Data Office.
ACTIVITIES DURING THE YEAR
Key issuesCommittee review and conclusion
CONDUCT RISK
The Committee continues to focus closely on the Group’s management of customer rectifications.Throughout 2019 the Committee has considered reports on the Group’s Rectifications portfolio performance, with particular interest in reducing the number of customers with outstanding remediations. The Committee has noted continued progress in the pace and quality of remediations, delivering a reduction in the number of customers awaiting redress and improvements in customer outcomes. The Committee has remained close to progress on material rectifications, including HBOS Reading.

Conclusion:Root cause analysis and read-across activities continue to improve and embed across the Group with good progress in reducing the volume of rectification programmes and customers impacted. This will remain a key focus for the Committee in 2020.
The Committee continues to focus closely on the Group’s management of conduct risks and issues associated with customers in financial difficulty.

During 2019, the Committee considered reports on the ongoing activity to improve the way the Group supports customers experiencing financial difficulty.

The Committee held a deep dive into financial difficulty cases to provide deeper insight into root cause analysis and the actions being taken to improve customer outcomes. Other key focus areas included the initiatives being delivered and progressed through the Financial Wellbeing lab and implementation of a revised operating model to improve outcomes.

The Committee also noted the impact of a potential economic downturn and new regulatory requirements such as Persistent Debt.

Conclusion:Whilst progress has been made, further improvement in the Group’s treatment of customers in financial difficulty will be a key focus area in 2020.

The Committee continues to focus on ensuring the Group is resolving customer complaints in a timely and fair manner and eradicating the causes for complaints.

The Committee continues to focus on ensuring the Group has an effective framework for managing complaints including root cause analysis to establish lessons learned and help prevent similar issues in the future. Consideration has been given to complaint metric performance via Board Risk Appetites and quality as measured by the Financial Ombudsman Service.

Conclusion:The Group continues to make good progress in reducing the causes for customer complaints however focus needs to remain on reducing the time taken to resolve complaints in 2020 and to learn from root cause analysis.

Vulnerable customers represent a significant proportion of the Group’s customer base and continue to be an area of close focus with increasing regulatory focus.

The Committee recognises the importance of the Group’s vulnerability strategy in delivering customer outcomes, against a backdrop of increasing regulatory focus and noted the Group’s response to the FCA’s consultation on Vulnerable Customers, considering the potential impact on the Group’s strategy going forward.

The Committee considered the progress that continues to be made to implement the Group’s vulnerability strategy, and the enhancements made to support the embedding of regulatory Framework and Guidance.

The Committee noted the actions in train, including defining solutions to allow vulnerability information to be recorded and shared, the continued development of vulnerability dashboards and enhancements to the control framework along with the proposals for an enhanced approach to investment prioritisation for vulnerability initiatives.

Conclusion:The Committee recognise the importance of this subject and the increasing regulatory focus. It will continue to require ongoing focus and investment to execute the Group’s strategy in relation to vulnerable customers and meet external expectations.

During the year the Committee has increased focus on climate change, sustainability and the potential impact to the Group and impact on the Group’s customers.

Climate change and sustainability have been added as top areas of ongoing focus and the Committee has increased consideration of the risks that may arise.

The Group is committed to delivering Taskforce on Climate-related Financial Disclosure Recommendations (TCFD) and is working to ensure that regulatory expectations with regards to managing the financial risks arising from climate change are met. A proactive approach is required to continue to anticipate the sustainability impact on client’s business models.

Conclusion:The Committee will continue to closely monitor climate change and sustainability risks, looking at the impact on both the Group and its customers, and the delivery of TCFD and other commitments.

FINANCIAL RISK – COVERING CREDIT AND MARKET RISK
The Committee continues to review the Commercial lending portfolio through regular credit quality update papers, including reviews of key portfolio and sector trends observed and external threats to portfolio performance.

Detailed reviews allowed the Committee to assess the overall quality of the portfolio and new business written. Risk levels and credit exposure, including to material individual names, were monitored with reference to management information and risk appetite limits, as appropriate.

Key sector concentrations, including commercial real estate and the funds business, as well as those sectors more vulnerable to the wider economic backdrop or structural change, were also examined in greater detail, including construction, manufacturing and consumer related sectors, such as retail. Specific consideration was also given to the automotive sector, which continues to face into disruptors such as new technologies and changing consumer behaviours.

The Committee also considered the Group’s approach to credit policies and individual transaction limits, and reviewed summary details of transactions and portfolio reviews that were assessed at the Group’s most senior credit committee.

Conclusion:Overall Commercial Banking credit quality remained broadly stable. Origination quality has been maintained, supported by a consistent through-the-cycle approach to risk appetite. The portfolio continues to be monitored closely with consideration given to the macroeconomic outlook and emerging trends.

Residual value risk

A review of the impact of used car prices on the residual value risk of motor finance businesses was undertaken.

Given the increased uncertainty around used car prices in the current market environment, consideration was given to the residual value risk associated with the Group’s growing motor finance businesses and the impact of a range of possible scenarios for the future path of used car prices and deteriorating macro environment.

Conclusion: The combination of pricing that reflects the future value of vehicles, and prudent provisioning, appropriately reflects potential risk. The Committee introduced a new risk appetite limit to reflect planned business growth and manage the concentration of residual value risk. The Committee will continue to monitor this throughout 2017.

Stress testing

The review of stress testing exercises and their results continued to be a key area of focus during the year.

The Committee reviewed a diverse set of stress testing scenarios in 2016, including internally defined moderate and severe economic downturns, reverse stress test events including a large scale cyber-attack and external scenarios set by the Bank of England and the European Banking Authority.

The assessment included a review of the resilience of the Group, including specific areas of focus such as credit risk as well as impacts on the Group’s capital and liquidity positions. An assessment of the impact on dividends and mitigating actions proposed by management in each scenario was also undertaken.

Conclusion: The Group’s capital and liquidity positions remained above required minimums and the relevant risk appetite metric, with outcomes reflecting the ongoing de-risking by the Group. The implementation and assessment of robust and well managed stress testing arrangements will remain a key area of focus for the Committee in the coming year.

Model risk

The approach to model risk management, including the Group’s model governance framework, material models and regulatory requirements were reviewed.

Assessment was made of the overall governance framework for models including scope, the model landscape, the role of the Group Model Governance Committee and modelling standards. Additionally, the Committee considered the Group’s material models at Divisional level, including their purpose, design and how regular performance monitoring and validation ensure they remain fit-for-purpose and identify areas for improvement in an evolving regulatory environment. The Committee also observed a structured reporting framework which facilitates good senior management awareness and escalation, when required.

Conclusion: The Group’s management of model risk is robust with a strong control framework, consisting of specialist teams, regular performance monitoring, annual validation and appropriate escalation of issues. Model risk will continue to be an area of focus for the Committee via regular reporting, including risk appetite measures.

Commercial Banking portfolios

The Committee considered a range of regular and ad-hoc papers covering key risks associated with the Commercial Banking portfolios.

The Committee continued to provide oversight of the risks in the Commercial Banking portfolios via a regular update on the credit quality in key sectors such as Commercial Real Estate, Acquisition Finance and SME as well as oversight of large single name exposures.

Additional topics covered in 2016 included country risk, the potential impact of the EU referendum, a review of the exposure to European Banks and deep dives in to the oil and gas sector. There was also increased focus on the Financial Markets business and the associated traded market risk through a newly created sub-committee.

Conclusion: Regular and cyclical assessments of key portfolios has assisted the Committee in its oversight of risk management within Commercial Banking and any impact arising from both existing and emerging risks. Management continues to take satisfactory action to mitigate and address risks and the Committee will continue to review core aspects of the Commercial Banking business during 2017.

173
165

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

Key issuesCommittee review and conclusion
The Committee reviewed the risks relating to retail lending indebtedness.

RESPONSIBLE BUSINESS COMMITTEE REPORTConsideration was given to the Group’s lending controls, risk appetite monitoring and new lending indebtedness risk for the consumer unsecured, motor, retail secured and buy-to-let portfolios.

 

BeingThe Committee noted that lending controls, risks appetite metrics and segmented reporting for both indebtedness and affordability assessments are in place, and acknowledged the Group’s continued actions closely to monitor and control higher risk and marginal indebtedness segments and reduce exposure over time. The Committee reviewed management action which had also been taken within retail secured lending, including buy-to-let, to protect against contagion risk from growth in consumer debt levels, and to ensure that customers’ finances were resilient to stress.

Conclusion:The Committee was satisfied that the appropriate lending controls and monitoring are in place for affordability and indebtedness and noted progress made to strengthen these and improve visibility of customers’ debt positions.

OPERATIONAL RISK
Operational resilience is one of the Group’s most important non-financial risks. Key focus in 2019 has been to continue to enhance the existing approach to operational resilience and strengthen the control environment, to improve the Group’s ability to respond to incidents and continue delivering key services to the Group’s customers.

Key areas of focus for the Committee have included updates on the Group’s operational resilience programmes, progress against the operational resilience strategy and continued regulatory engagement in advance of the publication of Bank of England’s consultation paper.

Given the significance of the risk to the Group, the Committee is supported by the IT and Cyber Advisory Forum specifically focused on IT and cyber risks. The Committee has reviewed papers relating to Group operational resilience investment, proposals for considering Impact Tolerances and Advanced Intrusion Testing.

Conclusion:In 2019, operational resilience was classified as a responsibleprimary risk. The Committee takes the operational resilience of its services very seriously and has drawn valuable insight from having independent advice and guidance. It has agreed risk appetite statements for critical services and will continue to strengthen these to reflect the increased focus on resilience. The Committee considers that governance of operational resilience risk is robust and that activities in plan will ensure the ongoing resilience of key services to the Group’s customers.

The Committee continues to focus on data governance, privacy and data ethics risks including oversight of the Group’s compliance with the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR), and the associated risks and controls.

Data risk continues to be an area of significant regulatory and media attention. The Committee has remained focused on ensuring effective controls are in place regarding the governance, privacy, ethics and management of the Group‘s customers’ data. Third party oversight controls continue to embed and mature following the successful implementation of GDPR. Compliance with the principles of the Basel Committee of Banking Supervision (BCBS) also remains a key area of focus.

Conclusion:The Group continues to enhance the controls required to identify and manage data risk.

The Committee recognises the importance of People risk management to ensure the Group has the right capabilities and culture as the Group builds the Bank of the Future.

Throughout 2019, the Committee has continued to focus on the People risk profile, recognising the challenges faced with successfully delivering the Group’s strategic agenda, alongside the regulatory change agenda. The Group recognises the increasing demands on colleagues and is focusing on the ongoing monitoring of colleague wellbeing and engagement, and on developing colleague skills to achieve capability enhancement for a digital era. Particular consideration is given to critical populations and high performing individuals to support the Group’s core commitments. The Group has also made significant progress in evolving and refining the compliance control environment for the Senior Manager and Certification Regime (SMCR) and delivery of the SMCR extension was completed in 2019.

Conclusion:Regular monitoring continues to confirm that the People risk profile is managed effectively. The Committee ensures the necessary risk oversight as the Group continues to deliver simplified colleague processes and maximises colleague skills and potential to achieve the workforce of the future.

The Committee continues to focus on the risks associated with delivery and embedding of an extensive strategic change agenda, including both discretionary and regulatory change.

The Committee continues to focus on the risks associated with the extensive Group strategic change agenda, recognising the challenges faced in ensuring both successful delivery and embedding of change.

Change and execution risk has been elevated to a primary risk category to recognise the risk attached to the delivery of GSR3 and its impact on the enterprise wide risk profile.

The Group has matured in its ability to define, measure and report execution risk. The articulation and quantification of this risk continues to embed through regular reviews of the execution risk dashboard and its metrics, as well as the implementation of the change and execution risk library.

An area of focus has been on increasing understanding of the wider risk impacts of the initiatives that are driving investment funding decisions and the impact of GSR3 on the Group’s risk profile. For instance, as GSR3 is transforming both ways of working and colleague journeys, there is a deeper understanding of the impact of those changes on People risk.

The Group continues to increase its use of agile delivery approaches and tools and change oversight has been reviewed and refreshed to support this.

Conclusion:Change and execution risk will remain an area of focus for the Committee as the Group continues to increase its understanding of the change and execution risk associated with its transformation agenda and evolve its change delivery approaches. Further focus is required fully to reflect the enterprise wide impacts of the Group’s strategic agenda into business risk profiles and to leverage this awareness in key investment funding decisions.

166

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Board Risk Committee reportcontinued

Key issuesCommittee review and conclusion
The Committee continues to consider key economic and political risks, particularly given the increasingly uncertain outlook.

The Committee continues to consider key economic and political risks. Consideration is fundamentalfocused on risks that may impact the Group’s central economics forecast that is incorporated into the Group’s four year operating plan. Continuation of the current global trade tensions, deterioration in the UK property market or UK productivity, or a global economic slowdown and low (or negative) interest rates could have an adverse impact on profitability, capital generation and the Group’s credit risk profile.

Conclusion:The Committee will continue to ourclosely monitor risks arising from economic uncertainty. The Committee will also focus on risks emerging due to slower economic growth and political challenges, as well as risks from wider global events.

Negotiations continue to determine the final terms of the UK’s exit from the EU.

The prolonged uncertainty regarding the options, timing and the process itself could affect the outlook for the UK and global economy.

The key risks for the Group include volatility and possible discontinuities in financial markets, impact on the Group’s customers’ trading performance, financial position and credit profile, and ability to continue to operate in line with current practice across borders.

When reviewing the possible impacts of the EU Exit, the Committee has given particular consideration to the Group’s strong UK focus and UK-centric strategy. We are proud that our colleaguesThe Committee continues to closely monitor developments, with specific focus on the trading, financial, operational impacts for the Group, as well as the cyber, physical security and fraud risks, and the continued support so many people, businessesof Group customers.

Conclusion:The Group’s EU exit contingency plans continue to be closely monitored by the Committee via specific regular updates, covering both operational status and communitiesexternal developments, a suite of early warning indicators and corresponding risk mitigation plans.

Financial Crime is a priority for the UK Government, law enforcement and regulators. The Committee continues to monitor the Group’s management of financial crime risk in light of continued legislative change and regulatory scrutiny.

The Committee acknowledged the continued focus the Group places on the fight against financial crime and is playing an active part in developing and delivering on the strategic aims of HM Government’s Economic Crime Reform programme, including designing and delivering improvements in the UK SARs (Suspicious Activity Reporting) regime. This is a multi-year programme delivering through a private and public partnership, and for which the Group is represented by the Chief Operating Officer attending the Home Office’s Economic Crime Strategic Board.

The Committee also recognised significant strengthening of the Group’s intelligence capability to inform assessment of risk, for example the work to understand exposure to allegations of money laundering through Baltic banks; and cash-based money laundering through instant deposit machines.

Conclusion:The Committee noted satisfaction with the standard of compliance documented in the MLRO report, and acknowledged the action plans in place across the UKGroup to achievefurther enhance the Group’s position. Additionally, the Committee acknowledged the strategic plans in place to further enhance and digitise the Group’s financial crime control framework, designed to deliver more effective and agile controls whilst improving the customer experience.

The Committee continues to closely monitor the Group’s management of fraud risk, whilst minimising the impact of controls on genuine customer journeys.

The Committee considered the challenging and evolving nature of the fraud risk environment influenced by factors such as an increasing sophistication of fraud typologies and an uplift in industry reported gross fraud losses. The Committee noted the correlated impact on the Group’s gross authorised fraud losses albeit Group market share remains below the Group’s market share of transactions. Gross unauthorised fraud losses at both industry and Group level rose during 2019. However, they remain within Group appetite and the Group’s net losses remain stable year on year on a better futurelike-for-like basis.

Additionally, the Committee acknowledged the leading role the Group has played in the development of an industry code for authorised push payment fraud. The code was implemented in May 2019 and the Group has demonstrated compliance and good customer outcomes. Some operational improvements, expectations from the Financial Ombudsman’s Service regarding the provision of warnings and the issue of funding cases where neither the financial institution nor the customer is to blame continue to be addressed.

Conclusion:The Committee noted the positive work undertaken in the detection and prevention of fraud and recognised the continuing efforts of the Group to protect the integrity of genuine customer journeys with strategic plans aimed at enhancing the fraud control environment of the Group which reflect the comprehensive nature of the challenge and require internal evolution and external engagements.

REGULAR REPORTING CATEGORIES
Managing regulatory risk continues to be a key focus within the Group due to the significant amount of highly complex and interdependent regulatory reform that the Group has managed in 2019, and will continue to manage in 2020.

The Committee has continued focus on ensuring effective controls and oversight to comply with existing regulatory obligations, as well as receiving regular updates on emerging regulatory and legal risks. There have been ongoing significant regulatory change and oversight programmes in which the Board has placed increased focus to ensure successful execution, including the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS 239), IBOR Transition, EU Exit, product pricing, customers in financial difficulty, HBOS Reading and climate change.

In addition, a key area of focus for the Committee has been ensuring ring-fencing requirements have been fully embedded and the Committee has operated in line with its commitments to the PRA and continued to demonstrate independent decision making for the ring-fenced bank. Key topics have included reviews of the ring-fenced bank perimeter, management of legal entity conflicts and governance.

Conclusion:The Group continues to place significant focus on implementing complex regulatory changes, as well as ensuring effective horizon scanning of upcoming trends. The Committee has discussed the topics raised, and will continue to closely monitor compliance with regulatory requirements, including ring-fencing in 2020. Regulatory risk will remain a priority area of focus for the Committee in 2020.

167

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Responsible Business Committee report

 

The Group has a
responsibility to help
address some of the
challenges faced by the
UK. The Group manages
this through the work of ourits Helping
Britain Prosper Planplan.

 

  Committee meetings 
     
  Eligible to attend Attended 
Committee Chairman        
Sara Weller  5   5 
Committee members who served during 2016        
Lord Blackwell  5   5 
Anita Frew  5   41

Sara Weller CBE

Chairman, Responsible Business Committee

 

 

1 Ms Frew was unable to attend the Committee meeting in April 2016 due to a prior business commitmentDEAR SHAREHOLDER

 

I am pleased to presentreport on the secondactivity of the Responsible Business Committee report, following its establishment in July 2015.

Responsible Business practices are fundamental building blocks of our strategy, and the Committee has made good progress in continuing to support the embedding of responsible business activities(the ‘Committee’), during 2016.a busy 2019.

 

The Committee focusescontinues to oversee and track progress against the Group’s Helping Britain Prosper Plan, including reviewing performance against strategic aims, focusing on digital skills, sustainability and the Group’s Charitable Foundations.

The Group made good progress against targets in the Helping Britain Prosper Plan. Some examples, set out later on this page, include the launch of a unique Resilience portal to support colleagues mental health.

The Group was recognised by Fortune magazine as a leading business worldwide for its work on the three areas of People, Businessesboth sustainability and Communities. At each meeting we explore in depth the progress made towards achieving the Group’s purpose of helping Britain prosper, through becoming the best bank for customers.mental health.

 

Key areas reviewed have been:The Group continued to support its UK-wide Charitable Foundations, showcasing the work to deepen our customer-centric culture; programmes to tackle disadvantage,they do, including through our Foundations, our role in supporting UK businesses build for the future;with domestic abuse and the development of the programme of skills-based volunteering undertaken by colleagues across the Group.mental health charities.

 

The Committee is supported in its work by two business-wide committees which report to the Group Chief Executive: the Group Customer First Committee and the Responsible Business Management Committee. Informationregularly reviewed progress on the workGroup’s aim to have more women in senior roles. It also discussed the Group’s opportunity and plans to advance the representation of these committees can be found on page 51.

I welcomed the opportunity during the year to get involved in responsible business activities in different parts of the country, including taking part in a panel for the School for Social Entrepreneurs (more detail on page 175). And I very much enjoyed meeting the profoundly deaf founder of the Yumma Café, a catering business aimed specificallycolleagues from BAME backgrounds at supporting deaf people. This was a great example of how the personal experience which drives many social entrepreneurs is making a significant difference. I would like to thank all those who attended our meetings this year for their support.levels.

 

I would like to thank all the Board Directors and executives who attended and contributed to the Committee during the year. Mostthousands of all, I would like to recognise the tremendous contribution of our colleagues who have given their support to people, businesses and communities across the country,entire Group for their hard work and extraordinary commitment to helpsupporting Responsible Business activity in their daily work, as well as by volunteering over 246,000 hours of their time and helping to raise over £11 million to date for the Group’s charity of the year, Mental Health UK.

The following report gives more examples of Group activity to Help Britain prosper.Prosper in 2019. I hope you find it both interesting and informative.

 

Sara Weller

Chairman, Responsible Business Committee


HOW THE COMMITTEE COMPOSITION AND EFFECTIVENESSSPENT ITS TIME IN 2019

 

The membershipCommittee continued to focus on the three material areas aligned to the Bank of the Future, with the aim of enabling people, businesses and communities to be ready for the future:

Digital SkillsThe programme was reviewed regularly, with updates on the direction of and progress with the Lloyds Bank Academy which successfully launched a second location in Bristol. The Committee comprises Sara Weller, independent Non-Executive Director (Chairmanalso considered ‘future.now’ launched by the Lord Mayor of London, bringing together organisations to boost digital skills in the UK.

The Group’sSustainabilitystrategy made consistent progress in 2019. A number of targets were achieved ahead of plan such as the EV1000 initiative of supporting 1,000 electric vehicles which was achieved during the third quarter of 2019. The Committee continues to present challenge on the Group’s strategy of developing new products and strategies to help and support customers in a sustainable way. The Company’s sustainability strategy is available on the Group’s website www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/our-group/ responsible-business.

The relationship between the Group and theCharitable Foundationsis a key area of focus and the Group worked closely with the Foundations to showcase the work they do. The Committee continues to review the work done to support the Charitable Foundations work in the charitable sector through strengthening skills-based volunteering across their-supported charities.

In other activities, the Committee undertook an in-depth review of Inclusion and Diversity within the Group, focusing on BAME colleagues. This demonstrated some of the Committee)Group’s strengths and uniqueness but also identified opportunities to strengthen further its approach to attracting and developing talent. The Committee looked closely at progress on mental health and resilience in conjunction with the launch of a Resilience portal for colleagues. This highlighted scientific research into human behaviours provided by medical professionals based on clinical data.

The Committee will continue to discuss and monitor the effectiveness of the portal.

At each meeting, updates have been provided on the performance against the metrics of the Helping Britain Prosper Plan.

COMMITTEE PURPOSE AND OPERATION

The Committee supports the Board in overseeing the Group’s performance as a Responsible Business by providing oversight of, and support for, the Group’s strategy and plans for embedding responsible business as part of the Group’s purpose to Help Britain Prosper. This Committee provides oversight and challenge on activities which impact the Group’s trust and reputation and by considering and recommending to the Board for approval the Responsible Business Report and Helping Britain Prosper Plan.

The Committee’s Chair reviews the forward agenda regularly to ensure that the focus of the Committee’s work is on its key priorities and members have sufficient time at meetings to raise issues of concern and to engage in constructive dialogue with colleagues.

COMMITTEE COMPOSITION, ATTENDANCE AT MEETINGS AND EFFECTIVENESS REVIEW

The Committee is composed of Non-Executive Directors.

Representatives from Group ChairmanInternal Audit and the Deputy Chairman. All Non-Executive Directors are invited toChief Operating Office attend the Committee’s meetings. The Group Chief Executive attended two meetings in 2016. as appropriate.

During the year, the Committee met its key objectives and carried out its responsibilities effectively, as confirmed by the annual effectiveness review. The Committee will consider the output from the 2019 effectiveness review and whether amendments could be made to its current working arrangements.

 

THE OPERATION OF THE COMMITTEE

Committee meetings are managed in accordance with the principles outlinedDetails of committee membership and meeting attendance can be found on page 155 for the management of Board agendas and meetings. These principles are intended to facilitate open debate and constructive challenge. The Committee Chairman reviews the draft agenda regularly to ensure that adequate time is devoted to issues of interest to Committee members and that its key responsibilities are addressed. The Committee Chairman reports regularly to the Board on the Committee’s work and presents the Helping Britain Prosper Plan to the Board for approval prior to publication.145.

HOW THE COMMITTEE SPENT ITS TIME IN 2016

The Committee has reviewed and discussed the following topics:

the development of the Group’s responsible business strategy, with input from the Group Chief Executive
the Group’s approach to measuring stakeholder and customer trust against its peers in financial services and acknowledged leaders in generating trust
the continuing development of the Group’s culture programme, in conjunction with the Board
the results of colleague surveys as they relate to the Group’s responsible business activities
the steps taken to identify vulnerable customers and to ensure the Group’s products and customer service approach take account of their varying needs
the initiatives in place to tackle financial disadvantage amongst customers and to promote financial and digital inclusion
the work of the School for Social Entrepreneurs and the Schools Activity Programme
a report on the Group’s charitable Foundations, and their planned future activities, from the Chief Executive of the Lloyds Bank Foundation for England and Wales
the Group’s responsible and sustainable finance approach, including the creation of the Green Loan Initiative and the work being done to develop innovative solutions to meet the increasing demand of customers for responsible lending products

RESPONSIBLE BUSINESS COMMITTEE AND EXTERNAL STAKEHOLDERS

The members of the Committee have an ongoing dialogue with key stakeholders with an interest in the Committee’s activities. Committee members look forward to engaging with key stakeholders, including the independent Stakeholder Panel, in 2017.

174
168

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

 

RESPONSIBLE BUSINESS IN ACTION: SCHOOL FOR SOCIAL ENTREPRENEURS

The Lloyds Bank and Bank of Scotland Social Entrepreneurs programme is delivered through a partnership with the School for Social Entrepreneurs and the Big Lottery. The programme aims to support 2,000 social entrepreneurs by 2020.

In July 2016, Sara Weller was asked to join a panel to select the next cohort of 21 Social Entrepreneurs to secure a place on the programme. This was an opportunity to understand how each of the social entrepreneurs is supported through a 12 month package comprising a series of interactive learning sessions, a senior colleague from within Lloyds Bank to support them as they develop their social business, and a small grant.

The panel membership comprised local colleagues, representatives from the SSE Dartington school and a member of South Gloucestershire Council. Each candidate ‘pitches’ their social business idea for three minutes before being interviewed by the panel.

The programme attracts a diverse array of applicants, ranging from an artisan bakery providing employment opportunities for young adults with learning difficulties to an artists’ space dedicated to tackling problems of isolation through arts and creativity.


DISCLOSURE CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

 

As of 31 December 2016,2019, Lloyds Banking Group, under the supervision and with the participation of the Group’s management, including the Group Chief Executive and the Chief Financial Officer, performed an evaluation of the effectiveness of the Group’s disclosure controls and procedures. Based on this evaluation, the Group Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer concluded that the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures, at 31 December 2016,2019, were effective for gathering, analysing and disclosing with reasonable assurance the information that Lloyds Banking Group is required to disclose in the reports it files under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, within the time periods specified in the SEC’s rules and forms. The Lloyds Banking Group’s management necessarily applied its judgement in assessing the costs and benefits of such controls and procedures, which by their nature can provide only reasonable assurance regarding management’s control objectives.

175

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

 

CHANGES IN INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING

 

There have been no changes in the Lloyds Banking Group’s internal control over financial reporting during the year ended 31 December 20162019 that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, the Lloyds Banking Group’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

MANAGEMENT REPORT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING

 

The management of Lloyds Banking Group plc is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting. Lloyds Banking Group plc’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with IFRS.

 

The Company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (i) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect transactions and dispositions of assets; (ii) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS and that receipts and expenditures are being made only in accordance with authorisations of management and directors of Lloyds Banking Group plc; and (iii) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use, or disposition of the Company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

 

Internal control systems, no matter how well designed, have inherent limitations and may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies and procedures may deteriorate.

 

The management of Lloyds Banking Group plc assessed the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting at 31 December 20162019 based on the criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework 2013 issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organisations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). Based on this assessment, management concluded that, at 31 December 2016,2019, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting was effective.

 

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, has issued an audit reportopinions on the Company’s consolidated financial statements and on its internal controlcontrols over financial reporting as of 31 December 2016. This report appearsreporting. These opinions appear on page F-2.

 

GOING CONCERN

 

The going concern of the Company and the Group is dependent on successfully funding their respective balance sheets and maintaining adequate levels of capital. In order to satisfy themselves that the Company and the Group have adequate resources to continue to operate for the foreseeable future, the Directors have considered a number of key dependencies which are set out in the risk management section under principal risks and uncertainties: funding and liquidity on page 4239 and pages 9594 to 100 and capital position on pages 10185 to 10894. Additionally, the Directors have considered capital and additionally have consideredfunding projections for the Group’s capitalCompany and funding position.the Group. Accordingly, the Directors conclude that the Company and the Group have adequate resources to continue in operational existence for a period of at least 12 months from the date of approval of the financial statements and therefore it is appropriate to continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the accounts.

176169

MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

 

MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS

 

As at 31 December 2016, 31 December 2015 and 31 December 2014, the Company had received notification from The Solicitor for the Affairs of Her Majesty’s Treasury (HM Treasury) that it had a direct interest of 6.93 per cent, 9.9 per cent and 24.9 per cent respectively in the Company’s issued ordinary share capital with rights to vote in all circumstances at general meetings. Subsequent to 31 December 2016, the Company has received notifications from The Solicitor for the Affairs of Her Majesty’s Treasury (HM Treasury) on 6 January 2017, 27 January 2017 and 22 February 2017 that its direct interest in the Company’s issued ordinary share capital had reduced to 5.95 per cent, 4.998 per cent and then to 3.89 per cent respectively. Based solely on the Schedule 13-G filed by BlackRock, Inc. with the US Securities and Exchange Commission dated 24 January 2017, as at 31 December 2016, BlackRock, Inc. beneficially owned 6.4 per cent (representing 4,566,352,317 ordinary shares) of the Company’s issued ordinary share capital. As at 24 February 2017 no other notification has been received that anyone has an interest of 3 per cent or more in the Company’s issued ordinary share capital. Further information on HM Treasury’s shareholding in the Company is provided inBusiness – History and development of Lloyds Banking Group.

All shareholders within a class of the Company’s shares have the same voting rights. As at14 February 2020 the Company had received notification under the FCA Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules (‘DTR’) of the following holdings in the Company’s issued ordinary share capital.

Interest in shares% of issued share capital
/voting rights4
BlackRock Inc.3,668,756,76515.14%
Harris Associates L.P.3,551,514,5712,34.99%

1The notification of 13 May 2015 provided by BlackRock Inc. under Rule 5 of the DTR identifies (i) an indirect holding of 3,599,451,380 shares in the Company representing 5.04 per cent of the voting rights in the Company, and (ii) a holding of 69,305,385 in other financial instruments in respect of the Company representing 0.09 per cent of the voting rights of the Company. BlackRock Inc.’s holding most recently notified to the Company under Rule 5 of the DTR varies from the holding disclosed in BlackRock Inc.’s Schedule 13-G filing with the US Securities and Exchange Commission dated 5 February 2020, which identifies beneficial ownership of 4,698,292,748 shares in the Company representing 6.7 per cent of the issued share capital in the Company. This variance is attributable to different notification and disclosure requirements between these regulatory regimes. The notifiable holding by BlackRock Inc. received by the Company has not changed since 31 December 2015. Prior to 31 December 2015, BlackRock Inc.’s holding in the Company was not required to be disclosed under the US Securities and Exchange Commission rules.
2An indirect holding.
3On 18 September 2017, Harris Associates L.P. disclosed under the DTR beneficial ownership of 3,607,058,758 ordinary shares, representing 5.01% of that share class. On 31 October 2018, Harris Associates L.P. made a further disclosure under the DTR of a decrease in their holding, to 3,551,514,571 ordinary shares, representing 4.99% of that share class, the notified percentage remaining below 5% as at the end of 2019.
4Percentage correct as at the date of notification.

 

As at 31 December 2016,14 February 2020, the Company had 2,509,5052,358,597 registered ordinary shareholders. The majority of the Company’s ordinary shareholders are registered in the United Kingdom. 1,803,454,6092,375,557,133 ordinary shares, representing 2.533.38 per cent of the Company’s issued share capital, were held by BNY Mellon as depositary for the ordinary share American Depositary Share Programme through which there were 178185 record holders.

 

Additionally, the majority of the Company’s preference shareholders are registered in the United Kingdom, with a further one1 record holder with an address in the United States registered through the Company’s preference share American Depositary Share Programme.

 

RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

 

The Group, as at 31 December 2016,2019, had related party transactions with 2122 key management personnel, certain of its pension funds, collective investment schemes and joint ventures and associates. See note 47 to the financial statements.

177170

REGULATION

 

APPROACH OF THE FINANCIAL CONDUCT AUTHORITY (FCA)(“FCA”)

 

As per the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (FSMA)FSMA (amended by the Financial Services Act 2012), the FCA has a strategic functionobjective to ensure that the relevant markets function well. In support of this, the FCA has three operational objectives: to secure an appropriate degree of protection for consumers; to protect and enhance the integrity of the UK financial system and to promote effective competition in the interests of consumers.

 

The FCA Handbook sets out rules and guidance across a range of conduct issues with which financial institutions are required to comply including high level principles of business and detailed conduct of business standards and reporting standards.

 

REGULATORY APPROACH OF THE PRAPRUDENTIAL REGULATION AUTHORITY (“PRA”)

 

As perThe PRA is part of the Financial Services Act 2012,Bank of England, with responsibility for the PRA hasprudential regulation and supervision of circa 1500 banks, building societies, credit unions, insurers and major investment firms. Their strategy is to deliver a resilient financial sector by seeking: an appropriate quantity and quality of capital and liquidity; effective risk management; robust business models; and sound governance including clear accountability of firms’ management. This strategy supports their two statutory objectives: to promote the safety and soundness of the firms which it supervisesthese firms; and with respect to insurers, to contribute to the securing of an appropriate degree of protection for policyholders.policyholders (for insurers).

Through regulation, the PRA sets standards/policies which it expects firms to meet, and monitors firm’s compliance. The PRA’s regulatory and supervisorysupervision approach incorporatesincludes three key characteristics: to take a judgement-based approach, a forward-looking approach, and a focused-approach.

Use of judgement to determine whether financial firms are safe and sound, whether insurers provide appropriate protection for policyholders and whether firms continue to meet the Threshold Conditions (including maintaining appropriate capital and liquidity, and having suitable management arrangements).
A forward looking approach to assess firms against risks which may arise in the future.
Focus on those issues and those firms that pose the greatest risk to the stability of the UK financial system and policyholders.

 

The PRA has largely inherited the prudential aspects of the former FSA Handbook, including regulations and guidance relating to capital adequacy and liquidity among several other things.will change a firm’s business model if they judge that mitigating risk measures are insufficient.

 

OTHER BODIES IMPACTING THE REGULATORY REGIME

 

THE BANK OF ENGLAND AND HM TREASURY

 

The agreed framework for co-operation in the field of financial stability in the financial markets is detailed in the Memorandum of Understanding published jointly by HM Treasury, the FCA (formerly the FSA) and the Bank of England (now including the PRA) (together, the “Tripartite Authorities”). The Bank of England has specific responsibilities in relation to financial stability, including: (i) ensuring the stability of the monetary system; (ii) oversight of the financial system infrastructure, in particular payments systems in the UK and abroad; and (iii) maintaining a broad overview of the financial system through its monetary stability role. The Bank also wholly incorporates the PRA.

 

UK FINANCIAL OMBUDSMAN SERVICE (FOS)(“FOS”)

 

The FOS provides consumers with a free and independent service designed to resolve disputes where the customer is not satisfied with the response received from the regulated firm. The FOS resolves disputes for eligible persons that cover most financial products and services provided in (or from) the UK. The jurisdiction of the FOS extends to include firms conducting activities under the Consumer Credit Act (CCA).1974. Although the FOS takes account of relevant regulation and legislation, its guiding principle is to resolve cases individually on merit on the basis of what is fair and reasonable; in this regard, the FOS is not bound by law or even its own precedent. The final decisions made by the FOS are legally binding on regulated firms.firms who also have a requirement under the FCA rules to ensure that lessons learned as a result of determinations by the FOS are effectively applied in future complaint handling.

 

THE FINANCIAL SERVICES COMPENSATION SCHEME (FSCS)(“FSCS”)

 

The FSCS was established under the FSMA and is the UK’s statutory fund of last resort for customers of authorised financial services firms. Companies within the Group are responsible for contributing to compensation schemes in respect of banks and other authorised financial services firms that are unable to meet their obligations to customers. The FSCS can pay compensation to customers if a firm is unable, or likely to be unable, to pay claims against it. The FSCS is funded by levies on firms authorised by the PRA and the FCA, including companies within the Group.

 

LENDING STANDARDS BOARD

 

The Lending Standards Board (formerly the Banking Code Standards Board) is responsible for monitoring and enforcing compliance withoverseeing the Standards of Lending Practice (which replaced the voluntary(for both personal and business customers). The Standards of Lending Code on 1 October 2016. The standards relate to certainPractice for personal customers cover six main areas: Financial promotions and communications; product sales; account maintenance and servicing; money management; financial difficulty; and customer vulnerability across key lending (current account overdrafts, credit cards, loans and credit cards)chargecards) to consumers micro-enterprises and charities with an income of less than £1 million. The Standards of Lending Practice for business customers apply to business customers, which at the point of lending have an annual turnover of up to £25 million. The standards cover nine main areas: product information; product sale; declined applications; product execution; credit monitoring; treatment of customers in financial difficulty; business support units; portfolio management; and customers in vulnerable circumstances for products including loans, overdrafts, commercial mortgages, credit cards, and chargecards.

 

UK COMPETITION AND MARKETS AUTHORITY (CMA)(“CMA”)

 

The objective of the CMA is to promote competition to ensure that markets work well for consumers, businesses and the economy. Since 1 April 2014 the CMA has, with the FCA, exercised the competition functions previously exercised by the Office of Fair Trading and the Competition Commission have been transferred toCommission. Through its five strategic goals (delivering effective enforcement; extending competition frontiers; refocusing competition protection; achieving professional excellence; and, developing integrated performance) the new CMA or the FCA. The CMA’s regulatory and enforcement powers impactimpacts the banking sector in a number of ways, including powers to investigate and prosecute a number of criminal offences under competition law. In addition, the CMA is now the lead enforcer under the Unfair Terms in Consumer Contracts Regulations 1999.

 

UK INFORMATION COMMISSIONER’S OFFICE

 

The UK Information Commissioner’s Office is responsible for overseeing implementation of the Data Protection Act 1998.2018 which enshrines the General Data Protection Regulation. This Act regulates, among other things, the retention and use of data relating to individual customers. The Freedom of Information Act 2000 (the FOIA)“FOIA”) sets out a scheme under which any person can obtain information held by, or on behalf of, a ‘public authority’“public authority” without needing to justify the request. A public authority will not be required to disclose information if certain exemptions set out in the FOIA apply.

171

REGULATION

 

THE PAYMENTS SYSTEM REGULATOR (PSR)(“PSR”)

 

The Payment System Regulator (PSR)PSR is an independent economic regulator for the £75 trillion payment systems industry, which was launched back in April 2015. Payment systems form a vital part of the UK’s financial system – they underpin the services that enable funds to be transferred between people and institutions. The purpose of PSR is to make payment systems work well for those that use them. The PSR is a subsidiary of the Financial Conduct Authority,FCA, but has its own statutory objectives, Managing Director and Board. In summary theirits objectives are: (i) to ensure that payment systems are operated and developed in a way that considers and promotes the interests of all the businesses and consumers that use them; (ii) to promote effective competition in the markets for payment systems and services - between operators, PSPspayment services providers and infrastructure providers; and (iii) to promote the development of and innovation in payment systems, in particular the infrastructure used to operate those systems.

 

COMPETITION REGULATION

 

The CMA commenced a Phase 2 competition investigation into Personal Current Account (PCA) and SME Banking in November 2014. The final CMA report was published on 9 August 2016. Findings and proposed remedies were largely as expected and consistent with the Interim publication. Key remedies include: introduction of ‘Open Banking’, publication of service quality information and customer information prompts. Recommendations were also made regarding improvements to Current Account switching, monthly maximum charge for PCA overdraft users, overdraft notifications and additional measures for small business to make comparison easier.

The FCA obtained concurrent competition powers with the CMA on 1 April 2015 in relation to the provision of financial services in the UK, in addition to supplementing its already existing competition objective. The FCA has been undertaking a programme of work to assess markets across financial services to ascertain whether or not competition is working effectively in the best interests of consumers. The FCA announced on 3 November 2016 that it will take action to improve

178

REGULATION

competition in the current account market, following the CMA’s recommendations. The FCA actions will extend beyond the CMA remedies and will include considering whether rules are required in relation to the maximum monthly charge for overdrafts plus taking forward further work on overdrafts through its work on high cost credit. The FCA will also act as an observer on the Open Banking steering group and be involved in developing and testing “prompts” to encourage customers to consider their banking arrangements.

The Payment Systems Regulator (PSR) became operational in April 2015 with concurrent competition powers in respect of UK payment systems, in addition to a statutory objective to promote effective competition. The PSR has completed two market reviews into the provision of indirect access and into the ownership and competitiveness of payments infrastructure. The final report for indirect access was published in July noting some concerns with quality of access, limited choice and barriers to switching. The final report for competitiveness of payments infrastructure, also published in July, noted some concerns with competition in payments infrastructure.

In addition, the PRA also has a secondary objective under the Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act to, so far as reasonably possible, act in a way which facilitates effective competition.

 

The FCA announced on 3 November 2016 that it will take action to improve competition in the current account market, following the CMA’s recommendations in the publication of its competition investigation into personal current account (PCA) and SME Banking (9 August 2016). The FCA have published their final report into the ’Strategic Review of Retail Banking Business Models’ (18 December 2018) recognising that PCAs are an important source of competitive advantage for major banks. The focus on high cost credit continues with further forward work on its proposals to simplify the pricing of all overdrafts and end higher prices for unarranged overdrafts. The FCA continues to act as an observer on the “Open Banking” steering group and be involved in developing and testing “prompts” to encourage customers to consider their banking arrangements.

The UK governmentGovernment has a continuing interest in competition. In November 2015, the Government published a document entitled “A better deal: boosting competition to bring down bills for families and firms”. This document focuses on the competition aspects of the government’s productivity plan and aims to promote competition in various sectors, including financial services.

 

The newcurrent regulatory regime may lead to greater UK Government and regulatory scrutiny or intervention in the future, ranging from enforced product and service developments and payment system changes to significant structural changes. This could have a significant effect on the Group’s operations, financial condition or the business of the Group.

 

EU REGULATION

 

A High Level Expert Group, chaired by Erkki Liikanen (the ‘Liikanen Report’), considered whether there is a need for structural reforms of the EU banking sector and to make relevant proposals as appropriate, with the objective of establishing a stable and efficient banking system serving the needs of citizens, the economy and the internal market. The High Level Expert Group presented its recommendations to the EU Commissioner on 2 October 2012. They recommended a set of five measures that augment and complement the set of regulatory reforms already enacted or proposed by the EU, the Basel Committee and national governments. First, proprietary trading and other significant trading activities should be assigned to a separate legal entity if the activities to be separated amount to a significant share of the bank’s business. This would ensure that trading activities beyond the threshold are carried out on a stand-alone basis and separate from the deposit bank. The other measures include: emphasising the need for banks to draw up and maintain effective and realistic recovery and resolution plans; supporting the use of designated bail out instruments; applying more robust weightsFinancial institutions operating in the determination of minimum capital standards; and augmenting existing corporate governance reforms such as strengthening boards and management, promoting the risk management function, rein in compensation for bank management and staff, improve risk disclosure, and strengthening sanctioning powers.

On 17 January 2014, the EU Commission published a press release confirming that it intends to make a proposal for the reform of the structure of banking in the EU, which will be based on the Liikanen Report. The objective of the reforms will be to make the financial sector as a whole more robust and resilient, to reduce the impact of potential bank failures, and ensure the financial sector is at the service of the real economy. In doing so, the reforms will aim to eliminate the concept of banks being ‘too big to fail.’ The proposed regulation included derogation from the separate requirements for banks in member states which had implement equivalent legislation before 29 January 2014 (including the UK). The form of the proposed EU regulation has been subject to much debate within the European institutions, with uncertainty surrounding both the outcome and timeline for conclusion. The main disagreements concern the need for ‘automatic’ separation of trading activities and the level of discretion given to National Competent Authorities.

The UK isare currently subject to the directives introduced under the Financial Services Action Plan. However, these directives arerelevant EU legislation, which is regularly reviewed at EU level and could be subject to change.change, including as a result of how it is transported into UK law following the UK’s exit from the EU. The Group will continue to monitor the progress of these initiatives, providechanges to legislation, providing specialist input on their drafting and assess the likely impact on its business.

 

CRD IV implements the Basel III agreement in the EU, and introduces significant changes in the prudential regulatory regime applicable to banks including: increased minimum capital ratios; changes to the definition of capital and the calculation of risk-weighted assets; and the introduction of new measures relating to leverage, liquidity and funding. CRD IV also makes changes to rules on corporate governance, including remuneration, and introduces standardised EU regulatory reporting requirements which will specify the information that must be reported to supervisors in areas such as own funds, large exposures and financial information.

On 29 January 2014 the European Commission published its long-awaited proposals for structural reform of EU banks in the form of a draft regulation. The proposals apply to the largest EU banks and groups – on the basis of historical data the Commission estimates that 29 EU banks may be subject to such proposed regulation. The Commission’s publication is only a proposal at this stage. It may well be amended, perhaps substantially, by the European Parliament and the Council before it is adopted.

USU.S. REGULATION

 

In the United States,Until 2018 Lloyds Bank and Bank of Scotland plc maintains a branch(“BoS”) maintained branches in New York, each licensed by the New York State Department of Financial Services (NYDFS)(“NYDFS”) and subject to regulation and examination by the NYDFS and the Federal Reserve Bank of New York (FRBNY)(“FRBNY”). Bank of Scotland plc maintainsBoS also maintained a branchrepresentative office in New York (also licensedHouston, Texas (authorized by the NYDFSTexas Department of Banking (“TXB”), and subject to regulation and examination by the NYDFS and the FRBNY) and maintains a representative office in Houston, licensed by the State of Texas and subject to regulation and examination by the banking supervisors of the State of TexasTXB and the Federal Reserve Bank of Dallas. A former representative office which BankDallas). On 11 July 2018, the New York branch of Scotland plc maintained in ChicagoBoS was closed and its license surrendered to the Division of BankingNYDFS, and the NYDFS confirmed to BoS in October, 2018 that the voluntary liquidation of the BoS New York branch under the New York State Banking Law was considered concluded. On 31 December 2018, Lloyds Bank advised the NYDFS that the Lloyds Bank New York branch was closed and Lloyds Bank surrendered its New York branch license to the NYDFS on that date and the voluntary liquidation of Illinois asthe Lloyds Bank New York branch was completed in 2019. The closure of the New York branches of Lloyds Bank and BoS was a consequence of the need by both banks to comply with the geographic limitations of the Ring-fencing Rules (as defined in the Risk Factors section). The BoS Houston representative office was also closed by BoS on 31 August 2016.

The licensing authorityDecember 2018. In July, 2018, applications filed on behalf of each USLloyds Bank Corporate Markets plc (“LBCM”) with the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (“Federal Reserve Board”) and the NYDFS to permit LBCM to establish a branch in New York were approved, and on 27 July 2018, LBCM’s New York branch license was issued by the NYDFS. Also in July, 2018, at the request of Lloyds Bank, the NYDFS issued a representative office license to Lloyds Bank. Under the New York State Banking Law, the NYDFS has the authority, in certain circumstances, to take possession of the business and property of Lloyds Bank plc and Bank of Scotland plc located in the stateNew York State of the office it licenses.a bank, such as LBCM, which maintains a licensed branch in New York State. Such circumstances generally include violations of law, unsafe business practices and insolvency.

 

The existence of branchesa branch of LBCM in the USU.S. subjects Lloyds Banking Group plcthe LBCM, the Company and its subsidiaries doing business or conducting activities in the USU.S. to oversight by the Board of GovernorsFederal Reserve Board.

As of the Federal Reserve System (Federal Reserve Board).

Eachend of Lloyds Banking Group plc,2018, each of the Company, Lloyds Bank, plc, HBOS, plcBoS and Bank of Scotland plc isLBCM was a foreign banking organisation treated as a bank holding company within the meaning of the USU.S. Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 (BHC Act)(“BHC Act”) in accordance with the provisions of the International Banking Act of 1978 and each hashad elected, with the permission of the Federal Reserve Board, to be treated as a financial holding company under the BHC Act.

179

REGULATION Because, as a result of the Ring-fencing Rules, from and after January 1, 2019, neither Lloyds Bank nor BoS may maintain branches or own substantial equity stakes in entities organized outside of the European Economic Area, each ceased to be treated as a financial holding company under the BHC Act from and after that date. HBOS has no direct or indirect investments or activities in the U.S., and also ceased to be treated as a financial holding company. However, each of the Company and LBCM will continue to be treated as a financial holding company under the BHC Act.

 

Financial holding companies may engage in a broader range of financial and related activities than are permitted to bank holding companies that do not maintain financial holding company status, including underwriting and dealing in all types of securities. To maintainA financial holding company status, Lloyds Banking Group plc, Lloyds Bank plc, HBOS plc and Bank of Scotland plc are required toits depository institution subsidiaries must meet certain capital ratios and be deemed to be ‘well managed’“well managed” for purposes of the Federal Reserve Board’s regulations. The Group’sA financial holding company’s direct and indirect activities and investments in the United States are limited to those that are ‘financial“financial in nature’nature” or ‘incidental’“incidental” or ‘complementary’“complementary” to a financial activity, as determined by the Federal Reserve Board.

172

REGULATION

 

TheFinancial holding companies are also subject to approval requirements in connection with certain acquisitions or investments. For example, the Group is also required to obtain the prior approval of the Federal Reserve Board before acquiring, directly or indirectly, the ownership or control of more than 5 per cent of any class of the voting shares of any USU.S. bank or bank holding company.

 

The Group’s USU.S. broker dealer, Lloyds Securities Inc. (“LSI”), is subject to regulation and supervision by the US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) and the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority, with respect to its securities activities, including sales methods, trade practices, use of safekeeping of customers’ funds and securities, capital structure, recordkeeping, the financing of customers’ purchases and conduct of directors, officers and employees.employees and other matters pertinent to its securities business. In order to comply with the change to Ring-Fencing Rules (as defined in the Risk Factors section), LSI became an indirect, wholly-owned subsidiary of LBCM on July 1, 2018 as a result of the sale of 100% of the shares of LSI’s direct parent (Lloyds America Securities Corporation) by Lloyds Bank to LBCM.

 

A major focus of USU.S. governmental policy relating to financial institutions in recent years has been combating money laundering and terrorist financing and enforcing compliance with USU.S. economic sanctions, with serious legal and reputational consequences for any failures arising in these areas. The Group engages, or has engaged, in a limited amount of business with counterparties in certain countries which the USU.S. State Department currently designates as state sponsors of terrorism, including Iran, Syria, Sudan and Sudan.North Korea. The Group intends to engage only in new business in such jurisdictions and only in very limited circumstances where the Group is satisfied concerning legal, compliance and reputational issues. At 31 December 2016,2019, the Group doesdid not believe that the Group’s business activities relating to countries designated as state sponsors of terrorism were material to its overall business.

 

The Group estimates that the value of the Group’s business in respect of such states represented less than 0.01 per cent of the Group’s total assets and, for the year ended December 2016,2019, the Group believes that the Group’s revenues from all activities relating to such states were less than 0.001 per cent of its total income, net of insurance claims. This information has been compiled from various sources within the Group, including information manually collected from relevant business units, and this has necessarily involved some degree of estimate and judgement.

 

DODD-FRANK ACT

In JulyThe Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010 the United States enacted the (the “Dodd-Frank Act which provides”), established a broadregulatory framework for significant regulatory changes that extend to almost every area of US financial regulation. The Dodd-Frank Act addresses, among other issues, systemic risk oversight, bank capital standards,swap dealers and major swap participants including the resolution of failing systemically significant financial institutions in the US, over the counter derivatives, restrictions on the ability of banking entities to engage in proprietary trading activities and make investments in and sponsor certain private equity funds and hedge funds (known as the ‘Volcker Rule’), asset securitisation activities and securities market conduct and oversight. US regulators have implemented many provisions of the Dodd-Frank Act through detailed rulemaking. Although most of the rules and regulations are now in force, it is unclear how they will be interpreted in practice by the supervisors.

Under the Dodd-Frank Act,requirement for entities that are swap dealers and major swap participants mustto register with the USU.S. Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC), and entities that are security-based swap dealers or major security based swap participants will be required to register with the SEC. The (“CFTC has promulgated its registration rules for swap dealers and major swap participants. The SEC finalised its registration rules for security-based swap dealers and major security-based swap participants; however, the registration requirement will not be effective until certain other regulations applicable to security-based swap dealers are adopted.”). Each of Lloyds Bank plc provisionallyand LBCM is registered as a swap dealer in 2013 and as such, is subject to regulation and supervision by the CFTC and the National Futures Association with respect to certain of its swap activities, including risk management practices, trade documentation and reporting, business conduct and recordkeeping, among others.

On 8 January 2020, the Bank filed an NFA Form 7-W with the NFA to deregister as a swap dealer with the CFTC, effective 7 February 2020. The New York branch ofNFA has confirmed to us that Lloyds Bank plc status is subject to the swap ‘push-out’ provisions‘in transition’, and confirmation of the Dodd-Frank Act, which will require monitoring to ensure the Group conducts its derivatives activities in conformity with the implementing regulations. In December 2014, the swap “push out” provisions of the Dodd-Frank Act were amended such that fewer swap activities need to be pushed out of covered depository institutions.

Furthermore, the Dodd-Frank Act requires the SEC to cause issuers with listed securities, which may include foreign private issuers such as the Group, to establish a ‘clawback’ policy to recoup previously awarded employee compensation in the event of an accounting restatement. The SEC has proposed implementing regulations which have not yet been finalised. The Dodd-Frank Act also grants the SEC discretionary rule-making authority to impose a new fiduciary standard on brokers, dealers and investment advisers, and expands the extraterritorial jurisdiction of US courts over actions brought by the SEC or the United States with respect to violations of the antifraud provisions of the United States Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”), the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and the Investment Advisers Act of 1940.

In December 2013, US regulators adopted final rules implementing the Volcker Rule. Banking entities, including foreign banking organisations subject to the BHC Act, such as Lloyds Banking Group plc, Lloyds Bank plc, HBOS plc and Bank of Scotland plc, are subject to the final rules which require banking entities to conform to the restrictions on proprietary trading activities, hedge fund and private equity activities and certain other enumerated investment restrictions, subject to a number of exclusions and exemptions that substantially limit their extraterritorial reach. Certain foreign banking entities are permitted to engage in proprietary trading from outside the United States if the trade lacks the requisite US nexus and the foreign banking entity complies with the various conditions of the exemption. Investments in, and sponsorship of certain retail investment funds organised outside the United States and publicly offered predominantly outside the United States, and certain retirement and pension funds organised and administered outside the United States for the benefit of non-US residents are generally permitted under the final rules. Certain foreign banking entities, but not any US branch, agency or subsidiary of a foreign banking entity, nor any non-US affiliate controlled by such a US branch, agency or subsidiary, are also permitted to invest in and sponsor certain funds in which ownership interests are not offered for sale or sold inside the United States or to US residents and subject to other conditions. The final rules impose significant compliance and reporting obligations on banking entities. Banking entities had until 21 July 2015 to bring their activities and investments into conformity with the Volcker Rule, however, on 18 December 2014, the Federal Reserve issued an order extending the Volcker Rule’s conformance period until 21 July 2016 for investments in and relationships with certain covered funds and certain foreign funds that were in place on or prior to 31 December 2013. On July 7, 2016, the Federal Reserve announced a final one-year extension of the general conformance period for banking entities to conform ownership interests in and relationships with legacy covered funds to July 21, 2017. On December 12, 2016, the Federal Reserve issued a policy statement with information about how banking entities may seek a statutory extension of the conformance period of five years for certain legacy covered funds that are also illiquid funds.

In February 2014, pursuant to the Dodd-Frank Act’s systemic risk regulation provisions, the Federal Reserve Board adopted final rules that apply enhanced prudential standards to the US operations of large foreign banking organisations, including the Group. Under the Federal Reserve Board’s final rules, a number of large foreign banking organisations were required by July 1, 2016 to establish a separately capitalised top-tier US intermediate holding company (IHC) to hold all of the large foreign banking organisation’s US bank and non-bank subsidiaries, except its US branches and agencies

180

REGULATION

and specified types of subsidiaries. However, this requirement does not apply to a large foreign banking organisation with combined US assets of less than $50 billion, excluding assets held by its US branches and agencies. This requirement does not apply to the Group. In addition, under the final rules, as of 1 July 2016, US branches and agencies of foreign banking organisations with $50 billion or more in total global consolidated assets, such as the Group, are subject to liquidity home country capital certification and, in certain circumstances, asset maintenance requirements. These foreign banking organisations are also required to maintain a US Risk Committee as of 1 July 2016. However, final rules for single counterparty credit limits and for early remediation have yet to be finalised.

The Dodd-Frank Act and related rules and regulations will result in additional costs and impose certain limitations and restrictions on the way that the Group conducts its business, although uncertainty remains about some of the final details, impact and timing of the implementing regulations.de-registration is anticipated imminently.

 

DISCLOSURE PURSUANT TO SECTION 219 OF THE IRAN THREAT REDUCTION AND SYRIA HUMAN RIGHTS ACT (ITRA)

 

Since the introduction of an enhanced financial sanctions policy, the Group has been proactive in reducing its dealings with Iran and individuals and entities associated with Iran. There remain a small number of historic Iran-related business activities which the Group has not yet been able to terminate for legal or contractual reasons.

 

Pursuant to ITRA Section 219, the Group notes that during 2016,2019, its non-US affiliates, Lloyds Bank plc and Bank of Scotland plc, received or made payments involving entities owned or controlled by the Government of Iran as defined under section 560.304 of title 31, Code of Federal Regulations, and/or designated under Executive Order 13382.13382 or 13224. In all cases, the payment was permitted under UK and EU sanctions legislation, specific authority was sought from and granted by HM Treasury, the UK’s Competent Authority to provide such authorisations or the payment(s) were credited to a blocked account, held in the name of the entity, in accordance with UK and EC sanctions legislation.

 

Gross revenues from these activities were approximately £6,000.£9,000. Net profits from these activities were approximately £10,000.£9,000.

 

The Group’s businesses, being reported below, are conducted in compliance with applicable laws in respect of Iran and Syria sanctions and, except as noted below, the Group intends to continue these historic activities until it is able to legally terminate the contractual relationships or to maintain/manage them in accordance with prevailing sanctions obligations. The nature of these activities is as follows:

 

1.Receipts in relationLimited and infrequent payments made to partial repayments of a European Export Credit Agreement loan made priorand received from entities directly or indirectly linked to 2005 with respect to engineering and the supply of equipment and related services for several projects in Iran. The loan remains outstanding. The borrower and/or guarantor is owned by the Government of Iran. Such payments are only made if they comply with UK regulation and legislation and/or licence from the U.S. Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control.
  
2.Payments made to Building and Housing Research Centre in Iran related to a guarantee, entered into by the Group in 2006, in connection with the supply of seismic equipment for free field accelerometers systems for dams and civil building monitoring. The beneficiary of the guarantee is an entity owned by the Government of Iran and the payments were made to a frozen account in a European bank for an entity designated under Executive Order 13382.
3.Payments received relating to operational and processing costs for a joint venture between BP Exploration Company Limited and Iranian Oil Company (UK) Limited. The Iranian Oil Company (UK) Limited is designated under Executive Order 13599). These payments are permitted under OFAC license IA-2013-302799-5.
4.Payments made to a blocked account in the name of Commercial Bank of Syria related to historic guarantees, entered into by the Group between 1997 and 2008, the majority of which relate to Bail Bonds for vessels. The Commercial Bank of Syria is designated under Executive orderOrder 13382.
  
5.3.Sums paid out from a pension trust fund to UK nationals resident in the UK who were employees of a company indirectly owned or controlled by an entity designated under Executive Order 13382 that is also owned or controlled by the Government of Iran.
  
6.4.Lloyds continues to provide payment clearing services to a UK based and UK authorised bank, one of whose account holders is an entity designated under Executive Order 13224 (although not by the UK or EU authorities). Lloyds concludes from the nature of such payment clearing services that revenue and profit (if any) arising from indirectly providing such services to the designated entity is negligible and not material to the Group’s activities and in any event does not flow directly from the designated entity. To the extent that the activities of the designated entity and its UK authorised bank continue to comply with UK regulation and legislation, Lloyds intends to continue its activities and keep this activitythem under review.
181173

LISTING INFORMATION

TRADING MARKETS

 

The ordinary shares of Lloyds Banking Group plc are listed and traded on the London Stock Exchange under the symbol ‘LLOY.L’‘LLOY’. The prices for shares as quoted in the official list of the London Stock Exchange are in pounds sterling. The following table shows the reported high and low closing prices for the ordinary shares on the London Stock Exchange. This information has been extracted from publicly available documents from various sources, including officially prepared materials from the London Stock Exchange, and has not been prepared or independently verified by the Lloyds Banking Group.

 Price per share Price per share 
 (in pence) (in pence) 
 High Low 
Annual prices:    
201673.74 47.55 
201589.00 68.68 
201486.30 70.94 
201380.37 46.31 
201249.25 25.30 
Quarterly prices:    
2016    
Fourth quarter64.37 52.38 
Third quarter60.95 47.55 
Second quarter73.74 51.15 
First quarter73.27 56.00 
2015    
Fourth quarter77.83 68.68 
Third quarter87.65 72.30 
Second quarter89.00 77.38 
First quarter81.43 72.87 
2014    
Fourth quarter80.89 72.27 
Third quarter76.87 71.92 
Second quarter80.15 70.94 
First quarter86.30 74.34 
Monthly prices:    
January 201766.58 64.20 
December 201664.37 57.55 
November 201661.40 55.15 
October 201657.74 52.38 
September 201660.95 54.25 
August 201659.35 51.95 

On 24 February 2017, the closing price of shares on the London Stock Exchange was 69.28 pence, equivalent to 86.59 US cents per share translated at the Noon Buying Rate of $1.2499 per £1.00 on 24 February 2017.

Lloyds Banking Group plc’s American Depositary Receipts (ADRs) were traded on the over-the-counter market in the US under the symbol ‘LLDTY’ between March 2000 and November 2001. Since 27 November 2001 Lloyds Banking Group plc American Depositary Shares (ADSs) have beenare listed on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol ‘LYG’. Each ADS represents four ordinary shares.

182

LISTING INFORMATION

The following table shows the reported high and low closing prices for ADSs on the New York Stock Exchange.

 Price per ADS Price per ADS 
 (in US dollars) (in US dollars) 
 High Low 
Annual prices:    
20164.40 2.55 
20155.64 4.25 
20145.76 4.62 
20135.36 2.84 
20123.23 1.53 
Quarterly prices:    
2016    
Fourth quarter3.21 2.61 
Third quarter3.31 2.55 
Second quarter4.40 2.78 
First quarter4.32 3.32 
2015    
Fourth quarter4.83 4.25 
Third quarter5.53 4.47 
Second quarter5.64 4.65 
First quarter4.96 4.38 
2014    
Fourth quarter5.02 4.62 
Third quarter5.32 4.70 
Second quarter5.53 4.83 
First quarter5.76 5.01 
2013    
Fourth quarter5.36 4.67 
Third quarter5.00 3.83 
Second quarter3.91 2.84 
First quarter3.58 2.89 
2012    
Fourth quarter3.23 2.34 
Third quarter2.56 1.75 
Second quarter2.12 1.53 
First quarter2.35 1.58 
Monthly prices:    
January 20173.38 3.21 
December 20163.21 2.91 
November 20163.12 2.75 
October 20162.84 2.61 
September 20163.31 2.87 
August 20163.21 2.81 

On 24 February 2017, the closing price of ADSs on the New York Stock Exchange was $3.50.

183

LISTING INFORMATION

 

ADR FEES

 

The Group’s depositary, The Bank of New York Mellon, collects its fees for delivery and surrender of ADSs directly from investors depositing shares or surrendering ADSs for the purpose of withdrawal or from intermediaries acting for them. The depositary collects fees for making distributions to investors by deducting those fees from the amounts distributed or by selling a portion of distributable property to pay the fees. The depositary may collect its annual fee for depositary services by deductions from cash distributions or by directly billing investors or by charging the book-entry system accounts of participants acting for them. The depositary may generally refuse to provide fee-attracting services until its fees for those services are paid.

 

Persons depositing or withdrawing shares must pay: For:
$5.00 (or less) per 100 ADSs (or portion of 100 ADSs) 

Issuance of ADSs, including issuances resulting from a distribution of shares or rights or other property.

Cancellation of ADSs for the purpose of withdrawal, including if the deposit agreement terminates.

$.02 (or less) per ADS Any cash distribution to ADS registered holders.
A fee equivalent to the fee that would be payable if securities distributed had been shares and the shares had been deposited for issuance of ADSs Distribution of securities distributed to holders of deposited securities which are distributed by the depositary to ADS registered holders.
$.02 (or less) per ADSs per calendar year Depositary services.
Registration or transfer fees Transfer and registration of shares on the share register to or from the name of the depositary or its agent when you deposit or withdraw shares.
Expenses of the depositary 

Cable, telex and facsimile transmissions (when expressly provided in thedepositthe deposit agreement).

Converting foreign currency to US dollars.

Taxes and other governmental charges the depositary or the custodian have to pay on any ADS or share underlying an ADS, for example, stock transfer taxes, stamp duty or withholding taxes As necessary.
Any charges incurred by the depositary or its agents for servicing the deposited securities As necessary.

 

FEES RECEIVED TO DATE

In 2016,2019, the Company received from the depositary $842,755$811,275 for continuing annual stock exchange listing fees, standard out-of-pocket maintenance costs for the ADRsADSs (consisting of the expenses of postage and envelopes for mailing annual and interim financial reports, printing and distributing dividend checks, electronic filing of US Federal tax information, mailing required tax forms, stationery, postage, facsimile, and telephone calls), any applicable performance indicators relating to the ADRADS facility, underwriting fees and legal fees.

 

FEES TO BE PAID IN THE FUTURE

The Bank of New York Mellon, as depositary, has agreed to reimburse the Company for maintenance expenses that they incur for the ADS program. The depositary has agreed to reimburse the Company for its continuing annual stock exchange listing fees. The depositary has also agreed to pay the standard out-of-pocket maintenance costs for the ADRs,ADSs, which consist of the expenses of postage and envelopes for mailing annual and interim financial reports, printing and distributing dividend checks, electronic filing of US Federal tax information, mailing required tax forms, stationery, postage, facsimile, and telephone calls. It has also agreed to reimburse the Company annually for certain investor relationship programs or special investor relations promotional activities. In certain instances, the depositary has agreed to provide additional payments to the Company based on any applicable performance indicators relating to the ADRADS facility. There are limits on the amount of expenses for which the depositary will reimburse the Company, but the amount of reimbursement available to the Company is not necessarily tied to the amount of fees the depositary collects from investors.

184174

DIVIDENDS

 

Lloyds Banking Group plc’s ability to pay dividends is restricted under UK company law. Dividends may only be paid if distributable profits are available for that purpose. In the case of a public limited company, a dividend may only be paid if the amount of net assets is not less than the aggregate of the called-up share capital and undistributable reserves and if the payment of the dividend will not reduce the amount of the net assets to less than that aggregate. In addition, a company cannot pay a dividend if any of its UK insurance subsidiaries is insolvent on a regulatory valuation basis or, in the case of regulated entities, if the payment of a dividend results in regulatory capital requirements not being met. Similar restrictions exist over the ability of Lloyds Banking Group plc’s subsidiary companies to pay dividends to their immediate parent companies. Furthermore, in the case of Lloyds Banking Group plc, dividends may only be paid if sufficient distributable profits are available for distributions due in the financial year on certain preferred securities. The board has the discretion to decide whether to pay a dividend and the amount of any dividend. In making this decision, the board is mindful of the level of dividend cover and, consequently, profit growth may not necessarily result in increases in the dividend. In the case of American Depositary Shares, dividends are paid through The Bank of New York Mellon which acts as paying and transfer agent.

 

The Group has a progressive and sustainable ordinary dividend policy whilst maintaining the flexibility to return surplus capital through buybacks or special dividends.

In May 2019 the Group announced that it will move to the payment of quarterly dividends in 2020, with the first quarterly dividend in respect of Q1 2020 payable in June 2020. The new approach will be to adopt three equal interim ordinary dividend payments for the first three quarters of the year followed by, subject to performance, a larger final dividend for the fourth quarter of the year. The first three quarterly payments, payable in June, September and December will be 20 per cent of the previous year’s total ordinary dividend per share. The fourth quarter payment will be announced with the full year results, with the amount continuing to deliver a full year dividend payment that reflects the Group’s financial performance and our objective of a progressive and sustainable ordinary dividend. The final dividend will continue to be paid in May, following approval at the AGM. The Group believes that this approach will provide a more regular flow of dividend income to all shareholders whilst accelerating the receipt of payments. In addition to the Group’s progressive and sustainable ordinary dividend policy the Board will continue to give consideration to the distribution of surplus capital at the end of each year.

Given the business performance in 2019 the Board has recommended a final ordinary dividend of 2.25 pence per share. This is in addition to the interim ordinary dividend of 1.12 pence per share that was announced in the 2019 half year results. The recommended total ordinary dividend per share for 20162019 of 2.553.37 pence per share has increased by 5 per cent from 2.253.21 pence per share in 2015, in line with the Group’s progressive and sustainable oridinary dividend policy, and the Group continues to expect ordinary dividends to increase over the medium term with a dividend payout ratio of at least 50 per cent of sustainable earnings.

At the time of proposal, the special dividend of 0.5 pence per share (2015: 0.5 pence per share) represented the distribution of capital over and above the Board’s view of the current level of CET1 capital required to grow the business, meet regulatory requirements and cover uncertainties, and allowed for the estimated capital impact of the MBNA acquisition. Subsequently, on 2 March 2017, the FCA provided further clarification in relation to the consultation paper dealing with PPI, resulting in an additional provision of £350 million being recorded, reducing the adjusted CET1 ratio by c.20bps.

The Boards view of the current level of CET1 capital required to grow the business, meet regulatory requirements and cover uncertainties remains unchanged at 13 per cent but this level may vary from time to time depending on circumstances and the Board will give due consideration, subject to the situation at the time, to the distribution of any surplus capital through the use of special dividends or share buy backs.2018.

 

The table below sets out the interim and final dividends in respect of the ordinary shares for fiscal years 20042015 through 2016.2019. The sterling amounts have been converted into US dollars at the Noon Buying Rate in effect on each payment date with the exception of the recommended final dividend for 2016,2019, for which the sterling amount has been converted in US dollars at the Noon Buying Rate on 2414 February 2017.2020.

 

 Interim ordinary Interim ordinary Final ordinary Final ordinary 
 dividend dividend dividend dividend 
 per share per share per share per share 
 (pence) (cents) (pence) (cents) 
200410.7 19.0 23.5 44.7 
200510.7 18.9 23.5 43.3 
200610.7 20.2 23.5 46.8 
200711.2 22.8 24.7 48.2 
200811.4 20.3   
2009    
2010    
2011    
2012    
2013    
20141  0.75 1.16 
201520.75 1.14 1.5 2.17 
201630.85 1.10 1.70 2.12 
  Interim ordinary
dividend
per share
(pence)
  Interim ordinary
dividend
per share
(cents)
  Final ordinary
dividend
per share
(pence)
  Final ordinary
dividend
per share
(cents)
 
20151  0.75   1.14   1.5   2.17 
20162  0.85   1.10   1.70   2.20 
2017  1.00   1.34   2.05   2.72 
2018  1.07   1.41   2.14   2.73 
2019  1.12   1.40   2.25   2.93 

 

1The recommended dividend for 2014 was in respect of the full year.
2For 2015, the Board also made a capital distribution in the form of a special dividend of 0.5 pence per share (0.72 cents per share). This is not listed in the table above.
  
32TheFor 2016, the Board has also recommendedmade a capital distribution in the form of a special dividend of 0.5 pence per share (0.62(0.65 cents per share at the Noon Buying Rate on 24 February 2017) for 2016.share). This is not listed in the table above.
185175

ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION OF LLOYDS BANKING GROUP PLC

 

Lloyds Banking Group plc is incorporated in Scotland under the UK Companies Act 1985 with registered number SC95000.

As resolved at the 2016 Annual General Meeting, with effect from 12 May 2016, Lloyds Banking Group plc amended its Articles of Association to: (i) remove the power for Lloyds Banking Group plc to issue share warrants to bearer, in accordance with legislative changes made to the Companies Act in 2015 as a result of the introduction of the UK Small Business, Enterprise and Employment Act 2015; (ii) amend the process to be adopted by Lloyds Banking Group plc in relation to untraceable shareholders and unclaimed dividends to reflect developing practice; and (iii) provide a limit on the aggregate amount of ordinary remuneration that may be paid to the directors.

A summary of the material provisions of Lloyds Banking Group plc’s Articles of Association is set out below.

OBJECTS OF LLOYDS BANKING GROUP PLC

The objects of Lloyds Banking Group plc are unrestricted.

RIGHTS ATTACHING TO SHARES

Any share in Lloyds Banking Group plc may be issued with any preferred, deferred or other special rights (including being denominated in another currency), or subject to such restrictions (whether as regards dividend, returns of capital, voting or otherwise) as Lloyds Banking Group plc may from time to time determine by ordinary resolution or as otherwise provided in the Articles of Association.

Subject to statute, Lloyds Banking Group plc may issue any shares which are, or at Lloyds Banking Group plc’s option are, liable to be redeemed. The directors may determine the terms and conditions and manner of such redemption.

VOTING RIGHTS

For the purposes of determining which persons are entitled to attend or vote at a meeting and how many votes such persons may cast, Lloyds Banking Group plc may specify in the notice of the meeting a time, not more than 48 hours before the time fixed for the meeting, by which a person must be entered on the register in order to have the right to attend or vote at the meeting.

Every holder of ordinary shares who is entitled to be and is present in person (including any corporation by its duly authorised representative) at a general meeting of Lloyds Banking Group plc and is entitled to vote will have one vote on a show of hands and, on a poll, if present in person or by proxy, will have one vote for every such share held by him, save that a member will not be entitled to exercise the right to vote carried by such shares if he or any person appearing to be interested in the shares held by him has been duly served with a notice under the Companies Act (requiring disclosure of interests in shares) and is in default in supplying Lloyds Banking Group plc with information required by such notice.

The limited voting shares confer the right to receive notice of and to attend and speak at all general meetings of Lloyds Banking Group plc, but do not confer a right to vote unless the business of the meeting includes the consideration of a resolution:

for the winding-up of Lloyds Banking Group plc; or
to vary, modify or abrogate any of the rights attaching to the limited voting shares.

In any such case, the holder may vote the limited voting shares only in respect of such resolution and will have the same rights with regard to the number and exercise of votes as a holder of ordinary shares but, in the case of a variation in the rights of limited voting shares, shall also have the protection of a requirement for approval of the variation either by way of consent in writing by the holders of three-quarters in nominal value of the issued limited voting shares or by a special resolution at a separate class meeting of the holders of limited voting shares.

Preference shares confer such rights as may be determined by the directors on allotment, but unless the directors otherwise determine, fully paid preference shares confer identical rights as to voting, capital, dividends (save as to currency or payment thereof) and otherwise, notwithstanding that they are denominated in different currencies and shall be treated as if they are one single class of shares. There are no limitations imposed by UK law orregarding the Articles of Association, restrictingplease refer to the rights of non-residentsdiscussion under the corresponding section of the UK or non-citizens ofAnnual Report on Form 20-F for the UK to hold or vote shares of Lloyds Banking Group plc.year ended 31 December 2018, filed with the SEC on 25 February 2019, which discussion is hereby incorporated by reference into this document.

 

GENERAL MEETINGS

Annual general meetings of Lloyds Banking Group plc are to be held, in each period of six months beginning with the day following Lloyds Banking Group plc’s accounting reference date, in Edinburgh or such other place in Scotland as the directors shall appoint and at a date and time as may be determined by the directors. All other general meetings may be convened whenever the directors think fit and shall be requisitioned in accordance with the requirements of the Articles of Association.

Lloyds Banking Group plc must prepare a notice of meeting in respect of a general meeting in accordance with the requirements of the Articles of Association and the Companies Act. Lloyds Banking Group plc must give at least 21 clear days’ notice in writing of an annual general meeting. All other general meetings may be called by at least 14 clear days’ notice in writing.

The directors may make arrangements to enable attendance or regulate the level of attendance at any place specified in the notice of meeting for the holding of a general meeting and, in any such case, shall direct that the meeting be held at a specified place, where the chairman of the meeting shall preside, and make arrangements for simultaneous attendance and participation by members and proxies at other locations. The chairman of a general meeting has express authority to adjourn the meeting if, in his opinion, it appears impracticable to hold or continue the meeting because of crowding or unruly conduct or because an adjournment is otherwise necessary for the proper conduct of the meeting.

The processes and procedures for the conduct of a general meeting (including adjourning meetings, voting, amending resolutions and appointing proxies) is established under the Articles of Association and the Companies Act. The chairman of a general meeting shall be entitled to take any action he considers appropriate for properly and orderly conduct before and during a general meeting. The directors shall be entitled to ask persons wanting to attend to submit to searches or other security arrangements as such directors consider appropriate.

The quorum necessary for the transaction of business at a general meeting is three members present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote.

186

ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION OF LLOYDS BANKING GROUP PLC

DIVIDENDS AND OTHER DISTRIBUTIONS AND RETURN OF CAPITAL

Under the Companies Act, before Lloyds Banking Group plc can lawfully make a distribution, it must ensure that it has sufficient distributable reserves (accumulated, realised profits, so far as not previously utilised by distribution or capitalisation, less accumulated, realised losses, so far as not previously written off in a reduction or reorganisation of capital duly made). Under the Articles of Association (and subject to statute) the directors are entitled to set aside out of the profits of Lloyds Banking Group plc any sums as they think proper which, at their discretion, shall be applicable for any purpose to which the profits of Lloyds Banking Group plc may be applied.

The shareholders in general meeting may by ordinary resolution declare dividends to be paid to members of Lloyds Banking Group plc, but no dividends shall be declared in excess of the amount recommended by the directors. The directors may pay fixed dividends on any class of shares carrying a fixed dividend and may also from time to time pay dividends, interim or otherwise, on shares of any class as they think fit. Except in so far as the rights attaching to any shares otherwise provide, all dividends shall be apportioned and paid pro rata according to the amounts paid up thereon. Subject to the rights attaching to any shares, any dividend or other monies payable in respect of a share may be paid in such currency or currencies as the directors may determine using such exchange rates as the directors may select.

The opportunity to elect to receive new shares instead of any cash dividend recommended by the directors may be offered to shareholders provided that the directors shall have obtained in advance the shareholders’ approval to do so as required by the Articles of Association and the procedure under the Articles of Association is followed for allotting such shares.

In addition, Lloyds Banking Group plc may by ordinary resolution direct the payment of a dividend in whole or in part by the distribution of specific assets (a distributionin specie).

The limited voting shares do not confer a right to participate in any distribution of profits by way of dividend. For any other distributions, the limited voting shares shall be deemed to confer rights and interests in the profits equally with the holders of ordinary shares according to the amounts paid up on such limited voting shares and ordinary shares respectively otherwise than in advance of calls.

On any distribution by way of capitalisation, the amount to be distributed will be appropriated amongst the holders of ordinary shares and limited voting shares in proportion to their holdings of ordinary shares and limited voting shares (pro rata to the amount paid up thereon). If the amount to be distributed is applied in paying up in full unissued ordinary shares and limited voting shares of Lloyds Banking Group plc, a shareholder will be entitled to receive bonus shares of the same class as the shares giving rise to his entitlement to participate in the capitalisation.

Any dividend or other moneys payable to a member that has not been cashed or claimed after a period of 12 years from the date of declaration of such dividend or other moneys payable to a member will be forfeited and revert to Lloyds Banking Group plc. Lloyds Banking Group plc shall be entitled to use such unclaimed or unclaimed dividend or other moneys payable to a member for its benefit in any manner that the directors may think fit. Lloyds Banking Group plc shall not be a trustee of dividends or other moneys payable that have not been cashed or claimed and it shall not be liable to pay interest on such dividends or other moneys.

On a return of capital, whether in a winding-up or otherwise, the ordinary shares and the limited voting shares will rank equally in all respects and the preference shares will be entitled to the rights attaching to them on issue.

Lloyds Banking Group plc’s ordinary shares and limited voting shares do not confer any rights of redemption. Rights of redemption in respect of Lloyds Bank Group plc’s preference shares shall be as the directors determine on allotment.

Lloyds Banking Group plc may, subject to applicable law and to the Articles of Association, issue redeemable shares and redeem the same. Lloyds Banking Group plc has issued certain preference shares which are redeemable. In general, subject to applicable law and the approval of the UK Prudential Regulation Authority, some of these shares are redeemable by Lloyds Banking Group plc on a specified date and in some cases, thereafter on relevant dividend payment dates. Others are redeemable at any time during a specified period and following the occurrence of specified regulatory events.

Under the Articles of Association and the Companies Act, the liability of shareholders is limited to the amount (if any) for the time being unpaid on the shares held by that shareholder.

CONVERSION OF LIMITED VOTING SHARES

Each limited voting share will be converted into an ordinary share:

on the day following the last date on which an amount could become due and payable to a holder of limited voting shares under a deed of covenant. A deed of covenant is a legal document which records the obligation of one person to pay a specified sum to another for a specified number of years; or
if an offer is made to ordinary shareholders (or to all such shareholders other than the offeror and/or any body corporate controlled by the offeror and/or any persons acting in concert with the offeror) to acquire the whole or any part of the issued ordinary share capital of Lloyds Banking Group plc and the right to cast more than 50 per cent of the votes which may ordinarily be cast on a poll at a general meeting of Lloyds Banking Group plc becomes or is certain to become vested in the offeror and/or any bodies corporate controlled by the offeror and/or any persons acting in concert with the offeror. Once the directors become aware of such vesting, they must serve a written notice on all holders of limited voting shares stating that such event has occurred. The publication of a scheme of arrangement under the statutes providing for the acquisition by any person of the whole or part of the ordinary share capital of Lloyds Banking Group plc shall be deemed to be the making of an offer for this purpose. 

The ordinary shares resulting from conversion will carry the right to receive all dividends and other distributions declared, made or paid on the ordinary share capital of Lloyds Banking Group plc by reference to a record date on or after the date of conversion and will rank equally in all other respects and form one class with the ordinary share capital of Lloyds Banking Group plc then in issue and fully paid.

While the limited voting shares remain unconverted, their holders will be entitled to participate in any offer made to subscribe for or purchase any securities of Lloyds Banking Group plc (or any other company) as if the limited voting shares had been converted at the relevant record date of such offer.

187

ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION OF LLOYDS BANKING GROUP PLC

VARIATION OF RIGHTS AND ALTERATION OF CAPITAL

Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act, the CREST Regulations and every other statute for the time being in force or any judgment or order of any court of competent jurisdiction concerning companies and affecting Lloyds Banking Group plc (the statutes), the rights attached to any class of shares for the time being in issue may (subject to their terms of issue) be varied or abrogated with the consent in writing of the holders of not less than three-quarters in nominal value of the issued shares of that class or with the sanction of a special resolution passed at a separate meeting of the holders of shares of that class. At any such separate meeting, the provisions of the Articles of Association relating to general meetings will apply, but the necessary quorum at any such meeting will be two persons holding or representing by proxy at least one-third in nominal value of the issued shares of that class (except at an adjourned meeting, at which the quorum shall be any holder of shares of the class, present in person or by proxy) and any such person may demand a poll and every such holder shall on a poll have one vote for every share of the class held by such holder.

Any special rights attached to any class of shares having preferential rights will not be deemed to be varied by: (i) the creation or issue of further shares ranking in some or all respects equally to such class (but not in priority thereto); or (ii) the creation or redemption by Lloyds Banking Group plc of its own shares.

However, for so long as the limited voting shares have not been converted (as described above):

Lloyds Banking Group plc is prohibited from consolidating or subdividing any of the ordinary shares without consolidating or subdividing the limited voting shares in a like manner and to a like extent; and
Lloyds Banking Group plc will not create any new class of equity share capital, other than in connection with or pursuant to an employees’ share scheme approved by Lloyds Banking Group plc in general meeting, provided that the creation of equity share capital which carries (as compared with the existing ordinary shares) only restricted voting or no voting rights and no greater rights as regards dividends or capital shall not be deemed to be the creation of a new class of equity share capital. Lloyds Banking Group plc will not alter the rights attached to all or any part of its share capital or attach any special rights or privileges or restrictions thereto.

As a matter of UK law, Lloyds Banking Group plc may, by ordinary resolution, increase its share capital, consolidate and divide all or any of its shares into shares of larger amount, sub-divide all or any of its shares into shares of smaller amount and cancel any shares not taken or agreed to be taken by any person. Where a consolidation or subdivision of shares would result in fractions of a share, the directors may sell the shares representing the fractions for the best price reasonably obtainable, and distribute the net proceeds of such sale to the relevant members entitled to such proceeds. Where a member’s entitlement to a portion of the proceeds of sale amounts to less than a minimum figure (as determined by the directors), such portion may be distributed to a charitable organisation at the directors’ discretion.

Subject to the provisions of the statutes, Lloyds Banking Group plc may, by special resolution, reduce its share capital, any capital redemption reserve, share premium account or other undistributable reserve in any way.

TRANSFER OF SHARES

All transfers of shares which are in certificated form may be effected by transfer in writing in any usual or common form or in any other form acceptable to the directors and must be executed by or on behalf of the transferor and, except in the case of fully paid shares, by or on behalf of the transferee. The transferor will be deemed to remain the holder of the shares transferred until the name of the transferee is entered in the register of members of Lloyds Banking Group plc in respect thereof. All transfers of shares which are in uncertificated form may be effected by means of a relevant system, unless the CREST Regulations provide otherwise.

The directors may, in the case of shares in certificated form, in their absolute discretion and without assigning any reason therefor, refuse to register any transfer of shares (not being fully paid shares) provided that, where any such shares are admitted to the Official List of the UK Financial Conduct Authority, such discretion may not be exercised in such a way as to prevent dealings in the shares of that class from taking place on an open and proper basis. The directors may also decline to register a transfer unless:

the instrument of transfer and the lodging of such instrument complies with the requirements of the Articles of Association and the transfer is in respect of only one class of shares; or
the transfer is in favour of not more than four persons as the transferee.

The directors shall refuse to register the transfer of any share on which Lloyds Banking Group plc has a lien and shall refuse to register the transfer of any limited voting share unless the same is:

between existing holders of limited voting shares; or
under a scheme established or order made by the Charity Commissioners or by the Court to a transferee having charitable objects; or
in the course of a winding-up to an institution having charitable objects which prohibit distributions of income and property to members to at least the same extent as is imposed on the transferor by its Memorandum of Association; or
at the direction of the crown to another charity having similar objects. 

The Articles of Association otherwise contain no restrictions on the free transferability of fully paid shares.

Subject to the statutes and the rules (as defined in the CREST Regulations), and apart from any class of wholly dematerialised security, the directors may determine that any class of shares may be held in uncertificated form and that title to such shares may be transferred by means of an electronic trading system or that shares of any class should cease to be so held and so transferred.

188

ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION OF LLOYDS BANKING GROUP PLC

DISCLOSURE OF HOLDINGS EXCEEDING CERTAIN PERCENTAGES

In broad terms, the Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the UK Financial Conduct Authority require Lloyds Banking Group plc shareholders to notify Lloyds Banking Group plc if the voting rights held by such Lloyds Banking Group plc shareholders (including by way of a certain financial instrument) reaches, exceeds or falls below three per cent, four per cent, five per cent, six per cent, seven per cent, eight per cent, nine per cent, ten per cent and each one per cent threshold thereafter up to 100 per cent. Under the Disclosure and Transparency Rules, certain voting rights in Lloyds Banking Group plc may be disregarded.

Pursuant to the Companies Act, Lloyds Banking Group plc may also send a notice to any person whom Lloyds Banking Group plc knows or has reasonably cause to believe that such person is interested in Lloyds Banking Group plc’s shares or at any time during the three years immediately preceding the date on which such notice is issued to have been so interested, requiring that person to confirm whether he has or had such an interest and if so provide details of that interest as required by the notice.

Under the Articles of Association and UK law, if a person fails to comply with such a notice or provides information that is false in a material particular in respect of any shares (the default shares), the Lloyds Banking Group plc directors may serve a restriction notice on such a person. Such a restriction notice will state that the default shares and, if the Lloyds Banking Group plc directors determine, any other shares held by that person, shall not confer any right to attend or vote at any general meeting of Lloyds Banking Group plc.

In respect of a person with a 0.25 per cent or more interest in the issued shares of the class in question, the Lloyds Banking Group plc directors may direct by notice to such member that, subject to certain exceptions, no transfers of shares held by such person shall be registered and/or that any dividends or other payments on the default shares shall be retained by Lloyds Banking Group plc pending receipt by Lloyds Banking Group plc of the information requested by the Lloyds Banking Group plc directors. Certain consequences of the issue of a restriction notice are outlined above.

MANDATORY TAKEOVER BIDS, SQUEEZE-OUT AND SELL-OUT RULES

Other than as provided by the Companies Act and the City Code, there are no rules or provisions relating to mandatory bids and/or squeeze-out and sell-out rules in relation to the ordinary shares.

UNTRACED MEMBERS

Lloyds Banking Group plc is entitled to sell, as the agent of a member, at the best price reasonably obtainable, any share registered in the name of a member (or any other person entitled to such shares at law) provided that: (i) such shares remaining untraced for 12 years and during that period at least three dividends in respect of such shares have become payable and no dividend in respect of those shares has been cashed or claimed by the relevant member; (ii) Lloyds Banking Group plc uses reasonable efforts to trace the relevant member and, following the expiry of the 12 year period, sends a notice to the last known physical or email address of such member stating Lloyds Banking Group plc’s intention to sell the shares; and (iii) during the three months following sending such notice, Lloyds Banking Group plc does not receive any communication from such member. Lloyds Banking Group plc can also sell, at the best price reasonably obtainable, any addition shares held by the same member that were issued during such 12 year period provided that no dividend on such additional shares has been cashed or claimed by such member during such period.

The proceeds from the sale of untraced shares shall be forfeited by the relevant member and shall belong to Lloyds Banking Group plc. Lloyds Banking Group plc shall not be liable or be required to account to the member for the proceeds of such sale. Lloyds Banking Group plc is entitled to use or invest the proceeds from such sale in any manner that the directors think fit.

FORFEITURE AND LIEN

The directors may by resolution make calls upon members in respect of any moneys unpaid on their shares (but subject to the terms of allotment of such shares) in the manner required by the Articles of Association.

If a member fails to pay in full any call or instalment of a call on or before the due date for payment, then, following notice by the directors requiring payment of the unpaid amount with any accrued interest and any expenses incurred, such share may be forfeited by a resolution of the directors to that effect (including all dividends declared in respect of the forfeited share and not actually paid before such forfeiture). A member whose shares have been forfeited will cease to be a member in respect of the shares, but will, notwithstanding the forfeiture, remain liable to pay to Lloyds Banking Group plc all monies which at the date of forfeiture were presently payable together with interest. The directors may at their absolute discretion enforce payment without any allowance for the value of the shares at the time of forfeiture or for any consideration received on their disposal or waive payment in whole or part.

Lloyds Banking Group plc has a first and paramount lien on every share (not being a fully paid share) for all monies (whether presently payable or not) called or payable at a fixed time in respect of such share, and the directors may waive any lien which has arisen and may resolve that any share shall for some limited period be exempt from such a lien, either wholly or partially.

A forfeited share becomes the property of Lloyds Banking Group plc, and it may be sold, re-allotted, otherwise disposed of or cancelled as the directors see fit. Any share on which Lloyds Banking Group plc has a lien may be sold on the terms set out in the Articles of Association. The proceeds of sale shall first be applied towards payment of the amount in respect of the lien insofar as it is still payable and then on surrender of the share certificate for cancellation (in the case of shares in certificated form), to the person entitled to the shares at the time of sale.

189

ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION OF LLOYDS BANKING GROUP PLC

WINDING-UP

The directors have the power, in the name and on behalf of Lloyds Banking Group plc, to present a petition to the court for Lloyds Banking Group plc to be wound up.

If Lloyds Banking Group plc is wound up, the liquidator may, with the authority of an ordinary resolution, divide amongst the members in specie or kind the whole or any part of the assets of Lloyds Banking Group plc. The liquidator may for such purpose set such value as he deems fair upon any one or more class or classes of property and may determine how such division shall be carried out as between the members or different classes of members. The liquidator may vest any part of the assets in trustees upon such trusts for the benefit of members as the liquidator thinks fit, and the liquidation may be closed and Lloyds Banking Group plc dissolved, but so that no contributory shall be compelled to accept any shares or other property in respect of which there is a liability.

DIRECTORS

Subject to any other provision of the Articles of Association, the number of directors of Lloyds Banking Group plc shall be no less than seven. The minimum/maximum number of directors may be varied by ordinary resolution of Lloyds Banking Group plc. The directors may elect from them a chairman and deputy chairman (or two or more deputy chairman) and determine the period for which each is to hold office.

The business and affairs of Lloyds Banking Group plc shall be managed by the directors, who may exercise all such powers of Lloyds Banking Group plc (including its borrowing powers) as are not by the statutes or by the Articles of Association required to be exercised by Lloyds Banking Group plc in general meeting, subject to the Articles of Association, to the provisions of the statutes and to such regulations as may be set by special resolution of Lloyds Banking Group plc, but no regulation so made by Lloyds Banking Group plc will invalidate any prior act of the directors which would have been valid if such regulation had not been made.

The directors may confer upon any director holding any executive office any of the powers exercisable by them on such terms and conditions, and with such restrictions, as they think fit. The directors may also delegate any of their powers to committees. Any such committee shall have power to sub-delegate to sub-committees or to any person any of the powers delegated to it. Any such committee or sub-committee shall consist of one or more directors only. The meetings and proceedings of any such committee or sub-committee consisting of two or more persons shall be governed, with such changes as are appropriate, by the provisions of the Articles of Association regulating the meetings and proceedings of the directors. The directors may also grant powers of attorney to appoint a company, firm or person (or body of persons) to be the attorneys for Lloyds Banking Group plc with such powers, authorities and discretions and for such period and subject to such conditions as the directors think fit.

The directors may meet to consider this business of Lloyds Banking Group plc as they think fit. Any director may summon a meeting on request. The quorum necessary for the transaction of business of the directors may be fixed from time to time by the directors and unless so fixed at any other number shall be four. Questions arising at any meeting of the directors shall be determined by a majority of votes. In the case of an equality of votes, the chairman of the meeting shall have a second or casting vote.

DIRECTORS’ RETIREMENT

The Articles of Association provide that a director appointed by the board either to fill a casual vacancy or as an additional director shall retire at the annual general meeting next after his appointment but shall be eligible for election as a director at that meeting. The Articles of Association further provide that each director shall retire at the annual general meeting held in the third calendar year following the year in which he was elected or last re-elected and shall be eligible for re-election as a director at that meeting. No person shall be eligible for election as a director at any general meeting unless he is a director that is retiring or is recommended by the directors for election in the manner required by the Articles of Association.

REMOVAL OF A DIRECTOR AND VACATION FROM OFFICE

Subject to statute, Lloyds Banking Group plc may remove any director from office by ordinary resolution of which special notice has been given.

The officer of a director will be vacated in the following circumstances:

the director becomes prohibited by law from acting as a director;
the director resigns in writing to the chairman or deputy chairman or the secretary and the directors resolve to accept such offer of resignation;
if a bankruptcy order is made against such director or such director applies to the court in connection with a voluntary arrangement under the UK Insolvency Act 1986;
if an order is made by the court claiming jurisdiction on the ground of mentor disorder for the director’s detention or for the appointment of a guardian or for the appointment of a person to exercise powers in respect of such director’s property or affairs;
if the director is absent from meetings of directors for six months without leave and the directors resolve that such director’s office be vacated; or
if a written notice is served on him (signed by no less than three-quarters of the directors) to the effect that such director’s office shall be vacated.

DIRECTORS’ SHARE QUALIFICATION

A director is not required to hold any shares of Lloyds Banking Group plc by way of qualification.

190

ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION OF LLOYDS BANKING GROUP PLC

DIRECTORS’ INDEMNITY/INSURANCE

So far as may be permitted by the statutes, any person who is or was at any time a director, officer, employee or trustee of Lloyds Banking Group plc (or any associated company) may be indemnified by Lloyds Banking Group plc against any liability incurred by him in connection with any negligence, default, breach of duty or breach of trust by him in relation to Lloyds Banking Group plc (or any associated company) or any other liability incurred in the execution of his duties, the exercise of his powers or otherwise in connection with his duties, powers or offices. The directors of Lloyds Banking Group plc may also purchase and maintain insurance in respect of such liabilities. So far as may be permitted by the statutes, Lloyds Banking Group plc may also provide defence costs in relation to any criminal, civil or regulatory proceedings to which any current or former director, officer, employee or trustee of Lloyds Banking Group plc (or any associated company) is subject and do anything to enable any such a person to avoid incurring such expenditure.

AUTHORISATION OF DIRECTORS’ INTERESTS

Subject to the provisions of the statutes, the directors can authorise any matter which would or might otherwise constitute or cause a breach of the duty of a director to avoid a situation in which he has or can have a direct or indirect interest that conflicts, or possibly may conflict, with the interests of Lloyds Banking Group plc.

Such authorisation of a matter shall be effective only if the matter in question shall have been proposed in writing for consideration at a meeting of the directors in accordance with the board’s normal procedures or in such other manner as the directors may determine, the quorum requirement for the meeting of directors at which the matter is considered is satisfied and the matter is (or would have been) agreed to without the interested directors voting.

Any authorisation of a matter under the Articles of Association shall be subject to such conditions or limitations as the directors may determine, whether at the time such authorisation is given or subsequently, and may be terminated by the directors at any time. A director shall comply with any obligations imposed on him pursuant to any such authorisation.

A director shall not, save as otherwise agreed by him, be accountable to Lloyds Banking Group plc for any benefit which he (or a person connected with him) derives from any matter authorised by the directors and any contract, transaction or arrangement relating thereto shall not be liable to be avoided on the grounds of any such benefit.

Where a director has an interest which can reasonably be regarded as likely to give rise to a conflict of interest, the director may, and shall if so requested by the directors, take such additional steps as may be necessary or desirable for the purpose of managing such conflict of interest, including compliance with any procedures laid down from time to time by the directors.

Lloyds Banking Group plc may by ordinary resolution ratify any contract, transaction or arrangement, or other proposal, not properly authorised under the Articles of Association.

MATERIAL INTERESTS

In general, the Companies Act requires that a director disclose to Lloyds Banking Group plc any personal interest that he may have and all related material information and documents known to him, in connection with any existing or proposed transaction by Lloyds Banking Group plc. The disclosure is required to be made promptly and in any event, no later than at the board of directors meeting in which the transaction is first discussed.

Subject to the provisions of the statutes, the director (or a person connected with him), provided that the director has declared the nature and extent of any interest as required under the Articles of Association:

may be a director or other officer of, or be employed by, or otherwise interested (including by the holding of shares) in Lloyds Banking Group plc, a subsidiary undertaking of Lloyds Banking Group plc, any holding company of Lloyds Banking Group plc, a subsidiary undertaking of any such holding company, or any body corporate promoted by Lloyds Banking Group plc or in which Lloyds Banking Group plc is otherwise interested (a relevant company);
may be a party to, or otherwise interested in, any contract, transaction or arrangement with a relevant company (or in which the company is otherwise interested);
may (and any firm of which he is a partner, employee or member may) act in a professional capacity for any relevant company (other than as auditor) and be remunerated therefor;
may have an interest which cannot reasonably be regarded as likely to give rise to a conflict of interest;
may have an interest, or a transaction or arrangement giving rise to such an interest, of which the director is not aware; and
may have any other interest authorised under the Articles of Association or by shareholder resolution.

Subject to the provisions of the Companies Act, a director is entitled to vote and be counted in the quorum in respect of any resolution concerning any contract, transaction or arrangement or any other proposal:

in which he has an interest of which he is not aware;
in which he has an interest which cannot reasonably be regarded as likely to give rise to a conflict of interest;
in which he has an interest only by virtue of interests in shares, debentures or other securities of the company, or by reason of any other interest in or through Lloyds Banking Group plc;
which involves the giving of any security, guarantee or indemnity to the director or any other person in respect of (i) money lent or obligations incurred by him or by any other person at the request of or for the benefit of the company or any of its subsidiary undertakings; or (ii) a debt or other obligation of the company or any of its subsidiary undertakings for which he himself has assumed responsibility in whole or in part under a guarantee or indemnity or by the giving of security;
concerning an offer of shares or debentures or other securities of or by the company or any of its subsidiary undertakings (i) in which offer he is or may be entitled to participate as a holder of securities; or (ii) in the underwriting or subunderwriting of which he is to participate;
191

ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION OF LLOYDS BANKING GROUP PLC

concerning any other body corporate in which he is interested, directly or indirectly and whether as an officer, shareholder, creditor, employee or otherwise, provided that he (together with persons connected with him) is not the holder of, or beneficially interested in, one per cent or more of the issued equity share capital of any class of such body corporate or of the voting rights available to members of the relevant body corporate;
relating to an arrangement for the benefit of the employees or former employees of the company or any of its subsidiary undertakings which does not award him any privilege or benefit not generally awarded to the employees or former employees to whom such arrangement relates;
concerning the purchase or maintenance by the company of insurance for any liability for the benefit of directors or for the benefit of persons who include directors;
concerning the giving of indemnities in favour of directors;
concerning the funding of expenditure by any director or directors on (i) defending criminal, civil or regulatory proceedings or actions against him or them, (ii) in connection with an application to the court for relief, or (iii) defending him or them in any regulatory investigations (and doing anything to enable any director or directors to avoid incurring such expenditure); and
in respect of which his interest, or the interest of directors generally, has been authorised by ordinary resolution.

Except as set out above and subject to the Companies Act, a director shall not be entitled to vote on any resolution in respect of any contract, transaction or arrangement, or any other proposal, in which he (or a person connected with him) is interested. Any vote of a director in respect of a matter where he is not entitled to vote shall be disregarded. A director shall not be counted in the quorum for a meeting of the directors in relation to any resolution on which he is not entitled to vote.

If a question arises at any time as to whether any interest of a director prevents him from voting, or being counted in the quorum, and such question is not resolved by his voluntarily agreeing to abstain from voting, such question shall be referred to the chairman of the meeting and his ruling in relation to any director other than himself shall be final and conclusive, provided that the nature or extent of the interest of such director has been fairly disclosed. If any such question shall arise in respect of the chairman of the meeting, the question shall be decided by resolution of the directors and the resolution shall be conclusive provided that the nature or extent of the interest of the chairman of the meeting has been fairly disclosed to the directors.

CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION

If a director, otherwise than by virtue of his position as director, receives information in respect of which he owes a duty of confidentiality to a person other than Lloyds Banking Group plc, he shall not be required to disclose such information to Lloyds Banking Group plc or otherwise use or apply such confidential information for the purpose of or in connection with the performance of his duties as a director, provided that such an actual or potential conflict of interest arises from a permitted or authorised interest under the Articles of Association. This is without prejudice to any equitable principle or rule of law which may excuse or release the director from disclosing information, in circumstances where disclosure may otherwise be required under the Articles of Association.

REMUNERATION

Lloyds Banking Group plc must obtain a binding vote of shareholders on remuneration policy at least once every three years and an advisory vote on an implementation report on how the remuneration policy was implemented in the relevant financial year.

The ordinary remuneration of the directors is determined by the directors except that such ordinary remuneration shall not exceed £1,000,000 per annum in aggregate or such higher amount as may from time to time be determined by ordinary resolution of Lloyds Banking Group plc. Such ordinary remuneration is (unless otherwise provided by ordinary resolution of Lloyds Banking Group plc) divisible among the directors as they may agree, or, failing agreement, equally. However, any director who holds office for only part of the period in respect of which remuneration is payable shall be entitled only to rank in such division for a proportion of the remuneration relating to the period during which he has held office.

Any director who holds an executive office, or who serves on any committee of the directors, or who otherwise performs services which in the opinion of the directors are outside the scope of the ordinary duties of a director, may be paid extra remuneration by way of salary, commission or otherwise or may receive such other benefits as the directors may determine in their discretion. Such extra remuneration or other benefits are in addition to, or in substitution for, any or all of a director’s entitlement to ordinary remuneration.

Where proposals are under consideration concerning the appointment (including fixing or varying the terms of appointment) of two or more directors to offices or employments with Lloyds Banking Group plc (or any body corporate in which Lloyds Banking Group plc is interested), the proposals may be divided and considered in relation to each director separately. In such case, each of the directors concerned shall be entitled to vote, and be counted in the quorum, in respect of each resolution except that concerning his own appointment or the fixing or variation of the terms thereof.

The directors may repay to any director all such reasonable expenses as he may incur in attending and returning from meetings of the directors or of any committee of the directors or general meetings or otherwise in connection with the business of Lloyds Banking Group plc. The directors have the power to pay and agree to pay gratuities, pensions or other retirement, superannuation, death or disability benefits to, or to any person in respect of, any director or ex-director.

ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATIONS

Subject to and in accordance with statute, Lloyds Banking Group plc has the right to offer shareholders the opportunity to have documents and information made available to them through Lloyds Banking Group plc’s website and in electronic form.https://www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/globalassets/documents/investors/2018/2018_lbg_form_20f.pdf

 

EXCHANGE CONTROLS

 

There are no UK laws, decrees or regulations that restrict Lloyds Banking Group plc’s exportimport or importexport of capital, including the availability of cash and cash equivalents for use by Lloyds Banking Group, or that affect the remittance of dividends, interest or other shareholders’ payments to non-UK holders of Lloyds Banking Group plc shares, except as set out inTaxation.

192176

TAXATION

 

UK TAXATION

 

The following discussion is intended only as a general guide to current UK and US federal income tax legislation, whatconsiderations relevant to US holders (as defined below in the section on US federal income tax considerations) of Lloyds Banking Group ordinary shares or ADSs. It is understood to bebased on current UK HM Revenue & Customslaw and tax authority practice and the terms of the current UK/US income tax treaty (the Treaty), all of which are subject to change at any time, possibly with retroactive effect.

 

The Treaty for the avoidance of double taxation with respect to taxes on income entered into force following the exchange of instruments of ratification by the UK Parliament and the US Senate on 31 March 2003.

 

The UK HM Revenue & CustomsThis summary does not consider your personal circumstances, and it is the UK government department responsiblenot a substitute for assessing and collecting UK tax revenues. The discussion is intended as a general guide and only applies to persons who are the beneficial owners of their ordinary shares or ADSs. References below to a US holder are to that term as defined, and subject to the exclusions described in the introduction below underUS federal income tax considerations. It may not apply to certain shareholders or ADS holders, such as dealers in securities.

Tax can be complicated and individual circumstances may need to be considered in more detail.advice. Any person who is in any doubt as to his tax position should consult his own professional adviser.

 

UK TAXATION OF CHARGEABLE GAINS

UK RESIDENTS

A disposal (or deemed disposal) of ordinary shares or ADSs by a shareholder or holder of ADSs resident or (in the case of an individual) ordinarily resident for tax purposes in the UK may, depending on the shareholder’s or ADS holder’s particular circumstances, and subject to any available exemption or relief, give rise to a chargeable gain or an allowable loss for the purposes of UK taxation on chargeable gains.

INDIVIDUALS, OTHER THAN US HOLDERS, TEMPORARILY NON-RESIDENT IN THE UK

A shareholder or ADS holder who is an individual and who has, on or after 17 March 1998, ceased to be resident and ordinarily resident for tax purposes in the UK for a period of five years or less of assessment and who disposes of ordinary shares or ADSs during that period may be liable, on return to the UK, to UK taxation on chargeable gains arising during the period of absence, subject to any available exemption, relief and/or foreign tax credit.

US HOLDERS

 

Subject to the provisions set out in the next paragraph in relation to temporary non-residents, US holders generally will not be liable for UK tax on chargeable gains unless they carry on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK through a branch or agency and the ordinary shares or ADSs are or have been used or held by or for the purposes of the branch or agency, in which case such US holder might, depending on individual circumstances, be liable to UK tax on chargeable gains on any disposition of ordinary shares or ADSs.

 

An individual US holder who is only temporarily not resident in the UK may, under anti-avoidance legislation, still be liable for UK tax on chargeable gains realised, subject to any available exemption, relief and/or foreign tax credit.

 

A US holder who is an individual and who has, on or after 17 March 1998, ceased to be resident or ordinarily resident for tax purposes in the UK for a period of five years or lessfewer years of assessment and who disposes of ordinary shares or ADSs during that period may be liable, on return to the UK, to UK taxation on chargeable gains arising during the period of absence, subject to any available exemption, relief and/or foreign tax credit.

 

OTHER NON-UK RESIDENT PERSONS

Subject to the provisions set out above underIndividuals, other than US holders, temporarily non-resident in the UK, shareholders or ADS holders who are neither resident nor ordinarily resident in the UK generally will not be liable for UK tax on chargeable gains unless they carry on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK through a branch or agency and the ordinary shares or ADSs are or have been used or held by or for the purposes of the branch or agency, in which case such shareholders or ADS holders might, depending on individual circumstances, be liable to UK tax on chargeable gains on any disposition of ordinary shares or ADSs. An individual holder of ordinary shares or ADSs who is only temporarily not resident in the UK may, under anti-avoidance legislation, still be liable for UK tax on chargeable gains realised, subject to any available exemption, relief and/or foreign tax credit.

TAXATION OF DIVIDENDS

UK RESIDENTS

Lloyds Banking Group plc will not be required to withhold tax at source when paying a dividend on the ordinary shares or ADSs.

Up until April 2016, an individual shareholder or ADS holder who is resident in the UK for tax purposes was entitled to a tax credit in respect of any dividend received from Lloyds Banking Group plc and will be taxable on the gross dividend, which is the aggregate of the dividend received and related tax credit. The value of the tax credit will be equal to one-ninth of the dividend received (and, therefore, 10 per cent of the gross dividend). The gross dividend will be treated as an individual’s marginal taxable income. The tax credit will, however, be treated as discharging the individual’s liability to income tax in respect of the gross dividend, unless and except to the extent that the gross dividend falls above the threshold for the higher rate of income tax. A UK resident individual shareholder or ADS holder who is liable to income tax at the higher rate or additional rate (higher rate is 40 per cent for the 2015-2016 and 2016-2017 tax years and additional rate is 45 per cent for the 2015-2016 and 2016-2017 tax years) will be subject to tax at the rate applicable to dividends for such shareholders or ADS holders (32.5 per cent for higher rate taxpayers for the 2015-2016 tax year, 37.5 per cent for additional rate taxpayers for the 2015-16 tax year) on the gross dividend. The tax credit will be set against but will not fully discharge such shareholders’ or ADS holders’ tax liability on the gross dividend and they will have to pay additional tax. The additional tax is 22.5 per cent of the gross dividend for higher rate taxpayers and 27.5 per cent for additional rate taxpayers for the 2015-16 tax year.

There will be no payment of the tax credit or any part of it to an individual whose liability to income tax on the dividend and the related tax credit is less than the tax credit.

After April 2016, the 10 per cent tax credit will be replaced with a £5,000 tax free dividend allowance. Dividends received above the allowance will be taxed at 7.5 per cent to the extent that the dividend falls within the threshold for basic rate of income tax. A UK resident individual shareholder or ADS holder who is liable to income tax at the higher rate or additional rate will be subject to tax at the rate applicable to dividends for such shareholders or ADS holders (32.5 per cent for higher rate taxpayers and 38.1 per cent for additional rate taxpayers for the 2016-2017 tax year) on dividends received.

193

TAXATION

UK resident shareholders or ADS holders who are not liable to UK tax on dividends, including pension funds and charities, will not be entitled to the payment of any tax credits in respect of dividends.

Subject to certain exceptions, such as for dealers in securities and for some insurance companies with overseas business, UK resident corporate shareholders or ADS holders will generally not be subject to corporation tax in respect of dividends received from Lloyds Banking Group plc, but will not be entitled to the payment of any tax credit with respect to the dividends.

Shareholders who are within the charge to corporation tax will be subject to corporation tax on dividends paid by the Company, unless (subject to special rules for such shareholders that are small companies) the dividends fall within an exempt class and certain other conditions are met. It is expected that the dividends paid by the Company would generally be exempt. Such shareholders will not be able to claim repayment of tax credits attaching to dividends.

US HOLDERS

 

Lloyds Banking Group plc will not be required to withhold tax at source when paying a dividend on the ordinary shares or ADSs to a US holder. US holders of ADSs or ordinary shares who receive a dividend from Lloyds Banking Group plc will not have any UK tax to pay in respect of the dividend.

 

OTHER NON-UK RESIDENT PERSONS

Lloyds Banking Group plc will not be required to withhold tax at source when paying a dividend on the ordinary shares or ADSs to a holder, other than a US holder, who is not resident for tax purposes in the UK.

Holders of ordinary shares or ADSs, other than US holders, who are not resident for tax purposes in the UK and who receive a dividend from Lloyds Banking Group plc will not have any UK tax to pay in respect of the dividend, but will not normally be able to claim any additional payment in respect of the dividend from the UK HM Revenue & Customs under any applicable Double Tax Treaty.

STAMP DUTY AND STAMP DUTY RESERVE TAX

UK RESIDENTS, US HOLDERS AND OTHER NON-UK RESIDENT PERSONS

 

Any conveyance or transfer on sale of ordinary shares (whether effected using the CREST settlement system or not) will be subject to UK stamp duty or stamp duty reserve tax (SDRT). The transfer on sale of ordinary shares will be liable to ad valorem UK stamp duty or SDRT, generally at the rate of 0.5 per cent of the consideration paid (rounded up to the next multiple of £5 in the case of stamp duty). Stamp duty is usually the liability of the purchaser or transferee of the ordinary shares. An unconditional agreement to transfer such ordinary shares will be liable to SDRT, generally at the rate of 0.5 per cent of the consideration paid, but such liability will be cancelled, or, if already paid, refunded, if the agreement is completed by a duly stamped transfer within six years of the agreement having become unconditional. SDRT is normally the liability of the purchaser or transferee of the ordinary shares.

 

WhereUK tax law requires that when Lloyds Banking Group plc issues ordinary shares or a holder of ordinary shares transfers such shares to the custodian or nominee for the depositary to facilitate the issue of ADSs to a person representing the ordinary shares or to a person providing clearance services (or their nominee or agent), a liability to UK stamp duty or SDRT at the rate of 1.5 per cent (rounded up to the next multiple of £5 in the case of the stamp duty) of either the issue price or, in the case of transfer, the listed price of the ordinary shares, calculated in sterling, will arise. However, following the case before the European Court of Justice (Case C-569/07 HSBC Holdings plc and Vidacos Nominees v The Commissioners for HM Revenue & Customs)litigation, HMRC now accepts that the charge to SDRT at 1.5 per cent on the issue of shares into clearance services or depository receipt schemes is prohibited.not compatible with EU law, and will not apply the charge. Where a holder of ordinary shares transfers such shares to the custodian or nominee for the depositary or clearance services this charge will apply, and generally be payable by the person receiving the ADSs or transferring the ordinary shares into the clearance service.

 

No liability to stamp duty or SDRT will arise as a result of the cancellation of any ADSs with the ordinary shares that they represent being transferred to the ADS holder.

 

No liability to UK stamp duty or SDRT will arise on a transfer of ADSs provided that any document that effectsgives effect to such transfer is not executed in the UK and that it remains at all subsequent times outside the UK. An agreement to transfer ADSs will not give rise to a liability to SDRT.

 

US FEDERAL INCOME TAX CONSIDERATIONS

 

The following summary describes material US federal income tax consequences of the ownership and disposition of ADSs or ordinary shares to the US holders described below, but it does not purport to be a comprehensive description of all of the tax considerations that may be relevant to a decision to own such securities. The summary applies only to US holders that hold ADSs or ordinary shares as capital assets for US federal income tax purposes.

This discussion does not address any alternative minimum or Medicare Contribution tax consequences, nor does it address US federal tax consequences to US holders that are subject to special rules, such as:

 

certain financial institutions;
  
dealers or traders in securities that use a mark-to-market method of tax accounting;
  
persons holding ADSs or ordinary shares as part of a hedge, straddle, wash sale, conversion or other integrated transaction or holders entering into a constructive sale with respect to ADSs or ordinary shares;
  
persons whose functional currency for US federal income tax purposes is not the US dollar;
  
persons who acquired ADSs or ordinary shares pursuant to the exercise of any employee stock option or otherwise as compensation;
  
tax-exempt entities, including ‘individual retirement accounts’ or ‘Roth IRAs’;
  
persons holding ADSs or ordinary shares in connection with a trade or business conducted outside of the United States;
  
partnerships or other entities classified as partnerships for US federal income tax purposes; or
177

TAXATION

persons that own or are deemed to own 10 per cent or more (by vote or value) of the voting shares of Lloyds Banking Group plc.

 

If an entity that is classified as a partnership for US federal income tax purposes holds ADSs or ordinary shares, the US federal income tax treatment of a partner will generally depend on the status of the partner and the activities of the partnership. Partnerships holding ADSs or ordinary shares and partners

194

TAXATION

in such partnerships should consult their tax advisers as to the particular US federal income tax consequences of holding and disposing of the ADSs or ordinary shares.

 

This summary is based on the US Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the Code), administrative pronouncements, judicial decisions and final, temporary and proposed Treasury Regulations, as well as the Treaty, all as of the date hereof, changes to any of which may affect the tax consequences described herein, possibly with retroactive effect. It is also based in part on representations of the depositary and assumes that each obligation provided for in or otherwise contemplated by the Deposit Agreement or any other related document will be performed in accordance with its terms.

 

As used herein, a ‘US holder’ is a person that for US federal income tax purposes is a beneficial owner of ADSs or ordinary shares that is, for US federal income tax purposes:and:

 

a citizen or individual resident of the United States;
  
a corporation, or other entity taxable as a corporation, created or organised in or under the laws of the United States, any state therein or the District of Columbia; or
  
an estate or trust the income of which is subject to US federal income taxation regardless of its source.

 

In general, a US holder who owns ADSs should be treated as the owner of the underlying shares represented by those ADSs for US federal income tax purposes. Accordingly, no gain or loss should be recognised if a US holder exchanges ADSs for the underlying shares represented by those ADSs.

 

The US Treasury has expressed concerns that parties to whom American depositary shares are released before shares are delivered to the depositary (‘pre-release’), or intermediaries in the chain of ownership between holders and the issuer of the security underlying the American depositary shares, may be taking actions that are inconsistent with the claiming of foreign tax credits by US holders of American depositary shares. Such actions would also be inconsistent with the claiming of the reduced rate of tax applicable to dividends received by certain non-corporate US holders. Accordingly, the availability of the preferential tax rate for dividends received by certain non-corporate US holders, described below, could be affected by actions taken by such parties or intermediaries.

 

Owners of ADSs or ordinary shares should consult their tax advisers as to the US, UK or other tax consequences of the ownership and disposition of such securities in their particular circumstances, including the effect of any US state or local tax laws.

 

TAXATION OF DISTRIBUTIONS

 

Distributions paid on ADSs or ordinary shares, other than certain pro rata distributions of ordinary shares, will generally be treated as dividends to the extent paid out of Lloyds Banking Group plc’s current or accumulated earnings and profits (as determined in accordance with US federal income tax principles). Because Lloyds Banking Group plc does not maintain calculations of its earnings and profits under US federal income tax principles, it is expected that distributions generally will be reported to US holders as dividends. The dividends will generally be foreign-source income to US holders and will not be eligible for the dividends-received deduction generally allowed to US corporations under the Code.

 

Subject to applicable limitations and the discussion above regarding concerns expressed by the US Treasury, dividends paid to certain non-corporate US holders may be taxable at favourable rates. Non-corporate US holders should consult their tax advisers to determine whether the favourable rates will apply to dividends they receive and whether they are subject to any special rules that limit their ability to be taxed at these favourable rates.

 

Dividends will be included in a US Holder’s income on the date of the US Holder’s or, in the case of ADSs, the depositary’s receipt of the dividend. The amount of a dividend will equal the US dollar value of the pounds sterling received, calculated by reference to the exchange rate in effect on the date of receipt regardless of whether the payment is converted into US dollars on the date of receipt. If the pounds sterling received as a dividend are not converted into US dollars on the date of receipt, then the US holder’s tax basis in the pounds sterling received will equal such US dollar value and the US holder may realise a foreign exchange gain or loss on the subsequent conversion into US dollars. Generally, any gains or losses resulting from the conversion of pounds sterling into US dollars will be treated as US-source ordinary income or loss.

 

TAXATION OF CAPITAL GAINS

 

Gain or loss realised by a US holder on a sale or other disposition of ADSs or ordinary shares will generally be subject to US federal income tax as capital gain or loss in an amount equal to the difference between the US holder’s tax basis in the ADSs or ordinary shares disposed of and the amount realised on the disposition, in each case as determined in US dollars. Gains or losses, if any, will generally be US-source and will be long-term if the US Holder held the ADSs or ordinary shares for more than one year. The deductibility of losses is subject to limitations.

 

INFORMATION REPORTING AND BACKUP WITHHOLDING

 

Dividends paid on, and the sale proceeds from, ADSs or ordinary shares that are made within the US or through certain US-related financial intermediaries may be subject to information reporting and backup withholding requirements unless the US holder:

 

is a corporation or other exempt recipient, or
  
in the case of backup withholding, the US holder provides a correct taxpayer identification number and certifies that it is not subject to backup withholding.

 

The amount of any backup withholding from a payment to a US holder will be allowed as a credit against the US holder’s US federal income tax liability and may entitle it to a refund, provided that the required information is timely furnished to the Internal Revenue Service.

195178

WHERE YOU CAN FIND MORE INFORMATION

 

The documents concerning the Lloyds Banking Group which are referred to herein may be inspected at the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC). You may read and copy any document filed or furnished by the Group at the SEC’s public reference room in Washington D.C., at 100 F Street, N.E., Washington D.C. 20549. Please call the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330 for further information on the reference rooms. The SEC also maintains a website at www.sec.gov which contains, in electronic form, each of the reports and other information that the Group has filed electronically with the SEC.

References herein to Lloyds Banking Group websites are textual references only and information on or accessible through such websites does not form part of and is not incorporated into this Form 20-F.

 

ENFORCEABILITY OF CIVIL LIABILITIES

 

Lloyds Banking Group plc is a public limited company incorporated under the laws of Scotland. Most of Lloyds Banking Group plc’s directors and executive officers and certain of the experts named herein are residents of the UK. A substantial portion of the assets of Lloyds Banking Group plc, its subsidiaries and such persons, are located outside the United States. As a result, it may not be possible for investors to effect service of process within the United States upon all such persons or to enforce against them in US courts judgments obtained in such courts, including those predicated upon the civil liability provisions of the federal securities laws of the United States. Furthermore, Lloyds Banking Group plc has been advised by its solicitors that there is doubt as to the enforceability in the UK, in original actions or in actions for enforcement of judgments of US courts, of certain civil liabilities, including those predicated solely upon the federal securities laws of the United States.

196179

RISK FACTORS

 

Set out below areis a summary of certain risk factors which could affect Lloyds Banking Group’s future results and may cause them to differ from expected results in material respects.materially. The factors discussed below should not be regarded as a complete and comprehensive statement of all potential risks and uncertainties that Lloyds Banking Group’s businesses face. This section should be read in conjunction with the more detailed information contained in this document, including as set forth in sections entitled “Business”, “Regulation” and “Operating and financial review and prospects”. For information on Lloyds Banking Group’s risk management policies and procedures (including the elevation of certain existing risks to principal risks during 2019), see Lloyds“Lloyds Banking GroupOperating and financial review and prospects—prospects — Risk ManagementManagement”.

 

CREDIT-RELATEDECONOMIC AND FINANCIAL RISKS

1.The Group’s businesses are subject to inherent and indirect risks arising from general macroeconomic conditions in the UK in particular, but also in the Eurozone, the U.S., Asia and globally

 

The Group’s businesses are subject to inherent and indirect risks concerning borrowerarising from general and sector-specific economic conditions in the markets in which it operates, particularly the UK, where the Group’s earnings are predominantly generated, and the Group’s operations are increasingly concentrated following the strategic reduction of its international presence. Whilst the Group’s revenues are predominantly generated in the United Kingdom, the Group does have some credit exposure in countries outside the UK even if it does not have direct exposure or a presence in such countries. Any significant macroeconomic deterioration in the UK and/or other economies such as the slowing of economic growth significantly below long-term average levels, rising unemployment, reduced corporate profitability, reduced personal income levels, inflationary pressures, including those arising from the sterling’s depreciation, reduced UK Government and/or consumer expenditure, increased corporate, SME or personal insolvency rates, borrowers’ reduced ability to repay loans, increased tenant defaults, fluctuations in commodity prices and changes in foreign exchange rates could have a material adverse effect on the results of operations, financial condition or prospects of the Group.

In the Eurozone for example, the pace of economic recovery, which has lagged behind that of other advanced countries following the global recession, has started to slow. High levels of private and public debt, continued weakness in the financial sector and reform fatigue remain a concern. Conversely, further monetary policy stimulus from the European Central Bank could undermine financial stability by encouraging a further build-up of unsustainable debt. In addition, increased political uncertainty in the Eurozone, and fragmentation risk in the EU and UK, could create financial instability and have a negative impact on the Eurozone and global economies. Any default on the sovereign debt of a Eurozone country and the resulting impact on other Eurozone countries, including the potential that some countries could leave the Eurozone, could materially affect the capital and the funding position of participants in the banking industry, including the Group.

Moreover, the effects on the UK, European and global economies of the exit of one or more EU member states from the Economic and Monetary Union, or the redenomination of financial instruments from the Euro to a different currency, are extremely uncertain and very difficult to predict and protect fully against in view of: (i) the potential for economic and financial instability in the Eurozone and possibly in the UK; (ii) the lasting impact on governments’ financial positions of the global financial crisis; (iii) the uncertain legal position; and (iv) the fact that many of the risks related to the business are totally, or in part, outside the control of the Group. If any such events were to occur, they may result in: (a) significant market dislocation; (b) heightened counterparty credit qualityrisk; (c) an adverse effect on the management of market risk and, in particular, asset and liability management due, in part, to redenomination of financial assets and liabilities; (d) an indirect risk of counterparty failure; or (e) further political uncertainty in the UK or other countries, any of which could have affecteda material adverse effect on the results of operations, financial condition or prospects of the Group.

In addition, the effects on the UK, European and global economies of the uncertainties arising from the results of the referendum and the process of the UK’s exit from the EU are difficult to predict but may include economic and financial instability in the UK, Europe and the global economy and the other types of risks described in “Regulatory and Legal Risks– Legal and regulatory risk arising from the UK’s exit from the European Union could adversely impact the Group’s business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects”. In the event of any substantial weakening in the UK’s economic growth, the possible policy of decreases in interest rates by the Bank of England or sustained low or negative interest rates would put further pressure on the Group’s interest margins and adversely affect the Group’s profitability and prospects. Furthermore, such market conditions may also result in an increase in the Group’s pension deficit.

In addition, whilst it is possible that the current U.S. administration’s economic policies might have an adverse effect on U.S. and global growth as well as global trade prospects, it is also possible that expansionary policies could boost U.S. and international growth temporarily at a time of limited spare capacity resulting in higher U.S. inflation and interest rates which could in turn significantly impact global investor risk appetite and pricing expectations, sparking elevated financial market volatility and a tightening of financial conditions. Concerns remain around the impact of increased tariffs on trade between the U.S. and other nations including China, Canada and the EU. The potential for escalation of trade disputes and any retaliatory actions taken may adversely impact the recoverabilityglobal economic outlook.

Developing macroeconomic uncertainty in emerging markets, in particular the slowdown of international trade and valueindustrial production, the high and growing level of assetsdebt in China and the risk of a sharp slowdown in Chinese economic growth, which may be exacerbated by attempts to de-risk its highly leveraged economy, or a devaluation of the Renminbi could pose threats to global economic recovery. External debt levels are higher now in emerging markets than before the global financial crisis, which could lead to higher levels of defaults and non-performing loans, in particular in an environment of rising interest rates.

Any adverse changes affecting the economies of the countries in which the Group has significant direct and indirect credit exposures and any further deterioration in global macroeconomic conditions, including as a result of geopolitical events, global health issues, acts of war or terrorism, could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s balance sheet.results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

2.The Group’s businesses are subject to inherent risks concerning borrower and counterparty credit quality which have affected and may adversely impact the recoverability and value of assets on the Group’s balance sheet

The Group has exposures (including, but not limited to, lending, undrawn commitments, derivative, equity, contingent and/or settlement risks) to many different products, counterparties, obligors and obligorsother contractual relationships and the credit quality of its exposures can have a significant impact on the Group’s earnings. Credit risk exposures are categorised as either “retail”, arising primarily in the Retail, Consumer Finance or “corporate” and parts of the Run-Off divisions, and small and medium-sized enterprises (SME) and “corporate” (including medium and large corporates, banks, financial institutions and sovereigns), arising primarily in the Commercial Banking, Run-Off and Insurance divisions. This reflectsreflect the risks inherent in the Group’s lending and lending-related activities and in theits insurance business primarily in respect of investment holdings (including loan assets) and exposures to reinsurers.

Adverse changes in the credit quality of the Group’s UK and/or international borrowers and counterparties or collateral held in support of exposures, or in their behaviour or businesses, may reduce the value of the Group’s assets and materially increase the Group’s write-downs and allowances for impairment losses. Credit risk can be affected by a range of factors outside the Group’s control, which include but are not limited to an adverse economic environment, (in thereduced UK and/or in countries where the Group and/or its customers/counterparties do and do not operate, such as any adverse economic effects that could occur in connection with the UK’s exit from the EU following the referendum decision), reduced UKglobal consumer and/or government spending (in light of the Group’s concentration in the UK), global economic slowdown leading to constraints on liquidity (given continued concerns around the Eurozone, adverse economic environments in China and emerging markets and other macro-economic issues),benefits, inflation, changes in the credit rating of individual

180

RISK FACTORS

counterparties, (including sovereigns), the debt levels of individual contractual counterparties, and the economic environment in which they operate, increased unemployment, reduced asset values, increased personal or corporate insolvency levels, adverse sector concerns, falling stock and bond/other financial markets, reduced corporate profits, over-indebtedness, (including sovereigns), changes (and the timing, quantum and pace of these changes) in interest rates (including the potential increase in the use of negative interest rates), and any subsequent impact on pension liabilities, volatility of oil and commodity prices, changes inor foreign exchange rates, higher tenant defaults, counterparty challenges to the interpretation or validity of contractual arrangements, an increase in credit spreads, changes to insolvency regimes makingwhich make it harder to enforce against counterparties, changes in consumer and customer demands and requirements, negative reputational impact of technological disruption or cybercrimedirect campaigns which adversely impact customers, industries or sectors and any external factors of a political, legislative, environmental or regulatory nature, including for example, rising “living wage” requirements, changes in accounting rules and changes to tax changes relatinglegislation and rates.

In particular, the Group has exposure to buy-to-let investments inconcentration risk where its business activities focus particularly on a single obligor, related/connected group of obligors or a similar type of customer (borrower, sovereign, financial institution or central counterparty), product, industrial sector or geographic location, including the UK.

 

The EU referendum decision has heightened the probability of some or all of these events happening and adds further uncertainty to counterparty credit risk and the Group’s financial condition. Key related risks which may impact the Group’s business and/or the Group’s clients’ businesses include, but are not limited to: weaker sterling, volatility in financial markets, a downgrade of the UK credit rating, inflation risk, prolonged low or rising interest rates, impact on European sovereigns and counterparties, reduced consumer spending, dampened confidence, loss and/or postponement of foreign direct investment and domestic direct investment, political uncertainty, potential wider European political instability, uncertainty around trade negotiations and/or the UK’s ability to retain access to the single market, passporting and free movement and cost of labour, relocation of companies and institutions away from the UK, and the withdrawal and/or reduction of EU funding. For more detail on the EU referendum decision see “—Business and Economic Risks— Political, legal, regulatory, constitutional and economic uncertainty arising from the outcome of the referendum on the UK’s membership of the EU could adversely impact the Group’s business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects” below. For further information on general macro-economic risks affecting the Group in the UK and the EU see “— Business and Economic Risks— The Group’s businesses are subject to inherent and indirect risks arising from general macro-economic conditions in the UK, the US, the Eurozone, Asia and globally, and any resulting instability of financial markets or banking systems”.

There are many other factors that could impact credit risk including fraud, natural disasters, flooding, industrial and strike action, war and acts of terrorism.

The Group has credit exposure both in the UK and internationally, including Europe, the US and Asia. The Group’s credit exposure includes residential mortgage lending (in the UK and, to a lesser extent, Ireland and Thethe Netherlands) and commercial real estate lending, including commercial real estate lending secured against secondary and tertiary non-primecommercial assets in the UK. The Group also has significant credit exposureAs a result, decreases in residential or commercial property values and/or increases in tenant defaults are likely to certain individual counterparties inlead to higher risk and cyclical asset classes and sectors (such as leveraged lending, oil and gas and related sectors, commodities trading, manufacturing (including auto manufacturers), construction, retail and outsourcing services) and weakened geographic markets and to counterparties whose businesses may be impacted by material unforeseen events. In addition, the Group has concentrated country exposure in the UK and within certain industry sectors, namely real estate and real estate-related sectors and financial intermediation including providing facilities to funds, mainly against high quality (investment grade equivalent) investors. Certain industry sectors have been adversely impacted by recent global economic events; for example the oil and gas and related sectors, manufacturing (including auto manufacturers) and commodities trading and such adverse developments in these sectors increases the risk of default byimpairment charges, which could materially affect the Group’s customers in these sectors.results of operations, financial condition or prospects. The Group’s retail customer portfolios (including those in the Retail, Consumer Finance and Run-Off divisions) will remain strongly linked to the UK economic environment, with house price deterioration, unemployment increases, inflationary pressures, consumer over-indebtedness and prolonged low or rising interest rates among the factors that may impact secured and unsecured retail credit exposures.

In recent years, a number of factors, such as Eurozone instability (including the risk of economic stagnation/deflation Deterioration in the Eurozone or of one or more members leaving the Eurozone), the deterioration of capital market conditions, the global economic slowdown (given slowdown in economic growth across China and emerging markets and other macro-economic issues) and measures adopted by the governments of individual countries, have reduced and could further reduce households’ disposable income and businesses’ profitability. In the UK, the sterling’s depreciation is expected to squeeze households’ real incomes by pushing up import prices. If such volatile conditions were to continue or increase, this could also have a negative impact on customers’ ability to honour their obligations, which in turn would result in deterioration of the Group’s credit quality. If political conditions or uncertainty over the Eurozone, or the UK Government and Eurozone austerity measures and public spending cuts, result in a prolonged period of economic stagnation for the UK or Eurozone, or a slowdown in the rate of economic recovery, or there is a broader economic slowdown, it may lead to further weakening of counterparty credit quality and subsequent higher impairment charges or fair value reductions in the Group’s lending and contingent equity and derivative portfolios. This could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

197

RISK FACTORS

The possibility of prolonged economic stagnation in the EU or the risk of one or more members leaving the EU (including the UK’s exit from the EU following the referendum decision), or the risk of a Eurozone member leaving the Eurozone, could impact the UK’s own economic recovery, given the extensive trade links between the UK and the Eurozone/EU and in turn, this could impact upon the Group’s performance. The Group has credit exposure to SMEs and corporates, financial institutions and securities which may have material direct and indirect exposures in the Eurozone countries. Any default on the sovereign debt of these countries and the resulting impact on other Eurozone countries,used vehicle prices, including the potential that some countries could leave the Eurozone, could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s business.

At present, default rates are partly cushioned by low rates of interest which have helped customer affordability, but the risk remains of increased default rates as interest rates start to rise. The timing, quantum and pace of any change in interest rates is a key risk factor for the Group’s default rates with expectations on the timing and quantum of any changes set by the Bank of England and also by the relevant central bank when lending in a foreign currency.

All new lending is dependent on the Group’s assessment of each customer’s ability to repay and the value of any underlying security. There is an inherent risk that the Group has incorrectly assessed the credit quality and/or the ability or willingness of borrowers to repay, possibly as a result of incomplete changing consumer demand, could result in increased provisions and/or inaccurate disclosure by those borrowers losses and/or as a result of the inherent uncertainty that is involved in the exercise of constructing models to estimate the true risk of lending to counterparties.accelerated depreciation charges. The Group estimates and establishes reserves foralso has significant credit risks and potential credit losses inherent in its credit exposure. This process, which is critical to the Group’s results and financial condition, requires difficult, subjective and complex judgements, including forecasts of how macro-economic conditions might impair the ability of borrowers to repay their loans. As is the case with any such assessments, there is always a risk that the Group will fail to adequately identify the relevant factors or that it will fail to estimate accurately the impact of these identified factors.

Concentration of credit and market risk could increase the Group’s potential for significant losses including in an adverse market/environment.

The Group has exposure to concentrationcertain individual counterparties in higher risk where its business activities focus particularly on a single obligor or a similar type of customer (borrower, sovereign, financial institution or central counterparty), product, industrial sector or geographic location, including the UK.

The Group has significant exposure to the UK residential mortgage market. Additionally, the Group has large sectorial concentrations (primarily in gilts,and cyclical asset classes and sectors (such as commercial real estate, and real estate-related lending, and financial intermediation, including providing facilities to funds, mainly against high quality (investment grade equivalent) investors and to a lesser extent,manufacturing, leveraged lending, oil and gas and related sectors, manufacturing (including auto manufacturers)hotels, commodities trading, automotive and related sectors, construction, agriculture, consumer-related sectors (such as retail and leisure), agriculturehousebuilders and leveraged lending), as well as significant global credit exposure.

The Group has significant real estate and real estate-related exposure, including secondary and tertiary non-prime assets, meaning that decreases in residential or commercial property values and/or increases in tenant defaults are likely to lead to higher impairment charges, which could materially affect the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.outsourcing services).

 

The Group’s corporate lending portfolio also contains substantial exposure to large and mid-sized, public and private companies. Exposures to sectors that have experienced cyclical weakness in recent years, coupled with a historic strategy of taking large single name concentrations to non-listed companies and entrepreneurs, and taking exposure at various levels of the capital structure, may give rise to (albeit reducing) single name and risk capital exposure. Whilst expectation of default for these exposures is appropriately provided for within the Group’s base case assumptions, they remain vulnerable to downside risks. As in the UK, the Group’s lending business overseas is also exposed to a small number of long-term customer relationships and these single name concentrations place the Group at risk of loss should default occur.

The Group’s efforts Any disruption to continue to divest, diversify or manage its credit portfolio against concentration risks may not be successful and any concentration of credit risk could increase the potential for significant losses in its credit portfolio. In addition, any disruption in the liquidity or transparency of the financial markets may result in the Group’s inability to sell or syndicate securities, loans or other instruments or positions held (including underwrites)through underwriting), thereby leading to increased concentrations of suchin these positions. These concentrations could expose the Group to losses if the mark-to-market value of the securities, loans or other instruments or positions declines causing the Group to take write-downs. Moreover, the inability to reduce the Group’s positions not only increases the market and credit risks associated with such positions, but also increases the level of risk-weighted assets on the Group’s balance sheet, thereby increasing its capital requirements and funding costs, all of which could materially adversely affect the Group’s operating results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

The Group’s corporate portfolios are also susceptible to “fallen angel” risk, that is, the probability of significant default increases significantly following material unexpected events, resulting in the potential for large losses. These types of events can occur from time

In addition, all lending decisions, and decisions related to time, and may include for example, major fraud, poor corporate governance, high profile incidents and collapse in specific sectorsother exposures (including, but not limited to, undrawn commitments, derivative, equity, contingent and/ or products, all of whichsettlement risks), are very difficult to forecast, and could adversely impactdependent on the Group’s resultsassessment of operations, financial condition each customer’s ability to repay and the value of any underlying security. There is an inherent risk that the Group has incorrectly assessed the credit quality and/or prospects.the ability or willingness of borrowers to repay, possibly as a result of incomplete or inaccurate disclosure by those borrowers or as a result of the inherent uncertainty that is involved in the exercise of constructing and using models to estimate the risk of lending to counterparties.

3.The Group’s businesses are subject to inherent risks concerning liquidity and funding, particularly if the availability of traditional sources of funding such as retail deposits or the access to wholesale funding markets becomes more limited

Liquidity and funding continues to remain a key area of focus for the Group and the industry as a whole. Like all major banks, the Group is dependent on confidence in the short and long-term wholesale funding markets. The Group relies on customer savings and transmission balances, as well as ongoing access to the global wholesale funding markets to meet its funding needs. The ability of the Group to gain access to wholesale and retail funding sources on satisfactory economic terms is subject to a number of factors outside its control, such as liquidity constraints, general market conditions, regulatory requirements, the encouraged or mandated repatriation of deposits by foreign wholesale or central bank depositors and the level of confidence in the UK banking system.

The Group’s profitability or solvency could be adversely affected if access to liquidity and funding is constrained, made more expensive for a prolonged period of time or if the Group experiences an unusually high and unforeseen level of withdrawals. In such circumstances, the Group may not be in a position to continue to operate or meet its regulatory minimum liquidity requirements without additional funding support, which it may be unable to access (including government and central bank facilities).

 

The Group is also subject to the risk of deterioration of the commercial soundness and/or perceived soundness of other financial services institutions within and outside the UK. Financial services institutions that deal with each other are interrelated as a result of trading, investment, clearing, counterparty and other relationships. This presents systemic risk and may be requiredadversely affect financial intermediaries, such as clearing agencies, clearing houses, banks, securities firms and exchanges with which the Group interacts on a daily basis, any of which could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s ability to record credit value adjustments, funding value adjustments and debit value adjustments on its derivative portfolio,raise new funding. A default by, or even concerns about the financial resilience of, one or more financial services institutions could lead to further significant systemic liquidity problems, or losses or defaults by other financial institutions, which could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

Corporate and institutional counterparties may also seek to reduce aggregate credit exposures to the Group (or to all banks) which could increase the Group’s cost of funding and limit its access to liquidity. The funding structure employed by the Group may also prove to be inefficient, thus giving rise to a level of funding cost where the cumulative costs are not sustainable over the longer term.

In addition, medium-term growth in the Group’s lending activities will rely, in part, on the availability of retail deposit funding on appropriate terms, which is dependent on a variety of factors outside the Group’s control, such as general macroeconomic conditions and market volatility, the confidence of retail depositors in the economy, the financial services industry and the Group, as well as the availability and extent of deposit guarantees. Increases in the cost of retail deposit funding will impact on the Group’s margins and affect profit, and a lack of availability of retail deposit funding could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s future growth. Any loss in consumer confidence in the Group could significantly increase the amount of retail deposit withdrawals in a short period of time. See “Economic and Financial Risks – The Group’s businesses are subject to inherent and indirect risks arising from general macroeconomic conditions in the UK in particular, but also in the Eurozone, the U.S., Asia and globally”.

181

RISK FACTORS

In recent years, the Group has also made use of central bank funding schemes such as the Bank of England’s Term Funding Scheme and Funding for Lending Scheme. Following the closures of these schemes in 2018, the Group has to replace matured central bank scheme funding, which could cause an increased dependence on term funding issuances. If the wholesale funding markets were to suffer stress or central bank provision of liquidity to the financial markets is abruptly curtailed, or the Group’s credit ratings are downgraded, it is likely that wholesale funding will prove more difficult to obtain.

Any of the refinancing or liquidity risks mentioned above, in isolation or in concert, could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s results or operations and its ability to meet its financial obligations as they fall due.

4.A reduction in the Group’s longer-term credit rating could materially adversely affect the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects

Rating agencies regularly evaluate the Group and the Company, and their ratings of longer-term debt are based on a number of factors which can change over time, including the Group’s financial strength as well as factors not entirely within the Group’s control, including conditions affecting the financial services industry generally, and the legal and regulatory frameworks affecting the Group’s legal structure, business activities and the rights of its creditors. In light of the difficulties in the financial services industry and the financial markets, there can be no assurance that the Group or the Company will maintain their current ratings. The credit rating agencies may also revise the ratings methodologies applicable to issuers within a particular industry or political or economic region. If credit rating agencies perceive there to be adverse changes in the factors affecting an issuer’s credit rating, including by virtue of change to applicable ratings methodologies, the credit rating agencies may downgrade, suspend or withdraw the ratings assigned to an issuer and/or its securities. Downgrades of the Group’s longer-term credit rating could lead to additional collateral posting and cash outflow, significantly increase its borrowing costs, limit its issuance capacity in the capital markets and weaken the Group’s competitive position in certain markets.

5.The Group’s businesses are inherently subject to the risk of market fluctuations, which could have a material adverse effect on the results of operations, financial condition or prospects of the Group

The Group’s businesses are inherently subject to risks in financial markets including changes in, and increased volatility of, interest rates, inflation rates, credit spreads, foreign exchange rates, commodity, equity, bond and property prices and the risk that its customers act in a manner which is inconsistent with the Group’s business, pricing and hedging assumptions. Movements in these markets will continue to have a significant impact on the Group in a number of key areas.

For example, adverse market movements have had and may continue to have an adverse effect, upon the financial condition of the defined benefit pension schemes of the Group. The schemes’ main exposures are to real rate risk and credit spread risk. These risks arise from two main sources: the “AA” corporate bond liability discount rate and asset holdings.

In addition, the Group’s banking and trading activities are also subject to market movements. For example, changes in interest rate levels, interbank margins over official rates, yield curves and spreads affect the interest rate margin realised between lending and borrowing costs. The potential for future volatility and margin changes remains. Competitive pressures on fixed rates or product terms in existing loans and deposits may restrict the Group in its ability to change interest rates applying to customers in response to changes in official and wholesale market rates.

The insurance business of the Group is exposed indirectly to equity and credit markets through the value of future management charges on policyholder funds. Credit spread and interest rate risk within insurance primarily arises from bonds and loans used to back annuities. The performance of the investment markets will thus have a direct impact upon the profit from investment contracts and on the insurance value in force and the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

Changes in foreign exchange rates, including with respect to the U.S. dollar and the Euro, may also have a material adverse effect the Group’s financial position and/or forecasted earnings.

6.Market conditions have resulted, and are expected to result in the future, in material changes to the estimated fair values of financial assets of the Group, including negative fair value adjustments

The Group has exposures to securities, derivatives and other investments, including asset-backed securities, structured investments and private equity investments that are recorded by the Group at fair value, which may be subject to further negative fair value adjustments in view of the volatile global markets and challenging economic environment.

In volatile markets, hedging and other risk management strategies (including collateralisation and the purchase of credit default swaps) may not be as effective as they are in normal market conditions, due in part to the decreasing credit quality of hedge counterparties, and general illiquidity in the markets within which transactions are executed.

In circumstances where fair values are determined using financial valuation models, the Group’s valuation methodologies may require it to make assumptions, judgements and estimates in order to establish fair value. These valuation models are complex and the assumptions used are difficult to make and are inherently uncertain. This uncertainty may be amplified during periods of market volatility and illiquidity. Any consequential impairments, write-downs or adjustments could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s results of operations, capital ratios, financial condition or prospects.

Any of these factors could cause the value ultimately realised by the Group for its securities and other investments to be lower than their current fair value or require the Group to record further negative fair value adjustments, which may have a material adverse effect on its results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

7.Any tightening of monetary policy in jurisdictions in which the Group operates could affect the financial condition of its customers, clients and counterparties, including governments and other financial institutions

Quantitative easing measures implemented by major central banks, adopted alongside record low interest rates to support recovery from the global financial crisis, have arguably helped loosen financial conditions and reduce borrowing costs. These measures may have supported liquidity and valuations for asset classes that are vulnerable to rapid price corrections as financial conditions tighten, potentially causing losses to investors and increasing the risk of default on the Group’s exposure to these sectors.

Monetary policy in the United Kingdom and in the markets in which the Group operates has been highly accommodative in recent years, however there remains considerable uncertainty as to the direction of interest rates and the pace of change, as set by the Bank of England and other major central banks. In the UK, monetary policy has further been supported by the Bank of England and HM Treasury “Funding for Lending” scheme (which closed in January 2018), the “Help to Buy” scheme (which closed in November 2019), the “Term Funding Scheme” (which closed in February 2018) and the purchase of corporate bonds in the UK. However, such a long period of stimulus has increased uncertainty over the impact of its reduction, which could

182

RISK FACTORS

lead to a risk of higher borrowing costs in wholesale markets, generally weaker than expected growth, or even contracting gross domestic product (“GDP”), reduced business and consumer confidence, higher levels of unemployment or underemployment, adverse changes to levels of inflation and falling property prices in the markets in which the Group operates, and consequently to an increase in delinquency rates and default rates among its customers. Similar risks result from the low level of inflation in developed economies, which in Europe particularly could deteriorate into sustained deflation if policy measures prove ineffective and economic growth weakens. Reduced monetary stimulus and the actions and commercial soundness of other financial institutions have the potential to impact market liquidity. The adverse impact on the credit quality of the Group’s customers and counterparties, coupled with a decline in collateral values, could lead to a reduction in recoverability and value of the Group’s assets and higher levels of expected credit loss allowances, which could have an adverse effect on the Group’s operations, financial condition or prospects.

8.The Group’s insurance business and defined benefit pension schemes are subject to insurance risks

The insurance business of the Group is exposed to short-term and longer-term variability arising from uncertain longevity due to annuity portfolios. The Group’s defined benefit pension schemes are also exposed to longevity risk. Increases in life expectancy (longevity) beyond current allowances will increase the cost of annuities and pension scheme benefits and may adversely affect the Group’s financial condition and results of operations.

Customer behaviour in the insurance business may result in increased cancellations or ceasing of contributions at a rate in excess of business assumptions. Consequent reduction in policy persistency and fee income would have an adverse impact upon the profitability of the insurance business of the Group.

The insurance business of the Group is also exposed to the risk of uncertain insurance claim rates. For example, extreme weather conditions can result in high property damage claims and higher levels of theft can increase claims on home insurance. These claims rates may differ from business assumptions and negative developments may adversely affect the Group’s financial condition and results of operations.

To a lesser extent the insurance business is exposed to mortality, morbidity and expense risk. Adverse developments in any of these factors may adversely affect the Group’s financial condition and results of operations.

9.The Group may be required to record credit value adjustments, funding value adjustments and debit value adjustments on its derivative portfolio, which could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects

The Group continually seeks to limit and manage counterparty credit risk exposure to market counterparties. Credit value adjustment (CVA)(“CVA”) and funding value adjustment (FVA)(“FVA”) reserves are held against uncollateralised derivative exposures and a risk management framework is in place to mitigate reserve value changes. CVA is an expected loss calculation that incorporates current market factors including counterparty credit spreads. FVA reserves are held to capitalise the cost of funding uncollateralised derivative exposures. The Group also calculates a debit value adjustment (DVA) to reflect own credit spread risk as part of the fair value of derivative liabilities. The Group uses several credit risk mitigation techniques to limit counterparty credit risk exposure including netting agreements, collateral agreements and other forms of credit enhancement where possible. However, deterioration

Deterioration in the creditworthiness of financial counterparties, or large adverse financial market movements, could impact the size of CVA and FVA reserves and result in a material charge to the Group’s profit and loss account.

CONDUCT RISKS

The Group is exposed to various forms of conduct risk in its operations, including the risk of mis-selling financial products, mishandling of complaints, business planning and strategy not being based upon customer need and not supporting fair customer outcomes, and engaging in conduct which disrupts the fair and effective operation of a market in which it is active, any ofaccount which could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s results or its relations with its customers and regulators.

The Group is exposed to various forms of conduct risk in its operations. Such risks are inherent in banking services. These include business and strategic planning that does not sufficiently consider customer need (leading to products being offered beyond target markets and mis-selling of financial products), ineffective management and monitoring of products and their distribution (which could result in customers receiving unfair outcomes), a

198

RISK FACTORS

culture that is not sufficiently customer-centric (potentially driving improper decision making and unfair outcomes for customers), outsourcing of customer service and product delivery via third parties that do not have the same level of control, oversight and culture as the Group (resulting in unfair customer outcomes which could lead to reputational damage and regulatory investigations), the possibility of alleged mis-selling of financial products or the mishandling of complaints related to the sale of such products (which could require amendments to sales processes, withdrawal of products or the provision of restitution to affected customers, all of which may require additional provisions in the Group’s financial accounts), poor governance of colleagues’ incentives and rewards and approval of schemes which drive unfair customer outcomes. These can lead to remediation and regulatory intervention/enforcement (including fines). Ineffective management and oversight of legacy conduct issues can result in customers who are undergoing remediation being unfairly treated and therefore further rectification being required. The Group is also exposed to the risk of engaging in conduct which disrupts the fair and effective operation of a market in which it is active.

While the Group has implemented a number of policies in order to help mitigate against these risks, no assurance can be given that the conduct strategy and framework will be effective and will not have an adverse effect on the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

 

10.The Group is exposed to risks related to the uncertainty surrounding the integrity and continued existence of reference rates

Reference rates and indices, including interest rate benchmarks, such as the London Interbank Offered Rate (“LIBOR”) and the Euro Interbank Offered Rate (“EURIBOR”), which are used to determine the amounts payable under financial instruments or the value of such financial instruments (“Benchmarks”), have, in recent years, been the subject of political and regulatory scrutiny as to how they are created and operated. This has resulted in regulatory reform and changes to existing Benchmarks, with further changes anticipated. These reforms and changes may cause a Benchmark to perform differently than it has done in the past or to be discontinued.

At this time, it is not possible to predict the overall effect (including financial impacts) of any such reforms and changes, any establishment of alternative reference rates or any other reforms to these reference rates that may be enacted, including the potential or actual discontinuance of LIBOR publication, any transition away from LIBOR or ongoing reliance on LIBOR for some legacy products.

Uncertainty as to the nature of such potential changes, alternative reference rates (including, without limitation, SONIA, €STER and SOFR or term versions of those rates) or other reforms may adversely affect a broad array of financial products, including any LIBOR-based or EURIBOR-based securities, loans and derivatives that are included in the Group’s financial assets and liabilities, that use these reference rates and may impact the availability and cost of hedging instruments and borrowings. If any of these reference rates are no longer available, the Group may incur additional expenses in effecting the transition from such reference rates, and may be subject to disputes, which could have an adverse effect on the Group’s results of operations. In addition, it can have important operational impacts through the Group’s systems and infrastructure as all systems will need to account for the changes in the reference rates. Any of these factors may have a material adverse effect on the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

REGULATORY AND LEGAL RISKS

 

1.The Group and its businesses are subject to substantial regulation and oversight. Adverse legal or regulatory developments could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s business, results of operations, financial condition or prospects

The Group and its businesses are subject to substantial regulation and oversight. Adverse legal or regulatory developments could have a significant material adverse effect on the Group’s business, results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

The Group and its businesses are subject to legislation, regulation, court proceedings, policies and voluntary codes of practice including the effects of any changes in these or the interpretation of them in the UK, the EU and the other markets in which the Group operates. The Group is therefore subject to associated legal and regulatory risks, including risk in connection with legal and regulatory actions and market reviews. Depending on the specific nature of the requirements and how theyoperates which are enforced, they could have a significant impact onimpacted by factors beyond the Group’s operations, business prospects, structure, costs and/or capital requirements and ability to enforce contractual obligations.

These laws and regulations include (i) increased regulatory oversight, particularly in respect of conduct issues, (ii) prudential regulatory developments, including ring-fencing, (iii) increased legislative requirements including the recently implemented Senior Managers and Certification Regime (the “SMCR”), and (iv) other industry-wide initiatives.

Unfavourable developments across any of these areas, discussed in greater detail elsewhere herein, could materially affect the Group’s ability to maintain appropriate liquidity, increase its funding costs, constrain the operation of its business and/or have a material adverse effect on the Group’s business, results of operations and financial condition. Areas where these changes could have an adverse effect on the Group include, but are not limited to:control, including:

 

(i)general changes in government, central bank or regulatory policy, or changes in regulatory regimes that may influence investor decisions in particular markets in which the Group operates, any ofand which may change the structure of those markets and the products offered or may increase the costs of doing business in those markets;
  
(ii)external bodies applying or interpreting standards, laws, regulations or contracts differently to the Group;
  
(iii)an uncertain and rapidly evolving prudential regulatory environment which could materially adversely affect the Group’s ability to maintain liquidity and increase its funding costs;
  
(iv)changes in competitive and pricing environments, including markets investigations, or one or more of the Group’s regulators intervening to mandate the pricing of the Group’s products, as a consumer protection measure;
183

RISK FACTORS

 
(v)one or more of the Group’s regulators intervening to prevent or delay the launch of a product or service, or prohibiting an existing product or service;
  
(vi)further requirements relating to financial reporting, corporate governance, corporate structure and conduct of business and employee compensation;
�� 
(vii)expropriation, nationalisation, confiscation of assets and changes in legislation relating to foreign ownership;
  
(viii)changes to regulation and legislation relating to economic and trading sanctions, money laundering and terrorist financing; and
  
(ix)regulatory changes which influence business strategy, particularly the rate of growth of the business, or which impose conditions on the sales and servicing of products, which have the effect of making such products unprofitable or unattractive to sell.

 

WithThese laws and regulations include (i) increased regulatory oversight, particularly in respect of conduct issues; (ii) prudential regulatory developments, including ring-fencing; and (iii) increased legislative requirements, such as the Banking Reform Act, the Competition and Market Authority Open Banking programme, the Second Payment Services Directive (“PSD2”), the General Data Protection Regulation (“GDPR”), Markets in Financial Instruments Directive (“MiFID II”), which is made up of MiFID (2014/65/EU) and the Markets in Financial Instruments Regulation (MiFIR - 600/2014/EU), and the Deposit Guarantee Schemes Directive 2014/49/EU (the “recast DGSD”).

Unfavourable developments across any of these areas as a result of the factors above could materially affect the Group’s ability to maintain appropriate liquidity, increase its funding costs, constrain the State Aid commitments agreed withoperation of its business and/or have a material adverse effect on the European Commission by the Group under the State Aid regime in 2009, the Group has satisfied all material structuralGroup’s business, results of operations and behavioural commitments following the successful carve-out and disposal of TSB and non-core asset reductions. financial condition.

2.The Group faces risks associated with its compliance with a wide range of laws and regulations

The Group is therefore no longer subjectexposed to restrictive behavioural commitments including the constraint on acquisitions, but the Group continues to be bound by two remaining limited ancillary commitments which means that the Group remains subject to supervision by the European Commissionrisk associated with respect to these commitments until they cease to have effect on or before June 2017.compliance with laws and regulations, including:

 

(i)certain aspects of the Group’s activities and business may be determined by the relevant authorities, the Financial Ombudsman Service (the “FOS”), or the courts, to have not been conducted in accordance with applicable laws or regulations, or, in the case of the FOS, with what is fair and reasonable in the Ombudsman’s opinion;
(ii)the possibility of alleged mis-selling of financial products or the mishandling of complaints related to the sale of such products by or attributed to a member of the Group, resulting in disciplinary action or requirements to amend sales processes, withdraw products, or provide restitution to affected customers, all of which may require additional provisions;
(iii)risks relating to compliance with, or enforcement actions in respect of, existing and/or new regulatory or reporting requirements, including as a result of a change in focus of regulation or a transfer of responsibility for regulating certain aspects of the Group’s activities and business to other regulatory bodies;
(iv)contractual and other obligations may either not be enforceable as intended or may be enforced against the Group in an adverse way;
(v)the intellectual property of the Group (such as trade names) may not be adequately protected;
(vi)the Group may be liable for damages to third-parties harmed by the conduct of its business; and
(vii)the risk of regulatory proceedings, enforcement actions and/or private litigation, arising out of regulatory investigations or otherwise (brought by individuals or groups of plaintiffs) in the UK and other jurisdictions.

For more detail on the changing prudential regulatory environment see “—

Regulatory and legal risks—actions pose a number of risks to the Group, including substantial monetary damages or fines, the amounts of which are difficult to predict and may exceed the amount of provisions set aside to cover such risks. See “Regulatory and Legal Risks – The Group faces risks associated with an uncertain and rapidly evolving international prudential,financial impact of legal proceedings and regulatory environmentrisks might be material but is difficult to quantify. Amounts eventually paid may materially exceed the amount of provisions set aside to cover such risks, or existing provisions may need to be materially increased in response to changing circumstances, as has been the case in respect of payment protection insurance redress payments below.. In addition, the Group may be subject, including as a result of regulatory actions, to other penalties and injunctive relief, civil or private litigation arising out of a regulatory investigation or otherwise, the potential for criminal prosecution in certain circumstances and regulatory restrictions on the Group’s business, all of which can have a negative effect on the Group’s reputation as well as taking a significant amount of management time and resources away from the implementation of the Group’s strategy.

 

The Group facesmay settle litigation or regulatory proceedings prior to a final judgement or determination of liability to avoid the cost, management efforts or negative business, regulatory or reputational consequences of continuing to contest liability, even when the Group believes that it has no liability or when the potential consequences of failing to prevail would be disproportionate to the costs of settlement. Furthermore, the Group may, for similar reasons, reimburse counterparties for their losses even in situations where the Group does not believe that it is legally compelled to do so. Failure to manage these risks associated with an uncertainadequately could materially affect the Group, both financially and rapidly evolving international prudential, legalreputationally.

3.Legal and regulatory risk arising from the UK’s exit from the European Union could adversely impact the Group’s business, operations, financial condition and prospects

Following the UK’s exit from the EU, there remains significant uncertainty around the terms of their future trade agreement. This uncertainty may be exacerbated by the possible re-emergence of a further Scottish independence referendum and regulatory environment./ or differential arrangements for Northern Ireland relative to the rest of the UK.

The Group’s borrowingGroup is subject to substantial EU-derived laws, regulation and oversight, which will be impacted as a result of the UK’s exit from the EU. In particular, after the transition period, the Group and its counterparties may no longer be able to rely on the European passporting framework for financial services. This could result in the loss of customers and / or the requirement for the Group to apply for authorisation in further EU jurisdictions where it is to continue business, with associated costs and access to capital markets,operational considerations. Any actions taken as a result of the ongoing uncertainty, as well as its ability to lendnew or carry out certain aspects of its business, could be affected by prudential regulatory developments, including (i) amendments to FSMA introduced by the Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013 (the “Banking Reform Act”) along with secondaryamended legislation and PRA/FCA rules made underregulation, may have a significant impact on the Banking Reform Act, (ii) amendments to the EU legislation comprising the Capital Requirements DirectiveGroup’s operations, profitability and the Capital Requirements Regulation (together, “CRD IV”), or implementation of CRD IV in the UK, (iii) evolving European and global prudential and regulatory changes, and (iv) regulatory changes in the US.business model.

 

BANKING REFORM ACT

4.The Group and its subsidiaries are subject to resolution planning requirements

 

The Banking Reform Act’s measures contain provisionsBank of England and the PRA have published final rules for a resolvability assessment framework (the “Resolvability Assessment Framework”), with respect to, amongst other things (i) ring-fencing domestic retail banking services of UK banks, and (ii) thefull implementation of SMCR.the framework required by 2022. This will require the Group to carry out a detailed assessment of its preparations for resolution. The new rules on the Resolvability Assessment Framework may affect the way in which the Group manages its business and ultimately impact the

199184

RISK FACTORS

 

RING-FENCING

The Banking Reform Act, secondary legislation and PRA/FCA rules made under the FSMA have enacted amendments to the FSMA and the UK regulatory regime that require UK banking groups (such as the Group) with more than £25 billion (on a Group-wide basis) of core deposits (defined as “ring-fenced bodies” or “RFBs”) to separate the retail banking activities of their UK banks – particularly deposit-taking and associated services – from certain prohibited forms of activity, including (i) dealing in investments, (ii) incurring exposures to relevant financial institutions (which include, amongst others, credit institutions (other than RFBs), investment firms and alternative investment funds (subject to certain limited exceptions)), (iii) participating in an inter-bank payment system other than as a direct member (subject to certain limited exceptions), and (iv) having non-EEA branches or subsidiaries. RFBs are also subject to regulations governing how pension arrangements can be managed, following the implementation of ring-fencing.

The PRA and FCA are required by the Banking Reform Act to implement ring-fencing rules (the “Ring-fencing Rules”) by 1 January 2019, with the deadline for implementing changes to the Group’s pension scheme being 1 January 2026. The PRA has published consultation papers covering: (i) the legal structure of an RFB and its wider group, (ii) the governance arrangements for an RFB, (iii) the continuity of services and facilities, (iv) prudential requirements applicable to the RFB sub-group, (v) intra-group arrangements, (vi) the use of financial market infrastructure by RFBs, and (vii) reporting requirements regarding compliance with the ring-fencing regime, including an RFB’s reliance on any exemptions to the excluded activities and prohibitions under secondary legislation. RFBs are able to apply for waiversprofitability of the Ring-fencing Rules in accordance withGroup. Further, the statutory procedure for waivers set out in FSMA. In July 2016, the PRA published its final policy statement, supervisory statement and rules covering items (i) through (vi) above, and the consultation process for item (vii) above has now closed. The PRA and FCA have also been granted powers under the FSMA to impose certain restructuring requirements on RFBs, their parent undertakings and certain other regulated entities within an RFB’s group if, in broad terms, the financial stabilitypublication of the RFB is deemed to be at risk as a resultoutcome of such assessment may affect the implementation ofway the Ring-Fencing Rules within the relevant banking group.

Whilst the Ring-fencing Rules and other aspects of regulatory guidance are not yet in final form, the implementation of the Ring-fencing Rules will have an impact on the Group’s structure, governance arrangements, business and reporting models, operations, costs and financing arrangements.

The Group is actively engaged with HM Treasury, the PRA and FCA to ensure that it is able to fully implement the restructuring required to implement ring-fencing by the January 2019 deadline. As required under the PRA’s second consultation paper, the Group submitted its latest implementation plan to the PRA and FCA in December 2016. In addition, the Group will become subject to the expanded oversight powers granted to HM Treasury, the PRA and the FCA under the Banking Reform Act from 1 January 2019.

SENIOR MANAGERS AND CERTIFICATION REGIME

The SMCR is a recently implemented regime which came into force on 7 March 2016 and replaces the approved persons regime for deposit takers and other PRA designated firms. The SMCR comprises a number of elements, including the senior managers’ regime, the certification regime and the conduct rules, which are due to be expanded by changes proposed by the Bank of England and the Financial Services Act 2016. The Group could be exposed to additional risk or loss if it is unable to comply with the requirements arising from the SMCR or if doing so imposes significant demands on the attention of management.

CAPITAL REQUIREMENTS REGULATION AND CAPITAL REQUIREMENTS DIRECTIVE

In 2012, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (the “Basel Committee”) approved significant changes to the regulatory framework applicable to the Group, including new capital and liquidity requirements intended to reinforce capital standards and to establish minimum liquidity standards for credit institutions (such changes being commonly referred to as “Basel III”). The Basel III changes refer to, among other things, (i) new requirements for a bank’s capital base; (ii) measures to strengthen capital requirements for counterparty credit exposures arising from certain transactions; (iii) the introduction of a leverage ratio; and (iv) short-term and longer-term standards for funding and liquidity.

The Basel III reform package has been implemented in Europe through CRD IV. Full implementation began from 1 January 2014, with particular elements being phased in over a period of time, to be fully effective by 2024.

As a European regulation, the Capital Requirements Regulation is directly applicable in the UKCompany and the Group is subject to its requirements. In December 2013, the PRA published its principal statement of policy, setting out the PRA rules in order to implement the Capital Requirements Directive in the UK.

The CRD IV regime is expected to continue to evolve as a result of further changes agreed by EU legislators, binding regulatory technical standards and guidelines to be developedperceived by the European Banking Authority (EBA) and changes to the waymarket which, in which the PRA interprets and applies these requirements to UK financial institutions. In particular, on 23 November 2016, the European Commission put forward significant proposals to amend, among other things, both the Capital Requirements Regulation and the Capital Requirements Directive (such amended Capital Requirements Regulation to be known as “CRR 2” and the Capital Requirements Directive as “CRD V”), including to propose a binding leverage ratio, a binding net stable funding ratio, more risk-sensitive capital requirements. If adopted, these reforms are expected to enter into force by 2019 at the earliest.

CRD IV introduced a number of new capital buffers to provide further capital cushions for additional risks that financial institutions may be subject to. These buffers will be fully phased in by 1 January 2019 and comprise: (i) a capital conservation buffer; (ii) a time-varying countercyclical capital buffer; (iii) buffers applicable to global systemically important banks (G-SIBs); (iv) buffers applicable to other systematically important banks; and (v) a systemic risk buffer (SRB).

The Group is not currently categorised as a G-SIB for which the Financial Stability Board (FSB) has set buffer rates. The Bank of England’s Financial Policy Committee (FPC) published the final framework for the UK SRB in May 2016 and the PRA published their statement of policy on their approach for implementing the SRB in December 2016. The Group’s RFB sub-group will be subject to the UK SRB from 1 January 2019; however, the level of the buffer will be dependent on the final structure of the Group’s RFB sub-group (which is, in turn, due to be finalised prior to 1 January 2019).

In December 2015, the FPC released a supplement to its Financial Stability Report on the framework of capital requirements for UK banks. The supplement outlined the FPC’s final views on the overall calibration of the UK capital framework and described how the framework of capital requirements for UK banks is expected to transition from its current state to its end point in 2019, as well as ongoing work to refine requirements during that transition period. In this supplement, the FPC set out its strategy for the time-varying UK countercyclical capital buffer which will be applied to a bank’s UK exposures. The UK countercyclical capital buffer rate was set to increase from 0 per cent. to 0.5 per cent. of risk-weighted assets on 29 March 2017, at which time the overlapping aspects of Pillar 2 supervisory capital buffers would be removed or reduced. However, following the EU referendum, on 5 July 2016 the FPC announced in their Financial Stability Report that the planned 0.5 per cent. UK countercyclical capital buffer would not be implemented in March 2017 and the 0 per cent. rate was expected to remain until at least June 2017. The FPC also recommended that where existing

200

RISK FACTORS

Pillar 2 PRA supervisory buffers reflect risks that would be captured by a UK countercyclical capital buffer rate, the PRA should reduce those buffers by an amount of capital which is equivalent to the effect of a UK countercyclical capital buffer rate of 0.5 per cent. The FPC has also indicated that it expects to review the countercyclical buffer and to set a UK countercyclical capital buffer rate in the region of 1 per cent. of risk-weighted assets when risks are judged to be neither subdued nor elevated, but the rate can be set in excess of this level. There remains a risk that any future changes to the countercyclical capital buffer rate in the UK could lead to an increase in capital requirements applicable to the Group where these changes are deemed not to be already captured by Pillar 2 supervisory capital buffers.

Under the Capital Requirements Directive Article 141, institutions that fail to meet their “combined buffer requirements” (consisting of buffers (i), (ii), and the higher of (iii), (iv) and (v)) will be subject to restrictions on the making of certain discretionary payments (including dividends on ordinary shares, coupons or Additional Tier 1 (AT1) securities and certain items of variable remuneration). These restrictions are scaled according to the extent of the breach and result in a maximum distributable amount which may be expended on such discretionary payments in each relevant period.

As outlined above, the Group’s capital buffer requirements are still being finalised and investors may not be able to predict accurately the risk of dividends on ordinary shares or distributions on other securities being prohibited or restricted as a result of the Capital Requirements Directive Article 141.

The FPC supplement also sets out how the PRA intends to set a PRA buffer for individual banks which is the minimum level of capital buffer required by the PRA. The PRA buffer is confidential between the Group and the PRA and can be set at a level in excess of the combined buffer requirements and any further sectoral capital measures that the PRA has imposed. As a result, investors may not be able to predict accurately the risk of dividends on ordinary shares or distributions on other securities being restricted as a result of the PRA buffer.

In addition to the risk based capital framework, the Group is also subject to minimum requirements under the UK leverage framework. Currently, the UK leverage ratio framework does not give rise to higher capital requirements for the Group than the risk-based capital framework but there is a risk that it could do so as a result of a change in the Group’s financial position or a strengthening of the regulatory requirements (which are expected to be calibrated in 2017).

The Group will monitor the ongoing changes to the capital framework which may affect the Group’s financial position or require the strengtheningsecondary market value of regulatory requirements.its securities.

 

EVOLVING EUROPEAN AND GLOBAL PRUDENTIAL AND REGULATORY CHANGES

More generally and in the longer term, the Basel Committee is considering revisions to Basel III including: credit risk capital requirements; capital floors; operational risk capital requirements; and capital requirements covering credit valuation adjustments. Whilst the Basel Committee and the PRA have publicly stated that they are not seeking to increase the overall quantum of capital in the system, there is a risk that individual firms may be more impacted than others, or the final rules are more onerous than these statements suggest. Final rules are expected to be published by the Basel Committee in early 2017 and until such rules are published and translated into European legislation it will remain premature to estimate the impact.

The Minimum Requirement for Own Funds and Eligible Liabilities (MREL), which is being implemented in the EU and the UK, will apply to EU financial institutions and cover capital and debt instruments that are capable of being written-down or converted to equity in order to prevent a financial institution from failing in a crisis. In November 2016, the Bank of England published a statement of policy outlining its approach to setting MREL. The Bank of England has set a final MREL conformance date of 1 January 2022 with MREL requirements transitioning up to that date. The PRA has also separately stated that financial institutions should expect the PRA to investigate whether any financial institution in breach of its MREL requirement is failing, or likely to fail, to satisfy the threshold conditions for authorisation, with a view to taking further action as necessary. On 23 November 2016, the European Commission published proposals to amend the BRRD to implement, among other things, a revised firm-specific MREL requirement. If adopted, these reforms are expected to enter into force by 2019 at the earliest. Under CRD V, it is proposed that MREL will also be factored in to the calculation of the maximum distributable amount (as discussed above). There is a risk that conforming with the final MREL requirements may create an unexpected adverse impact upon the amount, mix and associated cost of the Group’s capital and eligible debt of the Group.

Following the report of the European Commission’s high-level expert group on banking structural reform chaired by Erkki Liikanen (the “Liikanen Report”), published in 2012, structural reform measures that are similar to some of those contained in the Banking Reform Act are also under consideration.

European Regulation 648/2012, known as the European Market Infrastructure Regulation (EMIR), introduces new requirements to improve transparency and reduce the risks associated with the derivatives market. EMIR came into force on 16 August 2012 and when it fully comes into effect, EMIR will require entities that enter into any form of derivative contract, including interest rate, foreign exchange, equity, credit and commodity derivatives, to: (i) report every derivative contract entered into to a trade repository, (ii) implement new risk management standards (including operational processes and margining) for all bilateral OTC derivative trades that are not cleared by a central counterparty, and (iii) clear, through a central counterparty, OTC derivatives that are subject to a mandatory clearing obligation. Certain of the requirements under EMIR (such as some clearing requirements) have yet to fully come into effect. The first clearing obligations for certain interest rate derivatives have applied from June 2016. Variation margin requirements for uncleared trades came into effect on 4 February 2017 for market participants with a sufficiently large derivative trading volume and on 1 March 2017 for all other counterparties, including the Group. Certain products are exempt from variation margin requirements at this time and implementation for these products is due to be phased in. The Group does not expect initial margin requirements to apply to it until September 2018. It is expected that there will be additional costs and limitations on the Group’s business resulting from these requirements.

The Group’s businesses could be adversely impacted by significant US regulatory reforms including any changes relating to the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010 (the “Dodd-Frank Act”), which provides a broad framework for significant regulatory changes. For example, final rules implementing the “Volcker Rule” came into effect in July 2015, prohibiting certain types of proprietary trading by the Group and limiting the Group’s ability to make investments in and sponsor certain private equity funds and hedge funds. In addition, the Dodd-Frank Act’s implementing regulations include final rules imposing registration and other requirements on entities that engage in derivatives activities. The new US administration has announced its intention to modify the existing regulatory framework, including the Dodd-Frank Act. Although the timing and scope of any such changes and/or further progress on the Dodd-Frank Act’s implementing regulations are uncertain, there have been and will continue to be additional costs and/or limitations on the Group’s businesses in connection with any US financial regulatory changes.

2015.The Group and its subsidiaries are subject to regulatory actions which may be taken in the event of a bank or Group failure

RISK FACTORS

 

The full impact of the derivative market regulations on the Group remains unclear, and could have a materially adverse effect on the Group’s business, results of operations, financial condition or prospects. In particular, the costs of complying with the regulations are expected to be burdensome, giving rise to additional expenses that may have an adverse impact on the Group’s financial condition. Additionally, such regulations could make it more difficult and expensive to conduct hedging and trading activities. As a result of these increased costs, the regulation of the derivative markets may also result in the Group deciding to reduce its activity in these markets.

It is difficult to predict how and in what final form many of the regulatory changes described herein will be implemented and what financial obligations may be imposed in relation thereto. While the Group continues to work closely with regulatory authorities and industry associations to ensure that it is able to identify and respond to proposed regulatory changes, the Group could be exposed to additional risk of loss if it is unable to comply with the requirements arising from these regulations or if doing so imposes significant demands on the attention of management. Depending on the specific nature of the requirements and how they are enforced, such changes could have a significant impact on the Group’s operations, business prospects, structure, costs and/or capital requirements including changes to how the Group and its businesses are capitalised and funded, distribution of capital, reducing weighted assets, modifying legal entity structure and changing the Group’s business mix to strengthen the Group’s capital position.

The Group and its UK subsidiaries may become subject to the provisions of the Banking Act 2009, as amended, which could have an adverse impact on the Group’s business.

Under the Banking Act 2009, as amended, (the “Banking Act”), substantial powers have been granted to HM Treasury, the Bank of England and the PRA and FCA (together, the “Authorities”) as part of the special resolution regime (the “SRR”). These powers enable the Authorities to deal with and stabilise UK-incorporated institutions with permission to accept deposits pursuant to Part 4A(including members of the FSMAGroup) and their parent entities (including the Company) if they are failing or are likely to fail to satisfy certain threshold conditions (within the meaning of Section 55B of the FSMA). conditions.

The SRR consists of five stabilisation options: (i) transfer of all or part of the business of the relevant entity or the shares of the relevant entity to a private sector purchaser,purchaser; (ii) transfer of all or part of the business of the relevant entity to a “bridge bank” established and wholly owned by the Bank of England,England; (iii) transfer all or part of the relevant entity or “bridge bank” to an asset management vehicle,vehicle; (iv) making of one or more resolution instruments by the Bank of England,England; and (v) temporary public ownership of the relevant entity. HM Treasury may also take a parent company of a relevant entity into temporary public ownership where certain conditions are met. The SRR also provides for two new insolvency and administration procedures for relevant entities. Certain ancillary powers include the power to modify certain contractual arrangements in certain circumstances. The powers granted to resolution authorities under the Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (“BRRD”) include, but are not limited to: (i) a “write-down and conversion power” relating to Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital instruments and (ii) a “bail-in” power relating to the majority of unsecured liabilities (including the capital instruments and senior unsecured debt securities issued by the Group). Such loss absorption powers give resolution authorities the ability to write-down or write-off all or a portion of the claims of certain unsecured creditors of a failing institution or group and/or to convert certain debt claims into another security, including ordinary shares of the surviving group entity, if any. Such resulting ordinary shares may be subject to severe dilution, transfer for no consideration, write-down or write-off. Generally, losses are to be taken in accordance with the priority of claims under normal insolvency proceedings. The Banking Act and secondary legislation made thereunder provides certain limited safeguards for creditors in specific circumstances. For example, a holder of debt securities issued by the Company should not suffer a worse outcome than it would in insolvency proceedings. However, this “no creditor worse off” safeguard may not apply in relation to an application of the write-down and conversion power in circumstances where a stabilisation power is not also used; holders of debt instruments which are subject to the power may, however, have ordinary shares transferred to or issued to them by way of compensation. The exercise of mandatory write-down and conversion power under the Banking Act or any suggestion of such exercise could, therefore, materially adversely affect the rights of the holders of equity and debt securities and the price or value of their investment and/or the ability of the Group to satisfy its obligations under such debt securities.

Resolution authorities also have powers to amend the terms of contracts (for example, varying the maturity of a debt instrument) and to override events of default or termination rights that might be invoked as a result of the exercise of the resolution powers, which could have a material adverse effect on the rights of holders of the equity and debt securities issued by the Group, including through a material adverse effect on the price of such securities. The Banking Act also gives the Bank of England the power to override, vary or impose contractual obligations between a UK bank, its holding company and its group undertakings for reasonable consideration, in order to enable any transferee or successor bank to operate effectively. There is also power for HM Treasury to amend the law (excluding provisions made by or under the Banking Act) for the purpose of enabling it to use the regime powers effectively, potentially with retrospective effect.

The determination that securities and other obligations issued by the Group will be subject to loss absorption is likely to be inherently unpredictable and may depend on a number of factors which may be outside of the Group’s control. This determination will also be made by the relevant UK resolution authority and there may be many factors, including factors not directly related to the Company or the Group, which could result in such a determination. Because of this inherent uncertainty and given that both BRRD and the relevant provisions of the Banking Act remain untested in practice, it will be difficult to predict when, if at all, the exercise of a loss absorption power may occur which would result in a principal write-off or conversion to other securities, including the ordinary shares of the Company. Moreover, as the criteria that the relevant UK resolution authority will be obliged to consider in exercising any loss absorption power provide it with considerable discretion, holders of the securities issued by the Group may not be able to refer to publicly available criteria in order to anticipate a potential exercise of any such power and consequently its potential effect on the Group and the securities issued by the Group.

Potential investors in the securities issued by the Group should consider the risk that a holder may lose some or all of its investment, including the principal amount plus any accrued interest, if such statutory loss absorption measures are acted upon. The BRRD and applicable state aid rules provide that, other than in certain limited circumstances set out in the BRRD, extraordinary governmental financial support will only be available to the Group as a last resort once the write-down and conversion powers and resolution tools referred to above have been exploited to the maximum extent possible. Accordingly, it is unlikely that investors in securities issued by the Company will benefit from such support even if it were provided.

Holders of the Group’s securities may have limited rights or no rights to challenge any decision of the relevant UK resolution authority to exercise the UK resolution powers or to have that decision reviewed by a judicial or administrative process or otherwise. Accordingly, trading behaviour in respect of such securities is not necessarily expected to follow the trading behaviour associated with other types of securities that are not subject to such resolution powers. Further, the introduction or amendment of such recovery and resolution powers, and/or any implication or anticipation that they may be used, may have a significant adverse effect on the market price of such securities, even if such powers are not used.

The minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (“MREL”) applies to EU and UK financial institutions and covers own funds and debt instruments that are capable of being written-down or converted to equity in order to prevent a financial institution or its group from failing in a crisis. The Bank of England has set a final MREL conformance date of 1 January 2022 with interim compliance required by 1 January 2020.

 

In addition, the Group’s costs of doing business may increase by amendments made to the Banking Act in relation to deposits covered by the UK Financial Services Compensation Scheme (the “FSCS”). The Group contributes to compensation schemes such as the FSCS in respect of banks and other authorised financial services firms that are unable to meet their obligations to customers. Further provisions in respect of these costs are likely to be necessary in the future. The ultimate cost to the industry, which will also include the cost of any compensation payments made by the FSCS and, if necessary, the cost of meeting any shortfall after recoveries on the borrowings entered into by the FSCS, remains uncertain but may be significant and may have a material effect on the Group’s business, results of operations or financial condition.

 

6.The Group is subject to the risk of having insufficient capital resources and / or not meeting liquidity requirements

The final text of

If the EU Directive 2014/59/EU establishing an EU-wide framework for the recovery and resolution of credit institutions and investment firms (the “BRRD”), entered into force on 2 July 2014 and in the UK, the Banking Reform Act made provision for certain aspects of the “bail-in” power. Certain amendmentsGroup has, or is perceived to the BRRD may be made ashave, a result of proposals published by the European Commission on 23 November 2016. Under the “bail-in” power, prior to insolvency proceedings, regulators would have the power to impose losses on holdersshortage of regulatory capital securities, senior bondholders and/or other creditors while potentially leaving untouched certain other classes of excluded creditors; generally losses are to be taken in accordance with the priority of claims under normal insolvency proceedings. Bail-in is expectedunable to apply to all of the Group’s unsecured senior and subordinated debt instruments with a remaining maturity of greater than seven days. The stated aim of the BRRD is to provide authorities designated by EU member states to apply the resolution tools and exercise the resolution powers set forth in the BRRD (the “resolution authorities”) with common tools and powers to address banking crises pre-emptively in order to safeguard financial stability and minimise taxpayers’ exposure to losses. The powers granted to resolution authorities under the BRRD include, but are not limited to: (i) a “write-down and conversion power” relating to Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital instruments and (ii) a “bail-in” power relating to eligible liabilities (including the capital instruments and senior debt securities issued by the Group). Such powers give resolution authorities the ability to write-down or write-off all or a portion of the claims of certain unsecured creditors of a failing institution or group and/or to convert certain debt claims into another security, including ordinary shares of the surviving group entity, if any. Such resulting ordinary sharesmeet its regulatory minimum liquidity requirements, then it may be subject to severe dilution, transfer for no consideration, write-down or write-off. Such powers were implementedregulatory interventions and sanctions and may suffer a loss of confidence in the UKmarket with effect from 1 January 2015.

The conditions for usethe result that access to sources of the bail-in power are,liquidity and funding may become constrained, more expensive or unavailable. This, in summary, that (i) the regulator determines that the bank is failing or likely to fail, (ii) having regard to timing and other relevant circumstances, it is not reasonably likely that (ignoring the stabilisation powers) action will be taken by or in respect of the bank to avoid the failure of the bank, (iii) the relevant UK resolution authority determines that it is necessary having regard to the public interest to exercise the bail-in power in the advancement of one of the statutory objectives of resolution, and (iv) one or more of those objectives would not be met to the same extent by the winding up of the bank. The Banking Act and secondary legislation made thereunder provides certain other limited safeguards for creditors in specific circumstances. The “no creditor worse off” safeguard contained in the Banking Actturn, may not apply in relation to an application of the write-down and conversion power in circumstances where a stabilisation power is not also used; holders of debt instruments which are subject to the power may, however, have ordinary shares transferred to or issued to them by way of compensation. The exercise of mandatory write-down and conversion power under the Banking Act or any suggestion of such exercise could, therefore, materially adversely affect the rights of the holders of equityGroup’s capacity to continue its business operations, pay future dividends and debt securities and the pricemake other distributions or value of their investment and/pursue acquisitions or the ability of the Group to satisfy its obligations under such debt securities.

In addition to the provisions described above, it is possible that the exercise of other powers under the Banking Act to resolve failing banks in the UK and give the authorities powers to amend the terms of contracts (for example, varying the maturity of a debt instrument) and to override events of default or termination rights that might be invoked as a result of the exercise of the resolution powers could have a material adverse effect on the rights of holders of the equity and debt securities issued by the Group, including through a material adverse effect on the price of such securities. The Banking Act also gives the Bank of England the power to override, vary or impose contractual obligations between a UK bank, its holding company and its group undertakings for reasonable consideration, in order to enable any transferee or successor bank to operate effectively. There is also power for HM Treasury to amend the law (excluding provisions made by or under the Banking Act) for the purpose of enabling it to use the regime powers effectively, potentially with retrospective effect.

The determination that securities and other obligations issued by the Group will be subject to write-down, conversion or bail-in is likely to be inherently unpredictable and may depend on a number of factors which may be outside of the Group’s control. This determination will also be made by thestrategic opportunities, impacting future growth potential.

202185

RISK FACTORS

 

relevant UK resolution authoritySee also the risk factor above entitled “The Group’s businesses are subject to inherent risks concerning liquidity and there may be many factors, including factors not directly related tofunding, particularly if the Companyavailability of traditional sources of funding such as retail deposits or the Group, which could result in such a determination. Because of this inherent uncertainty and given that both BRRD and the relevant provisions of the Banking Act remain untested in practice, it will be difficultaccess to predict when, if at all, the exercise of a bail-in power may occur which would result in a principal write-off or conversion to other securities, including the ordinary shares of the Company. Moreover, as the criteria that the relevant UK resolution authority will be obliged to consider in exercising any bail-in power provide it with considerable discretion, holders of the securities issued by the Group may not be able to refer to publicly available criteria in order to anticipate a potential exercise of any such power and consequently its potential effect on the Group and the securities issued by the Group.wholesale funding markets becomes more limited”.

 

Potential investors in the securities issued by the Group should consider the risk thatA shortage of capital could arise from (i) a holder may lose all of its investment, including the principal amount plus any accrued interest, if such statutory loss absorption measures are acted upon. The BRRD and applicable state aid rules provide that, other than in certain limited circumstances set out in the BRRD, extraordinary governmental financial support will only be available to the Group as a last resort once the write down and conversion powers and resolution tools referred to above have been exploited to the maximum extent possible.

Holdersdepletion of the Group’s securities may have limited rightscapital resources through increased costs or no rights to challenge any decision of the relevant UK resolution authority to exercise the UK bail-in power or to have that decision reviewed by a judicial or administrative process or otherwise. Accordingly, trading behaviour in respect of such securities is not necessarily expected to follow the trading behaviour associated with other types of securities that are not subject to such recoveryliabilities and resolution powers. Potential investors in securities issued by the Group should consider the risk that a holder of such securities may lose all of its investment, including (in the case of debt securities) the principal amount plus any accrued and unpaid interest, if such statutory loss absorption measures are acted upon or if that senior debt instrument may be converted into Lloyds Banking Group plc ordinary shares. Further, the introduction or amendment of such recovery and resolution powers, and/or any implication or anticipation that they may be used, may have a significant adverse effect on the market price of such securities, even if such powers are not used.

The Group faces risks associated with its compliance with a wide range of laws and regulations.

The Group is exposed to various forms of legal and regulatory risk, including:

(i)certain aspects of the Group’s activities and business may be determined by the relevant authorities, the Financial Ombudsman Service (the “FOS”) or the courts not to have been conducted in accordance with applicable laws or regulations, or, in the case of the FOS, with what is fair and reasonable in the Ombudsman’s opinion;
(ii)the possibility of alleged mis-selling of financial products or the mishandling of complaints related to the sale of such products by or attributed to a member of the Group, resulting in disciplinary action or requirements to amend sales processes, withdraw products, or provide restitution to affected customers, all of which may require additional provisions;
(iii)risks relating to compliance with, or enforcement actions in respect of, existing and/or new regulatory or reporting requirements, including as a result of a change in focus of regulation or a transfer of responsibility for regulating certain aspects of the Group’s activities and business to other regulatory bodies;
(iv)contractual and other obligations may either not be enforceable as intended or may be enforced against the Group in an adverse way;
(v)the intellectual property of the Group (such as trade names) may not be adequately protected;
(vi)the Group may be liable for damages to third parties harmed by the conduct of its business;
(vii)the risk of regulatory proceedings, enforcement actions and/or private litigation, arising out of regulatory investigations or otherwise (brought by individuals or groups of plaintiffs) in the UK and other jurisdictions; and
(viii)risks related to court or UK Government activity leading to a requirement to equalise pension benefits for the effect of Guaranteed Minimum Pensions, in particular following the completion of the recent consultation by the Department for Work and Pensions on a possible methodology for delivering equalisation. It is possible that any such requirement could increase liabilities in the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes.

Regulatory and legal actions pose a number of risks to the Group, including substantial monetary damages or fines, the amounts ofreduced asset values which are difficult to predict and may exceed the amount of provisions set aside to cover such risks. In addition, the Group may be subject, includingcould arise as a result of the crystallisation of credit-related risks, regulatory actions, toand legal risks, business and economic risks, operational risks, financial soundness-related risks and other penalties and injunctive relief, civil risks; and/or private litigation arising out of a regulatory investigation or otherwise, the potential for criminal prosecution in certain circumstances and regulatory restrictions on the Group’s business, all of which can have a negative effect on the Group’s reputation. Any of these risks could have(ii) an adverse impact on the Group’s operations, financial condition, results of operations or prospects and the confidence of customersincrease in the Group, as well as taking a significant amount of management time and resources away fromcapital that is needed to be held; and/or (iii) changes in the implementation of the Group’s strategy.

The Group’s operations also expose it to various forms of reputational impacts. Negative public opinion can result from the actual or perceived manner in which the Group conductsis required to calculate its business activities,capital and/or the risk-weightings applied to its assets. This might be driven by a change to the actual level of risk faced by the Group or to changes in the minimum capital required by legislation or by the regulatory authorities. For example, an aggregated risk-weighted asset output floor has been proposed by the Basel Committee with a transitional period from 2022 to 2027. There remains uncertainty until such rules are translated into draft European and UK legislation. Further, in the context of the UK’s departure from the EU, the application of the output floor in the United Kingdom will be a matter for the UK legislature and the Group’s financial performance, the level of direct and indirect government support, actualprudential regulators.

If, in response to higher capital requirements or a shortage, or perceived practices inshortage, of regulatory capital, the banking and financial industry,Group raises additional capital through the issuance of shares, existing shareholders may experience a dilution of their holdings. If a capital or allegationsdebt instrument is converted to ordinary shares as a result of misconduct. Negative public opiniona trigger within the contractual terms of the instrument or through the exercise of statutory powers then, depending upon the terms of the conversion, existing shareholders may adversely affectexperience a dilution of their holdings. Separately, the Group’s abilityGroup may address a shortage of capital by acting to keep and attract customers, whichreduce leverage exposures and/or risk-weighted assets, for example by way of business disposals. Such actions may result in a material adverse effect onimpact the Group’s financial condition, results of operations or prospects. Negative public opinion referenced in the media as “lack of trust” in banking can be impacted by actions of competitors across the industry as well as actions by the Group. Regaining the trust of customers and the public is a key objectiveprofitability of the Group.

 

The Group may settle litigation or regulatory proceedings prior to a final judgment or determination of liability to avoid the cost, management efforts or negative business, regulatory or reputational consequences of continuing to contest liability, even whenWhilst the Group believesmonitors current and expected future capital, MREL and liquidity requirements, including having regard to both leverage and risk weighted assets-based requirements, and seeks to manage and plan the prudential position accordingly and on the basis of current assumptions regarding future regulatory capital and liquidity requirements, there can be no assurance that the assumptions will be accurate in all respects or that it has no liabilitywill not be required to take additional measures to strengthen its capital or whenliquidity position. Market expectations as to capital and liquidity levels may also increase, driven by, for example, the potential consequencescapital and liquidity levels (or targets) of failing to prevail would be disproportionate to the costs of settlement. Furthermore, the Group may, for similar reasons, reimburse counterparties for their losses even in situations where the Group does not believe that it is legally compelled to do so. Failure to manage these risks adequately could materially affect the Group, both financially and reputationally.peer banking groups.

 

The Group faces risks associated with the high level of scrutiny of the treatment of customers by financial institutions from regulatory bodies, the mediaGroup’s borrowing costs and politicians.

The Group’s operations, in particular relatedaccess to its treatment of customers, are subject to supervision by the FCA and other regulatory authorities. In recent periods, the UK banking industry has been subject to heightened attention from these regulatory authorities,capital markets, as well as its ability to lend or carry out certain aspects of its business, could also be affected by future prudential regulatory developments more generally, including (i) evolving European and global prudential and regulatory changes, including the pressapplication of final CRRII and the UK Government. The FCA in particular continues to focus on conduct of business issues through its supervision activitiesCRD V rules from June 2021, and its establishment of a new

203

RISK FACTORS

payment systems regulator (Payment Systems Regulator). Other regulatory efforts include the implementation of Basel IV reforms in Europe and the UK Mortgage Market Review (MMR)UK; (ii) regulatory changes in April 2014,other jurisdictions to which requires lenders to obtain evidencethe Group has exposure and (iii) the evolving regulatory and legal impacts of borrowers’ income so as to ensure that they can afford a mortgage, including with respect to potential interest rate rises. The Bankthe UK’s exit from the EU.

Any of England is currently implementing limitations on the ability of lenders to provide high loan-to-income mortgages. Increased scrutiny or regulatory development in these areasrisks mentioned above could materially affect the Group’s operation of its business and/or have a material adverse effect on the Group’s business,liquidity, results of operations, orits ability to continue its business operations and its financial condition. Alongside these changes, the FCA may consider various adjustments to the MMR or other legislation in order to align it with the Mortgage Credit Directive 2014/17/EU (MCD), which came into force on 21 March 2016, including: (i) introducing the “European Standardised Information Sheet”, which is a new product disclosure document to be provided to customers, (ii) requiring firms to calculate both an annual percentage rate of charge (APRC) according to the method set out in the MCD as well as a second APRC for variable-rate mortgage products, and (iii) widening the scope of UK mortgage regulation to include properties located across the EEA, as well as certain buy-to-let mortgages and second charge lending.

Additionally, the Group is subject to the Markets in Financial Instruments Directive (MiFID) and its various implementing measures, which together regulate the provision of “investment services and activities” in relation to a range of customer-related areas, including customer classification, conflicts of interest, client order handling, investment research and financial analysis, suitability and appropriateness, transparency obligations and transaction reporting. MiFID is in the process of being replaced by a revised directive (MiFID II) and a new regulation (Markets in Financial Instruments Regulation or “MiFIR”), which entered into force on 2 July 2014. The changes to MiFID include expanded supervisory powers that include the ability to ban specific products, services or practices. While the majority of the provisions of MiFID II and MiFIR and the implementing laws and regulations are currently scheduled to apply from 3 January 2018, the Group has commenced work to meet anticipated requirements. If the Group incurs substantial expenses associated with compliance, ongoing compliance imposes significant demands on the attention of management that result in other areas of the Group’s business not receiving sufficient management attention, or if particular products, services or practices are banned, the Group’s results of operations could be materially adversely affected.

The Group is also subject to European regulation on customer deposits. On 12 June 2014, the Deposit Guarantee Schemes Directive 2014/49/EU (the “recast DGSD”) was published in the Official Journal of the EU, which replaced Directive 94/19/EC on Deposit Guarantee Schemes. As required by the recast DGSD, the UK introduced a compliant deposit guarantee scheme (DGS) that:

 

7.gives a preferenceThe financial impact of legal proceedings and regulatory risks may be material and is difficult to quantify. Amounts eventually paid may materially exceed the amount of provisions set aside to cover such risks, or existing provisions may need to be materially increased in liquidation or resolutionresponse to deposits made by retail customers and SMEs over other senior creditors (includingchanging circumstances, as has been the holderscase in respect of the Notes issued by the Bank);
sets out the rights of eligible depositors (typically retail customers) to compensation, and repayment circumstances and procedures by the DGS, covering the unavailability of any deposit, up to aggregate deposits of €100,000;
places obligations on credit institutions, in particular, requirements to provide specified information to depositors (and potential depositors) on their rights to compensation under the DGS; and
sets out provisions on the financing of DGSs, including target funding levels and contribution amounts by credit institutions.payment protection insurance (“PPI”) redress payments

 

In addition, increasing regulatory scrutiny under the EU General Data Protection Regulation may limit the extent to which customer data can be used to support the Group achieving its strategic objectives.

The financial impact of legal proceedings and regulatory risks might be material but is difficult to quantify. Amounts eventually paid may materially exceed the amount of provisions set aside to cover such risks, or existing provisions may need to be materially increased in response to changing circumstances, as has been the case in respect of payment protection insurance (“PPI”) redress payments.

Where provisions have already been taken in published financial statements of the Group or results announcements for ongoing legal or regulatory matters, these have been recognised, in accordance with IAS 37 (“Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets”) (“IAS 37”), as the best estimate of the expenditure required to settle the obligation as at the reporting date. Such estimates are inherently uncertain and it is possible that the eventual outcomes may differ materially from current estimates, resulting in future increases or decreases to the required provisions, or actual losses that exceed or fall short of the provisions taken.

 

TheExcluding MBNA Limited (“MBNA”), the Group increased provisions for expected PPI costs by a further £1.35£2.5 billion in 2016. the year ended 31 December 2019. The charge in 2019 related largely to a significant increase in PPI information requests (PIRs) leading up to the deadline for submission of claims on 29 August 2019, associated administration costs and costs associated with the Official Receiver.

This brings the total amount provided for at the end of 20162019 to £17.4£21.9 billion, of which £2.6£1.6 billion remains unutilised relating to complaints and associated administration costs.

With regard to MBNA, as announced in December 2016, the Group’s exposure is capped at £240 million and is already provided for through an indemnity received from Bank of America. MBNA increased its PPI provision by £367 million in the year ended 31 December 2019 but the Group’s exposure continues to remain capped at £240 million under this indemnity.

Provisions have not been taken where no obligation (as defined in IAS 37 (“Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets”))37) has been established, whether associated with a known or potential future litigation or regulatory matter. Accordingly, an adverse decision in any such matters could result in significant losses to the Group which have not been provided for. Such losses would have an adverse impact on the Group’s financial condition and operations.

 

In November 2014, the UK Supreme Court ruled inPlevin v Paragon Personal Finance Limited[2014] [2014] UKSC 61 (Plevin)(“Plevin”) that failure to disclose to a customer a “high” commission payment on a single premium PPI policy sold with a consumer credit agreement created an unfair relationship between the lender and the borrower under s140 of the Consumer Credit Act 1974. It did not define a tipping point above which commission was deemed “high”. The disclosure of commission was not a requirement of the FSA’s (now FCA’s) Insurance: Conduct of Business sourcebook rules for the sale of general insurance (including PPI). The industry, the FCA and the FOS are considering the broader impacts of this decision. Permission to appeal the redress outcome in the Plevin case was refused by the Court of Appeal in July 2015 and by the President of the Family Division in November 2015.

 

In November 2015 and August 2016, the FCA consulted on the introduction of a two year industry deadline by which consumers would need to make their PPI complaints or lose their right to have them assessed, and proposed rules and guidance about how firms should handle PPI complaints fairly in light of the Plevin judgementjudgment discussed above. On 2 March 2017, the FCA confirmed thean industry deadline would beof 29 August 2019, and new2019. The FCA’s rules forto address Plevin would start incommenced on 29 August 2017. The industry deadline also applies to the handling of these complaints. It is anticipated that the introduction of an industry deadline could encouragehave encouraged eligible consumers to bring their claims earlier than would have otherwise been expected during such period in the absence of an industry deadline for having complaints assessed. The newFCA’s rules, issued on 2 March 2017, could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s reputation, business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects.

Further, no assurance can be given that the Group will not incur liability in connection with any past, current or future non-compliance with legislation or regulation, and any such non-compliance could be significant and materially adversely affect the Group’s reputation, business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects.

204186

RISK FACTORS

 

BUSINESS AND ECONOMIC RISKS

8.The Group must comply with anti-money laundering, counter terrorist financing, anti-bribery and sanctions regulations, and a failure to prevent or detect any illegal or improper activities fully or on a timely basis could negatively impact customers and expose the Group to liability

 

The Group’s businesses are subjectGroup is required to inherentcomply with applicable anti-money laundering, anti-terrorism, sanctions, anti-bribery and indirect risks arising from general macro-economic conditionsother laws and regulations in the UK, the US, the Eurozone, Asia and globally, and any resulting instability of financial markets or banking systems.

The Group’s businesses are subject to inherent and indirect risks arising from general and sector-specific economic conditions in the marketsjurisdictions in which it operates, particularly the UK, where the Group’s earnings are predominantly generatedoperates. These extensive laws and the Group’s operations are increasingly concentrated following the strategic reduction of its international presence. The Group may have credit exposure in countries outside the UK even if it does not have a presence in such countries. Any significant macro-economic deterioration in the UK and/or other economies could have a material adverse effect on the results of operations, financial condition or prospects ofregulations require the Group, as could continued or increasing political uncertainty within the UKamongst other things, to adopt and the EU. The profitabilityenforce “know-your-customer” policies and procedures and to report suspicions of the Group’s businesses could be affected by market factors such as the deterioration of UK economic growth significantly below long-term average levels, rising unemployment, reduced corporate profitability, reduced personal income levels (in real terms), inflationary pressures, including those arising from the sterling’s depreciation, reduced UK Government and/or consumer expenditure, changes in interest rates (and the timing, quantummoney laundering and pace of those changes as well as the possibility of further reductions in interest rates, including negative interest rates or of unexpected increases in interest rates which may have a detrimental effect on the Group’s customersterrorist financing, and their ability to service interest), increased personal, corporate or SME insolvency rates, borrowers’ reduced ability to repay loans and increased tenant defaults which could cause prices of residential or commercial real estate or other asset prices to fall, thereby reducing the collateral value on many of the Group’s assets, fluctuations in commodity prices, changes in foreign exchange rates; or a marked deterioration in global economic growth reflecting the high levels of debt that have built up in some emerging economies, most notably China. These, in turn, could cause increased impairments and/or fair value adjustments.

In additioncountries specific transactions to the possibility of macro-economic deterioration, any increase of financial market instability including any increase in credit spreads, increase or reduction in interest rates, including negative interest rates,applicable regulatory authorities. These laws and general illiquidity within the markets that the Group uses for hedging or bond issuances may represent further risk to the Group’s business. The outlook for global growth remains uncertain due to issues such as geopolitical tensions (e.g. the Syrian crisis, EU difficulties in dealing with the large inflow of migrants, fallout from Ukraine/Russiaregulations have become increasingly complex and Middle Eastern instability), the impact of the recent US presidential election, continued divergence in economic performance between countries within the Eurozone,detailed, require improved systems and the slow-down of economic growth rates in emerging markets generallysophisticated monitoring and China in particular. The Group has significant exposures, particularly by way of loans, in a number of overseas jurisdictions and is therefore subject to various risks relating to the stability of these financial markets. The global financial system has suffered considerable turbulence and uncertainty in recent years and, despite recent growth in the Eurozone and other advanced economies, the outlook for the global economy over the near to medium term remains challenging.

In the Eurozone, the pace of economic recovery has lagged behind that of other advanced countries following the global recession. While economic growth has picked up in certain Eurozone countries over the past year, recovery remains relatively weak and deflationary pressures, together with high levels of private and public debt, outstanding weaknesses in the financial sector and reform fatigue, also remain a concern. In addition, increased political uncertainty in the Eurozone, particularly in light of the upcoming elections in The Netherlands, France and Germany, could create financial instabilitycompliance personnel, and have a negative impact onbecome the Eurozonesubject of enhanced government and global economies. The possibility of prolonged low growth in the Eurozone could weaken the UK’s economic prospects, given the extensive economic and financial linkages between the UK and the Eurozone.

The recent US presidential election result creates additional uncertainty for the US and global economic outlook. Whilst it is possible that the new administration’s economic policies might have an adverse effect on US and global growth as well as global trade prospects, it is also possible that an expansionary fiscal policy could create greater than expected growth resulting in higher US inflation and interest rates which could in turn significantly impact global investor risk appetite, sparking elevated financial market volatility.

In addition, developing macro-economic uncertainty in emerging markets, in particular the high and growing level of debt in China and the risk of a sharp slowdown in Chinese economic growth or a devaluation of the Renminbi could pose threats to global economic recovery. External debt levels are higher now in emerging markets than before the global financial crisis, which could lead to higher levels of defaults and non-performing loans, in particular in an environment of rising interest rates. Financial markets may experience renewed periods of volatility, especially given the recent instability in oil and other commodity prices impacting corporates and emerging markets dependent on the oil and gas sector, creating the potential for a return of contagion between countries and banking systems which may place new strains on funding markets.regulatory supervision.

 

The Group has credit exposureadopted policies and procedures aimed at detecting and preventing the use of its banking network and services for money laundering, financing terrorism, bribery, tax evasion, human trafficking, modern day slavery, wildlife trafficking and related activities. These controls, however, may not eliminate instances where third parties seek to SMEs and corporates, financial institutions, sovereigns and securities which may have material direct and indirect exposures in Eurozone countries, the US and other countries. With the exception ofuse the Group’s retail lending exposuresproducts and services to engage in illegal or improper activities. In addition, while the Republic of Ireland,Group reviews its direct credit exposurerelevant counterparties’ internal policies and procedures with respect to such matters, the peripheral Eurozone countries through sovereignGroup, to a large degree, relies upon its relevant counterparties to maintain and private sector exposure is relatively smallproperly apply their own appropriate anti-money laundering procedures. Such measures, procedures and has been managed steadily downward since 2008.

Nonetheless, any default oncompliance may not be effective in preventing third parties from using the sovereign debt of these countriesGroup (and its relevant counterparties) as a conduit for money laundering and the resulting impact on other Eurozone countries, including the potential that some countries could leave the Eurozone, could have a material adverse effect onterrorist financing (including illegal cash operations) without the Group’s business. The exit(and its relevant counterparties’) knowledge. If the Group is associated with, or even accused of being associated with, or becomes a party to, money laundering or terrorist financing, the Group’s reputation could suffer and it could become subject to fines, sanctions and/or legal enforcement (including being added to any member state from the European Monetary Union (the “EMU”) could result in deterioration in the economic and financial environment in the UK and the Eurozone“black lists” that would materially affect the capital and the funding position of participantsprohibit certain parties from engaging in the banking industry, including the Group. This could also give rise to operational disruptions to the Group’s business.

Examples of indirect risks to the Group associatedtransactions with the Eurozone which have been identified are adverse developments relating to: European banking groups with lending and other exposures to certain Eurozone countries, corporate customers with operations or significant trade in certain European jurisdictions, major travel operators and airlines known to operate in certain Eurozone countries, and international banks with custodian operations based in certain European locations. Adverse developments relating to these sectors, or banking groups could increase the risk of defaults and negatively impact the Group’s business, results of operations or financial condition.

The effects on the UK, European and global economies of the exit ofGroup), any one or more EU member states from the EMU, or the redenomination of financial instruments from the Euro to a different currency, are extremely uncertain and very difficult to predict and protect fully against in view of: (i) the potential for economic and financial instability in the Eurozone and possibly in the UK, (ii) the lasting impact on governments’ financial positions of the global financial crisis, (iii) the uncertain legal position, and (iv) the fact that many of the risks related to the business are totally, or in part, outside the control of the Group. However, if any such events were to occur, they may result in: (a) significant market dislocation, (b) heightened counterparty risk, (c) an adverse effect on the management of market risk and, in particular, asset and liability management due, in part, to redenomination of financial assets and liabilities, (d) an indirect risk of counterparty failure, or (e) further political uncertainty in the UK, any of which could have a material adverse effect on the results of operations, financial condition or prospects of the Group. Any adverse changes affecting the economies of the countries in which the Group has significant direct and indirect credit exposures, including those discussed above and any further deterioration in global macro-economic conditions, could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

205

RISK FACTORS

Political, legal, regulatory, constitutional and economic uncertainty arising from the outcome of the referendum on the UK’s membership of the European Union could adversely impact the Group’s business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects.

On 23 June 2016, the UK held a referendum on the UK’s continued membership of the EU. A majority of voters voted for the UK to leave the EU. The announcement of the referendum result caused significant volatility in global stock markets and currency exchange rate fluctuations immediately following the EU referendum result that resulted in a significant weakening of the sterling against the U.S. dollar, the euro and other major currencies. The share prices of major UK banks and bank holding companies, including the Company, suffered significant declines in market prices immediately following the result of the referendum and major credit rating agencies downgraded the UK’s sovereign credit rating.

A process of negotiation will be required to determine the future terms of the UK’s relationship with the EU, and the uncertainty regarding the timing of, and the process for, the UK’s exit from the EU before, during and after the period of negotiation could have a negative economic impact and result in further volatility in the markets which could in turn adversely impact the Group’s business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects.

 

The effects on the UK, EuropeanFurthermore, failure to comply with trade and global economies of the uncertainties arising from the results of the referendumeconomic sanctions, both primary and the process of the UK’s exit from the EUsecondary (which are difficultfrequently subject to predict but may include economicchange by relevant governments and financial instabilityagencies in the UK, Europe and the global economy and the other types of risks described in “—The Group’s businesses are subject to inherent and indirect risks arising from general macro-economic conditions in the UK, the US, the Eurozone, Asia and globally, and any resulting instability of financial markets or banking systems”.

Under Article 50 of the Treaty on European Union (Article 50) once the exit process is triggered by the withdrawing member state, a two-year period of negotiation begins to determine the new terms of the withdrawing member’s relationship with the EU, after which period its EU membership ceases unless the European Council, together with the withdrawing member, unanimously decides to extend this period.

If, as is expected, the UK invokes Article 50, negotiations relating to the terms of the UK’s relationship with the EU may extend beyond the two-year period set forth therein which could create additional volatility in the markets and have an adverse impact on the Group’s profitability. These negotiations will run in parallel to standalone bilateral negotiations with many individual countries and multilateral counterparties with which the UK currently has trading arrangements by virtue of its membership of the EU. The timing of, and process for, such negotiations and the resulting terms of the UK’s future economic, trading and legal relationships are uncertain.

Furthermore, any uncertainty in the UK arising from the UK leaving the EU could be exacerbated should the possibility of a further Scottish independence referendum be resurrected. This could cause further uncertainty and risks to the Group.

The longer term effects of the EU referendum are difficult to predict but could include further financial instability and slower economic growth, in the UK in particular, but also in Europe and the global economy. The possible policy of further decreases in interest rates by the Bank of England or sustained low or negative interest rates would put further pressure on the Group’s interest margins and adversely affect the Group’s profitability and prospects. Furthermore, such market conditions may also result in an increase in the Group’s pension deficit.

A challenging macroeconomic environment, reduced profitability and greater market uncertainty could negatively impact the Group’s performance and potentially lead to credit ratings downgrades which could adversely impact the Group’s ability to access funding and the cost of such funding. The Group’s ability to access capital markets on acceptable terms and hence its ability to raise the amount of capital and funding required to meet its regulatory requirements and targets, including those relating to loss-absorbing instruments to be issued by the Group, could be affected.

The Group is subject to substantial EU-derived laws, regulation and oversight. There is now significant uncertainty as to the respective legal and regulatory environments in which the Group and its subsidiaries will operate when the UK is no longer a member of the EU. In particular, the Group and its counterparties may no longer be able to rely on the European passporting framework for financial services, which could result in the loss of customers and/or the requirement for the Group to apply for authorisation in multiple EU jurisdictions, the costs, timing and viability of which are uncertain. This uncertainty, and any actions taken as a result of this uncertainty (such as corporate clients of the Group preferring to transact with European competitors or to relocate from the UK to the EU to avoid a loss of passporting rights), as well as new or amended legislation and regulation, may have a significant impact on the Group’s operations, profitability and business model. For further information on the Group’s regulatory and legal risks see “—Regulatory and legal risks”.

Any tightening of monetary policy in jurisdictions in which the Group operatesoperates) and failure to comply fully with other applicable compliance laws and regulations, may result in the imposition of fines and other penalties on the Group, including the revocation of licences. In addition, the Group’s business and reputation could suffer if customers use its banking network for money laundering, financing terrorism, or other illegal or improper purposes.

9.Failure to manage the risks associated with changes in taxation rates or applicable tax laws, or misinterpretation of such tax laws, could materially adversely affect the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects

Tax risk is the financial conditionrisk associated with changes in taxation rates, applicable tax laws, misinterpretation of its customers, clients and counterparties, including governmentssuch tax laws, disputes with relevant tax authorities in relation to historic transactions, or conducting a challenge to a relevant tax authority. Failure to manage this risk adequately could cause the Group to suffer losses due to additional tax charges and other financial institutions, which could in turn adversely affect the Group’s results of operations.

Quantitative easing measures implemented by major central banks, adopted alongside record low interest rates to support recovery from the global financial crisis, have arguably helped loosen financial conditions and reduce borrowing costs. These measures may have led to the emergence of asset and liquidity bubbles that are vulnerable to rapid price corrections as financial conditions tighten, causing losses to investors and increasing the risk of default on the Group’s exposure to these sectors.

Whilst the US Federal Reserve increased its policy interest rates in December 2015 and December 2016, the US Federal Reserve’s policy stance and the future trajectory of policy rates remain uncertain. It remains unclear whether other major central banks,costs including the Bank of England, will begin to raise their policy interest rates in the near term. Given the current disinflationary global environment and uncertain outlook for emerging market growth, it is possible that policy interest rate increases may not occur and some central banks, such as the European Central Bank (the “ECB”) and Bank of England, may seek to lower policy interest rates further.

Although uncertainty remains about the timing of any increases by central banks, it is possible that any increase in interest rates may lead to increasing levels of defaults by the Group’s customers. Monetary policy has been highly accommodative in recent years, further supported by the Bank of England and HM Treasury “Funding for Lending” scheme, the “Help to Buy” scheme (which closed at the end of 2016), the “Term Funding Scheme” and the purchase of corporate bonds in the UK, which have helped to support demand at a time of very pronounced fiscal tightening and balance sheet repair.penalties. Such a long period of stimulus has increased uncertainty over the impact of its reduction, including the possibility of a withdrawal of such programmes whichfailure could lead to generally weaker than expected growth, or even contracting gross domestic product (GDP), reduced businessadverse publicity, reputational damage and consumer confidence, higher levels of unemployment or underemployment, adverse changes to levels of inflation and falling property pricespotentially costs materially exceeding current provisions, in the markets in which the Group operates, and consequentlyeach case to an increase in delinquency rates and default rates among its customers. Similar risks result from the exceptionally low level of inflation in developed economies, which in Europe particularly could deteriorate into sustained deflation if policy measures prove ineffective. Reduced monetary stimulus and the actions and commercial soundness of other financial institutions have the potential to impact market liquidity. The adverse impact on the credit quality of the Group’s customers and counterparties, coupled with a decline in collateral values, could lead to a reduction in recoverability and value of the Group’s assets and higher levels of impairment allowances,extent which could have an adverse effect on the Group’s operations, financial condition or prospects.

206

RISK FACTORS

Accommodative credit conditions in some areas of the world since the global financial crisis have led to a further build-up of debt, with private sector corporate debt in emerging markets growing particularly quickly. Emerging market currency depreciation and rising US interest rates may result in increasing difficulties in servicing this increased debt, especially debt that is denominated in US dollars, possibly leading to debt defaults, which may negatively affect economic growth in emerging markets or globally.

The Group’s businesses are inherently subject to the risk of market fluctuations, which could have a material adverse effect on the results of operations, financial condition or prospects of the Group.

The Group’s businesses are inherently subject to risks in financial markets and in the wider economy, including changes in, and increased volatility of, interest rates, inflation rates, credit spreads, foreign exchange rates, commodity, equity, bond and property prices and the risk that its customers act in a manner which is inconsistent with the Group’s business, pricing and hedging assumptions. Movements in these markets will continue to have a significant impact on the Group in a number of key areas.

For example, adverse market movements have had and would have an adverse effect, which could be material, upon the financial condition of the defined benefit pension schemes of the Group. The schemes’ main exposures are to real rate risk and credit spread risk. These risks arise from two main sources: the “AA” corporate bond liability discount rate and asset holdings.

Banking and trading activities that are undertaken by the Group are also subject to market movements, including interest rate risk, foreign exchange risk, inflation risk and credit spread risk. For example, changes in interest rate levels, interbank margins over official rates, yield curves and spreads affect the interest rate margin realised between lending and borrowing costs. The potential for future volatility and margin changes remains. Competitive pressures on fixed rates or product terms in existing loans and deposits may restrict the Group in its ability to change interest rates applying to customers in response to changes in official and wholesale market rates. The Group will continue to face interest rate margin compression in the prolonged low (or negative) interest rate environment and the yield on its structural hedge will reduce as reinvestment is undertaken at lower rates.

The insurance business of the Group is exposed indirectly to equity and credit markets through the value of future management charges on policyholder funds. Credit spread risk within insurance primarily arises from bonds and loans used to back annuities. The performance of the investment markets will thus have a direct impact upon the profit from investment contracts and on the insurance value in force (VIF) and the Group’s operating results, financial condition or prospects.

Changes in foreign exchange rates, including with respect to the US dollar and the Euro, affect the Group’s financial position and/or forecasted earnings. Foreign exchange risk is actively managed by the Group within a low risk appetite, minimising the Group’s exposure to exchange rate fluctuations.

Market conditions have resulted, and are expected to result in the future, in material changes to the estimated fair values of financial assets of the Group. Negative fair value adjustments have had, and may continue to have in the future, an adverse effect on the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

The Group has exposures to securities, derivatives and other investments, including asset-backed securities, structured investments and private equity investments that are recorded by the Group at fair value. These have been and may be subject to further negative fair value adjustments, particularly in view of the volatile global markets and challenging economic environment. Although credit value adjustments, debit value adjustments and funding value adjustments are actively managed within the Group, in stressed market conditions adverse movements in these could result in a material charge to the Group’s profit and loss account.

In volatile markets, hedging and other risk management strategies (including collateralisation and the purchase of credit default swaps) may not be as effective as they are in normal market conditions, due in part to the decreasing credit quality of hedge counterparties, and general illiquidity in the markets within which transactions are executed. Asset valuations in future periods, reflecting prevailing market conditions, may result in further negative changes in the fair values of the Group’s financial assets and these may also translate into increased impairment charges.

In circumstances where fair values are determined using financial valuation models, the Group’s valuation methodologies may require it to make assumptions, judgements and estimates in order to establish fair value. These valuation models are complex and the assumptions used are difficult to make and are inherently uncertain. This is particularly relevant in light of uncertainty as to the strength of the global economic recovery and continuing downside risks and may be amplified during periods of market volatility and illiquidity. Any consequential impairments, write-downs or adjustments could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s operating results, capital ratios, financial condition or prospects.

The value ultimately realised by the Group for its securities and other investments may be lower than their current fair value. Any of these factors could require the Group to record further negative fair value adjustments, which may have a material adverse effect on its operating results, financial condition or prospects. Material losses from the fair value of financial assets will also have an adverse impact on the Group’s capital ratios.

The Group’s businesses are conducted in competitive environments, with increased competition scrutiny, and the Group’s financial performance depends upon management’s ability to respond effectively to competitive pressures.

The markets for UK financial services, and the other markets within which the Group operates, are competitive, and management expects such competition to continue or intensify in response to competitor behaviour, new entrants to the market (including a number of new retail banks as well as non-traditional financial services providers), consumer demand, technological changes such as the growth of digital banking, and the impact of regulatory actions and other factors. The Group’s financial performance and its ability to maintain existing or capture additional market share depends significantly upon the competitive environment and management’s response thereto.

Notwithstanding this increase in competition described above, intervention by the UK Government competition authorities and/or European regulatory bodies and/or governments of other countries in which the Group operates, including in response to any perceived lack of competition within these markets by such regulatory authorities, may significantly impact the competitive position of the Group relative to its international competitors, which may be subject to different forms of government intervention, thus potentially putting the Group at a competitive disadvantage.

207

RISK FACTORS

The Competition and Markets Authority (the “CMA”) launched a full market investigation into competition in the SME banking and personal current account (PCA) markets in November 2014 and published its final report on 9 August 2016. The key final remedies include: the introduction of “Open Banking”, the publication of service quality information and customer information prompts. Recommendations were also made regarding improvements to current account switching, monthly maximum charges for PCA overdraft users, overdraft notifications and additional measures to assist small business in comparing the different products available. Recent political debate on the reform of the UK banking markets, other current or potential competition reviews, the payment systems regulator and the FCA statutory objective to promote competition, along with concurrent competition powers, may lead to proposals or initiatives to reduce regulators’ competition concerns, and for greater UK Government and regulatory scrutiny in the future that may impact the Group further. Additionally, the Group may be affected by changes in regulatory oversight following the pension review recommended by the Department for Work and Pensions. For more information on the Group’s regulatory environment, see “—Regulation—Other Bodies Impacting the Regulatory Regime”.

The internet and mobile technologies are changing customer behaviour and the competitive environment. There has been a steep rise in customer use of mobile banking over the last four years. The Group faces competition from established providers of financial services as well as from banking business developed by non-financial companies, including technology companies with strong brand recognition.

As a result of any restructuring or evolution in the market, there may emerge one or more new viable competitors in the UK banking market or a material strengthening of one or more of the Group’s existing competitors in that market. Any of these factors or a combination thereof could result in a significant reduction in the profit of the Group.

BUSINESS AND OPERATIONAL RISKS

 

The Group could fail to attract or retain senior management or other key employees.

The Group’s success depends on its ability to attract, retain and develop high calibre talent. The Group’s achievement of this aim may be impacted by the introduction of the SMCR, which came into force on 7 March 2016. The SMCR includes a criminal offence of reckless misconduct, a statutory “duty of responsibility” to take reasonable steps to prevent regulatory breaches occurring or continuing in the area of the firm for which they have responsibility and increasing use of senior management attestations. In addition, the proposed limits on variable pay and “clawback” requirements which were introduced pursuant to CRD IV in the UK may put the Group at a competitive disadvantage compared to companies who are not subject to such restrictions. In addition, macro-economic conditions and negative media attention on the financial services industry may adversely impact employee retention, colleague sentiment and engagement.

1.Operational risks, including the risk that the Group fails to design resilience into business operations, underlying infrastructure and controls, including weaknesses or failures in the Group’s processes, systems and security, and risks due to reliance on third party services and products could materially adversely affect the Group’s operations

 

In addition, the uncertainty resulting from the UK’s exit from the EU, following the referendum decision, on foreign nationals’ long-term residency permissions in the UK may make it challenging for the Group to retain and recruit adequate staff.

Failure to attract and retain senior management and key employees could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

Operational risks such as weaknesses or failures in the Group’s processes, systems and security and risks due to reliance on third party services and products could materially adversely affect the Group’s operations, results of operations, financial condition or prospects, and could result in the reputational damage of the Group.

Operational risks, through inadequate or failed processes, systems (including financial reporting and risk monitoring processes) or security, or from people-related or external events, including the risk of fraud and other criminal acts carried out against the Group, are present in the Group’s businesses. The Group’s businesses are dependent on processing and reporting accurately and efficiently a high volume of complex transactions across numerous and diverse products and services, in different currencies and subject to a number of different legal and regulatory regimes. Any weakness or errors in these processes, systems or security could have an adverse effect on the Group’s results, reporting of such results, and on the ability to deliver appropriate customer outcomes during the affected period which may lead to an increase in complaints and damage to the reputation of the Group.

 

Specifically, failure to develop, deliver or maintain effective IT solutions in line with the Group’s operating environment could have a material adverse impact on customer service and business operations. Any prolonged loss of service availability could damage the Group’s ability to service its customers, could result in compensation costs and could cause long-term damage to the Group’s business and brand. Furthermore, failure to protect the Group’s operations from increasingly sophisticated cyber-attacks could result in the loss and/or corruption of customer data or other sensitive information. The resilience of the Group’s IT infrastructure is of paramount importance to the Group; accordingly, significant investment has been,See “Business and will continue to be, made in IT infrastructure and supporting capabilities to ensure its resilience and subsequently the delivery of services to customers. The Group continues to invest in IT and information security control environments, including activity on user access management and records management to address evolving threats. The Group maintains contingency plans for a range of Group specific and industry wide IT and breach of security scenarios.

The Group adopts a risk based approach to mitigate the internal and external fraud risks it faces, reflecting the current and emerging fraud risks within the market. This approach drives a continual programme of prioritised enhancements to the Group’s technology, process and people related controls, with an emphasis on preventative controls supported by real time detective controls wherever feasible. Group-wide policies and operational control frameworks are maintained and designed to provide customer confidence, protect the Group’s commercial interests and reputation, comply with legal requirements and meet regulatory expectations.Operational Risks - The Group’s fraud awareness programme remains a key component of its fraud control environment. Although the Group devotes significant resourcesbusiness is subject to maintain and regularly update the processes and systems that are designedrisks related to protect the security of the Group’s systems, software, networks and other technology assets, there is no assurance that all of the Group’s security measures will provide absolute security. Any damage to the Group’s reputation (including to customer confidence) arising from actual or perceived inadequacies, weaknesses or failures in Group systems, processes or security could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.cybercrime.”

 

Third parties such as suppliers and vendors upon which the Group relies for important products and services could also be sources of operational risk, specifically with regard to security breaches affecting such parties. Many of the operational risks described above also apply when the Group relies on outside suppliers or vendors to provide key components of its business infrastructure. The Group may be required to take steps to protect the integrity of its operational systems, thereby increasing its operational costs. Additionally, any problems caused by these third parties, including as a result of their not providing the Group their services for any reason, their performing their services poorly, or employee misconduct, could adversely affect the Group’s ability to deliver products and services to customers and otherwise to conduct business. Replacing these third party vendors or moving critical services from one provider to another could also entail significant delays and expense.

The Group is also exposed to risk of fraud, cyberattack and other criminal activities (both internal and external) due to the operational risks inherent in banking operations. These risks are also present when the Group relies on outside suppliers or vendors to provide services to the Group and its customers. Fraudsters may target any of the Group’s products, services and delivery channels, including lending, internet banking, payments, bank accounts and cards. This may result in financial loss to the Group and/or the Group’s customers, poor customer experience, reputational damage, potential litigation and regulatory proceedings. Industry reported gross fraud losses have continued to increase as both financial institutions and their customers are targeted. Fraud losses and their impacts on customers and the wider society are now an increasing priority for consumer groups, regulators and the UK Government. Any weakness or errors in the Group’s processes, systems or security could have an adverse effect on the Group’s results and on the ability to deliver appropriate customer responses, which may lead to an increase in complaints and damage to the Group’s reputation. Please see “Regulatory and Legal Risks – The Group must comply with anti-money laundering, counter terrorist financing, anti-bribery and sanctions regulations, and a failure to prevent or detect any illegal or improper activities fully or on a timely basis could negatively impact customers and expose the Group to liability”.

2.The Group is exposed to conduct risk

The Group is exposed to various forms of conduct risk in its operations. Conduct risk is the risk of customer detriment due to poor design, distribution and execution of products and services or other activities which could undermine the integrity of the market or distort competition, leading to unfair customer outcomes, regulatory censure and financial and reputational loss. Such risks are inherent in banking services. Forms of conduct risk include business and strategic planning that does not sufficiently consider customer need (leading to products being offered beyond target markets and

208187

RISK FACTORS

 

Notwithstanding anythingmis-selling of financial products), ineffective management and monitoring of products and their distribution (which could result in thiscustomers receiving unfair outcomes), customer communications that are unclear, unfair, misleading or untimely (which could impact customer decision-making and result in customers receiving unfair outcomes), a culture that is not sufficiently customer-centric (potentially driving improper decision-making and unfair outcomes for customers), outsourcing of customer service and product delivery via third-parties that do not have the same level of control, oversight and customer-centric culture as the Group (which could result in potentially unfair or inconsistent customer outcomes), the possibility of alleged mis-selling of financial products (which could require amendments to sales processes, withdrawal of products or the provision of restitution to affected customers, all of which may require additional provisions in the Group’s financial accounts), ineffective management of customer complaints or claims (which could result in customers receiving unfair outcomes), ineffective processes or procedures to support customers, including those in potentially vulnerable circumstances (which could result in customers receiving unfair outcomes or treatments which do not support their needs), and poor governance of colleagues’ incentives and rewards and approval of schemes which drive unfair customer outcomes. Ineffective management and oversight of legacy conduct issues can also result in customers who are undergoing remediation being unfairly treated and therefore further rectification being required. The Group is also exposed to the risk factor, this risk factor should notof engaging in, or failing to manage, conduct which could constitute market abuse, undermine the integrity of a market in which it is active, distort competition or create conflicts of interest. Each of these risks can lead to regulatory censure, reputational damage, regulatory intervention/enforcement, the imposition of lengthy remedial redress programmes and financial penalties or other loss for the Group, all of which could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

3.The Group’s business is subject to risks related to cybercrime

The Group holds personally identifiable information on its systems aligned to product and services delivered to customers. Protection is delivered in accordance with data protection legislation, including GDPR. In certain international locations, there are additional regulatory requirements that must be taken as implyingfollowed for business conducted in that eitherjurisdiction. In the U.S., for example, the Company or any relevant company withinwas required from February 2018 to formally attest that it complies with specific cyber security requirements put forth by the Group will be unable to comply with its obligations as a company with securities admitted toNew York State Department of Financial Services in Part 500 of Title 23 of the Official List or as a supervised firm regulated byCompilation of Codes, Rules and Regulations of the FCA and/or the PRA.State of New York.

 

The Group’s business is subject to risks related to cybercrime.

The Group relies on the effectiveness of its Group Information and Cyber Security Policies and associated procedures, infrastructure and capabilities to protect the confidentiality and integrity of information held on its IT infrastructure and the infrastructure of third parties on whom the Group relies. The Group also takes protective measures against attacks designed to impact the availability of critical business processes to its customers. Despite preventative measures, the Group’s IT infrastructure, and that of third parties on whom the Group relies, may be vulnerable to cyber-attacks, sabotage,malware, denial of services, unauthorised access computer viruses, worms or other malicious code, and other events that have a security impact. Such an event may impact the confidentiality or integrity of the Group’s or its clients’, employees’ or counterparties’ information or the availability of services to customers. As a result of such an event or a failure in the Group’s cyber security policies, the Group could experience material financial loss, loss of competitive position, regulatory actions, breach of client contracts, reputational harm or legal liability, which, in turn, could causehave a decline inmaterial adverse effect on the Group’s earnings.results of operations, financial condition or prospects. The Group may be required to spend additional resources to modify its protective measures or to investigate and remediate vulnerabilities or other exposures, and it may be subject to litigation and financial losses that are either not insured against fully or not fully covered through any insurance that it maintains. Any failure in the Group’s cyber security policies, procedures or capabilities, or cyber-related crime, could lead to the Group suffering reputational damage, a loss of clients and could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects. The Group is committed to continued participation in industry-wide activity relating to cyber risk. This includes working with relevant regulatory and government departments to evaluate the approach the Group is taking to mitigate this risk.risk and sharing relevant information across the financial services sector.

4.The Group is subject to the emerging risks associated with climate change

The risks associated with climate change are coming under an increasing focus, both in the UK and internationally, from governments, regulators and large sections of society. These risks include: physical risks, arising from climate and weather-related events of increasing severity and/or frequency; transition risks resulting from the process of adjustment towards a lower carbon economy (including stranded, redundant or prohibited assets); and liability risks arising from the Group or clients experiencing litigation or reputational damage as a result of sustainability issues.

 

Terrorist acts,Physical risks from climate change arise from a number of factors and relate to specific weather events and longer term shifts in the climate. The nature and timing of extreme weather events are uncertain but they are increasing in frequency and their impact on the economy is predicted to be more acute in the future. The potential impact on the economy includes, but is not limited to, lower GDP growth, higher unemployment and significant changes in asset prices and profitability of industries. Such risks could lead to deteriorating claims experience for the Group’s general insurance business, out of line with the original assessment of risk that was used to set price and capital adequacy. This could pose a threat to both profitability and the strength of the solvency position of the general insurance business. Climate change related increases in risk could also necessitate the withdrawal of cover from areas that become uninsurable due to extreme inundation risk, opening the Group up to reputational damage in its withdrawal of such support. The physical risks could also lead to the disruption of business activity at client’s locations. In addition, the Group’s premises and resilience may also suffer physical damage due to weather events leading to increased costs for the Group.

The move towards a low-carbon economy will also create transition risks, due to potential significant and rapid developments in the expectations of policymakers, regulators and society resulting in policy, regulatory and technological changes which could impact the Group. These risks may cause the impairment of asset values, impact the creditworthiness of clients of the Group, and impact defaults among retail customers (including through the ability of customers to repay their mortgages, as well as the impact on the value of the underlying property), which could result in currently profitable business deteriorating over the term of agreed facilities. They may also adversely affect a policyholder’s returns.

In January 2020, the Group announced an ambitious goal to work with customers, government and the market to help reduce the emissions the Group finances by more than 50 percent by 2030 (see Environmental Matters – Helping the transition to a sustainable low carbon economy). Achieving this goal will require, among other actsthings: customers to change their behaviours; governments to introduce new policies, incentives and to invest in infrastructure; new market developments; and technological advancements. If these changes, most of war, geopolitical events, pandemicswhich are out of the Group’s control, do not occur, the Group may have difficulty achieving its targets. Furthermore, in order to reach its targets, the Group will need to further develop sustainable finance products and may be required to alter its business model.

If the Group does not adequately embed the risks associated with climate change identified above into its risk framework to appropriately measure, manage and disclose the various financial and operational risks it faces as a result of climate change, or other such eventsfails to adapt its strategy and business model to the changing regulatory requirements and market expectations on a timely basis, this could have a materialan adverse effectimpact on the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

Terrorist acts, other acts of war or hostility, geopolitical events, pandemics or other such events and responses to those acts/events may create economic and political uncertainties, which could have a material adverse effect on UK and international macro-economic conditions generally, and more specifically on the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects in ways that cannot necessarily be predicted.

TSB servicing requirements may adversely impact the Group.

As part of the divestment of TSB, the Group provides certain services to TSB which may result in reputational and financial exposure for the Group. For example, TSB relies on the Group for the provision of its IT systems and supporting infrastructure. The risks associated with provision of services to TSB include managing conflict of interests, the confidentiality of data, and competition risks as a part of providing services to a competitor bank. The Group’s service provision obligations, and the associated risks, are expected to cease as TSB transitions services to Banco de Sabadell, S.A.

The Group must comply with anti-money laundering, counter terrorist financing, anti-bribery and sanctions regulations, and a failure to prevent or detect any illegal or improper activities fully or on a timely basis could negatively impact customers and expose the Group to liability.

The Group is required to comply with applicable anti-money laundering, anti-terrorism, sanctions, anti-bribery and other laws and regulations in the jurisdictions in which it operates. These laws and regulations require the Group, amongst other things, to adopt and enforce “know-your-customer” policies and procedures and to report suspicions of money laundering and terrorist financing, and in some countries specific transactions to the applicable regulatory authorities. These laws and regulations have become increasingly complex and detailed, require improved systems and sophisticated monitoring and compliance personnel, and have become the subject of enhanced government and regulatory supervision.

The Group has adopted policies and enhanced its procedures aimed at detecting and preventing the use of its banking network and services for money laundering, financing terrorism, and related activities, applying systems and controls on a risk-based approach throughout its businesses and operations. These controls, however, may not completely eliminate instances where third parties seek to use the Group’s products and services to engage in illegal or improper activities. In addition, while the Group reviews its relevant counterparties’ internal policies and procedures with respect to such matters, the Group, to a large degree, relies upon its relevant counterparties to maintain and properly apply their own appropriate anti-money laundering procedures. Such measures, procedures and compliance may not be completely effective in preventing third parties from using the Group (and its relevant counterparties) as a conduit for money laundering and terrorist financing (including illegal cash operations) without the Group’s (and its relevant counterparties’) knowledge. If the Group is associated with, or even accused of being associated with, or becomes a party to, money laundering or terrorist financing, the Group’s reputation could suffer and/or it could become subject to fines, sanctions and/or legal enforcement (including being added to any “black lists” that would prohibit certain parties from engaging in transactions with the Group), any one of which could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s operating results, financial condition and prospects.

 

To

5.The Group’s businesses are conducted in competitive environments, with increased competition scrutiny, and the Group’s financial performance depends upon management’s ability to respond effectively to competitive pressures and scrutiny

The markets for UK financial services, and the extentother markets within which the Group operates, are competitive, and management expects such competition to continue or intensify. This expectation is due to competitor behaviour, new entrants to the market (including a number of new retail banks as well as non-traditional financial services providers), consumer demand, technological changes such as the growth of digital banking, and the impact of regulatory actions and other factors. The Group’s financial performance and its ability to maintain existing or capture additional market share depends significantly upon the competitive environment and management’s response thereto.

The competitive environment can be, and is, influenced by intervention by the UK Government competition authorities and/or European regulatory bodies and/or governments of other countries in which the Group operates, including in response to any perceived lack of competition within these markets. This may significantly impact the competitive position of the Group relative to its international competitors, which may be subject to different forms of government intervention.

The Competition and Markets Authority (the “CMA”) launched a full market investigation into competition in the SME banking and personal current account (“PCA”) markets in November 2014 and published its final report on 9 August 2016, followed by the Retail Banking Market Investigation Order 2017 on 2 February 2017. The key final remedies include: the introduction of “Open Banking”, the publication of service quality information and

188

RISK FACTORS

customer information prompts. Recommendations were also made regarding improvements to current account switching, monthly maximum charges for PCA overdraft users, overdraft notifications and additional measures to assist small business in comparing the different products available.

Additionally, the internet and mobile technologies are changing customer behaviour and the competitive environment. There has been a steep rise in customer use of mobile banking over the last four years. The Group faces competition from established providers of financial services as well as from banking business developed by non-financial companies, including technology companies with strong brand recognition.

As a result of any restructuring or evolution in the market, there may emerge one or more new viable competitors in the UK banking market or a material strengthening of one or more of the Group’s existing competitors in that market. Any of these factors or a combination thereof could result in a significant reduction in the profit of the Group.

6.The Group could fail to attract or retain senior management or other key employees

The Group’s success depends on its ability to attract, retain and develop high calibre talent. If the Group was to unexpectedly lose a member of its key management or fail to maintain one of the strategic relationships of the Group’s key management team, its business and results of operations could be materially adversely affected.

In addition, the Group also relies upon the services of other third-party providers for certain services and it may exercise limited control over the activities and business practices of these providers and any inability on the Group’s part to maintain satisfactory commercial relationships with them or their failure to provide quality services could adversely affect the Group’s business.

Attracting additional and retaining existing skilled personnel is fundamental to the continued growth of the Group’s business. Personnel costs, including salaries, are increasing as the general level of prices and the standard of living increases in the countries in which the Group does business and as industry-wide demand for suitably qualified personnel increases. No assurance can be given that the Group failswill successfully attract new personnel or retain existing personnel required to comply fully with applicable laws and regulations, the relevant government and regulatory agenciescontinue to which it reports have the power and authority to impose fines and other penalties on the Group, including the revocation of licences. In addition,expand the Group’s business and reputation could suffer if customers use its banking networkto successfully execute and implement the Group’s business strategy. In addition, the uncertainty resulting from the UK’s exit from the EU on foreign nationals’ long-term residency permissions in the UK may make it challenging for money laundering, financing terrorism, or other illegal or improper purposes.the Group to retain and recruit colleagues with relevant skills and experience.

7.The Group may fail to execute its ongoing strategic change initiatives, and the expected benefits of such initiatives may not be achieved on time or as planned

In order to maintain and enhance the Group’s strategic position, it continues to invest in new initiatives and programmes. The Group acknowledges the challenges faced with delivering these initiatives and programmes alongside the extensive agenda of regulatory and legal changes whilst safely operating existing systems and controls.

 

The Group may fail to execute its ongoing strategic change initiatives, and the expected benefits of such initiatives may not be achieved at the time or to the extent expected, or at all.

The Group has a number of strategic initiatives which it pursues on an ongoing basis. For example, the Group has programmes for reducing costs, improving efficiency and financial performance, and enhancing the overall customer experience by simplifying and reshaping the Group’s businesses. As the Group continues to deliver this strategy there is considerable focus on digitisation and ensuring the Group meets customer demands through digital and mobile platforms. This approach will support the Group in achieving its cost targets.

 

The successful completion of these programmes and the Group’s other strategic initiatives requires ongoing subjective and complex judgements, including forecasts of economic conditions in various parts of the world, and can be subject to significant execution risks. For example, the Group’s ability to execute its strategic initiatives successfully may be adversely impacted by a significant global macroeconomic downturn, legacy issues, limitations in the Group’s management or operational capacity and capability or significant and unexpected regulatory change in countries in which the Group operates.

 

Failure to execute the Group’s strategic initiatives successfully could have an adverse effect on the Group’s ability to achieve the stated targets and other expected benefits of these initiatives, and there is also a risk that the costs associated with implementing such initiatives may be higher than the financialexpected or benefits expected tomay be achieved, whichlesser than expected. Both of these factors could materially adversely impact the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

2098.The Group may be unable to fully capture the expected value from acquisitions, which could materially and adversely affect the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects

RISK FACTORS

 

The Group may be unable to fully capture the expected value from acquisitions, which could materially and adversely affect the Group’s results of operations, financial conditions or prospects.

The Group may from time to time undertake acquisitions as part of its growth strategy, which could subject the Group to a number of risks, such as: (i) the rationale and assumptions underlying the business plans supporting the valuation of a target business may prove inaccurate, in particular with respect to synergies and expected commercial demand,demand; (ii) the Group may fail to successfully integrate any acquired business, including its technologies, products and personnel,personnel; (iii) the Group may fail to retain key employees, customers and suppliers of any acquired business,business; (iv) the Group may be required or wish to terminate pre-existing contractual relationships, which could prove costly and/or be executed at unfavourable terms and conditions,conditions; (v) the Group may fail to discover certain contingent or undisclosed liabilities in businesses that it acquires, or its due diligence to discover any such liabilities may be inadequateinadequate; and (vi) it may be necessary to obtain regulatory and other approvals in connection with certain acquisitions and there can be no assurance that such approvals will be obtained and even if granted, that there will be no burdensome conditions attached to such approvals, all of which could materially and adversely affect the Group’s results of operations, financial conditions or prospects.

 

9.The Group could be exposed to industrial action and increased labour costs resulting from a lack of agreement with trade unions

The Group could be exposed to industrial action and increased labour costs resulting from a lack of agreement with trade unions.

Within the Group, there are currently two recognised unions for the purposes of collective bargaining. Combined, these collective bargaining arrangements apply to around 95 per cent.cent of the Group’s total workforce.

 

Where the Group or its employees or their unions seek to change any of their contractual terms, a consultation and negotiation process is undertaken. Such a process could potentially lead to increased labour costs or, in the event that any such negotiations were to be unsuccessful and result in formal industrial action, the Group could experience a work stoppage that could materially adversely impact its business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

FINANCIAL SOUNDNESS RELATED RISKS

The Group’s businesses are subject to inherent risks concerning liquidity and funding, particularly if the availability of traditional sources of funding such as retail deposits or the access to wholesale funding markets becomes more limited.

Liquidity and funding continues to remain a key area of focus for the Group and the industry as a whole. Like all major banks, the Group is dependent on confidence in the short and long-term wholesale funding markets. Should the Group be unable to continue to source sustainable funding, its ability to fund its financial obligations could be impacted.

The Group’s profitability or solvency could be adversely affected if access to liquidity and funding is constrained or made more expensive for a prolonged period of time. Under extreme and unforeseen circumstances, such as the closure of financial markets and uncertainty as to the ability of a significant number of firms to ensure they can meet their liabilities as they fall due, the Group’s ability to meet its financial obligations as they fall due or to fulfil its commitments to lend could be impacted through limited access to liquidity (including government and central bank facilities). In such extreme circumstances, the Group may not be in a position to continue to operate without additional funding support, which it may be unable to access. These factors may have a material adverse effect on the Group’s solvency, including its ability to meet its regulatory minimum liquidity requirements. These risks can be exacerbated by operational factors such as an over-reliance on a particular source of funding or changes in credit ratings, as well as market-wide phenomena such as market dislocation, regulatory change or major disasters.

In addition, corporate and institutional counterparties may seek to reduce aggregate credit exposures to the Group (or to all banks) which could increase the Group’s cost of funding and limit its access to liquidity. The funding structure employed by the Group may also prove to be inefficient, thus giving rise to a level of funding cost where the cumulative costs are not sustainable over the longer term. The funding needs of the Group may increase and such increases may be material to the Group’s operating results, financial condition or prospects. The Group relies on customer savings and transmission balances, as well as ongoing access to the global wholesale funding markets to meet its funding needs. The ability of the Group to gain access to wholesale and retail funding sources on satisfactory economic terms is subject to a number of factors outside its control, such as liquidity constraints, general market conditions, regulatory requirements, the encouraged or mandated repatriation of deposits by foreign wholesale or central bank depositors and the level of confidence in the UK banking system, any of which could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s profitability or, in the longer term and under extreme circumstances, its ability to meet its financial obligations as they fall due.

Medium-term growth in the Group’s lending activities will rely, in part, on the availability of retail deposit funding on appropriate terms, for which there is increasing competition. For more information, see “—Business and economic risks — The Group’s businesses are conducted in competitive environments, with increased competition scrutiny, and the Group’s financial performance depends upon management’s ability to respond effectively to competitive pressures” above. The ongoing availability of retail deposit funding on appropriate terms is dependent on a variety of factors outside the Group’s control, such as general macro-economic conditions and market volatility, the confidence of retail depositors in the economy, the financial services industry and the Group, as well as the availability and extent of deposit guarantees. Increases in the cost of retail deposit funding will impact on the Group’s margins and affect profit, and a lack of availability of retail deposit funding could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s future growth.

Any loss in consumer confidence in the Group could significantly increase the amount of retail deposit withdrawals in a short period of time. Should the Group experience an unusually high and unforeseen level of withdrawals, in such extreme circumstances the Group may not be in a position to continue to operate without additional funding support, which it may be unable to access, which could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s solvency.

If the wholesale funding markets were to suffer stress or central bank provision of liquidity to the financial markets is abruptly curtailed, or the Group’s credit ratings are downgraded, it is likely that wholesale funding will prove more difficult to obtain. Such increased refinancing risk, in isolation or in concert with the related liquidity risks noted above, could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s profitability and, in the longer term under extreme and unforeseen circumstances, its ability to meet its financial obligations as they fall due.

210

RISK FACTORS

The Group’s borrowing costs and access to the capital markets is dependent on a number of factors, including any reduction in the Group’s longer-term credit rating, and increased costs or reduction in access could materially adversely affect the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

A reduction in the credit rating of the Group or deterioration in the capital markets’ perception of the Group’s financial resilience could significantly increase its borrowing costs and limit its issuance capacity in the capital markets. As an indicator, during 2016, the spread between an index of “A” rated long-term senior unsecured bank debt and an index of similar “BBB” rated bank debt, both of which are publicly available, has averaged 43 basis points. The applicability to and implications for the Group’s funding cost would depend on the type of issuance and prevailing market conditions. The impact on the Group’s funding cost is subject to a number of assumptions and uncertainties and is therefore impossible to quantify precisely.

For the Company’s and its subsidiaries’ current ratings, see the section titled “Operating and Financial Review—Funding and Liquidity Risk—Funding and Liquidity Management in 2016”.

Rating agencies regularly evaluate the Group and the Company, and their ratings of longer-term debt are based on a number of factors, including the Group’s financial strength as well as factors not entirely within the Group’s control, including conditions affecting the financial services industry generally. In light of the difficulties in the financial services industry and the financial markets, there can be no assurance that the Group or the Company will maintain their current ratings. Downgrades of the Group’s longer-term credit rating could lead to additional collateral posting and cash outflow. The effects of a potential downgrade from all three rating agencies are included in the Group liquidity stress testing. As at 31 December 2016, a hypothetical instantaneous two notch downgrade of the Group’s current long-term credit rating and accompanying short-term downgrade implemented simultaneously by all major rating agencies could result in a contractual outflow of £3.1 billion of cash over a period of up to one year, £1.8 billion of collateral posting related to customer financial contracts and £9.0 billion of collateral posting associated with secured funding, calculated on an unaudited basis.

The regulatory environment in which the Group operates continues to change. Whilst uncertain at present, the Group’s borrowing costs and access to capital markets could be affected by the outcome of certain regulatory developments. For further detail on the potential impact of these regulatory developments on the Group’s business, see “—Regulatory and legal risks — The Group faces risks associated with an uncertain and rapidly evolving international prudential legal and regulatory environment”.

The Group is subject to the risk of having insufficient capital resources.

If the Group has or is perceived to have a shortage of capital then it may be subject to regulatory interventions and sanctions and may suffer a loss of confidence in the market with the result that access to liquidity and funding may become constrained or more expensive. Depending on the extent of any actions to improve the capital position there could be a material adverse effect on the Group’s business, including its operating results, financial condition and prospects. This, in turn, may affect the Group’s capacity to continue its business operations, pay future dividends and make other distributions or pursue acquisitions or other strategic opportunities, impacting future growth potential. If, in response to such shortage, the Group raises additional capital through the issuance of share capital or capital instruments, existing shareholders or holders of debt of a capital nature may experience a dilution of their holdings. If a capital or debt instrument is converted to share capital as a result of a trigger within the contractual terms of the instrument or through the exercise of statutory powers then, depending upon the terms of the conversion, existing shareholders may experience a dilution of their holdings. Separately, the Group may address a shortage of capital by taking action to reduce leverage and/or risk-weighted assets or by business disposals. Such actions may impact the underlying profitability of the Group.

A shortage of capital could arise from:

10.a depletion of theThe Group’s capital resources through increased costs or liabilitiesfinancial statements are based, in part, on assumptions and reduced asset values which could arise as a result of the crystallisation of credit-related risks, regulatory and legal risks, business and economic risks, operational risks, financial soundness-related risks, government related risks and other risks described herein; and/or
an increase in the amount of capital that is needed to be held. This might be driven by a change to the actual level of risk faced by the Group or to changes in the minimum levels required by legislation or by the regulatory authorities, or it may be driven by an increase to the Group’s view of the management buffer it should hold taking account of, for example, the capital levels or capital targets of the Group’s peer banks or through the changing views of rating agencies.estimates

 

Risks associated with the regulatory framework are described below:

Within the prevailing UK regulatory capital framework, the Group is subject to extensive regulatory supervision in relation to the levels of capital in its business. New or revised minimum and buffer capital requirements (including systemic and/or countercyclical capital requirements) could be applied and/or the manner in which existing regulatory requirements are applied to the Group could be changed by the regulatory authorities. For example:

Some of the Group’s risk-weighted assets are calculated from the Group’s approved models. These are subject to regular review on a rolling basis to ensure that they remain appropriate in prevailing economic and business conditions. In addition, ongoing consultations by the Basel Committee, the EBA and the PRA in relation to changes in how firms model probability of default and Loss Given Default within capital models, including the introduction of parameter floors, may result in changes to the Group’s approved models. These reviews and model implementation may lead to increased levels of risk-weighted assets and/or expected loss, and so to lower reported capital ratios.
The minimum capital requirements derived from risk-weighted assets are supplemented by the PRA, under Pillar 2 of the regulatory capital framework, through bank specific additional minimum requirements (informed by the PRA’s Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) and set through the PRA’s Individual Capital Guidance) and through buffer requirements (informed by the outcome of PRA stress testing and which may include an additional buffer to cover the risk posed by any weaknesses in risk management and governance). There is a risk that through these Pillar 2 processes the PRA may require the Group to hold more capital than is currently planned.

In addition, the regulatory framework continues to evolve, which may impact the Group’s capital position, for further detail see “—Regulatory and legal risks - The Group faces risks associated with an uncertain and rapidly evolving international prudential legal and regulatory environment” above.

211

RISK FACTORS

The Group has been and could continue to be negatively affected by the soundness and/or the perceived soundness of other financial institutions, which could result in significant systemic liquidity problems, losses or defaults by other financial institutions and counterparties, and which could materially adversely affect the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

The Group is subject to the risk of deterioration of the commercial soundness and/or perceived soundness of other financial services institutions within and outside the UK. Financial services institutions that deal with each other are interrelated as a result of trading, investment, clearing, counterparty and other relationships. This presents systemic risk and may adversely affect financial intermediaries, such as clearing agencies, clearing houses, banks, securities firms and exchanges with which the Group interacts on a daily basis, all of which could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s ability to raise new funding.

The Group routinely executes a high volume of transactions with counterparties in the financial services industry, resulting in a significant credit concentration. A default by, or even concerns about the financial resilience of, one or more financial services institutions could lead to further significant systemic liquidity problems, or losses or defaults by other financial institutions, which could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

The Group’s insurance business and defined benefit pension schemes are subject to insurance risks which could adversely affect the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

The insurance business of the Group is exposed to short-term and longer-term variability arising from uncertain longevity due to annuity portfolios. The Group’s defined benefit pension schemes are also exposed to longevity risk. Increases in life expectancy (longevity) beyond current allowances will increase the cost of annuities and pension scheme benefits and may adversely affect the Group’s financial condition and results of operations.

Customer behaviour in the insurance business may result in increased cancellations or ceasing of contributions at a rate in excess of business assumptions. Consequent reduction in policy persistency and fee income would have an adverse impact upon the profitability of the insurance business of the Group.

The insurance business of the Group is also exposed to the risk of uncertain insurance claim rates. For example, extreme weather conditions can result in high property damage claims and higher levels of theft can increase claims on home insurance. These claims rates may differ from business assumptions and negative developments may adversely affect the Group’s financial condition and results of operations.

To a lesser extent the insurance business is exposed to mortality, morbidity and expense risk. Adverse developments in any of these factors may adversely affect the Group’s financial condition and results of operations.

UK banks can recognise an insurance asset in their balance sheets representing the VIF of the business in respect of long-term life assurance contracts, being insurance contracts and investment contracts with discretionary participation features. This asset represents the present value of future profits expected to arise from the portfolio of in-force life assurance contracts. Adoption of this accounting treatment results in the earlier recognition of profit on new business, but subsequently a lower contribution from existing business, when compared to the recognition of profits on investment contracts under IAS 39 (Financial Instruments: “Recognition and Measurement”). Differences between actual and expected experience may have a significant impact on the value of the VIF asset, as changes in experience can result in significant changes to modelled future cash flows. The VIF asset is calculated based on best-estimate assumptions made by management, including mortality experience and persistency. If these assumptions prove incorrect, the VIF asset could be materially reduced, which in turn could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

GOVERNMENT RELATED RISKS

Until it ceases to be a shareholder, the Solicitor for the Affairs of HM Treasury might seek to exert influence over the Group and its business through its shareholding in, and other relationships with, the Company.

At Friday 24 February, HM Treasury held approximately 3.89 per cent. of the Company’s ordinary share capital. The relationship falls within the scope of the revised framework document between HM Treasury and UKFI published on 1 October 2010, which states that UKFI will manage the investments in the UK financial institutions in which HM Treasury holds an interest “on a commercial basis and will not intervene in day-to-day management decisions of the Investee Companies (as defined therein) (including with respect to individual lending or remuneration decisions)”. The framework document also makes it clear that such UK financial institutions will continue to be separate economic units with independent powers of decision. Although HM Treasury’s shareholding level has decreased significantly over time and is expected to continue to decrease, the revised framework document remains in place and will continue to do so until HM Treasury ceases to be a shareholder of the Company. Until such time, there is a risk that, through its relationship with, and shareholding in, the Company, HM Treasury and the UK Government may attempt to influence the Group in ways that could affect the Group’s business.

HM Treasury also has interests in other UK financial institutions, as well as an interest in the general health of the UK banking industry and the wider UK economy. The pursuit of those interests may not always be aligned with the commercial interests of the Group.

For more information, see “—Regulatory and legal risks — The Group and its businesses are subject to substantial regulation and oversight. Adverse legal or regulatory developments could have a significant material adverse effect on the Group’s results, operations, financial condition or prospects.” above.

212

RISK FACTORS

OTHER RISKS

The Group’s financial statements are based, in part, on assumptions and estimates.

The preparation of the Group’s financial statements requires management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses. Due to the inherent uncertainty in making estimates, actual results reported in future periods may be based upon amounts which differ from those estimates. Estimates, judgements and assumptions are continually evaluated and are based on historical experience and other factors, including expectations of future events that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the period in which the estimate is revised and in any future periods affected. The accounting policies deemed critical to the Group’s results and financial position, based upon materiality and significant judgements and estimates, which include impairment losses on loans and receivables, valuation of financial instruments, pensions, insurance and taxation as set out in the Company’s Annual Report 2016 filed with the SEC on Form 20-F in “Note 3 to the consolidated financial statements—Critical accounting estimates and judgements”.

189

RISK FACTORS

 

The consolidated financial statements are prepared using judgements, estimates and assumptions based on information available at the reporting date. If one or more of these judgements, estimates and assumptions is subsequently revised as a result of new factors or circumstances emerging, there could be a material adverse effect on the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects and a corresponding impact on its funding requirements and capital ratios.

 

In July 2014, the International Accounting Standards Board (the “IASB”) published a new accounting standard for financial instruments (IFRS 9) that will introduce a new model for recognising and measuring impairment based on expected credit losses, rather than an incurred loss model currently applied under IAS 39 (Financial Instruments: “Recognition and Measurement”), resulting in earlier recognition of credit losses. The changes are likely to result in an increase in the Group’s balance sheet provisions for credit losses and may therefore negatively impact the Group’s regulatory capital position. The extent of any increase in provisions will depend on, among other things, the composition of the Group’s lending portfolios and forecast economic conditions at the date of implementation. The new standard will be effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2018. The Basel Committee is consulting on arrangements to transition in the impact of IFRS 9 from a regulatory capital basis under the CRD V proposals, however, these are not expected to come into force until 2019 at the earliest (see “—Regulatory and legal risks– The Group faces risks associated with an uncertain and rapidly evolving international prudential, legal and regulatory environment – Evolving European and Global Prudential and Regulatory Changes”).

11.The Company is dependent on the receipt of dividends from its subsidiaries to meet its obligations, including its payment obligations with respect to its debt securities

 

The IASB has issued IFRS 16 to replace IAS 17 (Leases) which is effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2019. IFRS 16 requires lessees to recognise a right of use asset and a liability for future payments arising from a lease contract. This change will mainly impact the accounting for the properties that the Group currently accounts for as operating leases. Lessor accounting requirements remain aligned to the current approach under IAS 17. The capital treatment of the new assets and liabilities recognised under IFRS 16 is unclear.

In addition, an amendment to accounting standard IFRIC 14 (The Limit on a Defined Benefit Asset, Minimum Funding Requirements and their Interaction) is expected to be issued in 2017. This could add an additional minimum liability to the Group’s financial statements in respect of one of the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes.

The Company is dependent on the receipt of dividends from its subsidiaries to meet its obligations, including its payment obligations with respect to its debt securities.

The Company is a non-operating holding company. The principal sources of the Company’s income are, and are expected to continue to be, distributions from operating subsidiaries which also hold the principal assets of the Group. As a separate legal entity, the Company relies on such distributions in order to be able to meet its obligations (including its payment obligations with respect to its debt securities), and to create distributable reserves for payment of dividends to ordinary shareholders.

 

The ability of the Company’s subsidiaries (including subsidiaries incorporated outside the UK) to pay dividends and the Company’s ability to receive distributions from its investments in other entities will also be subject not only to their financial performance but also to applicable local laws and other restrictions. These restrictions could include, among others, any regulatory requirements, leverage requirements, any statutory reserve requirements and any applicable tax laws. There may also be restrictions as a result of current or forthcoming local ring-fencing requirements, including those relating to the  payment of dividends and the maintenance of sufficient regulatory capital on a sub-consolidated basis at the level of the RFB.ring-fenced bank sub-group. These laws and restrictions could limit the payment of dividends and distributions to the Company by its subsidiaries and any other entities in which it holds an investment from time to time, which could restrict the Company’s ability to meet its obligations and/or to pay dividends.dividends to ordinary shareholders.

 

12.The Company may not pay a dividend on its ordinary shares in any given financial/calendar year

The Company may not pay a dividend on its ordinary shares in any given financial/calendar year.

The determination of the Board of Directors of the Company (the “Board”) in any given year of whether the Company can or should pay a dividend on its ordinary shares, or the amount of such dividend, is subject to a number of factors. These include, among other things,

The Board must determine the amount of capital the Group has generated over the year, the amount of regulatory capital it is required to retain by the PRA and other regulatory authorities, and theoptimum level of investment the Board determines isto responsibly foster growth and to fund investment initiatives in the best interestsbusiness, including organic growth or growth through acquisitions as part of its growth strategy, as well as the appropriate level of capital for the Group to responsibly foster the growth of the business.retain to meet current and evolving regulatory requirements and to cover uncertainties.

 

The Company’s abilityThese determinations will change year to pay dividends may be adversely affected byyear based on the performance of the Group’s business in general, factors affecting its financial position (including capital, funding, liquidity and leverage), the economic environment in which the Group operates, the contractual terms of certain of the Group’s regulatory capital securities and other factors outside of the Group’s control, which could arise as a result of the crystallisation of credit-related risks, regulatory and legal risks, business and economic risks, operational risks, financial soundness-related risks government related risks and other risks described herein, many of which may impact the amount of capital that is generated over the course of the year.

213

RISK FACTORS

As the parent company of a banking group, the Company’s ability to pay dividends in the future is also dependent on the maintenance of an adequate level of regulatory capital. The Company’s ability to pay dividends may be affected by minimum regulatory requirements imposed by the PRA under the CRD IV requirements as implemented in the UK. The Company is also required by the PRA to maintain a number of regulatory capital buffers which may adversely impact the Company’s ability to distribute its reserves. The level at which these buffers may be set is determined by the CRD IV rules and the requirements of the PRA buffer. Often, the PRA notifies the Company of minimum regulatory capital requirements applicable to the Group for the coming year only a short time ahead of the Company’s dividend declaration for the prior year. This means that neither the Board nor the Company’s investors may be able to accurately predict the Company’s ability to pay dividends. For further detail on the potential impact of these requirements on the Company’s ability to pay dividends on its ordinary shares, see “—Regulatory and Legal Risks—The Group faces risks associated with an uncertain and rapidly evolving international prudential, legal and regulatory environment” and “—Financial soundness-related Risks—The Group is subject to the risk of having insufficient capital resources”.

In addition, the Board must determine in any given year the optimum level of investment to responsibly foster growth and to fund investment initiatives in the business, including organic growth or growth through acquisitions as part of its growth strategy, as well as the appropriate level of retained earnings for the Company as a prudential matter to meet evolving regulatory requirements and to cover uncertainties. These determinations will change year on year based on factors such as the economic cycle and macro-economic outlook, uncertainty in the regulatory and prudential environment, and relevant opportunities available to the Group at any given point in time. The Board’s decisions in relation to these matters will have an impact on the ability of the Company to pay a dividend on its ordinary shares in any given year.

 

13.Volatility in the price of the Company’s ordinary shares may affect the value of any investment in the Company

Volatility in the price of the Company’s ordinary shares may affect the value of any investment in the Company.

The market price of the Company’s ordinary shares could be volatile and subject to significant fluctuations due to various factors, some of which may be unrelated to the Group’s operating performance or prospects. These include economic or political disruption in the main jurisdictions in which the Group operates, any regulatory changes affecting the Group’s operations, developments in the industry or its competitors, the operating and share price performance of other companies in the industries and markets in which the Group operates, the potential placing of large volumes of the Company’s ordinary shares in the market, or speculation about the Group’s business in the press, media or investment communities. Furthermore, the Group’s operating results of operations and prospects from time to time may vary from the expectations of rating agencies, market analysts or investors. Any of these events could result in volatility in the market prices of the Company’s ordinary shares. In general, prospective investors should be aware that the value of an investment in the Company’s ordinary shares may go down as well as up.

Failure to manage the risks associated with changes in taxation rates or applicable tax laws, or misinterpretation of such tax laws, could materially adversely affect the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

Tax risk is the risk associated with changes in taxation rates, applicable tax laws, misinterpretation of such tax laws, disputes with relevant tax authorities in relation to historic transactions or conducting a challenge to a relevant tax authority. Failure to manage this risk adequately could cause the Group to suffer losses due to additional tax charges and other financial costs including penalties. Such failure could lead to adverse publicity, reputational damage and potentially costs materially exceeding current provisions, in each case to an extent which could have an adverse effect on the Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.

214190

FORWARD LOOKING STATEMENTS

 

This document contains certain forward looking statements within the meaning of Section 21E of the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and section 27A of the US Securities Act of 1933, as amended, with respect to the business, strategy, and plans and/or results of Lloyds Banking Group plc together with its subsidiaries (the Group) and its current goals and expectations relating to its future financial condition and performance. Statements that are not historical facts, including statements about Lloyds Bankingthe Group’s or its directors’ and/or management’s beliefs and expectations, are forward looking statements.

Words such as ‘believes’, ‘anticipates’, ‘estimates’, ‘expects’, ‘intends’, ‘aims’, ‘potential’, ‘will’, ‘would’, ‘could’, ‘considered’, ‘likely’, ‘estimate’ and variations of these words and similar future or conditional expressions are intended to identify forward looking statements but are not the exclusive means of identifying such statements. By their nature, forward looking statements involve risk and uncertainty because they relate to events and depend upon circumstances that will or may occur in the future.

 

Examples of such forward looking statements include, but are not limited to: projections or expectations of the Group’s future financial position including profit attributable to shareholders, provisions, economic profit, dividends, capital structure, portfolios, net interest margin, capital ratios, liquidity, risk-weighted assets (RWAs), expenditures or any other financial items or ratios; litigation, regulatory and governmental investigations; the Group’s future financial performance; the level and extent of future impairments and write-downs; statements of plans, objectives or goals of Lloyds Bankingthe Group or its management including in respect of statements about the future business and economic environments in the UK and elsewhere including, but not limited to, future trends in interest rates, foreign exchange rates, credit and equity market levels and demographic developments; statements about competition, regulation, disposals and consolidation or technological developments in the financial services industry; and statements of assumptions underlying such statements.

 

By their nature, forward looking statements involve risk and uncertainty because they relate to events and depend upon circumstances that will or may occur in the future.

Factors that could cause actual business, strategy, plans and/or results (including but not limited to the payment of dividends) to differ materially from the plans, objectives, expectations, estimates and intentions expressed in such forward looking statements made by the Group or on its behalf include, but are not limited to: general economic and business conditions in the UK and internationally; market related trends and developments; fluctuations in interest rates, (including low or negative rates),inflation, exchange rates, stock markets and currencies; any impact of the transition from IBORs to alternative reference rates; the ability to access sufficient sources of capital, liquidity and funding when required; changes to the Group’s credit ratings; the ability to derive cost savings and other benefits including, but without limitation as a result of any acquisitions, disposals and other strategic transactions; the ability to achieve strategic objectives; changing customer behaviour including consumer spending, saving and borrowing habits; changes to borrower or counterparty credit quality; concentration of financial exposure; management and monitoring of conduct risk; instability in the global financial markets, including Eurozone instability, instability as a result of uncertainty surrounding the exit by the UK from the European Union (EU) and as a result of such exit and the potential for one or more other countries to exit the EU or the Eurozone and the impact of any sovereign credit rating downgrade or other sovereign financial issues; political instability including as a result of any UK general election; technological changes and risks to the security of IT and operational infrastructure, systems, data and information resulting from increased threat of cyber security;and other attacks; natural, pandemic and other disasters, adverse weather and similar contingencies outside the Group’s control; inadequate or failed internal or external processes or systems; acts of war, other acts of hostility, terrorist acts and responses to those acts, geopolitical, pandemic or other such events; risks relating to climate change; changes in laws, regulations, practices and accounting standards or taxation, including as a result of the exit by the UK from the EU, or a further possible referendum on Scottish independence; changes to regulatory capital or liquidity requirements and similar contingencies outside the Group’s control; the policies, decisions and actions of governmental or regulatory authorities or courts in the UK, the EU, the United StatesUS or elsewhere including the implementation and interpretation of key legislation and regulation;regulation together with any resulting impact on the future structure of the Group; the ability to attract and retain senior management and other employees; requirements or limitations on the Group as a result of HM Treasury’s investment in the Group;employees and meet its diversity objectives; actions or omissions by the Group’s directors, management or employees including industrial action; changes to the Group’s post-retirement defined benefit scheme obligations; the extent of any future impairment charges or write-downs caused by, but not limited to, depressed asset valuations, market disruptions and illiquid markets; the value and effectiveness of any credit protection purchased by the Group; the inability to hedge certain risks economically; the adequacy of loss reserves; the actions of competitors, including non-bank financial services, lending companies and digital innovators and disruptive technologies; and exposure to regulatory or competition scrutiny, legal, regulatory or competition proceedings, investigations or complaints.

 

Lloyds Banking Group may also make or disclose written and/or oral forward looking statements in reports filed with or furnished to the US Securities and Exchange Commission, Lloyds Banking Group annual reviews, half-year announcements, proxy statements, offering circulars, prospectuses, press releases and other written materials and in oral statements made by the directors, officers or employees of Lloyds Banking Group to third parties, including financial analysts.

Except as required by any applicable law or regulation, the forward looking statements contained in this document are made as of thetoday’s date, hereof, and Lloyds Bankingthe Group expressly disclaims any obligation or undertaking to release publicly any updates or revisions to any forward looking statements contained in this document to reflect any change in Lloyds Bankingthe Group’s expectations with regard thereto or any change in events, conditions or circumstances on which any such statement is based.

The information, statements and opinions contained in this document do not constitute a public offer under any applicable law or an offer to sell any securities or financial instruments or any advice or recommendation with respect to such securities or financial instruments.

215191

LLOYDS BANKING GROUP STRUCTURE

 

The following is asubsidiaries are disclosed as principal subsidiaries in note 57 to the consolidated financial statements; the list below includes all significant subsidiaries, and certain other subsidiaries as noted below, of the significant subsidiaries of Lloyds Banking Group plcCompany at 31 December 2016.2019.

 

Name of subsidiary undertaking Country of
registration/
incorporation
 Percentage of equity share
capital and voting
rights held
 Nature of business Registered office
Lloyds Bank plc England 100% Banking and financial services 25 Gresham Street
London EC2V 7HN
Scottish Widows Limited Scotland 100%* Life assurance 25 Gresham Street
        London EC2V 7HN
HBOS plc Scotland 100%* Holding company The Mound
        Edinburgh EH1 1YZ
Bank of Scotland plc Scotland 100%* Banking and financial services The Mound
Edinburgh EH1 1YZ
Lloyds Bank Corporate Markets plc1England100%Banking and financial services25 Gresham Street
London EC2V 7HN

* Indirect interest

 

*1Indirect interestSubsidiary that does not meet quantitative threshold for significance. Included for consistency with the consolidated financial statements.
216192

INDEX TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Report of the Independent Registered Public Accounting FirmF-2
Consolidated income statement for the three years ended 31 December 2016,2019, 31 December 20152018 and 31 December 20142017F-3F-5
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the three years ended 31 December 2016,2019, 31 December 20152018 and 31 December 20142017F-4F-6
Consolidated balance sheet at 31 December 20162019 and 31 December 20152018F-5F-7
Consolidated statement of changes in equity for the three years ended 31 December 2016,2019, 31 December 20152018 and 31 December 20142017F-7F-9
Consolidated cash flow statement for the three years ended 31 December 2016,2019, 31 December 20152018 and 31 December 20142017F-9F-12
Notes to the consolidated financial statementsF-10F-13
F-1

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

 

TO THE SHAREHOLDERS OF LLOYDS BANKING GROUP PLCTo the board of directors and shareholders of Lloyds Banking Group plc

 

In our opinion,OPINIONS ON THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Lloyds Banking Group plc and its subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of31 December 2019and 31 December 2018,and the related consolidated incomeconsolidatedincome statements, consolidated statements of comprehensive income, consolidated statements of changes in equity and consolidated cash flow statements for each of the three years in the period ended31 December 2019, including the related notes (collectively referred to as the “consolidated financial statements”). We also have audited the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2019, based on criteria established inInternal Control - Integrated Framework(2013)issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO).

In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Lloyds Banking Group plc and its subsidiaries (the Company) atthe Company as of 31 December 20162019 and 31 December 20152018, and the results of theirits operations and theirits cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31ended31 December 2016, in2019in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board. Also in our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2016,2019, based on criteria established inInternal Control - Integrated Framework (2013)issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organisations ofCOSO.

CHANGES IN ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES

As discussed in Note 1 to the Treadway Commission (COSO). consolidated financial statements, the Company changed the manner in which it accounts for leases in 2019 and the manner in which it accounts for financial instruments and revenue from contracts with customers in 2018.

BASIS FOR OPINIONS

The Company’sCompany's management is responsible for these consolidated financial statements, for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting, and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the ManagementManagement's Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting appearing on page 175169 of the 20162019 Annual Report on Form 20-F. Our responsibility is to express opinions on thesethe Company’s consolidated financial statements and on the Company’sCompany's internal control over financial reporting based on our integrated audits. We are a public accounting firm registered with the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB) and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States).PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audits to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free of material misstatement, whether due to error or fraud, and whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects.

Our audits of the consolidated financial statements included performing procedures to assess the risks of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements, whether due to error or fraud, and performing procedures that respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test basis, evidence supportingregarding the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements, assessingstatements. Our audits also included evaluating the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, andas well as evaluating the overall presentation of the consolidated financial statement presentation.statements. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audits also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinions.

DEFINITION AND LIMITATIONS OF INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING

 

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (i) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (ii) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorisationsauthorizations of management and directors of the company; and (iii) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorisedunauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

 

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

 

CRITICAL AUDIT MATTERS

The critical audit matters communicated below are matters arising from the current period audit of the consolidated financial statements that were communicated or required to be communicated to the audit committee and that (i) relate to accounts or disclosures that are material to the consolidated financial statements and (ii) involved our especially challenging, subjective, or complex judgments. The communication of critical audit matters does not alter in any way our opinion on the consolidated financial statements, taken as a whole, and we are not, by communicating the critical audit matters below, providing separate opinions on the critical audit matters or on the accounts or disclosures to which they relate.

ALLOWANCE FOR EXPECTED CREDIT LOSSES

As described in Notes 2, 3 and 20 to the consolidated financial statements, the allowance for expected credit losses (ECL) was £3,455 million as of 31 December 2019. The calculation of the allowance for ECL required management to make a number of judgments, assumptions and estimates. The most significant included probability of default, lifetime of an exposure, significant increase in credit risk, post-model adjustments and forward looking information. The measurement of the allowance for ECL is required to reflect a probability-weighted range of possible future outcomes. Alongside a defined central scenario three further scenarios are generated around specified points along the loss distribution to reflect the range of outcomes. The allowance for ECL for individual exposures takes into account the value of any collateral held, repayments, or other mitigants of loss.

The principal considerations for our determination that performing procedures relating to the allowance for ECL is a critical audit matter are (i) there was significant judgment by management in determining the allowance, which in turn led to a high degree of auditor subjectivity in

F-2

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

performing procedures related to the impairment models, key assumptions, such as probability of default and significant increase in credit risk, post-model adjustments, the expected future cash flows related to individual exposures, the determination of the central scenario and the economic model used to select and weight the three further economic scenarios, which were used to estimate the allowance, (ii) there was significant judgment and effort in evaluating audit evidence related to these models, judgments and assumptions used to determine the allowance and (iii) the audit effort involved the use of professionals with specialised skill and knowledge.

Addressing the matter involved performing procedures and evaluating audit evidence in connection with forming our overall opinion on the consolidated financial statements. These procedures included testing the effectiveness of controls relating to the estimation process, which included controls over the data, models and assumptions used in determining the allowance for ECL. These procedures also included, among others, the involvement of professionals with specialised skill and knowledge to assist in testing management’s process to estimate the allowance for ECL including evaluating the appropriateness of methodology and models, evaluating the reasonableness of significant assumptions used in the impairment models, such as probability of default and significant increase in credit risk, and testing post model adjustments. It also included evaluating the reasonableness of key assumptions in the central scenario and the selection and weighting of the three further economic scenarios. Evaluating the assumptions used in the economic model involved assessing their reasonableness against external data and economic events that have occurred. We also assessed the reasonableness of the expected future cash flows related to individually assessed exposures.

PROVISION FOR PAYMENT PROTECTION INSURANCE

As described in Notes 3 and 38 to the consolidated financial statements, the provision for payment protection insurance (PPI) was £1,880 million as of 31 December 2019. The calculation of the provision for PPI requires the use of significant judgment. It involves forming a view on matters which are inherently uncertain such as the conversion ratio of PPI information requests to complaints.

The principal considerations for our determination that performing procedures relating to the provision for PPI is a critical audit matter are (i) there was significant judgment exercised by management in determining the provision, which in turn led to a high degree of auditor subjectivity in performing procedures related to the calculation model and key assumption, being the conversion ratio of PPI information requests to complaints, used to estimate the provision and (ii) there was significant judgment and effort in evaluating audit evidence related to the model and the key assumption used to determine the provision.

Addressing the matter involved performing procedures and evaluating audit evidence in connection with forming our overall opinion on the consolidated financial statements. These procedures included testing the effectiveness of controls relating to the calculation model used in determining the provision. These procedures also included, among others, testing management’s process to estimate the provision, including evaluating the appropriateness of the methodology and the model, and evaluating the reasonableness of the conversion ratio of PPI information requests to complaints. Evaluating this assumption involved assessing its reasonableness against historical data and comparing it to actual experience.

INSURANCE ACTUARIAL ASSUMPTIONS

As described in Notes 3, 25, 32 and 33 to the consolidated financial statements, the value of in-force business asset was £5,558 million and the liabilities arising from insurance contracts and participating investment contracts were £111,449 million as of 31 December 2019. The value of in-force business asset represents the present value of future profits expected to arise from the portfolio of in-force life insurance and participating investment contracts. The valuation of this asset and the liabilities arising from insurance contracts and participating investment contracts required management to make assumptions about future economic and operating conditions which are inherently uncertain. Some of the highly judgmental economic and non-economic assumptions used include future investment returns, future mortality rates, future expenses and future policyholder behaviour.

The principal considerations for our determination that performing procedures relating to insurance actuarial assumptions is a critical audit matter are (i) there was significant judgment by management to determine the actuarial assumptions, such as future investment returns, future mortality rates, future expenses and future policyholder behaviour, used to calculate the value of in-force business asset and the liabilities arising from insurance and participating contracts, (ii) there was significant judgment and audit effort to evaluate the evidence obtained related to these assumptions and (iii) the audit effort involved the use of professionals with specialised skill or knowledge.

Addressing the matter involved performing procedures and evaluating audit evidence in connection with forming our overall opinion on the consolidated financial statements. These procedures included testing the effectiveness of controls relating to the determination of the actuarial assumptions, such as the future investment returns, future mortality rates, future expenses and future policyholder behaviour. These procedures also included, among others, the involvement of professionals with specialised skill and knowledge to assist in assessing the reasonableness of the actuarial assumptions, and where appropriate, comparing them to peers in the insurance market or benchmarking data.

DEFINED BENEFIT OBLIGATION

As described in Notes 3 and 36 to the consolidated financial statements, the carrying value of the defined benefit obligation was £45,241 million as of 31 December 2019. The valuation of the defined benefit obligation required management to make a number of assumptions. The key assumptions are the discount rate applied to future cash flows, the rate of inflation and the expected lifetime of the schemes’ members. The discount rate is set by management with reference to market yields at the end of the reporting period on high quality corporate bonds in the currency and with a term consistent with the defined benefit pension schemes’ obligations. The rate of inflation is set by management with reference to market indices. The expected lifetime of the schemes’ members is set by management by considering latest market practice and actual experience in determining both current mortality expectations and the rate of future mortality improvement.

The principal considerations for our determination that performing procedures relating to the defined benefit obligation is a critical audit matter are (i) there was significant judgment by management to determine the discount rate to be applied to the future cash flows, the rate of inflation and the expected lifetime of the schemes’ members, which in turn led to significant auditor judgment and audit effort to evaluate the evidence obtained related to the actuarial models, inputs and assumptions and (ii) the audit effort involved the use of professionals with specialised skill or knowledge.

Addressing the matter involved performing procedures and evaluating audit evidence in connection with forming our overall opinion on the consolidated financial statements. These procedures included testing the effectiveness of controls relating to the estimation process, which included controls over data, models and key assumptions such as the discount rate applied to future cash flows, the rate of inflation and the expected lifetime of the schemes’ members, used to calculate the defined benefit obligation. These procedures also included, among others, the involvement of professionals with specialised skill and knowledge to assist in testing management’s process to estimate the defined benefit obligation, including evaluating the appropriateness of methodology and models, and evaluating the reasonableness of key assumptions, such as the discount rate, the rate of inflation and the expected lifetime of the schemes’ members. Evaluating the assumptions used in the models involved assessing their reasonableness by comparing them to our own independently determined benchmarks.

F-3

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

VALUATION OF CERTAIN LEVEL 3 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENT ASSETS

As described in Notes 3, 50 and 53 to the consolidated financial statements, the carrying value of the level 3 financial instrument assets held at fair value was £15,316 million as of 31 December 2019. Within this balance, there were two portfolios (Loans and advances to customers of £8,250 million and debt securities of £1,643 million) which are each concentrations of similar, non-traded assets. Loans and advances to customers classified as level 3 are valued using a discounted cash flow model. The key assumptions within this model include the credit ratings applied to borrowers and the illiquidity premiums. In relation to debt securities, where there is limited trading activity, management uses valuation models and consensus pricing information from third party pricing services to determine an appropriate valuation.

The principal considerations for our determination that performing procedures relating to the valuation of certain level 3 financial instrument assets is a critical audit matter are (i) there was judgment by management to determine the fair value of the level 3 financial instrument assets using valuation models which relied upon unobservable inputs, (ii) there was judgment required to evaluate the audit evidence obtained related to the valuation models, key assumptions, such as the credit ratings and illiquidity premiums, and consensus pricing information and (iii) the audit effort involved the use of professionals with specialised skill or knowledge.

Addressing the matter involved performing procedures and evaluating audit evidence in connection with forming our overall opinion on the consolidated financial statements. These procedures included testing the effectiveness of controls relating to the valuation of the financial instrument assets, including controls over the methodology, key assumptions, such as the credit ratings and illiquidity premiums, and pricing information. These procedures also included, among others, the involvement of professionals with specialised skill and knowledge to assist in reviewing the methodology, assessing the reasonableness of key assumptions, such as the credit ratings and illiquidity premiums, and developing an independent range of prices and comparing these to management’s estimate.

/s/ PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

London, United Kingdom
10 March 2017

25 February 2020

We have served as the Company’s auditor since 1995.

F-2F-4

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT

for the year ended 31 December

 

   Note   2016
£ million
   2015
£ million
   2014
£ million
 
Interest and similar income      16,620   17,615   19,211 
Interest and similar expense      (7,346)  (6,297)  (8,551)
Net interest income  5   9,274   11,318   10,660 
Fee and commission income      3,045   3,252   3,659 
Fee and commission expense      (1,356)  (1,442)  (1,402)
Net fee and commission income  6   1,689   1,810   2,257 
Net trading income  7   18,545   3,714   10,159 
Insurance premium income  8   8,068   4,792   7,125 
Other operating income  9   2,035   1,516   (309)
Other income      30,337   11,832   19,232 
Total income      39,611   23,150   29,892 
Insurance claims  10   (22,344)  (5,729)  (13,493)
Total income, net of insurance claims      17,267   17,421   16,399 
Regulatory provisions      (2,374)  (4,837)  (3,125)
Other operating expenses      (10,253)  (10,550)  (10,760)
Total operating expenses  11   (12,627)  (15,387)  (13,885)
Trading surplus      4,640   2,034   2,514 
Impairment  12   (752)  (390)  (752)
Profit before tax      3,888   1,644   1,762 
Taxation  13   (1,724)  (688)  (263)
Profit for the year      2,164   956   1,499 
                 
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders      1,651   466   1,125 
Profit attributable to other equity holders1      412   394   287 
Profit attributable to equity holders      2,063   860   1,412 
Profit attributable to non-controlling interests      101   96   87 
Profit for the year      2,164   956   1,499 
                 
Basic earnings per share  14   2.4p  0.8p  1.7p 
Diluted earnings per share  14   2.4p  0.8p   1.6p

     2019  2018  2017 
  Note  £ million  £ million  £ million 
Interest and similar income    16,861   16,349   16,006 
Interest and similar expense    (6,681)  (2,953)  (5,094)
Net interest income 5  10,180   13,396   10,912 
Fee and commission income    2,756   2,848   2,965 
Fee and commission expense    (1,350)  (1,386)  (1,382)
Net fee and commission income 6  1,406   1,462   1,583 
Net trading income 7  18,288   (3,876)  11,817 
Insurance premium income 8  9,574   9,189   7,930 
Other operating income 9  2,908   1,920   1,995 
Other income    32,176   8,695   23,325 
Total income    42,356   22,091   34,237 
Insurance claims 10  (23,997)  (3,465)  (15,578)
Total income, net of insurance claims    18,359   18,626   18,659 
Regulatory provisions    (2,895)  (1,350)  (2,165)
Other operating expenses    (9,775)  (10,379)  (10,181)
Total operating expenses 11  (12,670)  (11,729)  (12,346)
Trading surplus    5,689   6,897   6,313 
Impairment 13  (1,296)  (937)  (688)
Profit before tax    4,393   5,960   5,625 
Tax expense 14  (1,387)  (1,454)  (1,626)
Profit for the year    3,006   4,506   3,999 
               
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders    2,459   3,975   3,494 
Profit attributable to other equity holders1    466   433   415 
Profit attributable to equity holders    2,925   4,408   3,909 
Profit attributable to non-controlling interests    81   98   90 
Profit for the year    3,006   4,506   3,999 
               
Basic earnings per share 15  3.5p   5.5p   4.9p 
Diluted earnings per share 15  3.4p   5.5p   4.8p 

 

1The profit after tax attributable to other equity holders of £412 million (2015: £394 million; 2014: £287 million) is partly offset in reserves by a tax credit attributable to ordinary shareholders of £91 million (2015: £80 million; 2014: £62 million).Restated, see note 1.

The accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.

F-3

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

for the year ended 31 December

   2016
£ million
   2015
£ million
   2014
£ million
 
Profit for the year  2,164   956   1,499 
Other comprehensive income            
Items that will not subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss:            
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements:            
Remeasurements before taxation  (1,348)  (274)  674 
Taxation  320   59   (135)
   (1,028)  (215)  539 
Items that may subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss:            
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of available-for-sale financial assets:            
Adjustment on transfer from held-to-maturity portfolio  1,544       
Change in fair value  356   (318)  690 
Income statement transfers in respect of disposals  (575)  (51)  (131)
Income statement transfers in respect of impairment  173   4   2 
Taxation  (301)  (6)  (13)
   1,197   (371)  548 
Movement in cash flow hedging reserve:            
Effective portion of changes in fair value taken to other comprehensive income  2,432   537   3,896 
Net income statement transfers  (557)  (956)  (1,153)
Taxation  (466)  7   (549)
   1,409   (412)  2,194 
Currency translation differences (tax: nil)  (4)  (42)  (3)
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax  1,574   (1,040)  3,278 
Total comprehensive income for the year  3,738   (84)  4,777 
             
Total comprehensive income attributable to ordinary shareholders  3,225   (574)  4,403 
Total comprehensive income attributable to other equity holders  412   394   287 
Total comprehensive income attributable to equity holders  3,637   (180)  4,690 
Total comprehensive income attributable to non-controlling interests  101   96   87 
Total comprehensive income for the year  3,738   (84)  4,777 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.

F-4

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET

at 31 December

   Note   2016
£ million
   2015
£ million
 
Assets            
Cash and balances at central banks      47,452   58,417 
Items in the course of collection from banks      706   697 
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  15   151,174   140,536 
Derivative financial instruments  16   36,138   29,467 
Loans and receivables:            
Loans and advances to banks  17   26,902   25,117 
Loans and advances to customers  18   457,958   455,175 
Debt securities      3,397   4,191 
       488,257   484,483 
Available-for-sale financial assets  22   56,524   33,032 
Held-to-maturity investments         19,808 
Goodwill  23   2,016   2,016 
Value of in-force business  24   5,042   4,596 
Other intangible assets  25   1,681   1,838 
Property, plant and equipment  26   12,972   12,979 
Current tax recoverable      28   44 
Deferred tax assets  37   2,706   4,010 
Retirement benefit assets  36   342   901 
Other assets  27   12,755   13,864 
Total assets      817,793   806,688 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.

F-5

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETSTATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

for the year ended 31 December

 

  2019  20181  20171 
  £ million  £ million  £ million 
Profit for the year  3,006   4,506   3,999 
Other comprehensive income            
Items that will not subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss:            
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements:            
Remeasurements before tax  (1,433)  167   628 
Tax  316   (47)  (146)
   (1,117)  120   482 
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income:            
Change in fair value     (97)    
Tax  12   22     
   12   (75)    
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk:            
(Losses) gains before tax  (419)  533   (55)
Tax  113   (144)  15 
   (306)  389   (40)
Share of other comprehensive income of associates and joint ventures     8    
             
Items that may subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss:            
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of debt securities held at fair value through other comprehensive income:            
Change in fair value  (30)  (37)    
Income statement transfers in respect of disposals  (196)  (275)    
Impairment recognised in the income statement  (1)       
Tax  71   119     
   (156)  (193)    
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of available for sale financial assets:            
Change in fair value          303 
Income statement transfers in respect of disposals          (446)
Income statement transfers in respect of impairment          6 
Tax          63 
           (74)
Movement in cash flow hedging reserve:            
Effective portion of changes in fair value taken to other comprehensive income  1,209   234   (363)
Net income statement transfers  (608)  (701)  (651)
Tax  (148)  113   283 
   453   (354)  (731)
Currency translation differences (tax: nil)  (12)  (8)  (32)
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax  (1,126)  (113)  (395)
Total comprehensive income for the year  1,880   4,393   3,604 
             
Total comprehensive income attributable to ordinary shareholders  1,333   3,862   3,099 
Total comprehensive income attributable to other equity holders  466   433   415 
Total comprehensive income attributable to equity holders  1,799   4,295   3,514 
Total comprehensive income attributable to non-controlling interests  81   98   90 
Total comprehensive income for the year  1,880   4,393   3,604 

Equity and liabilities  Note   2016
£ million
   2015
£ million
 
Liabilities            
Deposits from banks  28   16,384   16,925 
Customer deposits  29   415,460   418,326 
Items in course of transmission to banks      548   717 
Trading and other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss  30   54,504   51,863 
Derivative financial instruments  16   34,924   26,301 
Notes in circulation      1,402   1,112 
Debt securities in issue  31   76,314   82,056 
Liabilities arising from insurance contracts and participating investment contracts  32   94,390   80,294 
Liabilities arising from non-participating investment contracts  34   20,112   22,777 
Other liabilities  35   29,193   29,661 
Retirement benefit obligations  36   822   365 
Current tax liabilities      226   279 
Deferred tax liabilities  37      33 
Other provisions  38   5,218   5,687 
Subordinated liabilities  39   19,831   23,312 
Total liabilities      769,328   759,708 
Equity            
Share capital  40   7,146   7,146 
Share premium account  41   17,622   17,412 
Other reserves  42   14,652   12,260 
Retained profits  43   3,250   4,416 
Shareholders’ equity      42,670   41,234 
Other equity instruments  44   5,355   5,355 
Total equity excluding non-controlling interests      48,025   46,589 
Non-controlling interests      440   391 
Total equity      48,465   46,980 
Total equity and liabilities      817,793   806,688 

1Restated, see note 1.

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.

F-6

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET

at 31 December

    2019  2018 
  Note £ million  £ million 
Assets        
Cash and balances at central banks    55,130   54,663 
Items in the course of collection from banks    313   647 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 16  160,189   158,529 
Derivative financial instruments 17  26,369   23,595 
Loans and advances to banks    9,775   6,283 
Loans and advances to customers    494,988   484,858 
Debt securities    5,544   5,238 
Financial assets at amortised cost 18  510,307   496,379 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income 21  25,092   24,815 
Investments in joint ventures and associates 22  304   91 
Goodwill 24  2,324   2,310 
Value of in-force business 25  5,558   4,762 
Other intangible assets 26  3,808   3,347 
Property, plant and equipment 27  13,104   12,300 
Current tax recoverable    7   5 
Deferred tax assets 37  2,666   2,453 
Retirement benefit assets 36  681   1,267 
Assets arising from reinsurance contracts held    23,567   7,860 
Other assets 28  4,474   4,575 
Total assets    833,893   797,598 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.

F-7

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET

at 31 December

Equity and liabilities Note 2019
£ million
  2018
£ million
 
Liabilities        
Deposits from banks    28,179   30,320 
Customer deposits    421,320   418,066 
Items in course of transmission to banks    373   636 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss 29  21,486   30,547 
Derivative financial instruments 17  25,779   21,373 
Notes in circulation    1,079   1,104 
Debt securities in issue 30  97,689   91,168 
Liabilities arising from insurance contracts and participating investment contracts 32  111,449   98,874 
Liabilities arising from non-participating investment contracts 34  37,459   13,853 
Other liabilities 35  20,333   19,633 
Retirement benefit obligations 36  257   245 
Current tax liabilities    187   377 
Deferred tax liabilities 37  44    
Other provisions 38  3,323   3,547 
Subordinated liabilities 39  17,130   17,656 
Total liabilities    786,087   747,399 
Equity          
Share capital 40  7,005   7,116 
Share premium account 41  17,751   17,719 
Other reserves 42  13,695   13,210 
Retained profits 43  3,246   5,389 
Shareholders’ equity    41,697   43,434 
Other equity instruments 44  5,906   6,491 
Total equity excluding non-controlling interests    47,603   49,925 
Non-controlling interests    203   274 
Total equity    47,806   50,199 
Total equity and liabilities    833,893   797,598 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.

F-8

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY

for the year ended 31 December

 

   Attributable to equity shareholders             
   Share capital
and premium
£ million
   Other
reserves
£ million
   Retained
profits
£ million
   Total
£ million
   Other
equity
instruments £ million
   Non-
controlling
interests
£ million
   Total
£ million
 
Balance at 1 January 2016  24,558   12,260   4,416   41,234   5,355   391   46,980 
Comprehensive income                            
Profit for the year        2,063   2,063      101   2,164 
Other comprehensive income                            
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of tax        (1,028)  (1,028)        (1,028)
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of available-for-sale financial assets, net of tax     1,197      1,197         1,197 
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax     1,409      1,409         1,409 
Currency translation differences (tax: £nil)     (4)     (4)        (4)
Total other comprehensive income     2,602   (1,028)  1,574         1,574 
Total comprehensive income     2,602   1,035   3,637      101   3,738 
Transactions with owners                            
Dividends        (2,014)  (2,014)     (29)  (2,043)
Distributions on other equity instruments, net of tax        (321)  (321)        (321)
Redemption of preference shares  210   (210)               
Movement in treasury shares        (175)  (175)        (175)
Value of employee services:                            
Share option schemes        141   141         141 
Other employee award schemes        168   168         168 
Changes in non-controlling interests                 (23)  (23)
Total transactions with owners  210   (210)  (2,201)  (2,201)     (52)  (2,253)
Balance at 31 December 2016  24,768   14,652   3,250   42,670   5,355   440   48,465 

  Attributable to equity shareholders         
  Share capital
and premium
£ million
  Other
reserves
£ million
  Retained
profits
£ million
  Total
£ million
  Other
equity
instruments
£ million
  Non-
controlling
interests
£ million
  Total
£ million
 
Balance at 1 January 2019  24,835   13,210   5,389   43,434   6,491   274   50,199 
Comprehensive income                            
Profit for the year        2,925   2,925      81   3,006 
Other comprehensive income                            
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of tax        (1,117)  (1,117)        (1,117)
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets held at fair value through other comprehensive income, net of tax:                            
Debt securities     (156)     (156)        (156)
Equity shares     12      12         12 
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk, net of tax        (306)  (306)        (306)
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax     453      453         453 
Currency translation differences (tax: £nil)     (12)     (12)        (12)
Total other comprehensive income     297   (1,423)  (1,126)        (1,126)
Total comprehensive income     297   1,502   1,799      81   1,880 
Transactions with owners                            
Dividends        (2,312)  (2,312)     (138)  (2,450)
Distributions on other equity instruments        (466)  (466)        (466)
Issue of ordinary shares  107         107         107 
Share buyback  (189)  189   (1,095)  (1,095)        (1,095)
Redemption of preference shares  3   (3)               
Issue of other equity instruments (note 44)        (3)  (3)  896      893 
Redemptions of other equity instruments (note 44)              (1,481)     (1,481)
Movement in treasury shares        (3)  (3)        (3)
Value of employee services:                            
Share option schemes        71   71         71 
Other employee award schemes        165   165         165 
Changes in non-controlling interests                 (14)  (14)
Total transactions with owners  (79)  186   (3,643)  (3,536)  (585)  (152)  (4,273)
Realised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income     2   (2)            
At 31 December 2019  24,756   13,695   3,246   41,697   5,906   203   47,806 

 

Further details of movements in the Group’s share capital, reserves and other equity instruments are provided in notes 40, 41, 42, 43 and 44.

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.

F-7F-9

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY

for the year ended 31 December

 Attributable to equity shareholders    Non-      Attributable to equity shareholders       
 Share capital
and premium
£ million
 Other
reserves
£ million
 Retained
profits
£ million
 Total
£ million
 Other equity
instruments
£ million
 controlling
interests
£ million
 Total
£ million
  Share capital
and premium
£ million
 Other
reserves
£ million
 Retained
profits
£ million
 Total
£ million
  Other
equity
instruments
£ million
 Non-
controlling
interests
£ million
  Total
£ million
 
Balance at 1 January 2014  24,424   10,477   4,088   38,989      347   39,336 
Balance at 31 December 2017  24,831   13,815   4,905   43,551   5,355   237   49,143 
Adjustment on adoption of IFRS 9 and IFRS 15     (262)  (929)  (1,191)        (1,191)
Balance at 1 January 2018  24,831   13,553   3,976   42,360   5,355   237   47,952 
Comprehensive income                                           
Profit for the year   1,412 1,412  87 1,499 
Profit for the year1        4,408   4,408      98   4,506 
Other comprehensive income                                                        
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of tax      539  539      539         120   120         120 
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of available-for-sale financial assets, net of tax    548    548      548 
Share of other comprehensive income of associates and joint ventures        8   8         8 
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets held at fair value through other comprehensive income, net of tax:                            
Debt securities     (193)     (193)        (193)
Equity shares     (75)     (75)        (75)
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk, net of tax        389   389         389 
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax    2,194    2,194      2,194      (354)     (354)        (354)
Currency translation differences (tax: £nil)     (3)     (3)        (3)     (8)     (8)        (8)
Total other comprehensive income  2,739 539 3,278   3,278      (630)  517   (113)        (113)
Total comprehensive income  2,739 1,951 4,690  87 4,777      (630)  4,925   4,295      98   4,393 
Transactions with owners                                           
Dividends      (27) (27)        (2,240)  (2,240)     (61)  (2,301)
Distributions on other equity instruments, net of tax   (225) (225)   (225)
Distributions on other equity instruments1        (433)  (433)        (433)
Issue of ordinary shares 3   3   3   162         162         162 
Share buyback  (158)  158   (1,005)  (1,005)        (1,005)
Issue of other equity instruments   (21) (21) 5,355  5,334         (5)  (5)  1,136      1,131 
Movement in treasury shares   (286) (286)   (286)        40   40         40 
Value of employee services:                                           
Share option schemes   123 123   123         53   53         53 
Other employee award schemes   233 233   233         207   207         207 
Adjustment on sale of non-controlling interest in TSB Banking Group plc   (171) (171)  805 634 
Other changes in non-controlling interests      1 1 
Total transactions with owners 3  (347) (344) 5,355 779 5,790   4   158   (3,383)  (3,221)  1,136   (61)  (2,146)
Balance at 31 December 2014 24,427 13,216 5,692 43,335 5,355 1,213 49,903 
Comprehensive income               
Profit for the year   860 860  96 956 
Other comprehensive income                            
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of tax      (215)  (215)      (215)
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of available-for-sale financial assets, net of tax    (371)    (371)      (371)
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax    (412)    (412)      (412)
Currency translation differences (tax: £nil)     (42)     (42)        (42)
Total other comprehensive income  (825) (215) (1,040)   (1,040)
Total comprehensive income  (825) 645 (180)  96 (84)
Transactions with owners               
Dividends   (1,070) (1,070)  (52) (1,122)
Distributions on other equity instruments, net of tax   (314) (314)   (314)
Redemption of preference shares 131 (131)      
Movement in treasury shares   (816) (816)   (816)
Value of employee services:               
Share option schemes   107 107   107 
Other employee award schemes   172 172   172 
Adjustment on sale of interest in TSB Banking Group plc      (825) (825)
Other changes in non-controlling interests      (41) (41)
Total transactions with owners 131 (131) (1,921) (1,921)  (918) (2,839)
Balance at 31 December 2015 24,558 12,260 4,416 41,234 5,355 391 46,980 
Realised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income     129   (129)            
At 31 December 2018  24,835   13,210   5,389   43,434   6,491   274   50,199 

1Restated, see note 1.

The accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.

F-10

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY

for the year ended 31 December

  Attributable to equity shareholders         
  Share capital
and premium
£ million
  Other
reserves
£ million
  Retained
profits
£ million
  Total
£ million
  Other equity
instruments
£ million
  Non-controlling
interests
£ million
  Total
£ million
 
Balance at 1 January 2017  24,768   14,652   3,250   42,670   5,355   440   48,465 
Comprehensive income                            
Profit for the year1        3,909   3,909      90   3,999 
Other comprehensive income                            
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of tax        482   482         482 
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of available-for-sale financial assets, net of tax     (74)     (74)        (74)
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk, net of tax        (40)  (40)        (40)
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax     (731)     (731)        (731)
Currency translation differences (tax: £nil)     (32)     (32)        (32)
Total other comprehensive income     (837)  442   (395)        (395)
Total comprehensive income     (837)  4,351   3,514      90   3,604 
Transactions with owners                            
Dividends        (2,284)  (2,284)     (51)  (2,335)
Distributions on other equity instruments1        (415)  (415)        (415)
Issue of ordinary shares  63         63         63 
Movement in treasury shares        (411)  (411)        (411)
Value of employee services:                            
Share option schemes        82   82         82 
Other employee award schemes        332   332         332 
Changes in non-controlling interests                 (242)  (242)
Total transactions with owners  63      (2,696)  (2,633)     (293)  (2,926)
Balance at 31 December 2017  24,831   13,815   4,905   43,551   5,355   237   49,143 

1 Restated, see note 1.

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.

F-8F-11

CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT

for the year ended 31 December

 

  Note   2016
£ million
   2015
£ million
   2014
£ million
  Note 2019
£ million
  2018
£ million
 2017
£ million
 
Profit before tax      3,888   1,644   1,762     4,393   5,960   5,625 
Adjustments for:                              
Change in operating assets  53(A)  (12,218)  34,700   (872) 54(A) (11,049)  (4,472)  (15,492)
Change in operating liabilities  53(B)  (2,659)  (11,985)  11,992  54(B) 3,642   (8,673)  (4,282)
Non-cash and other items  53(C)  13,885   (7,808)  (2,496) 54(C) 15,573   (2,892)  11,982 
Tax paid      (822)  (179)  (33)    (1,278)  (1,030)  (1,028)
Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities      2,074   16,372   10,353     11,281   (11,107)  (3,195)
Cash flows from investing activities                              
Purchase of financial assets      (4,930)  (19,354)  (11,533)    (9,730)  (12,657)  (7,862)
Proceeds from sale and maturity of financial assets      6,335   22,000   4,668     9,631   26,806   18,675 
Purchase of fixed assets      (3,760)  (3,417)  (3,442)    (3,442)  (3,514)  (3,655)
Proceeds from sale of fixed assets      1,684   1,537   2,043     1,432   1,334   1,444 
Acquisition of businesses, net of cash acquired      (20)  (5)  (1) 54(E) (21)  (49)  (1,923)
Disposal of businesses, net of cash disposed  53(E)  5   (4,071)  543  54(F)    1   129 
Net cash used in investing activities      (686)  (3,310)  (7,722)
Net cash (used in) provided by investing activities    (2,130)  11,921   6,808 
Cash flows from financing activities                              
Dividends paid to ordinary shareholders      (2,014)  (1,070)       (2,312)  (2,240)  (2,284)
Distributions on other equity instruments      (412)  (394)  (287)    (466)  (433)  (415)
Dividends paid to non-controlling interests      (29)  (52)  (27)    (138)  (61)  (51)
Interest paid on subordinated liabilities      (1,687)  (1,840)  (2,205)    (1,178)  (1,268)  (1,275)
Proceeds from issue of subordinated liabilities      1,061   338   629        1,729    
Proceeds from issue of other equity instruments��   893   1,131    
Proceeds from issue of ordinary shares            3     36   102   14 
Share buyback    (1,095)  (1,005)   
Repayment of subordinated liabilities      (7,885)  (3,199)  (3,023)    (818)  (2,256)  (1,008)
Changes in non-controlling interests      (8)  (41)  635 
Redemption of other equity instruments    (1,481)      
Net cash used in financing activities      (10,974)  (6,258)  (4,275)    (6,559)  (4,301)  (5,019)
Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents      21   2   (6)    (5)  3    
Change in cash and cash equivalents      (9,565)  6,806   (1,650)    2,587   (3,484)  (1,406)
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year      71,953   65,147   66,797     55,224   58,708   62,388 
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year  53(D)  62,388   71,953   65,147  54(D) 57,811   55,224   60,982 
Adjustment on adoption of IFRS 9            (2,274)
Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January 2018            58,708 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.

F-9F-12

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the consolidated financial statements

for the year ended 31 December

 

NOTE 1: BASIS OF PREPARATION

 

The consolidated financial statements of Lloyds Banking Group plc and its subsidiary undertakings (the Group) have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). IFRS comprises accounting standards prefixed IFRS issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) and those prefixed IAS issued by the IASB’s predecessor body as well as interpretations issued by the IFRS Interpretations Committee (IFRS IC) and its predecessor body. On adoption of IFRS 9 in 2018, the Group elected to continue applying hedge accounting under IAS 39.

 

The financial information has been prepared under the historical cost convention, as modified by the revaluation of investment properties, available-for-sale financial assets measured at fair value through other comprehensive income, trading securities and certain other financial assets and liabilities at fair value through profit or loss and all derivative contracts. As stated on page 176,169, the directors consider that it is appropriate to continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the financial statements.

 

DuringThe Group adopted IFRS 16Leasesfrom 1 January 2019. IFRS 16 replaces IAS 17Leasesand addresses the yearclassification and measurement of all leases. The Group’s accounting as a lessor under IFRS 16 is substantially unchanged from its approach under IAS 17; however for lessee accounting there is no longer a distinction between the accounting for finance and operating leases. For all assets the lessee recognises a right-of-use asset and a corresponding liability at the date at which the leased asset is available for use. Assets and liabilities arising from a lease are initially measured on a present value basis. The lease payments are discounted using the interest rate implicit in the lease, if that rate can be determined, or the lessee’s incremental borrowing rate. Lease payments are allocated between the liability and finance cost. The finance cost is charged to profit or loss over the lease period so as to produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability for each period. The right-of-use asset is depreciated over the shorter of the asset’s useful life and the lease term on a straight-line basis. Payments associated with leases with a lease term of 12 months or less and leases of low-value assets are recognised as an expense in profit or loss on a straight-line basis.

The Group elected to apply the standard retrospectively with the cumulative effect of initial application being recognised at 1 January 2019, comparatives have therefore not been restated. There was no impact on shareholders’ equity. Further details of the impact of adoption of IFRS 16 are provided in note 55.

The Group has reviewed its holding of government securities classifiedalso implemented the amendments to IAS 12Income Taxeswith effect from 1 January 2019 and as held-to-maturitya result tax relief on distributions on other equity instruments, previously taken directly to retained profits, is reported within tax expense in light of the current low interest rate environment and theyincome statement. Comparatives have been reclassified as available-for-sale; thisrestated. Adoption of these amendments to IAS 12 has resulted in a creditreduction in tax expense and an increase in profit for the year in 2019 of £1,544£115 million (2018: £106 million; 2017: £102 million) for the Group and £89 million (2018: £82 million; 2017: £79 million) for the Company. There is no impact on shareholders’ equity or on earnings per share.

The Group has early adopted the hedge accounting amendmentsInterest Rate Benchmark Reform, issued by the IASB as a response to issues arising from the available-for-sale revaluation reserve (£1,127 million after tax).planned replacement of interest rate benchmarks in a number of jurisdictions. The amendments confirm that entities applying hedge accounting can continue to assume that the interest rate benchmark on which the hedged cash flows and cash flows of the hedging instrument are based is not altered as a result of the uncertainties of the interest rate benchmark reform. Comparatives have not been restated. Further details are provided in note 53.

 

Details of those IFRS pronouncements which will be relevant to the Group but which were not effective at 31 December 20162019 and which have not been applied in preparing these financial statements are given in note 56.

The Group adopted IFRS 9 and IFRS 15 with effect from 1 January 2018.

 

NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIES

 

The Group’s accounting policies are set out below. These accounting policies have been applied consistently.

 

(A) Consolidation

 

The assets, liabilities and results of Group undertakings (including structured entities) are included in the financial statements on the basis of accounts made up to the reporting date. Group undertakings include subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures.

 

(1) SUBSIDIARIES

 

Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Group. The Group controls an entity when it has power over the entity, is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the entity, and has the ability to affect those returns through the exercise of its power. This generally accompanies a shareholding of more than one half of the voting rights although in certain circumstances a holding of less than one half of the voting rights may still result in the ability of the Group to exercise control. The existence and effect of potential voting rights that are currently exercisable or convertible are considered when assessing whether the Group controls another entity. The Group reassesses whether or not it controls an entity if facts and circumstances indicate that there are changes to any of the above elements. Subsidiaries are fully consolidated from the date on which control is transferred to the Group; they are de-consolidated from the date that control ceases.

 

The Group consolidates collective investment vehicles if its beneficial ownership interests give it substantive rights to remove the external fund manager over the investment activities of the fund. Where a subsidiary of the Group is the fund manager of a collective investment vehicle, the Group considers a number of factors in determining whether it acts as principal, and therefore controls the collective investment vehicle, including: an assessment of the scope of the Group’s decision making authority over the investment vehicle; the rights held by other parties including substantive removal rights without cause over the Group acting as fund manager; the remuneration to which the Group is entitled in its capacity as decision maker; and the Group’s exposure to variable returns from the beneficial interest it holds in the investment vehicle. Consolidation may be appropriate in circumstances where the Group has less than a majority beneficial interest. Where a collective investment vehicle is consolidated the interests of parties other than the Group are reported in other liabilities and the movement in these interests in interest expense.

 

Structured entities are entities that are designed so that their activities are not governed by way of voting rights. In assessing whether the Group has power over such entities in which it has an interest, the Group considers factors such as the purpose and design of the entity; its practical ability to direct the relevant activities of the entity; the nature of the relationship with the entity; and the size of its exposure to the variability of returns of the entity.

 

The treatment of transactions with non-controlling interests depends on whether, as a result of the transaction, the Group loses control of the subsidiary. Changes in the parent’s ownership interest in a subsidiary that do not result in a loss of control are accounted for as equity transactions; any difference between the amount by which the non-controlling interests are adjusted and the fair value of the consideration paid or received is recognised directly in equity and attributed to the owners of the parent entity. Where the Group loses control of the subsidiary, at the date when control is lost the amount of any non-controlling interest in that former subsidiary is derecognised and any investment retained in the former subsidiary is remeasured to its fair value; the gain or loss that is recognised in profit or loss on the partial disposal of the subsidiary includes the gain or loss on the remeasurement of the retained interest.

 

Intercompany transactions, balances and unrealised gains and losses on transactions between Group companies are eliminated.

F-13

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIEScontinued

 

The acquisition method of accounting is used to account for business combinations by the Group. The consideration for the acquisition of a subsidiary is the fair value of the assets transferred, the liabilities incurred and the equity interests issued by the Group. The consideration includes the fair value of any asset or liability resulting from a contingent consideration arrangement. Acquisition related costs are expensed as incurred except those relating to the issuance of debt instruments (see (E)(5) below) or share capital (see (P) below). Identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed in a business combination are measured initially at their fair value at the acquisition date.

 

(2) JOINT VENTURES AND ASSOCIATES

 

Joint ventures are joint arrangements over which the Group has joint control with other parties and has rights to the net assets of the arrangements. Joint control is the contractually agreed sharing of control of an arrangement and only exists when decisions about the relevant activities require the unanimous consent of the parties sharing control. Associates are entities over which the Group has significant influence. Significant influence is the power to participate in the financial and operating policy decisions of the entity, but is not control or joint control of those policies, and is generally achieved through holding between 20 per cent and 50 per cent of the voting share capital of the entity.

 

The Group utilises the venture capital exemption for investments where significant influence or joint control is present and the business unit operates as a venture capital business. These investments are designated at initial recognition at fair value through profit or loss. Otherwise, the Group’s investments in joint ventures and associates are accounted for by the equity method of accounting.

F-10

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued

 

(B) Goodwill

 

Goodwill arises on business combinations and represents the excess of the cost of an acquisition over the fair value of the Group’s share of the identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities acquired. Where the fair value of the Group’s share of the identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities of the acquired entity is greater than the cost of acquisition, the excess is recognised immediately in the income statement.

 

Goodwill is recognised as an asset at cost and is tested at least annually for impairment. If an impairment is identified the carrying value of the goodwill is written down immediately through the income statement and is not subsequently reversed. At the date of disposal of a subsidiary, the carrying value of attributable goodwill is included in the calculation of the profit or loss on disposal.

 

(C) Other intangible assets

 

Intangible assets which have been determined to have a finite useful life are amortised on a straight line basis over their estimated useful life as follows: up to 7 years for capitalised software; 10 to 15 years for brands and other intangibles.

 

Intangible assets with finite useful lives are reviewed at each reporting date to assess whether there is any indication that they are impaired. If any such indication exists the recoverable amount of the asset is determined and in the event that the asset’s carrying amount is greater than its recoverable amount, it is written down immediately. Certain brands have been determined to have an indefinite useful life and are not amortised. Such intangible assets are reassessed annually to reconfirm that an indefinite useful life remains appropriate. In the event that an indefinite life is inappropriate a finite life is determined and an impairment review is performed on the asset.

 

(D) Revenue recognition

 

(1) NET INTEREST INCOME

Interest income and expense are recognised in the income statement for all interest-bearing financial instruments using the effective interest method, except for those classified at fair value through profit or loss. The effective interest method is a method of calculating the amortised cost of a financial asset or liability and of allocating the interest income or interest expense over the expected life of the financial instrument. The effective interest rate is the rate that exactly discounts the estimated future cash payments or receipts over the expected life of the financial instrument or, when appropriate, a shorter period, to the netgross carrying amount of the financial asset (before adjusting for expected credit losses) or to the amortised cost of the financial liability, including early redemption fees, and related penalties;penalties, and premiums and discounts that are an integral part of the overall return. Direct incremental transaction costs related to the acquisition, issue or disposal of a financial instrument are also taken into account. Interest income from non-credit impaired financial assets is recognised by applying the effective interest rate to the gross carrying amount of the asset; for credit impaired financial assets, the effective interest rate is applied to the net carrying amount after deducting the allowance for expected credit losses. Impairment policies are set out in (H) below.

(2) FEE AND COMMISSION INCOME AND EXPENSE

 

Fees and commissions receivable which are not an integral part of the effective interest rate are generally recognised whenas income as the Group fulfils its performance obligations. The Group’s principal performance obligations arising from contracts with customers are in respect of value added current accounts, credit cards and debit cards. These fees are received, and the Group’s provides the service, has been provided. Loan commitmentmonthly; the fees for loans that are likely to be drawn downrecognised in income on this basis. The Group also receives certain fees in respect of its asset finance business where the performance obligations are deferred (together with related direct costs) andtypically fulfilled towards the end of the customer contract; these fees are recognised as an adjustment to the effective interest ratein income on the loan once drawn.this basis. Where it is unlikely that the loan commitments will be drawn, loan commitment fees are recognised in fee and commission income over the life of the facility.facility, rather than as an adjustment to the effective interest rate for loans expected to be drawn. Incremental costs incurred to generate fee and commission income are charged to fees and commissions expense as they are incurred.

(3) OTHER

 

Dividend income is recognised when the right to receive payment is established.

 

Revenue recognition policies specific to trading income are set out in E(3) below, life insurance and general insurance business are detailed below (see (M) below); those relating to leases are set out in (J)(2)(1) below.

 

(E) Financial assets and liabilities

 

On initial recognition, financial assets are classified intoas measured at amortised cost, fair value through other comprehensive income or fair value through profit or loss, available-for-saledepending on the Group’s business model for managing the financial assets held-to-maturityand whether the cash flows represent solely payments of principal and interest. The Group assesses its business models at a portfolio level based on its objectives for the relevant portfolio, how the performance of the portfolio is managed and reported, and the frequency of asset sales. Financial assets with embedded derivatives are considered in their entirety when considering their cash flow characteristics. The Group reclassifies financial assets when and only when its business model for managing those assets changes. A reclassification will only take place when the change is significant to the Group’s operations and will occur at a portfolio level and not for individual instruments; reclassifications are expected to be rare. Equity investments or loans and receivables. Financial liabilities are measured at amortised cost, except for trading liabilities and other financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss onunless the Group elects at initial recognition which are heldto account for the instruments at fair value. value through other comprehensive income. For these instruments, principally strategic investments, dividends are recognised in profit or loss but fair value gains and losses are not subsequently reclassified to profit or loss following derecognition of the investment.

F-14

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIEScontinued

The Group initially recognises loans and receivables,advances, deposits, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities when the Group becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. Regular way purchases and sales of securities and other financial assets and trading liabilities are recognised on trade date, being the date that the Group is committed to purchase or sell an asset.

 

Financial assets are derecognised when the contractual right to receive cash flows from those assets has expired or when the Group has transferred its contractual right to receive the cash flows from the assets and either: substantially all of the risks and rewards of ownership have been transferred; or the Group has neither retained nor transferred substantially all of the risks and rewards, but has transferred control.

 

Financial liabilities are derecognised when they are extinguished (ie when the obligation is discharged),discharged, cancelled or expire.expires.

 

(1) FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS MEASURED AT AMORTISED COST

Financial assets that are held to collect contractual cash flows where those cash flows represent solely payments of principal and interest are measured at amortised cost. A basic lending arrangement results in contractual cash flows that are solely payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding. Where the contractual cash flows introduce exposure to risks or volatility unrelated to a basic lending arrangement such as changes in equity prices or commodity prices, the payments do not comprise solely principal and interest. Financial assets measured at amortised cost are predominantly loans and advances to customers and banks together with certain debt securities used by the Group to manage its liquidity. Loans and advances are initially recognised when cash is advanced to the borrower at fair value inclusive of transaction costs. Interest income is accounted for using the effective interest method (see (D) above).

Financial liabilities are measured at amortised cost, except for trading liabilities and other financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss on initial recognition which are held at fair value.

(2) FINANCIAL ASSETS MEASURED AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

Financial assets that are held to collect contractual cash flows and for subsequent sale, where the assets’ cash flows represent solely payments of principal and interest, are recognised in the balance sheet at their fair value, inclusive of transaction costs. Interest calculated using the effective interest method and foreign exchange gains and losses on assets denominated in foreign currencies are recognised in the income statement. All other gains and losses arising from changes in fair value are recognised directly in other comprehensive income, until the financial asset is either sold or matures, at which time the cumulative gain or loss previously recognised in other comprehensive income is recognised in the income statement other than in respect of equity shares, for which the cumulative revaluation amount is transferred directly to retained profits. The Group recognises a charge for expected credit losses in the income statement (see (H) below). As the asset is measured at fair value, the charge does not adjust the carrying value of the asset, it is reflected in other comprehensive income.

(3) FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS MEASURED AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS

 

Financial instrumentsassets are classified at fair value through profit or loss where they are trading securitiesdo not meet the criteria to be measured at amortised cost or fair value through other comprehensive income or where they are designated at fair value through profit or loss by management. Derivativesto reduce an accounting mismatch. All derivatives are carried at fair value (see (F) below).through profit or loss.

 

Held for trading:TradingThe assets backing the insurance and investment contracts issued by the Group do not meet the criteria to be measured at amortised cost or fair value through other comprehensive income as they are managed on a fair value basis and accordingly are measured at fair value through profit or loss. Similarly, trading securities, which are debt securities and equity shares acquired principally for the purpose of selling in the short term or which are part of a portfolio which is managed for short-term gains. Such securitiesgains, do not meet these criteria and are classified as trading securities andalso measured at fair value through profit or loss. Financial assets measured at fair value through profit or loss are recognised in the balance sheet at their fair value. GainsFair value gains and losses arising from changes in their fair value together with interest coupons and dividend income are recognised in the income statement within net trading income in the period in which they occur.income.

 

ClassifiedFinancial liabilities are measured at fair value through profit and loss:Other financialor loss where they are trading liabilities or where they are designated at fair value through profit or loss in order to reduce an accounting mismatch; where the liabilities are part of a group of liabilities (or assets and liabilities) which is managed, and its performance evaluated, on a fair value basis; or where the liabilities contain one or more embedded derivatives that significantly modify the cash flows arising under the contract and would otherwise need to be separately accounted for. Financial liabilities measured at fair value through profit or loss are designated as such by management upon initial recognition. Such assets and liabilities are carriedrecognised in the balance sheet at their fair value. Fair value and gains and losses arising from changes in fair value together with interest coupons and dividend income are recognised in the income statement within net trading income in the period in which they occur. Financial assetsoccur, except that gains and liabilitieslosses attributable to changes in own credit risk are designated at fair value through profit or loss on acquisitionrecognised in the following circumstances:other comprehensive income.

it eliminates or significantly reduces the inconsistent treatment that would otherwise arise from measuring the assets and liabilities or recognising gains or losses on different bases. The main type of financial assets designated by the Group at fair value through profit or loss are assets backing insurance contracts and investment contracts issued by the Group’s life insurance businesses. Fair value designation allows changes in the fair value of these assets to be recorded in the income statement along with the changes in the value of the associated liabilities, thereby significantly reducing the measurement inconsistency had the assets been classified as available-for-sale financial assets.

F-11

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued

the assets and liabilities are part of a group which is managed, and its performance evaluated, on a fair value basis in accordance with a documented risk management or investment strategy, with management information also prepared on this basis.

where the assets and liabilities contain one or more embedded derivatives that significantly modify the cash flows arising under the contract and would otherwise need to be separately accounted for.

 

The fair values of assets and liabilities traded in active markets are based on current bid and offer prices respectively. If the market is not active the Group establishes a fair value by using valuation techniques. ReferThe fair values of derivative financial instruments are adjusted where appropriate to note 49(3) (Financial instruments: Financial assetsreflect credit risk (via credit valuation adjustments (CVAs), debit valuation adjustments (DVAs) and liabilities carried at fair value) for details offunding valuation techniquesadjustments (FVAs)), market liquidity and significant inputs to valuation models.

(2) AVAILABLE-FOR-SALE FINANCIAL ASSETS

Debt securities and equity shares that are not classified as trading securities, at fair value through profit or loss, held-to-maturity investments or as loans and receivables are classified as available-for-sale financial assets and are recognised in the balance sheet at their fair value, inclusive of transaction costs. Such assets are intended to be held for an indeterminate period of time and may be sold in response to needs for liquidity or changes in interest rates, exchange rates or equity prices. Gains and losses arising from changes in the fair value of investments classified as available-for-sale are recognised directly in other comprehensive income, until the financial asset is either sold, becomes impaired or matures, at which time the cumulative gain or loss previously recognised in other comprehensive income is recognised in the income statement. Interest calculated using the effective interest method and foreign exchange gains and losses on debt securities denominated in foreign currencies are recognised in the income statement.

The Group is permitted to transfer a financial asset from the available-for-sale category to the loans and receivables category where that asset would otherwise have met the definition of loans and receivables at the time of reclassification and where there is both the intention and ability to hold that financial asset for the foreseeable future. Reclassification of a financial asset from the available-for-sale category to the held-to-maturity category is permitted when the Group has the ability and intent to hold that financial asset to maturity. Reclassifications are made at fair value as of the reclassification date. Fair value becomes the new cost or amortised cost as applicable. Effective interest rates for financial assets reclassified to the loans and receivables and held-to-maturity categories are determined at the reclassification date. Any previous gain or loss on a transferred asset that has been recognised in equity is amortised to profit or loss over the remaining life of the investment using the effective interest method or until the asset becomes impaired. Any difference between the new amortised cost and the expected cash flows is also amortised over the remaining life of the asset using the effective interest method.

When an impairment loss is recognised in respect of available-for-sale assets transferred, the unamortised balance of any available-for-sale reserve that remains in equity is transferred to the income statement and recorded as part of the impairment loss.

(3) LOANS AND RECEIVABLES

Loans and receivables include loans and advances to banks and customers and eligible assets including those transferred into this category out of the fair value through profit or loss or available-for-sale financial assets categories. Loans and receivables are initially recognised when cash is advanced to the borrowers at fair value inclusive of transaction costs or, for eligible assets transferred into this category, their fair value at the date of transfer. Financial assets classified as loans and receivables are accounted for at amortised cost using the effective interest method (see (D) above) less provision for impairment (see (H) below).

The Group has entered into securitisation and similar transactions to finance certain loans and advances to customers. In cases where the securitisation vehicles are funded by the issue of debt, on terms whereby the majority of the risks and rewards of the portfolio of securitised lending are retained by the Group, these loans and advances continue to be recognised by the Group, together with a corresponding liability for the funding.risks.

 

(4) HELD-TO-MATURITY INVESTMENTS

Held-to-maturity investments are non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments and fixed maturities that the Group’s management has the positive intention and ability to hold to maturity other than: those that the Group designates upon initial recognition as at fair value through profit or loss; those that the Group designates as available-for-sale; and those that meet the definition of loans and receivables.

These are initially recognised at fair value including direct and incremental transaction costs and measured subsequently at amortised cost, using the effective interest method, less any provision for impairment.

A sale or reclassification of a more than insignificant amount of held-to-maturity investments would result in the reclassification of all held-to-maturity investments to available-for-sale financial assets.

(5) BORROWINGS

 

Borrowings (which include deposits from banks, customer deposits, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities) are recognised initially at fair value, being their issue proceeds net of transaction costs incurred. These instruments are subsequently stated at amortised cost using the effective interest method.

 

Preference shares and other instruments which carry a mandatory coupon or are redeemable on a specific date are classified as financial liabilities. The coupon on these instruments is recognised in the income statement as interest expense. Securities which carry a discretionary coupon and have no fixed maturity or redemption date are classified as other equity instruments. Interest payments on these securities are recognised, net of tax, as distributions from equity in the period in which they are paid. An exchange of financial liabilities on substantially different terms is accounted for as an extinguishment of the original financial liability and the recognition of a new financial liability. The difference between the carrying amount of a financial liability extinguished and the new financial liability is recognised in profit or loss together with any related costs or fees incurred.

 

When a financial liability is exchanged for an equity instrument, the new equity instrument is recognised at fair value and any difference between the original carrying value of the liability and the fair value of the new equity is recognised in the profit or loss.

 

(6)(5) SALE AND REPURCHASE AGREEMENTS (INCLUDING SECURITIES LENDING AND BORROWING)

 

Securities sold subject to repurchase agreements (repos) continue to be recognised on the balance sheet where substantially all of the risks and rewards are retained. Funds received under these arrangements are included in deposits from banks, customer deposits, or trading liabilities. Conversely,

F-12

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued

securities purchased under agreements to resell (reverse repos), where the Group does not acquire substantially all of the risks and rewards of ownership, are recorded as loans and receivablesadvances measured at amortised cost or trading securities. The difference between sale and repurchase price is treated as interest and accrued over the life of the agreements using the effective interest method.

F-15

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIEScontinued

 

Securities borrowing and lending transactions are typically secured; collateral takes the form of securities or cash advanced or received. Securities lent to counterparties are retained on the balance sheet. Securities borrowed are not recognised on the balance sheet, unless these are sold to third parties, in which case the obligation to return them is recorded at fair value as a trading liability. Cash collateral given or received is treated as a loan and receivableadvance measured at amortised cost or customer deposit.

 

(F) Derivative financial instruments and hedge accounting

 

Derivatives are classified as trading except those designated as effectiveAs permitted by IFRS 9, the Group continues to apply the requirements of IAS 39 to its hedging instruments which meet the criteria under IAS 39.relationships. All derivatives are recognised at their fair value. Derivatives are carried inon the balance sheet as assets when their fair value is positive and as liabilities when their fair value is negative. Refer to note 49(3)50(3) (Financial instruments: Financial assets and liabilities carried at fair value) for details of valuation techniques and significant inputs to valuation models.

 

Changes in the fair value of anyall derivative instrument that is not part of ainstruments, other than those in effective cash flow and net investment hedging relationshiprelationships, are recognised immediately in the income statement. As noted in (2) and (3) below, the change in fair value of a derivative in an effective cash flow or net investment hedging relationship is allocated between the income statement and other comprehensive income.

 

Derivatives embedded in a financial instrumentsasset are not considered separately; the financial asset is considered in its entirety when determining whether its cash flows are solely payments of principal and interest. Derivatives embedded in financial liabilities and insurance contracts (unless the embedded derivative is itself an insurance contract) are treated as separate derivatives when their economic characteristics and risks are not closely related to those of the host contract and the host contract is not carried at fair value through profit or loss. These embedded derivatives are measured at fair value with changes in fair value recognised in the income statement. In accordance with IFRS 4Insurance Contracts,, a policyholder’s option to surrender an insurance contract for a fixed amount is not treated as an embedded derivative.

 

The method of recognising the movements in the fair value of derivatives depends on whether they are designated as hedging instruments and, if so, the nature of the item being hedged. Hedge accounting allows one financial instrument, generally a derivative such as a swap, to be designated as a hedge of another financial instrument such as a loan or deposit or a portfolio of such instruments. At the inception of the hedge relationship, formal documentation is drawn up specifying the hedging strategy, the hedged item, the hedging instrument and the methodology that will be used to measure the effectiveness of the hedge relationship in offsetting changes in the fair value or cash flow of the hedged risk. The effectiveness of the hedging relationship is tested both at inception and throughout its life and if at any point it is concluded that it is no longer highly effective in achieving its documented objective, hedge accounting is discontinued. Note 17 provides details of the types of derivatives held by the Group and presents separately those designated in hedge relationships. In respect of interest rate benchmark reform, the Group assumes that the interest rate benchmark on which the hedged cash flows and/or the hedged risk are based, or the interest rate benchmark on which the cash flows of the hedging instrument are based, are not altered as a result of interest rate benchmark reform. The Group does not discontinue a hedging relationship during the period of uncertainty arising from the interest rate benchmark reform solely because the actual results of the hedge are not highly effective.

 

(1) FAIR VALUE HEDGES

 

Changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as fair value hedges are recorded in the income statement, together with the changes in the fair value of the hedged asset or liability that are attributable to the hedged risk; this also applies if the hedged asset is classified as an available-for-salea financial asset.asset at fair value through other comprehensive income. If the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, changes in the fair value of the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk are no longer recognised in the income statement. The cumulative adjustment that has been made to the carrying amount of the hedged item is amortised to the income statement using the effective interest method over the period to maturity.

 

(2) CASH FLOW HEDGES

 

The effective portion of changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as cash flow hedges is recognised in other comprehensive income in the cash flow hedgehedging reserve. The gain or loss relating to the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in the income statement. Amounts accumulated in equity are reclassified to the income statement in the periods in which the hedged item affects profit or loss. When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, any cumulative gain or loss existing in equity at that time remains in equity and is recognised in the income statement when the forecast transaction is ultimately recognised in the income statement. When a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was reported in equity is immediately transferred to the income statement.

 

(3) NET INVESTMENT HEDGES

 

Hedges of net investments in foreign operations are accounted for similarly to cash flow hedges. Any gain or loss on the hedging instrument relating to the effective portion of the hedge is recognised in other comprehensive income, the gain or loss relating to the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in the income statement. Gains and losses accumulated in equity are included in the income statement when the foreign operation is disposed of. The hedging instrument used in net investment hedges may include non-derivative liabilities as well as derivative financial instruments.

 

(G) Offset

 

Financial assets and liabilities are offset and the net amount reported in the balance sheet when there is a legally enforceable right of set-off and there is an intention to settle on a net basis, or realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. Cash collateral on exchange traded derivative transactions is presented gross unless the collateral cash flows are always settled net with the derivative cash flows. In certain situations, even though master netting agreements exist, the lack of management intention to settle on a net basis results in the financial assets and liabilities being reported gross on the balance sheet.

 

(H) Impairment of financial assets

 

(1) ASSETS ACCOUNTED FOR AT AMORTISED COSTThe impairment charge in the income statement includes the change in expected credit losses and certain fraud costs. Expected credit losses are recognised for loans and advances to customers and banks, other financial assets held at amortised cost, financial assets measured at fair value through other comprehensive income, and certain loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts. Expected credit losses are calculated as an unbiased and probability-weighted estimate using an appropriate probability of default, adjusted to take into account a range of possible future economic scenarios, and applying this to the estimated exposure of the Group at the point of default after taking into account the value of any collateral held, repayments, or other mitigants of loss and including the impact of discounting using the effective interest rate.

 

At each balance sheet dateinitial recognition, allowance (or provision in the Group assesses whether, ascase of some loan commitments and financial guarantees) is made for expected credit losses resulting from default events that are possible within the next 12 months (12-month expected credit losses). In the event of a result of one or moresignificant increase in credit risk since origination, allowance (or provision) is made for expected credit losses resulting from all possible default events occurring after initial recognitionover the expected life of the financial asset and priorinstrument (lifetime expected credit losses). Financial assets where 12-month expected credit losses are recognised are considered to the balance sheet date, there is objective evidence that a financial asset or group ofbe Stage 1; financial assets has become impaired.

Where such an event, including the identification of fraud, has had an impact on the estimated future cash flows of the financial asset or group ofwhich are considered to have experienced a significant increase in credit risk since initial recognition are in Stage 2; and financial assets an impairment allowance is recognised. The amount of impairment allowance is the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows discounted at the asset’s original effective interest rate. If the asset has a variable rate of interest, the discount rate used for measuring the impairment allowance is the current effective interest rate.which have

F-13F-16

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIEScontinued

 

Subsequentdefaulted or are otherwise considered to be credit impaired are allocated to Stage 3. Some Stage 3 assets, mainly in Commercial Banking, are subject to individual rather than collective assessment. Such cases are subject to a risk-based impairment sanctioning process, and these are reviewed and updated at least quarterly, or more frequently if there is a significant change in the credit profile.

An assessment of whether credit risk has increased significantly since initial recognition considers the change in the risk of default occurring over the remaining expected life of the financial instrument. The assessment is unbiased, probability-weighted and uses forward-looking information consistent with that used in the measurement of expected credit losses. In determining whether there has been a significant increase in credit risk, the Group uses quantitative tests based on relative and absolute probability of default (PD) movements linked to internal credit ratings together with qualitative indicators such as watchlists and other indicators of historical delinquency, credit weakness or financial difficulty. However, unless identified at an impairment loss on a financial asset or a groupearlier stage, the credit risk of financial assets interest income continuesis deemed to have increased significantly when more than 30 days past due. Where the credit risk subsequently improves such that it no longer represents a significant increase in credit risk since initial recognition, the asset is transferred back to Stage 1.

Assets are transferred to Stage 3 when they have defaulted or are otherwise considered to be recognised on an effective interest rate basis, oncredit impaired. Default is considered to have occurred when there is evidence that the asset’s carrying value net of impairment provisions. If, in a subsequent period,customer is experiencing financial difficulty which is likely to affect significantly the ability to repay the amount due. IFRS 9 contains a rebuttable presumption that default occurs no later than when a payment is 90 days past due. The Group uses this 90 day backstop for all its products except for UK mortgages. For UK mortgages, the Group uses a backstop of 180 days past due as mortgage exposures more than 90 days past due, but less than 180 days, typically show high cure rates and this aligns with the impairment loss decreases and the decrease can be related objectively to an event occurring after the impairment was recognised, the allowance is adjusted and the amount of the reversal is recognised in the income statement.

Impairment allowances are assessed individually for financial assets that are individually significant. Impairment allowances for portfolios of smaller balance homogenous loans such as most residential mortgages, personal loans and credit card balances that are below the individual assessment thresholds, and for loan losses that have been incurred but not separately identified at the balance sheet date, are determined on a collective basis.Group’s risk management practices.

 

In certain circumstances, the Group will renegotiate the original terms of a customer’s loan, either as part of an ongoing customer relationship or in response to adverse changes in the circumstances of the borrower. WhereIn the renegotiated payments of interest and principallatter circumstances, the loan will not recoverremain classified as either Stage 2 or Stage 3 until the original carrying value of the asset, the asset continuescredit risk has improved such that it no longer represents a significant increase since origination (for a return to be reported as past due and is considered impaired. Where the renegotiated payments of interest and principal will recover the original carrying value of the asset,Stage 1), or the loan is no longer reported as past due orcredit impaired provided that payments are made in accordance with the revised terms.(for a return to Stage 2). Renegotiation may also lead to the loan and associated provisionallowance being derecognised and a new loan being recognised initially at fair value.

Purchased or originated credit-impaired financial assets (POCI) include financial assets that are purchased or originated at a deep discount that reflects incurred credit losses. At initial recognition, POCI assets do not carry an impairment allowance; instead, lifetime expected credit losses are incorporated into the calculation of the effective interest rate. All changes in lifetime expected credit losses subsequent to the assets’ initial recognition are recognised as an impairment charge.

 

A loan or advance is normally written off, either partially or in full, against the related allowance when the proceeds from realising any available security have been received or there is no realistic prospect of recovery and the amount of the loss has been determined. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off decrease the amount of impairment losses recorded in the income statement. For both secured and unsecured retail balances, the write-off takes place only once an extensive set of collections processes has been completed, or the status of the account reaches a point where policy dictates that forbearance iscontinuing attempts to recover are no longer appropriate. For commercial lending, a write-off occurs if the loan facility with the customer is restructured, the asset is under administration and the only monies that can be received are the amounts estimated by the administrator, the underlying assets are disposed and a decision is made that no further settlement monies will be received, or external evidence (for example, third party valuations) is available that there has been an irreversible decline in expected cash flows.

(2) AVAILABLE-FOR-SALE FINANCIAL ASSETS

The Group assesses, at each balance sheet date, whether there is objective evidence that an available-for-sale financial asset is impaired. In addition to the criteria for financial assets accounted for at amortised cost set out above, this assessment involves reviewing the current financial circumstances (including creditworthiness) and future prospects of the issuer, assessing the future cash flows expected to be realised and, in the case of equity shares, considering whether there has been a significant or prolonged decline in the fair value of the asset below its cost. If an impairment loss has been incurred, the cumulative loss measured as the difference between the acquisition cost (net of any principal repayment and amortisation) and the current fair value, less any impairment loss on that asset previously recognised, is reclassified from equity to the income statement. For impaired debt instruments, impairment losses are recognised in subsequent periods when it is determined that there has been a further negative impact on expected future cash flows; a reduction in fair value caused by general widening of credit spreads would not, of itself, result in additional impairment. If, in a subsequent period, the fair value of a debt instrument classified as available-for-sale increases and the increase can be objectively related to an event occurring after the impairment loss was recognised, an amount not greater than the original impairment loss is credited to the income statement; any excess is taken to other comprehensive income. Impairment losses recognised in the income statement on equity instruments are not reversed through the income statement.

 

(I) Property, plant and equipment

 

Property, plant and equipment (other than investment property) is included at cost less accumulated depreciation. The value of land (included in premises) is not depreciated. Depreciation on other assets is calculated using the straight-line method to allocate the difference between the cost and the residual value over their estimated useful lives, as follows: the shorter of 50 years and the remaining period of the lease for freehold/long and short leasehold premises; the shorter of 10 years and, if lease renewal is not likely, the remaining period of the lease for leasehold improvements; 10 to 20 years for fixtures and furnishings; and 2 to 8 years for other equipment and motor vehicles.

 

The assets’ residual values and useful lives are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at each balance sheet date.

 

Assets are reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. In the event that an asset’s carrying amount is determined to be greater than its recoverable amount it is written down immediately. The recoverable amount is the higher of the asset’s fair value less costs to sell and its value in use.

 

Investment property comprises freehold and long leasehold land and buildings that are held either to earn rental income or for capital accretion or both, primarily within the life insurance funds. In accordance with the guidance published by the Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors, investment property is carried at fair value based on current prices for similar properties, adjusted for the specific characteristics of the property (such as location or condition). If this information is not available, the Group uses alternative valuation methods such as discounted cash flow projections or recent prices in less active markets. These valuations are reviewed at least annually by independent professionally qualified valuers. Investment property being redeveloped for continuing use as investment property, or for which the market has become less active, continues to be valued at fair value.

 

(J) Leases

 

(1) AS LESSEEUnder IFRS 16, a lessor is required to determine whether a lease is a finance or operating lease. A lessee is not required to make this determination.

 

The leases entered into by the Group are primarily operating leases. Operating lease rentals payable are charged to the income statement on a straight-line basis over the period of the lease.

When an operating lease is terminated before the end of the lease period, any payment made to the lessor by way of penalty is recognised as an expense in the period of termination.

F-14

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued

(2)(1) AS LESSOR

 

Assets leased to customers are classified as finance leases if the lease agreements transfer substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership to the lessee but not necessarily legal title. All other leases are classified as operating leases. When assets are subject to finance leases, the present value of the lease payments, together with any unguaranteed residual value, is recognised as a receivable, net of provisions,allowances for expected credit losses, within loans and advances to banks and customers. The difference between the gross receivable and the present value of the receivable is recognised as unearned finance lease income. Finance lease income is recognised in interest income over the term of the lease using the net investment method (before tax) so as to give a constant rate of return on the net investment in the leases. Unguaranteed residual values are reviewed regularly to identify any impairment.

 

Operating lease assets are included within tangible fixed assetsproperty, plant and equipment at cost and depreciated over their estimated useful lives, which equates to the lives of the leases, after taking into account anticipated residual values. Operating lease rental income is recognised on a straight-line basis over the life of the lease.

 

The Group evaluates non-lease arrangements such as outsourcing and similar contracts to determine if they contain a lease which is then accounted for separately.

F-17

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued

(2) AS LESSEE

Leases are recognised as a right-of-use asset and a corresponding liability at the date at which the leased asset is available for use by the Group. Assets and liabilities arising from a lease are initially measured on a present value basis. The lease payments are discounted using the interest rate implicit in the lease, if that rate can be determined, or the Group’s incremental borrowing rate appropriate for the right-of-use asset arising from the lease.

Lease payments are allocated between the liability and finance cost. The finance cost is charged to profit or loss over the lease period so as to produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability for each period. The right-of-use asset is depreciated over the shorter of the asset’s useful life and the lease term on a straight-line basis.

Payments associated with short-term leases and leases of low-value assets are recognised on a straight-line basis as an expense in profit or loss. Short-term leases are leases with a lease term of twelve months or less. Low-value assets comprise IT equipment and small items of office furniture.

 

(K) Employee benefits

 

Short-term employee benefits, such as salaries, paid absences, performance-based cash awards and social security costs are recognised over the period in which the employees provide the related services.

 

(1) PENSION SCHEMES

 

The Group operates a number of post-retirement benefit schemes for its employees including both defined benefit and defined contribution pension plans. A defined benefit scheme is a pension plan that defines an amount of pension benefit that an employee will receive on retirement, dependent on one or more factors such as age, years of service and salary. A defined contribution plan is a pension plan into which the Group pays fixed contributions; there is no legal or constructive obligation to pay further contributions.

 

Scheme assets are included at their fair value and scheme liabilities are measured on an actuarial basis using the projected unit credit method. The defined benefit scheme liabilities are discounted using rates equivalent to the market yields at the balance sheet date on high-quality corporate bonds that are denominated in the currency in which the benefits will be paid, and that have terms to maturity approximating to the terms of the related pension liability. The Group’s income statement charge includes the current service cost of providing pension benefits, past service costs, net interest expense (income), and plan administration costs that are not deducted from the return on plan assets. Past service costs, which represents the change in the present value of the defined benefit obligation resulting from a plan amendment or curtailment, are recognised when the plan amendment or curtailment occurs. Net interest expense (income) is calculated by applying the discount rate at the beginning of the period to the net defined benefit liability or asset.

 

Remeasurements, comprising actuarial gains and losses, the return on plan assets (excluding amounts included in net interest expense (income) and net of the cost of managing the plan assets), and the effect of changes to the asset ceiling (if applicable) are reflected immediately in the balance sheet with a charge or credit recognised in other comprehensive income in the period in which they occur. Remeasurements recognised in other comprehensive income are reflected immediately in retained profits and will not subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss.

 

The Group’s balance sheet includes the net surplus or deficit, being the difference between the fair value of scheme assets and the discounted value of scheme liabilities at the balance sheet date. Surpluses are only recognised to the extent that they are recoverable through reduced contributions in the future or through refunds from the schemes. In assessing whether a surplus is recoverable, the Group considers its current right to obtain a refund or a reduction in future contributions and does not anticipate any future acts by other parties that could change the amount of the surplus that may ultimately be recovered.

 

The costs of the Group’s defined contribution plans are charged to the income statement in the period in which they fall due.

 

(2) SHARE-BASED COMPENSATION

 

The Group operates a number of equity-settled, share-based compensation plans in respect of services received from certain of its employees. The value of the employee services received in exchange for equity instruments granted under these plans is recognised as an expense over the vesting period of the instruments, with a corresponding increase in equity. This expense is determined by reference to the fair value of the number of equity instruments that are expected to vest. The fair value of equity instruments granted is based on market prices, if available, at the date of grant. In the absence of market prices, the fair value of the instruments at the date of grant is estimated using an appropriate valuation technique, such as a Black-Scholes option pricing model or a Monte Carlo simulation. The determination of fair values excludes the impact of any non-market vesting conditions, which are included in the assumptions used to estimate the number of options that are expected to vest. At each balance sheet date, this estimate is reassessed and if necessary revised. Any revision of the original estimate is recognised in the income statement, together with a corresponding adjustment to equity. Cancellations by employees of contributions to the Group’s Save As You Earn plans are treated as non-vesting conditions and the Group recognises, in the year of cancellation, the amount of the expense that would have otherwise been recognised over the remainder of the vesting period. Modifications are assessed at the date of modification and any incremental charges are charged to the income statement.

 

(L) Taxation

 

Tax expense comprises current and deferred tax. Current and deferred tax are charged or credited in the income statement except to the extent that the tax arises from a transaction or event which is payable on taxable profits is recognised, as an expense in the same or a different period, outside the income statement (either in other comprehensive income, directly in equity, or through a business combination), in which case the tax appears in the same statement as the transaction that gave rise to it. The tax consequences of the Group’s dividend payments (including distributions on other equity instruments), if any, are charged or credited to the statement in which the profits arise.profit distributed originally arose.

 

The Group provides for potentialCurrent tax liabilities that may arise onis the basisamount of the amountscorporate income taxes expected to be paid topayable or recoverable based on the profit for the period as adjusted for items that are not taxable or not deductible, and is calculated using tax authorities including open matters whererates and laws that were enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

Current tax includes amounts provided in respect of uncertain tax positions when management expects that, upon examination of the uncertainty by Her Majesty’s Revenue and Customs (HMRC) adopt a different interpretation and application of tax law. Dependent on their complexity, provisions are based on management’s interpretation of theor other relevant tax legislation, precedents and guidance as well as external tax advice. The provisionauthority, it is themore likely than not that an economic outflow will occur. Provisions reflect management’s best estimate of the consideration expected to beultimate liability based on their interpretation of tax law, precedent and guidance, informed by external tax advice as necessary. Changes in facts and circumstances underlying these provisions are reassessed at each balance sheet date, and the provisions are re-measured as required to settlereflect current information.

For the particular obligation taking into account management’s judgementGroup’s long-term insurance businesses, the tax expense is analysed between tax that is payable in respect of policyholders’ returns and tax that is payable on the shareholders’ returns. This allocation is based on an assessment of the relevant risks and uncertainties.rates of tax which will be applied to the returns under the current UK tax rules.

F-15F-18

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued

 

For the Group’s long-term insurance businesses, the tax charge is analysed between tax that is payable in respect of policyholders’ returns and tax that is payable on shareholders’ returns. This allocation is based on an assessment of the rates of tax which will be applied to the returns under current UK tax rules.

Deferred tax is provided in full, using the liability method,recognised on temporary differences arising between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts in the consolidated financial statements. However, deferred tax is not accounted for if it arises from initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction other than a business combination that at the time of the transaction affects neither accounting nor taxable profit or loss.balance sheet. Deferred tax is determinedcalculated using tax rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted byat the balance sheet date, and which are expected to apply when the related deferred tax asset is realised or the deferred tax liability is settled.

 

Deferred tax assetsliabilities are generally recognised for all taxable temporary differences but not recognised for taxable temporary differences arising on investments in subsidiaries where the reversal of the temporary difference can be controlled and it is probable that future taxable profitthe difference will be available against whichnot reverse in the foreseeable future. Deferred tax liabilities are not recognised on temporary differences can be utilised. Incomethat arise from goodwill which is not deductible for tax payable on profits is recognised as an expense in the period in which those profits arise. Thepurposes.

Deferred tax effects of losses available for carry forwardassets are recognised as an asset whento the extent it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which these lossesthe deductible temporary differences can be utilised. Deferredutilised, and current tax related to gainsare reviewed at each balance sheet date and losses on the fair value re-measurement of available-for-sale investments and cash flow hedges, where these gains and losses are recognised in other comprehensive income, is also recognised in other comprehensive income. Such tax is subsequently transferredreduced to the income statement together withextent that it is no longer probable that sufficient taxable profits will be available to allow all or part of the gain or loss.asset to be recovered.

 

Deferred and current tax assets and liabilities are offset when theynot recognised in respect of temporary differences that arise on initial recognition of assets and liabilities acquired other than in the samea business combination. Deferred tax reporting group and where there is both a legal right of offset and the intention to settle on a net basis or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously.not discounted.

 

(M) Insurance

 

The Group undertakes both life insurance and general insurance business. Insurance and participating investment contracts are accounted for under IFRS 4Insurance Contracts, which permits (with certain exceptions) the continuation of accounting practices for measuring insurance and participating investment contracts that applied prior to the adoption of IFRS. The Group, therefore, continues to account for these products using UK GAAP and UK established practice.

 

Products sold by the life insurance business are classified into three categories:

 

Insurance contracts – these contracts transfer significant insurance risk and may also transfer financial risk. The Group defines significant insurance risk as the possibility of having to pay benefits on the occurrence of an insured event which are significantly more than the benefits payable if the insured event were not to occur. These contracts may or may not include discretionary participation features.

Investment contracts containing a discretionary participation feature (participating investment contracts) – these contracts do not transfer significant insurance risk, but contain a contractual right which gives the holder the right to receive, in addition to the guaranteed benefits, further additional discretionary benefits or bonuses that are likely to be a significant proportion of the total contractual benefits and the amount and timing of which is at the discretion of the Group, within the constraints of the terms and conditions of the instrument and based upon the performance of specified assets.

Non-participating investment contracts – these contracts do not transfer significant insurance risk or contain a discretionary participation feature.

 

The general insurance business issues only insurance contracts.

 

(1) LIFE INSURANCE BUSINESS

 

(I) ACCOUNTING FOR INSURANCE AND PARTICIPATING INVESTMENT CONTRACTS PREMIUMS AND CLAIMS

Premiums and claims

 

Premiums received in respect of insurance and participating investment contracts are recognised as revenue when due except for unit-linked contracts on which premiums are recognised as revenue when received. Claims are recorded as an expense on the earlier of the maturity date or the date on which the claim is notified.

 

LIABILITIESLiabilities

 

Changes in the value of liabilities are recognised in the income statement through insurance claims.

 

Insurance and participating investment contracts in the Group’s with-profit funds

Liabilities of the Group’s with-profit funds, including guarantees and options embedded within products written by these funds, are stated at their realistic values in accordance with the Prudential Regulation Authority’s realistic capital regime, except that projected transfers out of the funds into other Group funds are recorded in the unallocated surplus (see below).

Liabilities of the Group’s with-profit funds, including guarantees and options embedded within products written by these funds, are stated at their realistic values in accordance with the Prudential Regulation Authority’s realistic capital regime, except that projected transfers out of the funds into other Group funds are recorded in the unallocated surplus (see below).
Insurance and participating investment contracts which are not unit-linked or in the Group’s with-profit funds

A liability for contractual benefits that are expected to be incurred in the future is recorded when the premiums are recognised. The liability is calculated by estimating the future cash flows over the duration of in-force policies and discounting them back to the valuation date allowing for probabilities of occurrence. The liability will vary with movements in interest rates and with the cost of life insurance and annuity benefits where future mortality is uncertain.

Assumptions are made in respect of all material factors affecting future cash flows, including future interest rates, mortality and costs.

A liability for contractual benefits that are expected to be incurred in the future is recorded when the premiums are recognised. The liability is calculated by estimating the future cash flows over the duration of in-force policies and discounting them back to the valuation date allowing for probabilities of occurrence. The liability will vary with movements in interest rates and with the cost of life insurance and annuity benefits where future mortality is uncertain.
Assumptions are made in respect of all material factors affecting future cash flows, including future interest rates, mortality and costs.
Insurance and participating investment contracts which are unit-linked
Liabilities for unit-linked insurance contracts and participating investment contracts are stated at the bid value of units plus an additional allowance where appropriate (such as for any excess of future expenses over charges). The liability is increased or reduced by the change in the unit prices and is reduced by policy administration fees, mortality and surrender charges and any withdrawals. Benefit claims in excess of the account balances incurred in the period are also charged through insurance claims. Revenue consists of fees deducted for mortality, policy administration and surrender charges.

 

Liabilities for unit-linked insurance contracts and participating investment contracts are stated at the bid value of units plus an additional allowance where appropriate (such as for any excess of future expenses over charges). The liability is increased or reduced by the change in the unit prices and is reduced by policy administration fees, mortality and surrender charges and any withdrawals. Benefit claims in excess of the account balances incurred in the period are also charged through insurance claims. Revenue consists of fees deducted for mortality, policy administration and surrender charges.

F-16

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued

UNALLOCATED SURPLUSUnallocated surplus

 

Any amounts in the with-profit funds not yet determined as being due to policyholders or shareholders are recognised as an unallocated surplus which is shown separately from liabilities arising from insurance contracts and participating investment contracts.

 

(II) ACCOUNTING FOR NON-PARTICIPATING INVESTMENT CONTRACTS

 

The Group’s non-participating investment contracts are primarily unit-linked. These contracts are accounted for as financial liabilities whose value is contractually linked to the fair values of financial assets within the Group’s unitised investment funds. The value of the unit-linked financial liabilities is determined using current unit prices multiplied by the number of units attributed to the contract holders at the balance sheet date. Their value is never less than the amount payable on surrender, discounted for the required notice period where applicable. Investment returns (including movements in fair value and investment income) allocated to those contracts are recognised in the income statement through insurance claims.

 

Deposits and withdrawals are not accounted for through the income statement but are accounted for directly in the balance sheet as adjustments to the non-participating investment contract liability.

F-19

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued

 

The Group receives investment management fees in the form of an initial adjustment or charge to the amount invested. These fees are in respect of services rendered in conjunction with the issue and management of investment contracts where the Group actively manages the consideration received from its customers to fund a return that is based on the investment profile that the customer selected on origination of the contract. These services comprise an indeterminate number of acts over the lives of the individual contracts and, therefore, the Group defers these fees and recognises them over the estimated lives of the contracts, in line with the provision of investment management services.

 

Costs which are directly attributable and incremental to securing new non-participating investment contracts are deferred. This asset is subsequently amortised over the period of the provision of investment management services and its recoverability is reviewed in circumstances where its carrying amount may not be recoverable. If the asset is greater than its recoverable amount it is written down immediately through fee and commission expense in the income statement. All other costs are recognised as expenses when incurred.

 

(III) VALUE OF IN-FORCE BUSINESS

 

The Group recognises as an asset the value of in-force business in respect of insurance contracts and participating investment contracts. The asset represents the present value of the shareholders’ interest in the profits expected to emerge from those contracts written at the balance sheet date. This is determined after making appropriate assumptions about future economic and operating conditions such as future mortality and persistency rates and includes allowances for both non-market risk and for the realistic value of financial options and guarantees. Each cash flow is valued using the discount rate consistent with that applied to such a cash flow in the capital markets. The asset in the consolidated balance sheet is presented gross of attributable tax and movements in the asset are reflected within other operating income in the income statement.

 

The Group’s contractual rights to benefits from providing investment management services in relation to non-participating investment contracts acquired in business combinations and portfolio transfers are measured at fair value at the date of acquisition. The resulting asset is amortised over the estimated lives of the contracts. At each reporting date an assessment is made to determine if there is any indication of impairment. Where impairment exists, the carrying value of the asset is reduced to its recoverable amount and the impairment loss recognised in the income statement.

 

(2) GENERAL INSURANCE BUSINESS

 

The Group both underwrites and acts as intermediary in the sale of general insurance products. Underwriting premiums are included in insurance premium income, net of refunds, in the period in which insurance cover is provided to the customer; premiums received relating to future periods are deferred in the balance sheet within liabilities arising from insurance contracts and participating investment contracts on a basis that reflects the length of time for which contracts have been in force and the projected incidence of risk over the term of the contract and only credited to the income statement when earned. Broking commission is recognised when the underwriter accepts the risk of providing insurance cover to the customer. Where appropriate, provision is made for the effect of future policy terminations based upon past experience.

 

The underwriting business makes provision for the estimated cost of claims notified but not settled and claims incurred but not reported at the balance sheet date. The provision for the cost of claims notified but not settled is based upon a best estimate of the cost of settling the outstanding claims after taking into account all known facts. In those cases where there is insufficient information to determine the required provision, statistical techniques are used which take into account the cost of claims that have recently been settled and make assumptions about the future development of the outstanding cases. Similar statistical techniques are used to determine the provision for claims incurred but not reported at the balance sheet date. Claims liabilities are not discounted.

 

(3) LIABILITY ADEQUACY TEST

 

At each balance sheet date liability adequacy tests are performed to ensure the adequacy of insurance and participating investment contract liabilities net of related deferred cost assets and value of in-force business. In performing these tests current best estimates of discounted future contractual cash flows and claims handling and policy administration expenses, as well as investment income from the assets backing such liabilities, are used. Any deficiency is immediately charged to the income statement, initially by writing off the relevant assets and subsequently by establishing a provision for losses arising from liability adequacy tests.

 

(4) REINSURANCE

 

Contracts entered into by the Group with reinsurers under which the Group is compensated for benefits payable on one or more contracts issued by the Group are recognised as assets arising from reinsurance contracts held. Where the underlying contracts issued by the Group are classified as insurance contracts and the reinsurance contract transfers significant insurance risk on those contracts to the reinsurer, the assets arising from reinsurance contracts held are classified as insurance contracts. Where the underlying contracts issued by the Group are classified as non-participating investment contracts and the reinsurance contract transfers financial risk on those contracts to the reinsurer, the assets arising from reinsurance contracts held are classified as non-participating investment contracts.

F-17

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued

ASSETS ARISING FROM REINSURANCE CONTRACTS HELDAssets arising from reinsurance contracts heldCLASSIFIED AS INSURANCE CONTRACTSClassified as insurance contracts

 

Amounts recoverable from or due to reinsurers are measured consistently with the amounts associated with the reinsured contracts and in accordance with the terms of each reinsurance contract and are regularly reviewed for impairment. Premiums payable for reinsurance contracts are recognised as an expense when due within insurance premium income. Changes in the reinsurance recoverable assets are recognised in the income statement through insurance claims.

 

ASSETS ARISING FROM REINSURANCE CONTRACTS HELDAssets arising from reinsurance contracts heldCLASSIFIED AS NON-PARTICIPATING INVESTMENT CONTRACTSClassified as non-participating investment contracts

 

These contracts are accounted for as financial assets whose value is contractually linked to the fair values of financial assets within the reinsurers’ investment funds. Investment returns (including movements in fair value and investment income) allocated to these contracts are recognised in insurance claims. Deposits and withdrawals are not accounted for through the income statement but are accounted for directly in the balance sheet as adjustments to the assets arising from reinsurance contracts held.

 

(N) Foreign currency translation

 

Items included in the financial statements of each of the Group’s entities are measured using the currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity operates (the functional currency). Foreign currency transactions are translated into the appropriate functional currency using the exchange rates prevailing at the dates of the transactions. Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the settlement of such transactions and from the translation at year end exchange rates of monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are recognised in the income statement, except when recognised in other comprehensive income as qualifying cash flow or net investment hedges. Non-monetary assets that are measured at fair value are translated using the exchange rate at the date that the fair value was determined. Translation differences on equities and similar non-monetary items held at fair value through profit and loss are recognised in profit or loss as part of the fair value gain or loss. Translation differences on available-for-sale non-monetary financial assets measured at fair value through other comprehensive income, such as equity shares, are included in the fair value reserve in equity unless the asset is a hedged item in a fair value hedge.

F-20

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIES continued

 

The results and financial position of all group entities that have a functional currency different from the presentation currency are translated into the presentation currency as follows: the assets and liabilities of foreign operations, including goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on the acquisition of a foreign entity, are translated into sterling at foreign exchange rates ruling at the balance sheet date; and the income and expenses of foreign operations are translated into sterling at average exchange rates unless these do not approximate to the foreign exchange rates ruling at the dates of the transactions in which case income and expenses are translated at the dates of the transactions.

 

Foreign exchange differences arising on the translation of a foreign operation are recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated in a separate component of equity together with exchange differences arising from the translation of borrowings and other currency instruments designated as hedges of such investments (see (F)(3) above). On disposal or liquidation of a foreign operation, the cumulative amount of exchange differences relating to that foreign operation are reclassified from equity and included in determining the profit or loss arising on disposal or liquidation.

 

(O) Provisions and contingent liabilities

 

Provisions are recognised in respect of present obligations arising from past events where it is probable that outflows of resources will be required to settle the obligations and they can be reliably estimated.

 

Contingent liabilities are possible obligations whose existence depends on the outcome of uncertain future events or those present obligations where the outflows of resources are uncertain or cannot be measured reliably. Contingent liabilities are not recognised in the financial statements but are disclosed unless they are remote.

 

Provision is made for expected credit losses in respect of irrevocable undrawn loan commitments if it is probable that the facility will be drawn and result in the recognition of an asset at an amount less than the amount advanced.financial guarantee contracts (see (H) above).

 

(P) Share capital

 

Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares or options or to the acquisition of a business are shown in equity as a deduction, net of tax, from the proceeds. Dividends paid on the Group’s ordinary shares are recognised as a reduction in equity in the period in which they are paid.

 

Where the Company or any member of the Group purchases the Company’s share capital, the consideration paid is deducted from shareholders’ equity as treasury shares until they are cancelled; if these shares are subsequently sold or reissued, any consideration received is included in shareholders’ equity.

 

(Q) Cash and cash equivalents

 

For the purposes of the cash flow statement, cash and cash equivalents comprise cash and non-mandatory balances with central banks and amounts due from banks with a maturity of less than three months.

F-18

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 3: CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND ESTIMATES

 

The preparation of the Group’s financial statements in accordance with IFRS requires management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions in applying the accounting policies that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses. Due to the inherent uncertainty in making estimates, actual results reported in future periods may be based upon amounts which differ from those estimates. Estimates, judgements and assumptions are continually evaluated and are based on historical experience and other factors, including expectations of future events that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances.

 

The significant judgements made by management in applying the Group’s accounting policies and the key sources of estimation uncertainty in these financial statements, which together are deemed critical to the Group’s results and financial position, are as follows:

 

Allowance for expected credit losses

The Group recognises an allowance for expected credit losses for loans and advances to customers and banks, other financial assets held at amortised cost, financial assets measured at fair value through other comprehensive income and certain loan commitment and financial guarantee contracts. At 31 December 2019 the Group’s expected credit loss allowance was £3,455 million (31 December 2018: £3,362 million), of which £3,278 million (31 December 2018: £3,169 million) was in respect of drawn balances.

The calculation of the Group’s expected credit loss (ECL) allowances and provisions against loan commitments and guarantees under IFRS 9 requires the Group to make a number of judgements, assumptions and estimates. The most significant are set out below.

DEFINITION OF DEFAULT

The probability of default (PD) of an exposure, both over a 12 month period and over its lifetime, is a key input to the measurement of the ECL allowance. Default has occurred when there is evidence that the customer is experiencing significant financial difficulty which is likely to affect the ability to repay amounts due. The definition of default adopted by the Group is described in note 2(H) Impairment of financial assets. The Group has rebutted the presumption in IFRS 9 that default occurs no later than when a payment is 90 days past due for UK mortgages. As a result, at 31 December 2019, approximately £0.6 billion of UK mortgages (31 December 2018: £0.6 billion) were classified as Stage 2 rather than Stage 3; the impact on the Group’s ECL allowance was not material.

LIFETIME OF AN EXPOSURE

The PD of a financial asset is dependent on its expected life. A range of approaches, segmented by product type, has been adopted by the Group to estimate a product’s expected life. These include using the full contractual life and taking into account behavioural factors such as early repayments and refinancing. For non-revolving retail assets, the Group has assumed the expected life for each product to be the time taken for all significant losses to be observed. For retail revolving products, the Group has considered the losses beyond the contractual term over which the Group is exposed to credit risk. For commercial overdraft facilities, the average behavioural life has been used. Changes to the assumed expected lives of the Group’s assets could impact the ECL allowance recognised by the Group.

SIGNIFICANT INCREASE IN CREDIT RISK

Performing assets are classified as either Stage 1 or Stage 2. An ECL allowance equivalent to 12 months expected losses is established against assets in Stage 1; assets classified as Stage 2 carry an ECL allowance equivalent to lifetime expected losses. Assets are transferred from Stage 1 to Stage 2 when there has been a significant increase in credit risk (SICR) since initial recognition.

The Group uses a quantitative test together with qualitative indicators to determine whether there has been a SICR for an asset. For retail, a deterioration in the Retail Master Scale of four grades for credit cards, personal loans or overdrafts, three grades for personal mortgages, or two grades for UK motor finance accounts is treated as a SICR. For Commercial a doubling of PD with a minimum increase in PD of 1 per cent and a resulting change in the underlying grade is treated as a SICR. All financial assets are assumed to have suffered a SICR if they are more than 30 days past due.

Allowance for impairment losses on loans and receivables (note 21);F-21

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 3: CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND ESTIMATES continued

The setting of precise trigger points combined with risk indicators requires judgement. The use of different trigger points may have a material impact upon the size of the ECL allowance. The Group monitors the effectiveness of SICR criteria on an ongoing basis.

POST-MODEL ADJUSTMENTS

Limitations in the Group’s impairment models or input data may be identified through the on-going assessment and validation of the output of the models. In these circumstances, management make appropriate adjustments to the Group’s allowance for impairment losses to ensure the overall provision adequately reflects all material risks. These adjustments are generally determined taking into account the particular attributes of the exposure which have not been adequately captured by the primary impairment models.

At 31 December 2019, significant post-model adjustments included within the allowance for expected credit losses amounted to £161 million (2018: £195 million), less than 5 percent of overall provisions. This comprises increases for the additional end of term risk on interest only mortgages of £132 million (2018: £114 million); mortgage accounts in long term default of £33 million (2018: £47 million); the extension of modelled lifetime on Retail revolving products of £36 million (2018: £34 million); and a decrease from the temporary effects of bureau data changes which artificially inflate PDs, and the resulting ECL, of £40 million; (2018: Nil).

FORWARD LOOKING INFORMATION

The measurement of expected credit losses is required to reflect an unbiased probability-weighted range of possible future outcomes. In order to do this, the Group has developed an economic model to project a wide range of key impairment drivers using information derived mainly from external sources. These drivers include factors such as the unemployment rate, the house price index, commercial property prices and corporate credit spreads. The model-generated economic scenarios for the six years beyond 2019 are mapped to industry-wide historical loss data by portfolio. Combined losses across portfolios are used to rank the scenarios by severity of loss. Alongside a defined central scenario three further scenarios are generated by averaging a group of individual scenarios around specified points along the loss distribution to reflect the range of outcomes. The central scenario reflects the Group’s base case assumptions used for medium-term planning purposes, an upside and a downside scenario are also produced together with a severe downside scenario. Rare occurrences of adverse economic events can lead to relatively large credit losses which means that typically the most likely outcome is less than the probability-weighted outcome of the range of possible future events. To allow for this a relatively unlikely severe downside scenario is therefore included. At 31 December 2018 and 2019, the base case, upside and downside scenarios each carry a 30 per cent weighting; the severe downside scenario is weighted at 10 per cent. The choice of alternative scenarios and scenario weights is a combination of quantitative analysis and judgemental assessment to ensure that the full range of possible outcomes and material non-linearity of losses are captured. A committee under the chairmanship of the Chief Economist meets quarterly, to review and, if appropriate, recommend changes to the economic scenarios to the Chief Financial Officer and Chief Risk Officer. Findings dealing with all aspects of the expected credit loss calculation are presented to the Group Audit Committee.

For each major product grouping models have been developed which utilise historical credit loss data to produce PDs for each scenario; an overall weighted average PD is used to assist in determining the staging of financial assets and related ECL.

The key UK economic assumptions made by the Group averaged over a five-year period are shown below:

  At 31 December 2019 At 31 December 2018
           Severe           Severe 
  Base case  Upside  Downside  downside  Base case  Upside  Downside  downside 
Economic assumptions %  %  %  %  %  %  %  % 
Interest rate  1.25   2.04   0.49   0.11   1.25   2.34   1.30   0.71 
Unemployment rate  4.3   3.9   5.8   7.2   4.5   3.9   5.3   6.9 
House price growth  1.3   5.0   (2.6)  (7.1)  2.5   6.1   (4.8)  (7.5)
Commercial real estate price growth  (0.2)  1.8   (3.8)  (7.1)  0.4   5.3   (4.7)  (6.4)

The Group’s base-case economic scenario has changed little over the year and reflects a broadly stable outlook for the economy. Although there remains considerable uncertainty about the economic consequences of the UK’s exit from the European Union, the Group considers that at this stage the range of possible economic outcomes is adequately reflected in its choice and weighting of scenarios. The averages shown above do not fully reflect the peak to trough changes in the stated assumptions over the period. The tables below illustrate the variability of the assumptions from the start of the scenario period to the peak and trough.

  At 31 December 2019 At 31 December 2018
           Severe           Severe 
  Base case  Upside  Downside  downside  Base case  Upside  Downside  downside 
Economic assumptions – start to peak %  %  %  %  %  %  %  % 
Interest rate  1.75   2.56   0.75   0.75   1.75   4.00   1.75   1.25 
Unemployment rate  4.6   4.6   6.9   8.3   4.8   4.3   6.3   8.6 
House price growth  6.0   26.3   (1.9)  (2.3)  13.7   34.9   0.6   (1.6)
Commercial real estate price growth  0.1   10.4   (0.6)  (1.1)  0.1   26.9   (0.5)  (0.5)
                                 
  At 31 December 2019 At 31 December 2018
           Severe           Severe 
  Base case  Upside  Downside  downside  Base case  Upside  Downside  downside 
Economic assumptions – start to trough %  %  %  %  %  %  %  % 
Interest rate  0.75   0.75   0.35   0.01   0.75   0.75   0.75   0.25 
Unemployment rate  3.8   3.4   3.9   3.9   4.1   3.5   4.3   4.2 
House price growth  (1.9)  (0.8)  (14.8)  (33.1)  0.4   2.3   (26.5)  (33.5)
Commercial real estate price growth  (0.9)  0.3   (17.5)  (30.9)  (0.1)  0.0   (23.8)  (33.8)

The table below shows the extent to which a higher ECL allowance has been recognised to take account of forward looking information from the weighted multiple economic scenarios. The most significant difference between these bases arises on UK mortgages as the probability weighted ECL includes the

Valuation of assets and liabilities arising from insurance business (notes 24 and 32);F-22

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 3: CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND ESTIMATEScontinued

impact of house price movements on the loss given default. For other portfolios adjustment is made only for the probability of default. All non-modelled provisions, including post model adjustments, are based on the probability weighted modelled ECL across all scenarios.

  At 31 December 2019 At 31 December 2018
     Probability        Probability    
  Base case  weighted  Difference  Base case  weighted  Difference 
Impact of multiple economic scenarios £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
UK mortgages  464   569   105   253   460   207 
Other Retail  1,492   1,521   29   1,294   1,308   14 
Commercial Banking  1,258   1,315   57   1,472   1,513   41 
Other  50   50      81   81    
   3,264   3,455   191   3,100   3,362   262 

The table below shows the Group’s ECL for the upside and downside scenarios using a 100 per cent weighting, with stage allocation based on each specific scenario.

  At 31 December 2019 At 31 December 2018
  Upside  Downside  Upside  Downside 
  £m  £m  £m  £m 
ECL allowance  3,001   3,677   2,775   3,573 
                 

The impact of changes in the UK unemployment rate and House Price Index (HPI) have also been assessed. Although such changes would not be observed in isolation, as economic indicators tend to be correlated in a coherent scenario, this gives insight into the sensitivity of the Group’s ECL to changes in these two critical economic factors. The assessment has been made against the base case with the reported staging unchanged. The changes to HPI and the unemployment rate have been phased in to the forward-looking economic outlook over three years.

 

The table below shows the impact on the Group’s ECL resulting from a decrease/increase in Loss Given Default for a 10 percentage point (pp) increase/ decrease in the UK House Price Index (HPI).

                 
  At 31 December 2019 At 31 December 2018
  10pp increase  10pp decrease  10pp increase  10pp decrease 
  in HPI  in HPI  in HPI  in HPI 
ECL impact, £m  (110)  147   (114)  154 
                 
The table below shows the impact on the Group’s ECL resulting from a decrease/increase for a 1 percentage point (pp) increase/decrease in the UK unemployment rate.
                 
  At 31 December 2019 At 31 December 2018
  1pp increase in  1pp decrease in  1pp increase in  1pp decrease in 
  unemployment  unemployment  unemployment  unemployment 
ECL impact, £m  141   (143)  172   (155)

Valuation of assets and liabilities arising from insurance business

At 31 December 2019, the Group recognised a value of in-force business asset of £5,311 million (2018: £4,491 million) and an acquired value of in-force business asset of £247 million (2018: £271 million).

The value of in-force business asset represents the estimated present value of future profits expected to arise from the portfolio of in-force life insurance and participating investment contracts. The valuation of this asset requires assumptions to be made about future economic and operating conditions which are inherently uncertain and changes could significantly affect the value attributed to this asset. The methodology used to value this asset and the key assumptions that have been made in determining the carrying value of the value of in-force business asset at 31 December 2019 are set out in note 25.

At 31 December 2019, the Group carried total liabilities arising from insurance contracts and participating investment contracts of £111,449 million (2018: £98,874 million). Elements of the valuations of liabilities arising from insurance contracts and participating investment contracts require management to estimate future investment returns, future mortality rates, future expenses and future policyholder behaviour. These estimates are subject to significant uncertainty. The methodology used to value these liabilities and the key assumptions that have been made in determining their carrying value are set out in note 32.

The effect on the Group’s profit before tax and shareholders’ equity of changes in key assumptions used in determining the life insurance assets and liabilities is set out in note 33.

Defined benefit pension scheme obligations

The net asset recognised in the balance sheet at 31 December 2019 in respect of the Group’s defined benefit pension scheme obligations was £550 million (comprising an asset of £681 million and a liability of £131 million) (2018: a net asset of £1,146 million comprising an asset of £1,267 million and a liability of £121 million). The Group’s accounting policy for its defined benefit pension scheme obligations is set out in note 2(K).

The accounting valuation of the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes’ liabilities requires management to make a number of assumptions. The key areas of estimation uncertainty are the discount rate applied to future cash flows and the expected lifetime of the schemes’ members. The discount rate is required to be set with reference to market yields at the end of the reporting period on high quality corporate bonds in the currency and with a term consistent with the defined benefit pension schemes’ obligations. The average duration of the schemes’ obligations is approximately 18 years. The market for bonds with a similar duration is illiquid and, as a result, significant management judgement is required to determine an appropriate yield curve on which to base the discount rate. The cost of the benefits payable by the schemes will also depend upon the life expectancy of the members. The Group considers latest market practice and actual experience in determining the appropriate assumptions for both current mortality expectations and the rate of

Defined benefit pension scheme obligations (note 36);F-23

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 3: CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND ESTIMATEScontinued

future mortality improvement. It is uncertain whether this rate of improvement will be sustained going forward and, as a result, actual experience may differ from current expectations. The effect on the net accounting surplus or deficit and on the pension charge in the Group’s income statement of changes to the principal actuarial assumptions is set out in part (v) of note 36.

Recoverability of deferred tax assets

At 31 December 2019 the Group carried deferred tax assets on its balance sheet of £2,666 million (2018: £2,453 million) principally relating to tax losses carried forward. Further information on the Group’s deferred tax assets and uncertain tax positions is provided in notes 37 and 48 respectively.

Estimation of income taxes includes the assessment of recoverability of deferred tax assets. Deferred tax assets are only recognised to the extent they are considered more likely than not to be recoverable based on existing tax laws and forecasts of future taxable profits against which the underlying tax deductions can be utilised. The Group has recognised a deferred tax asset of £3,611 million (2018: £3,778 million) in respect of UK trading losses carried forward. Substantially all of these losses have arisen in Bank of Scotland plc and Lloyds Bank plc, and they will be utilised as taxable profits arise in those legal entities in future periods.

The Group’s expectations as to the level of future taxable profits take into account the Group’s long-term financial and strategic plans, and anticipated future tax-adjusting items. In making this assessment, account is taken of business plans, the Board-approved operating plan and the expected future economic outlook, as well as the risks associated with future regulatory change. Under current law there is no expiry date for UK trading losses not yet utilised, although (since Finance Act 2016) banking losses that arose before 1 April 2015 can only be used against 25 per cent of taxable profits arising after 1 April 2016, and they cannot be used to reduce the surcharge on banking profits. This restriction in utilisation means that the value of the deferred tax asset is only expected to be fully recovered by 2039. It is possible that future tax law changes could materially affect the value of these losses ultimately realised by the Group.

As disclosed in note 37, deferred tax assets totalling £428 million (2018: £584 million) have not been recognised in respect of certain capital and trading losses carried forward, unrelieved foreign tax credits and other tax deductions, as there are currently no expected future taxable profits against which these assets can be utilised.

Regulatory provisions

At 31 December 2019, the Group carried provisions of £2,408 million (2018: £2,385 million) against the cost of making redress payments to customers and the related administration costs in connection with historical regulatory breaches.

Determining the amount of the provisions, which represent management’s best estimate of the cost of settling these issues, requires the exercise of significant judgement and estimate. It will often be necessary to form a view on matters which are inherently uncertain, such as the scope of reviews required by regulators, and to estimate the number of future complaints, the extent to which they will be upheld, the average cost of redress and the impact of legal decisions that may be relevant to claims received. Consequently the continued appropriateness of the underlying assumptions is reviewed on a regular basis against actual experience and other relevant evidence and adjustments made to the provisions where appropriate.

More detail on the nature of the assumptions that have been made and key sensitivities is set out in note 38.

Fair value of financial instruments

At 31 December 2019, the carrying value of the Group’s financial instrument assets held at fair value was £211,650 million (2018: £206,939 million), and its financial instrument liabilities held at fair value was £47,265 million (2018: £51,920 million).

In accordance with IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement, the Group categorises financial instruments carried on the balance sheet at fair value using a three level hierarchy. Financial instruments categorised as level 1 are valued using quoted market prices and therefore minimal estimates are made in determining fair value. The fair value of financial instruments categorised as level 2 and, in particular, level 3 is determined using valuation techniques including discounted cash flow analysis and valuation models.

The valuation techniques for level 2 and level 3 financial instruments involve management judgement and estimates the extent of which depends on the complexity of the instrument and the availability of market observable information. In addition, in line with market practice, the Group applies credit, debit and funding valuation adjustments in determining the fair value of its uncollateralised derivative positions. A description of these adjustments is set out in note 50. Further details of the Group’s level 3 financial instruments and the sensitivity of their valuation including the effect of applying reasonably possible alternative assumptions in determining their fair value are also set out in note 50. Details about sensitivities to market risk arising from trading assets and other treasury positions can be found on page 108.

Recoverability of deferred tax assets (note 37);F-24

Payment protection insurance and other regulatory provisions (note 38); and

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Fair value of financial instruments (note 49).

 

NOTE 4: SEGMENTAL ANALYSIS

 

Lloyds Banking Group provides a wide range of banking and financial services in the UK and in certain locations overseas.

 

The Group Executive Committee (GEC) has been determined to be the chief operating decision maker for the Group. The Group’s operating segments reflect its organisational and management structures. The Group Executive CommitteeGEC reviews the Group’s internal reporting based around these segments in order to assess performance and allocate resources. GEC considers interest income and expense on a net basis and consequently the total interest income and expense for all reportable segments is presented net. The segments are differentiated by the type of products provided and by whether the customers are individuals or corporate entities.

 

The segmental results and comparatives are presented on an underlying basis, the basis reviewed by the chief operating decision maker. The effects of the following are excluded in arriving at underlying profit:

 

losses on redemption of the Enhanced Capital Notes and the volatility in the value of the embedded equity conversion feature;

market volatility and other items, which includesasset sales, including the effects of certain asset sales, the volatility relating to the Group’s own debt and hedging arrangements as well asand that arising in the insurance businesses, insurance gross up, businesses;
the unwind of acquisition-related fair value adjustments and the amortisation of purchased intangible assets;

restructuring costs, (which in 2015 and 2016 comprisedprincipally comprising severance related costs, relating to the Simplification programme announced in October 2014 and in 2014 included severance, IT and business costs relating to the programme started in 2011) and the costs of implementingintegrating newly acquired businesses, the cost of regulatory reform and ring-fencing;the rationalisation of the non-branch property portfolio; and

TSB build and dual running costs and the loss relating to the TSB sale in 2015;

payment protection insurance and other conduct provisions; andinsurance.

 

certain past service pension credits or charges.

For the purposes of the underlying income statement, operating lease depreciation (net of gains on disposal of operating lease assets) is shown as an adjustment to total income.

During 2019, the Group transferred Cardnet, its card payment acceptance service, from Retail into Commercial Banking and also transferred certain equity business from Commercial Banking into Central items. Comparative figures have been restated accordingly.

 

The Group’s activities are organised into fourthree financial reporting segments: Retail; Commercial Banking; Consumer Finance and Insurance. The Group’s unsecured personal lending portfolio, previously part of Retail, is now managed by Consumer FinanceInsurance and elements of the Group’s business in the Channel Islands and Isle of Man were transferred from Retail to Commercial Banking; comparatives have been restated accordingly.Wealth.

 

Retail offers a broad range of financial service products, including current accounts, savings, mortgages, motor finance and mortgages,unsecured consumer lending to UK personal customers, including wealth and small business customers. It is also a distributor of insurance and a range of long-term savings and investment products.

 

Commercial Banking is client-led, helping UK-based clients and international clients with a link to the UK. Through its four client facing divisions – SME, Mid Markets, Global Corporates and Financial Institutions – it provides clients with a range of products and services such as lending, transactional banking, working capital management, risk management and debt capital markets services as well as access to private equity through Lloyds Development Capital.

Consumer Finance comprises all the Group’s consumer lending products including motor finance, credit cards,SMEs, corporates and unsecured personal loans along with its European business.financial institutions.

 

Insurance provides a range of protection, pension and Wealth offers insurance, investment and wealth management products to meet the needs of its customers.and services.

 

Other includes certain assets previously reported as outside of the Group’s risk appetite and the results of businesses disposed. Other also includes income and expenditure not rechargedattributed to divisions, including the costs of certain central and head office functions and the costs of managing the Group’s technology platforms, branch and head office property estate, operations (including payments, banking operations and collections) and sourcing, the costs of which are predominantly recharged to the other divisions. It also reflects other items not recharged to the divisions.private equity business, Lloyds Development Capital.

 

Inter-segment services are generally recharged at cost, with the exception ofalthough some attract a margin. In particular a profit margin is charged on the internal commission arrangements between the UK branch and other distribution networks and the insurance product manufacturing businesses within the Group, where a profit margin is also charged.Group. Inter-segment lending and deposits are generally entered into at market rates, except that non-interest bearing balances are priced at a rate that reflects the external yield that could be earned on such funds.

F-19

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 4: SEGMENTAL ANALYSIS continued

 

For the majority of those derivative contracts entered into by business units for risk management purposes, the business unit recognises the net interest income or expense on an accrual accounting basis and transfers the remainder of the movement in the fair value of the derivative to the central group segmentfunction where the resulting accounting volatility is managed where possible through the establishment of hedge accounting relationships. Any change in fair value of the hedged instrument attributable to the hedged risk is also recorded within the central group segment.function. This allocation of the fair value of the derivative and change in fair value of the hedged instrument attributable to the hedged risk avoids accounting asymmetry in segmental results and leads to accounting volatility, which is managed centrally and reported within Other.

     Commercial  Consumer        Underlying basis 
  Retail  Banking  Finance  Insurance  Other  total 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Year ended 31 December 2016                        
Net interest income  6,497   2,735   1,941   (146)  408   11,435 
Other income, net of insurance claims  1,053   1,987   1,338   1,755   (68)  6,065 
Total underlying income, net of insurance claims  7,550   4,722   3,279   1,609   340   17,500 
Operating lease depreciation1     (105)  (775)     (15)  (895)
Net income  7,550   4,617   2,504   1,609   325   16,605 
Operating costs  (4,174)  (2,133)  (939)  (772)  (75)  (8,093)
Impairment  (373)  (16)  (282)     26   (645)
Underlying profit (loss)  3,003   2,468   1,283   837   276   7,867 
External income  8,460   3,668   3,885   1,311   176   17,500 
Inter-segment income  (910)  1,054   (606)  298   164    
Segment underlying income, net of insurance claims  7,550   4,722   3,279   1,609   340   17,500 
Segment external assets  300,085   188,296   40,992   153,936   134,484   817,793 
Segment customer deposits  271,005   132,628   7,920      3,907   415,460 
Segment external liabilities  275,006   221,395   12,494   146,836   113,247   768,978 
Other segment items reflected in income statement above:                        
Depreciation and amortisation  459   286   888   168   579   2,380 
Increase in value of in-force business           472      472 
Defined benefit scheme charges  134   45   10   13   85   287 
Other segment items:                        
Additions to fixed assets  278   126   2,086   481   789   3,760 
Investments in joint ventures and associates at end of year  1      5      53   59 

1Net of profits on disposal of operating lease assets of £58 million.
F-20F-25

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 4: SEGMENTAL ANALYSIS continued

 

   Commercial Consumer     Underlying  Retail
£m
  Commercial
Banking
£m
 Insurance
and Wealth
£m
 Other
£m
 Underlying
basis total
£m
 
 Retail1 Banking1 Finance1 Insurance Other basis total 
 £m £m £m £m £m £m 
Year ended 31 December 2015                        
Year ended 31 December 2019                    
Net interest income  6,664   2,576   1,954   (163)  451   11,482   8,807   2,918   112   540   12,377 
Other income, net of insurance claims  1,115   2,072   1,359   1,827   (218)  6,155   2,014   1,422   2,021   275   5,732 
Total underlying income, net of insurance claims  7,779   4,648   3,313   1,664   233   17,637   10,821   4,340   2,133   815   18,109 
Operating lease depreciation2     (30)  (720)     (14)  (764)
Operating lease depreciation1  (946)  (21)        (967)
Net income  7,779   4,618   2,593   1,664   219   16,873   9,875   4,319   2,133   815   17,142 
Operating costs  (4,339)  (2,162)  (977)  (702)  (131)  (8,311)  (4,760)  (2,081)  (982)  (52)  (7,875)
Impairment  (349)  22   (235)     (6)  (568)
TSB              118   118 
Remediation  (238)  (155)  (50)  (2)  (445)
Total costs  (4,998)  (2,236)  (1,032)  (54)  (8,320)
Impairment (charge) credit  (1,038)  (306)     53   (1,291)
Underlying profit  3,091   2,478   1,381   962   200   8,112   3,839   1,777   1,101   814   7,531 
External income  8,545   3,636   3,772   2,065   (381)  17,637   13,109   3,394   1,740   (134)  18,109 
Inter-segment income  (766)  1,012   (459)  (401)  614    
Inter-segment income (expense)  (2,288)  946   393   949    
Segment underlying income, net of insurance claims  7,779   4,648   3,313   1,664   233   17,637   10,821   4,340   2,133   815   18,109 
Segment external assets  307,887   178,838   36,501   143,217   140,245   806,688   350,585   145,060   175,869   162,379   833,893 
Segment customer deposits  273,719   131,998   11,082      1,527   418,326   252,056   145,122   13,677   10,465   421,320 
Segment external liabilities  278,933   226,106   15,462   137,233   101,974   759,708   259,964   183,390   182,333   160,400   786,087 
Other segment items reflected in income statement above:                        
Analysis of segment underlying other income, net of insurance claims:                    
Current accounts  518   136   5      659 
Credit and debit card fees  652   330         982 
Commercial banking and treasury fees     248         248 
Unit trust and insurance broking  9      197      206 
Private banking and asset management     4   65      69 
Factoring     103         103 
Other fees and commissions  54   249   156   30   489 
Fees and commissions receivable  1,233   1,070   423   30   2,756 
Fees and commissions payable  (571)  (321)  (405)  (53)  (1,350)
Net fee and commission income  662   749   18   (23)  1,406 
Operating lease rental income  1,225   25         1,250 
Rental income from investment properties        191      191 
Gains less losses on disposal of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income     (5)     201   196 
Lease termination income     12         12 
Trading income  47   812      278   1,137 
Insurance and other, net of insurance claims  206   72   2,216   (954)  1,540 
Other external income, net of insurance claims  1,478   916   2,407   (475)  4,326 
Inter-segment other income  (126)  (243)  (404)  773    
Segment other income, net of insurance claims  2,014   1,422   2,021   275   5,732 
Other segment items reflected in                    
income statement above:                    
Depreciation and amortisation  408   204   839   124   537   2,112   1,712   315   181   452   2,660 
Decrease in value of in-force business           (162)     (162)
Increase in value of in-force business        825      825 
Defined benefit scheme charges  123   30   9   11   142   315   108   43   19   75   245 
Other segment items:                                            
Additions to fixed assets  383   153   1,752   343   786   3,417   2,208   260   174   1,007   3,649 
Investments in joint ventures and associates at end of year  1      4      42   47   4         300   304 

1Net of profits on disposal of operating lease assets of £41 million.
F-26

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 4: SEGMENTAL ANALYSIS continued

  Retail
£m
  Commercial
Banking
£m
  Insurance
and Wealth
£m
  Other
£m
  Underlying
basis total
£m
 
Year ended 31 December 20181                    
Net interest income  9,060   3,013   123   518   12,714 
Other income, net of insurance claims  2,097   1,670   1,865   378   6,010 
Total underlying income, net of insurance claims  11,157   4,683   1,988   896   18,724 
Operating lease depreciation2  (921)  (35)        (956)
Net income  10,236   4,648   1,988   896   17,768 
Operating costs  (4,897)  (2,191)  (1,021)  (56)  (8,165)
Remediation  (267)  (203)  (39)  (91)  (600)
Total costs  (5,164)  (2,394)  (1,060)  (147)  (8,765)
Impairment (charge) credit  (861)  (71)  (1)  (4)  (937)
Underlying profit  4,211   2,183   927   745   8,066 
External income  13,022   4,889   1,895   (1,082)  18,724 
Inter-segment income (expense)  (1,865)  (206)  93   1,978    
Segment underlying income, net of insurance claims  11,157   4,683   1,988   896   18,724 
Segment external assets  349,412   165,030   140,487   142,669   797,598 
Segment customer deposits  252,808   148,635   14,063   2,560   418,066 
Segment external liabilities  259,778   191,687   147,673   148,261   747,399 
Analysis of segment underlying other income, net of insurance claims                    
Current accounts  503   142   5      650 
Credit and debit card fees  660   332   1      993 
Commercial banking and treasury fees     305         305 
Unit trust and insurance broking  13      208      221 
Private banking and asset management     5   92      97 
Factoring     83         83 
Other fees and commissions  52   253   163   31   499 
Fees and commissions receivable  1,228   1,120   469   31   2,848 
Fees and commissions payable  (601)  (311)  (418)  (56)  (1,386)
Net fee and commission income  627   809   51   (25)  1,462 
Operating lease rental income  1,305   38         1,343 
Rental income from investment properties        197      197 
Gains less losses on disposal of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income           275   275 
Lease termination income     7         7 
Net trading income, excluding insurance  71   711      282   1,064 
Insurance and other, net of insurance claims  247   356   2,146   (1,087)  1,662 
Other external income, net of insurance claims  1,623   1,112   2,343   (530)  4,548 
Inter-segment other income  (153)  (251)  (529)  933    
Segment other income, net of insurance claims  2,097   1,670   1,865   378   6,010 
Other segment items reflected in income statement above:                    
Depreciation and amortisation  1,573   278   154   400   2,405 
Decrease in value of in-force business        (55)     (55)
Defined benefit scheme charges  121   49   20   215   405 
Other segment items:                    
Additions to fixed assets  2,092   208   223   991   3,514 
Investments in joint ventures and associates at end of year  4         87   91 

 

1Restated, see page F-19.F-25.
  
2Net of profits on disposal of operating lease assets of £66£60 million.
F-27

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

     Commercial  Consumer        Underlying 
  Retail1  Banking1  Finance1  Insurance  Other  basis total 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Year ended 31 December 2014                        
Net interest income  6,270   2,542   2,037   (131)  257   10,975 
Other income, net of insurance claims  1,202   1,962   1,368   1,725   210   6,467 
Total underlying income, net of insurance claims  7,472   4,504   3,405   1,594   467   17,442 
Operating lease depreciation2     (24)  (667)     (29)  (720)
Net income  7,472   4,480   2,738   1,594   438   16,722 
Operating costs  (4,239)  (2,139)  (971)  (672)  (301)  (8,322)
Impairment  (494)  (85)  (318)     (205)  (1,102)
TSB              458   458 
Underlying profit  2,739   2,256   1,449   922   390   7,756 
External income  8,083   3,810   3,744   1,206   599   17,442 
Inter-segment income  (611)  694   (339)  388   (132)   
Segment underlying income, net of insurance claims  7,472   4,504   3,405   1,594   467   17,442 
Segment external assets  308,414   242,452   33,781   150,615   119,634   854,896 
Segment customer deposits  279,148   126,273   14,955      26,691   447,067 
Segment external liabilities  289,442   237,764   18,629   144,921   114,237   804,993 
Other segment items reflected in income statement above:                        
Depreciation and amortisation  335   158   778   130   194   1,595 
Decrease in value of in-force business           (428)     (428)
Defined benefit scheme charges  121   37   9   9   168   344 
Other segment items:                        
Additions to fixed assets  368   245   1,642   449   738   3,442 
Investments in joint ventures and associates at end of year  1      9      64   74 

NOTE 4: SEGMENTAL ANALYSIS continued

  Retail
£m
  Commercial
Banking
£m
  Insurance
and Wealth
£m
  Other
£m
  Underlying basis
total
£m
 
Year ended 31 December 20171                    
Net interest income  8,695   3,040   133   452   12,320 
Other income, net of insurance claims  2,150   1,803   1,846   406   6,205 
Total underlying income, net of insurance claims  10,845   4,843   1,979   858   18,525 
Operating lease depreciation2  (947)  (105)     (1)  (1,053)
Net income  9,898   4,738   1,979   857   17,472 
Operating costs  (4,847)  (2,249)  (1,040)  (48)  (8,184)
Remediation  (633)  (173)  (40)  (19)  (865)
Total costs  (5,480)  (2,422)  (1,080)  (67)  (9,049)
Impairment (charge) credit  (710)  (95)     10   (795)
Underlying profit  3,708   2,221   899   800   7,628 
External income  12,606   3,181   1,883   855   18,525 
Inter-segment income (expense)  (1,761)  1,662   96   3    
Segment underlying income, net of insurance claims  10,845   4,843   1,979   858   18,525 
Segment external assets  350,051   177,763   151,986   132,309   812,109 
Segment customer deposits  253,127   148,313   13,770   2,914   418,124 
Segment external liabilities  258,246   224,918   157,824   121,978   762,966 
Analysis of segment underlying other income, net of insurance claims:                    
Current accounts  572   135   5      712 
Credit and debit card fees  640   312   1      953 
Commercial banking and treasury fees     321         321 
Unit trust and insurance broking  10      214      224 
Private banking and asset management     5   93      98 
Factoring     91         91 
Other fees and commissions  95   273   184   14   566 
Fees and commissions receivable  1,317   1,137   497   14   2,965 
Fees and commissions payable  (636)  (287)  (380)  (79)  (1,382)
Net fee and commission income  681   850   117   (65)  1,583 
Operating lease rental income  1,281   63         1,344 
Rental income from investment properties     1   212      213 
Gains less losses on disposal of available-for-sale financial assets     5   (3)  444   446 
Lease termination income     74         74 
Trading income  26   481      (89)  418 
Insurance and other, net of insurance claims  6   (6)  2,223   (96)  2,127 
Other external income, net of insurance claims  1,313   618   2,432   259   4,622 
Inter-segment other income  156   335   (703)  212    
Segment other income, net of insurance claims  2,150   1,803   1,846   406   6,205 
Other segment items reflected in income statement above:                    
Depreciation and amortisation  1,547   322   197   304   2,370 
Increase in value of in-force business        (165)     (165)
Defined benefit scheme charges  149   53   25   132   359 
Other segment items:                    
Additions to fixed assets  2,431   130   274   820   3,655 
Investments in joint ventures and associates at end of year  12         53   65 

 

1Restated see page F-19.F-25.
  
2Net of profits on disposal of operating lease assets of £67£32 million.
F-21F-28

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 4: SEGMENTAL ANALYSIS continued

 

Reconciliation of underlying basis to statutory results

 

The underlying basis is the basis on which financial information is presented to the chief operating decision maker which excludes certain items included in the statutory results. The table below reconciles the statutory results to the underlying basis.

 

     Removal of:       Removal of:    
    Lloyds             Lloyds
Banking
Group
statutory
£m
 Volatility
and other
items1
£m
 Insurance
gross up2
£m
 PPI
£m
 Underlying
basis
£m
 
    Banking Volatility       Other    
    Group and other Insurance     conduct Underlying 
    statutory items1 gross up2 PPI provisions basis 
    £m £m £m £m £m £m 
Year ended 31 December 2016                            
Year ended 31 December 2019                    
Net interest income      9,274   263   1,898         11,435   10,180   379   1,818      12,377 
Other income, net of insurance claims      7,993   121   (2,110)     61   6,065   8,179   (426)  (2,021)     5,732 
Total income, net of insurance claims      17,267   384   (212)     61   17,500   18,359   (47)  (203)     18,109 
Operating lease depreciation3          (895)           (895)      (967)        (967)
Net income      17,267   (511)  (212)     61   16,605   18,359   (1,014)  (203)     17,142 
Operating expenses      (12,627)  1,948   212   1,350   1,024   (8,093)  (12,670)  1,697   203   2,450   (8,320)
Impairment      (752)  107            (645)  (1,296)  5         (1,291)
Profit before tax      3,888   1,544      1,350   1,085   7,867   4,393   688      2,450   7,531 
                                                
  Lloyds   Removal of:         Removal of:    
  Banking   Volatility               Other      Lloyds
Banking
Group
statutory
£m
 Volatility
and other
items4
£m
 Insurance
gross up2
£m
 PPI
£m
 Underlying
basis
£m
 
  Group   and other       Insurance       conduct   Underlying 
  statutory   items4   TSB5   gross up2   PPI   provisions   basis 
  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 
Year ended 31 December 2015                            
Year ended 31 December 2018                    
Net interest income  11,318   318   (192)  38         11,482   13,396   152   (834)     12,714 
Other income, net of insurance claims  6,103   209   (31)  (126)        6,155   5,230   107   673      6,010 
Total income, net of insurance claims  17,421   527   (223)  (88)        17,637   18,626   259   (161)     18,724 
Operating lease depreciation3      (764)              (764)      (956)        (956)
Net income  17,421   (237)  (223)  (88)        16,873   18,626   (697)  (161)     17,768 
Operating expenses  (15,387)  2,065   86   88   4,000   837   (8,311)  (11,729)  2,053   161   750   (8,765)
Impairment  (390)  (197)  19            (568)  (937)           (937)
TSB        118            118 
Profit  1,644   1,631         4,000   837   8,112 
Profit before tax  5,960   1,356      750   8,066 
                                                
  Lloyds   Removal of:         Removal of:    
  Banking   Volatility               Other      Lloyds
Banking
Group
statutory
£m
 Volatility
and other
items5
£m
 Insurance
gross up2
£m
 PPI
£m
 Underlying
basis
£m
 
  Group   and other       Insurance       conduct   Underlying 
  statutory   items6   TSB4   gross up2   PPI   provisions   basis 
  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 
Year ended 31 December 2014                            
Year ended 31 December 2017                    
Net interest income  10,660   619   (786)  482         10,975   10,912   228   1,180      12,320 
Other income, net of insurance claims  5,739   1,482   (140)  (614)        6,467   7,747   (186)  (1,356)     6,205 
Total income, net of insurance claims  16,399   2,101   (926)  (132)        17,442   18,659   42   (176)     18,525 
Operating lease depreciation3      (720)              (720)      (1,053)        (1,053)
Net income  16,399   1,381   (926)  (132)        16,722   18,659   (1,011)  (176)     17,472 
Operating expenses  (13,885)  1,936   370   132   2,200   925   (8,322)  (12,346)  1,821   176   1,300   (9,049)
Impairment  (752)  (448)  98            (1,102)  (688)  (107)        (795)
TSB        458            458 
Profit  1,762   2,869         2,200   925   7,756 
Profit before tax  5,625   703      1,300   7,628 

 

1ComprisesIn the write-off of the ECN embedded derivative and premium paid on redemption of the remaining notes in the first quarter (loss of £790 million);year ended 31 December 2019 this comprises the effects of asset sales (gain(gains of £217£214 million); volatilevolatility and other items (gain(losses of £99 million); liability management (gain of £123£88 million); the amortisation of purchased intangibles (£34068 million); restructuring costs 622471 million, principally comprising the severance related costs, related to phase IIthe integration of Zurich’s UK workplace pensions and savings business and costs associated with establishing the Simplification programme)Schroders Personal Wealth joint venture); and the fair value unwind and other items (loss(losses of £231£275 million).
  
2The Group’s insurance businesses’ income statements include income and expenditure which are attributable to the policyholders of the Group’s long-term assurance funds. These items have no impact in total upon the profit attributable to equity shareholders and, in order to provide a clearer representation of the underlying trends within the business, these items are shown net within the underlying results.
  
3Net of profits on disposal of operating lease assets of £58£41 million (2015: £66(2018: £60 million; 2014: £672017: £32 million).
  
4Comprises market movements on the ECN embedded derivativeeffects of asset sales (loss of £101£145 million); volatility and other items (gains of £95 million); the amortisation of purchased intangibles (£108 million); restructuring (£879 million, comprising severance related costs, the rationalisation of the non-branch property portfolio, the work on implementing the ring-fencing requirements and the integration of MBNA and Zurich’s UK workplace pensions and savings business); and the fair value unwind and other items (losses of £319 million).
5Comprises the effects of asset sales (gain of £54£30 million); volatile items (loss(gain of £107£263 million); liability management (loss of £28£14 million); the amortisation of purchased intangibles (£34291 million); restructuring costs (£170 million); TSB621 million, principally comprising costs (£745 million)relating to the Simplification programme; the rationalisation of the non-branch property portfolio, the work on implementing the ring-fencing requirements and the integration of MBNA); and the fair value unwind and other items (loss of £192£270 million).
5Comprises the underlying results of TSB.
6Comprises the loss arising on the Group’s exchange and tender offers in respect of its ECNs in April 2014 (£1,362 million); market movements on the ECN embedded derivative (gain of £401 million); the effects of asset sales (gain of £138 million); volatile items (loss of £343 million); liability management (loss of £24 million); the past service pension credit of £710 million (which represented the curtailment credit of £843 million following the group’s decision to reduce the cap on pensionable pay partly offset by the cost of other changes to the pay, benefits and reward offered to employees); the amortisation of purchased intangibles (£336 million); restructuring costs (£966 million); and TSB costs (£558 million); and the fair value unwind and other items (loss of £529 million).
F-22

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Geographical areas

 

Following the reduction in the Group’s non-UK activities, an analysis between UK and non-UK activities is no longer provided.

F-29

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 5: NET INTEREST INCOME

 

 Weighted average
effective interest rate
        Weighted average
effective interest rate
       
 2016  2015 2014  2016  2015 2014  2019  2018 2017  2019  2018 2017 
 %  % %  £m  £m £m  %  %  %  £m  £m  £m 
Interest and similar income:                                                
Loans and advances to customers  3.32   3.50   3.53   15,190   16,256   17,806   3.17   3.17   3.16   15,790   15,078   14,712 
Loans and advances to banks  0.46   0.42   0.52   381   397   406   0.78   0.84   0.40   514   565   271 
Debt securities held as loans and receivables  1.47   1.87   2.57   56   40   42 
Interest receivable on loans and receivables  2.87   2.98   3.12   15,627   16,693   18,254 
Debt securities held at amortised cost  2.23   1.60   1.29   122   66   43 
Interest receivable on financial assets held at amortised cost  2.89   2.87   2.81   16,426   15,709   15,026 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  1.64   1.98       435   640     
Available-for-sale financial assets  1.88   1.77   1.90   762   725   957           1.96           980 
Held-to-maturity investments  1.44   1.49      231   197    
Total interest and similar income  2.77   2.86   3.03   16,620   17,615   19,211 
Total interest and similar income1  2.83   2.82   2.73   16,861   16,349   16,006 
Interest and similar expense:                                                
Deposits from banks, excluding liabilities under sale and repurchase transactions1  0.65   0.41   0.74   (68)  (43)  (86)
Deposits from banks, excluding liabilities under sale and repurchase transactions  0.86   1.39   1.18   (96)  (117)  (80)
Customer deposits, excluding liabilities under sale and repurchase transactions  0.69   0.87   1.15   (2,520)  (3,299)  (4,781)  0.59   0.53   0.49   (2,015)  (1,812)  (1,721)
Debt securities in issue2  0.94   0.69   0.63   (799)  (586)  (552)  1.24   0.27   0.37   (1,204)  (234)  (266)
Subordinated liabilities  8.35   8.37   8.44   (1,864)  (2,091)  (2,475)  6.79   7.63   7.93   (1,201)  (1,388)  (1,481)
Lease liabilities  2.49   2.46   2.38   (42)  (1)  (1)
Liabilities under sale and repurchase agreements  0.46   0.57   2.61   (38)  (34)  (55)  1.12   0.96   0.58   (301)  (245)  (110)
Interest payable on liabilities held at amortised cost  1.07   1.19   1.45   (5,289)  (6,053)  (7,949)  0.98   0.79   0.79   (4,859)  (3,797)  (3,659)
Amounts payable to unitholders in consolidated open-ended investment vehicles  10.85   1.16   3.23   (2,057)  (244)  (602)
Total interest and similar expense  1.44   1.19   1.51   (7,346)  (6,297)  (8,551)
Amounts payable to unitholders in consolidated open-ended investment vehicles4  13.64   (6.07)  9.15   (1,822)  844   (1,435)
Total interest and similar expense3  1.31   0.60   1.06   (6,681)  (2,953)  (5,094)
Net interest income              9,274   11,318   10,660               10,180   13,396   10,912 

 

1Includes £51£26 million (2015: £nil; 2014: £nil)(2018: £31 million; 2017: £12 million) of interest expenseincome on assetsliabilities with negative interest rates.rates and £45 million (2018: £46 million; 2017: £49 million) in respect of interest income on finance leases.
  
2The impact of the Group’s hedging arrangements is included on this line; excluding this impact the weighted average effective interest rate in respect of debt securities in issue would be 2.702.57 per cent (2015: 2.76(2018: 2.68 per cent; 2014: 3.062017: 2.43 per cent).
3Includes £119 million (2018: £10 million; 2017: £50 million) of interest expense on assets with negative interest rates.
4Where a collective investment vehicle is consolidated the interests of parties other than the Group are reported in other liabilities and the movement in these interests in interest expense.

 

Included within interest and similar income is £205£198 million (2015: £248(2018: £227 million; 2014: £4072017: £179 million) in respect of impairedcredit-impaired financial assets. Net interest income also includes a credit of £557£608 million (2015:(2018: credit of £956£701 million; 2014:2017: credit of £1,153£651 million) transferred from the cash flow hedging reserve (see note 42).

 

NOTE 6: NET FEE AND COMMISSION INCOME

 

  2016  2015 2014  2019  2018 2017 
  £m  £m £m  £m  £m  £m 
Fee and commission income:                        
Current accounts              752   804   918   659   650   712 
Credit and debit card fees   875   918   1,050   982   993   953 
Other   1,418   1,530   1,691 
Commercial banking and treasury fees  248   305   321 
Unit trust and insurance broking  206   221   224 
Private banking and asset management  69   97   98 
Factoring  103   83   91 
Other fees and commissions  489   499   566 
Total fee and commission income   3,045   3,252   3,659   2,756   2,848   2,965 
Fee and commission expense   (1,356)  (1,442)  (1,402)  (1,350)  (1,386)  (1,382)
Net fee and commission income   1,689   1,810   2,257   1,406   1,462   1,583 

 

Fees and commissions which are an integral part of the effective interest rate form part of net interest income shown in note 5. Fees and commissions relating to instruments that are held at fair value through profit or loss are included within net trading income shown in note 7.

At 31 December 2019, the Group held on its balance sheet £293 million (31 December 2018: £282 million) in respect of services provided to customers and £140 million (31 December 2018: £168 million) in respect of amounts received from customers for services to be provided after the balance sheet date. Current unsatisfied performance obligations amount to £270 million (31 December 2018: £314 million); the Group expects to receive substantially all of this revenue by 2022.

Income recognised during the year ended 31 December 2019 included £54 million in respect of amounts included in the contract liability balance at 31 December 2018 and £9 million in respect of amounts from performance obligations satisfied in previous years.

The most significant performance obligations undertaken by the Group are in respect of current accounts, the provision of other banking services for commercial customers, credit and debit card services and investment management services.

F-23F-30

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 6: NET FEE AND COMMISSION INCOME continued

In respect of current accounts, the Group receives fees for the provision of bank account and transaction services such as ATM services, fund transfers, overdraft facilities and other value-added offerings.

For commercial customers, alongside its provision of current accounts, the Group provides other corporate banking services including factoring and commitments to provide loan financing. Loan commitment fees are included in fees and commissions where the loan is not expected to be drawn down by the customer.

The Group receives interchange and merchant fees, together with fees for overseas use and cash advances, for provision of card services to cardholders and merchants.

Investment management services principally comprise the management and administration of policyholders’ funds in accordance with investment mandates. Fees are generally based on the value of the assets under management.

NOTE 7: NET TRADING INCOME

 

 2016  2015 2014  2019  2018 2017 
 £m  £m £m  £m  £m  £m 
Foreign exchange translation (losses) gains  1,363   (80)  (95)  (255)  342   (174)
Gains on foreign exchange trading transactions  542   335   344   677   580   517 
Total foreign exchange  1,905   255   249   422   922   343 
Investment property (losses) gains (note 26)  (83)  416   513 
Securities and other gains (see below)  16,723   3,043   9,397 
Investment property (losses) gains (note 27)  (108)  139   230 
Securities and other gains (losses) (see below)  17,974   (4,937)  11,244 
Net trading income  18,545   3,714   10,159   18,288   (3,876)  11,817 

 

Securities and other gains comprise net gains (losses) arising on assets and liabilities held at fair value through profit or loss and for trading as follows:

 

  2016  2015  2014 
  £m  £m  £m 
Net income arising on assets held at fair value through profit or loss:            
Debt securities, loans and advances  4,771   451   4,805 
Equity shares  12,534   2,384   3,816 
Total net income arising on assets held at fair value through profit or loss  17,305   2,835   8,621 
Net income (expense) arising on liabilities held at fair value through profit or loss – debt securities in issue  (154)  14   (75)
Total net gains arising on assets and liabilities held at fair value through profit or loss  17,151   2,849   8,546 
Net (losses) gains on financial instruments held for trading  (428)  194   851 
Securities and other gains  16,723   3,043   9,397 

NOTE 8: INSURANCE PREMIUM INCOME

  2016  2015  2014 
  £m  £m  £m 
Life insurance            
Gross premiums:            
Life and pensions  5,613   3,613   6,070 
Annuities  1,685   430   327 
   7,298   4,043   6,397 
Ceded reinsurance premiums  (88)  (122)  (142)
Net earned premiums  7,210   3,921   6,255 
Non-life insurance            
Net earned premiums  858   871   870 
Total net earned premiums  8,068   4,792   7,125 

Premium income in 2015 was reduced by a charge of £1,959 million relating to the recapture by a third party insurer of a portfolio of policies previously reassured with the Group.

  2019  2018  2017 
  £m  £m  £m 
Net income arising on assets and liabilities mandatorily held at fair value through profit or loss:            
Financial instruments held for trading  120   (8)  404 
Other financial instruments mandatorily held at fair value through profit or loss:            
Debt securities, loans and advances  3,509   (26)  1,122 
Equity shares  14,559   (4,747)  9,862 
   18,188   (4,781)  11,388 
Net (expense) income arising on assets and liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss  (214)  (156)  (144)
Securities and other gains  17,974   (4,937)  11,244 
 
NOTE 8: INSURANCE PREMIUM INCOME            
             
  2019  2018  2017 
  £m  £m  £m 
Life insurance            
Gross premiums:            
Life and pensions  6,827   6,612   6,273 
Annuities  2,483   2,178   1,082 
   9,310   8,790   7,355 
Ceded reinsurance premiums  (378)  (271)  (168)
Net earned premiums  8,932   8,519   7,187 
Non-life insurance            
Net earned premiums  642   670   743 
Total net earned premiums  9,574   9,189   7,930 
 
NOTE 9: OTHER OPERATING INCOME            
             
   2019   2018   2017 
   £m   £m   £m 
Operating lease rental income  1,250   1,343   1,344 
Rental income from investment properties (note 27)  191   197   213 
Gains less losses on disposal of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (2017: available-for-sale financial assets) (note 42)  196   275   446 
Movement in value of in-force business (note 25)  825   (55)  (165)
Gain related to establishment of joint venture (note 23)  244       
Share of results of joint ventures and associates (note 22)  6   9   6 
Other  196   151   151 
Total other operating income  2,908   1,920   1,995 
F-24F-31

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 9: OTHER OPERATING INCOME

  2016  2015  2014 
  £m  £m  £m 
Operating lease rental income  1,225   1,165   1,126 
Rental income from investment properties (note 26)  229   268   269 
Gains less losses on disposal of available-for-sale financial assets (note 42)  575   51   131 
Movement in value of in-force business (note 24)  472   (162)  (428)
Liability management  (598)  (28)  (1,386)
Share of results of joint ventures and associates  (1)  (3)  32 
Other  133   225   (53)
Total other operating income  2,035   1,516   (309)

Liability management

In April 2014, the Group completed exchange offers with holders of certain series of its Enhanced Capital Notes (ECNs) and a tender offer to eligible retail holders outside the United States. A loss of £1,362 million was recognised in relation to these exchange and tender transactions in the year ended 31 December 2014. The Group completed tender offers and redemptions in respect of the remaining ECNs in March 2016, resulting in a net loss to the Group of £721 million, principally comprising the write-off of the embedded equity conversion feature and premiums paid under the terms of the transaction.

Profits of £123 million arose in the year ended 31 December 2016 (2015: losses of £28 million; 2014: losses of £24 million) on other transactions undertaken as part of the Group’s management of its wholesale funding and subordinated debt.

NOTE 10: INSURANCE CLAIMS

 

 2016  2015 2014  2019  2018 2017 
Insurance claims comprise: £m  £m £m  £m  £m  £m 
Life insurance and participating investment contracts                    
Claims and surrenders  (8,617)  (7,983)  (7,506)  (8,684)  (8,735)  (8,898)
Change in insurance and participating investment contracts (note 32)  (14,160)  2,898   (4,392)  (12,633)  4,565   (9,067)
Change in non-participating investment contracts  679   (438)  (1,448)  (2,664)  628   2,836 
  (22,098)  (5,523)  (13,346)  (23,981)  (3,542)  (15,129)
Reinsurers’ share  106   101   109   290   404   35 
  (21,992)  (5,422)  (13,237)  (23,691)  (3,138)  (15,094)
Change in unallocated surplus  14   63   74   (19)  8   (147)
Total life insurance and participating investment contracts  (21,978)  (5,359)  (13,163)  (23,710)  (3,130)  (15,241)
Non-life insurance                        
Total non-life insurance claims, net of reinsurance  (366)  (370)  (330)  (287)  (335)  (337)
Total insurance claims  (22,344)  (5,729)  (13,493)  (23,997)  (3,465)  (15,578)
Life insurance and participating investment contracts gross claims and surrenders can also be analysed as follows:            Life insurance and participating investment contracts gross claims and surrenders can also be analysed as follows:     
Deaths  (635)  (631)  (549)  (674)  (721)  (675)
Maturities  (1,347)  (1,348)  (1,656)  (1,122)  (1,198)  (1,280)
Surrenders  (5,444)  (4,811)  (4,102)  (5,523)  (5,548)  (5,674)
Annuities  (949)  (902)  (884)  (1,104)  (1,032)  (985)
Other  (242)  (291)  (315)  (261)  (236)  (284)
Total life insurance gross claims and surrenders  (8,617)  (7,983)  (7,506)  (8,684)  (8,735)  (8,898)
            
NOTE 11: OPERATING EXPENSES            
            
  2019   2018   2017 
  £m   £m   £m 
Staff costs:            
Salaries  2,539   2,482   2,679 
Performance-based compensation  380   509   473 
Social security costs  325   343   361 
Pensions and other post-retirement benefit schemes (note 36)  532   705   625 
Restructuring costs  92   249   24 
Other staff costs  383   474   448 
  4,251   4,762   4,610 
Premises and equipment:            
Rent and rates  93   370   365 
Repairs and maintenance  187   190   231 
Other  211   169   134 
  491   729   730 
Other expenses:            
Communications and data processing  1,038   1,121   882 
Advertising and promotion  170   197   208 
Professional fees  226   287   328 
UK bank levy  224   225   231 
Other  715   653   814 
  2,373   2,483   2,463 
Depreciation and amortisation:            
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment (note 27)  2,064   1,852   1,944 
Amortisation of acquired value of in-force non-participating investment contracts (note 25)  30   40   34 
Amortisation of other intangible assets (note 26)  566   513   392 
  2,660   2,405   2,370 
Goodwill impairment        8 
Total operating expenses, excluding regulatory provisions  9,775   10,379   10,181 
Regulatory provisions:            
Payment protection insurance provision (note 38)  2,450   750   1,300 
Other regulatory provisions (note 38)  445   600   865 
  2,895   1,350   2,165 
Total operating expenses  12,670   11,729   12,346 
F-25

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 11: OPERATING EXPENSES

  2016  2015  2014 
  £m  £m  £m 
Staff costs:         
Salaries  2,750   2,808   3,178 
Performance-based compensation  475   409   390 
Social security costs  363   349   398 
Pensions and other post-retirement benefit schemes (note 36):            
Past service (credits) charges1        (822)
Other  555   548   596 
   555   548   (226)
Restructuring costs  241   104   264 
Other staff costs  433   459   741 
   4,817   4,677   4,745 
Premises and equipment:            
Rent and rates  365   368   424 
Repairs and maintenance  187   173   221 
Other  120   174   246 
   672   715   891 
Other expenses:            
Communications and data processing  848   893   1,118 
Advertising and promotion  198   253   336 
Professional fees  265   262   481 
UK bank levy  200   270   237 
TSB disposal     665    
Other  873   703   1,017 
   2,384   3,046   3,189 
Depreciation and amortisation:            
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment (note 26)  1,761   1,534   1,391 
Amortisation of acquired value of in-force non-participating investment contracts (note 24)  37   41   43 
Amortisation of other intangible assets (note 25)  582   537   501 
   2,380   2,112   1,935 
Total operating expenses, excluding regulatory provisions  10,253   10,550   10,760 
Regulatory provisions:            
Payment protection insurance provision (note 38)  1,350   4,000   2,200 
Other regulatory provisions2 (note 38)  1,024   837   925 
   2,374   4,837   3,125 
Total operating expenses  12,627   15,387   13,885 
1On 11 March 2014 the Group announced a change to its defined benefit pension schemes, revising the existing cap on the increases in pensionable pay used in calculating the pension benefit, from 2 per cent to nil with effect from 2 April 2014. The effect of this change was to reduce the Group’s retirement benefit obligations recognised on the balance sheet by £843 million with a corresponding curtailment gain recognised in the income statement. This has been partly offset by a charge of £21 million following changes to pension arrangements for staff within the TSB business.
2In addition, regulatory provisions of £61 million (2015: £nil; 2014: £nil) have been charged against income.
F-26F-32

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 11: OPERATING EXPENSES continued

 

Performance-based compensation

The table below analyses the Group’s performance-based compensation costs between those relating to the current performance year and those relating to earlier years.

 

 2016  2015 2014  2019  2018 2017 
 £m  £m £m  £m  £m  £m 
Performance-based compensation expense comprises:                   
Awards made in respect of the year ended 31 December  312   280   324   244   362   334 
Awards made in respect of earlier years  163   129   66   136   147   139 
  475   409   390   380   509   473 
Performance-based compensation expense deferred until later years comprises:                        
Awards made in respect of the year ended 31 December  123   114   152   113   152   127 
Awards made in respect of earlier years  41   56   32   36   37   35 
  164   170   184   149   189   162 

 

Performance-based awards expensed in 20162019 include cash awards amounting to £116£89 million (2015: £96(2018: £137 million; 2014: £1042017: £102 million).

 

Average headcount

The average number of persons on a headcount basis employed by the Group during the year was as follows:

 

 2016  2015 2014  2019  2018  2017 
UK  79,606   84,922   94,241   69,321   71,857   75,150 
Overseas  812   781   847   762   769   794 
Total  80,418   85,703   95,088   70,083   72,626   75,944 

 

Fees payable to the auditorsNOTE 12: AUDITORS’ REMUNERATION

 

Fees payable to the Company’s auditors by the Group are as follows:

 

  2016  2015  2014 
  £m  £m  £m 
          
Fees payable for the audit of the Company’s current year annual report  1.5   1.2   1.4 
Fees payable for other services:            
Audit of the Company’s subsidiaries pursuant to legislation  14.7   14.9   15.5 
Other services supplied pursuant to legislation  3.1   2.2   2.1 
Total audit fees  19.3   18.3   19.0 
Other services – audit related fees  3.1   3.2   9.1 
Total audit and audit related fees  22.4   21.5   28.1 
Services relating to taxation:            
Taxation compliance services  0.2   0.2   0.2 
All other taxation advisory services  0.1   0.1   0.3 
   0.3   0.3   0.5 
Other non-audit fees:            
Services relating to corporate finance transactions  0.1   0.2   0.3 
Other services  1.5   2.3   3.2 
Total other non-audit fees  1.6   2.5   3.5 
Total fees payable to the Company’s auditors by the Group  24.3   24.3   32.1 
F-27

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 11: OPERATING EXPENSES continued

  2019  2018  2017 
  £m  £m  £m 
          
Fees payable for the audit of the Company’s current year annual report  1.5   1.5   1.5 
Fees payable for other services:            
Audit of the Company’s subsidiaries pursuant to legislation  20.2   19.1   18.6 
Other services supplied pursuant to legislation  3.5   2.9   3.0 
Total audit fees  25.2   23.5   23.1 
Other services – audit related fees  1.0   1.2   1.2 
Total audit and audit related fees  26.2   24.7   24.3 
Other non-audit fees:            
Services relating to corporate finance transactions        1.2 
Other services  0.7   2.0   2.4 
Total other non-audit fees  0.7   2.0   3.6 
Total fees payable to the Company’s auditors by the Group  26.9   26.7   27.9 

 

The following types of services are included in the categories listed above:

 

Audit fees: This category includes fees in respect of the audit of the Group’s annual financial statements and other services in connection with regulatory filings. Other services supplied pursuant to legislation relate primarily to the costs associatedincurred in connection with client asset assurance and with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act audit requirements togetherassociated with the cost of the audit of the Group’s financial statements filed on its Form 20-F filing.20-F.

 

Audit related fees: This category includes fees in respect of services for assurance and related services that are reasonably related to the performance of the audit or review of the financial statements, for example acting as reporting accountants in respect of debt prospectuses and circulars required by the UKLA listing rules.

Services relating to taxation: This category includes tax compliance and tax advisory services.

 

Other non-audit fees: This category includes due diligence relating to corporate finance, including venture capital transactions and other assurance and advisoryservices. The auditors are not engaged to provide tax services.

 

It is the Group’s policy to use the auditors on assignments in cases where their knowledge of the Group means that it is neither efficient nor cost effective to employ another firm of accountants. Such assignments typically relate to the provision of advice on tax issues, assistance in transactions involving the acquisition and disposal of businesses and accounting advice.

F-33

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 12: AUDITORS’ REMUNERATIONcontinued

 

The Group has procedures that are designed to ensure auditor independence, including that fees forprohibiting certain non-audit services. All audit and non-audit services are approved in advance. This approval canassignments must be obtained eitherpre-approved by the audit committee on an individual engagement basis or,basis; for certain types of non-audit services, particularly those of a recurring nature, through the approval of a fee cap covering all engagements of that type provided the fee is below that cap.

All statutory audit work as well as non-audit assignments where the fee is expected‘de minimis’ the audit committee has pre-approved all assignments subject to exceed the relevant fee cap must be pre-approvedconfirmation by the Audit Committee on an individual engagement basis.management. On a quarterly basis, the Audit Committeeaudit committee receives and reviews a report detailing all pre-approved services and amounts paid to the auditors for such pre-approved services.

 

During the year, the auditors also earned fees payable by entities outside the consolidated Lloyds Banking Group in respect of the following:

 

 2016  2015 2014  2019  2018 2017 
 £m  £m £m  £m  £m £m 
Audits of Group pension schemes  0.3   0.3   0.3   0.1   0.1   0.1 
Audits of the unconsolidated Open Ended Investment Companies managed by the Group  0.4   0.4   0.4   0.4   0.3   0.3 
Reviews of the financial position of corporate and other borrowers  1.2   3.1   5.0   0.2   0.4   0.2 
Acquisition due diligence and other work performed in respect of potential venture capital investments  1.0   1.2   1.0         0.1 

 

NOTE 12:13: IMPAIRMENT

 

  2016  2015  2014 
  £m  £m  £m 
Impairment losses on loans and receivables:         
Loans and advances to customers  592   443   735 
Debt securities classified as loans and receivables     (2)  2 
Total impairment losses on loans and receivables (note 21)  592   441   737 
Impairment of available-for-sale financial assets  173   4   5 
Other credit risk provisions  (13)  (55)  10 
Total impairment charged to the income statement  752   390   752 
           Purchased or    
           originated    
  Stage 1  Stage 2  Stage 3  credit-impaired  Total 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Year ended 31 December 2019               
Impact of transfers between stages  (17)  89   532      604 
Other changes in credit quality  4   1   899   (106)  798 
Additions (repayments)  94   (39)  (84)  (87)  (116)
Methodology, model and assumption changes  33   (27)  8      14 
Other items  (4)           (4)
   127   (65)  823   (193)  692 
Total impairment  110   24   1,355   (193)  1,296 
                     
In respect of:                    
Loans and advances to banks               
Loans and advances to customers  139   10   1,351   (193)  1,307 
Financial assets at amortised cost  139   10   1,351   (193)  1,307 
Other assets        5      5 
Impairment charge on drawn balances  139   10   1,356   (193)  1,312 
Loan commitments and financial guarantees  (28)  14   (1)     (15)
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  (1)           (1)
Total impairment  110   24   1,355   (193)  1,296 
                
           Purchased or    
           originated    
  Stage 1  Stage 2  Stage 3  credit-impaired  Total 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Year ended 31 December 2018               
Impact of transfers between stages  (12)  51   446      485 
Other changes in credit quality  (20)  (47)  541   69   543 
Additions (repayments)  18   (82)  43   (69)  (90)
Methodology, model and assumption changes  (71)  (21)  72      (20)
Other items  (13)     32      19 
   (86)  (150)  688      452 
Total impairment  (98)  (99)  1,134      937 
                     
In respect of:                    
Loans and advances to banks  1            1 
Loans and advances to customers  (66)  (51)  1,139      1,022 
Financial assets at amortised cost  (65)  (51)  1,139      1,023 
Other assets        1      1 
Impairment charge on drawn balances  (65)  (51)  1,140      1,024 
Loan commitments and financial guarantees  (19)  (48)  (6)     (73)
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  (14)           (14)
Total impairment  (98)  (99)  1,134      937 

F-28F-34

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 13: TAXATIONIMPAIRMENT continued

The Group’s impairment charge comprises the following items:

TRANSFERS BETWEEN STAGES

The net impact on the impairment charge of transfers between stages.

OTHER CHANGES IN CREDIT QUALITY

Changes in loss allowance as a result of movements in risk parameters that reflect changes in customer quality, but which have not resulted in a transfer to a different stage. This also contains the impact on the impairment charge as a result of write-offs and recoveries, where the related loss allowances are reassessed to reflect ultimate realisable or recoverable value.

ADDITIONS (REPAYMENTS)

Expected loss allowances are recognised on origination of new loans or further drawdowns of existing facilities. Repayments relate to the reduction of loss allowances as a result of repayments of outstanding balances.

METHODOLOGY, MODEL AND ASSUMPTION CHANGES

Increase or decrease in impairment charge as a result of adjustments to the models used for expected credit loss calculations; either as changes to the model inputs or to the underlying assumptions, as well as the impact of changing the models used.

2017
£m
Impairment losses on loans and receivables:
Loans and advances to customers697
Debt securities classified as loans and receivables(6)
Total impairment losses on loans and receivables691
Impairment of available-for-sale financial assets6
Other credit risk provisions(9)
Total impairment charged to the income statement688
Movements in the Group’s impairment allowances are shown in note 20.

NOTE 14: TAX EXPENSE

 

(A) Analysis of tax chargeexpense for the year

 

 2016  2015 2014   2019   20181   20171 
 £m  £m £m   £m   £m   £m 
UK corporation tax:                     
Current tax on profit for the year  (1,010)  (485)  (162)  (1,389)  (1,280)  (1,240)
Adjustments in respect of prior years  156   (90)  213   96   11   122 
  (854)  (575)  51   (1,293)  (1,269)  (1,118)
Foreign tax:                        
Current tax on profit for the year  (20)  (24)  (39)  (70)  (34)  (40)
Adjustments in respect of prior years  2   27   3   2   5   10 
  (18)  3   (36)  (68)  (29)  (30)
Current tax (charge) credit  (872)  (572)  15 
Deferred tax (note 37):            
Origination and reversal of temporary differences  (557)  (185)  (72)
Due to change in UK corporation tax rate  (201)  (27)  (24)
Current tax expense  (1,361)  (1,298)  (1,148)
Deferred tax:            
Current year  (165)  (127)  (430)
Adjustments in respect of prior years  (94)  96   (182)  139   (29)  (48)
Deferred tax expense  (26)  (156)  (478)
Tax expense  (1,387)  (1,454)  (1,626)
  (852)  (116)  (278)            
Tax charge  (1,724)  (688)  (263)
The income tax expense is made up as follows:            
            
  2019   20181   20171 
  £m   £m   £m 
Tax (expense) credit attributable to policyholders  (148)  14   (82)
Shareholder tax expense  (1,239)  (1,468)  (1,544)
Tax expense  (1,387)  (1,454)  (1,626)

 

The charge for tax on the profit for 2016 is based on a UK corporation tax rate of 20 per cent (2015: 20.25 per cent; 2014: 21.5 per cent).

The income tax charge is made up as follows:

  2016  2015  2014 
  £m  £m  £m 
Tax (charge) credit attributable to policyholders  (301)  3   (18)
Shareholder tax charge  (1,423)  (691)  (245)
Tax charge  (1,724)  (688)  (263)

(B) Factors affecting the tax charge for the year

A reconciliation of the charge that would result from applying the standard UK corporation tax rate to the profit before tax to the actual tax charge for the year is given below:

  2016  2015  2014 
  £m  £m  £m 
Profit before tax  3,888   1,644   1,762 
Tax charge thereon at UK corporation tax rate of 20 per cent
(2015: 20.25 per cent; 2014: 21.5 per cent)
  (778)  (333)  (379)
Factors affecting charge:            
Impact of bank surcharge  (266)      
Impact of changes in UK corporation tax rates  (201)  (27)  (24)
Disallowed items1  (464)  (630)  (195)
Non-taxable items  75   162   153 
Overseas tax rate differences  10   (4)  (24)
Gains exempted  19   67   181 
Policyholder tax2  (241)  3   (14)
Tax losses not previously recognised  59   42    
Adjustments in respect of previous years  64   33   34 
Effect of results of joint ventures and associates  (1)  (1)  7 
Other items        (2)
Tax charge on profit on ordinary activities  (1,724)  (688)  (263)
1The Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 introduced restrictions on the tax deductibility of provisions for conduct charges arising on or after 8 July 2015. This has resulted in an additional income statement tax charge of £289 million (2015: £459 million).
2In 2016 this includes a £231 million write down of the deferred tax asset held within the life business, reflecting the Group’s utilisation estimate which has been restricted by the current economic environment.Restated, see note 1.

The Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 introduced an additional surcharge of 8 per cent on banking profits from 1 January 2016.

The Finance Act 2016 was enacted on 15 September 2016. The Act further reduced the corporation tax rate applicable from 1 April 2020 to 17 per cent and further restricts the amount of banks’ profits that can be offset by carried forward losses for the purposes of calculating corporation tax liabilities from 50 per cent to 25 per cent with effect from 1 April 2016.

The corporation tax changes enacted have resulted in a reduction in the Group’s net deferred tax asset at 31 December 2016 of £158 million, comprising a £201 million charge included in the income statement and a £43 million credit included in equity.

F-29F-35

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 14: TAX EXPENSEcontinued

(B) Factors affecting the tax expense for the year

The UK corporation tax rate for the year was 19.0 per cent (2018: 19.0 per cent; 2017: 19.25 per cent). An explanation of the relationship between tax expense and accounting profit is set out below:

   2019   20181   20171 
   £m   £m   £m 
Profit before tax  4,393   5,960   5,625 
UK corporation tax thereon  (835)  (1,132)  (1,083)
Impact of surcharge on banking profits  (364)  (409)  (429)
Non-deductible costs: conduct charges  (370)  (101)  (287)
Non-deductible costs: bank levy  (43)  (43)  (44)
Other non-deductible costs  (121)  (90)  (59)
Non-taxable income  40   87   72 
Tax relief on coupons on other equity instruments  89   83   79 
Tax-exempt gains on disposals  102   124   128 
Recognition (derecognition) of losses that arose in prior years  18   (9)   
Remeasurement of deferred tax due to rate changes  (6)  32   (9)
Differences in overseas tax rates  (14)  6   (15)
Policyholder tax  (67)  (62)  (66)
Policyholder deferred tax asset in respect of life assurance expenses  (53)  73    
Adjustments in respect of prior years  237   (13)  88 
Tax effect of share of results of joint ventures        (1)
Tax expense  (1,387)  (1,454)  (1,626)

1Restated, see note 1.

NOTE 15: EARNINGS PER SHARE

 

 2016  2015 2014   2019   20181   20171 
 £m  £m £m   £m   £m   £m 
Profit attributable to equity shareholders – basic and diluted  1,651   466   1,125   2,459   3,975   3,494 
Tax credit on distributions to other equity holders  91   80   62 
  1,742   546   1,187 
1 Restated, see note 1.            
  2016   2015   2014   2019   2018   2017 
  million   million   million   million   million   million 
Weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue – basic  71,234   71,272   71,350   70,603   71,638   71,710 
Adjustment for share options and awards  790   1,068   1,097   682   641   683 
Weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue – diluted  72,024   72,340   72,447   71,285   72,279   72,393 
Basic earnings per share  2.4p  0.8p   1.7p   3.5p  5.5p  4.9p
Diluted earnings per share  2.4p   0.8p   1.6p  3.4p  5.5p  4.8p

 

Basic earnings per share are calculated by dividing the net profit attributable to equity shareholders by the weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue during the year, which has been calculated after deducting 14025 million (2015: 101(2018: 38 million; 2014: 222017: 57 million) ordinary shares representing the Group’s holdings of own shares in respect of employee share schemes.

 

For the calculation of diluted earnings per share the weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue is adjusted to assume conversion of all dilutive potential ordinary shares that arise in respect of share options and awards granted to employees. The number of shares that could have been acquired at the average annual share price of the Company’s shares based on the monetary value of the subscription rights attached to outstanding share options and awards is determined. This is deducted from the number of shares issuable under such options and awards to leave a residual bonus amount of shares which are added to the weighted-average number of ordinary shares in issue, but no adjustment is made to the profit attributable to equity shareholders.

 

The weighted-average number ofThere were 24 million anti-dilutive share options and awards excluded from the calculation of diluted earnings per share was 0.3 million at 31 December 2016 (2015: 1 million; 2014: 7 million)(2018: none; 2017: none).

F-36

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 15: TRADING AND OTHER16: FINANCIAL ASSETS AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS

 

These assets are comprised as follows:

 

 31 December 2019 31 December 2018
   Other financial      Other financial   
   assets      assets   
   mandatorily at      mandatorily at   
   fair value      fair value   
 2016 2015  Trading through    Trading through   
              assets profit or loss Total  assets profit or loss Total 
 Trading
assets
£m
 Other
financial
assets at fair
value through
profit or loss
£m
 Total
£m
 Trading
assets
£m
 Other financial
assets at fair
value through
profit or loss
£m
 Total
£m
  £m  £m  £m  £m £m £m 
Loans and advances to customers  30,473      30,473   30,109      30,109   10,422   10,654   21,076   26,886   10,964   37,850 
Loans and advances to banks  2,606      2,606   3,065      3,065   513   1,886   2,399   848   2,178   3,026 
Debt securities:                                                
Government securities  11,828   14,904   26,732   8,269   13,848   22,117   6,791   12,063   18,854   7,192   10,903   18,095 
Other public sector securities     1,325   1,325      2,039   2,039      2,126   2,126      2,064   2,064 
Bank and building society certificates of deposit     244   244      135   135      984   984      1,105   1,105 
Asset-backed securities:                                                
Mortgage-backed securities  47   660   707   516   842   1,358   6   462   468   10   215   225 
Other asset-backed securities  69   1,469   1,538   85   762   847   17   241   258   63   286   349 
Corporate and other debt securities  224   19,608   19,832   612   19,704   20,316   233   17,983   18,216   247   18,063   18,310 
  12,168   38,210   50,378   9,482   37,330   46,812   7,047   33,859   40,906   7,512   32,636   40,148 
Equity shares  6   67,691   67,697   5   60,471   60,476      95,789   95,789      77,485   77,485 
Treasury and other bills     20   20      74   74      19   19      20   20 
Total  45,253   105,921   151,174   42,661   97,875   140,536   17,982   142,207   160,189   35,246   123,283   158,529 

 

Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss include the following assets designated into that category:backing insurance contracts and investment contracts of £136,855 million (31 December 2018: £116,903 million). Included within these assets are investments in unconsolidated structured entities of £38,177 million (31 December 2018: £26,028 million), see note 49.

(i)financial assets backing insurance contracts and investment contracts of £101,888 million (2015: £90,492 million) which are so designated because the related liabilities either have cash flows that are contractually based on the performance of the assets or are contracts whose measurement takes account of current market conditions and where significant measurement inconsistencies would otherwise arise. Included within these assets are investments in unconsolidated structured entities of £15,611 million (2015: £13,282 million), see note 20; and
(ii)private equity investments of £2,245 million (2015: £2,415 million) that are managed, and evaluated, on a fair value basis in accordance with a documented risk management or investment strategy and reported to key management personnel on that basis.

 

For amounts included above which are subject to repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements see note 52.53.

F-30F-37

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the consolidated financial statements

 

NOTE 16:17: DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

 

The fair values and notional amounts of derivative instruments are set out in the following table:

 

 31 December 2016  31 December 2015 
               31 December 2019 31 December 2018
 Contract/
notional
amount
£m
 Fair value
assets
£m
 Fair value
liabilities
£m
  Contract/
notional
amount
£m
 Fair value
assets
£m
 Fair value
liabilities
£m
  Contract/
notional
amount
£m
 Fair value
assets
£m
 Fair value
liabilities
£m
 Contract/
notional
amount
£m
 Fair value
assets
£m
 Fair value
liabilities
£m
 
Trading and other                                        
Exchange rate contracts:                                          
Spot, forwards and futures  38,072   1,149   1,383   39,817   852   774   44,095   681   616   41,571   746   549 
Currency swaps  288,441   6,903   6,382   293,536   5,585   4,323   349,606   3,857   5,425   311,491   4,566   3,709 
Options purchased  15,192   808      20,352   751      8,310   452      10,202   485    
Options written  18,342      1,016   22,708      984   9,557      499   11,393      495 
  360,047   8,860   8,781   376,413   7,188   6,081   411,568   4,990   6,540   374,657   5,797   4,753 
Interest rate contracts:                                                
Interest rate swaps  2,160,535   19,780   18,862   2,316,071   14,442   13,050   5,245,703   17,318   15,213   4,381,271   13,624   12,629 
Forward rate agreements  628,962   13   87   1,159,099   6   57   555,742   7   13   494,430      2 
Options purchased  39,509   3,251      55,962   3,003      27,158   2,468      30,724   2,107    
Options written  39,847      3,400   52,202      3,116   23,610      2,216   26,463      1,997 
Futures  114,284   6   3   105,475   7   8   199,884   17   22   128,211   16   4 
  2,983,137   23,050   22,352   3,688,809   17,458   16,231   6,052,097   19,810   17,464   5,061,099   15,747   14,632 
Credit derivatives  8,098   381   659   4,566   295   407   16,959   83   167   13,757   99   181 
Embedded equity conversion feature (note 9)              545    
Equity and other contracts  43,218   1,135   1,168   14,174   1,295   1,145   11,414   250   503   15,145   389   699 
Total derivative assets/liabilities – trading and other  3,394,500   33,426   32,960   4,083,962   26,781   23,864   6,492,038   25,133   24,674   5,464,658   22,032   20,265 
Hedging                                                
Derivatives designated as fair value hedges:                                                
Currency swaps  1,454   19   22   2,649   52   107   34   8      490   3   29 
Interest rate swaps  194,416   1,462   737   121,063   1,572   724   183,489   798   229   150,971   947   187 
Options purchased                  
  195,870   1,481   759   123,712   1,624   831   183,523   806   229   151,461   950   216 
Derivatives designated as cash flow hedges:                                                
Interest rate swaps  384,182   814   1,166   460,829   816   1,534   426,740   355   743   556,945   358   844 
Futures  53,115      3   150,085   3    
Currency swaps  8,121   417   36   11,228   243   72   9,549   75   133   10,578   255   48 
  445,418   1,231   1,205   622,142   1,062   1,606   436,289   430   876   567,523   613   892 
Total derivative assets/liabilities – hedging  641,288   2,712   1,964   745,854   2,686   2,437   619,812   1,236   1,105   718,984   1,563   1,108 
Total recognised derivative assets/liabilities  4,035,788   36,138   34,924   4,829,816   29,467   26,301   7,111,850   26,369   25,779   6,183,642   23,595   21,373 

 

The notional amount of the contract does not represent the Group’s real exposure to credit risk which is limited to the current cost of replacing contracts with a positive value to the Group should the counterparty default. To reduce credit risk the Group uses a variety of credit enhancement techniques such as netting and collateralisation, where security is provided against the exposure.exposure; a large proportion of the Group’s derivatives are held through exchanges such as London Clearing House and are collateralised through those exchanges. Further details are provided in note 5253 Credit risk.

 

The Group holds derivatives as part of the following strategies:

 

Customer driven, where derivatives are held as part of the provision of risk management products to Group customers;
  
To manage and hedge the Group’s interest rate and foreign exchange risk arising from normal banking business. The hedge accounting strategy adopted by the Group is to utilise a combination of fair value and cash flow hedge approaches as described in note 52;53; and
  
Derivatives held in policyholder funds as permitted by the investment strategies of those funds.

The principal derivatives used by the Group are as follows:

The principal derivatives used by the Group are as follows:
Interest rate related contracts include interest rate swaps, forward rate agreements and options. An interest rate swap is an agreement between two parties to exchange fixed and floating interest payments, based upon interest rates defined in the contract, without the exchange of the underlying principal amounts. Forward rate agreements are contracts for the payment of the difference between a specified rate of interest and a reference rate, applied to a notional principal amount at a specific date in the future. An interest rate option gives the buyer, on payment of a premium, the right, but not the obligation, to fix the rate of interest on a future loan or deposit, for a specified period and commencing on a specified future date.
F-31

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 16: DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS continued

Exchange rate related contracts include forward foreign exchange contracts, currency swaps and options. A forward foreign exchange contract is an agreement to buy or sell a specified amount of foreign currency on a specified future date at an agreed rate. Currency swaps generally involve the exchange of interest payment obligations denominated in different currencies; the exchange of principal can be notional or actual. A currency option gives the buyer, on payment of a premium, the right, but not the obligation, to sell specified amounts of currency at agreed rates of exchange on or before a specified future date.
  
Credit derivatives, principally credit default swaps, are used by the Group as part of its trading activity and to manage its own exposure to credit risk. A credit default swap is a swap in which one counterparty receives a premium at pre-set intervals in consideration for guaranteeing to make a specific payment should a negative credit event take place. The Group also used credit default swaps to securitise, in combination with external funding, £455 million of corporate and commercial banking loans at 31 December 2015; these arrangements were wound up during 2016.
  
Equity derivatives are also used by the Group as part of its equity-based retail product activity to eliminate the Group’s exposure to fluctuations in various international stock exchange indices. Index-linked equity options are purchased which give the Group the right, but not the obligation, to buy or sell a specified amount of equities, or basket of equities, in the form of published indices on or before a specified future date.
F-38

Hedged cash flowsNotes to the consolidated financial statements

 

For designatedNOTE 17: DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS continued

Details of the Group’s hedging instruments are set out below:

  Maturity
31 December 2019 Up to 1 month
£m
  1-3 months
£m
  3-12 months
£m
  1-5 years
£m
  Over 5 years
£m
  Total
£m
 
Fair value hedges                        
Interest rate                        
Cross currency swap                        
Notional              34   34 
Average fixed interest rate              1.28%     
Average EUR/GBP exchange rate              1.38     
Average USD/GBP exchange rate                   
Average NOK/GBP exchange rate                   
Interest rate swap                        
Notional  331   9,305   37,948   106,339   29,566   183,489 
Average fixed interest rate  2.58%   1.74%   1.22%   1.71%   2.81%     
Cash flow hedges                        
Foreign exchange                        
Currency swap                        
Notional     413   1,611   2,389   5,136   9,549 
Average EUR/GBP exchange rate           1.05   1.05     
Average USD/GBP exchange rate     1.29   1.30   1.31        
Interest rate                        
Interest rate swap                        
Notional  9,675   23,589   58,447   209,108   125,921   426,740 
Average fixed interest rate  1.05%   1.22%   1.29%   1.47%   2.39%     
F-39

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Note 17: Derivative financial instruments continued

  Maturity
31 December 2018 Up to 1 month
£m
  1-3 months
£m
  3-12 months
£m
  1-5 years
£m
  Over 5 years
£m
  Total
£m
 
Fair value hedges                        
Interest rate                        
Cross currency swap                        
Notional     36      283   171   490 
Average fixed interest rate     4.82%      5.88%   4.44%     
Average EUR/USD exchange rate           1.13        
Average USD/GBP exchange rate           1.30        
Average NOK/GBP exchange rate     9.22      9.19   9.03     
Interest rate swap                        
Notional  393   417   32,876   86,451   30,834   150,971 
Average fixed interest rate  1.38%   2.06%   1.65%   1.75%   2.98%     
Cash flow hedges                        
Foreign exchange                        
Currency swap                        
Notional  67   47   2,234   2,111   6,119   10,578 
Average USD/EUR exchange rate  1.15      1.13   1.10   1.07     
Average USD/GBP exchange rate     1.32   1.34   1.27   1.28     
Interest rate                        
Interest rate swap                        
Notional  4,874   11,204   66,312   292,712   181,843   556,945 
Average fixed interest rate  1.47%   1.03%   0.99%   1.46%   1.85%     

The carrying amounts of the Group’s hedging instruments are as follows:

  Carrying amount of the hedging instrument
  Contract/notional
amount
  Assets  Liabilities  Changes in fair
value used for
calculating hedge
ineffectiveness
(YTD)
 
31 December 2019 £m  £m  £m  £m 
Fair value hedges                
Interest rate                
Currency swaps  34   8      2 
Interest rate swaps  183,489   798   229   1,142 
Cash flow hedges                
Foreign exchange                
Currency swaps  9,549   75   133   (185)
Interest rate                
Interest rate swaps  426,740   355   743   992 
                 
  Carrying amount of the hedging instrument
  Contract/notional
amount
  Assets  Liabilities  Changes in fair
value used for
calculating hedge
ineffectiveness
(YTD)
 
31 December 2018 £m  £m  £m  £m 
Fair value hedges                
Interest rate                
Currency swaps  490   3   29   (10)
Interest rate swaps  150,971   947   187   104 
Cash flow hedges                
Foreign exchange                
Currency swaps  10,578   255   48   229 
Interest rate                
Interest rate swaps  556,945   358   844   (781)

All amounts are held within Derivative financial instruments.

F-40

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

Note 17: Derivative financial instruments continued

The Group’s hedged items are as follows:

  Carrying amount of the hedged
item
  Accumulated amount of fair
value adjustment on the
hedged item
  Change in fair
value of
hedged item
for
  Cash flow hedge reserve 
              ineffectiveness
assessment
  Continuing  Discontinued 
  Assets  Liabilities  Assets  Liabilities  (YTD)  hedges  hedges 
31 December 2019 £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Fair value hedges                            
Interest rate                            
Fixed rate mortgages1  83,818      154      (73        
Fixed rate issuance2     70,353      3,058   (1,333)        
Fixed rate bonds3  21,354      660      405         
Cash flow hedges                            
Foreign exchange                            
Foreign currency issuance2                  72   (2)  179 
Customer deposits4                  116   18   (48)
Interest rate                            
Customer loans1                  (680)  1,248   336 
Central bank balances5                  (263)  128   163 
Customer deposits4                     (31)  5 
             
  Carrying amount of the hedged
item
  Accumulated amount of fair value
adjustment on the hedged item
  Change in fair
value of
hedged item
for
  Cash flow hedge reserve 
              ineffectiveness
assessment
  Continuing  Discontinued 
  Assets  Liabilities  Assets  Liabilities  (YTD)  hedges  hedges 
31 December 2018 £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Fair value hedges                            
Interest rate                            
Fixed rate mortgages1  53,136      (45)     (173)        
Fixed rate issuance2     63,746      1,598   807         
Fixed rate bonds3  23,285      232      (666)        
Cash flow hedges                            
Foreign exchange                            
Foreign currency issuance2                  (165)  114   327 
Customer deposits4                  (62)  70   (78)
Interest rate                            
Customer loans1                  456   867   60 
Central bank balances5                  (16)  30   20 
Customer deposits4                  (118)  (9)  (6)
1Included within loans and advances to customers.
2Included within debt securities in issue.
3Included within financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income.
4Included within customer deposits.
5Included within cash and balances at central banks.

The accumulated amount of fair value hedge adjustments remaining in the balance sheet for hedged items that have ceased to be adjusted for hedging gains and losses is a liability of £692 million (2018: liability of £170 million).

F-41

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 17: DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTScontinued

Gains and losses arising from hedge accounting are summarised as follows:

        Amounts reclassified from reserves to
income statement as:
31 December 2019  Gain (loss)
recognised in
other
comprehensive
income
£m
    Hedge
ineffectiveness
recognised in the
income statement1
£m
    Hedged cashflows
will no longer
occur
£m
    Hedged item
affected income
statement
£m
    Income statement
line item that
includes reclassified
amount
 
  
Fair value hedges                    
Interest rate                    
Fixed rate mortgages      186             
Fixed rate issuance      (32)            
Fixed rate bonds      (11)            
Cash flow hedges                    
Foreign exchange                    
Foreign currency issuance  (265)     (101)  (92) Interest expense 
Customer deposits  (22)        7  Interest expense 
Interest rate                    
Customer loans  651   98      (362) Interest income 
Central bank balances  237   36      (66) Interest income 
Customer deposits           6  Interest expense 

            Amounts reclassified from reserves to
income statement as:
 
31 December 2018     Gain (loss)
recognised in other
comprehensive
income
£m
  Hedge
ineffectiveness
recognised in the
income statement1
£m
  Hedged item
affected income
statement
£m
  Income statement line
item that includes
reclassified amount
 
 
Fair value hedges                    
Interest rate                    
Fixed rate mortgages          106         
Fixed rate issuance          (17)        
Fixed rate bonds          (27)        
Cash flow hedges                    
Foreign exchange                    
Foreign currency issuance      85      (81) Interest expense 
Customer deposits      (22)  (2)  (32) Interest expense 
Interest rate                    
Customer loans      (418)  (17)  (467) Interest income 
Central bank balances      (63)  (5)  (52) Interest income 
Customer deposits      (49)  (1)  (69) Interest expense 

1Hedge ineffectiveness is included in the income statement within net trading income.

There was a gain of £101 million (2018: nil) reclassified from the cash flow hedgeshedging reserve for which hedge accounting had previously been used but for which the following table shows when the Group’s hedged future cash flows are expected to occur and when they will affect income.

                       Over 20    
  0-1 years  1-2 years  2-3 years  3-4 years  4-5 years  5-10 years  10-20 years  years  Total 
2016 £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Hedged forecast cash flows expected to occur:                           
Forecast receivable cash flows 172  198  415  372  391  1,215  102  45  2,910 
Forecast payable cash flows (565) (722) (692) (599) (429) (1,541) (806) (262) (5,616)
Hedged forecast cash flows affect profit or loss:                           
Forecast receivable cash flows 211  223  418  363  472  1,070  99  54  2,910 
Forecast payable cash flows (777) (713) (671) (521) (415) (1,477) (787) (255) (5,616)
                            
                       Over    
  0-1 years  1-2 years  2-3 years  3-4 years  4-5 years  5-10 years  10-20 years  20 years  Total 
2015 £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Hedged forecast cash flows expected to occur:                           
Forecast receivable cash flows 363  298  499  500  376  1,876  137  75  4,124 
Forecast payable cash flows (1,235) (758) (714) (667) (440) (1,116) (532) (145) (5,607)
Hedged forecast cash flows affect profit or loss:                           
Forecast receivable cash flows 381  439  515  453  345  1,777  136  78  4,124 
Forecast payable cash flows (1,261) (741) (715) (671) (440) (1,115) (523) (141) (5,607)

There were no transactions for which cash flow hedge accounting had to be ceased in 2015 or 2016 as a result of the highly probable cash flows no longer being expected to occur.

NOTE 17: LOANS AND ADVANCES TO BANKS

  2016 2015
  £m £m
Lending to banks 2,903 2,273
Money market placements with banks 23,999 22,844
Total loans and advances to banks 26,902 25,117

For amounts included above which are subject to reverse repurchase agreements see note 52.

F-32F-42

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 18: LOANS AND ADVANCES TO CUSTOMERS

  2016 2015 
  £m £m 
Agriculture, forestry and fishing 7,269 6,924 
Energy and water supply 2,320 3,247 
Manufacturing 7,285 5,953 
Construction 4,535 4,952 
Transport, distribution and hotels 13,320 13,526 
Postal and telecommunications 2,564 2,563 
Property companies 32,192 32,228 
Financial, business and other services 49,197 43,072 
Personal:     
Mortgages 306,682 312,877 
Other 20,761 20,579 
Lease financing 2,628 2,751 
Hire purchase 11,617 9,536 
Total loans and advances to customers before allowance for impairment losses 460,370 458,208 
Allowance for impairment losses (note 21) (2,412)(3,033)
Total loans and advances to customers 457,958 455,175 

For amounts included above which are subject to reverse repurchase agreements see note 52.FINANCIAL ASSETS AT AMORTISED COST

 

YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 2019

Loans and advances to banks Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 1 January 2019  6,282   3         6,285 
Exchange and other adjustments1  (218)           (218)
Additions (repayments)  3,713   (3)        3,710 
At 31 December 2019  9,777            9,777 
Allowance for impairment losses  (2)           (2)
Total loans and advances to banks  9,775            9,775 
                     
Loans and advances to customers                    
At 1 January 2019  441,531   25,345   5,741   15,391   488,008 
Exchange and other adjustments1  (498)  (34)  47   283   (202)
Additions (repayments)  13,554   (2,558)  (858)  (1,934)  8,204 
Transfers to Stage 1  6,318   (6,286)  (32)       
Transfers to Stage 2  (13,084)  13,516   (432)       
Transfers to Stage 3  (1,540)  (1,440)  2,980        
   (8,306)  5,790   2,516        
Recoveries        397   28   425 
Acquisition of portfolios2  3,694            3,694 
Financial assets that have been written off during the year          (1,828)  (54)  (1,882)
At 31 December 2019  449,975   28,543   6,015   13,714   498,247 
Allowance for impairment losses  (675)  (995)  (1,447)  (142)  (3,259)
Total loans and advances to customers  449,300   27,548   4,568   13,572   494,988 
                     
Debt securities                    
At 1 January 2019  5,238      6      5,244 
Exchange and other adjustments1  (94)     (2)     (96)
Additions (repayments)  400            400 
Financial assets that have been written off during the year          (1)     (1)
At 31 December 2019  5,544      3      5,547 
Allowance for impairment losses        (3)     (3)
Total debt securities  5,544            5,544 
Total financial assets at amortised cost  464,619   27,548   4,568   13,572   510,307 
                     
Movements in Retail mortgage balances were as follows:                    

Retail mortgages Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
   Total
£m
 
At 1 January 2019  257,797   13,654   1,393   15,391   288,235 
Exchange and other adjustments1  (1)     2   283   284 
Additions (repayments)  799   (1,432)  (416)  (1,934)  (2,983)
Transfers to Stage 1  3,060   (3,057)  (3)       
Transfers to Stage 2  (7,879)  8,242   (363)       
Transfers to Stage 3  (427)  (472)  899        
   (5,246)  4,713   533        
Recoveries        29   28   57 
Acquisition of portfolios2  3,694            3,694 
Financial assets that have been written off during the year          (35)  (54)  (89)
At 31 December 2019  257,043   16,935   1,506   13,714   289,198 
Allowance for impairment losses  (23)  (281)  (122)  (142)  (568)
Total loans and advances to customers  257,020   16,654   1,384   13,572   288,630 

1Exchange and other adjustments includes certain adjustments, prescribed by IFRS 9, in respect of purchased or originated credit-impaired financial assets.
2Acquisition of portfolios in 2019 relates to the purchase, completed in September 2019, of Tesco Bank’s UK residential mortgage portfolio.
F-43

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 18: FINANCIAL ASSETS AT AMORTISED COSTcontinued

Year ended 31 December 2018

Loans and advances to banks   Stage 1
£m
      Stage 2
£m
      Stage 3
£m
      Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
      Total
£m
   
At 1 January 2018  4,245   2         4,247 
Exchange and other adjustments  (29)  1         (28)
Additions (repayments)  2,066            2,066 
At 31 December 2018  6,282   3         6,285 
Allowance for impairment losses  (2)           (2)
Total loans and advances to banks  6,280   3         6,283 
                     
Loans and advances to customers                    
At 1 January 2018  403,881   37,245   5,140   17,973   464,239 
Exchange and other adjustments  958   32         990 
Additions (repayments)  34,942   (2,187)  (2,074)  (2,609)  28,072 
Transfers to Stage 1  19,524   (19,501)  (23)       
Transfers to Stage 2  (15,743)  15,996   (253)       
Transfers to Stage 3  (2,031)  (2,220)  4,251        
   1,750   (5,725)  3,975        
Recoveries        553   27   580 
Disposal of businesses     (4,020)  (277)     (4,297)
Financial assets that have been written off during the year          (1,576)     (1,576)
At 31 December 2018  441,531   25,345   5,741   15,391   488,008 
Allowance for impairment losses  (525)  (994)  (1,553)  (78)  (3,150)
Total loans and advances to customers  441,006   24,351   4,188   15,313   484,858 
                     
Debt securities                    
At 1 January 2018  3,291      49      3,340 
Exchange and other adjustments  77      (14)     63 
Additions (repayments)  1,870            1,870 
Financial assets that have been written off during the year          (29)     (29)
At 31 December 2018  5,238      6      5,244 
Allowance for impairment losses        (6)     (6)
Total debt securities  5,238            5,238 
                     
Total financial assets at amortised cost  452,524   24,354   4,188   15,313   496,379 

Movements on Retail mortgage balances were as follows:

Retail mortgages  Stage 1
£m
    Stage 2
£m
    Stage 3
£m
    Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
    Total
£m
  
At 1 January 2018  251,707   20,109   1,232   17,973   291,021 
Additions (repayments)  989   (938)  (239)  (2,609)  (2,797)
Transfers to Stage 1  10,814   (10,805)  (9)       
Transfers to Stage 2  (5,396)  5,691   (295)       
Transfers to Stage 3  (317)  (403)  720        
   5,101   (5,517)  416        
Recoveries        3   27   30 
Financial assets that have been written off during the year          (19)     (19)
At 31 December 2018  257,797   13,654   1,393   15,391   288,235 
Allowance for impairment losses  (37)  (226)  (118)  (78)  (459)
Total loans and advances to customers  257,760   13,428   1,275   15,313   287,776 
F-44

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 18: FINANCIAL ASSETS AT AMORTISED COSTcontinued

The movement tables are compiled by comparing the position at 31 December to that at the beginning of the year. Transfers between stages are deemed to have taken place at the start of the reporting period, with all other movements shown in the stage in which the asset is held at 31 December, with the exception of those held within Purchased or originated credit-impaired, which are not transferrable.

Additions (repayments) comprise new loans originated and repayments of outstanding balances throughout the reporting period. Loans which are written off in the period are first transferred to Stage 3 before acquiring a full allowance and subsequent write-off.

NOTE 19: FINANCE LEASE RECEIVABLES

The Group’s finance lease receivables are classified as loans and advances to customers include finance lease receivables, which may beand accounted for at amortised cost. The balance is analysed as follows:

 

  2016 2015 
  £m £m 
Gross investment in finance leases, receivable:     
Not later than 1 year 551 497 
Later than 1 year and not later than 5 years 1,618 1,225 
Later than 5 years 1,561 2,407 
  3,730 4,129 
Unearned future finance income on finance leases (1,038)(1,316)
Rentals received in advance (64)(62)
Net investment in finance leases 2,628 2,751 

The net investment in finance leases represents amounts recoverable as follows:

 2019  2018 
 £m  £m 
Gross investment in finance leases, receivable:        
Not later than 1 year  490   458 
Later than 1 year and not later than 2 years  347   516 
Later than 2 years and not later than 3 years  181   456 
Later than 3 years and not later than 4 years  145   201 
Later than 4 years and not later than 5 years  208   178 
Later than 5 years  883   1,104 
  2,254   2,913 
Unearned future finance income on finance leases  (563)  (1,068)
Rentals received in advance  (20)  (23)
Net investment in finance leases  1,671   1,822 
        
The net investment in finance leases represents amounts recoverable as follows:        
        
 2016 2015   2019   2018 
 £m £m   £m   £m 
Not later than 1 year 361 319   406   303 
Later than 1 year and not later than 5 years 1,282 859 
Later than 1 year and not later than 2 years  326   407 
Later than 2 years and not later than 3 years  130   353 
Later than 3 years and not later than 4 years  103   154 
Later than 4 years and not later than 5 years  171   130 
Later than 5 years 985 1,573   535   475 
Net investment in finance leases 2,628 2,751   1,671   1,822 

 

Equipment leased to customers under finance leases primarily relates to structured financing transactions to fund the purchase of aircraft, ships and other large individual value items. During 2015 and 2016 no contingent rentals in respect of finance leases were recognised in the income statement. There was noan allowance for uncollectable finance lease receivables included in the allowance for impairment losses (2015: £nil)of £12 million (2018: £1 million).

F-33F-45

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the consolidated financial statements

 

NOTE 19: SECURITISATIONS AND COVERED BONDS20: ALLOWANCE FOR IMPAIRMENT LOSSES

 

Securitisation programmesANALYSIS OF MOVEMENT IN THE ALLOWANCE FOR IMPAIRMENT LOSSES BY STAGE

 

Loans and advances to customers and debt securities classified as loans and receivables include loans securitised under the Group’s securitisation programmes, the majority of which have been sold by subsidiary companies to bankruptcy remote structured entities. As the structured entities are funded by the issue of debt on terms whereby the majority of the risks and rewards of the portfolio are retained by the subsidiary, the structured entities are consolidated fully and all of these loans are retained on the Group’s balance sheet, with the related notes in issue included within debt securities in issue.

Year ended 31 December 2019 Stage 1
£m
   Stage 2
£m
   Stage 3
£m
   Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
   Total
£m
  
In respect of drawn balances                         
At 1 January 2019  527    994    1,570    78    3,169  
Exchange and other adjustments  11    (9)   23    283    308  
                          
Transfers to Stage 1  229    (222)   (7)          
Transfers to Stage 2  (53)   92    (39)          
Transfers to Stage 3  (15)   (140)   155           
Impact of transfers between stages  (175)   353    420         598  
   (14)   83    529         598  
Other items charged to the income statement  153    (73)   827    (193)   714  
Charge to the income statement (note 13)  139    10    1,356    (193)   1,312  
Advances written off            (1,829)   (54)   (1,883) 
Recoveries of advances written off in previous years            397    28    425  
Discount unwind            (53)       (53) 
At 31 December 2019  677    995    1,464    142    3,278  
                          
In respect of undrawn balances                         
At January 2019  123    64    6        193  
Exchange and other adjustments      (1)           (1) 
                          
Transfers to Stage 1  19    (19)              
Transfers to Stage 2  (4)   4               
Transfers to Stage 3  (1)   (3)   4           
Impact of transfers between stages  (17)   24    (1)        6  
   (3)   6    3         6  
Other items charged to the income statement  (25)   8    (4)       (21) 
Charge to the income statement (note 13)  (28)   14    (1)       (15) 
At 31 December 2019  95    77    5        177  
Total at 31 December 2019  772    1,072    1,469    142    3,455  
                          
In respect of:                         
Loans and advances to banks  2                2  
Loans and advances to customers:                         
Retail mortgages  23    281    122    142    568  
Other  652    714    1,325        2,691  
   675    995    1,447    142    3,259  
Debt securities          3        3  
Financial assets at amortised cost  677    995    1,450    142    3,264  
Other assets          14        14  
Provisions in relation to loan commitments and financial guarantees  95    77    5        177  
Total  772    1,072    1,469    142    3,455  
Expected credit loss in respect of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (memorandum item)                    

 

Covered bond programmes

Certain loans and advances to customers have been assigned to bankruptcy remote limited liability partnerships to provide security for issues of covered bonds by the Group. The Group retains all of the risks and rewards associated with these loans and the partnerships are consolidated fully with the loans retained on the Group’s balance sheet and the related covered bonds in issue included within debt securities in issue.

The Group’s principal securitisation and covered bond programmes, together with the balances of the advances subject to these arrangements and the carrying value of the notes in issue at 31 December, are listed below. The notes in issue are reported in note 31.

  2016 2015 
           
  Loans and   Loans and  
  advances  Notes  advances  Notes 
  securitised  in issue  securitised  in issue 
  £m  £m £m  £m 
Securitisation programmes1    
UK residential mortgages 35,146  17,705  39,154  20,931 
Commercial loans 7,395  8,179  9,345  8,720 
Credit card receivables 7,610  5,723  7,305  5,277 
Dutch residential mortgages 2,033  2,081  1,981  2,044 
PFI/PPP and project finance loans     305  94 
  52,184  33,688  58,090  37,066 
Less held by the Group    (26,435)    (29,303)
Total securitisation programmes (note 31)    7,253     7,763 
Covered bond programmes            
Residential mortgage-backed 33,881  30,021  43,323  29,697 
Social housing loan-backed 2,087  1,200  2,544  1,700 
  35,968  31,221  45,867  31,397 
Less held by the Group    (700)    (4,197)
Total covered bond programmes (note 31)    30,521     27,200 
Total securitisation and covered bond programmes    37,774     34,963 
1Includes securitisations utilising a combination of external funding and credit default swaps.

Cash deposits of £9,018 million (2015: £8,383 million) which support the debt securities issued by the structured entities, the term advances related to covered bondsExchange and other legal obligations are heldadjustments include certain adjustments, prescribed by the Group. Additionally, the Group had certain contractual arrangements to provide liquidity facilities to someIFRS 9, in respect of these structured entities. At 31 December 2016 these obligations had not been triggered; the maximum exposure under these facilities was £373 million (2015: £381 million).

The Group has a number of covered bond programmes, for which Limited Liability Partnerships have been established to ring-fence asset pools and guarantee the covered bonds issued by the Group. At the reporting date the Group had over-collateralised these programmes as set out in the table above to meet the terms of the programmes, to secure the rating of the covered bonds and to provide operational flexibility. From time-to-time, the obligations of the Group to provide collateral may increase due to the formal requirements of the programmes. The Group may also voluntarily contribute collateral to support the ratings of the covered bonds.

The Group recognises the full liabilities associated with its securitisation and covered bond programmes within debt securities in issue, although the obligations of the Group are limited to the cash flows generated from the underlyingpurchased or originated credit-impaired financial assets. The Group could be required to provide additional support to a number of the securitisation programmes to support the credit ratings of the debt securities issued, in the form of increased cash reserves and the holding of subordinated notes. Further, certain programmes contain contractual obligations that require the Group to repurchase assets should they become credit impaired.

The Group has not voluntarily offered to repurchase assets from any of its public securitisation programmes during 2016 (2015: none). Such repurchases are made in order to ensure that the expected maturity dates of the notes issued from these programmes are met.

F-34F-46

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 20: STRUCTURED ENTITIES

The Group’s interests in structured entities are both consolidated and unconsolidated. Detail of the Group’s interests in consolidated structured entities are set out in: note 19 for securitisations and covered bond vehicles, note 36 for structured entities associated with the Group’s pension schemes, and below in part (A) and (B). Details of the Group’s interests in unconsolidated structured entities are included below in part (C).

(A) Asset-backed conduits

In addition to the structured entities discussed in note 19, which are used for securitisation and covered bond programmes, the Group sponsors an active asset-backed conduit, Cancara, which invests in client receivables and debt securities. The total consolidated exposure of Cancara at 31 December 2016 was £6,840 million (2015: £7,295 million), comprising £6,684 million of loans and advances (2015: £6,440 million) and £156 million of debt securities (2015: £855 million).

All lending assets and debt securities held by the Group in Cancara are restricted in use, as they are held by the collateral agent for the benefit of the commercial paper investors and the liquidity providers only. The Group provides liquidity facilities to Cancara under terms that are usual and customary for standard lending activities in the normal course of the Group’s banking activities. During 2016 there has been a planned drawdown on certain liquidity facilities for balance sheet management purposes, supporting the programme to provide funding alongside the proceeds of the asset-backed commercial paper issuance. The Group could be asked to provide further support under the contractual terms of these arrangements including, for example, if Cancara experienced a shortfall in external funding, which may occur in the event of market disruption. As at 31 December 2015 there had been no drawdowns on these liquidity facilities.

The external assets in Cancara are consolidated in the Group’s financial statements.

(B) Consolidated collective investment vehicles and limited partnerships

The assets and liabilities of the Insurance business held in consolidated collective investment vehicles, such as Open-Ended Investment Companies and limited partnerships, are not directly available for use by the Group. However, the Group’s investment in the majority of these collective investment vehicles is readily realisable. As at 31 December 2016, the total carrying value of these consolidated collective investment vehicle assets and liabilities held by the Group was £75,669 million (2015: £67,122 million).

The Group has no contractual arrangements (such as liquidity facilities) that would require it to provide financial or other supportNotes to the consolidated collective investment vehicles; the Group has not previously provided such support and has no current intentions to provide such support.financial statements

 

(C) Unconsolidated collective investment vehicles and limited partnerships

The Group’s direct interests in unconsolidated structured entities comprise investments in collective investment vehicles, such as Open-Ended Investment Companies, and limited partnerships with a total carrying value of £15,611 million at 31 December 2016 (2015: £13,282 million), included within financial assets designated at fair value through profit and loss (see note 15). These investments include both those entities managed by third parties and those managed by the Group. At 31 December 2016, the total asset value of these unconsolidated structured entities, including the portion in which the Group has no interest, was £1,849 billion (2015: £603 billion).

The Group’s maximum exposure to loss is equal to the carrying value of the investment. However, the Group’s investments in these entities are primarily held to match policyholder liabilities in the Insurance division and the majority of the risk from a change in the value of the Group’s investment is matched by a change in policyholder liabilities. The collective investment vehicles are primarily financed by investments from investors in the vehicles.

During the year the Group has not provided any non-contractual financial or other support to these entities and has no current intention of providing any financial or other support. There were no transfers from/to these unconsolidated collective investment vehicles and limited partnerships.

The Group considers itself the sponsor of a structured entity where it is primarily involved in the design and establishment of the structured entity; and further where the Group transfers assets to the structured entity; market products associated with the structured entity in its own name and/or provide guarantees regarding the structured entity’s performance.

The Group sponsors a range of diverse investment funds and limited partnerships where it acts as the fund manager or equivalent decision maker and markets the funds under one of the Group’s brands.

The Group earns fees from managing the investments of these funds. The investment management fees that the Group earned from these entities, including those in which the Group held no ownership interest at 31 December 2016, are reported in note 6.

NOTE 21:20: ALLOWANCE FOR IMPAIRMENT LOSSES ON LOANS AND RECEIVABLES continued

 

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

TheMovements in the Group’s allowance for impairment losses on loans and receivables is management’s best estimatein respect of losses incurred inRetail mortgages were as follows:

  Stage 1
£m
   Stage 2
£m
   Stage 3
£m
   Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
   Total
£m
  
Balance at 1 January 2019  37    226    118    78    459  
Exchange and other adjustments              283    283  
                          
Transfers to Stage 1  17    (17)              
Transfers to Stage 2  (13)   33    (20)          
Transfers to Stage 3  (5)   (21)   26           
Impact of transfers between stages  (15)   105    39         129  
   (16)   100    45         129  
Other items charged to the income statement  3    (45)   (59)   (193)   (294) 
Charge to the income statement  (13)   55    (14)   (193)   (165) 
Advances written off            (35)   (54)   (89) 
Recoveries of advances written off in previous years            29    28    57  
Discount unwind            24        24  
At 31 December 2019  24    281    122    142    569  
F-47

Notes to the portfolio at the balance sheet date. In determining the required level of impairment provisions, the Group uses the output from various statistical models. Management judgement is required to assess the robustness of the outputs from these models and, where necessary, make appropriate adjustments. Impairment allowances are made up of two components, those determined individually and those determined collectively.consolidated financial statements

 

Individual impairment allowances are generally established against the Group’s commercial lending portfolios. Assets are reviewed on a regular basis and those showing potential or actual vulnerability are placed on a watchlist where greater monitoring is undertaken and any adverse or potentially adverse impact on ability to repay is used in assessing whether an asset should be transferred to a dedicated Business Support Unit. Specific examples of trigger events that could lead to the initial recognition of impairment allowances against lending to corporate borrowers (or the recognition of additional impairment allowances) include (i) trading losses, loss of business or major customer of a borrower; (ii) material breaches of the terms and conditions of a loan facility, including non-payment of interest or principal, or a fall in the value of security such that it is no longer considered adequate; (iii) disappearance of an active market because of financial difficulties; or (iv) restructuring a facility with preferential terms to aid recovery of the lending (such as a debt for equity swap).NOTE 20: ALLOWANCE FOR IMPAIRMENT LOSSES continued

 

For such individually identified financial assets, a review is undertaken of the expected future cash flows which requires significant management judgement as to the amount and timing of such cash flows. Where the debt is secured, the assessment reflects the expected cash flows from the

Year ended 31 December 2018 Stage 1
£m
   Stage 2
£m
   Stage 3
£m
   Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
   Total
£m
  
In respect of drawn balances                         
Balance at 1 January 2018  590    1,147    1,491    32    3,260  
Exchange and other adjustments  2        133        135  
                          
Transfers to Stage 1  304    (299)   (5)          
Transfers to Stage 2  (46)   85    (39)          
Transfers to Stage 3  (32)   (131)   163           
Impact of transfers between stages  (233)   401    325         493  
   (7)   56    444         493  
Other items charged to the income statement  (58)   (107)   696        531  
Charge to the income statement (note 13)  (65)   (51)   1,140        1,024  
Advances written off            (1,605)       (1,605) 
Disposal of businesses      (102)   (79)       (181) 
Recoveries of advances written off in previous years            553    27    580  
Discount unwind            (63)   19    (44) 
At 31 December 2018  527    994    1,570    78    3,169  
In respect of undrawn balances                         
Balance at 1 January 2018  147    126            273  
Exchange and other adjustments  (5)   (14)   12        (7) 
                          
Transfers to Stage 1  28    (28)              
Transfers to Stage 2  (6)   6               
Transfers to Stage 3  (2)   (5)   7           
Impact of transfers between stages  (25)   22    (5)        (8) 
   (5)   (5)   2         (8) 
Other items charged to the income statement  (14)   (43)   (8)       (65) 
Charge to the income statement (note 13)  (19)   (48)   (6)       (73) 
At 31 December 2018  123    64    6        193  
Total at 31 December 2018  650    1,058    1,576    78    3,362  
In respect of:                         
Loans and advances to banks  2                2  
Loans and advances to customers:                         
Retail mortgages (see below)  37    226    118    78    459  
Other  488    768    1,435        2,691  
   525    994    1,553    78    3,150  
Debt securities          6        6  
Financial assets at amortised cost  527    994    1,559    78    3,158  
Other assets          11        11  
Provisions in relation to loan commitments and financial guarantees  123    64    6        193  
Total  650    1,058    1,576    78    3,362  
Expected credit loss in respect of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (memorandum item):  1                1  
F-35F-48

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 21:20: ALLOWANCE FOR IMPAIRMENT LOSSES ON LOANS AND RECEIVABLEScontinued

 

realisationMovements in the Group’s allowance for impairment losses in respect of Retail mortgages were as follows:

  Stage 1
£m
   Stage 2
£m
   Stage 3
£m
   Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
   Total
£m
 
Balance at 1 January 2018  30    236    86    32    384 
Exchange and other adjustments      1    1        2 
                         
Transfers to Stage 1  72    (71)   (1)         
Transfers to Stage 2  (3)   15    (12)         
Transfers to Stage 3  (3)   (17)   20          
Impact of transfers between stages  (48)   82    40         74 
   18    9    47         74 
Other items charged to the income statement  (11)   (20)   (5)       (36)
Charge to the income statement  7    (11)   42        38 
Advances written off            (19)       (19)
Recoveries of advances written off in previous years            3    27    30 
Discount unwind            5    19    24 
At 31 December 2018  37    226    118    78    459 
                         
The Group income statement charge comprises:                        
                         
                  2019
£m
    2018
£m
 
Drawn balances                 1,312    1,024 
Undrawn balances                 (15)   (73)
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income                 (1)   (14)
Total                 1,296    937 

The movement tables are compiled by comparing the position at 31 December to that at the beginning of the security, net of costsyear. Transfers between stages are deemed to realise, whether or not foreclosure or realisationhave taken place at the start of the collateral is probable. The determination of individual impairment allowances requiresreporting period, with all other movements shown in the exercise of considerable judgement by management involving matters such as local economic conditions and the resulting trading performance of the customer, and the value of the security held, forstage in which there may not be a readily accessible market. The actual amount of the future cash flows and their timing may differ significantly from the assumptions made for the purposes of determining the impairment allowances and consequently these allowances can be subject to variation as time progresses and the circumstances of the customer become clearer.

Collective impairment allowances are generally established for smaller balance homogenous portfolios such as the retail portfolios. For these portfolios the asset is included in a group of financial assets with similar risk characteristics and collectively assessed for impairment. Segmentation takes into account factors such as the type of asset, industry sector, geographical location, collateral type, past-due status and other relevant factors. These characteristics are relevant to the estimation of future cash flows for groups of such assets as they are indicative of the borrower’s ability to pay all amounts due according to the contractual terms of the assets being evaluated.

Generally, the impairment trigger used within the impairment calculation for a loan, or group of loans, is when they reach a pre-defined level of delinquency or where the customer is bankrupt. Loans where the Group provides arrangements that forgive a portion of interest or principal are also deemed to be impaired and loans that are originated to refinance currently impaired assets are also defined as impaired.

In respect of the Group’s secured mortgage portfolios, the impairment allowance is calculated based on a definition of impaired loans which are those six months or more in arrears (or certain cases where the borrower is bankrupt or is in possession). The estimated cash flows are calculated based on historical experience and are dependent on estimates of the expected value of collateral which takes into account expected future movements in house prices, less costs to sell.

For unsecured personal lending portfolios, the impairment trigger is generally when the balance is two or more instalments in arrears or where the customer has exhibited one or more of the impairment characteristics set out above. While the trigger is based on the payment performance or circumstances of each individual asset, the assessment of future cash flows uses historical experience of cohorts of similar portfolios such that the assessment is considered to be collective. Future cash flows are estimated on the basis of the contractual cash flows of the assets in the cohort and historical loss experience for similar assets. The methodology and assumptions used for estimating future cash flows are reviewed regularly by the Group to reduce any differences between loss estimates and actual loss experience. The collective impairment allowance is also subject to estimation uncertainty and in particular is sensitive to changes in economic and credit conditions, including the interdependency of house prices, unemployment rates, interest rates, borrowers’ behaviour, and consumer bankruptcy trends. It is, however, inherently difficult to estimate how changes in one or more of these factors might impact the collective impairment allowance.

The value of collateral supporting the Group’s UK mortgage portfolio is estimated by applying changes in the house price indices to the original assessed value of the property. Given the relative size of the portfolio, this is a key variable in determining the Group’s impairment charge for loans and receivables. If average house prices were ten per cent lower than those estimatedheld at 31 December, 2016,with the impairment charge would increase by approximately £190exception of those held within Purchased or originated credit-impaired, which are not transferrable. As assets are transferred between stages, the resulting change in expected credit loss of £598 million (2018: £493 million) for drawn balances, and £6 million (2018: £8 million) for undrawn balances, is presented separately as Impacts of transfers between stages, in respectthe stage in which the expected credit loss is recognised at the end of UK mortgages.the reporting period.

 

In addition,Other items charged to the collective provision also includes provision for inherent losses, that is losses that have been incurred but have not been separately identified at the balance sheet date. The loans that are not currently recognised as impaired are grouped into homogenous portfolios by key risk drivers. Risk drivers for secured retail lendingincome statement include the current indexed loan-to-value, previous mortgage arrears, internal cross-product delinquency datamovements in the expected credit loss as a result of new loans originated and external credit bureau data; for unsecured retail lending they include whetherrepayments of outstanding balances throughout the account is up-to-date and, if not, the number of payments that have been missed; and for commercial lending they include factors such as observed default rates and loss given default. An assessment is made of the likelihood of assets being impaired at the balance sheet date and being identified subsequently; the length of time taken to identify that an impairment event has occurred is known as the loss emergencereporting period. The loss emergence period is determined by local management for each portfolio and the Group has a range of loss emergence periodsLoans which are dependent upon the characteristics of the portfolios. Loss emergence periods are reviewed regularly and updated when appropriate. In general the periods used across the Group vary between one month and twelve months based on historical experience. Unsecured portfolios tend to have shorter loss emergence periods than secured portfolios. This provision is sensitive to changeswritten off in the loss emergence period. Management useperiod are first transferred to Stage 3 before acquiring a significant level of judgement when determining the collective unidentified impairment provision, including the assessment of the level of overall risk existing within particular sectorsfull allowance and the impact of the low interest rate environmentsubsequent write-off. Consequently, recoveries on loss emergence periods. In the Commercial Banking division, an increase of one monthassets previously written-off also occur in the loss emergence period in respect of the loan portfolio assessed for collective unidentified impairment provisions would result in an increase in the collective unidentified impairment provision of approximately £33 million (2015: £36 million).

  2016  2015 
  Loans and
advances
to customers
£m
 Debt
securities
 £m
  Total
 £m
  Loans and
advances
to customers
£m
  Debt
securities
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 1 January 3,033 97  3,130  6,414  126  6,540 
Exchange and other adjustments 69   69  (246)   (246)
Disposal of businesses      (82)   (82)
Advances written off (2,111) (22) (2,133) (4,204) (31) (4,235)
Recoveries of advances written off in previous years 861 1  862  764  4  768 
Unwinding of discount (32)   (32) (56)   (56)
Charge (release) to the income statement (note 12) 592   592  443  (2) 441 
At 31 December 2,412 76  2,488  3,033  97  3,130 

Of the total allowance in respect of loans and advances to customers, £1,876 million (2015: £2,425 million) related to lending that had been determined to be impaired (either individually or on a collective basis) at the reporting date.Stage 3 only.

 

Of the total allowance in respect of loansNOTE 21: FINANCIAL ASSETS AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

  2019
£m
  2018
£m
 
Debt securities:        
Government securities  13,098   18,971 
Bank and building society certificates of deposit     118 
Asset-backed securities:        
Mortgage-backed securities  121   120 
Other asset-backed securities  60   131 
Corporate and other debt securities  11,051   5,151 
   24,330   24,491 
Treasury and other bills  535   303 
Equity shares  227   21 
Total financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  25,092   24,815 

All assets were assessed at Stage 1 at 31 December 2018 and advances to customers, £1,208 million (2015: £1,170 million) was assessed on a collective basis.2019.                    

F-36F-49

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

NOTE 22: INVESTMENTS IN JOINT VENTURES AND ASSOCIATES

The Group’s share of results of, and investments in, equity accounted joint ventures and associates comprises:

  Joint ventures Associates Total
  2019
£m
  2018
£m
  2017
£m
  2019
£m
  2018
£m
  2017
£m
  2019
£m
  2018
£m
  2017
£m
 
Share of income statement amounts:                                    
Income  66   8   (5)  (1)     4   65   8   (1)
Expenses  (59)  1               (59  1    
Impairment        7                  7 
Profit (loss) before tax  7   9   2   (1)     4   6   9   6 
Tax                           
Share of post-tax results  7   9   2   (1)     4   6   9   6 
Share of other comprehensive income     8                  8    
Share of total comprehensive income  7   17   2   (1)     4   6   17   6 
Share of balance sheet amounts:                                    
Current assets  347   27       5   15       352   42     
Non-current assets  158   54       6   17       164   71     
Current liabilities  (35)  (2)         (20)      (35)  (22)    
Non-current liabilities  (177)                   (177)       
Share of net assets at 31 December  293   79       11   12       304   91     
Movement in investments over the year:                                    
At 1 January  79   64       12   1       91   65     
Exchange and other adjustments               1          1     
Acquisitions  1                    1        
Establishment of joint venture (note 23)  208                    208        
Additional investments     12          11          23     
Disposals               (1)         (1)    
Share of post-tax results  7   9       (1)         6   9     
Share of other comprehensive income     8                    8     
Dividends paid  (2)  (14)                (2)  (14)    
Share of net assets at 31 December  293   79       11   12       304   91     

The Group’s unrecognised share of losses of associates for the year was £nil (2018: £4 million; 2017; £nil). For entities making losses, subsequent profits earned are not recognised until previously unrecognised losses are extinguished. The Group’s unrecognised share of losses net of unrecognised profits on a cumulative basis of associates is £17 million (2018: £17 million; 2017 £17 million) and of joint ventures is £3 million (2018: £3 million; 2017: £29 million).

Where entities have statutory accounts drawn up to a date other than 31 December management accounts are used when accounting for them by the Group.

NOTE 23: ACQUISITIONS

ACQUISITION OF WORKPLACE PENSIONS BUSINESS

On 1 July 2019, following the receipt of regulatory and legal approvals, the Group completed the acquisition of the UK workplace pensions and savings business of the Zurich Insurance Group. The total fair value of the purchase consideration in the year was £20 million, settled in cash.

The acquisition is intended to enhance Scottish Widows’ offering and broaden its participation in the financial planning and retirement segment whilst delivering a modern, flexible workplace savings platform.

The table below sets out the fair value of the identifiable assets and liabilities acquired.

  Book value as
at 1 July 2019
£m
  Fair value
adjustments
£m
  Fair value as at
1 July 2019
£m
 
Assets            
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  7,350      7,350 
Loans and advances to banks  17      17 
Value of in-force business     6   6 
Assets arising from reinsurance contracts held  13,616      13,616 
Other assets  6      6 
Total assets  20,989   6   20,995 
Liabilities            
Liabilities arising from non-participating investment contracts  20,981      20,981 
Other liabilities  8      8 
Total liabilities  20,989      20,989 
Provisional fair value of net assets acquired     6   6 
Goodwill arising on acquisition          14 
Total consideration          20 
F-50

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 22: AVAILABLE-FOR-SALE FINANCIAL ASSETS

  2016
£m
  2015
£m
 
Debt securities:      
Government securities 48,714  25,329 
Bank and building society certificates of deposit 142  186 
Asset-backed securities:      
Mortgage-backed securities 108  197 
Other asset-backed securities 317  319 
Corporate and other debt securities 6,030  5,808 
  55,311  31,839 
Equity shares 1,213  1,193 
Total available-for-sale financial assets 56,524  33,032 

All assets have been individually assessed for impairment. The criteria used to determine whether an impairment loss has been incurred are disclosed in note 2(H).23: ACQUISITIONScontinued

 

During 2016 government securitiesThe post-acquisition total income of the acquired business, which is included in the Group statutory consolidated income statement for the year ended 31 December 2019, is £22 million; the business also contributed profit before tax of £2 million for the same period.

Had the acquisition date been 1 January 2019, the Group’s consolidated total income would have been £18 million higher at £42,374 million and the Group’s consolidated profit before tax would have been £3 million lower at £4,390 million.

The carrying value of the goodwill arising on acquisition of £14 million has been reviewed at 31 December 2019, with appropriate assumptions made as to the future performance of the acquired business, and no adjustments are considered necessary.

WEALTH MANAGEMENT PARTNERSHIP

Following agreement with Schroders to enter into a partnership to create a new wealth management proposition, during 2019 the Group transferred approximately £13 billion of assets under management from its UK wealth management business and £12 billion of investment funds administered by its existing Authorised Corporate Director business into Scottish Widows Schroder Wealth Holdings Limited.

In connection with this partnership, the Group sold a 49.9 per cent interest in Scottish Widows Schroder Wealth Holdings Limited to Schroders Administration Limited in exchange for a 19.9 per cent interest in Schroder Wealth Holdings Limited, the holding company of Schroders plc’s existing UK wealth management business, valued at £202 million.

Following disposal of the 49.9 per cent interest, the Group accounts for its remaining 50.1 per cent interest in Scottish Widows Schroder Wealth Holdings Limited as a joint venture, which was recorded at a fair value atupon initial recognition of £208 million.

The Group recognised a gain arising from these transactions of £244 million, net of a charge of £70 million for an onerous contract provision in relation to the point of transfer of £22,830 million were reclassified from held-to-maturity investments, (see note 1).services that it is now obligated to provide to the joint venture; this amount is recognised within other operating income.

 

NOTE 23:24: GOODWILL

 

 2016  2015  2019
£m
  2018
£m
 
 £m  £m 
At 1 January and 31 December 2,016  2,016 
At 1 January  2,310   2,310 
Acquisition of businesses (note 23)  14    
At 31 December  2,324   2,310 
Cost1 2,362  2,362   2,664   2,664 
Accumulated impairment losses (346) (346)  (340)  (354)
At 31 December 2,016  2,016   2,324   2,310 

 

1For acquisitions made prior to 1 January 2004, the date of transition to IFRS, cost is included net of amounts amortised up to 31 December 2003.

 

The goodwill held in the Group’s balance sheet is tested at least annually for impairment. For the purposes of impairment testing the goodwill is allocated to the appropriate cash generating unit; of the total balance of £2,016£2,324 million (2015: £2,016(2018: £2,310 million), £1,836 million, or 9179 per cent of the total (2015:(2018: £1,836 million, 9179 per cent of the total) has been allocated to Scottish Widows in the Group’s Insurance division and £170Wealth division; £302 million, or 813 per cent of the total (2015:(2018: £302 million, or 13 per cent of the total) has been allocated to Cards in the Group’s Retail division; and £170 million, 8or 7 per cent of the total (2018: £170 million, 7 per cent of the total) to Motor Finance in the Group’s Consumer FinanceRetail division.

 

The recoverable amount of the goodwill relating to Scottish Widows has been based on a value-in-use calculation. The calculation uses pre-tax projections of future cash flows based upon budgets and plans approved by management covering a five-yearthree-year period, the related run-off of existing business in force and a discount rate of 108 per cent. The budgets and plans are based upon past experience adjusted to take into account anticipated changes in sales volumes, product mix and margins having regard to expected market conditions and competitor activity. The discount rate is determined with reference to internal measures and available industry information. New business cash flows beyond the five-yearthree-year period have been extrapolated using a steady 32 per cent growth rate which does not exceed the long-term average growth rate for the life assurance market. Management believes that any reasonably possible change in the key assumptions above would not cause the recoverable amount of Scottish Widows to fall below its balance sheet carrying value.

 

The recoverable amount of the goodwill relating to Motor Finance has also been based on a value-in-use calculation using pre-tax cash flow projections based on financial budgets and plans approved by management covering a five-yearfour-year period and a discount rate of 14 per cent. The cash flows beyond the five-yearfour-year period are extrapolated using a growth rate of 0.5 per cent which does not exceed the long-term average growth rates for the markets in which Motor Finance participates. Management believes that any reasonably possible change in the key assumptions above would not cause the recoverable amount of Motor Finance to fall below the balance sheet carrying value.

F-37

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The recoverable amount of the goodwill relating to the Cards business has been based on a value-in-use calculation using pre-tax cash flow projections based on financial budgets and plans approved by management covering a five-year period and a discount rate of 10 per cent. The cash flows beyond the five year period assume no growth. Management believes that any reasonably possible change in the key assumptions above would not cause the recoverable amount of the Cards business to fall below the balance sheet carrying value.

 

NOTE 24:25: VALUE OF IN-FORCE BUSINESS

 

Critical accounting estimates and judgementsKEY ASSUMPTIONS

 

The valueimpact of in-force business asset (2016: £4,702 million; 2015: £4,219 million) represents the present value of future profits expected to arise from the portfolio of in-force life insurance and participating investment contracts. The valuation of this asset requires assumptions to be made about future economic and operating conditions which are inherently uncertain andreasonably possible changes could significantly affect the value attributed to this asset. The methodology used to value this asset andin the key assumptions that have been made in determiningrespect of the carrying value ofGroup’s life insurance business, which include the impact on the value of in-forcein force business, asset at 31 December 2016 are set out below.

Key assumptionsdisclosed in note 33.

 

The principal features of the methodology and process used for determining key assumptions used in the calculation of the value of in-force business are set out below:

 

ECONOMIC ASSUMPTIONS

 

Each cash flow is valued using the discount rate consistent with that applied to such a cash flow in the capital markets. In practice, to achieve the same result, where the cash flows are either independent of or move linearly with market movements, a method has been applied known as the ‘certainty equivalent’ approach whereby it is assumed that all assets earn a risk-free rate and all cash flows are discounted at a risk-free rate. The certainty equivalent approach covers all investment assets relating to insurance and participating investment contracts, other than the annuity business (where an illiquidity premium is included, see below).

 

A market-consistent approach has been adopted for the valuation of financial options and guarantees, using a stochastic option pricing technique calibrated to be consistent with the market price of relevant options at each valuation date. Further information on options and guarantees can be found in note 32.

F-51

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 25: VALUE OF IN-FORCE BUSINESS continued

 

The liabilities in respect of the Group’s UK annuity business are matched by a portfolio of fixed interest securities, including a large proportion of corporate bonds and illiquid loan assets. The value of the in-force business asset for UK annuity business has been calculated after taking into account an estimate of the market premium for illiquidity in respect of corporate bond holdings and relevant illiquid loan assets. In determining the market premium for illiquidity, we consider a range of inputs are considered which reflect actual asset allocation and relevant observable market data. The illiquidity premium is estimated to be 13891 basis points at 31 December 2016 (2015: range of 85 to 1442019 (2018: 128 basis points).

 

The risk-free rate is derived from the relevant swap curve with a deduction for credit risk.

 

The table below shows the resulting range of yields and other key assumptions at 31 December:

 

 2016
%
 2015
%
  2019
%
 2018
%
 
Risk-free rate (value of in-force non-annuity business)1 0.00 to 4.20 0.00 to 4.20   0.00 to 3.90   0.00 to 4.05 
Risk-free rate (value of in-force annuity business)1 1.38 to 5.58 0.85 to 5.64   0.91 to 4.81   1.28 to 5.33 
Risk-free rate (financial options and guarantees)1 0.00 to 4.20 0.00 to 2.54   0.00 to 3.90   0.00 to 4.05 
Retail price inflation 3.50 3.27   3.11   3.43 
Expense inflation 3.73 3.65   3.41   3.75 

 

1All risk-free rates are quoted as the range of rates implied by the relevant forward swap curve.

 

NON-MARKET RISK

 

An allowance for non-market risk is made through the choice of best estimate assumptions based upon experience, which generally will give the mean expected financial outcome for shareholders and hence no further allowance for non-market risk is required. However, in the case of operational risk, reinsurer default and the with-profit funds these can be asymmetric in the range of potential outcomes for which an explicit allowance is made.

 

NON-ECONOMIC ASSUMPTIONS

 

Future mortality, morbidity, expenses, lapse and paid-up rate assumptions are reviewed each year and are based on an analysis of past experience and on management’s view of future experience. Further information on these assumptions is given in note 32 and the effect of changes in key assumptions is given in note 33.

 

The gross value of in-force business asset in the consolidated balance sheet is as follows:

 

  2016
£m
 2015
£m
 
Acquired value of in-force non-participating investment contracts 340 377 
Value of in-force insurance and participating investment contracts 4,702 4,219 
Total value of in-force business 5,042 4,596 

The movement in the acquired value of in-force non-participating investment contracts over the year is as follows:

 2019
£m
  2018
£m
 
Acquired value of in-force non-participating investment contracts  247   271 
Value of in-force insurance and participating investment contracts  5,311   4,491 
Total value of in-force business  5,558   4,762 
        
The movement in the acquired value of in-force non-participating investment contracts over the year is as follows:The movement in the acquired value of in-force non-participating investment contracts over the year is as follows:     
        
 2016
£m
 2015
£m
   2019
£m
   2018
£m
 
At 1 January 377 418   271   306 
Amortisation taken to income statement (note 11) (37)(41)
Acquisition of business  6   5 
Amortisation (note 11)  (30)  (40)
At 31 December 340 377   247   271 

 

The acquired value of in-force non-participating investment contracts includes £206£150 million (2015: £228(2018: £167 million) in relation to OEIC business.

F-38F-52

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 24:25: VALUE OF IN-FORCE BUSINESScontinued

Movement in value of in-force business

 

The movement in the value of in-force insurance and participating investment contracts over the year is as follows:

 

 2016
£m
  2015
£m
  2019
£m
 2018
£m
 
At 1 January 4,219  4,446   4,491   4,533 
Exchange and other adjustments 11  (5)  (5)  13 
Movements in the year:              
New business 428  454   696   675 
Existing business:              
Expected return (210) (365)  (274)  (304)
Experience variances (137) (130)  (43)  (122)
Assumption changes 127  (209)  102   (67)
Economic variance 264  88   344   (237)
Movement in the value of in-force business taken to income statement (note 9) 472  (162)
Disposal of businesses   (60)
Movement in the value of in-force business (note 9)  825   (55)
At 31 December 4,702  4,219   5,311   4,491 

 

This breakdown shows the movement in the value of in-force business only, and does not represent the full contribution that each item in the breakdown contributesmakes to profit before tax. This will also contain changes in the other assets and liabilities, including the effects of changes in assumptions used to value the liabilities, of the relevant businesses. The presentation of economic variance includes the impact of financial market conditions being different at the end of the reporting periodyear from those included in assumptions used to calculate new and existing business returns.

 

NOTE 25:26: OTHER INTANGIBLE ASSETS

 

 Brands
£m
 Core deposit
intangible
£m
 Purchased
credit card
relationships
£m
 Customer-
related
intangibles
£m
  Capitalised
software
enhancements
£m
   Total
£m
  Brands
£m
 Core deposit
intangible
£m
 Purchased
credit card
relationships
£m
 Customer-
related
intangibles
£m
 Capitalised
software
enhancements
£m
 Total
£m
 
Cost:                     
At 1 January 2015 596 2,770 315 538  1,509   5,728 
At 1 January 2018  596   2,770   1,017   538   2,940   7,861 
Additions      306   306               1,046   1,046 
Disposals      (1)  (1)        (15)     (55)  (70)
At 31 December 2015 596 2,770 315 538  1,814   6,033 
At 31 December 2018  596   2,770   1,002   538   3,931   8,837 
Exchange and other adjustments              4   4 
Additions      463   463               1,033   1,033 
Disposals      (110)  (110)              (10)  (10)
At 31 December 2016 596 2,770 315 538  2,167   6,386 
At 31 December 2019  596   2,770   1,002   538   4,958   9,864 
Accumulated amortisation:                                
At 1 January 2015 128 2,160 305 456  609   3,658 
At 1 January 2018  193   2,770   355   519   1,189   5,026 
Charge for the year 21 300 4 16  196   537   23      71   19   400   513 
Disposals                  (15)     (34)  (49)
At 31 December 2015 149 2,460 309 472  805   4,195 
At 31 December 2018  216   2,770   411   538   1,555   5,490 
Exchange and other adjustments              4   4 
Charge for the year 22 297 2 27  234   582         70      496   566 
Disposals      (72)  (72)              (4)  (4)
At 31 December 2016 171 2,757 311 499  967   4,705 
Balance sheet amount at 31 December 2016 425 13 4 39  1,200   1,681 
Balance sheet amount at 31 December 2015 447 310 6 66  1,009   1,838 
At 31 December 2019  216   2,770   481   538   2,051   6,056 
Balance sheet amount at 31 December 2019  380      521      2,907   3,808 
Balance sheet amount at 31 December 2018  380      591      2,376   3,347 

 

Included within brands above are assetsBrands of £380 million (31 December 2015:2018: £380 million) that have been determined to have indefinite useful lives and are not amortised. These brands use the Bank of Scotland name which has been in existence for over 300 years. These brands are well established financial services brands and there are no indications that they should not have an indefinite useful life.

 

The core deposit intangible is the benefit derived from a large stable deposit base that has low interest rates, and the balance sheet amount at 31 December 2016 shown above will become fully amortised during 2017.

The purchased credit card relationships represent the benefit of recurring income generated from the portfolioportfolios of credit cards purchased.

The customer-related intangibles include customer lists and the benefitsbalance sheet amount at 31 December 2019 is expected to be amortised over its remaining useful life of customer relationships that generate recurring income.

Capitalised software enhancements principally comprise identifiable and directly associated internal staff and other costs.eight years.

F-39F-53

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 26:27: PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

 

  Investment
properties
£m
   Premises
£m
   Equipment
£m
   Operating
lease assets
£m
   Total
£m
  Investment
properties
£m
 Premises
£m
 Equipment
£m
 Operating
lease assets
£m
 Right-of-
use asset1
£m
 Total
£m
 
Cost or valuation:                                 
At 1 January 2015  4,492   2,893   4,643   4,605   16,633 
At 1 January 2018  3,699   1,791   5,068   6,528       17,086 
Exchange and other adjustments  (5)        23   18         (6)  11       5 
Additions     141   1,071   1,702   2,914      72   519   1,755       2,346 
Expenditure on investment properties (see below)  272            272   143                143 
Change in fair value of investment properties (note 7)  416            416   139                139 
Disposals  (814)  (172)  (281)  (1,307)  (2,574)  (211)  (647)  (574)  (1,540)      (2,972)
Disposal of businesses     (273)  (167)     (440)
At 31 December 2015  4,361   2,589   5,266   5,023   17,239 
At 31 December 2018  3,770   1,216   5,007   6,754       16,747 
Adjustment on adoption of IFRS 16 (note 55)              1,716   1,716 
Balance at 1 January 2019  3,770   1,216   5,007   6,754   1,716   18,463 
Exchange and other adjustments  13   2   6   112   133   16   3   5   (4)     20 
Additions     59   806   2,088   2,953      121   522   1,693   196   2,532 
Expenditure on investment properties (see below)  344            344   73               73 
Change in fair value of investment properties (note 7)  (83)           (83)  (108)              (108)
Disposals  (871)  (100)  (113)  (1,017)  (2,101)  (198)  (245)  (238)  (1,694)  (27)  (2,402)
At 31 December 2016  3,764   2,550   5,965   6,206   18,485 
At 31 December 2019  3,553   1,095   5,296   6,749   1,885   18,578 
Accumulated depreciation and impairment:                                            
At 1 January 2015     1,374   1,883   832   4,089 
At 1 January 2018     728   2,125   1,506       4,359 
Exchange and other adjustments     9   (2)  7   14      1   (8)  6       (1)
Depreciation charge for the year     116   588   830   1,534      121   715   1,016       1,852 
Disposals     (90)  (245)  (752)  (1,087)     (634)  (534)  (595)      (1,763)
Disposal of businesses     (162)  (128)     (290)
At 31 December 2015     1,247   2,096   917   4,260 
At 31 December 2018     216   2,298   1,933       4,447 
Exchange and other adjustments     (1)  (8)  49   40         (1)  (36)  1   (36)
Depreciation charge for the year     136   672   953   1,761      125   715   1,008   216   2,064 
Disposals     (49)  (89)  (410)  (548)     (225)  (180)  (595)  (1)  (1,001)
At 31 December 2016     1,333   2,671   1,509   5,513 
Balance sheet amount at 31 December 2016  3,764   1,217   3,294   4,697   12,972 
Balance sheet amount at 31 December 2015  4,361   1,342   3,170   4,106   12,979 
At 31 December 2019     116   2,832   2,310   216   5,474 
Balance sheet amount at 31 December 2019  3,553   979   2,464   4,439   1,669   13,104 
Balance sheet amount at 31 December 2018  3,770   1,000   2,709   4,821      12,300 

1Primarily premises.

 

Expenditure on investment properties is comprised as follows:

 

 2016
£m
 2015
£m
  2019
£m
 2018
£m
 
Acquisitions of new properties 251 165   21   81 
Additional expenditure on existing properties 93 107   52   62 
 344 272   73   143 

 

Rental income of £229£191 million (2015: £268(2018: £197 million) and direct operating expenses arising from properties that generate rental income of £26£32 million (2015: £27(2018: £23 million) have been recognised in the income statement.

 

Capital expenditure in respect of investment properties which had been contracted for but not recognised in the financial statements was £65£7 million (2015: £37(2018: £33 million).

 

The table above analyses movements in investment properties, all of which are categorised as level 3. See note 4950 for details of levels in the fair value hierarchy.

 

At 31 December the future minimum rentals receivable under non-cancellable operating leases were as follows:

 

 2016
£m
 2015
£m
  2019
£m
 2018
£m
 
Receivable within 1 year 1,120 1,003   978   1,095 
1 to 5 years 1,373 1,163 
1 to 2 years  620   681 
2 to 3 years  312   332 
3 to 4 years  102   113 
4 to 5 years  12   30 
Over 5 years 347 172   2   6 
Total future minimum rentals receivable 2,840 2,338   2,026   2,257 

 

Equipment leased to customers under operating leases primarily relates to vehicle contract hire arrangements. During 2015 and 2016 no contingent rentals in respect of operating leases were recognised in the income statement.

In addition, total future minimum sub-lease income of £109 million at 31 December 2016 (£72 million at 31 December 2015) is expected to be received under non-cancellable sub-leases of the Group’s premises.

F-40F-54

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the consolidated financial statements

NOTE 27: OTHER ASSETS

  2016
£m
  2015
£m
 
Assets arising from reinsurance contracts held (notes 32 and 34)  714   675 
Deferred acquisition and origination costs  81   106 
Settlement balances  700   264 
Corporate pension asset  6,645   7,725 
Investments in joint ventures and associates  59   47 
Other assets and prepayments  4,556   5,047 
Total other assets  12,755   13,864 

 

NOTE 28: DEPOSITS FROM BANKSOTHER ASSETS

 

  2016
£m
  2015
£m
 
Liabilities in respect of securities sold under repurchase agreements  7,279   7,061 
Other deposits from banks  9,105   9,864 
Deposits from banks  16,384   16,925 

For amounts included above which are subject to repurchase agreements see note 52.

  2019  2018 
  £m  £m 
Deferred acquisition and origination costs  83   90 
Settlement balances  654   743 
Other assets and prepayments  3,737   3,742 
Total other assets  4,474   4,575 

 

NOTE 29: CUSTOMER DEPOSITS

  2016
£m
  2015
£m
 
Non-interest bearing current accounts  61,804   48,518 
Interest bearing current accounts  90,978   85,491 
Savings and investment accounts  208,227   224,137 
Liabilities in respect of securities sold under repurchase agreements  2,462    
Other customer deposits  51,989   60,180 
Customer deposits  415,460   418,326 

For amounts included above which are subject to repurchase agreements, see note 52.

Included in the amounts reported above are deposits of £219,106 million (2015: £230,110 million) which are protected under the UK Financial Services Compensation Scheme.

NOTE 30: TRADING AND OTHER FINANCIAL LIABILITIES AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS

 

 2016
£m
  2015
£m
  2019 2018 
Liabilities held at fair value through profit or loss  9,425   7,879 
 £m £m 
Liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss:     
Debt securities in issue  7,531   7,085 
Other     11 
  7,531   7,096 
Trading liabilities:                
Liabilities in respect of securities sold under repurchase agreements   42,067   38,431   11,048   21,595 
Other deposits  530   1,113   98   242 
Short positions in securities  2,482   4,440   2,809   1,614 
  45,079   43,984   13,955   23,451 
Trading and other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss  54,504   51,863 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss  21,486   30,547 

 

Liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss primarily represent debt securities in issue which either contain substantive embedded derivatives which would otherwise need to be recognised and measured at fair value separately from the related debt securities, or which are accounted for at fair value to significantly reduce an accounting mismatch.

 

The amount contractually payable on maturity of the debt securities held at fair value through profit or loss at 31 December 20162019 was £16,079£14,365 million, which was £6,656£6,834 million higher than the balance sheet carrying value (2015: £12,034(2018: £15,435 million, which was £4,156£8,350 million higher than the balance sheet carrying value). At 31 December 20162019 there was a cumulative £95£33 million increase in the fair value of these liabilities attributable to changes in credit spread risk; this is determined by reference to the quoted credit spreads of Lloyds Bank plc, the issuing entity within the Group. Of the cumulative amount an increase of £28£419 million arose in 20162019 and a decrease of £114£533 million arose in 2015.2018.

 

For the fair value of collateral pledged in respect of repurchase agreements see note 52.53.

NOTE 30: DEBT SECURITIES IN ISSUE

  2019  2018 
  £m  £m 
Medium-term notes issued  41,291   37,490 
Covered bonds (note 31)  29,821   28,194 
Certificates of deposit issued  10,598   12,020 
Securitisation notes (note 31)  7,288   5,426 
Commercial paper  8,691   8,038 
Total debt securities in issue  97,689   91,168 
F-41F-55

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the consolidated financial statements

 

NOTE 31: DEBT SECURITIES IN ISSUESECURITISATIONS AND COVERED BONDS

 

  2016
£m
  2015
£m
 
Medium-term notes issued  27,182   29,329 
Covered bonds (note 19)  30,521   27,200 
Certificates of deposit issued  8,077   11,101 
Securitisation notes (note 19)  7,253   7,763 
Commercial paper  3,281   6,663 
Total debt securities in issue  76,314   82,056 

SECURITISATION PROGRAMMES

Loans and advances to customers and debt securities carried at amortised cost include loans securitised under the Group’s securitisation programmes, the majority of which have been sold by subsidiary companies to bankruptcy remote structured entities. As the structured entities are funded by the issue of debt on terms whereby the majority of the risks and rewards of the portfolio are retained by the subsidiary, the structured entities are consolidated fully and all of these loans are retained on the Group’s balance sheet, with the related notes in issue included within debt securities in issue.

COVERED BOND PROGRAMMES

Certain loans and advances to customers have been assigned to bankruptcy remote limited liability partnerships to provide security for issues of covered bonds by the Group. The Group retains all of the risks and rewards associated with these loans and the partnerships are consolidated fully with the loans retained on the Group’s balance sheet and the related covered bonds in issue included within debt securities in issue.

The Group’s principal securitisation and covered bond programmes, together with the balances of the advances subject to these arrangements and the carrying value of the notes in issue at 31 December, are listed below. The notes in issue are reported in note 30.

  2019 2018
  Loans and
advances
securitised
  Notes
in issue
  Loans and
advances
securitised
  Notes
in issue
 
  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Securitisation programmes            
UK residential mortgages  25,815   23,505   25,018   22,485 
Commercial loans  5,116   6,037   5,746   6,577 
Credit card receivables  8,164   5,767   8,060   5,263 
Motor vehicle finance  3,450   3,462   2,850   2,855 
   42,545   38,771   41,674   37,180 
Less held by the Group      (31,436)      (31,701)
Total securitisation programmes (notes 29 and 30)1      7,335       5,479 
Covered bond programmes                
Residential mortgage-backed  37,579   29,321   34,963   27,694 
Social housing loan-backed  1,552   600   1,839   1,200 
   39,131   29,921   36,802   28,894 
Less held by the Group      (100)      (700)
Total covered bond programmes (note 30)      29,821       28,194 
Total securitisation and covered bond programmes      37,156       33,673 

1Includes £47 million (2018: £53 million) of securitisation notes held at fair value through profit or loss.

Cash deposits of £4,703 million (2018: £4,102 million) which support the debt securities issued by the structured entities, the term advances related to covered bonds and other legal obligations are held by the Group. Additionally, the Group had certain contractual arrangements to provide liquidity facilities to some of these structured entities. At 31 December 2019 these obligations had not been triggered; the maximum exposure under these facilities was £56 million (2018: £88 million).

The Group has a number of covered bond programmes, for which limited liability partnerships have been established to ring-fence asset pools and guarantee the covered bonds issued by the Group. At the reporting date the Group had over-collateralised these programmes as set out in the table above to meet the terms of the programmes, to secure the rating of the covered bonds and to provide operational flexibility. From time-to-time, the obligations of the Group to provide collateral may increase due to the formal requirements of the programmes. The Group may also voluntarily contribute collateral to support the ratings of the covered bonds.

The Group recognises the full liabilities associated with its securitisation and covered bond programmes within debt securities in issue, although the obligations of the Group in respect of its securitisation issuances are limited to the cash flows generated from the underlying assets. The Group could be required to provide additional support to a number of the securitisation programmes to support the credit ratings of the debt securities issued, in the form of increased cash reserves and the holding of subordinated notes. Further, certain programmes contain contractual obligations that require the Group to repurchase assets should they become credit impaired.

The Group has not provided financial or other support by voluntarily offering to repurchase assets from any of its public securitisation programmes during 2019 (2018: none).

F-56

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

 

NOTE 32: LIABILITIES ARISING FROM INSURANCE CONTRACTS AND PARTICIPATING INVESTMENT CONTRACTS

 

Insurance contract and participating investment contract liabilities are comprised as follows:

 

 2019 2018
 2016 2015  Gross Reinsurance1 Net Gross Reinsurance1 Net 
 Gross
£m
 Reinsurance1
£m
 Net
£m
 Gross
£m
 Reinsurance1
£m
 Net
£m
  £m £m £m £m £m £m 
Life insurance (see (1) below):                                          
Insurance contracts  79,793   (671)  79,122   66,122   (629)  65,493   96,812   (715)  96,097   84,366   (716)  83,650 
Participating investment contracts  13,984      13,984   13,460      13,460   14,063      14,063   13,912      13,912 
  93,777   (671)  93,106   79,582   (629)  78,953   110,875   (715)  110,160   98,278   (716)  97,562 
Non-life insurance contracts (see (2) below):                                                
Unearned premiums  404   (14)  390   461   (12)  449   333   (14)  319   342   (13)  329 
Claims outstanding  209      209   251      251   241      241   254      254 
  613   (14)  599   712   (12)  700   574   (14)  560   596   (13)  583 
Total  94,390   (685)  93,705   80,294   (641)  79,653   111,449   (729)  110,720   98,874   (729)  98,145 

 

1Reinsurance balances are reported within other assets (note 27).assets.

 

(1) Life insurance

 

The movement in life insurance contract and participating investment contract liabilities over the year can be analysed as follows:

 

  Insurance
contracts
£m
  Participating
investment
contracts
£m
  Gross
£m
  Reinsurance
£m
  Net
£m
 
At 1 January 2015  72,168   14,102   86,270   (636)  85,634 
New business  2,422   28   2,450   (4)  2,446 
Changes in existing business  (4,681)  (667)  (5,348)  11   (5,337)
Change in liabilities charged to the income statement (note 10)  (2,259)  (639)  (2,898)  7   (2,891)
Exchange and other adjustments  39   (1)  38      38 
Disposal of businesses  (3,826)  (2)  (3,828)     (3,828)
At 31 December 2015  66,122   13,460   79,582   (629)  78,953 
New business  4,422   28   4,450   (5)  4,445 
Changes in existing business  9,214   496   9,710   (37)  9,673 
Change in liabilities charged to the income statement (note 10)  13,636   524   14,160   (42)  14,118 
Exchange and other adjustments  35      35      35 
At 31 December 2016  79,793   13,984   93,777   (671)  93,106 

F-42

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 32: LIABILITIES ARISING FROM INSURANCE CONTRACTS AND PARTICIPATING INVESTMENT CONTRACTScontinued

  Insurance
contracts
  Participating
investment
contracts
  Gross  Reinsurance  Net 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 1 January 2018  86,949   15,881   102,830   (563)  102,267 
New business  5,476   31   5,507   (42)  5,465 
Changes in existing business  (8,072)  (2,000)  (10,072)  (111)  (10,183)
Change in liabilities charged to the income statement  (2,596)  (1,969)  (4,565)  (153)  (4,718)
Exchange and other adjustments  13      13      13 
At 31 December 2018  84,366   13,912   98,278   (716)  97,562 
New business  5,684   37   5,721   (45)  5,676 
Changes in existing business  6,798   114   6,912   46   6,958 
Change in liabilities charged to the income statement (note 10)  12,482   151   12,633   1   12,634 
Exchange and other adjustments  (36)     (36)     (36)
At 31 December 2019  96,812   14,063   110,875   (715)  110,160 

 

Liabilities for insurance contracts and participating investment contracts can be split into with-profit fund liabilities, accounted for using the PRA’s realistic capital regime (realistic liabilities) and non-profit fund liabilities, accounted for using a prospective actuarial discounted cash flow methodology, as follows:

 

 2019 2018
 2016 2015  With-profit
fund
 Non-profit
fund
 Total With-profit
fund
 Non-profit
fund
 Total 
 With-profit
fund
 £m
 Non-profit
fund
£m
 Total
£m
 With-profit
fund
£m
 Non-profit
fund
£m
 Total
£m
  £m £m £m £m £m £m 
Insurance contracts  9,147   70,646   79,793   9,023   57,099   66,122   8,018   88,794   96,812   7,851   76,515   84,366 
Participating investment contracts  8,860   5,124   13,984   9,341   4,119   13,460   7,222   6,841   14,063   7,438   6,474   13,912 
Total  18,007   75,770   93,777   18,364   61,218   79,582   15,240   95,635   110,875   15,289   82,989   98,278 

 

WITH-PROFIT FUND REALISTIC LIABILITIES

 

(I) BUSINESS DESCRIPTION

 

Scottish Widows Limited has the only with-profit funds within the Group. The primary purpose of the conventional and unitised business written in the with-profit funds is to provide a smoothed investment vehicle to policyholders, protecting them against short-term market fluctuations. Payouts may be subject to a guaranteed minimum payout if certain policy conditions are met. With-profit policyholders are entitled to at least 90 per cent of the distributed profits, with the shareholders receiving the balance. The policyholders are also usually insured against death and the policy may carry a guaranteed annuity option at retirement.

 

(II) METHOD OF CALCULATION OF LIABILITIES

 

With-profit liabilities are stated at their realistic value, the main components of which are:

 

With–profitWith-profit benefit reserve, the total asset shares for with-profit policies;
  
Cost of options and guarantees (including guaranteed annuity options);
  
Deductions levied against asset shares;
  
Planned enhancements to with-profits benefits reserve; and
  
Impact of the smoothing policy.
F-57

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

 

Note 32: Liabilities arising from insurance contracts and participating investment contractscontinued

(III) ASSUMPTIONS

 

Key assumptions used in the calculation of with-profit liabilities, and the processes for determining these, are:

 

INVESTMENT RETURNS AND DISCOUNT RATESInvestment returns and discount rates

 

With-profit fund liabilities are valued on a market-consistent basis, achieved by the use of a valuation model which values liabilities on a basis calibrated to tradable market option contracts and other observable market data. The with-profit fund financial options and guarantees are valued using a stochastic simulation model where all assets are assumed to earn, on average, the risk-free yield and all cash flows are discounted using the risk-free yield. The risk-free yield is defined as the spot yield derived from the relevant swap curve, adjusted for credit risk. Further information on significant options and guarantees is given below.

 

GUARANTEED ANNUITY OPTION TAKE-UP RATESGuaranteed annuity option take-up rates

 

Certain pension contracts contain guaranteed annuity options that allow the policyholder to take an annuity benefit on retirement at annuity rates that were guaranteed at the outset of the contract. For contracts that contain such options, key assumptions in determining the cost of options are economic conditions in which the option has value, mortality rates and take up rates of other options. The financial impact is dependent on the value of corresponding investments, interest rates and longevity at the time of the claim.

 

INVESTMENT VOLATILITYInvestment volatility

 

The calibration of the stochastic simulation model uses implied volatilities of derivatives where possible, or historical volatility where it is not possible to observe meaningful prices.

 

MORTALITYMortality

 

The mortality assumptions, including allowances for improvements in longevity for annuitants, are set with regard to the Group’s actual experience where this is significant, and relevant industry data otherwise.

 

LAPSE RATES (PERSISTENCY)Lapse rates (persistency)

 

Lapse rates refer to the rate of policy termination or the rate at which policyholders stop paying regular premiums due under the contract.

 

Historical persistency experience is analysed using statistical techniques. As experience can vary considerably between different product types and for contracts that have been in force for different periods, the data is broken down into broadly homogenous groups for the purposes of this analysis.

 

The most recent experience is considered along with the results of previous analyses and management’s views on future experience, taking into consideration potential changes in future experience that may result from guarantees and options becoming more valuable under adverse market conditions, in order to determine a ‘best estimate’ view of what persistency will be. In determining this best estimate view a number of factors are considered, including the credibility of the results (which will be affected by the volume of data available), any exceptional events that have occurred during the period under consideration, any known or expected trends in underlying data and relevant published market data.

F-43

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 32: LIABILITIES ARISING FROM INSURANCE CONTRACTS AND PARTICIPATING INVESTMENT CONTRACTScontinued

 

(IV) OPTIONS AND GUARANTEES WITHIN THE WITH-PROFIT FUNDS

 

The most significant options and guarantees provided from within the With-Profit Funds are in respect of guaranteed minimum cash benefits on death, maturity, retirement or certain policy anniversaries, and guaranteed annuity options on retirement for certain pension policies.

 

For those policies written in Scottish Widows pre-demutualisation containing potentially valuable options and guarantees, under the terms of the Scheme a separate memorandum account was set up, within the With-Profit Fund originally held in Scottish Widows plc and subsequently transferred into Scottish Widows Limited, called the Additional Account which is available, inter alia, to meet any additional costs of providing guaranteed benefits in respect of those policies. The Additional Account had a value at 31 December 20162019 of £2.7£2.6 billion (2015:(2018: £2.5 billion). The eventual cost of providing benefits on policies written both pre and post demutualisation is dependent upon a large number of variables, including future interest rates and equity values, demographic factors, such as mortality, and the proportion of policyholders who seek to exercise their options. The ultimate cost will therefore not be known for many years.

 

As noted above, the liabilities of the With-Profit Funds are valued using a market-consistent stochastic simulation model which places a value on the options and guarantees which captures both their intrinsic value and their time value.

 

The most significant economic assumptions included in the model are risk-free yield and investment volatility.

 

NON-PROFIT FUND LIABILITIES

 

(I) BUSINESS DESCRIPTION

 

The Group principally writes the following types of life insurance contracts within its non-profit funds. Shareholder profits on these types of business arise from management fees and other policy charges.

 

Unit-linked business

This includes unit-linked pensions and unit-linked bonds, the primary purpose of which is to provide an investment vehicle where the policyholder is also insured against death.

 

Life insurance

The policyholder is insured against death or permanent disability, usually for predetermined amounts. Such business includes whole of life and term assurance and long-term creditor policies.

 

Annuities

The policyholder is entitled to payments for the duration of their life and is therefore insured against surviving longer than expected.

 

(II) METHOD OF CALCULATION OF LIABILITIES

 

The non-profit fund liabilities are determined on the basis of recognised actuarial methods and involve estimating future policy cash flows over the duration of the in-force book of policies, and discounting the cash flows back to the valuation date allowing for probabilities of occurrence.

 

(III) ASSUMPTIONS

 

Generally, assumptions used to value non-profit fund liabilities are prudent in nature and therefore contain a margin for adverse deviation. This margin for adverse deviation is based on management’s judgement and reflects management’s views on the inherent level of uncertainty. The key assumptions used in the measurement of non-profit fund liabilities are:

F-58

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

 

INTEREST RATESNOTE 32: LIABILITIES ARISING FROM INSURANCE CONTRACTS AND PARTICIPATING INVESTMENT CONTRACTScontinued

Interest rates

 

The rates of interest used are determined by reference to a number of factors including the redemption yields on fixed interest assets at the valuation date.

 

Margins for risk are allowed for in the assumed interest rates. These are derived from the limits in the guidelines set by local regulatory bodies,rates, including reductions made to the available yields to allow for default risk based upon the credit rating of the securities allocated to the insurance liability.

 

MORTALITY AND MORBIDITYMortality and morbidity

 

The mortality and morbidity assumptions, including allowances for improvements in longevity for annuitants, are set with regard to the Group’s actual experience where this provides a reliable basis, and relevant industry data otherwise, and include a margin for adverse deviation.

 

LAPSE RATES (PERSISTENCY)Lapse rates (persistency)

 

Lapse rates are allowed for on some non-profit fund contracts. The process for setting these rates is as described for with-profit liabilities, however a prudent scenario is assumed by the inclusion of a margin for adverse deviation within the non-profit fund liabilities.

 

MAINTENANCE EXPENSESMaintenance expenses

 

Allowance is made for future policy costs explicitly. Expenses are determined by reference to an internal analysis of current and expected future costs plus a margin for adverse deviation. Explicit allowance is made for future expense inflation.

 

KEY CHANGES IN ASSUMPTIONSKey changes in assumptions

 

A detailed review of the Group’s assumptions in 20162019 resulted in the following key impacts on profit before tax:

 

Change in persistency assumptions (£4867 million decrease).

Change in the assumption in respect of current and future mortality and morbidity rates (£194164 million increase).

Change in expenses assumptions (£109208 million decrease)increase).

Included within change in expenses assumptions are the impacts associated with exiting the Standard Life Aberdeen investment management agreement.

 

These amounts include the impacts of movements in liabilities and value of the in-force business in respect of insurance contracts and participating investment contracts.

F-44

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 32: LIABILITIES ARISING FROM INSURANCE CONTRACTS AND PARTICIPATING INVESTMENT CONTRACTScontinued

 

(IV) OPTIONS AND GUARANTEES OUTSIDE THE WITH-PROFIT FUNDS

 

A number of typical guarantees are provided outside the With-Profit Funds such as guaranteed payments on death (e.g. term assurance) or guaranteed income for life (e.g. annuities). In addition, certain personal pension policyholders in Scottish Widows, for whom reinstatement to their occupational pension scheme was not an option, have been given a guarantee that their pension and other benefits will correspond in value to the benefits of the relevant occupational pension scheme. The key assumptions affecting the ultimate value of the guarantee are future salary growth, gilt yields at retirement, annuitant mortality at retirement, marital status at retirement and future investment returns. There is currently a provision, calculated on a deterministic basis, of £82£64 million (2015: £68(2018: £39 million) in respect of those guarantees.

 

(2) Non-life insurance

 

For non-life insurance contracts, the methodology and assumptions used in relation to determining the bases of the earned premium and claims provisioning levels are derived for each individual underwritten product. Assumptions are intended to be neutral estimates of the most likely or expected outcome. There has been no significant change in the assumptions and methodologies used for setting reserves.

 

The movements in non-life insurance contract liabilities and reinsurance assets over the year have been as follows:

 

 2019  2018 
 2016
£m
  2015
£m
  £m  £m 
Provisions for unearned premiums              
Gross provision at 1 January  461   424   342   358 
Increase in the year  827   934   663   681 
Release in the year  (884)  (897)  (672)  (697)
Change in provision for unearned premiums charged to income statement  (57)  37   (9)  (16)
Gross provision at 31 December  404   461   333   342 
Reinsurers’ share  (14)  (12)  (14)  (13)
Net provision at 31 December  390   449   319   329 

 

These provisions represent the liability for short-term insurance contracts for which the Group’s obligations are not expired at the year end.

 

 2019  2018 
 2016
£m
  2015
£m
  £m  £m 
Claims outstanding              
Gross claims outstanding at 1 January  251   224   254   225 
Cash paid for claims settled in the year  (408)  (343)  (300)  (306)
Increase/(decrease) in liabilities1  366   370 
Change in liabilities charged to the income statement  (42)  27 
Increase/(decrease) in liabilities charged to the income statement1  287   335 
  (13)  29 
Gross claims outstanding at 31 December  209   251   241   254 
Reinsurers’ share            
Net claims outstanding at 31 December  209   251   241   254 
Notified claims  122   117   128   170 
Incurred but not reported  87   134   113   84 
Net claims outstanding at 31 December  209   251   241   254 

 

1Of which an increase of £363£335 million (2015: £393(2018: £367 million) was in respect of current year claims and an increase of £3 million (2015:a decrease of £23£48 million (2018: a decrease of £32 million) was in respect of prior year claims.
F-45F-59

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 33: LIFE INSURANCE SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

Elements of the valuations of liabilities arising from insurance contracts and participating investment contracts require assumptions to be made about future investment returns, future mortality rates and future policyholder behaviour and are subject to significant management judgement and estimation uncertainty. The methodology used to value these liabilities and the key assumptions that have been made in determining their carrying value are set out in note 32.

 

The following table demonstrates the effect of reasonably possible changes in key assumptions on profit before tax and equity disclosed in these financial statements assuming that the other assumptions remain unchanged. In practice this is unlikely to occur, and changes in some assumptions may be correlated. These amounts include movements in assets, liabilities and the value of the in-force business in respect of insurance contracts and participating investment contracts. The impact is shown in one direction but can be assumed to be reasonably symmetrical.

 

 2019  2018 
 Increase    Increase   
 (reduction) Increase  (reduction) Increase 
     in profit (reduction) in profit (reduction)
   2016  2015  Change in before tax in equity  before tax in equity 
 Change in
variable
 Increase
(reduction)
in profit
before tax
£m
 Increase
(reduction)
in equity
£m
  Increase
(reduction)
in profit
before tax
£m
 Increase
(reduction)
in equity
£m
  variable £m  £m  £m £m 
Non-annuitant mortality and morbidity1 5% reduction  25   21   32   26  5% reduction  19   16   22   18 
Annuitant mortality2 5% reduction  (287)  (238)  (190)  (156) 5% reduction  (293)  (243)  (234)  (194)
Lapse rates3 10% reduction  48   40   85   70  10% reduction  107   89   89   74 
Future maintenance and investment expenses4 10% reduction  318   264   231   190  10% reduction  299   248   262   217 
Risk-free rate5 0.25% reduction  (74)  (62)  (44)  (37) 0.25% reduction  33   28   76   63 
Guaranteed annuity option take up6 5% addition  (12)  (10)  2   2  5% addition  (1)  (1)  (3)  (2)
Equity investment volatility7 1% addition  (10)  (8)  (7)  (5) 1% addition  (2)  (1)  (5)  (4)
Widening of credit default spreads on corporate bonds8 0.25% addition  (200)  (166)  (183)  (151) 0.25% addition  (424)  (352)  (364)  (303)
Increase in illiquidity premia9 0.10% addition  152   126   120   98  0.10% addition  191   159   153   127 

 

Assumptions have been flexed on the basis used to calculate the value of in-force business and the realistic and statutory reserving bases.

 

1This sensitivity shows the impact of reducing mortality and morbidity rates on non-annuity business to 95 per cent of the expected rate.
  
2This sensitivity shows the impact on the annuity and deferred annuity business of reducing mortality rates to 95 per cent of the expected rate.
  
3This sensitivity shows the impact of reducing lapse and surrender rates to 90 per cent of the expected rate.
  
4This sensitivity shows the impact of reducing maintenance expenses and investment expenses to 90 per cent of the expected rate.
  
5This sensitivity shows the impact on the value of in-force business, financial options and guarantee costs, statutory reserves and asset values of reducing the risk-free rate by 25 basis points.
  
6This sensitivity shows the impact of a flat 5 per cent addition to the expected rate.
  
7This sensitivity shows the impact of a flat 1 per cent addition to the expected rate.
  
8This sensitivity shows the impact of a 25 basis point increase in credit default spreads on corporate bonds and the corresponding reduction in market values. Swap curves, the risk-free rate and illiquidity premia are all assumed to be unchanged.
  
9This sensitivity shows the impact of a 10 basis point increase in the allowance for illiquidity premia. It assumes the overall spreads on assets are unchanged and hence market values are unchanged. Swap curves and the non-annuity risk-free rate are both assumed to be unchanged. The increased illiquidity premium increases the annuity risk-free rate.

 

NOTE 34: LIABILITIES ARISING FROM NON-PARTICIPATING INVESTMENT CONTRACTS

 

The movement in liabilities arising from non-participating investment contracts may be analysed as follows:

 

 2019  2018 
 2016
£m
  2015
£m
  £m  £m 
At 1 January  22,777   27,248   13,853   15,447 
Acquisition of business (note 23)  20,981    
New business  560   539   1,810   668 
Changes in existing business  (3,225)  (4,461)  815   (2,262)
Disposal of businesses     (549)
At 31 December  20,112   22,777   37,459   13,853 

 

The balances above are shown gross of reinsurance. As at 31 December 2016,2019, related reinsurance balances were £29£21 million (2015: £34(2018: £20 million); reinsurance balances are reported within other assets (note 27).assets. Liabilities arising from non-participating investment contracts are categorised as level 2. See note 4950 for details of levels in the fair value hierarchy.

F-46

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 35: OTHER LIABILITIES

 

  2016
£m
  2015
£m
 
Settlement balances  706   467 
Unitholders’ interest in Open Ended Investment Companies  22,947   22,621 
Unallocated surplus within insurance businesses  243   257 
Other creditors and accruals  5,297   6,316 
Total other liabilities  29,193   29,661 

NOTE 36: RETIREMENT BENEFIT OBLIGATIONS

  2016
£m
  2015
£m
  2014
£m
 
Charge to the income statement            
Past service (credits) charges1        (822)
Other  279   307   334 
Defined benefit pension schemes  279   307   (488)
Other post-retirement benefit schemes  8   8   10 
Total defined benefit schemes  287   315   (478)
Defined contribution pension schemes  268   233   252 
Total charge (credit) to the income statement(note 11)  555   548   (226)
  2019  2018 
  £m  £m 
Settlement balances  760   485 
Unitholders’ interest in Open Ended Investment Companies1  11,928   12,933 
Unallocated surplus within insurance businesses  400   382 
Lease liabilities  1,844   46 
Other creditors and accruals  5,401   5,787 
Total other liabilities  20,333   19,633 

 

1On 11 March 2014Where a collective investment vehicle is consolidated the interests of parties other than the Group announced a change to its defined benefit pension schemes, revising the existing cap on the increasesare reported at fair value in pensionable pay used in calculating the pension benefit, from 2 per cent to nil with effect from 2 April 2014. The effect of this change was to reduce the Group’s retirement benefit obligations recognised on the balance sheet by £843 million with a corresponding curtailment gain recognised in the income statement. This was partly offset by a charge of £21 million following changes to pension arrangements for staff within the TSB business.other liabilities.

  2016
£m
  2015
£m
 
Amounts recognised in the balance sheet        
Retirement benefit assets  342   901 
Retirement benefit obligations  (822)  (365)
Total amounts recognised in the balance sheet  (480)  536 
         
The total amount recognised in the balance sheet relates to:        
         
   2016
£m
   2015
£m
 
Defined benefit pension schemes  (244)  736 
Other post-retirement benefit schemes  (236)  (200)
Total amounts recognised in the balance sheet  (480)  536 
F-47F-60

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 35: OTHER LIABILITIES continued

The maturity of the Group’s lease liabilities was as follows:

  2019  2018 
  £m  £m 
Not later than 1 year  241   10 
Later than 1 year and not later than 2 years  222   9 
Later than 2 years and not later than 3 years  207   7 
Later than 3 years and not later than 4 years  170   6 
Later than 4 years and not later than 5 years  145   2 
Later than 5 years  859   12 
   1,844   46 

The Group adopted IFRS 16Leasesfrom 1 January 2019, see note 1.

NOTE 36: RETIREMENT BENEFIT OBLIGATIONS continued

  2019  2018  2017 
  £m  £m  £m 
Charge to the income statement         
Defined benefit pension schemes  241   401   362 
Other post-retirement benefit schemes  4   4   7 
Total defined benefit schemes  245   405   369 
Defined contribution pension schemes  287   300   256 
Total charge to the income statement (note 11)  532   705   625 

  2019  2018 
  £m  £m 
Amounts recognised in the balance sheet      
Retirement benefit assets  681   1,267 
Retirement benefit obligations  (257)  (245)
Total amounts recognised in the balance sheet  424   1,022 
         
The total amount recognised in the balance sheet relates to:        
   2019   2018 
   £m   £m 
Defined benefit pension schemes  550   1,146 
Other post-retirement benefit schemes  (126)  (124)
Total amounts recognised in the balance sheet  424   1,022 

 

Pension schemes

 

DEFINED BENEFIT SCHEMES

CRITICAL ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES AND JUDGEMENTS

The value of the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes’ liabilities requires management to make a number of assumptions. The key areas of estimation uncertainty are the discount rate applied to future cash flows and the expected lifetime of the schemes’ members. The discount rate is required to be set with reference to market yields at the end of the reporting period on high quality corporate bonds in the currency and with a term consistent with the defined benefit pension schemes’ obligations. The average duration of the schemes’ obligations is approximately 20 years. The market for bonds with a similar duration is illiquid and, as a result, significant management judgement is required to determine an appropriate yield curve on which to base the discount rate. The cost of the benefits payable by the schemes will also depend upon the life expectancy of the members. The Group considers latest market practice and actual experience in determining the appropriate assumptions for both current mortality expectations and the rate of future mortality improvement. Given the advances in medical science in recent years, it is uncertain whether this rate of improvement will be sustained going forward and, as a result, actual experience may differ from current expectations. The effect on the net accounting surplus or deficit and on the pension charge in the Group’s income statement of changes to the principal actuarial assumptions is set out in (iii) below.

 

(I) CHARACTERISTICS OF AND RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE GROUP’S SCHEMES

 

The Group has established a number of defined benefit pension schemes in the UK and overseas. All significant schemes are based in the UK, with the three most significant being the defined benefit sectionsmain section of the Lloyds Bank Pension Schemes No’sNo. 1, andthe Lloyds Bank Pension Scheme No. 2 and the HBOS Final Salary Pension Scheme. At 31 December 2019, these schemes represented 94 per cent of the Group’s total gross defined benefit pension assets (2018: 94 per cent). These schemes provide retirement benefits calculated as a percentage of final pensionable salary depending upon the length of service; the minimum retirement age under the rules of the schemes at 31 December 20162019 is generally 55 although certain categories of member are deemed to have a contractual right to retire at 50.

 

The Group operates a number ofboth funded and unfunded pension arrangements,arrangements; the majority, including the three most significant schemes, are funded schemes in the UK. All of these UK funded schemes are operated as separate legal entities under trust law, by the trustees and are in compliance with the Pensions Act 2004. 2004 and are managed by a Trustee Board (the Trustee) whose role is to ensure that their Scheme is administered in accordance with the Scheme rules and relevant legislation, and to safeguard the assets in the best interests of all members and beneficiaries. The Trustee is solely responsible for setting investment policy and for agreeing funding requirements with the employer through the funding valuation process. The Board of Trustees must be composed of representatives of the Company and plan participants in accordance with the Scheme’s regulations.

A valuation exerciseto determine the funding status of each scheme is carried out for each scheme at least every three years, whereby scheme assets are measured at market value and liabilities (technical provisions) are measured using prudent assumptions. If a deficit is identified a recovery plan is agreed between the Groupemployer and the scheme Trustee and sent to the Pensions Regulator for review. The Group has not provided for these deficit contributions as the future economic benefits arising from these contributions are expected to be available to the Group. The Group’s overseas defined benefit pension schemes are subject to local regulatory arrangements.

 

The latest full valuationsmost recent triennial funding valuation of the Group’s three main schemes, were carried outbased on the position as at 31 December 2016, showed an aggregate funding deficit of £7.3 billion (a funding level of 85.6 per cent) compared to a £5.2 billion deficit (a funding level of 85.9 per cent) for the previous valuation as at 30 June 2014;2014. In the results have been updatedlight of this funding deficit, and in contemplation of the changes that the Group had made as a result of its Structural Reform Programme, the Group agreed a recovery plan with the trustees. Under the plan, deficit contributions of £618 million were paid during 2019, and these

F-61

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 36: RETIREMENT BENEFIT OBLIGATIONS continued

will rise to £798 million in 2020, £1,287 million in 2021 and £1,305 million per annum from 2022 to 2024. Contributions in the later years will be subject to review and renegotiation at subsequent funding valuations. The next funding valuation is due to be completed by March 2021 with an effective date of 31 December 2016 by qualified independent actuaries.2019. The last full valuationsdeficit contributions are in addition to the regular contributions to meet benefits accruing over the year, and to cover the expenses of otherrunning the scheme. The Group currently expects to pay contributions of approximately £1,200 million to its defined benefit schemes were carried out on a number of different dates; these have been updated to 31 December 2016 by qualified independent actuaries.in 2020.

 

During 2009, the Group made one-off contributions to the Lloyds Bank Pension Scheme No 1 and Lloyds Bank Pension Scheme No 2 in the form of interests in limited liability partnerships for each of the two schemes which hold assets to provide security for the Group’s obligations to the two schemes. At 31 December 2016,2019, the limited liability partnerships held assets of approximately £5.4£6.7 billion. The limited liability partnerships are consolidated fully in the Group’s balance sheet.

 

The Group has also established three private limited companies which hold assets to provide security for the Group’s obligations to the HBOS Final Salary Pension Scheme, a section of the Lloyds Bank Pension Scheme No 1 and the Lloyds Bank Offshore Pension Scheme. At 31 December 20162019 these held assets of approximately £4.8 billion in aggregate. The private limited companies are consolidated fully in the Group’s balance sheet. The terms of these arrangements require the Group to maintain assets in these vehicles to agreed minimum values in order to secure obligations owed to the relevant Group pension schemes. The Group has satisfied this requirement during 2016.2019.

 

The last funding valuations of other Group schemes were carried out on a number of different dates. In order to report the position under IAS 19 as at 31 December 2019 the most recent valuation results for all schemes have been updated by qualified independent actuaries. The funding valuations use a more prudent approach to setting the discount rate and more conservative longevity assumptions than the IAS 19 valuations.

In July 2018 a decision was sought from the High Court in respect of the requirement to equalise the Guaranteed Minimum Pension (GMP) benefits accrued between 1990 and 1997 from contracting out of the State Earnings Related Pension Scheme. In its judgment handed down on 26 October 2018 the High Court confirmed the requirement to treat men and women equally with respect to these benefits and a range of methods that the Trustee is entitled to adopt to achieve equalisation. The Group currently expects to pay contributionsrecognised a past service cost of approximately £575£108 million to its defined benefit schemes in 2017.respect of equalisation in 2018 and, following agreement of the detailed implementation approach with the Trustee, a further£33 million has been recognised in 2019.

 

The responsibility for the governance of the Group’s funded defined benefit pension schemes lies with the Pension Trustees. Each of the Group’s funded UK defined benefit pension schemes are managed by a Trustee Board (the Trustee) whose role is to ensure that their Scheme is administered in accordance with the Scheme rules and relevant legislation, and to safeguard the assets in the best interests of all members and beneficiaries. The Trustee is solely responsible for setting investment policy and for agreeing funding requirements with the employer through the triennial valuation process. The Board of Trustees must be composed of representatives of the Company and plan participants in accordance with the Scheme’s regulations.(II) AMOUNTS IN THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

  2019  2018 
  £m  £m 
Amount included in the balance sheet      
Present value of funded obligations  (45,241)  (41,092)
Fair value of scheme assets  45,791   42,238 
Net amount recognised in the balance sheet  550   1,146 
 
   2019   2018 
   £m   £m 
Net amount recognised in the balance sheet        
At 1 January  1,146   509 
Net defined benefit pension charge  (241)  (401)
Actuarial gains (losses) on defined benefit obligation  (4,958)  1,707 
Return on plan assets  3,531   (1,558)
Employer contributions  1,062   863 
Exchange and other adjustments  10   26 
At 31 December  550   1,146 
 
   2019   2018 
   £m   £m 
Movements in the defined benefit obligation        
At 1 January  (41,092)  (44,384)
Current service cost  (201)  (261)
Interest expense  (1,172)  (1,130)
Remeasurements:        
Actuarial losses – experience  (29)  (439)
Actuarial (losses) gains – demographic assumptions  471   (201)
Actuarial gains (losses) – financial assumptions  (5,400)  2,347 
Benefits paid  2,174   3,079 
Past service cost  (44)  (108)
Curtailments     (12)
Settlements  17   17 
Exchange and other adjustments  35    
At 31 December  (45,241)  (41,092)
F-48F-62

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 36: RETIREMENT BENEFIT OBLIGATIONS continued

 

  2019  2018 
  £m  £m 
Analysis of the defined benefit obligation:      
Active members  (6,413)  (6,448)
Deferred members  (16,058)  (14,208)
Pensioners  (21,032)  (18,885)
Dependants  (1,738)  (1,551)
   (45,241)  (41,092)

(II) AMOUNTS IN THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

  2019  2018 
  £m  £m 
Changes in the fair value of scheme assets      
At 1 January  42,238   44,893 
Return on plan assets excluding amounts included in interest income  3,531   (1,558)
Interest income  1,220   1,152 
Employer contributions  1,062   863 
Benefits paid  (2,174)  (3,079)
Settlements  (18)  (18)
Administrative costs paid  (43)  (41)
Exchange and other adjustments  (25)  26 
At 31 December  45,791   42,238 

The expense recognised in the income statement for the year ended 31 December comprises:

 

  2016
£m
  2015
£m
 
Amount included in the balance sheet        
Present value of funded obligations  (45,822)  (36,903)
Fair value of scheme assets  45,578   37,639 
Net amount recognised in the balance sheet  (244)  736 
   2016
£m
   2015
£m
 
Net amount recognised in the balance sheet        
At 1 January  736   890 
Net defined benefit pension charge  (279)  (307)
Actuarial (losses) gains on defined benefit obligation  (8,770)  607 
Return on plan assets  7,455   (879)
Employer contributions  623   427 
Exchange and other adjustments  (9)  (2)
At 31 December  (244)  736 
   2016
£m
   2015
£m
 
Movements in the defined benefit obligation        
At 1 January  (36,903)  (37,243)
Current service cost  (257)  (302)
Interest expense  (1,401)  (1,340)
Remeasurements:        
Actuarial gains – experience  535   195 
Actuarial gains (losses) – demographic assumptions  195   (747)
Actuarial (losses) gains – financial assumptions  (9,500)  1,159 
Benefits paid  1,580   1,371 
Past service cost  (20)  (12)
Employee contributions     (1)
Settlements  12   8 
Exchange and other adjustments  (63)  9 
At 31 December  (45,822)  (36,903)
   2016
£m
   2015
£m
 
Analysis of the defined benefit obligation:        
Active members  (9,903)  (7,530)
Deferred members  (16,934)  (12,723)
Pensioners  (17,476)  (15,312)
Dependants  (1,509)  (1,338)
   (45,822)  (36,903)
   2016
£m
   2015
£m
 
Changes in the fair value of scheme assets        
At 1 January  37,639   38,133 
Return on plan assets excluding amounts included in interest income  7,455   (879)
Interest income  1,441   1,383 
Employer contributions  623   427 
Employee contributions     1 
Benefits paid  (1,580)  (1,371)
Settlements  (18)  (14)
Administrative costs paid  (36)  (30)
Exchange and other adjustments  54   (11)
At 31 December  45,578   37,639 
F-49

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

  2019  2018  2017 
  £m  £m  £m 
Current service cost  201   261   295 
Net interest amount  (48)  (22)  (1)
Past service credits and curtailments     12   10 
Settlements  1   1   3 
Past service cost – plan amendments  44   108   14 
Plan administration costs incurred during the year  43   41   41 
Total defined benefit pension expense  241   401   362 

 

NOTE 36: RETIREMENT BENEFIT OBLIGATIONS continued

(III) COMPOSITION OF SCHEME ASSETS:ASSETS

 

 2019  2018 
 2016 2015 Quoted Unquoted Total  Quoted Unquoted Total 
  Quoted
£m
   Unquoted
£m
   Total
£m
   Quoted
£m
   Unquoted
£m
   Total
£m
  £m  £m  £m  £m £m £m 
Equity instruments  1,114      1,114   947      947   555   39   594   637   222   859 
Debt instruments1:                                                
Fixed interest government bonds  5,797      5,797   4,841      4,841   8,893      8,893   7,449      7,449 
Index-linked government bonds  14,359      14,359   9,944      9,944   18,207      18,207   16,477      16,477 
Corporate and other debt securities  7,464      7,464   7,243      7,243   10,588      10,588   8,813      8,813 
Asset-backed securities  99      99   74      74            138      138 
  27,719      27,719   22,102      22,102   37,688      37,688   32,877      32,877 
Property     497   497      440   440      158   158      556   556 
Pooled investment vehicles  3,577   12,845   16,422   3,464   10,619   14,083   4,773   10,585   15,358   4,578   10,494   15,072 
Money market instruments, cash, derivatives and other assets
and liabilities
  1,462   (1,636)  (174)  525   (458)  67   204   (8,211)  (8,007)  (283)  (6,843)  (7,126)
At 31 December  33,872   11,706   45,578   27,038   10,601   37,639   43,220   2,571   45,791   37,809   4,429   42,238 

 

1Of the total debt instruments, £25,219£33,134 million (31 December 2015: £18,4282018: £29,033 million) were investment grade (credit ratings equal to or better than ‘BBB’).
F-63

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

Note 36: Retirement benefit obligationscontinued

 

The assets of all the funded plans are held independently of the Group’s assets in separate trustee administered funds.

 

The pension schemes’ pooled investment vehicles comprise:

 

 2019  2018 
  2016
£m
   2015
£m
  £m  £m 
Equity funds  2,883   2,412   2,429   2,329 
Hedge and mutual funds  2,350   2,078   2,886   2,487 
Liquidity funds  484   918   1,126   2,329 
Bond and debt funds  3,383   2,807   971   313 
Other  7,322   5,868   7,946   7,614 
At 31 December  16,422   14,083   15,358   15,072 

 

The expense (credit) recognisedTrustee’s approach to investment is focused on acting in the income statementmembers’ best financial interests, with the integration of ESG (Environmental, Social and Governance) considerations into investment management processes and practices. This policy is reviewed annually (or more frequently as required) and has been shared with the schemes’ investment managers for the year ended 31 December comprises:

   2016
£m
   2015
£m
   2014
£m
 
Current service cost  257   302   277 
Net interest amount  (40)  (43)  (6)
Past service credits and curtailments (see page F-47)        (822)
Settlements  6   6   7 
Past service cost – plan amendments  20   12   20 
Plan administration costs incurred during the year  36   30   36 
Total defined benefit pension expense (credit)  279   307   (488)
F-50

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTSimplementation.

 

NOTE 36: RETIREMENT BENEFIT OBLIGATIONScontinued

(IV) ASSUMPTIONS

 

The principal actuarial and financial assumptions used in valuations of the defined benefit pension schemes were as follows:

 

  2016
%
  2015
%
 
Discount rate  2.76   3.87 
Rate of inflation:        
Retail Prices Index  3.23   2.99 
Consumer Price Index  2.18   1.99 
Rate of salary increases  0.00   0.00 
Weighted-average rate of increase for pensions in payment  2.74   2.58 
   2016
Years
   2015
Years
 
Life expectancy for member aged 60, on the valuation date:        
Men  28.1   28.1 
Women  30.3   30.4 
Life expectancy for member aged 60, 15 years after the valuation date:        
Men  29.3   29.5 
Women  31.7   31.9 

  2019  2018 
  %  % 
Discount rate  2.05   2.90 
Rate of inflation:        
Retail Prices Index  2.94   3.20 
Consumer Price Index ��1.99   2.15 
Rate of salary increases  0.00   0.00 
Weighted-average rate of increase for pensions in payment  2.57   2.73 
   2019   2018 
   Years   Years 
Life expectancy for member aged 60, on the valuation date:        
Men  27.5   27.8 
Women  29.2   29.4 
Life expectancy for member aged 60, 15 years after the valuation date:        
Men  28.5   28.8 
Women  30.3   30.6 

 

The mortality assumptions used in the UK scheme valuations are based on standard tables published by the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries which were adjusted in line with the actual experience of the relevant schemes. The table shows that a member retiring at age 60 at 31 December 20162019 is assumed to live for, on average, 28.127.5 years for a male and 30.329.2 years for a female. In practice there will be much variation between individual members but these assumptions are expected to be appropriate across all members. It is assumed that younger members will live longer in retirement than those retiring now. This reflects the expectation that mortality rates will continue to fall over time as medical science and standards of living improve. To illustrate the degree of improvement assumed the table also shows the life expectancy for members aged 45 now, when they retire in 15 yearsyears’ time at age 60.

 

(III)(V) AMOUNT TIMING AND UNCERTAINTY OF FUTURE CASH FLOWS

 

RISK EXPOSURE OF THE DEFINED BENEFIT SCHEMESRisk exposure of the defined benefit schemes

 

Whilst the Group is not exposed to any unusual, entity specific or scheme specific risks in its defined benefit pension schemes, it is exposed to a number of significant risks, detailed below:

 

Inflation rate risk: the majority of the plans’ benefit obligations are linked to inflation both in deferment and once in payment. Higher inflation will lead to higher liabilities although this will be partiallymaterially offset by holdings of inflation-linked gilts and, in most cases, caps on the level of inflationary increases are in place to protect against extreme inflation.

 

Interest rate risk:The defined benefit obligation is determined using a discount rate derived from yields on AA-rated corporate bonds. A decrease in corporate bond yields will increase plan liabilities although this will be partiallymaterially offset by an increase in the value of bond holdings.holdings and through the use of derivatives.

 

Longevity risk: The majority of the schemes obligations are to provide benefits for the life of the members so increases in life expectancy will result in an increase in the plans’ liabilities.

 

Investment risk:Scheme assets are invested in a diversified portfolio of debt securities, equities and other return-seeking assets. If the assets underperform the discount rate used to calculate the defined benefit obligation, it will reduce the surplus or increase the deficit. Volatility in asset values and the discount rate will lead to volatility in the net pension liabilityasset on the Group’s balance sheet and in other comprehensive income. To a lesser extent this will also lead to volatility in the pension expense in the Group’s income statement.

 

The ultimate cost of the defined benefit obligations to the Group will depend upon actual future events rather than the assumptions made. The assumptions made are unlikely to be borne out in practice and as such the cost may be higher or lower than expected.

 

SENSITIVITY ANALYSISSensitivity analysis

 

The effect of reasonably possible changes in key assumptions on the value of scheme liabilities and the resulting pension charge in the Group’s income statement and on the net defined benefit pension scheme liability,asset, for the Group’s three most significant schemes, is set out below. The sensitivities

F-64

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

Note 36: Retirement benefit obligations continued

provided assume that all other assumptions and the value of the schemes’ assets remain unchanged, and are not intended to represent changes that are at the extremes of possibility. The calculations are approximate in nature and full detailed calculations could lead to a different result. It is unlikely that isolated changes to individual assumptions will be experienced in practice. Due to the correlation of assumptions, aggregating the effects of these isolated changes may not be a reasonable estimate of the actual effect of simultaneous changes in multiple assumptions.

  Effect of reasonably possible alternative assumptions
  Increase (decrease)
in the income
statement charge
 (Increase) decrease in the
net defined benefit pension
scheme surplus
  2019  2018  2019  2018 
  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Inflation (including pension increases):1                
Increase of 0.1 per cent  12   14   467   410 
Decrease of 0.1 per cent  (12)  (14)  (460)  (395)
Discount rate:2                
Increase of 0.1 per cent  (20)  (27)  (763)  (670)
Decrease of 0.1 per cent  21   25   784   686 
Expected life expectancy of members:                
Increase of one year  40   43   1,636   1,299 
Decrease of one year  (39)  (42)  (1,575)  (1,257)
F-51

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 36: RETIREMENT BENEFIT OBLIGATIONS continued

  Effect of reasonably possible alternative assumptions 
  Increase (decrease)
in the income
statement charge
 Increase (decrease) in the
net defined benefit pension
scheme liability
 
  2016
£m
  2015
£m
  2016
£m
  2015
£m
 
Inflation (including pension increases):1                
Increase of 0.1 per cent  19   17   491   363 
Decrease of 0.1 per cent  (14)  (16)  (458)  (346)
Discount rate:2                
Increase of 0.1 per cent  (30)  (29)  (821)  (605)
Decrease of 0.1 per cent  30   30   847   621 
Expected life expectancy of members:                
Increase of one year  42   43   1,213   952 
Decrease of one year  (37)  (41)  (1,178)  (927)

1At 31 December 2016,2019, the assumed rate of RPI inflation is 3.232.94 per cent and CPI inflation 2.181.99 per cent (2015:(2018: RPI 2.993.20 per cent and CPI 1.992.15 per cent).
  
2At 31 December 2016,2019, the assumed discount rate is 2.762.05 per cent (2015: 3.87(2018: 2.90 per cent).

 

SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS METHOD AND ASSUMPTIONSSensitivity analysis method and assumptions

 

The sensitivity analysis above reflects the impact on the liabilities of the Group’s three most significant schemes which account for over 90 per cent of the Group’s defined benefit obligations. Whilst differences in the underlying liability profiles for the remainder of the Group’s pension arrangements mean they may exhibit slightly different sensitivities to variations in these assumptions, the sensitivities provided above are indicative of the impact across the Group as a whole.

 

The inflation assumption sensitivity applies to both the assumed rate of increase in the Consumer Prices Index (CPI) and the Retail Prices Index (RPI), and include the impact on the rate of increases to pensions, both before and after retirement. These pension increases are linked to inflation (either CPI or RPI) subject to certain minimum and maximum limits.

 

The sensitivity analysis (including the inflation sensitivity) does not include the impact of any change in the rate of salary increases as pensionable salaries have been frozen since 2 April 2014.

 

The life expectancy assumption has been applied by allowing for an increase/decrease in life expectation from age 60 of one year, based upon the approximate weighted average age for each scheme. Whilst this is an approximate approach and will not give the same result as a one year increase in life expectancy at every age, it provides an appropriate indication of the potential impact on the schemes from changes in life expectancy.

 

There was no change in the methods and assumptions used in preparing the sensitivity analysis from the prior year.

 

ASSET-LIABILITY MATCHING STRATEGIESAsset-liability matching strategies

 

The main schemes’ assets are invested in a diversified portfolio, consisting primarily of debt securities. The investment strategy is not static and will evolve to reflect the structure of liabilities within the schemes. Specific asset-liability matching strategies for each pension plan are independently determined by the responsible governance body for each scheme and in consultation with the employer.

 

A significant goal of the asset-liability matching strategies adopted by Group schemes is to reduce volatility caused by changes in market expectations of interest rates and inflation. In the main schemes, this is achieved by investing scheme assets in bonds, primarily fixed interest gilts and index linked gilts, and by entering into interest rate and inflation swap arrangements. These investments are structured to take into account the profile of scheme liabilities, and actively managed to reflect both changing market conditions and changes to the liability profile.

 

On 28 January 2020, the main schemes entered into a £10 billion longevity insurance arrangement to hedge around 20 per cent of the schemes’ exposure to unexpected increases in life expectancy. This arrangement will form part of the schemes’ investment portfolio and will provide income to the schemes in the event that pensions are paid out for longer than expected. The transaction is structured as a pass-through with Scottish Widows as the insurer, and onwards reinsurance to Pacific Life Re Limited.

At 31 December 20162019 the asset-liability matching strategy mitigated 89around 106 per cent of the liability sensitivity to interest rate movements and 102around 103 per cent of the liability sensitivity to inflation movements. MuchIn addition a small amount of the residual interest rate sensitivity is mitigatedarises through holdings of corporate and other debt securities.

F-65

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

 

MATURITY PROFILE OF DEFINED BENEFIT OBLIGATIONNote 36: Retirement benefit obligations continued

Maturity profile of defined benefit obligation

 

The following table provides information on the weighted average duration of the defined benefit pension obligations and the distribution and timing of benefit payments:

 

  2016
Years
  2015
Years
 
Duration of the defined benefit obligation  20   19 
   2016
£m
   2015
£m
 
Maturity analysis of benefits expected to be paid        
Benefits expected to be paid within 12 months  1,639   1,370 
Benefits expected to be paid between 1 and 2 years  1,180   1,121 
Benefits expected to be paid between 2 and 5 years  3,971   3,759 
Benefits expected to be paid between 5 and 10 years  8,030   7,710 
Benefits expected to be paid between 10 and 15 years  9,453   9,102 
Benefits expected to be paid between 15 and 25 years  20,268   19,882 
Benefits expected to be paid between 25 and 35 years  18,831   18,631 
Benefits expected to be paid between 35 and 45 years  13,589   13,878 
Benefits expected to be paid in more than 45 years  7,809   8,857 
F-52

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

  2019
Years
  2018
Years
 
Duration of the defined benefit obligation 18  18 
   2019   2018 
   £m   £m 
Maturity analysis of benefits expected to be paid:        
Within 12 months  1,274   1,225 
Between 1 and 2 years  1,373   1,299 
Between 2 and 5 years  4,455   4,303 
Between 5 and 10 years  8,426   8,305 
Between 10 and 15 years  9,229   9,416 
Between 15 and 25 years  17,400   18,417 
Between 25 and 35 years  13,999   15,631 
Between 35 and 45 years  8,291   9,924 
In more than 45 years  3,160   4,270 

 

NOTE 36: RETIREMENT BENEFIT OBLIGATIONScontinued

MATURITY ANALYSIS METHOD AND ASSUMPTIONSMaturity analysis method and assumptions

 

The projected benefit payments are based on the assumptions underlying the assessment of the obligations, including allowance for expected future inflation. They are shown in their undiscounted form and therefore appear large relative to the discounted assessment of the defined benefit obligations recognised in the Group’s balance sheet. They are in respect of benefits that have been accrued prior to the respective year-end date only and make no allowance for any benefits that may have been accrued subsequently.

 

DEFINED CONTRIBUTION SCHEMES

 

The Group operates a number of defined contribution pension schemes in the UK and overseas, principally Your Tomorrow and the defined contribution sections of the Lloyds Bank Pension Scheme No. 1.

 

During the year ended 31 December 20162019 the charge to the income statement in respect of defined contribution schemes was £268£287 million (2015: £233(2018: £300 million; 2014: £2522017: £256 million), representing the contributions payable by the employer in accordance with each scheme’s rules.

 

Other post-retirement benefit schemes

 

The Group operates a number of schemes which provide post-retirement healthcare benefits and concessionary mortgages to certain employees, retired employees and their dependants. The principal scheme relates to former Lloyds Bank staff and under this scheme the Group has undertaken to meet the cost of post-retirement healthcare for all eligible former employees (and their dependants) who retired prior to 1 January 1996. The Group has entered into an insurance contract to provide these benefits and a provision has been made for the estimated cost of future insurance premiums payable.

 

For the principal post-retirement healthcare scheme, the latest actuarial valuation of the liability was carried out at 31 December 20142019 by qualified independent actuaries. The principal assumptions used were as set out above, except that the rate of increase in healthcare premiums has been assumed at 6.846.54 per cent (2015: 6.59(2018: 6.81 per cent).

 

Movements in the other post-retirement benefits obligation:

 

 2019  2018 
  2016
£m
   2015
£m
  £m  £m 
At 1 January  (200)  (196)  (124)  (144)
Actuarial (loss) gain  (33)  (2)
Actuarial (losses) gains  (6)  18 
Insurance premiums paid  7   6   7   5 
Charge for the year  (8)  (8)  (4)  (4)
Exchange and other adjustments  (2)     1   1 
At 31 December  (236)  (200)  (126)  (124)

 

NOTE 37: DEFERRED TAX

 

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The largest category of deferred tax asset relates to tax losses carried forward. The recoverability of the Group’s deferred tax assets in respect of carry forward losses is based on an assessment of future levels of taxable profit expected to arise that can be offset against these losses. The Group’s expectations as to the level of future taxable profits take into account the Group’s long-term financial and strategic plans, and anticipated future tax adjusting items.

In making this assessment account is taken of business plans, the board approved operating plan and the expected future economic outlook as set out in the Group Chief Executive’s Review and Market Overview, as well as the risks associated with future regulatory change.

The Group’s total deferred tax asset includes £4,298 million (2015: £4,890 million) in respect of trading losses carried forward. The tax losses have arisen in individual legal entities and will be used as future taxable profits arise in those legal entities, though substantially all of the unused tax losses for which a deferred tax asset has been recognised arise in Bank of Scotland plc and Lloyds Bank plc.

The deferred tax asset is expected to be utilised over different time periods in each of the entities in which the losses arise. Under current UK tax law there is no expiry date for unused tax losses. Following the enactment of the Finance Acts in 2015 and 2016, there is a restriction imposed on the amount of banks’ profits that can be offset by certain carried forward tax losses for the purposes of calculating corporation tax liabilities. The additional restriction in 2016 has increased the period over which the Group expects to fully utilise its tax losses from 2025 to 2031.

F-53

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 37: DEFERRED TAX continued

The movement in the net deferred tax balance isliabilities are as follows:

 

   2016
£m
   2015
£m
Asset at 1 January  3,977   4,091 
Exchange and other adjustments  (14)  5 
Disposals     (59)
Income statement charge (note 13):        
Due to change in UK corporation tax rate and related impacts  (201)  (27)
Origination and reversal of temporary differences  (651)  (89)
   (852)  (116)
Amount credited (charged) to equity:        
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements  320   59 
Available-for-sale financial assets (note 42)  (246)  (7)
Cash flow hedges (note 42)  (466)  7 
Share-based compensation  (13)  (3)
   (405)  56 
Asset at 31 December  2,706   3,977 
  2019  2018    2019  2018 
Statutory position £m  £m  Tax disclosure £m  £m 
Deferred tax assets  2,666   2,453  Deferred tax assets  4,917   4,731 
Deferred tax liabilities  (44)    Deferred tax liabilities  (2,295)  (2,278)
Asset at 31 December  2,622   2,453  Asset at 31 December  2,622   2,453 

 

The statutory position reflects the deferred tax assets and liabilities as disclosed in the consolidated balance sheet and takes into account the ability of the inabilityGroup to offsetnet assets and liabilities where there is noa legally enforceable right of offset. The tax disclosure of deferred tax assets and liabilities ties to the amounts outlined in the tabletables below which splits the deferred tax assets and liabilities by type.type, before such netting.

Statutory position  2016
£m
   2015
£m
  Tax disclosure  2016
£m
   2015
£m
 
Deferred tax assets  2,706   4,010  Deferred tax assets  5,549   6,400 
Deferred tax liabilities     (33) Deferred tax liabilities  (2,843)  (2,423)
Asset at 31 December  2,706   3,977  Asset at 31 December  2,706   3,977 

The deferred tax charge in the income statement comprises the following temporary differences:

   2016
£m
   2015
£m
   2014
£m
 
Accelerated capital allowances  (120)  377   34 
Pensions and other post-retirement benefits  (105)  (40)  (243)
Long-term assurance business  (273)  303   312 
Allowances for impairment losses     (5)  (24)
Tax losses carried forward  (625)  (855)  (565)
Tax on fair value of acquired assets  93   178   159 
Other temporary differences  178   (74)  49 
Deferred tax charge in the income statement  (852)  (116)  (278)
F-54F-66

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the consolidated financial statements

 

NOTENote 37: DEFERRED TAXDeferred tax continued

 

DeferredAs a result of legislation enacted in 2016, the UK corporation tax rate will reduce from 19 per cent to 17 per cent on 1 April 2020. The Group measures its deferred tax assets and liabilities are comprised as follows:

   2016
£m
   2015
£m
 
Deferred tax assets:        
Accelerated capital allowances  969   1,089 
Pensions and other post-retirement benefits  143    
Other provisions  40   28 
Tax losses carried forward  4,298   4,890 
Other temporary differences  99   393 
Total deferred tax assets  5,549   6,400 
   2016
£m
   2015
£m
 
Deferred tax liabilities:        
Pensions and other post-retirement benefits     (72)
Long-term assurance business  (914)  (641)
Available-for-sale asset revaluation  (233)  (11)
Tax on fair value of acquired assets  (798)  (891)
Derivatives  (643)  (395)
Other temporary differences  (255)  (413)
Total deferred tax liabilities  (2,843)  (2,423)

at the value expected to be recoverable or payable in future periods, and re-measures them at each reporting date based on the most recent estimates of utilisation or settlement, including the impact of bank surcharge where appropriate. The Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 introduced an additional surchargedeferred tax impact of 8 per cent on banking profits from 1 January 2016.

The Finance Act 2016 was enacted on 15 September 2016. The Act further reduced the corporation tax rate applicable from 1 April 2020this re-measurement to 17 per cent and further restricts the amountin 2019 is a charge of banks’ profits that can be offset by carried forward losses for the purposes of calculating corporation tax liabilities from 50 per cent to 25 per cent with effect from 1 April 2016.

The corporation tax changes enacted have resulted in a reduction in the Group’s net deferred tax asset at 31 December 2016 of £158£6 million comprising a £201 million charge included in the income statement and a £43credit of £5 million credit included in equity.other comprehensive income.

During the December 2019 election campaign, the UK government stated its intention to maintain the corporation tax rate at 19 per cent on 1 April 2020. Had this rate change been substantively enacted at 31 December 2019, the effect would have been to increase net deferred tax assets by £294 million.

On 29 October 2018, the UK government announced its intention to restrict the use of capital tax losses to 50 per cent of any future gains arising. Had this restriction been substantively enacted at 31 December 2019, the effect would have been to reduce net deferred tax assets by £50 million.

Movements in deferred tax liabilities and assets (before taking into consideration the offsetting of balances within the same taxing jurisdiction) can be summarised as follows:

  Tax losses  Property,
plant and
equipment
  Pension
liabilities
  Provisions  Share-based
payments
  Derivatives  Other
temporary
differences
  Total 
Deferred tax assets £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 1 January 2018  4,034   743   90   380   51      16   5,314 
(Charge) credit to the income statement  (256)  (100)  64   (45)  (6)     (5)  (348)
(Charge) credit to other comprehensive income        (92)  (138)           (230)
Other (charge) credit to equity              (5)        (5)
At 31 December 2018  3,778   643   62   197   40      11   4,731 
(Charge) credit to the income statement  (167)  (1)  (83)  (87)  4   149   174   (11)
(Charge) credit to other comprehensive income        74   116            190 
Other (charge) credit to equity              7         7 
At 31 December 2019  3,611   642   53   226   51   149   185   4,917 
                                 
      Long-term
assurance
business
  Acquisition
fair value
  Pension
assets
  Derivatives  Asset
revaluations1
  Other
temporary
differences
  Total 
Deferred tax liabilities     £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 1 January 2018      (799)  (879)  (181)  (499)  (207)  (140)  (2,705)
(Charge) credit to the income statement      162   142   (67)  (19)  (33)  7   192 
(Charge) credit to other comprehensive income            (25)  113   141      229 
Exchange and other adjustments                     6   6 
At 31 December 2018      (637)  (737)  (273)  (405)  (99)  (127)  (2,278)
(Charge) credit to the income statement      (193)  221   59   (48)  (19)  (35)  (15)
(Charge) credit to other comprehensive income            64   (148)  83      (1)
Exchange and other adjustments                     (1)  (1)
At 31 December 2019      (830)  (516)  (150)  (601)  (35)  (163)  (2,295)

1Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income.

 

Deferred tax assets not recognised

 

Deferred tax of £24 million (2018: £90 million) has been recognised in respect of the future tax benefit of some expenses of the life assurance business carried forward. The deferred tax asset not recognised in respect of the remaining expenses is approximately £254 million (2018: £371 million), and these expenses can be carried forward indefinitely. The unrecognised deferred tax asset has reduced in 2019, as a significant amount of brought forward expenses have been utilised in the last year.

Deferred tax assets of £92approximately £48 million (2015: £140(2018: £78 million) have not been recognised in respect of capital£280 million of UK tax losses carried forward as there are no predictedand other temporary differences which can only be used to offset future capital profits. Capitalgains. UK capital losses can be carried forward indefinitely.

 

Deferred tax assets of £723 million (2015: £893 million) have not been recognised in respect of trading losses carried forward, mainly in respect of temporary differences in the insurance businesses and in certain overseas companies. Trading losses can be carried forward indefinitely, except for losses in the USA which expire after 20 years.

In addition, no deferred tax assets have not beenasset is recognised in respect of unrelieved foreign tax carried forward at 31 December 2016credits of £46 million (2015: £76(2018: £46 million), as there are no predictedexpected future taxable profits against which the unrelieved foreign tax credits can be utilised. These tax credits can be carried forward indefinitely.

No deferred tax has been recognised in respect of foreign trade losses where it is not more likely than not that we will be able to utilise them in future periods. Of the asset not recognised, £35 million (2018: £36 million) relates to losses that will expire if not used within 20 years, and £45 million (2018: £53 million) relates to losses with no expiry date.

As a result of parent company exemptions on dividends from subsidiaries and on capital gains on disposal there are no significant taxable temporary differences associated with investments in subsidiaries, branches, associates and joint arrangements.

F-55F-67

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the consolidated financial statements

 

NOTE 38: OTHER PROVISIONS

 

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

At 31 December 2016, the Group carried provisions of £3,947 million (2015: £4,463 million) against the cost of making redress payments to customers and the related administration costs in connection with historical regulatory breaches, principally the mis-selling of payment protection insurance (2016: £2,608 million; 2015: £3,458 million).

Determining the amount of the provisions, which represent management’s best estimate of the cost of settling these issues, requires the exercise of significant judgement. It will often be necessary to form a view on matters which are inherently uncertain, such as the scope of reviews required by regulators, the number of future complaints, the extent to which they will be upheld, the average cost of redress and the impact of legal decisions that may be relevant to claims received. Consequently the continued appropriateness of the underlying assumptions is reviewed on a regular basis against actual experience and other relevant evidence and adjustments made to the provisions where appropriate.

More detail on the nature of the assumptions that have been made and key sensitivities is set out below.

  Provisions for
commitments
£m
   Payment
protection
insurance
£m
   Other
regulatory
provisions
£m
   Vacant
leasehold
property

£m
   Other
£m
   Total
£m
  Provisions for
financial
commitments
and guarantees
 Payment
protection
insurance
 Other
regulatory
provisions
 Other Total 
At 1 January 2016  50   3,458   1,005   37   1,137   5,687 
 £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 31 December 2018  193   1,524   861   969   3,547 
Adjustment on adoption of IFRS 16 (note 55)              (97)  (97)
Balance at 1 January 2019              872   3,450 
Exchange and other adjustments  19      10   4   64   97   (1)  367      (39)  327 
Provisions applied     (2,200)  (761)  (14)  (282)  (3,257)     (2,461)  (778)  (593)  (3,832)
Charge for the year  (13)  1,350   1,085   24   245   2,691   (15)  2,450   445   498   3,378 
At 31 December 2016  56   2,608   1,339   51   1,164   5,218 
At 31 December 2019  177   1,880   528   738   3,323 

 

Provisions for financial commitments and guarantees

 

Provisions are held in cases where the Group is irrevocably committed to advance additional funds, but where there is doubt as to the customer’s ability to meet its repayment obligations.recognised for expected credit losses on undrawn loan commitments and financial guarantees. See also note 20.

 

Payment protection insurance (excluding MBNA)

 

The Group increased the provision for PPI costs by a further £1,350£2,450 million in 2016,the year ended 31 December 2019, bringing the total amount provided to £17,375£21,875 million.

 

The charge in 2019 was largely due to the provisionsignificant increase in 2016 was largely driven by a higher total volume of complaints expected as a result of the Financial Conduct Authority’s (FCA) industry deadline being extendedPPI information requests (PIRs) leading up to the enddeadline for submission of claims on 29 August 2019, and also reflects costs relating to complaints received from the Official Receiver as well as changesadministration costs. An initial review of around 60 per cent of the five million PIRs received in the run-up to the rulesPPI deadline has been undertaken, with the conversion rate remaining low, and guidance that should apply when firms handle PPI complaints in lightconsistent with the provision assumption of around 10 per cent. The Group has reached final agreement with the UK Supreme Court’s decision in Plevin v Paragon Personal Finance Limited [2014] UKSC 61 (Plevin). Final rules and guidance were published by the FCA on 2 March 2017 (PS 17/3).Official Receiver.

 

As atAt 31 December 2016,2019, a provision of £2,608£1,578 million remained unutilised relating to complaints and associated administration costs.costs excluding amounts relating to MBNA. Total cash payments were £2,200£2,201 million during the year toended 31 December 2016. Spend continues to reduce following the completion of the re-review of previously handled cases (remediation).

The provision is consistent with total expected reactive complaint volumes of 5.2 million (including complaints falling under the Plevin rules and guidance) in light of the FCA Policy Statement PS 17/3. Weekly complaint levels in the second half of 2016 have been approximately 8,300 versus approximately 8,600 in the first half, and are expected to vary significantly through to the industry deadline, now confirmed to be August 2019.

 

SENSITIVITIES

The Group estimates that it has sold approximately 16 million PPI policies since 2000. These include policies that were not mis-sold and those that have been successfully claimed upon. Since the commencement of the PPI redress programme in 2011 the Group estimates that it has contacted, settled or provided for approximately 50 per cent of the policies sold since 2000.

 

The total amount provided for PPI represents the Group’s best estimate of the likely future cost. However aA number of risks and uncertainties remain in particular with respect to future volumes.including processing the remaining PIRs and outstanding complaints. The cost could differ from the Group’s estimates and the assumptions underpinning them, and could result in a further provision being required. There is significant uncertainty aroundThese may also be impacted by any further regulatory changes and potential additional remediation arising from the impactcontinuous improvement of the regulatory changes, FCA media campaign and Claims Management Companies and customer activity.Group’s operational practices.

 

Key metrics and sensitivities are highlightedFor every one per cent increase in PIR conversion rate on the stock as at the industry deadline, the Group would expect an additional charge of approximately £100 million.

Payment protection insurance (MBNA)

MBNA increased its PPI provision by £367 million in the table below:year ended 31 December 2019 but the Group’s exposure continues to remain capped at £240 million under the terms of the sale and purchase agreement.

Sensitivities
(exclude claims where no PPI policy was held)
 Actuals
to date
 Anticipated
future3
 Sensitivity3
Customer initiated complaints since origination (m)1 3.9 1.3 0.1 = £190m
Average uphold rate per policy2 74% 89% 1% = £35m
Average redress per upheld policy2 £1,700 £1,250 £100 = £150m
Administrative expenses (£m) 3,190 490 1 case = £375

1Sensitivity includes complaint handling costs.
2Actuals to date are based on the last six months to 31 December 2016.
3Anticipated future and sensitivities are impacted by a proportion of complaints and re-complaints falling under thePlevinrules and guidance in light of the FCA Policy Statement PS 17/3
F-56F-68

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 38: OTHER PROVISIONS continuedNotes to the consolidated financial statements

 

Other provisions for legal actions and regulatory matters

In the course of its business, the Group is engaged in discussions with the PRA, FCA and other UK and overseas regulators and other governmental authorities on a range of matters. The Group also receives complaints in connection with its past conduct and claims brought by or on behalf of current and former employees, customers, investors and other third parties and is subject to legal proceedings and other legal actions. Where significant, provisions are held against the costs expected to be incurred in relation to these matters and matters arising from related internal reviews. During the year ended 31 December 2019 the Group charged a further £445 million in respect of legal actions and other regulatory matters, and the unutilised balance at 31 December 2019 was £528 million (31 December 2018: £861 million). The most significant items are as follows.

ARREARS HANDLING RELATED ACTIVITIES

The Group has provided an additional £188 million in the year ended 31 December 2019 for the costs of identifying and rectifying certain arrears management fees and activities, taking the total provided to date to £981 million. The Group has put in place a number of actions to improve its handling of customers in these areas and has made good progress in reimbursing arrears fees to impacted customers.

 

PACKAGED BANK ACCOUNTS

 

In the year endedThe Group had provided a total of £795 million up to 31 December 2016 the Group has provided an additional £280 million2018 in respect of complaints relating to alleged mis-selling of packaged bank accounts, raisingwith no further amounts provided during the total amount provided to £505 million. As atyear ended 31 December 2016, £215 million of the provision remained unutilised. The total amount provided represents the Group’s best estimate of the likely future cost, however a2019. A number of risks and uncertainties remain, in particularparticularly with respect to future volumes.

ARREARS HANDLING RELATED ACTIVITIES

Following a review of the Group’s secured and unsecured arrears handling activities, the Group has put in place a number of actions to further improve its handling of customers in these areas. As a result, the Group has provided an additional £261 million in the year ended 31 December 2016 (bringing the total provision to £397 million), for the costs of identifying and rectifying certain arrears management fees and activities. As at 31 December 2016, the unutilised provision was £383 million (31 December 2015: £136 million).

 

CUSTOMER CLAIMS IN RELATION TO INSURANCE BRANCH BUSINESS IN GERMANY

 

The Group continues to receive claims in Germany from customers relating to policies issued by Clerical Medical Investment Group Limited (subsequently renamed Scottish Widows Limited)., with smaller numbers received from customers in Austria and Italy. The German industry-wide issue regarding notification of contractual ‘cooling off’ periods has continued to lead to an increasing number of claims in 2016. Accordingly a provision increase of £94 million was recognised in the year ended2016 and 2017. Whilst complaint volumes have declined, new litigation claim volumes per month have remained fairly constant throughout 2019. Up to 31 December 2016 giving2019 the Group had provided a total provision of £639 million; the remaining unutilised provision as at 31 December 2016 is £168 million (31 December 2015: £124 million).£656 million. The validity of the claims facing the Group depends upon the facts and circumstances in respect of each claim. As a result, the ultimate financial effect, which could be significantly different from the current provision, will be known only once all relevant claims have been resolved.

 

OTHER LEGAL ACTIONS AND REGULATORY MATTERSHBOS READING – REVIEW

 

The Group has now completed its compensation assessment for all 71 business customers within the customer review, with more than 98 per cent of these offers to individuals accepted. In total, more than £100 million in compensation has been offered to victims of the courseHBOS Reading fraud prior to the publication of its business,Sir Ross Cranston’s independent quality assurance review of the customer review, of which £94 million has so far been accepted, in addition to £9 million for ex-gratia payments and £6 million for the re-imbursements of legal fees. Sir Ross’s review was concluded on 10 December 2019 and made a number of recommendations, including a re-assessment of direct and consequential losses by an independent panel. The Group has committed to implementing Sir Ross’s recommendations in full. In addition, further ex gratia payments of £35,000 have been made to 200 individuals in recognition of the additional delay which will be caused whilst the Group takes steps to implement Sir Ross’s recommendations. It is engaged in discussionsnot possible to estimate at this stage what the financial impact will be.

HBOS READING – FCA INVESTIGATION

The FCA’s investigation into the events surrounding the discovery of misconduct within the Reading-based Impaired Assets team of HBOS has concluded. The Group has settled the matter with the PRA, FCA and other UK and overseas regulators and other governmental authorities onpaid a rangefine of matters. The Group also receives complaints and claims from customers in connection with its past conduct and, where significant, provisions are held against£45.5 million, as per the costs expected to be incurred as a result of the conclusions reached. In the year ended 31 December 2016, the Group charged an additional £450 million in respect of matters across all divisions. At 31 December 2016, the Group held unutilised provisions totalling £573 million for these other legal actions and regulatory matters.

Vacant leasehold property

Vacant leasehold property provisions are made by reference to a prudent estimate of expected sub-let income, compared to the head rent, and the possibility of disposing of the Group’s interest in the lease, taking into account conditions in the property market. These provisions are reassessed on a biannual basis and will normally run off over the period of under-recovery of the leases concerned, currently averaging 3 years; where a property is disposed of earlier than anticipated, any remaining balance in the provision relating to that property is released.FCA’s final notice dated 21 June 2019.

 

Other

 

Following the sale of TSB Banking Group plc, in 2015, the Group raised a provision of £665 million in relation to the Transitional Service Agreement entered into between Lloyds Bank plc and TSB and the contribution to be provided to TSB in moving to alternative IT provision; £611various ongoing commitments; £117 million of this provision remained unutilised at 31 December 2016.2019.

 

Provisions are made for staff and other costs related to Group restructuring initiatives at the point at which the Group becomes irrevocably committed to the expenditure. At 31 December 20162019 provisions of £239£129 million (31 December 2015: £2012018: £191 million) were held.

 

OtherThe Group carries provisions also include those arising out of the insolvency of a third party insurer, which remains exposed£118 million (2018: £122 million) for indemnities and other matters relating to asbestos and pollution claimslegacy business disposals in the US. The ultimate cost and timing of payments are uncertain. The provision held of £35 million at 31 December 2016 represents management’s current best estimate of the cost after having regard to actuarial estimates of future losses.prior years.

F-57F-69

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 39: SUBORDINATED LIABILITIES

 

The movement in subordinated liabilities during the year was as follows:

 

   Preference
shares
£m
   Preferred 
securities
£m
   Undated
subordinated
liabilities
£m
   Enhanced
capital notes
£m
   Dated
subordinated
liabilities
£m
   Total
£m
 
At 1 January 2016  980   3,748   965   3,610   14,009   23,312 
Issued during the year:                        
4.65% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2026 (US$1,500 million)              1,061   1,061 
Tender offers and redemptions in respect of Enhanced Capital Notes           (3,568)     (3,568)
Other repurchases and redemptions during the year:                        
7.5% Undated Subordinated Step-up Notes        (5)        (5)
4.939% Non-voting Non-cumulative Perpetual Preferred Securities     (32)         �� (32)
7.286% Perpetual Regulatory Tier One Securities (Series A)     (150)           (150)
4.25% Subordinated Undated Instruments        (7)        (7)
Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes        (108)        (108)
Primary Capital Undated Floating Rate Notes:                        
Series 1        (101)        (101)
Series 2        (142)        (142)
Series 3        (110)        (110)
6.267% Non-Cumulative Callable Fixed to Floating Rate Preference Shares callable 2016  (319)              (319)
5.125% Undated Subordinated Step-up Notes callable 2016        (2)        (2)
13% Subordinated Fixed to Fixed Rate Notes 2021 callable 2016              (244)  (244)
10.125% Subordinated Fixed to Fixed Rate Notes 2021 callable 2016              (233)  (233)
11.875% Subordinated Fixed to Fixed Rate Notes 2021 callable 2016              (960)  (960)
10.75% Subordinated Fixed to Fixed Rate Notes 2021 callable 2016              (466)  (466)
9.875% Subordinated Fixed to Fixed Rate Notes 2021                        
callable 2016              (456)  (456)
Callable Floating Rate Subordinated Notes 2016              (186)  (186)
Callable Floating Rate Subordinated Notes 2016              (143)  (143)
Subordinated Callable Notes 2016              (382)  (382)
   (319)  (182)  (475)     (3,070)  (4,046)
Foreign exchange and other movements  203   568   109   (42)  2,234   3,072 
At 31 December 2016  864   4,134   599      14,234   19,831 
  Preference
shares
£m
  Preferred
securities
£m
  Undated
subordinated
liabilities
£m
  Dated
subordinated
liabilities
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 1 January 2018  813   3,690   565   12,854   17,922 
Issued during the year           1,729   1,729 
Repurchases and redemptions during the year1     (614)     (1,642)  (2,256)
Foreign exchange movements  18   131   20   377   546 
Other movements (all non-cash)  (28)  (2)  3   (258)  (285)
At 31 December 2018  803   3,205   588   13,060   17,656 
Repurchases and redemptions during the year1  (3)  (49)  (53)  (713)  (818)
Foreign exchange movements  (12)  (83)  (36)  (402)  (533)
Other movements (all non-cash)  114   152   18   541   825 
At 31 December 2019  902   3,225   517   12,486   17,130 

F-581The repurchases and redemptions resulted in cash outflows of £818 million (2018: £2,256 million).

Issued during 2018
Dated subordinated liabilities£m
1.75% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2028 callable 2023664
4.344% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes callable 20481,065
1,729
Repurchases and redemptions during 2019
Preference shares£m
6.3673% Non-cumulative Fixed to Floating Rate Preference Shares callable 20193
Preferred securities£m
13% Step-up Perpetual Capital Securities callable 201949
Undated subordinated liabilities£m
6.5% Undated Subordinated Step-up Notes callable 20191
7.375% Undated Subordinated Guaranteed Bonds52
53
Dated subordinated liabilities£m
10.375% Subordinated Fixed to Fixed Rate Notes 2024 callable 2019135
9.375% Subordinated Bonds 2021328
6.375% Subordinated Instruments 2019250
713
Repurchases and redemptions during 2018
Preferred securities£m
6.461% Guaranteed Non-voting Non-cumulative Perpetual Preferred Securities600
Undated Perpetual Preferred Securities14
614
Dated subordinated liabilities£m
10.5% Subordinated Bonds callable 2018150
6.75% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes callable 20181,492
1,642

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 39: SUBORDINATED LIABILITIES continued

   Preference
shares
£m
   Preferred
securities
£m
   Undated
subordinated
liabilities
£m
   Enhanced
capital notes
£m
   Dated
subordinated
liabilities
£m
   Total
£m
 
At 1 January 2015  1,091   3,819   1,852   3,683   15,597   26,042 
Issued during the year:                        
5.3% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2045 (US$824 million)              543   543 
4.582% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2025 (US$1,353 million)              893   893 
               1,436   1,436 
Repurchases and redemptions during the year:                        
6.625% Subordinated Notes 2015              (350)  (350)
4.875% Subordinated Notes 2015              (723)  (723)
7.834% Sterling Step-up Non-Voting Non-Cumulative Preferred Securities callable 2015     (5)           (5)
8.117% Non-cumulative Perpetual Preferred Securities (Class A)     (250)           (250)
6.0884% Non-Cumulative Fixed to Floating Rate Preference Shares callable 2015  (10)              (10)
6.625% Undated Subordinated Step-Up Notes callable 2010        (5)        (5)
6.9625% Callable Subordinated Fixed to Floating Rate Notes 2020 callable 2015              (737)  (737)
5.125% Step-up Perpetual Subordinated Notes callable 2015 (Scottish Widows plc)        (560)        (560)
5.92% Non-cumulative Fixed to Floating Rate Preference shares callable 2015  (140)              (140)
Floating Rate Undated Subordinated Step-up Notes        (29)        (29)
6.05% Fixed to Floating Rate Undated Subordinated Notes        (18)        (18)
5.125% Undated Subordinated Fixed to Floating Rate Notes        (50)        (50)
5.109% Callable Fixed to Floating Rate Notes 2017              (14)  (14)
6.305% Subordinated Callable Fixed to Floating Notes 2017              (35)  (35)
6.50% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2020              (764)  (764)
6% Subordinated Notes 2033              (191)  (191)
4.25% Perpetual Fixed to Floating Rate Reset Subordinated Guaranteed Notes        (276)        (276)
   (150)  (255)  (938)     (2,814)  (4,157)
Foreign exchange and other movements  39   184   51   (73)  (210)  (9)
At 31 December 2015  980   3,748   965   3,610   14,009   23,312 

 

These securities will, in the event of the winding-up of the issuer, be subordinated to the claims of depositors and all other creditors of the issuer, other than creditors whose claims rank equally with, or are junior to, the claims of the holders of the subordinated liabilities. The subordination of specific subordinated liabilities is determined in respect of the issuer and any guarantors of that liability. The claims of holders of preference shares and preferred securities are generally junior to those of the holders of undated subordinated liabilities, which in turn are junior to the claims of holders of the dated subordinated liabilities. The subordination of the dated Enhanced Capital Notes (ECNs) ranked equally with that of the dated subordinated liabilities. The Group has not had any defaults of principal, interest or other breaches with respect to its subordinated liabilities during 2016 (2015:2019 (2018: none).

F-59F-70

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 40: SHARE CAPITAL

 

(1) Authorised share capital

 

As permitted by the Companies Act 2006, the Company removed references to authorised share capital from its articles of association at the annual general meeting on 5 June 2009. This change took effect from 1 October 2009.

 

(2) Issued and fully paid share capital

 

2016
Number of shares
2015
Number of shares
2014
Number of shares
2016
£m
2015
£m
2014
£m
 2019
Number of shares
  2018
Number of shares
 2017
Number of shares
 2019
£m
  2018
£m
 2017
£m
 
Ordinary shares of 10p (formerly 25p) each   Ordinary shares of 10p (formerly 25p) each                     
At 1 January71,373,735,35771,373,735,35771,368,435,9417,1387,1387,137  71,163,592,264   71,972,949,589   71,373,735,357   7,116   7,197   7,138 
Issued under employee share schemes5,299,4161  775,882,951   768,551,098   518,293,181   78   77   51 
Share buyback programme (note 42)  (1,886,917,377)  (1,577,908,423)     (189)  (158)   
Redesignation of limited voting ordinary shares (see below)        80,921,051         8 
At 31 December71,373,735,35771,373,735,3577,1387,1387,138  70,052,557,838   71,163,592,264   71,972,949,589   7,005   7,116   7,197 
Limited voting ordinary shares of 10p (formerly 25p) each                             
At 1 January and 31 December80,921,05180,921,051888
At 1 January        80,921,051         8 
Redesignation to ordinary shares        (80,921,051)        (8)
At 31 December                  
Total issued share capital 7,1467,1467,146              7,005   7,116   7,197 

 

SHARE ISSUANCES

 

NoIn 2019, 776 million shares were issued in 2016 or 2015; in 2014, 5(2018: 769 million sharesshares; 2017: 518 million shares) were issued in respect of employee share schemes.

 

(3) Share capital and control

 

There are no restrictions on the transfer of shares in the Company other than as set out in the articles of association and:

 

certain restrictions which may from time to time be imposed by law and regulations (for example, insider trading laws);

where directors and certain employees of the Company require the approval of the Company to deal in the Company’s shares; and

pursuant to the rules of some of the Company’s employee share plans where certain restrictions may apply while the shares are subject to the plans.

 

Where, under an employee share plan operated by the Company, participants are the beneficial owners of shares but not the registered owners, the voting rights are normally exercised by the registered owner at the direction of the participant. Outstanding awards and options would normally vest and become exercisable on a change of control, subject to the satisfaction of any performance conditions at that time.

 

In addition, the Company is not aware of any agreements between shareholders that may result in restrictions on the transfer of securities and/or voting rights.

 

Information regarding significant direct or indirect holdings of shares in the Company can be found on page 177.170.

 

The directors have authority to allot and issue ordinary and preference shares and to make market purchases of ordinary and preference shares as granted at the annual general meeting on 1216 May 2016.2019. The authority to issue shares and the authority to make market purchases of shares will expire at the next annual general meeting. Shareholders will be asked, at the annual general meeting, to give similar authorities.

 

Subject to any rights or restrictions attached to any shares, on a show of hands at a general meeting of the Company every holder of shares present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote has one vote and on a poll every member present and entitled to vote has one vote for every share held.

 

Further details regarding voting at the annual general meeting can be found in the notes to the notice of the annual general meeting.

 

ORDINARY SHARES

 

The holders of ordinary shares, (excluding the limited voting ordinary shares), who held 99.9100 per cent of the total ordinary share capital at 31 December 2016,2019, are entitled to receive the Company’s report and accounts, attend, speak and vote at general meetings and appoint proxies to exercise voting rights. Holders of ordinary shares (excluding the limited voting ordinary shares) may also receive a dividend (subject to the provisions of the Company’s articles of association) and on a winding up may share in the assets of the Company.

 

LIMITED VOTING ORDINARY SHARES

 

TheAt the annual general meeting on 11 May 2017, the Company’s shareholders approved the redesignation of the 80,921,051 limited voting ordinary shares are held by the Lloyds Bank Foundations (the Foundations). The holders of the limited votingas ordinary shares who held 0.1 per cent of 10 pence each. The redesignation took effect on 1 July 2017 and the total ordinary share capital at 31 December 2016, are entitled to receive copies of every circular or other document sent out by the Company to the holders of other ordinary shares. Theseredesignated shares carry no rights to dividends but rank pari passu with the ordinary shares in respect of other distributions and in the event of winding up. These shares do not have any right to vote at general meetings other than on resolutions concerning the winding up of the Company, or for a variation in the class rights of the limited voting ordinary shares. In the event of an offer for more than 50 per cent of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company, each limited voting ordinary share will convert into an ordinary share and shallnow rank equally with the existing issued ordinary shares in all respects fromof the date of conversion.Company.

 

The Company has entered into deeds of covenant with the Foundations under the terms of which the Company makes annual donations. The deeds of covenant in effect as at 31 December 20162019 provide that such annual donations will cease in certain circumstances, including the Company providing nine years’ notice. Such notice has been given to the Lloyds TSB Foundation for Scotland.

 

PREFERENCE SHARES

 

The Company has in issue various classes of preference shares which are all classified as liabilities under IFRSaccounting standards and which are included in note 39.

F-60F-71

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 41: SHARE PREMIUM ACCOUNT

 

 2016
£m
  2015
£m
  2014
£m
  2019
£m
 2018
£m
 2017
£m
 
At 1 January  17,412   17,281   17,279   17,719   17,634   17,622 
Issued under employee share schemes        2   29   85   12 
Redemption of preference shares1  210   131      3       
At 31 December  17,622   17,412   17,281   17,751   17,719   17,634 

 

1During the year ended 31 December 2016,2019, the Company redeemed all of its outstanding 6.267%6.3673% Non-cumulative Fixed to Floating Rate Callable US Dollar Preference Shares at their combined sterling equivalent par value of £210£3 million. These preference shares had been accounted for as subordinated liabilities. On redemption an amount of £210£3 million was transferred from the distributable merger reserve to the share premium account (2015: £131 million in respect of the redemption of the outstanding 6.0884% Non-cumulative Fixed to Floating Rate Preference Shares and 5.92% Non-cumulative Fixed to Floating Rate Preference Shares).account.

 

NOTE 42: OTHER RESERVES

 

  2016
£m
  2015
£m
  2014
£m
 
Other reserves comprise:         
Merger reserve  7,766   7,976   8,107 
Capital redemption reserve1  4,115   4,115   4,115 
Revaluation reserve in respect of available-for-sale financial assets  759   (438)  (67)
Cash flow hedging reserve  2,136   727   1,139 
Foreign currency translation reserve  (124)  (120)  (78)
At 31 December  14,652   12,260   13,216 

1There were no movements in this reserve during 2014, 2015 or 2016.
  2019
£m
  2018
£m
  2017
£m
 
Other reserves comprise:            
Merger reserve  7,763   7,766   7,766 
Capital redemption reserve  4,462   4,273   4,115 
Revaluation reserve in respect of debt securities held at fair value through other comprehensive income  123   279     
Revaluation reserve in respect of equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income  19   5     
Revaluation reserve in respect of available-for-sale financial assets          685 
Cash flow hedging reserve  1,504   1,051   1,405 
Foreign currency translation reserve  (176)  (164)  (156)
At 31 December  13,695   13,210   13,815 

 

The merger reserve primarily comprises the premium on shares issued on 13in January 2009 underas part of the placingrecapitalisation of the Group and open offer and shares issued on 16 January 2009 on the acquisition of HBOS plc.


The capital redemption reserve represents transfers from the mergerdistributable reserve in accordance with companies’ legislation upon the redemption of ordinary and amounts transferred frompreference share capital following the cancellation of the deferred shares.capital.

 

The revaluation reservereserves in respect of available-for-sale financial assets representsdebt securities and equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income represent the cumulative after tax unrealised change in the fair value of financial assets so classified as available-for-sale since initial recognition; or in the case of available-for-sale financial assets obtained on acquisitions of businesses, since the date of acquisition; and in the case of transferred assets that were previously held at amortised cost, by reference to that amortised cost.acquisition.

 

The cash flow hedging reserve represents the cumulative after tax gains and losses on effective cash flow hedging instruments that will be reclassified to the income statement in the periods in which the hedged item affects profit or loss.

 

The foreign currency translation reserve represents the cumulative after-tax gains and losses on the translation of foreign operations and exchange differences arising on financial instruments designated as hedges of the Group’s net investment in foreign operations.

 

 2016
£m
  2015
£m
  2014
£m
  2019
£m
  2018
£m
 2017
£m
 
Merger reserve                    
At 1 January  7,976   8,107   8,107   7,766   7,766   7,766 
Redemption of preference shares (note 41)  (210)  (131)     (3)      
At 31 December  7,766   7,976   8,107   7,763   7,766   7,766 
            
  2019
£m
   2018
£m
   2017
£m
 
Capital redemption reserve            
At 1 January  4,273   4,115   4,115 
Shares cancelled under share buyback programmes (see below)  189   158    
At 31 December  4,462   4,273   4,115 

On 20 February 2019 the Group announced the launch of a share buyback programme to repurchase outstanding ordinary shares and the programme commenced on 1 March 2019; the Group bought back and cancelled 1,887 million shares under the programme, for a total consideration, including expenses, of £1,095 million. Upon cancellation £189 million, being the nominal value of the shares repurchased, was transferred to the capital redemption reserve.

Under a similar programme in 2018, the Group bought back and cancelled 1,578 million shares for a total consideration, including expenses, of £1,005 million; £158 million was transferred to the capital redemption reserve.

F-61F-72

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 42: OTHER RESERVES continued

  2019
£m
  2018
£m
 
Revaluation reserve in respect of debt securities held at fair value through other comprehensive income        
At 1 January  279   472 
         
Change in fair value  (30)  (37)
Deferred tax  10   35 
   (20)  (2)
Income statement transfer in respect of disposals (note 9)  (196)  (275)
Deferred tax  61   84 
   (135)  (191)
Impairment recognised in the income statement  (1)   
At 31 December  123   279 
         
   2019
£m
   2018
£m
 
Revaluation reserve in respect of equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income        
At 1 January  5   (49)
         
Change in fair value     (97)
Deferred tax  12   22 
   12   (75)
Realised gains and losses transferred to retained profits  14   151 
Deferred tax  (12)  (22)
   2   129 
At 31 December  19   5 
F-73

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 42: OTHER RESERVES continued

 

Movements in other reserves were as follows:

 

 2016
£m
  2015
£m
 2014
£m
       2017
£m
 
Revaluation reserve in respect of available-for-sale financial assets                        
At 1 January  (438)  (67)  (615)          759 
Adjustment on transfer from held-to-maturity portfolio  1,544       
Deferred tax  (417)      
  1,127                   
Change in fair value of available-for-sale financial assets  356   (318)  690           303 
Deferred tax  (25)  (18)  (65)          (26)
Current tax  (3)  2              (4)
  328   (334)  625           273 
Income statement transfers:                        
Disposals (note 9)  (575)  (51)  (131)          (446)
Deferred tax  196   3   52           93 
Current tax  (52)  (1)              
  (431)  (49)  (79)          (353)
            
Impairment  173   4   2           6 
Deferred tax     8               
  173   12   2           6 
At 31 December  759   (438)  (67)          685 
            
  2016
£m
   2015
£m
   2014
£m
   2019
£m
   2018
£m
   2017
£m
 
Cash flow hedging reserve                        
At 1 January  727   1,139   (1,055)  1,051   1,405   2,136 
Change in fair value of hedging derivatives  2,432   537   3,896   1,209   234   (363)
Deferred tax  (610)  (186)  (765)  (303)  (69)  121 
  1,822   351   3,131   906   165   (242)
Income statement transfers (note 5)  (557)  (956)  (1,153)
Income statement transfers  (608)  (701)  (651)
Deferred tax  144   193   216   155   182   162 
  (413)  (763)  (937)  (453)  (519)  (489)
At 31 December  2,136   727   1,139   1,504   1,051   1,405 
            
  2016
£m
   2015
£m
   2014
£m
   2019
£m
   2018
£m
   2017
£m
 
Foreign currency translation reserve                        
At 1 January  (120)  (78)  (75)  (164)  (156)  (124)
Currency translation differences arising in the year  (110)  (59)  (25)  (12)  (8)  (21)
Foreign currency gains on net investment hedges (tax: £nil)  106   17   22         (11)
At 31 December  (124)  (120)  (78)  (176)  (164)  (156)
F-62F-74

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 43: RETAINED PROFITS

 

 2016
£m
  2015
£m
 2014
£m
   2019   20181   20171 
  £m   £m   £m 
At 31 December 2017      4,905     
Adjustment on adoption of IFRS 9 and IFRS 15      (929)    
At 1 January  4,416   5,692   4,088   5,389   3,976   3,250 
Profit for the year  2,063   860   1,412   2,925   4,408   3,909 
Dividends paid1  (2,014)  (1,070)   
Issue costs of other equity instruments (net of tax)        (21)
Distributions on other equity instruments (net of tax)  (321)  (314)  (225)
Dividends paid2  (2,312)  (2,240)  (2,284)
Issue costs of other equity instruments (net of tax) (note 44)  (3)  (5)   
Distributions on other equity instruments  (466)  (433)  (415)
Share buyback programmes (note 42)  (1,095)  (1,005)   
Realised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income  (2)  (129)    
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements  (1,028)  (215)  539   (1,117)  120   482 
Share of other comprehensive income of associates and joint ventures     8    
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk (net of tax)3  (306)  389   (40)
Movement in treasury shares  (175)  (816)  (286)  (3)  40   (411)
Value of employee services:                        
Share option schemes  141   107   123   71   53   82 
Other employee award schemes  168   172   233   165   207   332 
Adjustment on sale of non-controlling interest in TSB        (171)
At 31 December  3,250   4,416   5,692   3,246   5,389   4,905 

 

1Restated, see note 1.
2Net of a credit in respect of unclaimed dividends written-back in accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association.Association in 2017.
3During 2017 the Group derecognised, on redemption, financial liabilities on which cumulative fair value movements relating to own credit of £3 million net of tax, had been recognised directly in retained profits.

 

Retained profits are stated after deducting £495£575 million (2015: £740(2018: £499 million; 2014: £5652017: £611 million) representing 730902 million (2015: 943(2018: 909 million; 2014: 6482017: 861 million) treasury shares held.

 

The payment of dividends by subsidiaries and the ability of members of the Group to lend money to other members of the Group may be subject to regulatory or legal restrictions, the availability of reserves and the financial and operating performance of the entity. Details of such restrictions and the methods adopted by the Group to manage the capital of its subsidiaries are provided under Capital Risk on page 104.87.

 

NOTE 44: OTHER EQUITY INSTRUMENTS

 

  2016
£m
  2015
£m
  2014
£m
 
At 1 January  5,355   5,355    
Additional Tier 1 securities issued in the year:            
Sterling notes (£3,725 million nominal)        3,725 
Euro notes (€750 million nominal)        622 
US dollar notes ($1,675 million nominal)        1,008 
At 31 December  5,355   5,355   5,355 
  2019  2018  2017 
  £m  £m  £m 
At 1 January  6,491   5,355   5,355 
Issued in the year:            
US dollar notes ($1,500 million nominal)     1,136    
US dollar notes ($500 million nominal)  396       
Sterling notes (£500 million nominal)  500       
Redemption  (1,481)      
At 31 December  5,906   6,491   5,355 

During the year ended 31 December 2019 the Group issued £500 million of sterling and £396 million (US$500 million) of US dollar Additional Tier 1 (AT1) securities; issue costs of £3 million, net of tax, were charged to retained profits.

On 27 June 2019 the Group redeemed, at par, £1,481 million of Additional Tier 1 securities at their first call date.

 

The AT1 securities are Fixed Rate Resetting Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities with no fixed maturity or redemption date.

 

The principal terms of the AT1 securities are described below:

 

The securities rank behind the claims against Lloyds Banking Group plc of (a) unsubordinated creditors, (b) claims which are, or are expressed to be, subordinated to the claims of unsubordinated creditors of Lloyds Banking Group plc but not further or otherwise or (c) whose claims are, or are expressed to be, junior to the claims of other creditors of Lloyds Banking Group, whether subordinated or unsubordinated, other than those whose claims rank, or are expressed to rank, pari passu with, or junior to, the claims of the holders of the AT1 Securities in a winding-up occurring prior to the Conversion Trigger.a conversion event being triggered.

The securities bear a fixed rate of interest until the first call date. After the initial call date, in the event that they are not redeemed, the AT1 securities will bear interest at rates fixed periodically in advance for five year periods based on market rates.
  
Interest on the securities will be due and payable only at the sole discretion of Lloyds Banking Group plc, and Lloyds Banking Group plc may at any time elect to cancel any Interest Payment (or any part thereof) which would otherwise be payable on any Interest Payment Date. There are also certain restrictions on the payment of interest as specified in the terms.
  
The securities are undated and are repayable, at the option of Lloyds Banking Group plc, in whole at the first call date, or on any fifth anniversary after the first call date. In addition, the AT1 securities are repayable, at the option of Lloyds Banking Group plc, in whole for certain regulatory or tax reasons. Any repayments require the prior consent of the PRA.
  
The securities convert into ordinary shares of Lloyds Banking Group plc, at a pre-determined price, should the fully loaded Common Equity Tier 1 ratio of the Group fall below 7.0 per cent.
F-63F-75

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 45: DIVIDENDS ON ORDINARY SHARES

 

The directors have recommended a final dividend, which is subject to approval by the shareholders at the Annual General Meeting, of 1.72.25 pence per share (2015: 1.5(2018: 2.14 pence per share; 2014: 0.752017: 2.05 pence per share) representing a total dividend of £1,212£1,586 million (2015: £1,070(2018: £1,523 million; 2014: £5352017: £1,475 million), which will be paid on 1627 May 2017.2020. The directors have also recommended a special dividend of 0.5 pence per share (2015: 0.5 pence per share; 2014: nil) representing a total dividend of £356 million (2015: £357 million; 2014: nil). These financial statements do not reflect these recommended dividends.

 

Dividends paid during the year were as follows:

 

 2019  2018 2017         
 pence  pence pence  2019  2018 2017 
 2016
pence
per share
 2015
pence
per share
 2014
pence
per share
 2016
£m
 2015
£m
 2014
£m
  per share  per share per share  £m  £m £m 
Recommended by directors at previous year end:                                        
Final dividend  1.50   0.75      1,070   535      2.14   2.05   1.70   1,523   1,475   1,212 
Special dividend  0.50         357               0.50         356 
Interim dividend paid in the year  0.85   0.75      607   535      1.12   1.07   1.00   789   765   720 
  2.85   1.50      2,034   1,070      3.26   3.12   3.20   2,312   2,240   2,288 

The cash cost of the dividends paid in the year was £2,312 million (2018: £2,240 million; 2017: £2,284 million), in 2017 this was net of a credit in respect of unclaimed dividends written-back in accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association.

In May 2019 the Group announced that it will move to the payment of quarterly dividends in 2020, with the first quarterly dividend in respect of the first quarter of 2020 payable in June 2020. The new approach will be to adopt three equal interim ordinary dividend payments for the first three quarters of the year followed by, subject to performance, a larger final dividend for the fourth quarter of the year. The first three quarterly payments, payable in June, September and December will be 20 per cent of the previous year’s total ordinary dividend per share. The fourth quarter payment will be announced with the full year results. The final dividend will continue to be paid in May, following approval at the AGM. The Group believes that this approach will provide a more regular flow of dividend income to all shareholders whilst accelerating the receipt of payments.

 

The trustees of the following holdings of Lloyds Banking Group plc shares in relation to employee share schemes retain the right to receive dividends but have chosen to waive their entitlement to the dividends on those shares as indicated: the Lloyds Banking Group Share Incentive Plan (holding at 31 December 2016: 27,898,0192019: 6,508,529 shares, 31 December 2015: 24,275,8242018: 5,538,164 shares, waived rights to all dividends), the HBOS Share Incentive Plan Trust (holding at 31 December 2016:2019: 445,625 shares, 31 December 2015: 446,1692018: 445,625 shares, waived rights to all dividends), the Lloyds Banking Group Employee Share Ownership Trust (holding at 31 December 2016: 10,699,9782019: 11,656,155 shares, 31 December 2015: 164,141,1792018: 5,679,119 shares, on which it waived rights to all dividends), and Lloyds Group Holdings (Jersey) Limited (holding at 31 December 2016: 42,846 shares,2019: nil, 31 December 2015:2018: 42,846 shares, waived rights to all but a nominal amount of one penny in total) and the Lloyds Banking Group Qualifying Employee Share Ownership Trust (holding at 31 December 2016: nil shares, 31 December 2015: 1,398 shares, waived rights to all but a nominal amount of one penny in total).

 

NOTE 46: SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS

 

Charge to the income statement

 

The charge to the income statement is set out below:

 

 2019 2018 2017 
 2016
£m
 2015
£m
 2014
£m
  £m £m £m 
Deferred bonus plan  266   255   213   261   325   313 
Executive and SAYE plans:                        
Options granted in the year  16   12   29   16   14   17 
Options granted in prior years  138   99   78   59   71   81 
  154   111   107   75   85   98 
Share plans:                        
Shares granted in the year  15   15   14   17   16   17 
Shares granted in prior years  7   6   6   20   17   9 
  22   21   20   37   33   26 
Total charge to the income statement  442   387   340   373   443   437 

 

During the year ended 31 December 20162019 the Group operated the following share-based payment schemes, all of which are equity settled.

 

Deferred bonus plansGroup Performance Share plan

 

The Group operates a number of deferred bonus plansGroup Performance Share plan that areis equity settled. Bonuses in respect of employee performance in 20162019 have been recognised in the charge in line with the proportion of the deferral period completed.

F-64F-76

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 46: SHARE-BASED PAYMENTScontinued

 

Save-As-You-Earn schemes

 

Eligible employees may enter into contracts through the Save-As-You-Earn (SAYE) schemes to save up to £500 per month and, at the expiry of a fixed term of three or five years, have the option to use these savings within six months of the expiry of the fixed term to acquire shares in the Group at a discounted price of no less than 80 per cent of the market price at the start of the invitation.

 

Movements in the number of share options outstanding under the SAYE schemes are set out below:

 

 2019  2018 
   Weighted    Weighted 
   average    average 
 2016 2015  Number of exercise price  Number of exercise price 
 Number of
options
  Weighted
average
exercise price
(pence)
 Number of
options
 Weighted
average
exercise price
(pence)
  options  (pence) options (pence)
Outstanding at 1 January  850,146,220   50.99   783,626,383   48.73   802,994,918   49.30   860,867,088   51.34 
Granted  454,667,560   47.49   156,797,949   60.70   487,654,212   39.87   188,866,162   47.92 
Exercised  (401,286,043)  40.74   (32,683,177)  41.83   (27,303,963)  51.23   (135,721,404)  59.00 
Forfeited  (10,590,490)  56.02   (27,740,207)  48.69   (15,830,204)  48.69   (22,909,999)  49.85 
Cancelled  (204,238,535)  60.23   (24,943,674)  56.04   (130,068,149)  49.03   (78,073,042)  50.66 
Expired  (10,005,816)  57.08   (4,911,054)  48.34   (49,352,741)  58.74   (10,033,887)  55.20 
Outstanding at 31 December  678,692,896   51.76   850,146,220   50.99   1,068,094,073   44.55   802,994,918   49.30 
Exercisable at 31 December        533,654   180.66   227,139   60.70   68,378   60.02 

 

The weighted average share price at the time that the options were exercised during 20162019 was £0.67 (2015: £0.77)£0.59 (2018: £0.67). The weighted average remaining contractual life of options outstanding at the end of the year was 2.92.22 years (2015: 1.9(2018: 2.16 years).

 

The weighted average fair value of SAYE options granted during 20162019 was £0.13 (2015: £0.17)£0.10 (2018: £0.13). The fair values of the SAYE options have been determined using a standard Black-Scholes model.

For the HBOS sharesave plan, no options were exercised during 2015 or 2016 and the outstanding options lapsed on 31 December 2016. The options outstanding at 31 December 2015 had an exercise price of £1.8066 and a weighted average remaining contractual life of 0.4 years.

 

Other share option plans

 

LLOYDS BANKING GROUP EXECUTIVE SHARE PLAN 2003

 

The Plan was adopted in December 2003 and under the Plan share options may be granted to senior employees. Options under this plan have been granted specifically to facilitate recruitment and as such were not subject to any performance conditions. The Plan is used not only to(to compensate new recruits for any lost share awards butawards), and also to make grants to key individuals for retention purposes with, inpurposes. In some instances, the grant beinggrants may be made subject to individual performance conditions.

For options granted on 27 March 2014 under the Commercial Banking Transformation Plan (CBTP), the number of options that may be delivered in March 2017 may vary by a factor of 0-4 from the original ‘on-target’ award, depending on the degree to which the performance conditions have been met. An ‘on-target’ vesting is contingent upon Commercial Banking achieving £2.5 billion underlying profit and 2 per cent Return on Risk-weighted Assets (‘RoRWA’) on 31 December 2016. The Plan will pay out at between £1.9 billion and £3 billion underlying profit, and between 1.6 per cent and 2.5 per cent RoRWA.

 

Participants are not entitled to any dividends paid during the vesting period.

 

 2019  2018 
   Weighted    Weighted 
   average    average 
 2016  2015  Number of exercise price  Number of exercise price 
 Number of
options
  Weighted
average
exercise price
(pence)
  Number of
options
  Weighted
average
exercise price
(pence)
  options  (pence) options (pence)
Outstanding at 1 January  221,397,597   Nil   233,389,084   Nil   10,263,028   Nil   14,523,989   Nil 
Granted  4,298,701   Nil   9,813,363   Nil   2,336,171   Nil   3,914,599   Nil 
Exercised  (2,700,679)  Nil   (13,313,421)  Nil   (4,455,481)  Nil   (6,854,043)  Nil 
Vested  (69,005)  Nil   (148,109)  Nil 
Forfeited  (3,863,477)  Nil   (8,374,250)  Nil   (39,250)  Nil   (662,985)  Nil 
Lapsed  (169,861)  Nil   (117,179)  Nil   (400,825)  Nil   (510,423)  Nil 
Outstanding at 31 December  218,962,281   Nil   221,397,597   Nil   7,634,638   Nil   10,263,028   Nil 
Exercisable at 31 December  4,504,392   Nil   3,972,911   Nil   2,683,267   Nil   3,305,442   Nil 

 

The weighted average fair value of options granted in the year was £0.68 (2015: £0.75)£0.59 (2018: £0.55). The fair values of options granted have been determined using a standard Black-Scholes model. The weighted average share price at the time that the options were exercised during 20162019 was £0.64 (2015: £0.83)£0.60 (2018: £0.65). The weighted average remaining contractual life of options outstanding at the end of the year was 5.13.8 years (2015: 6.1(2018: 5.2 years).

F-65F-77

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 46: SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS continued

 

Other share plans

 

LLOYDS BANKING GROUP LONG-TERM INCENTIVEEXECUTIVE SHARE OWNERSHIP PLAN

 

The Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)plan, introduced in 2006, is aimed at delivering shareholder value by linking the receipt of shares to an improvement in the performance of the Group over a three year period. Awards are made within limits set by the rules of the Plan,plan, with the limits determining the maximum number of shares that can be awarded equating to three times annual salary. In exceptional circumstances this may increase to four times annual salary.

 

Participants may beAt the end of the performance period for the 2016 grant, the targets had not been fully met and therefore these awards vested in 2019 at a rate of 68.7 per cent.

  2019  2018 
  Number of  Number of 
  shares  shares 
Outstanding at 1 January  417,385,636   370,804,915 
Granted  174,490,843   160,586,201 
Vested  (88,318,950)  (73,270,301)
Forfeited  (55,029,439)  (48,108,870)
Dividend award  11,376,655   7,373,691 
Outstanding at 31 December  459,904,745   417,385,636 

Awards in respect of the 2017 grant vested in 2020 at a rate of 49.7 per cent. For the 2017 grant, participants are entitled to any dividends paid during the vesting period if the performance conditions are met.period. An amount equal in value to any dividends paid between the award date and the date the Remuneration Committee determine that the performance conditions were met, maywill be paid, based on the number of shares that vest. The Remuneration Committee willcan determine if any dividends are to be paid in cash or in shares. Details of the performance conditions for the plan are provided in the Directors’ remuneration report.

At the end of the performance period for the 2013 grant, the targets had not been fully met and therefore these awards vested in 2016 at a rate of 94.18 per cent.

  2016
Number of
shares
  2015
Number of
shares
 
Outstanding at 1 January  398,066,746   522,836,111 
Granted  132,194,032   121,676,131 
Vested  (140,879,465)  (196,193,904)
Forfeited  (33,713,900)  (50,251,592)
Dividend award  2,560,615    
Outstanding at 31 December  358,228,028   398,066,746 

Awards in respect of the 2014 grant will vest in 2017 at a rate of 55 per cent.Compensation.

 

The weighted average fair value of awards granted in the year was £0.64 (2015: £0.78)£0.45 (2018: £0.48).

CFO BUYOUT

William Chalmers joined the Group on 3 June 2019 and was appointed as Chief Financial Officer on 1 August 2019 on the retirement of George Culmer. He was granted deferred share awards over 4,086,632 shares, to replace unvested awards from his former employer, Morgan Stanley, that were forfeited as a result of him joining the Group.

2019
Number of
shares
Outstanding at 1 January
Granted4,086,632
Exercised(818,172)
Outstanding at 31 December3,268,460

The weighted average fair value of awards granted in the year was £0.55.

 

The fair value calculations at 31 December 20162019 for grants made in the year, using Black-Scholes models and Monte Carlo simulation, are based on the following assumptions:

 

   Executive     
   Share Plan     
 Save-As-You-
Earn
 Executive
Share Plan
2003
 LTIP Commercial
Banking
Transformation
Plan
 Save-As-You-Earn  2003  LTIP  CFO Buyout 
Weighted average risk-free interest rate 0.25% 0.36% 0.39% 0.43%  0.36%   0.62%   0.83%   0.64% 
Weighted average expected life 3.2 years 1.9 years 3.0 years 0.8 years  3.2 years   1.3 years   3.7 years   1.4 years 
Weighted average expected volatility 30% 26% 24% 33%  20%   23%   27%   19% 
Weighted average expected dividend yield 4.5% 3.1% 0.0% 4.5%  4.0%   4.0%   4.0%   4.0% 
Weighted average share price £0.59 £0.69 £0.73 £0.78 £0.53   £0.62   £0.63   £0.58 
Weighted average exercise price £0.47 nil nil nil  £0.40   Nil   Nil   Nil 

 

Expected volatility is a measure of the amount by which the Group’s shares are expected to fluctuate during the life of an option. The expected volatility is estimated based on the historical volatility of the closing daily share price over the most recent period that is commensurate with the expected life of the option. The historical volatility is compared to the implied volatility generated from market traded options in the Group’s shares to assess the reasonableness of the historical volatility and adjustments made where appropriate.

 

Share Incentive Plan

FREE SHARES

An award of shares may be made annually to employees up to a maximum of £3,600. The shares awarded are held in trust for a mandatory period of three years on the employee’s behalf, during which period the employee is entitled to any dividends paid on such shares. The award is subject to a non-market based condition. If an employee leaves the Group within this three year period for other than a ‘good’ reason, all of the shares awarded will be forfeited.

On 9 May 2019, the Group made an award of £200 (2018: £200) of shares to all eligible employees. The number of shares awarded was 22,422,337 (2018: 21,513,300), with an average fair value of £0.62 (2018: £0.67) based on the market price at the date of award.

F-78

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 46: SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS continued

MATCHING SHARES

 

The Group undertakes to match shares purchased by employees up to the value of £45 per month; these matching shares are held in trust for a mandatory period of three years on the employee’s behalf, during which period the employee is entitled to any dividends paid on such shares. The award is subject to a non-market based condition: if an employee leaves within this three year period for other than a ‘good’ reason, 100 per centall of the matching shares are forfeited. Similarly if the employees sell their purchased shares within three years, their matching shares are forfeited.

 

The number of shares awarded relating to matching shares in 20162019 was 35,956,224 (2015: 18,001,413)37,346,812 (2018: 34,174,161), with an average fair value of £0.61 (2015: £0.78)£0.56 (2018: £0.63), based on market prices at the date of award.

 

FIXED SHARE AWARDSFixed share awards

 

Fixed share awards were introduced in 2014 in order to ensure that total fixed remuneration is commensurate with role and to provide a competitive reward package for certain Lloyds Banking Group employees, with an appropriate balance of fixed and variable remuneration, in line with regulatory requirements. The fixed share awards are delivered in Lloyds Banking Group shares, released over five years with 20 per cent being released each year following the year of award. The number of shares purchased in 20162019 was 10,031,272 (2015: 8,237,469)8,239,332 (2018: 8,965,562).

 

The fixed share award is not subject to any performance conditions, performance adjustment or clawback. On an employee leaving the Group, there is no change to the timeline for which shares will become unrestricted.

F-66

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 47: RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

 

Key management personnel

 

Key management personnel are those persons having authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the activities of an entity; the Group’s key management personnel are the members of the Lloyds Banking Group plc Group Executive Committee together with its Non-Executive Directors.

 

The table below details, on an aggregated basis, key management personnel compensation:

 

 2019  2018 2017 
 2016
£m
 2015
£m
 2014
£m
  £m  £m £m 
Compensation              
Salaries and other short-term benefits  17   14   15   15   14   13 
Post-employment benefits        1          
Share-based payments  23   18   17   15   18   22 
Total compensation  40   32   33   30   32   35 

 

Aggregate contributions in respect of key management personnel to defined contribution pension schemes were £0.1 million (2015: £0.1 million; 2014: £0.1£nil (2018: £nil; 2017: £0.05 million).

 

 2019  2018 2017 
 2016
million
  2015
million
 2014
million
  million  million million 
Share option plans               
At 1 January  9   13   14      1   3 
Granted, including certain adjustments (includes entitlements of appointed key management personnel)  3   3             
Exercised/lapsed (includes entitlements of former key management personnel)  (9)  (7)  (1)     (1)  (2)
At 31 December  3   9   13         1 
            
  2016
million
   2015
million
   2014
million
 
Share plans            
At 1 January  82   102   105 
Granted, including certain adjustments (includes entitlements of appointed key management personnel)  29   37   19 
Exercised/lapsed (includes entitlements of former key management personnel)  (46)  (57)  (22)
At 31 December  65   82   102 

  2019
million
  2018
million
  2017
million
 
Share plans         
At 1 January  84   82   65 
Granted, including certain adjustments (includes entitlements of appointed key management personnel)  (46)  39   37 
Exercised/lapsed (includes entitlements of former key management personnel)  (29)  (37)  (20)
At 31 December  101   84   82 

 

The tables below detail, on an aggregated basis, balances outstanding at the year end and related income and expense, together with information relating to other transactions between the Group and its key management personnel:

 

 2016
£m
  2015
£m
 2014
£m
  2019
£m
  2018
£m
  2017
£m
 
Loans                
At 1 January  5   3   2   2   2   4 
Advanced (includes loans of appointed key management personnel)  3   4   2   1   1   1 
Repayments (includes loans of former key management personnel)  (4)  (2)  (1)  (1)  (1)  (3)
At 31 December  4   5   3   2   2   2 

 

The loans are on both a secured and unsecured basis and are expected to be settled in cash. The loans attracted interest rates of between 2.496.45 per cent and 23.9524.20 per cent in 2016 (2015: 3.992019 (2018: 6.70 per cent and 23.9524.20 per cent; 2014: 0.52017: 6.45 per cent and 23.95 per cent).

F-79

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 47: RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS continued

 

No provisions have been recognised in respect of loans given to key management personnel (2016(2018 and 2015:2017: £nil).

 

 2016
£m
  2015
£m
 2014
£m
  2019
£m
 2018
£m
 2017
£m
 
Deposits               
At 1 January  13   16   13   20   20   12 
Placed (includes deposits of appointed key management personnel)  41   58   32   44   33   41 
Withdrawn (includes deposits of former key management personnel)  (42)  (61)  (29)  (41)  (33)  (33)
At 31 December  12   13   16   23   20   20 

 

Deposits placed by key management personnel attracted interest rates of up to 4.03.0 per cent (2015: 4.7(2018: 3.5 per cent; 2014: 4.72017: 4.0 per cent).

 

At 31 December 2016,2019, the Group did not provide any guarantees in respect of key management personnel (2015(2018 and 2014:2017: none).

 

At 31 December 2016,2019, transactions, arrangements and agreements entered into by the Group’s banking subsidiaries with directors and connected persons included amounts outstanding in respect of loans and credit card transactions of £0.4£0.6 million with fivefour directors and two connected persons (2015: £1(2018: £0.5 million with fourthree directors and sixthree connected persons; 2014: £12017: £0.01 million with sixthree directors and sixtwo connected persons).

F-67

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 47: RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS continued

 

Subsidiaries

 

In accordance with IFRS 10 Consolidated financial statements, transactions and balances with subsidiaries have been eliminated on consolidation.

 

PENSION FUNDS Pension funds

 

The Group provides banking and some investment management services to certain of its pension funds. At 31 December 2016,2019, customer deposits of £171£169 million (2015: £145(2018: £225 million) and investment and insurance contract liabilities of £406£127 million (2015: £694(2018: £79 million) related to the Group’s pension funds.

 

COLLECTIVE INVESTMENT VEHICLESCollective investment vehicles

 

The Group manages 139 (2015: 168)141 (2018: 131) collective investment vehicles, such as Open Ended Investment Companies (OEICs) and of these 83 (2015: 95)75 (2018: 82) are consolidated. The Group invested £265£804 million (2015: £818(2018: £620 million) and redeemed £826£1,771 million (2015: £616(2018: £404 million) in the unconsolidated collective investment vehicles during the year and had investments, at fair value, of £2,405£3,417 million (2015: £2,129(2018: £2,513 million) at 31 December. The Group earned fees of £192£127 million from the unconsolidated collective investment vehicles during 2016 (2015: £1872019 (2018: £128 million).

 

JOINT VENTURES AND ASSOCIATESJoint ventures and associates

 

At 31 December 20162019 there were loans and advances to customers of £173£75 million (2015: £225(2018: £57 million) outstanding and balances within customer deposits of £15£5 million (2015: £8(2018: £2 million) relating to joint ventures and associates.

 

In addition to the above balances, the Group has a number of other associates held by its venture capital business that it accounts for at fair value through profit or loss. At 31 December 2016,2019, these companies had total assets of approximately £4,712£4,761 million (2015: £3,911(2018: £4,091 million), total liabilities of approximately £5,033£5,322 million (2015: £4,104(2018: £4,616 million) and for the year ended 31 December 20162019 had turnover of approximately £4,401£4,286 million (2015: £4,660(2018: £4,522 million) and made a loss of approximately £27£190 million (2015:(2018: net loss of £181£125 million). In addition, the Group has provided £1,550£1,266 million (2015: £1,710(2018: £1,141 million) of financing to these companies on which it received £127£86 million (2015: £125(2018: £49 million) of interest income in the year.

 

As discussed in note 23, in October 2019, the Group established a wealth management joint venture with Schroders. The Group subsequently transferred approximately £12 billion of managed assets at fair value.

NOTE 48: CONTINGENT LIABILITIES, COMMITMENTS AND COMMITMENTSGUARANTEES

 

Interchange fees

 

With respect to multi-lateral interchange fees (MIFs), the Group is not directly involved in the ongoing investigations and litigation (as described below) which involveinvolves card schemes such as Visa and MasterCard.Mastercard. However, the Group is a membermember/licensee of Visa and MasterCardMastercard and other card schemes. The litigation in question is as follows:

 

The European Commissionlitigation brought by retailers against both Visa and Mastercard continues to pursue certain competition investigations into MasterCardin the English Courts (and includes appeals heard by the Supreme Court, judgment awaited); and Visa probing, amongst other things, MIFs paid in respect of cards issued outside the EEA;
  
Litigation continueslitigation brought on behalf of UK consumers in the English Courts against both Visa and MasterCard. This litigation has been brought by several retailers who are seeking damages for allegedly ‘overpaid’ MIFs. From publicly available information, it is understood these damages claims are running to different timescales with respect to the litigation process. It is also possible that new claims may be issued;
Any ultimate impact on the Group of the above investigations and the litigation against Visa and MasterCard remains uncertain at this time.Mastercard.

 

Any impact on the Group of the litigation against Visa and Mastercard remains uncertain at this time. Insofar as Visa is required to pay damages to retailers for interchange fees set prior to June 2016, contractual arrangements to allocate liability have been agreed between various UK banks (including the Group) and Visa Inc, completed itsas part of Visa Inc’s acquisition of Visa Europe on 21 Junein 2016. The Group’s share ofThese arrangements cap the sale proceeds comprised cash consideration of approximately £330 million (of which approximately £300 million was received on completion of the sale and £30 million is deferred for three years) and preferred stock, which the Group measures at fair value. The preferred stock is convertible into Class A Common Stock of Visa Inc or its equivalent upon the occurrence of certain events. As part of this transaction, the Group and certain other UK banks also entered into a Loss Sharing Agreement (LSA) with Visa Inc, which clarifies the allocation of liabilities between the parties should the litigation referred to above result in Visa Inc being liable for damages payable by Visa Europe. The maximum amount of liability to which the Group may be subject, under the LSAand this cap is cappedset at the cash consideration which was received by the Group at completion.for the sale of its stake in Visa Europe to Visa Inc may also have recourse to a general indemnity, currently in place under Visa Europe’s Operating Regulations, for damages claims concerning inter or intra-regional MIF setting activities.2016.

 

LIBOR and other trading rates

 

In July 2014, the Group announced that it had reached settlements totalling £217 million (at 30 June 2014 exchange rates) to resolve with UK and US federal authorities legacy issues regarding the manipulation several years ago of Group companies’ submissions to the British Bankers’ Association (BBA) London Interbank Offered Rate (LIBOR) and Sterling Repo Rate. The Swiss Competition Commission concluded its investigation against Lloyds Bank plc in June 2019. The Group continues to cooperate with various other government and regulatory authorities, including the Serious Fraud Office, the Swiss Competition Commission, and a number of US State Attorneys General, in conjunction with their investigations into submissions made by panel members to the bodies that set LIBOR and various other interbank offered rates.

 

Certain Group companies, together with other panel banks, have also been named as defendants in private lawsuits, including purported class action suits, in the US in connection with their roles as panel banks contributing to the setting of US Dollar, Japanese Yen and Sterling LIBOR and the Australian BBSW Reference Rate. The lawsuits, which contain broadly similar allegations, allege violations of the Sherman Antitrust Act, the Racketeer Influenced and Corrupt Organizations Act and the Commodity Exchange Act, as well as various state statutes and common law doctrines. Certain of the plaintiffs’ claims including those asserted under US anti-trust laws, werehave been dismissed by the US Federal Court for Southern District of New York (the District Court). In November 2015 OTC and exchange-based plaintiffs’ claims against the Group were dismissed for lack of personal jurisdiction. On 20 December 2016, the Federal Court for Southern District of New York dismissed all antitrust class action claims against LBG and its affiliates in the Multi District Litigation arising from the alleged manipulation of USD LIBOR. Further appeals in relation(subject to the anti-trust claims remain possible.appeals).

F-80

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 48: CONTINGENT LIABILITIES, COMMITMENTS AND GUARANTEES continued

 

Certain Group companies are also named as defendants in (i) UK based claimsclaims; and (ii) two Dutch class actions, raising LIBOR manipulation allegationsallegations. A number of the claims against the Group in connection withrelation to the alleged mis-sale of interest rate hedging products.products also include allegations of LIBOR manipulation.

 

It is currently not possible to predict the scope and ultimate outcome on the Group of the various outstanding regulatory investigations not encompassed by the settlements, any private lawsuits or any related challenges to the interpretation or validity of any of the Group’s contractual arrangements, including their timing and scale.

F-68

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 48: CONTINGENT LIABILITIES AND COMMITMENTS continued

 

UK shareholder litigation

 

In August 2014, the Group and a number of former directors were named as defendants in a claim filed in the English High Court by a number of claimants who held shares in Lloyds TSB Group plc (LTSB) prior to the acquisition of HBOS plc, alleging breaches of duties in relation to information provided to shareholders in connection with the acquisition and the recapitalisation of LTSB. Judgment was delivered on 15 November 2019. The Group and former directors successfully defended the claims. The claimants have sought permission to appeal. It is currently not possible to determine the ultimate impact on the Group (if any), but the Group intends to defend the claim vigorously.

Financial Services Compensation Scheme

The Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS) is the UK’s independent statutory compensation fund of last resort for customers of authorised financial services firms and pays compensation if a firm is unable or likely to be unable to pay claims against it. The FSCS is funded by levies on the authorised financial services industry. Each deposit-taking institution contributes towards the FSCS levies in proportion to their share of total protected deposits on 31 December of the year preceding the scheme year, which runs from 1 April to 31 March.

Following the default of a number of deposit takers in 2008, the FSCS borrowed funds from HM Treasury to meet the compensation costs for customers of those firms. At 31 March 2016, the end of the latest FSCS scheme year for which it has published accounts, the principal balance outstanding on these loans was £15,655 million (31 March 2015: £15,797 million). Although it is anticipated that the substantial majority of this loan will be repaid from funds the FSCS receives from asset sales, surplus cash flow or other recoveries in relation to the assets of the firms that defaulted, any shortfall will be funded by deposit-taking participants of the FSCS. The amount of future levies payable by the Group depends on a number of factors including the amounts recovered by the FSCS from asset sales, the Group’s participation in the deposit-taking market at 31 December, the level of protected deposits and the population of deposit-taking participants.

 

Tax authorities

 

The Group provides for potential tax liabilities that may arise on the basis of the amounts expected to be paid to tax authorities including open matters where Her Majesty’s Revenue and Customs (HMRC) adopt a different interpretation and application of tax law. The Group has an open matter in relation to a claim for group relief of losses incurred in its former Irish banking subsidiary, which ceased trading on 31 December 2010. In 2013 HMRC informed the Group that their interpretation of the UK rules permittingwhich allow the offset of such losses denies the claim; ifclaim for group relief of losses. If HMRC’s position is found to be correct, management estimate that this would result in an increase in current tax liabilities of approximately £600£800 million (including interest) and a reduction in the Group’s deferred tax asset of approximately £400£250 million. The Group does not agree with HMRC’s position and, having taken appropriate advice, does not consider that this is a case where additional tax will ultimately fall due. There are a number of other open matters on which the Group is in discussion with HMRC (including the tax treatment of certain costs arising from the divestment of TSB Banking Group plc);, none of thesewhich is expected to have a material impact on the financial position of the Group.

 

Residential mortgage repossessions

In August 2014, the Northern Ireland High Court handed down judgment in favour of the borrowers in relation to three residential mortgage test cases concerning certain aspects of the Group’s practice with respect to the recalculation of contractual monthly instalments of customers in arrears. The FCA is actively engaged with the industry in relation to these considerations. The Group will respond as appropriate to this and any investigations, proceedings, or regulatory action that may in due course be instigated as a result of these issues. The FCA has issued a consultation on new guidance on the treatment of customers with mortgage payment shortfalls. The guidance covers remediation for mortgage customers who may have been affected by the way firms calculate these customers’ monthly mortgage instalments. The output from this consultation is expected in the first quarter of 2017.

Update to the Financial Conduct Authority’s announcement in November 2015 on a deadline for PPI complaints and Plevin vParagon Personal Finance Limited

On 2 August 2016, the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) published a further consultation paper (CP16/20: Rules and guidance on payment protection insurance complaints: feedback on CP15/39 and further consultation), following on from the original consultation published in November 2015. The consultation papers proposed the introduction of a two year industry deadline by which consumers would need to make their PPI complaints and rules and guidance that should apply when firms handle PPI complaints in light of the UK Supreme Court’s decision in Plevin v Paragon Personal Finance Limited [2014] UKSC 61. On 2 March 2017 the FCA confirmed that the deadline would be 29 August 2019, and new rules for Plevin would come into force in August 2017.

Mortgage arrears handling activities – FCA investigation

 

On 26 May 2016, the Group was informed that an enforcement team at the FCA had commenced an investigation in connection with the Group’s mortgage arrears handling activities. This investigationIt is ongoing and it isnot currently not possible to make a reliable assessment of theany liability if any, that may resultresulting from the investigation.

HBOS Reading – customer review

The Group is commencing a review into a number of customer cases from the former HBOS Impaired Assets Office based in Reading. This review follows the conclusion of a criminal trial in which a number of individuals,investigation including two former HBOS employees, were convicted of conspiracy to corrupt, fraudulent trading and associated money laundering offences which occurred prior to the acquisition of HBOS by the Group in 2009. The review is at an early stage and it is currently not possible to determine the ultimateany financial impact on the Group.

F-69

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 48: CONTINGENT LIABILITIES AND COMMITMENTS continuedpenalty.

 

Other legal actions and regulatory matters

 

In addition, during the ordinary course of business the Group is subject to other complaints and threatened or actual legal proceedings (including class or group action claims) brought by or on behalf of current or former employees, customers, investors or other third parties, as well as legal and regulatory reviews, challenges, investigations and enforcement actions, both in the UK and overseas. All such material matters are periodically reassessed, with the assistance of external professional advisers where appropriate, to determine the likelihood of the Group incurring a liability. In those instances where it is concluded that it is more likely than not that a payment will be made, a provision is established to management’s best estimate of the amount required at the relevant balance sheet date. In some cases it will not be possible to form a view, for example because the facts are unclear or because further time is needed properly to assess the merits of the case, and no provisions are held in relation to such matters. In these circumstances, specific disclosure in relation to a contingent liability will be made where material. However the Group does not currently expect the final outcome of any such case to have a material adverse effect on its financial position, operations or cash flows.

 

  2016  2015 
  £m  £m 
Contingent liabilities      
Acceptances and endorsements 21  52 
Other:      
Other items serving as direct credit substitutes 779  458 
Performance bonds and other transaction-related contingencies 2,237  2,123 
  3,016  2,581 
Total contingent liabilities 3,037  2,633 
  

Contingent liabilities, commitments and guarantees arising from the banking business

  2019
£m
  2018
£m
 
Contingent liabilities      
Acceptances and endorsements  74   194 
Other:        
Other items serving as direct credit substitutes  366   632 
Performance bonds and other transaction-related contingencies  2,454   2,425 
   2,820   3,057 
Total contingent liabilities  2,894   3,251 

 

The contingent liabilities of the Group arise in the normal course of its banking business and it is not practicable to quantify their future financial effect.

 

 2016  2015  2019
£m
 2018
£m
 
 £m £m 
Commitments     
Commitments and guarantees     
Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions     1 
Forward asset purchases and forward deposits placed 648 421   189   731 
Undrawn formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments to lend:             
Less than 1 year original maturity:              
Mortgage offers made 10,749  9,995   12,684   11,594 
Other commitments 62,697  57,809 
Other commitments and guarantees  85,735   85,060 
 73,446 67,804   98,419   96,654 
1 year or over original maturity 40,074 44,691   34,945   37,712 
Total commitments 114,168 112,916 
Total commitments and guarantees  133,553   135,098 

 

Of the amounts shown above in respect of undrawn formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments to lend, £63,203£63,504 million (2015: £63,086(2018: £64,884 million) was irrevocable.

F-81

Operating lease commitmentsNOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

Where a Group company is the lessee the future minimum lease payments under non-cancellable premises operating leases are as follows:

  2016  2015 
  £m  £m 
Not later than 1 year 264  267 
Later than 1 year and not later than 5 years 855  885 
Later than 5 years 944  1,049 
Total operating lease commitments 2,063  2,201 

Operating lease payments represent rental payable by the Group for certain of its properties. Some of these operating lease arrangements have renewal options and rent escalation clauses, although the effect of these is not material. No arrangements have been entered into for contingent rental payments.NOTE 48: CONTINGENT LIABILITIES, COMMITMENTS AND GUARANTEES continued

 

Capital commitments

 

Excluding commitments in respect of investment property (note 26)27), capital expenditure contracted but not provided for at 31 December 20162019 amounted to £543£405 million (2015: £388(2018: £378 million). Of this amount, £541£400 million (2015: £380(2018: £369 million) related to assets to be leased to customers under operating leases. The Group’s management is confident that future net revenues and funding will be sufficient to cover these commitments.

NOTE 49: STRUCTURED ENTITIES

The Group’s interests in structured entities are both consolidated and unconsolidated. Detail of the Group’s interests in consolidated structured entities are set out in: note 31 for securitisations and covered bond vehicles, note 36 for structured entities associated with the Group’s pension schemes, and below in part (A) and (B). Details of the Group’s interests in unconsolidated structured entities are included below in part (C).

(A) Asset-backed conduits

In addition to the structured entities discussed in note 31, which are used for securitisation and covered bond programmes, the Group sponsors an active asset-backed conduit, Cancara, which invests in client receivables and debt securities. The total consolidated exposure of Cancara at 31 December 2019 was £3,735 million (2018: £5,122 million), comprising £3,670 million of loans and advances (2018: £5,012 million) and £65 million of debt securities (2018: £110 million).

All lending assets and debt securities held by the Group in Cancara are restricted in use, as they are held by the collateral agent for the benefit of the commercial paper investors and the liquidity providers only. The Group provides liquidity facilities to Cancara under terms that are usual and customary for standard lending activities in the normal course of the Group’s banking activities. During 2019 there have continued to be planned drawdowns on certain liquidity facilities for balance sheet management purposes, supporting the programme to provide funding alongside the proceeds of the asset-backed commercial paper issuance. The Group could be asked to provide support under the contractual terms of these arrangements including, for example, if Cancara experienced a shortfall in external funding, which may occur in the event of market disruption.

The external assets in Cancara are consolidated in the Group’s financial statements.

(B) Consolidated collective investment vehicles and limited partnerships

The assets of the Insurance business held in consolidated collective investment vehicles, such as Open-Ended Investment Companies and limited partnerships, are not directly available for use by the Group. However, the Group’s investment in the majority of these collective investment vehicles is readily realisable. As at 31 December 2019, the total carrying value of these consolidated collective investment vehicle assets and liabilities held by the Group was £68,724 million (2018: £62,648 million).

The Group has no contractual arrangements (such as liquidity facilities) that would require it to provide financial or other support to the consolidated collective investment vehicles; the Group has not previously provided such support and has no current intentions to provide such support.

(C) Unconsolidated collective investment vehicles and limited partnerships

The Group’s direct interests in unconsolidated structured entities comprise investments in collective investment vehicles, such as Open-Ended Investment Companies, and limited partnerships with a total carrying value of £38,177 million at 31 December 2019 (2018: £26,028 million), included within financial assets designated at fair value through profit and loss (see note 16). These investments include both those entities managed by third parties and those managed by the Group. At 31 December 2019, the total asset value of these unconsolidated structured entities, including the portion in which the Group has no interest, was £2,363 billion (2018: £2,435 billion).

Given the nature of these investments, the Group’s maximum exposure to loss is equal to the carrying value of the investment. However, the Group’s investments in these entities are primarily held to match policyholder liabilities in the Insurance division and the majority of the risk from a change in the value of the Group’s investment is matched by a change in policyholder liabilities. The collective investment vehicles are primarily financed by investments from investors in the vehicles.

During the year the Group has not provided any non-contractual financial or other support to these entities and has no current intention of providing any financial or other support. There were no transfers from/to these unconsolidated collective investment vehicles and limited partnerships.

The Group considers itself the sponsor of a structured entity where it is primarily involved in the design and establishment of the structured entity; and further where the Group transfers assets to the structured entity; market products associated with the structured entity in its own name and/or provide guarantees regarding the structured entity’s performance.

The Group sponsors a range of diverse investment funds and limited partnerships where it acts as the fund manager or equivalent decision maker and markets the funds under one of the Group’s brands.

The Group earns fees from managing the investments of these funds. The investment management fees that the Group earned from these entities, including those in which the Group held no ownership interest at 31 December 2019, are reported in note 6.

F-70F-82

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 49:50: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

 

(1) Measurement basis of financial assets and liabilities

 

The accounting policies in note 2 describe how different classes of financial instruments are measured, and how income and expenses, including fair value gains and losses, are recognised. The following table analyses the carrying amounts of the financial assets and liabilities by category and by balance sheet heading.

 

   At fair value
through profit or loss
               Mandatorily held at fair value
through profit or loss
           
 Derivatives
designated
as hedging
instruments
£m
 Held for
trading
£m
 Designated
upon initial
recognition
£m
 Available-
for-sale
£m
 Loans and
receivables
£m
 Held at
amortised
cost
£m
 Insurance
contracts
£m
 Total
£m
  Derivatives
designated
as hedging
instruments
£m
 Held for
trading
£m
 Other
£m
 Designated at
fair value
through profit
or loss
£m
 At fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
£m
 Held at
amortised
cost
£m
 Insurance
contracts
£m
 Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2016 
At 31 December 2019                                
Financial assets                                 
Cash and balances at central banks      47,452  47,452                  55,130      55,130 
Items in the course of collection from banks      706  706                  313      313 
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  45,253 105,921     151,174 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss     17,982   142,207               160,189 
Derivative financial instruments 2,712 33,426      36,138   1,236   25,133                  26,369 
Loans and receivables: 
Loans and advances to banks     26,902   26,902                  9,775      9,775 
Loans and advances to customers     457,958   457,958                  494,988      494,988 
Debt securities     3,397   3,397                  5,544      5,544 
     488,257   488,257 
Available-for-sale financial assets    56,524    56,524 
Financial assets at amortised cost                 510,307      510,307 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income              25,092         25,092 
Assets arising from reinsurance contracts held                    23,567   23,567 
Total financial assets 2,712 78,679 105,921 56,524 488,257 48,158  780,251   1,236   43,115   142,207      25,092   565,750   23,567   800,967 
Financial liabilities                                 
Deposits from banks      16,384  16,384                  28,179      28,179 
Customer deposits      415,460  415,460                  421,320      421,320 
Items in course of transmission to banks      548  548                  373      373 
Trading and other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss  45,079 9,425     54,504 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss     13,955      7,531            21,486 
Derivative financial instruments 1,964 32,960      34,924   1,105   24,674                  25,779 
Notes in circulation      1,402  1,402      ��           1,079      1,079 
Debt securities in issue      76,314  76,314                  97,689      97,689 
Liabilities arising from insurance contracts and participating investment contracts       94,390 94,390                     111,449   111,449 
Liabilities arising from non-participating investment contracts       20,112 20,112                     37,459   37,459 
Unallocated surplus within insurance businesses       243 243 
Other                 1,844   400   2,244 
Subordinated liabilities      19,831  19,831                  17,130      17,130 
Total financial liabilities 1,964 78,039 9,425   529,939 114,745 734,112   1,105   38,629      7,531      567,614   149,308   764,187 
F-71F-83

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 49:50: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS continued

 

   At fair value
through profit or loss
              Mandatorily held at fair value
through profit or loss
           
 Derivatives
designated
as hedging
instruments
£m
 Held for
trading
£m
 Designated
upon initial
recognition
£m
 Available-
for-sale
£m
 Loans and
receivables
£m
 Held at
amortised
cost
£m
 Insurance
contracts
£m
 Total
£m
  Derivatives
designated
as hedging
instruments
£m
 Held for
trading
£m
 Other
£m
 Designated at
fair value
through profit or
loss
£m
 At fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
£m
 Held at
amortised
cost
£m
 Insurance
contracts
£m
 Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2015                 
At 31 December 2018                                
Financial assets                                                 
Cash and balances at central banks      58,417  58,417                  54,663      54,663 
Items in the course of collection from banks      697  697                  647      647 
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  –  42,661  97,875  –  –  –  –  140,536 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss     35,246   123,283               158,529 
Derivative financial instruments 2,686 26,781      29,467   1,563   22,032                  23,595 
Loans and receivables:                 
Loans and advances to banks     25,117   25,117                  6,283      6,283 
Loans and advances to customers     455,175   455,175                  484,858      484,858 
Debt securities     4,191   4,191                  5,238      5,238 
     484,483   484,483 
Available-for-sale financial assets    33,032    33,032 
Held-to-maturity investments      19,808  19,808 
Financial assets at amortised cost                 496,379      496,379 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income              24,815         24,815 
Assets arising from reinsurance contracts held                    7,860   7,860 
Total financial assets 2,686 69,442 97,875 33,032 484,483 78,922  766,440   1,563   57,278   123,283      24,815   551,689   7,860   766,488 
Financial liabilities                                                 
Deposits from banks      16,925  16,925                  30,320      30,320 
Customer deposits      418,326  418,326                  418,066      418,066 
Items in course of transmission to banks      717  717                  636      636 
Trading and other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss  –  43,984  7,879  –  –  –  –  51,863 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss     23,451      7,096            30,547 
Derivative financial instruments 2,437 23,864      26,301   1,108   20,265                  21,373 
Notes in circulation      1,112  1,112                  1,104      1,104 
Debt securities in issue      82,056  82,056                  91,168      91,168 
Liabilities arising from insurance contracts and participating investment contracts  –  –  –  –  –  –  80,294  80,294                     98,874   98,874 
Liabilities arising from non-participating investment contracts  –  –  –  –  –  –  22,777  22,777                     13,853   13,853 
Unallocated surplus within insurance businesses       257 257 
Other                 46   382   428 
Subordinated liabilities      23,312  23,312                  17,656      17,656 
Total financial liabilities 2,437 67,848 7,879   542,448 103,328 723,940   1,108   43,716      7,096      558,996   113,109   724,025 
F-72F-84

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 49:50: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTScontinued

 

(2) Fair value measurement

 

Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. It is a measure as at a specific date and may be significantly different from the amount which will actually be paid or received on maturity or settlement date.

 

Wherever possible, fair values have been calculated using unadjusted quoted market prices in active markets for identical instruments held by the Group. Where quoted market prices are not available, or are unreliable because of poor liquidity, fair values have been determined using valuation techniques which, to the extent possible, use market observable inputs, but in some cases use non-market observable inputs. Valuation techniques used include discounted cash flow analysis and pricing models and, where appropriate, comparison to instruments with characteristics similar to those of the instruments held by the Group.

The Group managesmeasures valuation adjustments for its derivative exposures on a net basis; the Group determines their fair values onsame basis as the basis of their net exposures. In all other cases, fair values of financial assets and liabilities measured at fair valuederivatives are determined on the basis of their gross exposures.managed.

 

The carrying amount of the following financial instruments is a reasonable approximation of fair value: cash and balances at central banks, items in the course of collection from banks, assets arising from reinsurance contracts held, items in course of transmission to banks, notes in circulation and liabilities arising from non-participating investment contracts.

 

Because a variety of estimation techniques are employed and significant estimates made, comparisons of fair values between financial institutions may not be meaningful. Readers of these financial statements are thus advised to use caution when using this data to evaluate the Group’s financial position.

 

Fair value information is not provided for items that are not financial instruments or for other assets and liabilities which are not carried at fair value in the Group’s consolidated balance sheet. These items include intangible assets, such as the value of the Group’s branch network, the long-term relationships with depositors and credit card relationships; premises and equipment; and shareholders’ equity. These items are material and accordingly the Group believes that the fair value information presented does not represent the underlying value of the Group.

 

VALUATION CONTROL FRAMEWORK

 

The key elements of the control framework for the valuation of financial instruments include model validation, product implementation review and independent price verification. These functions are carried out by appropriately skilled risk and finance teams, independent of the business area responsible for the products.

 

Model validation covers both qualitative and quantitative elements relating to new models. In respect of new products, a product implementation review is conducted pre- and post-trading. Pre-trade testing ensures that the new model is integrated into the Group’s systems and that the profit and loss and risk reporting are consistent throughout the trade life cycle. Post-trade testing examines the explanatory power of the implemented model, actively monitoring model parameters and comparing in-house pricing to external sources. Independent price verification procedures cover financial instruments carried at fair value. The frequency of the review is matched to the availability of independent data, monthly being the minimum. Valuation differences in breach of established thresholds are escalated to senior management. The results from independent pricing and valuation reserves are reviewed monthly by senior management.

 

Formal committees, consisting of senior risk, finance and business management, meet at least quarterly to discuss and approve valuations in more judgemental areas, in particular for unquoted equities, structured credit, over-the-counter options and the Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA) reserve.

 

VALUATION OF FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES

 

Assets and liabilities carried at fair value or for which fair values are disclosed have been classified into three levels according to the quality and reliability of information used to determine the fair values.

 

LEVEL 1

 

Level 1 fair value measurements are those derived from unadjusted quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities. Products classified as level 1 predominantly comprise equity shares, treasury bills and other government securities.

 

LEVEL 2

 

Level 2 valuations are those where quoted market prices are not available, for example where the instrument is traded in a market that is not considered to be active or valuation techniques are used to determine fair value and where these techniques use inputs that are based significantly on observable market data. Examples of such financial instruments include most over-the-counter derivatives, financial institution issued securities, certificates of deposit and certain asset-backed securities.

 

LEVEL 3

 

Level 3 portfolios are those where at least one input which could have a significant effect on the instrument’s valuation is not based on observable market data. Such instruments would include the Group’s venture capital and unlisted equity investments which are valued using various valuation techniques that require significant management judgement in determining appropriate assumptions, including earnings multiples and estimated future cash flows. Certain of the Group’s asset-backed securities and derivatives, principally where there is no trading activity in such securities, are also classified as level 3.

 

Transfers out of the level 3 portfolio arise when inputs that could have a significant impact on the instrument’s valuation become market observable after previously having been non-market observable. In the case of asset-backed securities this can arise if more than one consistent independent source of data becomes available. Conversely transfers into the portfolio arise when consistent sources of data cease to be available.

F-73F-85

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 49:50: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS continued

 

(3) Financial assets and liabilities carried at fair value

 

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The valuation techniques for level 2 and, particularly, level 3 financial instruments involve management judgement and estimates the extent of which depends on the complexity of the instrument and the availability of market observable information. In addition, in line with market practice, the Group applies credit, debit and funding valuation adjustments in determining the fair value of its uncollateralised derivative positions. A description of these adjustments is set out in this note on page F-79. Further details of the Group’s level 3 financial instruments and the sensitivity of their valuation including the effect of applying reasonably possible alternative assumptions in determining their fair value are set out below. Details about sensitivities to market risk arising from trading assets and other treasury positions can be found in the Risk Management section on page 87.

(A) FINANCIAL ASSETS, EXCLUDING DERIVATIVES

 

VALUATION HIERARCHY

 

At 31 December 2016,2019, the Group’s financial assets carried at fair value, excluding derivatives, totalled £207,698£185,281 million (31 December 2015: £173,5682018: £183,344 million). The table below analyses these financial assets by balance sheet classification, asset type and valuation methodology (level 1, 2 or 3, as described on page F-73)F-85). The fair value measurement approach is recurring in nature. There were no significant transfers between level 1 and 2 during the year.

 

VALUATION HIERARCHYValuation hierarchy

  Level 1  Level 2  Level 3  Total 
  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 31 December 2016            
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss            
Loans and advances to customers   30,473    30,473 
Loans and advances to banks   2,606    2,606 
Debt securities:            
Government securities 24,959  1,773    26,732 
Other public sector securities   1,279  46  1,325 
Bank and building society certificates of deposit   244    244 
Asset-backed securities:            
Mortgage-backed securities   654  53  707 
Other asset-backed securities 4  1,092  442  1,538 
Corporate and other debt securities 112  17,968  1,752  19,832 
  25,075  23,010  2,293  50,378 
Equity shares 66,147  37  1,513  67,697 
Treasury and other bills 20      20 
Total trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 91,242  56,126  3,806  151,174 
Available-for-sale financial assets            
Debt securities:            
Government securities 48,542  172    48,714 
Bank and building society certificates of deposit   142    142 
Asset-backed securities:            
Mortgage-backed securities   108    108 
Other asset-backed securities   184  133  317 
Corporate and other debt securities 107  5,923    6,030 
  48,649  6,529  133  55,311 
Equity shares 435  17  761  1,213 
Total available-for-sale financial assets 49,084  6,546  894  56,524 
Total financial assets carried at fair value, excluding derivatives 140,326  62,672  4,700  207,698 

  Level 1  Level 2  Level 3  Total 
  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 31 December 2019            
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss                
Loans and advances to customers     10,164   10,912   21,076 
Loans and advances to banks  18   2,381      2,399 
Debt securities:                
Government securities  18,618   236      18,854 
Other public sector securities     2,071   55   2,126 
Bank and building society certificates of deposit  52   932      984 
Asset-backed securities:                
Mortgage-backed securities     468      468 
Other asset-backed securities     158   100   258 
Corporate and other debt securities     16,381   1,835   18,216 
   18,670   20,246   1,990   40,906 
Treasury and other bills  19         19 
Equity shares  93,766   17   2,006   95,789 
Total financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  112,473   32,808   14,908   160,189 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income                
Debt securities:                
Government securities  12,860   238      13,098 
Bank and building society certificates of deposit            
Asset-backed securities:                
Mortgage-backed securities        121   121 
Other asset-backed securities        60   60 
Corporate and other debt securities  16   11,035      11,051 
   12,876   11,273   181   24,330 
Treasury and other bills  535         535 
Equity shares        227   227 
Total financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  13,411   11,273   408   25,092 
Total financial assets carried at fair value, excluding derivatives  125,884   44,081   15,316   185,281 
F-74F-86

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 49:50: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS continued

 

  Level 1  Level 2  Level 3  Total 
  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 31 December 2015            
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss            
Loans and advances to customers   30,109    30,109 
Loans and advances to banks   3,065    3,065 
Debt securities:            
Government securities 20,881  1,235  1  22,117 
Other public sector securities   759  1,280  2,039 
Bank and building society certificates of deposit   135    135 
Asset-backed securities:            
Mortgage-backed securities   1,295  63  1,358 
Other asset-backed securities   839  8  847 
Corporate and other debt securities 38  18,241  2,037  20,316 
  20,919  22,504  3,389  46,812 
Equity shares 58,457  292  1,727  60,476 
Treasury and other bills 74      74 
Total trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 79,450  55,970  5,116  140,536 
Available-for-sale financial assets            
Debt securities:            
Government securities 25,259  70    25,329 
Bank and building society certificates of deposit   186    186 
Asset-backed securities:            
Mortgage-backed securities   197    197 
Other asset-backed securities   264  55  319 
Corporate and other debt securities 7  5,801    5,808 
  25,266  6,518  55  31,839 
Equity shares 43  521  629  1,193 
Total available-for-sale financial assets 25,309  7,039  684  33,032 
Total financial assets carried at fair value, excluding derivatives 104,759  63,009  5,800  173,568 
F-75

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 49: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS continued

  Level 1  Level 2  Level 3  Total 
  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 31 December 2018            
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss                
Loans and advances to customers     27,285   10,565   37,850 
Loans and advances to banks     3,026      3,026 
Debt securities:                
Government securities  17,926   169      18,095 
Other public sector securities     2,064      2,064 
Bank and building society certificates of deposit  84   1,021      1,105 
Asset-backed securities:                
Mortgage-backed securities     219   6   225 
Other asset-backed securities     231   118   349 
Corporate and other debt securities     16,840   1,470   18,310 
   18,010   20,544   1,594   40,148 
Treasury and other bills  20         20 
Equity shares  75,701   26   1,758   77,485 
Total financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  93,731   50,881   13,917   158,529 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income                
Debt securities:                
Government securities  18,847   124      18,971 
Bank and building society certificates of deposit     118      118 
Asset-backed securities:                
Mortgage-backed securities        120   120 
Other asset-backed securities     5   126   131 
Corporate and other debt securities  32   5,119      5,151 
   18,879   5,366   246   24,491 
Treasury and other bills  303         303 
Equity shares        21   21 
Total financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  19,182   5,366   267   24,815 
Total financial assets carried at fair value, excluding derivatives  112,913   56,247   14,184   183,344 

 

MOVEMENTS IN LEVEL 3 PORTFOLIO

 

The table below analyses movements in level 3 financial assets, excluding derivatives, carried at fair value (recurring measurement).

 

 2019 2018
 2016  2015  Financial assets
at fair value
through profit
or loss
 Financial assets
at fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
 Total level 3
assets carried
at fair value,
excluding
derivatives
(recurring basis
) Financial assets
at fair value
through profit or
loss
 Financial assets
at fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
 Total level 3
assets carried at
fair value,
excluding
derivatives
(recurring basis
)
 Trading and
other financial
assets at fair
value through
profit or loss
£m
 Available-
for-sale
£m
  Total level 3
assets carried
at fair value,
excluding
derivatives
(recurring basis)
£m
 Trading and other
financial assets at
fair value through
profit or loss
 £m
 Available-
for-sale
£m
 Total level 3
assets carried
at fair value,
 excluding
derivatives
(recurring basis)
£m
  £m  £m  £m  £m £m £m 
At 1 January  5,116   684   5,800   5,104   270   5,374   13,917   267   14,184   14,152   302   14,454 
Exchange and other adjustments  8   12   20            (85)  (10)  (95)  87   (2)  85 
Gains recognised in the income statement within other income  437      437   192      192   794      794   439      439 
Gains recognised in other comprehensive income within the revaluation reserve in respect of available-for-sale financial assets     312   312      302   302 
Purchases  833   258   1,091   965   68   1,033 
(Losses) gains recognised in other comprehensive income within the revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income     12   12      (4)  (4)
Purchases/increases to customer loans  2,579   207   2,786   2,480   2   2,482 
Sales  (2,597)  (527)  (3,124)  (1,070)  (11)  (1,081)  (2,807)  (87)  (2,894)  (3,593)  (95)  (3,688)
Transfers into the level 3 portfolio  186   155   341   71   55   126   644   19   663   815   348   1,163 
Transfers out of the level 3 portfolio  (177)     (177)  (146)     (146)  (134)     (134)  (463)  (284)  (747)
At 31 December  3,806   894   4,700   5,116   684   5,800   14,908   408   15,316   13,917   267   14,184 
Gains recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the change in fair value of those assets held at 31 December  642      642   34      34 
Gains (losses) recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the change in fair value of those assets held at 31 December  269      269   (104)     (104)
F-87

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 50: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS continued

 

VALUATION METHODOLOGY FOR FINANCIAL ASSETS, EXCLUDING DERIVATIVES

 

LOANS AND ADVANCES TO CUSTOMERS AND BANKSLoans and advances to customers and banks

 

These assets are principally reverse repurchase agreements. The fair value of these assets is determined using discounted cash flow techniques. The discount rates are derived from market observable repo curves specific to the type of security purchased under the reverse repurchase agreement.interest rates, a risk margin that reflects loan credit ratings and an incremental illiquidity premium based on historical spreads at origination on similar loans.

 

DEBT SECURITIESDebt securities

 

Debt securities measured at fair value and classified as level 2 are valued by discounting expected cash flows using an observable credit spread applicable to the particular instrument.

 

Where there is limited trading activity in debt securities, the Group uses valuation models, consensus pricing information from third party pricing services and broker or lead manager quotes to determine an appropriate valuation. Debt securities are classified as level 3 if there is a significant valuation input that cannot be corroborated through market sources or where there are materially inconsistent values for an input. Asset classes classified as level 3 mainly comprise certain collateralised loan obligations and collateralised debt obligations.

 

EQUITY INVESTMENTSEquity investments

 

Unlisted equity and fund investments are valued using different techniques in accordance with the Group’s valuation policy and International Private Equity and Venture Capital Guidelines.

 

Depending on the business sector and the circumstances of the investment, unlisted equity valuations are based on earnings multiples, net asset values or discounted cash flows.

 

A number of earnings multiples are used in valuing the portfolio including price earnings, earnings before interest and tax and earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation. The particular multiple selected being appropriate for the type of business being valued and is derived by reference to the current market-based multiple. Consideration is given to the risk attributes, growth prospects and financial gearing of comparable businesses when selecting an appropriate multiple.
  
Discounted cash flow valuations use estimated future cash flows, usually based on management forecasts, with the application of appropriate exit yields or terminal multiples and discounted using rates appropriate to the specific investment, business sector or recent economic rates of return. Recent transactions involving the sale of similar businesses may sometimes be used as a frame of reference in deriving an appropriate multiple.
  
For fund investments the most recent capital account value calculated by the fund manager is used as the basis for the valuation and adjusted, if necessary, to align valuation techniques with the Group’s valuation policy.

 

Unlisted equity investments and investments in property partnerships held in the life assurance funds are valued using third party valuations. Management take account of any pertinent information, such as recent transactions and information received on particular investments, to adjust the third party valuations where necessary.

F-76

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 49: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTScontinued

 

(B) FINANCIAL LIABILITIES, EXCLUDING DERIVATIVES

 

VALUATION HIERARCHY

 

At 31 December 2016,2019, the Group’s financial liabilities carried at fair value, excluding derivatives, comprised its trading and other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss and totalled £54,504£21,486 million (31 December 2015: £51,8632018: £30,547 million). (Financial guarantees are also recognised at fair value, on initial recognition, and are classified as level 3; but the balance is not material). The table below analyses these financial liabilities by balance sheet classification and valuation methodology (level 1, 2 or 3, as described on page F-73)F-85). The fair value measurement approach is recurring in nature. There were no significant transfers between level 1 and 2 during the year.

 

Level 1
£m
 Level 2
£m
 Level 3
£m
 Total
£m
 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Total 
At 31 December 2016       
Trading and other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss       
Liabilities held at fair value through profit or loss 9,423 2 9,425
 £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 31 December 2019         
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss         
Liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss     7,483   48   7,531 
Trading liabilities:                       
Liabilities in respect of securities sold under repurchase agreements 42,067  42,067     11,048      11,048 
Other deposits     98      98 
Short positions in securities2,417 65  2,482  2,781   28      2,809 
Other 530  530
2,417 42,662  45,079  2,781   11,174      13,955 
Total financial liabilities carried at fair value, excluding derivatives2,417 52,085 2 54,504  2,781   18,657   48   21,486 
At 31 December 2015       
Trading and other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss       
Liabilities held at fair value through profit or loss 7,878 1 7,879
At 31 December 2018                
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss                
Liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss     7,085   11   7,096 
Trading liabilities:                       
Liabilities in respect of securities sold under repurchase agreements 38,431  38,431     21,595      21,595 
Other deposits     242      242 
Short positions in securities4,153 287  4,440  1,464   150      1,614 
Other 1,113  1,113
4,153 39,831  43,984  1,464   21,987      23,451 
Total financial liabilities carried at fair value, excluding derivatives4,153 47,709 1 51,863  1,464   29,072   11   30,547 
F-88

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 50: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS continued

 

The table below analyses movements in the level 3 financial liabilities portfolio, excluding derivatives. There were no transfers into or out of level 3 during 2015 or 2016.

 

  2016  2015 
  £m  £m 
At 1 January  1   5 
Losses (gains) recognised in the income statement within other income  1    
Redemptions     (4)
At 31 December  2   1 
Gains recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the change in fair value of those liabilities held at 31 December  1    

  2019  2018 
  £m  £m 
At 1 January  11    
Losses (gains) recognised in the income statement within other income      
Redemptions  (5)   
Transfers into the level 3 portfolio  52   11 
Transfers out of the level 3 portfolio  (10)   
At 31 December  48   11 
Gains recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the change in fair value of those liabilities held at 31 December      

 

VALUATION METHODOLOGY FOR FINANCIAL LIABILITIES, EXCLUDING DERIVATIVES

 

LIABILITIES HELD AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSSLiabilities held at fair value through profit or loss

 

These principally comprise debt securities in issue which are classified as level 2 and their fair value is determined using techniques whose inputs are based on observable market data. The carrying amount of the securities is adjusted to reflect the effect of changes in own credit spreads. Thespreads and the resulting gain or loss is recognised in the income statement.other comprehensive income.

 

At 31 December 2016,2019, the own credit adjustment arising from the fair valuation of £9,423£7,531 million (2015: £7,878(2018: £7,085 million) of the Group’s debt securities in issue designated at fair value through profit or loss resulted in a loss of £28£419 million (2015:(2018: gain of £114£533 million).

F-77

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS, before tax, recognised in other comprehensive income.

 

NOTE 49: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS continued

TRADING LIABILITIES IN RESPECT OF SECURITIES SOLD UNDER REPURCHASE AGREEMENTSTrading liabilities in respect of securities sold under repurchase agreements

 

The fair value of these liabilities is determined using discounted cash flow techniques. The discount rates are derived from observable repo curves specific to the type of security sold under the repurchase agreement.

 

(C) DERIVATIVES

 

All of the Group’s derivative assets and liabilities are carried at fair value. At 31 December 2016,2019, such assets totalled £36,138£26,369 million (31 December 2015: £29,4672018: £23,595 million) and liabilities totalled £34,924£25,779 million (31 December 2015: £26,3012018: £21,373 million). The table below analyses these derivative balances by valuation methodology (level 1, 2 or 3, as described on page F-73)F-85). The fair value measurement approach is recurring in nature. There were no significant transfers between level 1 and level 2 during the year.

 

 2019 2018
 2016  2015  Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Total  Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Total 
 Level 1
£m
 Level 2
£m
 Level 3
£m
 Total
£m
 Level 1
£m
 Level 2
£m
 Level 3
£m
 Total
£m
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m £m £m £m 
Derivative assets  270   34,469   1,399   36,138   43   27,955   1,469   29,467   50   25,456   863   26,369   93   22,575   927   23,595 
Derivative liabilities  (358)  (33,606)  (960)  (34,924)  (41)  (25,537)  (723)  (26,301)  (54)  (24,358)  (1,367)  (25,779)  (132)  (20,525)  (716)  (21,373)

 

Where the Group’s derivative assets and liabilities are not traded on an exchange, they are valued using valuation techniques, including discounted cash flow and options pricing models, as appropriate. The types of derivatives classified as level 2 and the valuation techniques used include:

 

Interest rate swaps which are valued using discounted cash flow models; the most significant inputs into those models are interest rate yield curves which are developed from publicly quoted rates.
  
Foreign exchange derivatives that do not contain options which are priced using rates available from publicly quoted sources.
  
Credit derivatives which are valued using standard models with observable inputs, except for the items classified as level 3, which are valued using publicly available yield and credit default swap (CDS) curves.
  
Less complex interest rate and foreign exchange option products which are valued using volatility surfaces developed from publicly available interest rate cap, interest rate swaption and other option volatilities; option volatility skew information is derived from a market standard consensus pricing service. For more complex option products, the Group calibrates its models using observable at-the-money data; where necessary, the Group adjusts for out-of-the-money positions using a market standard consensus pricing service.

 

Complex interest rate and foreign exchange products where there is significant dispersion of consensus pricing or where implied funding costs are material and unobservable are classified as level 3.

 

Where credit protection, usually in the form of credit default swaps, has been purchased or written on asset-backed securities, the security is referred to as a negative basis asset-backed security and the resulting derivative assets or liabilities have been classified as either level 2 or level 3 according to the classification of the underlying asset-backed security.

 

Certain unobservable inputs used to calculate CVA, FVA, and own credit adjustments, are not significant in determining the classification of the derivative and debt instruments. Consequently, these inputs do not form part of the Level 3 sensitivities presented.

F-89

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 50: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS continued

The table below analyses movements in level 3 derivative assets and liabilities carried at fair value.

 

  2016  2015 
  Derivative
 assets
 £m
  Derivative
 liabilities
 £m
  Derivative
 assets
 £m
  Derivative
 liabilities
 £m
 
At 1 January  1,469   (723)  2,771   (1,456)
Exchange and other adjustments  74   (53)  (25)  18 
Gains (losses) recognised in the income statement within other income  220   (299)  (87)  (36)
Purchases (additions)  24   (13)  72   (74)
(Sales) redemptions  (91)  128   (125)  120 
Derecognised pursuant to tender offers and redemptions in respect of Enhanced Capital Notes  (476)         
Transfers into the level 3 portfolio  216      126   (114)
Transfers out of the level 3 portfolio  (37)     (1,263)  819 
At 31 December  1,399   (960)  1,469   (723)
Gains (losses) recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the change in fair value of those assets or liabilities held at 31 December  284   (262)  (95)  (12)

F-78

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 49: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS continued

  2019 2018
  Derivative
assets
  Derivative
liabilities
  Derivative
assets
  Derivative
liabilities
 
  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 1 January  927   (716)  1,056   (804)
Exchange and other adjustments  (27)  4   7   (5)
Losses (gains) recognised in the income statement within other income  81   (75)  (84)  49 
Purchases (additions)  4   (4)     (68)
(Sales) redemptions  (19)  47   (52)  112 
Transfers into the level 3 portfolio  415   (959)      
Transfers out of the level 3 portfolio  (518)  336       
At 31 December  863   (1,367)  927   (716)
Gains (losses) recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the change in fair value of those assets or liabilities held at 31 December  (14)  18   (424)  82 

 

DERIVATIVE VALUATION ADJUSTMENTS

 

Derivative financial instruments which are carried in the balance sheet at fair value are adjusted where appropriate to reflect credit risk, market liquidity and other risks.

 

(I) UNCOLLATERALISED DERIVATIVE VALUATION ADJUSTMENTS, EXCLUDING MONOLINE COUNTERPARTIES

(i)Uncollateralised derivative valuation adjustments, excluding monoline counterparties

 

The following table summarises the movement on this valuation adjustment account during 20152018 and 2016:2019:

 

 2019  2018 
 2016
£m
  2015
£m
  £m  £m 
At 1 January  598   608   562   521 
Income statement charge (credit)  163   (38)  (134)  47 
Transfers  (17)  28   (5)  (6)
At 31 December  744   598   423   562 
                
Represented by:                
  2016   2015         
  £m   £m   2019   2018 
  £m   £m 
Credit Valuation Adjustment  685   511   278   409 
Debit Valuation Adjustment  (123)  (78)  (27)  (79)
Funding Valuation Adjustment  182   165   172   232 
  744   598   423   562 

 

Credit and Debit Valuation Adjustments (CVA and DVA) are applied to the Group’s over-the-counter derivative exposures with counterparties that are not subject to standard interbank collateral arrangements. These exposures largely relate to the provision of risk management solutions for corporate customers within the Commercial Banking division.

 

A CVA is taken where the Group has a positive future uncollateralised exposure (asset). A DVA is taken where the Group has a negative future uncollateralised exposure (liability). These adjustments reflect interest rates and expectations of counterparty creditworthiness and the Group’s own credit spread respectively.

 

The CVA is sensitive to:

 

the current size of the mark-to-market position on the uncollateralised asset;
  
expectations of future market volatility of the underlying asset; and
  
expectations of counterparty creditworthiness.

 

In circumstances where exposures to a counterparty become impaired, any associated derivative valuation adjustment is transferred and assessed for specific loss alongside other non-derivative assets and liabilities that the counterparty may have with the Group.

 

Market Credit Default Swap (CDS) spreads are used to develop the probability of default for quoted counterparties. For unquoted counterparties, internal credit ratings and market sector CDS curves and recovery rates are used. The Loss Given Default (LGD) is based on market recovery rates and internal credit assessments.

 

The combination of a one notch deterioration in the credit rating of derivative counterparties and a ten per cent increase in LGD increases the CVA by £64£60 million. Current market value is used to estimate the projected exposure for products not supported by the model, which are principally complex interest rate options that are traded in very low volumes. For these, the CVA is calculated on an add-on basis (in total contributing £1 million of the overall CVA balance(although no such adjustment was required at 31 December 2016)2019).

 

The DVA is sensitive to:

 

the current size of the mark-to-market position on the uncollateralised liability;
  
expectations of future market volatility of the underlying liability; and
  
the Group’s own CDS spread.
F-90

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 50: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS continued

 

A one per cent rise in the CDS spread would lead to an increase in the DVA of £152 million to £275£99 million.

 

The risk exposures that are used for the CVA and DVA calculations are strongly influenced by interest rates. Due to the nature of the Group’s business the CVA/DVA exposures tend to be on average the same way around such that the valuation adjustments fall when interest rates rise. A one per cent rise in interest rates would lead to a £221£63 million fall in the overall valuation adjustment to £341£188 million. The CVA model used by the Group does not assume any correlation between the level of interest rates and default rates.

 

The Group has also recognised a Funding Valuation Adjustment to adjust for the net cost of funding uncollateralised derivative positions. This adjustment is calculated on the expected future exposure discounted at a suitable cost of funds. A ten basis points increase in the cost of funds will increase the funding valuation adjustment by approximately £32£21 million.

 

(II) MARKET LIQUIDITY(ii) Market liquidity

 

The Group includes mid to bid-offer valuation adjustments against the expected cost of closing out the net market risk in the Group’s trading positions within a timeframe that is consistent with historical trading activity and spreads that the trading desks have accessed historically during the ordinary course of business in normal market conditions.

 

At 31 December 2016,2019, the Group’s derivative trading business held mid to bid-offer valuation adjustments of £96£80 million (2015: £76(2018: £80 million).

F-79

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 49: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS continued

 

(D) SENSITIVITY OF LEVEL 3 VALUATIONS

 

     At 31 December 2016  At 31 December 2015      At 31 December 2019 At 31 December 2018
        Effect of reasonably possible
alternative assumptions2
     Effect of reasonably possible
 alternative assumptions2
        Effect of reasonably possible
alternative assumptions2
    Effect of reasonably possible
alternative assumptions2
 
 Valuation techniques Significant unobservable
inputs1
 Carrying
 value
 £m
  Favourable
 changes
 £m
  Unfavourable
changes
£m
  Carrying
value
£m
  Favourable
changes
£m
  Unfavourable
changes
£m
    Significant unobservable Carrying
value
 Favourable
changes
 Unfavourable
changes
 Carrying
value
 Favourable
changes
 Unfavourable
changes
 
Trading and other financial assets at fair value
through profit or loss
                          
 Valuation techniques inputs1 £m £m £m £m £m £m 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or lossFinancial assets at fair value through profit or loss                          
Loans and advances to customers Discounted cash flows Interest rate spreads (bps) 47bps/108bps  10,912   401   (384)  10,565   380   (371)
Debt securities Discounted cash flows Credit spreads (bps) (1ps/2ps)  29   5   (5)  92   7   (7) Discounted cash flows Credit spreads (bps) (1bps/2bps)  61   1   (1)  274   92   (21)
Equity and venture capital investments Market approach Earnings multiple (1.5//15.4)  1,948   89   (89)  1,657   54   (55)
 Underlying asset/net asset value (incl. property prices)3 n/a  935   89   (113)  523   48   (57)
Unlisted equities, debt securities and property partnerships in the life funds Underlying asset/net asset value (incl. property prices), broker quotes or discounted cash flows3 n/a  1,052   19   (41)  898   2   (45)
      14,908           13,917         
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeFinancial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income                          
Asset-backed securities Lead manager or broker quote n/a  59         62        Lead manager or broker quote/consensus pricing n/a  181   6   (6)  246   3   (5)
Equity and venture capital investments Market approach Earnings multiple (0.9/10.0)  2,163   63   (68)  2,279   72   (72) Underlying asset/net asset value (incl. property prices)3 n/a  227   7   (6)  21   2   (2)
 Underlying asset/net asset value (incl. property prices)3 n/a  54   2   (3)  145   8   (14)      408           267         
Unlisted equities and debt securities, property partnerships in the life funds Underlying asset/net asset value (incl. property prices)3 n/a  1,501      (32) 2,538    (48)
      3,806        5,116       
Available-for-sale financial assets                 
Asset-backed securities Lead manager or broker quote/consensus pricing n/a  133         55       
Equity and venture capital investments Underlying asset/net asset value (incl. property prices)3 n/a  761   48   (53)  339   25   (27)
Other Various n/a          290     
      894        684       
Derivative financial assetsDerivative financial assets                   Derivative financial assets                          
Embedded equity conversion feature Lead manager or broker quote Equity conversion feature spread           545   14   (14)
Interest rate derivatives Option pricing model Interest rate volatility (0%/115%)  1,399   (3)  (19) 924  20  (19) Option pricing model Interest rate volatility (14%/115%)  863   5   (6)  927   7   (5)
      1,399        1,469             863           927         
Level 3 financial assets carried at fair valueLevel 3 financial assets carried at fair value   6,099          7,269         Level 3 financial assets carried at fair value    16,179           15,111         
Trading and other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss    2        1     
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss Discounted cash flows Interest rate spreads (+/–50bps)  48   1   (1)  11       
Derivative financial liabilitiesDerivative financial liabilities                     Derivative financial liabilities                          
Interest rate
derivatives
 Option pricing model Interest rate volatility (0%/115%)  960        723      Option pricing model Interest rate volatility (14%/115%)  1,367         716       
      960        723             1,367           716         
Level 3 financial liabilities carried at fair value     962          724         Level 3 financial liabilities carried at fair value  1,415           727         

 

1Ranges are shown where appropriate and represent the highest and lowest inputs used in the level 3 valuations.
  
2Where the exposure to an unobservable input is managed on a net basis, only the net impact is shown in the table.
  
3Underlying asset/net asset values represent fair value.
F-80F-91

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 49:50: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTScontinued

 

UNOBSERVABLE INPUTS

 

Significant unobservable inputs affecting the valuation of debt securities, unlisted equity investments and derivatives are as follows:

 

Interest rates and inflation rates are referenced in some derivatives where the payoff that the holder of the derivative receives depends on the behaviour of those underlying references through time.
  
Credit spreads represent the premium above the benchmark reference instrument required to compensate for lower credit quality; higher spreads lead to a lower fair value.
  
Volatility parameters represent key attributes of option behaviour; higher volatilities typically denote a wider range of possible outcomes.
  
Earnings multiples are used to value certain unlisted equity investments; a higher earnings multiple will result in a higher fair value.

 

REASONABLY POSSIBLE ALTERNATIVE ASSUMPTIONS

 

Valuation techniques applied to many of the Group’s level 3 instruments often involve the use of two or more inputs whose relationship is interdependent. The calculation of the effect of reasonably possible alternative assumptions included in the table above reflects such relationships.

 

DEBT SECURITIESDebt securities

 

Reasonably possible alternative assumptions have been determined in respect of the Group’s structured credit investment by flexing credit spreads.

 

DERIVATIVESDerivatives

 

Reasonably possible alternative assumptions have been determined in respect of swaptions in the Group’s derivative portfolios which are priced using industry standard option pricing models. Such models require interest rate volatilities which may be unobservable at longer maturities.

To derive reasonably possible alternative valuations these volatilities have been flexed within a range of nil10 per cent to 115128 per cent (2015: 1(2018: 19 per cent and 63to 80 per cent).

 

UNLISTED EQUITY, VENTURE CAPITAL INVESTMENTS AND INVESTMENTS IN PROPERTY PARTNERSHIPSUnlisted equity, venture capital investments and investments in property partnerships

 

The valuation techniques used for unlisted equity and venture capital investments vary depending on the nature of the investment. Reasonably possible alternative valuations for these investments have been calculated by reference to the approach taken, as appropriate to the business sector and investment circumstances and as such the following inputs have been considered:

 

for valuations derived from earnings multiples, consideration is given to the risk attributes, growth prospects and financial gearing of comparable businesses when selecting an appropriate multiple;
  
the discount rates used in discounted cash flow valuations; and
  
in line with International Private Equity and Venture Capital Guidelines, the values of underlying investments in fund investments portfolios.
F-81

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 49: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS continued

 

(4) Financial assets and liabilities carried at amortised cost

 

(A) FINANCIAL ASSETS

 

VALUATION HIERARCHY

 

The table below analyses the fair values of the financial assets of the Group which are carried at amortised cost by valuation methodology (level 1, 2 or 3, as described on page F-73)F-85). Loans and receivablesFinancial assets carried at amortised cost are mainly classified as level 3 due to significant unobservable inputs used in the valuation models. Where inputs are observable, debt securities are classified as level 1 or 2.

 

     Valuation hierarchy      Valuation hierarchy
 Carrying value Fair value Level 1 Level 2 Level 3  Carrying value
£m
 Fair value
£m
 Level 1
£m
 Level 2
£m
 Level 3
£m
 
 £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 31 December 2016                    
Loans and receivables:                    
Loans and advances to customers: unimpaired  451,339   450,986         450,986 
Loans and advances to customers: impaired  6,619   6,475         6,475 
At 31 December 2019           
Financial assets at amortised cost:           
Loans and advances to customers: Stage 1  449,300   450,465      54,600   395,865 
Loans and advances to customers: Stage 2  27,548   28,259         28,259 
Loans and advances to customers: Stage 3  4,568   3,508         3,508 
Loans and advances to customers: purchased or originated credit-impaired  13,572   13,572         13,572 
Loans and advances to customers  457,958   457,461         457,461   494,988   495,804      54,600   441,204 
Loans and advances to banks  26,902   26,812         26,812   9,775   9,773      1,555   8,218 
Debt securities  3,397   3,303      3,288   15   5,544   5,537      5,526   11 
Reverse repos included in above amounts:                                        
Loans and advances to customers  8,304   8,304         8,304   54,600   54,600      54,600    
Loans and advances to banks  902   902         902   1,555   1,555      1,555    
At 31 December 2015                    
Loans and receivables:                    
Loans and advances to customers: unimpaired  448,010   447,808         447,808 
Loans and advances to customers: impaired  7,165   6,989         6,989 
At 31 December 2018                    
Financial assets at amortised cost:                    
Loans and advances to customers: Stage 1  441,006   440,542      40,483   400,059 
Loans and advances to customers: Stage 2  24,351   25,516         25,516 
Loans and advances to customers: Stage 3  4,188   3,289         3,289 
Loans and advances to customers: purchased or originated credit-impaired  15,313   15,313         15,313 
Loans and advances to customers  455,175   454,797         454,797   484,858   484,660      40,483   444,177 
Loans and advances to banks  25,117   25,130         25,130   6,283   6,286      461   5,825 
Debt securities  4,191   4,107   7   4,090   10   5,238   5,244      5,233   11 
Held-to-maturity investments  19,808   19,851   19,851       
Reverse repos included in above amounts:                                        
Loans and advances to customers                 40,483   40,483      40,483    
Loans and advances to banks  963   963         963   461   461      461    
F-92

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 50: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS continued

 

VALUATION METHODOLOGY

 

Loans and advances to customers

 

The Group provides loans and advances to commercial, corporate and personal customers at both fixed and variable rates duerates. Due to their short term nature. Thenature, the carrying value of the variable rate loans and those relating to lease financing is assumed to be their fair value.

 

To determine the fair value of loans and advances to customers, loans are segregated into portfolios of similar characteristics. A number of techniques are used to estimate the fair value of fixed rate lending; these take account of expected credit losses based on historic trends, prevailing market interest rates and expected future cash flows. For retail exposures, fair value is usually estimated by discounting anticipated cash flows (including interest at contractual rates) at market rates for similar loans offered by the Group and other financial institutions. Certain loans secured on residential properties are made at a fixed rate for a limited period, typically two to five years, after which the loans revert to the relevant variable rate. The fair value of such loans is estimated by reference to the market rates for similar loans of maturity equal to the remaining fixed interest rate period. The fair value of commercial loans is estimated by discounting anticipated cash flows at a rate which reflects the effects of interest rate changes, adjusted for changes in credit risk. No adjustment is made to put it in place by the Group to manage its interest rate exposure.

 

Loans and advances to banks

 

The carrying value of short dated loans and advances to banks is assumed to be their fair value. The fair value of loans and advances to banks is estimated by discounting the anticipated cash flows at a market discount rate adjusted for the credit spread of the obligor or, where not observable, the credit spread of borrowers of similar credit quality.

 

Debt securities

 

The fair values of debt securities which were previously within assets held for trading and were reclassified to loans and receivables, are determined predominantly from lead manager quotes and, where these are not available, by alternative techniques including reference to credit spreads on similar assets with the same obligor, market standard consensus pricing services, broker quotes and other research data.

 

Reverse repurchase agreements

The carrying amount is deemed a reasonable approximation of fair value given the short-term nature of these instruments.

F-82

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 49: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS continued

 

(B) FINANCIAL LIABILITIES

 

VALUATION HIERARCHY

 

The table below analyses the fair values of the financial liabilities of the Group which are carried at amortised cost by valuation methodology (level 1, 2 or 3, as described on page F-73)F-85).

 

     Valuation hierarchy      Valuation hierarchy
 Carrying value Fair value Level 1 Level 2 Level 3  Carrying value
£m
 Fair value
£m
 Level 1
£m
 Level 2
£m
 Level 3
£m
 
 £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 31 December 2016                    
At 31 December 2019           
Deposits from banks  16,384   16,395      16,395      28,179   28,079      28,079    
Customer deposits  415,460   416,490      408,571   7,919   421,320   421,728      416,493   5,235 
Debt securities in issue  76,314   79,650      79,434   216   97,689   100,443      100,443    
Subordinated liabilities  19,831   22,395      22,395      17,130   19,783      19,783    
Repos included in above amounts:                                        
Deposits from banks  7,279   7,279      7,279      18,105   18,105      18,105    
Customer deposits  2,462   2,462      2,462      9,530   9,530      9,530    
At 31 December 2015                    
At 31 December 2018                    
Deposits from banks  16,925   16,934      16,934      30,320   30,322      30,322    
Customer deposits  418,326   418,512      407,417   11,095   418,066   418,450      412,283   6,167 
Debt securities in issue  82,056   85,093      81,132   3,961   91,168   93,233      93,233    
Subordinated liabilities  23,312   26,818      26,818      17,656   19,564      19,564    
Repos included in above amounts:                                        
Deposits from banks  7,061   7,061      7,061      21,170   21,170      21,170    
Customer deposits                 1,818   1,818      1,818    

 

VALUATION METHODOLOGY

 

Deposits from banks and customer deposits

The fair value of bank and customer deposits repayable on demand is assumed to be equal to their carrying value.

 

The fair value for all other deposits is estimated using discounted cash flows applying either market rates, where applicable, or current rates for deposits of similar remaining maturities.

 

Debt securities in issue

 

The fair value of short-term debt securities in issue is approximately equal to their carrying value. Fair value for other debt securities is calculated based on quoted market prices where available. Where quoted market prices are not available, fair value is estimated using discounted cash flow techniques at a rate which reflects market rates of interest and the Group’s own credit spread.

 

Subordinated liabilities

The fair value of subordinated liabilities is determined by reference to quoted market prices where available or by reference to quoted market prices of similar instruments. Subordinated liabilities are classified as level 2, since the inputs used to determine their fair value are largely observable.

 

Repurchase agreements

 

The carrying amount is deemed a reasonable approximation of fair value given the short term nature of these instruments.

(5) Reclassifications of financial assets

In 2015 the Group had reviewed its approach to managing a portfolio of government securities held as a separately identifiable component of the Group’s liquidity portfolio. Given the long-term nature of this portfolio, and reflecting the Group’s positive intent and ability to hold them until maturity in the economic environment at the time, the Group concluded that certain of these securities would be able to be held until they reached maturity and consequently, on 1 May 2015, government securities with a fair value of £19,938 million were reclassified from available-for-sale financial assets to held-to-maturity investments. During 2016, the Group has reassessed this holding of government securities classified as held-to-maturity in light of the current low interest rate environment and they have been reclassified as available-for-sale; this resulted in a credit of £1,544 million to the available-for-sale revaluation reserve (£1,127 million after tax).

F-83F-93

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 50: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS continued

(5) Reclassifications of financial assets

Other than the reclassifications on adoption of IFRS 9 on 1 January 2018, there have been no reclassifications of financial assets in 2018 or 2019.

NOTE 51: TRANSFERS OF FINANCIAL ASSETS

 

There were no significant transferred financial assets which were derecognised in their entirety, but with ongoing exposure. Details of transferred financial assets that continue to be recognised in full are as follows.

 

The Group enters into repurchase and securities lending transactions in the normal course of business that do not result in derecognition of the financial assets covered as substantially all of the risks and rewards, including credit, interest rate, prepayment and other price risks are retained by the Group. In all cases, the transferee has the right to sell or repledge the assets concerned.

 

As set out in note 19,31, included within loans and receivablesfinancial assets measured at amortised cost are loans transferred under the Group’s securitisation and covered bond programmes. As the Group retains all of a majority of the risks and rewards associated with these loans, including credit, interest rate, prepayment and liquidity risk, they remain on the Group’s balance sheet. Assets transferred into the Group’s securitisation and covered bond programmes are not available to be used by the Group whilst the assets are within the programmes. However, the Group retains the right to remove loans from the covered bond programmes where they are in excess of the programme’s requirements. In addition, where the Group has retained some of the notes issued by securitisation and covered bond programmes, the Group has the ability to sell or pledge these retained notes.

 

The table below sets out the carrying values of the transferred assets and the associated liabilities. For repurchase and securities lending transactions, the associated liabilities represent the Group’s obligation to repurchase the transferred assets. For securitisation programmes, the associated liabilities represent the external notes in issue (note 31). Except as otherwise noted below, none of the liabilities shown in the table below have recourse only to the transferred assets.

 

  2016  2015 
  Carrying  Carrying  Carrying  Carrying 
  value of  value of  value of  value of 
  transferred  associated  transferred  associated 
  assets  liabilities  assets  liabilities 
  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Repurchase and securities lending transactions                
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  10,256   3,380   13,711   7,460 
Available-for-sale financial assets  24,681   21,809   18,141   14,295 
Loans and receivables:                
Loans and advances to customers  583      1,491    
Securitisation programmes                
Loans and receivables:                
Loans and advances to customers1  52,184   7,253   58,090   7,763 
  2019 2018
  Carrying
value of
transferred
assets
£m
  Carrying
value of
associated
liabilities
£m
  Carrying
value of
transferred
assets
£m
  Carrying
value of
associated
liabilities
£m
 
Repurchase and securities lending transactions            
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  9,186   3,364   6,815   961 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  7,897   5,875   7,279   5,337 
Securitisation programmes                
Financial assets at amortised cost:                
Loans and advances to customers1  42,545   7,335   41,674   5,479 

 

1The carrying value of associated liabilities excludes securitisation notes held by the Group of £26,435£31,436 million (31 December 2015: £29,3032018: £31,701 million).
F-84F-94

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 51:52: OFFSETTING OF FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES

 

The following information relates to financial assets and liabilities which have been offset in the balance sheet and those which have not been offset but for which the Group has enforceable master netting agreements or collateral arrangements in place with counterparties.

 

        Related amounts where set
off in the balance sheet not
permitted3
  Potential         Related amounts where set off in
the balance sheet not permitted3
 Potential
net amounts
 
            net amounts 
 Gross Amounts Net amounts Cash Non-cash if offset 
 amounts offset in the presented in collateral collateral of related 
 of assets and balance the balance received/ received/ amounts 
 liabilities1 sheet2 sheet pledged pledged permitted 
At 31 December 2016 £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 31 December 2019 Gross amounts
of assets and
liabilities1
£m
 Amounts offset
in the balance
sheet2
£m
 Net amounts
presented in
the balance
sheet
£m
 Cash collateral
received/
pledged
£m
 Non-cash
collateral
received/
pledged
£m
 if offset
of related
amounts
permitted
£m
 
Financial assets                                     
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:                        
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:                        
Excluding reverse repos  118,095      118,095      (3,265)  114,830   148,920      148,920      (2,825)  146,095 
Reverse repos  35,298   (2,219)  33,079      (33,079)     24,165   (12,896)  11,269   (366)  (10,903)   
  153,393   (2,219)  151,174      (36,344)  114,830   173,085   (12,896)  160,189   (366)  (13,728)  146,095 
Derivative financial instruments  92,390   (56,252)  36,138   (6,472)  (19,906)  9,760   79,735   (53,366)  26,369   (7,650)  (13,892)  4,827 
Loans and advances to banks:                                                
Excluding reverse repos  26,000      26,000   (2,826)     23,174   8,220      8,220   (3,377)     4,843 
Reverse repos  902      902      (902)     1,555      1,555      (1,555)   
  26,902      26,902   (2,826)  (902)  23,174   9,775      9,775   (3,377)  (1,555)  4,843 
Loans and advances to customers:                                                
Excluding reverse repos  451,290   (1,636)  449,654   (1,793)  (6,331)  441,530   440,388      440,388   (2,392)  (2,123)  435,873 
Reverse repos  8,304      8,304      (8,304)     58,959   (4,359)  54,600      (54,600)   
  459,594   (1,636)  457,958   (1,793)  (14,635)  441,530   499,347   (4,359)  494,988   (2,392)  (56,723)  435,873 
Debt securities  3,397      3,397         3,397   5,544      5,544      (211)  5,333 
Available-for-sale financial assets  56,524      56,524      (21,475)  35,049 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  25,092      25,092      (5,859)  19,233 
Financial liabilities                                                
Deposits from banks:                                                
Excluding repos  9,105      9,105   (5,080)  (695)  3,330   10,074      10,074   (8,016)     2,058 
Repos  7,279      7,279      (7,279)     18,105      18,105      (18,105)   
  16,384      16,384   (5,080)  (7,974)  3,330   28,179      28,179   (8,016)  (18,105)  2,058 
Customer deposits:                                                
Excluding repos  415,153   (2,155)  412,998   (1,391)  (6,331)  405,276   413,659   (1,869)  411,790   (1,850)  (2,123)  407,817 
Repos  2,462      2,462      (2,462)     9,530      9,530      (9,530)   
  417,615   (2,155)  415,460   (1,391)  (8,793)  405,276   423,189   (1,869)  421,320   (1,850)  (11,653)  407,817 
Trading and other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss:                        
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss:                        
Excluding repos  12,437      12,437         12,437   10,438      10,438         10,438 
Repos  44,286   (2,219)  42,067      (42,067)     28,303   (17,255)  11,048      (11,048)   
  56,723   (2,219)  54,504      (42,067)  12,437   38,741   (17,255)  21,486      (11,048)  10,438 
Derivative financial instruments  90,657   (55,733)  34,924   (4,620)  (24,820)  5,484   77,276   (51,497)  25,779   (5,770)  (16,364)  3,645 
F-85F-95

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 51:52: OFFSETTING OF FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIEScontinued

 

       Related amounts where set off in
the balance sheet not permitted3
 Potential           Related amounts where set off in
the balance sheet not permitted3
 Potential
net amounts
 
           net amounts 
     Net amounts   Non-cash if offset 
 Gross amounts Amounts offset presented in Cash collateral collateral of related 
 of assets and in the balance the balance received/ received/ amounts 
 liabilities1 sheet2 sheet pledged pledged permitted 
At 31 December 2015 £m £m £m £m £m £m 
At 31 December 2018 Gross amounts
of assets and
liabilities1
£m
 Amounts offset
in the balance
sheet2
£m
 Net amounts
presented in
the balance
sheet
£m
 Cash collateral
received/
pledged
£m
 Non-cash
collateral
received/
pledged
£m
 if offset
of related
amounts
permitted
£m
 
Financial assets                                     
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:                        
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:                        
Excluding reverse repos  107,362      107,362      (7,175)  100,187   130,172      130,172      (978)  129,194 
Reverse repos  39,083   (5,909)  33,174      (33,174)     33,472   (5,115)  28,357   (622)  (27,735)   
  146,445   (5,909)  140,536      (40,349)  100,187   163,644   (5,115)  158,529   (622)  (28,713)  129,194 
Derivative financial instruments  62,937   (33,470)  29,467   (3,228)  (20,091)  6,148   78,607   (55,012)  23,595   (6,039)  (15,642)  1,914 
Loans and advances to banks:                                                
Excluding reverse repos  24,154      24,154   (1,810)     22,344   5,822      5,822   (2,676)     3,146 
Reverse repos  963      963      (963)     461      461      (461)   
  25,117      25,117   (1,810)  (963)  22,344   6,283      6,283   (2,676)  (461)  3,146 
Loans and advances to customers:                                                
Excluding reverse repos  457,546   (2,371)  455,175   (1,001)  (7,250)  446,924   447,020   (2,645)  444,375   (1,319)  (3,241)  439,815 
Reverse repos                    42,494   (2,011)  40,483      (40,483)   
  457,546   (2,371)  455,175   (1,001)  (7,250)  446,924   489,514   (4,656)  484,858   (1,319)  (43,724)  439,815 
Debt securities  4,191      4,191         4,191   5,238      5,238         5,238 
Available-for-sale financial assets  33,032      33,032      (13,895)  19,137 
Held-to-maturity investments  19,808      19,808         19,808 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  24,815      24,815      (5,361)  19,454 
Financial liabilities                                                
Deposits from banks:                                                
Excluding repos  9,864      9,864   (2,770)  (1,387)  5,707   9,150      9,150   (5,291)     3,859 
Repos  7,061      7,061      (7,061)     21,170      21,170      (21,170)   
  16,925      16,925   (2,770)  (8,448)  5,707   30,320      30,320   (5,291)  (21,170)  3,859 
Customer deposits:                                                
Excluding repos  420,330   (2,004)  418,326   (458)  (7,250)  410,618   417,652   (1,404)  416,248   (1,370)  (3,241)  411,637 
Repos                    1,818      1,818      (1,818)   
  420,330   (2,004)  418,326   (458)  (7,250)  410,618   419,470   (1,404)  418,066   (1,370)  (5,059)  411,637 
Trading and other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss:                        
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss:                        
Excluding repos  13,432      13,432         13,432   8,952      8,952         8,952 
Repos  44,340   (5,909)  38,431      (38,431)     28,721   (7,126)  21,595      (21,595)   
  57,772   (5,909)  51,863      (38,431)  13,432   37,673   (7,126)  30,547      (21,595)  8,952 
Derivative financial instruments  60,138   (33,837)  26,301   (2,811)  (22,586)  904   77,626   (56,253)  21,373   (3,995)  (17,313)  65 

 

1After impairment allowance.
  
2The amounts set off in the balance sheet as shown above represent derivatives and repurchase agreements with central clearing houses which meet the criteria for offsetting under IAS 32.
  
3The Group enters into derivatives and repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements with various counterparties which are governed by industry standard master netting agreements. The Group holds and provides cash and securities collateral in respective of derivative transactions covered by these agreements. The right to set off balances under these master netting agreements or to set off cash and securities collateral only arises in the event of non-payment or default and, as a result, these arrangements do not qualify for offsetting under IAS 32.

 

The effects of over collateralisation have not been taken into account in the above table.

F-86F-96

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 52:53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT

 

As a bancassurer, financial instruments are fundamental to the Group’s activities and, as a consequence, the risks associated with financial instruments represent a significant component of the risks faced by the Group.

 

The primary risks affecting the Group through its use of financial instruments are: credit risk; market risk, which includes interest rate risk and foreign exchange risk; liquidity risk; capital risk; and insurance risk. Information about the Group’s exposure to each of the above risks and capital can be found on pages 4441 to 112.108. The following additional disclosures, which provide quantitative information about the risks within financial instruments held or issued by the Group, should be read in conjunction with that earlier information.

 

Market risk

 

INTEREST RATE RISK

(A)INTEREST RATE RISK

 

Interest rate risk arises from the different repricing characteristics of the assets and liabilities. Liabilities are either insensitive to interest rate movements, for example interest free or very low interest customer deposits, or are sensitive to interest rate changes but bear rates which may be varied at the Group’s discretion and that for competitive reasons generally reflect changes in the Bank of England’s base rate. The rates on the remaining deposits are contractually fixed for their term to maturity.

 

Many banking assets are sensitive to interest rate movements; there is a large volume of managed rate assets such as variable rate mortgages which may be considered as a natural offset to the interest rate risk arising from the managed rate liabilities. However, a significant proportion of the Group’s lending assets, for example many personal loans and mortgages, bear interest rates which are contractually fixed.

 

The Group’s risk management policy is to optimise reward whilst managing its market risk exposures within the risk appetite defined by the Board. The largest residual risk exposure arises from balances that are deemed to be insensitive to changes in market rates (including current accounts, a portion of variable rate deposits and investable equity), and is managed through the Group’s structural hedge. The structural hedge consists of longer-term fixed rate assets or interest rate swaps and the amount and duration of the hedging activity is reviewed regularly by the Group Asset and Liability Committee. Further details on the Group market risk policy can be found on page 102.

The Group establishes two types of hedge accounting relationships for interest rate risk:risk using cash flow hedges and fair value hedges andhedges. The Group is exposed to cash flow hedges.interest rate risk on its variable rate loans and deposits together with its floating rate subordinated debt. The derivatives used to manage the structural hedge may be designated into cash flow hedges to manage income statement volatility. The economic items related to the structural hedge, for example current accounts, are not eligible hedged items under IAS 39 for inclusion into accounting hedge relationships. The Group is exposed to fair value interest rate risk on its fixed rate customer loans, its fixed rate customer deposits and the majority of its subordinated debt, and to cash flow interest rate risk on its variable rate loans and deposits together with its floating rate subordinated debt. The Group applies netting between similar risks before applying hedge accounting.

Hedge ineffectiveness arises during the management of interest rate risk due to residual unhedged risk. Sources of ineffectiveness, which the Group may decide to not fully mitigate, can include basis differences, timing differences and notional amount differences. The effectiveness of accounting hedge relationships is assessed between the hedging derivatives and the documented hedged item, which can differ to the underlying economically hedged item.

 

At 31 December 20162019 the aggregate notional principal of interest rate swaps designated as fair value hedges was £194,416£183,489 million (2015: £121,063(2018: £150,971 million) with a net fair value asset of £725£569 million (2015:(2018: asset of £848£760 million) (note 16)17). The lossesgains on the hedging instruments were £1,946£1,144 million (2015: losses(2018: gains of £618£94 million). The gainslosses on the hedged items attributable to the hedged risk were £2,017£1,001 million (2015:(2018: losses of £32 million). The gains of £511 million).and losses relating to the fair value hedges are recorded in net trading income.

 

In addition the Group has cash flow hedges which are primarily used to hedge the variability in the cost of funding within the commercial business. Note 16 shows when the hedged cash flows are expected to occur and when they will affect income for designated cash flow hedges. The notional principal of the interest rate swaps designated as cash flow hedges at 31 December 20162019 was £384,182£426,740 million (2015: £460,829(2018: £556,945 million) with a net fair value liability of £352£388 million (2015:(2018: liability of £718£486 million) (note 16)17). In 2016,2019, ineffectiveness recognised in the income statement that arises from cash flow hedges was a gain of £24£134 million (2015: gain(2018: loss of £3£25 million).

 

CURRENCYINTEREST RATE BENCHMARK REFORM

As discussed in note 1, the Group has applied the hedge accounting amendmentsInterest Rate Benchmark Reformto hedge accounting relationships directly affected by the replacement of interest rate benchmarks. Under these amendments, for the purposes of:

– determining whether a forecast transaction is highly probable;
determining whether the hedged future cash flows are expected to occur;
determining whether a hedge is expected to be highly effective in achieving offsetting changes in fair value or cash flows attributable to the hedged risk; and
determining whether an accounting hedging relationship should be discontinued because of a failure of the retrospective effectiveness test

the Group has assumed that the interest rate benchmark on which the hedged risk or the cash flows of the hedged item or hedging instrument are based is not altered by uncertainties resulting from the proposed interest rate benchmark reform. In addition, for a fair value hedge of a non-contractually specified benchmark portion of interest rate risk, the Group assesses only at inception of the hedge relationship and not on an ongoing basis that the risk is separately identifiable and hedge effectiveness can be measured.

The Group’s most significant hedge accounting relationships are exposed to the following interest rate benchmarks: Sterling LIBOR, US Dollar LIBOR and Euro LIBOR. The notional of the hedged items that the Group has designated into cash flow hedge relationships that is directly affected by the interest rate benchmark reform is £29,202 million, of which £25,438 million relates to Sterling LIBOR. These are principally loans and advances to customers in Commercial Banking. In addition, the interest rate benchmark reforms affect assets designated in fair value hedges with a notional of £102,969 million, of which £98,278 million is in respect of sterling LIBOR, and liabilities designated in fair value hedges with a notional of £62,295 million, of which £9,186 million is in respect of sterling LIBOR. These fair value hedges principally relate to mortgages in Retail and debt securities in issue.

The Group is managing the process to transition to alternative benchmark rates under its Group-wide IBOR Transition Programme. This programme is working towards ensuring that the Group has the market capability and infrastructure to deal with the reform. The programme also encompasses the associated impacts on accounting and reporting and includes dealing with the impact on hedge accounting relationships of the transition to alternative reference rates. Further information on the Group’s programme is set out on page 45.

The significant assumptions and judgements that the Group has made in applying these requirements include the following:

– a hedge accounting relationship is assumed to be affected by the interest rate benchmark reform if the reform gives rise to uncertainties about the timing and/or amount of the interest rate benchmark-based cash flows of the hedged items and/or of the hedging instrument;
F-97

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

– where the hedged item is a forecast transaction then, in the absence of any certainty in relation to the interest rate benchmark reform, assessments have been determined as to whether the forecast transaction is highly probable assuming that the interest rate benchmark on which the hedged cash flows are based is not altered as a result of the interest rate benchmark reform;
any reclassification of amounts in cash flow hedge reserves to profit or loss have been based on assessing whether the hedged cash flows are no longer expected to occur assuming that the interest rate benchmark on which the hedged cash flows are based is not altered as a result of the interest rate benchmark reform; and
all benchmark rate referenced hedged items and hedging instruments included in hedging relationships are subject to uncertainty due to interest rate benchmark reform.

In accordance with the Interest Rate Benchmark Reform amendments to IAS 39, the Group will cease to apply prospectively the reliefs outlined above when the uncertainty arising from interest rate benchmark reform is no longer present with respect to the timing and the amount of the interest rate benchmark-based cash flows of the hedged item (or for the effectiveness assessments, the hedging instrument). The reliefs will be disapplied earlier if the hedging relationship is discontinued or the entire amount accumulated in the cash flow hedge reserve with respect to that hedging relationship is reclassified to profit or loss for a reason other than interest rate benchmark reform.

At 31 December 2019, the notional amount of the hedging instruments in hedging relationships to which these amendments apply was £604,602 million, of which £117,076 million relates to Sterling LIBOR fair value hedges and £400,439 million relates to Sterling LIBOR cash flow hedges.

(B)CURRENCY RISK

 

The corporate and retail businesses incur foreign exchange risk in the course of providing services to their customers. All non-structural foreign exchange exposures in the non-trading book are transferred to the trading area where they are monitored and controlled. These risks reside in the authorised trading centres who are allocated exposure limits. The limits are monitored daily by the local centres and reported to the market and liquidity risk function in London. Associated VaR and the closing, average, maximum and minimum are disclosed on page 92.108. The Group also manages foreign currency risk via cash flow hedge accounting, utilising currency swaps.

 

Risk arises from the Group’s investments in its overseas operations. The Group’s structural foreign currency exposure is represented by the net asset value of the foreign currency equity and subordinated debt investments in its subsidiaries and branches. Gains or losses on structural foreign currency exposures are taken to reserves.

 

The Group hedges partceased all hedging of the currency translation risk of the net investment in certain foreign operations using currency borrowings. At 31 December 2016 the aggregate principal of these currency borrowings was £695 million (2015: £670 million). In 2016, an ineffectiveness loss of £2 million before tax and £1 million after tax (2015: ineffectiveness gain of £5 million before tax and £4 million after tax) was recognised in the income statement arising from net investment hedges.on 1 January 2018.

 

The Group’s main overseas operations are in the Americas and Europe. Details of the Group’s structural foreign currency exposures after net investment hedges, are as follows:

 

FUNCTIONAL CURRENCY OF GROUP OPERATIONS

(C)FUNCTIONAL CURRENCY OF GROUP OPERATIONS

 

  2016  2015 
        Other non-        Other non- 
  Euro  US Dollar  sterling  Euro  US Dollar  sterling 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Gross exposure  247   479   36   246   447   32 
Net investment hedges  (216)  (479)     (254)  (415)  (1)
Total structural foreign currency exposures, after net investment hedges  31      36   (8)  32   31 
   2019  2018
   Euro
£m
  US Dollar
£m
  Other
non-sterling
£m
  Euro
£m
  US Dollar
£m
  Other
non-sterling
£m
 
Exposure   63   93   48   112   59   60 
F-87F-98

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 52:53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

 

Credit risk

 

The Group’s credit risk exposure arises in respect of the instruments below and predominantly in the United Kingdom. Information about the Group’s exposure to credit risk, credit risk management, measurement and mitigation can be found on pages 5352 to 85.80.

 

A.(A) MAXIMUM CREDIT EXPOSURE

 

The maximum credit risk exposure of the Group in the event of other parties failing to perform their obligations is detailed below. No account is taken of any collateral held and the maximum exposure to loss, which includes amounts held to cover unit-linked and With Profits funds liabilities, is considered to be the balance sheet carrying amount or, for non-derivative off-balance sheet transactions and financial guarantees, their contractual nominal amounts.

 

  At 31 December 2016 At 31 December 2015
  Maximum
exposure
  Offset2  Net exposure  Maximum
exposure
  Offset2  Net exposure 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Loans and receivables:                        
Loans and advances to banks, net1  26,902      26,902   25,117      25,117 
Loans and advances to customers, net1  457,958   (6,331)  451,627   455,175   (7,250)  447,925 
Debt securities, net1  3,397      3,397   4,191      4,191 
   488,257   (6,331)  481,926   484,483   (7,250)  477,233 
Available-for-sale financial assets3  55,311      55,311   31,839      31,839 
Held-to-maturity investments           19,808      19,808 
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:3,4                        
Loans and advances  33,079      33,079   33,174      33,174 
Debt securities, treasury and other bills  50,398      50,398   46,886      46,886 
   83,477      83,477   80,060      80,060 
Derivative assets  36,138   (18,539)  17,599   29,467   (19,466)  10,001 
Assets arising from reinsurance contracts held  714      714   675      675 
Financial guarantees  6,883      6,883   7,165      7,165 
Off-balance sheet items:                        
Acceptances and endorsements  21      21   52      52 
Other items serving as direct credit substitutes  779      779   458      458 
Performance bonds and other transaction-related contingencies  2,237      2,237   2,123      2,123 
Irrevocable commitments  63,203      63,203   63,086      63,086 
   66,240      66,240   65,719      65,719 
   737,020   (24,870)  712,150   719,216   (26,716)  692,500 

  2019 2018
   Maximum
exposure
£m
   Offset2
£m
  Net exposure
£m
   Maximum
exposure
£m
   Offset2
£m
  Net exposure
£m
 
Loans and advances to banks, net1  9,775      9,775   6,283      6,283 
Loans and advances to customers, net1  494,988   (2,792)  492,196   484,858   (3,241)  481,617 
Debt securities, net1  5,544      5,544   5,238      5,238 
Financial assets at amortised cost  510,307   (2,792)  507,515   496,379   (3,241)  493,138 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income3  24,865      24,865   24,794      24,794 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:3,4                        
Loans and advances  23,475      23,475   40,876      40,876 
Debt securities, treasury and other bills  40,925      40,925   40,168      40,168 
   64,400      64,400   81,044      81,044 
Derivative assets  26,369   (14,696)  11,673   23,595   (14,327)  9,268 
Assets arising from reinsurance contracts held  23,567      23,567   7,860      7,860 
Off-balance sheet items:                        
Acceptances and endorsements  74      74   194      194 
Other items serving as direct credit substitutes  366      366   632      632 
Performance bonds and other transaction-related contingencies  2,454      2,454   2,425      2,425 
Irrevocable commitments and guarantees  63,504      63,504   64,884      64,884 
   66,398      66,398   68,135      68,135 
   715,906   (17,488)  698,418   701,807   (17,568)  684,239 
1Amounts shown net of related impairment allowances.
  
2Offset items comprise deposit amounts available for offset, and amounts available for offset under master netting arrangements, that do not meet the criteria under IAS 32 to enable loans and advances and derivative assets respectively to be presented net of these balances in the financial statements.
  
3Excluding equity shares.
  
4Includes assets within the Group’s unit-linked funds for which credit risk is borne by the policyholders and assets within the Group’s With-Profits funds for which credit risk is largely borne by the policyholders. Consequently, the Group has no significant exposure to credit risk for such assets which back related contract liabilities.

 

B.(B) CONCENTRATIONS OF EXPOSURE

 

The Group’s management of concentration risk includes single name, industry sector and country limits as well as controls over the Group’s overall exposure to certain products. Further information on the Group’s management of this risk is included within Credit risk mitigation Risk management on page 53.

 

At 31 December 20162019 the most significant concentrations of exposure were in mortgages (comprising 6760 per cent of total loans and advances to customers) and to financial, business and other services (comprising 1118 per cent of the total). For further information on concentrations of the Group’s loans, refer to note 18.

  2019
£m
  2018
£m
 
Agriculture, forestry and fishing  7,558   7,314 
Energy and water supply  1,432   1,517 
Manufacturing  6,093   8,260 
Construction  4,285   4,684 
Transport, distribution and hotels  13,016   14,113 
Postal and telecommunications  1,923   2,711 
Property companies  27,596   28,451 
Financial, business and other services  89,763   77,505 
Personal:        
Mortgages1  299,141   297,498 
Other  29,272   28,699 
Lease financing  1,671   1,822 
Hire purchase  16,497   15,434 
Total loans and advances to customers before allowance for impairment losses  498,247   488,008 
Allowance for impairment losses (note 18)  (3,259)  (3,150)
Total loans and advances to customers  494,988   484,858 

1Includes both UK and overseas mortgage balances.

 

Following the continuing reduction in the Group’s non-UK activities, an analysis of credit risk exposures by geographical region has not been provided.

F-88F-99

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 52:53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENTcontinued

 

C.(C) CREDIT QUALITY OF ASSETS

 

LOANS AND RECEIVABLES

The disclosures in the table below and those on page F-90 are produced under the underlying basis used for the Group’s segmental reporting. The Group believes that, for reporting periods following a significant acquisition such as the acquisition of HBOS in 2009, this underlying basis, which includes the allowance for loan losses at the acquisition date on a gross basis, more fairly reflects the underlying provisioning status of the loans. The remaining acquisition-related fair value adjustments in respect of this lending are therefore identified separately in this table.

The analysis of lending between retail and commercial has been prepared based upon the type of exposure and not the business segment in which the exposure is recorded. Included within retail are exposures to personal customers and small businesses, whilst included within commercial are exposures to corporate customers and other large institutions.

LOANS AND ADVANCES

    Loans and advances to customers Loans and 
                 advances 
                 designated 
  Loans and              at fair value 
  advances  Retail –  Retail –        through 
  to banks  mortgages  other  Commercial  Total  profit or loss 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 31 December 2016                        
Neither past due nor impaired  26,888   296,303   39,478   109,364   445,145   33,079 
Past due but not impaired  14   7,340   386   305   8,031    
Impaired – no provision required     784   392   689   1,865    
– provision held     3,536   1,038   2,056   6,630    
Gross  26,902   307,963   41,294   112,414   461,671   33,079 
Allowance for impairment losses     (1,696)  (458)  (1,378)  (3,532)   
Fair value adjustments                 (181)   
Net balance sheet carrying value  26,902               457,958   33,079 
At 31 December 2015                        
Neither past due nor impaired  25,006   302,063   38,886   100,001   440,950   33,174 
Past due but not impaired  111   8,233   393   463   9,089    
Impaired – no provision required     732   690   1,092   2,514    
– provision held     3,269   911   2,896   7,076    
Gross  25,117   314,297   40,880   104,452   459,629   33,174 
Allowance for impairment losses     (1,617)  (448)  (2,107)  (4,172)   
Fair value adjustments                 (282)   
Net balance sheet carrying value  25,117               455,175   33,174 

 

The criteria thatanalysis of lending has been prepared based on the division in which the asset is held; with the business segment in which the exposure is recorded reflected in the ratings system applied. The internal credit ratings systems used by the Group usesdiffer between Retail and Commercial, reflecting the characteristics of these exposures and the way that they are managed internally; these credit ratings are set out below. All probabilities of default (PDs) include forward-looking information and are based on 12 month values, with the exception of credit impaired.

Stage 3 assets include balances of £205 million (2018: £250 million) (with outstanding amounts due of approximately £1,700 million (2018: £2,200 million)) which have been subject to determine that there is objective evidence of an impairment loss are disclosed in note 2(H). Included in loansa partial write-off and receivables are advances which are individually determinedwhere the Group continues to be impairedenforce recovery action.

Stage 2 and Stage 3 assets with a grosscarrying amount before impairment allowances of £2,870£219 million (31 December 2015: £4,406(2018: £1,000 million). were modified during the year. No material gain or loss was recognised by the Group.

 

The table below sets out the reconciliation of the allowance for impairment losses of £2,412 million (2015: £3,033 million) shown in note 21 to the allowance for impairment losses on an underlying basis of £3,532 million (2015: £4,172 million) shown above:

  2016  2015 
  £m  £m 
Allowance for impairment losses on loans and advances to customers  2,412   3,033 
HBOS allowance at 16 January 20091  11,147   11,147 
HBOS charge covered by fair value adjustments2  12,236   12,166 
Amounts subsequently written off  (22,699)  (22,623)
   684   690 
Foreign exchange and other movements  436   449 
Allowance for impairment losses on loans and advances to customers on an underlying basis  3,532   4,172 

1Comprises an allowance held at 31 December 2008 of £10,693 million and a charge for the period from 1 January 2009 to 16 January 2009 of £454 million.
2This represents the element of the charge on loans and advances to customers in HBOS’s results that was included within the Group’s fair value adjustments in respect of the acquisition of HBOS on 16 January 2009.)
Gross drawn exposures PD range Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2019                      
Loans and advances to banks:                      
CMS 1-10 0.00-0.50%  9,777            9,777 
CMS 11-14 0.51-3.00%               
CMS 15-18 3.01-20.00%               
CMS 19 20.01-99.99%               
CMS 20-23 100%               
     9,777            9,777 
Loans and advances to customers:                      
Retail - mortgages                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  257,028   13,494         270,522 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  15   2,052         2,067 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%     414         414 
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%     975         975 
RMS 14 100%        1,506   13,714   15,220 
     257,043   16,935   1,506   13,714   289,198 
Retail - unsecured                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  22,151   1,098         23,249 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  2,676   919         3,595 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%  76   189         265 
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%  18   606         624 
RMS 14 100%        678      678 
     24,921   2,812   678      28,411 
Retail - UK Motor Finance                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  13,568   1,297         14,865 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  314   368         682 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%     99         99 
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%  2   178         180 
RMS 14 100%        150      150 
     13,884   1,942   150      15,976 
Retail - Other                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  9,520   390         9,910 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%     409         409 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%     7         7 
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%  134   23         157 
RMS 14 100%        150      150 
     9,654   829   150      10,633 
Total Retail    305,502   22,518   2,484   13,714   344,218 
F-89F-100

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 52:53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

 

LOANS AND ADVANCES WHICH ARE NEITHER PAST DUE NOR IMPAIRED

     Loans and advances to customers  Loans and 
                 advances 
                 designated 
  Loans and              at fair value 
  advances  Retail –  Retail –        through 
  to banks  mortgages  other  Commercial  Total  profit or loss 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 31 December 2016                        
Good quality  26,745   295,286   34,195   72,083       33,049 
Satisfactory quality  87   814   4,479   30,433       30 
Lower quality  3   39   387   6,433        
Below standard, but not impaired  53   164   417   415        
Total loans and advances which are neither past due nor impaired  26,888   296,303   39,478   109,364   445,145   33,079 
At 31 December 2015                        
Good quality  24,670   301,403   33,589   63,453       33,156 
Satisfactory quality  311   527   4,448   28,899       15 
Lower quality  4   27   476   7,210       3 
Below standard, but not impaired  21   106   373   439        
Total loans and advances which are neither past due nor impaired  25,006   302,063   38,886   100,001   440,950   33,174 

The definitions of good quality, satisfactory quality, lower quality and below standard, but not impaired applying to retail and commercial are not the same, reflecting the different characteristics of these exposures and the way they are managed internally, and consequently totals are not provided. Commercial lending has been classified using internal probability of default rating models mapped so that they are comparable to external credit ratings. Good quality lending comprises the lower assessed default probabilities, with other classifications reflecting progressively higher default risk. Classifications of retail lending incorporate expected recovery levels for mortgages, as well as probabilities of default assessed using internal rating models. Further information about the Group’s internal probabilities of default rating models can be found on page 53.

LOANS AND ADVANCES WHICH ARE PAST DUE BUT NOT IMPAIRED

     Loans and advances to customers  Loans and 
                 advances 
                 designated 
  Loans and              at fair value 
  advances  Retail –  Retail –        through 
  to banks  mortgages  other  Commercial  Total  profit or loss 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 31 December 2016                        
0-30 days  14   3,547   285   157   3,989    
30-60 days     1,573   75   37   1,685    
60-90 days     985   2   74   1,061    
90-180 days     1,235   6   14   1,255    
Over 180 days        18   23   41    
Total loans and advances which are past due but not impaired  14   7,340   386   305   8,031    
At 31 December 2015                        
0-30 days  111   4,066   276   248   4,590    
30-60 days     1,732   81   100   1,913    
60-90 days     1,065   9   52   1,126    
90-180 days     1,370   8   19   1,397    
Over 180 days        19   44   63    
Total loans and advances which are past due but not impaired  111   8,233   393   463   9,089    

A financial asset is ‘past due’ if a counterparty has failed to make a payment when contractually due.

Gross drawn exposures (continued) PD range Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2019                      
Commercial                      
CMS 1-10 0.00-0.50%  59,880   379         60,259 
CMS 11-14 0.51-3.00%  25,638   2,322         27,960 
CMS 15-18 3.01-20.00%  1,805   3,123         4,928 
CMS 19 20.01-99.99%     169         169 
CMS 20-23 100%        3,447      3,447 
     87,323   5,993   3,447      96,763 
Other                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  754   32         786 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  40            40 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%               
RMS 14 100%        84      84 
     794   32   84      910 
CMS 1-10 0.00-0.50%  56,356            56,356 
CMS 11-14 0.51-3.00%               
CMS 15-18 3.01-20.00%               
CMS 19 20.01-99.99%               
CMS 20-23 100%               
     56,356            56,356 
Total loans and advances to customers    449,975   28,543   6,015   13,714   498,247 
                       
In respect of:                      
Retail    305,502   22,518   2,484   13,714   344,218 
Commercial    87,323   5,993   3,447      96,763 
Other    57,150   32   84      57,266 
Total loans and advances to customers    449,975   28,543   6,015   13,714   498,247 
F-90F-101

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 52:53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

Expected credit losses in respect of drawn exposures PD range Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2019                      
Loans and advances to banks:                      
CMS 1-10 0.00-0.50%  2            2 
CMS 11-14 0.51-3.00%               
CMS 15-18 3.01-20.00%               
CMS 19 20.01-99.99%               
CMS 20-23 100%               
     2            2 
Loans and advances to customers:                      
Retail - mortgages                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  23   183         206 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%     39         39 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%     13         13 
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%     46         46 
RMS 14 100%        122   142   264 
     23   281   122   142   568 
Retail - unsecured                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  188   42         230 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  103   92         195 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%  7   34         41 
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%  3   193         196 
RMS 14 100%        233      233 
     301   361   233      895 
Retail - UK Motor Finance                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  203   30         233 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  10   15         25 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%     10         10 
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%  1   32         33 
RMS 14 100%        84      84 
     214   87   84      385 
Retail - Other                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  25   9         34 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%     27         27 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%     1         1 
RMS 14 100%        51      51 
     25   37   51      113 
Total Retail    563   766   490   142   1,961 
F-102

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

Expected credit losses in respect of drawn exposures (continued) PD range Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2019                      
Commercial                      
CMS 1-10 0.00-0.50%  33   1         34 
CMS 11-14 0.51-3.00%  50   37         87 
CMS 15-18 3.01-20.00%  13   174         187 
CMS 19 20.01-99.99%     16         16 
CMS 20-23 100%        941      941 
     96   228   941      1,265 
Other                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  6   1         7 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%               
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%               
RMS 14 100%        16      16 
     6   1   16      23 
CMS 1-10 0.00-0.50%  10            10 
CMS 11-14 0.51-3.00%               
CMS 15-18 3.01-20.00%               
CMS 19 20.01-99.99%               
CMS 20-23 100%               
     10            10 
Total loans and advances to customers    675   995   1,447   142   3,259 
                       
In respect of:                      
Retail    563   766   490   142   1,961 
Commercial    96   228   941      1,265 
Other    16   1   16      33 
Total loans and advances to customers    675   995   1,447   142   3,259 
F-103

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

Gross undrawn exposures  PD range Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2019                 
Loans and advances to customers:                 
Retail - mortgages                 
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  12,242   62         12,304 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  1   1         2 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%               
RMS 14 100%        8   79   87 
     12,243   63   8   79   12,393 
Retail - unsecured                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  60,653   1,986         62,639 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  389   218         607 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%  5   39         44 
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%  1   73         74 
RMS 14 100%        83      83 
     61,048   2,316   83      63,447 
Retail - UK Motor Finance                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  1,181            1,181 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  193   4         197 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%               
RMS 14 100%               
     1,374   4         1,378 
Retail - Other                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  1,240            1,240 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%     62         62 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%               
RMS 14 100%        3      3 
     1,240   62   3      1,305 
Total Retail    75,905   2,445   94   79   78,523 
F-104

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

Gross undrawn exposures (continued)  PD range Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2019                 
Commercial                      
CMS 1-10 0.00-0.50%  47,707   76         47,783 
CMS 11-14 0.51-3.00%  5,134   850         5,984 
CMS 15-18 3.01-20.00%  258   327         585 
CMS 19 20.01-99.99%     43         43 
CMS 20-23 100%        5      5 
     53,099   1,296   5      54,400 
Other                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  239            239 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%               
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%               
RMS 14 100%               
     239            239 
CMS 1-10 0.00-0.50%  391            391 
CMS 11-14 0.51-3.00%               
CMS 15-18 3.01-20.00%               
CMS 19 20.01-99.99%               
CMS 20-23 100%               
     391            391 
Total loans and advances to customers    129,634   3,741   99   79   133,553 
                       
In respect of:                      
Retail    75,905   2,445   94   79   78,523 
Commercial    53,099   1,296   5      54,400 
Other    630            630 
Total loans and advances to customers    129,634   3,741   99   79   133,553 
F-105

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

Expected credit losses in respect of undrawn exposures  PD range Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2019                 
Loans and advances to customers:                      
Retail - mortgages                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  1            1 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%               
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%               
RMS 14 100%               
     1            1 
Retail - unsecured                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  56   24         80 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  6   8         14 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%     3         3 
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%     15         15 
RMS 14 100%               
     62   50         112 
Retail - UK Motor Finance                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  2            2 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%               
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%               
RMS 14 100%               
     2            2 
Retail - Other                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  11            11 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%     3         3 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%               
RMS 14 100%               
     11   3         14 
Total Retail    76   53         129 
F-106

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

Expected credit losses in respect of undrawn exposures (continued)  PD range Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2019                 
Commercial                      
CMS 1-10 0.00-0.50%  11            11 
CMS 11-14 0.51-3.00%  7   9         16 
CMS 15-18 3.01-20.00%  1   13         14 
CMS 19 20.01-99.99%     2         2 
CMS 20-23 100%        5      5 
     19   24   5      48 
Other                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%               
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%               
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%               
RMS 14 100%               
                  
CMS 1-10 0.00-0.50%               
CMS 11-14 0.51-3.00%               
CMS 15-18 3.01-20.00%               
CMS 19 20.01-99.99%               
CMS 20-23 100%               
                  
Total loans and advances to customers    95   77   5      177 
                       
In respect of:                      
Retail    76   53         129 
Commercial    19   24   5      48 
Other                 
Total loans and advances to customers    95   77   5      177 
F-107

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

Gross drawn exposures PD range Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
 £m
  Stage 3
 £m
  Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2018                 
Loans and advances to banks:                      
CMS 1-10 0.00-0.50%  6,177   3         6,180 
CMS 11-14 0.51-3.00%  105            105 
CMS 15-18 3.01-20.00%               
CMS 19 20.01-99.99%               
CMS 20-23 100%               
     6,282   3         6,285 
Loans and advances to customers:                      
Retail - mortgages                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  257,740   10,784         268,524 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  57   1,709         1,766 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%     262         262 
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%     899         899 
RMS 14 100%        1,393   15,391   16,784 
     257,797   13,654   1,393   15,391   288,235 
Retail - unsecured                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  22,363   1,079         23,442 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  2,071   774         2,845 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%  72   167         239 
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%  199   687         886 
RMS 14 100%        703      703 
     24,705   2,707   703      28,115 
Retail - UK Motor Finance                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  12,918   954         13,872 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  301   318         619 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%     111         111 
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%  5   197         202 
RMS 14 100%        129      129 
     13,224   1,580   129      14,933 
Retail - Other                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  9,033   704         9,737 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  190   66         256 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%     7         7 
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%  211   23         234 
RMS 14 100%        165      165 
     9,434   800   165      10,399 
Total Retail    305,160   18,741   2,390   15,391   341,682 
F-108

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

Gross drawn exposures (continued) PD range Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2018                 
Commercial                 
CMS 1-10 0.00-0.50%  65,089   100         65,189 
CMS 11-14 0.51-3.00%  25,472   3,450         28,922 
CMS 15-18 3.01-20.00%  1,441   2,988         4,429 
CMS 19 20.01-99.99%     54         54 
CMS 20-23 100%        3,230      3,230 
     92,002   6,592   3,230      101,824 
Other                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  804   6         810 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%               
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%               
RMS 14 100%        55      55 
     804   6   55      865 
CMS 1-10 0.00-0.50%  43,565            43,565 
CMS 11-14 0.51-3.00%     6         6 
CMS 15-18 3.01-20.00%               
CMS 19 20.01-99.99%               
CMS 20-23 100%        66      66 
     43,565   6   66      43,637 
Total loans and advances to customers    441,531   25,345   5,741   15,391   488,008 
                       
In respect of:                      
Retail    305,160   18,741   2,390   15,391   341,682 
Commercial    92,002   6,592   3,230      101,824 
Other    44,369   12   121      44,502 
Total loans and advances to customers    441,531   25,345   5,741   15,391   488,008 
F-109

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

Expected credit losses in respect of drawn exposures PD range Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2018                 
Loans and advances to banks:                 
CMS 1-10 0.00-0.50%  2            2 
CMS 11-14 0.51-3.00%               
CMS 15-18 3.01-20.00%               
CMS 19 20.01-99.99%               
CMS 20-23 100%               
     2            2 
Loans and advances to customers:                      
Retail - mortgages                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  37   141         178 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%     34         34 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%     9         9 
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%     42         42 
RMS 14 100%        118   78   196 
     37   226   118   78   459 
Retail - unsecured                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  135   45         180 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  57   83         140 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%  4   29         33 
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%  3   172         175 
RMS 14 100%        228      228 
     199   329   228      756 
Retail - UK Motor Finance                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  114   19         133 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  6   15         21 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%     11         11 
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%  1   34         35 
RMS 14 100%        78      78 
     121   79   78      278 
Retail - Other                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  30   25         55 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  2   2         4 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%     1         1 
RMS 14 100%        60      60 
     32   28   60      120 
Total Retail    389   662   484   78   1,613 
F-110

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

Expected credit losses in respect of drawn exposures (continued) PD range Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2018                 
Commercial                 
CMS 1-10 0.00-0.50%  32   1         33 
CMS 11-14 0.51-3.00%  50   86         136 
CMS 15-18 3.01-20.00%  11   231         242 
CMS 19 20.01-99.99%     7         7 
CMS 20-23 100%        1,031      1,031 
     93   325   1,031      1,449 
Other                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  43   1         44 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%               
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%               
RMS 14 100%        11      11 
     43   1   11       55 
CMS 1-10 0.00-0.50%               
CMS 11-14 0.51-3.00%     6         6 
CMS 15-18 3.01-20.00%               
CMS 19 20.01-99.99%               
CMS 20-23 100%        27      27 
        6   27      33 
Total loans and advances to customers    525   994   1,553   78   3,150 
                       
In respect of:                      
Retail    389   662   484   78   1,613 
Commercial    93   325   1,031      1,449 
Other    43   7   38      88 
Total loans and advances to customers    525   994   1,553   78   3,150 
F-111

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

Gross undrawn exposures PD range Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2018                      
Loans and advances to customers:                      
Retail - mortgages                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  12,024   19         12,043 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  2   1         3 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%               
RMS 14 100%        5   90   95 
     12,026   20   5   90   12,141 
Retail - unsecured                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  57,433   1,811         59,244 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  391   155         546 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%  10   27         37 
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%  3   51         54 
RMS 14 100%        36      36 
     57,837   2,044   36      59,917 
Retail - UK Motor Finance                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  1,565            1,565 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  141            141 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%               
RMS 14 100%               
     1,706            1,706 
Retail - Other                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  1,381   47         1,428 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%               
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%  360            360 
RMS 14 100%        3      3 
     1,741   47   3      1,791 
Total Retail    73,310   2,111   44   90   75,555 
F-112

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

Gross undrawn exposures (continued) PD range Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2018                      
Commercial                      
CMS 1-10 0.00-0.50%  51,632            51,632 
CMS 11-14 0.51-3.00%  6,501   693         7,194 
CMS 15-18 3.01-20.00%  126   297         423 
CMS 19 20.01-99.99%  31   11         42 
CMS 20-23 100%        6      6 
     58,290   1,001   6      59,297 
Other                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  246            246 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%               
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%               
RMS 14 100%               
     246            246 
CMS 1-10 0.00-0.50%               
CMS 11-14 0.51-3.00%               
CMS 15-18 3.01-20.00%               
CMS 19 20.01-99.99%               
CMS 20-23 100%               
                  
Total loans and advances to customers    131,846   3,112   50   90   135,098 
                       
In respect of:                      
Retail    73,310   2,111   44   90   75,555 
Commercial    58,290   1,001   6      59,297 
Other    246            246 
Total loans and advances to customers    131,846   3,112   50   90   135,098 
F-113

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

Expected credit losses in respect of undrawn exposures PD range Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased or
originated
credit-impaired
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2018                      
Loans and advances to customers:                      
Retail - mortgages                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  1            1 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%               
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%               
RMS 14 100%               
     1            1 
Retail - unsecured                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  85   26         111 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%  5   10         15 
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%     3         3 
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%     10         10 
RMS 14 100%               
     90   49         139 
Retail - UK Motor Finance                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  2            2 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%               
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%               
RMS 14 100%               
     2            2 
Retail - Other                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  11   2         13 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%               
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%               
RMS 14 100%               
     11   2         13 
Total Retail    104   51         155 
F-114

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

             Purchased or    
             originated    
    Stage 1  Stage 2  Stage 3  credit-impaired  Total 
Expected credit losses in respect of undrawn exposures (continued) PD range £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
At 31 December 2018                 
Commercial                 
CMS 1-10 0.00-0.50%  9            9 
CMS 11-14 0.51-3.00%  7   7         14 
CMS 15-18 3.01-20.00%  1   5         6 
CMS 19 20.01-99.99%  1   1         2 
CMS 20-23 100%        6      6 
     18   13   6      37 
Other                      
RMS 1-6 0.00-4.50%  1            1 
RMS 7-9 4.51-14.00%               
RMS 10 14.01-20.00%               
RMS 11-13 20.01-99.99%               
RMS 14 100%               
     1            1 
CMS 1-10 0.00-0.50%               
CMS 11-14 0.51-3.00%               
CMS 15-18 3.01-20.00%               
CMS 19 20.01-99.99%               
CMS 20-23 100%               
                  
Total loans and advances to customers    123   64   6      193 
                       
In respect of:                      
Retail    104   51         155 
Commercial    18   13   6      37 
Other    1            1 
Total loans and advances to customers    123   64   6      193 

F-115

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENTcontinued

 

DEBT SECURITIES CLASSIFIED AS LOANS AND RECEIVABLESHELD AT AMORTISED COST

 

An analysis by credit rating of the Group’s debt securities classified as loans and receivablesheld at amortised cost is provided below:

 

2016  2015 
              2019 2018
 Investment     Investment      Investment     Investment     
 grade1 Other2 Total grade1 Other2 Total  grade1 Other2 Total grade1 Other2 Total 
 £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m £m £m £m £m £m 
Asset-backed securities:                                          
Mortgage-backed securities  2,089      2,089   2,528      2,528   3,007    3,007  3,263  9  3,272 
Other asset-backed securities  1,192   98   1,290   1,140   94   1,234   876      876   763   17   780 
  3,281   98   3,379   3,668   94   3,762  3,883  3,883 4,026 26 4,052 
Corporate and other debt securities  29   65   94   417   109   526  1,650 14 1,664 1,176 16 1,192 
Gross exposure  3,310   163   3,473   4,085   203   4,288  5,533 14 5,547 5,202 42 5,244 
Allowance for impairment losses          (76)          (97)         (3)         (6)
Total debt securities classified as loans and receivables          3,397           4,191 
Total debt securities held at amortised cost         5,544         5,238 

  

1Credit ratings equal to or better than ‘BBB’.
  
2Other comprises sub-investment grade (2016: £91 million; 2015: £87(31 December 2019: £nil; 31 December 2018: £6 million) and not rated (2016: £72(31 December 2019: £14 million; 2015: £11631 December 2018: £36 million).

 

AVAILABLE-FOR-SALE FINANCIAL ASSETS AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME (EXCLUDING EQUITY SHARES)

 

An analysis of the Group’s available-for-sale financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income is included in note 22.19. The credit quality of the Group’s available-for-sale financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (excluding equity shares) is set out below:

 

 2016  2015 
              2019 2018
 Investment     Investment      Investment     Investment     
 grade1 Other2 Total grade1 Other2 Total  grade1 Other2 Total grade1 Other2 Total 
 £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m £m £m £m £m £m 
Debt securities:                                     
Government securities  48,714      48,714   25,329      25,329  13,084 14 13,098 18,971  18,971 
Bank and building society certificates of deposit  142      142   186      186     118  118 
Asset-backed securities:                                                
Mortgage-backed securities  108      108   197      197   121    121  120    120 
Other asset-backed securities  312   5   317   315   4   319      60   60      131   131 
  420   5   425   512   4   516  121 60 181 120 131 251 
Corporate and other debt securities  6,030      6,030   5,808      5,808  11,036 15 11,051 4,934 217 5,151 
Total held as available-for-sale financial assets  55,306   5   55,311   31,835   4   31,839 
Total debt securities 24,241 89 24,330 24,143 348 24,491 
Treasury and other bills 535  535 303  303 
Total financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income 24,776 89 24,865 24,446 348 24,794 

 

1Credit ratings equal to or better than ‘BBB’.
  
2Other comprises sub-investment grade (2016: £5(31 December 2019: £89 million; 2015: £431 December 2018: £85 million) and not rated (2016:(31 December 2019: £nil; 2015: £nil)31 December 2018: £263 million).
F-91F-116

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 52:53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

 

DEBT SECURITIES, TREASURY AND OTHER BILLS HELD AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS

 

An analysis of the Group’s trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss is included in note 15.14. The credit quality of the Group’s debt securities, treasury and other bills held at fair value through profit or loss is set out below:

 

 2016  2015  2019 2018
 Investment     Investment      Investment     Investment     
 grade1 Other2 Total grade1 Other2 Total  grade1 Other2 Total grade1 Other2 Total 
 £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m £m £m £m £m £m 
Debt securities, treasury and other bills held at fair value                        
through profit or loss                        
Debt securities, treasury and other bills held at fair value through profit or loss             
Trading assets:                                     
Government securities  11,828      11,828   8,269      8,269  6,791  6,791 7,192  7,192 
Asset-backed securities:                                                
Mortgage-backed securities  47      47   516      516   1  5  6  10    10 
Other asset-backed securities  69      69   85      85   14   3   17   63      63 
  116      116   601      601  15 8 23 73  73 
Corporate and other debt securities  221   3   224   582   30   612  232 1 233 228 19 247 
Total held as trading assets  12,165   3   12,168   9,452   30   9,482  7,038 9 7,047 7,493 19 7,512 
Other assets held at fair value through profit or loss:                                     
Government securities  14,904      14,904   13,848      13,848  12,044 19 12,063 10,903  10,903 
Other public sector securities  1,318   7   1,325   2,023   16   2,039  2,118 8 2,126 2,059 5 2,064 
Bank and building society certificates of deposit  244      244   135      135  984  984 1,105  1,105 
Asset-backed securities:                                                
Mortgage-backed securities  633   27   660   801   41   842   452  10  462  208  7  215 
Other asset-backed securities  1,178   291   1,469   762      762   241      241   283   3   286 
  1,811   318   2,129   1,563   41   1,604  693 10 703 491 10 501 
Corporate and other debt securities  17,445   2,163   19,608   17,371   2,333   19,704  15,932 2,051 17,983 16,141 1,922 18,063 
Total debt securities held at fair value through profit or loss  35,722   2,488   38,210   34,940   2,390   37,330  31,771 2,088 33,859 30,699 1,937 32,636 
Treasury bills and other bills  20      20   74      74  19  19 20  20 
Total other assets held at fair value through profit or loss  35,742   2,488   38,230   35,014   2,390   37,404  31,790 2,088 33,878 30,719 1,937 32,656 
Total held at fair value through profit or loss  47,907   2,491   50,398   44,466   2,420   46,886  38,828 2,097 40,925 38,212 1,956 40,168 

 

1Credit ratings equal to or better than ‘BBB’.
  
2Other comprises sub-investment grade (2016: £485(2019: £251 million; 2015: £5442018: £411 million) and not rated (2016: £2,006(2019: £1,846 million; 2015: £1,8762018: £1,545 million).

 

Credit risk in respect of trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss held within the Group’s unit-linked funds is borne by the policyholders and credit risk in respect of with-profits funds is largely borne by the policyholders. Consequently, the Group has no significant exposure to credit risk for such assets which back those contract liabilities.

F-92

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 52: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

 

DERIVATIVE ASSETS

 

An analysis of derivative assets is given in note 16.17. The Group reduces exposure to credit risk by using master netting agreements and by obtaining collateral in the form of cash or highly liquid securities. In respect of the Group’s net credit risk relating to derivative assets of £17,599£11,673 million (2015: £10,001(2018: £9,268 million), cash collateral of £6,472£7,650 million (2015: £3,228(2018: £6,039 million) was held and a further £613£274 million was due from OECD banks (2015: £94(2018: £213 million).

 

 2016 2015 
              2019 2018
 Investment     Investment      Investment      Investment     
 grade1 Other2 Total grade1 Other2 Total  grade1 Other2 Total  grade1 Other2 Total 
 £m £m £m £m £m £m  £m £m £m  £m £m £m 
Trading and other  31,373   2,053   33,426   24,764   2,017   26,781   22,991   2,142   25,133   19,797   2,235   22,032 
Hedging  2,664   48   2,712   2,653   33   2,686   1,178   58   1,236   1,534   29   1,563 
Total derivative financial instruments  34,037   2,101   36,138   27,417   2,050   29,467   24,169   2,200   26,369   21,331   2,264   23,595 

 

1Credit ratings equal to or better than ‘BBB’.
  
2Other comprises sub-investment grade (2016: £1,830(2019: £1,555 million; 2015: £1,4182018: £1,920 million) and not rated (2016: £271(2019: £645 million; 2015: £6322018: £344 million).

 

FINANCIAL GUARANTEES AND IRREVOCABLE LOAN COMMITMENTS

 

Financial guarantees represent undertakings that the Group will meet a customer’s obligation to third parties if the customer fails to do so. Commitments to extend credit represent unused portions of authorisations to extend credit in the form of loans, guarantees or letters of credit. The Group is theoretically exposed to loss in an amount equal to the total guarantees or unused commitments, however, the likely amount of loss is expected to be significantly less; most commitments to extend credit are contingent upon customers maintaining specific credit standards.

 

D.(D) COLLATERAL HELD AS SECURITY FOR FINANCIAL ASSETS

 

A general description of collateral held as security in respect of financial instruments is provided on page 55.53. The Group holds collateral against loans and receivablesadvances and irrevocable loan commitments; qualitative and, where appropriate, quantitative information is provided in respect of this collateral below. Collateral held as security for trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss and for derivative assets is also shown below.

F-117

LOANS AND RECEIVABLESNOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

The disclosures below are produced under the underlying basis used for the Group’s segmental reporting. The Group believes that, for reporting periods following a significant acquisition, such as the acquisition of HBOS in 2009, this underlying basis, which includes the allowance for loan losses at the acquisition on a gross basis, more fairly reflects the underlying provisioning status of the loans.NOTE 53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENTcontinued

 

The Group holds collateral in respect of loans and advances to banks and customers as set out below. The Group does not hold collateral against debt securities, comprising asset-backed securities and corporate and other debt securities, which are classified as loans and receivables.financial assets held at amortised cost.

 

LOANS AND ADVANCES TO BANKS

 

There were reverse repurchase agreements which are accounted for as collateralised loans within loans and advances to banks with a carrying value of £902£1,555 million (2015: £963(2018: £461 million), against which the Group held collateral with a fair value of £785£1,516 million (2015: £1,009(2018: £481 million).

 

These transactions were generally conducted under terms that are usual and customary for standard secured lending activities.

 

LOANS AND ADVANCES TO CUSTOMERS

 

RETAIL LENDINGRetail lending

 

MORTGAGESMortgages

 

An analysis by loan-to-value ratio of the Group’s residential mortgage lending is provided below. The value of collateral used in determining the loan-to-value ratios has been estimated based upon the last actual valuation, adjusted to take into account subsequent movements in house prices, after making allowanceallowances for indexation error and dilapidations.

 

   2016  2015 
  Neither           Neither          
  past due  Past due but        past due  Past due but       
  nor impaired  not impaired  Impaired  Gross  nor impaired  not impaired  Impaired  Gross 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Less than 70 per cent  220,497   5,288   2,334   228,119   211,631   4,907   1,965   218,503 
70 per cent to 80 per cent  39,789   1,004   648   41,441   45,764   1,350   671   47,785 
80 per cent to 90 per cent  23,589   621   495   24,705   27,529   935   528   28,992 
90 per cent to 100 per cent  7,983   223   355   8,561   10,908   610   247   11,765 
Greater than 100 per cent  4,445   204   488   5,137   6,231   431   590   7,252 
Total  296,303   7,340   4,320   307,963   302,063   8,233   4,001   314,297 

F-93

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTSIn some circumstances, where the discounted value of the estimated net proceeds from the liquidation of collateral (i.e. net of costs, expected haircuts and anticipated changes in the value of the collateral to the point of sale) is greater than the estimated exposure at default, no credit losses are expected and no ECL allowance is recognised.

 

     As at 31 December 2019        As at 31 December 2018    
  Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased
or
originated
credit-
impaired
£m
  Total gross
£m
  Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased
or
originated
credit-
impaired
£m
  Total gross
£m
 
Drawn balances                                        
Less than 70 per cent  179,566   13,147   1,174   10,728   204,615   185,556   10,728   1,035   11,846   209,165 
70 per cent to 80 per cent  44,384   2,343   181   1,751   48,659   41,827   1,802   190   1,884   45,703 
80 per cent to 90 per cent  27,056   1,057   86   677   28,876   24,854   832   95   1,032   26,813 
90 per cent to 100 per cent  5,663   199   34   207   6,103   4,957   164   39   302   5,462 
Greater than 100 per cent  374   189   31   351   945   603   128   34   327   1,092 
Total  257,043   16,935   1,506   13,714   289,198   257,797   13,654   1,393   15,391   288,235 

NOTE 52: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

     As at 31 December 2019        As at 31 December 2018    
  Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased
or
originated
credit-
impaired
£m
  Total
£m
  Stage 1
£m
  Stage 2
£m
  Stage 3
£m
  Purchased
or
originated
credit-
impaired
£m
  Total
£m
 
Expected credit losses on drawn balances                                        
Less than 70 per cent  6   104   41   44   195   3   94   34   19   150 
70 per cent to 80 per cent  7   75   29   38   149��  11   51   24   12   98 
80 per cent to 90 per cent  7   58   25   23   113   14   47   27   16   104 
90 per cent to 100 per cent  2   17   12   10   41   4   16   14   9   43 
Greater than 100 per cent  1   27   15   27   70   5   18   19   22   64 
Total  23   281   122   142   568   37   226   118   78   459 

 

OTHEROther

 

The majority of non-mortgage retail lending is unsecured. At 31 December 2016, impaired2019, Stage 3 non-mortgage lending amounted to £972£610 million, net of an impairment allowance of £458£368 million (2015: £1,153(2018: £631 million, net of an impairment allowance of £448£366 million). The fair value of the collateral held in respect of this lending was £139 million (2015: £107 million). In determining the fair value of collateral, no specific amounts have been attributed to the costs of realisation and the value of collateral for each loan has been limited to the principal amount of the outstanding advance in order to eliminate the effects of any over-collateralisation and to provide a clearer representation of the Group’s exposure.

 

UnimpairedStage 1 and Stage 2 non-mortgage retail lending amounted to £39,864£54,042 million (2015: £39,279(2018: £52,450 million). Lending decisions are predominantly based on an obligor’s ability to repay from normal business operations rather than reliance on the disposal of any security provided. Collateral values are rigorously assessed at the time of loan origination and are thereafter monitored in accordance with business unit credit policy.

 

The Group credit risk disclosures for unimpaired non-mortgage retail lending report assets gross of collateral and therefore disclose the maximum loss exposure. The Group believes that this approach is appropriate. The value of collateral is reassessed if there is observable evidence of distress of the borrower. Unimpaired non-mortgage retail lending, including any associated collateral, is managed on a customer-by-customer basis rather than a portfolio basis. No aggregated collateral information for the entire unimpaired non-mortgage retail lending portfolio is provided to key management personnel.

 

COMMERCIAL LENDINGCommercial lending

 

REVERSE REPURCHASE TRANSACTIONSReverse repurchase transactions

 

At 31 December 20162019 there were reverse repurchase agreements which were accounted for as collateralised loans with a carrying value of £8,304£54,600 million (2015: £nil)(2018: £40,483 million), against which the Group held collateral with a fair value of £7,490£52,982 million (2015: £nil)(2018: £42,339 million), all of which the Group was able to repledge. Included in these amountsThere were no collateral balances in the form of cash provided in respect of reverse repurchase agreements of £8 million (2015:included in these amounts (2018: £nil). These transactions were generally conducted under terms that are usual and customary for standard secured lending activities.

 

IMPAIRED SECURED LENDINGStage 3 secured lending

 

The value of collateral is re-evaluated and its legal soundness re-assessed if there is observable evidence of distress of the borrower; this evaluation is used to determine potential loss allowances and management’s strategy to try to either repair the business or recover the debt.

F-118

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENTcontinued

 

At 31 December 2016, impaired2019, Stage 3 secured commercial lending amounted to £204£966 million, net of an impairment allowance of £401£243 million (2015: £1,245(2018: £658 million, net of an impairment allowance of £577£215 million). The fair value of the collateral held in respect of impaired secured commercial lending was £1,160£744 million (2015: £1,367(2018: £590 million). In determining the fair value of collateral, no specific amounts have been attributed to the costs of realisation. For the purposes of determining the total collateral held by the Group in respect of impaired secured commercial lending, the value of collateral for each loan has been limited to the principal amount of the outstanding advance in order to eliminate the effects of any over-collateralisation and to provide a clearer representation of the Group’s exposure.

 

ImpairedStage 3 secured commercial lending and associated collateral relates to lending to property companies and to customers in the financial, business and other services; transport, distribution and hotels; and construction industries.

 

UNIMPAIRED SECURED LENDING

UnimpairedStage 1 and Stage 2 secured commercial lending amounted to £36,275 million (2015: £51,298 million).

 

For unimpairedStage 1 and Stage 2 secured commercial lending, the Group reports assets gross of collateral and therefore discloses the maximum loss exposure. The Group believes that this approach is appropriate as collateral values at origination and during a period of good performance may not be representative of the value of collateral if the obligor enters a distressed state.

 

UnimpairedStage 1 and Stage 2 secured commercial lending is predominantly managed on a cash flow basis. On occasion, it may include an assessment of underlying collateral, although, for impairedStage 3 lending, this will not always involve assessing it on a fair value basis. No aggregated collateral information for the entire unimpaired secured commercial lending portfolio is provided to key management personnel.

 

TRADING AND OTHER FINANCIAL ASSETS AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS (EXCLUDING EQUITY SHARES)

 

Included in trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss are reverse repurchase agreements treated as collateralised loans with a carrying value of £33,079£11,269 million (2015: £33,174(2018: £28,356 million). Collateral is held with a fair value of £30,850£11,081 million (2015: £36,493(2018: £36,101 million), all of which the Group is able to repledge. At 31 December 2016, £27,3032019, £9,605 million had been repledged (2015: £15,438(2018: £31,013 million).

 

In addition, securities held as collateral in the form of stock borrowed amounted to £47,816£32,888 million (2015: £58,621(2018: £51,202 million). Of this amount, £16,204£30,594 million (2015: £29,859(2018: £49,233 million) had been resold or repledged as collateral for the Group’s own transactions.

 

These transactions were generally conducted under terms that are usual and customary for standard secured lending activities.

 

DERIVATIVE ASSETS, AFTER OFFSETTING OF AMOUNTS UNDER MASTER NETTING ARRANGEMENTS

 

The Group reduces exposure to credit risk by using master netting agreements and by obtaining collateral in the form of cash or highly liquid securities. In respect of the net derivative assets after offsetting of amounts under master netting arrangements of £17,599£11,673 million (2015: £10,001(2018: £9,268 million), cash collateral of £6,472£7,650 million (2015: £3,228(2018: £6,039 million) was held.

 

IRREVOCABLE LOAN COMMITMENTS AND OTHER CREDIT-RELATED CONTINGENCIES

 

At 31 December 2016,2019, the Group held irrevocable loan commitments and other credit-related contingencies of £66,240£66,398 million (2015: £65,719(2018: £68,135 million). Collateral is held as security, in the event that lending is drawn down, on £10,053£12,391 million (2015: £9,551(2018: £10,661 million) of these balances.

F-94

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 52: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

 

COLLATERAL REPOSSESSED

 

During the year, £241£413 million of collateral was repossessed (2015: £203(2018: £245 million), consisting primarily of residential property.

 

In respect of retail portfolios, the Group does not take physical possession of properties or other assets held as collateral and uses external agents to realise the value as soon as practicable, generally at auction, to settle indebtedness. Any surplus funds are returned to the borrower or are otherwise dealt with in accordance with appropriate insolvency regulations. In certain circumstances the Group takes physical possession of assets held as collateral against commercial lending. In such cases, the assets are carried on the Group’s balance sheet and are classified according to the Group’s accounting policies.

 

E. Collateral pledged as security(E) COLLATERAL PLEDGED AS SECURITY

 

The Group pledges assets primarily for repurchase agreements and securities lending transactions which are generally conducted under terms that are usual and customary for standard securitised borrowing contracts.

 

REPURCHASE TRANSACTIONS

 

DEPOSITS FROM BANKSDeposits from banks

 

Included in deposits from banks are deposits held as collateral for facilities granted, with a carrying valuebalances arising from repurchase transactions of £7,279£18,105 million (2015: £7,061(2018: £21,170 million) and a; the fair value of £8,395the collateral provided under these agreements at 31 December 2019 was £17,545 million (2015: £6,707(2018: £19,615 million).

CUSTOMER DEPOSITS

 

Customer deposits included

Included in customer deposits held as collateral for facilities granted with a carrying valueare balances arising from repurchase transactions of £2,462£9,530 million (2015: £nil) and a(2018: £1,818 million); the fair value of £2,277the collateral provided under these agreements at 31 December 2019 was £9,221 million (2015: £nil). No collateral balances in the form of cash were provided in respect of repurchase agreements (2015: £5(2018: £1,710 million).

 

TRADING AND OTHER FINANCIAL LIABILITIES AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSSFinancial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

 

The fair value of collateral pledged in respect of repurchase transactions, accounted for as secured borrowing, where the secured party is permitted by contract or custom to repledge was £45,702£8,324 million (2015: £44,655(2018: £28,438 million).

 

SECURITIES LENDING TRANSACTIONS

 

The following on balance sheet financial assets have been lent to counterparties under securities lending transactions:

 

  2016
£m
  2015
£m
 
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  6,991   6,478 
Loans and advances to customers  583   1,491 
Available-for-sale financial assets  3,206   4,247 
   10,780   12,216 
  2019
£m
  2018
£m
 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  5,857   5,837 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  2,020   1,917 
   7,877   7,754 

 

SECURITISATIONS AND COVERED BONDS

 

In addition to the assets detailed above, the Group also holds assets that are encumbered through the Group’s asset-backed conduits and its securitisation and covered bond programmes. Further details of these assets are provided in notes 19 and 20.note 31.

F-119

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

 

Liquidity risk

 

Liquidity risk is defined as the risk that the Group has insufficient financial resources to meet its commitments as they fall due, or can only secure them at excessive cost. Liquidity risk is managed through a series of measures, tests and reports that are primarily based on contractual maturity. The Group carries out monthly stress testing of its liquidity position against a range of scenarios, including those prescribed by the PRA. The Group’s liquidity risk appetite is also calibrated against a number of stressed liquidity metrics.

F-95

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 52: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

 

The table below analyses assets and liabilities of the Group into relevant maturity groupings based on the remaining contractual period at the balance sheet date; balances with no fixed maturity are included in the over 5 years category. Certain balances, included in the table below on the basis of their residual maturity, are repayable on demand upon payment of a penalty.

 

(A) MATURITIES OF ASSETS AND LIABILITIES

 

 Up to
1 month
£m
 1-3
months £m
 3-6
months £m
 6-9
months £m
 9-12
months £m
 1-2
years
£m
 2-5
years
£m
 Over 5
years
£m
 Total
£m
  Up to
1 month
£m
 1-3
months
£m
 3-6
months
£m
 6-9
months
£m
 9-12
months
£m
 1-2
years
£m
 2-5
years
£m
 Over 5
years
£m
 Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2016                   
At 31 December 2019                                    
Assets                                                       
Cash and balances at central banks 47,446 2 4      47,452   55,128   2                     55,130 
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through                   
profit or loss 20,168 14,903 7,387 2,914 817 1,680 6,011 97,294 151,174 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  7,195   3,689   3,016   1,710   451   2,801   5,385   135,942   160,189 
Derivative financial instruments 956 1,700 1,393 786 651 2,230 4,165 24,257 36,138   583   739   627   404   336   1,294   2,763   19,623   26,369 
Loans and advances to banks 9,801 6,049 3,894 1,201 867 1,281 3,692 117 26,902   4,953   1,017   265   124   91   26      3,299   9,775 
Loans and advances to customers 20,179 10,651 14,235 12,400 10,773 26,007 69,300 294,413 457,958   35,973   26,036   23,283   12,626   11,425   29,917   74,416   281,312   494,988 
Debt securities held as loans and receivables 8   242   34 3,113 3,397 
Available-for-sale financial assets 127 259 73 637 222 1,887 16,080 37,239 56,524 
Debt securities held at amortised cost  131   19            74   3,085   2,235   5,544 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  111   179   729   102   234   2,929   12,809   7,999   25,092 
Other assets 5,025 583 584 1,560 1,059 1,846 4,808 22,783 38,248   2,224   1,155   533   160   520   568   1,218   50,428   56,806 
Total assets 103,710 34,147 27,570 19,740 14,389 34,931 104,090 479,216 817,793   106,298   32,836   28,453   15,126   13,057   37,609   99,676   500,838   833,893 
Liabilities                                                       
Deposits from banks 3,772 2,779 1,062 503 13 43 7,859 353 16,384   4,530   2,715   267   85   55   15,686   433   4,408   28,179 
Customer deposits 347,753 18,936 8,961 10,482 8,477 13,859 6,430 562 415,460   382,885   12,945   6,716   4,377   3,207   6,742   1,752   2,696   421,320 
Derivative financial instruments, trading and other                   
financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss 18,381 19,640 8,779 1,696 1,179 3,843 5,575 30,335 89,428 
Derivative financial instruments and financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss  5,182   6,101   2,579   784   528   1,644   5,238   25,209   47,265 
Debt securities in issue 4,065 8,328 6,433 4,158 1,224 6,939 25,020 20,147 76,314   4,070   9,159   7,135   7,418   1,963   13,618   30,897   23,429   97,689 
Liabilities arising from insurance and investment                   
contracts 1,583 2,190 2,737 2,463 2,377 8,588 19,971 74,593 114,502 
Liabilities arising from insurance and investment contracts  1,213   1,658   2,370   2,348   2,882   9,028   24,870   104,539   148,908 
Other liabilities 3,282 2,266 1,213 2,164 1,440 413 3,087 23,544 37,409   4,541   1,914   772   893   1,682   898   906   13,990   25,596 
Subordinated liabilities  390 161 393  1,750 4,527 12,610 19,831      1,339   96   1,137   108   575   4,105   9,770   17,130 
Total liabilities 378,836 54,529 29,346 21,859 14,710 35,435 72,469 162,144 769,328   402,421   35,831   19,935   17,042   10,425   48,191   68,201   184,041   786,087 
At 31 December 2015  
At 31 December 2018                                    
Assets                                      
Cash and balances at central banks 58,411 2 4      58,417   54,662   1                     54,663 
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through  
profit or loss 25,696 12,877 6,526 3,008 680 1,495 6,411 83,843 140,536 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  10,686   8,826   8,492   5,133   2,587   2,090   5,467   115,248   158,529 
Derivative financial instruments 1,226 1,257 841 585 607 1,480 3,889 19,582 29,467   579   688   418   336   441   1,064   3,075   16,994   23,595 
Loans and advances to banks 9,802 4,676 4,157 915 1,095 1,784 2,076 612 25,117   2,594   520   584   172   203   160      2,050   6,283 
Loans and advances to customers 19,392 6,351 11,864 8,318 11,426 28,061 68,685 301,078 455,175   36,326   19,383   18,415   14,378   11,318   30,459   72,028   282,551   484,858 
Debt securities held as loans and receivables 9   1 98 208 28 3,847 4,191 
Available-for-sale financial assets 109 269 56 535 120 1,000 7,178 23,765 33,032 
Held-to-maturity investments      297 3,357 16,154 19,808 
Debt securities held as at amortised cost  7         521         2,262   2,448   5,238 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  166   453   249   800   1,685   2,536   11,496   7,430   24,815 
Other assets 4,620 1,068 884 1,589 1,421 2,204 9,561 19,598 40,945   2,667   1,552   196   238   219   387   1,118   33,240   39,617 
Total assets 119,265 26,500 24,332 14,951 15,447 36,529 101,185 468,479 806,688   107,687   31,423   28,354   21,578   16,453   36,696   95,446   459,961   797,598 
Liabilities                                      
Deposits from banks 6,586 1,076 5,958 42 132 22 2,543 566 16,925   2,793   1,688   748   54   45   4,758   16,052   4,182   30,320 
Customer deposits 340,445 20,365 13,758 10,584 9,277 15,927 6,742 1,228 418,326   380,753   10,623   5,628   4,543   4,431   6,421   3,244   2,423   418,066 
Derivative financial instruments, trading and other  
financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss 24,326 14,191 5,070 1,625 806 4,020 5,135 22,991 78,164 
Derivative financial instruments and financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss  5,160   11,877   5,048   1,663   522   1,104   4,108   22,438   51,920 
Debt securities in issue 5,822 7,273 5,556 4,757 1,661 11,697 21,984 23,306 82,056   4,172   5,692   9,007   4,668   1,694   13,062   28,676   24,197   91,168 
Liabilities arising from insurance and investment  
contracts 1,580 1,558 2,279 2,066 2,269 7,817 20,674 64,828 103,071 
Liabilities arising from insurance and investment contracts  1,844   1,850   2,316   2,302   2,104   7,995   20,986   73,330   112,727 
Other liabilities 4,240 2,800 449 2,326 1,906 634 5,079 20,420 37,854   4,403   3,201   733   1,182   1,383   756   232   13,652   25,542 
Subordinated liabilities 269 307 329 466 2,083 648 9,321 9,889 23,312   85   145   95   251      2,600   2,559   11,921   17,656 
Total liabilities 383,268 47,570 33,399 21,866 18,134 40,765 71,478 143,228 759,708   399,210   35,076   23,575   14,663   10,179   36,696   75,857   152,143   747,399 
F-120

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENTcontinued

 

The above tables are provided on a contractual basis. The Group’s assets and liabilities may be repaid or otherwise mature earlier or later than implied by their contractual terms and readers are, therefore, advised to use caution when using this data to evaluate the Group’s liquidity position. In particular, amounts in respect of customer deposits are usually contractually payable on demand or at short notice. However, in practice, these deposits are not usually withdrawn on their contractual maturity.

F-96

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 52: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

 

The table below analyses financial instrument liabilities of the Group, excluding those arising from insurance and participating investment contracts, on an undiscounted future cash flow basis according to contractual maturity, into relevant maturity groupings based on the remaining period at the balance sheet date; balances with no fixed maturity are included in the over 5 years category.

 

  Up to
1 month
£m
  1-3
months
£m
  3-12
months
£m
  1-5
years
£m
  Over 5
years
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2016                  
Deposits from banks  3,686   4,154   1,541   5,883   1,203   16,467 
Customer deposits  347,573   19,151   28,248   20,789   1,294   417,055 
Trading and other financial liabilities at                        
fair value through profit or loss  14,390   19,718   11,845   1,938   13,513   61,404 
Debt securities in issue  7,590   8,721   12,533   36,386   17,635   82,865 
Liabilities arising from non-participating                        
investment contracts  20,112               20,112 
Subordinated liabilities  41   674   1,289   9,279   18,542   29,825 
Total non-derivative financial liabilities  393,392   52,418   55,456   74,275   52,187   627,728 
Derivative financial liabilities:                        
Gross settled derivatives – outflows  33,128   24,088   25,366   52,925   36,462   171,969 
Gross settled derivatives – inflows  (31,359)  (22,401)  (23,510)  (49,239)  (32,382)  (158,891)
Gross settled derivatives – net flows  1,769   1,687   1,856   3,686   4,080   13,078 
Net settled derivatives liabilities  21,669   117   620   1,167   3,020   26,593 
Total derivative financial liabilities  23,438   1,804   2,476   4,853   7,100   39,671 
At 31 December 2015                        
Deposits from banks  6,673   1,143   6,156   2,785   400   17,157 
Customer deposits  339,387   21,234   34,012   23,932   312   418,877 
Trading and other financial liabilities at                        
fair value through profit or loss  15,055   15,465   5,365   5,897   10,662   52,444 
Debt securities in issue  7,526   9,131   18,467   34,515   24,540   94,179 
Liabilities arising from non-participating                        
investment contracts  22,777               22,777 
Subordinated liabilities  522   366   4,132   13,238   20,476   38,734 
Total non-derivative financial liabilities  391,940   47,339   68,132   80,367   56,390   644,168 
Derivative financial liabilities:                        
Gross settled derivatives – outflows  31,932   28,059   27,510   29,962   28,508   145,971 
Gross settled derivatives – inflows  (30,432)  (26,967)  (26,337)  (27,883)  (26,521)  (138,140)
Gross settled derivatives – net flows  1,500   1,092   1,173   2,079   1,987   7,831 
Net settled derivatives liabilities  16,600   115   321   953   2,587   20,576 
Total derivative financial liabilities  18,100   1,207   1,494   3,032   4,574   28,407 

The Group’s financial guarantee contracts are accounted for as financial instruments and measured at fair value, upon initial recognition, on the balance sheet. The majority of the Group’s financial guarantee contracts are callable on demand, were the guaranteed party to fail to meet its obligations. It is, however, expected that most guarantees will expire unused. The contractual nominal amounts of these guarantees totalled £6,883 million at 31 December 2016 (2015: £7,165 million) with £3,815 million expiring within one year; £667 million between one and three years; £1,334 million between three and five years; and £1,067 million over five years (2015: £4,014 million expiring within one year; £942 million between one and three years; £1,182 million between three and five years; and £1,027 million over five years).

  Up to
1 month
£m
  1-3
months
£m
  3-12
months
£m
  1-5
years
£m
  Over 5
years
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2019                        
Deposits from banks  5,009   2,564   762   20,066   317   28,718 
Customer deposits  385,864   14,433   14,327   10,661   1,393   426,678 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss  4,370   5,543   2,255   2,690   14,653   29,511 
Debt securities in issue  5,335   9,858   19,205   54,638   36,321   125,357 
Liabilities arising from non-participating investment contracts  37,459               37,459 
Other liabilities (Lease liabilities)  2   61   190   803   946   2,002 
Subordinated liabilities  942   1,462   1,918   7,837   14,857   27,016 
Total non-derivative financial liabilities  438,981   33,921   38,657   96,695   68,487   676,741 
Derivative financial liabilities:                        
Gross settled derivatives – outflows  43,118   44,379   34,012   36,012   18,238   175,759 
Gross settled derivatives – inflows  (40,829)  (42,954)  (32,966)  (34,758)  (17,753)  (169,260)
Gross settled derivatives – net flows  2,289   1,425   1,046   1,254   485   6,499 
Net settled derivatives liabilities  23,648   48   122   700   2,201   26,719 
Total derivative financial liabilities  25,937   1,473   1,168   1,954   2,686   33,218 
At 31 December 2018                        
Deposits from banks  2,820   2,710   1,022   20,920   3,502   30,974 
Customer deposits  380,985   10,584   14,169   11,634   1,554   418,926 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss  9,693   10,984   7,553   930   10,771   39,931 
Debt securities in issue  5,942   7,314   22,564   48,233   24,201   108,254 
Liabilities arising from non-participating investment contracts  13,853               13,853 
Subordinated liabilities  247   1,017   1,144   8,231   19,328   29,967 
Total non-derivative financial liabilities  413,540   32,609   46,452   89,948   59,356   641,905 
Derivative financial liabilities:                        
Gross settled derivatives – outflows  39,165   27,976   23,978   43,239   33,763   168,121 
Gross settled derivatives – inflows  (38,301)  (27,283)  (23,134)  (40,690)  (28,933)  (158,341)
Gross settled derivatives – net flows  864   693   844   2,549   4,830   9,780 
Net settled derivatives liabilities  13,511   103   209   782   2,193   16,798 
Total derivative financial liabilities  14,375   796   1,053   3,331   7,023   26,578 

 

The majority of the Group’s non-participating investment contract liabilities are unit-linked. These unit-linked products are invested in accordance with unit fund mandates. Clauses are included in policyholder contracts to permit the deferral of sales, where necessary, so that linked assets can be realised without being a forced seller.

 

The principal amount for undated subordinated liabilities with no redemption option is included within the over five years column; interest of approximately £23£29 million (2015: £39(2018: £27 million) per annum which is payable in respect of those instruments for as long as they remain in issue is not included beyond five years.

F-97F-121

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 52:53: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT continued

 

Further information on the Group’s liquidity exposures is provided on pages 9594 to 98.100.

 

Liabilities arising from insurance and participating investment contracts are analysed on a behavioural basis, as permitted by IFRS 4, as follows:

 

   Up to
1 month
 £m
   1-3
months
£m
   3-12
months
£m
   1-5
years
£m
   Over 5
years
£m
   

Total

£m

 
At 31 December 2016  1,283   1,836   6,266   23,425   61,580   94,390 
At 31 December 2015  1,477   1,081   4,745   10,444   62,547   80,294 
  Up to
1 month
£m
  1-3
months
£m
  3-12
months
£m
  1-5
years
£m
  Over 5
years
£m
  Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2019  1,340   1,240   5,378   25,349   78,142   111,449 
At 31 December 2018  1,667   1,624   5,925   25,414   64,244   98,874 

 

For insurance and participating investment contracts which are neither unit-linked nor in the Group’s with-profit funds, in particular annuity liabilities, the aim is to invest in assets such that the cash flows on investments match those on the projected future liabilities.

 

The following tables set out the amounts and residual maturities of the Group’s off balance sheet contingent liabilities, commitments and commitments.guarantees.

 

  Up to
1 month
£m
   1-3
months
£m
   3-6
months
£m
   6-9
months
£m
   9-12
months
£m
   1-3
years
£m
   3-5
years
£m
   Over 5
years
£m
   Total
£m
  Up to
1 month
£m
 1-3
months
£m
 3-6
months
£m
 6-9
months
£m
 9-12
months
£m
 1-3
years
£m
 3-5
years
£m
 Over 5
years
£m
 Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2016                                    
At 31 December 2019                           
Acceptances and endorsements  13   6         1   1         21   25   24   4      21            74 
Other contingent liabilities  427   782   163   153   122   466   280   623   3,016   381   409   387   177   207   475   101   683   2,820 
Total contingent liabilities  440   788   163   153   123   467   280   623   3,037   406   433   391   177   228   475   101   683   2,894 
Lending commitments  48,210   3,546   5,276   4,783   11,628   17,212   18,775   4,090   113,520 
Lending commitments and guarantees  68,638   2,682   15,297   4,637   7,367   17,365   14,114   3,264   133,364 
Other commitments     3      41   1   79   122   402   648      1   16   5      72   43   52   189 
Total commitments  48,210   3,549   5,276   4,824   11,629   17,291   18,897   4,492   114,168 
Total contingents and commitments  48,650   4,337   5,439   4,977   11,752   17,758   19,177   5,115   117,205 
  Up to
1 month
£m
   1-3
months
£m
   3-6
months
£m
   6-9
months
£m
   9-12
months
£m
   1-3
years
£m
   3-5
years
£m
   Over 5
years
£m
   Total
£m
 
At 31 December 2015                                    
Total commitments and guarantees  68,638   2,683   15,313   4,642   7,367   17,437   14,157   3,316   133,553 
Total contingents, commitments and guarantees  69,044   3,116   15,704   4,819   7,595   17,912   14,258   3,999   136,447 
At 31 December 2018                                    
Acceptances and endorsements  16   34            1   1      52   64   83   34   13               194 
Other contingent liabilities  331   441   433   116   142   365   107   646   2,581   450   484   203   223   150   665   133   749   3,057 
Total contingent liabilities  347   475   433   116   142   366   108   646   2,633   514   567   237   236   150   665   133   749   3,251 
Lending commitments  46,443   1,989   4,444   3,276   11,575   18,803   19,234   6,731   112,495 
Lending commitments and guarantees  67,055   2,947   4,474   6,055   16,123   17,737   15,374   4,602   134,367 
Other commitments        2   31   5   4   83   296   421   428         2   92   20   13   176   731 
Total commitments  46,443   1,989   4,446   3,307   11,580   18,807   19,317   7,027   112,916 
Total contingents and commitments  46,790   2,464   4,879   3,423   11,722   19,173   19,425   7,673   115,549 
Total commitments and guarantees  67,483   2,947   4,474   6,057   16,215   17,757   15,387   4,778   135,098 
Total contingents, commitments and guarantees  67,997   3,514   4,711   6,293   16,365   18,422   15,520   5,527   138,349 

 

NOTE 53:54: CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT

 

(A) Change in operating assets

   2016
£m
   2015
£m
   2014
£m
 
Change in loans and receivables  710   6,081   12,852 
Change in derivative financial instruments, trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  (13,889)  20,689   (11,767)
Change in other operating assets  961   7,930   (1,957)
Change in operating assets  (12,218)  34,700   (872)
             
(B) Change in operating liabilities            
   2016
£m
   2015
£m
   2014
£m
 
Change in deposits from banks  (654)  6,107   (3,029)
Change in customer deposits  (3,690)  (4,252)  7,745 
Change in debt securities in issue  (6,552)  5,657   (11,089)
Change in derivative financial instruments, trading and other liabilities at fair value through profit or loss  11,265   (16,924)  24,020 
Change in investment contract liabilities  (2,665)  (3,922)  (342)
Change in other operating liabilities  (363)  1,349   (5,313)
Change in operating liabilities  (2,659)  (11,985)  11,992 

  2019
£m
  2018
£m
  2017
£m
 
Change in financial assets held at amortised cost  (12,423)  (27,038)  (24,747)
Change in derivative financial instruments and financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  3,887   22,046   9,916 
Change in other operating assets  (2,513)  520   (661)
Change in operating assets  (11,049)  (4,472)  (15,492)
             
(B) Change in operating liabilities            
             
   2019   2018   2017 
   £m   £m   £m 
Change in deposits from banks  (2,140)  515   13,415 
Change in customer deposits  3,248   (322)  2,913 
Change in debt securities in issue  6,631   18,579   (3,600)
Change in derivative financial instruments and liabilities at fair value through profit or loss  (5,078)  (24,606)  (12,481)
Change in investment contract liabilities  2,625   (1,594)  (4,665)
Change in other operating liabilities1  (1,644)  (1,245)  136 
Change in operating liabilities  3,642   (8,673)  (4,282)

1Includes £82 million (2018: £27 million; 2017: £2 million) in respect of lease liabilities.
F-98F-122

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 53:54: CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT continued

 

(C) Non-cash and other items  

   2016
£m
   2015
£m
   2014
£m
 
Depreciation and amortisation  2,380   2,112   1,935 
Revaluation of investment properties  83   (416)  (513)
Allowance for loan losses  592   441   737 
Write-off of allowance for loan losses, net of recoveries  (1,272)  (3,467)  (5,761)
Impairment of available-for-sale financial assets  173   4   2 
Change in insurance contract liabilities  14,084   (2,856)  4,070 
Payment protection insurance provision  1,350   4,000   2,200 
Other regulatory provisions  1,085   837   925 
Other provision movements  (40)  337   222 
Net charge (credit) in respect of defined benefit schemes  287   315   (478)
Impact of consolidation and deconsolidation of OEICs1  (3,157)  (5,978)  (5,277)
Unwind of discount on impairment allowances  (32)  (56)  (126)
Foreign exchange impact on balance sheet2  (155)  507   770 
Loss on ECN transactions  721      1,336 
Interest expense on subordinated liabilities  1,864   1,970   2,374 
Loss (profit) on disposal of businesses     46   (208)
Net gain on sale of available-for-sale financial assets  (575)  (51)  (131)
Hedging valuation adjustments on subordinated debt  153   (162)  559 
Value of employee services  309   279   340 
Transactions in own shares  (175)  (816)  (286)
Accretion of discounts and amortisation of premiums and issue costs  465   339   122 
Share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures  1   3   (32)
Transfers to income statement from reserves  (557)  (956)  (1,153)
Profit on disposal of tangible fixed assets  (93)  (51)  (44)
Other non-cash items  (17)  (11)  (8)
Total non-cash items  17,474   (3,630)  1,575 
Contributions to defined benefit schemes  (630)  (433)  (538)
Payments in respect of payment protection insurance provision  (2,200)  (3,091)  (2,458)
Payments in respect of other regulatory provisions  (761)  (661)  (1,104)
Other  2   7   29 
Total other items  (3,589)  (4,178)  (4,071)
Non-cash and other items  13,885   (7,808)  (2,496)

  2019
£m
  2018
£m
  2017
£m
 
Depreciation and amortisation  2,660   2,405   2,370 
Revaluation of investment properties  108   (139)  (230)
Allowance for loan losses  1,312   1,024   691 
Write-off of allowance for loan losses, net of recoveries  (1,458)  (1,025)  (1,061)
Impairment charge relating to undrawn balances  (15)  (73)  (9)
Impairment of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (2017: available-for-sale financial assets)  (1)  (14)  6 
Change in insurance contract liabilities  12,593   (4,547)  9,168 
Payment protection insurance provision  2,450   750   1,300 
Other regulatory provisions  445   600   865 
Other provision movements  (165)  (518)  (8)
Net charge (credit) in respect of defined benefit schemes  245   405   369 
Unwind of discount on impairment allowances  (53)  (44)  (23)
Foreign exchange impact on balance sheet1  533   191   125 
Interest expense on subordinated liabilities  1,228   1,388   1,436 
Net gain on sale of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (2017: available-for-sale financial assets)  (196)  (275)  (446)
Hedging valuation adjustments on subordinated debt  440   (429)  (327)
Value of employee services  236   260   414 
Transactions in own shares  (3  40   (411)
Accretion of discounts and amortisation of premiums and issue costs  445   1,947   1,701 
Share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures  (6)  (9)  (6)
Gain on establishment of joint venture  (244)      
Transfers to income statement from reserves  (608)  (701)  (650)
Profit on disposal of tangible fixed assets  (32)  (104)  (120)
Other non-cash items  (35)  (34)   
Total non-cash items  19,879   1,098   15,154 
Contributions to defined benefit schemes  (1,069)  (868)  (587)
Payments in respect of payment protection insurance provision  (2,461)  (2,104)  (1,657)
Payments in respect of other regulatory provisions  (778)  (1,032)  (928)
Other  2   14    
Total other items  (4,306)  (3,990)  (3,172)
Non-cash and other items  15,573   (2,892)  11,982 

 

1These OEICs (Open-ended investment companies) are mutual funds which are consolidated if the Group manages the funds and also has a sufficient beneficial interest. The population of OEICs to be consolidated varies at each reporting date as external investors acquire and divest holdings in the various funds. The consolidation of these funds is effected by the inclusion of the fund investments and a matching liability to the unitholders; and changes in funds consolidated represent a non-cash movement on the balance sheet.
2When considering the movement on each line of the balance sheet, the impact of foreign exchange rate movements is removed in order to show the underlying cash impact.
3A number of capital transactions entered into by the Group involved the exchange of existing securities for new issues and as a result there was no related cash flow.
F-99

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 53: CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT continued

 

(D) Analysis of cash and cash equivalents as shown in the balance sheet

 

 2019  2018 2017 
  2016
£m
   2015
£m
   2014
£m
  £m  £m £m 
                     
Cash and balances at central banks  47,452   58,417   50,492   55,130   54,663   58,521 
Less: mandatory reserve deposits1  (914)  (941)  (980)  (3,289)  (2,553)  (957)
  46,538   57,476   49,512   51,841   52,110   57,564 
Loans and advances to banks  26,902   25,117   26,155   9,775   6,283   6,611 
Less: amounts with a maturity of three months or more  (11,052)  (10,640)  (10,520)  (3,805)  (3,169)  (3,193)
  15,850   14,477   15,635   5,970   3,114   3,418 
Total cash and cash equivalents  62,388   71,953   65,147   57,811   55,224   60,982 

 

1  Mandatory reserve deposits are held with local central banks in accordance with statutory requirements; these deposits are not available to finance the Group’s day-to-day operations.

1Mandatory reserve deposits are held with local central banks in accordance with statutory requirements; these deposits are not available to finance the Group’s day-to-day operations.

 

Included within cash and cash equivalents at 31 December 20162019 is £14,475£49 million (2015: £13,545(31 December 2018: £40 million; 2014: £12,8551 January 2018 £48 million; 31 December 2017: £2,322 million) held within the Group’s long-term insurance and investments businesses, which is not immediately available for use in the business.

(E) Disposal and closure of group undertakings and businesses

   2016
£m
   2015
£m
   2014
£m
 
Trading and other assets at fair value through profit or loss     3,420   11 
Loans and advances to customers     21,333   256 
Loans and advances to banks     5,539   55 
Available-for-sale financial assets     654    
Value of in-force business     60    
Property, plant and equipment     150    
      31,156   322 
             
Customer deposits     (24,613)  (266)
Debt securities in issue     (9)   
Liabilities arising from insurance contracts and participating investment contracts     (3,828)   
Liabilities arising from non-participating investment contracts     (549)   
Non-controlling interests     (825)   
Other net assets (liabilities)  5   (314)  802 
   5   (30,138)  536 
             
Net assets  5   1,018   858 
             
Non-cash consideration received        (518)
(Loss) profit on sale     (46)  208 
Cash consideration received on losing control of group undertakings and businesses  5   972   548 
Cash and cash equivalents disposed     (5,043)  (5)
Net cash inflow (outflow)  5   (4,071)  543 

NOTE 54: ACQUISITION OF MBNA LIMITED

On 20 December 2016, the Group signed an agreement with Bank of America Merrill Lynch (BAML) to purchase 100 per cent of the share capital of MBNA Limited, a UK consumer credit card business, for a cash consideration of £1.9 billion. The Group is expected to acquire control of MBNA Limited during 2017, subject to the receipt of competition and regulatory approval.

NOTE 55: EVENTS SINCE THE BALANCE SHEET DATE

On 2 March 2017 the FCA confirmed that the deadline by which consumers will need to make their PPI complaints will be 29 August 2019 and that the final rules and guidance that should apply when firms handle PPI complaints in light of Plevin will come into force in August 2017. The Group has reassessed its provisioning in light of this guidance, leading to an additional charge of £350 million, bringing the total charge for the year ended 31 December 2016 to £1,350 million.

F-100F-123

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 54: CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENTcontinued

(E) Acquisition of group undertakings and businesses

  2019
£m
  2018
£m
  2017
£m
 
Net assets acquired:            
Cash and cash equivalents        123 
Loans and advances to customers        7,811 
Available-for-sale financial assets          16 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  7,350       
Assets arising from reinsurance contracts held  13,616       
Intangible assets     21   702 
Property, plant and equipment        6 
Other assets  29   6   414 
Deposits from banks1        (6,431)
Liabilities arising from non-participating investment contracts  (20,981)      
Other liabilities  (8)  (1)  (927)
Goodwill arising on acquisition  14      302 
Cash consideration  20   26   2,016 
Less: Cash and cash equivalents acquired        (123)
Net cash outflow arising from acquisition of subsidiaries and businesses  20   26   1,893 
Acquisition of and additional investment in joint ventures  1   23   30 
Net cash outflow from acquisitions in the year  21   49   1,923 

1Upon acquisition in 2017, the funding of MBNA was assumed by Lloyds Bank plc.

(F) Disposal and closure of group undertakings and businesses

  2019
£m
  2018
£m
  2017
£m
 
Loans and advances to customers        342 
Non-controlling interests        (242)
Other net assets (liabilities)     1   29 
      1   129 
             
Net assets     1   129 
             
Non-cash consideration received         
(Loss) profit on sale         
Cash consideration received on losing control of group undertakings and businesses     1   129 
Cash and cash equivalents disposed         
Net cash inflow (outflow)     1   129 
F-124

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 55: ADOPTION OF IFRS 16

The Group adopted IFRS 16Leasesfrom 1 January 2019 and elected to apply the standard retrospectively with the cumulative effect of initial application being recognised at that date; comparative information has therefore not been restated. Comparative information was prepared in accordance with IAS 17. Under IAS 17, where the Group was lessee it charged operating lease rentals to the income statement on a straight-line basis over the life of the lease.

Operating lease commitments as at 31 December 2018 amounted to £2,043 million. Lease liabilities amounting to £1,813 million in respect of leased properties previously accounted for as operating leases were recognised at 1 January 2019. These liabilities were measured at the present value of the remaining lease payments, discounted using the Group’s incremental borrowing rate appropriate for the related right-of-use asset as at that date, adjusted to exclude short-term leases and leases of low-value assets of approximately £20 million. The weighted-average borrowing rate applied to these lease liabilities was 2.43 per cent in the UK, where the majority of the obligations arise, and 5.10 per cent in the US. The corresponding right-of-use asset of £1,716 million was measured at an amount equal to the lease liabilities, adjusted for lease liabilities recognised at 31 December 2018 of £97 million. The right-of-use asset and lease liabilities are included within property, plant and equipment and other liabilities respectively. There was no impact on shareholders’ equity.

In applying IFRS 16 for the first time, the Group has used a number of practical expedients permitted by the standard; the most significant of which were the use of a single discount rate to a portfolio of leases with reasonably similar characteristics; reliance on previous assessments of whether a lease is onerous; and the use of hindsight in determining the lease term where the contract contains options to extend or terminate the lease. The Group has also elected not to apply IFRS 16 to contracts that were not identified as containing a lease under IAS 17 and IFRIC 4Determining whether an Arrangement contains a Lease.

 

NOTE 56: FUTURE ACCOUNTING DEVELOPMENTS

 

The following pronouncements are not applicable for the year ending 31 December 20162019 and have not been applied in preparing these financial statements. Save as disclosed below, the impact of these accounting changes is still being assessed by the Group and reliable estimates cannot be made at this stage.

 

IFRS 9 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS17 Insurance Contracts

 

IFRS 917 replaces IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement IFRS 4Insurance Contractsand is currently effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2018.

CLASSIFICATION AND MEASUREMENT2021 although, in its Exposure Draft published on 26 June 2019, the International Accounting Standards Board proposed delaying implementation until 1 January 2022.

 

IFRS 917 requires financial assetsinsurance contracts and participating investment contracts to be classified intomeasured on the balance sheet as the total of the fulfilment cash flows and the contractual service margin. Changes to estimates of future cash flows from one of three measurement categories, fair value throughreporting date to another are recognised either as an amount in profit or loss fair value through other comprehensive income or amortised cost. Financial assets will be measured at amortised cost if they are held within a business modelas an adjustment to the objectiveexpected profit for providing insurance coverage, depending on the type of which is to hold financial assets in order to collect contractual cash flows,change and their contractual cash flows represent solely paymentsthe reason for it. The effects of principal and interest. Financial assets will be measured at fair value through other comprehensive income if they are held within a business model the objective of which is achieved by both collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial assets and their contractual cash flows represent solely payments of principal and interest. Financial assets not meeting either of these two business models; and all equity instruments (unless designated at inception to fair value through other comprehensive income); and all derivatives are measured at fair value through profit or loss. An entity may, at initial recognition, designate a financial asset as measured at fair value through profit or loss if doing so eliminates or significantly reduces an accounting mismatch.

The Group has undertaken an assessment to determine the potential impact ofsome changes in classification and measurement of financial assets. The adoption of IFRS 9 is unlikely to result in significant changes to existing asset measurement bases, however, the final impact willdiscount rates can either be dependent on the facts and circumstances that exist on 1 January 2018.

IFRS 9 retains most of the existing requirements for financial liabilities. However, for financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss, gains or losses attributable to changes in own credit risk may be presented in other comprehensive income. It is expected that the Group will elect to early adopt this presentation of gains and losses on financial liabilities from 1 January 2017. These gains and losses are currently recognised in profit or loss and are disclosedor in note 30 to the financial statements.

IMPAIRMENT OVERVIEW

The IFRS 9 impairment model will be applicable to all financial assets at amortised cost, debt instruments measured at fair value through other comprehensive income lease receivables, loan commitmentsas an accounting policy choice. The risk adjustment is released to profit and financial guarantees not measuredloss as an insurer’s risk reduces. Profits which are currently recognised through a Value in Force asset, will no longer be recognised at fair value throughinception of an insurance contract. Instead, the expected profit for providing insurance coverage is recognised in profit or loss.

IFRS 9 replaces the existing ‘incurred loss’ impairment approach with an Expected Credit Loss (‘ECL’) model, resulting in earlier recognition of credit losses compared with IAS 39. Expected credit losses are the unbiased probability weighted average credit losses determined by evaluating a range of possible outcomes and future economic conditions.

The ECL model has three stages. Entities are required to recognise a 12 month expected loss allowance on initial recognition (stage 1) and a lifetime expected loss allowance when there has been a significant increase in credit risk since initial recognition (stage 2). Stage 3 requires objective evidence that an asset is credit-impaired, which is similar to the guidance on incurred losses in IAS 39.

Under IAS 39, provisions are recognised for losses that have been incurred but may not have been separately identified. An assessment is made of the likelihood of assets being impaired at the balance sheet date and being identified subsequently; the length ofover time taken to identify that an impairment event has occurred is known as the loss emergence period. The Group has a range of emergence periods which are dependent upon the characteristics of the portfolios, but typically range between one month and twelve months based on historical experience. Unsecured portfolios tend to have shorter emergence periods than secured portfolios. Under IFRS 9, all loans in stage 1 will require a loss allowance measured at an amount equal to 12 months ECL andinsurance coverage is therefore longer than current emergence periods for certain portfolios.

The requirement to recognise lifetime ECL for loans which have experienced a significant increase in credit risk since origination, but which are not credit impaired, does not exist under IAS 39. The assessment of whether an asset is in stage 1 or 2 considers the relative change in the probability of default occurring over the expected life of the instrument, not the change in the amount of expected credit losses. This will involve setting quantitative tests combined with supplementary indicators such as credit risk classification. Reasonable and supportable forward looking information will also be used in determining the stage allocation. In general, assets more than 30 days past due, but not credit impaired, will be classed as stage 2.

IFRS 9 requires the use of more forward looking information including reasonable and supportable forecasts of future economic conditions. The need to consider a range of economic scenarios and how they could impact the loss allowance is a subjective feature of the IFRS 9 ECL model. The Group is developing the capability to model a number of economic scenarios and capture the impact on credit losses to ensure the overall ECL represents a reasonable distribution of economic outcomes. Appropriate governance and oversight will be established around the process.

IFRS 9 IMPAIRMENT MODELS

For all material portfolios, IFRS 9 ECL calculation will leverage the systems, data and methodology used to calculate regulatory ‘expected losses’. The Group anticipates the definition of default for IFRS 9 purposes will be aligned to the Basel definition of default to ensure consistency across the Group. However, the IFRS 9 ECL models differ from the regulatory models in a number of ways, for example stage 2 assets under IFRS 9 carry a lifetime expected loss amount whereas regulatory models generate 12 month expected losses for non-defaulted loans.

IFRS 9 models will use three key input parameters for the computation of expected loss, being probability of default (‘PD’), loss given default (‘LGD’) and exposure at default (‘EAD’). However, given the conservatism inherent in the regulatory expected losses calculation, some adjustments to these components must be made to ensure compliance with IFRS 9. Some of the key requirements are listed in the following table.

F-101

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 56: FUTURE ACCOUNTING DEVELOPMENTS continued

ComponentRegulatory capitalIFRS 9
EAD

– Anticipates additional drawings made by customers who are yet to default

– Downturn EAD, appropriate to a severe but plausible economic downturn

– Maximum exposure is the contractual amount except for certain revolving facilities (as defined by the standard)

– Forward looking EAD

PD

– 12 month PD

– Through-the-cycle using long run average economic and risk data to reduce sensitivity to changes in the economic cycle

– Default defined as 90 days past due, except 180 days past due definition for certain mortgage portfolios secured by UK residential real estate, plus unlikeliness to pay factors

– Forward-looking 12 month PD or lifetime PD, considering a range of possible outcomes

– Point-in-time, sensitive to changes in the economic cycle

– No explicit definition of default

– Rebuttable presumption that default does not occur later than when a financial asset is 90 days past due

LGD

– Downturn LGD, appropriate to a severe by plausible economic downturn

– Subject to floors, to mitigate the risk of underestimating credit losses due to a lack of historical data

– Discount cash flows to take account of the uncertainties associated with the receipt of recoveries with respect to a defaulted exposure

– Forward looking LGD

– No floors prescribed

– Discount rate is effective interest rate as defined by IFRS 9

IMPACT OF IFRS 9 ON THE GROUP

The adoption of IFRS 9 may result in an increase in the Group’s balance sheet provisions for credit losses and may therefore negatively impact the Group’s regulatory capital position. The extent of any increase in provisions will depend upon on a number factors including the composition of the Group’s lending portfolios and forecast economic conditions at the date of implementation. Whilst the Group is still refining its methodology and completing the development of the models required to calculate the provision, it is not possible to provide a reliable estimate of the impact of adopting IFRS 9. It is also too early to estimate the ongoing impact of the IFRS 9 impairment model on the financial results although the requirement to transfer assets between stages and to incorporate forward looking data into the expected credit loss calculation, including multiple economic scenarios, could result in impairment charges being more volatile when compared to the current IAS 39 impairment model.

The regulatory capital impact of IFRS 9 could be affected by changes to the regulatory rules. The Basel Committee on Banking Supervision has issued two papers on the impacts of IFRS 9 on regulatory capital, a consultation paper on the ‘Regulatory treatment of accounting provisions – interim approach and transitional arrangements’; and one discussing longer-term changes. It is not clear whether any transitional capital arrangements will be in place for 1 January 2018.

HEDGE ACCOUNTING

The hedge accounting requirements of IFRS 9 are more closely aligned with risk management practices and follow a more principle-based approach than IAS 39.provided. The standard does not address macro hedge accounting, which is being considered in a separate IASB project. There is an option to maintain the existing IAS 39 hedge accounting rules until the IASB completes its project on macro hedging. The Group currently expects to continue applying IAS 39 hedge accounting in accordance with this accounting policy choice.

IFRS 9 IMPLEMENTATION PROGRAMME

The Group has an established IFRS 9 programme to ensure a high quality implementation in compliance with the standard and additional regulatory guidance that has been issued. The programme involves Finance and Risk functions across the Group with Divisional and Group steering committees providing oversight. The key responsibilities of the programme include defining IFRS 9 methodology and accounting policy, development of ECL models, identifying data and system requirements, and establishing an appropriate operating model and governance framework. The programme is progressing in line with current delivery plans.

Credit risk methodologies have been defined and model build and approval is underway for core portfolios. The Retail secured model has been approved by the Model Governance Committee. Models and credit risk processes will be tested during the parallel run period to embed the changes and help improve the understanding of the new impairment models.

Finance systems and reporting requirements are being developed and tested. Existing controls and governance structures have been reviewed and changes identified as a result of IFRS 9. The governance framework includes the review, challenge and sign-off of forward looking information for a range of economic scenarios. Communication and training plans are in place and the impact on resources within Finance and Risk functions is being assessed to ensure the business is ready to implement the new standard.

IFRS 15 REVENUE FROM CONTRACTS WITH CUSTOMERS

IFRS 15 replaces IAS 18 Revenue and IAS 11 Construction Contracts. Financial instruments, leases and insurance contracts are out of scope however, fee recognition associated with credit cards and packaged products, for example, will need to be reviewed. The standard is not currently expected to have a significant impact on the Group’s profitability. Limited, or no systems or process impacts are expected as a result of adopting IFRS 15. IFRS 15 is effectiveaccounting for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2018.

IFRS 16 LEASESthe insurance and participating investment contracts issued by the Group.

 

The Group’s IFRS 16 replaces IAS 17 Leases and requires lesseesproject is progressing to recognise a right of use asset and a liability for future payments arising from a lease contract. Lessees will recognise a finance chargeplan. Work has focussed on interpreting the liability and a depreciation charge on the asset which could affect the timingrequirements of the recognitionstandard, developing methodologies and accounting policies, and assessing the changes required to reporting and other systems. The development of expenses on leased assets. This change will mainly impact the properties that the Group currently accountsGroup’s data warehousing and actuarial liability calculation processes required for as operating leases. Finance systems will need to be changed to reflect the new accounting rules and disclosures. Lessor accounting requirements remain aligned to the current approach under IAS 17. IFRS 1617 reporting is effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2019.progressing.

 

MINOR AMENDMENTS TO OTHER ACCOUNTING STANDARDSMinor amendments to other accounting standards

 

During 2016, theThe IASB has issued amendments to IAS 7 Statement of Cash Flows (which require additional disclosure about an entity’s financing activities) and IAS 12 Income Taxes (which clarify when a deferred tax asset should be recognised for unrealised losses) together with a number of other minor amendments to IFRSs which will be effective for annual periods beginning on or after either 1 January 2017 or2020 (including IFRS 3Business Combinationsand IAS 1 January 2018.Presentation of Financial Statements). These revised requirementsamendments are not expected to have a significant impact on the Group.

F-102F-125

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 57: PARENT COMPANY DISCLOSURES

 

A COMPANY INCOME STATEMENT

 

   2016
£ million
   2015
£ million
   2014
£ million
 
Net interest income  66   276   255 
Other income  3,618   983   283 
Total income  3,684   1,259   538 
Operating expenses  (221)  (290)  (265)
Profit on ordinary activities before tax  3,463   969   273 
Taxation  (328)  (72)  106 
Profit for the year  3,135   897   379 
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders  2,723   503   92 
Profit attributable to other equity holders  412   394   287 
Profit for the year  3,135   897   379 
             
B COMPANY BALANCE SHEET
 
            
       2016
£ million
   20151
£ million
 
Assets            
Non-current assets:            
Investment in subsidiaries      44,188   40,785 
Loans to subsidiaries      6,912   14,548 
Deferred tax assets      38   51 
       51,138   55,384 
Current assets:            
Derivative financial instruments      461   590 
Other assets      959   909 
Amounts due from subsidiaries      67   67 
Cash and cash equivalents      42   24 
Current tax recoverable      465   32 
       1,994   1,622 
Total assets      53,132   57,006 
Equity and liabilities            
Capital and reserves:            
Share capital      7,146   7,146 
Share premium account      17,622   17,412 
Merger reserve      7,423   7,633 
Capital redemption reserve      4,115   4,115 
Retained profits      1,584   785 
Shareholders’ equity      37,890   37,091 
Other equity instruments      5,355   5,355 
Total equity      43,245   42,446 
Non-current liabilities:            
Debt securities in issue      2,455    
Subordinated liabilities      4,329   3,065 
       6,784   3,065 
Current liabilities:            
Current tax liabilities          
Other liabilities      3,103   11,495 
       3,103   11,495 
Total liabilities      9,887   14,560 
Total equity and liabilities      53,132   57,006 

  2019
£m
  20181
£m
  20171
£m
 
Net interest (expense) income  (108)  (173)  (121)
Dividends received from subsidiary undertakings  5,150   4,000   2,650 
Other income  682   524   142 
Total income  5,724   4,351   2,671 
Operating expenses  (289)  (246)  (255)
Trading surplus  5,435   4,105   2,416 
Impairment  4   (3)   
Profit on ordinary activities before tax  5,439   4,102   2,416 
Tax expense  (24)  2   62 
Profit for the year  5,415   4,104   2,478 
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders  4,949   3,671   2,063 
Profit attributable to other equity holders  466   433   415 
Profit for the year  5,415   4,104   2,478 

 

1During 2016 the Company has reviewed the treatment of certain holdings of preference shares issued by its subsidiary, Lloyds Bank plc. As a result loans to subsidiaries and other liabilities have been increased by £585 million; comparatives have been restated accordingly.Restated, see note 1.
F-103F-126

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 57: PARENT COMPANY DISCLOSURES continued

B COMPANY BALANCE SHEET

  2019
£m
  2018
£m
 
Assets      
Non-current assets:      
Investment in subsidiaries  48,597   46,725 
Loans to subsidiaries  14,660   24,211 
Deferred tax assets     9 
   63,257   70,945 
Current assets:        
Derivative financial instruments  760   256 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  12,516   588 
Other assets  983   955 
Amounts due from subsidiaries  27   27 
Cash and cash equivalents  29   57 
Current tax recoverable  1   76 
   14,316   1,959 
Total assets  77,573   72,904 
Equity and liabilities        
Capital and reserves:        
Share capital  7,005   7,116 
Share premium account  17,751   17,719 
Merger reserve  7,420   7,423 
Capital redemption reserve  4,462   4,273 
Retained profits  3,950   2,103 
Shareholders’ equity  40,588   38,634 
Other equity instruments  5,906   6,491 
Total equity  46,494   45,125 
Non-current liabilities:        
Debt securities in issue  20,018   20,394 
Subordinated liabilities  5,961   6,043 
Deferred tax liabilities  2    
   25,981   26,437 
Current liabilities:        
Derivative financial instruments  438   209 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss  3,464    
Other liabilities  1,196   1,133 
   5,098   1,342 
Total liabilities  31,079   27,779 
Total equity and liabilities  77,573   72,904 
F-127

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 57: PARENT COMPANY DISCLOSURES continued

 

C COMPANY STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY

 

  Share capital
and premium
£ million
  Merger
reserve
£ million
  Capital
redemption
reserve
£ million
  Retained
profits1
£ million
  Total
shareholders’
equity
£ million
  Other equity
instruments
£ million
  Total
equity
£ million
 
Balance at
1 January 2014
 24,424  7,764  4,115  1,414  37,717    37,717 
Total comprehensive income1       379  379    379 
Distributions on other equity instruments, net of tax       (225) (225)   (225)
Issue of ordinary shares 3        3    3 
Issue of other equity instruments       (21) (21) 5,355  5,334 
Movement in treasury shares       (182) (182)   (182)
Value of employee services:                     
Share option schemes, net of tax       122  122    122 
Other employee award schemes       233  233    233 
Balance at 31 December 2014 24,427  7,764  4,115  1,720  38,026  5,355  43,381 
Total comprehensive income1       897  897    897 
Dividends paid       (1,070) (1,070)   (1,070)
Distributions on other equity instruments, net of tax       (314) (314)   (314)
Redemption of preference shares 131  (131)          
Movement in treasury shares       (753) (753)   (753)
Value of employee services:                     
Share option schemes       133  133    133 
Other employee award schemes       172  172    172 
Balance at 31 December 2015 24,558  7,633  4,115  785  37,091  5,355  42,446 
Total comprehensive income1       3,135  3,135    3,135 
Dividends paid       (2,014) (2,014)   (2,014)
Distributions on other equity instruments, net of tax       (330) (330)   (330)
Redemption of preference shares 210  (210)          
Movement in treasury shares       (301) (301)   (301)
Value of employee services:                     
Share option schemes       141  141    141 
Other employee award schemes       168  168    168 
Balance at 31 December 2016 24,768  7,423  4,115  1,584  37,890  5,355  43,245 

  Share capital
and premium
£m
  Merger
reserve
£m
  Capital
redemption
reserve
£m
  Retained
profits1
£m
  Total
shareholders’
equity
£m
  Other equity
instruments
£m
  Total
equity
£m
 
Balance at 1 January 2017  24,768   7,423   4,115   1,584   37,890   5,355   43,245 
Total comprehensive income1,2           2,478   2,478      2,478 
Dividends paid           (2,284)  (2,284)     (2,284)
Distributions on other equity instruments1           (415)  (415)     (415)
Issue of ordinary shares  63            63      63 
Movement in treasury shares           (277)  (277)     (277)
Value of employee services:                            
Share option schemes           82   82      82 
Other employee award schemes           332   332      332 
Balance at 31 December 2017  24,831   7,423   4,115   1,500   37,869   5,355   43,224 
Adjustment on adoption of IFRS 9           (2)  (2)     (2)
Balance at 1 January 2018  24,831   7,423   4,115   1,498   37,867   5,355   43,222 
Total comprehensive income1,2           4,104   4,104      4,104 
Dividends paid           (2,240)  (2,240)     (2,240)
Distributions on other equity instruments1           (433)  (433)     (433)
Issue of ordinary shares  162            162      162 
Share buy-back programme  (158)     158   (1,005)  (1,005)     (1,005)
Issue of AT1 securities           (7)  (7)  1,136   1,129 
Movement in treasury shares           (74)  (74)     (74)
Value of employee services:                            
Share option schemes           53   53      53 
Other employee award schemes           207   207      207 
Balance at 31 December 2018  24,835   7,423   4,273   2,103   38,634   6,491   45,125 
Comprehensive income                            
Total comprehensive income2           5,415   5,415      5,415 
Dividends paid           (2,312)  (2,312     (2,312)
Distributions on other equity instruments           (466)  (466     (466)
Redemption of preference shares  3   (3)               
Issue of ordinary shares  107            107      107 
Share buy back programme  (189)     189   (1,095)  (1,095)     (1,095)
Issue of other equity instruments           (5)  (5)  896   891 
Redemption of other equity instruments                 (1,481)  (1,481)
Movement in treasury shares           74   74      74 
Value of employee services:                            
Share option schemes           71   71      71 
Other employee award schemes           165   165      165 
Balance at 31 December 2019  24,756   7,420   4,462   3,950   40,588   5,906   46,494 
1Restated, see note 1.
2Total comprehensive income comprises only the profit (loss) for the year.
F-104F-128

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

NOTE 57: PARENT COMPANY DISCLOSURES continued

 

D COMPANY CASH FLOW STATEMENT

 

   2016
£ million
   20151
£ million
   2014
£ million
 
Profit (loss) before tax  3,463   969   273 
Fair value and exchange adjustments and other non-cash items  2,482   (594)  1,118 
Change in other assets  (50)  (566)  558 
Change in other liabilities and other items  (8,392)  458   (4,242)
Dividends received  (3,759)  (1,080)  (720)
Distributions on other equity instruments received  (119)      
Tax (paid) received  (679)  (142)  301 
Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities  (7,054)  (955)  (2,712)
Cash flows from investing activities            
Return of capital contribution  441   600   198 
Dividends received  3,759   1,080   720 
Distributions on other equity instruments received  119       
Capital injection to Lloyds Bank plc  (3,522)      
Amounts advanced to subsidiaries  (4,978)  (1,157)  (7,892)
Redemption of loans to subsidiaries  13,166   570   4,420 
Net cash used in investing activities  8,985   1,093   (2,554)
Cash flows from financing activities            
Dividends paid to ordinary shareholders  (2,014)  (1,070)   
Distributions on other equity instruments  (412)  (394)  (287)
Issue of other equity instruments        5,329 
Issue of subordinated liabilities  1,061   1,436   629 
Interest paid on subordinated liabilities  (229)  (129)  (128)
Repayment of subordinated liabilities  (319)  (152)  (596)
Proceeds from issue of ordinary shares        3 
Net cash provided by financing activities  (1,913)  (309)  4,950 
Change in cash and cash equivalents  18   (171)  (316)
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year  24   195   511 
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year  42   24   195 

1See note 1 on page F-103.
  2019
£m
  2018
£m
  2017
£m
 
Profit before tax  5,439   4,102   2,416 
Fair value and exchange adjustments and other non-cash items  (166)  (715)  495 
Change in other assets  (11,975)  (572)  18 
Change in other liabilities and other items  3,151   7,538   8,431 
Dividends received  (5,150)  (4,000)  (2,650)
Distributions on other equity instruments receivedº  (366)  (324)  (292)
Tax (paid) received  70   660   (197)
Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities  (8,997)  6,689   8,221 
Cash flows from investing activities            
Return of capital contribution  5   9   77 
Dividends received  5,150   4,000   2,650 
Distributions on other equity instruments received  366   324   292 
Acquisition of and capital injections to subsidiaries  (1,648)  (12,753)  (320)
Return of capital     11,114    
Amounts advanced to subsidiaries  (1,812)  (21,577)  (8,476)
Repayment of loans to subsidiaries  11,257   12,602   475 
Interest received on loans to subsidiaries  395   370   244 
Net cash (used in) provided by investing activities  13,713   (5,911)  (5,058)
Cash flows from financing activities            
Dividends paid to ordinary shareholders  (2,312)  (2,240)  (2,284)
Distributions on other equity instruments  (466)  (433)  (415)
Issue of subordinated liabilities     1,729    
Interest paid on subordinated liabilities  (314)  (275)  (248)
Share buy-back  (1,095)  (1,005)   
Issue of other equity instruments  891   1,129    
Redemptions of other equity instruments  (1,481)      
Repayment of subordinated liabilities  (3)      
Proceeds from issue of ordinary shares  36   102   14 
Net cash provided by financing activities  (4,744)  (993)  (2,933)
Change in cash and cash equivalents  (28)  (215)  230 
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year  57   272   42 
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year  29   57   272 

 

E INTERESTS IN SUBSIDIARIES

 

The principal subsidiaries, all of which have prepared accounts to 31 December and whose results are included in the consolidated accounts of Lloyds Banking Group plc, are:

 

  Country of
registration/
Incorporation
 Percentage
of equity
share capital
and voting
rights held
 Nature of business
Lloyds Bank plc England 100% Banking and financial services
Scottish Widows Limited Scotland 100%1 Life assurance
HBOS plc Scotland 100%1 Holding company
Bank of Scotland plc Scotland 100%1 Banking and financial services
Lloyds Bank Corporate Markets plcEngland100%Banking and financial services

1Indirect interest.

 

The principal area of operation for each of the above subsidiaries is the United Kingdom.

F-105

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 58: CONDENSED CONSOLIDATING FINANCIAL INFORMATION

The Company owns 100 per cent of the share capital of Lloyds Bank plc (Lloyds Bank), which intends to offer and sell certain securities in the US from time to time utilising a registration statement on Form F-3 filed with the SEC by the Company. This will be accompanied by a full and unconditional guarantee by the Company.

Lloyds Bank intends to utilise an exception provided in Rule 3-10 of Regulation S-X, which allows it to not file its financial statements with the SEC. In accordance with the requirements to qualify for the exception, presented below is condensed consolidating financial information for:

The Company on a stand-alone basis as guarantor;
Lloyds Bank on a stand-alone basis as issuer;
Non-guarantor subsidiaries of the Company and Lloyds Bank on a combined basis (Subsidiaries);
Consolidation adjustments; and
Lloyds Banking Group’s consolidated amounts (the Group).

Under IAS 27, the Company and Lloyds Bank account for investments in their subsidiary undertakings at cost less impairment. Rule 3-10 of Regulation S-X requires a company to account for its investments in subsidiary undertakings using the equity method, which would increase/(decrease) the results of the Company and Lloyds Bank in the information below by £(1,072) million and £(851) million, respectively, for the year ended 31 December 2016; by £(37) million and £(10,248) million, respectively, for the year ended 31 December 2015; and by £1,033 million and £(545) million, respectively, for the year ended 31 December 2014. The net assets of the Company and Lloyds Bank in the information below would also be increased/(decreased) by £4,780 million and £(8,268) million, respectively, at 31 December 2016; and by £4,143 million and £(7,366) million, respectively, at 31 December 2015.

INCOME STATEMENTS

For the year ended 31 December 2016 Company
£m
  Lloyds Bank
£m
  Subsidiaries
£m
  Consolidation
adjustments
£m
  Group
£m
 
Net interest income 66  4,883  4,661  (336) 9,274 
Other income 3,618  5,489  30,349  (9,119) 30,337 
Total income 3,684  10,372  35,010  (9,455) 39,611 
Insurance claims     (22,344)   (22,344)
Total income, net of insurance claims 3,684  10,372  12,666  (9,455) 17,267 
Operating expenses (221) (7,722) (6,380) 1,696  (12,627)
Trading surplus 3,463  2,650  6,286  (7,759) 4,640 
Impairment   (620) (239) 107  (752)
Profit before tax 3,463  2,030  6,047  (7,652) 3,888 
Taxation (328) (77) (1,815) 496  (1,724)
Profit for the year 3,135  1,953  4,232  (7,156) 2,164 
                
For the year ended 31 December 2015 Company
£m
  Lloyds Bank
£m
  Subsidiaries
£m
  Consolidation
adjustments
£m
  Group
£m
 
Net interest income 276  4,170  7,129  (257) 11,318 
Other income 983  16,057  10,035  (15,243) 11,832 
Total income 1,259  20,227  17,164  (15,500) 23,150 
Insurance claims     (5,729)   (5,729)
Total income, net of insurance claims 1,259  20,227  11,435  (15,500) 17,421 
Operating expenses (290) (8,994) (6,948) 845  (15,387)
Trading surplus 969  11,233  4,487  (14,655) 2,034 
Impairment   (265) (222) 97  (390)
Profit before tax 969  10,968  4,265  (14,558) 1,644 
Taxation (72) (57) (803) 244  (688)
Profit for the year 897  10,911  3,462  (14,314) 956 

F-106

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 58: CONDENSED CONSOLIDATING FINANCIAL INFORMATION continued

For the year ended 31 December 2014 Company
£m
  Lloyds Bank
£m
  Subsidiaries
£m
  Consolidation
adjustments
£m
  Group
£m
 
Net interest income 255  3,800  7,158  (553) 10,660 
Other income 283  7,180  20,039  (8,270) 19,232 
Total income 538  10,980  27,197  (8,823) 29,892 
Insurance claims     (13,493)   (13,493)
Total income, net of insurance claims 538  10,980  13,704  (8,823) 16,399 
Operating expenses (265) (7,927) (6,602) 909  (13,885)
Trading surplus 273  3,053  7,102  (7,914) 2,514 
Impairment   (585) (777) 610  (752)
Profit before tax 273  2,468  6,325  (7,304) 1,762 
Taxation 106  (143) (716) 490  (263)
Profit for the year 379  2,325  5,609  (6,814) 1,499 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

For the year ended 31 December 2016  Company
£m
   Lloyds Bank
£m
   Subsidiaries
£m
   Consolidation
adjustments
£m
   Group
£m
 
Profit (loss) for the year  3,135   1,953   4,232   (7,156)  2,164 
Other comprehensive income                    
Items that will not subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss:                    
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements:                    
Remeasurements before taxation     (682)  (666)     (1,348)
Taxation     184   136      320 
      (498)  (530)     (1,028)
Items that may subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss:                    
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of available-for-sale financial assets:                    
Adjustment on transfer from held-to-maturity portfolio     1,544         1,544 
Change in fair value     268   84   4   356 
Income statement transfers in respect of disposals     (507)  (68)     (575)
Income statement transfers in respect of impairment     172   1      173 
Taxation     (269)  (32)     (301)
      1,208   (15)  4   1,197 
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve:                    
Effective portion of changes in fair value     1,290   125   1,017   2,432 
Net income statement transfers��    (241)  (233)  (83)  (557)
Taxation     (258)  29   (237)  (466)
       791   (79)  697   1,409 
Currency translation differences (tax: nil)     19   44   (67)  (4)
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax     1,520   (580)  634   1,574 
Total comprehensive income for the year  3,135   3,473   3,652   (6,522)  3,738 
Total comprehensive income attributable to ordinary shareholders  2,723   3,354   3,450   (6,302)  3,225 
Total comprehensive income attributable to other equity holders  412   119   101   (220)  412 
Total comprehensive income attributable to equity holders  3,135   3,473   3,551   (6,522)  3,637 
Total comprehensive income attributable to non-controlling interests        101      101 
Total comprehensive income for the year  3,135   3,473   3,652   (6,522)  3,738 
F-107

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 58: CONDENSED CONSOLIDATING FINANCIAL INFORMATIONcontinued

For the year ended 31 December 2015 Company
£m
  Lloyds
Bank £m
  Subsidiaries
£m
  Consolidation
adjustments £m
  Group
£
m
 
Profit (loss) for the year  897   10,911   3,462   (14,314)  956 
Other comprehensive income                    
Items that will not subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss:                    
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements:                    
Remeasurements before taxation     31   (305)     (274)
Taxation     (1)  60      59 
      30   (245)     (215)
Items that may subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss:                    
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of                    
available-for-sale financial assets:                    
Change in fair value     (300)  (27)  9   (318)
Income statement transfers in respect of disposals     (14)  (37)     (51)
Income statement transfers in respect of impairment     1   38   (35)  4 
Taxation     (17)  2   9   (6)
      (330)  (24)  (17)  (371)
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve:                    
Effective portion of changes in fair value     294   183   60   537 
Net income statement transfers     (421)  (557)  22   (956)
Taxation     (76)  59   24   7 
      (203)  (315)  106   (412)
Currency translation differences (tax: nil)     (13)  52   (81)  (42)
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax     (516)  (532)  8   (1,040)
Total comprehensive income for the year  897   10,395   2,930   (14,306)  (84)
Total comprehensive income attributable to
ordinary shareholders
  503   10,395   2,834   (14,306)  (574)
Total comprehensive income attributable to
other equity holders
  394            394 
Total comprehensive income attributable to equity holders  897   10,395   2,834   (14,306)  (180)
Total comprehensive income attributable to
non-controlling interests
        96      96 
Total comprehensive income for the year  897   10,395   2,930   (14,306)  (84)
F-108

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 58: CONDENSED CONSOLIDATING FINANCIAL INFORMATIONcontinued

For the year ended 31 December 2014 Company
£m
  Lloyds Bank
£m
  Subsidiaries
£m
  Consolidation
adjustments

£m
  Group
£m
 
Profit (loss) for the year  379   2,325   5,609   (6,814)  1,499 
Other comprehensive income                    
Items that will not subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss:                    
Post–retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements:                    
Remeasurements before taxation     309   365      674 
Taxation     (62)  (73)     (135)
      247   292      539 
Items that may subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss:                    
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of
available-for-sale financial assets:
                    
Change in fair value     364   256   70   690 
Income statement transfers in respect of disposals     11   (129)  (13)  (131)
Income statement transfers in respect of impairment     1   7   (6)  2 
Taxation     (14)  (1)  2   (13)
      362   133   53   548 
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve:                    
Effective portion of changes in fair value     1,799   (56)  2,153   3,896 
Net income statement transfers     (227)  (474)  (452)  (1,153)
Taxation     (315)  106   (340)  (549)
      1,257   (424)  1,361   2,194 
Currency translation differences (tax: nil)     3   (13)  7   (3)
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax     1,869   (12)  1,421   3,278 
Total comprehensive income for the year  379   4,194   5,597   (5,393)  4,777 
Total comprehensive income attributable to
ordinary shareholders
  92   4,194   5,510   (5,393)  4,403 
Total comprehensive income attributable to
other equity holders
  287            287 
Total comprehensive income attributable to equity holders  379   4,194   5,510   (5,393)  4,690 
Total comprehensive income attributable to
non-controlling interests
        87      87 
Total comprehensive income for the year  379   4,194   5,597   (5,393)  4,777 
F-109

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 58: CONDENSED CONSOLIDATING FINANCIAL INFORMATIONcontinued

BALANCE SHEETS

At 31 December 2016 Company
£m
  Lloyds Bank
£m
  Subsidiaries
£m
  Consolidation
adjustments
£m
  Group
£m
 
Assets               
Cash and balances at central banks     44,595   2,857      47,452 
Items in course of collection from banks     512   194      706 
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss     48,309   112,154   (9,289)  151,174 
Derivative financial instruments  461   36,714   18,737   (19,774)  36,138 
Loans and receivables:                    
Loans and advances to banks     4,379   22,498   25   26,902 
Loans and advances to customers     161,161   290,036   6,761   457,958 
Debt securities     2,818   528   51   3,397 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings  7,021   152,260   104,314   (263,595)   
Available-for-sale financial assets     55,122   3,274   (1,872)  56,524 
Goodwill        2,343   (327)  2,016 
Value of in-force business        4,761   281   5,042 
Other intangible assets     893   314   474   1,681 
Property, plant and equipment     3,644   9,263   65   12,972 
Current tax recoverable  465   420   26   (883)  28 
Deferred tax assets  38   2,286   1,503   (1,121)  2,706 
Retirement benefit assets     254   86   2   342 
Investment in subsidiary undertakings, including assets held for sale  44,188   38,757      (82,945)   
Other assets  959   1,168   11,613   (985)  12,755 
Total assets  53,132   553,292   584,501   (373,132)  817,793 
Equity and liabilities                    
Liabilities                    
Deposits from banks     9,450   6,936   (2)  16,384 
Customer deposits     213,135   202,433   (108)  415,460 
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings  2,690   86,803   149,152   (238,645)   
Items in course of transmission to banks     292   256      548 
Trading and other financial liabilities                    
at fair value through profit or loss     55,776   945   (2,217)  54,504 
Derivative financial instruments     38,591   16,107   (19,774)  34,924 
Notes in circulation        1,402      1,402 
Debt securities in issue  2,455   74,366   22,336   (22,843)  76,314 
Liabilities arising from insurance contracts and participating                    
investment contracts        94,409   (19)  94,390 
Liabilities arising from non-participating investment contracts        20,112      20,112 
Other liabilities  413   3,295   27,668   (2,183)  29,193 
Retirement benefit obligations     399   420   3   822 
Current tax liabilities     3   1,390   (1,167)  226 
Deferred tax liabilities               
Other provisions     2,833   2,355   30   5,218 
Subordinated liabilities  4,329   10,575   10,648   (5,721)  19,831 
Total liabilities  9,887   495,518   556,569   (292,646)  769,328 
Equity                    
Shareholders’ equity  37,890   54,557   25,687   (75,464)  42,670 
Other equity instruments  5,355   3,217   305   (3,522)  5,355 
Total equity excluding non-controlling interests  43,245   57,774   25,992   (78,986)  48,025 
Non-controlling interests        1,940   (1,500)  440 
Total equity  43,245   57,774   27,932   (80,486)  48,465 
Total equity and liabilities  53,132   553,292   584,501   (373,132)  817,793 
F-110

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 58: CONDENSED CONSOLIDATING FINANCIAL INFORMATION continued

At 31 December 2015 Company
£m
  Lloyds Bank
£m
  Subsidiaries
£m
  Consolidation
adjustments
£m
  Group
£m
 
Assets               
Cash and balances at central banks     55,919   2,498      58,417 
Items in course of collection from banks     518   179      697 
Trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss     52,064   103,789   (15,317)  140,536 
Derivative financial instruments  590   30,992   17,363   (19,478)  29,467 
Loans and receivables:                    
Loans and advances to banks     2,625   22,467   25   25,117 
Loans and advances to customers     158,117   291,529   5,529   455,175 
Debt securities     2,865   1,247   79   4,191 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings  14,639   132,784   88,957   (236,380)   
Available-for-sale financial assets     32,476   4,835   (4,279)  33,032 
Held-to-maturity investments     19,808         19,808 
Goodwill        2,343   (327)  2,016 
Value of in-force business        4,280   316   4,596 
Other intangible assets     720   303   815   1,838 
Property, plant and equipment     3,522   9,389   68   12,979 
Current tax recoverable  32   250   21   (259)  44 
Deferred tax assets  51   3,490   2,777   (2,308)  4,010 
Retirement benefit assets     402   675   (176)  901 
Investment in subsidiary undertakings  40,785   39,241      (80,026)   
Other assets  909   916   13,028   (989)  13,864 
Total assets  57,006   536,709   565,680   (352,707)  806,688 
Equity and liabilities                    
Liabilities                    
Deposits from banks     13,614   3,313   (2)  16,925 
Customer deposits     205,717   212,798   (189)  418,326 
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings  11,101   70,656   122,031   (203,788)   
Items in course of transmission to banks     326   391      717 
Trading and other financial liabilities                    
at fair value through profit or loss     56,332   5,043   (9,512)  51,863 
Derivative financial instruments     31,040   14,739   (19,478)  26,301 
Notes in circulation        1,112      1,112 
Debt securities in issue     78,430   27,504   (23,878)  82,056 
Liabilities arising from insurance contracts and participating                    
investment contracts        80,316   (22)  80,294 
Liabilities arising from non-participating investment contracts        22,777      22,777 
Other liabilities  394   2,988   28,340   (2,061)  29,661 
Retirement benefit obligations     148   255   (38)  365 
Current tax liabilities        807   (528)  279 
Deferred tax liabilities        1,053   (1,020)  33 
Other provisions     3,421   2,236   30   5,687 
Subordinated liabilities  3,065   19,709   14,106   (13,568)  23,312 
Total liabilities  14,560   482,381   536,821   (274,054)  759,708 
Equity                    
Shareholders’ equity  37,091   54,328   26,968   (77,153)  41,234 
Other equity instruments  5,355            5,355 
Total equity excluding non-controlling interests  42,446   54,328   26,968   (77,153)  46,589 
Non-controlling interests        1,891   (1,500)  391 
Total equity  42,446   54,328   28,859   (78,653)  46,980 
Total equity and liabilities  57,006   536,709   565,680   (352,707)  806,688 
F-111

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 58: CONDENSED CONSOLIDATING FINANCIAL INFORMATION continued

CASH FLOW STATEMENTS

For the year ended 31 December 2016 Company
£m
  Lloyds Bank
£m
  Subsidiaries
£m
  Consolidation
adjustments
£m
  Group
£m
 
Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities  (7,054)  577   11,131   (2,580)  2,074 
Cash flows from investing activities                    
Dividends received from subsidiary undertakings  3,759   3,984      (7,743)   
Distributions on other equity instruments received  119         (119)   
Return of capital contributions  441         (441)   
Available-for-sale financial assets and held-to-maturity investments:                    
Purchases     (4,664)  (322)  56   (4,930)
Proceeds from sale and maturity     6,429   2,350   (2,444)  6,335 
Purchase of fixed assets     (1,122)  (2,638)     (3,760)
Proceeds from sale of fixed assets     19   1,665      1,684 
Purchase of other equity instruments issued by subsidiaries               
Capital lending to Lloyds Bank               
Capital repayments by Lloyds Bank               
Additional capital lending to subsidiaries  (4,978)        4,978    
Capital repayments by subsidiaries  13,166         (13,166)   
Additional capital injections to subsidiaries  (3,522)  (309)     3,831    
Acquisition of businesses, net of cash acquired        (20)     (20)
Disposal of businesses, net of cash disposed     231   5   (231)  5 
Net cash flows from investing activities  8,985   4,568   1,040   (15,279)  (686)
                     
Cash flows from financing activities                    
Dividends paid to ordinary shareholders  (2,014)  (3,040)  (4,602)  7,642   (2,014)
Distributions on other equity instruments  (412)  (119)  (101)  220   (412)
Dividends paid to non-controlling interests        (29)     (29)
Interest paid on subordinated liabilities  (229)  (1,516)  (893)  951   (1,687)
Proceeds from issue of subordinated liabilities  1,061   2,753      (2,753)  1,061 
Repayment of subordinated liabilities  (319)  (13,200)  (4,952)  10,586   (7,885)
Proceeds from issue of other equity instruments     3,217   305   (3,522)   
Capital contribution received        309   (309)   
Return of capital contributions     (441)     441    
Capital borrowing from the Company               
Capital repayments to the Company     (3,387)  (1,198)  4,585    
Change in stake of non-controlling interests        (8)     (8)
Net cash used in financing activities  (1,913)  (15,733)  (11,169)  17,841   (10,974)
                     
Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents     2   19      21 
Change in cash and cash equivalents  18   (10,586)  1,021   (18)  (9,565)
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year  24   55,852   16,101   (24)  71,953 
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year  42   45,266   17,122   (42)  62,388 
F-112

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 58: CONDENSED CONSOLIDATING FINANCIAL INFORMATION continued

For the year ended 31 December 2015 Company
£m
  Lloyds Bank
£m
  Subsidiaries
£m
  Consolidation
adjustments
£m
  Group
£m
 
Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities  (955)  7,539   7,472   2,316   16,372 
                     
Cash flows from investing activities                    
Dividends received from subsidiary undertakings  1,080   12,820      (13,900)   
Return of capital contributions  600         (600)   
Available-for-sale financial assets and held-to-maturity investments:                    
Purchases     (7,903)  (13,593)  2,142   (19,354)
Proceeds from sale and maturity     7,055   14,945      22,000 
Purchase of fixed assets     (1,279)  (2,138)     (3,417)
Proceeds from sale of fixed assets     61   1,476      1,537 
Additional capital injections to subsidiaries     (64)     64    
Purchase of other equity instruments issued by subsidiaries     (1,500)     1,500    
Capital lending to Lloyds Bank  (1,157)        1,157    
Capital repayments by Lloyds Bank  570         (570)   
Acquisition of businesses, net of cash acquired        (5)     (5)
Disposal of businesses, net of cash disposed     850   122   (5,043)  (4,071)
Net cash flows from investing activities  1,093   10,040   807   (15,250)  (3,310)
                     
Cash flows from financing activities                    
Dividends paid to ordinary shareholders  (1,070)  (1,080)  (12,820)  13,900   (1,070)
Distributions on other equity instruments  (394)           (394)
Dividends paid to non-controlling interests        (52)     (52)
Interest paid on subordinated liabilities  (129)  (1,755)  (956)  1,000   (1,840)
Proceeds from issue of subordinated liabilities  1,436         (1,098)  338 
Repayment of subordinated liabilities  (152)  (1,266)  (2,151)�� 370   (3,199)
Capital contributions received        165   (165)   
Return of capital contributions     (600)     600    
Capital borrowing from the Company     1,157      (1,157)   
Capital repayments to the Company     (1,155)     1,155    
Changes in non-controlling interests        1,459   (1,500)  (41)
Net cash used in financing activities  (309)  (4,699)  (14,355)  13,105   (6,258)
                     
Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents        2      2 
Change in cash and cash equivalents  (171)  12,880   (6,074)  171   6,806 
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year  195   42,972   22,175   (195)  65,147 
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year  24   55,852   16,101   (24)  71,953 
F-113

NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 58: CONDENSED CONSOLIDATING FINANCIAL INFORMATION continued

           Consolidation    
  Company  Lloyds Bank  Subsidiaries  adjustments  Group 
For the year ended 31 December 2014 £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 
Net cash (used in) provided by operating activities  (2,712)  1,978   11,927   (840)  10,353 
Cash flows from investing activities                    
Dividends received from subsidiary undertakings  720   2,873      (3,593)   
Return of capital contributions  198         (198)   
Available-for-sale financial assets:                    
Purchases     (6,052)  (5,657)  176   (11,533)
Proceeds from sale and maturity     1,626   7,776   (4,734)  4,668 
Purchase of fixed assets     (1,182)  (2,260)     (3,442)
Proceeds from sale of fixed assets     100   1,943      2,043 
Additional capital lending to subsidiaries  (7,892)  (750)     8,642    
Capital repayments by subsidiaries  4,420   1,930      (6,350)   
Acquisition of businesses, net of cash acquired        (1)     (1)
Disposal of businesses, net of cash disposed     728   905   (1,090)  543 
Net cash flows from investing activities  (2,554)  (727)  2,706   (7,147)  (7,722)
                     
Cash flows from financing activities                    
Distributions on other equity instruments  (287)           (287)
Dividends paid to equity shareholders        (3,593)  3,593    
Dividends paid to non-controlling interests        (27)     (27)
Interest paid on subordinated liabilities  (128)  (1,832)  (1,624)  1,379   (2,205)
Proceeds from issue of subsordinated liabilities  629            629 
Proceeds from issue of ordinary shares  3            3 
Proceeds from issue of other equity instruments  5,329      (5,329)      
Repayment of subordinated liabilities  (596)  (1,380)  (6,472)  5,425   (3,023)
Capital contributions received        8,642   (8,642)   
Sale of non-controlling interest in TSB     634         634 
Other changes in non-controlling interests        1      1 
Return of capital contribution     (198)     198    
Capital repayments to parent company        (6,350)  6,350    
Net cash used in financing activities  4,950   (2,776)  (14,752)  8,303   (4,275)
                     
Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents     6   (12)     (6)
Change in cash and cash equivalents  (316)  (1,519)  (131)  316   (1,650)
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year  511   44,491   22,306   (511)  66,797 
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year  195   42,972   22,175   (195)  65,147 
F-114F-128

GLOSSARY

 

Term used US equivalent or brief description.
Accounts Financial statements.
AllottedArticles of association Issued.Articles and bylaws.
Associates Long-term equity investments accounted for by the equity method.
Attributable profit Net income.
ATMAutomatic Teller Machine.
ATM interchangeSystem allowing customers of different ATM operators to use any ATM that is part of the system.
Balance sheet Statement of financial position.
Broking Brokerage.
Building society A building society is a mutual institution set up to lend money to its members for house purchases. See also ‘Demutualisation’.
Buy-to-let mortgages Buy-to-let mortgages are those mortgages offered to customers purchasing residential property as a rental investment.
Called-up share capital Ordinary shares, issued and fully paid.
Contract hire Leasing.
Creditors Payables.
Debtors Receivables.
Deferred tax Deferred income tax.
Demutualisation Process by which a mutual institution is converted into a public limited company.
Depreciation Amortisation.
Endowment mortgage An interest-only mortgage to be repaid by the proceeds of an endowment insurance policy which is assigned to the lender providing the mortgage. The sum insured, which is payable on maturity or upon the death of the policyholder, is used to repay the mortgage.
Finance lease Capital lease.
Freehold Ownership with absolute rights in perpetuity.
ISAIndividual Savings Account.
Leasehold Land or property which is rented from the owner for a specified term under a lease. At the expiry of the term the land or property reverts back to the owner.
Lien Under UK law, a right to retain possession pending payment.
Life assurance Life insurance.
Loan capital Long-term debt.
Members Shareholders.
Memorandum and articles of associationArticles and bylaws.
National Insurance A form of taxation payable in the UK by employees, employers and the self-employed, used to fund benefits at the national level including state pensions, medical benefits through the National Health Service (NHS), unemployment and maternity.self-employed. It is part of the UK’s national social security system and ultimately controlled by HM Revenue & Customs.
Nominal value Par value.
Open Ended Investment Company (OEIC) Mutual fund.
Ordinary shares Common stock.
Overdraft A line of credit, contractually repayable on demand unless a fixed-term has been agreed, established through a customer’s current account.
Preference shares Preferred stock.
217

GLOSSARY

Term usedUS equivalent or brief description.
Premises Real estate.
Profit attributable to equity shareholders Net income.
Provisions Reserves.
Regular premium Premiums which are payable throughout the duration of a policy or for some shorter fixed period.
Reinsurance The insuring again by an insurer of the whole or part of a risk that it has already insured with another insurer called a reinsurer.
193

GLOSSARY

Term usedUS equivalent or brief description.
Retained profits Retained earnings.
Share capital Capital stock.
Shareholders’ equity Stockholders’ equity.
Share premium account Additional paid-in capital.
Shares in issue Shares outstanding.
Single premium A premium in relation to an insurance policy payable once at the commencement of the policy.
Specialist mortgages Specialist mortgages include those mortgage loans provided to customers who have self-certified their income (normally as a consequence of being self-employed) or who are otherwise regarded as a sub-prime credit risk.income. New mortgage lending of this type has not been offered by the Group since early 2009.
Tangible fixed assetsProperty and equipment.
Undistributable reserves Restricted surplus.
Write-offs Charge-offs.
218194

FORM 20-F CROSS REFERENCE SHEET

 

 Form 20–F Item Number and CaptionLocationPage
Part I   
Item 1.Identity of Directors, Senior Management and Advisers  
 A.Directors and senior managementNot applicable. 
 B.AdvisersNot applicable. 
 C.AuditorsNot applicable. 
Item 2.Offer Statistics and Expected Timetable  
 A.Offer statisticsNot applicable. 
 B.Method and expected timetableNot applicable. 
Item 3.Key Information  
 A.Selected financial data“Selected consolidated financial data”3
 “Exchange rates”43
 B.Capitalisation and indebtednessNot applicable. 
 C.Reason for the offer and use of proceedsNot applicable. 
 D.Risk factors“Risk factors”197–214180–190
Item 4.Information on the Company  
 A.History and development of the company“Business overview”2
  “Business – History and development of Lloyds Banking Group”4
  “Business – Legal actions and regulatory matters”6–911–12
  “Operating and financial review and prospects – Line of businessDivisional information”24–2726
“Where you can find more information”179
“Corporate Governance – Governance in action”149–151
 B.Business overview“Business overview”2
  “Business – Legal actions and regulatory matters”6–911–12
  “Operating and financial review and prospects – Line of businessDivisional information”24–2726
  “Regulation”178–181171–173
 C.Organisational structure“Lloyds Banking Group structure”216192
 D.Property, plant and equipment“Business – Properties”610
Item 4A.Unresolved Staff CommentsNot applicable. 
Item 5.Operating and Financial Review and Prospects  
 A.Operating results“Operating and financial review and prospects”10–11615–112
  “Operating and financial review and prospects – Credit risk”53–85
  “Regulation”178–181171–173
  “Operating and financial review and prospects – Market Risk”87–92102–108
 B.Liquidity and capital resources“Operating and financial review and prospects – Risk elements in the loan portfolio and potential problem loans – Cross border outstandings”8580
  “Operating and financial review and prospects – Funding and Liquidity Risk”95–94–100
  “Operating and financial review and prospects – Capital risk”101–10985–94
  “Operating and financial review and prospects – Investment portfolio, maturities, deposits, short-term borrowings”113–116109–112
  “Dividends”185175
  “Notes to the consolidated financial statements – note 48”F-70F-80–F-82
 C.Research and development, patents and licenses, etc.Not applicable. 
 D.Trend information“Operating and financial review and prospects – Overview and trend information”11–1216
 E.Off-balance sheet arrangements“Operating and financial review and prospects – Funding and liquidity risk – Off balance sheet arrangements”100
“Notes to the consolidated financial statementsalso refer to financial notesnote 53”100F-97–F-122
 F.Tabular disclosure of contractual obligations“Operating and financial review and prospects – Funding and liquidity risk – Contractual cash obligations”100
 G.Safe harbor“Forward looking statements”215191
Item 6.Directors, Senior Management and Employees  
 A.Directors and senior management“Management and employees – Directors and senior management”117–120113–116
 B.Compensation“Compensation”117–142
“Notes to the consolidated financial statementsalso refer to financial notesnote 11”120–151F-32–F-33
 C.Board practices“Management and employees”117–120113–116
  “Articles of association of Lloyds Banking Group plc”190176
  “Management and employees – Employees”120
  “Compensation – Service agreements”131139
  “Corporate governance – Leadership”Board Leadership and Company Purpose”153155–156
  “Corporate governance – the Board in 2016”154–161
  “Corporate governance – Audit Committee Report”167–170160–163
  “Compensation – Annual report on remuneration – Remuneration Committee”150–151132–133
 D.Employees“Management and employees – Employees”120116
 E.Share ownership“Compensation – OutstandingDirectors’ share interests and share awards”145–149127–129
  “Notes to the consolidated financial statements – note 2”F-15F-13
Item 7.Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions  
 A.Major shareholders“Major shareholders and related party transactions – Major shareholders” 177170
219195

FORM 20-F CROSS REFERENCE SHEET

 

 Form 20–F Item Number and CaptionLocationPage
 B.Related party transactions“Major shareholders and related party transactions – Related party transactions”177170
  “Notes to the consolidated financial statements – note 47”F-67–F-68F-79– F-80
 C.Interests of experts and counselNot applicable. 
Item 8.Financial Information  
 A.Consolidated statements and other financial information“Consolidated financial statements”F-1F-5–F-12
“Notes to the consolidated financial statements”F-13–F-129
“Report of the Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm”F-2–F-4
  “Business – Legal actions and regulatory matters”6–911–12
  “Operating and financial review and prospects”10–11615–112
  “Dividends”185175
 B.Significant changesNot Applicable  
Item 9.The Offer and Listing  
 A.Offer and listing details“Listing information”182174
 B.Plan of distributionNot applicable. 
 C.Markets“Listing information”182174
 D.Selling shareholdersNot applicable. 
 E.DilutionNot applicable. 
 F.Expenses of the issueNot applicable. 
Item 10.Additional Information  
 A.Share capitalNot applicable. 
 B.Memorandum and articles of association“Articles of association of Lloyds Banking Group plc”186–192176
 C.Material contracts“Business – Material contracts”5
 D.Exchange controls“Exchange controls”192176
 E.Taxation“Taxation”193–195177–178
 F.Dividends and paying agentsNot applicable. 
 G.Statements by expertsNot applicable. 
 H.Documents on display“Where you can find more information”196179
 I.Subsidiary information“Lloyds Banking Group structure”216192
Item 11. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk“Operating and financial review and prospects – Credit risk”53–8552–80
  “Operating and financial review and prospects – Market risk”87–92102–108
Item 12.Description of Securities Other than Equity Securities  
 A.Debt securitiesNot applicable. 
 B.Warrants and rightsNot applicable. 
 C.Other securitiesNot applicable. 
 D.American Depositary Shares“Listing information – ADR fees”184174
Part II   
Item 13.Defaults, Dividends Arrearages and DelinquenciesNot applicable. 
Item 14.Material Modifications to the Rights of Security Holders andNot applicable. 
 Use of Proceeds  
Item 15.Controls and Procedures“Corporate governance”175-176143–169
“Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm”F-2–F-4
Item 16.[Reserved by the Securities and Exchange Commission]Commission  
 A.Audit committee financial expert“Management and Employees – Directors and Senior Management”117–120
 “Corporate governance – Audit Committee report”167160–163
 B.Code of ethics“Management and employees – Employees”120116
 C.Principal accountant fees and services“Corporate governance – Risk Management and internal control
systems – Auditor independence and remuneration”170163
  “Notes to the consolidated financial statements – note 1112Operating expenses”Auditors’ Remuneration”F-26–F-28F-33– F-34
 D.Exemptions from the listing standards for auditNot applicable. 
 committees  
 E.Purchases of equity securities by the issuer and affiliated purchasersNot applicable.
purchasers  
 F.Change in registrant’s certifying accountantNot applicable. 
 G.Corporate governance“Corporate governance – Statement on US corporate governance standards”152143
 H.Mine safety disclosureNot applicableapplicable. 
Part III   
Item 17.Financial statementsSee response to item 18. 
Item 18.Financial statements“Consolidated financial statements”F-1F-5–F-12
“Notes to the consolidated financial statements”F-13–F-129
“Report of the Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm”F-2–F-4
Item 19.ExhibitsSee “Exhibit index”221197
220196

EXHIBIT INDEX

 

1.Articles of association of Lloyds Banking Group plc
2.Neither Lloyds Banking Group plc nor any subsidiary is party to any single long-term debt instrument pursuant to which a total amount of securities exceeding 10 per cent of the Group’s total assets (on a consolidated basis) is authorised to be issued. Lloyds Banking Group plc hereby agrees to furnish to the Securities and Exchange Commission (the Commission), upon its request, a copy of any instrument defining the rights of holders of its long-term debt or the rights of holders of the long-term debt issued by it or any subsidiary for which consolidated or unconsolidated financial statements are required to be filed with the Commission.

4.2(a)(i)(d)Registration Rights Agreement datedDescription of securities registered under Section 12 January 2009 between Lloyds Banking Group plc and The Commissioners of Her Majesty’s Treasury (as amended with effect from 11 June 2009)
(ii)Resale Rights Agreement effective 11 June 2009 between Lloyds Banking Group plc and The Commissioners of Her Majesty’s Treasury
(iii)Deed of Withdrawal dated 3 November 2009 between Lloyds Banking Group plc and The Lords Commissioners of Her Majesty’s Treasury²the Exchange Act.

4.(b)(i)Service agreement dated 3 November 2010 between Lloyds Bank plc and António Horta-Osórioo
  (ii)Letter of appointmentamendment dated 2319 February 20092019 to the service agreement dated 3 November 2010 between Lloyds Banking GroupBank plc and Anthony WatsonAntónio Horta-Osório
  (iii)Deed of confirmation and variation of contract dated 18 June 2019 to a pensions contract between Lloyds Banking Group plc and António Horta-Osório
(iv)Letter of appointment dated 17 November 2010 between Lloyds Banking Group plc and Anita Frewo
  (iv)
(v)Letter of appointment dated 31 January 2012 between Lloyds Banking Group plc and Sara Weller§
  (v)
(vi)Service agreement dated 1 March 2012 between Lloyds Bank plc and George Culmerr
  (vi)Letter of appointment dated 25 February 2013 between Lloyds Banking Group plc and Nick Luffr
  (vii)Letter of appointment dated 28 October 2013 between Lloyds Banking Group plc and Dyfrig John•Website Statement – in compliance with Companies Act 2006 – in relation to George Culmer
  (viii)Service agreement dated 30 November 2010 between Lloyds Bank plc and Juan Colombás•
  (ix)Letter of appointment dated 31 March 2014 between Lloyds Banking Group plc and Lord Blackwell£
  (x)Letter of appointment dated 1 April 2014 between Lloyds Banking Group plc and Nick Prettejohn£
  (xi)Letter of appointment dated 1 May 2014 between Lloyds Banking Group plc and Simon Henry£
  (xii)Letter of appointment dated 26 June 2014 between Lloyds Banking Group plc and Alan Dickinson£
  (xiii)Letter of appointment dated 26 November 2015 between Lloyds Banking Group plc and Deborah McWhinney+
  (xiv)(xiiii)Letter of appointment dated 26 November 2015 between Lloyds Banking Group plc and Stuart Sinclair+
(xiv)Letter of appointment dated 2 March 2017 between Lloyds Banking Group plc and Lord Lupton
(xv)Supplementary letter dated 5 December 2017 to the letter of appointment dated 2 March 2017 between Lloyds Banking Group plc and Lord Lupton
(xvi)Letter of appointment dated 17 April 2018 between Lloyds Banking Group plc and Amanda Mackenzie
(xvii)Supplementary letter dated 3 September 2018 to the letter of appointment dated 17 April 2018 between Lloyds Banking Group plc and Amanda Mackenzie
(xviii)Service agreement dated 15 March 2019 between Lloyds Bank plc and William Chalmers
(xix)Letter of appointment dated 21 October 2019 between Lloyds Banking Group plc and Sarah Legg
(xx)Supplementary letter dated 31 October 2019 to the letter of appointment dated 21 October 2019 between Lloyds Banking Group plc and Sarah Legg

8.1List of subsidiaries, their jurisdiction of incorporation and the names under which they conduct business
12.1Certification of António Horta-Osório filed pursuant to 17 CFR 240.13a-14(a) and 15 U.S.C. 7241
12.2Certification of George CulmerWilliam Chalmers filed pursuant to 17 CFR 240.13a-14(a) and 15 U.S.C. 7241
13.1Certification of António Horta-Osório and George CulmerWilliam Chalmers furnished pursuant to 17 CFR 240.13a-14(b) and 18 U.S.C. 1350
15.1Consent of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

Previously filed with the SEC on Lloyds Banking Group’s Form 20–F filed 7 May 2009
Previously filed with the SEC on Lloyds Banking Group’s Form 20-F filed 13 May 2010
oPreviously filed with the SEC on Lloyds Banking Group’s Form 20–F filed 13 May 2011
§
Previously filed with the SEC on Lloyds Banking Group’s Form 20–F filed 16 March 2012
rPreviously filed with the SEC on Lloyds Banking Group’s Form 20–F filed 25 March 2013
Previously filed with the SEC on Lloyds Banking Group’s Form 20-F filed 5 March 2014
£Previously filed with the SEC on Lloyds Banking Group’s Form 20-F filed 12 March 2015
+Previously filed with the SEC on Lloyds Banking Group’s Form 20-F filed 8 March 2016
²Pursuant to a request for confidential treatmentPreviously filed with the SEC the confidential portions of this exhibit have been omitted andon Lloyds Banking Group’s Form 20–F filed separately9 March 2018
Previously filed with the SEC.SEC on Lloyds Banking Group’s Form 20–F filed 25 February 2019

 

The exhibits shown above are listed according to the number assigned to them by the Form 20–F.

221197

SIGNATURE

 

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorised the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

 

 LLOYDS BANKING GROUP plc 
 By:/s/ G CulmerW Chalmers 
    
 Name:George CulmerWilliam Chalmers 
 Title:Chief Financial Officer 
    
 
Dated:10 March 201725 February 2020 
222198